Sewerage Design Manual 2013 India PDF

MANUAL ON SEWERAGE
AND SEWAGE TREATMENT SYSTEMS
PART A: ENGINEERING
THIRD EDITION - REVISED AND UPDATED
MINISTRY OF URBAN DEVELOPMENT, NEW DELHI

http://moud.gov.in
CENTRAL PUBLIC HEALTH AND

ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING ORGANIZATION
IN COLLABORATION WITH
JAPAN INTERNATIONAL COOPERATION AGENCY
NOVEMBER 2013
In keeping with the advancements in this sector, updates as and when found
necessary will be hosted in the Ministry website: http://MoUD.gov.in/ and the
reader is advised to refer to these also.
All rights reserved

No, portion of this document may be reproduced / printed for commercial purpose
without the prior permission of the Ministry of Urban Development, Government of India.
Copy Edited and Published under contract with JICA by

Creative Environmental Consultants, Chennai, www.cec.ind.in
in association with Water Today, Chennai, www.watertoday.org
Jf W i W l
Wcl
M IN IST ER O F URBAN DE V E L O PM EN T
A N D P A R L IA M E N T A R Y A F F A I R S
IND IA
MESSAGE
While the population of urban areas has increased from 19.9% to 31.2% between 1971 and
2011, the contribution of urban areas to GDP growth has shown a phenomenal increase from 38%
to 60% over the same period. Providing sanitation and hygiene to a growing population of more than
1.21 billion with higher aspiration levels is a major challenge. This increase in population has created
a significantly enhanced demand on water supply, health, hygiene and environmental sanitation.
To tackle this, the Government of India has initiated programs and given policy directions
to States and Cities through interventions like the launch of the Jawaharlal Nehru National Urban
Renewal Mission (JnNURM) and adoption of National Urban Sanitation Policy, 2008. JnNURM seeks
to promote cities as engines of economic growth through improvement in the quality of urban life
by facilitating the States for creation of quality urban infrastructure, with assured service levels and
efficient governance.
The National Urban Sanitation Policy (NUSP), 2008 pertains to management of human
excreta and associated public health and environmental impacts, including 100% sanitary and safe
disposal of human excreta and liquid wastes from all sanitation facilities like sewers and toilets.
I am confident that the revised and updated manual in three parts - Engineering,
Operation & Maintenance and Management will further enable the practicing professionals in
design and operation & maintenance of the sewerage and sewage treatment systems economically,
efficiently and effectively.
I would like to acknowledge the support extended by the Japan International Cooperation
Agency (JICA), Government of Japan and also the efforts of the officials of MoUD in this
endeavour. I am hopeful this effort would contribute towards achieving the Ministrys vision of the
creation of economically vibrant, inclusive, efficient and sustainable urban habitats.
(KAMAL NATH)
India is passing through a dynamic phase of development wherein the Government of India
is striving hard to provide all the necessary infrastructure facilities to urban population in order to
achieve sustainable economic growth. As per the 2011 census, the share of urban population is
31.2% as against 28% of 2001 census of the total population of the country which is expected to
be 50% by the mid of the century. Infrastructure facilities being provided for such an unprecedented
growth are unable to meet with the requirement due to various compelling circumstances. Water
supply and sanitation is one of the basic infrastructure facilities, which has a direct impact on the urban
population to meet the desired levels of quantity and quality.
Inadequate and unsafe water supply and sanitation services have a direct effect on the health
of the community and an indirect effect on the economy of the country.The report on "The Economic
Impact of Inadequate Sanitation in India released by the Water and Sanitation Program (WSP),
World Bank states that inadequate sanitation costs India almost US$ 54 billion (about
Rs. 2.7 lakh crore) or 6.4% of countrys GDP in 2006. In view of this huge cost to be paid for
inadequate sanitation, it is really necessary on all the concerned agencies dealing with water supply
and sanitation sector in the country including the community to find ways for how best this loss to the
nation could be minimized.
I appreciate the cooperation extended by the Japan International Cooperation Agency (JICA)
and the Government of Japan through their financial and expert support in completing this task of
Revision and Updating of the Manual on Sewerage and Sewage Treatment Systems, which was last
published by the Ministry during 1993.Untiring efforts of the experts from JICA Study Team and India
culminated in bringing out such an exhaustive manual in three parts, is worthy of appreciation.
I am confident that the three parts of the manual will certainly achieve the program
objectives of the Government of India as stated in the "National Urban Sanitation Policy adopted in
2008. I also sincerely hope that this Manual would serve as a guide to policy makers, planners, and all
practicing professionals in the field of sewerage and sewage treatment systems so as make the
systems economically viable to accrue benefits in the long term on a sustainable basis.
Finally, I would like to acknowledge the untiring efforts of all people who are associated with
the task of accomplishing the commendable job of formulation of this exhaustive manual for the
benefit and improvement of the sanitation sector.
(Sudhir Krishna)
n 11 ^>13
-
Dr. ASHOK SINGHVI ^TTTrT
Joint Secretary
Tel. : (011) 23063255
Fax : (011) 23062028 G O V E R N M EN T OF INDIA
E-mail : [email protected] M IN IS TR Y O F URBAN D E VELO PM EN T
N IR M A N BHAWAN
New Delhi-110011, Dated the 20
PR EFA C E
Over the years, there has been continuous migration of people from rural and peri-urban
areas to cities and towns. The proportion of population residing in urban areas has increased from
28.0% in 2001 to 31.2% in 2011. The number of towns has increased from 5161 in 2001 to 7935
in 2011. The uncontrolled growth in urban areas has left many Indian cities and towns deficient in
infrastructural services such as water supply, sewerage & sanitation, storm water drainage and solid
waste management.
Sewerage and sewage treatment is a part of public health and sanitation, and according to the
Indian Constitution, falls within the purview of the State List. Since this is non-exclusive, non-rivalled
and essential, the responsibility for providing the services lies within the public domain. The activity
being local in nature, it is entrusted with the Urban Local Bodies. The Urban Local Body undertakes
the task of sewerage and sewage treatment service delivery, with its own staff, equipment and funds.
In few cases, part of the said work is contracted out to private enterprises.
Cities and towns which have sewerage and sewage treatment facilities are unable to
cope-up with the increased burden of providing such facilities efficiently to the desired level. Issues
and constraints that are encountered by the urban local bodies, responsible for providing sewerage
and sanitation facilities, are compounded due to various reasons. The main cause of water pollution
is the unintended disposal of untreated, partially treated and non-point sources of sewage and more
important is its effect on human health & environment.
While the conventional sewerage is an effective system for sewage collection, transportation
and treatment, it also remains as highly resource-inefficient in terms of technology. Consequently,
high capital and recurrent costs for the O&M of this system at a significant level, prohibits its
widespread adoption in all sizes of urban areas in the country.
As per the 2011 Census, only 32.7% of urban households are connected to a piped sewer
system whereas 38.2% dispose of their wastes into septic tanks and 8.8% households are having
pit latrines (single & double, etc.) and 1.7% of households are having other latrines (connected to
open drains, night soil removed by human etc.). About 18.6% of urban households still do not have
access to individual toilets - about 6.0% use public /community toilets and 12.6% are forced the
indignity of open defecation.
According to the report on the Status of Wastewater Generation and Treatment in Class-I
Cities and Class-II towns of India, December 2009 published by Central Pollution Control Board,
C ontinued
the estimated sewage generation from 498 Class-I cities and 410 Class-II towns (Population
estimated for 2008 based on 2001 census) together is 38,524 MLD, out of which only 11,787 MLD
(30.5%) is being treated with a capacity gap of 26,737 MLD.
The National Urban Sanitation Policy (NUSP) adopted by the Ministry of Urban Development
in 2008 envisionsAll Indian Cities and towns become totally sanitised, healthy and liveable and
ensure and sustain good public health outcomes to all their citizens, with a special focus on hygienic
and affordable sanitation facilities for the urban poor and women . With a view to promote sanitation
very rapidly in urban areas of the country and also to recognise the excellent performance in this
sector by the cities, the Government of India has instituted an annual award scheme for rating of the
cities on certain selected sanitation parameters. The overall goals of NUSP, is to transform the urban
sanitation into community driven, totally sanitized, healthy and liveable.
The Millennium Development Goals (MDGs) enjoins upon the signatory nations to extend
access to improved sanitation to at least half the urban population by 2015, and 100% access by
2025. This implies extending coverage to households without improved sanitation, and providing
proper sanitation facilities in public places to make cities and towns free of open defecation. The
Ministry proposed to shift the focus on infrastructure in urban water supply and sanitation (UWSS)
to improve the service delivery and formulated in 2008 a set of Standardized Service Level
Benchmarks for UWSS as per International Best Practice & brought out the "Handbook on Service
Level Benchmarking on water supply and sanitation.
The Manual on Sewerage and Sewage Treatment (second edition) published in 1993 mainly
gave thrust to engineering aspects of the sewerage and sewage treatment systems. The topics
additionally covered in the current revised and updated revision are emphasis on O&M and
management of sewerage and sewage treatment systems, not dealt with in detail in the earlier
edition and are to create awareness amongst the practicing and field engineers on the importance of
sustainability of the systems in the long-term. The present Manual on Sewerage and Sewage
Treatment Systems has been divided into three parts, as Part - A on Engineering, Part - B on
Operation and Maintenance, and Part - C on Management.
On behalf of the Ministry I would like to highly appreciate and acknowledge the financial and
physical support provided by the Japan International Cooperation Agency (JICA), Government of
Japan for the preparation of this exhaustive and informative manual.
The Ministry of Urban Development places on record its appreciation of the Expert
Committee for the revision and updating of the Manual on Sewerage and Sewage Treatment
Systems and the untiring services rendered by Dr. M. Dhinadhayalan, Joint Adviser (PHEE) &
Member Secretary of the Expert Committee who acted as the fulcrum between the Ministry of Urban
Development, GOI and the Japan International Cooperation Agency (JICA) to maintain an extremely
balanced relation throughout the period of preparation of the Manual so as to accomplish the task.
I also extend my thanks to all those people who were directly or indirectly instrumental in
giving such a praise-worthy shape to the manual
Dr. M. DHINADHAYALAN
Joint Adviser (PHEE)
CPHEEO Pl+lWl
G O VE R N M EN T OF INDIA
MINISTRY OF URBAN DEVELOPMENT
NIRMAN BHAVAN
110011
New Delhi - 110011
ACKNOW LEDGEM ENT
Ever since the publication of the Manual on Sewerage and Sewage Treatment in 1993
a number of new developments and changes have occurred in the range of technologies for
on-site and off-site sanitation systems, including collection, transportation, treatment and reuse of
treated sewage & sludge for various uses during the last two decades. While revising the Manual
a broad approach was adopted for the need for revision and updating of the manual on the three
important aspects, such as i) Engineering, ii) Operation & Maintenance, and iii) Management of
sewerage and sewage treatment systems. Additional topics on operation & maintenance and
management were added so as to create awareness amongst the practicing and field engineers
regarding the importance of these two topics for the long-term sustainability of the systems.
The revision and updating of the existing manual (1993), aims to meet the important
requirement of providing advice on the technology options for urban sanitation, for the new
infrastructure or upgrading of existing services. It is applicable both for small interventions in specific
locations and for larger programs that aim to improve sanitation on a citywide scale. The manual
would help the practitioners in the selection of technologies with various options for providing
techno-economic solutions keeping in view the health of the community and safeguarding the
environment so as to provide a wide range of options to the planners and designers.
The National Urban Sanitation Policy (NUSP) was adopted by the Ministry of Urban
Development (MoUD) in 2008. It envisions that "All Indian cities and towns become totally
sanitized, healthy and liveable and ensure and sustain good public health and environmental
outcomes for all their citizens with a special focus on hygienic and affordable sanitation facilities for
the urban poor and women . With a view to promote sanitation very rapidly, in urban areas of the
country and also to recognise the excellent performance in this sector by the cities, the
Government of India (GOI) instituted an annual award scheme for rating of cities on certain
selected sanitation parameters. The overall goal is to transform Urban India into community driven,
totally sanitized, healthy and liveable cities and towns.
In view of the importance attached and impetus given to sanitation by the GOI in cities and
towns of the country, the MoUD decided to revise and update the existing Manual on Sewerage and
Sewage Treatment under the aegis of Japan International Cooperation Agency (JICA), who
appointed a JICA Study Team (JST) in July 2010 comprising of experts from Japan.
The JST visited about 40 Sewage Treatment Plants across 8 States during 2010-2011 and
gathered first-hand experience on planning, implementation and O & M of sewerage systems and
factual knowledge on the social, engineering, financial and management issues relevant to India.
The JST retained an Indian Study Team (IST) to assist in the preparation of the manual.
C ontinued
The MoUD constituted 3 Expert Committees (ECs) (Annex-1) (1st & 2nd in August 2010 and
the 3rd in November 2011) by nominating experts from Central Ministries / Departments, academic
& research institutions, senior engineers from State Departments & Utilities for reviewing and
finalizing the drafts of the JST. Two numbers of each one week long study tours were conducted in
November, 2011 and January 2012 by JST for the members of the EC to study the sewerage and
sewage treatment systems in Japan. This helped the members of the EC to get the first hand
information on the technologies adopted in sewerage and sewage treatment and how the sewerage
systems are being operated and maintained. The tours were facilitated by JICA.
The ECs, JST and IST interacted in 16 meetings at New Delhi to give a final shape to all the
three parts of the manual. The manuals prepared by the JST, ECs and IST address the following. :
Part - A on Engineering addresses the core technologies and updated approaches towards
the incremental sanitation from on-site to decentralized or conventional sewerage systems including
collection, conveyance, treatment and reuse of the misplaced resource of sewage and sludge and
is simplified to the level of the practicing engineer for the day-to-day field guidance in understanding
the situation and coming out with a choice of approaches to remedy the situation.
Part - B on Operation and Maintenance addresses the issues of standardizing the human
and financial resources. These are needed to sustain the sewerage and sanitation systems which are
created at huge costs without slipping into an edifice of dis-use for want of codified requirements for
O&M so that it would be possible to address the related issues. These financial and related issues
are to be addressed at the estimate stage itself, thus enabling to seek a comprehensive approval of
fund allocations and human resources. This would also usher in the era of public private partnership
to make the projects self-sustaining. This also covers aspects such as guidelines for cleaning of the
sewers and septic tanks besides addressing the occupational health hazards and safety measures
of the sanitation workers.
Part - C on Management is a refreshing approach to modern methods of project delivery

and project validation and gives a continual model for the administration to foresee the deficits in
allocations and usher in newer mechanisms. It is a tool for justifying the chosen project delivery
mechanism and optimizing the investments on need based allocations instead of allocations in
budget that remain unutilized and get surrendered in the end of fiscal year with no use to anyone.
These draft manuals were discussed with an All India audience in the 2 National Workshops
held at New Delhi on 20th & 21st September 2012 for finalization of Part A: Engineering and on
21st & 22nd January 2013 for finalization of Part B: Operation & Maintenance and Part C:
Management, where in delegates from Central Ministries, State Government Departments, Urban
Local Bodies, Parastatal Agencies, and representatives from Technology Providers participated
and deliberated in detail regarding the contents of each part of the three manuals. These were
further reviewed and brought to completion by the Editorial committee constituted by the MoUD with
members as in (Annex-2). In all, 6 meetings of the Editorial committee were held at New Delhi.
The Editorial Committee while editing the Manual kept in view the TOR prescribed by the
Ministry and also comments, suggestions, views offered by the delegates who participated in
National Workshops and views received through e-mail were also accommodated suitably wherever
necessary in all the three parts of the manual.
C ontinued
The Expert Committee places on record its gratitude to:
The MoUD for the necessary support & encouragement in the preparation of the manual
The JICA for funding the meetings, study tours, workshops and publishing the manuals.
The PHE Departments, Water & Sewerage Boards, Urban Local Bodies, and individuals for
their valuable suggestions on the draft of the manual.
The Expert Committee is highly indebted to Mr. Akira Takechi, JICA Study Team Leader for
his wonderful guidance, whole hearted support and encouragement of the members of the Expert
Committee during the entire period in fulfilling the task of preparation of the Manual.
The Expert Committee expresses its gratitude to Dr.S.Sundaramoorthy, Consultant, JST,

Team Leader IST & Member Secretary, Editorial Committee as the architect of the manual and his
team for giving final shape to all the three parts of the Manual.
I would like to extend my sincere thanks to Dr.S.R.Shukla, Former Adviser (PHEE), CPHEEO,
MoUD, Co-Chairman of the Expert Committees, for chairing all the Expert / Editorial Committee
meetings and for his continued involvement, guidance and support in preparation and finalization of
three parts of the manual.
I express my sincere thanks and gratitude to Ms.E.P.Nivedita, then Director (LSG), for
taking the initial efforts through coordination and chairing the deliberations of the EC meetings
in laying a broader framework for revision and updation of the Manual.
I am also privileged to express my sincere thanks on behalf of the Expert Committee to

Ms.Veena Kumari Meena, then Director (LSG) and Ms.Nandita Mishra, Director (PHE) for their
support in finalization of the Manual.
The contribution made by Mr.V.K.Chaurasia, Joint Adviser (PHEE), Mr.J.B.Ravinder, Deputy

Adviser (PHE), Mr. A.K. Saha, Assistant Adviser (PHE), and Dr.Ramakant, Assistant Adviser (PHE),
CPHEEO for enriching the contents of the Manual is very much appreciated. The painstaking efforts
taken by Dr.Ramakant, Assistant Adviser (PHE) and Member-Coordinator, during the entire process
of preparation of the Manual is stupendous and laudable.
A special mention and deep appreciation is due for the meticulous and diligent efforts of
Dr.S.Saktheeswaran, Editorial Consultant (JICA) & Copy-Editor to JICA for bringing out the manual
in a concise form, through several stages of editing and incorporating all the feedbacks.
The help and contribution by Mr. Takashi Sakakibara, JICA expert, CPHEEO and
Mr.C.Krishna Gopal, Consultant, NUSP Cell is highly appreciated.
The Committee also acknowledges the contribution and support of the representatives of
SMEC India Pty Ltd for the first phase of the study and CH2M HILL for the second phase of the study
for their excellent logistics support and facilitation throughout the period.
I would like to acknowledge all those connected individuals, organizations, institutions,

Bilateral and Multilateral agencies for their efforts directly and indirectly, through their valuable
contribution, suggestions and inputs.
(M. Dhinadhayalan)
Annex-1
JIC A Study Team (JST)
Name Designation / Departm ent
1 Akira Takechi Team Leader
2 Katsuzo Motegi Sew erage M anagem ent
3 Kiyoshi M izufune Planning & Design (Civil)
4 Dr A lok Kum ar Planning & Design (Sewer)
5 G uillerm o M adariaga Planning & Design (M echanical & Electrical)
6 M asatoshi Yam ada G eneral Editor / Sew erage M anagem ent
7 Yoshitaka Ito O&M (Facility, Sewer)
8 Teruo Suga O&M (M echanical)
9 M ikio Suzuki O&M (Electrical)
10 Akira Morita O nsite Planning & Design/O &M
11 Guru raj Rao C oordinator / O&M
12 Dr Kiyoshi M oriyam a Sew erage O&M Planning
13 M asaaki M ukaide Civil Facility Designing
14 Takenori Shoryuji Facility O&M Planning
15 T akehiro Nakano W ater Q uality / Safety
Indian Study Team (IS T)-C ounterpart to JS T
No Name Designation / Departm ent
1 Dr S Sundaram oorthy Team Leader from February-2012 & Sewage Treatm ent
2 Shri M K Am irthalingam Sew age C ollection system s
3 Shri R Vasudevan Electrical and Instrum entation System s
4 Shri D Harsha M anagem ent Practices in Sew erage
5 Shri I Kalyanasundaram Sew erage Structures
6 Shri P Subram ani Sludge M anagem ent and Bio-m ethanation
7 Dr S Saktheesw aran Sew age Reuse and C opy-E ditor

Annex - 1 (continued)
Indian Expert Committee-Part-A
No Name Designation / Department
1 Adviser(PHEE) (Vacant) CPHEEO/, MoUD, Chairman
2 Dr. S.R. Shukla Former Adviser (PHEE), CPHEEO, MoUD, Co-Chairman
3 Shri. R. Sethuraman Former Joint Adviser (PHEE), CPHEEO, MoUD
4 Shri B.B.Uppal Former Deputy Adviser (PHE), CPHEEO, MoUD
5 Shri V.K.Chaurasia Joint Adviser (PHEE), CPHEEO, MoUD
6 Dr. M.Dhinadhayalan Joint Adviser (PHEE), CPHEEO, MoUD, Member Secretary
7 Dr. Ramakant Assistant Adviser (PHE), CPHEEO, MoUD, Coordinator
8 Dr.Arvind.K.Nema Professor, Dept of Civil Engineering, 1.1.T.Delhi,
9 Dr. A.K.Dussa Director (UWE), Ministry of New & Renewable Energy
10 Shri D.P.Singh Retd Chief Engineer,(Ganga), U.P.Jal Nigam, Allahabad
11 Shri M.Dhanabalan Retd Chief Engineer,TWAD Board, Chennai
12 Dr.Hernant Landge C E, Maharashtra Jeevan Pradhikaran, Thane
13 Dr. Kazmi Absar Ahmed Associate Professor, Dept of Civil Engineering l.l.T, Roorkee,
14 Shri C. Lallunghnema Joint Secretary (Tech.), PHED, Mizoram
15 Shri S.T. Gopalram Joint Chief Engineer, (P&D), TWAD Board, Chennai
16 Dr. Vinod Tare Professor, Dept of Civil Engineering, I.I.T.Kanpur
17 Dr. Girish R.Pophali Scientist E-1, NEERI, Nagpur
18 Shri Nazimuddin Senior Environmental Engineer, CPCB, MoEF, Delhi
19 Shri D.K.Agrawal Scientist F, Bureau of Indian Standards, Delhi
20 Dr. R.K.Singh Deputy General Manager (Projects), HUDCO, MoHUPA

Indian Expert Committee-Part-B
1 Adviser(PHEE) (Vacant) CPHEEO/Director (PHE), MoUD, Chairman
2 Dr. S.R. Shukla Former Adviser (PHEE), CPHEEO, MoUD, Co-Chairman
3 Shri. R. Sethuraman Former Joint Adviser (PHEE),CPHEEO, MoUD
4 Shri M Sankaranaryanan Retd. Joint Adviser (PHEE), CPHEEO, MoUD
5 Shri. J.B.Ravinder Deputy Adviser (PHE), CPHEEO, MoUD
6 Dr. M.Dhinadhayalan Joint Adviser (PHEE), CPHEEO, MoUD, Member Secretary
8 Shri. S.V.Ahuja, Project Director, GJTI, GWSSB, Gandhinagar
9 Shri. G.EIangovan, Retd. Engineering Director, CMWSSB, Chennai
10 Prof. A.Mazumdar, Former Professor, AIIH&PH, Kolkata
11 Dr. Kazmi Absar Ahmed Associate Professor, Dept of Civil Engineering, l.l.T, Roorkee
12 Shri.S. P. Garnaik Energy Economist, BEE, Ministry of Power
13 Shri.B. I. Dalai Additional C E, Surat Municipal Corporation, Surat
14 Shri S.M. Jejurikar C E, (M&E), Greater Mumbai Municipal corporation
15 Shri Sumit Dutta C E, (S&D), Kolkata Metro Development Authority
16 Shri Dilip Kumar Padhi, Retd. Member Secretary, Odisha W S & S Board
17 Shri S.P. Rudramurthy Additional C E, (CP&WWM), BWSSB, Bengaluru
18 Shri. J.S.Bahra Executive Engineer, Punjab WS& SB, Chandigarh
19 Shri M.Sathyanarayanan Director(Projects), Metropolitan WS&SB, Hyderabad

Indian Expert Committee-Part-C
1 Director (LSG) MoUD, Chairperson
2 Dr. S.R. Shukla Former Adviser (PHEE), CPHEEO, MoUD
3 Dr. M.Dhinadhayalan Joint Adviser (PHEE),CPHEEO, MoUD, Member- Secretary
4 Dr.Ramakant Assistant Adviser(PHE),CPHEEO, MoUD, Co-ordinator
5 Shri Nazimuddin Senior Environmental Engineer, CPCB, MoEF
6 Shri S. Srinivasan Sr. Vice President, Commercial, IL&FS Water, Chennai
7 Prof. Kulbhushan Balooni Associate Prof. Economic Area, IIM, Kozhikode, Kerala
8 Dr. R.K.Singh Deputy General Manager(Projects),HUDCO, MoHUPA
9 Dr. Urmila Brighu Associate Prof, Dept of Civil Engineering, MNIT, Jaipur
10 Dr. Zillur Rahman, Associate Prof. Dept of Management Studies, I.I.T.Roorkee
The list of Editorial Committee members is in the next page

Annex -2
Editorial Committee-Part-A
No. Name Designation / Department
1 Dr. S.R. Shukla Former Adviser (PHEE), CPHEEO, MoUD, Chairman
2 Dr. M.Dhinadhayalan Joint Adviser (PHEE), CPHEEO, MoUD
3 Shri V.K.Chaurasia Joint Adviser (PHEE), CPHHEO, MoUD
4 Shri. J.B.Ravinder Deputy Adviser (PHE), CPHEEO, MoUD
5 Dr. S. Sundaramoorthy Retd. Engg. Dir. CMWSSB, Editorial consultant
6 Dr. Kazmi Absar Ahmed Associate Professor, Civil Engineering, l.l.T, Roorkee,
Editorial Committee-Part-B and Part-C
No. Name Designation / Department
1 Dr. S.R. Shukla Former Adviser (PHEE), CPHEEO, MoUD, Chairman
2 Shri M Sankaranaryanan Retd. Joint Adviser (PHEE), CPHEEO, MoUD
3 Dr. M.Dhinadhayalan Joint Adviser (PHEE), CPHEEO, MoUD
5 Dr. S. Sundaramoorthy Retired Engg. Dir. CMWSSB, Chennai, Editorial consultant
6 Prof. A.Mazumdar, Former Professor, AIIH&PH, Kolkata
7 Shri R.N.Gupta, Former Engineer-in-Chief, PHED, Chhattisgarh
8 Dr. Kazmi Absar Ahmed Associate Professor, Civil Engineering, l.l.T, Roorkee,
9 Dr. Urmila Brighu Associate Professor, Civil Engineering, MNIT, Jaipur

Part A: Engineering
PART-A-TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Title Page
CHAPTER-1- INTRODUCTION
1.1 Preamble 1-1
1.1.1 Need for Safe Sanitation System 1-2
1.1.2 Present Scenario of Urban Sanitation in India 1-3
1.1.3 Basic Philosophy of Sewage Treatment 1-4
1.1.4 Sewerage and Sewage Treatment Technology 1-4
1.1.5 Efforts of Concerned Agencies in Retrospect 1-5
1.2 Loss to the Nation due to Poor Sanitation 1-5
1.2.1 Time and Money Loss in terms of DALYs 1-5
1.2.2 Poor Sanitation Costs India $ 54 Billion 1-6
1.3 Sector Organization 1-7
1.4 Initiatives of Government of India 1-8
1.4.1 Initiatives on Reforms-74th Constitution Amendment Act 1992 1-8
The Prohibition of Employment as Manual Scavengers

1.4.2 1-9
and their Rehabilitation Act, 2013
1.5 National Urban Sanitation Policy (NUSP), 2008 1-10
1.5.1 Key Sanitation Policy Issues 1-10
1.5.2 National Urban Sanitation Policy Goals 1-11
1.5.3 Concepts of Totally Sanitized Cities 1-11
1.6 Sanitation Promotion 1-12
I
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
1.7 Service Level Benchmarking on Sewage Management 1-12
1.8
Emerging Trends & Technologies of Sewerage & sewage Treatment 1-13
1.8.1 Recent Trend - Centralized vis-a-vis Decentralized Sewerage 1-13
1.9 Need for Revision and Updating of the Existing Manual 1-14
1.9.1 Guidelines for Preparation of City Sanitation Plan (CSP) 1-15
1.10 Setting up of Environmental Pollution Standards at the State 1-15
1.11 Relationship between Part - A, Part - B and Part - C manuals 1-16
CHAPTER - 2 - PROJECT PLANNING
2.1 Vision 2-1
2.2 Objectives 2-1
2.3 Need for Project Planning 2-1
2.4 Basic Design Considerations 2-2
2.4.1 Engineering Considerations 2-3
2.4.2 Institutional Aspects 2-3
2.4.3 Environmental Considerations 2-3
2.4.4 Treatment Process 2-5
2.4.5 Financial Aspects 2-7
2.4.6 Legal Issues 2-7
2.4.7 Community Awareness 2-8
II
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
2.4.8 Inter- and Intra-departm ental Coordination 2-8
2.4.9 G eographical Inform ation System s 2-8
2.4.10 City M aster Plan 2-8
2.4.11 City Sanitation Plan 2-8
2-8
2.5 Design Period
2.6 Population Forecast 2-9
2.6.1 G eneral C onsiderations 2-9
2.6.2 Final Forecast 2-11
2.7 Project Area 2-11
2.8 Reuse and Disposal 2-12
2.9 Layout and A rrangem ent of Sew erage 2-12
2.10 Legislation and R egulations 2-12
2.11 G uidelines on House Sew er Connections 2-13
2.12 Survey and Investigation 2-13
2.12.1 Basic Information 2-13
2.12.1.1 Physical Aspects 2-14
2.12.1.2 Survey of Natural Conditions 2-14
2.12.1.3 Survey on Related Plans 2-15
III
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
2.12.1.4 S urvey on Pollution Loads and Receiving Bodies 2-15
2.12.1.5 S urvey on Existing Facilities 2-15
2.12.1.6 S urvey on R esources o f Sew erage System and its Utilization 2-16
2.12.1.7 S urvey on Treated Sewage, Sludge and Biogas Utilization 2-16
2.12.1.8 Project Surveys 2-16
2.12.1.9 Prelim inary Project Surveys 2-16
2.12.1.10 Detailed Project Surveys 2-17
2.12.1.11 Construction Surveys 2-17
2.12.1.12 D evelopm ental Aspects 2-17
2.12.1.13 Fiscal Aspects 2-18
2.12.1.14 O ther Aspects 2-18
2.13 Detailed Project Report (DPR) 2-19
2.13.1 General 2-19
2.13.1.1 Project Reports 2-19
2.13.2 Identification Report 2-20
2.13.3 P refeasibility Report 2-21
2.13.3.1 Executive Sum m ary 2-22
2.13.3.2 Introduction 2-22
2.13.3.3 Project Area and the Need for the Project 2-23
2.13.3.3.1 Project Area 2-23
2.13.3.3.2 Population Pattern 2-23
2.13.3.3.3 S ocio-Econom ic Aspects 2-23
2.13.3.3.4 S ector Institutions 2-24
2.13.3.3.5 Existing Sew erage S ystem s and Population Served 2-24
2.13.3.3.6 Urban Drainage and Solid W astes 2-24
IV
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
2.13.3.3.7 Need for the Project 2-24
2.13.3.4 Long Term Plan for Sew age Collection, Treatm ent & Disposal 2-25
2.13.3.5 Proposed Sew erage Project 2-26
2.13.3.6 C onclusion and R ecom m endations 2-28
2.13.4 Feasibility Report 2-29
2.13.4.1 Background 2-30
2.13.4.2 Proposed Project 2-30
2.13.4.3 Institutional and Financial Aspects 2-33
2.13.4.4 Techno Econom ic Appraisal Procedure 2-34
2.13.4.5 C onclusion and R ecom m endations 2-35
2.14 Planning of Sew erage System 2-35
2.14.1 Approach 2-35
2.14.2 Design Population Forecast 2-35
2.14.3 Estim ation o f Sewage Flow 2-35
2.14.4 S ew age Characteristics and Pollution Load 2-36
2.14.5 Planning of S ew er System 2-36
2.14.6 Planning of Pum ping Station 2-36
2.14.7 Planning of Sewage Treatm ent Facilities 2-36
2.15 Planning of Sludge Treatm ent and Utilization 2-36
2.15.1 Basic Philosophy of Sludge Treatm ent 2-36
2.15.2 Design Sludge Generation 2-36
2.15.3 Planning for Sludge Reuse 2-37
2.15.4 Com m on Sludge Treatm ent Facilities 2-37
2.15.5 Transportation and Disposal o f Sludge 2-37
V
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
2.16 Planning of Utilization of Resources and Space 2-37
2.16.1 Planning and Utilization of Space in SPS and STP 2-37
2.17 Planning fo r Reconstruction 2-37
2.17.1 G eneral A spects o f R econstruction Planning 2-38
2.17.2 Reconstruction Planning of Sewers 2-38
2.17.3 R econstruction Planning of SPSs and STPs 2-39
2.18 Environm ental Preservation and Beautification 2-39
2.18.1 In S ew er System s 2-39
2.18.2 In STP and SPS 2-39
2.18.3 Environm ental Preservation M easures o f Surrounding Area 2-39
2.19 Engineering Plans 2-40
2.19.1 Plans 2-40
2.19.2 Specifications 2-41
2.19.3 Revisions to Approved Plans 2-41
2.20 C hecklist 2-41
2-21 M andatory R equirem ent in Sanitation Sector 2-41
CHAPTER - 3 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF SEWERS
3.1 General 3-1
3.2 Design Period 3-1
VI
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
3.4 Tributary Area 3-3
3.5 Per Capita Sewage Flow 3-3
3.6 Infiltration 3-4
3.7 Sew age from Com m ercial Institutions 3-4
3.8 Industrial Effluents to be Discouraged 3-4
3.9 Storm R unoff 3-5
3.9.1 Estim ation o f Storm R unoff 3-5
3.9.2 Rational Method 3-7
3.9.2.1 Runoff-Rainfall Intensity Relationship 3-7
3.9.2.2 Storm Frequency 3-7
3.9.2.3 Intensity of Precipitation 3-9
3.9.2.4 Tim e of Concentration 3-10
3.10 M easurem ent o f Flows in Existing Drains/Sewers 3-11
3.11 Types of Collection System 3-17
3.11.1 Separate Sewers 3-17
3.11.2 Com bined Sewers 3-17
3.11.3 Pressurized Sewers 3-17
VII
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
3.11.4 V acuum S ew er System 3-18
3.12 Materials, Shapes and Sizes of Sewers 3-19
3.12.1 Introduction 3-19
3.12.2 Brick 3-19
3.12.3 Concrete 3-19
3.12.3.1 Precast concrete 3-19
3.12.3.2 Cast-in-situ Reinforced Concrete 3-20
3.12.4 Stoneware or Vitrified Clay 3-20
3.12.5 A sbestos Cem ent 3-20
3.12.6 Cast Iron 3-21
3.12.7 Steel 3-21
3.12.8 Ductile Iron Pipes 3-21
3.12.9 N on-M etallic N on-Concrete S ynthetic Material Pipes 3-22
3.12.9.1 UPVC Pipe 3-23
3.12.9.2 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipes 3-23
3.12.9.3 Structured W all Piping 3-23
3.12.9.4 Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastic Pipes (GRP) 3-23
3.12.9.5 Fiber Glass Reinforced Plastic 3-23
3.12.9.6 Pitch Fibre Pipes 3-24
3.13 Shape and Size o f Sewers 3-24
3.14 Minim um Size o f C ircular Sewers 3-25
3.15 Flow in C ircular Sewers 3-25
VIII
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
3.15.1 M inim um V elocity for Preventing Sedim entation 3-26
3.15.2 M inim um V elocity for Preventing Hydrogen Sulphide in Sewers 3-26
3.15.2.1 Potential for Sulphide Build up 3-27
3.15.3 M axim um Velocity 3-27
3.15.4 M annings Form ula for G ravity Flow 3-27
3.15.5 Design Depth o f Flow 3-28
3.15.6 Slope o f Sew er 3-31
3.16 Hydraulics o f Sewers Flowing under Pressure 3-32
3.16.1 Type of Flow 3-32
3.16.2 Hazen-W illiam s Formula 3-32
3.17 S ew er Transitions 3-32
3.17.1 C onnections o f Different Sewers 3-32
3.17.2 Bends 3-34
3.17.3 Junction 3-35
3.17.4 Vertical Drops and O ther Energy Dissipaters 3-35
3.17.5 Inverted Siphon 3-35
3.17.6 H ydraulic Calculations for Inverted Siphon 3-36
3.17.7 V elocity in Inverted Siphon Sewers 3-36
3.17.8 Size and A rrangem ent of Pipes 3-36
3.17.9 Inlet and O utlet C ham bers 3-37
3.17.10 G eneral Requirem ents 3-37
3.18 Leaping W eirs for Segregating Storm Flows 3-37
3.18.1 Side Flow Leaping W eirs 3-37
IX
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
3.18.2 Floor Level Leaping W eir 3-38
3.19 Relief Sewers 3-39
3.20 Basic Information 3-40
3.20.1 Prelim inary Investigation for Design of S ew er System 3-40
3.20.2 Detailed Survey 3-40
3.20.3 Layout o f System 3-41
3.20.4 Profile of S ew er System 3-42
3.20.5 Available Head 3-42
3.20.6 Plans and Nom enclature 3-43
3.20.7 Precautions 3-46
3.21 Definition 3-46
3.22 Types of Brickwork M anholes 3-46
3.23 RCC and Com bination M anholes 3-46
3.24 HDPE M anholes 3-53
3.25 Drop M anholes 3-53
3.26 Junction Manholes 3-54
3.27 Side Entrance M anholes 3-54
X
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
3.28 S crapper (Service) Type Manhole 3-55
3.29 Flushing M anholes 3-56
3.30 D ifferent Diam eters o f Sewers in the Sam e M anhole 3-57
3.31 Term inal Cleanout Structure 3-57
3.32 Construction o f Brickwork M anholes 3-57
3.33 Construction of RCC M anholes 3-58
3.34 Covers and Frames 3-59
3.35 Rungs 3-59
3.36 Pile S upports in Loose Soils 3-59
3.37 M anhole Rehabilitation 3-59
3.38 Staging of Sew erage W orks 3-62
3.39 S ew er Construction 3-62
3.40 Type o f Loads 3-64
XI
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
3.41 Loads on C onduit due to Backfill 3-64
3.42 Types o f Installation or Construction Conditions 3-65
3.43 Loads for D ifferent Conditions 3-66
3.43.1 E m bankm ent or Projecting C onduit Condition 3-66
3.44 Trench Condition 3-71
3.45 Tunnel Condition 3-74
3.46 Effect of Subm ergence 3-77
3.46.1 Load on C onduit due to Superim posed Loads 3-77
3.47 Concentrated Loads 3-78
3.48 Distributed Load 3-78
3.49 Conduits under Railway Track 3-80
3.50 Supporting Strength o f Rigid Conduit 3-80
3.50.1 Laboratory Test Strength 3-81
3.50.2 Field Supporting Strength 3-81
3.50.3 Protection and Bedding o f Sewers 3-81
3.50.3.1 G uidelines 3-81
3.50.3.2 Bedding in Q uicksand Soil Conditions 3-82
XII
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
3.50.3.3 Type o f Bedding 3-83
3.50.3.4 Classes o f Bedding for Trench Conditions 3-84
3.50.3.5 Load Factors fo r Bedding 3-86
3.50.3.6 Supporting Strength in E m bankm ent Conditions 3-87
3.50.3.7 Classes of Bedding 3-87
3.50.3.8 Load Factors fo r Rigid Pipes 3-88
3.50.3.8.1 Conduits under Simultaneous Internal Pressure & External Loading

3-90
3.51 Relationship between different Elem ents in Structural Design 3-90
3.51.1 Field Layout and Installation 3-91
3.52 Cross Drainage W orks 3-92
3.53 S ew er Ventilators 3-92
3.54 Prevention of Cross Connection 3-93
3.54.1 Visual Separation 3-93
3.54.2 Protection of W ater Mains 3-93
3.54.3 Relation to W aterw orks Structures 3-93
3.54.4 Construction M ethods 3-93
3.54.5 Trench 3-93
3.54.5.1 Dim ensions 3-93
3.54.5.2 Excavation 3-94
3.54.5.3 Shoring 3-94
3.54.5.4 Underground Services 3-95
3.54.5.5 Dewatering 3-95
XIII
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
3.54.5.6 Foundation and Bedding 3-95
3.54.5.7 Tunneling 3-95
3.54.5.8 Shafts 3-95
3.55 M ethods o f Tunneling 3-96
3.56 Laying o f Pipe Sewers 3-97
3.56.1 Stoneware Pipes 3-97
3.56.2 RCC Pipes 3-97
3.56.3 Cast-in-situ Concrete Sections 3-98
3.56.4 Construction o f Brick Sewers 3-98
3.56.5 Cast Iron Pipes 3-98
3.56.6 Ductile Iron Pipes 3-98
3.56.7 Solid W all UPVC Pipes 3-98
3.56.8 Solid W all HDPE Pipes 3-99
3.56.9 Structured W all Pipes 3-99
3.56.10 Double W all C orrugated Polyethylene Pipes 3-99
3.56.11 Relative Lim itations in Pipe M aterials in Som e Situations 3-99
3.57 Load Carrying M echanism o f the Pipes 3-99
3.58 Jointing of Sewers 3-100
3.58.1 Stoneware Pipes 3-100
3.58.2 Concrete Pipes 3-100
3.58.3 Cast Iron Pipes 3-101
3.58.4 Ductile Iron pipes 3-101
XIV
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
3.58.5 Solid W all UPVC Pipes 3-101
3.58.6 Solid W all HDPE Pipes 3-102
3.58.7 Structured W all Pipes 3-102
3.58.8 Double W alled Corrugated Pipes 3-102
3.59 Precautions against Uplift 3-102
3.60 The W ater Jetting Issues 3-102
3.61 Testing o f S ew er Lines 3-103
3.61.1 W ater Test 3-103
3.61.2 A ir Testing 3-104
3.62 Check for O bstruction 3-104
3.63 Backfilling of the Trenches 3-105
3.64 Removal o f Sheeting 3-105
3.65 S ew er Rehabilitation 3-105
3.65.1 M ethods 3-107
3.65.2 S ew er Renovation 3-107
3.65.3 Illustrative Example 3-111
3.66 Storm w ater Related Structure 3-111
3.66.1 Curb Inlets 3-111
XV
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
3.66.2 G utter Inlets 3-111
3.66.3 Com bination Inlets 3-111
3.66.4 Catch Basins 3-111
3.66.5 Flap G ates and Flood Gates 3-112
3.67 Outfall Sewers 3-113
3.68 Cross Infrastructure W orks 3-113
3.69 Corrosion Prevention and Control 3-113
3.69.1 General 3-113
3.69.2 Corrosion o f Sewers 3-113
3.69.3 Corrosion due to Biological Reactions 3-113
3.69.4 Factors Influencing Sulphide Generation 3-114
3.69.4.1 Tem perature 3-114
3.69.4.2 Strength of Sewage 3-114
3.69.4.3 V elocity o f Flow 3-116
3.69.4.4 Age o f Sewage 3-117
3.69.4.5 Hydrogen Ion C oncentration 3-117
3.69.4.6 Sulphate C oncentration 3-117
3.69.4.7 Ventilation 3-117
3.69.5 Sulphide control Procedures 3-117
3.69.5.1 Design o f Sewers for Sulphide Corrosion Issue 3-118
3.69.5.2 Control o f Sewage C haracter for Sulphide Corrosion Issues 3-118
3.69.5.3 Cleaning o f Sewers for Sulphide Corrosion Issues 3-119
3.69.5.4 C hlorination for Sulphide Control Issues 3-119
XVI
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
3.69.6 M aterials o f Construction fo r Sulphide Corrosion Issues 3-119
3.69.7 S ew er protection 3-120
3.69.7.1 Liners 3-120
3.69.7.2 Protective Coatings 3-121
3.69.7.3 C athodic Protections 3-121
3.69.7.4 Protection by Sacrificial Anode 3-123
3.70 Connection o f House Sew er to Public Sewer 3-124
3.71 Spacing o f M anholes 3-124
3.71.1 In Public Sewers 3-126
3.71.2 In Outfall or Trunk G ravity Sewers 3-126
3.72 Lift Stations in G ravity Sewers 3-128
CHAPTER - 4
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF SEWAGE PUMPING MAINS
AND PUMPING STATIONS
4.1 General Considerations 4-1
4.1.1 Design Flow 4-1
4.1.2 Location and Configuration 4-1
4.1.3 M easures for Safety and Environm ent Protection 4-2
4.1.4 Design o f Suction W ater Level 4-3
4.1.5 Design Discharge Level 4-3
4.1.6 Selection o f Power Source 4-3
4.2 Screen and G rit C ham ber 4-3
4.2.1 Gate 4-3
XVII
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
4.2.2 Screens 4-4
4.2.3 A m ount o f Screenings 4-4
4.2.4 Configuration and Method of Degritting 4-4
4.2.5 Am ount o f Grit 4-5
4.2.6 Treatm ent and Disposal o f Screenings and Grit 4-5
4.3 M achinery Room 4-5
4.4 M easures against O dour 4-5
4.5 Pumps 4-5
4.5.1 Types o f Pumps 4-5
4.5.2 Types o f Pump Stations 4-7
4.5.3 Screw Pump Stations 4-7
4.5.4 N um ber o f Pumps 4-8
4.5.5 Selection o f Pump Stations 4-8
4.6 W et W ell 4-8
4.6.1 Structure 4-9
4.6.2 Interior Linings and W aterproofing for Old W ells 4-9
4.6.3 Floor Slopes 4-9
4.6.4 Lighting 4-9
4.6.5 Ventilation 4-9
4.6.6 W et W ell Design Criteria 4-10
4.6.7 Structural Design Criteria 4-11
XVIII
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
4.7 Pump Basics 4-13
4.7.1 Centrifugal Pumps 4-13
4.7.2 C om putation o f the Total Head o f Pumping 4-15
4.7.3 System Head 4-15
4.7.4 O perating Point of a Centrifugal Pump 4-17
4.7.5 Parallel O peration 4-18
4.7.6 Stable C haracteristic 4-19
4.8 Cavitation in Pumps 4-19
4.9 Prime M overs 4-20
4.10 Surging o f Pump and W ater H am m er 4-20
4.11 Piping and Valves 4-21
4.12 Appurtenances 4-21
4.12.1 A ir-R elease and Air/Vacuum Release Valves 4-21
4.12.2 Drain Valves 4-22
4.12.3 Additional Appurtenances 4-22
4.12.4 Dry W ell 4-22
4.12.5 A utom atic O peration o f Pum ps and Equipm ent 4-22
4.12.6 Protective Equipm ent 4-22
4.13 A uxiliary Power Devices 4-22
XIX
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
4.14 Alarm System s 4-22
4.15 Flow M easurem ent 4-23
4.15.1 M agnetic Flow Meters 4-23
4.15.2 Ultrasonic Flow Meters 4-23
4.16 Corrosion Prevention and Control in Pump Sets 4-23
4.17 R ehabilitation/R econstruction o f Pum ping Station 4-23
4.18 Lift Stations 4-24
4.19 Installation o f Pumps 4-24
4.20 Pumping Mains and Design Approach 4-27
4.20.1 Design Formula 4-27
4.20.2 C om putation o f Pump Kilowatt 4-27
4.20.3 V elocity C onsiderations in Design o f Pumping Mains 4-28
4.20.4 Injection and Relay Pum ping Mains 4-29
4.21 Anti Vortex 4-31
CHAPTER - 5
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF SEWAGE TREATMENT FACILITIES
5.1 General 5-1
5.1.1 R ecom m ended Exclusive Discharge G uidelines 5-4
5.1.2 Processes of Biological Sewage Treatm ent 5-4
5.1.3 Design Sew age Flow 5-6
XX
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
5.1.4 Raw Sew age Characteristics 5-6
5.1.4.1 Determ ination o f Influent Raw Sewage Q uality 5-6
5.2 Unit O perations in Biological Treatm ent 5-8
5.3 S econdary Biological Treatm ent Process 5-8
5.3.1 A erobic Treatm ent Process 5-8
5.3.1.1 A ctivated Sludge Process 5-10
5.3.1.2 Fixed Media System s 5-10
5.3.1.3 Moving Media System s 5-12
5.3.2 A naerobic Treatm ent System s 5-13
5.3.3 Facultative Treatm ent Processes 5-14
5.3.4 Perform ance of Conventional Treatm ent Processes 5-14
5.3.5 STP Land Area 5-15
5.3.5.1 STP Land Area for D ifferent Technologies 5-16
5.3.6 A rrangem ent o f Treatm ent Units in STP 5-17
5.3.7 Control o f Hydrogen Sulfide O dour 5-19
5.3.7.1 Buffer Zone A round the STP 5-21
5.3.8 Required Engineering Data 5-21
5.3.9 Design Period 5-21
5.3.10 Sew ers and Conduits 5-21
5.3.11 Installation o f M echanical Equipm ent 5-22
5.3.12 Unit Bypasses 5-22
5.3.13 Unit Dewatering 5-22
5.3.14 Floatation 5-23
5.3.15 Construction M aterials 5-23
XXI
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
5.3.15.1 Concrete 5-23
5.3.15.2 Structural Steel 5-24
5.3.15.3 Steel Pipes 5-24
5.3.16 Coating and Painting 5-24
5.3.17 O perating the Equipm ent 5-24
5.3.18 Erosion Control during Construction 5-24
5.3.19 Grading and Landscaping 5-25
5.4 Plant O utfalls 5-26
5.4.1 Discharge -P h ysica l Im pact Control 5-27
5.4.2 Protection and M aintenance of O utfalls 5-27
5.4.3 Sam pling Provisions 5-27
5.5 Essential Facilities 5-27
5.5.1 Em ergency Power Facilities 5-27
5.5.2 W ater Supply 5-27
5.5.3 Sanitary Facilities 5-28
5.5.4 Flow M easurem ent 5-28
5.5.5 Laboratory 5-28
5.6 Screening, Grit Removal and Flow Equalization 5-28
5.6.1 Screening 5-28
5.6.1.1 Coarse Screens 5-28
5.6.1.2 Medium Screens 5-29
5.6.1.3 Fine Screens 5-29
5.6.1.4 C om m inuting Devices 5-29
XXII
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
5.6.1.5 Location of Screens 5-29
5.6.1.6 Housing o f Screens 5-30
5.6.1.7 Hydraulics 5-30
5.6.1.8 V elocity 5-30
5.6.1.9 Head Loss 5-31
5.6.1.10 Q uantity of Screenings 5-32
5.6.1.11 O ther Screens 5-32
5.6.1.11.1 Rotary Drum Screens 5-32
5.6.1.11.2 C ircular W edge W ire Screens 5-33
5.6.1.12 Screen Com pactor 5-33
5.6.1.13 Screw Press 5-35
5.6.1.14 Disposal o f Screenings 5-35
5.6.2 G rit Removal 5-35
5.6.2.1 C om position o f Grit 5-36
5.6.2.2 Types 5-36
5.6.2.3 V ortex Type Units 5-36
5.6.2.4 V ortex Type Units with Scum Removal 5-36
5.6.2.5 Aerated G rit Cham bers 5-38
5.6.2.6 Clearing o f the Grit 5-39
5.6.2.7 Design Data 5-39
5.6.2.7.1 G eneric Design o f G rit Cham bers 5-39
5.6.2.7.1.1 Settling V elocity 5-39
5.6.2.7.1.2 Surface O verflow Rate 5-41
5.6.2.7.1.3 Detention Period 5-41
5.6.2.7.1.4 Bottom Scour and Flow through Velocity 5-42
5.6.2.7.2 S pecific Design o f Recent Devices 5-43
XXIII
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
5.6.2.7.3 V elocity Control Devices for G rit Channels 5-43
5.6.2.8 Flow M easurem ent 5-45
5.6.2.8.1 Parshall Flume 5-45
5.6.2.8.2 N um ber o f Units 5-48
5.6.2.8.3 Dim ensions of Each Unit 5-48
5.6.2.8.4 Loss o f Head 5-48
5.6.2.9 Disposal o f Grit 5-48
5.6.2.10 Choice o f Unit 5-49
5.6.3 Flow Equalization 5-49
5.7 Settling 5-49
5.7.1 General 5-49
5.7.2 Characteristics o f Settleable Solids 5-50
5.7.3 Types o f Settling 5-50
5.7.3.1 Discrete Settling 5-50
5.7.3.2 Flocculent Settling 5-50
5.7.3.3 Hindered or Zone Settling 5-51
5.7.3.4 Com pression 5-51
5.7.4 Design C onsiderations 5-51
5.7.4.1 Factors Influencing Design 5-51
5.7.4.2 Design Criteria 5-51
5.7.4.2.1 Surface Loading Rate 5-51
5.7.4.2.2 Solids Loading Rate 5-51
5.7.4.2.3 W eir Loading 5-52
5.7.4.2.4 Depth and Detention Tim e 5-52
5.7.4.2.5 Design G uidelines and Procedure 5-53
XXIV
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
5.7.4.2.6 Sludge w ithdraw al from Clarifiers and Thickeners 5-54
5.7.4.2.6.1 Prim ary Ciarifier-10 MLD with 400 mg/L, SS&60% Removal 5-55
5.7.4.2.6.2 S econdary C larifier for 10 MLD o f Sew age with 0.6 RAS 5-55
5.7.4.2.6.3 Choice o f Sludge W ithdrawal 5-55
5.7.4.2.7 Inlets and Outlets 5-58
5.7.4.2.8 Scum Removal 5-59
5.7.4.2.9 Types and Shapes 5-59
5.7.5 Perform ance 5-59
5.7.6 Chem ical Aided Sedim entation 5-60
5.7.6.1 Unit O perations 5-60
5.7.6.1.1 Mixing 5-60
5.7.6.1.2 Flocculation 5-60
5.7.6.1.3 Sedim entation 5-61
5.8 Sewage Treatm ent 5-61
5.8.1 A ctivated Sludge Process 5-61
5.8.1.2 A ctivated Sludge Process Variables 5-62
5.8.1.3 Loading Rate 5-62
5.8.1.5 Mixing Regime 5-64
5.8.1.6 Flow Scheme 5-65
5.8.1.7 Conventional System and M odifications 5-65
5.8.1.7.1 Conventional System 5-65
5.8.1.7.2 C om pletely Mixed 5-65
5.8.1.7.3 Plug Flow 5-66
XXV
Part A: Engineering
S ection Title Page
5.8.1.7.4 Extended A eration 5-66
5.8.1.7.5 Design C onsideration 5-66
5.8.1.7.5.1 A eration Tank 5-66
5.8.1.7.5.2 O xygen Requirem ents 5-68
5.8.1.7.5.3 A eration Facilities 5-68
5.8.1.7.5.4 Diffused Aeration 5-71
5.8.1.7.5.5 S urface A erators 5-71
5.8.1.7.5.6 Mixing Requirem ents 5-72
5.8.1.7.5.7 M easuring Devices 5-72
5.8.1.7.5.8 S econdary Settling 5-72
5.8.1.7.5.9 Sludge Recycle 5-72
5.8.1.7.5.10 Excess Sludge W asting 5-73
5.8.1.7.6 Nitrification 5-74
5.8.1.7.7 D enitrification 5-75
5.8.1.7.8 P hosphorous Removal 5-75
5.8.1.7.9 A erated Lagoons 5-76
5.8.1.7.10 Design Variables 5-77
5.8.1.7.11 M ixing C onditions 5-78
5.8.1.7.12 S ubstrate Rem oval Rates 5-80
5.8.1.7.13 Pow er Level 5-80
5.8.1.7.14 E ffluent C haracteristics 5-81
5.8.1.7.15 S ludge A ccum ulation 5-81
5.8.1.7.16 C onclusion 5-81
5.8.2 A ttached G rowth System s 5-81
H istorical D evelopm ent of A ttached G rowth in

5.8.2.1 5-81
Rock M edia Filters
XXVI
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
5.8.2.2 D evelopm ent o f Modern Synthetic Media 5-82
5.8.2.3 Physical Features 5-83
5.8.2.3.1 Shape o f Reactors 5-83
5.8.2.3.2 Provision for Flooding 5-83
5.8.2.3.3 Side W alls 5-83
5.8.2.3.4 Floor 5-83
5.8.2.3.5 Under Drainage System for FFR 5-83
5.8.2.3.5.1 Slope o f Under Drains 5-83
5.8.2.3.5.2 Main Collecting Channel 5-84
5.8.2.3.5.3 Ventilation 5-84
5.8.2.3.5.4 Reactor Media 5-84
5.8.2.3.5.5 Synthetic Media 5-84
5.8.2.3.5.6 Reactor Dosing 5-85
5.8.2.3.5.7 Flow Distribution 5-85
5.8.2.3.5.8 Pum ping Arrangem ents 5-86
5.8.2.3.5.9 Ponding Problem s 5-86
5.8.2.3.5.10 M ultiple Units 5-87
5.8.2.3.5.11 Plant Hydraulics 5-84
5.8.2.4 Design G uidelines 5-88
5.8.3 Treatm ent M ethods using Im m obilization Carrier 5-88
5.8.3.1 Historical 5-88
5.8.3.2 Specific M icrobiology 5-88
5.8.3.3 Status 5-88
5.8.3.4 Physical Features 5-89
5.8.3.4.1 Shape of Reactors 5-89
5.8.3.4.2 Floor 5-89
XXVII
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
5.8.3.4.3 R eactor Media 5-89
5.8.3.4.4 Netting to Hold Back Media 5-89
5.8.3.4.5 A uxiliary M ixers in the Reactor 5-89
5.8.3.4.6 M ultiple Units 5-89
5.8.3.4.7 Plant Hydraulics 5-89
5.8.3.5 Design G uidelines 5-89
5.8.4 Stabilization Ponds 5-90
5.8.4.1 General 5-90
5.8.4.2 Classification 5-90
5.8.4.2.1 A erobic 5-90
5.8.4.2.2 A naerobic 5-90
5.8.4.2.3 Facultative 5-90
5.8.4.3 M echanism of Purification 5-90
5.8.4.3.1 A erobic and A naerobic Reactions 5-91
5.8.4.3.2 Diurnal Variations 5-91
5.8.4.3.3 O dour Control 5-92
5.8.4.3.4 Algae 5-92
5.8.4.4 Design C onsiderations 5-92
5.8.4.4.1 Areal O rganic Loading 5-92
5.8.4.4.2 Detention Tim e and Hydraulic Flow Regimes 5-93
5.8.4.4.3 Depth 5-94
5.8.4.4.4 Sludge A ccum ulation 5-94
5.8.4.4.5 Bacterial Reduction 5-94
5.8.4.4.6 M osquito Aspects 5-95
5.8.4.5 Construction Details 5-96
5.8.4.5.1 Site Selection 5-96
XXVIII
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
5.8.4.5.2 Pre-treatm ent 5-96
5.8.4.5.3 Construction in Stages 5-96
5.8.4.5.4 M ultiple Units 5-96
5.8.4.5.5 Pond Shape 5-96
5.8.4.5.6 Em bankm ent 5-97
5.8.4.5.7 Pond Bottom 5-97
5.8.4.5.8 Pond Inlets 5-97
5.8.4.5.9 Pond Outlets 5-98
5.8.4.5.10 Pond Interconnections 5-98
5.8.4.5.11 O ther Aspects 5-98
5.8.4.6 Perform ance 5-98
5.8.4.7 Construction for Filtering Out Algae 5-99
5.8.4.8 Applications 5-100
5.8.5 A naerobic Treatm ent o f Sewage 5-100
5.8.5.2 High Rate A naerobic System s 5-100
5.8.5.2.1 A naerobic C ontact Process 5-101
5.8.5.2.2 A naerobic Filter 5-102
5.8.5.2.3 A naerobic Fixed Films Reactor 5-102
5.8.5.2.4 Fluidized and Expanded Bed Reactor 5-102
5.8.5.2.5 Up flow A naerobic Sludge Blanket Reactor 5-102
5.8.5.3 Design and O perational C onsiderations 5-102
5.8.5.3.1 O rganic Load and Sludge Retention Tim e 5-103
5.8.5.3.2 Hydraulic Load 5-103
5.8.5.3.3 Effect o f Tem perature 5-103
5.8.5.3.4 Excess Sludge Production and Nutrient Requirem ent 5-103
XXIX
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
5.8.5.3.5 Toxicity 5-104
5.8.5.3.6 Recirculation 5-104
5.8.5.3.7 Gas Yield and Utilization 5-104
5.8.5.4 Pre-treatm ent 5-104
5.8.5.5 Effluent Q uality and Post Treatm ent 5-104
5.8.5.6 Choice of Process 5-105
5.8.6 Supplem ental Treatm ent Processes 5-105
5.8.6.2 Tertiary Treatm ent Technology 5-105
5.8.6.2.1 Chem ical Precipitation 5-105
5.8.6.2.2 Membrane Technologies 5-110
5.9 Disinfection Facilities 5-110
5.9.1 Need fo r Disinfection 5-110
5.9.2 Disinfection by Chlorination 5-116
5.9.2.1 Dechlorination 5-116
5.9.3 Ultraviolet Radiation Disinfection 5-117
5.9.4 O zone System s 5-117
5.9.5 Relative A spects o f Disinfection Processes 5-117
5.10 The Issues o f Nitrogen and Phosphorus 5-119
5.11 Desirable Treated Sewage Q uality and Processes 5-119
5.12 Electrical and Instrum entation 5-122
5.12.1 General 5-122
XXX
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
5.12.2 Power Receiving and Transform ation Equipm ent 5-122
5.12.2.1 Location 5-123
5.12.2.2 Rating and Supply Voltage 5-123
5.12.2.3 Lightning Arrestors 5-123
5.12.2.4 G roup O perating Switches (GOS) 5-123
5.12.2.5 C ircuit Breaker (CB) 5-124
5.12.2.6 Drop O ut Fuses (DOF) 5-124
5.12.2.7 O verhead Bus Bars 5-124
5.12.2.8 T ransform er 5-124
5.12.2.9 Parallel O peration 5-126
5.12.2.10 Instrum ent Transform er for Metering 5-126
5.12.2.11 Instrum ent Transform ers for Protection 5-126
5.12.2.12 Substation Fencing and Lighting 5-126
5.12.2.13 Earthing and Lightning Protection 5-126
5.12.3 Prime M overs - Motors and M otor Controllers 5-126
5.12.3.1 Motors 5-127
5.12.3.2 Selection Criteria 5-127
5.12.3.3 Constructional Features of Induction Motors 5-127
5.12.3.4 Method o f Starting 5-127
5.12.3.5 Voltage Ratings 5-127
5.12.3.6 Types o f Enclosure 5-128
5.12.3.7 Class of Duty 5-129
5.12.3.8 Insulation 5-129
5.12.3.9 Margin in Brake Kilowatts (BkW ) 5-129
5.12.3.10 Electrical S w itchgear and Control Equipm ent 5-129
5.12.3.11 Switch G ear 5-130
XXXI
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
5.12.3.12 Switchboards 5-130
5.12.3.13 Starters 5-130
5.12.3.14 C apacitors 5-131
5.12.3.15 Speed Control o f Motors 5-132
5.12.3.16 Cables 5-132
5.12.3.17 Controls 5-133
5.12.3.18 Subm ersible Pump Motors 5-134
5.12.3.19 Single Line Diagram 5-135
5.12.4 Backup Power Supply 5-135
5.12.4.1 Parallel O peration o f G enerators 5-135
5.12.4.2 Fuel Storage 5-135
5.12.4.3 Cost o f Captive Power 5-135
5.12.4.4 E lectricity Room and G enerator Room 5-137
5.12.4.5 Clearance from Statutory A uthorities 5-137
5.12.5 A utom atic Mains Failure Panel 5-137
5.12.5.1 Sequence of O peration of AM F Panel 5-138
5.12.5.2 Inbuilt Tim ers for Safety o f the O peration 5-139
5.12.6 Uninterruptible Power Supply 5-139
5.12.7 Instrum entation Facilities 5-140
5.12.7.1 Principle o f W orking o f DO Probe 5-140
5.12.7.2 A dvantages and Disadvantages 5-141
5.12.7.3 Standard Procedures 5-141
5.12.7.4 M inim um V elocity 5-141
5.12.7.5 Slime Build up on Probes in Aeration Tanks 5-142
5.12.7.6 Instrum entation 5-142
5.12.8 Instrum entation Facilities - BOD 5-142
XXXII
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
5.12.9 Instrum entation Facilities - pH, etc. 5-142
5.12.10 Non-instrum entation Method o f Q uick BOD M easurem ent 5-143
5.12.11 Flow M easurem ent 5-143
5.12.11.1 M agnetic Flow Meters 5-143
5.12.11.2 Ultrasonic Flow Meters 5-143
5.12.11.3 Ultrasonic Level Sensors 5-144
5.12.12 S upervisory Control and Data Acquisition System (SCADA) 5-144
5.12.12.1 C om ponents o f S CADA System 5-145
5.12.12.2 SC AD A Software 5-145
5.12.12.3 SC AD A S ecurity Level 5-145
5.12.12.3.1 RTU Security Level 5-145
5.12.12.3.2 M inim um Access Levels o f Program m ing and Configuration 5-145
5.12.12.4 SC AD A User Interface 5-146
5.12.12.4.1 Com m and/C ontrol Functions 5-146
5.12.12.4.2 Display Capability 5-146
5.12.12.4.3 Text Description 5-146
5.12.12.5 Alarm Capabilities 5-146
5.12.12.5.1 Alarm Display Capability 5-146
5.12.12.5.2 Alarm File Capability 5-147
5.12.12.5.3 Alarm Printing Capability 5-147
5.13 Distributed Control System s 5-147
5.13.1 Description 5-147
5.14 Program m able Logic Control 5-147
5.14.1 Description 5-147
XXXIII
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
5.15 Corrosion Protection and Control 5-148
5.15.1 General 5-148
5.15.2 Corrosion of Treatm ent System s 5-148
5.15.2.1 Raw Sew age Collection and pH Neutralization 5-148
5.15.2.2 Clarifiers 5-148
5.15.2.3 Sludge Digestion 5-149
5.15.2.4 Activated Sludge 5-149
5.15.2.5 A ttached/Fluidized/lm m obilized Media Systems 5-149
5.15.3 Sewage and Sew age Pumps 5-149
5.15.4 Preventive M aintenance 5-150
5.15.5 Piping R equirem ents in Treatm ent Plants 5-150
5.15.6 M odification o f M aterials 5-150
5.16 Rehabilitation of Sew age Treatm ent Facilities 5-152
5.16.1 Criteria for Rehabilitation of STPs 5-152
5.16.1.1 Upgradation o f Facilities 5-152
5.16.1.2 Energy Saving M easures 5-154
5.17 Carbon Credit 5-154
5.18 Recent Technologies in Sew age Treatm ent 5-157
5.18.1 O bjective O riented Emerging Technologies 5-157
5.18.2 Recycled N itrification/D enitrification Process 5-163
5.18.2.1 Description 5-163
5.18.2.2 Application Exam ples 5-163
5.18.2.3 The K&C V alley STP at Bengaluru 5-164
XXXIV
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
5.18.2.5 Typical Design Param eters 5-165
5.18.2.6 A pplicability 5-165
5.18.3 W uhrm ann Process 5-165
5.18.3.2 A pplication Exam ples 5-166
5.18.4 Step-feed M ultistage Biological Nitrogen Removal Process 5-169
5.18.5 A naerobic-oxic A ctivated Sludge Process 5-171
5.18.6 Bardenpho Process 5-174
XXXV
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
5.18.7 A naerobic-anoxic-oxic (A 2 0 ) Process 5-176
5.18.8 O ther Reported Processes 5-178
5.18.8.1 S haron-A nam m ox Processes 5-178
5.18.9 Guiding Principles o f Biological Nutrient Removal Processes 5-178
5.18.10 M em brane Filtration (MF, UF, NF, RO) 5-179
5.18.10.5 Guiding Principles 5-181
5.18.11 M em brane Bioreactor 5-181
5.18.12 Sequencing Batch Reactors (SBR) 5-189
XXXVI
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
5.18.12.4.1 Disinfection tank volum e 5-198
5.18.13 Moving Bed Biofilm Reactors (M BBR) 5-199
5.18.14 Fixed Bed Biofilm Activated Sludge Process 5-209
5.18.15 Subm erged Im m obilized Biofilm Technology 5-212
5.18.16 BIO FO R Technology 5-213
5.18.16.1 Key Features o f the Technology 5-213
5.18.17 High Rate Activated Sludge BIO FO R-F Technology 5-214
XXXVII
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
5.18.17.1 Key Features o f this Technology 5-214
5.18.18 Subm erged Aeration Fixed Film (SAFF) Technology 5-216
5.18.18.1 Key Features o f the Technology 5-216
5.18.19 Rim Flow Sludge Suction Clarifiers 5-217
5.18.19.1 Advantages 5-217
5.18.19.2 Disadvantages 5-217
5.18.20 Improved Secondary Clarifier (HYDROPLUME) CSIR-NEERI 5-218
5.18.20.1 Salient Features of HYDRO PLUM E 5-218
5.18.20.2 Advantages 5-219
5.19 A ddressing the Recent Technologies in Choice of STP 5-219
CHAPTER - 6 SLUDGE TREATMENT FACILITIES
6.1 The Approach 6-1
6.2 Hydraulics o f Sludge Pipelines 6-4
6.2.1 Sludge Piping 6-4
6.2.1.1 Friction Losses in G ravity Sludge Pipelines 6-4
6.2.1.2 Friction Losses in Pumped Sludge Pipelines 6-4
6.2.2 Sludge Pump Types and Applications 6-5
6.2.2.1 Centrifugal Pumps 6-10
6.2.2.2 A ir-Lift Pumps 6-11
6.2.2.3 Screw Pumps 6-11
XXXVIII
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
6.2.2.4 Reciprocating Plunger 6-11
6.2.2.5 Diaphragm Pumps 6-12
6.2.2.6 Torque Flow Pumps 6-12
6.2.2.7 Rotary Lobe Pumps 6-12
6.2.2.8 O perational Problem s 6-13
6.2.2.9 Requirem ent of Standby Units 6-13
6.2.2.10 Pump Appurtenances 6-13
6.2.2.10.1 A ir C ham ber 6-13
6.2.2.10.2 Revolution C ounter 6-14
6.2.2.10.3 Gland Seals 6-14
6.2.2.10.4 Valves 6-14
6.2.2.10.5 G auges 6-14
6.2.2.10.6 Sam pling Devices 6-14
6.2.2.10.7 W ashouts and Drains 6-15
6.2.2.10.8 Tim e Clocks 6-15
6.2.2.10.9 M easuring Devices 6-15
6.2.2.11 Pump Drive Equipm ent 6-15
6.2.3 Physical Features o f Sludge Piping for Pumps 6-15
6.2.4 A dverse Effects o f Heavy Metals & Sludge C om ponents 6-16
6.2.5 Sludge Digestion or Stabilization Requirem ents 6-16
6.2.6 Return Flow Treatm ent R equirem ents 6-17
6.2.7 Sludge Storage R equirem ents 6-18
6.2.7.1 Capacity o f Sludge Storage Tank 6-18
6.2.7.2 Structure 6-18
6.2.7.3 Num ber o f Tanks 6-18
6.2.7.4 A gitator 6-18
XXXIX
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
6.2.7.5 O dours in Tank and Deodorization 6-18
6.2.8 M ethods o f Ultim ate Disposal 6-19
6.2.9 Back-up Techniques o f Sludge Handling and Disposal 6-19
6.3 Sludge Thickening 6-19
6.3.1 G ravity Thickening 6-20
6.3.1.1 C apacity 6-20
6.3.1.2 Shape and Num ber 6-21
6.3.1.3 Structure 6-21
6.3.1.4 Appurtenances 6-21
6.3.2 Centrifugal Thickening 6-21
6.3.2.1 Centrifugal Thickener 6-22
6.3.2.2 Sludge Feed Pump 6-22
6.3.3 A ir Floatation Thickening 6-22
6.3.3.1 D issolved-air Floatation Thickening 6-23
6.3.3.1.1 C apacity 6-23
6.3.3.1.2 Shape and Num ber 6-24
6.3.3.1.3 Structure 6-24
6.3.3.1.4 Sludge R em over and Sludge Scraper 6-24
6.3.3.1.5 Pressurizing Pump 6-24
6.3.3.1.6 A ir Dissolution Tank 6-24
6.3.3.1.7 Appurtenances 6-25
6.3.3.2 D ispersed-air Floatation Thickening 6-25
6.3.3.2.1 C apacity 6-25
6.3.3.2.2 Shape and Num ber 6-25
XL
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
6.3.3.2.3 Structure 6-26
6.3.3.2.4 Sludge Rem over and Sludge Scraper 6-26
6 .3 .3 2 .5 Control o f Foaming 6-26
6.3.4 Belt Type Thickening 6-26
6.3.4.1 Capacity 6-26
6.3.4.2 Shape and Num ber 6-26
6.3.4.3 Chem ical Dosing Equipm ent 6-27
6.3.5 Com parison o f D ifferent Types of Sludge Thickening 6-27
6.4 A naerobic Sludge Digestion 6-27
6.4.1 General 6-27
6.4.1.1 M icrobiology o f the Process 6-27
6.4.2 Digestion Types 6-29
6.4.2.1 Low Rate Digestion 6-29
6.4.2.2 High Rate Digestion 6-29
6.4.2.3 Sludge Tem perature 6-30
6.4.3 D igester Tank Volum e 6-31
6.4.4 Sludge Loading Rate 6-32
6.4.4.1 Loading Criteria 6-32
6.4.4.2 Solids Retention Tim e and Tem perature 6-32
6.4.4.3 Storage for Digested Sludge 6-34
6.4.5 Sizing 6-34
6.4.5.1 Sizing o f Low Rate Digesters 6-34
6.4.5.2 Sizing o f High Rate Digester 6-35
6.4.6 Structure 6-35
XLI
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
6.4.6.1 N um ber o f Units 6-35
6.4.6.2 D igester Shape and Size 6-36
6.4.6.3 Free Board and Depth 6-36
6.4.6.4 Floor Slope 6-36
6.4.6.5 Roofing 6-37
6.4.6.6 D igester Control Room 6-37
6.4.7 Mixing System 6-37
6.4.8 Heating System 6-42
6.4.9 Sludge Inlets and Draw-offs 6-43
6.4.10 S upernatant W ithdraw al and Treatm ent 6-43
6.4.10.1 Supernatant Liquor D raw -off Pipe 6-43
6.4.10.2 S upernatant Liquor Return Piping 6-43
6.4.11 G uidelines for Sludge Piping A rchitecture 6-44
6.4.12 Gas Collection and Storage 6-45
6.4.12.1 Gas Collection 6-45
6.4.12.2 Storage (Gas Holder) 6-46
6.4.13 Piping 6-47
6.4.14 Appurtenances 6-48
6.4.14.1 Sam pling Sinks and Valves 6-48
6.4.14.2 Liquid Level Indicator 6-49
6.4.15 Corrosion Prevention 6-49
6.4.15.1 Material o f Equipm ent 6-49
6.4.15.2 Coating o f Parts o f Piping and Equipm ent 6-49
6.4.15.3 Stripping o f Hydrogen Sulphide in D igester Gas 6-49
6.4.15.3.1 Biochem ical Process 6-50
6.4.15.3.2 Biological Process 6-50
XLII
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
6.4.15.3.3 Chem ical Process 6-50
6.4.15.3.4 O bservations o f the System s 6-51
6.4.15.3.5 A ppraisal o f the System s in Term s o f O&M 6-51
6.5 A erobic Sludge Digestion 6-52
6.5.1 General 6-52
6.5.2 Tank C apacity 6-53
6.5.2.1 Volum e Required 6-53
6.5.2.2 Effect o f Tem perature on Volum e 6-54
6.5.3 Mixing 6-54
6.5.4 A ir R equirem ents 6-54
6.5.5 S upernatant Separation 6-54
6.5.6 Scum and G rease Removal 6-54
6.5.7 High Level Em ergency O verflow 6-54
6.5.8 A erobic Digestion Sludge Production 6-55
6.5.9 Digested Sludge Storage Volum e 6-55
6.5.9.1 Sludge Storage Volum e 6-55
6.5.9.2 Liquid Sludge Storage 6-55
6.6 Sludge Drying Beds 6-55
6.6.1 A pplicability 6-55
6.6.2 Unit Sizing 6-56
6.6.2.1 Area o f Beds 6-56
6.6.3 Percolation Type Bed C om ponents 6-56
6.6.3.1 Gravel 6-56
6.6.3.2 Sand 6-56
XLIII
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
6.6.3.3 Under Drains 6-56
6.6.3.4 W alls 6-57
6.6.3.5 Dim ensions 6-57
6.6.3.6 Sludge Inlet 6-57
6.6.3.7 Cover 6-57
6.6.3.8 Drainage 6-57
6.6.4 Sludge Removal 6-57
6.6.4.1 Preparation o f Bed 6-57
6.6.4.2 W ithdraw al o f Sludge 6-58
6.6.4.3 Rem oval o f Sludge Cake 6-58
6.6.4.4 Hauling and Storage o f Sludge Cakes 6-58
6.7 Sludge Dewatering 6-58
6.7.1 General 6-58
6.7.2 Features 6-59
6.7.3 Dewatering Principle 6-59
6.7.4 Sludge Conditioning 6-59
6.7.4.1 Chem ical Conditioning 6-60
6.7.4.2 Use of Polyelectrolytes 6-61
6.7.4.3 Elutriation 6-61
6.7.4.4 Heat Treatm ent 6-62
6.7.5 Screw Press 6-62
6.7.6 Rotary Press 6-63
6.7.7 Belt Press 6-65
6.7.8 Filter Press 6-66
6.7.9 Centrifugal Dewatering Machine 6-67
XLIV
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
6.7.10 Vacuum Filter 6-68
6.7.11 Com parison o f Dewatering System s 6-69
6.8 Sludge Disinfection 6-69
6.8.1 Heat Drying 6-69
6.8.2 Incineration 6-72
6.9 Sludge Com posting 6-72
6.9.1 O utline 6-72
6.9.2 Types o f C om posting Methods 6-72
6.9.3 A pplicability 6-74
6.9.4 A dvantages and Disadvantages 6-75
6.9.5 Design C onsiderations 6-75
6.9.6 Mixed C om posting of Sludge and M unicipal Solid W aste 6-76
6.10 Sludge Disposal 6-76
6.10.1 Sludge Storage 6-76
6.10.1.1 General 6-76
6.10.1.2 Volum e 6-76
6.10.2 Disposal 6-77
6.10.2.1 Sludge as Soil Filler 6-77
6.10.2.1.1 Heavy metal and Faecal coliform ceiling concentration 6-78
6.10.2.2 Sludge Storage Yard 6-79
6.10.2.3 Sanitary Land Fill 6-79
6.10.2.4 Disposal in W ater or Sea 6-80
XLV
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
6.11 Corrosion Prevention and Control 6-80
6.11.1 A naerobic Sludge Digesters 6-80
6.11.2 Sludge Pumps 6-80
6.11.3 Piping R equirem ents in Treatm ent Plants 6-81
6.11.4 M odification o f M aterials 6-81
6.12 Upgrading and Retrofitting o f Sludge Facilities 6-81
6.12.1 Energy Saving M easures 6-82
6.13 Biom ethanation and Energy Recovery (Carbon Credit) 6-83
6.13.1 General 6-83
6.13.2 Digester Gas Utilization 6-83
6.13.3 Utilization o f Dried Sludge 6-85
6.14 Recent Technologies in Sludge Treatm ent 6-85
6.14.1 Necessity o f Sludge Treatm ent 6-85
6.14.2 Types o f Sludge Treatm ent Technologies 6-85
6.14.3 Heat Drying 6-86
6.14.3.3 Design C onsiderations 6-87
6.14.3.4 Applicability 6-87
6.14.4 S olar Drying 6-87
6.14.4.2 Main C om ponents o f Solar Sludge Drying System 6-87
XLVI
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
6.14.4.4 Potential Uses for Dried Sludge 6-89
6.15 U ltrasonic Disintegration o f Feed Sludge to Digester 6-89
6.16 Guiding Principles of Sludge Treatm ent Technologies 6-90
CHAPTER - 7 RECYCLING AND REUSE OF SEWAGE
7.1 Introduction 7-1
7.1.1 O verview o f Current Practices in India 7-1
7.1.2 O verview o f C urrent Practices in the W orld 7-2
7.2 Case Studies in Recycling and Reuse o f Sewage 7-3
7.2.1 Raw Sew age Reuse as Cooling W ater at Chennai, India 7-3
7.2.1.1 The Pride o f Place 7-3
7.2.1.2 Treatm ent Schem atic 7-3
7.2.1.3 Raw and Recovered Sewage Qualities 7-3
7.2.1.4 Step by Step Reasoning o f the Treatm ent 7-3
7.2.1.5 Key Design Criteria 7-6
7.2.1.6 Perform ance Results 7-7
7.2.1.7 Pointers for the Future 7-7
7.2.2 Reuse Plant at Indira Gandhi International Airport, Delhi, 7-8
7.2.2.1 W ater Routing o f this Plant 7-9
7 !2.2.2 Key Design Criteria 7-9
7.2.2.3 Perform ance Results 7-10
7.2.3 Reuse Plant at M umbai International Airport, 7-10
7.2.4 Pointers for the Future 7-11
7.2.5 Reuse Plants at M/S CPCL and M/S MFL 7-13
XLVII
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
7.2.6 Sewage Reuse Plant at M/S RCF 7-14
7.2.7 Bengaluru, India 7-14
7.2.8 Karnal, India 7-15
7.2.9 Mudiali (Kolkata), India 7-19
7.2.10 O range C ounty California, USA 7-20
7.2.11 Tokyo M etropolitan, Japan 7-21
7.2.12 Restoration o f M eguro River, Japan 7-22
7.2.13 Road W ashing & Subw ay Coach Cleaning, Seoul 7-24
7.2.14 Ground Cooling, Japan 7-25
7.2.15 Singapore NEW ater 7-26
7.3 Guiding Principles fo r India 7-27
7.3.1 A griculture 7-28
7.3.1.1 Key Principles 7-28
7.3.1.2 O sm otic Effects 7-29
7.3.1.3 T oxic Effects 7-30
7.3.1.4 Sodium Hazard 7-32
7.3.1.5 Residual Sodium C arbonate 7-33
7.3.1.6 O rganic Solids 7-33
7.3.1.7 O ther C onsiderations 7-33
7.3.1.8 Design and M anagem ent o f Sewage Farms 7-33
7.3.1.9 M anagem ent of W ater in Sew age Farming 7-34
7.3.1.9.1 Hydraulic Loading 7-34
7.3.1.9.2 O rganic Loading 7-36
7.3.1.9.3 Irrigation Interval 7-36
7.3.1.10 M anagem ent of Soil 7-36
XLVIII
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
7.3.1.11 Nutrients Loading 7-37
7.3.1.12 Land Requirem ents for Hydraulic and Nitrogen Loadings 7-37
7.3.1.13 Alternative A rrangem ent during Non-irrigating Periods 7-38
7.3.1.14 Protection against Health Hazards 7-38
7.3.2 Guiding Principles - Farm Forestry 7-39
7.3.3 Guiding Principles - Horticulture 7-39
7.3.4 Guiding Principles - Toilet Flushing 7-39
7.3.5 Guiding Principles - Industrial and Com m ercial 7-40
7.3.5.1 As Cooling W ater 7-40
7.3.5.2 As Boiler Feed W ater 7-43
7.3.5.3 As Process W ater 7-46
7.3.6 Guiding Principles - Fish Culture 7-47
7.3.7 Guiding Principles - G roundw ater Recharge 7-47
7.3.8 Guiding Principles - Indirect Recharge o f Im poundm ents 7-47
7.3.9 Guiding Principles - Indirect Reuse as Potable Raw W ater 7-47
7.3.9.1 Treated Sew age into Perennial Rivers 7-48
7.3.9.2 Treated Sewage into N on-Perennial/D ry River Courses 7-48
7.3.9.3 Treated Sewage into Surface W ater Reservoirs 7-48
7.3.9.4 Treated Sewage Conjunctive Use in Surface Water & Aquifer 7-49
7.3.9.5 Treated Sewage into Soil & Reuse as Industrial / Agricultural 7-50
7.3.9.6 Treated Sewage Deep Well Injection as Seawater Intrusion Barrier 7-51
7.3.10 Guiding Principles - O ther Uses 7-51
7.3.11 Standard o f Treated Sew age and its Uses 7-51
7.3.12 Public Education 7-53
7.3.13 Piping and Cross-connection Control 7-53
XLIX
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
7.4 Legal Issues 7-53
CHAPTER - 8 - DECENTRALIZED SEWERAGE SYSTEM
8.1 Definition 8-1
8.2 Challenges in Sustaining a Centralized Sewerage 8-1
8.2.1 Financial S ustainability 8-1
8.2.2 Idle Volum es and Tim e in Conventional Sewerage 8-2
8.2.3 Idle Investm ent in Conventional Sewerage 8-2
8.2.4 Problem s of House Service C onnections 8-3
8.2.5 Conflict o f Levies fo r Recovering the Sew er Costs 8-3
8.3 Concept o f Decentralized Sewerage 8-3
8.3.1 A dvantages o f Decentralized Sewerage 8-4
8.4 Technologies of Decentralized Sewerage 8-5
8.4.1 Sim plified Sewerage 8-5
8.4.2 Small Bore S ew er System 8-7
8.4.2.1 C om ponents o f the System 8-7
8.4.2.2 S uitability o f the System 8-7
8.4.3 Shallow Sewers 8-8
8.4.3.1 System Description 8-8
8.4.3.2 C om ponents o f the System 8-8
8.4.3.3 Design 8-10
L
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
8.4.3.5 Lim itations 8-10
8.4.4 Twin Drain System 8-10
8.4.4.1 Installation at Kolachel, Tam il Nadu 8-11
8.4.4.2 Design A dopted for the System 8-11
8.4.4.3 Perform ance of the System 8-11
8.4.4.4 Financial A spects o f the System 8-11
8.5 A pplication o f Decentralized Sew erage in Urban Areas 8-13
8.6 Public Toilets as Decentralized Sewerage 8-15
8.6.1 Norm s for Public Toilet facilities with focus on gender issues 8-15
8.6.2 O ff Site Treatm ent 8-16
8.6.3 O ne-w ay See through Public Toilets 8-16
8.7 C om m unity Toilets as Decentralized Sewerage 8-16
8.7.1 Norms 8-17
8.8 DEW ATS 8-18
8.9 Recom m endations 8-19
CHAPTER - 9 - ON-SITE SANITATION
9.1 O verview o f O n-site Sanitation 9-1
9.1.1 O n-site Sew age Treatm ent System 9-1
9.1.2 O n-site Classification 9-1
LI
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
9.1.2.2 Sim ple Treatm ent Method 9-1
9.1.2.3 A dvanced Treatm ent System 9-2
9.2 Prohibition of E m ploym ent as M anual S cavengers A ct 2013 9-2
9.3 Interim M easures 9-2
9.3.1 Public and Com m unity Toilets 9-3
9.3.2 M obile Toilet 9-3
9.3.3 Pour Flush W ater Seal Latrine 9-4
9.3.3.1 Design and M aterials 9-5
9.3.3.1.1 Squatting Pan, Trap, Footrests, and Connecting Drain 9-5
9.3.3.1.2 Leach Pits/Twin Pit Latrine 9-6
9.3.3.1.2.1 Sludge Accum ulation Rate 9-6
9.3.3.1.2.2 Long Term Infiltration Rate 9-7
9.3.3.1.2.3 Hydraulic Loading 9-7
9.3.3.1.2.4 Pathogen Destruction 9-8
9.3.3.1.2.5 O ptim al Pit Emptying Frequency 9-8
9.3.3.1.2.6 Size o f Pits 9-8
9.3.3.1.2.7 Design o f Pits under Different Conditions 9-8
9.3.3.2 Construction o f Pour Flush Latrine 9-9
9.3.3.2.1 Squatting Pan and Trap 9-9
9.3.3.2.2 Foot Rests 9-9
9.3.3.2.3 Pit Lining 9-9
9.3.3.2.4 Pit Bottom 9-14
9.3.3.2.5 Pit Cover 9-14
9.3.3.2.6 Leach Pit Connection 9-14
LII
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
9.3.3.3 Pollution Safeguards 9-14
9.3.3.3.1 Safe Distance from Drinking W ater Sources 9-14
9.3.3.3.2 Safe Distance from W ater Supply Mains 9-15
9.3.3.3.3 Location of Pits 9-15
9.3.3.3.4 Subsoil Conditions 9-16
9.3.3.4 Night Soil Digesters 9-16
9.3.3.4.1 Design Criteria 9-17
9.3.4 Conventional S eptic Tank 9-18
9.3.4.1 Design 9-18
9.3.4.2 Construction Details 9-19
9.3.4.3 Sludge W ithdraw al and Disposal 9-20
9.3.4.4 S econdary Treatm ent and Disposal o f Effluent 9-22
9.3.4.5 Soak Pits 9-23
9.3.4.6 Dispersion Trenches 9-23
9.3.5 Improved S eptic Tank 9-23
9.3.5.1 Up-Flow A naerobic Filter 9-23
9.3.6 Package S eptic Tank - A naerobic Filter Type System 9-28
9.3.7 O n-site Package S eptic Tank - C ontact A eration System 9-29
9.3.8 A naerobic - A erobic O n-site Treatm ent System (Johkasou) 9-31
9.3.8.1 Classification o f Treatm ent System s 9-31
9.3.8.2 System Configuration 9-32
9.3.8.3 Exam ple Design in Japan 9-33
9.3.8.4 Features 9-36
9.4 Decision Making for O n-site Treatm ent Technology 9-37
9.4.1 General 9-37
LIII
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
9.4.2 Problem s with Existing O n-site System 9-38
9.4.2.1 Natural Characteristics 9-38
9.4.2.2 Social R equirem ents 9-38
9.4.3 Elem ents o f Successful Program m e 9-39
9.4.4 Transport and Fate o f Sludge 9-40
9.5 Dealing with Septage 9-41
9.5.1 Characterization o f Septage 9-41
9.5.1.1 Septic Tanks used only for W ater Closets 9-41
9.5.1.2 Septic Tanks used for all D om estic Sewage 9-41
9.5.1.3 BOD for S eptic Tanks used for W ater Closets and Bathing 9-42
9.5.1.4 Values Reported from Elsewhere 9-42
9.5.1.5 Values to be considered for Indian Conditions 9-42
9.6 Logistics of Septage Collection 9-42
9.7 Septage Treatm ent Facility 9-42
9.8 Treatm ent o f Septage in Existing STP 9-42
9.8.1 Pre-Treatm ent of Septage 9-45
9.8.1.1 C o-treatm ent in Existing STPs-Liquid Stream 9-45
9.8.1.2 C o-treatm ent in Existing STPs-Sludge Stream 9-46
9.8.1.3 Points of Addition o f the Liquid and Sludge Stream s 9-46
9.9 Treatm ent o f Septage at Independent SeTP 9-46
9.9.1 Pre-Treatm ent of Septage 9-50
LIV
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
9.9.2 Septage Dewatering 9-50
9.10 A dvantages and Disadvantages o f the System s 9-52
9.11 C om posting of Dewatered Septage or Sludge 9-52
9.12 Dewatered Septage Sludge Reuse 9-53
CHAPTER 10 PREPARATION OF CITY SANITATION PLAN
10.1 The Planning Process 10-1
10.2 The City Sanitation Plan 10-1
10.3 Design Period 10-2
10.5 Basic Planning Model 10-2
10.5.1 Draft Fram ework for a CSP under NUSP 10-2
10.5.1.1 G eneric Elem ents of Planning 10-2
10.5.1.2 Purpose 10-2
10.5.2 Steps for Achieving 100% Sanitation 10-4
10.5.2.1 Key Principles 10-4
10.5.2.2 Preparatory A ctions 10-4
10.5.2.2.1 City Sanitation Task Force 10-4
10.5.2.3 Baseline Data Collection fo r Database/G IS 10-7
10.5.2.4 Awareness Generation & Launch of 100% Sanitation Campaign 10-9
LV
Part A: Engineering
Section Title Page
10.5.2.5 Specifying Legal and Regulatory Institutional Responsibilities 10-9
10.5.2.6 Planning and Financing 10-10
10.5.2.7 Technical Options 10-11
10.5.2.8 Reaching the Un-served Populations and Urban Poor 10-13
10.5.2.9 O&M and Service Delivery System s 10-14
10.5.2.10 Capacity Building and Training 10-15
10.5.2.11 Im plem entation M anagem ent and M onitoring and Evaluation 10-16
10.5.2.11.1 Im plem entation M anagem ent 10-16
10.5.2.11.2 Monitoring, Evaluation and Supervision of Progress 10-17
10.5.3 Evaluation o f 100% Sanitation Status 10-18
10.5.4 M onitoring o f 100% Sanitation Status 10-18
10.5.5 City Reward Schem es 10-19
10.5.6 Cities with Special Institutions and Characteristics 10-20
10.6 C oordination between CMP and CSP 10-20
10.7 City Sanitation Plan O utline 10-21
10.8 Algorithm for Decision Making on Sew erage O ptions 10-21
10.9 Reporting 10-21
LVI
Part A: Engineering
LIST OF TABLES
Table Title Page
1.1 Burden of water related diseases in India, 1990 1-6
1.2 Poor sanitation cost to India 1-7
1.3 Sewage management (Sewerage and Sanitation) 1-13
2.1 Design period of sewerage components 2-9
2.2 Service level benchmarks for sewage management 2-31
3.1 Densities of population vs. populated areas 3-2
3.2 Peak factor for contributory population 3-3
3.3 Ground water infiltration 3-4
3.4 Institutional needs for potable water 3-5
3.5 Percentage of Imperviousness of areas 3-7
3.6 Runoff coefficients for times of concentration 3-8
3.7 Duration vs. intensity of storms 3-9
3.8 Time intensity values of storms 3-9
3.9 Design velocities to be ensured in gravity sewers 3-26
3.10 Sulphide generation based on Z values 3-27
3.11 Mannings coefficient of roughness n for stated materials 3-29
3.12 Hydraulic properties of circular sections for Mannings formula 3-31
3.13 Minimum slopes of sanitary sewers 3-31
3.14 Hazen-W illiams coefficients 3-33
3.15 Diameters of circular manholes for stated depths of sewers 3-46
3.16 Quantity of water needed for flushing 3-56
3.17 Recommended design values of settlement ratios 3-67
3.18 W eights of common filling material 3-72
3.19 Values of Cd for calculating loads on pipes in trenches 3-73
LVII
Part A: Engineering
Table Title Page
3.20 Cohesion coefficients for different soils 3-76
3.21 Load coefficients, for concentrated & distributed loads over conduits 3-79
3.22 Type of bedding for sewer pipes 3-83
3.23 Selection of bedding for different depths and different diameters 3-84
3.24 Load factor for different classes of bedding 3-86
3.25 Values of N for different pipe beddings 3-89
3.26 Values of Z for different pipe beddings 3-89
3.27 Maximum jetting pressure in case of different types of pipes 3-103
3.28 Minimum test times per 30 m of vitrified clay sewer line for air testing 3-104
3.29 Criteria for selection of trenchless technology 3-108
3.30 Spacing of manholes as per Japanese Manual 3-127
3.31 Spacing of manholes in sewers not receiving house service sewers 3-127
4.1 Illustration of wet well volume in sewer systems 4-10
4.2 Friction factor for fittings in pumping mains 4-16
4.3 Efficiencies of pumps to be adopted for design purposes 4-27
5.1 Contribution of human wastes in grams per capita per day 5-1
5.2 Use based classification of surface waters in India 5-2
5.3 General standards for discharge of environmental pollutants 5-3
5.4 Concentration of various parameters in the absence of drain or outfall 5-7
5.5 General treatm ent efficiencies of conventional treatment processes 5-15
5.6 Settling velocities and surface overflow rates for ideal grit chamber 5-41
5.7 Dimensions of Parshall flume (mm) 5-46
5.8 Design parameters for clarifiers 5-53
5.9 Characteristics and design parameters of activated sludge systems 5-64
5.10 DO Saturation vs. tem perature in Celsius in tap water at MSL 5-70
5.11 DO Correction factor for altitudes 5-70
LVIII
Part A: Engineering
Table Title Page
5.12 Some characteristics of aerated lagoons 5-76
5.13 Dispersion numbers D/UL at different length -w id th ratios 5-79
5.14 Permissible organic loadings at different latitudes 5-93
5.15 Organic loadings and efficiencies of high rate anaerobic reactors 5-103
5.16 W ater hardness precipitation reactions and chemical needs 5-106
5.17 Variation of data of Ganga River during 1986-2008 5-112
5.18 Classification of Ganga water according to designated best use 5-113
5.19 Technical factors and feasibility considerations in disinfectant choice 5-118
5.20 Guidelines for treated sewage discharge into surface water 5-120
5.21 Requirement of power for different ratings of STP 5-125
5.22 General motor ratings for various voltage ranges 5-128
5.23 Protective enclosures and types of environment 5-128
5.24 Margins for motor-ratings 5-129
5.25 Guidelines for starters for squirrel-cage motors 5-131
5.26 Types of cables for different voltages 5-133
5.27 Piping materials in Sewerage and Sewage Treatm ent 5-151
5.28 Estimated and actual achieved electrical energy recovery 5-156
5.29 Types of sewage treatment technologies 5-158
5.30 Operational conditions of Yoshinogawa STP, Japan (FY 2009) 5-163
5.31 Performance of Yoshinogawa STP, Japan (FY 2009) 5-164
5.32 Criteria for nitrification-denitrification from K&C Valley STP 5-164
5.33 Performance of Hamamatsu City sewage treatment plant 5-167
5.34 Criteria for nitrification-denitrification systems (20C temperature) 5-168
5.35 Criteria for Step-feed multistage biological nitrogen removal process 5-171
5.36 Performance of AO processes 5-172
5.37 Typical design parameters of AO process 5-173
LIX
Part A: Engineering
Table Title Page
5.38 Performance of 42 MLD Bardenpho process, STP, Canada 5-175
5.39 Typical design parameters of Bardenpho process 5-176
5.40 Performance of A 2 0 process (Toba STP, Kyoto, Japan) 5-177
5.41 Typical design parameters of A 2 0 process 5-177
5.42 Description of each process 5-183
5.43 Performance of 4.54 MLD STP using MBR technology, Delhi 5-184
5.44 Operating conditions of MBR process (Nordkanal STP) 5-184
5.45 Performance of MBR process (Nordkanal STP) 5-184
5.46 Operating condition of MBR process (Arakawa STP) 5-185
5.47 Performance of MBR process (Arakawa STP) 5-185
5.48 Performance of MBR process 5-186
5.49 Number of membrane panels replaced 5-186
5.50 Operating condition of MBR process 5-186
5.51 Performance of MBR process 5-187
5.52 Typical design parameters of MBR process 5-188
5.53 Typical effluent quality 5-188
5.54 Criteria used in the 45 MLD SBR at Mundhwa STP in Pune 5-195
5.55 Operating conditions of the Culver SBR process 5-196
5.56 Performance of the Culver SBR process 5-196
5.57 Process parameters for SBR configurations for unsettled sludge 5-198
5.58 Dimensions of the carrier materials 5-200
5.59 Parameters of the pellets of the Pegasus process 5-202
5.60 Merits of FAB technology 5-205

Details of biological nitrification-denitrification Linpor process,
5.61 5-205
Germany
5.62 Performance of Linpor process, Germany 5-205
5.63 Details of biological nitrification-denitrification Pegasus process, Japan 5-206
LX
Part A: Engineering
Table Title Page
5.64 Performance of Pegasus process, Japan 5-206
5.65 Performance of the Lillehammer Kaldnes process 5-207
5.66 Performance of EBB test in Nobeoka city 5-213
6.1 Typical sludge generation Values 6-2
6.2 Solids concentration by treatment process 6-2
6.3 Example of solids recovery rate in each treatment stage 6-4
6-4 Hazen Williams value of C for sludge flows 6-5
6.5 Types of sludge pumps and their Application 6-6
6.6 Surface loadings and solids concentration 6-20
6.7 Comparative evaluation of different sludge thickening process 6-28
6.8 Typical criteria for sizing mesophilic anaerobic sludge digesters 6-32
6.9 Solids retention time at different tem peratures (high rate digestion 6-33
6-10 Observed performances of the three systems for removing H2S 6-51
6.11 Sludge source and volume/population equivalent 6-53
6.12 Sludge source and volume/population equivalent 6-55
6.13 Advantages and disadvantages of dewatering systems 6-70
6.14 Ceiling Concentration of Heavy Metals in Sludge for Agriculture 6-78
6.15 Types of sludge treatment technologies 6-86
7.1 Raw sewage quality variations taken for the design 7-5
7.2 Makeup water quality required for recirculation cooling 7-5
7.3 Performance of the STP at DIAL for higher Nitrogen loaded sewage 7-10
7.4 Performance of the SBR at MIAL for higher Nitrogen loaded sewage 7-10
7.5 Micro nutrients to biological systems as done at IGI Airport STP 7-12
7.6 Treatm ent barriers for indirect potable reuse of treated sewage 7-16
7.7 Influent & effluent quality for the Ochiai W ater Reclamation Facility 7-23
7.8 W ater quality ratings 7-29
LXI
Part A: Engineering
Table Title Page
7.9 Maximum concentration of toxic elements in irrigation waters 7-30
7.10 Values for major inorganic constituents in water applied to the land 7-31
7.11 Suggested limits for salinity in irrigation waters 7-32
7.12 W ater requirements (cm) to wet different soils to a depth of 30 cm 7-34
7.13 W ater requirements of crops 7-34
7.14 Recommended hydraulic loadings 7-35
7.15 Cooling water quality guidelines 7-41
7.16 Quality changes as water becomes sewage & treated for reuse 7-44
7.17 Chemical requirements of water for low & medium pressure boilers 7-45
7.18 Requirements for boiler water, condensate for water - tube boilers 7-46
7.19 Recommended norms of treated sewage quality at point of use 7-52
8.1 Physico-chemical characteristics of the Kolachel System 8-13
8.2 Norms for Toilets in Public spaces 8-15
8.3 Norms for sanitary facilities in Public Toilets 8-16
8.4 Toilet facilities for infrequent events 8-17
9.1 Material and other details for latrine units 9-6
9.2 Sludge accumulation rates 9-7
9.3 Long term infiltration rates of different types of soils 9-7
9.4 Size of leach pits 9-8
9.5 Characteristics of night-soil and cow-dung 9-17
9.6 Design criteria and performance parameters for digester 9-17
9.7 Recommended size of septic tank up to 20 users 9-19
9.8 Recommended sizes of septic tank for residential colonies 9-19
9.9 Classification according to treatm ent capacity (Example of Japan) 9-31
9.10 Classification according to treatment performance, Japan 9-32
9.11 Specifications for a package-type treatm ent system in Japan 9-35
LXII
Part A: Engineering
Table Title Page
9.12 Range values of BOD, COD and SS at inlet to septic tank in India 9-41
9.13 Septage characteristics as per US EPA 9-43
9.14 Heavy metals in septage as per US EPA 9-44
9.15 Illustrative characteristics of septage for Indian Conditions 9-45
9.16 Advantages and disadvantages of septage treatm ent at STP 9-52
9.17 Advantages & disadvantages of septage treatment facility 9-52
9.18 Operational parameters for dewatered septage composting 9-53
10.1 Sample format for preparing City Sanitation Plan 10-24
LXIII
Part A: Engineering
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure Title Page
1.1 Status of Toilets in Urban Households in India 1-3
1.2 Suggested Real Time Total Sanitation Model 1-12
3.1 Typical mounting of V Notch in a drain 3-11
3.2 Typical mounting of rectangular w eir in a drain 3-12
3.3 Typical mounting of rectangular w eir with end constrictions 3-13
3.4 Palmer-Bowlus flume installation in drains 3-13
3.5 Palmer-Bowlus flume installation in circular sewer 3-14
3.6 Configurations and use of Palmer-Bowlus flume 3-15
3.7 Instrumentation for flow m easurem ent & sampling in conduits 3-15
3.8 Profile of pressurized sewer system 3-18
3.9 Profile of vacuum sewer system 3-18
3.10 Jet rodding cum vacuum, suction sewer cleaning machine 3-22
3.11 Twin drain system 3-25
3.12 Hydraulic - Element graph for circular sewers 3-30
3.13 Hydraulic elements of circular sewers 3-30
3.14 Inverted siphon or suppressed sewer for combined sewage 3-36
3.15 Typical sideways leaping weir 3-38
3.16 Leaping weir 3-38
3.17 Typical floor level leaping weir 3-39
3.18 House sewer connections 3-42
3.19 Nomenclature of sewers 3-44
3.20 Typical sewer section 3-44
3.21 Example sewer network 3-45
3.22 Rectangular manhole for 0.9 m x 0.8 m & depth less than 0.9 m 3-47
3.23 Rectangular manhole for 1.2 m x 0.9 m & depth 0.9 m to 2.5 m 3-48
LXVII
Part A: Engineering
Figure Title Page
3.24 Arch type manhole for 1.4 m x 0.9 m & deeper than 2.5 m 3-48
3.25 Typical circular manhole of diameters &depths as in Table 3.15 3-49
3.26 RCC and Brickwork Combination Manhole 3-50
3.27 RCC Manhole for a depth between 0.6 m to 2.3 m 3-51
3.28 RCC Manhole for a depth between 2.3 m to 5 m 3-52
3.29 Illustrative arrangem ent of drop manhole 3-55
3.30 Arrangem ent of manholes in loose or slushy soils or quick sand 3-60
3.31 Depiction on in-situ sewer manhole lining 3-61
3.32 Classification of construction conditions 3-65
3.33 Settlem ents that influence loads on positive projecting conduits 3-66
3.34 Diagram for coefficient Cc for positive projecting conduits 3-68
3.35 Negative projecting conduit 3-69
3.36 Coefficient for negative projecting conduits 3-70
3.37 Settlem ents that influence loads on negative projecting conduits 3-70
3.38 Imperfect trench conditions 3-71
3.39 Load producing forces 3-72
3.40 Exam ples of sub trench 3-74
3.41 Conduit in tunnel 3-75
3.42 Diagram for coefficient Ct for tunnels in undisturbed soil 3-76
3.43 Concentrated and distributed load centered over conduit 3-77
3.44 Example of Venteak supported sewer pipe 3-82
3.45 Typical laying of sewers in high subsoil locations 3-83
3.46 Classes of bedding for conduit in trench 3-85
3.47 Effect of M-20 concrete encasem ent of supporting strength of pipe 3-87
3.48 Classes of bedding for projecting conduits 3-88
3.49 Mechanized Shoring 3-94
LXVIII
Part A: Engineering
Figure Title Page
3.50 Mechanism of resisting loads by rigid and non-rigid piping 3-100
3.51 Aligning SW sewers by twines on crown and mid diam eter 3-101
3.52 Arrangem ent for low pressure air testing of sewer pipeline 3-104
3.53 Guided auger boring 3-109
3.54 Trenchless pipe jacking 3-110
3.55 Different types of inlets 3-112
3.56 Sulphide gas equilibrium in negligible oxygen conditions 3-115
3.57 Sulphide gas equilibrium in appreciable oxygen conditions 3-115
3.58 Solids accumulation at invert of mains at various velocities 3-116
3.59 RCC Sewer pipe with protective coating 3-121
3.60 General arrangement of cathodic protection 3-122
3.61 Connection between house service sewer and public sewer 3-126
3.62 Geometry and hydraulics of egg shaped sewer at full flow 3-127
4.1 Typical hand operated screen facility at shallow sewers 4-4
4.2 Arrangem ent of internals in a submersible pump set 4-6
4.3 Typical dry-well and wet-well installations 4-7
4.4 Archimedean screw pump 4-7
4.5 Typical arrangements of a subm ersible pump set wet well 4-12
4.6 System head curve for a pumping system 4-16
4.7 System head curves for LWL & HWL in suction sump 4-16
4.8 System head curves with change in pipe sizes 4-17
4.9 Change in operating point by operation of delivery valve 4-17
4.10 Operation of pumps in parallel 4-18
4.11 Stable and unstable characteristics of centrifugal pumps 4-19
4.12 Illustrative drawing of lift stations 4-25
4.13 Typical foundation for a pump 4-26
LXIX
Part A: Engineering
Figure Title Page
4.14 Foundation for vertical pumps 4-26
4.15 Illustration of pumping main hydraulics on serial pumping mains 4-29
4.16 Illustrative hydraulics of relay pumping mains in Figure 4.15 4-30
4.17 Typical anti vortex plate 4-31
5.1 Aerobic metabolism 5-5
5.2 Anaerobic metabolism 5-5
5.3 Facultative Metabolism 5-6
5.4 Unit operations in aerobic mechanized biochemical STPs 5-9
5.5 Process flow sheet of conventional anaerobic sewage treatm ent 5-9
5.6 Schem atic diagrams of ASP with different modifications 5-11
5.7 Fixed film synthetic media filters 5-12
5.8 Fluidized aerobic bed reactor showing the media in motion 5-13
5.9 Fluidized anaerobic bed reactor showing the media in motion 5-13
5.10 Up flow anaerobic sludge blanket reactor 5-14
5.11 Anaerobic sludge digester mixing with generated biogas 5-14
5.12 Example of secondary clarifier in 3 layers, Japan 5-16
5.13 Example of reaction tank and clarifier in layers, Japan 5-16
5.14 STP Land Area required for various treatm ent technologies 5-17
5.15 An illustration of a nitrification-denitrification bioreactor in India 5-18
5.16 Bioreactor during construction and after commissioned 5-19
5.17 Civil units layout at 31 MLD Thiruvottiyur STP of CMW SSB 5-20
5.18 Grading and landscaping at Vrishabhavathi Valley STP, Bangalore 5-25
5.19 Treated Sewage Fountain at Vrishabhavathi Valley STP, Bangalore 5-26
5.20 Grading and landscaping at Vrishabhavathi Valley STP, Bangalore 5-26
5.21 Mechanical screen with ventilation at Koyambedu STP, Chennai. 5-30
5.22 Typical rotary drum screen 5-32
LXX
Part A: Engineering
Figure Title Page
5.23 Typical circular wedge wire screen 5-33
5.24 UNIDO type circular screen in Ramnad STP, Tamilnadu 5-34
5.25 Typical screenings compactor 5-34
5.26 Typical screw press 5-35
5.27 Hydraulic regimen of vortex grit separator 5-37
5.28 Hydraulic regimen of vortex and scum grit separator 5-37
5.29 Aerated grit chamber 5-38
5.30 Proportional flow weir 5-43
5.31 Typical Installation of proportional flow weir. 5-44
5.32 Sutro weir 5-45
5.33 Dimensions for Parshall flume 5-46
5.34 Typical Parshall Flume Installation 5-48
5.35 Masonry Beveled Weirs of Primary Clarifiers 5-52
5.36 Floor Plan of Square Shaped Clarifiers Sludge Scraper 5-57
5.37 SRT and specific substrate utilization rate 5-63
5.38 SRT as a function of aeration basin temperature 5-64
5.39 Schematic of biological N-DN in ASP 5-75
5.40 Flow routing in ASP N-DN process 5-75
5.41 Substrate removal for the dispersed flow model 5-78
5.42 Estimated Effect of Lagoon Geometry on D/UL 5-79
5.43 Stages of Mosquito & Larvae Breathing Near W ater Surface 5-95
5.44 Rock Filter Installed in the Corner of a Pond, USA 5-99
5.45 Configurations of High Rate Anaerobic Systems 5-101
5.46 Calcium and magnesium solubility with pH variation in water 5-107
5.47 Calcium carbonate equilibrium at pH variations 5-107
5.48 Phosphorus solubility with pH variation in water 5-108
LXXI
Part A: Engineering
Figure Title Page
5.49 Optional points of addition o f coagulant chemical in STP 5-109
5.50 The Traverse of River Ganga 5-111
5.51 5-year average Faecal Coliform along the Ganga River 5-114
5.52 5-year average Total Coliform along the Ganga River 5-115
5.53 Nutrient removal processes 5-121
5.54 SLD for 11 KV/415 V transform er station 5-136
5.55 Principle of a dissolved oxygen probe 5-140
5.56 Hand held DO meter for field &laboratory use in BOD bottle 5-140
5.57 Setup with magnetic mixer and mixed needle for agitation 5-141
5.58 Eccentric axis self stirring probe with the D 0 probe 5-142
5.59 Portable BOD test instrument 5-143
5.60 Typical SCADA communication overview 5-144
5.61 Algorithm for rehabilitation programm e of STPs 5-153
5.62 Country wise carbon credit market as of year 2009 5-155
5.63 Project wise carbon credit market as of year 2009 5-155
5.64 Configuration of recycled nitrification/denitrification process 5-163
5.65 Configuration of W uhrmann process 5-166
5.66 Ludzack & Ettinger process - W uhrmann modified 5-166
5-67 Hamamatsu City sewage treatm ent plant process diagram 5-166
5-68 Step feed four pass anoxic-oxic system in Stamford 5-170
5-69 Configuration of anaerobic-oxic activated sludge process 5-171
5-70 Configuration of Bardenpho process (4-stage) 5-174
5-71 Configuration of modified Bardenpho process (5-stage) 5-174
5-72 Anaerobic-anoxic-oxic activated sludge process 5-176
5-73 Sharon-Anam m ox process for nitrogen removal 5-178
5-74 Membrane characteristics 5-179
LXXII
Part A: Engineering
Figure Title Page
5-75 Configuration of membrane bioreactor system 5-182
5-76 Flow diagram of 4.54 MLD STP using MBR technology, Delhi 5-183
5-77 Illustrative Schematic of SBR operation in the same Basin 5-190
5-78 Some of the Decanters Reported on the Internet 5-192
5-79 Typical operating cycles of intermittent SBR process 5-193
5-80 Typical configuration of Continuous Flow SBR 5-194
5-81 Yannawa STP, Thailand 5-199
5-82 Linpor-CN process flow diagram 5-201
5-83 Linpor Cubes carrying sludge 5-201
5-84 Pegasus process flow diagram 5-202
5-85 Pegasus bio-n-cubes 5-202
5-86 Typical reactors of MBBR process 5-203
5-87 Kaldnes biofilm carriers 5-203
5-88 Flow diagram of MBBR process for BOD and N removal 5-204
5-89 FAB technology 5-204
5-90 Lilleham m er Kaldnes process for BOD & N removal 5-207
5-91 Flow diagram of BIOFOR Technology 5-213
5-92 Flow diagram of High Rate Activated Sludge BIOFOR-F 5-215
5-93 Flow diagram of Submerged Aeration Fixed Film (SAFF) 5-216
5-94 Sectional Drawing of HYDROPLUME Clarifier 5-218
6.1 Solids balance of Conventional Activated Sludge Process 6-3
6.2 Head loss Factor for Different Sludge Types & Concentrations 6-5
6.3a Types of sludge pumps 6-7
6.3b Types of sludge pumps-continued 6-8
6.3c Types of sludge pumps-continued 6-9
6.3d Types of sludge pumps-continued 6-10
LXXIII
Part A: Engineering
Figure Title Page
6.4 Anaerobic digestion mechanisms 6-28
6.5 Sludge digestion system 6-29
6.6 Reduction of volatile matter related to digester detention time 6-31
6.7 Effect of solids retention time & tem perature on VS reduction 6-33
6.8 Low height cylindrical, egg shaped & tall form cylindrical digesters 6-36
6.9 Some of the mechanical mixing systems in digesters 6-39
6.10 Some of the gas based mixing systems in digesters 6-40
6.11 CFD Modeling results of digester mixing efficiency 6-41
6.12 Illustrative flexible gas holder configurations. 6-47
6.13 A view of the gas holders. 6-47
6.14 Digester gas hydrogen sulphide stripping systems 6-52
6.15 Screw press dewatering machine 6-63
6.16 Rotary press dewatering machine 6-64
6.17 Belt press dewatering machine 6-65
6-18 Configuration of an aerated static pile composting method 6-73
6-19 In-Vessel composting reactor - Taulman composting system 6-74
6-20 Mixed composting of sewage and municipal solid waste 6-76
6-21 Example of flow of power generated from digester gas 6-84
6-22 Sludge volume reduction of each step of sludge treatm ent process 6-85
6-23 Typical operations in solar sludge drying 6-88
6-24 Typical solar sludge drying 6-88
6-25 Activated Sludge before and after Ultrasonic Disintegration 6-90
7.1 Treatm ent scheme of M/S GMR Vasavi power plant sewage reuse 7-4
7.2 W ater balance in the New Delhi IGI airport sewage reuse plant 7-8
7.3 Simplified treatm ent scheme for IGI airport Delhi STP 7-9
7.4 Circular SBR based STP at MIAL with floating decanter 7-11
LXXIV
Part A: Engineering
Figure Title Page
7.5 Sewage reuse schematic at M/S CPCL, Chennai 7-13
7.6 Sewage reuse schematic at M/S. MFL, Chennai 7-13
7.7 Sewage reuse schematic at M/S RCF, Mumbai 7-14
7.8 Schematic of treatment for reuse in Bangalore 7-17
7.9 Irrigation method for sewage fed tree plantation, Karnal Institute 7-18
7-10 Stages of fish farming 7-19
7-11 Ponds and high rise buildings 7-19
7-12 Full grown and fresh harvested fish 7-19
7-13 Relative locations of treatment plant & infiltration facilities, Anaheim 7-20
7-14 Purified water from the GWRS piped to O CW Ds ponds, Anaheim 7-21
7-15 Schematic of recycling system in Shinjuku 7-22
7-16 Sequence of treatm ent in Ochiai W ater Reclamation Facility 7-23
7-17 Meguro River before & after restoration by reclaimed wastewater 7-24
7-18 W ater from Jungnang STP reused for road cleaning 7-24
7-19 Highly treated sewage used at subway coach depot cleaning 7-25
7-20 Road sprinkling with treated wastewater 7-26
7-21 Map showing location of NEWater facilities in Singapore 7-27
7-22 Flow sheet for treatment of sewage as cooling tower make-up water 7-43
7-23 Flow sheet for reuse of sewage as high pressure boiler feed 7-46
7-24 Depiction of aquifer recharge in Berlin 7-49
7-25 Chennai Soil Aquifer Treatment site firmed up by the UNDP 7-50
8-1 Logistics of capacity building in sewerage collection & treatment 8-2
8-2 Concept of Centralized system vs. decentralized system 8-2
8-3 On - Site and Off - Site treatment system 8-4
8-4 Simplified sewerage avoiding public roads unless actually required 8-5
8-5 Pavement (sidewalk) simplified sewerage in Brasilia in 1999 8-6
LXXV
Part A: Engineering
Figure Title Page
8-6 Simplified sewerage in footpath & road free of manholes, Puducherry 8-6
8-7 Junction cham ber for simplified sewerage pipes, Guatemala 8-6
8-8 Schematics of small bore sewer system 8-9
8-9 Schematic of the twin drain decentralized sewerage 8-11
8-10 Twin drain system 8-12
8-11 Another set up of twin drain system at Kodimunai 8-12
8-12 Historical centralized sewerage system of a large Indian city 8-14
8-13 Toilet in Switzerland with one way mirror viewable from inside only 8-17
8-14 Schematic treatm ent process of DEWATS technology 8-18
8-15 Typical DEWATS treatm ent plant components 8-18
9.1 Examples of common toilet arrangements 9-3
9.2 Mobile toilet 9-4
9.3 Squatting pan and trap 9-5
9.4 Pour flush latrine with circular pits 9-10
9.5 Pour flush latrine in water logged areas 9-11
9.6 Leach pits in high subsoil water level 9-12
9.7 Pour flush latrine with combined pits 9-13
9.8 Structure of a septic tank 9-21
9.9 Anaerobic filter 9-24
9.10 Anaerobic baffled reactor 9-25
9.11 Multi cham ber anaerobic filter 9-25
9.12 Typical septic tank up flow filter for ten persons 9-26
9.13 Septic tank - Up flow filter evapotranspiration system 9-27
9.14 Lab Scale Facility for Testing the flow pattern and COD removal 9-30
9.15 Configuration of an integral septic tank and contact aeration unit 9-31
9.16 Treatm ent system based on anaerobic filter & contact aeration 9-34
LXXVI
Part A: Engineering
Figure Title Page
9.17 Flow Chart-Contact Aeration & Flocculation-Sedim entation Method 9-35
9.18 Typical septage receiving facility 9-46
9.19 Points of addition of liquid and solids from septage to existing STPs 9-48
9.20 Septage treatm ent process at Nonthaburi, Thailand 9-49
9.21 A photo view o f septage treatm ent process at Nonthaburi, Thailand 9-49
9.22 Lime stabilization of septage 9-51
9.23 Typical Mechanical Septage Dewatering System 9-51
10.1 Planning, implementation, monitoring & evaluation of city sanitation 10-3
10.2 Decision Tree for Selecting Technical Option 10-22
LXXVII
Part A: Engineering
ABBREVIATIONS
AA Aguas Argentinas
AAI Airports Authority of India
ABACUS Advanced Billing and Collection Utility System
AC Alternating Current
ADB Asian Development Bank
AE Assistant Engineer
AL Aerated Lagoon
AM Alandur Municipality
AM Asset Management
AMF Automatic Mains Failure Panel
ArSP Alandur Sewerage Project
ASEM Advisory Services in Environmental Management
ASP Activated Sludge Process
ASR Average Survival Ratio
AU Anna University
AWS Automatic Weather Station
BCP Business Continuity Plan

BIS Bureau of Indian Standards
BOD Biochemical Oxygen Demand
BOO Build Own Operate
BOOT Build Own Operate Transfer
BOO Bill of Quantities
BOT Build Operate Transfer
BSNL Bharat Sanchar Nigam Limited
BTO Build Transfer Operate
BWSSB Bangalore Water Supply and Sewerage Board
CA Constitutional Amendment
CAA Constitutional Amendment Act
CAD Computer-Aided Design
CB Circuit Breaker
CBO Community-based Organizations
CCS Centre for Civil Society
CCTV Closed Circuit Television
CD Compact Disc
CE Chief Engineer
CETP Common Effluent Treatment Plant
CFC Central Finance Commission
CFD Computational Fluid Dynamics
CFL Compact Fluorescent Lamp
CFR Continuous Fed Reactor
LXXIX
Part A: Engineering
Cl Cast Iron
Cl Context Information
CM Confederation of Indian Industry
CMP City Master Plan
CMWSSB Chennai Metropolitan Water Supply and Sewerage Board
COD Chemical Oxygen Demand
CPCB Central Pollution Control Board
CPCL Chennai Petroleum Corporation Limited
CPHEEO Central Public Health and Env.Engineering Organization
CPL Community Participation Law
CPM Critical Path Method
CRZ Coastal Regulation Zone
CS Chemical Sludge
CSER Corporate Social and Environmental Responsibility
CSIR Council of Scientific and Industrial Research
CSO Central Statistical Organization
CSP City Sanitation Plan
CSR Corporate Social Responsibility
CSS Centralized Sewerage System
CTE Consent to Establish
CTO Consent to Operate
DAF Dissolved Air Floatation

DALY Disability Adjusted Life Year
DAN IDA Danish International Development Agency
DC Direct Current
DCB Demand Collection Balance
DCS Distributed Control System
DDC Direct Digital Control
DEA Double Entry Accounting
DFID Department for International Development
DG Diesel Generator
Dl Ductile Iron
DMF Dual Media Filters
DMHQ Disaster Management Head Quarter
DMP Disaster Management Plan
DO Dissolved Oxygen
DOL Direct On Line
DPC District Planning Committee
DPR Detailed Project Report
DWF Dry W eather Flow
DWMS Decentralized Wastewater Management System
LXXX
Part A: Engineering
EAM Enterprise Asset Management

EBB Eco Bio Block
EC Electrical Conductivity
EE Executive Engineer
EIA Environmental Impact Assessment
EMI Equated Monthly Instalment
EPA Environment Protect Agency
EPC Engineering Procurement and Construction
ERP Enterprise Resource Planning
ES Effective Size
ESR Electron Spin Resonance
EWS Economically Weaker Section
F/M Food to Microorganism

FAR Floor Area Ratio
FBAS Fixed Bed Biofilm Activated Sludge
FBR Fed Batch Reactor
FC Faecal Coliform
FFR Fixed Film Reactor
FI Funding Institution
FIDIC International Federation of Consulting Engineers
FIRE Financial Institutions Reform and Expansion
FL Facultative Lagoon
FRC French Water Club
FSI Floor Space Index
GA General Arrangement
GAC Granular Activated Carbon
GDP Gross Domestic Product
Gl Galvanized Iron
GIS Geographical Information System
GL Ground Level
GOI Government of India
GOS Group Operated Switch
GOTN Government of Tamil Nadu
GSM Global System for Mobile Communications
HDA Haldia Development Authority

HDPE High Density Polyethylene
HIA Health Impact Assessment
HP Horsepower
HPEC High Powered Expert Committee
HPP High Pressure Pump
HRD Human Resources Development
LXXXI
Part A: Engineering
HRT Hydraulic Retention Time

HT High Tension
HUDCO Housing and Urban Development Corporation
HUF Hindu Undivided Family
HVAC Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning
IDWSSD International Drinking W ater Supply and Sanitation Decade

IEC Information, Education and Communication
IIPA Indian Institute of Public Administration
NT Indian Institute of Technology
IL&FS Infrastructure Leasing & Financial Services Limited
IP Internet Protocol
IPR Indirect Potable Reuse
IRC Indian Road Congress
USER Indian Institute of Science Education & Research
IS Indian Standard
ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network
ISO International Organization for Standardization
ISRO Indian Space Research Organization
IT Information Technology
ITI Industrial Training Institutes
ITN International Training Network
ITV Industrial Television
IWA International W ater Association
IWWA Indian W ater Works Association
JE Junior Engineer
JICA Japan International Cooperation Agency
JnNURM Jawaharlal Nehru National Urban Renewal Mission
JSWA Japan Sewage W orks Association
KAPS Knowledge, Attitude, Practice, Study

KIADB Karnataka Industrial Areas Development Board
KMDA Kolkata Municipal Development Authority
Kva Kilovolts ampere
KWA Kerala W ater Authority
LAN Local Area Network

LBFL Local Bodies Finance List
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LDPE Low Density Polyethylene
LLDPE Linear Low Density Polyethylene
LIC Life Insurance Corporation
LXXXII
Part A: Engineering
LoC Letter of Credit

LPS Liters per second
LT Low Tension
M&E Monitoring and Evaluation

mA milliamps
MBBR Moving Bed Biofilm Reactor
MBR Membrane Bio Reactor
MCGM Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai
MDG Millennium Development Goals
MF Micro Filtration
MFL Maximum Flood Level
MIS Management Information System
MLD Million Litres per Day
MLE Modified Ludzack Ettinger
MLIT Ministry of Land, Infrastructure, Transport and Tourism
MLSS Mixed Liquor Suspended Solids
MLVSS Mixed Liquor Volatile Suspended Solids
MMRDA Mumbai Metropolitan Region Development Authority
MMSD Milwaukee Metropolitan Sewerage District
MoEF Ministry of Environment and Forests
MoF Ministry of Finance
MoHA Ministry of Home Affairs, India
MoHUPA Ministry of Housing and Urban Poverty Alleviation
MoNRE Ministry of New and Renewable Energy
MoSJE Ministry of Social Justice and Empowerment
MoUD Ministry of Urban Development
MoUHPA Ministry of Urban Housing and Poverty Alleviation
MP Member of Parliament
MPC Metropolitan Planning Committee
MPLADS Member of Parliament Local Area Development Scheme
MPN Most Probable Number
MSDS Material Safety Data Sheet
MSWM Municipal Solid W aste Management
MWCI Manila W ater Company
MWSI Manila W ater Services
MWSS Manila Metropolitan W aterworks and Sewerage Services
NABARD National Bank for Agriculture and Rural Development

NCB-W2 World Banks Contract for National Competitive Bidding
NCC National Cadet Corps
NDITA Nabadiganta Industrial Township Authority
LXXXIII
Part A: Engineering
NEERI National Environm ental Engineering Research Institute

NF Nano Filtration
NGO Non Governm ental Organization
NIC National Informatics Centre
NICNET Nation-wide Informatics Network
NILIM National Institute for Land and Infrastructure M anagement, Japan
NITIE National Institute for Training in Industrial Engineering
NRC National Research Council
NRCD National River Conservation Directorate
NRCP National River Conservation Plan
NRSA National Remote Sensing Agency
NSKFDC National Safai Karamachari Finance and Developm ent Corporation
NSS National Social Service
NTADCL New Tiruppur Area Developm ent Corporation Ltd.
NURM National Urban Renewal Mission
NUSP National Urban Sanitation Policy
O&M Operation and M aintenance

OHP Overhead Projector
PA Poverty Alleviation
PC Personal C om puter
PCB Pollution Control Board
PCOM Per Capita O&M Costs
PDCA Plan-Do-Check-Act
PE Polyethylene
PERT Program m e Evaluation and Review Technique
PF Power Factor
PHE Public Health Engineering
PHED Public Health Engineering Departm ent
PI Perform ance Indicator
PIL Public Interest Litigations
PLC Program m able Logic Controller
PMC Pune Municipal Corporation
PP Polypropylene
PPP Public Private Partnership
PPPP Public Private People Partnership
PSP Private Sector Participation
PUB Public Utilities Board
PVC Poly Vinyl Chloride
PVC-U Unplasticized Poly Vinyl Chloride
PWD Public W orks Departm ent
LXXXIV
Part A: Engineering
RO R everse O sm osis
R&D R esearch and D evelopm ent
RBC Rotating B iological C ontactor
RBI R eserve B ank of India
RCC R einforced C em ent C oncrete
RDBM S Relational D atabase M anagem ent S ystem
RIF Rural Innovation Fund
RS Return Sludge
RTU R em ote Term inal Unit
SAFF S ubm erged A eration Fixed Film

SAR Sodium A bsorption Ratio
SAT Soil A q u ife r Treatm ent
SBR S equencing Batch R eactor
SC A D A S upervisory C ontrol and Data A cquisition
SCS Survival C urve using S urvey
SDE Spatial D atabase Engine
SDES State D irectorates o f E conom ics and S tatistics
SE S uperintending Engineer
SEC AP S ystem Evaluation and C apacity A ssurance Plans
SEM IS S ew erage M apping and Inform ation S ystem
SFBR S ubm erged Fixed Bed R eactor
SFC State Finance C om m ission
SFRC Steel Fiber R einforced C oncrete
SHG S elf-H elp Group
SLB S ervice Level B enchm ark
SMC S urat M unicipal C orporation
SMS S hort M essage Services
SO Q S tandards o f Q uality
SO R S urface O verflow Rate
SPC Special Purpose C om pany
SPCB State Pollution C ontrol Board
SPS S ew age Pum ping Station
SRT Solids R etention Tim e
SS S uspended Solids
STP S ew age Treatm ent Plant
SW D Side W a te r Depth
SW M Solid W a ste M anagem ent
SW M D S ew erage and W a ste w a te r M anagem ent D epartm ent, Japan
SXF S ecure e x c h a n g e Form at file
LXXXV
Part A: Engineering
TAIMS Tokyo Advanced Information M anagem ent System

TCPO Town and Country Planning Organization
TDS Total Dissolved Solids
TNUDF Tamil Nadu Urban Developm ent Fund
TNUIFSL Tamil Nadu Urban Infrastructure Financial Services Limited
TUFIDCO Tamil Nadu Urban Finance and Infrastructure Dev. Corporation Ltd.
TW AD Tamil Nadu W ater Supply and Drainage Board
TW ICL Tamil Nadu W ater Infrastructure Com pany Limited
UA Urban Agglom eration

UASB Upflow Anaerobic Sludge Blanket
UF Ultra Filtration
UGD Underground Drainage
UIDSSMT Urban Infrastructure Dev.Schem e for Small & Medium Towns
ULB Urban Local Body
UNEP United Nations Environm ent Programme
UNHABITAT United Nations Human Settlem ents Programme
UNICEF United Nations International Childrens Em ergency Fund
UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply
USAID United States Agency for International Developm ent
USEPA United States Environmental Protection Agency
UV Ultra violet
UWSS Urban W ater Supply and Sanitation Sector
VDU Video Display Unit

VFD Variable Frequency Drive
VSNL Videsh Sanchar Nigam Limited
VSS Volatile Suspended Solids
WAN W ide Area Network

WB W orld Bank
W EF W ater Environm ent Federation
W HO W orld Health Organization
W SP W ater and Sanitation Program
WS W aste Sludge
W SS W ater Supply and Sanitation
W SSB W ater Supply and Sewerage Board
W TP W ater Treatm ent Plant
ZLD Zero Liquid Discharge
LXXXVI
CHAPTERS
Part A: Engineering CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
Perhaps we need to be reminded what Mahatma Gandhi said For India, Sanitation is more
important than independence.
1.1 PREAMBLE
Over the years, there has been a continuous migration of people from rural and semi-urban areas
to cities and towns. The proportion of population residing in urban areas has increased from 27.8%
in 2001 to 31.2 % in 2011. The number of towns has increased from 5,161 in 2001 to 7,935 in
2011. The uncontrolled growth in urban areas has left many Indian cities deficient in infrastructure
services as water supply, sewerage, storm water drainage and solid waste management.
Most of the urban areas inhabited by slums in the country are plagued by acute problems related
to indiscriminate disposal of sewage. It is due to the deficient services of the town / city authorities
that sewage and its management has become a tenacious problem, even though a large part of the
municipal expenditure is allotted to it. It is not uncommon to find that a large portion of resources is
being utilized on manning sewerage system by Urban Local Bodies (ULBs) for their operation and
maintenance (O&M). Despite this, there has been a decline in the standard of services with respect
to collection, transportation, treatment and safe disposal of treated sewage as well as measures for
ensuring safeguard of public health, hygiene and environment. In many cities and towns in India,
major portion of sewage remains unattended leading to insanitary conditions in densely populated
slums. This in turn results in an increase in morbidity especially due to pathogens and parasitic
infections and infestations in all segments of population, particularly the urban slum dwellers.
Sewerage and sewage treatment is a part of public health and sanitation and according to the Indian
Constitution, falls within the purview of the State List. Since this is non-exclusive and essential, the
responsibility for providing the services lies within the public domain. The activity being of a local
nature is entrusted to the ULBs, which undertake the task of sewerage and sewage treatment service
delivery, with its own staff, equipment and funds. In a few cases, part of the said work is contracted
out to private enterprises. Cities and towns, which have sewerage and sewage treatment facilities
are unable to cope-up with the increased burden of providing such facilities efficiently to the desired
level. Issues and constraints that are encountered by the ULBs responsible for providing sewerage
and sanitation facilities are compounded due to various reasons. The main cause of water pollution
is the unintended disposal of untreated, partly treated and non-point sources of sewage and more
important is its effect on human health and environment.
The reasons for the above cited position are:
1. Almost all local bodies not being financially resourceful to self-generate the required capital funds
and looking up to the State and Central Governments for outright grant assistance
2. Lack of institutional arrangements and capacity building to conceive planning, implementation,

procurement of materials, operate and maintain the sewerage system and sewage treatment
plants (STP) at the desired level of efficiency
1- 1
3. The fact that the collected sewage terminates far away beyond the boundaries of the ULB and is
an "out of sight, out of mind syndrome
4. The high cost of infrastructure investment, continual replacement and on-going O&M costs of
centralized sewerage system (CSS) facilities take these systems beyond the financial grasp of
almost any ULB in the country
5. It is also necessary to recognize that the practice of piped sewer collection is an inheritance
from advanced countries with high water usages, which permit adequate flushing velocities. Due
to their high per capita water supply rates, the night-soil does not settle in pipes and hence no
choking and no sulphide gas generation. Whereas, in the Indian scenario, the per capita water
supply is low and inequitable in many cities and that too intermittent and this results in settling
down of night-soil in the sewers, choking, gasification, etc., which necessitates very often the
extreme remedies of cutting open the roads to access and break open the pipes for rectification
and so on.
While the conventional sewerage may be an effective system for sewage collection and
transportation and treatment, it also remains as a highly resource-inefficient technology.
Consequentially, high capital cost and continuing significant costs for O&M of this system prohibit its
widespread adoption in all sizes of urban areas in the country.
There has been no major effort to create community awareness either about the likely perils due
to poor sewage management or the simple steps that every citizen can take which will help in
reducing sewage generation and promote effective management of its generation and
treatment. The degree of community sensitization and public awareness is low. There is no system
of segregation of black water (from toilets) and grey water (other liquid wastes) at household level.
In most cities and towns no proper service connections have been provided to the toilets
connecting to the sewers.
1.1.1 Need for Safe Sanitation System
Sanitation can be perceived as the conditions and processes relating to peoples health,
especially the systems that supply water and deal with the human waste. Such a task would
logically cover other matters such as solid wastes, industrial and other special / hazardous
wastes and storm water drainage. However, the most potent of these pollutants is the sewage.
When untreated sewage accumulates and is allowed to become septic, the decomposition of its
organic matter leads to nuisance conditions including the production of malodorous gases. In
addition, untreated sewage contains numerous pathogens that dwell in the human intestine tract.
Sewage also contains nutrients, which can stimulate the growth of aquatic plants and may contain
toxic compounds or compounds that are potentially mutagenic or carcinogenic.
For these reasons, the immediate and nuisance-free removal of sewage from its sources of
generation followed by treatment, reuse or dispersal into the environment in an eco-friendly manner
is necessary to protect public health and environment.
1-2
1.1.2 Present Scenario of Urban Sanitation in India
The problem of sanitation is much worse in urban areas due to increasing congestion and
density in cities. Indeed, the environmental and health implications of the very poor sanitary
conditions are a major cause for concern. The study of Water and Sanitation Programme (WSP)
of the World Bank observes that when mortality impact is excluded, the economic impact for the
weaker section of the society accounting to 20 % of the households is the highest. The National
Urban Sanitation Policy (NUSP) of 2008 has laid down the framework for addressing the
challenges of city sanitation. The NUSP emphasizes the need for spreading awareness about
sanitation through an integrated city-wide approach, assigning institutional responsibilities and
due regard for demand and supply considerations, with special focus on the urban poor.
As per the 2011 Census, 81.4% households have toilet facilities within their premises. This includes
70.9% households having water closets; 8.8% households having pit latrines; 1.7% households
having other toilets (connected to open drains, night soil removed by human etc., which are unsafe).
Out of the 70.9% households, 32.7% households have water closets connected to sewer system and
38.2% households are having water closets with septic tank.
The remaining 18.6% households do not have toilet facilities within their premises. This includes
6.0% households using public toilets and 12.6% households defecating in the open. As per the 2011
census, the status of toilets in urban households in India is shown in Figure 1.1.
Figure 1.1 Status of Toilets in Urban Households in India
According to the report on the Status of Wastewater Generation and Treatment in Class-I Cities and
Class-II towns of India, December 2009, published by Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB), the
estimated sewage generation from 498 Class-I cities and 410 Class-II towns (Population estimated
for 2008 based on 2001 census) together is 38,524 MLD. Out of this, only 11,787 MLD (31%) is
being treated with a capacity gap of 26,737 MLD.
Sewer networks for collection and transportation of sewage from households in cities and towns are
too inadequate to carry it to the STP. The STP capacities are inadequate due to many reasons.
1- 3
These are poor planning and implementation of sewerage and STP and other appropriate
sanitation facilities by ULBs due to inadequate financial resources and lack of adequate capacity of
ULBs in the country.
This imposes significant public health and environmental costs to urban areas, that contribute
more than 60% of the countrys GDP. Impacts due to poor sanitation are especially significant for
the urban poor (22% of total urban population), women, children and the elderly. The loss due to
diseases caused by poor sanitation for children under 14 years alone in urban areas amounts to
Rs. 500 crores at 2001 prices (Planning Commission-United Nations International Children
Emergency Fund UNICEF, 2006). Inadequate discharge of untreated domestic / municipal
sewage has resulted in contamination of more than 75 % of all surface waters across India.
1.1.3 Basic Philosophy of Sewage Treatment
Sewage when collected from communities can be perceived as a "water conveyor belt. Its treatment
can be perceived as "unloading the conveyor belt to make the belt useable again. The crucial issue
is water in the conveyor belt. Hence, the treated sewage must ultimately return to the receiving water
body or to the land or it could be reused for specific applications after appropriate treatment.
The complex question faced by the design engineers and the practicing engineers are :
What is the level of treatment that must be achieved in a given type of treatment beyond those
prescribed by the discharge standards to ensure protection of the health of the community and
the environment?
The answer to this question requires detailed analyses of local conditions and needs, application of
scientific knowledge, engineering judgment based on past experience & consideration of central,
state and local regulations. In some cases, a detailed assessment is required. The reuse and
disposal of sludge are vexing problems for some ULBs and requires careful consideration.
1.1.4 Sewerage and Sewage Treatment Technology
Sewerage and Sewage treatment technology is the branch of environmental engineering. The
basic principles of engineering are applied to solve the issues associated with collection. The basic
principes of biochemistry are applied to the treatment and environmental issues in the disposal and
reuse of treated sewage. The ultimate goal is the protection of public health in a manner
commensurate with environmental, economic, social and political concerns. To protect public health
and environment, it is necessary to have knowledge of:
1. Constituents of concern in sewage
2. Impacts of these constituents when sewage is dispersed into the environment
3. The transformation and long-term fate of these constituents in treatment processes
4. Treatment methods which can be used to remove or modify the constituents found in sewage
5. Methods for beneficial use or disposal of solids generated by the treatment systems
1-4
To provide an initial perspective in the field of sewerage and sewage treatment technology,
a common terminology is first defined followed by:
1. A discussion of the issues that need to be addressed in the planning and design of sewerage
management systems, and
2. The current status and new directions in sewerage and sewage treatment technology
1.1.5 Efforts of Concerned Agencies in Retrospect
Sewerage and sanitation were not accorded the due priority by the ULBs till the late seventies. The
impetus of the International Drinking Water Supply and Sanitation Decade (IDWSSD), 1981 to 1990
had produced considerable efforts in urban areas in the country to improve health by investment in
water supply and sanitation programmes. These comprise the sewerage and sanitation sub-sector
the construction of sewers & on-site sanitation facilities using various types of toilets. Under certain
hydrological conditions, unsewered sanitation can cause severe groundwater contamination by
pathogens and nitrate, which may largely negate the expected health benefits of such programmes.
In some circumstances, therefore, the low-cost-technologies may be incompatible.
Although the targets fixed for sewerage and sanitation coverage during the decade at the beginning
of the IDWSSD were laudable, but could not be achieved due to resource constraints and other
prevailing reasons. Due to these reasons, the condition of sanitation has worsened.
1.2 LOSS TO THE NATION DUE TO POOR SANITATION
1.2.1 Time and Money Loss in terms of DALYs
The Disability-Adjusted-Life-Years (DALY) is a measure of overall disease burden, expressed as

the number of years lost due to ill health, disability or early death. Originally developed by the World
Health Organization (WHO), it is becoming increasingly used in the field of public health and health
impact assessment (HIA). It extends the concept of potential years of life lost due to premature death
to include equivalent years of healthy life lost by virtue of being in states of poor health or disability.
In doing so, mortality and morbidity are combined into a single common-matrix.
As per the WHO report, 80 % of the diseases in human beings are water-borne and water-related.
It is mainly due to water pollution or water contamination and water logging. Though water logging
may be location and weather specific, water pollution and contamination is a common phenomenon
which can occur at any place at any point of time if the community is not careful about adverse impact
of indiscriminate disposal of sewage. The indiscriminate disposal of human excreta or sewage from
habitations may contain hazardous micro-organisms (pathogens) for water pollution and harbouring
vectors which act as carriers of pathogens.
The names of diseases mentioned in Table 1.1 (overleaf) might appear to be conventional which occur
in many parts of the country. The occurrence of such diseases depends upon various factors relating to
illiteracy, personal hygiene, standard of living, malnutrition, adulteration of food items, lack of
community awareness among all stakeholders and other factors related to environmental pollution.
1-5
Table 1.1 Burden of water related diseases in India, 1990

______ ______________________________________ fin millions of DALYs)
Diseases Female Male Total
Diarrheal Diseases 14.39 13.64 28.03
Intestinal Helminths 1.00 1.06 2.06
Trachoma 0.07 0.04 0.11
Hepatitis 0.17 0.14 0.31
Total - water-borne
and water-related 15.63 14.88 30.51
Diseases
Source: World Bank, 1993
There is no doubt that these factors play an important role in the occurrence of diseases but unsafe
disposal of untreated or partially treated sewage plays a vital role in aggravating the chances of
occurrence of these communicable diseases.
If we merely consider the economic value of life years at the average per capita income of $ 300 per
year, the annual loss of 30.51 million DALYs is worth of 30.51*300 = $ 9.153 billion (Exchange rate
during 1993, $1 = Rs 40). Improvements in water supply and sanitation including management of
municipal solid waste can substantially reduce the incidences and severity of these diseases, as well
as infant mortality associated with diarrhoea as shown in the following box:
Reduction in morbidity from better water supply and sanitation including safe disposal of
municipal solid waste is estimated to be 26 % for diarrhoea, 27 % for trachoma, 29 % for ascaris,
77 % for schistosomiasis and 78 % for dracunculiasis. Mean reduction in diarrhoea-specific
mortality can be 65 %, while overall child mortality can be reduced by 55 %.
Source: Esrey et. al., 1991
From the above statements and Table 1.1, it is evident that environmental pollution by liquid and
solid wastes adversely affects the environment and human health directly or indirectly resulting in
loss of life and heavy financial burden on exchequers.
1.2.2 Poor Sanitation Costs India $54 Billion
It has been reported from "The Economic Impact of Inadequate Sanitation in India a report
released by the Water and Sanitation Programme (WSP), states that inadequate sanitation costs
India almost $54 billion or 6.4% of the countrys Gross Domestic Product (GDP) in 2006. Over
70% of this economic impact or about $38.5 billion was health-related with diarrhoea followed by
acute lower respiratory infections accounting for 12% of the health-related impacts.
It is the poorest who bear the greatest cost due to inadequate sanitation. The poorest fifth of the
urban population bears the highest per capita economic impact of $ 37.75, much more than the
national average per capita loss due to inadequate sanitation, which is $ 21.35.
1-6
Health impacts, accounting for the bulk of the economic impacts, are followed by the economic losses
due to the time spent in obtaining piped water supply and sanitation facilities, about $15 billion, and
about $0.5 billion of potential tourism revenue loss due to Indias reputation for poor sanitation, the
report says. Table 1.2 gives a glimpse of How much we lose.
Table 1.2 Poor sanitation cost to India
No. Impact Loss ($ billion)
1. Health 38.5
2. Access time (safe WSS) 15.0
3. Tourism 0.5
Total 54.0
Source: World Bank, 2006
The challenge of sanitation in Indian cities is acute. With very poor sewerage networks, a large
number of urban poor still depend on public toilets. Many public and community toilets have no
water supply while the outlets of many other toilets with water carriage systems are not connected
to citys sewerage system. As per the estimate, over 50 million people in urban India defecate in
the open every day. The cost in terms of Disability Adjusted Life Years (DALY) of diarrhoeal
diseases for children from poor sanitation is estimated at Rs. 500 crores. The cost per DALY
per person due to poor sanitation is estimated at Rs. 5,400 and due to poor hygiene practices
at Rs. 900. A study by the WSP using data for 2006 shows that the per capita economic cost of
inadequate sanitation including mortality rate in India is Rs. 2,180.
As mentioned above, the impacts of poor sanitation on human health are significant. Unsafe
disposal of human excreta facilities are responsible for the transmission of oral-faecal diseases,
including diarrhoea and a range of intestinal worm infections such as hookworm and roundworm.
Diarrhoea accounts for almost one-fifth of all deaths (or nearly 535,000 annually) among Indian
children who are under 5 years. In addition, rampant worm infestation and repeated diarrhoea
episodes result in widespread childhood malnutrition. Moreover, India is losing millions of rupees
each year because of poor sanitation. Illnesses are costly to families and to the economy as a whole
in terms of productivity losses and expenditure on medicines, health care, etc. The economic toll is
also apparent in terms of water treatment costs, losses in fisheries production, tourism, welfare
impacts such as reduced school attendance, inconvenience, wasted time, lack of privacy &
security for women. On the other hand, ecologically sustainable sanitation can have significant
economic benefits that accrue from recycling nutrients and using biogas as an energy source.
1.3 SECTOR ORGANIZATION
Water supply and sanitation is treated as a state subject as per the Federal Constitution of India
and, therefore, the States are vested with the constitutional right on planning, implementation,
operation and maintenance and cost recovery of water supply and sanitation projects.
1-7
At the local level, the responsibility is entrusted by legislation to the local bodies like Municipal
Corporation, Municipality, Municipal Council and Notified Area Committee/Authority for towns or on a
State/Regional basis to specialized agencies. The economic and social programme of the country is
formulated through five-year plans.
The Public Health Engineering Department (PHED) is the principal agency at State level for planning
and implementation of water supply and sanitation programmes. In a number of States, statutory
Water Supply and Sanitation Boards (WSSBs) have taken over the functions of the PHEDs. The
basic objectives for creation of WSSBs have been to bring in the concept of commercialization of the
water supply and sanitation sector management and more accountability. Such boards have been
set up in Assam, Bihar, Gujarat, Karnataka, Kerala, Maharashtra, Orissa, Punjab, Uttar Pradesh
and Tamil Nadu. The metropolitan cities of Bangalore, Hyderabad and Chennai have separate
statutory Boards. The water supply and sanitation services in the cities of Ahmedabad, Delhi, Kolkata,
Mumbai, Pune and few other cities are under the Municipal Corporations.
The Ministry of Urban Development (MoUD), Government of India (GOI) formulates policy
guidelines in respect of Urban Water Supply and Sanitation Sector and provides technical
assistance to the States and ULBs wherever needed. The expenditure on water supply and
sanitation is met out of block loans and grants disbursed as Plan assistance to the States, and out of
loans from financial institution like Life Insurance Corporation of India (LIC) and Housing and Urban
Development Corporation (HUDCO). The Central Government acts as an intermediary in mobilizing
external assistance in water supply and sanitation sector and routes the assistance via the
State plans. It also provides direct grant assistance to some extent to water supply and sanitation
projects in urban areas under the various programmes of GOI.
1.4 INITIATIVES OF GOVERNMENT OF INDIA
Government of India has taken number of initiatives during the last two decades by
implementing number of reforms aimed at improving the working efficiency of ULBs in India. These
reforms have been implemented in the form of Act (Amendment) and all the State Governments
have been advised to implement these reforms by suitably modifying ULBs bye-laws so as to
achieve the objectives of these reforms for the development of urban sector in the country. Few of
the reforms such as institutional, financial, legal, etc., are in vogue. The reforms mainly relating to
sewerage and sanitation are briefly described as under.
1.4.1 Initiative on Reforms - 74th Constitution Amendment Act, 1992
Quite often, multiplicity of agencies and overlapping of responsibilities are the reasons for
ineffective and poor operation and maintenance of the assets created by civic bodies. In the
light of 74thAmendment under the 12th Schedule of the Constitution, the role and responsibility of
the ULBs have increased significantly in providing these basic facilities to the community on
a sustainable basis. The new Amendment has enabled ULBs to become financially viable and
technically sound to provide basic amenities to the community.
1-8
As per the 74th Constitution Amendment Act, 1992, the ULBs have been delegated with sets of
responsibilities and functions; however, they are not supplemented with adequate financial
resources. As a result, they are not able to perform their assigned functions in an efficient and
effective manner. They are also not able to fix the rates of user charges and are heavily dependent
upon the higher levels of Government grants. Consequent to the 74th Constitutional Amendment
Act (74th CAA), the States are expected to devolve responsibility, powers and resources upon ULBs
as envisaged in the 12th Schedule of the Constitution. The 74th CAA has substantially broadened
the range of functions to be performed by the elected ULBs. The 12th Schedule brings into the
municipal domain among others such as urban and town planning, regulation of land-use, planning
for economic & social development and safeguarding the interests of weaker sections of the society.
The Constitution thus envisages ULBs as being totally responsible for all aspects of development,
civic services and environment in the cities going far beyond the traditional role. The focus should
not only be on the investment requirements to augment supplies or install additional systems in
sanitation and water supply. Instead, greater attention must be paid to the critical issues of
institutional restructuring, managerial improvement, better and more equitable service to citizens who
must have a greater degree of participation. The 74th CAA also focuses on achieving sustainability
of the sector through the adoption of adequate measures in O&M, the financial health of the utilities
through efficiency of operations and levy of user charges, and conservation & augmentation of the
water sources.
1.4.2 THE PROHIBITION OF EMPLOYMENT AS MANUAL SCAVENGERS AND THEIR

REHABILITATION ACT, 2013
The Government of India has enacted The Prohibition of Employment as Manual Scavengers and
their Rehabilitation Act, 2013 in September 2013 to remove certain anomalies in the erstwhile
legislation of The Employment of Manual Scavengers and Construction of Dry Latrines (Prohibition)
Act, 1993.
The 1993 Act served as a primary instrument to eradicate practice of manual scavenging, but
the House listing data from Census, 2011 showed the existence of manual scavenging in many
of the States. The Prohibition of Employment as Manual Scavengers and their Rehabilitation Act,
2013, provides for the following distinction very clearly to end this dehumanizing practice of manual
scavenging and also to eliminate the hazardous cleaning of septic tanks and sewers by the
sanitary workers.
Prohibits insanitary latrines.

Prohibits hazardous manual cleaning of sewers and septic tanks.
Offences committed under the law is cognizable and non-bailable.
Appropriate governments shall confer powers on local authority and district magistrates.
Vigilance and Monitoring committee to be set up at the level of sub-division, District, State
and Central to monitor the implementation of the Act.
The responsibility of the local authorities under the Act is mandatory.
1-9
The Centrally sponsored scheme of Integrated Low Cost Sanitation scheme implemented by the
Ministry of Housing and Urban Poverty Alleviation (MoHUPA) for liberation of the scavengers was
started in year 1980-81. It is now being operated through MoHUPA.
As per the schemes revised guidelines 2008, the objectives of the scheme are
To convert / construct low cost sanitation units through sanitary two pit pour flush latrines
with superstructures and appropriate variations to suit local conditions and
To Construct new latrines where the economically weaker section (EWS) households have
no latrines and
To avoid the inhuman practice of defecating in the open in urban areas.
This would improve the overall sanitation in towns. The manual scavengers thus liberated
if any or their dependents would have to be rehabilitated under the scheme by the State
Governments simultaneously with the help of funds provided by the Ministry of Social Justice and
Empowerment (MoSJE).
As per the Gazette of India dated October 2013, the Act shall come into force from December 6,
2013. The text of the Act as in the Gazette is in Appendix A 1.1. The time frame specified under
the Act for the fulfilment of responsibilities and carrying out certain activities are mentioned in
Appendix A 1.2.
1.5 NATIONAL URBAN SANITATION POLICY (NUSP), 2008
The NUSP adopted by the MoUD in 2008, envisions that "All Indian cities and towns become
totally sanitized, healthy and liveable and ensure and sustain good public health and environmental
outcomes for all their citizens, with a special focus on hygenic and affordable sanitation facilities for
the urban poor and women
According to the NUSP Sanitation is defined as safe management of human excreta, including its
safe confinement treatment, disposal and associated hygiene-related practices.
1.5.1 Key Sanitation Policy Issues
In order to achieve the above vision, following key policy issues must be addressed
Poor Awareness: Sanitation has been accorded low priority and there is poor awareness about
its inherent linkages with public health.
Social and Occupational aspects of Sanitation: Despite the appropriate legal framework,
progress towards the elimination of manual scavenging has shown limited success, Little or no
attention has been paid towards the occupational hazard faced by sanitation workers daily.
Fragmented Institutional Roles and Responsibilities: There are considerable gaps and overlaps
in institutional roles and responsibilities at the national, state, and city levels.
1 - 10
Lack of an Integrated City-wide Approach: Sanitation investments are currently planned in a

piece-meal manner and do not take into account the full cycle of safe confinement, treatment and
safe disposal.
Limited Technology Choices: Technologies have been focussed on limited options that have not
been cost-effective and sustainability of investments has been in question.
Reaching the Un-served and Poor: Urban poor communities as well other residents of informal
settlements have been constrained by lack of tenure, space or economic constraints, in obtaining
affordable access to safe sanitation. In this context, the issues of whether services to the poor
should be individualized and whether community services should be provided in non-notified
slums should be addressed. However provision of individual toilets should be prioritized. In rela
tion to "Pay and Use toilets, the issue of subsidies inadvertently reaching the non-poor should
be addressed by identifying different categories of urban poor.
Lack of Demand Responsiveness: Sanitation has been provided by public agencies in a

supply driven manner, with little regard for demands and preferences of households as customers
of sanitation services.
1.5.2 National Urban Sanitation Policy Goals (NUSP)
The overall goal of this policy is to transform urban India into community-driven, totally sanitized,
healthy, and liveable cities and towns. The specific goals are:
a. Awareness generation and behaviour change
b. Open defecation free cities
c. Integrated city-wide sanitation
1.5.3 Concepts of Totally Sanitized Cities
A totally sanitized city will be one that has achieved the outputs or milestones specified in the NUSP,
the salient features are given below.
a. Cities must be open defecation free.
b. Must eliminate the practice of manual scavenging and provide adequate personnel protection
equipment that addresses the safety of sanitation workers.
c. Municipal sewage and storm water drainage must be safely managed.
d. Recycle and reuse of treated sewage for non-potable applications should be implemented
wherever possible.
e. Solid waste collected and disposed off fully and safely.
f. Services to the poor and systems for sustaining the results.
g. Improved public health outcomes and environmental standards.
1 - 11
1.6 SANITATION PROMOTION
In order to rapidly promote sanitation in urban areas of the country (as provided for in the NUSP
and Goals 2008), and to recognize excellent performance in this area, the GOI intends to institute
an annual rating award scheme for cities (NUSP 2008).
The MoUD is also promising a National Communication Campaign to generate awareness on

sanitation both at the household level and at the service provider level. The aim of this exercise is
to generate awareness of the benefits of hygiene and clean environment and thereafter bring about
behaviour. The suggested real time Total Sanitation Model is given in Figure 1.2 .
It is to be recognized that total sanitation is not a stationery concept. It is a

journey. What is a totally satisfied sanitation situation today would become
inadequate in future. This is due to real-time changes in population densities,
socio-economic aspects and costs of the total sanitation system, etc.
Amend legalities as
Enact the legal requirements to ensure total justified and needed for
sanitation and self sustainability of the system the implementation of
in terms of revenue & expenditure the total sanitation
program.
Determine the
scope of the Conduct a public
consultation process Publicise the outcome
total sanitation
to assess social of the public
project as
acceptability. consultation process.
incremental to
population Reach a consensus
growth, etc as on physical &
conceived in the financial scope of ULB implements the project by
first box above. total sanitation generating funds through various
program. sources (borrowings, grants) and
/ or through PPP mode.
Also fix severe
penalties for any Continuously update the O&M
default in the components to match growing
implementation of complex demands of the total
the program. sanitation program.
Figure 1.2 Suggested Real Time Total Sanitation Model
1.7 SERVICE LEVEL BENCHMARKING ON SEWAGE MANAGEMENT (SEWERAGE AND

SEWAGE TREATMENT)
The Millennium Development Goals (MDGs) enjoins upon the signatory nations to extend access to
improved sanitation to at least half the urban population by 2015, and 100% access by 2025.
1 - 12
This implies extending coverage to households with improved sanitation and providing proper
sanitation facilities in public places to make cities and towns open-defecation free. The Ministry
proposed to shift focus on infrastructure in urban water supply and sanitation sector (UWSS) to
improve service delivery.
The Ministry formulated a set of Standardized Service Level Benchmarks (SLB) for UWSS as per
International Best Practice and brought out a "Handbook on Service Level Benchmarking on water
supply and sanitation sector during the year 2008.
The SLB on Sewage Management (Sewerage and Sewage management) are given in Table 1.3
which are required to be achieved within a specified time frame.
Table 1.3 Sewage Management (Sewerage and Sanitation)
No. Proposed Indicator Benchmark
1. Coverage of toilets 100%
2. Coverage of sewage network services 100%
3. Collection efficiency of sewage network 100%
4. Adequacy of sewage treatment capacity 100%
5. Quality of sewage treatment 100%
6. Extent of reuse and recycling of sewage 20%
7. Efficiency of redressal of customer complaints 80%
8. Extent of cost recovery in sewage treatment 100%
9. Efficiency in collection of sewage charges 90%
Source: MoUD, 2011
1.8 EMERGING TRENDS AND TECHNOLOGIES OF SEWERAGE AND SEWAGE TREATMENT
1.8.1 Recent Trend - Centralized vis-a-vis Decentralized Sewerage Systems
While the conventional sewerage may be a comprehensive system for sewage collection and
transport, it also remains as a highly resource-intensive technology. Consequently, high capital cost
and significant O&M cost of this system inhibits its widespread adoption in all sizes of urban areas.
The implementation of Centralized Wastewater Management System (CWMS) should not be

considered as the only option available for collection, transportation and treatment of sewage.
There are certain factors which govern the selection of options between CWMS and Decentralized
Wastewater Management System (DWMS). These have been elaborately discussed in the
relevant chapter of this Manual.
1 - 13
The DWMS may be designed as the collection, treatment, and disposal/reuse of sewage from
individual houses, cluster of houses, isolated communities, industries or institutional facilities as well
as from portion of existing communities at or near the point of generation of sewage.
The DWMS maintains both the solids and liquid fraction, although the liquid portion and any residual
solids can be transported to a centralized point for further treatment and reuse.
Recognizing the many applications and benefits of sewage reuse, some important points may be
kept in view such as
i. Review of the impact of the population growth rate
ii. Review of potential water reuse applications and water quality requirements
iii. Review of appropriate technologies for sewage treatment and reuse
iv. Considering the type of management structure that will be required in the future and
v. Identification of issues that must be solved to bring about water reuse for sustainable
development on a broad scale.
It has been emphasized that, if the sewage from the urban and semi urban areas were reused for a
variety of non-potable uses, the demand on the potable water supply would be reduced.
The choice of appropriate technology will also depend on several factors such as
composition of sewage, availability of land, availability of funds and expertise. Different operation
and maintenance options will have to be considered with respect to sustainable plant operation,
the use of local resources, knowledge and manpower.
1.9 NEED FOR REVISION AND UPDATING OF THE EXISTING MANUAL ON SEWERAGE
AND SEWAGE TREATMENT (1993)
Ever since the publication of the Manual on sewerage and sewage treatment in 1993 a number of
new developments and changes have occurred in the complete range of technologies of collection,
transportation, treatment and reuse of treated sewage and sludge for various usages during the last
two decades. Broad approaches adopted for the need of revision and updating of the manual on
sewerage and sewage treatment are as mentioned below:
i. A greater fundamental understanding of the mechanisms of the biological treatment.
ii. The application of advanced treatment methods for the removal of specific constituents.
iii. The increased emphasis on the management of sewerage and sewage treatment in general and
management of sludge resulting from the treatment of sewage, and
iv. The issuance of more comprehensive and restrictive permit requirements for the discharge and
reuse of treated sewage.
1 - 14
Even though the sewerage and sewage treatment practices have continued to evolve and grow
during last two decades, no time period in the past can equal this intervening period in terms of
technological development. In addition, awareness of the environmental issues among the
national urban communities has reached a level not experienced before. This active awareness is a
driving force for the agencies responsible for sewerage and sewage treatment to achieve the level of
performance far beyond those envisioned even during the last two decades.
Pressure for environmental compliance today is greater than before. The need for sewerage and
sanitation schemes in urban areas and regulatory requirements have, at present, become more
forceful. Support from the Central and State Governments for environmental-related programmes
are becoming a strong driving force than ever before. Communities are quite aware, well organized,
and informed.
The revision and updating of the existing manual (1993) aims to meet some of those needs by
providing advice on the selection of technology options for urban sanitation and whether new
infrastructure or upgrading of existing services. It is applicable both to small interventions in specific
locations and larger programmes that aim to improve sanitation citywide. The selection of
technologies with various options for providing techno-economic solutions keeping in view health
of the community and safeguarding the environment are listed below to provide a wide range of
options to the planners and designers:
i. Decentralized sewerage system

ii. Sludge treatment and septage management
iii. Recent technologies on sewerage and sewage treatment
iv. New pipe materials for construction of sewers

v. Guidelines for recycling and reuse of treated sewage
vi. New guidelines for discharging treated sewage into water bodies used for drinking.
1.9.1 Guidelines for Preparation of City Sanitation Plan (CSP)
One of the most important objectives of revising and updating of this manual is Preparation of City
Sanitation Plan, which has been amply described in Chapter 10 so as to give proper guidance
to decision makers, planners & designers and also suitably involve political initiatives as a tool to
envision affordable upgrade of existing sanitation systems and futuristic sanitation systems in a
self-sustaining basis.
The algorithm given in Chapter 10 is a very useful approach for decision makers and planners to
adopt the most suitable strategy for providing safe sanitation to the urban community within the policy
framework of the GOI in the country.
1.10 SETTING-UP OF ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION STANDARDS AT THE STATE LEVEL
While planning the citywide sanitation programme, concerned agencies must set-up standards and
follow at the State Level (within overall framework of national standards) such as CPHEEO and BIS
guidelines values as mentioned below:
1 - 15
a. Environment Outcome (e.g., State Pollution Control Boards standards on effluent

parameters, diminishing water resources, impact of climate change, use of low energy intensive
on-site/decentralized sewage treatment technologies, distributed utilities, etc.),
b. Public Health Outcomes (e.g., State Health Departments),
c. Processes (e.g., safe disposal of on-site septage) and infrastructure (e.g., design standards)
(PHEDs/Parastatals) and coverage of the informal sector activities like disposal of sewage,
solid waste, etc.,
d. Service delivery standards (e.g., by the Urban Development Departments),
e. Manpower issues such as adequate remuneration, hazardous nature of work,

employment on transparent terms and conditions, use of modern and safe technology, provision
of adequate safety equipment such as glove, boots, masks, regular health check-ups, medical
and accident insurance, etc.,
f. States are recommended to not just emulate but also set their standards higher than the national
standards in order to encourage its institutions and citizens to target higher standards of public
health and environment.
1.11 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN PART-A (ENGINEERING), PART-B (OPERATION AND

MAINTENANCE), AND PART-C (MANAGEMENT) OF THIS MANUAL
The present manual is one of a set of three parts and which are interdependent as under:
i. Part - A on Engineering
ii. Part - B on Operation and Maintenance
iii. Part - C on Management
Part - A on Engineering addresses the core technologies and updated approaches towards the
incremental sanitation from on-site to decentralized or conventional collection, conveyance,
treatment and reuse of the misplaced resource of sewage and is simplified to the level of the practicing
engineer for day to day guidance in the field in understanding the situation and coming out with a
choice of approaches to remedy the situation. In addition, it also includes recent advances in sewage
treatment and sludge & septage management to achieve betterment of receiving environment. It is
a simple guideline for the field engineer.
Part - B on Operation and Maintenance addresses the issues of standardizing the human and
financial resources. These are needed to sustain the sewerage and sanitation systems which are
created at huge costs without slipping into an edifice of dis-use for want of codified requirements for
O&M so that it would be possible to address the related issues. These financial and related issues
are to be addressed at the estimate stage itself, thus enabling to seek a comprehensive approval
of fund allocations and human resources. This would also usher in the era of public private partner
ship to make the projects self-sustaining. This also covers aspects such as guidelines for cleaning
1 - 16
of the sewers and septic tanks besides addressing the occupational health hazards and safety
measures of the sanitation workers. It is a simple guidance for the resource seeker and resource
allocating authorities.
Part - C on Management addresses the modern methods of project delivery and project validation
and gives a continual model for the administration to foresee the deficits in allocations and usher in
newer mechanisms. It is a tool for justifying the chosen project delivery mechanism and optimizing
the investments on need based allocations instead of allocations in budget that remain unutilized and
get surrendered at the end of the fiscal year with no use of the funds to anyone in that whole year.
It is a straight forward refinement of a mundane approach over the decades.
It is important to mention here in the beginning of this Part- A of the Manual that trade names and
technology nomenclatures, etc., where cited, are only for familiarity of explanations and not a
stand alone endorsement of these.
1 - 17
Part A: Engineering CHAPTER 2: PLANNING
CHAPTER 2: PROJECT PLANNING
2.1 VISION
The vision for urban sanitation in India as mentioned in the NUSP (2008) of GOI is:
"All Indian cities and towns become totally sanitized, healthy and liveable and ensure and sustain
good public health and environmental outcomes for all their citizens with a special focus on hygienic
and affordable sanitation facilities for the urban poor and women .
2.2 OBJECTIVES
The objective of a sewage collection, treatment and disposal system is to ensure that sewage
discharged from communities is properly collected, transported and treated to the required
degree in short, medium and long-term planning and disposed-off/reused without causing any
health or environmental problems.
Short term: Implies the immediate provision of on-site system. It is an interim arrangement until
the implementation of the long-term plan. Short-term plans should be formulated for a target up to
5 years from the base year.
Medium term: Implies the provision of a decentralized (non-conventional) system of collection for
rapid implementation of collection, transportation, treatment and disposal/local reuse to avoid
sporadic sewage discharges into the environment and where conventional sewerage system is not
feasible. Medium-term plans should have a target of 15 years from the base year.
Long term: Implies conventional sewage collection, transportation, treatment, and environmentally
sound disposal/reuse. It encompasses the short term and medium term. Long-term plans should
be formulated for a target of 30 years from the base year.
2.3 NEED FOR PROJECT PLANNING
The City sanitation plan is the pre-requisite for sewerage projects. The decision tree in selecting
the appropriate technical option whether it is on-site, decentralised or conventional system as in
Figure 10.2 shall be followed. While preparing the plan, the data similar to Figure 10.1, has to be
first enumerated specific to the classification therein. Only after having assessed the above
status, the plan for the city can be conceived in accordance with the NUSP. While doing so
the real time total sanitation model shown in Figure 1.2 shall also be taken into consideration.
The city sanitation plan should include
1. Provision of individual and community toilets to prohibit open defecation
2. Conversion of insanitary toilets such as dry or bahao toilets (directly connected to open drain),
single pit toilets, etc to sanitary toilets
3. Replacement of existing septic tanks, which are not as per the specifications and further improvements
2- 1
4. Decentralised sewerage system including treatment and non-conventional sewers such as

settled or simplified sewers / small bore sewers, twin drains where water is scarce
5. Septage management including desludging of septic tanks, transportation, treatment and

its disposal
6. Mechanization or cleaning of sewers, septic tanks and safety devices for sanitation workers
7. Conventional sewerage system where per capita supply is more than 135 lpcd or augmentation
of water supply in contemplated with 135 lpcd
8. Recycling and reuse of treated sewage
9. Provision for public toilets
However, while preparing the CSP, solid waste management and storm water drainage components
should also be considered as envisaged under NUSP
Sewage collection, treatment and disposal systems can be either short-term, medium-term or
long-term. To keep overall costs down, most urban systems today are planned as an optimum mix of
the three types depending on various factors.
Planning is required at different levels: national, state, regional, local and community. Though the
responsibility of various organizations in charge of planning sewage collection, treatment and
disposal systems is different in each case, they still have to function within the priorities fixed by
the national and state governments and keep in view the overall requirements of the area.
2.4 BASIC DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
2.4.1 Engineering considerations
2.4.2 Institutional aspects
2.4.3 Environmental considerations
2.4.4 Treatment process
2.4.5 Financial aspects
2.4.6 Legal issues
2.4.7 Community awareness
2.4.8 Inter and Intra departmental coordination
2.4.9 Geographical information systems
2.4.10 City master plan
2.4.11 City sanitation plan
2-2
2.4.1 Engineering Considerations
Topographical, engineering and other considerations, which figure prominently in project design,
are mentioned below:
a) Design period, stage wise population to be served, expected sewage volume, sewage quality and
fluctuation with respect to time
b) Topography of the general area to be served, its slope and terrain and geological
considerations. Tentative sites available for STP, sewage pumping station (SPS) and disposal
works, considering flooding conditions
c) Available hydraulic head in the system up to high flood level in case of disposal to a nearby river
or high tide level in case of coastal discharge or the level of the irrigation area to be commanded
in case of land disposal
d) Depth of groundwater table and its seasonal fluctuation affecting construction, sewer infiltration &
structural design (uplift considerations)
e) Soil bearing capacity and type of strata expected to be met with in construction
f) On-site disposal facilities, including the possibilities of segregating the sullage water and sewage
and reuse or recycle sullage water within the households
g) Existing water supply, sewerage and sanitation conditions
h) Water reliability, augmentation steps, drought conditions
i) Reuse in agriculture, farm forestry, non-potable urban usages and industries
j) Decentralized sewerage and progressive coverage
2.4.2 Institutional Aspects
a) Capability of existing local authority
b) Revenue collection and reliability
c) Capacity building needs
d) Public Private Partnership
2.4.3 Environmental Considerations
The following aspects should be considered during design:
a) Surface Water Hydrology and Quality
Hydrological considerations affect the location of outfalls to rivers with regard to protection
of nearby water supply intake points either upstream or downstream, especially at low flow
conditions in the river. Hydrological considerations also help determine expected dilutions
downstream, frequency of floods and drought conditions, flow velocities, travel times to downstream
points of interest, navigation, etc.
2-3
Surface water quality considerations include compliance with treated effluent standards at the
discharge point with respect to parameters like BOD, suspended and floating solids, oil & grease,
nutrients, coliforms, etc. Special consideration may be given to the presence of public bathing ghats
downstream. The aquatic ecosystem (including fish) may also need protection in case of rivers
through minimum dissolved oxygen (DO) downstream, ammonia concentrations in the water,
uptake of refractory and persistent substances in the food chain, and protection of other legitimate
uses to which the river waters may be put to.
b) Ground Water Quality
Another environmental consideration is the potential for ground water pollution presented by the
STP proposed to be built. For example, in certain soils, special precautions may be needed
to intercept seepage of sewage from lagoons and ponds. Land irrigation would also
present a potential for ground water pollution especially from nitrates. In case of low cost sanitation
involving on-site disposal of excreta and sullage, ground water pollution may need special attention
if the ground water table is high and if the top soil is relatively porous.
c) Coastal Water Quality
Shoreline discharges of sewage effluents, though treated, could lead to bacterial and viral
pollution and affect bathing water quality of beaches. Discharges have to be made offshore and at
sufficient depth through marine outfall to benefit from dilution and natural die-away of organisms
before they are washed back to the shoreline by currents. The presence of nutrients could also
promote algal growth in coastal waters, especially in bays where natural circulation patterns might
keep the nutrients trapped in the water body.
d) Odour and Mosquito Nuisance
Odour and mosquito nuisance in the vicinity of STP, particularly in the downwind direction
of prevailing winds, can have adverse impacts on land values, public health and environment
and general utility of amenities may be threatened. These factors have to be considered
in the selection of technologies and sites for location of STP and the use of treated
sewage for irrigation.
e) Public Health
Public health considerations pervade through all aspects of design and operation of sewage
treatment and disposal projects. Some aspects have already been referred to in earlier part of this
section. Public health concepts are built into various bye-laws, regulations and codes of practice,
which must be observed, such as:
i) Effluent discharge standards including the permissible microbial and helminthic quality
requirements
ii) Standards for control of toxic and accumulative substances in the food chain
iii) Potential for nitrate and microbial pollution of ground waters
2-4
iv) Deterioration of drinking water resources including wells
v) Deterioration of bathing water quality
vi) Control measures for health and safety of sewage plant operators and sewage farm workers,
and nearby residents, who are exposed to bio-aerosols or handle raw and/or treated sewage.
f) Landscaping
The STP structures need not be ugly and unsightly. At no real extra cost, some architectural
concepts can be used and the buildings designed to suit the main climates (humid or dry)
generally met within India.
Apart from the usual development of a small garden near the plants office or laboratory, some
considerations need to be given to sites for disposal of screenings and grit in a harmless
manner, general sanitation in the plant area and provision of a green belt around the STP. Green
belt around the STP shall be preferably of plants with shallow roots in order to avoid deep and
spread roots from trees accessing the water retaining structures and damaging their construction
by ingress to the moist zones.
g) Status of pollution of surface waters, ground waters and coastal waters
h) Remediation needs and realistic solutions to mitigation of pollution

i) Solid wastes disposal and leachates as affecting the likely siting of STPs
j) Condition of sludge generated in STPs and potential to go in for vermicomposting
k) Clean Development Mechanism by biomethanation and energy recovery from STPs

l) Vital statistics and frequency of waterborne and vector borne diseases
2.4.4 Treatment Process
The process considerations involve factors, which affect the choice of treatment method, its
design criteria and related requirements such as the following:
a) Sewage Flow and Characteristics
This constitutes the primary data required for process design. The various parameters to be
determined are described in other sections of the manual.
b) Degree of Treatment Required
In case of domestic or municipal sewage, this is considered, for example, in terms of removal of
BOD, nutrients (nitrogen and phosphorous), coliforms, helminths etc. Land disposal generally has
to meet less stringent discharge standards than disposal to surface waters. Land disposal also has
the advantage of avoiding nutrient removal in STP and is preferred wherever feasible. It is often not
enough to aim only at BOD removal and let other items be left to unspecified, incidental removal,
whatever may occur. The selection of a treatment process thus, depends on the extent of removal
efficiency required for all the important parameters and the need to prevent nuisance conditions.
2-5
c) Performance Characteristics
The dependability of performance of a process in spite of fluctuations in influent quality and

quantity are very useful attributes in ensuring a stable effluent quality. Similarly, the ability to
withstand power and operational failures, also form important considerations in the choice of
treatment process. The more high-rated treatment process, the more sensitive it is in operation.
Other processes like digesters, lagoons and ponds may be sensitive to extreme temperature
range. The choice has to match with the discharge standards to be met in a specific case. The
performance characteristics for some methods of sewage treatment are indicated in Appendix A.2.1.
d) Other Process Requirements
Various other factors affecting the choice of a process include requirements in terms of -:
- Land
- Power and its dependability

- Operating (and control) equipment requirement and its indigenous availability
- Skilled staff
- Nature of maintenance problems

- Extent of sludge production and its disposal requirements
- Loss of head through plant in relation to available head (to avoid pumping as far as possible)
- Adoption of modular system
Between the land and power requirements, a trade-off is often possible, based on the
actual costs. This could well be exploited to get an optimum solution for ensuring treatment
requirements and giving a dependable performance.
The operating equipment and its ancillary control equipment should be easy to operate and
maintain (with indigenously available spare parts) as far as possible. It is to be noted that, methane
gas collection, scrubbing to remove hydrogen sulphide wherever necessary and its conversion to
electricity, should be effectively done. The option of gas collection and supply to a nearby industry or
area should be favoured during the site selection stage wherever possible.
The related issues are -
e) To be affordable by the ULB for its O&M
f) Trade-offs between portions to be treated for industrial uses and portions to be discharged
g) Possibility of upgrading with respect to incrementing flows over time
h) Dependency on proprietary spares to be avoided or in built into the O&M contract itself
i) Local skills to comprehend and implement monitoring
2-6
2.4.5 Financial Aspects
Finally, from among the few selected options, the overall costs (capital and operating) and
financial sustainability have to be determined in order to arrive at the optimum solution.
a) Capital costs include all initial costs incurred up to plant start-up, such as:
- Civil construction, equipment supply and erection costs

- Land purchase costs including legal fees, if any
- Engineering design and supervision charges
- Interest charge on loan during construction period
b) Operating costs after start-up of plant include direct operating costs and fixed costs, such as:
Amortisation and interest charges on capital borrowing
Direct operation and maintenance costs on
- Salary & Wages

- Chemicals
- Energy
- Transport
- Maintenance and repairs
- Tools and Plants
- Insurance
- Overheads
c) Financial sustainability
Levy of appropriate sewerage charges
Capacity & Willingness to pay by the users.
Willingness to charge
Efficient sewerage charge collection
Supplementary budget from alternate sources
Revenue generation potential of the concerned local body, water boards, PHEDs / Jal Nigams,
Parastatal organizations, as the case may be
Actual recovery generated
2.4.6 Legal Issues
In general, legalities do not affect sewerage projects except land acquisition issues, which
require tact, patience and perseverance.
2-7
2.4.7 Community Awareness
In general, the decision-making on sewerage system management is carried out without

involving the public at large and this has to change by appropriate web-based messages,
hand-outs, public hearings and documenting the outcomes and taking the population along.
2.4.8 Inter- and Intra-departmental Coordination
a) Co-ordination between ULB and water boards/PHEDs/Jal Nigams/as the case may be
b) Co-ordination among water boards / PHEDs / Jal Nigams / ULB as the case may be and the
elected representatives
c) Intra-departmental coordination
2.4.9 Geographical Information Systems
Geographical Information Systems (GIS) should be an integral part of sewage collection system. It
allows developing city master plans (CMP), including CSP rapidly and in a precise manner and can
be related precisely to its position in the ground.
The spatial modelling capabilities of GIS can be used to estimate current and future sewage flows,
evaluate the capacity of the sewers and estimate the condition of the sewers.
2.4.10 City Master Plan
The CMP shall be prepared clearly indicating the various aspects as this will form a basis
for the project. The CSP shall also mandatorily form part of the CMP. The various aspects to be
considered are in Chapter 10. Any proposal submitted for funding shall mandatorily include
the CMP and CSP. It is very important and pertinent to include and account for the mandatory
provision of adequate and proper sanitation facilities in every school in the country thus complying
with the directive of the GOI.
The planning period to be adopted for the preparation of the master plan shall be 30 years. In order
to bring the master plan projections on the same time line for comparison and funding, the Town
& Country planning authority would also be required to increase their planning period, from the
present 20 years to 30 years for the reasons mentioned earlier.
2.4.11 City Sanitation Plan
The CSP should be a part of CMP and it should be prepared in accordance with the NUSP
The planning design period for on-site, decentralised and centralised systems shall be 5 years,
5 to 15 years and 30 years respectively.
2.5 DESIGN PERIOD
The project components may be designed for the periods mentioned in Table 2-1 overleaf.
2-8
Table 2.1 Design period of sewerage components
Design Period,
SI. No Component
Years (from base year)
1 Land Acquisition 30 years or more
2 Conventional sewers (A) 30
3 Non-conventional sewers (B) 15
4 Pumping mains 30
5 Pumping Stations-Civil Work 30
6 Pumping Machinery 15
7 Sewage Treatment Plants 15
8 Effluent disposal 30
9 Effluent Utilization 15 or as the case may be
(A) Typical underground sewers with manholes laid in the roads

(B) All types such as small bore, shallow sewers, pressure sewers, vacuum
sewers
Source: CPHEEO, 1993
2.6 POPULATION FORECAST
2.6.1 General Considerations
The design population should be estimated by paying attention to all the factors governing the future
growth and development of the project area in the industrial, commercial, educational, social, and
administration spheres. Special factors causing sudden immigration or influx of population should
also be predicted as far as possible.
A judgement based on these factors would help in selecting the most suitable method of deriving
the probable trend of the population growth in the area or areas of the project from the following
mathematical methods, graphically interpreted where necessary:
a) Demographic method of population projection
The population change can occur in three ways: by birth (population gain), by death (population
loss), or by migration (population loss or gain depending on whether movement-out or movement
-in occurs in excess). Annexation of area may be considered a special form of migration. Population
forecasts are frequently made by preparing and summing up separate but related projections of
natural increases and of net migration, and are expressed below.
2-9
The net effect of births and deaths on population is called natural increase (natural decrease, if
deaths exceed births).
The migration also affects the number of births and deaths in an area, and hence, projections of net
migration are prepared before projections for natural increase.
This method thus takes into account the prevailing and anticipated birth rates and death rates of the
region or city for the period under consideration.
An estimate is also made of the emigration from and immigration to the community, its area-wise
growth and the net increase of population is calculated accordingly considering all these factors by
arithmetical balancing.
b) Arithmetic increase method
This method is generally applicable to large and old cities. In this method, the average
increase of population per decade is calculated from the past records and added to the present
population to estimate population in the next decade. This method gives a low value and is suitable
for well-settled and established communities.
c) Incremental increase method
In this method, the increment in arithmetical increase is determined from the past decades and the
average of that increment is added to the average increase. This method gives increased values
compared to the figures obtained by the arithmetical increase method.
d) Geometrical increase method
In this method, the percentage increase is assumed as the rate of growth and the average of the
percentage increase is used to determine the increment in future population. This method gives a
much higher value and is applicable to growing towns and cities having a vast scope of expansion.
e) Decreasing rate of growth
In this method, it is assumed that the rate of percentage increase decreases, and the average
decrease in the rate of growth is calculated. The percentage increase is modified by deducting the
decrease in the rate of growth. This method is applicable only to those cases where the rate of
growth of population shows a downward trend.
f) Graphical method
There are two methods: in the first method, only the city in question is considered; and in the second
method, other similar cities are taken into account.
i) Graphical method based on single city
In this method, the population curve of the city (i.e., the population vs. past decades) is smoothly
extended for obtaining values for the future. The curve should be extended carefully; this requires vast
experience and good judgement. The line of best fit may be obtained by the method of least squares.
2 - 10
ii) Graphical method based on cities with similar growth pattern
In this method, the city in question is compared with other cities that have already undergone
the same phases of development, which the city in question is likely to undergo. Based on this
comparison, a graph of populations versus decades is plotted and extrapolated.
g) Logistic method
The S shaped logistic curve for any city gives the complete trend of growth for the city right from
beginning to the saturation limit of population of the city. This method is applicable to very large cities
with adequate demographic data.
h) Method of density
In this approach, the trend in rate of increase in population density for each sector of a city is
determined and population is forecast for each sector based on the above approach. Addition of
population sector-wise, gives the population of the city.
2.6.2 Final Forecast
While the forecast of the population of a project area at any given time during the design period
can be derived by any one of the foregoing methods appropriate to each case, the density and
distribution of such population in several areas, zones or districts will again have to be estimated
based on the relative probabilities of expansion in each zone or district, according to the nature of
development and based on existing and contemplated town planning regulations. Wherever
population growth forecast or master plans prepared by town planning authorities or other
appropriate authorities are available, the design population should take these figures into account.
Floating population should also be considered which includes number of persons visiting the
project area for tourism, pilgrimage or for working. The numbers should be decided in consultation
with the tourism departments and specified for water supply and sewerage.
The worked out examples for estimation of future population by some of the methods are
given in Appendix A.2.2.
2.7 PROJECT AREA
The factors that influence the determination of project area include natural topography, layout of
buildings, political boundaries, economic factors, CMP, etc. For larger drainage areas, though
it is desirable that the sewer capacities are designed for the total project area, sometimes the
political boundaries and legal restrictions prevent construction of sewers beyond the limits of the
local authority. However, when designing sewers for larger areas, there is usually an economic
advantage in providing adequate capacity initially for a certain period of time and constructing
additional sewers, when the pattern of growth becomes established. The need to finance projects
within the available resources necessitates the design to be restricted to political boundaries.
The project area under consideration should be marked on a key plan so that the area can be
measured from the map.
2 - 11
2.8 REUSE AND DISPOSAL
The reuse of treated sewage should be given preference over disposal and the various options
are discussed in Chapter 7 of this manual.
2.9 LAYOUT AND ARRANGEMENT OF SEWERAGE
The layout of collection systems shall resist the tendency to go in for underground sewerage
flat out even in habitations that are only sparsely developed. The options of either time-deferred
underground sewerage or incremental sewerage commensurate with the pace of development by
such options as small bore, shallow sewers, twin drains, etc., to start with and eventual underground
sewerage when habitations have been populated to a certain level where the revenue will be able to
sustain the O&M.
The layouts by small communities shall be mandated to include the small bore sewer system / twin
drain in both sides of roads, whereby the house side drain will receive the septic tank effluent and
the road side drain will receive the storm water runoff. In metropolitan urban centres, decentralized
sewerage shall be confined to institutional boundaries only and not culled out of habitations itself
and zoning of sewerage with STPs fanning out radially outwards is to be encouraged.
A flat out choice of underground sewerage with sewers in middle of roads shall be discouraged and
incremental sanitation as settled sewers, small-bore sewers, twin drain for septic tank effluents and
sewers on shoulders of wide roads are to be evaluated as detailed in Chapter 3 of this manual.
2.10 LEGISLATION AND REGULATIONS
a. Water (Prevention and Control) Act, 1974
In this Act, it is necessary to obtain a consent to establish (CTE) from the Pollution Control
Board (PCB) before starting the work of STP. Similarly, it is necessary to obtain the consent to
operate (CTO) after completion of the construction and before actual operation. The CTE is
based on whether the proposed STP design meets the discharge standards for treated sewage
and the CTO is based on whether all the units originally committed are actually built and to the
same size. Starting the construction without the CTE and starting the operation without CTO are
punishable as an offence.
b. Environment (Protection) Act, 1986
The discharge standards for treated sewage, the noise standards governing the STP, the air
emission standards governing the STP are prescribed in this act and are binding without exception.
The PCB is empowered to tighten these standards wherever it is needed.
c. Municipal Bye-laws
Most municipal bye-laws stipulate that the owner of any property shall dispose of sewage in a
proper manner without causing any nuisance to others. W herever municipal sewers exist within a
specified distance as per the respective bye-laws, it is obligatory that the sewage of the property be
discharged into it. The bye-laws provide for action against defaulting owners.
2 - 12
d. Environment Impact Assessment
According to the Environment Impact Assessment (EIA) notification issued in 2006 by MoEF, this is
not needed for sewerage projects. However, the concerned agencies are advised to maintain all the
necessary facts and figures related to the total sanitation programme in the form of an effective and
efficient Management Information Systems (MIS) which might be required in future under NUSP
e. Indian Standards
The Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS) lays down quality levels of bought out items and construction
quality and these shall not be diluted under any account. W herever BIS are not available,
internationally accepted standards may be used.
f. Town and Country Planning Act
The Town & Country Planning Act shall be mandatorily followed. W herever there is a possibility,
storm water drains on both sides of the road shall be built mandatorily.
2.11 GUIDELINES ON HOUSE SEWER CONNECTIONS
a) There is a compelling need to amend the bye-laws to make it compulsory for the population
to avail house sevice sewer connection wherever public sewer is provided and if this is not
forthcoming, the local authority shall effect the house sewer connection and institute revenue
recovery proceedings.
b) Include house-service sewer connections as part of the sewerage project itself
c) Float Equated monthly instalments (EMI) schemes for repayment of house service sewer
connection costs.
2.12 SURVEY AND INVESTIGATION
The survey and investigation are both pre-requisites for framing of the preliminary report and the
preparation of a detailed project report (DPR) for any sewerage project. The engineering and policy
decisions taken are dependent on the correctness and reliability of the data collected and its proper
evaluation for preparing DPR to ensure success of the programme on long-term sustainable basis.
2.12.1 Basic Information
Broad knowledge of the problems likely to be faced during the various phases of the implementation
of the project is essential for performing investigations effectively. Information on physical, fiscal,
developmental and other aspects have to be collected.
The philosophy of survey is to rule out simple initial mistakes, which will make the entire project a
blunder eventually. The entire geographical coverage of the project area relies very seriously on
gravity transmission and eligible pathways, affordability by users, etc. The initial survey will chalk out
the aspects to be considered and the aspects which have to be time deferred and the aspects which
need to be relegated in each case.
2 - 13
2.12.1.1 Physical Aspects
These would necessitate the collection of information related to:
a) Topography or elevation difference needed for design of sewers and location of STP, outfall
and disposal works
b) Subsoil conditions, such as types of strata likely to be encountered, depth of groundwater

table and its fluctuations. In the absence of any records, preliminary data should be collected
by carrying out at least 3 trial bores or 3 trial pits per hectare
c) Underground structures like storm drains and appurtenances, city survey stones, utility services
like house connections for water supply & sewerage, electric & telephone cables and gas lines
d) Location of streets and adjoining areas likely to be merged or annexed
e) Contour map of the area to be superimposed on the village/town/city maps
f) Survey of India maps
g) Groundwater table and its fluctuations from local enquiries and past records
h) Underground utility services and Survey of India bench marks
i) Land use maps, density and trends of population growth and demographic studies
j) Type and number of industries for potential reuse and discharge of sewage
k) Existing drainage and sewerage facilities and data related to these facilities
l) Flow in sewers and sewers of similar areas to assess the flow characteristics
m) Historical and socio-economic data
n) Problems of maintenance of existing sewers
o) Effluent disposal sites and their availability
p) Earthquake
The possible sources of information are existing maps and plans showing streets from revenue or
town surveys or the Survey of India maps.
Other sources are the topographical maps of survey of India if available with existing spot-levels,
aerial photographs, photographs of complex surfaces for supplementing the existing instrumental
surveys by concerned authorities like Municipalities and Roads Departments.
2.12.1.2 Survey of Natural Conditions
a) Societal preferences and local habits
b) Present status of the governmental, semi-governmental or municipal authority sponsoring the

project, its capacity, adequacy, effectiveness and the desirability of its modification or necessity
of a new organization to satisfactorily implement and maintain the project.
2 - 14
2.12.1.3 Survey on Related Plans
a) Sewerage master plan
b) Other related sewerage plans
c) Long-term comprehensive development plans for cities and towns
d) Urban planning
e) City planning area, urbanization zone, and urbanization control area
f) Land use plan
g) Road plan
h) Urban development as rezoning, residential estates, and industrial complexes
i) Design longitudinal section, transverse section
j) Design flood level and corresponding flood flow
k) Design low flood level and corresponding flow
l) Other plans.
2.12.1.4 Survey on Pollution Loads and Receiving Bodies
a) Survey on generated pollution load
b) Existing conditions and future plans related to water supply
c) Existing conditions and future plans related to industrial uses
d) Population, industrial production, agriculture, forestry and animal husbandry
e) Data on quality and quantity of sewage from large factories, offices, etc.
f) Data on sewage generated from sightseeing sources
g) Data on wells
h) Data on standard unit pollution loads from different sources
i) Survey to gather information on receiving water bodies
j) Data on existing water quality and flow in water bodies at the time of sampling
k) Data on environmental standards for water quality
l) Utilization of existing water bodies and future plans related to uses.
2.12.1.5 Survey on Existing Facilities
a) Underground installations
b) Existing sewerage and on-site sanitation facilities
2 - 15
c) Existing conditions of disposal of human waste
d) Existing conditions and alignment of road
e) Cultural assets and historic relics
f) Other existing facilities.
2.12.1.6 Survey on Resources of Sewerage System and its Utilization
a) Utilization of space in STP and SPS
b) The open space on top of STP structures or SPS is precious especially in highly populated cities
and can be used for terrace garden, green houses.
c) Utilization of space in large sewers as conduits for optical fibre cables.
2.12.1.7 Survey on Treated Sewage, Sludge and Biogas Utilization
a) Reuse of treated sewage should be taken up after discussions between ULB, water boards,
PHEDs / Jal Nigams and the public, as the case may be. Various possible reuse methods such as
farm forestry, greenbelt development and lawns in road medians
b) Utilization of sludge in public areas is not possible due to issues of public acceptance and
hence it is best to focus on farm forestry
c) Utilization of alternative energy, like in plant energy to be harnessed from biomethanation and to
evaluate the ambient temperature suitability or heating of sludge vs. economics
d) Reuse of treated sewage to a minimum extent of 20 % by volume shall be mandatorily

explored and the proposed use for achieving this 20 % target shall mandatorily form part
of the CSP
e) Utilization of sludge as a construction material (as porous pavements, bricks, etc.).
2.12.1.8 Project Surveys
It should include the overall survey of the population, their historical outlook, their willingness for
a change, acceptance of the concept to pay for the services, responsibility of local body under the
national law of the land and above all, a public hearing on these issues.
2.12.1.9 Preliminary Project Surveys
This is concerned with the broad aspects of the project. Data on aspects such as capacity
required, basic arrangement and size, physical features affecting general layout and design,
availability of effluent disposal facilities, probable cost and possible methods of financing, shall be
collected to prepare an engineering report describing the scope and cost of the project with
reasonable accuracy. In framing such estimates, due consideration must be given to the escalation
of prices of basic materials and their availability. While extreme precision and detail are not required
in this phase, all the basic data obtained must be reliable.
2 - 16
2.12.1.10 Detailed Project Surveys
The surveys for this phase form the basis for the engineering design, as well as, for the
preparation of plans and specifications for incorporation in the DPR. In contrast to preliminary survey,
this survey must be precise and contain contours of all the areas to be served giving all the details
that will facilitate the designer to prepare design and construction of plans suiting the field conditions.
It should include, inter-alia, network of benchmarks and traverse surveys to identify the nature as well
as extent of the existing underground structures requiring displacement, negotiation or clearance.
Such detailed surveys are necessary to establish rights-of-way, minimize utility relocation costs,
obtain better bids and prevent changing and rerouting of lines.
2.12.1.11 Construction Surveys
All control points such as base lines and benchmarks for sewer alignment and grade should be
established by the engineer along the route of the proposed construction. All these points should
be referred adequately to permanent objects.
a) Preliminary Layouts
Before starting the work, right-of-ways, work areas, clearing limits and pavement cuts should be
laid out clearly to ensure that the work proceeds smoothly. Approach roads, detours, by-passes and
protective fencing should also be laid out and constructed prior to undertaking sewer construction
work. All layout work must be completed and checked before construction begins.
b) Setting Line and Grade
The transfer of line and grade from control points, established by the engineers, to the construction
work should be the responsibility of the executing agency until work is completed. The methods
generally used for setting the line and grade of the sewers are discussed in Chapter 3 of this manual.
The procedures for establishing line and grade where tunnels are to be employed in sewer system are
also discussed in Chapter 3 of this manual.
2.12.1.12 Developmental Aspects
The following should be taken into account:
a) Types of land use, such as commercial, industrial, residential and recreational uses; extent
of areas to be served
b) Density of population, trends of population growth and demographic studies
c) Type and number of industries for determining quantity and nature of wastes, and locations of
their discharge points
d) Existing drainage and sewerage facilities and data related to these facilities
e) Flow in existing sewers and sewers of similar areas to assess the flow characteristics
f) Historical and socio-economic data
2 - 17
g) Basis of design and information on the maintenance of existing sewers
h) Effluent disposal sites and their availability
Possible sources of information are census records, town and metropolitan master plans, city
development plans, regional planning records, land use plan, flow gauging records, stream flow
records, meteorological data and data from pollution control boards.
2.12.1.13 Fiscal Aspects
The various factors that will have an important bearing are:
a) Existing policies or commitments/obligations which may affect the financing of the project
b) Outstanding loan amounts and instalments of repayments
c) Availability of Central and State Government loans, grant-in-aid, loans from other financing
bodies such as Life Insurance Corporation, Industrial Development Corporation, HUDCO,
International Bank for Reconstruction and Development and other Banks and Institutions
d) Present water rates, sewer-tax and revenue realized from the service, size of property plots and
land holding, the economic condition of community with respect to their tax-paying capacity
e) Factors affecting the cost of construction, operation and maintenance (O&M); some of the
information can be obtained from the records related to Municipal and State Tax Levies, Acts
and Rules governing loans, procedures for financing projects and registers and records of the
authorities maintaining water supply and sewerage systems.
2.12.1.14 Other Aspects
The considerations that are likely to influence the planning of sewerage system are:
a) Changes in political boundaries by physical acquisition or merger of adjacent communities or by

possible extension of limits
b) Feasibility of multi-regional or multi-municipal systems
c) Prevailing water pollution prevention statutes, other rules and regulations related to discharge
of industrial and domestic wastes
d) Present status of the governmental, semi-governmental or municipal authority sponsoring the

project, its capacity, adequacy, effectiveness and the desirability of its modification or necessity
of a new organization to satisfactorily implement and maintain the project
e) Inconveniences likely to be caused to the community during execution and the feasibility of
minimizing them by suitable alignment or location of the components of the sewerage system
Possible sources of information are National Acts, State and Municipal Laws and Bye-laws,
minutes of the past meetings of the municipal or other governing bodies and discussions with
officials, municipal councillors and other local leaders.
2 - 18
2.13 DETAILED PROJECT REPORT (DPR)
2.13.1 General
All projects have to follow distinct stages between the period they are conceived and completed.
The various stages are:
Pre-investment planning
- Identification of a project
- Survey and Investigation as described in clause 2.12
- Preparation of project report
Appraisal and sanction
Construction of facilities and carrying out support activities
Operation and maintenance
Monitoring and feed back
2.13.1.1 Project Reports
Project reports deal with all aspects of pre-investment planning and establish the need as well
as the feasibility of projects technically, financially, socially, culturally, environmentally, legally and
institutionally. For big projects, economic feasibility may also have to be examined. Project
reports should be prepared in three stages viz. (i) identification report (ii) pre-feasibility report and
(iii) feasibility report. Projects for small towns or those forming parts of a programme may not
require preparation of feasibility reports. Detailed engineering and preparation of technical
specification and tender documents are not necessary for taking investment decisions, since these
activities can be carried out during the implementation phase of projects. For small projects,
however, it may be convenient to include detailed engineering in the project report, if standard
design and drawing can be adopted.
Since project preparation is quite expensive and time consuming, all projects should normally
proceed through three stages and at the end of each stage, a decision should be taken
whether to proceed to the next planning stage and commit the necessary manpower and financial
resources for the next stage. Report at the end of each stage should include a timetable and cost
estimate for undertaking the next stage activity and a realistic schedule for all future stages of
project development. It should be taken into consideration the time required for review and
approval of the report, providing funding for the next stage, mobilizing personnel or fixing agency
(for the next stage of project preparation) data gathering, physical surveys, site investigations, etc.
The basic design of a project is influenced by the authorities/organizations who are involved in
approving, implementing, operating and maintaining the project. Therefore, the institutional
arrangements, through which a project will be brought into operation, must be considered at the
project preparation stage. Similarly responsibility for project preparation may change at various
stages. Arrangements in this respect should be finalized for each stage of project preparation.
2 - 19
Sometimes, more than one organization may have a role to play in the various stages of
preparation of a project. It is therefore necessary to identify a single entity to be responsible for
overall management and coordination of each stage of project preparation. It is desirable that
the implementing authority is identified and those responsible for operations of a project are
consulted at the project preparation stage.
2.13.2 Identification Report
Identification report is basically a desk study, to be carried out relying primarily on the existing
information. It can be prepared reasonably quickly by those who are familiar with the project area
and needs of project components. This report is essentially meant for establishing the need for a
project indicating likely alternatives, which would meet the requirements. It also provides an idea
of the magnitude of cost estimates of a project to facilitate bringing the project in the planning and
budgetary cycle and makes out a case for obtaining sanction to incur expenditure for carrying out the
next stages of project preparation. The report should be brief and include the following information:
a) Identification of the project area and its physical environment
b) Commercial industrial, educational, cultural and religious importance and activities in and around
the project area (also point out special activities or establishments like defence or others of
national importance)
c) Existing population, physical distribution and socioeconomic analysis
d) Present sewage collection, treatment and disposal arrangements in the project area, pointing out
deficiencies, if any, in system of collection and treatment
e) Population projection for the planning period, according to existing and future land use plans or
master plans, if any
f) Establish the need for taking up a project in the light of existing and future deficiencies in sewage
collection, treatment and disposal services, pointing out adverse impacts of non-implementation
of the project, on a time scale
g) Bring out, how the project would fit in with the national / regional / sectoral strategies and with
the general overall development in the project area
h) Identify a strategic plan for long-term development of sewage collection, treatment and disposal
services in the project area, in the context of existing regional development plans and such other
reports, indicating phases of development
i) State the objectives of the short-term project under consideration, in terms of population to
be served and the impact of the project after completion, clearly indicating the design period
j) Identify project components, with alternatives if any; both physical facilities and supporting
activities
k) Preliminary estimates of costs (component-wise) of construction of physical facilities and

supporting activities, cost of operation and maintenance
2 - 20
l) Identify source for financing capital works and operation and maintenance, work out annual
burden (debt servicing + operational expenditure)
m) Indicate institutions responsible for project approval, financing, implementation, operation

and maintenance (e.g., Central Government, State Government, Zilla Parishad, Local Body,
Water Supply Boards)
n) Indicate organization responsible for preparing the project report (pre-feasibility report, feasibility
report), cost estimates for preparing project report and sources of funds to finance preparation
of project reports
0) Indicate time table for carrying out all future stages of the project and the earliest date by which
the project might be operational
p) Indicate personnel strength required and training needs for implementation of the project.
Indicate if any particular/peculiar difficulties of policy or other nature that are likely to be
encountered for implementing the project and how these could be resolved
q) Recommend actions to be taken to proceed further.
The following plans may be enclosed with the report:
1) An index plan to a scale of 1 cm = 2 km showing the project area, existing works, proposed works
and location of community/township or institution to be served
ii) A schematic diagram showing the salient levels of project component
2.13.3 Pre-feasibility Report
After clearance is received, based on the identification report from the concerned authority and /
or owner of the project and commitments are made to finance further studies, the preparation work
on pre-feasibility report should be undertaken by an appropriate agency. This may be a central
planning and design cell of the department dealing with the water and sewerage board, ULB,
Jal Nigam or professional consultants working in the water supply, sanitation and environmental
areas. In the latter case, terms of reference for the study and its scope should be carefully set out.
Pre-feasibility study may be a separate and discrete stage of project preparation or it may be the first
stage of a comprehensive feasibility study. In either case, it is necessary that it precedes taking up of
a feasibility study because the pre-feasibility study is essentially carried out for screening and ranking
of all project alternatives, and to select an appropriate alternative for carrying out the detailed
feasibility study. The pre-feasibility study helps in selecting a short-term project, which will fit in the
long-term strategy for improving services in the context of overall perspective plan for development
of the project area.
A pre-feasibility report can be taken to be a Preliminary Project Report, the structure and component
of which are as follows:
i) Executive summary
ii) Introduction
2 - 21
iii) The project area and the need for a project
iv) Long term plan for sewage collection, treatment and disposal
v) Proposed sewage collection, treatment and disposal project
vi) Conclusions and recommendations
vii) Tables, figures/maps and annexes
2.13.3.1 Executive Summary
It is a good practice to provide an executive summary at the beginning of the report, giving its
essential features, basic strategy, approach adopted in developing the project and the salient
features of financial and administrative aspects.
2.13.3.2 Introduction
This section explains the origin and concept of the project, how it was prepared and the scope and
status of the report. These subsections may be detailed as under:
a) Project Genesis
i) Describe how the idea of the project originated, agency responsible for promoting the project.
ii) List and explain previous studies and reports on the project, including the project identification
report and agencies which prepared them
iii) Describe how the project fits in the regional development plan, long-term sector plan, land use
plan, public health care and sewage management programme, etc.
b) How was the Study Organized
i) Explain how the study was carried out, agencies responsible for carrying out the various
elements of work and their role in preparing the study
ii) Time table followed for the study
c) Scope and Status of the Report
i) How the pre-feasibility report fits in the overall process of project preparation
ii) Describe data limitation
iii) List interim reports prepared during the study
iv) Explain the pre-feasibility report is intended to be used for obtaining approval for the
proposed project
2 - 22
2.13.3.3 Project Area and the Need for the Project
This section establishes the need for the project. It should cover the following main items.
2.13.3.3.1 Project Area
i) Give geographical description of the project area with reference to maps
ii) Describe special features such as topography, climate, culture, religion, migration, etc., which
may affect project design, implementation and operation
iii) Map showing administrative and political jurisdiction
iv) Describe any ethnic, cultural or religious aspects of the communities which may have a bearing
on the project proposal.
2.13.3.3.2 Population Pattern
i) Estimate population in the project area, indicating the sources of data or the basis for the
estimate
ii) Review previous population data, historic growth rates and causes
iii) Estimate future population growth with different methods and indicate the most probable growth
rates and compare with past population growth trends
iv) Compare growth trends within the project area, with those for the region, state and the entire
country
v) Discuss factors likely to affect population growth rate
vi) Estimate probable densities of population in different parts of the project area at future intervals
of time e.g. five, ten and twenty years ahead
vii) Discuss patterns of seasonal migration, if any, within the area
viii) Indicate implication of the estimated growth pattern on housing and other local infrastructure.
2.13.3.3.3 Socio-Economic Aspects
i) Describe present living conditions of the people of different socio-economic and ethnic groups
ii) Identify locations according to income levels or other indications of socio-economic studies
iii) Show on the project area map, location-wise density of population, religion, poverty groups and
ethnic concentrations and the present and future land uses (as per development plan)
iv) Information on housing conditions and relative proportions of owners and tenants
v) Provide data and make projection on housing standards and average household occupancy in
various parts of the project area
2 - 23
vi) Provide data on education, literacy and unemployment by age and sex
vii) Describe public health status within the project area with particular attention to diseases related
to water and sanitary conditions
viii) Provide data on maternal and infant mortality rates and life expectancy
ix) Discuss the status of health care programmes in the area, as well as other projects, which have
bearing on improvements in environmental sanitation.
2.13.3.3.4 Sector Institutions
i) Identify the institutions (Government, Semi-Government and Non-Government) which are

involved in any of the stages of water supply and sanitation project development in the area
(Planning, preparing projects, financing, implementation, O&M and evaluation)
ii) Comment on roles, responsibilities and limitation (territorial or others) of all the identified
institutions, in relation to water supply and sanitation (This may be indicated on a diagram).
2.13.3.3.5 Existing Sewage Collection, Treatment and Disposal Systems and

Population Served
Describe each of the existing sewage collection, treatment and disposal systems (including
conventional, decentralized, and on-site systems) in the project area, indicating the following
details mentioned hereunder:
i) Area served, quantity and quality of sewage collected, components of the system such as
collection network, SPS, STP, sewage reuse and disposal methods, etc.
ii) Private sewage disposal methods such as septic tanks, on-site toilets, etc.
2.13.3.3.6 Urban Drainage and Solid Wastes
Briefly describe existing systems of storm water drainage and solid waste collection and
disposal. This discussion should be focused in terms of their impact on sewerage management and
the environment.
2.13.3.3.7 Need for the Project
i) Comment as to why the existing system cannot satisfy the existing and projected demands for
services with reference to population to be served
ii) Describe benefits of system improvements (which may include rehabilitation or developing a
new system)
iii) Indicate priorities to improvement of existing system, expansion of systems, construction of new
system, assessment of the need for consumer education in hygiene and comments on urgency
of project preparation and implementation.
2 - 24
2.13.3.4 Long Term Plan for Sewage Collection, Treatment and Disposal
a) Sewage collection, treatment and disposal services have to be planned, as a phased

development programme and any short-term project should be such that it would fit in the
long-term strategy. Such a long-term plan or the strategic plan should be consistent with the
future overall development plans for the areas. A long-term plan may be prepared for a period
of 30 years and alternative development sequences may be identified to provide target service
coverage at affordable costs. From these alternative development sequences, a priority project to
be implemented in short term can be selected. It is this project, which then becomes the subject
of a comprehensive feasibility study.
b) Alternative development sequences should be identified in the light of the coverage to be

achieved during the planning period in phases. This calls for definition of the following:
i) Population to be covered with improved sewage management facility
ii) Target dates by which the above mentioned coverage would be extended within the planning
period, in suitable phases
iii) Consistency and coordination to be maintained between projections for both water supply and
sanitation services.
c) It must be noted that availability of funds is one of the prime factors which will ultimately decide
the scope and scale of a feasible project
d) Selection of a Strategic Plan
Each of the alternative development sequences, which can overcome the existing deficiencies
and meet the present and future needs, consist of a series of improvements and expansions to
be implemented over the planned period. Since all the needs cannot be satisfied in the immediate
future, it is necessary to carefully determine priorities of target groups for improvement in services
and stages of development and thus restrict the number of alternatives.
e) Planning for system requirement includes consideration of the following:
i) Possibilities of rehabilitating and/or de-bottlenecking the existing systems
ii) Alternative treatment systems and pumping schemes
f) It may also be necessary to ascertain if supporting activities like health education, staff
training and institutional improvements etc., are necessary to be included as essential components
of the project. All the physical and supporting input need to be carefully budgeted (capital and
operating) after preparing preliminary designs of all facilities identified for each of the development
sequences. These may then be evaluated for least cost solution by net present worth method,
which involves expressing all costs (capital and operating) for each year in economic terms,
discounting future costs to present value, selecting the sequence with the lowest present value.
2 - 25
g) As stated earlier, costs are to be expressed in economic terms and not in terms of their financial
costs. This is because the various alternatives should reflect resource cost to the economy as a
whole at different future dates. Costing of the selected project may however be done in terms of
financial costs, duly considering inflation during project implementation.
2.13.3.5 Proposed Sewerage Project
a) Details of the Project
The project to be selected may consist of those components of the least cost alternative of
development sequence, which can be implemented during the next 3 to 4 years. Components of the
selected project may be as follows:
i) Rehabilitation and de-bottlenecking of the existing facilities
ii) Construction of new facilities for improvement and expansion of existing systems
iii) Support activities like training, consumer education, public motivation, etc.
iv) Equipment and other measures necessary for operation and maintenance of the existing
and expanded systems
v) Consultancy services needed (if any) for conducting feasibility study, detailed engineering,
construction supervision, socio-economic studies and support activities.
b) Project Components
All project components should be thoroughly described, duly supported by documents such as:
i) Location maps
ii) Technical information for each physical component and economic analysis where necessary
iii) Preliminary engineering designs and drawings in respect of each physical component, such as
collection network, SPS, STP and disposal system.
c) Implementation Schedule
A realistic implementation schedule should be presented, taking into consideration time required for
all further steps to be taken, such as conducting feasibility study, appraisal of the project, sanction
to the project, fund mobilization, implementation, trial and commissioning. In preparing this schedule
due consideration should be given to all authorities/groups whose inputs and decisions can affect
the project and its timing.
d) Cost Estimates
Cost estimates of each component of the project should be prepared and annual requirement of
funds for each year should be worked out, taking into consideration the likely annual progress of each
component. Due allowance should be made for physical contingencies and annual inflation. This
exercise will result in arriving at total funds required annually for implementation of the project.
2 - 26
e) Pre-feasibility Report
The pre-feasibility report should bring out any major environmental and social impact the project is
likely to cause and if these aspects will affect its feasibility (Refer to section 2.13.3 of this manual).
f) Institutional Responsibilities
The pre-feasibility report should identify the various organizations/departments/agencies that

would be responsible for further planning and project preparation, approval, sanction, funding,
implementation, O&M of the project and indicate the manpower needed to implement and later
operate and maintain the project. It should also discuss special problems likely to be encountered
during O&M, in respect of availability of skilled and technical staff, funds, transport, chemicals,
communication, power, spare parts, etc. Quantitative estimates of all these resources should be
made and included in the project report.
g) Financial Aspects
The capital cost of a project is the sum of all expenditure required to be incurred to complete design
and detailed engineering of the project, construction of all its components including support activities
and conducting special studies. After estimating component-wise costs, they may also be worked
out on annual basis throughout the implementation period, taking into consideration construction
schedule and allowances for physical contingencies and inflation. Basic item costs to be adopted
should be of the current year. Annual cost should be suitably increased to cover escalation during the
construction period. Total of such escalated annual costs determines the final cost estimate of the
project. Financing plan for the project should then be prepared, identifying all the sources from which
funds can be obtained and likely annual contribution from each source, until the project is completed.
The possible sources of funds include:
i) Cash reserves available with the project authority
ii) Grant-in-aid from government
iii) Loans from government
iv) Loans from financing institutions like Life Insurance Corporation, Banks, HUDCO, etc.,
v) Open market borrowings
vi) Loans/grants from bilateral/international agencies
vii) Capital contribution from voluntary organization or from consumers
h) Interest on Loan
If the lending authority agrees, interest payable during implementation period can be capitalized and
loan amount increased accordingly.
i) Recurring Expenditure
The next step is to prepare recurrent annual costs of the project for the next few years (approximately
10 years) covering O&M expenditure of the entire system (existing and proposed).
2 - 27
This would include expenditure on staff, chemicals, energy, spare parts and other materials for
system operation, transportation, up-keep of the systems and administration. The annual financial
burden imposed by a project comprises the annual recurring cost and payment towards loan and
interest (debt servicing) less the revenue derived from taxes, tariffs, etc.
j) Financing Plan
Every State Government and the GOI have schemes for financing water supply and
sewage collection, treatment and disposal schemes in the urban and rural areas and definite
allocations are made for the national plan periods. It will be necessary at this stage to ascertain if
and how much finance can be made available for the project under consideration and to estimate
the annual availability of funds for the project until its completion. This exercise has to be done in
consultation with the concerned department of the Government and the lending institutions, which
would see whether the project fits in the sector policies and strategies, and can be brought in an
annual planning and budgetary cycle, taking into consideration the commitments already made
in the sector and the overall financial resource position. The project may be finally sanctioned for
implementation if the financing plan is firmed up.
2.13.3.6 Conclusion and Recommendations
a) Conclusions
This section should present the essential findings and results of the pre-feasibility report. It should
include a summary of the following main items:
i) Existing coverage
ii) Review of the need for the project
iii) Long-term development plans considered
iv) Recommended project, and its scope in terms of coverage and components
v) Priorities concerning target-groups and areas to be served by the project
vi) Capital costs and tentative financing plan
vii) Annual recurring costs and debt servicing and projection of operating revenue
viii) Urgency for implementation of the project
ix) Limitation of the data/information used and assumption and acknowledgements made and
need for in-depth investigation, survey and revalidation of assumptions and judgments, while
carrying out the feasibility study.
The administrative difficulties likely to be met with and risks involved during implementation of
the project should also be commented on. These may pertain to boundary of the project area,
availability of land for constructing project facilities, coordination with the various agencies,
acceptance of service by the beneficiaries, shortage of construction materials, implementation of
support activities involving peoples participation, supply of power, timely availability of funds for
implementation of the project and problems of O&M of the facilities.
2 - 28
b) Recommendations
i) This should include all actions required to be taken to complete project preparation and
implementation, identifying the agencies responsible for taking these actions. A detailed timetable
for actions to be taken should be presented. If found necessary and feasible, taking up works
for rehabilitating and/or de-bottlenecking the existing system should be recommended as an
immediate action. Such works may be identified and cost be estimated so that detailed proposals
can be developed for implementation.
ii) It may also be indicated whether the project authority can go ahead with taking up detailed
investigations, data collection, operational studies, without undertaking feasibility study formally.
iii) In respect of small and medium size projects, the pre-feasibility report can be considered
sufficient for obtaining investment decision for the project if:
The results of the pre-feasibility study are based on adequate and reliable data / information. The
analysis of the data and situation is carried out fairly intensively,
No major environmental and social problems are likely to crop up that might jeopardize project
implementation, and
No major technical and engineering problems are envisaged during construction and operation
of the facilities.
iv) In that case, the pre-feasibility study with suitable concluding report should be processed for
obtaining investment decision for the project. The feasibility study can then be taken up at the
beginning of the implementation phase and if results of the study are noticed to be at variance
with the earlier ones, suitable modification may be introduced during implementation.
v) In respect of major projects however and particularly those for which assistance from bilateral
or international funding agencies is sought for, comprehensive feasibility study may have to be
taken up before an investment decision can be taken.
2.13.4 Feasibility Report
Feasibility study examines the project selected in the pre-feasibility study as a short-term
project in much detail, to check if it is feasible technically, financially, economically, socially, legally,
environmentally and institutionally.
Enough additional data/information may have to be collected to examine the above mentioned
aspects, though the details necessary for construction of project components may be collected
during execution of works.
It is a good practice to keep the authority responsible for taking investment decision, informed of
the stage and salient features of the project. If there are good prospects of the project being funded
immediately after the feasibility study is completed, detailed engineering of priority components
may be planned simultaneously.
2 - 29
The feasibility report may have the following sections:
a) Background
b) Proposed project
c) Institutional and financial aspects
d) Techno Economic Appraisal Procedure
e) Conclusion and recommendations
2.13.4.1 Background
This section describes the history of project preparation, how this report is related to other reports
and studies carried out earlier, and in particular its setting in the context of a pre-feasibility report.
It should also bring out if the data/information and assumptions made in the prefeasibility report are
valid, and if not, changes in this respect should be highlighted. References to all previous reports and
studies should be made.
In respect of the project area, need for a project and strategic plan for the same, only a brief
summary of the information covered in pre-feasibility report should be presented, highlighting such
additional data/information if any collected for this report.
The summary information should include planning period, project objectives, service coverage,
service standards considered and selected for long-term planning and for the project, community
preferences and affordability, quantification of future demands for services, alternative strategic
plans, their screening and ranking, recommended strategic plan and cost of its implementation.
2.13.4.2 Proposed Project
This section describes details of the project recommended for implementation. Information presented
here is based on extensive analysis and preliminary engineering designs of all components of the
project. The detailing of this section may be done in the following subsections.
a) Objectives
Project objectives may be described in terms of general development objectives such as health
improvements, ease in sewerage management, improved environmental conditions, human
resources development, institutional improvements and terms of specific objectives such as
coverage of various target groups.
b) Project Users
Define number of people by location and institutions who will benefit and/or not benefit from the
project area and reasons for the same, users involvement during preparation, implementation and
operation of the project.
2 - 30
c) Rehabilitation and De-bottlenecking of the Existing Sewerage System
In fact, rehabilitation, improvements and de-bottlenecking works, if necessary, should be planned for
execution prior to that of the proposed project. If so these activities should be mentioned in
the feasibility report, if however these works are proposed as components of the proposed
project, the necessity of undertaking the rehabilitation / improvement de-bottlenecking works should
be explained.
d) Project Description
This may cover the following items in brief:
i) Definition of the project in the context of the recommended development alternative (strategic
plan) and explanation for the priority of the project
ii) Brief description of each component of the project, with maps and drawings
iii) Functions, location, design criteria and capacity of each component
iv) Technical specification (dimension, material) and performance specifications
v) Stage of preparation of designs and drawings of each component
vi) Constructing in-house facilities
vii) Method of financing
viii) Existing benchmarks (for relevant indicators mentioned in the "Handbook on Service Level
Benchmarking, MoUD) and benchmarks expected to be achieved after implementation
of the project should be mentioned in the report. The indicators included in above reference
are given in Table 2-2.
Table 2-2 Service level benchmarks for sewage management
SI. Benchmark SI.

Proposed Indicator Proposed Indicator Benchmark
No. No.
Extent of reuse and
1 Coverage of toilets 100% 6 20%
recycling of sewage
Coverage of sewage Efficiency in redressal of
2 100% 7 80%
network sen/ices customer complaints
Collection efficiency of Extent of cost recovery in

3 100% 8 100%
the sewage network sewage management
Adequacy of sewage Efficiency in collection of

4 100% 9 90%
treatment capacity sewage charges
Quality of sewage
5 100%
treatment
Source:MoUD, 2011
2 - 31
e) Support Activities
Need for and description of components such as staff training, improving billing and accounting,
consumer education, health education, community participation, etc., and timing of undertaking
these components and the agencies involved should be included.
f) Integration of the Proposed Project with the Existing and Future Systems
Describe how various components of the proposed project would be integrated with the existing
and future works.
g) Agencies Involved in Project Implementation and Relevant Aspects
i. Designate the lead agency
ii. Identify other agencies including government agencies, who would be involved in project
implementation, describing their role, such as granting administrative approval, technical
sanction, approval to annual budget provision, sanction of loans, construction of facilities,
procurement of materials and equipment, etc.,
iii. Outline arrangements to coordinate the working of all agencies
iv. Designate the operating agency and its role during implementation stage
v. Role of consultants, if necessary, scope of their work, and terms of reference
vi. Regulations and procedures for procuring key materials and equipment, power, and transport
problems, if any
vii. Estimate number and type of workers and their availability
viii. Procedures for fixing agencies for works and supplies and the normal time it takes to award
contracts
ix. List of imported materials, if required, procedure to be followed for importing them and estimation
of delivery period
x. Outline any legislative and administrative approvals required to implement the project, such as
those pertaining to environmental clearance, prescribed effluent standards, acquisition of lands,
permission to construct across or along roads and railways, high-tension power lines, in forest
area and defence or other such restricted areas
xi. Comment on the capabilities of contractors and quality of material and equipment available
indigenously
h. Cost Estimates
i. Outline basic assumptions made for unit prices, physical contingencies, price contingencies and
escalation
ii. Summary of estimated cost of each component for each year till its completion and work out
total annual costs to know annual cash flow requirements
2 - 32
iii. Estimate foreign exchange cost if required to be incurred
v. Work out per capita cost of the project on the basis of design population, cost per unit of sewage
treated and disposed and compare these with norms, if any, laid down by government or with
those for similar projects
i) Implementation Schedule
Prepare a detailed and realistic implementation schedule for all the project components,
taking into consideration stage of preparation of detailed design and drawings; additional field
investigations required, if any; time required for preparing tender documents; notice period;
processing of tenders; award of works / supply contract; actual construction period; period
required for procurement of material and equipment; testing; trials of individual components; and
commissioning of the facilities, etc.
If consultants services are required, the period required for completion of their work should also be
estimated. A detailed PERT/CPM network showing implementation schedule for the whole project,
as well as those for each component should be prepared, showing linkages and inter-dependence
of various activities.
Implementation schedule should also be prepared for support-activities such as training, consumer
education, etc., and their linkages with completion of physical components and commissioning of
the project should be established.
j) Operation and Maintenance of the Project
Estimate annual operating costs considering staff, chemicals, energy, transport, routine
maintenance of civil works, maintenance of electrical/mechanical equipment, including normal cost
of replacement of parts and supervision charges. Annual cost estimates should be prepared for a
period of 10 years from the probable year of commissioning the project, taking into consideration
expected coverage and escalation.
Procedure for monitoring and evaluating the project performance with reference to project objectives
should be indicated.
2.13.4.3 Institutional and Financial Aspects
a) Institutional Aspects
It is necessary to examine capabilities of the organizations that would be entrusted with the
responsibility of implementing the project and operating the same after it is commissioned. The
designated organization(s) must fulfill the requirements in respect of organizational structure,
personnel, financial, health and management procedures, so that effective and efficient performance
is expected. This can be done by describing the following aspects:
i) History of the organization, its functions, duties and powers, legal basis, organization chart (present
and proposed), relationship between different functional groups of the organization and with its regional
offices, its relation with government agencies and other organizations involved in sector development
2 - 33
ii) Public relations in general and consumer relations in particular, extension services available
to sell new services, facilities for conducting consumer education programme and settling
the complaints
iii) Systems for budgeting capital & recurring expenditure, revenue, accounting expenditure &
revenue, internal & external audit arrangements and inventory management
iv) Present positions and actual staff, comments on number and quality of staff in each category,
ratio of staff proposed for maintenance and operation of the project to the population served,
salary ranges of the staff and their comparison with those of other public sector employees
v) Staff requirement (category wise) for operating the project immediately after commissioning,
future requirements, policies regarding staff training, facilities available for training
vi) Actual tariffs for the last 5 years, present tariff, tariff proposed after the project is commissioned,
its structures, internal and external subsidies, procedure required to be followed to adopt new
tariff, expected tariff and revenues in future years, proposal to meet the shortage in revenues
vii) Prepare annual financial statements (income statements, balance sheets and cash flows) for
the project operating agency for five years after the project is commissioned; explain all basic
assumptions for the financial forecast and the terms and conditions of tapping financial sources;
demonstrate ability to cover all operating and maintenance expenditure and loan repayment,
workout rate of return on net fixed assets and the internal financial rate of return of the project
b) Financing Plan
Identify all sources of funds for implementation of the project, indicating year-by-year requirements
from these sources, to meet expenditure as planned for completing the project as per schedule, state
how interest during construction will be paid, or whether it will be capitalized and provided for in the
loan, explain the procedures involved in obtaining funds from the various sources.
2.13.4.4 Techno Economic Appraisal Procedure
The decision between technologies of sewerage as well as sewage treatment should be carried out
on life cycle analysis of major components. In general, the life cycle of civil works can be taken as
30 years and that of equipment can be taken as 15 years in non-sewage treatment locations and 10
years in sewage treatment locations. The analysis should include:
a) Net Present Value (NPV) of capital costs
b) Equivalent cost of annuity and O&M costs
c) Revenue recoverable if any by way of by-products
d) Land Cost
e) Dependency on Imports for day to day spares
f) Import substitution
2 - 34
g) Time required to achieve the desired project objectives
h) Mitigation of any adverse environmental impacts
i) Long term sustainability by the finances of the ULB
While aspects of a) through d) can be attributed to numerical values, the aspects e) through i) will be
subjective and has to be appraised based on higher weightage for most preferred technologies.
Thus, the exercise of techno-economic appraisal is not a fully mathematical approach and has to be
tempered as two interdependent aspects, both kept up and reasoned out interactively. The tendency
to overly complicate the exercise with undue mathematics shall be resisted.
2.13.4.5 Conclusion and Recommendations
This section should discuss justification of the project, in terms of its objectives, cost effectiveness,
affordability, willingness of the beneficiaries to accept the services and effect of not proceeding with
the project.
Issues that are likely to adversely affect project implementation and operation should be outlined
and ways of tackling the same should be suggested. Effect of changes in the assumptions made for
developing the project on project implementation period, benefits, tariff, costs and demand, etc.,
should be mentioned.
Definite recommendations should be made regarding time-bound actions to be taken by the various
agencies, including advance action that may be taken by the lead agency pending approval and
financing of the project.
2.14 PLANNING OF SEWERAGE SYSTEM
2.14.1 Approach
The approach to planning of sewerage shall be governed by optimum utilization of the funds
available such that the sewerage system when completed does not become unused for long and at
the same time does not become inadequate very soon.
2.14.2 Design Population Forecast
This shall be as per the methods in Chapter 3 of this manual and its validation with respect to
known growths in recent decades and evolving a reasonable basis by comparing with other similar
habitations. There is no hard and fast mathematical basis for this and the methods in Chapter 3 are
only a guideline.
2.14.3 Estimation of Sewage Flow
This shall be as per the methods in Chapter 3 of this manual and its validation with respect to known
growths in recent decades and evolving a reasonable basis. The design population having been
established, the judgem ent of per capita water supply is the key.
2 - 35
2.14.4 Sewage Characteristics and Pollution Load
The raw sewage characteristics are a function of the level of water supply and per capita
pollution load as shown in Chapter 5 of this manual. Thus, the level of water supply decides the
concentration of pollutants.
The pollutant load from a given habitation expressed as kg/day will remain the same but the
concentration will vary depending on the level of water supply. Where the actual level of water supply
is not foreseeable, the desirable level as in Chapter 3 shall be followed.
2.14.5 Planning of Sewer System
The design principles in Chapter 3 of this manual shall be followed. In essence, it stipulates that the
options of small bore sewers, shallow sewers, twin drains and underground sewers all have to be
relatively evaluated to sub regions of the project site instead of blindly going in for total underground
sewer flat out. Incremental sewer shall also be considered based on the phased development of the
region instead of directly opting for total underground sewer system.
2.14.6 Planning of Pumping Station
options of horizontal foot mounted centrifugal pump sets in a dry well adjacent to wet well has its
importance in shallow lift smaller capacity pump stations and submersible pump sets are not a panacea
for all applications. In addition, the twin wet well concept for degritting shall be considered.
2.14.7 Planning of Sewage Treatment Facilities
choice of conventional systems as also recent emerging trends can also be considered provided the
costs of the latter are ascertained from recent contracts in the country and not arbitrarily based on
quotes from vendors of these technologies.
2.15 PLANNING OF SLUDGE TREATMENT AND UTILIZATION
2.15.1 Basic Philosophy of Sludge Treatment
Sludge in STPs generally refers to the biological organisms, which have a tendency to decay
and putrefy and as otherwise has its value as soil fillers in agriculture and biomethanation. The
philosophy shall be to opt for the biomethanation route and derive electricity by igniting the methane
gas in specially designed gas engines.
2.15.2 Design Sludge Generation
The design principles in Chapter 6 of this manual shall be followed. In essence, it stipulates the
quantity and volatile portion of the sludge solids given by the BOD load. The numerical design
guidelines are more easily followed than the theoretical derivations.
2 - 36
2.15.3 Planning for Sludge Reuse
Sludge reuse is to be considered for biomethanation and using the methane gas to produce
electricity and the digested sludge as soil filler in agriculture or farm forestry. The latter use as soil
filler may not be easily possible in metropolitan urban centres for want of the land. Transportation of
the sludge outside the limits of the metropolitan area is never easy, as the public there will object to
this. Hence, methods such as pellets to marketable soil fillers or composted organic fertilizers shall
have to be explored, though this is new to India.
However, the use of treated sewage sludge for land application shall be subject to its compliance to
section 6.10.2.1 and section 6.10.2.1.1 of chapter 6 of this manual
2.15.4 Common Sludge Treatment Facilities
Common sludge treatment implies that sewage sludge generated in two or more STPs are collected
in one STP and treated there. It is an effective method of sludge treatment for urban areas, where
the land acquisition for STPs is difficult. However, while planning it is important to consider that
transportation / collection of sludge is difficult.
2.15.5 Transportation and Disposal of Sludge
The practice of transporting of wet sludge in tankers and spraying onto agriculture fields are reported
to be in vogue in developed western countries where such lands are in plenty. However, this practice
is not recommended for India because of the fact that in the arid temperatures in most parts of the
country this may set off an unintentional cycle of airborne aerosol infection. Thus transportation, if
ever to be carried out, shall have to be only in the form of dewatered sludge cake to at least a solid
content of about 25%. The disposal shall have to be for eco-friendly purposes as agriculture or farm
forestry or pellets for marketing as supplemented organic fertilizers.
However, the use of treated sewage sludge for land application shall be subject to its compliance to
section 6.10.2.1 and section 6.10.2.1.1 of chapter 6 of this manual.
2.16 PLANNING OF UTILIZATION OF RESOURCES AND SPACE
2.16.1 Planning of Utilization of Space in Sewage Pumping Stations and Treatment Plant
The open spaces in STPs and SPS, especially roof-tops, shall be used for horticulture, sports
facilities/playgrounds, parks, etc. This will help utilization of such space in densely populated cities.
2.17 PLANNING FOR RECONSTRUCTION
The facilities get older with the passage of time and at some stage, they are not able to function at
the desired level of performance.
It becomes necessary to carry out rehabilitation or reconstruction work to make them work
properly. For this purpose, a reconstruction plan is to be anticipated and developed in the planning
stage itself.
2 - 37
2.17.1 General Aspects of Reconstruction Planning
By definition, reconstruction arises when the original construction has become either useless or is
damaged due to earthquakes or floods. In such situations, the single most important requirement
is the records of "as constructed drawings, which show the approved drawings with endorsements
of whatever changes have been carried out in construction. In the absence of these drawings, it is
impossible to understand why and how the construction failed. This is most important as the original
drawing has been approved based on a set of standards but still it has failed and hence, there are
important issues to be understood. Thus, the most important aspect of reconstruction planning is
the documentation of "as constructed drawings and the original design. The next important need is
to build a ready reference of past construction failures and the reasons and reconstruction history.
Perhaps the more important aspect is to encourage the engineers to be frank of their unintentional
lapses and treat this as human error and not to flog even trivial lapses as major flaws.
2.17.2 Reconstruction Planning of Sewers
Almost everything written in Section 2.17.1 applies here also. In addition, the following are relevant:
a) A mandatory record of the fate of gases inside major sewers monitored and chronicled for ready
reference
b) An ultra-sonic survey of major sewers once a year to maintain a record of the integrity of the
sewers and the weakness that may be occurring in some sections
c) A procedure for alternative diversion of sewage flow by temporary submersible pump sets in the
upstream manhole of a damaged portion to the downstream manhole, thus permitting the repairs
to the damaged section
d) A procedure to plug the manholes on both ends of the damaged sewer using pneumatic plugs
similar to football or automobile tubes
e) A standardised schedule of rates for such emergency work
f) A stock of well point system for dewatering the damaged portion
g) The most important plan in facing a failure of a trunk sewer is to realize that ground water may be
polluted by seepage of raw sewage. Thus, priority is to route the sewage in another trunk sewer
to shut off the incoming raw sewage immediately and divert the same to another destination even
if it means overloading the trunk sewer where it is diverted.
h) While designing the sewer system itself, trunk sewers shall be designed to be possible to be used
for such diversions by temporarily using the sewer as a pumping line under low pressure. After all,
these sewers are laid using long sewer pipes of 6 m length, and the load carrying capacity needs
a rating of at least about 4 kg/sq. cm and this is adequate for such low head pumped diversions.
Temporary pumping lines of low pressure can be laid above ground along property boundary
compound walls by using double-flanged DI pipes which are easy to lay and dismantle.
2 - 38
2.17.3 Reconstruction Planning of SPS and STP
The reconstruction plan for SPS and STP has to address the following issues:
a) In both these installations, the reconstruction applies largely to sewage retaining civil works
only, because in the case of mechanical and electrical equipment, it is replacement and not
reconstruction. Replacement does not require great skill. Reconstruction of sewage holding
structures requires very great skills and experience and this includes piping and valves.
b) The importance of record keeping of "as constructed drawings as stated earlier in Section 2.17.1
is very much important in this case also.
c) The most important plan in facing a failure of a sewage holding civil work as tank is to realize
that ground water may be polluted by seepage of raw sewage and thus shut off the incoming raw
sewage immediately and divert the same to another destination even if it means overloading the
new destination.
d) While designing the sewer system itself, the pumping mains shall be designed to be possible to
use for such diversions by temporarily overloading another trunk sewer. After all, these sewers
are laid using long sewer pipes of 6 m length, and the load varying capacity needs a rating of at
least about 4 kg/sq. cm and this is adequate for such low head pumped diversions. This may not
be possible in large metropolitan centres but must be possible in class II and class III cities.
e) In the case of reconstruction of sewage holding structures, the best is to abandon the damaged
structure, strengthen its foundation and inscribe a new structure. This may result in a loss of
volume by about 10% but that is nothing to be taken seriously.
2.18 ENVIRONMENTAL PRESERVATION AND BEAUTIFICATION
2.18.1 In Sewer Systems
Most often, the slimy matter taken out of the manholes is left on the road edges itself and this
creates a health hazard. In planning stage itself, solutions by way of driving trucks to collect all these
to a central facility close to the municipal solid wastes dump-site has to be recognized. Accordingly,
in the planning stage itself provisions shall be made in the estimates for procuring a set of mobile
trucks that can be deployed in such situations, as no commercial truck will come forward to remove
such muck from sewage manholes.
2.18.2 In Sewage Treatment Plant and Pumping Stations
Suitable provisions for greening of the premises shall be made in the cost estimation stage itself.
2.18.3 Environmental Preservation Measures of Surrounding Area
The fuel and energy available in the treated sewage and sludge in sewerage system can be utilized
to contribute to energy conservation in the area. The reduction in energy consumed by the sewerage
facilities can indirectly contribute to the prevention of global warming.
2 - 39
In order to preserve the environment of a city and to have positive impact on global environment, it is
necessary to use various functions of the sewerage system as described below.
a. Preservation of water quality
In order to plan water quality conservation of a close natural water area, it is necessary to
promote introduction of advanced treatment process. It is necessary to promote introduction of
efficient advanced processing technology at sustainable cost. Moreover, it is important to plan the
public awareness such that the ratio of pollution discharged without treatment is reduced gradually.
b. Use of resurgent water, rain water
Cooling the road and building by resurgent water, rain water, etc., can be planned.
c. Utilization of resources and energy
The practically feasible utilization of resource including treated sewage and sludge can be planned
to avoid draining of water and nutrient.
d. Energy conservation measures
The introduction of energy-saving equipment in sewerage facilities can be thought of as the first
energy conservation measures. This can be done while updating of apparatus and equipment. It is
also important to aim at energy saving by improving the operating method of existing facilities.
e. Reduction of greenhouse gas
A lot of greenhouse gases (e.g., methane, CO2, etc.,) is discharged in sewerage systems. Measures
to reduce such emission can be planned.
2.19 ENGINEERING PLANS
2.19.1 Plans
All plans for sewerage facilities should be in a well-organized format and bear a suitable title
showing the name of the municipality, sewer district and organization.
They should show the scale in metric measure, a graphical scale, the north point, date, and the
name and signature of the engineer. A space should be provided for signature and / or approval
stamp of the appropriate reviewing authority.
The plans should be clear and legible. They should be drawn to a scale, which will permit all
necessary information to be plainly shown. Datum used should be indicated. Locations and logs of
test borings, when required, should be shown on the plans.
Detail plans should consist of plan views, elevations, sections, and supplementary views, which
together with the specifications and general layouts, provide the working information for the contract
and construction of the facilities. They should also include dimensions and relative elevations of
structures, location, equipment, size of piping, water levels and ground elevations.
2 - 40
2.19.2 Specifications
Complete signed technical specifications should be prepared and submitted for the construction of
sewers, SPS, STP, and all other appurtenances, and should accompany the plans. The detailed
specifications accompanying construction drawings should include, but not be limited to, detailed
specifications for the approved procedures for operation during construction, related construction
information not shown on the drawings, which is necessary to inform the builder in detail of the
design requirements for the quality of materials, workmanship, and fabrication of the project.
The specifications should also include: the type, size, strength, operating characteristics, and
rating of equipment; allowable infiltration; the complete requirements for all mechanical and
electrical equipment, including machinery, valves, piping, and jointing of pipe; electrical apparatus,
wiring, instrumentation, and meters; laboratory fixtures and equipment; operating tools, construction
materials; special filter materials, such as, stone, sand, gravel, or slag; miscellaneous appurtenances;
chemicals when used; instructions for testing materials and equipment as necessary to meet design
standards; and performance tests for the completed facilities and component units. It is suggested
that these performance tests be conducted at design load conditions wherever practical.
2.19.3 Revisions to Approved Plans
In case if the project is prepared and approved and due to some reason, the implementation is not
started for a long period (say 5 - 10 years), some of the im portant factors affecting generated amount
of sewage, such as population, water supply coverage, etc. will change. In such cases, revision of
the approved plan will be required and approval shall be required again. Moreover, any deviations
from approved plans or specifications affecting capacity, flow, operation of units, or point of discharge
shall be approved, in writing, before such changes are made. Revised plans or specifications should
be submitted well in advance of any construction work, which will be affected by such changes to
allow sufficient time for review and approval. Structural revisions or other minor changes not
affecting capacities, flows or operation can be permitted during construction without approval. "As
built plans clearly showing such alterations shall be submitted to the reviewing authority at the
completion of the work.
2.20 CHECKLIST
The MoUD website http://urbanindia.nic.in/programm e/uwss/dprs-checklists/sews.pdf contains

the checklist for the preparation of DPR for sewerage schemes which require financial assistance.
This checklist can be referred to and shall be complied with.
2.21 MANDATORY REQUIREMENTS IN SANITATION SECTOR
These shall be as follows
1. Each state government shall mandatorily pass a "Sewerage & Sanitation act and notify the
rules thereunder. The reason for this is to empower the ULBs to prevail on the property owners/
occupiers to avail house service sewer connections once the sewerage system is developed by
the ULB, within 30 m of the premises irrespective of whatever be the mode of existing sewage
disposal system.
2 - 41
In case the owner/occupier fails to do so the ULB by virtue of its powers can disconnect essential
services like, water supply and electricity after the expiry of the notice period. An example of such
a provision can be seen under rule 10(5) of the Goa Sewerage System and sanitation services
management rules 2010 enacted under the Goa Sewerage system and services management
act 2008 as contained in Appendix C. 2-2 of Part C Management.
2. Similarly, each state government shall mandatorily formulate and notify appropriate act and rules
for septage management.
2 - 42
CHAPTER 3: DESIGN AND
Part A: Engineering CONSTRUCTION OF SEWERS
CHAPTER 3: DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF SEWERS
3.1 GENERAL
The major roles of a sewer system can be listed as follows:
- Improvement in the environment by removing the sewage as it originates
- Preventing inundation of low lying areas that may be otherwise caused by not providing sewers
- Prevention of vector propagation by sewage stagnations
- Avoiding cross connections with freshwater sources by seepage
In addition, there is a strong emphasis on:
a) Avoiding sewer impacts on groundwater quality by infiltration of soil water into sewers and
exfiltration of sewage into soil water, occurring rather as a cycle depending on the flow conditions
in leaky sewers, and
b) Moving away from the mind-set that a sewer system shall necessarily be an underground sewer
right in the middle of the road with costly construction, upkeep and remediation and making the
objective realizable if necessary in an incremental sewerage commensurate with optimizing the
area coverage in the available financial and human resources to create and sustain the system.
This chapter presents the following:
Part - 1 Estimation of Design Flows
Part - 2 Types and Hydraulics of Sewers
Part - 3 Design of Sewer Networks
Part - 4 Types and Construction of Manholes
Part - 5 Laying, Jointing and Construction of Sewers
PART - 1 ESTIMATION OF DESIGN FLOWS
3.2 DESIGN PERIOD
The length of time up to which the capacity of a sewer will be adequate is referred to as the design
period. In fixing a design period, consideration must be given for the useful life of structures and
equipment employed, taking into account obsolescence as well as wear and tear. The flow is
largely a function of the population served, population density, water consumption, lateral and sub main
sewers are usually designed for peak flows of the population at saturation density as set forth in the
master plan. Trunk sewers, interceptors, and outfalls are difficult and uneconomical to be enlarged or
duplicated and hence are designed for longer design periods. In the case of trunk sewers serving
relatively undeveloped areas adjacent to metropolitan areas, it is advisable to construct initial facilities
for more than a limited period. Nevertheless, right of way for future larger trunk sewers can be acquired
or reserved. The recommended design period for various components shall be as in Table 2-1.
3- 1
Methods of estimation of population for arriving at the design population have been discussed in
Section 2.6. When a master plan containing land use pattern and zoning regulations is available for the
town, the anticipated population can be based on the ultimate densities and permitted floor space index
provided for in the master plan.
In the absence of such information on population, the following densities are suggested for adoption
as in Table 3.1.
Table 3.1 Densities of Population vs. Populated areas
Size of town (Population) Density of population per hectare
Up to 5,000 75-150
Above 5,001 to 20,000 150-250
Above 20,001 to 50,000 250-300
Above 50,001 to 1,00,000 300-350
Above 1,00,001 350-1,000
In cities where Floor Space Index (FSI) or Floor Area Ratio (FAR) limits are fixed by the local
authority this approach may be used for working out the population density. The FSI or FAR is the
ratio of total floor area (of all the floors) to the plot area.
The densities of population on this concept may be worked out as in the following example for an
area of one hectare (ha)
Roads 20%
Gardens 15%
Schools (including playgrounds) 5%
Markets 2%
Hospital and Dispensary 2%
Total 44%
Area available for Residential Development = 100 - 44 = 56% or 0.56
Actual total floor area = Area for residential development x FSI
Assuming an FSI of 0.5 and floor area of 9 m /person
Number of persons or density per hectare
3-2
3.4 TRIBUTARY AREA
The natural topography, layout of buildings, political boundaries, economic factors etc., determine
the tributary area. For larger drainage areas, though it is desirable that the sewer capacities be
designed for the total tributary area, sometimes, political boundaries and legal restrictions prevent
the sewers to be constructed beyond the limits of the local authority. However, in designing sewers
for larger areas, there is usually an economic advantage in providing adequate capacity initially for a
certain period of time and adding additional sewers, when the pattern of growth becomes
established. The need to finance projects within the available resources necessitates the design to
be restricted to political boundaries. The tributary area for any section under consideration has to be
marked on a key plan and the area can be measured from the map.
3.5 PER CAPITA SEWAGE FLOW
The entire spent water of a community should normally contribute to the total flow in a sanitary
sewer. However, the observed dry weather flow quantities usually are slightly less than the per capita
water consumption, since some water is lost in evaporation, seepage into ground, leakage etc.
In arid regions, mean sewage flows may be as little as 40% of water consumption and in well
developed areas; flows may be as high as 90%. However, the conventional sewers shall be
designed for a minimum sewage flow of 100 litres per capita per day or higher as the case may be.
Non-conventional sewers shall be designed as the case may be.
For some areas, it is safe to assume that the future density of population for design as equal to
the saturation density. It is desirable that sewers serving a small area be designed accordingly
on saturation density.
For new communities, design flows can be calculated based on the design population and projected
water consumption for domestic use, commercial use and industrial activity. In case a master plan
containing land use pattern and zoning regulation is available, the anticipated population can be
based on the ultimate densities as in Table 3.1.
The flow in sewers varies from hour to hour and seasonally. However, for the purpose of hydraulic
design estimated peak flows are adopted. The peak factor or the ratio of maximum to average flows
depends upon contributory population as given in Table 3.2.
Table 3.2 Peak factor for Contributory Population
Contributory Population Peak Factor
up to 20,000 3.00
Above 20,001 to 50,000 2.50
Above 50,001 to 7,50,000 2.25
above 7,50,001 2.00
3-3
The peak factor also depends upon the density of population, topography of the site, hours of water
supply and hence, individual cases may be further analyzed if required. The minimum flow may vary
from 1/3 to 1/2 of average flow.
3.6 INFILTRATION
Estimate of flow in sanitary sewers may include certain flows due to infiltration of groundwater through
joints. Since sewers are designed for peak discharges, allowances for groundwater infiltration for the
worst condition in the area should be made as in Table 3.3
Table 3.3 Ground water infiltration
Minimum Maximum
Litres/ha/day 5,000 50,000
Litres/km/day 500 5,000
Litres/day/manhole 250 500
Once the flow is estimated as per Table 3.3, the design infiltration value shall be limited to a
maximum of 10% of the design value of sewage flow.
Care shall be taken that in high ground water locations and coastal locations, the sewer pipes shall
not be stoneware or vitrified clay pipes and instead shall be cast iron / ductile iron pipes or other
non-metallic pipes with safeguards against floatation as discussed later in the section on laying
of sewers.
3.7 SEWAGE FROM COMMERCIAL INSTITUTIONS
The industries and commercial buildings often use water other than the municipal supply and may
discharge their liquid wastes into the sanitary sewers. Estimates of such flows have to be made
separately as in Table 3.4 (overleaf) for their potable water supply.
3.8 INDUSTRIAL EFFLUENTS TO BE DISCOURAGED
The mixing of industrial effluents through discharge into public sewers is undesirable due to the
possible detrimental effects of such effluent on the operation of biological sewage treatment process.
This aspect has been well recognized in recent times and industrial areas having polluting industries
are generally located such as to avoid mixing with sewage.
However, in cities that have undergone unregulated growth in the past, polluting industries may exist
in pockets of mixed land use. In such cases, those industries are required to implement zero liquid
discharge (ZLD) by reusing the effluents after appropriate treatment in house.
Of all the industries, this shall strictly apply to the automobile service stations and machine
shops from where the spent metal plating baths and oil & grease shall be prevented from entering
the sewers.
3-4
Table 3.4 Institutional needs for potable water
W ater Supply
No. Institutions
(litres)
1 Hospital including laundry and beds exceeding 100 450 per bed
2 Hospital including laundry and beds not exceeding 100 340 per bed
3 Lodging houses / hotels 180 per bed
4 Hostels 135 lpcd
5 Nurses hom es and m edical quarters 135 lpcd
6 Boarding schools/colleges 135 lpcd
7 Restaurants 70 per seat
8 Airports and Seaports, duty staff 70 lpcd
9 Airports and Seaports, alighting and boarding persons 15 lpcd
10 Train and Bus stations, duty staff 70 lpcd
11 Train and Bus stations, alighting and boarding persons 15 lpcd
12 Day schools/colleges 45 lpcd
13 Offices 45 lpcd
14 Factories, duty staff 45 lpcd
15 Cinema, concert halls and theatres 15 lpcd
3.9 STORM RUNOFF
The sanitary sewers are not expected to receive storm water. Strict inspection, vigilance, and proper
design and construction of sewers and manholes should eliminate this flow or bring it down to a very
insignificant quantity.
However, in small habitations where rainfall is almost a continuous affair, it may be necessary to
include storm water in the design of sewers as under.
3.9.1 Estimation of Storm Runoff
The storm runoff is that portion of the precipitation, which drains over the ground. Estimation of such
runoff reaching the storm sewers therefore is dependent on the intensity, duration of precipitation,
characteristics of the tributary area, and the time required for such flow to reach the sewer.
The design of storm water sewers begins with an estimate of the rate and volume of surface runoff.
When rain falls on a given catchment, a portion of the precipitation is intercepted by the vegetation
cover that mostly evaporates, a portion hits the soil and some of it percolates down below and the
rest flows over the ground. The higher the intensity of rain, the higher will be the peak runoff.
3-5
The characteristics of the drainage area such as imperviousness, topography including depressions,
water pockets, shape of the drainage basin and duration of the precipitation determine the fraction of
the total precipitation, which will reach the sewer. This fraction is known as the coefficient of runoff.
The time-period after which the entire area begins contributing to the total runoff, at a given
monitoring point, is known as the time of concentration. It is also defined as the time it takes for a
drop of water to flow from the most distant point to the outlet of the basin. The duration of rainfall that
is equal to the time of concentration is known as the critical rainfall duration. The rational formula for
the relationship between peak runoff and the rainfall is given below.
where,
Q : Runoff in m3/hr
C : Dimensionless runoff coefficient
i: Intensity of rainfall in mm/hr
A : Area of drainage district in hectares
The storm water flow for this purpose may be determined by using the rational method,
hydrograph method, rainfall-runoff correlation studies, digital computer models, inlet method or empirical
formulae. The empirical formulae that are available for estimating the storm water runoff can be used
only when comparable conditions to those for which the equations were derived initially exist.
A rational approach, therefore, demands a study of the existing precipitation data of the area
concerned to permit a suitable forecast. Storm sewers are not designed for the peak flow of rare
occurrence such as once in 10 years or more, but it is necessary to provide sufficient capacity to
avoid too frequent flooding of the drainage area. There may be some flooding when the precipitation
exceeds the design value, which has to be permitted. The frequency of such permissible flooding
may vary from place to place, depending on the importance of the area. Though such flooding causes
inconvenience, it may have to be accepted occasionally, considering the economy effected in the
sizes of the drains and the costs.
The maximum runoff, which has to be carried in a sewer section should be computed for a condition
when the entire basin draining at that point becomes contributory to the flow and the time needed
for this is known as the time of concentration (with reference to the concerned section). Thus, for
estimating the flow to be carried in the storm sewer, the intensity of rainfall which lasts for the period
of time of concentration is the one to be considered contributing to the flow of storm water in the
sewer. Of the different methods, the rational method is more commonly used as herein.
It may be reiterated that Q represents only the maximum discharge caused by a particular storm.
The portion of rainfall, which finds its way to the sewer, is dependent on the imperviousness and the
shape of the drainage area apart from the duration of storm.
The percent imperviousness of the drainage area can be obtained from the records of a particular
district. In the absence of such data, Table 3.5 (overleaf) may serve as a guide.
3-6
Table 3.5 Percentage of Imperviousness of Areas
S. No. Type of Area Percentage of Imperviousness

1. Commercial and Industrial Area 70-90
Residential Area
2. - High Density 61-75
- Low Density 35-60
3. Parks and undeveloped areas 10-20
When several different surface types or land use comprise the drainage area, a composite or
weighted average value of the imperviousness runoff coefficient can be computed, such as:
where,
I: Weighted average imperviousness of the total drainage basin
Av A2, An: Sub drainage areas
I1,I2,In: Imperviousness of the respective sub-areas.
The weighted average runoff coefficients for rectangular areas, of length four times the width as
well as for sector shaped areas with varying percentages of impervious surface for different time of
concentration are given in Table 3.6 (overleaf).
Although these are applicable to particular shape areas, they also apply in a general way to the
areas, which are usually encountered in practice. Errors due to difference in shape of drainage are
within the limits of accuracy of the rational method and of the assumptions on which it is based.
3.9.2 Rational Method
3.9.2.1 Runoff-Rainfall Intensity Relationship
The entire precipitation over the drainage district does not reach the sewer. The characteristics
of the drainage district, such as, imperviousness, topography including depressions and water
pockets, shape of the drainage basin and duration of the precipitation determine the fraction of the
total precipitation, which will reach the sewer.
This fraction known as the coefficient of runoff needs to be determined for each drainage district. The
runoff reaching the sewer is given by Equation (3.1).
3.9.2.2 Storm Frequency
The frequency of storm for which the sewers are to be designed depends on the importance of the
area to be drained. Commercial and industrial areas have to be subjected to less frequent flooding.
The suggested frequency of flooding in the different areas is as follows -:
3-7
Table 3.6 R unoff C oefficients for Tim es of Concentration
Duration, t, minutes 10 20 30 45 60 75 90 100 120 135 150 180
W eighted A verage Coefficient
1. S ector concentrating in stated time
a. Im pervious 0.525 0.588 0.642 0.700 0.740 0.771 0.795 0.813 0.828 0.840 0.850 0.865
b. 60% Im pervious 0.365 0.427 0.477 0.531 0.569 0.598 0.622 0.641 0.656 0.670 0.682 0.701
c. 40% Im pervious 0.285 0.346 0.395 0.446 0.482 0.512 0.535 0.554 0.571 0.585 0.597 0.618
d. Pervious 0.125 0.185 0.230 0.277 0.312 0.330 0.362 0.382 0.399 0.414 0.429 0.454
2. Rectangle (length = 4 x w idth) concentrating in stated time
a. Im pervious 0.550 0.648 0.711 0.768 0.808 0.837 0.856 0.869 0.879 0.887 0.892 0.903
b. 50% Im pervious 0.350 0.442 0.499 0.551 0.590 0.618 0.639 0.657 0.671 0.683 0.694 0.713
c. 30% Im pervious 0.269 0.360 0.414 0.464 0.502 0.530 0.552 0.572 0.588 0.601 0.614 0.636
d. Pervious 0.149 0.236 0.287 0.334 0.371 0.398 0.422 0.445 0.463 0.479 0.495 0.522
3 -8
a) Residential areas
i) Peripheral areas twice a year
ii) Central and comparatively high priced areas once a year
b) Commercial and high priced areas once in 2 years
3.9.2.3 Intensity of Precipitation
The intensity of rainfall decreases with duration. Analysis of the observed data on intensity and
duration of rainfall of past records over a period of years in the area is necessary to arrive at a
fair estimate of intensity-duration for given frequencies. The longer the record available, the more
dependable is the forecast. In Indian conditions, intensity of rainfall adopted in design is usually in the
range of 12 mm/hr to 20 mm/hr or based on the actual record.
Table 3.7 gives the analysis of the frequency of storms of stated intensities and durations during
26 years for which rainfall data were available for a given town.
Table 3-7 Duration vs. intensity of storms
Duration 30 35 40 45 50 60 75 100 125

Intensity
in
mm/hr No. of storms of stated intensity or more for a period of 26 years
Minutes
5 100 40 18 10 2
10 90 72 41 25 10 5 1
15 82 75 45 20 12 5 1
20 83 62 51 31 10 9 4 2
30 73 40 22 10 8 4 2
40 34 16 8 4 2 1
50 14 8 4 3 1
60 8 4 2 1
90 4 2
The stepped line indicates the location of the storm occurring once in 2 years, i.e., 13 times in 26 years.
The time-intensity values for this frequency are obtained by interpolation from Table 3.8.
Table 3.8 Time intensity values of storms
i (mm/hr) t (min) i (mm/hr) t (min)
30 51.67 50 18.50
35 43.75 60 14.62
40 36.48 75 8.12
45 28.57
3-9
The relationship may be expressed by a suitable mathematical formula, several forms of which are
available. The following two equations are commonly used:
a (3.3)
a
ii) l ~ (3.4)
t+b
where
Intensity of rainfall (mm/hr)
t: Duration of storm (minutes)
a, b and n : Constants
The available data on i and t are plotted and the values of the intensity (i) can then be determined for
any given time of concentration, (tc).
3.9.2.4 Time of Concentration
It is the time required for the rain-water to flow over the ground surface from the extreme point of the
drainage basin and reach the point under consideration. It is equal to inlet time (t) plus the time of
flow in the sewer (tf).
The inlet time is dependent on the distance of the farthest point in the drainage basin to the inlet
manhole, the shape, characteristics and topography of the basin and may generally vary from 5 to 30
minutes. In highly developed sections, the inlet time may be as low as 3 minutes. The time of flow is
determined by the length of the sewer and the velocity of flow in the sewer. It is to be computed for
each length of sewer to be designed.
a) Tributary Area
For each length of storm sewer, the drainage area should be indicated clearly on the map and
measured. The boundaries of each tributary are dependent on topography, land use, nature of
development and shape of the drainage basins. The incremental area may be indicated separately
on the compilation sheet and the total area computed.
b) Duration of Storm
Continuously long, light rain saturates the soil and produces higher coefficient than that due to,
heavy but intermittent, rain in the same area because of the lesser saturation in the latter case.
The runoff from an area is significantly influenced by the saturation of the surface to nearest the
point of concentration, rather than the flow from the distant area. The runoff coefficient of a larger
area has to be adjusted by dividing the area into zones of concentration and by suitably decreasing
the coefficient with the distance of the zones.
A typical example of the computation of storm runoff is given in Appendix A.3.1.
3 - 10
3.10 MEASUREMENT OF FLOWS IN EXISTING DRAINS/SEWERS
Quite often, the measurement of flows in existing drains or sewers will provide valuable data for a
more realistic assessment of the design flows. In general, non-sewered areas will most certainly be
having a set of drains where the generated sewage will be flowing out. The assessment of the flows
in drains can be done by a variety of methods right from the rudimentary crude method to the most
sophisticated dye tracer method. The choice of methods presented hereunder is considered to be
appropriate to the conditions in the country particularly, away from metropolitan centres.
a) The Float Method
At the very outset, a non-intrusive method is called for. This can be done by finding out the time taken
for a float like an empty match-box or a plastic box to travel for about 3 m in a straight reach and
measuring the width and depth of flow in the drain. If we assume the respective values as 20
seconds, the width as 0.9 m and depth of flow as 0.6 m, the flow can be assessed as 0.8 * 0.9 * 0.6 *
(3/20) * 1000 = 65 lps. The factor of 0.8 is the average velocity in such drains for the depth of flow.
b) The V notch method
This requires the insertion of a V notch plate in the drain at a location where the downstream
discharge can be a free fall. These plates can be cut out from stainless steel (SS) or Teflon sheets
of nominal thickness of about 2 mm and inserted tightly into the drain and the gaps can be closed
by a mixture of clay and cement in equal proportion mixed to a thick consistency and smeared on
the downstream side. The V notch is best chosen such that the angle subtended is 90 degrees.
The clearances to be ensured are shown in Figure 3.1
_____ 2Hmax _____

minimum
.4 . ' ; oc ...
_ *
X X ,
V ,
* -1
w Hmax .
'
: *- - * -
' - a ' ,
2Hmax
* > . minimum
*
* * .* 4 d
1- .* '
*' - * * . -
** * * * i
. V v
- - .? * . , . . >v
V
Figure 3.1 Typical mounting of a V Notch in a drain
The depth of flow is measured over the lower tip of the V bottom and the discharge is
Q = 1.42 * tan of angle of V notch * H power 2.5 (3.5)
3 - 11
As the angle is 90 degrees, the tangent is equal to 1 and hence, the equation simplifies to
Q=1.42x H power 2.5 (3.6)
Where Q is cum/sec and H is in m
c) The rectangular weir method
This can be used if there is already an existing levelled overflow weir like the overflow culverts in
irrigation canals. In smaller drains and in places where workmanship of V notch cuts are difficult,
these can be used easily by cutting a mild steel or wood sheet as shown in Figure 3.2.
_____ L _____
Crest Length ;*
. v
' V->'V
\ *- *
* 4 '
V *
1 '

: :. .
1
* **
* . ' **
4
.
.
2Hmax *'+ V '

, _ fl ----- Hmax minimum
4
' J
* -
" /
a * . . .
! *- * * a -
f _ 4
. v . ' ; -> - v - * , V '0 , ,
' j* **
* * * d '
Figure 3.2 Typical mounting of a rectangular weir in a drain
The depth of flow is measured over the overflow edge of the notch and the discharge is
Q = 1.85 x L x H power 1.5 (3.7)
Where,
Q is cum/sec,
H is in m,
L is the length of weir
d) The rectangular weir with end contractions method
These are similar to the rectangular weir except that the length of the weir is smaller than the width
of the drain as in Figure 3-3 overleaf.
The depth of flow is measured over the overflow edge of the notch and the discharge is
Q = 1.85 x (L - 0.2H) x H power 1.5 (3.8)
Where
Q is cum/sec,
H is in m,
L is the length of weir
3 - 12
Figure 3.3 Typical mounting of a rectangular weir with end constrictions in a drain
e) The Palmer-Bowlus Flume
This can be used in case of both the drains and pipes flowing under gravity. Its major advantages are
(i) less energy loss; (ii) minimal restriction to flow and (iii) Easy installation in existing conduits. It is a
readymade piece for various widths and diameters. The placement in a drain will be as in Figure 3.4
and that in a sewer pipe will be as in Figure 3.5 overleaf.
Figure 3.4 Palmer-Bowlus flume installation in drains
3 - 13
Figure 3.5 Palmer-Bowlus flume installation in circular sewer
This has the specific advantage of its ability to be placed in a manhole to measure the sewage flow in
the gravity sewer as long as the flow is not exceeding the diameter of the sewer. Typical installation
details are seen in Figure 3.6 overleaf.
The depth of flow needs to be measured in only one location and thus it is a lot easier. In addition, it
can be easily removed after measurement. The only disadvantage is it cannot be used when the depth
of flow exceeds the diameter of the sewer and to this extent, it may have limitations in the surcharged
condition of sewers in historical cities. This also has the advantage of facilitating a flow measurement in
large diameter sewers, which flow under gravity and the flume itself is much simpler as in Figure 3.7.
The chart for getting at the flow once the depth is measured is obtained by relating to a standard
curve supplied by the plume manufacturer depending on the shape of the plume. This is also
available as software linked to a personal computer.
The combination of the Palmer-Bowlus and Tracer dye techniques have been reported as early as
1974 as illustrated in Figure 3.7. It is a system worth inducting in large trunk sewers near the outfalls
to have an integrated measurement of the flows and key quality parameters or at least for the flow
details and variation patterns.
3 - 14
Top Left and Right- The installation in manholes by inserting the pipe ends into the sewer
and measuring the depth of flow by ultrasonic sensor to integrate to a computer as needed.
Bottom left- The Flume, originally invented by Palmer & Bowlus for the Los Angeles County
Sanitation District and in use for over three decades, is made by many manufacturers.
Bottom Right- The installation, in a large circular sewer by merely placing the readymade
flume at the invert and measurement of the depth, which can be done by ultrasonic sensor.
Figure 3.6 Configurations and use of Palmer-Bowlus flume
Source: J. Marsalek, 1974

Figure 3.7 Instrumentation for flow measurement and sampling in urban large conduits
3 - 15
f) The Venturi Pipe or the Dall Tube
While dealing with old pumping mains, there is a chance of detecting a venturi pipe fitting in the pipeline,
as was the standard practice in those years. The flow through it is a function of the difference in head of
the fluid at the mouth and the throat and the formula for a given venturi metre is very simple as
Q = K x (a1 x a2) (factor) (3.9)
factor = SQRT (2gh/(a12-a22)) (3.10)
Where
K = 0.95 to 0.98
a1 = area in sqm at mouth
a2 = area in sqm at throat
h = h1-h2
h1 = piezometric water level in m at mouth
h2 = piezometric water level in m at throat
It is thus clear that once the difference in head is measured between sewage pressure head at mouth
and at throat, the square root of the same is directly proportional to the flow. It is possible to connect a
differential Mercury manometer to the sampling ports in the metre and open the quarter turn-cock
when flow needs to be measured and to note the reading. A simple wall chart relating the difference
to the flow will be more than needed. Of course, instrumentation is possible by connecting the two
pressures to a differential pressure transmitter and taking its output to a square root extractor and
then to a multiplier for the constant for the metre and thereby get a continuous reading of the flow
without any interventional systems.
Suffice to say that so far as estimation of flows for design of sewer systems or augmentation of sewer
systems are concerned, where an existing pumping station with a venturi meter in the delivery main is
available, a simple mercury manometer U tube, connected to the ports of the venturi meter may help
in ascertaining the variation of the flow pattern and arrive at peak flow factors etc. more realistically.
A Dall tube is nothing but a venturi pipe-fitting of a reduced length and as otherwise all other
properties of flow measurements are the same.
In fact, if possible this can be inserted into an existing pumping main for the evaluation of the above
flow patterns.
3 - 16
PART - 2 TYPES AND HYDRAULICS OF SEWERS
3.11 TYPES OF COLLECTION SYSTEM
These are separate sewers, combined sewers, pressurized sewers and vacuum sewers.
3.11.1 Separate Sewers
These sewers receive domestic sewage and such industrial wastes pre-treated to the discharge
standards as per the Environment Protection Act 1986. The consent to discharge into sewers are
given by the local pollution control administration.
3.11.2 Combined Sewers
These sewers receive storm water in addition and have some advantages in locations of intermittent
rainfall almost throughout the year and with a terrain permitting gravitated collection and obviously
being confined to a very small region as a whole. As otherwise, in regions of seasonal rainfall like
in monsoons, the combined system will have serious problems in achieving self cleansing velocities
during dry seasons and necessitating complicated egg shaped sewers etc. to sustain velocities at
such times, plus the treatment plant to be designed to manage strong sewage in dry season and
dilute sewage in monsoon season as also the hydraulics. These sewers are also ideally suited
for resorts and private development.
3.11.3 Pressurized Sewers
Pressurized sewers are for collecting sewage from multiple sources to deliver to an existing
collection sewer, and/or to the STP and are not dependent on gravity and thus topography is not
a challenge. Typically, sewage from establishments in the vicinity is collected in a basin fitted with
submersible pump to lift and inject the sewage to a sewer on the shoulder of the roadway, thus
sparing the riding surface from the infamous digging for initial repairs and often for repairs.
The principle advantages are the ability to sewer areas with undulating terrain, rocky soil conditions and
high groundwater tables as pressurized sewers can be laid close to the ground and anchored well
besides there cannot be infiltration, and exfiltration is quickly detected and set right and essentially
smaller diameter pipes and, above all, obviating the cumbersome deep manholes as also road
crossings by CI or DI pipes with trenchless technology laid inside a casing pipe and installation
without disrupting traffic, opening trenches across paved roadways, or moving existing utilities etc.
An important issue is for each plot to have a grinder pump set and each commercial plot to have its
own grease interceptors to remove excessive fats, oils & grease before the grinder pump.
Obviously, this system is not suitable for continuous building area.
A disadvantage is the need to ensure unfailing power supply to the grinder pump and hence this is
perhaps limited to high profile condominiums and not the public sewer systems in India.
A typical profile is shown in Figure 3.8 overleaf.
3 - 17
Source: WERF, Fact sheet 2
Figure 3.8 Profile of Pressurized Sewer system
3.11.4 Vacuum Sewer System
The vacuum sewer collects sewage from multiple sources and conveys it to the STP. As the name
suggests, a vacuum is maintained in the collection system and when a house sewer is opened to
atmospheric pressure, sewage and air are pulled into the sewer, whereby the air forms a plug in
the line, and air pressure pushes the sewage toward the vacuum station. This differential pressure
comes from a central vacuum station. These sewers can take advantage of available slope in the
terrain, but have a limited capacity to pull water uphill may be to some 9 m. Each valve pit is fitted with a
pneumatic pressure-controlled vacuum valve, which automatically opens after a predetermined
volume of sewage has entered the sump. The difference in pressure between the valve pit
(at atmospheric pressure) and the main vacuum line (under negative pressure) pulls sewage and air
through the service line. The amount of air that enters with the sewage is controlled by the length of
time that the valve remains open. When the vacuum valves closes, atmospheric pressure is restored
inside the valve pit. Overall, the lines are installed in a saw-tooth or vertical zig-zag configuration so
that the vacuum created at the central station is maintained throughout the network. A disadvantage
is the need to ensure unfailing power supply to the vacuum pump and hence this is perhaps limited
to high profile condominiums and not the public sewer systems in India. A typical profile is
shown in Figure 3.9.
WERF, Fact sheet 4
Figure 3.9 Profile of Vacuum sewer system
3 - 18
3.12 MATERIALS, SHAPES AND SIZES OF SEWERS
3.12.1 Introduction
Factors influencing the selection of materials for sewers are flow characteristics,
availability in the sizes required including fittings and ease of handling and installation, water
tightness and simplicity of assembly, physical strength, resistance to acids, alkalies, gases, solvents,
etc., resistance to scour, durability and cost including handling and installation. No single material
will meet all the conditions that may be encountered in sewer design. Selection should be made for
the particular application and different materials may be selected for parts of a single project. The
determination of the suitability in all respects of the pipes and specials for any work is a matter of
decision by the engineer concerned on the basis of requirements for the scheme and guided by
Appendix A.3-10 on relative limitations on use of pipe materials in specific locations.
3.12.2 Brick
Brickwork is used for construction of sewers, particularly in larger diameters. Many old brick
sewers are still in use and the failures are mainly due to the disintegration of the bricks or the mortar
joints. Because of the comparatively higher cost, larger space requirement, slower progress of work
and other factors, brick is now used for sewer construction only in special cases. The advantage of
brick sewers is that these could be constructed to any required shape and size. Brick sewers shall
have cement concrete or stone for invert and 12.5 mm thick cement plaster with neat finish for the
remaining surface. To prevent ground water infiltration, it is desirable to plaster the outside surface.
Inside plaster can be with mortar using high alumina cement conforming to IS 6452 or polyurea
coating and the outer surface shall be plastered with mortar using sulphate resistant cement.
3.12.3 Concrete
The advantages of concrete pipes are the relative ease with which the required strength may be
provided, feasibility of adopting a wide range of pipe sizes and the rapidity with which the trench
may be backfilled. However, these pipes are subject to crown corrosion by sulphide gas, mid depth
water line corrosion by sulphate and outside deterioration by sulphate from soil water. These shall
be manufactured with sulphate resistant cement and with high alumina coating on the inside at the
manufacturers works itself. Protective measures as outlined in corrosion protection in sewers shall
be provided where excessive corrosion is likely to occur.
3.12.3.1 Precast concrete
Plain cement concrete pipes are used in sewer systems on a limited scale only and generally,
reinforced concrete pipes are used. Non-pressure pipes are used for gravity flow and pressure
pipes are used for force mains, submerged outfalls, inverted siphons and for gravity sewers where
absolute water-tight joints are required. Non-pressure pipes used for construction of sewers and
culverts shall confirm to the IS 458. Certain heavy-duty pipes that are not specified in IS 458 should
conform to other approved standards.
3 - 19
3.12.3.2 Cast-in-situ Reinforced Concrete
Cast-in-situ reinforced concrete sewers are constructed where they are more economical, or
when non-standard sections are required, or when a special shape is required or when the
headroom and working space are limited. The sewer shape shall be of an economic design, easy to
construct and maintain and shall have good hydraulic characteristics. Wide flat culvert bottoms shall
be provided with "Vee of at least 15 cm cuvettes in the centre. All formwork for concrete sewers shall
be unyielding and tight and shall produce a smooth sewer interior. Collapsible steel forms will produce
the desirable sewer surface, and may be used when the sewer size and length justify the expense.
It is desirable to specify a minimum clear cover of 50 mm over reinforcement steel and a minimum
slump consistent with workability shall be used for obtaining a dense concrete structure free of voids.
The distance for cutting concrete shall be kept to a minimum to avoid segregation and the vibrating
of concrete done by approved mechanical vibrators. Air entraining cement or plasticizing agents may
be used to improve workability and ensure a denser concrete. Concrete shall conform to IS 456.
3.12.4 Stoneware or Vitrified Clay
These pipes are normally available in lengths of 90 cm and the joints need caulking with yarn
soaked in cement mortar and packing in the spigot and socket joints, which requires skilled labour.
Specifications for the AA class and A class are identical except that in the case of class AA pipes,
one hundred percent hydraulic testing has to be carried out at the manufacturing stage, whereas in
the case of Class A only five percent of the pipes are tested hydraulically by following IS 651. The
resistance of vitrified clay pipes to corrosion from most acids and to erosion due to grit and high
velocities gives it an advantage over other pipe materials in handling acid concentrations. A mini
mum crushing strength of 1,600 kg/m is usually adopted for all sizes manufactured presently. The
strength of vitrified clay pipes often necessitates special bedding or concrete cradling to improve field
supportive strength.
3.12.5 Asbestos Cement
For sewerage works, asbestos cement pipes are usually used in sizes ranging from 80 mm
to 1000 mm in diameter. Standard specifications have been framed by the BIS in IS 6908. Non
corrosiveness to most natural soil conditions, freedom from electrolytic corrosion, good flow
characteristics, light weight, ease in cutting, drilling, threading and fitting with specials, allowance of
greater deflection up to 12 degrees with mechanical joints, ease of handling, tight joints and quick
laying and backfilling are to be considered. These pipes cannot however stand high super imposed
loads and may be broken easily. They are subject to corrosion by acids, highly septic sewage and
by highly acidic or high sulphate soils. Protective measures as outlined in corrosion protection in
sewers shall be provided in such cases. While using AC pipes strict enforcement of approved
bedding-practices will reduce possibility of flexible failure.
Where grit is present, high velocities such as those encountered on steep grades may cause erosion.
It is stated that in a recent process of manufacture titled Maaza, high forming pressures of up to 80
kg / sqcm, leading to very smooth surface and very few air pores are possible. However, the relevant
BIS standard or code of practice is awaited.
3 - 20
3.12.6 Cast Iron
Cast Iron pipes and fittings are being manufactured in the country for several years. These pipes are
available in diameters from 80 mm to 1050 mm and are covered with protective coatings. Pipes are
supplied in 3.66 m and 5.5 m lengths and a variety of joints are available including socket, spigot,
and flanged joints. These pipes have been classified as LA, A and B according to their thickness.
Class LA pipes have been taken as the basis for evolving the series of pipes. Class A pipes allow 10
% increase in thickness over class LA. Class B pipes allows 20 % increase in thickness over class
LA. Cast iron pipes with a variety of jointing methods are used for pressure sewers, sewers above
ground surface, submerged outfalls, piping in sewage treatment plants and occasionally on gravity
sewers where absolutely water-tight joints are essential or where special considerations require their
use. IS 1536 and IS 1537 give the specifications for spun, and vertically cast pipes respectively. The
advantage of cast iron pipes are long laying lengths with tight joints, ability when properly designed
to withstand relatively high internal pressure and external loads and corrosion resistance in most
natural soils. They are however subject to corrosion by acids or highly septic sewage and acidic
soils. Whenever it is necessary to deflect pipes from a straight line either in the horizontal or in the
vertical plane, the amount of deflection allowed should not normally exceed 2.5 degrees for lead
caulked joints. In mechanical joints, the deflection shall be limited to 5 degrees for 80 to 300 mm dia,
4 degrees for 350 to 400 mm diameter and 3 degrees from 400 to 750 mm diameter pipes.
Inside coating shall be by Cement mortar and outer coating shall be coal tar both carried out at the
manufacturers works and conforming to the relevant BIS standards/codes of practice.
3.12.7 Steel
Pressure sewer mains, under water river crossings, bridge crossings, necessary connections
for pumping stations, self-supporting spans, railway crossing and penstocks are some of the
situations where steel pipes are preferred. Steel pipes can withstand internal pressure, impact load and
vibrations much better than CI pipe. They are more ductile and withstand water hammer better. For
buried sewers, spirally welded pipes are relatively stronger than horizontally welded sewers. The
disadvantage of steel pipe is that it cannot withstand high external load. Further, the main is likely
to collapse when it is subjected to negative pressure. Steel pipes are susceptible to various types of
corrosion. A thorough soil survey is necessary all along the alignment where steel pipes are
proposed. Steel pipes shall be coated inside by high alumina cement mortar or polyurea and outside
by epoxy. Steel pipes shall conform to IS 3589. Electrically welded steel pipes of 200 mm to 2,000
mm diameter for gas, water and sewage and laying should conform to IS 5822.
3.12.8 Ductile Iron Pipes
Ductile iron is made by a metallurgical process, which involves the addition of magnesium into molten
iron of low sulphur content. The magnesium causes the graphite in the iron to precipitate in the form
of microscopic (6.25 micron) spheres rather than flakes found in ordinary cast iron. The spheroidal
graphite in iron improves the properties of ductile iron. The ductile iron pipes are normally prepared
using the centrifugal cast process. The ductile iron pipes are usually provided with cement mortar
lining at the factory by centrifugal process to ensure a uniform thickness throughout its length.
3 - 21
Cement mortar lining is superior to bituminous lining as the form er provides a smooth surface and
prevents tuberculation by creating a high pH at the pipe wall and ultimately by providing a physical
and chemical barrier to the water.
The Indian standard IS 8329 provides specification for the centrifugally cast ductile iron pipes (similar
to ISO 2531 and EN 1994). These pipes are available in the range of 80 mm to 1000 mm diameter, in
lengths of 5.5 to 6 m. These pipes are manufactured in the country with ISO 9002 accreditation.
The ductile iron pipes have excellent properties of machinability, impact resistance, high wear and
tear resistance, high tensile strength and ductility and corrosion resistance. DI pipes, having same
composition of CI pipe, will have same expected life as that of CI pipes. They are strong, both
inner and outer surfaces are smooth, free from lumps, cracks, blisters and scars. The ductile iron
pipes stand up to hydraulic pressure tests as required by service regulations. These pipes are
approximately 30 % lighter than conventional cast iron pipes. The ductile iron pipes are lined with
cement mortar in the factory by centrifugal process and unlined ductile iron pipes are also available.
The ductile iron fittings are manufactured conforming to IS 9523. The joints for ductile iron pipes
are suitable for use of rubber gaskets conforming to IS 5383.
3.12.9 Non-Metallic Non-Concrete Synthetic Material Pipes
The main advantage of these pipes is their ability not to be affected by corrosion from
sulphides or sulphates but they require precautions as detailed in clause under the sub title laying of
sewers and need to be ascertained and sorted out on specific cases. They require precautions as
detailed in clause under the sub title "laying of sewers and evaluated on case-by-case basis. An
additional criterion is the ability of these pipes to withstand the mechanical jet rodding machines
as in Figure 3.10 to clear the obstructions in sewers.
The mechanized reverse jet at the nozzle releasing a "jack hammer action.
Figure 3.10 Jet rodding cum vacuum, suction sewer cleaning machine
The jet in these machines is a jack hammer action through a triplex plunger pump releasing the
treated sewage backwards as in Figure 3.10 and the hydraulic pressures are in the range of 50 to
60 bar. The jet in the reverse direction of sewer flow acts like an airplane jet and propels the nozzle
forward, and thus drills through the choked up blocks and clears the obstructions however tough
they are. While the ability of the metallic and concrete sewer pipes to withstand this jet action at that
pressure is by now well established in the country mainly due to the rubber ring joints, the ability
of the non-metallic synthetic material sewer pipes are to be established hereafter in the country.
3 - 22
Moreover, their track record in other locations in such applications shall be suitably evaluated
before adoption. In general, the homogenous wall composition can be relied better than
multi-layered adhesive based wall composition.
3.12.9.1 UPVC Pipe
The chief advantages of UPVC pipe are resistance to corrosion, light weight for transportation,
toughness, rigidity, economical in laying, jointing, and maintenance and easy to fabricate.
To prevent buoyancy the pipes can be tied to poles driven into the ground. IS 15328 deals with non
pressure unplasticized polyvinylchloride (PVC) for use in underground sewerage system. IS 9271
deals with the unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (UPVC) single wall corrugated pipes for drainage.
3.12.9.2 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipes
The advantages of these pipes offering smooth interior surfaces and offering relatively highest
resistance to corrosion are recognized and they are available in solid wall. When laid in straight
gradients without humps or depressions, they can easily offer longer life cycle.
Methods of joints are usually fusion welded or flange jointed depending on straight runs or fittings.
Standard specifications have been framed by the BIS in IS 14333 for sewerage application.
3.12.9.3 Structured Wall Piping
These pipes can be manufactured in PVC-U, PP and PE as per EN 13476-3 / IS 16098. The walls
of these pipes are either double walled or ribbed wall. The BIS for pipes and fittings with PVC-U
material having smooth external surface Type A is IS 16098 (Part-1) and for pipes and fittings with PE
and PP material having non-smooth external surface Type B is IS 16098 (Part-2). The Type B pipes
are generally known as Double Walled Corrugated (DWC) pipes. In India, DWC pipes are produced
in sizes 75 mm ID to 1,000 mm ID with a standard length of 6 m for easy transportation and handling
and to reduce the number of joints required.
3.12.9.4 Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastic Pipes (GRP)
GRP Pipes are widely used in other countries where corrosion resistant pipes are required at
reasonable costs. GRP can be used as a lining material for conventional pipes which are subject to
corrosion. Fibre glass can resist external and internal corrosion whether the corrosion mechanism is
galvanic or chemical in nature. Standard specifications have been framed by the BIS in IS 14402.
3.12.9.5 Fibre Glass Reinforced Plastic Pipes (FRP)
Fibre-glass reinforced plastic pipe is a matrix or composite of glass fibre, polyester resin and filters.
These pipes possess better strength, durability, high tensile strength, low density and are highly
corrosion resistant. Fibre-glass pressure pipes are manufactured in diameters up to 2,400 mm and
length up to 18 m. These pipes are now being taken up for manufacture in India.
3 - 23
3.12.9.6 Pitch Fibre Pipes
The pitch impregnated fibre pipes are light in weight and have shown their durability in service. The
pipes can be easily jointed in any weather condition as internally tapered couplings join the pipes
without the use of jointing compound.
They are flexible, resistant to heat, freezing and thawing and earth currents, which cause electrolytic
action. They are also unaffected by acids and other chemicals, water softeners, sewer gases, oils
and greases and laundry detergents.
They can be cut to required length on the site. Due to its longer length, the cost of jointing, handling
and laying is reduced. These are generally recommended for uses such as septic tanks and house
connection to sewers, farm drainage, down pipes, storm drains, industrial waste drainage, etc.
These are manufactured in India with 50 to 225 mm nominal diameter and length varying from 1.5
to 3.5 m. These pipes are joined by taper coupling joints or rubber ring joints. The details of the pipes,
fittings, etc., are covered in IS 11925.
3.13 SHAPE AND SIZE OF SEWERS
a) In general, circular sewer sections are ideal from load bearing point of view in public roads and
as the hydraulic properties are better for varying flows.
b) However, for large flows, the egg-shaped sections are superior for both load transmission and
velocity at minimum flows plus ability to flush out sediments in the bottom V portion when peak
flow arises. These are normally of RCC, either cast in situ or pre-cast as also brickwork, though
brickwork has its challenges of quality assessment and quality control.
c) Box conduits are also possible provided the inner corners are chamfered and the bottom
finished as cuvettes instead of flat floor. They are perhaps best suited as a cover for taking higher
diameter gravity circular sewers across roads, railway crossings, river crossings, etc. These can
be built in situ with brickwork or cast in situ concrete. They can also be made in pre-cast sections
duly jointed. In all cases plastering is needed on the inside and soil side and on the top side and
the corners shall be filleted.
d) In early stages of new housing plot layouts, it is invariably the septic tank that is provided in
the built up plots and either the septage is either sucked out periodically and sometimes
surreptitiously emptied at random locations or simply discharged into the road drains or officially
discharged into treatment plants or pumping stations. Nevertheless, there are many places
where it is merely let into roadside drains or merely on road sides which complicates
environmental issues. The twin drain system can be used, which comprises an
integrally built twin drain with the drain nearer to the property carrying the septic tank effluent
and grey water and the drain on the road-side carrying the storm water. The sewer drains are
interconnected to flow out to treatment. A typical system in use in coastal areas of Tamil Nadu
in Tsunami affected rehabilitation centres is pictured in Figure 3.11 overleaf.
3 - 24
Part A: Engineering___________________________________________________ CONSTRUCTION OF SEWERS
The twin drain under

- C l s v S H , construction and after
commissioning at the Tsunami
rehabilitated fisher folk
& ' k
w / i y settlement. The house side drain
receives septic tank effluent and
I l \ v is with removable cover slabs.
Source: M/s. Kottar Social Service Society, Nagercoil & M/s. Caritas India & M/s. Caritas Germany
Figure 3.11 Twin drain system
3.14 MINIMUM SIZE OF CIRCULAR SEWERS
The minimum diameter may be adopted as 200 mm for cities having present / base year
population of over 1 lakh. However, depending on growth potential in certain areas even 150 mm
diameter can also be considered. However, in towns having present / base year population of less
than 1 lakh, the minimum diameter of 150 mm shall be adopted.
In the case of hilly locations, the minimum diameter of 150 mm shall be adopted. The house sewer
connection pipe to public sewer shall be (a) minimum 100 mm or higher based on the number of
houses / flats connected and (b) subject to the receiving public sewer being of higher diameter.
3.15 FLOW IN CIRCULAR SEWERS
If the velocity and depth of flow is the same for the length of a conduit, it is termed steady flow and
as otherwise, it is non-steady flow. The hydraulic analysis of sewers is simplified by assuming steady
flow conditions though the actual flow conditions are different during morning peak flows and varying
flows in other parts of the 24 hours.
In the design of sanitary sewers, an attempt shall be made to obtain adequate scouring
velocities at the average or at least at the maximum flow at the beginning of the design period. The flow
velocity in the sewers shall be such that the suspended materials in sewage are not silted up;
i.e., the velocity shall be such as to cause automatic self-cleansing effect. The generation of such a
minimum self cleansing velocity in the sewer, at least once a day is important, because if depositions
are takes place and is not removed, it will obstruct free flow, causing further deposition and finally
leading to the complete blocking of the sewer.
The smooth interior surface of a sewer pipe gets scoured due to continuous abrasion caused by the
suspended solids present in sewage. It is, therefore, necessary to limit the maximum velocity in the
sewer pipe. This limiting or non-scouring velocity will mainly depend upon the material of the sewer.
Thus the sewers are designed on the assumption that although silting might occur at minimum flow, it
would be flushed out during peak flows. Erosion of sewers is caused by sand and other gritty material
in the sewer and by excessive velocity.
3 - 25
3.15.1 Minimum Velocity for Preventing Sedimentation
To ensure that deposition of suspended solids does not take place, self-cleansing velocities using
Shields formula is considered in the design of sewers.
(3.11)
n
where, n = Mannings n
R= Hydraulic Mean Radius in m
KS = Dimensionless constant with a value of about 0.04 to start motion of granular
particles and about 0.8 for adequate self cleansing of sewers
SS = Specific gravity of particle
dp = Particle size in mm
The above formula indicates that velocity required to transport material in sewers is mainly
dependent on the particle size and specific gravity and slightly dependent on conduit shape and
depth of flow. The specific gravity of grit is usually in the range of 2.4 to 2.65. Gravity sewers shall
be designed for the velocities as in Table 3.9.
Table 3.9 Design velocities to be ensured in gravity sewers
No Criteria Value
1 Minimum velocity at initial peak flow 0.6 m/s
2 Minimum velocity at ultimate peak flow 0.8 m/s
3 Maximum velocity 3 m/s
Source: WPCF, ASCE, 1982
3.15.2 Minimum Velocity for Preventing Hydrogen Sulphide in Sewers
The velocity shall be not only self cleansing but also be sufficient to keep the submerged surfaces
of the sewer free from slimes and prevent the generation of Hydrogen Sulphide gas which can
attack the cement concrete sewers. It is useful to define a climatic condition as the combination of the
average temperature for the warmest three months of the year and the average 6-hour high flow BOD
for the day. Where diurnal BOD curves have not been made, it may be assumed that this BOD is 1.25
times the BOD of flow proportioned 24-hour composite. The effective BOD defined by the equation:
(EBOD) = (BOD)c x i.0 7 (Tc-20) (3.12)
Where
EBOD = Effective EBOD in mg/l

(BOD)c = Climatic BOD in mg/l
Tc = Climatic temperature in degrees Celsius
1.07 = Empirical coefficient

The reference for E BOD is from ASCE Manuals and Reports on Engineering Practice No. 60.
3 - 26
3.15.2.1 Potential for Sulphide Build up
Another indicator of the likelihood of sulphide build up in relatively small gravity sewers (not over
600 mm diameter) is given by the formula:
Z = [EBOD/(S050 x Q033)] x (P/b) (3.13)
Where
Z= Defined function
S= Hydraulic slope
Q= Discharge volume in m3/sec
P= Wetted perimeter in meters
b= Surface width in meters.
The reference for sulphide generation is WPCF, ASCE, 1982.
The sulphide generation based on Z values are given in Table 3.10
Table 3.10 Sulphide generation based on Z values
Z Values Sulphide Condition
Z < 5,000 Sulphide rarely generated
5,000 < Z < 10,000 Marginal condition for sulphide generation
Z > 10,000 Sulphide generation common
Source: WPCF, ASCE, 1982
3.15.3 Maximum Velocity
Erosion is caused by sand and other gritty material and is compounded by high velocities and hence
the maximum velocity shall be limited to 3 m/s. In hilly areas where the slope and flows gets fixed, the
velocity also gets automatically fixed. If such velocities exceed 3 m/sec in hilly areas, use of cast iron
and ductile iron pipes shall be made with socket and spigot joints and O rings and the sockets facing
uphill. The provision of structures like drop manholes can also be made to dissipate the energy.
3.15.4 Mannings Formula for Gravity Flow
V - [(l/w )]x [i? 2/3 SV2 (3-14)
For c irc u la r co n d u its
. 1/2
V = ( l/w ) (3.968x1 O '3) d 2'3 S' (3-15)
and
1/2
Q = (l/ )(3 .1 1 8 x 1 0 6) d 267 S (3-16)
3 - 27
where,
Q : Discharge in l/s
S : Slope of hydraulic gradient
D : Internal diameter of pipe line in mm
R : Hydraulic radius in m
y : Velocity in m/s
n : Mannings coefficient of roughness as in Table 3-11
A chart for Mannings formula is in Appendix A.3.2 A and A 3.2 B for the stated ranges of discharges
therein. These can be used to initially verify
(a) the tentative size, and slope of the required sewer for a given flow rate and velocity, or
(b) The tentative flow rate and slope of a chosen sewer size and velocity.
It is not easy to read these values precisely to decimal values from the graph and hence, it is
recommended to recheck the values in the MS Excel spreadsheet given in Appendix A.3.3. There are
also similar nomograms, etc. but the precision is best obtained in MS Excel.
3.15.5 Design Depth of Flow
The sewers shall not run full as otherwise the pressure will rise above or fall below the atmospheric
pressure and condition of open channel flow will cease to exist. Moreover, from consideration of
ventilation, sewers should not be designed to run full. In case of circular sewers, the Mannings
formula reveals that:
The velocity at 0.8 depth of flow is 1.14 times the velocity at full depth of flow.
The discharge at 0.8 depth of flow is 0.98 times the discharge at full depth of flow.
Accordingly, the maximum depth of flow in design shall be limited to 0.8 of the diameter at ultimate
peak flow. In order to facilitate the calculations easily, the hydraulic properties at various depths of
flow are compiled in Figure 3.12 and Figure 3.13 and Table 3.12.
3 - 28
Table 3.11 Mannings coefficient of roughness n for stated materials
Mannings
Type of Material Condition
n
(a) Good 0.012

Salt glazed stone ware pipe
(b) Fair 0.015
(a) Good 0.013
Cement concrete pipes (With collar joints)
(b) Fair 0.015
Spun concrete pipes (RCC & PSC),With S / S Joints, (Design Value) 0.011
(a) Neat cement plaster 0.018
(b) Sand and cement plaster 0.015
(c) Concrete, steel troweled 0.014
Masonry (d) Concrete, wood troweled 0.015
(e) Brick in good condition 0.015
(f) Brick in rough condition 0.017
(g) Masonry in bad condition 0.020
(a) Smooth, dressed ashlar 0.015
Stone-work (b) Rubble set in cement 0.017
(c) Fine, well packed gravel 0.020
(a) Regular surface in good condition 0.020
(b) In ordinary condition 0.025
Earth (c) With stones and weeds 0.030
(d) In poor condition 0.035
(e) Partially obstructed with debris or weeds 0.050
(a) Welded 0.013
(b) Riveted 0.017
Steel
(c) Slightly tuberculated 0.020
(d) With spun cement mortar lining 0.011
(a) Unlined 0.013
Cast Iron / Ductile Iron
(b) With spun cement mortar lining 0.011
Asbestos cement 0.011
Plastic (smooth) 0.011
FRP 0.01
HDPE/UPVC 0.01
Note: Values of n may be taken as 0.015 for unlined metallic pipes and 0.011 for plastic
and other smooth pipes.
3 - 29
V A LU E S O F
1.0 12 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6
t
\ f variabie with depth / / 1 N\ \
\ ^t
------------ n, f constant
\
------------ in dependent of n, f / i I
\ / i 1
s /
s / /
/
e
T3 \ s'
O \
<
D
E Discharge
s ' /
<0 HYDF AULIC
\ a RADI IS R
B 0.5 y
Mat ining's n j f
> S* >
/ /
2o -4
Veloc ty, v ^
o
K ^
3 0-3 */ y
^ A r ;a, A ^
/ / y
02 / /
*
/ /
/
0.1 /
I ' A :
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 12 1J
Hydraulic elem ents -j^-AND
Figure 3.12 Hydraulic - Element graph for circular sewers
VALUES OF- Si
1.0
/ / / \
/ / f t \
0.9 / t
// i
I
/f i
0.8
RAT w :OR n\> ARIABl E / l
/ J
WIT H DEPT H ~ / J I
0.7 /
/ I
/ i
a \ /'
!
i
^ 0.6
\
/ l
O RA 'O -W I
\
05
\
\
F PR n V; \RIABL {
N.
0.5 \
\ -OIL
WITH 1
\
EATIO
\
\
~ FOR /
0.4
/ /
cc )NSTAh
/ \ s /
/ / R> L FOR
0.3 / >
RATIO f r FO R BOTh / CONS TANT
/
/ )NSTAh IT AND n VARI/ ]L y
0.2 V /ITH DE PTH J
\
\
/
\
0.1
0/ 0.2 0.4 0.6 1.0 1.2
VALUES OF ^ A N D ^
Figure 3.13 Hydraulic elements of circular sewers that possess equal self-cleansing
properties at all depths
3 - 30
Table 3.12 Hydraulic properties of circular sections for Mannings formula
Constant (n) Variable (n
d/D v/V q/Q nd/n v/V q/Q
1.0 1.000 1.000 1.00 1.000 1.000
0.9 1.124 1.066 1.07 1.056 1.020
0.8 1.140 0.968 1.14 1.003 0.890
0.7 1 120 0.838 1.18 0.952 0712
0.6 1.072 0.671 1.21 0.890 0.557
0.5 1.000 0.500 1.24 0.810 0.405
0.4 0.902 0.337 1.27 0.713 0.266
0.3 0 776 0.196 1.28 0.605 0.153
0.2 0.615 0,088 1.27 0,486 0.070
0.1 0.401 0.021 1.22 0.329 0.017
Where,
D = Depth of flow (internal dia) d = Actual depth of flow
V = Velocity at full depth v = Velocity at depth d
n = Mannings coefficient at full depth nd = Mannings coefficient at depth d
Q = Discharge at full depth q = Discharge at depth d
For practical purposes, it is not possible to measure the value of nd and hence only the fixed value of
Mannings n shall be used. The method of using the Table 3-12 is illustrated in Appendix A.3.4 A and
A 3.4 B for stated ranges of discharges for typical cases in day-to-day situations of design of circular
sewer pipes under gravity flow conditions. In as much as the determination of the varying values of n is
difficult and has many uncertainties, the formula shall be used with constant values of n only.
3.15.6 Slope of Sewer
The minimum slopes in Table 3.13 shall be applicable:
Table 3.13 Minimum slopes of sanitary sewers
Sewer Size Minimum S ope Sewer Size Minimum Slope

(mm) As percent As 1 in (mm) As percent As 1 in
150 0.6 170 375 0.15 670
200 0.40 250 450 0.12 830
250 0.28 360 >525 0.10 1000
300 0.22 450
3 - 31
3.16 HYDRAULICS OF SEWERS FLOWING UNDER PRESSURE
3.16.1 Type of Flow
The hydraulic analysis of pumping mains is approached based on turbulent flow conditions to ensure
that the suspended matter does not settle during pumping.
3.16.2 Hazen-Williams Formula
F = 0.849 C R 63 S'054 (3.17)
for circular conduits, the expression becomes
V ~ 4 . 5 6 7 x 1 0 3 C D 0 63 S 054 (3 -1 8 >
Q = 1.292 x ic r5c D z'63 S'54 (3'19^

where,
Q : Discharge in m3/hr
D : Internal diameter of pipe in mm
V : Velocity in m/s
R : Hydraulic radius in m
S : Slope of hydraulic gradient and
C : Hazen - Williams coefficient as in Table 3.14 overleaf.
A chart for Hazen W illiams formula is in Appendix A. 3.5 A and A 3.5 B for stated ranges of
discharges. This can be used to initially verify -:
(a) The tentative size, and slope of the required sewer for a given flow rate and velocity, or
(b) The tentative flow rate and slope of a chosen sewer size and velocity.
It is not easy to read these values precisely to decimal values from the graph and hence, it is
recommended to recheck the values in the MS Excel given in Appendix A.3.6.
3.17 SEWER TRANSITIONS
3.17.1 Connections of Different Sewers
Where sewers of different characteristics are connected, sewer transitions occur. The difference may
be in terms of flow, area, shape, grade, alignment and conduit material, with a combination of one or
all characteristics. Transitions may be in the normal cases streamlined and gradual and can occur
suddenly in limiting cases. Head lost in a transition is a function of velocity head and hence assumes
importance in the flat terrain. Deposits also impose significant losses. For design purposes, it is
assumed that energy losses and changes in depth, velocity and invert elevation occur at the
centre of transition and afterwards these changes are distributed throughout the length of transition.
3 - 32
Table 3.14 Hazen-Williams coefficients
Recom m ended
values for
No. C onduit Material
New
Design
Pipes(A)
1 Unlined m etallic pipes
C ast iron, Ductile iron 130 100
Mild steel 140 100
2 C entrifugally lined m etallic pipes
C ast iron, Ductile iron and Mild steel pipes lined with cem ent m ortar or epoxy
Up to 1200 mm dia 140 140
A bove 1200 mm dia 145 145
3 Projection method cem ent m ortar lined m etallic pipes
C ast iron, Ductile iron and Mild steel pipes 130(B) 110(C)
4 N on-m etallic pipes
RCC spun concrete upto 1200 mm diam eter 140 140
RCC spun concrete above 1200 mm diam eter 145 145
Pre-stressed concrete upto 1200 mm diam eter 140 140
Pre-stressed concrete above 1200 mm diam eter 145 145
A sbestos cem ent 150 140
HDPE, UPVC, GRP, FRP 150 140
Note:
a The C values for new pipes included in the above table are for determining the acceptability of
surface finish of new pipelines. The user agency may specify that flow test may be conducted for
determining the C values of laid pipelines.
b For pipes of diameter 500 mm and above, the range of C values may be from 90 to 125 for pipes
less than 500 mm.
c In the absence of specific data, this value is recommended. However, in case authentic field data
is available, higher rates upto 130 may be adopted.
Note: Even though the C value can be taken as 145 for Water supply, but for sewage, 140 shall be taken for
design purpose.
3 - 33
The energy head, piezometric head (depth) and invert as elevation are noted and working from
Energy grade line, the required invert drop or rise is determined. However, if the calculations indicate
a rise in invert it is ignored since such a rise will create a damming effect leading to deposition of
solids.
For open-channel transition in subcritical flow the loss of energy is expressed as:
(3.20)
Where
(V2/2g) is change of velocity head before and after transition,

K = 0.1 for contractions and 0.2 for expansions.
In transitions for supercritical flow, additional factors must be considered, since standing waves of
considerable magnitude may occur or in long transitions air entrapment may cause backing of flow.
Allowance for the head loss that occurs at these transitions has to be made in the design.
Manholes shall be located at all such transitions and a drop shall be provided where the sewer is
intercepted at a higher elevation for streamlining the flow, taking care of the head loss and to help
in maintenance. The vertical drop may be provided only when the difference between the elevations
is more than 60 cm, below which it can be avoided by adjusting the slope in the channel and in the
manhole connecting the two inverts. The following invert drops are recommended:
(a) For sewers less than 400 mm Half the difference in dia.
(b) 400 mm to 900 mm 2/3 the difference in dia.
(c) Above 900 mm 4/5 the difference in dia.
Transition from larger to smaller diameters shall not be made. The crowns of sewers are always
kept continuous. In no case, the hydraulic flow line in the large sewers shall be higher than the
incoming one. To avoid backing up, the crown of the outgoing sewer shall not be higher than the
crown of incoming sewer.
3.17.2 Bends
The head loss in bends is expressed by:
(3.21)
Where
kb is a friction coefficient, which is a function of the ratio of radius of curvature of the bend to
the width of conduit, deflection angle, and cross section of flow.
The friction factor for various fittings are given in Table 4-2 in Chapter 4.
3 - 34
3.17.3 Junction
A junction occurs where one or more branch sewers enter a main sewer. The hydraulic design
is in effect, the design of two or more transitions, one for each path of flow. Apart from hydraulic
considerations, well-rounded junctions are required to prevent deposition. Because of difficulty in
theoretically calculating the hydraulic losses at junctions, some general conditions may be checked
to ensure the proper design of junctions. If available energy at junctions is small, gently sloping
transitions may be used. The angle of entry may be 30 degrees or 45 degrees with reference to
axis of main sewer, whenever ratio of branch sewer diameter to main sewer diameter is one half or
less. Junctions are sized so that the velocities in the merging streams are approximately equal at
maximum flow. If considerable energy is available in long sewers at a junction, a series of steps
may be provided in the branch to produce a cascade or it may be designed as a hydraulic jump to
dissipate energy in the branch before entering the main sewer. Vertical pipe drops are used
frequently at junctions for which main sewer lies well below the branch sewers, particularly if the ratio
of branch sewer diameter and main sewer diameter is small. These pipe drops are designed with
an entrance angle of 30 degrees with the main sewer.
3.17.4 Vertical Drops and Other Energy Dissipators
In developed areas, it may sometimes be necessary and economical to take the trunk sewers
deep enough like tunnels. In such cases, the interceptors and laterals may be dropped vertically
through shafts to the deep trunk sewers or tunnels. Hydraulic problems encountered with such deep
vertical drops may be difficult to solve and may be some times solved by model studies. Vertical
drops must be designed to avoid entrapment of air. Such entrapped air in a shaft can result in surges,
which may reduce the capacity of intake. Entrapped air may not be able to flow along the sewer
and escape through another ventilation shaft. Air problems can be minimised by designing a shaft
with an open vortex in the middle for full depth of drop. To accomplish this, the flow is to be inducted
tangentially into inlet chamber at the head of the shaft. If the vertical drop is likely to cause
excessive turbulence, it may be desirable to terminate the drop in the branch to dampen the flow
before it enters the main flow. Another type of vertical drop incorporates a water cushion to
absorb the impact of a falling jet. Water cushion required has been found to be equal to h1/2 d1/3 in
which h is the height of fall and d is depth of the crest. Special chutes or steeply inclined sewers
can be constructed instead of vertical drops. All drops cause release of gasses and maintenance
problems, and hence shall be avoided to the extent where possible.
3.17.5 Inverted Siphon
When a sewer line dips below the hydraulic grade line, it is called an inverted siphon. The
purpose is to carry the sewer under the obstruction and regain as much elevation as possible after the
obstruction is passed. They shall be resorted to only where other means of passing the
obstruction are not feasible, as they require considerable attention in maintenance. As the siphons are
depressed below the hydraulic grade line, maintenance of self-cleansing velocity at all flows is very
important. Two considerations that govern the profile of a siphon are provision for hydraulic losses
and ease of cleaning. It is necessary to ascertain the minimum flows and the peak flows for design.
3 - 35
To ensure self-cleansing velocities for the wide variations in flows, generally, two or more pipes
not less than 200 mm diameter are provided in parallel so that up to the average flows, the first
pipe is used and when the flow exceeds the average, the balance flow is taken by the second and
subsequent pipes. Siphons may need cleaning more often than gravity sewers and hence
shall not have any sharp bends either horizontal or vertical. Only smooth curves of adequate
radius shall be used and the entry and exit piping shall be at a slope of as close to 30 degrees to
horizontal. The design criteria for inverted siphons are given in IS 4111, Part III. Some of the
important criteria are given below.
3.17.6 Hydraulic Calculations for Inverted Siphon
As the inverted siphon is a pipe under pressure, a difference in the water levels at the inlet and outlet
is the head under which the siphon operates. This head shall be sufficient to cover the entry, exit and
friction losses in pipes. The friction loss through the barrel will be determined by the design velocity.
The Hazen-Williams formula can be used for calculation of head loss.
3.17.7 Velocity in Inverted Siphon Sewers
It is necessary to have a self-cleansing velocity of 1.0 m/s for the minimum flow to avoid deposition
in the line.
3.17.8 Size and Arrangement of Pipes
In the multiple-pipe siphons, the inlet shall be such that the pipes come into action successively as
the flow increases. This may be achieved by providing lateral weirs with heights kept in accordance
with the depth of flow at which one or more siphon pipes function. Figure 3.14 gives the general
arrangement for a three-way siphon. In the two-pipe siphon, the first pipe shall take 1.25 to 1.5 times
the average flow and second shall take the balance of the flow.

Figure 3.14 Inverted siphon or suppressed sewer for combined sewage
3 - 36
3.17.9 Inlet and Outlet Chambers
The design of inlet and outlet chambers shall allow sufficient room for entry for cleaning and
maintenance of siphons. The outlet chambers shall be so designed as to prevent the backflow of
sewage into pipes which are not being used at the time of minimum flow.
3.17.10 General Requirements
Provision shall be made for isolating the individual pipes as well as the siphon to facilitate
cleaning. This can be done by providing suitable penstocks or stop boards at the inlet and outlet of
each pipe and by providing stop valve at its lower point if it is accessible. A manhole at each end of
the siphon shall be provided with clearance for rodding. The rise, out of the siphon for small pipes
shall be on a moderate slope so that sand and other deposits may be moved out of the siphon. The
rising leg shall not be so steep as to make it difficult to remove heavy solids by cleaning tools that
operate on hydraulic principle. Further, there shall be no change of diameter in the barrel since this
would hamper cleaning operation. It is desirable to provide a coarse screen to prevent the
entry of rags etc. into the siphon.
Proper bypass arrangements shall be provided from the inlet chamber and if required special
arrangements shall be made for pumping the sewage to the lower reach of sewer line.
Alternatively, a vacuum pump may be provided at the outlet to overcome maintenance problems
arising out of clogging and silting of siphons. If it is possible a blow off may be installed at the low
point to facilitate emergency maintenance operations.
Positive pressure develops in the atmosphere upstream of a siphon because of the downstream
movement of air induced by the sewage flow. This air tends to exhaust from the manhole at the
siphon inlet. The exiting air can cause serious odour problems. Conversely, air is drawn in at the
siphon outlet. Attempts can be made to close the inlet structure tightly so that the air gets out at
manholes or vents upstream. However, this causes depletion of oxygen in the sewer and leads to
sulphide generation. To avoid this, sufficient ventilation arrangements have to be provided.
3.18 LEAPING WEIRS FOR SEGREGATING STORM FLOWS
Even though sometimes sewers are required to be designed for accommodating the storm flows
as a combined sewer, it may not be necessary to design the treatment plant for the full combined
flow. The classic principle that storm water being lighter in density will be floating over the denser
sewage is recognized to design the leaping weirs by which the lighter storm water is diverted before
the treatment plant. The two variations of this facility are presented herein.
3.18.1 Side Flow Leaping Weirs
A side flow weir constructed along one or both sides of a combined sewer delivers excess
flows during storm periods to relief sewers or natural drainage courses. The crest of the weir is
set at an elevation corresponding to the desired depth of flow in the sewer. The weir length
must be sufficiently long for effective regulation. The length of the side flow weir is given by the
formula devised by Babbitt.
3 - 37
L = 7.6 x 1 0 -4 x V x D x Log (h1/h2) (3.22)
where,
L: Required length in m
V : Velocity of approach in m/s
D : Dia of the sewer in mm
h i, h2 : Heads in m above the crest of the weir upstream and downstream
The formula is limited to conditions in which the weir is placed in the side of a circular pipe at a
distance above the bottom, greater than d/4 and less than d/2 where d is the diameter of the pipe
and the edge of the weir is sharp and parallel to the invert of the channel. Its usefulness is limited in
that it was devised for pipes between 450 and 600 mm in diameter and where the depth of flow above
the weir should not exceed 3d/4. A typical sideways leaping weir is shown in Figure 3.15.
Incoming flows in excess of the desired dry weather flow will "leap
over the weirs on the sides to be diverted to storm drans. This can
also be used for a flow equalisation to the STP. When the sewage
level drops below the weir lip, submersible pumps can pump back
the sewage from the bottom well so that a constant rate of flow can
be maintained to the STP. The downstream screen after this unit
and Parshall flume with stilling well and level metre are also seen.
Source: Daniel Sztruhar et.al.

Figure 3.15 Typical sideways leaping weir
3.18.2 Floor Level Leaping Weir
A floor-level leaping weir is formed by a gap in the invert of a sewer through which the
dry-weather flow falls and over which a portion of the entire storm leaps. Leaping weirs
have the advantage of operating as regulators without moving parts, but the disadvantage
of concentrating grit in the low flow channel. Some formulae based in empirical findings are
available for design. However, from practical considerations, it is desirable to design the weirs
with moving crests to make the opening adjustable as indicated in Figure 3.16.
A typical-floor level leaping weir is shown in Figure 3.17 overleaf.

Figure 3.16 Leaping weir
3 - 38
Part A : Engineering CONSTRUCTION OF SEWERS
The incoming sewage (towards the reader), will

drop through the floor level weir and be taken
away through the pipe to the right of the reader.
During heavy inflows, the excess quantity will
leap past the floor level weir and led away to
either storm sewer or balancing tank in case
of STP to a balancing tank below and to be
pumped back during low flows for constant
flow to the STP
Source: Daniel Sztruhar et.al.
Figure 3.17 Typical floor level leaping weir
3.19 RELIEF SEWERS
An overloaded existing sewer may require relief, with the relief sewer constructed parallel to the
existing line. Relief sewers are also called supplementary sewers. In the design, it must be decided
whether (a) the proposed sewer is to share all the rates of flow with the existing sewer or (b) it is
to take all flows in excess of predetermined quantity or (c) it is to divert a predetermined flow from
the upper end of the system.
The topography and available head may dictate which alternative is selected. If flows are to be
divided according to a ratio, the inlet structure to the relief sewer must be designed to divide the flow.
If the relief sewer is to take all flows in excess of a predetermined quantity, the excess flow may be
discharged through a weir to the relief sewer. If the flow is to be diverted in the upper reaches of a
system, the entire flow at the point of diversion may be sent to the relief sewer or the flow may be
divided in a diversion structure.
A decision as to the method of relief to be chosen depends on available velocities. Self-cleansing

velocities have to be maintained in both sewers even after diversion of flows. Otherwise, nuisance
conditions may result. If the relief sewer is designed to take flows in excess of a fixed quantity the
relief sewer itself will stand idle much of the time and deposits may occur, in some cases, it might be
better to make the new sewer large enough to carry the total flow and abandon the old one.
3 - 39
PART - 3 DESIGN OF SEWER NETWORK
3.20 BASIC INFORMATION
Before the sewer network can be designed, accurate information regarding the site conditions
is essential. This information may vary with the individual scheme but, shall in general, be covered
by the following:
a) Site plan - A plan of the site to scale with topographical levels, road formation levels, level of the
outfall, location of wells, underground sumps and other drinking water sources
b) The requirements of local bye-laws
c) Subsoil conditions - Subsoil conditions govern the choice of design of the sewer and the
method of excavation
d) Location of other services (such as position, depth and size of all other pipes, mains, cables, or
other services, in the vicinity of the proposed work)
e) Topography
3.20.1 Preliminary Investigation for Design of Sewer System
The anticipation of future growth in any community in terms of population or commercial and
industrial expansion forms the basis for preparation of plan for providing the amenities including
installation of sewers in the area to be served. The anticipated population, its density and its waste
production is generally estimated for a specified planning period. The recommended planning period
is 30 years; however, this may vary depending upon the local conditions. The prospective disposal
sites are selected and their suitability is evaluated with regard to physical practicability for collection
of sewage, effects of its disposal on surrounding environment and cost involved.
3.20.2 Detailed Survey
The presence of rock or underground obstacles such as existing sewers, water lines, electrical or
telephone wires, tunnels, foundations, etc., have significant effect upon the cost of construction.
Therefore, before selecting the final lines and grades for sewers necessary information regarding
such constructions is collected from various central and state engineering departments.
Besides the location of underground structure, a detailed survey regarding the paving
characteristics of the streets, the location of all existing underground structures, the location and
basement elevations of all buildings, profile of all streets through which the sewer will run,
elevations of all streams, culverts and ditches, and maximum water elevations therein are also made.
The above details are noted on the map. The scale of the map may vary depending upon the
details desired. It is recommended to adopt the following scales for various plans and drawings
depending upon the detailed information desired.
3 - 40
(a) Index Plan 1 : 100,000 or 1 : 200,000

(b) Key Plan and general layout 1 : 10,000 or 1 : 20,000
(c) Zonal Plans 1 : 2,500 or 1 : 5,000
(d) Longitudinal sections of sewers 1 : 500 or 1 : 2,250 or 1 : 2,500
(e) Structural drawings 1 : 20 or 1 : 50 or 1 : 100 or 1 : 200
3.20.3 Layout of System
The sewer system layout involves the following steps:
(a) Selection of an outlet or disposal point
(b) Prescribing limits to the drainage valley or Zonal Boundaries
(c) Location of Trunk and Main Sewers
(d) Location of Pumping Stations if found necessary
In general, the sewers will slope in the same direction as the street or ground surface and will be
connected to trunk sewers. The discharge point may be a treatment plant or a pumping station or
a water course, a trunk sewer or intercepting sewer. It is desirable to have discharge boundaries
following the property limits. The boundaries of sub zones are based on topography, economy or
other practical consideration.Trunk and main sewers are located in the valleys. The most common
location of sanitary sewer is in the centre of the street. A single sewer serves both sides of the street
with approximately same length for each house connection.
In very wide streets it may be economical to lay a sewer on each side. In such cases, the sewer may
be adjacent to the road curb or under the footpath & interference with other utilities has to be avoided.
Sometimes sewers may be located in the back of property limits to serve parallel rows of houses in
residential area. However, access to such locations becomes difficult and hence sewer locations in
streets are often preferred. Sewers as a rule are not located in proximity to water supplies. When such
situations are unavoidable the sewers may be encased in sleeve pipes or encased in concrete.
The Puducherry Public Works Department has been historically adopting a practice of connecting the
house services of a few houses by a rider sewer on the foot path with chambers and then connect to
the sewer manhole in the road as in Figure 3.18 (overleaf).
A tentative layout is prepared by marking sewer lines along the streets or utilities / easements. The
direction of flow is shown using arrows, which is generally the direction in which the ground slopes.
Manholes are provided at all sewer intersections, changes in horizontal direction, major change in
slopes, change in size and at regular intervals.
The depth of cut is dictated by the need to ensure a minimum cover and the desirability of
mandatory cushion depending upon the pipe size and expected loads.
It is the standard design practice to provide a minimum cover of 1 m at the starting point in the case of
sanitary sewer network and 0.5 m for storm drainage system.
3 - 41
Photograph on left shows connection from interceptor chamber to manhole and photo
graph on right shows connection from chamber to manhole
Source: Puducherry PWD
Figure 3.18 House sewer connections
If the sewer changes in direction in a manhole without change of size, a drop of usually 30 mm is
provided in the manhole. If the sewer changes in size, the crown of inlet and outlet sewers are set
at the same elevation. The vertical drop may be provided as described in Section 3.17. Sewers as a
design practice are not located in proximity to water supplies. When such situations are unavoidable,
the sewers should be encased in sleeve pipes or encased in concrete. Even when a plot is empty, it is
better to lay the house service connection sewer to the nearest manhole from a temporary chamber
in the vacant plot and plug it.
3.20.4 Profile of Sewer System
The vertical profile is drawn from the survey notes for each sewer line. All longitudinal sections are
indicated with reference to the same datum line. The vertical scale of the longitudinal sections are
usually magnified ten times the horizontal scale. The profile shows ground surface, tentative manhole
locations, grade, size and material of pipe, ground and invert levels and extent of concrete protection,
etc. At each manhole the surface elevation, the elevation of sewer invert entering and leaving the
manhole are generally listed.
3.20.5 Available Head
Generally, the total available energy is utilized to maintain proper flow velocities in the
sewers with minimum head loss. However, in hilly terrain excess energy may have to be dissipated
using special devices. Hence, the sewer system design is limited on one hand by hydraulic losses,
which must be within the available head and on the other to maintain self-cleansing velocities. It
becomes difficult to meet both conditions with increasing variation in rate of flow. Where differences in
elevations are insufficient to permit gravity flow, pumping may be required. The cost of construction,
operation, and maintenance of pumping stations are compared with the cost of construction and
maintenance of gravity sewers. Apart from the cost considerations the consequences of mechanical
and electrical failures at pumping stations may also be considered, which may necessitate a
gravity system even at a higher cost.
3 - 42
3.20.6 Plans and Nomenclature
The following procedure is recommended for the nomenclature of sewers:
First distinct number such as 1, 2, 3, etc., is allotted to the manholes of the trunk sewers
commencing from the lower end (outfall end) of the line and finishing at the top end.
Manholes on the mains or sub mains are again designated numbers 1, 2, 3, etc., prefixing
the number of the manhole on trunk/main sewer where they join. Similar procedure is adopted
for the branches to branch main. When all the sewer lines connected to the main line have
thus been covered by giving distinctive numbers to the manholes, the manholes on the further
branches to the branch mains are similarly given distinctive numbers, again commencing with
the lower end.
If two branches, one on each side meeting the main sewer or the branch sewer, letter L (to
represent left) or letter R (to represent right) is prefixed to the numbering system, depending
on the direction of flow.
If there is more than one sewer either from the left or right they are suitably designated as L1,
L2, L3, or R1, R2, R3, the subscript refer to the line near to the sewer taking away the
discharge from the manhole.
Thus, L2R4.2.3 (Figure 3-19 overleaf) will pinpoint a particular manhole on the sub main from which
the flow reaches manhole number 4 on the trunk sewer through a sub main and a main. The first
numeral (from the left) is the number of the manhole on the trunk sewer. The numerals on the right of this
numeral, in order, represent the manhole numbers in the main, sub main, etc., respectively.
The first letter immediately preceding the numeral denotes the main and that it is to the right of the
trunk sewer. Letters to the left in their order represent sub main, branch respectively. The same
nomenclature is used for representing the sections, e.g. Section L2R4.2.3 identifies the section
between the manhole L2R4.2.3 and the adjoining downstream manhole.
All longitudinal sections should be indicated with reference to the same datum line. The vertical scale
of the longitudinal sections should be magnified ten times the horizontal scale.
The trunk sewer should be selected first and drawn and other sewers should be considered as
branches. The trunk sewer should be the one with the largest diameter that would extend
farthest from the outfall works. Whenever two sewers meet at a point, the main sewer is the
larger of the incoming sewers. (e.g., 3.2 represents the second manhole on the main sewer from the
manhole no. 3 on the trunk sewer).
Once the rough sections have been prepared, the designer should review the work for improving the
spacing of manholes, the sizes and gradients of the sewers and so forth, economising on materials
and excavation to the extent possible. At the same time the designer must ensure that the sewer will
serve all users and that they can be actually laid according to the alignments shown in the drawing
and have sufficient gradients.
3 - 43

Figure 3.19 Nomenclature of sewers
The sewers should be shown as thick lines and the manholes as small circles in the plan. In the
section, the sewer may be indicated by a line or two lines depending upon the diameters and scales
adopted. Grade, size and material of pipe, ground and invert levels and extent of concrete protection
should be indicated as shown in Figure 3.20.

Figure 3.20 Typical sewer section
3 - 44
Standard vertical plan filing systems are now available and are very convenient for storing of
plans and taking them out quickly for reference. Normally, size A0 and A1 (trimmed size 841 1,189
mm and 594 841 mm respectively) should be used along with soft copies on CD / DVD while
submitting the project drawings for approval.
All documents including drawings, design calculations, measurement sheets of estimates, etc.,
should be in metric system. In drawings, length should be indicated either entirely in meters,
corrected up to two decimals or entirely in mm (for thickness etc.). If this practice is followed, units
would be obvious and in certain cases, writing of m or mm with the figure can be omitted. The flow
should normally be indicated in litres per second (lps) or cubic meters per hour (m3/hr) except for
very large flows which may be indicated in cubic meters per second (cum/sec). For uniformity, lps for
sewage flows and cum/sec for storm flows is recommended. Similarly, areas in sewer plans and
design calculations may be indicated in hectares (ha). While writing figures they should be grouped
into groups of three with a single space between each group and without comma. In case of a
decimal number, this grouping may be on either side of the digit (e.g., 47 342.294 31).
In case of design of sewer network using computer programme, there is no restriction in the
nomenclature of the sewers and manholes as required for the manual design. It is sufficient to give
node numbers as well as pipe (link) numbers in any manner in the sewer network for design of the
network for using computer software. The numbering of the network may be adopted as shown in
Figure 3.21 and illustrated in Appendix A.3.7.
Figure 3.21 Example sewer network
3 - 45
3.20.7 Precautions
Design of sewer systems for rocky strata especially in hilly terrain in walled cities may have to
invoke controlled blasting or chipping and chiseling both of which can cause hindrance to traffic for
long periods of time and may also cause damages to heritage structures. In such situations, it is
necessary to consider the shallow sewer options on both sides of the roads and if drains are already
in position, construction of the additional twin of the drain and manage the collection system. The
herringbone cutting for house service connections damages the roads in construction and O&M.
PART 4 TYPES AND CONSTRUCTION OF MANHOLES
3.21 DEFINITION
A manhole is an opening through which a man may enter a sewer for inspection, cleaning and other
maintenance and is fitted with a removable cover to withstand traffic loads in sewers. The manholes
first constructed before the sewers are laid interconnecting these. The stated depths of sewers and
diameter of circular manholes are in Table 3.15.
Table 3.15 Diameters of circular manholes for stated depths of sewers
Z Values Sulphide Condition
Z < 5,000 Sulphide rarely generated
5,000 < Z < 10,000 Marginal condition for sulphide generation
Z > 10,000 Sulphide generation common
Note:
Where depths exceed 6 m below GL, lift stations as in Section 4.18 shall be inserted and sewage lifted
to initial cover depth of 0.9 m.
In specific situations deeper depth can be justified in the DPR like outfall, etc
3.22 TYPES OF BRICKWORK MANHOLES
These are shown in Figure 3.22, Figure 3.23, Figure 3.24 and Figure 3.25.
3.23 RCC AND COMBINATION MANHOLES
In lieu of entire brickwork, RCC or RCC with brickwork combination manholes have the advantage
of better quality control in raw materials and workmanship, besides easier fixing in the field with
maximum speed and minimum disturbance to traffic. This is admittedly advantageous especially in
case of difficulties in obtaining good bricks and the non-availability of trained masons in getting the
corbelled cone portion and lapses there can lead to potential fatal accidents on public roads.
There is however the issue of the concern about the concrete corrosion of the inside by sulphide
gas and the soil side by sulphate in soil water. In view of this, the use of high alumina cement is
advisable in manufacture itself or sulphate resistant cement with extra lining of 25 mm thickness
over inner wall with high alumina cement.
3 - 46
P LAN
Figure 3.22 Rectangular manhole for 0.9 m * 0.8 m clear in plan and depth less than 0.9 m
Two types of RCC manholes can be used -
Manholes with vertical shaft in RCC and the corbelled cone portion in brickwork
Entire manhole in RCC and corbelled cone portion separately precast and jointed
The entries and exits of main sewers as well as house service sewers requires careful
detailing because the issue of puncturing the walls for insertions of especially house service sewers
later on is impossible. These shall be managed as detailed below.
The corbelled cone portion which is eccentric with one vertical edge, shall be separately cast and
its design standardized with respect to the diameter of its base.
The vertical shaft is best pre-cast to have a better quality control of raw materials and
workmanship, which is otherwise very suspect in local situations of every manhole.
The shaft itself shall be made of rings with lap joints of the annular rim and duly jointed at site by
cement mortar or elasto-polymers.
3 - 47
PLAN
Figure 3.23 Rectangular manhole for 1.2 m * 0.9 m clear in plan and depth 0.9 m to 2.5 m
M.S.
FO O TR EST
W ALL-
T CHANNEL AND
BENCHING
H E IG H T OF
SPR IN G IN G / C C 1:2:4
1
SECTION A A SECTION B B
h B
A A
]T'7|
I \ / I
i i
f=7*r=f:
1/
/ \ \l
1 B
Figure 3.24 Arch type manhole for 1.4 m * 0.9 m clear in plan and deeper than 2.5 m
3 - 48
Source:CPHEEO, 1993
Figure 3.25 Typical circular manhole of diameters and depths as in Table 3-15
3 - 49
The varying heights of the manhole are obtained by choosing the bottom ring deeper than the
fractional height needed there and filling up the bottom floor after placing the ring such that the
invert level of the sewer is obtained thereby.
This ring shall have a vertical inverted U cut out in casting itself to insert the sewer pipes and
caulk the annular space using cement concrete with cement-based water proofing admixtures.
The dimensions of the U cut out shall be standardized to match the OD of proposed sewers and
a clear cover of 50 cm all round for caulking.
The position of the vertical inverted U cut outs will normally be 180 degrees apart in plan but in
cases of junction manholes and drop manholes it may be at differing angles in plan and needs to
be precast suitably and shall not be chiseled out in the field.
For insertion of the house service sewers into the manholes, it is necessary to have a
precast ring section below the corbel portion, with holes at 45 degrees to the public sewer line to
facilitate insertion of three house service sewers on each side of the public sewer axis. Usually
the house service sewers shall be 110 mm or 160 mm UPVC 4 kg/sqcm (as detailed in sewer
laying section). Accordingly, the height of the ring shall be 250 mm and 300 mm to permit filling
of the annular interspaces between the sewer and the opening with cement concrete of at least
50 mm around the finished sewer.
A typical example of a combination manhole is shown in Figure 3.26, Figure 3.27 and Figure 3.28.
B : THICKNESS OF WALL
ALL DIMENSION IN MILLIMETRES.
Source:CPHEEO, 1993
Figure 3.26 RCC and Brickwork Combination Manhole
3 - 50
Part A: Engineering
CONSTRUCTION OF SEWERS
25MM GROUT HOLE

TYP. LOCATED AT
NOTES:
1. ALL OlMENSlONS ARE IN MILLIMETRE.
2, GRADE OF CONCRETE SHALL BE M30
RCPC MH
PLAN SHOWING GROUT HOLE LOCATION
r COVER
75 THK.
2 5 m m SLOT
PCC
GROUTED
WITH CEMENT
SLURRY
<h 500 60 & WITH B m m ROD,
0 1000
H HI
0 1400 I? 1
JOINT
DETAIL A' SEALANT
150 THK. PRECAST UNH IOMPOUND
p r ec a s t Pa n el \ CONNECTION DETAIL "A" BITUMINOUS
PAD.
RING BEAM
75 THK V-
P.C.C 1:4:3 M d 1200 DETAIL B SMOOTH
1 1800 n _ r _ 'APER I f
RNISH
100 THK.
BASE SLAB TYP. PANEL
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT PRECAST UNIT
DETAIL
CONNECTION DETAIL A*
F ig u r e 3.27 RCC M a n h o le fo r a d e p th b e tw e e n 0.6 m to 2.3 m
3- 51
25MM GROUT HOLE
NOTES:
I ALL OlMENSlONS ARE IN MILLIMETRE.
2 . GRADE OF CONCRETE SHALL BE M30
PLAN SHOWING GROUT HOLE LOCATION
25mm SLOT
GROUTED
WITH CEMENT
SLURRY
60 *
i* 1 1 * 1- WITH 8 m m ROD.
r i_ n
f .H 0 .1| .l5 0 , JOINT

SEALANT
PRECAST UNIT OMPOUND
CONNECTION DETAIL 'A* BITUMINOUS
PAD.
-V
SMOOTH
n_r $ APER
FINISH
J0L
i/ 1 i\ i
+5/ 60 TYP. PANEL
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT PRECAST UNIT
DETAIL B DETAIL
CONNECTION DETAIL 'A*
Figure 3.28 RCC Manhole for a depth between 2.3 m to 5 m
3 -5 2
3.24 HDPE MANHOLES
HDPE manholes with EN 13598-2: 2009 and ISO (ISO 9001: 2008) specifications are recent entrants.
However, the Indian standards are yet to be brought out by BIS. These being ready made can speed
up the construction as compared to brickwork manholes. However, if desired for a specific location
they are to be safeguarded against the uplift pressure due to high ground water table and crushing
under high traffic load etc. by suitably anchoring and, the cost of these shall not be compromised.
3.25 DROP MANHOLES
Difference in elevations of incoming and outgoing sewers, which would result in holding up
of solids that can cause nuisance to the maintenance personnel, should be avoided. When it is
necessary to drop the elevation of the sewer at a manhole, the drop should be made by means of an
outside connection - in this regard, the dimensions of the related fittings govern the minimum
vertical outside drop that can be made.
The designers judgm ent will determine, in each case, where the difference in elevation warrants
using an outside drop instead of lowering the upstream or branch sewer. The outside connection is
provided for the protection of the person who may enter the manhole. Therefore, sometimes when
a lateral sewer joins a deeper, sub main sewer or the use of a drop manhole will reduce the amount
of excavation needed by allowing the lateral to maintain a shallow slope. The sewage drops into the
lower sewer through the vertical pipe at the manhole.
Encasement of the entire outside drop in concrete or brick masonry is needed to protect it against
damage during the backfilling of the trench. Maintenance may be facilitated by providing a cross
instead of a tee at the top of the vertical drop, with a cast iron riser from the cross to the surface
of the ground where a cast iron lamp hole frame and cover are installed. When such a drop is
plugged, a ball or a chain is dropped down to break any sticks, thereby permitting the plugging
material to be washed out.
When a sewer connects with another sewer, and the difference in level between the sewers of the
main line and the invert level of branch line is more than 600 mm or a drop of more than 600 mm
is required to be given in the same sewer line, it is uneconomical or impractical to arrange the
connection within 600 mm. At that point, a drop connection shall be provided for which a manhole
may be built incorporating a vertical or nearly vertical drop pipe from the higher sewer to the
lower sewer.
This pipe may either be outside the shaft and encased in concrete or may be supported on
brackets inside the shaft, which should be suitably enlarged.
If the drop pipe is outside the shaft, a continuation of the sewer should be built through the shaft wall
to form a rodding and inspection eye. This should be provided with a half-blank flange.
If the drop pipe is inside the shaft, if should be in cast iron and it would be advantageous to provide
adequate means for rodding and a cushion of 150 mm depth should also be provided.
3 - 53
The drop pipe should terminate at its lower end with a plain or duck-foot bend turned so as to
discharge its flow at 45 degrees or less to the direction of the flow in the main sewer and the pipe,
shall be cast iron, or surrounded with 150 mm of concrete. In the case of sewers that are over
450 mm in diameter the drop in level may be accomplished by one of the following methods:
a) A Cascade
This is a steep ramp composed of steps, over which the flow is broken up and retarded. A pipe
connecting the two levels is often concreted under the steps to allow small flows to pass without
trickling over the steps. The cascade steps may be made of heavy duty bricks of Class I quality
IS 2180, cement concrete with granolithic finish or dressed granite.
b) A Ramp
A ramp may be formed by increasing the grade of the last length of the upper sewer to about
45 degrees or by constructing a steeply graded channel or culvert leading from the high level to the
low level sewer. In order to break up the flow down the ramp and minimize the turbulence in the main
sewer, the floor of a culvert ramp should be obstructed by raised transverse ribs of either brick or
concrete at 1.15 m intervals and a stilling pool provided at the bottom of the ramp.
c) By Drops in Previous Successive Manholes
Instead of providing the total drop required at the junction manhole, the same might be achieved by
giving smaller drops in successive manholes preceding the junction manhole. Thus, for example, if
a total drop of 2.4 m is required to be given, 0.6 m drop may be given in each of the previous three
manholes and the last 0.6 m drop may be given at the junction manhole.
The diameter of the back-drop should be at least as large as that of the incoming pipe. A typical
illustration of a drop manhole is shown in Figure 3-29 overleaf.
3.26 JUNCTION MANHOLES
A manhole should be built at every junction of two or more sewers, and the curved portions of the
inverts of tributary sewers should be formed within the manhole. To achieve this with the best
economy of space, the chamber may be built of a shape other than rectangular. The soffit of the
smaller sewer at a junction should not be lower than that of the larger sewer, in order to avoid the
surcharging of the former when the latter is running full, and the hydraulic design usually assumes
such a condition. The gradient of the smaller sewer may be steepened from the previous manhole
sufficiently to reduce the difference of invert level at the point of junction to a convenient amount.
3.27 SIDE ENTRANCE MANHOLES
In large sewers or where it is difficult to obtain direct vertical access to the sewer from ground level,
owing to existing services, gas, water, etc., the access shaft should be constructed in the
nearest convenient position off the line of sewer, and connected to the manhole chamber by
a lateral passage.
3 - 54
h Y
Y
SECTIONAL PLAN Z Z
SECTION X X SECTION Y Y
Figure 3.29 Illustrative arrangement of drop manhole
In the tunnelled sewers the shaft and lateral access heading may be used as a working shaft, the
tunnel being broken out from the end of the heading, or alternatively the shaft and heading may be
constructed after the main tunnel is complete, provision having been made for breaking in from the
access heading to build the chamber.
The floor of the side-entrance passage, which should fall at about 1 in 30 towards the sewer, should
enter the chamber not lower than the soffit level of the sewer. In large sewers where the floor of the
side entrance passage is above the soffit, either steps or a ladder (which should be protected either
by a removable handrail or by safety chains) should be provided to reach the benching.
3.28 SCRAPPER (SERVICE) TYPE MANHOLE
It has been proposed in the earlier 1993 edition of the manual that the scraper manholes shall be
used at specified intervals for desilting the sewer systems.
In the interim period, advancements in mechanized sewer cleaning, like jet rodding and vacuum
suction machines have occurred and are being used. In order to avoid man entry into sewer
manholes these scraper manholes shall be discontinued forthwith. Instead, the numbers of these
mechanized sewer-cleaning equipment as recommended in Part B of the O&M manual shall be
included in the project in the TOR stage itself and procured.
3 - 55
3.29 FLUSHING MANHOLES
Where it is not possible to obtain self-cleansing velocities due to flatness of the gradient especially
at the top ends of branch sewers, which receive very little flow, it is essential that some form of
flushing device be incorporated in the system. This can be done by making grooves at intervals of
45 m to 50 m in the main drains in which wooden planks are inserted and water allowed to head
up and which will rush on with great velocity when the planks are removed. Alternatively, an
elevated tank is built and filled with treated sewage from which connections are made through
pipes and flushing hydrants to rush water to the sewers. The relevant Indian Standard is
IS 4111 Part 2. Flushing can also be very conveniently accomplished by the use of a fire
hydrant or tanker and hose.
Where flushing manholes are provided, they are located generally at the head of a sewer.
Sufficient velocity shall be imparted in the sewer to wash away the deposited solids. The flush is
usually effective up to a certain distance after which the imparted velocity gets dissipated.
The automatic systems, which are operated by mechanical units often get corroded by the
sewer gases and do not generally function satisfactorily and hence, are not recommended.In
case of hard choking in sewers, care should be exercised to ensure that there is no possibility
of backflow of sewage into the ground and entering defective water supply mains.
Approximate quantities of water needed for flushing are given in Table 3.16
Table 3.16 Quantity of water needed for flushing
Q uantity o f w a te r (Litres)
Slope 200 m m dia. 250 mm dia. 300 mm dia.
1 in 200 2,300 2,500 3,000
1 in 130 1,500 1,800 2,300
1 in 100 1,300 1,500 2,000
1 in 50 500 800 1,000
1 in 33 400 500 700
Source:CPHEEO, 1993
A more practical and relatively safer method is to deploy the modern jet rodding machines at head
manholes and use the treated sewage from the STP, but then, the cost of the machine is involved.
A simpler option will be to use the possibility of positioning a butterfly valve at the head sewer
mouth in the manhole and is kept open by an extended handle, which can be operated from ground
level when the manhole cover is opened. After opening the manhole cover, the valve is closed by a
quarter turn and the manhole is filled with treated sewage brought by a tanker from the STP. After
filling, the valve is opened to enable flushing. Usually a sewer tanker can hold about 6000 litres
and is adequate to flush at least two manholes per trip.
3 - 56
3.30 DIFFERENT DIAMETERS OF SEWERS IN THE SAME MANHOLE
Manholes should be built to cause minimum head loss and interference with the hydraulics of the
sewer line. One way to maintain a relatively smooth flow transition through the manhole, when
a small sewer joins one of a larger diameter, is to match the pipe crown elevations at the manhole.
3.31 TERMINAL CLEANOUT STRUCTURE
Terminal cleanouts are sometimes used at the ends of branch or lateral sewers. Their purpose is to
provide a means for inserting cleaning tools for flushing or for inserting an inspection light into the
sewer. In fact, a terminal cleanout amounts to an upturned pipe coming to the surface of the ground.
The turn is made with bends so that flexible cleaning rods can be passed through them. The diameter
of a bend should be the same as that of the sewer. The cleanout is capped with a cast iron frame
and cover. Care should be taken to maintain proper alignment of the pipe while encasing it with
concrete. The frame and cover of the terminal cleanout structure should be made of grey cast
iron. Tees were often used, instead of pipe bends, in older engineering practice, and the structures
were called "lamp holes. Modern sewer cleaning equipment cannot be passed from the surface
through such structures, so their use is to be discontinued forthwith. Terminal cleanouts are limited
in usefulness and should never be used as a substitute for a manhole. They are permitted under
some state regulations only at the ends of branch sewers, which may never be extended and must
lie within 50 m of a manhole.
3.32 CONSTRUCTION OF BRICKWORK MANHOLES
a) If the sewer is constructed in a tunnel, the manhole should be located at the access or
working shafts and the manhole chamber may be constructed of a size to suit the working shaft or
vice-versa. The width/diameter of the manhole should not be less than internal diameter of the
sewer + 150 mm benching on both sides (150 mm + 150 mm).
b) The opening for entry into the manhole (without cover) should be of such minimum dimensions
as to allow a work with the cleaning equipment to get access into the interior of the manhole
without difficulty. A circular opening is generally preferred. A minimum clear opening of 60 cm is
recommended. Suitable steps, usually of malleable cast iron shall be provided for entry.
c) Access shaft shall be circular in shape and shall have a minimum internal diameter of 750 mm;
where the depth of the shaft exceeds 3 m suitable dimensions shall be provided to facilitate
cleaning and maintenance. Access shaft where built of brickwork, should be corbelled on three
sides to reduce it to the size of the opening in the cover frame, and to provide easy access on the
fourth side to step irons or ladder. In determining the sizes, the dimensions of the maintenance
equipment likely to be used in the sewers, shall be kept in view.
d) The manhole base slab shall be 150 mm for manholes up to 1 m depth, 200 mm for manholes
from 1 to 2 m depth and 300 mm for greater depths. In all cases, the thickness shall be counter
checked for uplift conditions based on maximum ground water elevations at the site on the soil
side by considering empty manhole conditions.
3 - 57
e) Where subsoil water condition exists, a rich mix may be used and it shall further be
waterproofed with addition of approved water proofing compound in a quantity as per
manufacturers specifications.
f) The brickwork manholes shall be first constructed to the required invert and with circular
openings to facilitate the laying of sewer pipes later on. These manholes facilitate the judgement
in the field when trenches are dug up and sewer pipes are to be laid to give the levels using a
levelling instrument or with boning rods.
g) All brickwork shaft shall be in English bond and the jointing faces being well buttered with
cement mortar before laying, so as to ensure a full joint and brickwork shall be in accordance
with IS 2212 code of practice for brickwork. The cement mortar used shall not be weaker
than 1:3 and in accordance with IS 2250 code of practice for preparation and use of masonry
mortars and its revisions.
h) The thickness of walls shall be typically one brick (23 cm) for up to l.5 m deep manholes and
one and a half brick (35 mm) for depths greater than 1.5 m. The actual thickness in any case
shall be verified on the basis of engineering design in difficult soil conditions.
i) The jointing of brickwork and plastering on both sides (20 mm) shall be in a mix of cement
mortar 1:3. Admixtures for water proofing if desired shall be cement based.
j) Salt glazed or concrete half channel pipes of the required size and curve shall be laid and
embedded in cement concrete base to the same line and fall as the sewer. These can also be
finished as semi-circular channels with cement mortar 1:2 and of diameter equal to that of the
sewer. Above the horizontal diameter, the sides shall be extended vertically to the same level as
the crown of the outgoing pipe and the top edge shall be sloped up at 1:10 towards the wall and
suitably rounded off. The branch channels shall also be similar.
k) Bricks on edge shall be cut to a proper form and laid around the upper half of all the pipes
entering or leaving the manhole, to form an arch.
l) All around the pipe there shall be a joint of cement mortar 12 mm thick between the pipe and
the bricks. The ends of the pipes shall be built in and neatly finished off with cement mortar.
m) The entire height of the manhole shall be tested for water-tightness by closing both the
incoming and outgoing ends of the sewer and filling the manhole with water. A drop in water
level not more than 50 mm per 24 hours shall be permitted.
n) It should be ensured that there is no leakage of ground water into the manhole by observing
the manhole for 24 hours after emptying it.
o) The top of the manhole shall be flush with the finished road level as per IS 4111 Part I.
3.33 CONSTRUCTION OF RCC MANHOLES
The idea of RCC manholes is essentially to quicken the work of construction in the roads by
adopting precast sections assembled at site.
3 - 58
Thus, the issues related to their construction are more of design itself and quality control in casting.
The provisions of IS 456 and IS 3370 Parts I, II and IV shall inter alia apply to the design. The entire
structure shall at all times be designed to the condition where the ground water is at ground level
itself and the inside is empty and there is no superimposed load on the manhole to counter the uplift
force and not considering the skin friction of the manhole sidewall with the soil.
3.34 COVERS AND FRAMES
The size of manhole covers should be such that there should be clear opening of not less than
560 mm diameter for manholes exceeding 0.9 m depth. When cast iron manhole covers and
frames are used they shall conform to IS 1726. The frames of manhole shall be firmly embedded to
correct alignment and level in plain concrete on the top of masonry. The precast frame and cover
can also be of steel fibre reinforced concrete (SFRC) conforming to IS 12592 and shall be of
approved make. The frame and cover shall be of LD/ MD/ HD/ EHD grade, size and thickness as
mentioned in the description of the item. The standard for DI manhole covers is EN 123.
3.35 RUNGS
As per the US Department of Environmental Conservation, Model Sewer Use Law, Section 504,
Manholes and Manhole Installation clause 6, "No steps or ladder rungs shall be installed in the inside
or outside manhole walls at any time (http://www.dec.ny.gov/chemical/8729.html). This implies the
total ban on man entry into manholes (leave alone the nomenclature) and in turn underscores the
fully mechanized methods of attending to sewer blocks. Though it is the ideal condition, the relatively
lesser per capita water supply rates and the absence of strict enforcement of grinders below faucets
in kitchens etc. and handicapped financial positions of local bodies defy the adoption of such an
ideal situation in our country for some more time and may be adopted in stages starting from
mega cities. Till such time, the rungs shall continue to be used.
Where the depth of the manhole exceeds 90 cm below the surface of the ground, rungs shall be built
into the brickwork. The vertical distance between the two consecutive rungs shall not be more than
30 cm and the centre-to-centre horizontal distance between alternate rungs shall not exceed 38 cm.
The rungs shall have a width of 15 cm.
3.36 PILE SUPPORTS IN LOOSE SOILS
Where the soil is weak, RCC piles shall be driven to hard stratum and the pile cap made of the
same size of the PCC of the manhole and after pouring the RCC for the pile and capping slab,
immediately the RCC for foundation of the manhole shall also be poured and integrally cured.
Tremie pipe shall be used along with bentonite lining as the case may be. The typical diagram for
the RCC pile support is in Figure 3-30 overleaf.
3.37 MANHOLE REHABILITATION
While preparing DPR for augmentation of sewerage in already existing sewered habitations, it is
necessary to look into the needs of rehabilitation of the old system and include the appropriate
financial provisions.
3 - 59
Plan
Pile w ill be o f R CC . D riving th ro u g h soil w a te r w ill need b e n to n ite ca sin g and p o urin g using tre m m ie pipe.
S u lp h a te re s is ta n t c e m e n t is b e st used here. Pile sh o uld be d rive n to hard stra ta irre sp e ctive o f depth.
R C C and P C C to be p o ure d in te rg ra lly and c o n crte d using s u lp h a te re s is ta n t ce m e n t
Figure 3.30 Illustrative arrangement of manholes in loose soils or slushy soils or quick sand
3 -6 0
With sewer systems in our country dating back to as old as 75 years and all manholes being of
brickwork, there is a need to look into the manhole rehabilitation contingencies. The following
approach is recommended.
a) Institute an ultrasonic survey of the structural integrity of all manholes known to be more than
30 years, the accepted life cycle of civil works and maintain an annual repeat record, which will
indicate the manholes requiring immediate attention.
b) Isolate the manhole from service by plugging the sewers with inflatable special balloons and
transfer pumping from upstream manhole to downstream manhole using submersible pump sets
in the upstream manhole; prepare the surface by cleaning it and removing loose particles.
c) Adopt the lining of the insides by the commercially available fast-curing elastomeric/other
material that can be directly applied to existing concrete or brickwork using spray techniques
whereby a homogeneous, non-porous and monolithic lining is formed. This can provide effective
surface protection against wear, corrosion and water infiltration.
d) This will mark a new era in sustaining the infrastructures created in sewer manholes and
forestall major issues when the rehabilitation needs arise suddenly.
e) Recent technologies provide for spray lining of the manholes without man entry.
A polymeric/elastomer material like polyurea is obtained as a powder and a solution is made
at site and is pumped through a vertical guide pipe in the central axis with a spray nozzle at its
base and rotating full 360 degrees in plan. The thickness of lining is controlled by the rate of
solution pumped, the revolutions per minute and the rate of rise of the guide pipe. There is no
need to block the entry and exit sewers, as the spray entering these under pressure will line
these pipes also to a certain length as well. An illustration is shown in Figure 3.31.
Vertical guide firmly anchored to

the spray equipment
Manhole structure showing the

original dented sidewall
The new lining inside the manhole

which is the same shape & smooth
Dents, damages to the manhole

sidewall at random places
The rotating spray nozzle ejecting

the lining solution uniformly
Figure 3.31 Depiction on in-situ sewer manhole lining (Spray equipment not shown)
3 - 61
PART - 5 LAYING, JOINTING AND CONSTRUCTION OF SEWERS
3.38 STAGING OF SEWERAGE WORKS
Due to enormous scope of sewerage work, it is desirable to set up priorities for taking up the works
of different component for execution. It is generally noticed that most of sewerage schemes are not
completed for want of funds, land, as well as due to public litigation and execution of work in improper
sequence. The partially executed schemes could not be made functional. Therefore, the priorities of
works shall be followed during execution in sequence as shown below.
(1) Sewage treatment plants
(2) Trunk mains
(3) Sewage pumping stations (if required)
(4) Main sewers
(5) Sub main sewers
(6) Sewers (Laterals)
The works at Sr. No. 1 to 3 mentioned above can be taken simultaneously. However, only after
completion of all works from Sr. 1 to 6 mentioned above, the property connections shall be given.
In case, part of main sewer or sub main sewer is not laid for want of land acquisition
issues or any public litigation, the work of sewer lines joining that particular sub main/main
sewer shall be postponed. Following such priorities, the executed works could be put into use,
thus the expenditure made on structures shall not be proved unfruitful.
3.39 SEWER CONSTRUCTION
In sewer construction work, two operations are of special importance, namely, excavation of
trenches, and laying of sewer pipes in trenches and tunnels. Most of the trench work involves open
cut excavation; and in urban areas, it includes:
1) Removing pavement
2) Removal of the material from the ground, and its separation, its classification where necessary,
and its final disposal
3) Sheeting and bracing the sides of the trench
4) Removal of water (if any) from the trench
5) Protection of other structures, both underground and on the surface, whose foundations
may be affected
6) Backfilling, and
7) Replacement of the pavement
3 - 62
The most common type of sewer construction practice involves the use of open trenches and
prefabricated pipes. However, larger sewer systems, and unusual situations may require tunnelling,
jacking of pipes through the soil, or cast-in-situ concrete sewers.
On all excavation work, safety precautions for the protection of life and property are
essential; and measures to avoid inconveniences to the public are desirable. Such measures and
precautions include the erection and maintenance of signs (to forewarn public), barricades, bridges
and detours; placing and maintenance of lights both for illumination and also as danger signals;
provision of watchmen to exclude unauthorised persons, particularly children, from trespassing
on the work; and such other precautions as local conditions may dictate.
(i) Each pipe section should be uncracked.
(ii) Proper placement (i.e., bedding) has to be there for each pipe section that is laid.
(iii) There should be proper joining of pipe sections.
(iv) There should be proper alignment (direction and longitudinal slope) of the line.
(v) Pipes should be covered properly with clean fill material (backfilled).
The structural design of a sewer is based on the relationship: the supporting strength of the sewer
as installed divided by a suitable factor of safety which must equal or exceed the load imposed on it
by the weight of earth and any superimposed loads.
The essential steps in the design and construction of buried sewers or conduits to provide safe
installations are therefore:
i) Determination of the maximum load that will be applied to the pipe based on the trench and
backfill conditions and the live loads to be encountered
ii) Computation of the safe load carrying capacity of the pipe when installed and bedded in the
manner to be specified using a suitable factor of safety and making certain the design supporting
strength thus obtained is greater than the maximum load to be applied
iii) Specifying the maximum trench widths, the type of pipe bedding and the manner in which the
backfill is to be made in accordance with the conditions used in the design
iv) Checking each pipe for structural defects before installation and making sure that only sound
pipes are installed and
v) Ensuring by adequate inspection and engineering supervision that all trench widths, sub grade
work, bedding, pipe laying and backfilling are in accordance with design assumptions as set
forth in the project specifications.
Proper design and adequate specifications alone are not enough to ensure protection from
dangerous or destructive overloading of pipe. Effective value of these depends on the degree to
which the design assumptions are realized in actual construction. For this reason, thorough and
competent inspection is necessary to ensure that the installation conforms to the design
requirements and specifications.
3 - 63
3.40 TYPE OF LOADS
In a buried sewer, stresses are induced by external loads and by internal pressure in case of a
pressure main. The stress due to external loads is of utmost importance and may be the only one
considered in the design. Besides, if the sewer is exposed to sunlight, temperature stresses induced
may be considerable and these will have to be taken into consideration particularly in case of metallic
pipes. The external loads are of two categories viz., load due to backfill material known as backfill
load and superimposed load, which again is of two types viz. concentrated load and distributed load.
Moving loads may be considered as equivalent to uniformly distributed load. Sewer lines are mostly
constructed of stoneware, concrete or cast iron, which are considered as rigid pipes (while steel
pipes, if used, are not considered as rigid pipes). The flexibility of the pipe affects the load imposed
on the pipe and the stresses induced in it.
3.41 LOADS ON CONDUIT DUE TO BACKFILL
Methods for determining the vertical load on buried conduits due to gravity earth forces in all
commonly encountered conditions, as developed by A. Marston, are generally accepted as the most
suitable and reliable for computation. Theoretically stated, the load on a buried conduit is equal to the
weight of the prism of earth directly over the conduit, called the interior prism of earth plus or minus
the frictional shearing forces transferred to the prism by the adjacent prism of earth.
The considerations are:
a) The calculated load due to the backfill is the load that will develop when ultimate settlement
has taken place.
b) The magnitude of the lateral pressure causing the shearing force is computed by Rankines
theory.
c) There is negligible cohesion except for tunnel conditions.
The general form of Marstons formula is
W - C wB2 (3.23)
where,
W : Vertical load in kgs per metre length acting on the conduit due to gravity earth loads
w : Unit weight of earth, kg/m3
B : Width of trench or conduit in meters depending upon the type of installation conditions, m
C : Dimensionless co-efficient that measures the effect of
a) Ratio of height of fill to width of trench or conduit
b) Shearing forces between interior and adjacent earth prisms and
c) Direction and amount of relative settlement between interior and adjacent earth prisms for
embankment conditions.
3 - 64
3.42 TYPES OF INSTALLATION OR CONSTRUCTION CONDITIONS
The accepted types of installation or construction conditions are shown in Figure 3.32. There are
three classifications for the construction conditions:
NOTE:
N O R M A L G R O U N D W A TE R LEVEL W IT H R E F E R E N C E T O T H E IN V E R T LE VEL IS TO BE
TA K EN N O T E O F IN T H E DESIGN.
Figure 3.32 Classification of construction conditions
1) Embankment condition
2) Trench condition and
3) Tunnel condition
Embankment condition prevails when the conduit is covered with fill above the original ground
surface or when a trench in undisturbed ground is so wide that trench wall friction does not affect
the load on the pipe. The embankment condition is further classified depending upon the position
of the top of conduit in relation to the original ground surface as
i) Positive projecting condition
ii) Zero projecting condition

iii) Negative projecting condition and
iv) Imperfect trench condition
3 - 65
Trench condition exists when the pipe or conduit is installed in a relatively narrow trench (not wider
than twice the external diameter of the pipe) cut in undisturbed soil and then covered with earth
backfill up to the original ground surface. Tunnel condition exists when the sewer is placed by
means of jacking or tunnelling.
3.43 LOADS FOR DIFFERENT CONDITIONS
3.43.1 Embankment or Projecting Conduit Condition
a) Positive Projecting Conduit
A conduit is said to be laid as a positive projecting conduit when the top of the conduit is projecting
above the natural ground into the overlying embankment (Figure 3-33).
TO P O F EM BANKM ENT
---------------- FINAL ELEVATION
Figure 3.33 Settlements that influence loads on positive projecting conduits
i) Load Producing Forces
The load on the positive projecting conduit is equal to the weight of the prism of soil directly
above the structure plus or minus vertical shearing forces, which act in a vertical plane extending
upward into the embankment from the sides of the conduit. These vertical shearing forces
ordinarily do not extend to the top of the embankment but terminate in a horizontal plane at
some elevation above the top of the conduit known as the plane of equal settlement as shown
in Figure 3.33, which also shows the elements of settlement ratio.
3 - 66
_ , Settlem ent o f critical p la n esettlem ent o f top o f conduit

Settlem ent ratio i\,D = ------------------- 1 :--------------- ;-------------------- ---------- 1---------------
Compression o f height o f column H o f em bankm ent (3-24)
_ + Sg )_ {Sf + dc )
where,
H: Height of top of conduit above adjacent natural ground surface (initial) or the bottom of a
wide trench
p. Bc: where p is the projection ratio and Bc is the outside width of conduit
Sm : Compression column of height H of embankment
Sg : Settlement of natural ground adjacent to the conduit
Sf : Settlement of the bottom of conduit and
dc : Deflection of conduit or shortening of its vertical height under load.
When (S m+ Sg) > (Sff + dc), rn

sd is positive, i.e., the shearing forces act downwards. Therefore, the
load on conduit is equal to weight of critical prism plus shear force. When (Sm+Sg) < (Sf +dc), rSD is
negative and the shear force acts in the upward direction. The settlement ratio rSD therefore,
indicates the direction and magnitude of the relative settlement of the prism of earth directly above and
adjoining the conduit. The product of rSDand p gives the relative height of plane of equal settlement
and hence of the magnitude of the shear component of the load. When rSD*p = 0, the plane of equal
settlement coincides with the critical plane and there are no shearing forces and the load is equal to
the weight of the central prism. It is not practicable to predetermine the rsd value. The recommended
design values based on actual experience are given in Table 3.17.
Table 3.17 Recommended design values of settlement ratios
Type of Conduit Type of Soil Settlement Ratio
1 Rigid Rock or unyielding foundation + 1.0
2 Rigid Ordinary foundation + 0.5 to + 0.8
3 Rigid Yielding foundation 0 to + 0.5
4 Rigid Negative projecting installation 0.3 to 0.5
5 Flexible Poorly compacted side fill 0.4 to 0
6 Flexible Well compacted side fill 0
Source:CPHEEO, 1993
ii) Computation of Loads
Marstons formula for positive projecting conduits (both rigid and flexible) is mentioned overleaf.
3 - 67
where,
Wc : Load on conduit in kg/m
w: Unit weight of backfill material in kg/m3
Bc : Outside width of conduit in m
Cc : Load coefficient, which is a function of the product of the projection ratio and the settlement
ratio and ratio of the height of fill above the top of the conduit to the outside width of the
conduit (H/B). It is also influenced by the coefficient of internal friction of the backfill material
and the Rankines ratio of lateral pressure to vertical pressure Ku. Suggested values for Ku
for positive and negative settlement ratios are 0.19 and 0. 13, respectively.
The value of Cccan be obtained from Figure 3.34.
VALUES OF COEFFICIENT Cc

Figure 3.34 Diagram for coefficient Cc for positive projecting conduits
b) Negative Projecting Conduit
A conduit is said to be laid in a negative projecting condition when it is laid in a trench, which is
narrow with respect to the size of pipe and shallow with respect to depth of cover. Moreover, the native
material of the trench is of sufficient strength that the trench shape can be maintained dependably
during the placing of the embankment, the top of the conduit being below the natural ground surface
3 - 68
and the trench refilled with loose material and the embankment constructed above (Figure 3.35).
The prism of soil above the conduit, being loose and greater in depth compared to the adjoining
embankment, will settle more than the prism over the adjoining areas thus generating upward
shear forces which relieve or reduce the load on the conduit.
TOP OF EMBANKMENT
Figure 3.35 Negative projecting conduit
i) Computation of Loads
Marstons formula for negative projecting conduits is given by
(3.26)
where,
Wc : Load on the conduit in kg/m
Bd : Width of trench in m
w: Unit weight of soil in kg/m3
Cn : Load coefficient, which is a function of the ratio (H/Bd) of the height of fill and the
width of trench equal to the projection ratio p (Vertical distance from the firm ground
surface down to the top of the conduit/width of the trench) and the settlement ratio
rsd given by the expression,
settlement o f natural ground - settlement o f critical plane

compression o f the backfill within the height p B d (3.27)
_Sg-(S<l+Sf +dc)
Values of Cn, for various values of H/Bd, rsd, and p are given in Figure 3.36 overleaf.
Exact determination of the settlement ratio is very difficult. Recommended value of rsd is 0.3 for
design purposes. Elements of settlement ratios are shown in Figure 3.37 overleaf.
3 - 69
Figure 3.36 Coefficient Cn for negative projecting conduits and imperfect trench conditions
Figure 3.37 Settlements that influence loads on negative projecting conduits
3 - 70
c) Imperfect Trench Conduits
An imperfect trench conduit is employed to minimize the load on a conduit under embankments
of unusual heights. The conduit is first installed as a positive projecting conduit. The embankment
is then built up to some height above the top and thoroughly compacted as it is placed. A trench
of the same width as the conduit is excavated directly over it down to or near its top. This trench
is refilled with loose compressible material and the balance of the embankment completed in a
normal manner (Figure 3.38).

Figure 3.38 Imperfect trench conditions
The Marstons formula for this installation condition is again given by
The values of Cn in this case also may be obtained from Figure 3.36 for negative projecting conduits
taking Bc= Bd on the assumption that the trench fill is no wider than the pipe.
3.44 TRENCH CONDITION
Generally, sewers are laid in ditches or trenches by excavation in natural or undisturbed soil and
then covered by refilling the trench to the original ground level.
a) Load Producing Forces
The vertical dead load to which a conduit is subjected under trench conditions is the resultant of
two major forces. The first component is the weight of the prism of soil within the trench and above
the top of the pipe and the second is due to the friction or shearing forces generated between
the prism of soil in the trench and the sides of the trench produced by settlement of backfill. The
resultant load on the horizontal plane at the top of the pipe within the trench is equal to the weight of
the backfill minus these upward shearing forces as shown in Figure 3.39 overleaf.
3 - 71

Figure 3.39 Load producing forces
b) Computation of Loads
The load on rigid conduits in trench condition is given by the Marstons formula in the form
(3.29)
where,
W : Load on the pipe in kg per linear meter

w : Unit weight of backfill soil in kg/m3
Bd : Width of trench at the top of the pipe in m and
Cd : Load coefficient which is a function of a ratio of height of fill to width of trench (H/Bd)
and of the friction coefficient between the backfill and the sides of the trench.
Weights of common filling materials (w) and values of Cd for common soil conditions encountered
are given in Table 3.18 and Table 3.19, respectively.
Table 3.18 Weights of common filling material
Materials W eight (kg/m3) Materials Weight (kg/m3)
Dry Sand 1,600 Saturated Clay 2,080
Ordinary (Damp Sand) 1,840 Saturated Top Soil 1,840
Wet Sand 1,920 Sand and Damp Soil 1,600
Damp Clay 1,920
3 - 72
Table 3-19 Values of Cd for calculating loads on pipes in trenches
Safe working Values of Cd

Minimum Maximum Ordinary Extreme
Ratio HIBd Completely
possible without for Ordinary maximum maximum
*** Top Soil **** *****
cohesion** Sand for clay for clay
0.5 0.455 0.461 0.464 0.469 0.474
1.0 0.830 0.852 0.864 0.881 0.898
1.5 1.140 1.183 1.208 1.242 1.278
2.0 1.395 1.464 1.504 1.560 1.618
2.5 1.606 1.702 1.764 1.838 1.923
3.0 1.780 1.904 1.978 2.083 2.196
3.5 1.923 2.075 2.167 2.298 2.441
4.0 2.041 2.221 2.329 2.487 2.660
4.5 2.136 2.344 2.469 2.650 2.856
5.0 2.219 2.448 2.590 2.798 3.032
5.5 2.286 2.537 2.693 2.926 3.190
6.0 2.340 2.612 2.782 3.038 3.331
6.5 2.386 2.675 2.859 3.137 3.458
7.0 2.423 2.729 2.925 3.223 3.571
7.5 2.454 2.775 2.982 3.299 3.673
8.0 2.479 2.814 3.031 3.366 3.764
8.5 2.500 2.847 3.073 3.424 3.845
9.0 2.518 2.875 3.109 3.476 3.918
9.5 2.532 2.898 3.141 3.521 3.983
10.0 2.543 2.918 3.167 3.560 4.042
11.0 2.561 2.950 3.210 3.626 4.141
12.0 2.573 2.972 3.242 3.676 4.221
13.0 2.581 2.989 3.266 3.715 4.285
14.0 2.587 3.000 3.283 3.745 4.336
15.0 2.591 3.009 3.296 3.768 4.378
Very Great 2.599 3.030 3.333 3.846 4.548
Wc = load on pipe in kg per linear meter

Cd = Coefficient
w = Weight of trench filling material in kg/m3
Bd = Width of trench a little below the top of the pipe in meters
* Ratio of height of fill above top of pipe to width of trench a little below the top of the pipe.
** These values give the loads generally imposed by granular filling materials before tamping or settling.
*** Use these values as safe for all ordinary cases of sand filling.
**** Thoroughly wet. Use these values as safe for all ordinary cases of clay filling.
***** Completely saturated. Use these values only for extremely unfavourable conditions.
3 - 73
Equation (3.29) gives the total vertical load due to backfill in the horizontal plane at the top of the conduit
as shown in Figure 3.39 if the pipe is rigid. For flexible conduits, the formula may be modified as
where,
Bc : Outside width of the conduit in m
c) Influence of Width of Trench
It has been experimentally seen that when the width of the trench excavated is not more than twice
the external width of the conduit, the assumption made in the trench condition of loading holds
good. If the width of the trench goes beyond three times the outside dimension of the conduit, it is
necessary to apply the embankment condition of loading. In the transition width from
Bd = 2Bc to Bd = 3Bc computation of load by both the procedures will give the same results.
In case of excavations with sloping sides (possible in undeveloped areas), the provision of a
sub-trench (Figure 3.40) minimizes the load on the pipe by reducing the value of Bd.
Figure 3.40 Examples of sub trench
3.45 TUNNEL CONDITION
When the conduit is laid more than 9 m to 12 m deep or when the surface obstructions are such that
it is difficult to construct the pipeline by the conventional procedure of excavation and backfilling, it
may be more economical to place the conduit by means of tunnelling. The general method in this
case is to excavate the tunnel, to support the earth by suitable means and then to lay the conduit. The
space between the conduit and the tunnel is finally filled up with compacted earth or concrete grout
as indicated in Figure 3.41 overleaf.
If the length of tunnel is short say 6 m to 10 m, the entire circular section can be constructed as one
unit. For longer tunnels, construction may be in segments, with refilling proceeding simultaneously.
3 - 74
T O P O F NATURAL G R O U N D
Bt
H
/ S P A C E BETW EEN C O N D U IT AND

7 NATURAL G R O U N D FILLED W ITH
LIM IT O F T U N N E L C O M P A C T E D M ATERIAL
EXCA VATIO N
Figure 3.41 Conduit in tunnel
a) Load Producing Forces
The vertical load acting on the tunnel supports and eventually the pipe in the tunnel is the
resultant of two major forces viz., the weight of the overhead prism of soil within the width of the tunnel
excavation and the shearing forces generated between the interior prisms and the adjacent material
due to friction and cohesion of the soil.
b) Load Computations
Marstons formula to be used in this case of installation of conduit is given by:
Wt = C t Bt (wBt - 2 C ) (3.31)
where,
Wt : Load on the pipe or tunnel support in kg/m
w: Unit weight of soil above the tunnel in kg/m3
Bt : Maximum width of the funnel excavation in m
C: Coefficient of cohesion in kg/m2 and
Ct : Load coefficient which is a function of the ratio (H/Bt) of the distance from the ground
surface to the top of the tunnel to the maximum width of tunnel excavation and of the
coefficient of internal friction of the material of the tunnel.
When the coefficient of cohesion is zero, the formula reduces to the same form as in trench
condition equation (3.29).
3 - 75
Value of C for various values of H/Bt and different soil conditions are to be obtained from Figure 3-42.
1 2 3 4 5
VALUES O F C O E F FIC IE N T C t

Figure 3.42 Diagram for coefficient Ct for tunnels in undisturbed soil
Recommended values of coefficient of cohesion for different types of soils are given in Table 3.20.
Table 3.20 Cohesion coefficients for different soils
Type of Soil kg/m2 Type of Soil kg/m2
Soft Clay 200 Silty Sand 500
Medium Clay 1,200 Dense Sand 1,400
Hard Clay 4,700 Saturated Top Soil 500
Loose Dry Sand 0
3 - 76
3.46 EFFECT OF SUBMERGENCE
Sewers may be laid in trenches or under embankment in areas that may be temporarily or
permanently submerged in water. The fill load, in such cases, will be reduced and correspond to the
buoyant weight of the fill material. However, effect of submergence could be ignored which provides
an additional factor of safety, but it may be necessary to check whether a pipe is subject to flotation.
Under submergence, the minimum height of the fill material that will be required to prevent flotation
ignoring the frictional forces in the fill can be determined from the equation:
(3.32)
where,
Hmin : Minimum height

of fill material in m
ws : Saturated density of the soil in kg/m3
w0 : Density of water in kg/m3
Wc : Unit weight of the empty pipe in kg/linear metre and
Bc : Outside width of the conduit in m.
W herever sufficient height of fill material is not available, anti-flotation blocks should be provided.
(As shown in Example IX in Appendix A.3.8)
3.46.1 Load on Conduit due to Superimposed Loads
The types of superimposed loads, which are generally encountered in buried conduits may
be categorized as (a) concentrated load and (b) distributed load. These are explained
diagrammatically in Figure 3.43.
GROUND SURFACE
UNIFORM LOAD K g/m 2

ACTING ON A R E A D xM
GROUND SURFACE
(a) (b)
Source:CPHEEO, 1993
Figure 3.43 (a) Concentrated superimposed load vertically centred over conduit (left)
(b) Distributed superimposed load vertically centred over conduit (right)
3 - 77
3.47 CONCENTRATED LOADS
The formula for load due to superimposed concentrated load such as a truck wheel (Figure 3.43) is
given in the following form by Holls integration of Boussinesqs formula
(3.33)
where,
sc : Load on the conduit in kg/m

P : Concentrated load in kg acting on the surface
F : Impact factor (1.0 for air field runways, 1.5 for highway traffic and air field taxi ways,
1.75 for railway traffic) and
Cs : Load coefficient which is a function of
(3.34)
where,
H : Height of the top of the conduit to ground surface in m
Bc : Outside width of conduit in m, and
L: Effective length of the conduit to which the load is transmitted in m.
Values of Cs for various values of (B /2H ) and (L/2H) are obtained from Table 3.20
The effective length of the conduit is defined as the length over which the average load due to
surface traffic units produces the same stress in the conduit wall, as does the actual load, which
varies in intensity from point to point. This is generally taken as 1 m or the actual length of the
conduit if it is less than 1 m.
3.48 DISTRIBUTED LOAD
For the case of distributed superimposed loads, the formula for load on conduit is given by
where,
Wsd : Load on the conduit in kg/m

P : Intensity of the distributed load in kg/m2
F : Impact factor
Bc : Width of the conduit in m
Cs : Load coefficient, a function of D/2H and L/2H from Table 3.21
H : Height of the top of conduit to the ground surface in m
D, L : Width and length in m respectively of the area over which the distributed load acts
3 - 78
Part A: Engineering
Table 3.21 Values of load coefficients, Cs for concentrated and distributed superimposed loads vertically centred over conduits
D M L
o r -----
2H 2H 2H
or
A _ 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.2 1.5 2.0 5.0
2H
0.1 0.019 0.037 0.053 0.067 0.079 0.089 0.097 0.103 0.108 0.112 0.117 0.121 0.124 0.128
0.2 0.037 0.072 0.103 0.131 0.155 0.174 0.189 0.202 0.211 0.219 0.229 0.238 0.244 0.248
0.3 0.053 0.103 0.149 0.190 0.224 0.252 0.274 0.292 0.306 0.318 0.333 0.345 0.355 0.360
0.4 0.067 0.131 0.190 0.241 0.284 0.320 0.349 0.373 0.391 0.405 0.425 0.440 0.454 0.460
0.5 0.079 0.155 0.224 0.284 0.336 0.379 0.414 0.441 0.463 0.481 0.505 0.525 0.540 0.548
0.6 0.089 0.174 0.252 0.320 0.379 0.428 0.467 0.499 0.524 0.544 0.572 0.596 0.613 0.624
0.7 0.097 0.189 0.274 0.349 0.414 0.467 0.511 0.546 0.584 0.597 0.628 0.650 0.674 0.688
0.8 0.103 0.202 0.292 0.373 0.441 0.499 0.546 0.584 0.615 0.639 0.674 0.703 0.725 0.740
0.9 0.108 0.211 0.306 0.391 0.463 0.524 0.574 0.615 0.647 0.673 0.711 0.742 0.766 0.784
1.0 0.112 0.219 0.318 0.405 0.481 0.544 0.597 0.639 0.673 0.701 0.740 0.774 0.800 0.816
1.2 0.117 0.229 0.333 0.425 0.505 0.572 0.628 0.674 0.711 0.740 0.783 0.820 0.849 0.868
1.5 0.121 0.238 0.345 0.440 0.525 0.596 0.650 0.703 0.742 0.774 0.820 0.861 0.894 0.916
2.0 0.124 0.244 0.355 0.454 0.540 0.613 0.674 0.725 0.766 0.800 0.849 0.894 0.930 0.956
3-79
For class AA IRC loading, in the critical case of wheel load of 6.25 tones, the intensity of distributed
load with wheel area 300mm * 150mm is given by
3.49 CONDUITS UNDER RAILWAY TRACK
The load on conduits under railway track is given by
W = 4 Cs U B C (3.36)
where,
U: Uniformly distributed load in tonnes / m2 from the surface directly over the conduit and
equal to
rT PF + 2WtB PF Wt
U = ------------- = ------ + ' (3.37)
4AB 4AB 2A
where,
P : Axle load in tonnes (22.5 tonnes for Broad gauge)
F : Impact factor for railroad =1.75
2A : Length of the sleeper in m (2.7 m for Broad gauge)
2B : Distance between the two axles (1.84 m for broad gauge)
Wt : Weight of the track structure in tones/m (0.3 tonnes/m for broad gauge)
Cs : Load coefficient which depends on the height of the top of sleeper from the top of the conduit
B : Width of the conduit in m
For broad gauge track, the formula will reduce to:
(3.38)
3.50 SUPPORTING STRENGTH OF RIGID CONDUIT
The ability of a conduit to resist safely the calculated earth load depends not only on its inherent
strength but also on the distribution of the vertical load and bedding reaction and on the lateral
pressure acting against the sides of the conduit. The inherent strength of a rigid conduit is usually
expressed in terms of the three edge bearing test results, the conditions of which are, however,
different from the field load conditions. The magnitude of the supporting strength of a pipe as
installed in the field is dependent upon the distribution of the vertical load and the reaction against
the bottom of the pipe. It also depends on the magnitude and distribution of the lateral pressure
acting on the sides of the pipe.
3 - 80
3.50.1 Laboratory Test Strength
All rigid pipes may be tested for strength in the laboratory by the three-edge-bearing test (ultimate
load). Methods of test and minimum strength for concrete (unreinforced and reinforced) stoneware
and AC pipes and other details are given in Appendix A.3.9.
3.50.2 Field Supporting Strength
The field supporting strength of a rigid conduit is the maximum load per unit length, which the pipe will
support while retaining complete serviceability when installed under specified conditions of bedding
and backfilling. The field supporting strength however does not include any factor of safety. The ratio
of the strength of a pipe under any stated condition of loading and bedding to its strength measured
by the three-edge-bearing test is called the load factor.
The load factor does not contain a factor of safety. Load factors have been determined
experimentally and analytically for the commonly used construction condition for both trench and
embankment conduits. The basic design relationship between the different design elements is the
safe supporting strength (W),
W = Field supporting strength / Factor of safety

= Load factor * three edge bearing strength / Factor of safety (3.39)
A factor of safety of at least 1.5 should be applied to the specified minimum three-edge-bearing
strength to determine the working strength for all the rigid conduits.
3.50.3 Protection and Bedding of Sewers
3.50.3.1 Guidelines
The factor of safety recommended for concrete pipes for sewers is 1.5, which is considerably less as
compared to that for most engineering structures which have a factor of safety of at least 2.5. As the
margin of safety against the ultimate failure is low, it becomes imperative to guarantee that the loads
imposed on sewer pipes are not greater than the design loads for the given installation conditions.
In order to achieve this objective the following procedures are recommended:
1. Minimum width of the trench should be specified in consonance with the requirements of
adequate working space to allow access to all parts and joints of pipes.
2. Specification should lay proper emphasis on the limit of the width of trench to be adopted in the
field, which should not exceed that adopted in the design calculations. Any deviations from this
requirement during the construction should be investigated for their possible effect on the load
coming on the pipe and steps should be taken to improve the safe supporting strength of pipe for
this condition of loading by adopting suitable bedding or such other methods when necessary.
3. The field engineer should keep in touch with the design engineer throughout the duration of the
project and any deviation from the design assumptions due to the exigencies of work, should be
immediately investigated and corrective measures taken in time.
3 - 81
Part A: Engineering___________________________________________________ CONSTRUCTION OF SEWERS
4. All pipes used on the work should be tested as per the IS specifications and test certificates
of the manufacturers should be furnished for every consignment brought to the site.
5. Whenever shoring is used, the pulling out of planks on completion of work should be carried
out in stages and this should be properly supervised to ensure that the space occupied by the
planks is properly backfilled.
6. Proper backfilling methods both as regards to selection of materials, methods of placing and
proper compaction should be in general agreement with the design assumptions.
3.50.3.2 Bedding in Quicksand Soil Conditions
In quick sand conditions, it is necessary to anchor the sewer to the ground and hold it at the grade
as laid in the face of soil sinkage. This is done by using the Venteak piles, which are driven on both
sides of the sewer into the soil right up to hard strata and connecting the two by a cross beam at the
soffit of the sewer. Then the sewer is tied securely to the cross beam by a 8 mm thick nylon rope in
two rounds and singeing the ends of the rope integrally to prevent slippages. An example is shown
in Figure 3-44. The venteak pile cross bracing can be a single brace inserted between the piles for
non-metallic smaller sewers and double bracing for metallic higher sized sewers as in Figure 3.44.
A work in progress in such conditions is shown in Figure 3.45 overleaf.
PLAN
(The sewer pipe should be cross-braced with the horizontal supports by means of non-biodegradable
nylon rope of 8 mm multi-stranded and with multiple wraps around and the edges singed to heat weld
the entire rope without loosening or unwinding)
Figure 3.44 Example of Venteak supported sewer pipe
3 - 82
Source: L&T Shipbuilding Limited, Kattupalli, Chennai, 2012
Figure 3.45 Typical arrangements for laying sewers in high subsoil locations using dewatering pump
sets, tube wells and Venteak piles with cross brace and nylon rope wrapping around the sewers
securing it to the venteak piles and brace
3.50.3.3 Type of Bedding
The type of bedding (granular, concrete cradle, full concrete encasement etc.) would depend on
the soil strata and depth at which sewer is laid. The load due to backfill, superimposed load (live
load) and the three-edge-bearing strength of pipe (IS: 458) are the governing criteria for selection of
appropriate bedding factors.
Design Load X Factor of Satety*

Bedding Factor = ---------------------------------------------- (3.40)
Three Edge Bearing Strength
* Factor of safety = 1.5
The type of bedding to be used depends on the bedding factor and the matrix of type of bedding for
different diameters and different depths has been tabulated in Table 3.22 and Table 3.23.
Table 3.22 Type of bedding for sewer pipes
Bedding Factor Type of Bedding
Up to 1.9 Class B : Granular (GRB)
1 .9 - 2.8 Class Ab : Plain Concrete cradle (PCCB)
2 .8 - 3.4 Class Ac : Reinforced Concrete cradle (RCCB) with 0.4 % Reinforcement
> 3.4 Class Ad : Reinforced concrete arch with 1.0% reinforcement
3 - 83
Table 3.23 Selection of bedding for different depths and different diameters
Bedding type Bedding type

Diameter Diameter
for cover depth in m for cover depth in m
up to 2 .5 3 .5 5 .0 up to 2 .5 3 .5 5 .0
mm mm
2.5 3.5 5.0 6.0 2.5 3.5 5.0 6.0
400 Ab Ab Ab Ac 1,400 B Ab Ab Ab
500 Ab Ab Ab Ab 1,500 B Ab Ab Ab
600 B Ab Ab Ab 1,600 B Ab Ab Ab
800 B Ab Ab Ab 2,200 B Ab Ab Ac
900 B Ab Ab Ab 2,400 B Ab Ab Ac
1,000 B Ab Ab Ab 2,600 B Ab Ab Ac
1,200 B Ab Ab Ab 2,800 B Ab Ab Ac
3.50.3.4 Classes of Bedding for Trench Conditions
Four classes, A, B, C and D, of bedding used most often for pipes in trenches are illustrated in
Figure 3-46 overleaf. Class A bedding may be either concrete cradle or concrete arch. Class B is
bedding having a shaped bottom or compacted granular bedding with a carefully compacted backfill.
Class C is an ordinary bedding having a shaped bottom or compacted granular bedding but with a
lightly compacted backfill. Class D is one with flat bottom trench with no care being taken to secure
compaction of backfill at the sides and immediately over the pipe and hence is not recommended.
Class B or C bedding with compacted granular bedding is generally recommended. Shaped bottom
is impracticable and costly and hence is not recommended.
The pipe bedding materials must remain firm and not permit displacement of pipes.
The material has to be uniformly graded or well graded. Uniformly graded materials include pea
gravel or one-size materials with a low percentage of over and undersized particles.
Well-graded materials containing several sizes of particles in stated proportions, ranging from a
maximum to minimum size coarse sand, pea gravel, crushed gravel, crushed screenings, can be used
for pipe bedding.
Fine materials or screenings are not satisfactory for stabilizing trench bottoms and are difficult to
compact in a uniform manner to provide proper pipe bedding.
Well-graded material is most effective for stabilizing trench bottom and has a lesser tendency to
flow than uniformly graded materials. However, uniformly graded material is easier to place and
compact above sewer pipes.
3 - 84
Be + 20cm MIN Be + 20cm MIN
PLAIN OR
REINFORCED CO M PACTED .0.25 Be / 10 CM MIN
CO NCRETE GRANULAR
CAREFULLY
MATERIAL PLAIN OR
TAMPED
REINFORCED
BACK FILL 0.25 Be MIN
0.25 Be CO NCRETE
,25 D 10cm MIN
C O NC RETE CRADLE C O NC RETE ARCH
CLASS A
30cm CAREFULLY
CO M PACTED
CAREFULLY COMPACTED GRANULAR
COMPACTED BACK FILL MATERIAL
BACKFILL
0.25 Be MIN
FINE GRANULAR
FILL
SHAPED BOTTOM W ITH TAMPED BACK FILL CO M PACTED GRANULAR BEDDING

(NO T RECOMMENDED)
CLASS B
15cm 15cm
LIGHTLY
LIGHTLY COMPACTED
CO M PACTED BACK FILL
BACK FILL
OM PACTED
GRANULAR
MATERIAL
SH A PED BOTTOM (NO T RECOMMENDED) GRANULAR BEDDING
CLASS C
LOOSE BACK FILL
FLAT BOTTOM IMPERMISSIBLE BEDDING

(NO T RECOMMENDED)
CLASS D
NOTE : IN ROCK, TRENCH IS EXCAVATED AT LEAST 15cm

BELOW THE BELL OF THE PIPE EXCEPT WHERE
CONCRETE CRADLE IS USED
Figure 3.46 Classes of bedding for conduit in trench
3 - 85
3.50.3.5 Load Factors for Bedding
The load factors for the different classes of bedding are given in Table 3-24.
Table 3.24 Load factor for different classes of bedding
Class of Load
Condition
bedding factor
Aa Concrete cradle-plain concrete and lightly tamped backfill 2 .2
Ab Concrete cradle-plain concrete and carefully tamped backfill 2 .8
Ac Concrete cradle-RCC with P-0.4% Up to 3.4
Arch type - plain concrete 2 .8
RCC with P = 0.4% Up to 3.4

Ad
RCC with P = 0.1% Up to 4.8
P is ratio of area of steel to area of concrete at the crown)

Shaped bottom or compacted granular bedding with
B 1.9
carefully compacted backfill
Shaped bottom or compacted granular bedding with
C 1.5
lightly compacted backfill
D Flat bottom trench 1.1
Source:CPHEEO, 1993
The granular material used must stabilize the trench bottom in addition to providing a firm and
uniform support for the pipe. Well-graded crushed rock or gravel with the maximum size not
exceeding 25 mm, is recommended for the purpose. Where rock or other unyielding foundation
material is encountered, bedding may be according to one of the Classes A, B or C, but with the
following additional requirements.
Class A: The hard unyielding material should be excavated down to the bottom of the
concrete cradle.
Class B or Class C: The hard, unyielding material should be excavated below the bottom of the
pipe and pipe bell, to a depth of at least 15 cm.
The width of the excavation should be at least 1.25 times the outside diameter of the pipe and
it should be refilled with granular material.
Total encasement of non-reinforced rigid pipe in concrete may be necessary where the required safe
supporting strength cannot be obtained by other bedding methods.
The load factor for concrete encasement varies with the thickness of concrete. The effect of M-20
concrete encasement of various thicknesses on supporting strength of pipe under trench conditions
is given in Figure 3.47 overleaf.
3 - 86
LI /
/ / / / / ,
/ / / / / /
O)
/ t / / /
24 / / / / / / / ' t i

o PIPE )IA IN mrr
o # / wQ$V &\4 f
7
/f4 /f & /
21 / / / /
/ / / / /s y
I
I > / / / / / / / s // / / /
/ / / / // /
CD / / ' / / '/ ' / / / / /
z 18 / / / / / /
LU / / / ' / / f/ / */ / / / /, / / / / s/ / y
o; / / / / /
/ J' s / / / // /
/ / / /
W 15 / / / / / y / , ' / / s/ 'Y
CD / / s ' / / /
/ ' // '/ / ' / / /
/ / / /
I
or 12 /
/
/ / // / / / / / t P
o /
/
/
/
s s'
CL
CL 9 /
/
/
/
r - # A
w '/ /
D y' / / /
W / / / /
/ / /
LU
6 / / s //y * , v S 's
X/
<f)
< s '
LU 3
/
// 4' M
Ct z /s
O
0
25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 22
THICKNESS OF ENCASEMENT (mm)
Figure 3.47 Effect of M-20 concrete encasement of various thickness on supporting strength of
pipe under trench conditions
3.50.3.6 Supporting Strength in Embankment Conditions
The soil pressure against the sides of a pipe placed in an embankment may be significant in resisting
the vertical load on the structure.
3.50.3.7 Classes of Bedding
The beddings, which are generally adopted for projecting conduits laid under the embankment conditions
of installation are illustrated in Figure 3.48 overleaf.
The classifications of the beddings are as under:
CLASS A: In this case, the conduit is laid on a mat of concrete.
CLASS B: The conduit is laid on accurately shaped earth to fit the bottom of the pipe and the
sides are filled with thoroughly tamped earth.
3 - 87

Figure 3.48 Classes of bedding for projecting conduits
CLASS C: In this type of bedding the conduit is laid on accurately shaped earth to fit the bottom
surface of the conduit. For rock foundations, the conduit is laid on a layer of granular cushion and
the sides of the conduit are filled up.
CLASS D: The conduit is laid on earth not shaped to fit the bottom of the conduit. In case of
rocky soil, the conduit is laid on a shallow granular cushion.
3.50.3.8 Load Factors for Rigid Pipes
The load factor for rigid pipes, installed as projecting conduits under embankments or in wide
trenches, is dependent on the type of bedding, the magnitude of the active lateral soil pressure and
on the area of the pipe over which the active lateral pressure acts.
3 - 88
The load factor for projecting circular conduits may be calculated by the formula:
where,
Lf : Load factor
N : Parameter dependent on the type of bedding
Z : Parameter dependent upon the area over which the lateral pressure acts effectively
q : Ratio of total lateral pressure to total vertical load on pipe
a) Positive Projecting Conduits
The ratio q for positive projecting conduits may be estimated by the formula
where,
k : Rankines ratio which may be taken as 0.33.
The value of N for different types of beddings for circular pipes is given in Table 3.25.
Table 3-25 Values of N for different pipe beddings
Type of Bedding Value of N Type of Bedding Value of N

A - Reinforced concrete cradle 0.42 to 0.51 C 0.84
A - Plain concrete cradle 0.51 to 0.64 D 1.31
B 0.71
The value of Z in case of circular pipes is given in Table 3.26.
Table 3.26 Values of Z for different pipe beddings
Fraction of Value of Z for Fraction of Value of Z for

conduit on which conduit on which
A Class Other A Class Other
lateral pressure lateral pressure
Beddings Beddings Beddings Beddings
act m act m
0.0 0.150 0.000 0.7 0.811 0.594
0.3 0.743 0.217 0.9 0.678 0.655
0.5 0.856 0.423 1.0 0.638 0.638
Source:CPHEEO, 1993
3 - 89
b) Negative Projecting Conduits
The load factor for negative projecting conduits may also be determined by the equations (3.41) and
(3.42) with a value of k of 0.15, provided the side fills are well compacted.
c) Imperfect Trench Conditions
The equations for positive projecting conditions will hold good for those conditions as well.
3.50.3.8.1 Conduits under Simultaneous Internal Pressure and External Loading
Simultaneous action of internal pressure and external load gives a lower supporting strength of a
pipe than what it would be if the external load acted alone.
If the bursting strength and the three-edge strength of a pipe are known, the relation
between the internal pressure and external loads, which will cause failure may be computed by
means of the formula:
(3.43)
S
where,
t: Internal pressure in kg/cm 2 at failure when external load is simultaneously acting
T : Bursting strength of a pipe in kg/cm 2 when no external load is simultaneously acting
s : Three-edge-bearing load at failure in kg/linear metre when there is simultaneous

action of internal pressure and
S : Three-edge-bearing load at failure in kg/linear metre when there is no internal

pressure simultaneously acting.
3.51 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN DIFFERENT ELEMENTS IN STRUCTURAL DESIGN
The basic design relationships between the different design elements are as follows for rigid pipe
Ultimate three edge bearing strength

Safe working strength = (3.44)
Factor of safety
Safe field supporting strength = Safe working strength * load factor (3.45)
Appendix A.3.9 gives the details of three-edge-bearing tests.
It is but obvious, that sewers have to be sturdy enough to sustain the load of the backfill material
(dead load), as well as the load due to the vehicular traffic (live load). Factors like, depth of the
backfill, type of this material, and width of the trench influence the magnitude of the dead load; while
the parameters that determine the load-carrying capacity of the sewer line are the crushing strength
of the pipe, and the characteristics of the pipe bedding. Bedding defines the way in which a pipe is
placed on the bottom of the trench.
3 - 90
Proper bedding distributes the load around the circumference of the pipe, and this increases the
supporting strength of the pipe. The ratio of actual field supporting strength to the crushing strength
of the pipe is known as load factor.
It may be pointed out that class D bedding is the weakest of all, and hence is not generally adopted.
Here, the trench bed being left flat and bare, the pipe is not fully supported due to its projecting
bell-ends. Further, if the backfill is placed loosely over the sewer without the necessary compaction,
the barrel may not get properly supported by the bedding. The ordinary bedding (Class C), offers a
better support, say, with a load factor of 1.5. In first class bedding (Class B), the granular material
extends halfway up the pipe, and a carefully compacted backfill can give a load factor of even 1.9.
In Class A bedding, the barrel is supported by a concrete bed (yielding a load factor of 2.8) with
a careful compaction of the backfill. It is common, in such engineering constructions to define a
safely factor (SF) as well, such as:
Field Supporting Strength

Safety Factor = (3.46 )
Safe Supporting Strength
Safety factor of 1.5 is normally adopted for clay or unreinforced concrete sewers to address the
possibility of using poor quality materials or for faulty construction. With a view to selecting the best
bedding condition, it is to be ensured that the safe supporting strength is equal to or greater than the
total expected load over the pipe.
For pipelines situated in shallower trenches (such as, storm sewers or even some water mains),
the component of load due to vehicular traffic may be a substantial part of the total load on the line.
However, for deeper trenches (such as, sanitary sewers), the proportion of live load may not be
significant compared to the dead load. In USA, Marstons Formula is commonly used to determine
the load due to backfill, as in Equation (3.23).
3.51.1 Field Layout and Installation
It is understood that the straight line and slope of a sewer has to be carried out meticulously as per
design. The horizontal layout determines the location as well as direction of the sewer line, while
slope of the line provides the necessary hydraulic carrying capacity of the sewerage system.
The location of the trench is generally laid out first as an offset line running parallel to the proposed
sewer centre line. This offset line is demarcated by wooden stakes driven into the ground surface at
intervals of, say, 15 m. The offset line, as is clear, is quite away from the sewer centre line with a view
not to allow it being disturbed during construction; however, it has to be proximate enough so that
the transfer of measurements to the actual trench can readily be done. The wooden stakes are set
with their tops at a specific height above the designed trench bottom (horizontal slope line) thus, the
checking of the trench depth during excavation, etc., can be done with ease.
Two procedures are available to lay pipe sections in the open trench, namely, by batter boards, and
by laser beams. Batter boards are placed across the trench at uniform intervals. The tops of these
boards can be set at even height above the designed sewer invert elevation.
3 - 91
The centre line of the sewer is traced on the boards by extending a line of sight with a transit
level or a theodolite and a string is stretched from board to board along this very line. Later on,
this line is transferred onto the trench bed by means of a plumb bob for the invert levels. Invert
levels and characteristics indicated by vertical rods are marked off in even increments and the lower
end of each rod is placed on the pipe invert bedding plane, and the string over the batter boards
helps to check if it matches with the proper elevation mark on the rod, by appropriate adjustment
of the pipe placement.
In the laser method, advantage is taken of an intense, narrow beam of light that is projected by
the laser instrument, over a long distance. This beam is aligned through a sewer pipe to strike a
target held at the other end of the pipe.
A transit that is placed above a manhole helps establish the alignment of the sewer with reference
to field survey points, and transfer it down to the laser instrument that is mounted inside the manhole.
Lasers can achieve an accuracy up to 0.01 per cent over a distance of up to 300 m.
3.52 CROSS DRAINAGE WORKS
Cross drainage, works arise when a sewer has to cross another service like electricity, water line,
gas piping, telecommunication cable, river course, nalah, etc. The following shall be mandatorily
implemented without fail.
In regard to the electric power cables, the sewer shall be laid above the electric power cable and
horizontally away from the power cable with clearances of minimum 30 cm all round as per IS: 1255.
In regard to water lines, the sewer shall always travel below the water line.
With regard to gas lines, the sewer has to travel above the gas line so that sewer gases, if they
escape, need not accidentally set off an ignition of the gas line. With regard to telecommunication
cables, lateral separation of at least 30 cm shall be followed. In cases of river crossing and nalah
crossing, each situation shall be decided on its site conditions.
Gravity sewers, if possible, may be converted to pumped sewer lines by a low lift dedicated pumping
station, before the crossing discharging into the gravity section after crossing the water course; this
will help in keeping the pumped sewer visible to the eye or close to the ground at all times.
3.53 SEWER VENTILATORS
In a modern, well-designed sewerage system, there is no need to provide ventilation on such

elaborate scale considered necessary in the past, especially with the present day policy to omit
intercepting traps in house connections.
The ventilating columns are not necessary where intercepting traps are not provided. It is necessary
however, to make provision for the escape of air to take care of the exigencies of full flow and to keep
the sewage as fresh as possible, especially in outfall sewers. In case of storm sewers, this can be
done by providing ventilating manhole covers.
3 - 92
3.54 PREVENTION OF CROSS CONNECTION
3.54.1 Visual Separation
A cross connection between water main and sewer main seldom occurs because of the sizes of
these mains. However, where the location is complicated, the water mains shall be either blue
coloured pipes or shall be painted with blue florescent coloured paint.
3.54.2 Protection of W ater Mains
A minimum offset of equal to half the width of the manhole plus 30 cm shall be the lateral offset
between water mains and sewer lines. It is advisable to encase the sewer than the water mains.
3.54.3 Relation to Waterworks Structures
Gravity sewers shall not be laid closer to water retaining structures and the effort should be to detour
as far as possible. In case of leakages in sewer joints, the leakage may gain access to the sidewalls
of the water retaining structures.
A simpler precaution if possible will be to use CI or DI pipes for that length of sewer that runs close
to the water retaining structure
3.54.4 Construction Methods
The design and the construction of sewers are interdependent; the knowledge of one is an
essential prerequisite to the competent performance of the other.
The ingenuity of the designer and supervising engineer is continually called for, to reduce the
construction cost and to achieve quality workmanship. Barring unforeseen conditions, it shall be the
responsibility of the supervising engineer and the contractor to complete the work as shown on the
plans at minimum cost and with minimum disturbance of adjacent facilities and structures.
3.54.5 Trench
3.54.5.1 Dimensions
The width of trench should be the minimum necessary for the proper installation of the sewer with
the due consideration to its bedding. It depends on the type of shoring (single stage or two stage),
working space required in the lower part of the trench and the type of ground below the surface.
The width of the trench at different levels from the top of the sewer to the ground surface is primarily
related to its effect upon the adjoining services and nearby structures.
In undeveloped areas or open country, excavation with side slope shall be permissible from the top
of the sewer to the ground surface instead of vertical excavation with proper shoring. In developed
areas, however, it is essential to restrict the trench width to protect the existing facilities and
properties and to reduce the cost of restoring the surface. Increase in width over the minimum
required would unduly increase the load on the pipe.
3 - 93
3.54.5.2 Excavation
Excavation for sewer trenches for laying sewers shall be in straight lines and to the correct depths
and gradients required for the pipes as specified in the drawings. The material excavated from the
trench shall not be deposited very close to the trench to prevent the weight of the materials from
causing the sides of the trench to slip or fail. The sides of the trench shall, however, be supported
by shoring where necessary to ensure proper and speedy excavation. In case, the width of the road
or lane where the work of excavation is to be carried out is so narrow as to warrant the stacking
of materials near the trench, the same shall be taken away to a place to be decided by the
Engineer-in-Charge. This excavated material shall be brought back to the site of work for filling the
trench. In case the presence of water is likely to create unstable soil conditions, a well point system
erected on both sides of the trench shall be employed to drain the immediate area of the sewer trench
prior to excavation operation. A well point system consists of a series of perforated pipes driven
into the water bearing strata on both sides of a sewer trench and connected with a header pipe and
vacuum pump. If excavation is deeper than necessary, the same shall be fitted and stabilized before
laying the sewer.
3.54.5.3 Shoring
The shoring shall be adequate to prevent caving in of the trench walls by subsidence of soil adjacent
to the trench. In narrow trenches of limited depth, a simple form of shoring shall consist of a pair of 40
to 50 mm thick and 30 cm wide planks set vertically at intervals and firmly fixed with struts. For wider
and deeper trenches, a system of wall plates (Wales) and struts of heavy timber section is commonly
used. Continuous sheeting shall be provided outside the wall plates to maintain the stability of the
trench walls. The number and the size of the wall plates shall be fixed considering the depth of trench
and type of soil. The cross struts shall be fixed in a manner to maintain pressure against the wall
plates, which in turn shall be kept pressed against the timber sheeting by means of timber wedges or
dog spikes. In non-cohesive soils combined with considerable ground water, it may be necessary to
use continuous interlocking steel sheet piling to prevent excessive soil movements by ground water
percolation and extend the piling at least 1.5 m below the trench bed. In case of deep trenches,
excavation and shoring may be done in stages.
A mechanized shoring is presented in Figure. 3.49
Figure 3.49
W ork in execution by latest tech n olog y fo r sew er
laying in India (M um bai). Steel anchors have
grooves for slotting precast RCC slabs or other
sheeting and the anchors are held in place by
steel adjustable struts. S pecific advantage is
e asiness of pulling out the anchors, sheeting and
struts by deploying m echanical equipm ent.
Source: Bihar Urban D evelopm ent
C orporation Detailed Project R eport for
S aidpur S ew er N etw ork - Patna (P ackage 6)
3 - 94
3.54.5.4 Underground Services
All other services like pipes, ducts, cables, mains and other services exposed due to the excavation
shall be effectively supported.
3.54.5.5 Dewatering
Trenches for sewer construction shall be dewatered for the placement of concrete and laying of pipe
sewer or construction of concrete or brick sewer and kept dewatered until the concrete foundations,
pipe joints or brick work or concrete have cured. The pumped-out water from the trenches shall be
disposed off in existing storm water drainage arrangement nearby.
In the absence of any such arrangement, the pumped water may be drained through completed
portion of sewer to a permanent place of disposal. Where a trench is to be retained dry for a
sufficient period to facilitate the placement of forms for sewer construction, an under drain shall
be laid of granular material leading to a sump for further disposal. Precautions are to be taken to
arrest potential floating of the laid sewers, arising out of induced buoyancy during rainy season.
3.54.5.6 Foundation and Bedding
Where a sewer has to be laid in a soft underground stratum or in a reclaimed land, the trench shall
be excavated deeper than what is ordinarily required. The trench bottom shall be stabilized by the
addition of coarse gravel or rock. In case of very bad soil, the trench bottom shall be filled in with
cement concrete of appropriate grade. In the areas subject to subsidence, the pipe sewer should be
laid on suitable supports or concrete cradle supported on piles.
In the case of cast-in-situ sewers, an RCC section with both transverse and longitudinal steel
reinforcement shall be provided when intermittent variations in soil bearing capacity are encountered.
In case of long stretches of very soft trench bottom, soil stabilization shall be done either by rubble,
concrete or wooden crib.
3.54.5.7 Tunnelling
Tunnels are employed in sewer systems when it becomes economical, considering the nature of
soil to be excavated and surface conditions with reference to the depth at which the sewer is to be
laid. Generally, in soft soils the minimum depth is about 10 m. In rocks, however, tunnels may be
adopted at lesser depths. In busy and high activity zones, crowded condition of the surface, expensive
pavements or presence of other service facilities near the surface sometimes, make it advantageous
to tunnel at shallower depths. Each situation has to be analysed in detail before any decision to
tunnel is taken.
3.54.5.8 Shafts
Shafts are essential in tunneling to gain access to the depth at which tunnelling is to be done to
remove the excavated material. The size of shaft depends on the type and size of machinery
employed for tunneling, irrespective of the size of the sewer.
3 - 95
3.55 METHODS OF TUNNELLING
The tunneling methods adopted for sewer construction can be classified generally as auger or
boring, jacking and mining.
a) Auger or Boring
In this method, rigid steel or concrete pipes are pushed into the ground to reasonable distances and
the earth is removed by mechanical means from the shaft or pit location. Presence of boulders is a
serious deterrent for adoption of this method, in which case it may be more economical to first install
an oversize lining by conventional tunnelling or jacking and fill the space between the pipe and lining
with sand, cement or concrete.
b) Jacking
In this procedure, the leading pipe is provided with a cutter or edge to protect the pipe while jacking.
Soil is gradually excavated and removed through the pipe as successive lengths of pipes are added
between the leading pipe and the jacks and pushed forward taking care to limit the jacking up to the
point of excavation. This method usually results in minimum disturbance of the natural soils adjacent
to the pipe. The jacking operation should continue without interruption as otherwise soil friction might
increase, making the operation more difficult.Jacking of permanent tunnel lining is generally adopted
for sewers of sizes varying from 750 to 2,750 mm, depending upon the conditions of soil and the
location of the line.
The pipes selected should be able to withstand the loads exerted by the jacking procedure. The
most common pipes used for this are reinforced concrete or steel.
c) Mining
Tunnels larger than 1.5 m are normally built with the use of tunnel shields, boring machines or
by open face mining depending on the type of material met with. Rock tunnels normally are
excavated open-face with conventional mining methods or with boring tools. These are used as a
safety precaution in mining operations in very soft clay or in running sand especially in built up areas.
In this method, a primary lining of adequate strength to support the surrounding earth is installed to
provide progressive backstop for the jacks which advance the shield.
As the excavation continues, the lining may be installed either against the earth, filling the
annular space by grouting with pea gravel or the lining may be expanded against the earth, the latter
eliminating the need for any grouting. Boring machines of different types have been developed for
tunnel excavation in clay and rock and are equipped with cutters mounted on a rotating head, which
is moved forward.
The excavated earth is usually carried by a conveyor system. Some machines are also equipped
with shields. Though the machines are useful in fairly long runs through similar material, difficulties
are encountered when the material varies. Open face mining without shields are adopted in particular
instances such as in rock. Segmental support of timber or steel is used for the sides and the top of
the tunnel.
3 - 96
3.56 LAYING OF PIPE SEWERS
In laying sewers, the centre of each manhole shall be marked by a peg. Two wooden posts
1 0 0 mm x 1 0 0 mm and 1,800 mm high shall be fixed on either side at nearly equal distance from
the peg or sufficiently clear of all intended excavation. The sight rail when fixed on these posts shall
cross the centre of manhole. The sight rails made from 250 mm wide x 40 mm thick wooden planks
and screwed with the top edge against the level marks and shall be fixed at distances more than 30 m
apart along the sewer alignment. The centre line of the sewer shall be marked on the sight rail. These
vertical posts and the sight rails shall be perfectly square and planed smooth on all sides and edges.
The sight rails shall be painted half-white and half-black alternately on both the sides and the tee
heads and cross pieces of the boning rods shall be painted black. When the sewers converging to a
manhole come in at various levels, there shall be a rail fixed for every different level.
The boning rods with cross section 75 mm x 50 mm of various lengths shall be prepared from
wood. Each length shall be a certain number of metres and shall have a fixed tee head and fixed
intermediate cross pieces, each about 300 mm long. The top edge of the cross pieces shall be fixed
at a distance below the top edge equal to, the outside diameter of the pipe, the thickness of the
concrete bedding or the bottom of excavation, as the case may be. The boning staff shall be marked
on both sides to indicate its full length.
The posts and the sight rails shall not be removed in any case until the trench is excavated, the pipes
are laid, jointed and the filling is started.
When large sewer lines are to be laid or where sloped trench walls result in top-of-trench widths too
great for practical use of sight rails or where soils are unstable, stakes set in the trench bottom itself
on the sewer line, as rough grade for the sewer is completed, would serve the purpose.
3.56.1 Stoneware Pipes
The stoneware pipes shall be laid with sockets facing up the gradient, on desired bedding.
Special bedding, hunching or encasing may be provided where conditions so demand (as discussed
in Section 3.50). All the pipes shall be laid perfectly true, both to line and gradient, IS 4127. At the
close of each days work or at such other times when pipe is not being laid, the end of the pipe should
be protected by a close fitting stopper.
3.56.2 RCC Pipes
The RCC pipes shall be laid in position over proper bedding, the type of which may be determined
in advance, the abutting faces of the pipes being coated by means of a brush with bitumen in liquid
condition. The wedge shaped groove in the end of the pipe shall be filled with sufficient quantity
of either special bituminous compound or sufficient quantity of cement mortar of 1:3. The collar
shall then be slipped over the end of the pipe and the next pipe butted well against the "O ring by
appliances to compress roughly the "O ring or cement mortar into the grooves. Care being taken
to see that concentricity of the pipes and the levels are not disturbed during the operation. Spigot
and socket RCC pipes shall be laid in a manner similar to stoneware spigot and socket pipes. The
structural requirements as discussed in this chapter and IS 783 may be followed.
3 - 97
3.56.3 Cast-in-situ Concrete Sections
For sewer sizes beyond 2 m internal diameter cast-in-situ concrete sections shall generally be used,
the choice depending upon the relative costs worked out for the specific project. The concrete shall
be cast in suitable number of lifts usually two or three. The lifts are generally designated as the invert,
the side wall and the arch.
3.56.4 Construction of Brick Sewers
Sewers larger than 2 m are generally constructed in brick work. The brickwork shall be in cement
mortar of 1:3 and plastered smooth with cement plaster of 1:2, 20 mm thick both from inside and
outside. A change in the alignment of brick sewer shall be on a suitable curve conforming to the
surface alignment of the road. The construction shall conform to IS 2212 in general.
3.56.5 Cast Iron Pipes
The pipes shall be laid in position with the socket ends of all pipes facing up gradient. When using
lead joints, any deviations either in plan or in elevation of less than 11 1/4 degree shall be effected
by laying the straight pipes round the flat curve of such radius that the minimum thickness of lead
in a lead joint at the face of the socket shall not be reduced below 6 mm. The spigot shall be
carefully pushed into the socket with one or more laps of spun yarn wound round it. Each joint shall
be tested before running the lead, by passing completely round it, a wooden gauge notched out to the
correct depth of lead and the notch being held close up against the face of socket. When using the
"O ring joints, each "O ring shall be inserted fully and verified by a toll with prior marking of the socket
depth, which, when inserted after the "O ring joint will reveal that the "O ring has been fully inserted
in position. Special precautions by manufacturers, if any, shall also be followed. Flange joints
shall be used with appropriate specials and tail-pieces when inserting a fitting like a meter or a
valve in the pipeline. IS 3114 should be followed in setting out the sewers.
3.56.6 Ductile Iron Pipes
The same procedures and precautions for laying as in the case of cast iron pipes shall apply
here also.
3.56.7 Solid Wall UPVC Pipes
The single most important precaution is to ensure that the excavated trench is not water logged.
Where situations imply water logging, it is mandatory to employ a well point dewatering system
running 24 hours, 7 days a week to hold the subsoil water at least 50 cm below the bedding elevation.
Thereafter, the grade of the trench having been checked, lower the pipe with socket ends facing the
up gradient. When a pipe needs to be cut to suit a given distance, the pipe shall be cut perpendicular
to its axis, using a firm hand held saw. Then bevel the cut end by a bevelling tool or power tool to the
same angle as in the original uncut pipe and mark the insertion line freshly using an indelible black
paint to retain the guide limit for insertion. Carefully remove any loose soil from the socket and do
not remove the "O ring from its housing. Check by hand whether the "O ring is seated uniformly.
Thereafter, place the pipe spigot end near the socket.
3 - 98
3.56.8 Solid Wall HDPE Pipes
Unlike in the case of CI, DI, UPVC pipe sewers, the HDPE sewers are normally butt welded and
pre-assembled on ground and only then lowered inside the trench spanning manhole to manhole.
The butt-welding shall follow the manufacturers recommendations. Where flanged joints are needed
for attaching or inserting fittings and specials like valves, the free end of the HDPE pipe shall be butt
-welded with a standard flange and thereafter the flanged jointing can be made. However, in the
case of such pipes, the uplift during high groundwater conditions above the pipe level is a problem
specifically in high ground water and coastal areas. The concrete surrounds or venteak piles shall be
used to hold these in place in such conditions, where ground water can rise above the sewer.
3.56.9 Structured Wall Pipes
The IS 16098 (Part-1), IS 16098 (Part-2) and EN 13476 also cover the performance requirements
for the respective materials. These pipes are manufactured with externally corrugated wall or with
T-beam type of wall with hollows between the webs of the T beams. These are laid in almost the
same way as the UPVC pipes. These outer-ribbed wall pipes are jointed with "O rings after due
cleaning of dust, etc., using push-tight method and these rings help in preventing the escape of the
contained fluid.
3.56.10 Double Wall Corrugated Polyethylene Pipes
Please refer section 3.12.9.3.
3.56.11 Relative Limitations in Pipe Materials in Some Situations
The merits and demerits of different pipe materials are covered in Section 3.12 and their
laying is covered in this Section 3.56.
It will be useful to keep in mind that sewers pass through a whole length of roads in a habitation and
varying soil conditions, bedding conditions, locations, etc., will be encountered at various places.
Hence, a particular pipe material may be suitable in a particular location but may require some other
material at some other locations.
A guide for this is presented in Appendix A.3.10. This may be referred to during field execution of the
sewer pipes and necessary local adjustments can be made.
3.57 LOAD CARRYING MECHANISM OF THE PIPES
The non-metallic and non-concrete sewer pipes behave integral with the surrounding soil
when it comes to structural behaviour. As loads are superimposed, the pipe cross section may
tend to deflect by marginal reduction in vertical diameter. This may induce an increase in
horizontal diameter, but this increase will be resisted by the lateral soil pressure and eventually
there arises a near uniform radial pressure around the pipe and a compressive thrust. This is
illustrated in Figure 3.50 overleaf.
3 - 99
Deflection of Non-Rigid Pipes Zones of Tension and Compression in Rigid Pipes
Figure 3.50 Mechanism of resisting superimposed loads by rigid and non-rigid piping
Thus, adequate backfilling in layers and compaction in each layer is of paramount importance. On
the contrary, the metallic and concrete pipes, being stiffer than the surrounding soil, they carry a
substantial portion of the applied load but the shear stress in the haunch area can be critical
specifically, when haunch support is inadequate. Thus the load carrying mechanism of both these
classes of pipe materials are dependent on the haunch supports and proper backfilling.
3.58 JOINTING OF SEWERS
Joints of pipe sewers may generally be any of the following types:
i) Spigot and socket joint (rigid and semi flexible)

ii) Collar Joint (rigid and semi flexible)
iii) Cast Iron detachable joint (semi flexible)
iv) Coupling joint (semi flexible)
Cement joints are rigid and even a slight settlement of pipes can cause cracks and hence leakage.
To avoid this problem it is recommended that semi flexible joints be used.
3.58.1 Stoneware Pipes
All the pipe joints shall be caulked with tarred gasket in one length for each joint and sufficiently
long to entirely surround the spigot end of the pipe. The gasket shall be caulked lightly home but
not so to occupy more than a quarter of the socket depth. The socket shall then be filled with a
mixture of one part of cement and one part of clean fine sand mixed with just sufficient quantity of
water to have a consistency of semi-dry condition. A fillet shall be formed round the pint with a trowel
forming an angle of 45 degrees with the barrel of the pipe IS 4127. Rubber gaskets may also be used
for jointing. A method of relatively easier checking of the grade of SW pipe sewer line is followed by
the CMWSSB. In this method, two tight strings connected to the crown and one horizontal diameter
edge as shown in Figure 3-51 (overleaf) are used to judge and adjust the grade, which is much faster
and more precise than the boning rod method which becomes cumbersome.
3.58.2 Concrete Pipes
Concrete spigot and socket pipes are laid and jointed as described above for glazed stoneware
spigot and socket pipes with yarn or rubber gasket and cement.
3 - 100
Source: CMWSSB, Chennai, 2012
Figure 3.51 A simpler approach to initial laying and aligning the SW sewers by the two tight twines
one on crown and one on mid diameter are used
Asbestos cement pipes are joined by coupling joints or CI detachable joints.
Large size concrete sewers have ogee joints in which the pipe has mortise at one end and
a tendon to suit at the other end. They are jointed with cement or asphalt. A concrete collar
sufficiently wide to cover and overlap the joint is fixed on it.The collars shall be placed symmetrcally
over the end of two pipes and the annular space between the inside of the collar and the outside
of the pipe shall be filled with hemp yarn soaked in tar or cement slurry tamped with just
sufficient quantity of water to have a consistency of semi dry condition. This is well packed and
thoroughly rammed with caulking tools and then filled with cement mortar (1:2) prop. The joints
shall be finished off with a fillet sloping at 45 degrees to the surface of the pipe. The
finished joints shall be protected and cured for at least 24 hours. Any plastic solution or cement
mortar that may have squeezed in shall be removed to leave the inside of the pipe perfectly clean.
For more details of jointing procedure, reference may be made to IS 783.
3.58.3 Cast Iron Pipes
For CI pipes several types of joints such as rubber gasket known as Tyton joint, mechanical
joint known as screw gland joint and conventional joint known as lead joint are used. For details
refer to CPHEEO Manual on Water Supply and Treatment and relevant Indian Standards.
3.58.4 Ductile Iron pipes
The same procedures and precautions as in the case of cast iron pipes shall apply here too.
3.58.5 Solid Wall UPVC Pipes
Just before jointing, the lubricating material supplied by the pipe manufacturer shall be uniformly
applied around the spigot end and onto the "O ring surface to be in contact with the spigot end
after jointing.
3 - 101
Do not remove the O ring for doing this. Thereafter use the lateral force by pushing the socket end of
the pipe to be inserted by placing a wooden plank across its face and using a crowbar plunged and
anchored into the soil as a level. Do not try to hit the pipe socket. When the insertion mark is reached
at the face of socket, stop the work.
3.58.6 Solid Wall HDPE Pipes
The jointing is by welded heat fusion of the pipe cut surfaces to be jointed. The temperature and
the time of contact are generally specified by the manufacturer.
3.58.7 Structured Wall Pipes
These are mainly by "O ring gaskets inserted in a spigot-socket arrangement. In the case of T-Beam
wall type pipes, these ends are made integral with the pipe. In the case of externally corrugated pipes,
once the pipe ends are positioned and verified for alignment, lubricate the "O ring in the correct slit
as indicated by the manufacturer and push the coupling to its designated location. The "O ring is
fixed into these circular recesses and the piping is slid over it using a separate coupling, which slides
over the "O ring and brings about the jointing. Structured wall pipes are laid and jointed between
them or between structured wall and solid wall type cells. The precautions will be to make sure that
pipe ends and couplings are cleaned free of extraneous matter and test slide the coupling to mark the
pipe ends at half the coupler length to ascertain the lengths of the pipe inside the coupling.
3.58.8 Double Walled Corrugated Pipes
These are jointed the same way as externally corrugated structured wall piping.
3.59 PRECAUTIONS AGAINST UPLIFT
Other than the metallic and concrete pipe sewers, the uplift during high groundwater conditions
above the pipe level is a problem specifically in high ground water locations, water logged locations
and coastal areas. The concrete surrounds or venteak piles shall be used to hold these in place in
such conditions, where the ground water can rise above the sewer.
3.60 THE WATER JETTING ISSUES
With the Honourable courts levying huge penalties if man entry is practiced for sewer cleaning and
with the commitment of the ULB to do away with this practice, the mechanical methods of sewer
cleaning have gained momentum and is being practiced more widely in recent years. These
machines, which are popularly known as je t rodders, je t the water or secondary treated sewage into
the sewers by a jack-hammer action at high pressures as in Figure 3.10.
The ability of the stoneware, cast iron, concrete, HDPE/PE/PP/PVC sewer pipes to withstand the
pressures to establish the permissible pressure ratings has to be evolved in India. However, an
available literature is from the Sewer Jetting Code of Practice first published in 2001 in UK and which
provides guidance on jetting pressure for different types of sewer pipes, as in Table 3-27 overleaf.
3 - 102
Table 3.27 Maximum jetting pressure in case of different types of pipes
No. Maximum Jetting Pressure Concrete Clay Plastic Bricks/fibre
1 Meter of Water 3450 3450 1800 1030
2 BAR 345 345 180 103
Source: Water Research Centre, 2005
Care must be exercised in the field when applying the pressures to clean the sewers since the
pressures stated in Table 3.27 are the maximum pressures.
3.61 TESTING OF SEWER LINES
3.61.1 Water Test
Each section of sewer shall be tested for water tightness preferably between manholes. To prevent
change in alignment and disturbance after the pipes have been laid, it is desirable to backfill the pipes
up to the top, keeping at least 90 cm length of the pipe open at the joints. However, this may not be
feasible in the case of pipes of shorter length, such as stoneware and RCC pipes. With concrete
encasement or concrete grade, partial covering of the pipe is not necessary.
In case of concrete and stoneware pipes with cement mortar joints, pipes shall be tested three
days after the cement mortar joints have been made. It is necessary that the pipelines be filled with
water for about a week before commencing the application of pressure to allow for the absorption
by pipe wall. The sewers are tested by plugging the ends with a provision for an air outlet pipe with
stop-cock in the upper end. The water is filled through a funnel connected at the lower end provided
with a plug. After the air has been expelled through the air outlet, the stop-cock is closed and water
level in the funnel is raised to 2.5 m above the invert at the upper end. Water level in the funnel is
noted after 30 minutes and the quantity of water required to restore the original water level in the
funnel is determined. The pipe line under pressure is then inspected while the funnel is still in
position. There shall not be any leaks in the pipe or the joints (small sweating on the pipe surface is
permitted). Any sewer or part thereof not meeting the test shall be emptied and repaired or
re-laid as required and tested again.
The leakage or quantity of water to be supplied to maintain the test pressure during the period of 10
minutes shall not exceed 0 .2 litres/mm dia. of pipes per kilometre length per day.
For non-pressure pipes, it is better to observe the leakage for a period of 24 hours if feasible. The
test for exfiltration for detection of leakage shall be carried out at a time when the groundwater
table is low.
For concrete, RCC and asbestos cement pipes of more than 800 mm dia. the quantity of water
inflow can be increased by 1 0 % for each additional 1 0 0 mm of pipe dia.
For brick sewers, regardless of their diameters, the permissible leakage of water shall not exceed 10
cubic meters for 24 hours per km length of sewer.
3 - 103
3.61.2 Air Testing
Air testing becomes necessary particularly in large diameter pipes when the required quantity of
water is not available for testing. As per the ASTM C28-80, vitrified clay pipes testing is specified as
applying air pressure to 2.8 m water column and held for 2 to 5 minutes when all plugs are checked
and the exact point of leakage can be detected by applying soap solution to all the joints in the line
and looking for air bubbles. Thereafter, the air supply is disconnected and the time taken to drop from
2.5 m to 1.7 m water column for every 30 m is noted to be in conformity with Table 3.28.
Table 3.28 Minimum test times per 30 m of vitrified clay sewer line for air testing
Diameter, mm m inutes Diam eter, mm m inutes Diam eter, mm m inutes
100 0.3 400 2.1 750 4.8
150 0.7 450 2.4 800 5.4
200 1.2 500 3.0 900 6.0
250 1.5 600 3.6 950 6.6
300 1.8 700 4.2 1,070 7.3
The longer lengths and hence fewer joints of sewer pipelines when laid with RCC and double walled
HDPE pipes must be able to easily withstand the above testing and hence, the same test conditions
are retained for these sewers also. A typical arrangement is shown in Figure 3.52.
Figure 3.52 Typical arrangement for low pressure air testing of sewer pipeline
3.62 CHECK FOR OBSTRUCTION
As soon as a stretch of sewer is laid and tested, a double disc or solid or closed cylinder, 75 mm
less in dimension than the internal dimension of the sewer shall be run through the stretch of the
sewer to ensure that it is free from any obstruction.
3 - 104
3.63 BACKFILLING OF THE TRENCHES
Backfilling of the sewer trench is a very important consideration in sewer construction. The
method of backfilling to be used varies with the width of the trench, the character of the material
excavated, the method of excavation and the degree of compaction required. In developed streets,
a high degree of compaction is required to minimize the load while in less important streets, a more
moderate specification for back fill may be justified. In open country, it may be sufficient to
mound the trench and after natural settlement, return to re-grade the areas.
No trench shall be filled in unless the sewer stretches have been tested and approved for water
tightness of the joints. However, partial filling may be done keeping the joints open to avoid any
disturbance. The refilling shall proceed around and above the pipes. Soft material screened free from
stones or hard substances shall first be used and hand pressed under and around the pipes to half
their height. Similar soft material shall then be put up to a height of 30 cm above the top of the pipe
and this will be moistened with water and well rammed. The remainder of the trench can be filled with
hard material, in stages, each not exceeding 60 cm. At each stage, the filling shall be well rammed,
consolidated and completely saturated with water and then only further filling shall be continued.
Before and during the backfilling of a trench, precautions shall be taken against the floatation of the
pipeline due to entry of large quantities of water into the trench causing an uplift of the empty or the
partly filled pipeline. Reference may be made to section 3.46 for more details in this regard. Upon
completion of the backfill, the surface shall be restored fully to the level that existed prior to the
construction of the sewer.
3.64 REMOVAL OF SHEETING
Sheeting driven below the spring line of a sewer shall be withdrawn a little at a time as the
back-filling progresses. Some of the backfilled earth is forced into the void created by withdrawing
the sheeting by means of a water jet. To avoid any damage to buildings, cables, gas mains,
water mains, sewers, etc., near the excavation, or to avoid disturbance to the sewer already laid
portions of the sheeting may be left in the trenches.
3.65 SEWER REHABILITATION
Disrepair of sewers renders them leaky; and, as a result, they carry large volumes of infiltration
water. They, most often get, blocked and sometimes collapse. The expenditure of excavating and
then replacing a portion of badly functioning sewer is prohibitive. It is, therefore, economical to
repair and rehabilitate the system as such. Therefore, continuing sewer maintenance efforts have
to be designed with a view to preventing unnecessary deterioration of the sewer system. Any
maintenance programme that may be adopted depends on the nature of the problem, necessity of
maintaining the flow while the repair is being carried out, the expected traffic disruption that may be
caused, safety aspects that need be addressed, and the cost that has to be borne.
It is necessary to clean the sewer lines before embarking on a visual inspection. This is
commonly done by flushing the sewer by using a fire hose, connected to a hydrant, which
discharges into a manhole.
3 - 105
However, caution is to be applied to avoid backups into the surrounding buildings that are
connected to the system. Another method to clean the sewers is by using a soft rubber ball that is
inflated to match the diameter of the pipe and later being pulled by a cord via the reach of the line
between manholes. Power rodding machines or power winches (to pull a bucket through the line)
can also be used. Moreover, it is to be looked into that the collected debris is disposed of properly.
Inspections, after cleansing operations, are made during low-flow periods using flashlights. Use of
closed-circuit television system (even making a photographic or videotape record) gives accurate
location of leaks, root intrusions and any structural problems. A common method for sealing leaks in
otherwise structurally sound pipelines comprises chemical grouting, the grout is applied internally to
joints, holes, and cracks. In smaller or medium sized lines, inflatable rubber sleeves are generally
pulled through, while in large sized lines workers place a sealing ring manually over the defective
joint and, the grout is pumped through a hand held probe. However, as a safety measure, the air
in the sewer must be tested for carbon monoxide, hydrogen sulphide, and explosive gases before
allowing entry to workers.
Crown corrosion can cause structural damage to sewers. Large sewers, suffering this damage
can be strengthened by applying a lining of gunite, a mixture of fine sand, cement, and water. It is
applied internally by means of pneumatic spraying. Quite long lengths of concrete sewers are
effectively rehabilitated with gunite lining. To renew on extensively cracked sewer lines a
procedure known as slip lining is adopted. It comprises pulling a flexible plastic liner pipe into the
damaged pipe and then reconnecting all the individual service connections to the liner. It may be
necessary sometimes, to fill the narrow annular space between the lines and the existing pipe with
grout preventing relative movement. However, it may be pointed out that multiple excavations are
required to reconnect each service line to the new liner. In a relatively new and sophisticated method,
namely, Inversion lining, a flexible liner is used. This line expanding to fit over the pipe geometry is
thermally hardened and the procedure avoids excavations for service line connections.
Concrete manholes may also suffer sulphuric acid corrosion. Severe cases may need total
replacement of the manhole. For less severe cases, the deteriorated material is removed using water
or sand blasting, or mechanical tools, and then special chemical preparations are applied to stabilize
the remaining material. Next, high strength patching mortar is used in filling in the irregularities in the
internal surface; and lastly a lining or a coating has to be applied.
Manholes are sometimes subject to surface water inflow and/or ground water infiltration, and it is
an unacceptable situation. This circumstance can arise due to holes in the manhole cover; spaces
between the cover and the frame; and poor sealing of the frame of the cover. Frames can be resealed
using hydraulic cement, and water-proof epoxy coating. Sometimes, the manhole frame and cover
are raised, and the exposed portion is coated with asphalt or cement. One more method consists
in installing a special insert between the frame and the cover and it does not allow water and grit
to enter the manhole while allowing gas to escape through a relief valve.
Infiltration of groundwater through the sidewall of a manhole and its base, or around pipe entrances
is solved by chemical grouting; being a less costly method compared to lining or coating, it also
needs no preparatory restoration of the surface. Further, cracks and opening get sealed by pressure
injection of the gel or foam (grouting materials).
3 - 106
House (service) connections and smaller diameter pipes, join the lateral sewer line in the street with
the building that the sewer line serves. These house lines are also known as building sewers or
service laterals, and can be as long as 30 m. These can develop defects like cracks and open-jointed
pipes, causing considerable infiltration of groundwater. The total length of service connections can
often be greater than the length of the main sewers. Therefore, the maintenance of these lines is
also equally important. Chemical grouting and inversion lining procedures are often helpful.
Sewers, which are determined to be critical after inspection, have to be taken up for rehabilitation.
Sewer rehabilitation is necessitated either to improve the hydraulic performance of the existing line or
due to danger of the sewer line deteriorating further and leading to eventual collapse or failure.
3.65.1 Methods
Sewer rehabilitation may be carried out by renovation or by renewal of the sewer. When the condition
of the sewer is improved either to increase its carrying capacity or to increase its life, it is known as
renovation. When the sewer line is reconstructed or replaced to the same dimensions as existing,
it is known as renewal.
3.65.2 Sewer Renovation
While preparing the DPRs for a habitation where a sewerage system is already in place, it is equally
important to consider and provide for renovation of old sewers as well especially, when the old and
augmented systems will be functioning contingent upon each other. In the renovation of sewers, the
original sewer fabric is utilized and improvements are carried out; the various methods utilized are:
a) Stabilization where painting or chemical grouting of the joints is carried out
b) Pipe linings in which pipes of slightly smaller diameter than the sewer are inserted
Pipes may be of Glass Reinforced Plastic (GRP) and HDPE which can be butt fusion welded.
The in-situ tube, manufactured of polyester felt and impregnated with a resin mixed with a special
catalyst is tailored to suit the internal diameter/dimension of the pipe. The in-situ tube is inserted
from any manhole, opening, etc. During insertion, the tube turns inside out so that the polyurethane
side forms the inside surface of the pipe. Water is pumped into the tube to a predetermined head
and the tube travels down the pipe to be repaired. As the in-situ tube travels, the pressure of the
water firmly presses the resin impregnated side against the pipe wall. When the in-situ tube reaches
the downstream manhole, addition of water is stopped and the water heated to cure the resin.
The result is a cast in-situ pipe within a pipe. An alternative method of pulling the tube in and then
inflating it is also used for small diameter pipes. Recent development is the use of photo curing
resins, i.e., curing by light.
c) Segmental linings of glass reinforced cement, GRP, resin concrete and precast gunite are
used when man entry is possible
d) When linings are used, annulus grouting is necessary in majority of the cases for a satisfactory
performance.
3 - 107
e) The places where sewer network is crossing a canal/distributary or a natural drain, the site
conditions need to be assessed and analyzed carefully considering various available
options. At the locations where sewer network is crossing a natural drain, the depth of sewer is
kept in such a way that it crosses below the bed level and can be laid through open trenches.
The places where large diameter network pipes are crossing a canal or distributary the crown
of the pipe is kept more than "D m below the bed level, where "D is the diameter of the
pipe so as to ensure the pipes can be laid using trenchless technology without disturbing the
canal above. The criteria for selection of trenchless technology based on the diameter of pipe
is presented in Table 3.29.
Table 3.29 Criteria for selection of trenchless technology
No. Diameter of Pipe Suitable Trenchless Technology
1 < 1,000 mm Guided Boring
2 1,000 mm - 1,500 mm Pipe Jacking
3 > 1,500 mm Tunnel Boring
f) Different trenchless technologies are used for different diameters, material of construction of
pipe and site conditions. These are explained in the subsequent sections.
g) Guided Auger Boring
Auger boring is a technique for forming a horizontal bore under a crossing, using a cutting head
and auger flights. The auger boring equipment consists of a cutting head attached to a helically
wound auger flight. The rotation action of the auger flight simultaneously rotates the cutting head and
removes the excavated soil from the bore. The auger flight is contained within a steel casing.
In auger boring, the auger rotates inside the casing as it is jacked. Hence, there is a danger that it may
damage any interior coating or liner that may be in the pipe. The standard casing material used with
auger boring is steel. Presently, most of the rail road and highway specifications require the use of steel
casing with auger boring. The cutting head and auger are rotated from the drive pit by a transmission
or power unit. Most auger boring systems include pipe-jacking equipment, which allows the casing
to be moved forward as the cutting head advances. Once the casing has been installed, the product
pipe can be inserted. The size of pipe that can be installed by this method ranges from 100 mm to
more than 1,500 mm. However, the most common size range is 200 mm to 900 mm. A typical
guided auger boring is shown in Figure 3.53 overleaf.
h) Pipe Jacking
Pipe jacking is a trenchless construction method, which requires workers inside the jacking pipe
and is generally started from an entry pit and can be done manually or by using machines.
However, it is accomplished with workers inside the pipe. The excavation method varies from
the very basic process of workers digging the face with pick and shovel to the use of highly
sophisticated tunnel boring machines.
3 - 108
Source:JSWA, 1991
Figure 3.53 Guided auger boring
Since the method requires personnel working inside the pipe, the method is limited to
personnel-entry-size pipes. Hence, the minimum pipe diameter recommended by this method is
1060 mm outside diameter.
Irrespective of the method, the excavation is generally accomplished inside an artificial shield,
which is designed to provide a safe working environment for the people working inside and to allow
the bore to remain open for the pipe to be jacked in place. The shield is guidable to some extent
with individually controlled hydraulic jacks.
The first step in any pipe jacking operation is site selection and equipment selection as per the site
requirements. A pipe-jacking project should be planned properly for a smooth operation. The site
must provide space for storage and handling of pipes, hoisting equipment for the pipe, spoil storage
and handling facility, etc. If adequate space is available, a big jacking pit is preferred so that longer
pipe segments can be jacked and the total project duration is reduced.
The jacking pit size is a function of pipe diameter, length of pipe segment, shield dimensions, jack
size, thrust wall design, pressure rings and guide rail system. The space available at the site governs
the selection of all the above components. The jacking pit should be shored and braced unless it
is very shallow and high strength clay. It can be shored with timber, steel piling or shaft liner plates.
Due to the jacking forces required to push large diameter pipes through the ground, the jacking pit
design and construction are critical. The pit embankment supports must be properly designed and
constructed. It is critical that pit floor and the thrust reaction structure be designed to withstand the
weight of the heavy pipe segment repeatedly placed on it as well as the continuously exerted jacking
loads as the operation is being conducted.
3 - 109
Preparation of the floor of pit, i.e., soil, stone or concrete slab will be determined by the length, size
and/or duration of the job. The final alignment and grade will depend largely on the initial setup.
Therefore, it is advisable to set up a concrete slab foundation for large jobs, which are likely to take
a long time. The pit should have space for personnel to walk on both sides of the pipe. It is important
that the pit should be dry and continuous dewatering provisions should be made.
One of the major factors that affect pipe jacking is the jacking force required to push the pipe
inside the soil. Every effort is made to minimize the thrust. Application of bentonite to the outer
skin of the jacking pipe reduces the friction between the jacking pipe and the soil, and reduces
the thrust requirements.
The use of intermediate jacking stations (IJS) is common to control or increase the jacking forces.
There is no limit to the number of IJS that can be installed in a line. The IJS permit the pipe to be
thrust forward in sections rather than the total length being thrust forward from the jacking pit.
The manual pipe-jacking method is suitable for diameter up to 1500 mm. For large diameters manual
jacking is not advisable as grade and alignment maintenance may not be possible in such cases.
For such works, mechanical techniques like utility tunnelling / Tunnel Boring Machine (TBM) may
be chosen. A typical trenchless pipe jacking method is shown in Figure 3.54.
Source:JSWA, 2011
Figure 3.54 Trenchless pipe jacking
i) Tunnel Boring / Utility tunnelling / Trenchless Technology
Tunnel boring is pipe-jacking method; but in this method, instead of manual excavation, highly
sophisticated tunnel boring machines are used for excavation. It is generally used for diameter
higher than 1,500 mm and where proper slope / gradient is required.
3 - 110
3.65.3 Illustrative Example
Illustrative example for structural design of buried sewer is given in Appendix A.3.8.
3.66 STORMWATER RELATED STRUCTURES
These are devices meant to transmit the surface runoff to the sewers in the case of combined
system and form a very important part of the system. Their location and design should therefore be
given careful consideration.
Storm water inlets may be categorized under three major groups viz. curb inlets, gutter inlets
and combination inlets, each being either depressed or flush depending upon their elevation with
reference to the pavement surface.
The actual structure of an inlet is usually made of brickwork. Normally, cast iron gratings
conforming to IS 5961 shall be used. In case there is no vehicular traffic, fabricated steel gratings
may be used. The clear opening shall not be more than 25 mm.
The connecting pipe from the street inlet to the main street sewer should not be less than 200 mm in
diameter and should have sufficient slope. Maximum spacing of inlets would depend upon various
conditions of road surface, size and type of inlet and rainfall. The maximum horizontal spacing of
30 m is recommended.
3.66.1 Curb Inlets
Curb inlets are vertical openings in the road curbs through which the storm water flows and are
preferred where heavy traffic is anticipated.
They are termed as deflector inlets when equipped with diagonal notches cast into the gutter
along the curb opening to form a series of ridges or deflectors. This type of inlet does not interfere
with the flow of traffic as the top level of the deflectors lie in the plane of the pavement.
3.66.2 Gutter Inlets
These consist of horizontal openings in the gutter, which is covered by one or more gratings through
which the flow passes.
3.66.3 Combination Inlets
These are composed of a curb and gutter inlet acting as a single unit. Normally, the gutter inlet
is placed right in front of the curb inlets but it may be displaced in an overlapping or end-to-end
position. Figure 3.55 (overleaf) shows the different types of inlets.
3.66.4 Catch Basins
Catch basins are structures meant for the retention of heavy debris in storm water which otherwise
would be carried into the sewer system. Their use is not recommended since they are more of a
nuisance and a source of mosquito breeding apart from posing substantial maintenance problems.
3 - 111
CURB INLETS
(a) UNDEPRESSED (b) DEPRESSED (c) DEFLECTOR INNLET
GUTTER INLET
(d) UNDEPRESSED (e) DEPRESSED
COMBINATION INLETS
(f) GRATE PLACED (g) GRATE PLACED (h) GRATE PLACED

DIRECTLY IN END TO END OVERLAPPING
FRONT POSITION POSITION
(DEPRESSED) (UNDEPRESSED) (UNDEPRESSED)

Figure 3.55 Different types of inlets
Where a main sewer is laid and the sewer network is not yet laid, the dry weather flow from the open
drains may be connected to the sewers by making a provision for a catch basin and overflow weir.
3.66.5 Flap Gates and Flood Gates
Flap gates or backwater gates are installed at or near sewer outlets to prevent backflow of water
during high tide or at high stages in the receiving stream. Such gates should be designed so that the
flap should open at a very small head differential. With a properly operated flap gate, it is possible to
continue to pump a quantity equivalent to the sanitary sewage flow from the combined sewer to the
treatment plant even though flood conditions prevail in the stream at the sewer outlet.
In case of a sea and estuary outfall, the outfall sewer should be able to discharge at full rate when
the water level in the estuary or sea is %th the mean annual tide level. Adequate storage to prevent
backflow into the system due to the closure of these gates at the time of high tides is also necessary
if pumping is to be avoided. To control the flow from the storage tank, flood-gate or penstocks are
provided which can be opened and closed quickly at the predetermined states of tide. The gates are
generally electrically operated and are controlled by a lunar clock.
Many flap or backwater gates are rectangular and may consist of wooden planks. Circular or
rectangular metallic gates are commercially available. Flap gates may be of various metals or alloys
as required by the design conditions.
Flap gates are usually hinged by a link-type arrangement that makes it possible for the gate shutter
to get seated more firmly. Hinge pins, linkages and links should be of corrosion resistant material.
There should be a screen chamber to arrest floating undesirables on the upstream side of the flap
gate. The maintenance of flap gates requires regular inspection and removal of debris from the pipe
and outlet chamber, lubrication of hinge pins and cleaning of seating surfaces.
3 - 112
3.67 OUTFALL SEWERS
The aspects to be considered in the design of a sewer outfall are listed as under:
1) Location to avoid unpleasant sight and offensive smell
2) Protection of the mouth of sewer if it empties into a river against swift currents, water traffic,
floating debris, heavy waves, or other hazards which might damage the structure; and
3) Prevention of backing-up of water into the sewer if the outfall is having a flat grade
3.68 CROSS INFRASTRUCTURE WORKS
Section 3.52 shall be mandatorily followed.
3.69 CORROSION PREVENTION AND CONTROL
3.69.1 General
Corrosion is the phenomenon of the interaction of a material with the environment (water, soil or
air) resulting in its deterioration. There are many types of corrosion, the major types being galvanic,
concentration cell, stray current, stress and bacterial. Sewage collection and treatment systems are
more prone to corrosion in view of the nature of the sewage. Since sewage contains solids which are
more likely to cause abrasion in sewers, pumps and their components, thus removing the protective
coating and accelerating the corrosion process, corrosion control becomes all the more important in
sewerage systems. It is particularly acute in areas where sewage strength is high, sulphate content
of water is substantial and average temperature is above 20C. The corrosion problem in sewerage
systems can be categorized as (1) Corrosion of sewers and (2) Corrosion of treatment systems.
3.69.2 Corrosion of Sewers
The most widely used materials for sewers are reinforced concrete, stoneware, asbestos cement
and cast iron. The development of plastics, fibre glass and other synthetic materials has increased
the choice of piping materials. For gravity sewers the usual practice is to use vitrified stoneware
pipes for smaller sizes and cement concrete pipes for larger sizes. For pumping mains, CI pipes are
generally used. Factors such as climate and topography, high temperature, flat grades and long
length of sewers may favour the development of highly septic, sulphide containing sewage in the
sewer line. Industrial wastes may aggravate these problems by the introduction of high concentration
of pollutants and/or large volumes of hot water that accelerate chemical and biological reaction
rates. Concrete sewers are the worst affected because of sulphides in sewage.
3.69.3 Corrosion due to Biological Reactions
Hydrogen Sulphide may be produced biologically in sewers by (1) the hydrolysis of organic
compounds containing sulphur and (2) by reduction of sulphates. Sewage contains a variety of
sulphur bearing organic compounds (usually at concentration between 1 to 5 mg/l) and inorganic
sulphates, which find their way through drinking water, industrial water or sea water intrusion.
3 - 113
Hydrogen sulphide in sewer is usually produced by bacteriological reduction of sulphates. Hydrogen

sulphide gas by itself is not injurious to cement concrete, unless it gets readily oxidized by dissolved
oxygen or by several bacterial species.
Oxygen is normally present in the air between the crown and the sewage, ^ S , a prerequisite for
sewer corrosion and CO 2 , are usually present in the sewer air. In the presence of air, ^ S gets
oxidized to sulphuric acid and this sulphuric acid reacts with the cement constituents of concrete.
In fact, it reacts with the lime in the cement concrete to form calcium sulphate, which in turn, reacts
with the calcium aluminates in the cement to form calcium sulpho-aluminates.
Expansion caused by these reactions results in spalling of the surface of the concrete, thereby
exposing underlying layers of concrete to further attack. If the corrosion products adhere to the
surface of the concrete, then a certain measure of protection against further acid attack is provided.
Sulphuric acid, in fact, does not and cannot penetrate into normal concrete.
Acid attack therefore takes place at the surface only. The most outstanding character of this form of
corrosion is the fact that it only occurs above the water line in the sewer. In other words, it is the crown
portion of the pipe, which gets corroded and this phenomenon is referred to as crown corrosion. Due
to this corrosion, the reinforcement gets exposed and the sewer gets damaged. In general, synthetic
material pipes are not directly affected by biological corrosion.
3.69.4 Factors Influencing Sulphide Generation
The factors that influence sulphide generation in sewers include: (i) temperature of sewage,
(ii) strength of sewage, (iii) velocity of flow, (iv) age of sewage, (v) pH of sewage, (vi) sulphate
concentration and (vii) ventilation of the sewer.
3.69.4.1 Temperature
Since sulphide generation is a biological phenomenon, it is obvious that sewage temperature

influences the rate of sulphide generation. Temperature below 20C generally will not cause any
appreciable sulphide build up. From 20C to 30C, the rate of sulphide generation increases at
about 7% per C rise in temperature and is maximum at 38C.
3.69.4.2 Strength of Sewage
A high concentration of organic strength (BOD) in sewage will lead to an increased rate of
sulphide generation as in Figure 3.56 and Figure 3.57 overleaf.
For any specified sewage temperature and flow condition in a sewer, there is limiting sewage
strength, usually less than 80 mg/l of BOD, below which a build-up of hydrogen sulphide will
practically cease.
However, it is possible in a long force main or at other locations where oxygen is shut off from the
sewage for a few hours, that sulphide build up may occur even with low values of BOD.
3 - 114
Part A: Engineering
TRANSFER OF H2 S TO PIPE WALL,OXIDATION TO H 2SO4

H2 S + 2 O2 * - H2 SO4
DISSOLVED OXYGEN LESS THAN 0.1 mg/]

DISSOLVED SULPHIDE PRESENT, HS' + H 2S
OXIDATION OF SULPHIDE:
2 O2 +2 HS S 2 O 3 2- + H2O
DEPLETION OFO 2 IN THE LAMINAR LAYER

DIFFUSION OF S 0 4 AND NUTRIENTS,
PRODUCTION OF SULPHIDE
DIFFUSION OF SULPHIDE INTO THE STREAM
Source: USEPA, 1974

Figure 3.56 Sulphide gas equilibrium in negligible oxygen
conditions in sewers
3-
OXYGEN ENTERING THE WATER
SEWAGE
DISSOLVED OXYGEN GREATER THAN 1 mg/l
DISSOLVED SULPHIDE ZERO OR TRACE
DIFFUSION OF O: AND NUTRIENTS
DIFFUSION OF SO* AND NUTRIENTS,

PRODUCTION OF SULPHIDE
DIFFUSION AND OXYDATION OF SULPHIDE /
I
Source: USEPA, 1974

Figure 3.57 Sulphide gas equilibrium in appreciable oxygen
conditions in sewers
115
3.69.4.3 Velocity of Flow
The velocity should be both self-oxidizing and self-cleansing. If the velocity of flow is great enough
to keep the submerged surfaces of the sewer free from slimes, no generation of ^ S will occur.
W henever the velocities are too small, the organic materials get settled out and undergo
anaerobic decay and release the sulphide, which later combines with the moisture and forms
sulphurous and sulphuric acid. The effect of velocity and relative sedimentation of organics and
grit is shown in Figure 3.58.
Source:USEPA,1974
Figure 3.58 Solids accumulation at invert of mains at various velocities
This incidentally brings out the fact that under prolonged conditions of absence of the minimum
velocities and the absence of the high velocities associated with the peak flow conditions at least
once a day, the effective area of the pipe is progressively reduced. This affects the gravity sewers by
backing up of the sewage upstream and reduced pumping in pumping mains resulting from higher
heads needed to pump the same volumes of sewage in reduced bores of the pipe.
The velocity necessary to prevent the build-up of sulphides in flowing sewage corresponding to
different values of the effective BOD (BODT) are shown in Section 3.15.2.
In determining the velocity to be used in design, the effective BOD should be calculated for the
period of the year, which gives the maximum value.
3 - 116
3.69.4.4 Age of Sewage
The oxidation-reduction potential of sewage which in turn is influenced by the age of sewage, seems
to be one of the important factors contributing to sulphide build up in the lower reaches. When septic
sewage is discharged from a collecting system, an Imhoff tank, or from a septic tank into an outfall,
it should be treated before it goes into the sewer. When outfall grades are steep, the problem is
particularly acute since high turbulence can release the sulphides causing odour and corrosion
problems. Long detention times in forced mains greatly influence the generation of sulphides.
The possible sulphide build up in a filled pipe can be roughly estimated as:
(3.4 7)
where,
Cs : Increase of Sulphide concentration in the force main in mg/l

t: Detention time in the main in minutes
d: Pipe diameter in mm
3.69.4.5 Hydrogen Ion Concentration
Sulphide producing organisms are known to have a considerable adaptability so that pH value is not
likely to have much effect on the rate of generation in sewers within the pH of 6 to 8 . If the pH value
is above 9.0 or below 5.5, sulphide generation will be affected.
3.69.4.6 Sulphate Concentration
The more the concentration of Sulphate, the more is its reduction to ^ S .
3.69.4.7 Ventilation
Ample ventilation through sewers will help in carrying away the generated H2 S, supply additional
oxygen to the sewage and keep the walls free of moisture and reduce the tendency for sulphuric acid
formation and attack of concrete.
Ventilation is particularly important in locations of turbulent flow, either by better natural ventilation
or by forced ventilation by fans, one or more of the necessary factors for optimal bacterial activity
can be made limiting. However, it is often very difficult and expensive to provide enough ventilation
to prevent corrosion.
3.69.5 Sulphide Control Procedures
The following are some of the criteria that may be taken into account in preventing or controlling
sulphide build up and consequent odour and/or corrosion.
3 - 117
3.69.5.1 Design of Sewers for Sulphide Corrosion Issue
In the design of sewer systems, consideration should be given to the desirability of maintaining
velocities sufficient to avoid sulphide build up and of minimizing pressure lines and points of high
turbulence. The designer should take into consideration topography, grades of sewers, ventilation,
materials of construction, sewage temperature and strength, etc.
Some of the design features that should be considered are described below.
One of the important factors in the control of H2S is the velocity of flow and BOD. Please refer
Sections 3.15.2 for BOD to prevent H2S in sewers. The limiting velocities for prevention of
sulphide generation vary with temperature and effective BOD. The velocities given in Section 3.15.1
are believed to be the minimum that should be used. An allowance of 25% in the velocity should
be made as a factor of safety and if industrial wastes are present with a higher content of dissolved
organic matter, it may be necessary to increase this allowance to 50%. Where it is impractical to
provide a sewer gradient in design to give these limiting velocities, other means of controlling sulphide
generation should be considered. Velocities giving high, single point turbulence, may however, result
in sulphide release and severe odour and/or corrosion.
Except in the cases where sewage is quite weak and in a fairly well aerated condition, high sulphide
generation because of large slime areas can be expected in completely filled sewer lines. Force
mains, therefore should be kept to a minimum or velocities must be adequate at all flowing times.
Since biological activity is concentrated largely in the slime layer, it increases with an increase
of the wetted perimeter. The oxygen uptake is proportional to the surface width of the stream.
Therefore, it follows that deep flow in a pipe is more conducive to sulphide generation than shallow
flow. Accordingly, where sulphide generation is a critical consideration, a larger pipe is always better
than a smaller one for any given slope and sewage flow.
Turbulence caused by high velocities for short distances or improper design of junction manholes
permitting sewage lines to intersect at right angles or at different elevations should be avoided as
turbulence can cause excessive release of ^ S even where sewage contains only a small amount
of dissolved sulphides.
Concrete with a low water-cement ratio of suitable workability, thorough mixing, proper placing and
sufficient curing is preferred for sewers.
3.69.5.2 Control of Sewage Character for Sulphide Corrosion Issues
Trade wastes containing dissolved sulphides should not be allowed into the sewers. High sulphate
concentrations arising from the discharge of tidal or sea-water to the sewer should be controlled.
The oxidation-reduction potential of the sewage can be increased and the rate of generation of ^ S
slowed down by steps, which include the partial purification of sewage allowed into the sewers by
sedimentation or by high rate treatment on filters. Effective BOD of sewage depends upon sewage
strength and temperature. By reducing sewage strength and/or temperature, effective BOD as well
as minimum velocity required can be reduced.
3 - 118
Strength of sewage can be reduced in some cases by diluting sewage with unpolluted water.
It must be realized, however, that dilution reduces the waste-carrying capacity of the sewer.
Where velocities are inadequate to control the formation of H2S or where completely filled lines
are encountered as in force mains, supplemental aeration by the use of compressed air may be
desirable. Air injection would prevent hydrogen sulphide building up and in any case will greatly
reduce generation.
Air addition at about 10 lpm for each cm of pipe diameter is necessary. Care must be taken to
prevent the formation of air pockets in such lines, since experience has shown that some ^ S will
form on the walls at the points of such air pockets and corrosion will occur.
3.69.5.3 Cleaning of Sewers for Sulphide Corrosion Issues
Removal of slime and silt has the effect of reducing sulphide generation. Periodic cleaning of
sewers by mechanical or chemical means is necessary. Any partial blocking of the sewer by debris
will result in retardation of flow and consequent anaerobic decomposition of deposited sludge.
Periodic mechanical cleaning and flushing of sewers can reduce average sulphide generation by
50 %. A good continuing programme of mechanical cleaning is probably the foundation for any
control programme.
Sulphuric acid is effective in reducing slimes. Intermittent use of sulphuric acid was found to be useful
in removing slimes on the submerged walls. Caution must be exercised in the use of sulphuric acid
for the purpose of acidification since iron sulphide, that may be present on sewer walls, may cause
an initial release of H2S sufficient to be fatal to any worker inside the sewer. The shift of pH value also
changes all the ionized sulphide (in the flow) to H2S.
Slaked lime, Ca(OH )2 is probably more suitable for chemically treating the slime since no corrosion
damage will result from it and sulphide release will not occur. It has been found that if the slimes are
subject to lime slurry of about 8,000 mg/L for 45 minutes, they will be inactivated for periods of 3 to
14 days depending upon flow and sewage characteristics.
3.69.5.4 Chlorination for Sulphide Control Issues
Chlorine has been successfully used in controlling sulphide generation for many years. Chlorine is
effective in three ways (i) it destroys sulphides by chemical reaction, (ii) it reduces biological activity
and produces mild oxidizing compounds in the sewage and (iii) it destroys the slimes.
An approximate dosage of 10 to 12 mg/L of chlorine is sufficient. When excess chlorine is applied,

it leaves the sewage in an oxidized state, and prevents the re-appearance of sulphide for some
distance downstream.
3.69.6 Materials of Construction for Sulphide Corrosion Issues
When corrosion cannot be prevented by design, maintenance or control of wastes entering

the sewer, consideration must be given to corrosion resistant materials such as vitrified-clay or
to protective linings of proven performance.
3 - 119
Plastic pipes may also be used if accepted in all other respects. It is possible that super sulphated
metallurgical cement, pozzolana-portland cement mixtures or portland cement low in tricalcium
aluminate may be more resistant to attack than normal portland cement.
On concrete pipe, extra wall thickness (sacrificial concrete) sometimes is specified to increase pipe
life in the event corrosive conditions develop. On reinforced concrete, this takes the form of added
cover over the inner reinforcing steel.
Another method of modifying the composition of concrete is by the use of limestone or dolomite
aggregate in the manufacture of the pipe materials. The use of such aggregates increases the amount
of acid-soluble material in the concrete, which prolongs the life of the pipe in corrosive environments.
The rate of acid attack of limestone or dolomite aggregate pipe may be only about one fifth as great
as when granite aggregate is used.
Unfortunately, not all limestone and dolomite aggregates exhibit the same resistance to this form
of corrosion. Accordingly, tests should be made before limestone or dolomitic aggregate is used.
Aluminous cement has initial resistance to acid attack. Its corrosion products are also not extensive.
Therefore, it may have limited use in sewer structures.
3.69.7 Sewer Protection
Protection of sewer structures by lining or coating against ^ S attack can also be considered if other
methods of control are impracticable.
3.69.7.1 Liners
A plastic polyvinyl chloride sheet, having T-shaped protections on the back, which key into the
pipe wall at the time of manufacture, is one of the successful lining materials. Vitrified clay of low
porosity has also been used as a liner. In regions where high sulphides and high production of H2 SO 4
can be expected, the problems remain.
Cement mortar joints are subject to attack. Bituminous joints are emulsified and dissolved by soaps,
oil and grease. Acid-proof cement joints offer the best protection, but they are costly. Some type
of plastic coatings and/or linings for sewers and other structures have proved moderately successful,
given continued inspection and maintenance.
The function of these linings is to isolate the concrete from the corrosive atmosphere. To be
effective, the lining including joints must be sealed completely to protect the sewer system
throughout its expected life.
The interior of cast iron and ductile iron pipe usually is lined with cement mortar. Steel pipe
sometimes is lined similarly. Smooth-walled steel pipe also may be protected by cementing
plasticized polyvinyl chloride sheets to the pipe and sealing the joints.
Corrugated metal pipe may be coated inside and out with bituminous material. For added
protection, asbestos fibres may be embedded in the molten zinc before it is bituminous-coated
(asbestos bonded). Such coatings should be of impermeable material of sufficient thickness and free
of flaws such as pin-holes.
3 - 120
3.69.7.2 Protective Coatings
Any protective coating used should possess the following qualities; (i) it should be resistant to acid
attack, (ii) it should bond securely to the concrete, (iii) it should be economical and durable,
(iv) it should be resistant to abrasive action by flow of sewage, and (v) when applied, it should be thin
enough to fill all pores and irregularities in the surface. The coating should be continuous with no pin
holes or other breaks. Figure 3.59 presents a RCC sewer pipe with coating.
Figure 3.59 RCC Sewer pipe with protective coating
The effectiveness of a coating thus depends on its inherent resistance to acid attack and on its
ability to form impervious membrane. In practice, no coating can be applied without discontinuity.
Inspection and maintenance must be periodical.
Plastic-based paints and coal tar epoxy coatings have proved to be good.
3.69.7.3 Cathodic Protections
Cathodic protection is the application of electricity from an external power supply or the use of
galvanic methods for combating electrochemical corrosion.
Cathodic protection should be used as a supplement and not as an alternative technique to

other methods of protection. It may be a more suitable and expeditious method of protection for
existing pipelines.
a) Basic Principle
The basic principle is to make the entire surface of the equipment cathodic, thus affording protection,
since corrosion takes place only at the anodic surface. This can be achieved by connecting it to a DC
source. In this case, the anode consists of specially earthed electrodes. The general arrangement in
a cathodic protection assembly is shown in the Figure 3.60 overleaf.
3 - 121
Figure 3.60 General arrangement of cathodic protection
The current from the positive pole of the DC source flows through the conductor 2 into the earthed
anode 3 and then into the soil. From the soil the current flows to the surface of the pipe 4 to be
protected and flows along the pipe to the drainage junction point 5, the conductor 6 and back to
the negative terminal of the current source. Thus, the entire surface of the underground pipe or
equipment becomes cathodic and is protected from corrosion, while the earthed anode gets
corroded. The anode, is usually scrap metal e.g., old tubes, rails, etc. Other metals, which are
resistant to attack by surrounding soil like special alloys or graphite, are also used. The
conductivity of the protective coating has a direct influence on the length of the protected section
of the pipe. The required power increases with increasing conductivity of the coating.
b) Preliminary Investigations
The existing pipeline has to be inspected to ascertain the sections that require protection. Other
basic information required are as follows:
a) Plan and details of the pipelines (showing branch connections, diameter, length and wall
thickness) and location plan of the section to be protected along with
i) Data on soil resistance along the section to be protected at the intervals of at least 100 m as well
as the earthing points
ii) Information on the availability of sources of electricity, amperage, voltage, DC/AC (phase) in the
vicinity and spaces for housing current supply and controls
iii) Data on the conductivity or resistivity of the existing protective insulation; and
iv) Condition of the pipeline, if it is already in use
c) Power requirements
With the above data, minimum current density and maximum protection potential can be worked
out. The capacity of the current source for a cathodic protection system depends on (1) length of the
section to be protected (2) type and state of the coating of the pipeline (3) diameter of the pipe
(4) wall thickness of the pipe (5) conductivity of the soil and (6 ) design of anode earthing. The power
requirements vary from 0.4 to 10 kilowatts in most cases. The possible current sources are DC
Generator, converter-rectifier, storage batteries of dry or acid type. The pipeline should be at least
0.3 V negative to the soil.
3 - 122
d) Anodes
The main power loss occurs in the anode earthing. The earthing can be carried out by any metal
(pure or scrap) of any shape and carbon forms like coke or graphite. When tubes are used, the
earthing can be either horizontal or vertical. Near the earthing zone, soil treatment can be done
to reduce soil resistance by adding salts like sodium chloride, calcium chloride or moistening the
soil, the former being better and long lasting. Carbon or graphite electrodes have longer durability
than metal electrodes.
e) Other facilities
A cathodic protection station should provide space for housing the equipment, installation of
current sources, supply and distribution zones, equipment for check measurements, construction of
earthing structures and facilities for carrying out operational tests.
3.69.7.4 Protection by Sacrificial Anode
Sacrificial anodes serve the same purpose as the cathodic protection system but do not require
external electric power supply. The required current is supplied by an artificial galvanic couple in
which the parts to be protected, usually iron or steel, is made as the cathode by choosing the other
metal having the higher galvanic potential, as the anode. Zinc, Aluminium and Magnesium (with
sufficient purity) or their alloys, which are higher up in the galvanic series must be used for this
purpose. Sheets of zinc suspended in a coagulation basin are an example. A single protector anode
will not be sufficient and it will be necessary to install a number of such anodes generally spaced at
4 to 6 m in the pipeline or the structures to be protected.
The performance and service life of anodes depend mostly on the nature of soil or water
surrounding them. Use of fill materials in the soil such as clay and gypsum powder results in low
resistance of anode earthing and yields a high current. The costs of protection by galvanic anode
would be appreciably higher in the case of pipeline networks in big towns since it would be necessary
to suppress incidental contacts.
For the application of galvanic protection, the resistance of the soil should be less than
12,000 ohm-cm. A higher resistance of the circuit can achieve neither the required current density,
nor the reduction of the pipe to soil potential. In such cases, cathodic protection by means of external
power supply offers better protection.
The following measures are also of interest in minimizing corrosion:
i) Minimizing point of high turbulence within the system thus resulting in less sulphide generation
ii) Designing wet wells to preclude surcharge of tributary lines which also result in less
sulphide generation
iii) Provision of forced ventilation at a point where air may be depleted seriously of its oxygen
iv) Using a coating of another metal such as zinc, galvanized iron or using paints appropriately
3 - 123
v) Gas Scrubbing
vi) Providing inside sleeving or lining of suitable type of plastic materials
The problem of sewer corrosion due to hydrogen sulphide production and its control is a serious one
to the sewage conveyance system. Prevention of ^ S generation by proper design and continued
cleaning of sewers seems to be the best available method.
3.70 CONNECTION OF HOUSE SEWER TO PUBLIC SEWER
The earlier practice has been to connect house sewers to public sewers using the typical Y branch
or T branch depending on the depth of public sewer. The reason for this is that stoneware pipes
had these specials and can be inserted wherever needed while laying the sewers. Most of the
problems of sewer blocks are traceable to solid materials getting stuck at T or Y junction in house
services, requiring most times even cutting open the roads. It is henceforth proposed to discontinue
this practice. The house-service sewer connections shall be effected only in manholes. In case of
old sewers, a new manhole shall be inserted for this purpose. The material of the house service
sewer shall be either conventional salt glazed stoneware or UPVC rigid straight pipes of 6 kg/cm2
pressure class in manufacture and as per IS 15328 with solvent cement joints.
The minimum earth cover above the crown of the sewer shall be mandatorily 90 cm and where
this becomes impossible; the property owner shall be directed to depress his terminal chamber to
comply with this minimum earth cover of 90 cm, as the public manhole shall start at its crown at 100
cm below ground level (see also section 3.20.3). Where such sewers cross the electricity power
cables, the specifications of IS 1255 clause 6.3.3 and clause 6.3.3.1 shall be mandatorily followed
without any exception. All such house service sewers shall be only above the electricity power cable
and the minimum clearance shall be 30 cm all-round the electricity power cable. The electric power
cable itself shall be covered all around by 15 cm riddled soil and further protected on top by tiles,
bricks or slabs. Hence, the total minimum clearance will be 30 cm + 15 cm = 45 cm.
The house owner shall be mandated to possess a kraite a type of non-corroding, sufficiently
flexible but rigid type of less than 10 mm diameter rod, which he/she shall use to rod the
house-service sewer freely up to the manhole. The labour of the local body shall not be deployed for
any removal of obstructions in the house-service sewer. Typically, it is possible to effect six service
connections to a manhole. Without exception, the provision of terminal chamber inside the property
premises shall be mandatorily followed.
3.71 SPACING OF MANHOLES
Sewers are known to get choked resulting in sewage overflow from upstream manholes. The
non-invasive and non-destructive cleaning is by equipments like jetting machines, bucket machines,
rodding machines etc. At the same time, however, house-service sewers are also known to get
choked and sewage backs up into the houses. The reasons in this case are
(a) the choking of public sewers and manholes in road portion or
(b) obstructions in the house sewer itself due to extraneous material pushed into it by the residents.
3 - 124
The problem at
(a) can be relieved when the public sewer is cleared up.
(b) however requires clearing the house-service sewer.
In the older practice of house service sewers joining the public sewer through Y or T junctions,
this is difficult and invariably, the road is dug up at the junction to break the house service sewer,
clear it up and join back by covering with a curved tile or sleeve etc. Even then, the choking can
recur and the practice is to be repeated resulting in the weakening of the service sewer itself to
withstand the load from the road.
The Chennai Metropolitan Water Supply and Sewerage Board (CMWSSB) have been
successfully implementing for over two decades, the practice of connecting all house service
sewers to manholes and not public sewers. The precaution used is such connections are effected
below the corbel portion of the manholes. Typically, a manhole takes six such connections, three
from each side of the road, from properties opposite to and on both sides of the manhole. The clearing
of the house-service itself seldom arises because even the extraneous matter pushed in by the
residents gets dropped into the manhole and if at all noticed, the simple rodding of the house
sewers by bamboo splits or flexible rods succeeds in clearing the blockages and drop them into the
manholes. Thus, the problem of the road getting dug up frequently causing nuisance in the
public is completely avoided.
From this point of view, it becomes necessary to limit the length of such house service
sewers. Considering that typically properties are developed on plots of about 10 m width, a
spacing of 30 m between manholes permits both the objectives of easy cleaning of public sewer
stretches and eliminating the avoidable road digging to clear obstructions in house service sewers.
Accordingly, the spacing of manholes shall be retained at 30 m as in the existing manual and in
case of economically weaker sections, the spacing can be narrower, commensurate with the width
of the plots so that all connections are made to the manholes without undue lengths.
In addition, there will be additional manholes at changes of directions and in the case of
commercial structures like meeting halls, marriage halls etc as the case may be. Very wide plots
should be encouraged to avail manholes at each end of the plot by meeting the cost of the extra
manhole. In the case of gravity outfall sewers with no house service sewers, the spacing can be
at 60 m besides at every change of direction and drops. For insertion of the house service sewers
into the manholes, it is necessary to have a precast ring section below the corbel portion with
holes at 45 degrees to the public sewer line to facilitate insertion of three house service sewers
on each side of the road.
Usually the house service sewers shall be 110 mm or 160 mm UPVC 4 kg / sqcm (as detailed in
sewer laying section). Accordingly, the height of the ring shall be 250 mm and 300 mm to permit
filling of the annular the interspaces between the sewer and the opening with cement concrete
and at least 50 mm of RCC annular fill around the inserted house service sewer respectively.
Without exception, the provision of terminal chamber inside the property premises
shall be mandatorily followed.
3 - 125
3.71.1 In Public Sewers
The CMWSSB are connecting all the house service sewers directly below the corbels of
manholes for over two decades. Typically, a manhole takes six such connections, three from
the properties on each sides of the public sewer alignment. The clearing of the house service
itself seldom arises because even the extraneous matter pushed in by the residents gets
dropped into the manhole. Where needed, simple rodding of the house sewers by bamboo
splits or flexible rods from the terminal chamber of the property clears the blockages and drop
it into the manholes. Thus, the problem of the road getting dug up is completely avoided.
Such a system is also referred to as the Berlin System as in Figure 3.61 as cited by the EPA in
its publication quoted here.
Conventional System Berlin" System

Source: EPA, 2010
Figure 3.61 Connection system between house service sewer and public sewer
Considering that the typical road frontage of plots in ULBs at about 10 m and the road widths
being two lanes with 6 m to 8 m width, a spacing of 30 m between manholes permits restricting
the lengths of house sewers between 3 m in the shorter perpendicular direction and 15 m in the
longer hypotenuse direction. These are reasonable for maintenance and cleaning. Accordingly, the
spacing of manholes shall be 30 m. In the case of economically weaker sections, the spacing can
be lesser, commensurate with the width of the plots. The standard provision of additional manholes
at changes of directions will continue. In the case of meeting halls, marriage halls etc as also very
wide plots these should be encouraged to avail manholes at each end of the plot by their meeting the
cost of the extra manhole.
3.71.2 In Outfall or Trunk Gravity Sewers
In outfall or trunk gravity sewers with no house service connections, the diameter of the sewers will
also be larger as 1.5 m in diameter. The Japanese manual specifies as in Table 3.30 overleaf.
The WEF states the spacing of manholes as Manholes are provided in sewer systems to help
maintain and clean sewer pipes. Typically, they are provided at intersections of two or more mainline
sewers, at changes in direction of sewer lines, and at regular intervals along a mainline. Manholes
are typically spaced approximately 300 feet (91.4 meter) apart, but can be less than 100 feet (30
meter) or as far apart as 500 feet (152 meter) (EPA).
3 - 126
Table 3.30 Spacing of manholes as per Japanese Manual
Sewer Diameter (mm) 600 or less 1 0 0 0 or less 1500 or less 1650 or more
Maximum Manhole
75 100 150 200
Space (m)
Source: JSWA
Considering the involved aspects of costs, frequency of cleaning and financial sustainability of
sewer cleaning equipment by the ULBs, the following in Table 3.31 is now recommended. It is
always possible to insert a manhole later on in between the existing manholes if another sewer or
house service sewer is to be connected at that time.
Table 3.31 Spacing of manholes in gravity sewers not receiving house service sewers
Sewer Diameter (mm) Up to 600 600 to 900 900 to 1200 1200 to 1500
Maximum Manhole
60 90 120 150
Space (m)
Maximum Manhole
30 m or it can be less than 30 m depending on the street
Space (m)
Where sewer diameters exceed 1500 mm, the possibility of using egg shaped sewers made out
of pre-cast RCC sections made out of sulphate resisting cement and duly plastered on both sides
should be explored for easier execution of work and better control over the flushing and cleaning
at low flows in the bottom egg shaped segment. The geometry of the egg shaped sewer and its
hydraulic properties at full flow are shown in Figure 3.62. The characteristics of flow shall be referred
to from standard texts.
Figure 3.62 Geometry and hydraulics of egg shaped sewer at full flow
3 - 127
3.72 LIFT STATIONS IN GRAVITY SEWERS
There are cases where high water table conditions or rocky strata pose considerable difficulties in
the design and provision of conventional gravity sewerage system in that excavations amidst sub soil
water or rocky terrain is not only difficult but also is frowned upon by the public when the works drag
on and on in the middle of the road. Such situations can be easily got over by restricting the depth of
sewers to a practicable limit and diverting the flow into a pavement submersible pump station with
a lockable control panel there itself. This is similar to the pillar boxes of the electricity board and the
delivery main can lift the flow to the downstream manhole at the conventional 0.9 m depth to invert.
With the availability of quite a few manufacturers of sewage-submersible pump sets in the country it
should be possible to implement this instead of struggling with deep sewers in such areas for years
together and more importantly compounding the problems of O&M and the repairs at these depths
perpetually. These submersible pump stations can be operated by mercury float switches and
powered by dedicated feeder lines from the local electrical authority similar to the lines given to the
hospitals, etc. These pump sets can also be connected to solar panels. The pump pit can be covered
with pedestrian grade walkway slabs, which are of RCC and with adequate lifting arrangements to
permit the lowering and lifting the submersible pump sets. More details on lift stations are
available in Chapter 4.
3 - 128
CHAPTER 4: DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF
SEWAGE PUMPING STATIONS
Part A: Engineering AND SEWAGE PUMPING MAINS
CHAPTER 4 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF SEWAGE PUMPING STATIONS AND

SEWAGE PUMPING MAINS
4.1 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
Pumping stations handle sewage either as in-line for pumping the sewage from a deeper sewer to
a shallow sewer or for conveying to the STP or outfall. They are required where sewage
from low lying development areas is unable to be drained by gravity to existing sewerage
infrastructure, and / or where development areas are too remote from available sewerage
infrastructure to be linked by gravity means.
4.1.1 Design Flow
Refer Chapter 3 of this manual.
4.1.2 Location and Configuration
The proper location of the pumping station requires a comprehensive study of the area to be served,
to ensure that the entire area can be adequately drained. Special consideration has to be given to
undeveloped or developing areas and to probable future growth. The location of the pumping
station will often be determined by the trend of future overall development of the area. The site
should be aesthetically satisfactory. The pumping station has to be so located and constructed such
that it will not get flooded at any time. The storm-water pumping stations have to be so located that
water may be impounded without creating an undue amount of flood-damage, if the flow exceeds
the pumping station capacity. The station should be easily accessible under all weather conditions.
Pumping stations are typically located near the lowest point in a development. However,
the siting and orientation of each pumping station shall be considered individually and based on the
following criteria:
Local topography as slope of the ground and above and below ground obstructions
Proposed layout of the particular development and of future developments
Proximity of proposed and/or existing sewerage infrastructure
Size and type of the pumping station
Access considerations for O&M needs including operators health and safety issues
Visual impact, particularly the vent tube, odours, noise problems, etc.,
Availability of power, water, etc.,
Vulnerability of the site for inundation
Compatibility to neighbouring residences by suitable dialogues.
Of these, the inundation is the key and can result in major environmental and health problems in
case raw sewage is flushed to the surface due to flooding of the wet well, or because of failure of
4- 1
the system due to a partially/fully submerged switchboard. Inundation may also result in severe
scouring around structures, particularly around the wet well, valve chamber, and possibly cause
damage to the critical components such as the electrical switchboard. Accordingly, the designer shall
establish the levels of the top of the wet well wall, top of valve chamber walls and top of the plinth
supporting the electrical cubicle, so that those structures cannot be inundated by a flood of a 1 in
1 0 0 -year recurrence interval.
Preferred method will be the formed ground level to be at the 1 in 100 -year flood level and building
plinth and top of wet wells etc. shall be at 0.45 m above.
Ditch drain shall be mandatorily provided all around and if it is not possible to drain by gravity to the
nearby natural drain. Drain pump sets shall be installed with 100% standby to pump out rain water
and connected to the standby power. Rain-water harvesting shall not be provided in sewage pumping
stations to avoid ground water pollution by raw sewage due to accidental spillage.
Minimum number of wet wells shall be two, irrespective of the volume of sewage to be pumped
out and the structures shall be as far possible circular in plan to facilitate simpler and economical
construction, besides the possibility of removing accumulated grit from one of the wells at a time
without interrupting the pumping out.
4.1.3 Measures for Safety and Environment Protection
1. Railing shall be provided around all manholes and openings where covers may be left open
during operation and at other places, where there are differences in levels or where there is
danger for people falling.
2. Guards shall be provided around all mechanical equipment, where the operator may come in
contact with the belt-drives, gears, rotating shafts or other moving parts of the equipment.
3. Staircases shall be provided in preference to ladders, particularly for dry well access. Straight
staircases shall be provided as against spiral or circular staircases or steps. The steps to be
provided in the staircase shall be of the non-slippery type.
4. Telephone is an essential feature in a pump-house, as it will enable the operator to maintain

contact with the main office. In case of injury, fire or equipment-difficulty, the telephone will
provide facility to obtain proper assistance as rapidly as possible.
5. Fire extinguishers, first-aid boxes and other safety devices shall be provided at all SPS.
6 . A system of colours for pipes shall minimize the possibility of cross-connections.
7. To prevent leakages of explosive gases, the wet well should not be directly connected by any
opening to the dry well superstructure.
8 . All electrical equipment and wiring should be properly insulated and grounded and
switches and controls should be of non-sparking type. All wiring and devices in hazardous
areas should be explosion-proof.
4-2
9. All pumping stations should have potable water supply, washroom and toilet facilities and
precautions taken to prevent cross connections.
10. Hoisting equipment shall be provided for handling of equipment and materials, which cannot be
readily lifted or removed by manual labour. Hence, in large pumping stations, gantries of
adequate capacities shall be provided to lift the pumps, motors and large piping.
11. Fencing shall be provided around the pumping station to prevent trespassing.
12. The station should be landscaped to make it blend with the surroundings and to add to the
aesthetic effect, particularly when residential areas are in the near vicinity of the station.
13. Adequate lighting is essential at the plinth and all locations of the pumping station and glares
and shadows shall be avoided in the vicinity of machinery and floor openings.
4.1.4 Design Suction W ater Level
The suction elevation should be preferably below the invert of the incoming sewer to facilitate air
passage through the sewer in the reaches closer to the pump station. A preferable drop of 50 cm
to 1 0 0 cm below the invert of the incoming sewer is desirable to safeguard against problems of
choking of sediments in sewers due to stagnations.
4.1.5 Design Discharge Level
The water surface elevation in the receiving structure decides the static lift when compared to the
suction level. However, friction losses and free-fall at receiving chamber are to be added to this
to get at the design discharge level. As a rule, if needed this has to be increased such that the
hydraulic grade line does not cut the longitudinal section of the ground level along the pumping main.
This is achieved by raising the discharge elevation by means of a raised delivery line ending up in a
goose-neck before dropping the flow into the receiving chamber such that the hydraulic grade line
moves upwards in its terminal end and thus becomes free of the ground level.
The hydraulic grade line shall be at least 1 m above the highest ground level or the top most crown
of the pumping main.
4.1.6 Selection of Power Source
The power source will be the local electricity grid. A dedicated feeder from the nearby substation
is recommended and in large pumping stations two such independent dedicated feeders from two
different substations is to be considered. Drawing off a nearby power cable is permissible for small
pumping stations handling less than 1 MLD of DWF.
4.2 SCREEN AND GRIT CHAMBER
4.2.1 Gate
It is necessary to insert a penstock gate at the entry of the sewer into the wet well. The gate shall
close by lowering the gate by either hand driven or motorized gear wheel.
4-3
4.2.2 Screens
These are needed to trap the floating matters like sachets, plastic milk packets, grocery bags,
etc., which otherwise can lump in the impeller. The travelling mechanized endless screen is
recommended so that man entry is totally avoided. For this purpose, it is necessary to restrict the
width of flow to a rectangular profile in plan with the upstream length as at least three times the width
and downstream length as at least two times the width. It is difficult to design and construct such a
rectangular structure at deep depths. Hence, the recommended procedure is to construct the circular
well first and fill up the arc sections with partitioned mass concrete to get at the rectangular passage.
The design is invariably governed by equipment manufacturers who use the DWF and peak
flows as the basis. In large pumping stations, it pays to have two successive screens: one coarse
and the other fine, the idea being to have a back-up, in case one of them is in downtime. In small
stations where the depth of incoming sewer is just about 3 m or so, a hand operated screen
facility can be provided as in Figure 4.1.
The screen champer consists of two individual

screens hung from a common wire rope gliding over
a pulley lined with Teflon to avoid friction and avoid
need for oil or grease to get over the friction. When one
screen is in operation, the other is in raised position to
facilitate cleaning. This relative movement can be
got either by manually rotating the pulley wheel or
mechanically doing this through a motor and
limit switch. Each screen has an L shaped tray with
perforated sheet at the bottom and when raised,
the cleaning between the screens by a manual rake
disturbs the screenings which will fall into the tray from
where it is scooped out by a push of the spade over it
and emptying directly into the trolley at ground level.
Figure 4.1 Typical Hand operated Screen Facility at Shallow Sewers in Pumping Stations
4.2.3 Amount of Screenings
Refer Section 5.6 of Chapter 5.
4.2.4 Configuration, Number of Grit Chambers and Method of Degritting
Grit shall be removed at the SPS to safeguard the same from causing wear to the pump impeller and
inside of especially RCC pumping mains. In case of HDPE and PVC pipeline, the material of the wall
does not succumb to erosion as long as velocities are between 1 m/s and 3 m/s and moderate grit
content can be even pumped out directly to the STP. For almost all other pipelines the grit will erode
the wall thickness and the pipes may collapse after some time. All the same, it is best to remove the
grit before pumping.
4-4
The grit well shall be an independent well upstream of the wet well. A reliable grit removal system shall
be a simple submersible pump set. The system shall be designed such that the floor of the wet well
is depressed below the level of the incoming and outgoing sewers. The depression shall be minimum
0 .6 m deep at one end and 1.0 m at the opposite end and such end finished flat for 1 m diametrical
distance to house submersible pump sets. These pump sets shall be operated at the beginning of each
eight-hour shift to pump out the grit laden sediments to a filtering masonry unit at GL and its filtrate let
back into the grit well. The filtering masonry unit shall follow the designs of the sludge drying beds as
in chapter 5 of this manual. The pump out rate shall be equal to the volume of the depressed portion
pumped out in 10 minutes. The filtrate will be returned by gravity to the wet well. The pumped out
sewage grit mixture can also be put through vortex separators (see Chapter-5 sub section on grit)
installed above ground level and the grit collected in a trolley and the overflow degritted sewage
can flow back to the well itself. The grit at the bottom can be further handled in screw classifiers like in
detritors and elevated to fall into a stationary trailer. The system will be an enclosed and compact
system eliminating human contact. There are many such integrated systems but these are patented.
Hence specifying design criteria is difficult. However, these can be procured on competitive basis.
4.2.5 Amount of Grit
Refer section 5.6 in Chapter 5 of this manual.
4.2.6 Treatment and Disposal of Screenings and Grit
If land area is available, the screenings can be segregated to remove non-biodegradable

components and blend it with grit and compacted. If not, it can be made a secure fill into an elevated
HDPE container to be transported to the STP as and when it fills up. The removed plastics
will be disposed into the municipal solid wastes.
4.3 MACHINERY ROOM
This room will house both switches, for switching on and off and the control gear and shall be a
dedicated room with no other occupant and well ventilated with two entries/exits. The height of the
room shall be the typical 4.5 m and the roof shall be a permanent structure of masonry. Timber
products shall be totally avoided in the construction and fixtures and furniture in this building.
4.4 MEASURES AGAINST ODOUR
The best method is to provide good aromatic plants around and not trees. Artificial room sprays can be
used, but not inside the electrical control room.
4.5 PUMPS
4.5.1 Types of Pumps
Historically, the sewage pumps are of two types, namely, horizontal axis driven with impeller rotating
in the vertical plane or vertical axis driven with impeller rotating in the horizontal plane. Both these are
centrifugal pumps. The vertical axis driven pump has the advantage that the pump can be at a lower
4-5
elevation and the motor can be at a higher elevation and connected by a vertical shaft, which permits
the pump at the floor of the wet well and the motor on top of it above the MFL. If horizontal axis driven
pump is used, the motor and pump are close coupled and can be installed in dry well at the same depth
of wet well. The suction pipe driven through the wall or erected above the MFL and the vacuum pump
set is used to create the vacuum in the pumping arrangement called negative suction with priming. In
general, this negative suction and its vacuum priming are to be avoided altogether in sewage.
The later entrant of submersible pump sets are with integral motor and pump in the same casing
and the assembly is water tight to the motor compartment and functions on vertical axis. Unlike the
individual motor coupled pump sets, where the heat of the motor is dissipated by the air circulation
brought about by the fan driven by impeller shaft blowing the air over the motor surface, the
submersible pump sets require to be kept submerged in sewage at all times and the cooling of the
motor is achieved through the surrounding sewage.
The recent entrant of immersible pump sets is with a seal of oil around the motor and which takes care
of its cooling. Thus, theoretically, it is possible to pump out the wet well contents to almost the mid
height of the pump and this saves considerable construction costs. These are otherwise similar to the
submersible pump sets.
A typical section of a submersible pump set is shown in Figure 4.2.
SELF-LOCKING CLAMP TO SEAL THE PUMP DELIVERY TO THE PIPE BRANCH
Figure 4.2 Arrangement of internals in a submersible pump set
4-6
In all cases, the free passage between the impeller and casing is called the ball passing size
and is to be preferred as minimum of 80 mm.
4.5.2 Types of Pump Stations
This is shown in Figure 4.3 and is self-explanatory.
JL
| | [
iL
77777",
f t f
PUMPING STATION WITH

HORIZONTAL PUMPS IN
DRY - PIT
Figure 4.3 Typical dry-well and wet-well installations
4.5.3 Screw Pump Stations
There is yet another type known as immersible pump set where the cooling is made by an oil
chamber filled with specific oil around the motor in the same arrangement as the submersible
pump set and in this case, there is no need to keep the minimum depth of sewage submergence.
There is also the Archimedean screw pump set which is shown in Figure 4-4 and which can only
be used for lift stations as the delivery will be at atmospheric conditions .
The open impeller screw picks up

and lifts the sewage on the screw and
discharges at the top of the screw. The
rotational speed is generally about 20
to 30 rpm. The motor is mounted at
the top with a gearbox kept inclined
and thus driving the impeller axially.
Depending on the speed o f rotation
the quantity lifted varies. There is no
piping or valve. The material is carbon
steel. Photo courtesy CMWSS Board,
Koyambedu STP-Chennai
Source: CMWSSB, Chennai

Figure 4.4 Archimedean screw pump.
4-7
4.5.4 Number of Pumps
The capacity of a pump is usually stated in terms of Dry Weather Flow (DWF), estimated for
the pumping station. The general practice is to provide 3 pumps for a small capacity pumping
station comprising (a) 1 pump of 1 DWF, (b) 1 of 2 DWF and (c) 1 of 3 DWF capacity. For large
capacity pumping station, 5 pumps are usually provided, comprising (d) 2 of 1/2 DWF, (e) 2 of 1 DWF
and (f) 1 of 3 DWF capacity, including standby.
Alternatively, the number of pumps can also be chosen to be in multiples of DWF flow and
provide a 100% standby capacity for peak flow. This will permit easier inventories, cannibalization
and uniformity in electrical control systems and switchgear except that the civil structure may need
a larger footprint. In this alternative, it is also possible to defer the actual pump installations till the
commensurate volume of sewage arises in due course.
A combination of vertical submersible screw, centrifugal impeller pump and a vortex inducing
arrangement at the pump pit floor is stated to induce a spin of the incoming sewage depending on
the flow rate and thus producing a flow variation commensurate to the incoming flow variation, while
the pump is in constant speed of rotation. Right now, it is a patented make. It will be useful to take up
pilot project of this and such other technologies and evolve a system so that it can help reduce the
costs of civil works and multiples of pump set machinery for future pump stations.
4.5.5 Selection of Pump Stations
Where suction lifts are about 3 m to 5 m only, the horizontal foot mounted centrifugal pump
stations should be explored in view of the ease of repairs from local resources and the fact that
motors and pumps can be independently taken out for repairs. In addition, where space limitations
are constricting, submersible pump stations could be preferred. Archimedean pumps are rugged in
operation, but have a limitation on the efficiency, which is only about 25% and are to be preferred
in dealing with high volumes of raw sewage to be lifted over a short height. As otherwise, their
application in sewage is very little except return sludge in STP where they are ideal.
4.6 Wet Well
Wet well pumping stations usually contain larger pumping units than those required for submersible
type pumping stations. The pumping units are installed in the dry well whilst the sewage is stored
in the adjacent wet well. To ensure that the centrifugal pumps are always primed, the pumps are
located below the level of sewage in the wet well. In respect of submersible pump sets, the
top of the pump set shall be such that the pump set is fully submerged at minimum level of
sewage flow and the required wet volume is satisfied by the volume of wet well below the invert
level of the incoming sewer and an additional allowance of 50 cm below it. Conventional stations are
often equipped with multi-stage pumps.
Wet wells shall be designed and constructed to be as hazard free as possible, and corrosion
resistant materials shall be used throughout. No junction boxes shall be installed in the wet well. Float
cables and bubbler tubes shall be placed in a covered case that shall extend from the control panel
to the wet well.
4-8
These shall be in 2 parallel wells, each catering to 50% of the volume or in case of large flows,
a single well with two compartments which can be hydraulically connected by a penstock in the
partition wall.
4.6.1 Structure
Sewage pumping-station wet wells shall be constructed of brickwork duly plastered or reinforced
concrete and shall be circular. Wet wells that are installed below the groundwater table shall be
adequately designed to prevent uplift pressure without the use of hydrostatic pressure relief valves.
Wet well size and depth shall be as required to accommodate the influent sewer, provide for adequate
pump suction pipe or pump submergence as recommended by the pump manufacturer and to
provide adequate volume to prevent the frequent start and stop of pumps. Partitioning the wet well
to help accommodate future growth requirements may be practiced.
4.6.2 Interior Linings and Waterproofing for Old Wells
Wet well interior walls shall be lined with a material that is suitable for prolonged immersion in
sewage. The lining shall be completely resistant to hydrogen sulphide and sulphuric acid. The liner
shall be easily cleanable and sufficiently durable so that it can be washed with a high-pressure water
hose and shall be light in colour. Wet wells that are anticipated to be below the groundwater table
shall also have a waterproofing system installed on the exterior of the wet well. Regardless of the
elevation of the water table, all joints in the concrete and all penetrations through the concrete shall
be grouted with non-shrink grout on both sides of the joint or penetration.
4.6.3 Floor Slopes
In the case of wet well and dry well type with horizontal food mounted centrifugal pumps in the
dry well, the floor should have benching like a hopper with a minimum slope of 1 vertical to
1 horizontal to enable suspended solids to drain into the hopper and pumped out without depositing
on the entire flow. In the case of submersible pump / immersible pump, the floor shall be horizontal
to permit easy installation of present and future pumps.
4.6.4 Lighting
The interior of pump stations, whether at grade or below grade, shall have a lighting system
specifically designed to provide illumination best suited for the station layout, which may include
suspended, wall, or ceiling mounted. Energy efficient fluorescent fixtures are preferred. Lighting
shall be at levels adequate for routine service inspections and maintenance activities.
4.6.5 Ventilation
Pump stations shall be provided with a separate ventilating system and shall be sized to provide
a minimum of 10 air changes per hour. Ventilation systems shall be capable of matching inside air
temperature to outside air and shall be automatic. Ventilation shall be accomplished by the
introduction of fresh air into the pump station under positive pressure. The air shall be filtered to
remove particulates inside the pumping station.
4-9
4.6.6 Wet Well Design Criteria
Size of the wet well should be based on the following:
1. Flow from proposed development and any associated future development
2. Capability to receive flows from surrounding areas as determined by the authorities
The volume of wet well is given by
V = T x Q/4 (4.1)
where,
V : Effective volume of wet well (in cubic meters)
T: Time for one pump cycle (in minutes)
Q : Pumping rate (cubic meters per minute)
The value of T is related to the number of starts per hour and it is not advisable to exceed 6 starts
per hour. Accordingly, the value of T in the design is to be taken as 10 minutes for smaller pump
capacities but 15 minutes is desirable and hence, the denominator in the equation is to be used as
a value of 4.
Ideally, this volume has to be provided below the invert of the lowest incoming sewer in accordance
with section 4.1.4 of this manual. However, it may not always be possible especially in large sized
pumping stations. In such a case, the volume in the sewers calculated at 0.8 times their total volume
can be considered as the extended wet well volume. This is illustrated in Table 4.1.
Table 4.1 Illustration of wet well volume in sewer systems
Given,
Pumping capacity at peak flow = 42 cubic meters per minute
Volume required = 15 x 42 / 4 = 158 m3
Possible depth below invert of sewer =2 m
Area needed = 158 / 2 = 79 m 2
Diameter needed = SQRT (4x79 /3.14) = 10 m
The depth of the wet well required is also governed by the depth of submergence needed for
the submersible pump set. This is governed by the height of the submersible pump set and the
floor clearance. Assuming the height of the pump set as 1.2 m and floor clearance as 0.3 m the
minimum depth of the floor of the wet well below the invert of the sewer shall be 2 + 1.5 = 3.5 m.
It may be difficult to construct wet wells of 3.5 m deep below invert of incoming trunk sewers
which themselves may be at a depth of about 5 m to 6 m below ground level. Moreover, designing
and constructing the wet wells to be checked for cracking stress in high water table areas may
be not only difficult but may give way to infiltration which will be a challenge to control later on.
Thus, it becomes a problem of obtaining sufficient wet well volume at reasonable cost.
4 - 10
A solution to this is proposed in Chapter 6 titled pumps and pumping stations of the book
Wastewater Engineering, collection, treatment and disposal by Metcalf & Eddy, TMH edition, 1974,
which states, The effective volume V of the wet well between on and off float switch settings
includes the storage in the incoming sewers. If the on switch setting is below the sewer invert,
no storage is available. This setting is wasteful of both the storage capacity and head available in
sewers of appreciable size. It also wastes power and may require higher head pumps and larger
horsepower motors. Where it is necessary to rely on the storage in the sewers to obtain adequate
wet well volume for control, backwater curves should be computed to obtain the effective volume
between the various float switch settings. This may amount to 50% of the volume in the wet well
itself. Some stations have been built with practically no wet well and in the case of really large
stations, the wet well volume within the station approaches insignificance. In these cases, the only
volume available for control is the storage volume in the sewers.
It is also a matter for consideration to move on to immersible pump sets in future where
the submergence in sewage is not needed and the motor winding cooling is provided by an
internal oil chamber around it in the example above, this will mean reducing the height of wet well
below the incoming sewer by 1.2 m.
An ideal type of wet well design can be as shown in Figure 4.5 overleaf.
Following points should be considered while designing the wet well pumping system:
- Normal operating volume shall prevent any one pump from starting more than 3 times per hour.
- Level control is to be provided by ultrasonic level controller or submersible transducer.
- Provide high water and low water alarm activated by ultrasonic or submersible level control
system and backup float switches.
- Locate level switch where flow from the inlet pipe will not interfere with the float.
- Design electrical service to handle the ultimate capacity of the pump station.
4.6.7 Structural Design Criteria
In respect of civil structural design, all wet wells shall be designed to withstand soil water pressure
as though it is at ground level itself irrespective of actual water level, to take care of contingencies
of flooding and marooning of the stations. In addition, the stability of the base slab shall be checked
for resisting moment by considering the weight of the slab alone and neglecting the weight of the
sidewalls. Pressure relief valves for soil water uplift should not be encouraged in wet wells and
IS: 456 & IS: 3370 shall be followed. All civil works in contact with sewage shall be constructed
with either brick work or RCC and in both cases sulphate resistant cement alone shall be used.
In RCC, Fusion Bonded Epoxy coated reinforcement steel having not less than 175 to
300 microns shall be used for reinforcement.
Epoxy coating over the inner face of the screen well / grit well 1 m above the maximum sewage water
level is recommended.
4 - 11
The top of the pump set shall not be exposed to the atmosphere and shall be
always submerged. The required wet well volume shall be provided preferably between
the invert of the sewer and the top of the submersible pump set. This is achieved in
this drawing. The wet well volume for large stations can also be compensated by the
volume in sewers obtained at 0 .8 of diameter and backwater curve.
Figure 4.5 Typical arrangements of a submersible pump set wet well
4 - 12
4.7 PUMP BASICS
Even though submersible pumps have become a generic name, the fact remains that the
basics of pumps as applicable to centrifugal pumps apply to these also and accordingly, these
are discussed herein.
4.7.1 Centrifugal Pumps
These are by far the most widely used in the country in the past in sewage pumping and are
generally classified as radial flow, mixed flow and axial flow pumps based on the specific speed of
the pump (ns), which is obtained from the following formula:
(4.2)
where,
n : Speed of the pump in rpm
Q : Flow rate in m /s
H : Head of the pump in m
The specific speed of the pump is akin to a shape number and forms the basis for the
design of the impeller of a centrifugal pump. The shape of the impeller is identifiable by the relative
proportions of the inlet size, outlet width and the outside diameter. Broader inlet size and outlet
width are logical for larger flows. For higher head-to-speed ratio the impeller would be logically
narrower than broader. Therefore, the specific speed is larger and the shape is broader. This is
proportional to the flow-rate and inversely proportional to the head-to-speed ratio.
In a narrow and tall impeller, the flow through the impeller will be radial, i.e., across a plane
perpendicular to the axis of rotation. Hence, these are called as radial flow pumps and are pumps of
low specific speed, generally between 40 and 150.
In a broad and short impeller, the flow through the impeller will be partly radial and partly axial. Hence,
these are called as mixed flow pumps and are pumps of specific speeds in the range from 150 to 350.
If the impellers in the pumps has specific speeds higher than 350, the flow is more or less parallel to
the axis of rotation and hence these pumps are called as the axial flow pumps. In a double-suction
pump, the impeller is actually a composite impeller, with two identical flow-passages combined back
to back. Each side is practically an independent impeller and each such impeller handles only half
the flow. So, the specific speed for such pumps is calculated by taking only half the flow. By this, the
specific speed of a double-suction pump is only 70% of what the specific speed would have been
with a single-suction design.
Generally, pumps of low specific speed can work with more suction-lift than the pumps of higher
specific speed. With the pumps of very high specific speed as that of the axial flow pumps, not only
that they would not work with any suction-lift, instead they would need positive suction head or
minimum submergence for trouble free working.
4 - 13
It is always advisable to avoid suction-lift for any centrifugal pump. In the SPS, the pumps are
installed either to work submerged in the wet well itself like vertical pumps with motor above GL
and the pump in the wet well connected by a rotary shaft or installed in the dry well at such a level
that the impeller will be below the level of the liquid in the wet well.
The power-characteristics of the centrifugal pumps are also related to the specific speed. The radial
flow pumps with low specific speed have such power-characteristics that the required input power to
the pump increases as the capacity, i.e., the flow-rate of the pump increases.
In radial flow pumps, the power demand is minimum with zero flow, i.e., with the delivery valve
closed. Since the pump should be started with the pump exerting the minimum load on the driver/
motor, the radial-flow pumps should be started with the delivery valve closed.
The power-characteristics of the mixed flow pumps are almost flat or with very little gradient so,
the mixed flow pumps can also be started in the manner similar to that for the radial flow pumps.
However, in the case of axial flow pumps, the power needed to put into the pump is maximum at zero
flow. These pumps should hence be started with the delivery valve fully open.
The impellers of centrifugal pumps have vanes, which are either open or have shrouds. Open
impellers have no shrouds. Semi-open impellers have only a back shroud. Enclosed impellers have
both the front and the back shrouds. Axial flow pumps would have only the open impellers. The mixed
flow pumps, especially of the higher specific speed would be generally semi-open. However, the
impellers of radial and mixed flow pumps can be constructed in all the three types.
The centrifugal pumps are used more commonly for clean and clear liquids. The enclosed
impellers are the most common in construction. The impellers are constructed of the semi-open or
open type depending on the size of the solids and the consistency of solids to be handled. For
handling large-size solids, the impellers are also designed with fewer vanes, which would
however have less efficiency.
In the case of high head pumping, the total head is shared by more than one impeller in the
multi-stage pumps. With very high head, for a single-stage pump the specific speed may
become less than 40 and in turn so low that even the radial flow design would be too narrow. By
making the head to be shared by more than one impeller, the specific speed for each impeller will be
better. On the other hand, high head would be beyond the range of a single-stage, high specific
speed mixed flow or axial flow pump.
Multi-staging would make the head attainable, as is typically seen in vertical turbine pumps. In
multi-stage construction, the flow out of one impeller is carried to the suction of the next impeller, with
some conversion of the kinetic energy into pressure-energy, in a bowl or a diffuser.
In single-stage pumps, the energy conversion is achieved in a volute casing around the impeller.
For ease of access to the internals the volute casing is often made of the axially split type. This
facilitates accessing all the rotating parts for cleaning or repairs, without disturbing the fixation of the
pump with the adjoining suction and delivery piping.
4 - 14
4.7.2 Computation of the Total Head of Pumping
The total head of pumping has to be calculated taking note of four factors.
Firstly, the differences between the static levels of the liquid in the suction sump, i.e., the wet well and
the highest point on the discharge side makes the potential or static head.
Secondly, the rate of flow and the size of the discharge-mouth determine the velocity at
the point of discharge and in turn the kinetic or the velocity head.
Thirdly, the difference in the pressures on the liquid in the suction sump and at the point of delivery
makes the pressure head. On the suction side, the liquid in the wet well is open to the atmosphere,
but on the delivery side when delivering into a closed conduit sewer, there would be a potential head
at the point of delivery, against which the pump will have to deliver. Therefore, the delivery pressure
will be higher than atmospheric. The pressure-differential will make the pressure head.
Lastly, the pump has to generate as much head as is needed to compensate for the frictional
losses across the pipes, valves, bends and all such appurtenances both on the suction and delivery
sides. This makes the frictional head.
With the pumps running, if the discharge of the pumps is more than the inflow, then the
level of the liquid in the wet well would keep falling. By this, the potential head component in the
total head would keep increasing. Converse will be the case when the inflow is more than the
discharge by the pumps.
Throttling of the delivery valve causes a change in the rate of flow and in turn a change in the
velocity head which varies in square proportion of the velocity, because the velocity head is
computed as V 2 /2g.
The frictional losses also vary in square proportion of the velocity or flow-rate. The formula for
calculating the friction loss will be the Hazen Williams formula as in section 3.16.2 of this manual.
There will be losses in fittings of the pipe line which can be calculated as a function of
the velocity head and as in Table 4-2 overleaf.
A typical calculation of the total friction factor for fittings is shown in Appendix A.4.1.
4.7.3 System Head
At the stage of planning, the method of computing the total head of pumping should be to estimate
it over a range of flow-rates, for different variations in the static levels and for different options of
piping sizes and layouts. This obtains the system head curve, as illustrated in Figure 4-6 overleaf.
With an increase only in the potential head, the new system head curve will be a curve shifted
parallel upwards, as shown in Figure 4.7 overleaf.
For a smaller size of piping, the parabolic portion in the system head curve will be steeper,
as shown in Figure 4.8.
4 - 15
Table 4.2 Friction factor for fittings in pumping mains
No. Type of Fittings Factor

1 Sudden contraction 0.5
2 Entrance shape well rounded 0.5
3 Elbow 90 degrees 1.0

6 Tee 90 degrees 1.5
7 Tee in straight pipe 0.3
8 Gate valve open 0.4
9 Valve with reducer and increaser 0.5
10 Globe valve 10.0
11 Angle 5.0
12 Swing check 2.5
13 Venturi meter 0.3
14 Orifice 1.0
4 2 4 4 2
Source:CPHEEO, 1993
Figure 4.6 System head curve for a pumping system
Source:CPHEEO, 1993
Figure 4.7 System head curves for LWL & HWL in suction sump
4 - 16
Q -
Source:CPHEEO, 1993
Figure 4.8 System head curves with change in pipe sizes
From the system head curves, one knows what the total head would be for an average operating
condition, which then can be specified as the total head of pumping.
4.7.4 Operating Point of a Centrifugal Pump
The Head-Discharge (H vs. Q) characteristics of a centrifugal pump are a drooping parabola, with the
pump discharge being less when the head is more. When the pump is put into a system, it meets the
head as demanded by the system. The system demand is as per the system-head curve. The head
met by the pump is as per its H-Q curve. For example, by throttling the delivery valve to close, the
system head curve would become a steeper parabola and would intersect the H-Q curve of the pump
at a point of higher head and less discharge, thus becoming the new operating point of the pump.
This is illustrated in Figure 4.9.
Q -
Source:CPHEEO, 1993
Figure 4.9 Change in operating point by operation of delivery valve
4 - 17
4.7.5 Parallel Operation
When more than one pump would be discharging into a common closed conduit or header, the
performance characteristics of the pumps suffer mutual influences. Pumps discharging into a
common closed header/conduit are said to be running in parallel. The flow obtained in the header
is what is contributed by all the running pumps together. The combined characteristics of pumps
running in parallel are obtained by reading against different heads; the values of the Q obtainable
from the individual pumps and plotting the addition of the Q-values against respective heads, as
illustrated in Figure 4.10.
4 \
1
1 H = f (0 )
1\ \ \ THREE
1 1\ \ \P U M P S
1
1 1 \ \
1 1 H = f (0 ) \ No. OF F LO W OF
1 ONE PUMP \ PUMPS EACH
IN OPERN PUMP
1 NPSHn = f (Q)
I__ \H = f(o )\
1 Q1
'1 TWO x
L^ PUMPS 2 Q2
n = f (Q)
r 1 1 3 Q3
Q3 Q 2 Q 1 Q

Figure 4.10 Operation of pumps in parallel
The operating point of parallel operation is the point of intersection of the combined H-Q
curve with the system head curve. Because the point of intersection on the combined
characteristics is at a head higher than that at the point of intersection on the H-Q curve of a single
pump, the discharge at the operating point will be the intersection on the H-Q curve of a single pump.
From this, it is clear that two identical pumps put into parallel operation will give discharge less than
double the discharge of only one pump operating. One must study what combination of pumps of
different H-Q characteristics can give such combined characteristics as to have an intersection
on the combined characteristics at the desired double discharge.
As seen from Figure 4-10, if there are two identical pumps running in parallel, individual pump
would be contributing a discharge Qp. If one of the pumps would trip, the system would have only
one pump running and giving a discharge Q1, which is more than Qp. At higher discharge, the
pump would draw more power, which should not overload its motor. While putting the pumps into
parallel operation, it is sound logic to provide that the discharge Qp in parallel operation would be
somewhat to the left of the discharge at the best efficiency-point (b.e.p.) of the pump. This will aid in
the event of tripping of any other pump, the higher discharge such as Q1 of the running pump
will only be nearer to its b.e.p.
4 - 18
4.7.6 Stable Characteristic
It is possible that on the H-Q curve of a centrifugal pump, the shut-off head will not be the
maximum head, as shown in Figure 4.11.
Figure 4.11 Stable and unstable characteristics of centrifugal pumps
Such H-Q curve is called unstable, because at heads higher than the shut-off head, the discharge
of the pumps keeps hunting between two values, causing the pumps performance to be unstable.
Such instability is prone to cause the pump to suffer vibrations. This becomes more hazardous in
parallel operation, because the hunting of flow of the unstable pump causes the other pumps also to
experience continuous change in their share and in turn hunting, instability and vibrations. Pumps to be
put into parallel operation should hence be only of stable H-Q curve or care should be taken that the
system head will definitely be safely less than the shut-off head of the pump with unstable curve.
4.8 CAVITATION IN PUMPS
The flow must reach the eye of the impeller with such absolute pressure-head, that it will be higher
than the vapour-pressure and the net positive suction head required (NPSHr) by the pump. The
absolute pressure-head of the flow, as it reaches the eye of the impeller can be found by
deducting from the pressure on the liquid in the suction sump. It is atmospheric in the case of an
open sump such as the wet well, firstly, the static head between the liquid level in the suction sump
and the centre-line of the pump, if the pumps centre line is above the liquid-level, i.e., if there is a
suction-lift. If the centre-line of the pump is below the liquid level, i.e., if the suction is flooded, the
static head will have to be added and not deducted. Next, the velocity-head, appropriate to the
suction-size will have to be deducted.
In addition, the frictional losses up to the eye of the impeller will also have to be deducted. Even if the
flow has a positive absolute pressure, after all the deductions, while reaching the eye of the impeller,
the flow suffers from shocks, twists, turns and turbulences at the eye of the impeller. This tax on the
energy in the flow is called as the net positive suction head required (NPSHr) of the pump. Therefore,
the positive absolute pressure of the flow, as it reaches the eye of the impeller should be more than
the vapour pressure (Vp) even after providing for NPSH.
4 - 19
This means:
(Pressure head at the eye of the impeller) > (NPSH + V )

r p
i.e., (Pressure head at the eye of the impeller - V ) > (NPSH )
p r
The value in the parenthesis now on the left is termed as the NPSHa, i.e. Net Positive Suction Head
available. NPSH can hence be derived as follows:
a
NPSH = Pressure on liquid in the suction sump Static head between the liquid level in the
suction sump and the centre line of the pump - velocity head - frictional losses up to the
eye of the impeller - vapour pressure
If the NPSH be not greater than NPSH , vapour bubbles get formed, which while travelling along the
a r
flow, being compressible receive energy from the impeller, which builds up the pressure inside them
and the resultant compression reduces their volume culminating in the collapse of the bubbles with
sudden release of the energy. This causes impact and vibrations. This entire phenomenon is called
cavitation and can cause very serious damages. The simple clue to avoid cavitation is to ensure that
NPSH will be more than NPSH . The formula given above for NPSH suggests many possibilities of
a r a
keeping NPSH as high as possible.
a
4.9 PRIME MOVERS
Invariably the prime mover is an electrical driven motor. See section in Chapter 5 for further details.
4.10 SURGING OF PUMP AND WATER HAMMER
This may occur where the delivery is for a high head and there is a sudden shut off when the
sewage in the delivery main surges back on the pump. In medium situations, this is taken care of by the
non-return valves in the delivery main which itself is the surge control device, especially when the
dashpot type is used wherein an air cushion is trapped inside a chamber and the surge force is
absorbed and the flap does not bang against the valve seating. A sudden closure can lead to bursting
of the pipeline and hence the surge analysis has to be made and evaluated for the normal operation
of the pump station as well as for a power outage while the pump(s) are running. The modulus of
elasticity of the pipe material shall be considered when evaluating water hammer effects and cyclic
loadings. At a minimum, the following should be addressed in the surge analysis:
- Transient pressures due to water hammer and its effect on the entire system
- Cyclic loading of the force main
- Investigation of the pipeline profile to determine the possibility of water column separation
- Reverse rotation characteristics of the pumps
- Shut-off characteristics of all proposed pump control valves (if allowed), including check valves.
- Substantiation for the use of surge control valves and other surge protection devices, when
necessary, listing recommended size and computed discharge pressures
4 - 20
The potential impact of water hammer shall be evaluated with special consideration given to
cyclic loadings that are inherent in sewage force mains. All elements of the piping system must be
designed to withstand the maximum water hammer in addition to the static head and cyclic
loading. A minimum safety factor of 1.5 shall be used when determining the adequacy of all piping
system components with regard to withstanding system pressure. A surge control device in lieu of
strengthening piping system components may be used based on the life-cycle cost comparison.
The software for surge analysis is rather complicated and hence it is not promulgated in this manual.
Suffice it to state that when the delivery heads exceed 25% of the horizontal length of the
delivery pipeline, a surge analysis can be carried out by using the commercially available software
or outsourced to institutions of repute.
Water hammer is an internal surge in pressure inside the pumping main when a pump suddenly
stops or when a delivery valve in the pumping main is suddenly closed causing a reversal of the
flow direction instantly and its forward and reverse oscillation. This phenomenon imparts a higher
instantaneous pressure on the pumping main and can cause bursting depending on the
magnitude which is almost entirely a function of the static lift. In general, sewage-pumping mains
seldom encounter static lifts of more than about 2 0 m and this will not be a problem.
Moreover, soft-start starters shall be used to ameliorate the situation as also spring-check or dashpot
type of non-return valves to be used instead of plain swing-check valves. There are also customized
protection systems from appropriate equipment vendors.
4.11 PIPING AND VALVES
The suction and delivery piping of pumping stations are to be chosen between ductile iron and cast
iron, in that order and the inside lining shall be with either high alumina cement mortar or polyurea
and outside coated with epoxy. Joints shall be of O-ring spigot and socket and valve fixtures shall
be through appropriate flanged joints. Next are the RCC pipes with high alumina cement or polyurea
lining on the inside and a sacrificial concrete of 15 mm to 20 mm on both the inside and outside and
in cases where the soil water has sulphates exceeding the limits for concrete, sulphate resistant
cement shall be used in the manufacture itself. The use of MS pipelines is not advocated.
The preferred material of valves is cast iron body with disc of such material as desired by the user
agency and relevant BIS code.
4.12 APPURTENANCES
4.12.1 Air-Release and Air/Vacuum Release Valves
Air release and air/vacuum release valves shall be specifically designed for sewerage
services and be sized as per the manufacturers recommendations. Air release and air / vacuum
release valves shall be required at pumps on the discharge pipe as close as possible to the check
valve. The air and vacuum release valves will be contained in a vault and vented above ground.
A manually controlled isolation valve shall be installed between the force main and the air release
or air / vacuum release valves.
4 - 21
4.12.2 Drain Valves
There should be provision of at least one force main dewatering connection at the pumping station
and dewatering connections at other major force main low points. Drains shall generally include a
plug valve installed on a tee and drain piping to an existing sewer manhole or to a separate manhole
that can then be pumped out.
4.12.3 Additional Appurtenances
Additional appurtenances at sanitary sewer pumping stations and force mains should be provided
on a case-by-case basis.
4.12.4 Dry Well
This shall be designed in accordance with IS: 456 and IS: 3370 and the precautions stipulated in
Subsection 4.6.7 shall apply here also.
4.12.5 Automatic Operation of Pumps and Equipment
Automatic operation of pumps is possible by pre-programmed logic controllers which start the
specified pump set once the sewage level reaches a specified height and progressively brings in
more pumps into operation and the same in reverse order with dropping of sewage levels. The input
to this is the float switch with mercury contact in sealed float, which gets tilted to horizontal and floats
when sewage level reaches the float and thereby closes an electronic circuit inside the float which
generates a standard signal of 4 mA to 20 mA which is relayed to the control panel for activating the
pump. When the sewage level falls, the circuit gets tripped and the signal vanishes and the pump is
tripped. The key to the whole issue is to recognize the pre-set programming which may have to be
validated for different seasons like monsoon, normal and drought. For this purpose, these controllers
are referred to as programmable logic controllers (PLCs). These are custom designed.
4.12.6 Protective Equipment
Refer chapter 5 of this manual.
4.13 AUXILIARY POWER DEVICES
Refer chapter 5 of this manual.
4.14 ALARM SYSTEMS
Alarm is indicated when the pump is running dry and when the motor temperature exceeds the
specified limit. In both cases, the method of instant detection is most crucial. The dry running of
the pump is detected by the no flow reading in the flow meter. The temperature increase in the
motor is detected by the built in temperature sensor which uses the bimetallic properties of dissimilar
metals and a set point transducer. In both cases the signal generation is the standard 4 to 20 mA
which is relayed to first trip the pump set and simultaneously raises a hooter and visual annunciation
by appropriately coloured flashing lamps. Refer chapter 5 of this manual on instrumentation.
4 - 22
4.15 FLOW MEASUREMENT
4.15.1 Magnetic Flow Meters
Magnetic flow meters work on the principle of electromagnetic induction. The induced voltage
generated by an electrical conductor in a magnetic field is directly proportional to the conductors
velocity. Thus, the sewage is the conductor and is suitable for all piping like, raw sewage, settled
sewage, primary sludge, return activated sludge, waste activated sludge and treated sewage. These
are non-invasive and used in almost all pipelines but of course initial calibration is needed. The
output is the standard 4 mA to 20 mA signal which is relayed to the central monitoring system.
4.15.2 Ultrasonic Flow Meters
When ultrasonic impulses are released onto a pipe surface carrying sewage, the impulses are
deflected along the flow direction based on the velocity of the flow before they impinge on the
opposite sidewall of the pipe. The time taken is measured and is correlated to the velocity and then
to the diameter of the pipeline and hence the flow rate is arrived at. Like magnetic flow meters these
are also non-invasive and used in almost all pipelines but of course, initial calibration is needed.
The output is the standard 4 mA to 20 mA signal which is relayed to the central monitoring system.
4.16 CORROSION PREVENTION AND CONTROL IN PUMP SETS
In general, when pipes are flowing full, corrosion does not arise. As such piping in pumping
stations, as long as they are of DI or CI, will not exhibit corrosion inherently because they are of
such a material and because there is no chances of sulphide corrosion on these metal castings.
However, mild steel fixtures will immediately go into corrosion and will be totally avoided. The
fasteners shall be of SS under all circumstances.
4.17 REHABILITATION / RECONSTRUCTION OF PUMPING STATION
These arise in contingent situations such as incoming sewage flow exceeding the capacity of the
pump sets, or the pump sets are old or the civil works are beginning to crumble. When the inflow
exceeds the capacity of existing pump sets, if the increase is marginal, it may be possible to use a
variable frequency drive and increase the speed of the pump set, but this may not be a permanent
measure. Installation of diesel pump sets in the open area and connecting the pumped sewage
to the existing delivery main header is another option, but here again, may be to about the same 1 0 %
extra flow only as otherwise the pressure in the delivery main will increase and burst can occur.
A better option will be to switch over to near uniform pumping instead of using peak hour pump sets
in the morning peaks whereby the no flow time slots and night-time slots can be brought into play
beneficially. In fact, if the pumping is effectively managed in this way, the volume of the entire sewer
system itself will buffer the morning peak flows till about noon time for stretched out pumping.
If the civil works start crumbling, the first thing is to construct another independent electrical control
panel room and shift all electrical gadgets there. The next is to gunite the outer surface of the walls
of the wet well to arrest leakages on both sides.
4 - 23
As for the bottom slab, it is difficult to examine its integrity and if it is only a wet-well with no
submersible pump sets, under pinning technique can be used. If the well has installed submersible
pump sets, a possibility will be to sink another wet-well and shift the pump sets and then attend to
the old well.
4.18 LIFT STATIONS
In locations of high water table and rocky terrain, a typical conventional sewer design and more
so its construction poses a series of challenges when depths of excavation exceeds about 3 m.
Eventually, the depth of wet-well is also negatively influenced by this issue.
In such situations, it is advantageous to opt for intermediate lift stations, which are like "on line . In
general, these are submersible pump stations, which are interposed in the gravity sewer network.
The procedure is to sink a wet-well on the road shoulder or an acquired plot beyond the shoulder
and divert the incoming deeper sewer to it and the submersible pump set therein will lift the sewage
and discharge it to the next on line shallow sewer. As the sewer progresses, any number of such lifts
can be inserted based on the location. These shall be connected to dedicated electricity feeders as
installation and O&M of standby diesel pump sets etc., are not feasible in such locations.
A typical lift station is illustrated in Figure 4.12 overleaf.
4.19 INSTALLATION OF PUMPS
The procedure of installation depends upon whether the pump is to be mounted horizontally or
vertically. Most pumps to be mounted horizontally are supplied by the manufacturers as a
wholesome, fully assembled unit.
However, pumps to be mounted vertically are supplied as sub-assembled. For the installation of
these pumps, the proper sequence of assembly has to be clearly understood from the drawing of the
pump manufacturer.
The installation of a pump should proceed through five stages in the following order:
1. Preparing the foundation and fixing the foundation bolts
2. Fixing the pump on the foundation bolts, however resting on levelling wedges, which permit not
only easy levelling but also space for filling in the grout later on
3. Levelling
4. Grouting
5. Alignment
The foundation should be sufficiently substantial to absorb vibrations and to form a permanent,
rigid support for the base plate.
A typical foundation is illustrated in Figure 4.13.
4 - 24
CHAPTER 4: DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
OF SEWAGE PUMPING STATIONS
M O N O R A IL CHAIN
PULLY BLO C K (2 T 0 N )
W E T WELL
, VENTILATION
200mm Dl K-9
230 tk.
BR IC K WALL
NAME SIZE NOS.
RS 2400 X 3000 01
D 1200 X 2 1 0 0 01
W 1500 X 1200 04
V 1 50 0 X 600 04
EXHAUST FAN 01
CIVIL W ORK IS DESIGNED FOR YEAR 2041
PUMP IS DESIGNED FOR YEAR 2026,
IN FUTURE IT IS BEING REPLACED BY
HIGHER CAPICITY PUMP.
LWL = 254.95
BOTTOM LEVEL= 253
These are normally used for lifting the sewage in the sewers at intervals to save the ultimate depth of cut and laying sewers.
The wet well is finished as a bowl to collect and pump out the grit.
Figure 4.12 Illustrative drawing of lift stations
4-25
BASEPLATE
FINISHED GROUTING r
" TO il. ALLOWANCE ,GROUT
FOR GROUT- LEVELING WEDGES OR SHIMS-LIFT IN PLACE
OF FOUNDATION LEFT
DAM ROUGH CLEAN AND WET
h :PIPE SLEVE DQWN
WASHER - '

Figure 4.13 Typical foundation for a pump
The capacity of the soil or of the supporting structure should be adequate to withstand the entire
load of the foundation and the dynamic load of the machinery. As mentioned in clause 6.2.2 and
6.2.3 of IS: 2974 (Part IV), the total load for the pump set and foundation shall include the following:
a) Constructional loads
b) Three times the total weight of the pump
c) Two times the total weight of the motor
d) Weight of the water in the column pipe
e) Half of the weight of the unsupported pipe, connected to the pump-flanges
If the pumps are mounted on steel structures, the location of the pump should be as nearest as
possible to the main members (i.e., beams or walls). The sections for structural should have
allowance for corrosion also. A curb-ring or a sole-plate with machined top should be used as a
bearing surface for the support flange of a vertical wet-pit pump. The mounting face should be
machined, because the curb-ring or sole-plate is used to align the pump. Figure 4-14 shows
typical arrangement with curb-ring and with sole-plate. Pumps kept in storage for a long time
should be thoroughly cleaned before installation.

Figure 4.14 Foundation for vertical pumps
4 - 26
Submersible pumps with wet type motors should be filled with water and the opening should be
properly plugged after filling the water.
Alignment of the pump sets should be checked, even if they are received aligned by the
manufacturer. The alignment should be proper, both for parallelism (by filler gauge) and for coaxiality
(by straight edge or by dial gauge). During all alignment-checks, both the shafts should be pressed
hard, over to one side, while taking readings. Alignment should be also checked after fastening the
piping and thereafter, periodically during operation.
4.20 PUMPING MAINS AND DESIGN APPROACH
These are designed and constructed in the same way as any other water pumping mains. The
exception being that the design practice of economical size of pumping mains in conjunction with
the electrical energy of the pump sets as used in water pumping mains is not applicable in sewage
pumping mains. This is due to varying rates of discharge through the 24 hours like low, average and
peak flows through the same main at various parts of the day and night.
4.20.1 Design Formula
The Hazen Williams formula as detailed in Section 3.16.2 of Chapter 3 shall be followed.
There will be pressure losses in fittings which shall be accounted for as in Table 4.2 and illustrated in
Appendix A.4.1.
4.20.2 Computation of Pump Kilowatt
This is a function of the static head, friction losses and incidental other losses as illustrated in
Appendix A.4.2.
The usual efficiencies of pump sets for estimating the kW requirement can be taken as in Table 4.3.
Table 4.3 Efficiencies of pumps to be adopted for design purposes
No. Type of Pump Set Efficiency
1 Horizontal foot mounted centrifugal pump sets 0.85
2 Vertical shaft centrifugal pump sets 0 .8
3 Submersible pump sets 0.65
4 Positive displacement pump sets 0.40
In actual practice based on the manufacturers pump curves and duty point, the figures may vary
and here again, the figures will vary from manufacturer to manufacturer and hence, suffice to
state that for design purposes, these figures shall be used.
4 - 27
The kW of a pump shall be calculated as
kW required = QxH/100.5/r| (4.3)
where,
Q : Discharge in litres per second

H : Total head to be got over in m
H : Efficiency of the pump
This is usually called the brake horse power. The actual horse power is to include the efficiency of
the motor. This is about 0.95 for modern new motors and 0.9 for motors nearing their life cycle of
15 years. Thus, the actual kW needed shall be taken for design purposes as
Actual kW = Brake horse power in kW / 0.9
4.20.3 Velocity Considerations in Design of Pumping Mains
The US EPA suggests that pumping mains designed for velocities between 0.6 to 2.4 m/s are
normally based on the most economical pipe diameters and typical available heads. For shorter
pumping mains of less than 600 m and low lift requirements of less than 10 m, the recommended
design force main velocity range is 1.8 to 2.7 m/s. This higher design velocity allows the use of
smaller pipe, reducing construction costs. Higher velocity also increases pipeline friction loss
resulting in increased energy costs.
The maximum velocity at peak conditions is recommended not to exceed 3 m/s. In the case of
water pumping mains, economical size of pumping mains is calculated by trying out various
sizes and finding out the net present value of the capital costs of pipeline and pumping
machinery and capitalized electrical energy costs. In the case of sewage, this is not possible
because of the complexity of varying pumping rates during lean flow, average flow and peak flows
resulting in near impossibility of doing the economical size calculations.
Hence, the rule of thumb is recommended whereby the maximum velocity in peak flow does not
exceed 2.7 m/s and the minimum velocity at low flows is not less than 1 m/s.
A judicious selection of the pipe diameter is implied in dealing with sewage pumping mains.
The reason for recommending the minimum velocity as 1 m/s is based on the fact that sewage in
India invariably brings in considerable grit and even though grit removal is provided in pumping
stations, there can be times when either the equipment is under repair or the grit actually passes
through at peak flows. When the peak flow tapers off it accumulates in the pipeline and reduces the
sectional area and higher velocities are needed if the net pumping flow is the low flow conditions.
A case study of a pumping main evaluated by the WHO/UNDP at Chennai way back in 1979, itself
using Fluorometer studies illustrates the theory as in Appendix A.4.3 and is a rare piece of literature.
Sewage pumping mains of especially RCC can suffer corrosion by hydrogen sulphide gas, which
forms and gets liberated inside these mains due to the velocity conditions.
4 - 28
W henever the velocities are too small, the organic materials get settled out and undergo
anaerobic decay and release the sulphide, which later combines with the moisture and forms
sulphurous and sulphuric acid.
The effect of velocity and relative sedimentation of organics and grit is shown in Appendix A.4.3.
Thus, ensuring of velocities at not less than 0.8 m/s barest minimum and not exceeding 3 m/sec at
any time has to be the criterion.
The example in Appendix A.4.4 explains the interpretations of these through the entire 30 years
period by considering segments of each 10 years.
4.20.4 Injection and Relay Pumping Mains
Often sewage pumping mains themselves get injected one into another. This is designed on the
same principles of design as in Appendix A.4.4 applied to each sequential section starting from the
farthest origin of the pumping and add the respective low, average and peak flows for each
successive section and arrive at the sizes of pipelines along the "spine as shown in Figure 4.15.
R c D
Pumpage Pumpage
Low flow 15 lps Low flow 20 lps
Average flow 20 lps Average flow 30 lps
Peak flow 45 lps Peak flow 65 lps C1
Pumpage
Design Flow conditions, in lps Low flow 30 lps
Reach Average Average flow 50 lps
Low flow Peak flow
flow Peak flow 120 lps
A-B 15 20 45
B-C 35 50 110
C1-C 30 50 120
C-D 65 100 230
Figure 4.15 Illustration of pumping main hydraulics on serial pumping mains
a) The first step is to calculate the friction loss and fittings loss in the "spine pipe line which will be
A-B-C-D with incrementing flows in each segment for a given pipeline diameter by using
Appendix 4.4 for each segment and adding up all these from A to D and establish the preferred
diameter from velocity considerations.
b) The next step is to plot the hydraulic head line, the ground level and invert level line on Y scale
from A to D on a two dimensional scale on Y scale.
c) The next step is to mark the delivery level at D and connect backwards by the losses and verify
the hydraulic grade line is above GL by at least 2 m and if not, raise it by 2 m above GL at the
crown point. The hydraulic elevations at B, C and D are the delivery levels for pumps at A, B
and C1. This is explained in Figure 4.16 overleaf.
4 - 29
CHAPTER 4: DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
OF SEWAGE PUMPING STATIONS
14 m
12 m
10 m
8m
6m
4m
2m
O riginal condition
Hydraulic Head 1 3 -4 = 9 11.5-13 = ( - ) 1 .5 1 1 -6 = 5 8 5 - 7 = 1.5
Hydraulic level 13 11.5 11 8.5
Friction loss in the reach 1.5 0.5 2.5
Delivery level 6.5
Invert of pipe, m 2,7 10.7 3.55 5.55
Earth cover in the reach, m 1 1 1
Dia. of pipe in the reach, m 0.3 0.3 0.45
Ground level, m 4 12 6 7
Location A B C D
A d justed condition
Hydraulic Head 1 6 . 5 - 4 = 12.5 1 5 -1 3 = 2 1 4 . 5 - 6 = 8 ,5 1 2 -7 = 5
Hydraulic level 15 + 1.5 = 16.5 11.5 + 1 .5 + 2 = 1 5m 1 5 - 0 , 5 = 14,5 1 4 .5 - 2 .5 =1 2 .0

Friction loss in the reach 1.5 0.5 2.5
Delivery level 6.5
Invert of pipe, m 2.7 11.7 3.55 5.55
Earth cover in the reach, m 1 1 1
Dia, of pipe in the reach, m 0.3 0.3 0,45
Ground level, m 4 13 6 7
Location A B C D
In the original condition the hydraulic grade line cuts into the ground level at location B by 1.5 m and leading to cavitation in the pipe line.
In the adjusted condition the hydraulic grade line is lifted by the 1.5 m to avoid cavitation and additional 2 m safety is introduced.
F igure 4 .1 6 Illu stra tive h yd ra u lics o f relay pum p in g m a in s in F igure 4.15
4-30
4.21 ANTI VORTEX
A vortex is a phenomenon whereby when a liquid is sucked into a suction end of the pump set, air
is also drawn due to a vortex formation. This can be caused in both vertically downward suction as
well as vertically upward suction. The result is the pumped sewage will be having an air-sewage
mixture and thus, in fact it will aid imparting oxygen to the sewage which is beneficial. However, the
problem is because of the turbulence induced, dissolved gas like sulphide if already present in the
sewage can get stripped and the discharged end may have a perceptible concentration which may be
offensive. Hence, anti-vortex attachments are normally used in the suction end, which breaks up the
formation of the vortex. The simpler version is the attachment of a circular orifice plate of sufficient
annulus width for upward suction pipes as in Figure 4.17.
Figure 4.17 Typical anti vortex plate

There are many other variations and can be sourced from the market.
4 - 31
Part A: Engineering SEWAGE TREATMENT FACILITIES
CHAPTER 5: DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF SEWAGE TREATMENT FACILITIES
5.1 GENERAL
Sewage is 99 % water carrying domestic wastes originating in kitchen, bathing, laundry, urine and
night soil. A portion of these goes into solution. The remaining goes into colloidal or suspended
stages. It also contains salts used in cooking, sweat, bathing, laundry and urine. It also contains
waterborne pathogenic organisms from the night soil of already infected persons. The
concentrations are mentioned in Table 5.1
Table 5.1 Contribution of human wastes in grams per capita per day
Parameters Range
1 Biochemical oxygen demand, BOD 45-54
2 Chemical oxygen demand, COD 1.6-1.9 times BOD
3 Total organic carbon, TOC 0.6-1.0 times BOD
4 Total solids, TS 170-220
5 Suspended solids, SS 70-145
6 Grit (inorganic,0.2 mm and above) 5-15
7 Grease 10-30
8 Alkalinity as calcium carbonate (C a C 0 3) 20-30
9 Chlorides 4-8
10 Total nitrogen N 6-12
11 Organic nitrogen -0 .4 total N
12 Free ammonia -0 .6 total N
13 Nitrate -0.0-0.5 total N
14 Total phosphorus -0.6-4.5
15 Organic phosphorus -0 .3 total P
16 lnorganic(ortho- and poly-phosphates) -0 .7 total P
17 Potassium(as potassium oxide K20 ) 2.0-6.0
Microorganisms in 100 ml of sewage
0CD 0CD
o
1 1
18 Total bacteria 22 Protozoan cysts Up to 103

o
19 Conforms 23 Helminthic eggs Up to 103

CN
sl-
O
20 Faecal streptococci 105-106 24 Virus (plaque forming units)

i
21 Salmonella Typhosa
o
i
Source: Arceivala, 2000

Note:
1. The wastewater from toilets is usually referred to as black water and the rest of the wastewater from all
other activities is referred to as grey water.
2. As already cited in chapter 1, about 12.6 % of population are still not having toilets and practice open
defecation. Their grey water somehow gets into sewers by way of open drains discharging into sewers.
3. Thus, the BOD of raw sewage has to be foreseen realistically because this dictates the cost of the STP
almost pro-rata. continued in next page
5- 1
4. The difference between total solids and suspended solids is the dissolved solids. When calculating its
concentration, the dissolved solids in the freshwater used by the ULB must be added to arrive at the values
in raw sewage.
5. The raw sewage pH generally ranges between 6.8 to 8.0 depending on raw water quality.
6 . The major nitrogen compound in domestic waste is urea CO(NH2)2, which is readily hydrolyzed to
ammonia (NH3) and carbon dioxide (CO2) by the enzyme urease present in sewage. Hence, NH3
constitutes the major fraction of total nitrogen in domestic sewage.
When the treated sewage is discharged into the rivers, the ratio of the respective flows decides the
concentration of these parameters in the blended river water. The quality of surface waters for
specified uses are shown in Table 5.2
Table 5.2 Use based classification of surface waters in India

(All values are in mg/l unless otherwise specified therein)
Class Designated best use Criteria Limits

PH 6.5 to 8.5
Drinking water source
without conventional Dissolved Oxygen (D 0 ) 6 or more
A
treatment but after BOD 2 or less
disinfection
Total Coliform MPN /1 0 0 ml 50 or less
PH 6.5 to 8.5
Outdoor bathing Dissolved Oxygen (D 0 ) 5 or more
B
(organized) BOD 3 or less
Total Coliform MPN / 1000 ml 50 or less
PH 6.5 to 8.5
Drinking water source
with conventional Dissolved Oxygen (D 0 ) 4 or more
C
treatment followed by BOD 3 or less
disinfection
Total Coliform, MPN / 1000 ml 5000 or less
PH 6.5 to 8.5
Propagation of wild life
D Dissolved Oxygen (D 0 ) 4 or more
and fisheries
Free Ammonia 1.2 mg/l or less
PH 6.0 to 8.5
Irrigation, industrial Electrical Conductivity, micro
< 2250
E cooling, and controlled mhos/cm
waste disposal Sodium Absorption Ratio (SAR) < 26
Boron < 2 mg/l
Source: The Environment (Protection) Rules, 1986 in http://cpcb.nic.in/GeneralStandards.pdf
The objective of sewage treatment is to reduce the polluting substances to (a) the standards laid
down by the Ministry of Environment and Forests (MoEF) of the Government of India (GOI) and
these cannot be relaxed by the State Pollution Control Boards (PCB), but they can prescribe more
stringent standards specific to the discharge environment and (b) the specified limits of faecal
coliforms laid down by the National River Conservation Directorate (NRCD). These standards are
compiled and presented in Table 5.3.
5-2
Table 5.3 General standards for Discharge of Environmental Pollutants, Part A: Effluents as per
Schedule VI of the Environmental (Protection) Rules 1986 and National River Conservation
Directorate Guidelines for Faecal Coliforms, (Values in mg/l unless stated)
Standards
Inland Public Land Marine
No C haracteristics
Surface Sewers, for Coastal
W ater (A) Irrigation Areas
1 C olour and odour (B) (B) (B)
2 SS 100 600 200 (C), (D)
3 Particle size of SS (E) - - (F), (G)
4 pH value 5.5 to 9.0
5 Tem perature (H) - - (H)
6 Oil and grease 10 20 10 10
7 Total residual chlorine 1.0 - - 1.0
8 A m m oniacal nitrogen (as N) 50 50 - 50
9 Total Kjeldahl Nitrogen, (TK N ) (as N) 100 - - 100
10 Free am m onia (as NH3) 5.0 - - 5.0
11 B iochem ical O xygen Dem and 30 350 100 100
12 C hem ical O xygen Dem and 250 - - 250
13 A rse nic (as A s) 0.2
14 M ercury (as Hg) 0.01 0.01 - 0.01
15 Lead (as Pb) 0.1 1.0 - 2.0
16 C adm ium (as Cd) 2.0 1.0 - 2.0
17 H exavalent C hrom ium (as C r 6+) 0.1 2.0 - 1.0
18 Total C hrom ium (as Cr) 2.0 2.0 - 2.0
19 C opper (as Cu) 3.0 3.0 - 3.0
20 Z in c (as Zn) 5.0 15.0 - 15.0
21 S elenium (as Se) 0.05 0.05 - 0.05
22 Nickel (as Ni) 3.0 3.0 - 5.0
23 C yanide (as CN) 0.2 2.0 0.2 0.2
24 Fluoride (as F) 2.0 15.0 - 15.0
25 Dissolved phosphates (as P) 5.0 - - -
26 S ulphide (as S) 2.0 - - 5.0
27 P henolic com pounds (as C6H5O H) 1.0 5.0 - 5.0
R adioactive m aterials
28 A lpha em itters, m icro curie/L 10"7 10'7 108 10'7
Beta em itters, m icro curie/L 10'6 10'6 10'7 10'6
29 B io-assay test (I)
30 M anganese (as Mn), 2.0 2.0 - 2.0
31 Iron (as Fe), 3.0 3.0 - 3.0
32 V anadium (as V), 0.2 0.2 - 0.2
33 N itrate Nitrogen (as N), 10.0 - - 20.0
onto and into w ater
34. Faecal C oliform , M P N /100 ml fo r discharge (J) (K) (J) (K)
1,000 10,000 1,000 10,000
Explanations of notations are given in next page
5-3
A. These standards shall be applicable only if such sewer leads to a secondary treatment including
biological treatment system; otherwise the discharge into sewers shall be treated as discharge
into inland surface waters.
B. All efforts should be made to remove colour & unpleasant odour as far as practicable.
C. For process wastewater 100 mg/l
D. For cooling water effluent 10% above total suspended matter of influent.
E. Shall pass 850 micron IS Sieve
F. Floatable solids max. 3 mm
G. Settleable solids max. 850 microns
H. Shall not exceed 5C above the receiving water temperature
I. 90 % survival of fish after 96 hours in 100 % effluent
J. Desirable
K. Maximum permissible
Source: The Environment (Protection) Rules, 1986 in http://cpcb.nic.in/GeneralStandards.pdf
In respect of standards specific for treated sewage discharge into surface waters, the values of BOD
not exceeding 20 mg/L and SS not exceeding 30 mg/L have been of historical origin. However, this
manual recommends the guidelines for treated sewage if discharged into such surface waters used
as a source of drinking water as (1) BOD not exceeding 10 mg/L, (2) SS not exceeding 10 mg/L,
(3) Total Nitrogen as N not exceeding 10 mg/L, (4) Dissolved Phosphorous as P not exceeding
2 mg/L and (5) Faecal coliforms not exceeding 230 MPN / 100 ml. More details of these can be seen
in Table 5-20.
5.1.1 Recommended Exclusive Discharge Guidelines
The recommended guidelines for treated sewage discharge into surface water which after some
travel may be used as a source of drinking are mentioned in Table 5-20.
5.1.2 Process of Biological Sewage Treatment
Biological sewage treatment is a process where biological organisms are cultured and allowed
to consume the organic matter and multiply their population. This is by a process where the
organisms secrete enzymes through their cell walls; and these enzymes solubilize the organic matter
and the solution is drawn back into the organisms again through their cell wall. This is the food. The
organisms grow and multiply by a process called binary fission whereby each organism splits into
two complete new organisms. This is called metabolism. The multiplied organisms are settled out
and the clear treated sewage is free from the organic matter. The metabolism can be by (a) aerobic
organisms needing oxygen like human beings or (b) anaerobic organisms that do not need oxygen.
The pathways are shown in Figure 5.1 and Figure 5.2 overleaf.
5-4
Source: Dr. Akepati S. Reddy, Thapar Centre for Industrial Research & Development, Punjab
Figure 5.1 Aerobic metabolism
What happens to organic m atter in Anaerobic Biological Process?

Suspended
organic matter
O U , H2O, H2 S, Nhb,
Energy, etc.
Hydrolysis
Non- biodegradable
' y
Soluble organic
matter
x Residual biomass
A '
Non- biodegradable \ , Digestion
Residual New anaerobic
-J, Microbial biomass CH*, H2O, NHs,
biodegradable
organic matter
Carbonaceous BOD is the sum of

oxygen otherwise needed during biooxidation of organic matter
ammonia - ammonia ammonia
C m . Methane gas is flammable and has calorific value, but cannot be bottled.
H2S is hydrogen sulphide gas produced from sulphate o f water and has smell of rotten
egg. Also, H 2S can form sulphurous / sulphuric acid, which is corrosive in nature.
Source: Dr. Akepati S. Reddy, Thapar Centre for Industrial Research & Development, Punjab
Figure 5.2 Anaerobic metabolism
5-5
The settled and separated organisms are again put through aerobic or anaerobic processes
where their own protoplasm is the reserve food and is referred to as aerobic digestion or anaerobic
digestion. The anaerobic digestion is preferred as it yields valuable methane gas, as a source of
thermal energy to generate electricity. The digested remains are referred to as digested sludge and
can be disposed off as soil filler.
There is also another process of treatment known as facultative where both the aerobic and
anaerobic processes occur simultaneously. This is confined to stabilization ponds where the
upper portion is aerobic and the settled sludge undergoes anaerobic process at the pond bottom
as in Figure 5.3.
Figure 5.3 Facultative Metabolism
The digested organisms are removed once in many years when it reaches about 30 % of the liquid
height of the pond and are disposed of as soil filler in the dry summer months.
There are also shallow ponds which are fully aerobic and deep ponds which are fully anaerobic.
5.1.3 Design Sewage Flow
Once the DPR is approved, it takes about three to four years to complete the construction. This
completed year is referred to as the base year. Hence, the design population and design volume of
sewage shall be taken as the values in the base year.
5.1.4 Raw Sewage Characteristics
5.1.4.1 Determination of Influent Raw Sewage Quality
The value of BOD may vary from place to place due to various prevailing socio-economic conditions,
etc. The values may be ascertained for the specific situation with suitable documented justification
with laboratory analysis data based on the following procedure.
5-6
The raw sewage characteristics are a function of level of water supply and per capita pollution load.
Thus, the level of water supply plays a major role in deciding the concentration of pollutants. Other
significant factors are settlement and decomposition in sewers under warm weather conditions,
partially decomposed sewage from septic tanks, lifestyle of the population, etc. The best way to
ascertain the sewage characteristics is to conduct the composite sampling once a week for diurnal
variation on hourly basis from the nearby existing sewage outfall or drain.
Considering a four-week month, three samples are to be taken on weekdays, whereas the fourth
sample is to be taken on an off day i.e. Sunday.
Sampling for water quality should be conducted for at least one month during dry weather to assess
pollution load quantitatively and qualitatively.
The samples should be analyzed for the following parameters;
pH, Temperature, Colour, Odour, Alkalinity, TSS, Volatile SS, BOD (Total & Filtered), COD (Total
and Filtered), Nitrogen (NH3, TKN, NO3), Phosphorus (Ortho-P & T-P), Total Coliforms and Faecal
Coliforms, TDS, Chloride, Sulphates, Heavy Metals (if there is a chance of industrial contamination)
The results arising from these analyses shall be adopted with the approval of the competent
authority. In the absence of drain or outfall, the Table 5.4 can be referred for new developments
for 135 L/cap /day rate of water supply. Depending on the rate of water supply the concentrations
can be forecast. Based on the raw sewage quality monitoring experiences, the following typical
concentrations can be taken for design purpose for 135 L/Cap /day water supply.
Table 5.4 Concentration of various parameters in the absence of drain or outfall
Per capita water Sewage Concen

Item contribution supply Generation tration
(g / c /d ) ( L /c /d ) 80 % of (3) (mg/L)
(1 ) (2) (3) (4) (5)
BOD 27.0 135 108 250.0
COD 45.9 135 108 425.0
TSS 40.5 135 108 375.0
VSS 28.4 135 108 262.5
Total Nitrogen 5.4 135 108 50.0
Organic Nitrogen 1.4 135 108 12.5
Ammonia Nitrogen 3.5 135 108 32.5
Nitrate Nitrogen 0.5 135 108 5.0
Total Phosphorus 0.8 135 108 7.1
Ortho Phosphorous 0.5 135 108 5.0
Illustration BOD = 27 *1000 (mg) / 135 X 0.8 (litres) = 250 mg/L
5-7
The Table 5.1 in the manual is retained as a historical value and the Table 5-4 will be followed for the
design of biological STPs.
The main reasons for condensing the parameters in the Table 5-4 are
(a) there is a need for listing briefly the parameters of direct relevance to biological treatment
processes for BOD removal.
(b) the parameters like total organic carbon, grit, grease, alkalinity chlorides, nitrite, nitrate, potassium
are not influencing the biological treatment processes for BOD removal and
(c) the fact that the reduction or elimination of the organisms like coliforms, streptococci,
salmonella, protozoa, helminths and virus in these biological treatment processes are incidental and
are not specifically designed for.
In general, the required ratio of BOD:N:P is as follows

For aerobic process, BOD:N:P is 100:5:1
For anaerobic process, BOD:N:P is 300:5:1
If the N and P is less, these are artificially added by making a solution of appropriate fertilizers and
adding to the raw sewage.
5.2 UNIT OPERATIONS IN BIOLOGICAL TREATMENT
The treatment processes are already explained in Section 5.1. The physical activities used to
implement the processes are called unit operations. For example, the physical processes of
screening, grit (sand) and suspended solids being settled out are together referred to as primary
treatment. The metabolic process is called secondary treatment. Unit operation means the physical
activity. For example, simple settling of raw sewage is carried out in primary clarifiers. Pumping air
into the sewage for supplying oxygen to the aerobic metabolism is called aeration. Settling of the
microorganisms after aeration is carried out in secondary clarifiers. The concentration of settled out
organics and microorganisms from primary settling or secondary settling or both together is carried
out in sludge thickeners. The anaerobic metabolism of thickened sludge is carried out in sludge
digesters. The general sequence is shown in Figure 5.4 and Figure 5.5 overleaf.
5.3 SECONDARY BIOLOGICAL TREATMENT PROCESS
5.3.1 Aerobic Treatment Process
The following treatment processes as also cited in the advisory issued by the Ministry of Urban
Development in March-2012 titled "Recent Trends in Technologies in Sewage Treatment fall under
the classification of aerobic treatment
Activated Sludge Process (ASP)

Sequencing Batch Reactor (SBR)
Moving Bed Bio Reactor (MBBR) / Fluidized Aerobic Bioreactor (FAB)
Membrane Bio Reactor (MBR)
5-8

Figure 5.4. Unit operations in aerobic mechanized biochemical sewage treatment process
(Secondary Treatment can also be extended aeration and without digester)
ANAEROBIC
GRIT REDUCTION
SCREENING REMOVAL & SYNTHESIS SETTLING
I----------------- 1
RAW GRIT I TREATED POST
SCREEN h
WASTE CHAMBER W ASTE TREATMENT
WATER L. W ATER
1. ANAEROBIC FILTER
2. ANAEROBIC RBC
3. FLUID BED SMAR
4. UASBR
Figure 5.5 Process flow sheet of conventional anaerobic sewage treatment
BIOFOR - Biological Filtration and Oxygenated Reactor (BIOFOR)

High Rate Activated Sludge BIOFOR-F Technology
Submerged Aeration Fixed Film (SAFF) Technology
Fixed Bed Biofilm Activated Sludge Process (FBAS)
Fixed media like Rotating Biological Contactor (RBC)
Oxidation ditch (O D)
5-9
5.3.1.1 Activated Sludge Process
There are two variations of this process namely,
(a) the conventional process for removal of BOD and SS alone and
(b) additionally incorporation of biological nitrification & denitrification for removal of nitrogen in the
same process.
Within the conventional process, there are other variations as in Figure 5.6. In the case of very
small STPs bleeding excess sludge will be a hydraulic challenge and hence mixed liquor
can be wasted intermittently.
The conventional system represents the early development of the ASP which is more than 100 years
old. (See Box No. 5.1 page 5-219, about Edward Ardern & William T. Lockett, the inventors)
Over the years, several modifications to the conventional system have been developed to meet
specific treatment objectives. In step aeration, settled sewage is introduced at several points along
the tank length which produces a uniform oxygen demand throughout.
In tapered aeration, air supply is tapered to match the needs from the deeding point of sewage to
its exit from the aeration tank.
Contact stabilization provides for reaeration of return activated sludge from the final clarifier, which
allows a smaller aeration or contact tank.
While conventional system maintains a plug flow hydraulic regime, completely mixed process
aims at instantaneous mixing of the influent waste and return sludge with the-entire contents
of the aeration tank.
The extended aeration process employs low organic loading, long aeration time, high mixed liquor
suspended solids (MLSS) concentration and low F/M. Because of long detention in the aeration
tank / oxidation ditch, the MLSS undergo considerable endogenous respiration and get well
stabilized and in these cases, the excess sludge does not require separate digestion and it can be
directly dried on sand beds or dewatered in equipments. In addition, the excess sludge production is
minimum in this case. The conventional system, the complete mix and the extended aeration have
found wider acceptance.
5.3.1.2 Fixed Media System
The primary sedimentation is a pre-requirement in these applications. These are the older trickling
filters with stone media and now use synthetic media such as inclined corrugated media placed in
cube sized packs and the inclinations changed to opposite directions in successive layers.
The applied sewage is distributed from the top of the media pack by a stationary or hydraulically
driven reverse je t arms on opposite radii or rotated by a mechanical drive. This arrangement is
needed to apply the sewage on the entire plan area uniformly. This sets up a hydraulic draft and
allows the lighter gases of metabolism to escape upwards and fresh air to rush in at the bottom
through open ports on the side walls at the floor.
5 - 10
E X C E S S SLUDG E
INFLU ENT AER ATIO N E FFLUEN T

TANK
SETTLIN G T A N K /
<vJ *
RETU R N SLUDG E E X C E S S SLUDG E
FIG.(a): CONVENTIONAL ACTIVATED SLUDGE
INFLU ENT
FIG.(b): STEP AERATION
E X C E S S SLUDG E
FIG.(c): CONTACT STABILIZATION
INFLU ENT SETTLIN G TANK
FIG.(d): COMPLETE MIX PLANT
FIG.(e): OXIDATION DITCH

Figure 5.6 Schematic diagrams of activated sludge treatment with different modifications
5 - 11
The organisms grow as a film on the fixed media and bring about the metabolism as the sewage
passes over them as a film. In due course of time, the thickness of the film increases. This results
in the film shearing away from the media which is called sloughing. This is carried away to
secondary settling tanks. Recirculation of the settled sewage is sometimes practiced to the inlet
of the reactor. This helps to return the enzymes released by the microbes back to the reactor for
solubilizing the sewage organic matter. The media should be only made of virgin material like HDPE,
PVC. The fixed film media system is in Figure 5.7.
Figure 5.7 Fixed film synthetic media filters
5.3.1.3 Moving Media Systems
These involve the synthetic small sized media, which are fluidized in the reactor by artificial air supply
by compressed air released at the floor of the reactor. This brings about the circulatory movement of
these media into the tank contents. The trade names are Fluidized Aerobic reactor (FAB), Moving Bed
Biological reactor (MBBR) as also Fluidized Anaerobic reactor and their operational principle
is illustrated in Figure 5.8.
The microbial film that develops over the surface of the fluidized media permits the metabolism.
Secondary settling is needed in the case of FAB and MBBR. In the case of FAB, additional further
treatment may also be necessary.
5 - 12
Figure 5.8 Fluidized aerobic bed reactor showing the media in motion
5.3.2 Anaerobic Treatment Systems
The following treatment processes fall under the classification of anaerobic treatment.
a) Up flow Anaerobic Sludge Blanket - UASB

b) Anaerobic filter - AF
c) Anaerobic fluidized bed
These are mainly needed in case where bio-methanation is possible to recover the energy.
Instances are the Up Flow Anaerobic Reactor and sludge digesters and the schematic of these
are shown in Figure 5.9, Figure 5.10, and Figure 5.11. The principle of anaerobic treatment is
already shown in Figure 5.2.
Figure 5.9 Fluidized anaerobic bed reactor showing the media in motion
5 - 13
Figure 5.10 Up flow anaerobic sludge blanket reactor
Figure 5.11 Anaerobic sludge digester mixing with generated biogas
5.3.3 Facultative Treatment Processes
The following treatment processes fall under the classification of facultative treatment.
a) Aerated lagoon - AL
b) Waste stabilization pond - WSP
c) Eco Bio Block - EBB
5.3.4 Performance Efficiency of Conventional Treatment Processes
The performance efficiency of the conventional treatment processes are in Table 5.5.
5 - 14
Table 5.5 General Treatment Efficiencies of Conventional Treatment Processes
Percentage Reduction
Process
Total
SS BOD
Coliform
1 Primary treatment (sedimentation) 45-60 30-45 40-60
2 Secondary treatment
(i) Activated sludge plants 85-90 85-95 90-96
(ii) Stabilisation ponds (single cell) 80-90 90-95 90-95
(iii) Stabilization ponds (two cells) 90-95 95-97 95-98
5.3.5 STP Land Area
In recent times, population densities have increased in ULBs. Even public lands are being
encroached upon and these become difficult to vacate. Thus getting open vast land areas for setting
up STPs is a problem.
Moreover, because of densification, even if open lands are available, the population is very close to
these lands and they object to the STPs nearby. Thus, the STPs have to be planned to occupy lesser
areas than the STPs of olden days.
This has brought in the concept of multi-tier STPs where the primary clarifier can be at the topmost
floor with aeration tank below it and secondary clarifier at the bottom floor. It is also possible to
construct multi-tier STPs like the SBR based STP in Bangkok as in Figure 5.81 (later on in this
chapter) whereby land area can be reduced. Similarly, MBR also results in lower area because of
higher MLSS concentration and reduced volume of aeration tanks permitting vertical arrangement
of tanks one over the other.
An important engineering requirement in such cases is the need to ensure headroom of 4.5 m in
between the top of sidewall of the bottom tank and the roof of the upper tank. This is because of the
fact that these locations come under industry classification and electrical utilities are involved.
The recurring cost of additional pumping of all the raw sewage over the entire increased height has
to be considered in such cases.
There are also similar STPs in Japan (Figure 5.12 and Figure 5.13) which have been built conserving
space. These types of facilities have a complicated structure compared to the conventional facilities.
Therefore, while making decision on adopting these facilities, the difficulty in O&M of these facilities
has also to be well considered.
5 - 15
Source:JSWA, 2009
Figure 5.12 Example of secondary clarifier built in 3 layers (Hirano STP, Osaka, Japan)
P ipe gallery
Source: JSWA, 2009
Figure 5.13 Example of reaction tank and secondary clarifier in layers (Imafuku, Osaka, Japan)
5.3.5.1 STP Land Area for different technologies
The STP land area required for various treatment technologies are shown in Figure 5.14. It can
be observed that excluding WSP the land area is in the range of 0.2 to 1.0 hectare per MLD for
STP as per the technology adopted keeping in view the size of the town / area.
The minimum foot print will also be an important factor in evaluating the treatment technology. This
is because in the case of Koyambedu 125 MLD STP at Chennai for the CMWSSB, the cost of the
land based on official rates exceeded the cost of the STP itself. This was because the location of
the STP site is in the prime hub of metropolitan transport, metro rail, wholesale vegetable market,
long distance bus station, etc. This however may not be the case everywhere. Hence, the decision
on relative costing of savings in land area is best left to the concerned ULBs depending on the
nature of the site and its potential uses.
5 - 16
Source: NRCD, MoEF, 2009

Figure 5.14 STP Land Area required for various treatment technologies
Considering the foregoing, the energy cost, operating cost and capital cost will be the
determining factors in DPRs while looking into the technologies. The land cost is to be kept out at
the DPR stage.
5.3.6 Arrangement of Treatment Units in STP
The preferred arrangement will have the following guidelines
The civil construction of units can be integrated by common walls especially sewage holding
structures
This can be either rectangular or square tanks touching each other or circular tanks inscribed
concentrically.
This will economize on costs of piping because sewage can be conveyed by channels through
all such units.
Stop gates operated by hand wheels on a rack and pinion method can replace costly buried
valves and avoid the difficulty of O&M of such buried valves.
An illustration of one such construction is the biological STP at the Indira Gandhi International
Airport terminal T3 as illustrated in Figure 5.15.
5 - 17
Tanks Tank Tanks
Return Sludge Raw Sewage
Source: Indira Gandhi International Aiport, Delhi
Figure 5.15 An illustration of a nitrification-denitrification bioreactor in India
5 - 18
The anoxic tank, aeration tank and clarifier are all arranged in a single civil structure for the
17.5 MLD STP designed with two parallel modules. Photographic views in construction and in
O&M are shown in Figure 5.16
Source:Indira Gandhi International Airport, Delhi
Figure 5.16 Left is the bioreactor during construction; Right is the bioreactor after commissioning
showing the rich MLSS culture in the annular plug flow reactor
5.3.7 Control of Hydrogen Sulphide Odour
W hichever be the sewage treatment process that is used, care should be taken to avoid unnecessary
stagnation of raw sewage or sludge. At the same time, there are the following locations from which
the odour of Hydrogen Sulphide can arise.
a) Sewers that are choked and not flowing,

b) Sewage pumping station sumps where sewage is not pumped out then and there,
c) Primary clarifiers, sludge thickeners, digesters and sludge drying beds in STPs.
The standardizing of technologies for odour control in such locations is yet to be validated. This is due
to the factual position that until now, the SPS and STP are located fairly away from the habitations.
However, of late with increasing urbanization and densification of land use, the locations of these
are almost coming up in the midst of urban living. Hence, it becomes necessary to institute odour
control measures in sewerage and sewage treatment systems.
In sewers, keeping the sewage elevation below the crown of the gravity sewers will
enable outside air to be drawn and it will rise through the sewers at the rising gradient and thus
avoid build up of the foul odours.
In SPS, covering the raw sewage sump is not advised because the submersible pump sets have to
raised and lowered for maintenance. The suction of the sewage by the pumps enables the inward
flow of the air and this helps in avoiding build up of foul odours.
In the case of STPs, the locations are screen chambers, detritors, equalization tanks, primary
clarifiers, sludge thickeners, sludge digesters and sludge dewatering units.
5 - 19
The prevailing technology options for odour control in STPs are compiled in Appendix A.5-1.
In essence, the options are in providing a cover over such units to contain the odourous gas and air
mixture and then draw it into a gas purification unit and then condition the purified air to be pumped
back into the enclosure.
The illustrations of the hydrogen sulphide stripping units described in Figure 6.14 in Chapter 6 can be
followed. Their design criteria will be as per the respective equipment manufacturers.
For this purpose, the layout of the various unit operations is best arranged in such a way to group
the odour causing units together for a single master enveloping dome instead of multiple domes
over each of the units. At the same time, the contained space must permit access to the mechanical
equipment for repairs, renewals etc. In general, a circular configuration will be relatively
advantageous in economically providing a funicular polygon type of dome using a translucent,
synthetic non corrosive light weight material for the dome. The dome itself can be raised free of
the structure during the repairs and renewals to provide unhindered access and visibility in work.
During the containment position, the free air space above the unit can be minimal so that the volume of
air-gas mixture to be purified will be minimal and will permit higher concentration of the gas which will
help in better efficiency in purification. One such layout at the Thiruvottoyur 31 MLD capacity STP of
CMWSSB now under construction in the peripheral urban location of Chennai is shown in Figure 5.17.
Figure 5.17 Layout of the civil units at the 31 MLD Thiruvottiyur STP of CMWSSB
The circular layout at right incorporates the raw sewage equalization tank (9), primary clarifier (10),
sludge thickener (23) and sludge digester (24). The circular unit at left incorporates the aeration
tank (11), secondary clarifier (12), tertiary filter (13) sumps for sludge, filtrate etc (13a to 13c) and
chlorine contact tank (14). It may be seen that the odour causing units of raw sewage equalization
tank, primary clarifier, sludge thickener and sludge digester are laid out into a single integrated
structure for easy odour control and additional dome- type enclosure facility in later days.
5 - 20
Part A : Engineering SEWAGE TREATMENT FACILITIES
5.3.7.1 Buffer zone around the STP
Adequate measures may be taken for de-odourization in the STP. The units in the STP which need
deodorization system are screen chambers, grit chamber, primary clarifier, sludge thickening and
dewatering units. However, the odor emissions are negligible for sludge treatment facilities of
extended aeration systems due to in-situ aerobic digestion of sludge. W herever the STPs are
provided with de-odourization system, specific buffer zones are not required.
In case of STPs where de-odorization system cannot be provided, an aerial / peripheral distance
of 100 m from the odour-producing units to the habitation is recommended. However, this distance
can be reduced by conducting public consultation.
5.3.8 Required Engineering Data
The mandatory data shall include:
a) Contour map and elevations connected to the nearest Survey of India permanent bench mark.
b) Soil tests till it attains hard stratum and test bores at a grid of 500 m squares
c) Rainfall of nearest observatory for at least 50 years
d) Highest intensity of rainfall
e) Earthquake records of the region
f) Maximum flood level at the site and in the identified receiving water
g) Wind rose.
5.3.9 Design Period
This shall be as in Table 2.1of Chapter 2.
5.3.10 Sewers and Conduits
Generally, urban sewerage schemes involve large volumes of sewage. The sewers conveying it to
the STPs can be pipes or in-situ constructed conduits passing through dense areas. These conduits
shall be preferably non-corrosive materials such as CI or DI pipes.
They can also be RCC pipes with high alumina cement lining and adequate wall thickness to
withstand the traffic loads in public roads. Pre-stressed concrete pipes are not recommended.
This is because if the steel is corroded by Hydrogen sulphide from the sewage, it will lose its
thickness. This will affect the ability of the steel rods to withstand the pre-stressed tension and they
may snap. Then the entire pipe will crack. These cannot be repaired easily at site.
The old brick-arch sewers are good against corrosion, but the challenges are procuring quality bricks,
availability of dedicated skilled masons and difficulties of future repairs if needed.
5 - 21
5.3.11 Installation of Mechanical Equipment
The general arrangement (GA) drawing of each mechanical equipment erected in its civil works
tank is called the GA drawing. These drawings shall show clearly the way the bolts, nuts etc are
securely fixed in the civil works. It is better if the drawing clearly states the sequence of removing the
equipment later on, when needed. It shall be the basis for the erection of the equipment. All steel
parts shall be sand blasted and then painted with the approved primer and first coat before it can be
assembled at site. All bought out equipment parts shall be once again checked at site for
scratches and peelings of paints and rectified before permitting the erection. Levelling of overflow
weir edges shall be done by guiding the finished levels with the help of two levelling instruments
placed perpendicular to each other and focusing on the same reference at a given time. The run of
mechanical equipment first involves the run of electrical prime movers and shall not be run for
unduly long periods. The sludge scrapper in clarifiers shall be completed in their erection along with
screeding of the inclined floor.
5.3.12 Unit Bypasses
Bypass arrangements shall be by gravity either by a direct outfall conduit or through a dedicated
terminal tank before the outfall conduit. In the case of a tank, its volume shall be equal to the buffer
volume needed as calculated by mass diagram (Appendix A.5.2). However, the economics of such
a dedicated terminal tank versus the size of the outfall conduit to handle the peak flow shall also be
considered before arriving at a decision. It should be possible to chlorinate this volume to the same
level as for treated sewage before discharge. If pipes or conduits of RCC are used, they shall be
with protection by High Alumina cement or sulphate resistant cement. They can also be of other pipe
materials or brick masonry conduit. All such pipes or conduits shall be designed for a velocity of not
less than 0.6 m/s and not more than 2.5 m/sec.
The bypass facility is to be provided after each location as the screen chamber, detritor and the
primary clarifier. There shall not be any bypass before the secondary clarifiers of activated sludge
plants because the MLSS will be washed out. The chlorinator should be designed to handle a
dosage of 10 mg/L. The volume of the chlorine contact tank shall be 30 minutes based on the
average flow. The discharge location shall be got approved from the PCB. Its physical
arrangements shall be carried out under intimation to the pollution control authorities and the
authority in charge of the waterways.
5.3.13 Unit Dewatering
Dewatering of treatment units is not a standard requirement in STPs because the sewage flow is for
24 hours 7 days a week. However, if civil work in a tank is needed for maintenance, the dewatering
becomes necessary. All units shall be constructed with a puddle flange pipe of not less than 150 mm
ID in the side-wall just above the formation level and provided with an isolation valve and closed
by a removable blank flange on the airside. A portable diesel based pump set can be connected at
this flange to pump out the contents into the plant bypass chambers. This pumping is necessary
because these chambers in the by pass pipe-line will have their sidewalls at the same elevation as the
sidewalls of treatment units, and hence, gravity dewatering is not possible.
5 - 22
5.3.14 Floatation
Floatation as a method of removing the suspended matters is not usually followed in biological
STPs. Their only application is in removing oil & grease from raw sewage if industrial uncontrolled
sewage enters into the sewage in the collection system. The oil & grease enters the sewers as free
oil and grease. However due to the turbulence of the flow in sewers, pump sets, pumping mains,
etc. It results in water and oil forming an "emulsion . These will not float like oil & grease and they
remain distributed in the entire sewage. Thus they cannot be removed directly by floatation. The
emulsions in sewage are usually oil in water emulsions. These emulsions must be first broken
up by chemical reactions to release the free oil and grease. Then only they can be removed by
floatation. This breaking of the emulsions is done by adding chemicals like alum or polyelectrolytes.
This is referred to as "de-emulsification . Thereafter the sewage can be allowed to stand still to allow
the de-emulsified oil and grease to float. This is removed by skimming and is called scum. If fine air
bubbles are intimately dispersed into the de-emulsified sewage by passing the mixture through
pressurised tubes, the bubbles get more intimately bonded to the oil and grease particles.
Thereafter the mixture is released immediately into a shallow tank. Here the air bubbles and the
de-emulsified oil and grease rise rapidly as scum, and are removed by skimmers. The subnatant of
the tank is the oil & grease removed sewage. These are all patented units and overall design criteria
cannot be prescribed. Usually this is provided after the screens and grit removal.
5.3.15 Construction Materials
5.3.15.1 Concrete
This section gives only the guidelines and not exhaustive specifications. In general, RCC is the
preferred material for civil structures and shall follow IS: 456 and IS: 3370. The cement shall be
of IS: 269 with the latest revision thereof for 33 grade ordinary Portland cement, IS: 12330 for
sulphate resistance cement, IS: 8112 with the latest revision thereof for 43 grade ordinary Portland
cement and IS: 12269 with the latest revision thereof for 53 grade ordinary Portland cement as
the case may be. Sand shall follow IS: 2116. Coarse and fine aggregates (stone and sand) shall
follow IS: 383 and IS: 456. The maximum quantities of deleterious materials in the aggregates, as
determined in accordance with IS: 2386 (Part II) shall not exceed the limits given in Table I of IS: 383
All Reinforcement steel should be either of the following:
(a) Fusion Bonded Epoxy coated having not less than 175 microns thickness and up to
300 microns to reinforcement of all diameters as per IS: 13620 for RTS rods. (b)The binding wire
should be of PVC coated and the exposed portion if any after bar bending work should be
covered with the Epoxy paint supplied by the coating agency. (c) CTD of high strength deformed
CRS steel reinforcement bars conforming to relevant BIS codes (Gr Fe 415, BIS code 1786-1985)
from producers approved by the Ministry of Steel (MoS) of GOI.
Water proofing on the inside surface of all liquid retaining structures (except sludge digester and gas
holding tank, which shall be of sulphate resistant cement and solvent free epoxy painted) shall be
made by thoroughly cleaning of all the dust, grit, grease, oily matter, and other deleterious material.
5 - 23
This will be followed by three coats of sodium silicate solution in a proportion of 1 part of sodium
silicate to 3 part of water applied for one litre of solution, to cover 4 sqm of surface, and each coating
allowed to dry for 24 hours.
5.3.15.2 Structural Steel
W herever a structural steel member like channels, angles, I sections etc used in mechanical
equipment, gets in contact with sewage it requires special precautions. The sludge
scrapers in the floor of clarifiers are held in position by mild steel angles suspended from the walkway
platform of the clarifier. These are partly inside the sewage and partly above it. The wind action of the
sewage causes oscillation of the sewage surface. This results in alternate exposure of steel to
wetting and drying. This condition accelerates the corrosion. In such cases, the steel member shall
be spliced with SS members for 30 cm above and 30 cm below the sewage surface. Epoxy or
special polymer painting of the other portions of steel is needed. Before painting, the bare steel
shall be sand blasted to SA 2.5 Swedish standard SIS 05 5900 with a surface profile not exceeding
65 microns or the equivalent specifications of ASTM. Where sand blasting is not possible, manual
chipping or wire brushing to remove loose rust and scale shall be permitted to ST 2 Swedish standard
SIS 05 5900. Solvent free epoxy coating shall be for 360 microns and curing shall be done for 7 days,
at room temperature if the temperature is less than 15C, the surface shall be warmed up by in
candescent lamps, heaters, blowers or infrared lamp.
5.3.15.3 Steel Pipes
Bar / wire wrapped steel cylinder pipes with cement mortar lining and coating (including specials)
conforming to IS: 15155 shall be permitted for large diameter pipelines that are not laid under
concrete structures but only under roadways and freeways. For pipelines under concrete structures,
preferred material shall be DI, CI or high alumina RCC pipes and with O-ring joints for all these.
5.3.16 Coating and Painting
Already covered under Section 5.3.15.1
5.3.17 Operating the Equipment
All the operations of equipment shall be carried out as per the preventive maintenance manual
of the respective equipment manufacturer and an independent quarterly external third party
inspection and certification.
5.3.18 Erosion Control during Construction
The site shall be first set out with a ditch drain in kutcha earthwork with stone boulders loosely placed
in a trapezoidal section to intercept all overland runoffs from the surrounding areas onto the STP
site. The termination of the ditch drain shall be into a public water course by gravity and if this is not
possible a dyke and temporary diesel driven pump sets shall be readied before the monsoon and
manned 24 hours seven days a week for the full monsoon period.
5 - 24
Where this type of prevention appears too complicated for reasons like land availability etc., a
diaphragm wall shall be first constructed all around the STP site with its sill at least 50 cm above the
MFL of the area at the entry and exit at the STP site. Within the STP site, temporary ditch drains along
the proposed road alignments shall be provided and the storm water pumped out to the nearest water
course. The use of well point system is also recommended.
5.3.19 Grading and Landscaping
The grading of the finished site shall be such that the riding surface of the roads shall be at least
20 cm above the finished ground level on both sides. There shall be a suitable chamber to drain
the storm water to the drains on both sides. In main arterial roads, the free land between the edge
of storm water drains and the nearest structure shall be not less than 3 m to permit the laying and
maintenance of water pipelines, sewers, manholes, power cables, street-lights, instrumentation
cables and interconnecting pipelines between STP units. In advanced countries, the cables and
interconnecting pipelines between units are taken through RCC walk through box culverts
connecting the units below GL. This permits their future maintenance by walking through the box
culverts and without any digging up the formed ground. Such man entry box culverts shall follow all
the safety precautions for confined spaces and especially the indoor air quality by forced ventilation
and adequate lighting and emergency communication facilities. Landscaping shall be confined only
to turfing. Flowering plants if used shall be housed only in dedicated ornamental pots or concrete
troughs. Trees with spread out roots should never be permitted within the STP site and for clear
6 m from any civil structure. This is because, these roots are known to go in search of water and
even pierce through the sidewalls and floor of concrete structures. Thereafter, they will corrode the
reinforcement steel rods and weaken the concrete side walls. A good grading and landscaping is
shown in Figure 5.18, Figure 5.19 and Figure 5.20 at the Vrishabhavathi Valley STP at Bangalore.
The fountain in Figure 5.19 is with the treated sewage.
Source: BWSSB
Figure 5.18 Grading and landscaping at Vrishabhavathi Valley STP, Bangalore
5 - 25
Source:BWSSB
Figure 5.19 Treated Sewage Fountain at Vrishabhavathi Valley STP, Bangalore
Source: BWSSB
Figure 5.20 Grading and landscaping at Vrishabhavathi Valley STP, Bangalore
5.4 PLANT OUTFALLS
The outfall takes the treated sewage from the STP to the disposal location. It can be either a gravity
conduit or pumped conduit. The guidelines of section 5.3.10 apply here also. It shall be designed for
the DWF if equalization basin is provided in the STP. If not, it shall be designed for the peak flow.
5 - 26
It shall be constructed with the invert at minimum of 0.5 m above the MFL of the receiving water
body or other regulations by the local authority. The discharge shall be first let into a receiving well
and then spill over to the river or water body. The designs of the receiving well shall be got approved
by the competent local body before construction.
The receiving well shall be provided with RCC removable cover slabs of heavy duty such that
where required, the full plan view of the well can be ventilated to permit man entry safely when
required. The top of the cover shall be sloping with a finish of coarse aggregate like a stucco finish
to ensure that it is not used for squatting or as a leisure spot.
There shall be two heavy duty manhole covers on the slab at opposite ends and a stub ventilating
pipe with a downward "Tee and 90 degree bends at each end duly covered with synthetic mosquito
mesh secured by nylon ropes with their ends heat sealed.
5.4.1 Discharge -Physical Impact Control
The main objective is to avoid erosion of the banks of the water course or river or reservoir due to the
hydraulic turbulence of the treated sewage falling and running over these earth surfaces. This will be
controlled by the spillway design.
5.4.2 Protection and Maintenance of Outfalls
This shall be done only by the competent local authority in charge of the water course or river or
reservoir. The annual cost shall be paid to them as part of O&M cost of the STP
5.4.3 Sampling Provisions
Sampling provisions are needed for grab sampling in case of manual collection and automatic
instrumentation based on-line testing for automated sampling. The sample collection facility shall be
provided in the firm and level ground portion before the bunds and on the roadside.
This shall be by means of a scour pipe enclosed in a masonry chamber with removable heavy duty
CI manhole framelid. Trying to sample at the exact discharge end is not necessary as it involves risk
of the person falling into the water course or river or reservoir.
5.5 ESSENTIAL FACILITIES
5.5.1 Emergency Power Facilities
The emergency power facilities will be as in Section 5.12 in the electrical section.
5.5.2 Water Supply
The water supply at the STP shall be provided on the same lines as a public water supply system as
in the CPHEEO manual on water supply and treatment.
5 - 27
5.5.3 Sanitary Facilities
Toilets and baths in the STP site are to be judiciously located so that the operator need not have
to walk long distances. As the sewage flows at these locations will be very small and intermittent,
septic tanks shall be provided at each location. The tank shall be emptied by a sewer lorry as part
of the O&M segment of the city sewerage system. It shall discharge it into the raw sewage receiving
structure of the STP.
5.5.4 Flow Measurement
This shall be as per Section 4.15.
5.5.5 Laboratory
This is dealt with in Appendix A.5.3, Appendix A.5.4 and Appendix A.5.5.
5.6 SCREENING, GRIT REMOVAL AND FLOW EQUALIZATION
5.6.1 Screening
Screening is essential for removal of floating materials which are mainly sachets, plastic sheet bits,
leaves, fibres, rags, etc. If these are not removed, they will get into the pumps and entangle in the
impellers. They can also be drawn into suction pipes and choke them and it is difficult to locate their
position in the pipeline. They can cause objectionable shoreline conditions where disposal into sea
is practiced. Screens are used ahead of pumping stations, meters and as a first step in all STPs.
A screen is a device with openings generally of uniform size. The screening element may consist
of parallel bars, rods, gratings or wire mesh or perforated plates and the openings may be of any
shape, although generally they are contrived from circular or rectangular bars. It is recommended that
three sequential stages of screens shall be provided being coarse, followed by medium and followed
by fine screens. A typical design example is shown in Appendix A.5.6.
5.6.1.1 Coarse Screens
They serve more as protective devices in contrast to fine screens, which function as treatment
devices. Coarse screens are usually bar screens and are sometimes used in conjunction with
comminuting devices. A bar screen is composed of vertical or inclined bars spaced at equal intervals
across a channel through which sewage flows. It is usual to provide a bar screen with relatively large
openings of 25 mm. Bar screens are usually raked clean manually or by mechanical devices. These
rakes sweep the entire screen removing the floating substances. Some mechanical cleaners utilize
endless chains or cables to move the rake teeth through the screen openings. Screenings are raked
to a platform with perforations which permits the drainage of water content back to the unit.
Hand cleaned racks are set usually at an angle of 45 to 60 degrees to the horizontal to increase the
effective cleaning surface and facilitate the raking operations. Experience indicates that the area
of the vertical projections of the space between the bars measured across the direction of the
flow should be about twice the area of the feeding sewer.
5 - 28
Mechanically cleaned racks are generally erected almost vertically. Such bar screens have openings
25% in excess of the cross section of the sewage channel. Their area is usually half of that required
for hand raked screens. Additional provision should be available for manual raking to take care of
the situations where the mechanical rakes are temporarily out of order. Plants using mechanically
cleaned screens have controls for (a) manual start and stop (b) automatic start and stop by clock
control (c) high level switch (d) high level alarm (e) starting switch or overload switch actuated by loss
of head and (f) overload alarm. The fabrication of screens should be such that bolts, cross bars, etc.,
will not interfere with raking operations.
5.6.1.2 Medium Screens
Medium bar screens have clear openings of 12 mm. Bars are usually 10 mm thick on the upstream
side and taper slightly to the downstream side. These mechanically raked units are used before
all pumps or treatment units such as the stabilization ponds. The bars used for the screens are
rectangular in cross-section, usually about 10 mm * 50 mm and are placed with the larger dimension
parallel to the flow. A weir on the side of the screen may be used as an overflow bypass.
5.6.1.3 Fine Screens
Fine screens are not normally suitable for raw sewage directly because of the clogging possibilities.
They are mechanically cleaned devices using perforated plates, woven wire cloth or very closely
spaced bars with clear openings of 5 mm or may be of the drum or disc type, mechanically cleaned
and continuously operated.
Fine screens have generally a net submerged open area of not less than 0.05 m 2 for every 1000 m3
of average daily flow of sewage from a separate system, the corresponding figure being 0.075 m2
for combined systems. They are also used for beach protection where sewage without any further
treatment is discharged into sea for disposal by dilution in situations where sewerage systems are
not yet in place.
5.6.1.4 Comminuting Devices
A comminuting device is a mechanically cleaned screen which incorporates a cutting mechanism

that shreds the retained material and enabling it to pass along with the sewage. The solids from the
comminutor however, may lead to the production of more scum in the digester.
They are recommended for smaller sized STPs of up to 1 MLD.
5.6.1.5 Location of Screens
Screening devices are usually located where they are readily accessible because the nature of
materials handled requires frequent inspection and maintenance of the installation. Where screens
are placed in deep pits or channels, it is necessary to provide sufficiently wide approaches from the
top and ample working space for easy access and maintenance.
Provision should be made for the-location of penstocks and bypass arrangements for the screens.
5 - 29
5.6.1.6 Housing of Screens
The need for a structure to house the screening equipment depends on two factors viz., the design of
the equipment and the climatic conditions. If climatic conditions are not severe and could be withstood
by the equipment, the screen housing can be omitted. Mechanically cleaned screens generally need
suitable housing to protect the equipment, prevent accidents to operating personnel and improve the
appearance of the STP. Ventilation of the housing is necessary to prevent accumulation of moisture and
removal of corrosive atmosphere. An illustration is shown in Figure 5.21.
Figure 5.21 Mechanical screen with screen housing and ventilation at Koyambedu STP in
Chennai. Manual screen and bypass channel screen in between the mechanical and manual screens
is also seen
5.6.1.7 Hydraulics
A screen by its very nature and function collects material which will interfere with the flow. If the
screen is cleaned continuously by mechanical arrangement, this interference will be kept to a
minimum. Screens with intermittent cleaning arrangement are likely to produce surges of
relatively high flow soon after cleaning. The usually accepted design is to place the base of the
screen several centimetres below the invert of the approach channel and steepen the grade of
the influent conduit immediately before the screen.
5.6.1.8 Velocity
The velocity of flow ahead of and through a screen varies materially and affects its operation.
The lower the velocity through the screen, the greater is the amount of screenings that would be
removed from sewage. However, the lower the velocity, the greater would be the amount of solids
deposited in the channel. Hence, the design velocity should be such as to permit 100% removal of
material of certain size without undue depositions. Velocities of 0.6 to 1.2 m/s through the open area
for the peak flows have been used satisfactorily. When considerable amounts of storm water are to
be handled, approach velocities of about 0 .8 m/s are desirable to avoid grit deposition at the bottom
of the screen, which might otherwise become inoperative when most needed during storm though
lower value of 0 .6 m/s is used in current practice.
5 - 30
Further, the velocity at low flows in the approach channel should not be less than 0.3 m/s to
avoid deposition of solids. A straight channel before the screen is mandatory. Its length shall be a
minimum of 5 times the width of the screen chamber. A similar channel after the channel is ideal
for good hydraulics. Velocities can be got in the channel before the screen by adjusting the floor
slope of the channel. These will ensure good velocity distribution across the screen and maximum
effectiveness of the device.
5.6.1.9 Head Loss
Head loss varies with the quantity and nature of screenings allowed to accumulate between
cleanings. The head loss created by a clean screen may be calculated by considering the flow and
the effective areas of the screen openings, the latter being the sum of the vertical projections of the
openings. The head loss through clean flat bar screens is calculated by the following formula:
// = 0.0729(Tr2 - v 2)
(5.1)
where,
h: Head loss in m
V : Velocity through the screen in m/s
v : Velocity before the screen in m/s
Usually accepted practice is to provide loss of head of 0.15 m but the maximum loss with clogged
hand cleaned screen should not exceed 0.3 m. For the mechanically cleaned screen, the head loss
is specified by the manufacturers.
Another formula often used to determine the head loss through a bar rack is Kirschmers equation:
h= (3QV/ b f n \ SinO (5 .2 )
where,
h: Head loss, in m
P: Bar shape factor which is assigned value of 2.42 for sharp edged rectangular bar,
1.83 for rectangular bar with semicircle upstream, 1.79 for circular, and 1.67 for
rectangular bar with both u/s and d/s face as semi-circular
W: Maximum width of bar facing the flow, m
b: Minimum clear spacing between bars, m
hv : Velocity head of flow approaching rack, m
Q: Angle of inclination of rack with the horizontal
5 - 31
The head loss through fine screens is given by the formula
h = a/lg)(Q/CA)2 {5 .3 }
where,
h: Head loss, m
Q Discharge, m3/s
C Coefficient of discharge (typical value 0.6)
2
A: Effective submerged open area, m
5.6.1.10 Quantity of Screenings
The quantity of screenings varies with the size of screen used and on the nature of sewage.
Generally it has been found that for every the screenings from sanitary sewage vary from 0.0015 to
0.015 m 3 / million litres with screen sizes having clear opening of 100 mm and 25 mm respectively.
5.6.1.11 Other Screens
5.6.1.11.1 Rotary Drum Screens
Where the incoming sewage to the STP is at a higher elevation than ground level, the use of
horizontal rotary screen is advantageous in that it avoids the need for manual scraping and the
complicated forward and backward mechanical rakes. A typical drawing is shown in Figure 5.22.
Figure 5.22 Typical rotary drum screen
5 - 32
The inlet sewage skims over the rotating screen and the screenings are intercepted and are rotated
forward and to be are scraped onto conveyor belting. The screened sewage will go through the
slots and fall downwards and get collected in a bottom trough and in the process it releases any
sticking screenings to the circular screen in its downward rotation and the screenings float up for
the screening on the upward movement. The screened sewage at the bottom can be collected in a
channel and taken out in any suitable direction for downstream units. Though there are
advantages of a simple operating system, there is the disadvantage of higher head loss compared
to the bar screens due to the drop in sewage elevation for the height of the drum. Design criteria
for these are vendor based and hence, these can be alternative offers in tender calls and then
decided after evaluating the technical aspects. Their design criteria are generally as per the chosen
manufacturers design standards.
5.6.1.11.2 Circular Wedge Wire Screens
These are relatively simpler screens which operate on the principle shown in Figure 5.23
Figure 5.23 Typical circular wedge wire screen
The screen rods are usually wedge shaped which give a narrower slit in the upstream than the
downstream slit of the screen openings and this prevents the clumping and jamming of the
screenings while flowing across the slits. The screenings are continuously propelled by wire brushes
on rotating arms and when they move up above the elevation of the screen rods, the screenings
are ejected over a conveyor belt by the release of a spring loaded mechanism in the tubular arms
holding the wire brush. The loss of head is just about the same as compared to the bar screens and
the mechanism is simple for local servicing. Their design criteria are generally as per the chosen
manufacturers design standards. An installation is shown in Figure 5.24 overleaf.
5.6.1.12 Screen Compactor
The Screen Compactor is a unit which combines the following. The screen is usually a drilled
or wedge wire metal screen section with mesh sizes that can be fabricated to suit and typically can
be in the range of 0.25 mm to 10 mm.
5 - 33
Figure 5.24 UNIDO type circular wedge wire screen seen from upstream at left and from
downstream at right in Ramanathapuram STP of Tamilnadu
Source TWAD Board, Chennai, Ramanathapuram STP
The conveyor is used to transmit the captured solids out of the sewage and dewater by gravity
conveying the separated solids towards the pressing zone where it gets dewatered and
compresses the screenings to reduce the volume. Their design criteria are generally as per the chosen
manufacturers design standards. This is shown in Figure 5.25.
Figure 5.25 Typical screenings compactor
5 - 34
5.6.1.13 Screw Press
These are relatively more modern and are illustrated in Figure 5.26. The progressive compaction in
the inclined conduit simultaneously, helps dewatering the screenings and compacting. Their design
criteria are generally as per the chosen manufacturers design standards.
HEAD BOX
DRIVEN
S PR O C KE T CAK
DISCHARGE
Screw Press Cross Section
Figure 5.26 Typical screw press
5.6.1.14 Disposal of Screenings
The methods of disposal of screenings could be burial or composting. The screenings should not be
left in the open or transported in uncovered conveyors as it would create nuisance due to flies and
insects. If conveyors are used, they should be kept as short as possible for sanitary reasons. Burial
in trenches usually 7.5 cm to 10 cm deep is practiced particularly in small installations.
At large works, where sufficient land for burial is not available within a reasonable distance from the
plant, screenings shall be transported and mixed with town refuse for production of compost or for
further processing and disposal as per guidelines / norms of the local PCB.
5.6.2 Grit Removal
Grit removal is necessary to protect the moving mechanical equipment and pump elements
from abrasion and accompanying abnormal wear and tear. Removal of grit also reduces the
frequency of cleaning of digesters and settling tanks. It is desirable to provide screens or comminuting
device ahead of grit chambers to reduce the effect of rags and other large floating materials on the
mechanical equipment, in case of mechanized grit chamber.
However, where sewers are laid at such depths as to make the location of grit chambers ahead of
pumping units undesirable or uneconomical, only a bar screen is provided ahead of pumps, with grit
chambers and other units following the pumps.
Accordingly, the sewage after removal of grit shall be as far as possible free of grit particles. The grit
removal units should always have 1 0 0 % standby.
5 - 35
5.6.2.1 Composition of Grit
Grit in sewage consists of coarse particles of sand, ash and clinkers, egg shells, bone chips and
many inert materials inorganic in nature. Both quality and quantity of grit varies depending upon (a)
types of street surfaces encountered (b) relative areas served (c) climatic conditions (d) types of
inlets and catch basins (e) amount of storm water diverted from combined sewers at overflow
points (f) sewer grades (g) construction and condition of sewer system (h) ground and ground water
characteristics (i) industrial wastes (j) relative use of dumping chutes or pail depots where night
soil and other solid wastes are admitted to sewers and (k) social habits. The specific gravity of
the grit is usually 2.4 to 2.65. Grit is non-putrescible and possesses a higher hydraulic subsidence
value than organic solids. Hence, it is possible to separate the gritty material from organic solids by
differential sedimentation in a grit chamber.
5.6.2.2 Types
Grit chambers are of three major types as follows:
i) Velocity controlled V shaped long grit channels
ii) Square shaped chambers with entry and exit on opposite sides and mild hopper
iii) Vortex type cone and the centrifugal action plummets the grit to the bottom
They are mechanically cleaned and manually cleaned. The choice depends on several factors
such as the quantity and quality of grit to be handled, head loss requirements, space requirements,
topography and economic considerations with respect to both capital and operating costs. In
very small plants, mechanization may be uneconomical. For STP flows of more than 10 MLD,
mechanized grit removal units are preferred.
5.6.2.3 Vortex Type Units
The sewage is fed tangentially to induce a vortex type of flow, which will funnel the grit towards
the centre, and hence be drawn down at the bottom chamber. An auxiliary agitator at this location
keeps the grit in suspension and hence it is washed free of organics. The rim flow of the vortex is the
degritted sewage to downstream units. The grit at the bottom can be either drained onto a grit filter
bed by gravity or pumped to the beds depending on the levels. The filtrate is returned to the raw
sewage. Though the centrifugal force and agitation are good controlling mechanisms, the additional
head loss incurred in handling the filtrate and pumping if needed are comparatively avoided in the
case of velocity controlled channels or detritors. This unit has its advantages in situations where
sewage flow rates and durations vary widely. The hydraulic energy required for the vortex may
compel the need to impart additional pumped energy to the sewage before degritting. A typical
vortex type unit is shown in Figure 5.27 overleaf.
5.6.2.4 Vortex Type Units with Scum Removal
These are similar in their function to the vortex grit separator and have an additional provision to
remove the scum. This is useful in situations where this problem is encountered in raw sewage.
5 - 36
\ y Grit discharge
Figure 5.27 Hydraulic regimen of vortex grit separator
As otherwise, these are similar in their function and grit separation methods to vortex
grit separator. A typical vortex type unit is shown in Figure 5.28.
Figure 5.28 Hydraulic regimen of vortex and scum grit separator
5 - 37
5.6.2.5 Aerated Grit Chambers
An aerated grit chamber is a special form of grit chamber consisting of a standard spiral-flow
aeration tank provided with air-diffusion tubes placed on one side of the tank, 0 .6 to 1 m from the
bottom. The grit particles tend to settle down to the bottom of the tank at rates dependent upon the
particle size and the bottom velocity of roll of the spiral flow. This is in turn controlled by the rate
of air diffusion through the diffuser tubes and the shape of the tank. The heavier grit particles with
their higher settling velocities drop down to the floor whereas the lighter organic particles are carried
with roll of the spiral motion and eventually out of the tank. The velocity of roll, however, should not
exceed the critical velocity of scour of grit particles. Normally, a transverse velocity of flow, not
exceeding 0.4 m/s to 0.6 m/s at the top of the tank should satisfy this requirement for differential
scour. No separate grit washing mechanism or control device for horizontal velocity is necessary in
aerated grit chambers. A typical drawing is shown in Figure 5.29. The aerated de gritting removals
are reproduced from WEF MOP 11 hereunder.
Transverse velocity at surface 0 .6 - 0 .8 m/s
Depth-to-width ratio 1.5:1 to 2:1

A ir supply 4.6-7.7 l/m/s of length
0.3-0.4 m 3 /m 3
Detention time 3-5 min (peak)
Quantity of grit 7.5-75 ml/m 3
Quantity of scum (skimmings) 7.5-45 ml/m 3
Source: EPA
Figure 5.29 Aerated grit chamber
5 - 38
5.6.2.6 Clearing of the Grit
Manual clearing of the grit is to be avoided except in the case of very small STPs of less than
1 MLD where velocity controlled channels can be cleared by the operator using a shovel and
walking on a platform along the length. Mechanical clearing is advocated and these are provided with
mechanical equipment for not only collection but also washing of grit and can be operated on either a
continuous or an intermittent basis. Scraper blades or ploughs rotated by a motor drive, collect the grit
settled on the floor of the grit chamber. The grit so collected is elevated to the ground level by several
mechanisms such as bucket elevators, jet pump, screws and air lift. The grit washing mechanisms
are also of several designs most of which are agitation devices using either water or air to produce
a washing action. In intermittently (normally once or twice a day) operated type, sufficient storage
capacity to hold the grit between intervals of grit elevation should be provided.
5.6.2.7 Design Data
The basic data essential for a rational approach to the design of grit chambers are hourly variations
of sewage flow and typical values for minimum, average and peak flows. Since the grit chamber is
designed for peak flows and the flow through velocity is maintained constant within the range of flow,
successful design and operation of grit chamber calls for a fairly, accurate estimation of the flows.
The quantity and quality of grit varies from sewage to sewage. Data relating to these two factors is
very useful in proper design of grit collecting, elevating and washing mechanisms. In the absence
of specific data, grit content may be taken as 0.05 to 0.15 m3/million litres for sewage and 0.06 to
0.12 for combined sewage. The quantity may increase three to four fold during peak flow hours,
which may last for 1 to 2 hours.
5.6.2.7.1 Generic Design of Grit Chambers
5.6.2.7.1.1 Settling Velocity
Grit chamber may be designed on a rational basis by considering it as a sedimentation basin. The
grit particles are treated as discrete particles settling with their own settling velocities. The settling
velocity is governed by the size and specific gravity of the grit particles to be separated and the
viscosity of the sewage. The minimum size of the grit to be removed is 0.20 mm although 0.10 to
0.15 mm is preferred for conditions where considerable amount of ash is likely to be carried in the
sewage. The specific gravity of the grit may be as low as 2.4, but for design purposes a value of 2.65
is used. The settling velocity of discrete particles can be determined using the appropriate equation
depending upon the Reynolds number,
1 . Stokes Law
5 - 39
where,
VI : Settling velocity, m/s

2
g Acceleration due to gravity, m/s
3
P Mass density of grit particle, kg/m
P Mass density of liquid, kg/m
d Size of the particle, m
2
V Kinematic viscosity of sewage, m /s
S Specific gravity of grit particle, dimensionless
Stokes law holds good for Reynolds number R below 1.0;
R = V J / \
For grit particles of specific gravity of 2.65 and liquid temperature at 10 degree;
This corresponds to particles of size less than 0.1 mm. The flow conditions are laminar where viscous
forces dominate over inertial forces.
2. Transition Law
The design of grit chamber is based on removal of grit particles with minimum size of 0.2 mm or
0.15 mm and therefore Stokes Law is not applicable to determine the settling velocity of the grit
particles for design purposes.
The settling velocity of a discrete particle is given by the general equation
(5.5)
Where C d is the Newton coefficient of Drag which is a function of Reynolds number. The
transition flow conditions hold when Reynolds number is between 1 and 1,000. In this range,
CD can be approximated by
(5.6)
Substituting the value of C d in equation (5.6) and simplifying
.714
V s = [0 .7 0 7 (S s - U r f V 0'6 ]
(5.7)
The settling velocity of grit particles in the transition zone is also calculated by the Hazens
modified formula
( 5 .8)
5 - 40
Where d in equation (5.8) is in cm and T is the temperature in degree Centigrade and Vs in cm/s.
The settling velocity of grit particles in the range of 0.1 mm and 1mm can be determined using
equation (5.7) and this equation or its approximate empirical form of equation (5.8) should be used in
design of grit chambers which are designed to remove particles of size 0.15 mm or 0.2 mm.
3. Newtons Law
When the particle size increases beyond 1 mm and Reynolds number beyond 1,000, the Newton
coefficient drag CQ assumes a constant value of 0.4 and the following equation can be used to
determine the settling velocity of grit particles.
5.6.2.7.1.2 Surface Overflow Rate
Efficiency of an ideal settling basin is expressed as the ratio of the settling velocity of the particles to
be removed (Vs) to the surface overflow rate (Vo).
(5.10)
Where Vo is defined as the ratio of flow of sewage to be treated in an ideal settling tank to the plan
area of the tank, i.e., Q/A. It is equal to the settling velocity of those particles which will be 100%
removed in an ideal settling tank.
In an ideal settling basin, all particles having settling velocity, Vs > Vo are completely removed.
However, particles having settling velocity, Vs < Vo are removed in proportion to the ratio of Vs to Vo.
Table 5.6 gives settling velocity of different size particles of specific gravity 2.65 (inorganic
grit particles) and corresponding surface overflow rates for 1 0 0 % removal of these particles
based on Equation (5.8).
Though the different settling patterns occur as described here, for purpose of preparing DPRs,
the discreet settling alone shall be considered to simplify the computations and the criteria
is shown in Table 5.6.
Table 5.6 Settling velocities and surface overflow rates for ideal grit chamber at 10C
Settling velocity m/s, Surface Overflow rate m3 / d /m2

Diameter of
Particles, mm
Ss = 2.65 Ss = 2.65
0.20 0.025 2160
0.15 0.018 1555
5 - 41
However, the behaviour of a real grit chamber departs significantly from that of the ideal settling
basin due to turbulence and short-circuiting resulting from eddy, wind and density currents. Hence,
the surface overflow rates (SOR) should be diminished to account for the basin performance.
Following equation could be used to determine the SOR for a real basin for a given efficiency of grit
removal and basin performance.
(5.11)
where,
r] : Desired efficiency of removal of grit particle

: Settling velocity of minimum size of grit particle to be removed
Q/A : Design surface over flow rate applicable for grit chamber to be designed
n: An index which is a measure of the basin performance.
The values of n are 1/8, 1/4, 1/2 and 1 for very good, good, poor and very poor performance.
It can be seen that the design surface overflow rate will be 66.67%, 58.8%, 50% and 33.3% of the
settling velocity of the grit particles to be removed to achieve 75% removal efficiency in grit
chamber with very good, good, poor and very poor tank performance respectively. In practice,
values of two thirds to one half are used in design depending upon the type of the grit chamber.
5.6.2.7.1.3 Detention Period
Once the area is calculated surface overflow rate and the liquid depth is ascertained from the
equipment manufacturer, the resulting volume and hence detention time at average flow shall be
checked up as not to exceed 60 seconds.
5.6.2.7.1.4 Bottom Scour and Flow through Velocity
Bottom scour is an important factor affecting grit chamber efficiency and the scouring process
itself determines the optimum velocity of flow through the unit. This may be explained by the fact
that there is a critical velocity of flow (Vc) beyond which particles of a certain size and density once
settled, may be again placed in motion and reintroduced into the stream of flow. The critical velocity
for scour may be calculated from modified Shields formula:
(5.12)
where Kc = 3 to 4.5. A value of 4.0 is usually adopted for grit particles.
For a grit particle size of 0.2 mm, the formula gives critical velocity values of 17.1 to 25.6 cm/sec.
In actual practice; a horizontal velocity of flow of 15 to 30 cm/sec is used at peak flows. The
horizontal velocity of flow should be maintained constant at other flow rates also to ensure that only
organic solids and not the grit are scoured from the bottom. Bottom scour is an important factor
particularly affecting the grit chamber efficiency. Design example of velocity controlled grit chamber
and detritors are shown in Appendix A.5.7 and A 5.8
5 - 42
5.6.2.7.2 Specific Design of Recent Devices
Their design criteria are generally as per the chosen manufacturers design standards.
5.6.2.7.3 Velocity Control Devices for Grit Channels
In earlier days, velocity controlled grit chambers were used which needed constant velocities at
all depths of flow and for this purpose, devices as proportional weir and Sutro weirs were used
downstream. Numerous devices have been designed in an attempt to maintain a constant
horizontal velocity of flow through grit chambers in the recommended range of 15 to 30 cm/sec.
A variation of 5 to 10% above and below the desired velocity is permitted. Multiple channels with the
total capacity to carry the maximum flow are to be adopted.
A satisfactory method of controlling the velocity of flow through the grit channels is by using a control
section at the end of the channel, This varies the cross sectional area of flow in the section in direct
proportion to the flow.
As for example, for a flow of 5 cum/s the cross-sectional area of flow should be 5 m2 and when flow
decreases to 3 cum/s the cross-sectional area of flow should be reduced to 3 m2 to maintain the
same velocity in the channel. Such control sections include proportional flow weirs, Sutro weirs and
Parshall flumes. In practice, the Parshall flumes are commonly used.
a) Proportional Flow Weir
The proportional flow weir is a combination of a weir and an orifice as shown in Figure 5.30. It
maintains a nearly constant velocity in the grit channels by varying the cross-sectional area of flow
through the weir so that the depth is proportional to flow.
Figure 5.30 Proportional flow weir
5 - 43
The general equation for determining the flow through weir, Q is
(5.13)
where,
c Coefficient which is assumed 0.61 for symmetrical sharp-edge weirs.

a Dimension of weir usually assumed between 25 mm and 50 mm
b Base width of the weir
H Depth of flow
To determine the shape of the curve forming the outer edges of the cut portion, the following equation
of curve forming the edge of the weir may be used.
where,
x : W eir width at liquid surface

Y: Liquid depth
The weir shall be set from 100 mm to 300 mm above the bottom of grit chamber to provide grit
storage or for operation of mechanical grit clearing.
The weir should also be set at such an elevation as to provide a free fall into the outlet channel as it
cannot function under submerged conditions. Each grit chamber should be provided with a separate
control weir. An installation is shown in Figure 5.31.
Figure 5.31 Typical Installation of proportional flow weir.

Photo at left is view from the grit channel side. Photo at right is the outlet from the weir showing the
graduated readings at various depths of flows
Source-Dr Absar Kazmi, Training Course by Department of Civil Engineering, IIT Roorkee
5 - 44
b) Sutro Weir
The Sutro-weir is a half proportional flow weir cut symmetrically and centrally along the vertical axis
as illustrated in Figure 5.32. The orifice has a straight horizontal bottom forming the weir.
Y \y y
_\ / / / X /
Figure 5.32 Sutro weir
Grit removal from these channels is normally carried out by suction pumps mounted on a bridge
travelling the full length in both forward and return directions.
The suction end of these pumps has a hose suspended into the sewage in the channel. They
discharge through a header into a channel built along the side of the grit channel. Most often, the
suction fails and the grit is not removed. Hence, these mechanized grit removal systems and the
velocity controlled long grit channels are proposed to be phased out.
5.6.2.8 Flow Measurement
Flow measurement is invariably to be provided for at the downstream of the grit removal facilities.
The Parshall flume is normally used.
5.6.2.8.1 Parshall Flume
A Parshall flume is an open constricted channel, which can be used both as a measuring
device and also as a velocity control device. It is more commonly used for the latter purpose in
downstream of grit chambers.
The flume has a distinct advantage over the proportional flow weir, as it involves negligible
headloss and can work under submerged conditions up to certain limits as in Figure 5.33 overleaf.
The limits of submergence are 50% in case of 150 mm throat width and 70% for wide throat widths
up to 1 m as in Table 5.7 overleaf.
Another advantage is that one control section can be installed after the exit channel of a number of
parallel grit chambers. to measure the total flows through all the grit channels.
5 - 45
B F G
..-T T tt
iK Â ; ~ _ 7
------------------------- - J
z
LO NG ITUDINAL SECTION
Figure 5.33 Dimensions for Parshall flume
Table 5.7 Dimensions of Parshall flume (mm)
Flow range Q
W A B++ C D+++ F G K Z
max (mld)+
Up to 5 75 460 450 175 255 150 300 25 56
5-30 150 610 600 315 391 300 600 75 113
3 0 -4 5 225 865 850 375 566 300 750 75 113
45-170 300 1350 1322 600 831 600 900 75 225
170-250 450 1425 1397 750 1010 600 900 75 225
250 -350 600 1500 1472 900 1188 600 900 75 225
350- 500 900 1650 1619 1200 1547 600 900 75 225
500-700 1200 1800 1766 1500 1906 600 900 75 225
700-850 1500 2100 2060 2100 2625 600 900 75 225
850-1400 2400 2400 2353 2700 3344 600 900 75 225
+ For average flow and peak factors, see earlier sections

1/3
++ Value should be equal to 1.5 * (Qmax) but not less than those shown in the Table
+++ For higher values of B (than shown in the table), the values of D also to be increased to
keep D/B ratio same as in table
5 - 46
The flume is also self cleansing and there is no problem of clogging. As the Parshall flume is a
rectangular control section, the grit chamber above it must be designed to approach a parabolic cross
section. However, a rectangular section with a trapezoidal bottom may be used with a Parshall flume
in which case the variations in velocity at maximum and minimum flow conditions from the designed
velocity of flow should be within permissible limits as given by the following equations.
and
(5.17)
(5.18)
(5.19)
(5.20)
(5.21)
where,
Q: Rate of flow in lps

Qmin : Minimum rate of flow in lps
Qmax : Maximum rate of flow in lps
W: Throat width in m
HA : Depth of flow in upstream leg of the flume at one third point in m
Z : Constant in m
D : Depth of flow in grit chamber in m
b: Width of grit chamber in m
V: Velocity of flow in m/s at particular depth of flow
5 - 47
Recommended throat widths for different ranges of flow along with the dimensions of the
various dimensions of the flume for the different throat widths are given in Table 5.7 which should
be strictly adhered to. A typical example is shown in Appendix A.5.9. A typical Parshall flume
installation is shown in Figure 5.34
A Parshall flume in use showing the ultrasonic

level measurement equipment mounted over
the flume at the throat.
Source-Dr Absar Kazmi, Training Course by

Department of Civil Engineering, IIT Roorkee
Figure 5.34 Typical Parshall Flume Installation
5.6.2.8.2 Number of Units
In case of manually cleaned grit chambers at least two units should be provided. All mechanically
cleaned units should be provided with a manually cleaned unit as standby.
5.6.2.8.3 Dimensions of Each Unit
The surface areas required for each unit is worked out based on the overflow rate. In case of
mechanized grit chambers, the plan dimension and liquid depth shall be readjusted to suit the
standard sizes of the mechanical equipment. Additional depth for storage of grit between intervals of
cleaning shall be provided depending on the interval of cleaning. A free board of 150 mm to 300 mm
shall be provided. Bottom slopes are based on the type of scraper mechanism used.
5.6.2.8.4 Loss of Head
Loss of head in a grit chamber varies from 0.06 m to 0.6 m depending on the device adopted for
velocity control in velocity controlled grit chambers. In mechanized units, the free fall over the exit
weir shall not be less than 2 0 0 mm at peak flow.
5.6.2.9 Disposal of Grit
Clean grit is characterized by the lack of odours. Washed grit may resemble particles of sand and
gravel, interspersed with particles of egg-shell, and other similar relatively inert materials from the
households. Grit washing mechanism has to be included whenever the detention time is more and
flow through velocity is less. Unless washed, it may contain considerable amount of organic matter.
This becomes an attraction to rodents and insects and is unsightly and odorous. The grit may be
disposed of by dumping or burying or by sanitary landfill. The ultimate method used however
depends upon the quantity and characteristics of the grit, availability of land for dumping, filling, or
burial. In general, unless grit is washed, provision for burial should be made.
5 - 48
5.6.2.10 Choice of Unit
The square detritor offers perhaps the reasonable preferred combination of (a) mechanical
degritting, (b) mechanical grit washing, (c) minimum head loss, (d) grit delivery at a required
elevation to stationed trucks beneath it, (e) slow moving central drive and grit classifiers with
minimum wear and tear and (f) all these without the need for manual labour to handle the grit. The grit
classifier drive system is to be preferred in mild steel appropriately coated as compared to cast iron
cam drives because these cast iron parts will need long intervals to be sent back to the foundry
for repairs. Here again, the classifiers can be either the screw or the to & fro raker.
The screw type will need a factory made stainless steel trough to match the screw profile. It has
the advantage of a flappable semi cylindrical hinged cover and preventing odours and insects
around it and protection in rains. The raker type can be accommodated in ordinary masonry
channel. Their choice is a matter of preference by the user agency.
5.6.3 Flow Equalization
The design criteria given in the manual for the treatment portion are based on the DWF. There is
no need to make changes to these for peak flows. The necessary adjustments are in-built in these
design criteria.
However, when the peak factor exceeds 3 by a wide margin, it is advisable to equalize the sewage
flow before feeding to the STP units. This can be either by inline equalization tank or side stream
flow balancing tank depending on the volume of the raw sewage flow. The illustrations in
Section 3.18 using side stream leaping weirs or floor level leaping weirs can be used to allow the
average flow to go on to the STP and excess flows to spill into a balancing tank from where it can
be supplemented by pumping during lean flow periods. However, the option of providing either the
inline equalization tank or side stream flow balancing tank is decided based on the specific situation
and cost economics. The volume of such equalization tanks are to be based on the mass diagram.
An example for Chennai sewage conditions as measured in summer and monsoon seasons is
illustrated as Appendix A.5.2.
5.7 SETTLING
5.7.1 General
The words settling tanks, sedimentation tanks and clarifiers are used in various manuals and text
books. All these mean the same. A more popularly used name is clarifiers. These are used to
separate the suspended solids, which can settle by gravity when the sewage is held in a tank. If these
suspended solids are discharged into water courses, they will result in sludge banks. If these are
used for land disposal, it will lead to clogging of soil pores and uncontrolled organic loading.
The primary clarifier is located after screens and grit chambers and reduces the organic load on
secondary treatment units. It is used to remove (i) inorganic suspended solids or grit if it is not
removed in grit chamber described earlier, (ii) Organic and residual inorganic solids, free
oil and grease and other floating material and (iii) chemical flocs produced during chemical
coagulation and flocculation.
5 - 49
Secondary clarifier is located after the biological reactor and is used to separate the bio-flocculated
solids or bioflocs of biological reactors. In some cases where two stage bio reactors are used, the
clarifiers after the first stage of bioreactor is referred to as intermediate clarifiers.
Septic tanks, Imhoff tanks and clarigester are combination units where digestion of organic matter
and settling are combined in the same unit and is meant for small installations.
Settling also occurs in waste stabilization ponds and facultative aerated lagoons. However, the
settled organic matter is stabilized in the pond itself and no separate unit is provided.
5.7.2 Characteristics of Settleable Solids
The settleable solids to be removed in primary or secondary clarifiers are mainly organic and
flocculent in nature. These are either dispersed or flocculated. Their specific gravity varies from
1.01 to 1.02. The bulk of the finely divided organic solids reaching primary clarifiers are low specific
gravity solids which are incompletely flocculated but are susceptible to flocculation. Flocculation
occurs within primary clarifiers due to eddying motion of the fluid. The aggregation becomes more
complete as the sewage is detained for longer periods (hydraulic residence time) in these tanks.
However, the rate of flocculation rapidly decreases as the detention period is increased beyond
certain values. Hence prolonged detention periods are not productive and in fact may be counter
productive by inducing septic conditions and generation of sulphide gas.
5.7.3 Types of Settling
Mainly , four categories of settling occur, depending on the tendency of particles to interact and their
concentration. These settling types are (i) Discrete settling (ii) Flocculent settling (iii) Hindered or
zone settling (iv) Compression.
5.7.3.1 Discrete Settling
Discrete particles do not change their size, shape or mass during settling. Grit in sewage behaves
like discrete particles. The settling velocity of discrete particles is determinable using Stokes or
Transition law. Organic solids in raw sewage and bioflocs in biologically treated sewage cannot be
considered as discrete particles and hence Stokes law is not applicable for these particles.
5.7.3.2 Flocculent Settling
Flocculent particles coalesce during settling, increasing the mass of particles and settle faster.
Flocculent settling refers to settling of flocculent particles of low concentration usually less than 1000
mg/l. The degree of flocculation depends on the contact opportunities, which in turn are affected
by the surface overflow rate, the depth of the basin, the concentration of the particles, the range of
particle sizes and the velocity gradients in the system. No adequate mathematical equation exists to
describe flocculent settling and therefore, overflow rates to achieve a given removal efficiency are
determined using data obtained from settling column studies. The removal of raw sewage organic
suspended solids in primary settling tanks, settling of chemical flocs in settling tanks and of bioflocs
in the upper portion of secondary sedimentation tanks are examples of flocculent settling.
5 - 50
5.7.3.3 Hindered or Zone Settling
When concentration of flocculent particles is in intermediate range, they are close enough
together so that their velocity fields overlap causing hindered settling. The settling of particles results in
significant upward displacement of water. The particles maintain their relative positions with respect
to each other and the whole mass of particles settles as a unit or zone. This type of settling is
applicable to concentrated suspensions found in secondary settling basins following activated
sludge units. In the hindered settling zone, the concentration of particles increases from top to
bottom leading to thickening of the settled particles at the bottom. Such secondary clarifiers where
zone settling occurs are designed based on solids loading for the given area of the water surface.
The required loading rate can be determined by conducting settling column analysis in the laboratory.
However, the values of best design are readily given in this manual in section 5.7.
5.7.3.4 Compression
In compression zone, the concentration of particles becomes so high that particles are in physical
contact with each other, the lower layers supporting the weight of upper layers. Consequently, any
further settling results due to compression of the whole structure of particles and accompanied by
squeezing out of water from the pores between the solid particles. This settling phenomenon occurs
at the bottom of deep sludge mass, such as in the bottom of secondary clarifiers following secondary
biological treatment and in tanks used for thickening of sludge.
5.7.4 Design Considerations
5.7.4.1 Factors Influencing Design
Several factors such as flow variations, density currents, solids concentration, solids loading, area,
detention time and overflow rate influence the design and performance of clarifiers. In the design of
some plants, only a few of these factors may have significant effect on performance while in others,
all of them may play an important role. Clarifiers are designed for average flow conditions. Hence,
during peak flow periods, the detention period gets reduced with increase in the overflow rate and
consequent overloading for a short period. If hourly flow variations are wide, a flow equalization tank
will be useful before the treatment units so that uniform hydraulic loading is possible.
5.7.4.2 Design Criteria
The design criteria shall consist of surface loading rate, solids loading rate, weir overflow rate
and side water depth.
5.7.4.2.1 Surface Loading Rate
This represents the hydraulic loading per unit surface area of tank in unit time expressed as m 3/d/m 2
and must be checked, both, for average flow and peak flow.
5.7.4.2.2 Solids Loading Rate
The solids loading rate is an important decision variable for the design of secondary clarifier which
settles the bio-flocculated solids. It is expressed as kg SS/d/m2.
5 - 51
5.7.4.2.3 W eir Loading
W eir loading influences the removal of solids particularly in secondary clarifiers. There is no
positive evidence that weir loading has any significant effect on removal of solids in primary clarifiers.
However, certain loading rates based on practice are recommended both for primary as well as
secondary clarifiers. The loading should however ensure uniform withdrawal over the entire
periphery of the tank to avoid short-circuiting or dead pockets. Performance of existing clarifiers for
SS removal can be improved by merely increasing their weir length.
Primary and secondary clarifiers normally have the V notch at the weir overflow rim. The CMWSSB
is operating a 23 MLD STP using conventional ASP with 2 primary clarifiers of each 21.2 m
diameter and 2 secondary clarifiers of each 24.4 m diameter. Their RCC sidewall is topped with
14 cm thick brick pillars of 23 cm length interspaced with masonry bevelled weirs of 70 cm
length as in Figure 5.35.
Figure 5.35 Masonry Bevelled Weirs of Primary Clarifiers (left & centre) and Secondary Clarifier
(right) with additional entrainment aeration of the treated sewage by the freefall over the weir.
In construction, it is easy to guide the mason by a levelling instrument to finish these weirs all at
the same elevation as he has to trowel the small length between the pillars one at a time. This
arrangement has not resulted in any corrosion and facilitates easy cleaning of the lip and overflow
face of the weir daily. In terms of weir length, this effectively means the weir length is 70/93 = 75% of
the peripheral length. The weir loading rate at average flow works out to 23,000/(2x3.14x21.2x0.75)
= 230 cum/m/day for primary clarifier and 23,000/(2x3.14x24.4x0.75) = 200 cum/m/day for
secondary clarifier., though the manual guidelines are limited to 125 and 185 respectively. The
suspended solids in overflow in these secondary clarifiers are consistently between 20 and 30 mg/l.
Though these higher weir overflow rates are reportedly functioning well, still, complying with the
reduced loading rates of 125 and 185 can only prevent the drag of SS over the weirs and better SS
removals. However, if v notched weirs are preferred they can be used with appropriate material of
weir plates and fasteners.
5.7.4.2.4 Depth and Detention Time
Once the surface area is arrived at from overflow rate and solids loading rate, the next step is the
determination of the depth which influences the detention time and vice versa. The depth considered
for design is the vertical side water depth (SWD). It influences the hydrostatic compression of the
bottom sludge solids. Thus deeper depths will give higher concentration in the sludge solids
withdrawn from the bottom sludge pit. Shallow depths will result in loose solids concentration.
5 - 52
This will require huge volumes of wet sludge to be withdrawn for taking out a given weight of sludge
solids. In turn, these volumes have a heavy bearing in the required volumes of the sludge handling
units and their associated piping and valves etc. Hence drawal of dense sludge is more beneficial.
In the case of secondary clarifiers, another issue is that longer residence times may result in all
the residual dissolved oxygen in the treated sewage being fully consumed by the live MLSS in
the clarifier itself. Thereafter, these MLSS will not have oxygen until the time they are returned to
the aeration tank. It inhibits their metabolism on entering the aeration tank. Thus the return sludge
shall not be really live. The depth also influences the hydraulic pattern. Higher depths may cause
dead zones and shallow depths may cause short-circuiting between sewage released in the baffle
zone and what overflows along the peripheral weirs. The data for clarifiers in STPs built in India and
evaluated by NEERI are extracted in Appendix A.5.10.
It is seen that depths of primary clarifiers vary from 2.4 m to 4.2 m with detention times varying from
1.65 hours to 4 hours. In secondary clarifiers, the depths vary from 2.4 m to 4.2 m and detention
times vary from 2.2 hours to 4.2 hours. Considering all these factors and the reported performance
of these STPs, it requires an iterative approach. In the case of secondary clarifiers for extended
aeration plants, deeper depths and longer detention times are not significant from return sludge
point of view as the sludge is already mineralized when it leaves the aeration tank. In cases where
marginally deeper depths and slightly longer detention times are to be considered for secondary
clarifiers, the contact stabilization process is recommended to freshen up the sludge before
returning it to the aeration tank.
5.7.4.2.5 Design Guidelines and Procedure
The design guidelines for both the primary and secondary clarifiers are given in Table 5.8.
Table 5.8 Design Parameters for Clarifiers
Overflow rate, Solid loading, Side Water Weir loading,

cum/sqm/day kg/day/sqm Depth, m cum/m/day
Type of Settling
Average Peak Average Peak Average Average
Primary Clarifiers
Primary Settling only 25-30 50-60 Not applicable >2.5-3.5 125

Followed by
35-50 80 - 1 2 0 Not applicable >2.5-3.5 125
secondary treatment
With excess sludge
25-35 50-60 Not applicable >3.5-4.5 125
return
Secondary Clarifiers
Secondary settling
15-35 40-50 70 - 140 210 >3.0-3.5 185
for activated sludge
Secondary settling
8 - 15 25-35 25 - 120 170 >3. 0 - 4. 0 185
for extended aeration
Note: Where the mechanized aerobic treatment is used after UASB reactor,
the settling tank design shall be based on conventional activated sludge process as above.
Source: CPHEEO, 1993 and as recommended in the present manual
5 - 53
The smaller values are for plants of less than 5 MLD. It is necessary to provide the clarifiers in at
least two parallel units to have availability of one during repairs to the other. For bigger plants, more
numbers are needed.
The procedure of sizing the clarifiers shall be as follows. In respect of all STPs where only BOD
removal with or without biological nitrification is concerned, the hydraulic load from any return flows
as sludge return, thickener supernatant return, sludge filtrate return are not taken into consideration
and are deemed to be covered within the design criteria as in Table 5.8
In the case of biological nitrification-denitrification tanks, the flow due to internal return from the
secondary clarifier overflow needs to be added to the average and peak flows for verifying the
compliance to the design criteria. The recommended design procedures are furnished herein.
Design Procedure for Primary clarifiers:
1. Choose the average overflow rate in Table 5-8 and arrive at the surface area
2. Choose the peak overflow rate in Table 5-8 and arrive at the surface area
3. Choose the higher of the above two values and decide the diameter
4. Verify the weir overflow rate for compliance to Table 5-8
5. If the rate exceeds, verify with a double sided launder inside the clarifier
6 . Even with this, if the rate exceeds, increase the diameter suitably.
7. Choose a compatible SWD.
Design Procedure for Secondary clarifiers:
1. Choose the average overflow rate in Table 5-8 and arrive at the surface area
2. Choose the peak overflow rate in Table 5-8 and arrive at the surface area
3. Choose the average solids loading rate in Table 5-8 and decide surface area
4. Choose the peak solids loading in Table 5-8 and arrive at the surface area
5. Choose the higher of the above four values and decide the diameter
6 . Verify the weir overflow rate for compliance to Table 5-8
7. If the rate exceeds, verify with a double sided launder inside the clarifier
8 . Even with this, if the rate exceeds, increase the diameter suitably.
9. Choose a compatible SWD.
An illustrative sizing of clarifiers in ASP is given in Appendix A.5.11
5.7.4.2.6 Sludge withdrawal from Clarifiers and Thickeners
There is some uncertainty in the issue of whether sludge from clarifiers and thickeners is to be drawn
by first drawing it into a sludge sump and then withdrawing by a pump set.
5 - 54
The following clarity is now advocated.
5.7.4.2.6.1 Primary Clarifier for 10 MLD with 400 mg/l of SS & 60 % Removal
The SS removed per day will be 10x400x0.6 = 2400 kg/day
The solids concentration will be 2 %
The volume to be drawn will be 2400x(100/2)/1000 = 120 m3/day
If drawn continuously for 24 hours, withdrawal has to be 120/24 = 5 m /hr

2
Using minimum specified pipe of dia 200 mm, area is (0.2)x(0.2)x0.785 = 0.03 m
Thus the velocity will be 5 / 3600 / 0.03 = 0.04 m/s

Clearly this cannot be permitted.
Suppose the sludge is drawn for 5 minutes every hour, then the flow will be revised as
Withdrawal has to be 120 / (24x5/60) = 60 m3/hr

2
Using minimum specified pipe of dia 200 mm, area is (0.2)x(0.2)x0.785 = 0.03 m
Thus the velocity will be 60 / 3600 / 0.03 = 0.55 m/s
Obviously this is much better than withdrawal through a sludge sump.
5.7.4.2.6.2 Secondary Clarifier for 10 MLD of Sewage with 0.6 RAS
The volume to be drawn will be 10000x0.6 = 6000 m3/day
If drawn continuously for 24 hours, withdrawal has to be 6000/24 = 250 m /hr

2
For a velocity of 1.5 m/s, area is 250/3600/1.5 = 0.046 m resulting in a dia of 0.25 m
By using a sludge sump, the height has to be from invert of pipe to top of the clarifier
This height will be anywhere about 4.5 m.

2
For a minimum diameter of 2 m for man entry when needed, area is 3.14 m
Resulting volume will be 4.5x3.14 = 14.13 m
HRT in the sump becomes 14.13/250 = 0.056 hrs or 3.4 minutes
Any sump has to be minimum 10 minutes of HRT

Hence the volume needed is 250x10/60 = 42 m 3
Required diameter becomes 3.5 m
It is a choice by the designer to decide on direct pumping or sump and pumping.
5.7.4.2.6.3 Choice of Sludge Withdrawal
a) Direct suction minimizes the complexities of sumps, valves, etc.
b) If the clarifier water level is just at ground level, it is necessary to construct a dry well and equip it
with dry pit submersible pump sets of open impeller or centrifugal screw impeller directly coupled
to the flange of the suction pipe after a valve on the upstream. The rpm shall be less than 960.
5 - 55
c) For RAS, if the designer prefers an intermediate sludge sump, necessary diffused air shall be
let into such a sump. The pump sets can also be horizontal centrifugal foot mounted pump sets
(in a separate dry pit) of motor not more than 960 rpm and equipped with VFD control or with
submersible pump sets of speed not over 960 rpm or Archimedean screw pump in the sump itself
which has to be rectangular to accommodate the screw.
Sludge can be removed either hydrostatically or mechanically from the sedimentation tanks. The
sludge is withdrawn from the tank by hydrostatic pressure or by pumping. Manual cleaning has been
largely given up in favour of mechanical cleaning in modern practice. Tanks are also provided with
hopper bottoms for hydrostatic sludge removal.
Generally horizontal flow tanks are provided with rectangular hoppers and vertical tanks with circular
or square types. Side slopes of the hoppers should be of the order of 1.2:1 to 2:1 preferably with
values greater than 1.7:1 and 1.5:1 for pyramidal and conical hoppers respectively. The floor of the
hoppers should not be wider than 0 .6 m.
Mechanical sludge scraping is best suited for circular or square tanks and occasionally adopted
in rectangular tanks. The scrapers or ploughs push the sludge along the tank bottom to sludge
collecting channel or pocket from where it is either pumped directly or gravitated to a sludge sump
for further disposal. In rectangular tanks, sludge hoppers are generally placed at the inlet end.
However, they may be placed at mid-length in long tanks or at the outlet end in case of secondary
settling tank of activated sludge plant. The sludge scraping mechanism may be of a moving bridge
type of flight scrapers mounted on endless chain conveyors. The linear conveyor speed should
not exceed 0.010 to 0.015 m/s.
In case of flight scrapers, where the maximum width of tanks is greater than twice the depth,
multiple flight scrapers are placed side by side, in which case the width of tank could be increased
up to a maximum 30 m. When multiple flight scrapers are used, the receiving sludge hoppers are
designed as a trough with transverse collectors to convey the sludge to a single outlet pocket.
A bottom slope of 1% is recommended for mechanical scraping of sludge.
The most common type of sludge scraping in circular clarifiers is a revolving sludge scraper
mechanism with radial arms having ploughs or blades set at an angle just above floor level and
rotating at 1 to 2 revolutions per hour. The ploughs push the sludge to a central hopper as the arms
are rotated. Sludge from the central hopper is removed to a sludge sump by the side of the tank from
where it is pumped or it is directly sucked and pumped out.
For small diameters of up to 9 m, the revolving bridge is spanned across the diameter of the tank.
For bigger diameters, it is supported on the tank wall on one side and on a pillar at the centre of
the tank. This pillar is a hollow construction and serves as the inlet to the clarifier. The drive motors
for the sludge scraper arms can be either stationary at the centre of the walkway or movable in the
case of traction drive and are mounted at one end of the rotating bridge. The interval between
sludge removals should be less than 4 hours and never exceed 12 hours. Light flocculent sludge
such as the activated sludge or mixture of activated sludge and primary sludge are scraped
and shall be removed continuously from the tank to avoid septicity as the activated sludge are
live organisms.
5 - 56
The peripheral speed of the scraper should be between 2.5 to 4 cm/sec. All rotary mechanisms
are operated at a low speed of 1 to 2 revolutions per hour.
In the case of square tanks, the sludge scraper arms are provided with a pivoted extension with
blades which will project out at the corners and retract to suit the diameter once it has crossed them
as shown in Figure 5.36.
10
Source.US Patent Application Number 183106

Figure 5.36 Floor Plan of Square Shaped Clarifiers Sludge Scraper
The pantograph mechanism is numbered as 32 and 35 in Figure 5-36. These remove the sludge
from the corners and push it towards the centre. The floor should be suitably finished. These types of
clarifier construction is useful in the case of long rectangular aeration tanks where the longer
sidewalls can be used to attach primary and secondary clarifiers on each of the shorter sides or on
the longer side as abutting clarifiers using common wall construction for saving land area and for
superstructure for covering all these for indoor air quality control in due course.
Where sludge is removed intermittently with intervals longer than four hours, provision for
sludge storage in the hoppers of the tanks should be made. Sludge conveyor pipes should not
be less than 200 mm in diameter. Hopper volumes should be excluded when calculating the
effective sedimentation volume of the tank.
As the withdrawal from primary clarifiers is on an intermittent basis, the connecting pipe between
the clarifier and the sludge sump outside the clarifier gets into choking problems besides the
sludge in the sludge sump also getting anaerobic and malodorous due to storage. There are also
installations where the sludge is withdrawn by direct suction.
It is recommended to adopt a sludge withdrawal every hour and of just the adequate volume to
not induce the tunnel effect in the sludge zone of the clarifier. The pump impellers are to be
preferred as positive displacement stator-rotor or screw centrifugal horizontal foot mounted
type working at not over 960 rpm.
5 - 57
5.7.4.2.7 Inlets and Outlets
Performance of clarifiers is very much influenced by inlet and outlet devices. The inlet devices must
distribute the flow evenly in the tank.
All inlets must be designed to keep down the entrance velocity to prevent formation of eddy or
inertial currents in the tank to avoid short-circuiting. A stilling chamber is necessary ahead of inlets
if the sewage is received under pressure from pumping mains.
The design should ensure least interference with the settling zone and promote ideal settling
conditions. The outlet devices like the peripheral weirs must withdraw the sewage uniformly over the
full length. Hence, the weir elevation must be kept the same all around the periphery.
The choice of inlet and outlet design depends on the geometry of sedimentation tank and the mode of
entry and exit from the tank.
In horizontal flow rectangular tanks, inlets and outlets are placed opposite each other separated by
the length of tank with the inlet perpendicular to the direction of flow.
In the design of inlets to rectangular tanks the following methods are used to distribute the flow
uniformly across the tank.
a) Multiple pipe inlets with baffle boards of depth 0.45 to 0.6 m in front of the inlets, 0.6 to 0.9 m away
from it, and with the top of baffle being 25 mm below water surface for the scum to pass over
b) Channel inlet with perforated baffle side wall between the tank and the channels, or
c) Inlet channel with submerged weirs followed by a baffle board inside the tank.
Scum baffles are provided ahead of outlet devices to prevent the escape of scum with the effluent.
In radial flow circular tanks, the usual practice is to provide a central inlet and a peripheral outlet.
The central inlet pipe may be either a submerged horizontal pipe from wall to centre or an inverted
siphon laid beneath the tank floor or a top entry pipe suspended from the bridge.
An inlet baffle is placed concentric to the pipe mouth, generally with a diameter of 10 to 20 % of the
tank diameter and extending 1 to 2 m below water surface. Where the inlet pipe discharges into a
central hollow pillar, the top of the pillar is flared to provide adequate number of inlet diffusion ports
through which sewage enters the tank with an entry velocity of 0.10 to 0.25 m/s through the ports.
The entry ports are submerged 0.3 to 0.6 m below the water surface.
The outlet is generally a peripheral weir discharging freely into a peripheral channel, the crest of the
weir is provided with V-notches for uniform draw off at low flows or finished as bevelled masonry
wears as in Figure 5.35. In all primary clarifiers, a peripheral scum baffle extending 0.20 to 0.30 m
below the water surface is provided ahead of the effluent weir.
If the length of the peripheral weir is not adequate, a weir trough mounted on wall brackets near the
periphery with adjustable overflow weir on both sides is provided to increase the length of weir.
5 - 58
5.7.4.2.8 Scum Removal
One distinct feature of primary clarifiers is the skimming device, which could be operated by the
same drive mechanism as the sludge scraper arms at the bottom of the tank. It generally consists
of a skimmer arm to which a scraper blade is attached and moved, partly submerged and partly
projecting above the water surface, from the outlet end towards the inlet end in case of rectangular
tanks or in a circular path in the case of circular tanks. The floating scum is thus collected at the forward
end of the scraper blade and moved until it is tipped manually or automatically into a scum trough,
which discharges the scum to a sump outside the tank from where it is removed for burial, burning or
feeding to the digester.
A scum baffle at least 0.15 m above and extending to at least 0.30 m below the water level is provided
along the periphery, ahead of outlet device, to prevent the escape of scum with effluent.
5.7.4.2.9 Types and Shapes
Circular tanks are more common than rectangular or square tanks. Up-flow tanks have been used
for sewage sedimentation, but horizontal flow types are more popular. Rectangular tanks need less
space than circular tanks and can be more economically designed in a large plant, where multiple
units are to be constructed. They can form a more compact layout with the rectangular secondary
treatment units such as aeration tanks in the activated sludge system. The diameters of circular tanks
vary widely from 3 m to 60 m although the most common range is 12 m to 30 m. The diameters and
depths could be chosen at the discretion of the designer in conformity with the manufactured sizes
of scraper mechanisms in the country. The water depth shall be as per Table 5.8. Floors are sloped
from periphery to centre at a rate of 7.5 % to 10%. The inlet to the tank is generally at the centre
and outlet is a peripheral weir, the flow being radial and horizontal from centre to the periphery of
the tank. Multiple units are arranged in pairs with feed from a central control chamber.
For rectangular tanks, maximum length and widths of 90 m and 30 m respectively with length to
width ratios of 1.5 to 7.5 and length to depth ratios of 5 to 25 are recommended and depths shall be
compatible with the sludge moving equipment manufacturers requirements. Bottom slopes of 1%
are normally adopted. Peak velocities shall not exceed 1.5 mph.
5.7.5 Performance
Primary clarifiers may be expected to accomplish 30% to 45% removal of BOD, (but shall be
taken as maximum of 35% for design) and 60%-70% removal of SS, (but shall be taken as
maximum of 60 % for design) depending on concentration and characteristics of solids in
suspension. Secondary clarifiers, if considered independently, remove a very high percentage of
flocculated solids, even more than 99%, particularly following an activated sludge unit where high
mixed liquor suspended solids concentration is maintained in the aeration tank.
However, the efficiency of the biological treatment process is always defined in terms of the
combined efficiency of the biological treatment units and its secondary clarifier with reference to the
characteristics of the incoming sewage.
5 - 59
5.7.6 Chemical Aided Sedimentation
Chemical aided sedimentation of sewage is not normally recommended in the scope of biological
treatment plants, unless it is warranted with reference to needs of compliance with quality of treated
sewage, especially to control the residual phosphorous. Sometimes, when biological nitrification is
aimed at and the required bicarbonate alkalinity is not inherent in the sewage, Sodium carbonate or
bicarbonate will be necessary. In practice, it is analogous to chemical coagulation, flocculation and
sedimentation in water treatment. The colloidal and finely dispersed solids which cannot be removed
by plain primary sedimentation alone as they possess extremely low settling velocities and are
aggregated into settleable particles by addition of chemicals in chemical-aided sedimentation.
Commonly used chemicals are salts of lime, aluminium, ferric and ferrous in the form of powder or
solutions, polyelectrolytes and polymers.
5.7.6.1 Unit Operations
The process consists of the three unit operations viz., proportioning and mixing of chemicals,
flocculation and sedimentation.
5.7.6.1.1 Mixing
The required dose of chemical is weighed and fed to sewage by means of proportioning and
feeding devices, ahead of the mixing unit. Mixing is accomplished in a rapid or flash mixing unit
provided with paddles, propellers or by diffused air and having detention period of 0.5 to 3 minutes.
The paddles of propellers are mounted on a vertical shaft and driven by a constant speed motor
through reduction gears. The size and speed of the propeller is so selected as to give a propeller
capacity of twice the maximum flow through the tank.
The shaft speed is generally between 100 to120 rpm and power needed is about 0.1 kW / MLD.
5.7.6.1.2 Flocculation
The principle of flocculation in sewage is similar to flocculation in water purification. The flocs that
are formed after flash mixing with chemicals are made to coalesce into bigger sizes by either air
flocculation or mechanical flocculation. Both diffused air and mechanical vertical draft tube are
used for air flocculation. Revolving paddle type is the most common of the mechanical flocculators.
The tanks are usually in duplicate with a detention period of 30-90 minutes depending upon results
required and the type of sewage treated. However, the combination of chemical dosage and the
flocculation period are first determined by laboratory jar test followed by bench scale testing in
the field. The paddles are mounted either on a horizontal or vertical shaft. The peripheral speed
of the paddles is kept in the range of 0.3 to 0.45 m/s. The flow-through velocity through the
flocculator shall be in the range of 15 to 25 cm/sec to prevent sedimentation there itself.
The drive motors can be either stationary or movable in the case of traction drive and are placed
above the tank. In case of domestic sewage and certain industrial wastes, mechanical flocculation
without addition of chemicals will reduce self-flocculation of the finely divided suspended solids
and hence increase the efficiency of sedimentation.
5 - 60
5.7.6.1.3 Sedimentation
The flocculated sewage solids are settled out in a subsequent sedimentation tank. Refer Appendix
7.2 to 7.6 of CPHEEO Manual on Water Supply & Treatment 1999.
5.8 SEWAGE TREATMENT
Sewage Treatment detailed here will be on biological treatment technology only. It covers such of
those technologies for which validated design guidelines are available in India over the past many
decades. There are more recent technologies with each of them having their own design guidelines
by the respective equipment vendors and for which obviously there are proprietary issues
in procurement out of public funds. No doubt, unless these are tried out at some point in time,
there is no way of inheriting these forever, but at the same time, the proprietary issue has to be got
over. Hence, these technologies will be addressed later in this chapter under the title "Recent
Technologies. Accordingly, the technologies to be considered in this chapter will be the Activated
Sludge Processes, Attached Growth Systems, Treatment Methods Using Immobilization
Carrier, Stabilization Ponds and Anaerobic Treatment. It is decided to phase out the stone media
trickling filter technology considering the difficulties of upkeep of its rotary distributor, Psychoda
flies nuisance and the recent light weight media which give much more surface area for unit volume
of the media as compared to the stone media.
5.8.1 Activated Sludge Process
Aerobic suspended growth systems are of two basic types, those which employ sludge
recirculation, viz., conventional activated sludge process and its modifications and those which do
not have sludge recycle, viz., aerated lagoons. In both cases sewage containing organic matter
is aerated in an aeration basin in which micro-organisms metabolize the soluble and suspended
organic matter. Part of the organic matter is synthesized into new cells and part is oxidized to
carbon dioxide and water to derive energy. In activated sludge systems the new cells formed in the
reaction are removed from the liquid stream in the form of a flocculent sludge in clarifiers. A part
of this activated sludge is recycled to the aeration basin and the remaining form waste or excess
sludge. In aerated lagoons the microbial mass leaves with the effluent stream or may settle down in
areas of the aeration basin where mixing is not sufficient.
The suspended solids concentration in the aeration tank liquor, also called mixed liquor
suspended solids (MLSS), is generally taken as an index of the mass of active micro-organisms in
the aeration tank. However, the MLSS will contain not only active micro-organisms but also
dead cells as well as inert organic matter derived from the raw sewage. The mixed liquor volatile
suspended solids (MLVSS) value is also used and is preferable to MLSS as it eliminates the
effect of inorganic matter. Aerobic and facultative bacteria are the predominant micro-organisms
which carry out the above reactions of organic matter i.e. oxidation and synthesis. Their cellular
mass contains about 12% Nitrogen and 2% Phosphorous. These nutrients should be
present in sufficient quantity in the waste or they may be added, as required, for the reactions
to proceed satisfactorily. A generally recommended ratio of BOD:N:P is 100:5:1. Domestic
sewage is generally balanced with respect to these nutrients.
5 - 61
5.8.1.2 Activated Sludge Process Variables
An ASP essentially consists of the following: (i) Aeration tank containing microorganisms in
suspension in which the reaction takes place, (ii) Activated sludge recirculation system,
(iii) Excess sludge wasting and disposal facilities, (iv) Aeration systems to transfer oxygen
and (v) Secondary sedimentation tank to separate and thicken activated sludge.
These are schematically illustrated in Figure 5.6 (a) to (e). The main variables of the ASP
are the loading rate, the mixing regime and the flow scheme.
5.8.1.3 Loading Rate
The loading rate expresses the rate at which the sewage is applied in the aeration tank.
A loading parameter that has been developed empirically over the years is the hydraulic
retention time (HRT), 0, d.
(5.22)
Where,
V : Volume of aeration tank, m3, and
Q : Sewage inflow, m3/day
Another empirical loading parameter is volumetric organic loading which is defined as the BOD
applied per unit volume of aeration tank, per day.
A rational loading parameter which has found wider acceptance and is preferred, is specific
substrate utilization rate, U, per day which is defined as:
(5.23)
A similar loading parameter is mean cell residence time or sludge retention time (SRT), 0c, day:
where S 0 and S are influent and effluent organic matter concentrations respectively, conventionally
0 3
measured as BOD5, (g/m ) X and Xs are MLSS concentration in aeration tank and waste activated
sludge from secondary settling tank under flow, respectively, (g/m ) and Qw - waste activated sludge
rate, (m 3/d). Under steady state operation the mass of waste activated sludge is given by
where,
Y : Maximum yield coefficient (microbial mass synthesized/mass of substrate utilized)

1
kd : Endogenous respiration rate constant, (d ).
5 - 62
From the earlier equations it is seen that
1/0 = Y U - k* (5.26)
Since both Y and kd are constants for a given waste, it is, therefore, necessary to define either
0c or U. Equation (5.26) is plotted in Figure 5.37 for typical values of Y = 0.5 and kd = 0.06/d for
municipal sewage.

Figure 5.37 Relationship between SRT (0c) and specific substrate utilization rate
(U) for Y = 0.5 arid k = 0.06d-1
If the value of S is small compared to S0, which is often the case for activated sludge systems
treating municipal sewage, U may also be expressed as Food applied to Microorganism ratio,
(5.27)
The 0c value controls the effluent quality, settleability and drainability of biomass.
Other operational parameters which are affected by the choice of 0c values are oxygen requirement
and quantity of waste activated sludge.
Figure 5-38 (overleaf) gives 0c value as a function of temperature for 90-95% reduction of BOD of
municipal sewage.
Typical values of loading parameters for various activated sludge modifications commonly
used in India are furnished in Table 5.9 overleaf.
5 - 63
TEMPERATURE (C)
Figure 5.38 SRT as a function of aeration basin temperature for 90-95% BOD removal
Table 5.9 Characteristics and Design Parameters of Activated Sludge Systems for Sewage
Flow Regim e
Process Type unit
Conventional Com plete mix Extended aeration
MLSS mg/L 1500 to 3000 3000 to 4000 3000 to 5000
MLSS/MLVSS ratio 0.8 0.8 0.6
F/M day1 0.3 to 0.4 0.3 to 0.6 0.1 to 0.18
HRT Hours 4 to 6 4 to 6 12 to 24
0c days 5 to 8 5 to 8 10 to 26
Q r/Q ratio 0.25 to 0.5 0.25 to 0.8 0.25 to 1.0
BOD removal % 85 to 92 85 to 92 95 to 98
kg 0 2/kg BOD removed ratio 0.8 to 1.0 0.8 to 1.0 1.0 to 1.2
5.8.1.5 Mixing Regime
The mixing regime employed in the aeration tank may be plug flow or completely mixed flow.
Plug-flow implies that the sewage moves down progressively along the aeration tank essentially
unmixed with the rest of the tank contents. Completely mixed flow involves rapid dispersal of the
incoming sewage throughout the tank. In the plug flow system, the F/M and the oxygen demand
will be highest at the inlet end of the aeration tank and will then progressively decrease. In the
completely mixed system, the F/M and the oxygen demand will be uniform throughout the tank.
5 - 64
5.8.1.6 Flow Scheme
The flow scheme involves the pattern of sewage addition and sludge return to the aeration tank and
the pattern of aeration. Sewage addition may be at a single point at the inlet end of the tank or it may
be at several points along the aeration tank. The sludge return may be directly from the settling tank
to the aeration tank or through a sludge reaeration tank. Aeration may be at a uniform rate or it may
be varied from the head of the aeration tank to its end.
5.8.1.7 Conventional System and Modifications
The conventional system represents the early development of the activated sludge process. Over
the years, several modifications to the conventional system have been developed to meet specific
treatment objectives by modifying the process variables discussed earlier.
In step aeration, settled sewage is introduced at several points along the tank length, which produces
uniform oxygen demand throughout. Tapered aeration attempts to supply air to match oxygen demand
along the length of the tank. Contact stabilization provides for reaeration of return activated sludge from
the final clarifier, which allows a smaller aeration or contact tank. While the conventional system
maintains a plug flow hydraulic regime, completely mixed process aims at instantaneous mixing
of the influent waste and return sludge with the entire contents of the aeration tank. The extended
aeration process employs low organic loading, long aeration time, high MLSS concentration
and low F/M. Because of long detention in the aeration tank/oxidation ditch, the MLSS
undergo considerable endogenous respiration and get well stabilized. The excess sludge does not
require separate digestion and it can be dried directly on sand beds or mechanically dewatered.
In addition, the excess sludge production is minimal. The conventional system and the last two
modifications named above have found wider acceptance. These are described below in detail.
5.8.1.7.1 Conventional System
The Conventional system is always preceded by primary settling. The plant itself consists of a
primary clarifier, an aeration tank, a secondary clarifier, a sludge return line and an excess sludge
waste line leading to a digester. The BOD removal in the process is about 85% to 92%. The plant
employs a plug flow regime, which is achieved by a long and narrow configuration of the aeration
tank with length equal to 5 or more times the width. The sewage and mixed liquor enter at the head
of the tank and is withdrawn at its end. Because of the plug flow regime, the oxygen demand at the
head of the aeration tank is high and then tapers down. However, air is supplied in the process at a
uniform rate along the length of the tank. This leads to either oxygen deficiency in the initial zone or
wasteful application of air in the subsequent reaches. Another limitation of the plug flow regime is that
there is a lack of operational stability at times of excessive variation in rate of inflow and in influent
strength. For historical reasons, the conventional system is the most widely used type of the activated
sludge process. Plants up to 300 MLD capacities have been built in India.
5.8.1.7.2 Completely Mixed
The complete mix activated sludge plant employs a completely mixed flow regime. In a
circular or square tank, complete mixing is achieved by mechanical aerators with adequate mixing.
5 - 65
The completely mixed plant has the capacity to hold a high MLSS level in the aeration tank
enabling the aeration tank volume to be reduced. The plant has increased operational stability at
shock loadings and increased capacity to treat toxic biodegradable wastes like phenols.
5.8.1.7.3 Plug Flow
This occurs in tanks of a longish shape in plan when used with surface aerators and almost all
diffused aeration tanks.
5.8.1.7.4 Extended Aeration
The flow scheme of the extended aeration process and its mixing regime are similar to that of
the completely mixed process except that primary settling is omitted. The process employs low
organic loading, long aeration time, high MLSS concentration and low F/M. The BOD removal
efficiency is high. Because of long detention in the aeration tank, the mixed liquor solids
undergo considerable endogenous respiration and remain well stabilized. The excess sludge does
not require separate digestion and can he dried directly on sand beds. Furthermore, the excess
sludge production is minimal. The oxygen requirement for the process is higher and the running
costs are correspondingly high. However, operation is rendered simple due to the elimination of
primary settling and separate sludge digestion. The method is, therefore, well suited specially for
small and medium size communities and zones of a larger city. In small plants intermittent operation
of extended aeration systems may be adopted, intermittent aeration cycles are: (i) closing of inlet
and aerating the sewage, (ii) stopping aeration and allowing the contents to settle and (iii) letting in
fresh sewage which displaces an equal quantity of clarified effluent. Sludge is wasted from the
mixed liquor. To handle continuous flows a number of units may be operated in parallel.
The oxidation ditch is one form of an extended aeration system having certain special features like
an endless ditch for the aeration tank and a rotor for the aeration mechanism. The ditch consists of
a long continuous channel usually oval in plan. The channel may be earthen with lined sloping sides
and lined floor or it may be built in concrete or brick with vertical walls. The sewage is aerated by a
surface rotor placed across the channel. The rotor not only aerates the sewage but also imparts a
horizontal velocity to the mixed liquor preventing the biological sludge from settling out.
5.8.1.7.5 Design Consideration
The items for consideration in the design of activated sludge plant are aeration tank capacity and
dimensions, aeration facilities, secondary sludge settling and recycle and excess sludge wasting.
5.8.1.7.5.1 Aeration Tank
Equations (5.24) to (5.26) can be combined to yield
V X = YOQc (s 0 - s ) / ( l + K dQc ) (5.28)
The volume of the aeration tank is calculated for the selected, value of 0c by assuming a suitable
value of MLSS concentration, X, in Equation (5.28).
5 - 66
Alternatively the tank capacity may be designed from F/M and MLSS concentration according
to Equation (5.27). The F/M and MLSS levels generally employed in different types of
commonly used activated sludge systems are given in Table 5-9 along with their corresponding
BOD removal efficiencies.
It is seen that economy in reactor volume can be achieved by assuming a large value for X. However,
it is seldom taken to be more than 5,000 g/m3. A common range is between 1,000 and 4,000 g/m3.
Considerations that govern the upper limit are
a) Initial and running cost of sludge recirculation system to maintain a high value of MLSS,
b) Limitations of oxygen transfer equipment to supply oxygen at required rate in a small

reactor volume,
c) Increased solids loading on secondary clarifier which may necessitate a larger surface area to
meet limiting solid flux, design criteria for the tank and minimum HRT for the aeration tank for
stable operation under hydraulic surges.
Except in the case of extended aeration plants and completely mixed plants, the aeration tanks
are designed as long narrow channels. This configuration is achieved by the provision of
round-the-end baffles in small plants when only one or two tank units are proposed and by
construction as long and narrow rectangular tanks with common intermediate walls in large
plants when several units are proposed. In extended aeration plants other than oxidation
ditches and in complete mix plants the tank shape may be circular or square when the plant,
capacity is small, or rectangular with several side inlets and equal number of side outlets, when
the plant capacity is large.
The width and depth of the aeration channel depends on the type of aeration equipment employed.
The depth controls the aeration efficiency and usually ranges from 3 m to 4.5 m for surface aerators,
the deeper depth being justified by use of hopper bottomed tank square cells and draft tubes. In the
case of diffused aeration, the delivery pressure at the compressor plays a crucial part in that, where
this exceeds about 6.5 m depth water cooled compressors would be needed and this shall be duly
considered. If the capacities are over 70 MLD then duplicate units are preferred.
The width controls the mixing and is usually 5 to 10 m. The width-depth ratio should be adjusted
to be 1.2 to 2.2. The length should not be less than 30 m or not ordinarily longer than 100 m in a
single section length before doubling back. The horizontal velocity should be around 1.5 m/min.
Excessive width may lead to settlement of solids in the tank. Triangular baffles and fillets are used
to eliminate dead spots and induce spiral flow in the tanks. The tank free-board is generally kept
between 0.3 m and 0.5 m.
Due consideration must be given in the design of aeration tanks for the requirement of emptying
them for maintenance and repair of the aeration equipment. Intermediate walls should be designed
for empty conditions on each side.
The method of dewatering should be considered in the design and provided for during construction.
5 - 67
The inlet and outlet channels of the aeration tank should be designed for empty conditions on
either side. The method of dewatering should be considered in the design and provided for during
construction. The unit dewatering can be as per Section 5.3.13 already detailed in this manual.
The inlet and outlet channels of the aeration tanks should be designed to maintain a minimum
velocity of 0.3 m/s to avoid deposition of solids. The channels or conduits and their appurtenances
should be sized to carry the maximum hydraulic load to the remaining aeration tank units when any
one unit is out of operation.
The inlet should provide for free fall into aeration tank when more than one tank unit or more than
one inlet is proposed. The free fall will enable positive control of the flows through the different
inlets. Outlets usually consist of free fall weirs. The weir length should be sufficient to maintain a
reasonably constant water level in the tank. When multiple inlets are involved, they should be
provided with valves, gates or stop planks to enable the regulation of flow through each inlet.
5.8.1.7.5.2 Oxygen Requirements
Oxygen is required in the activated sludge process for the oxidation of a part of the influent organic
matter and for the endogenous respiration of the micro-organisms in the system. The total oxygen
requirement of the process may be formulated as follows:
where,
f: Ratio of BOD to ultimate BOD

1.42 : Oxygen demand of biomass, g/g
Biological sludge produced per day.
A x :
AX= Q * Y obs * (So-S)
Yobs = Y/(1+Kdx0c)
Where Y is 0.5 and K , is 0.06
d
The formula does not allow for nitrification but allows only for carbonaceous BOD removal. The extra
theoretical oxygen requirement for nitrification is 4.56 Kg O2/per kg NH 3 -N oxidized to NO 3 - N. The
total oxygen requirements per kg BOD removed for different activated sludge processes are given
in Table 5.9. The amount of oxygen required for a particular process will increase within the range
shown in the Table 5.9 as the F/M value decreases. Appendix A.5.12 presents an illustrative design
of conventional ASP aeration.
5.8.1.7.5.3 Aeration Facilities
The aeration facilities of the activated sludge plant are designed to provide the calculated oxygen
demand of the sewage against a specific level of dissolved oxygen in the sewage. The aeration
devices, apart from supplying the required oxygen demand shall also provide adequate mixing or
agitation in order that the entire mixed liquor suspended solids present in the aeration tank will be
available for the biological activity.
5 - 68
The recommended dissolved oxygen concentration in the aeration tank is in the range 0.5 to 1 mg/l
for conventional activated sludge plants and in the range 1 to 2 mg/l for extended aeration type
activated sludge plants and above 2 mg/l when nitrification is required in the ASP
Aerators are rated based on the amount of oxygen they can transfer to tap water under standard
conditions of 20C, 760 mm Hg barometric pressure and zero DO. The oxygen transfer capacity
under field conditions can be calculated from the standard oxygen transfer capacity by the formula:
where,
N : Oxygen transferred under field conditions, kg O2/kWh

N Oxygen transfer capacity under standard conditions, kg O2/kWh
s
Dissolved oxygen saturation for sewage at operating temperature, mg/l
Cs
Cl Operation DO level in aeration tank usually 1 to 2 mg/1
T: Temperature, C
a : Correction factor for oxygen transfer for sewage,
The value of Cs is calculated by arriving at the dissolved oxygen saturation value for tap water
at the operating temperature and altitude as in Table 5.10 and Table 5.11 (overleaf) and then
multiply it by a factor (P) which is usually 0.95 for domestic sewage and with TDS in the normal
range of 1,200 to 1,500 mg/l.
The value of a requires a detailed understanding. This represents the ratio of the oxygen uptake
rate, known as K_a, of the given sewage to that of clean tap water at 20 degree Celsius. In simple
terms, it is the rate at which oxygen can be dissolved into water and sewage. The K_a for water is
almost constant. It will however vary in sewage because of the constituents like organic matter,
chemicals, biological organisms, detergents, etc, which interfere with the oxygen transfer. Also, the
sewage quality itself varies between ULBs depending on water supply rates. Thus the K_a value
for sewage will always be less than one. The importance of K_a as related to the a-value in STP
is seen from equation 5.30.
The oxygen requirement at the standard condition denoted as Ns decides the kw of aeration
equipment. This value of Ns is inversely proportional to the a-value. Thus, higher value of a-means
lesser the kw of aerators and compressors and the entire aeration system. For example, if a-value
is 0.8 in one case and 0.4 in another case, the cost of the entire aeration system using the value of
0.4 will be 200% higher. Thus, technically, it becomes highly debatable when specifying this a-value
in DPR and in contracts. The second edition of the manual specifies this value as 0.8 to 0.85. This
is also corroborated by the publication of Sundaramoorthy & Sundaresan (1972) which evaluated
the a- value for the mixed liquor of a conventional ASP at Chennai as 0.847 to 0.854 for a surface
aerator system. Many recent tender documents specify it as close to 0.6 in diffused aeration
(BWSSB- Contract s ic for 60 MLD average flow BOD removal and Nitrification-denitrification).
Even conceding that fine bubble aeration systems are more efficient in dissolving oxygen, Metcalf &
Eddy (2003) cites the study by Hwand and Stenstrom (1985) reporting the a value as 0.4 to 0.9 for
fine bubble diffuser system. Thus, there is considerable uncertainty in specifying a-value.
5 - 69
Table 5.10 DO Saturation vs. Temperature in Celsius in Tap Water at Mean Sea Level
The re la tion sh ip betw een tem pe ra ture and oxygen so lubility
Tem perature(degree C) O xygen so lu bility (m g/l)
0 14.6
5 12.8
10 11.3
15 10.2
20 9.2
25 8.6
30 7.5
35 6.9
40 6.4
100 (boiling) 0.0
Table 5.11 DO Correction Factor for Altitudes
Altitude(m eters) Factor Altitude(m eters) Factor
0 1 1067 0.88
152 0.98 1219 0.86
305 0.96 1372 0.84
457 0.95 1524 0.82
610 0.93 1676 0.81
762 0.91 1829 0.80
914 0.89
At the same time, it should be recognized that the compressor capacity needed for ensuring
adequate mixing energy is also important. In actual design, the power requirements are calculated
separately for aeration & mixing and the higher of the two is chosen. Mostly, the power required
for mixing is always higher.
Considering all these, it is considered prudent to opt for a a value of 0.6 for calculating the
oxygen and hence the air requirements. If possible this value can also be got tested in the case of
upgrading existing STPs
The oxygen transfer capacities of surface, fine and coarse diffused air systems under standard
conditions lie between 1.2 to 2.4, 1.2 to 2 and 0.6 to 1.2 kg O 2/kWh respectively. However, it is
necessary to secure the test certificates for the same from the diffused air system vendor before
deciding on the tendered offers.
5 - 70
5.8.1.7.5.4 Diffused Aeration
Diffused aeration involves the introduction of compressed air into the sewage through submerged
diffusers of fine bubble or coarse bubble type. In the former, compressed air is released at or
near the bottom of the aeration tank through porous tubes or plates made of aluminium oxide or
silicon oxide grains cemented together in a ceramic matrix. Troubles due to clogging from the inside
can be reduced by providing air filters and those due to clogging from outside can be avoided by
providing adequate air pressure below the diffusers at all times. In spite of such precautions, fine
bubble diffusers will require periodical cleaning. Air supplied to porous diffusers should not contain
more than 0.02 mg of dust per cum of air. Coarse bubble aerators have lower aeration efficiency than
fine bubble aerators, but are cheaper in capital cost and are less liable to clogging and do not require
filtration of air. In longish channel type aeration tanks, air diffusers are generally placed along one
side of the aeration tank, helping to set up a spiral flow in the tank which improves mixing and
prevents the solids from settling. They are located 0.3 m to 0.6 m above the tank floor to aid in tank
cleaning and reduce clogging during shutdown. The air volume calculated based on the a-value
shall be further adjusted as follows.
a) Percentage of oxygen in the air at the STP location
b) Weight of the air at the STP location
c) Efficiency of the diffusers in transferring the air at the given liquid depth of the aeration tank at the
rate of 4 % to 5 % per metre depth.
d) Fouling factor of diffusers at the rate of 4 % to 5 % per year over its life span
e) An overall factor of safety of 10 % to take care of contingencies.
The compressor shall be provided for the above duty and it shall have a VFD so that the actual air
requirement and hence the actually required kW alone can be operated to maintain the required
residual oxygen in aeration.
The agitator-sparger is a mechanical aerator system involving the release of compressed air at the
bottom of the aeration tank in large bubbles and the breaking up of the bubbles into fine bubbles by
submerged turbine rotors located above the air outlets are also used.
5.8.1.7.5.5 Surface Aerators
Surface aerators are available in both fixed and floating types. Some of their advantages are
higher oxygen transfer capacity, absence of air piping and air filter and simplicity of operation and
maintenance. Surface aerators generally consist of large diameter impeller plates revolving on
vertical shaft at the surface of the liquid with or without draft tubes. A hydraulic jump is created by
the impellers at the surface causing air entrapment in the sewage. The impellers also induce mixing.
The speed of rotation of the impellers is usually 70-100 rpm for geared motor systems. The aeration
rotors for small oxidation ditches are generally of cage type but may also be of the angle iron type.
Particular attention must be paid to the design of shaft length, bearings and alignment. Vertical shaft
aerators are easier to maintain and are used with deeper ditches.
5 - 71
5.8.1.7.5.6 Mixing Requirements
The aeration equipment has also to provide adequate mixing in the aeration tank to keep the
solids in suspension. The air requirements shall be calculated both for summer and winter as well as
mixing power and the higher duty installed. Mixing considerations require that the minimum power input
in activated sludge aeration tanks where MLSS is of the order of 4000-5000 mg/l, should not be less
than 15-26 W/m 3 of tank volume. The power input of aerators derived from oxygenation considerations
should be checked to satisfy the mixing requirements and increased where required. In the case of
3 2
diffused aeration, the air volume for mixing shall be not less than 1.8-2.7 m /hr/m of floor area (US
EPA, 625/8-85/0100, p 38). The delivery head shall be as per the chosen liquid depth and friction
losses. The surface area of the diffusers shall not be less than 6 % of the floor area of the aeration tank.
In the case of tubular diffusers, the centre to centre spacing shall be preferably restricted to not over
30 cm and where unavoidable, the interspaces shall be provided with pre-cast RCC ridges so that the
MLSS if it settles down will slide to the diffusers and will be automatically pushed up into the aeration
tank by the buoyancy. The loss of aeration tank volume by these ridge blocks and blocks for supporting
the diffuser headers shall be compensated in deciding the liquid height of the aeration tank.
5.8.1.7.5.7 Measuring Devices
Devices should be installed for indicating flow rates of raw sewage or primary effluent, return sludge
and air to each aeration tank. For plants designed for sewage flow of 10 MLD or more, integrating
flow recorders should be used.
5.8.1.7.5.8 Secondary Settling
Secondary settling assumes considerable importance in the activated sludge process as the
efficient separation of the biological sludge is necessary not only for ensuring final effluent quality but
also for return of adequate sludge to maintain the MLSS level in the aeration tank. The secondary
settling tank of the activated sludge process is particularly sensitive to fluctuations in flow rate and on
this account it is recommended that the units be designed not only for average overflow rate but also
for peak overflow rates. The high concentration of suspended solids in the effluent requires that the
solids loading rate should also be considered. The recommended overflow rates and solids loading
rates for secondary clarifiers of activated sludge have been given in Table 5.8.
5.8.1.7.5.9 Sludge Recycle
The MLSS concentration in the aeration tank is controlled by the sludge recirculation rate and the
sludge settle ability and thickening in the secondary sedimentation tank.
where,
3
Qr : Sludge recirculation rate, m /d.
5 - 72
The sludge settleability is determined by sludge volume index (SVI) defined as volume
occupied in ml by one gram of solids in the mixed liquor after settling for 30 min and is determined
experimentally. If it is assumed that sedimentation of suspended solids in the laboratory is similar to
that in sedimentation tank, then Xs = 106/SVI. Values of SVI between 100 and 150 ml/g indicate good
settling of suspended solids and this can be achieved for values suggested in Figure 5.38. The
Xs value may not be taken more than 1 0 ,0 0 0 g/cum unless separate thickeners are provided to
concentrate the settled solids or secondary sedimentation tank is designed to yield a higher value.
Using the above value for Xs and 5000 mg/l for X in Equation (5.31), the sludge recirculation ratio
comes out to be 1.0. The return sludge is always to be pumped and the recirculation ratio should be
limited to the values suggested in Table 5.9.
As stated above, the recirculation ratio computation depends on the concentration of the sludge
in the underflow of the clarifier and this in turn can be attributed to the SVI as mentioned. The
SVI is a plant control parameter and cannot be assumed as a design parameter. Thus, the
concentration of the sludge in the underflow of the clarifier is again not possible to pre-fix in design.
Normally well operated clarifiers can be expected to concentrate the MLSS of mixed liquor by about
3 times. Thus, the thumb rule recirculation ratio can also be expressed as 1/(3-1) = 0.5. However, the
thumb rule indicates a value of 0.25 to 0.8 in Table 5-9. Moreover, there has to be flexibility in the field
to vary the recirculation ratio nearer to the higher limit to reach adequate flows and hence maintain
velocities in piping through the plant when the influent sewage volume is very much less. Thus, it is
recommended that irrespective of the designers choice, the recirculation pump set shall be
designed to deliver the higher volume but in actual practice the pumpage can be controlled to the
bare minimum through a VFD control.
5.8.1.7.5.10 Excess Sludge Wasting
The sludge generated in the aeration tank has to be wasted to maintain a steady level of MLSS
in the system. The excess sludge quantity will increase with increasing F/M and decrease with
increasing temperature. The excess sludge generated under steady state operation may be
estimated from Equation (5.24) and (5.25).
In the case of domestic sewage, the excess sludge to be wasted will be about 0.35-0.5 kg/kg BOD 5
removed for the conventional system and about 0.25-0.35 kg/kg BOD 5 removed in the case of
extended aeration plants having no primary settling.
The volume of sludge to be wasted will depend on the suspended solids concentration in the waste
stream.
Excess sludge may be wasted either from the sludge return line or directly from the aeration tank as
mixed liquor. The latter procedure is to be preferred as the concentration of suspended solids will
then be somewhat steady in the waste stream providing better control on biomass wasted.
The waste sludge is either discharged into the primary settling tank or thickened in a sludge
thickening unit and digested directly, In extended aeration plants, the excess sludge is taken to
sludge drying beds or mechanical dewatering directly and the sludge filtrate discharged into the
effluent stream.
5 - 73
Excess sludge = (A/(0.6 to 0.8)) + B
A is calculated by the following equation and 0.6 to be used for extended aeration and 0.8 is used for
conventional activated sludge.
A = Q * Y obs (S 0-S)
Y obs = Y /( 1 + KdX0 c)
Where Y is 0.5
K . is 0.06
d
B = Q *inert TSS removal
Inert TSS = Influent TSS - Influent VSS
TSS removal in primary settling tank is 60%.
Inert SS removal in primary settling tank is 60%.
VSS removal in primary settling tank is 60%.

0c is from Figure 5-38 for the lowest operating temperature.
Excess sludge in kg/day = Y Qbs x BOD inlet * Flow MLD
Calculate excess sludge kg/day from the thumb rule in Section 5.8.1.7.5.10
Adopt the higher value
Excess sludge volume m /day = (Excess wasted kg/day) * 1000/MLSS in clarifier underflow
MLSS in clarifier underflow is to be assumed based on the SWD and is usually 3 times the MLSS.
5.8.1.7.6 Nitrification
Activated sludge plants are ordinarily designed for the removal of only carbonaceous BOD.
However, there may be incidental nitrification in the process. Nitrification will consume part of the
oxygen supplied to the system and reduce the DO level in the aeration tank. Nitrification will also lead
to subsequent denitrification in the secondary clarifier causing a rising sludge problem also called
blanket rising. Nitrification is aided by low F/M and long aeration time. It may be pronounced in
extended aeration plants especially in hot weather. At the other extreme in the contact stabilization
process and in the modified aeration plant, there may be little or no nitrification.
Nitrification though generally not desired may be required in specific cases, e.g. when ammonia
has to be eliminated from the effluent in the interest of pisciculture or when nitrification cum
denitrification is proposed for elimination of nitrogenous matter from the effluent for control of
eutrophication. In such cases, plug flow systems have been developed for efficient removal of both
carbon and nitrogen, Alternatively a two stage system may be designed with carbonaceous BOD
removal in the first stage and nitrification in the second stage by ensuring adequate organic matter
is still left behind at the end of the first stage to serve as the energy source for the nitrifying
organisms in the second stage.
5 - 74
Nitrification requires bicarbonate alkalinity in the ratio of seven times that of the ammonia to be
nitrified and if the available alkalinity is inadequate, the addition of Sodium carbonate or Bicarbonate
is needed before the aeration tank.
5.8.1.7.7 Denitrification
In general, this is achieved as an integrated nitrification-denitrification process as a variation of

the typical activated sludge process. The principle is shown in Figure 5.39 and the flow scheme
is shown in Figure 5.40.
T reated
Aeration tank where sewage is Settling Tank
effluent
received and compressed air is separates the

released at floor level and where microbes
microbes eat the organics and
grow and multiply. Additionally
more air is supplied to grow a set
of microbes which convert NH4 to
N 03 (ammonia to nitrate) Part of Sludge to city
microbes solid wastes
recycled or farm
back here
Raw sewage
--------
Here the microbes are exposed to the raw sewage for their food but air is not
supplied so that the microbes reduce the N 0 3 to N2 gas and use that oxygen and
nitrogen gas is released to atmosphere, a process that is called denitrification and
the remaining BOD part is sent to the aeration tank.
Figure 5.39 Schematic of biological nitrification-denitrification in activated sludge process
Internal MLSS
Return
A noxic Aeration S econdary

Tank Tank C larifier
Return Sludge in Excess

W
need of Oxygen Sludge
Figure 5.40 Flow routing in Activated Sludge Biological Nitrification-Denitrification process
5.8.1.7.8 Phosphorous Removal
The consciousness to restrict the phosphorous in the treated sewage before discharge into the
environment to curtail eutrophication is being recognized. The phosphorous can be removed
by a process called as the luxury uptake. There are at least six different variations of these
processes which have all been developed in advanced countries and every situation will need a
separate evaluation and validation.
5 - 75
An alternative process is to introduce a chemical precipitation either in the secondary clarifier or as

a separate tertiary stage where phosphorous is precipitated by coagulating with Ferric or Aluminium
salts. There is also another technology of high Lime followed by acidification or carbonation whereby
in addition to phosphorous removal, colour, heavy metals, fluorides, silica and magnesium can also
be simultaneously removed. It is necessary to conduct lab studies to establish the efficiency and the
type of chemicals.
5.8.1.7.9 Aerated Lagoons
Aerated lagoons are generally provided in the form of simple earthen basins with inlet at one end
and outlet at the other to enable the sewage to flow through while aeration is usually provided by
mechanical means to stabilize the organic matter. The major difference between activated sludge
systems and aerated lagoons is that in the latter, settling tanks and sludge recirculation are absent.
Aerated lagoons are of two principal types depending on how the microbial mass of solids in the
system is handled. Facultative Aerated Lagoons are those in which some solids may leave with the
effluent stream and some settle down in the lagoon since aeration power input is just enough for
oxygenation and not for keeping all solids in suspension. As the lower part of such lagoons may be
anoxic or anaerobic while the upper layers are aerobic, the term facultative is used. Appendix A.5.13
presents an illustrative design of facultative aerated lagoon.
Aerobic Lagoons, on the other hand, are fully aerobic from top to bottom as the aeration power
input is sufficiently high to keep all the solids in suspension besides meeting the oxygenation needs
of the system. No settlement occurs in such lagoons and under equilibrium conditions the new
(microbial) solids produced in the system equal the solids leaving the system. Thus, the solids
concentration in the effluent is relatively high and some further treatment is generally provided
after such lagoons. If the effluent is settled and the sludge recycled, the aerobic lagoon, in fact,
becomes an activated sludge or extended aeration type lagoon. A few typical characteristics of the
above types of lagoons are given in Table 5.12.
Table 5.12 Some Characteristics of Aerated Lagoons
Facultative Extended
Fully
No. Characteristics Aerated Aeration System
Aerobic
Lagoons (for comparison)
1. Detention time, days 3 -5 2 -3 0.5-1.0
2. Depth, m 2.5-5.0 2.5-4.0 2.5-4.0
3. Land required, m2/person 0. 15- 0. 30 0 . 1 0 - 0 .2 0
4. BOO removal efficiency % 80-90 50-60 95-98
5. Overall BOD removal rate, K (A) 0 .6 - 0 .8 1-1.5 20-30
6. Suspended solids in lagoon, mg/l 40-150 150 - 3 5 0 3, 000- 5, 000
7. VSS/SS 0 .6 0 .8 0. 6
8. Desirable power level (B) 0.75 2.75-6.0 15-18

9 Power requirement, kWh/person/year 12 -1 5 12 -1 4 16-20
Source: CPHEEO,1993
(A) Per day at 20 degree C for soluble BOD only; (B)-in watts per cum of lagoon volume
5 - 76
Facultative type aerated lagoons have been more commonly used the world over because of
their simplicity in operation and minimum need of machinery. They are often referred to simply
as aerated lagoons. Their original use came as a means of upgrading overloaded oxidation
ponds in some countries without adding to the land requirement. In fact, much less land is required
compared to oxidation ponds.
In earlier times the design of aerated lagoons was often done using simple thumb-rules of detention
time and power per capita. However, over the years it has come to be recognized that lagoons being
large bodies of water are subject to seasonal temperature effects and flow mixing conditions. Flow
conditions in aerated lagoons are neither ideal complete-mixing nor ideal plug-flow in nature. They
are dependent on lagoon geometry and are better described by dispersed flow models of the type
given by Wehner and Wilhem for first-order kinetics and hence the design procedure given below
takes treatability of the waste, temperature and mixing conditions into account. Fully aerobic lagoons
always have a complete-mixing regime and a slightly different mode of design is followed. However,
as aerobic lagoons have not yet been built in India (except one case) further discussion is limited to
facultative aerated lagoons only.
5.8.1.7.10 Design Variables
For facultative aerated lagoons, the dispersed flow model just referred to gives the relation between
influent and effluent substrate concentrations, S 0 and S, respectively and other variables such as the
nature of the waste, the detention time and the mixing conditions, as shown in the following equation.
d \ dispersion num ber (dim ensionless)
where,
2
D : Axial dispersion coefficient (length /time)
L: Length of axial travel path
Q: Theoretical detention time. (Volume/Flow rate)
U: Velocity of flow through lagoon (length/time)
K: Substrate removal rate in lagoon (time-1)
SQ & S : Initial and final substrate concentrations (mass/volume)
A graphical solution of the above equation is shown in Figure 5.41 (overleaf) from which it is seen that
prior knowledge of the substrate removal rate K as well as of the mixing condition likely to prevail in
a lagoon is necessary to determine the efficiency of BOD removal at selected detention time. This is
discussed further.
5 - 77
50 40 30 20 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
PERCENT REMAINING (%)
50 60 70 80 _r" 909192 93 94 9 5 96 97 98 99
PERCENT REMOVED (%)
Figure 5.41 Substrate removal efficiency using the dispersed flow model (Wehner - Wilhem equation)
5.8.1.7.11 Mixing Conditions
The mixing conditions in a lagoon are reflected by the term d which is known as the Dispersion
Number and equals (D/UL) or (D/L2). It is affected by various factors. Observed results have
shown the (D/UL) values to be in the approximate range given in Table 5.13 (overleaf) for different
length-width ratios of lagoons. By suitable choice of a lagoons geometry one can promote either
more plug flow or more complete mixing type of conditions. In case of cells in series, each cell may
be well mixed with value of D/UL approaching 3.0 or 4.0 but overall the arrangements would give a
relatively plug-flow type arrangement.
5 - 78
Table 5.13 Likely Values of Dispersion Numbers D/UL at Different Length -W idth Ratios
Approximate range of
Aerated Lagoon Typical mixing condition
D/UL values
Length to width ratio 1:1 to 4:1 3.0 to 4.0 and over Well mixed
Length to width ratio 8:1 or more 0 .2 - 0 .6 Approaching plug flow
Two or Three cells in series 0 .2 - 0 .6 (overall) - do-
The values of D/UL can be determined by conducting dye (tracer) tests on existing units
using well-known methods, but where D/UL values are required for design purposes prior to
construction; they can be estimated either from lab-scale models or by using empirical
equations. Low values of D/UL signify plug flow conditions and generally give higher
efficiencies of substrate removal whereas the converse is the case with higher values of D/UL.
However, process efficiency is not the only consideration; process stability under fluctuating inflow
quality and quantity conditions, has also to be kept in view. For municipal or domestic sewage,
relatively plug flow type conditions (i.e. low values of D/UL) are preferred. In case of industrial wastes,
relatively well mixed condition may be preferred (i.e. higher values D/UL) depending upon the
nature of the industrial waste; the greater the fluctuations in quality and quantity of industrial wastes,
the greater the advantage in adopting well-mixed conditions. Figure 5.42 gives some examples of
different types of arrangements using baffles or cells in series.
Figure 5.42 Estimated Effect of Lagoon Geometry D/UL
Lagoons are generally rectangular though it is not particularly essential. Natural land contours
may be followed to the extent possible to save on earthwork. Lagoon units may be built with
different length-width ratios and arrangement of internal baffles to promote desired mixing conditions.
Lagoons may also be provided as two or three stage systems with the subsequent units placed at a
lower level than the first if desired.
5 - 79
The construction techniques for aerated lagoons are similar to those used in case of oxidation
ponds with earthen embankments. Pitching of the embankment is desirable to protect it against
erosion. In cases where soil percolation is expected, suitable lining may have to be provided to
maintain the design level in the lagoon and avoid ground water pollution.
5.8.1.7.12 Substrate Removal Rates
As shown in Table 5-12 for facultative aerated lagoons the overall substrate removal rate K
for sewage varies from 0.6-0.8 per day (soluble BOD basis) at 20C. At other temperatures in
lagoons the values are obtained from:
The temperature in a lagoon TL is estimated from the following equation:
Where
0 = detention time in days,
h = depth of lagoon in meters,

T. and T are the temperatures (C) of influent sewage and ambient air respectively and
i a
f = the heat transfer coefficient for aerated lagoons which is 0.49 m/day.
The average winter month temperature is critical for determining the detention time required.
As stated earlier, the detention time to be provided in a lagoon can be determined from
Equation (5.32) or Figure 5.42 for any desired efficiency for the computed temperature and mixing
conditions in the lagoon.
5.8.1.7.13 Power Level
The power input in facultative aerated lagoons has to be adequate only to diffuse dissolved oxygen
uniformly in the system and no effort is made to keep the solids in suspension. Hence, a minimum
power level of 0.75 watts per cum lagoon volume should be adequate, but this should be checked
with the aeration equipment supplier for its oxygenation characteristics and compatibility with
proposed depth and shape of lagoon. For treating sewage the power requirement varies from
12 to 15 kWh/person/year or 2 to 2.5 HP per 1,000 population equivalent.
The oxygenation capacity of aerators is reported to range from 1.87 to 2.0 kg Oxygen/kWh at
standard conditions for power delivered at shaft. Spacing of aerators should be adequate for
uniform aeration all over the lagoon area without much overlap of the circle of influence of
adjoining aerators as specified by the manufacturers. A minimum of two aerators would be
desirable to provide the required make up for the total power requirement.
5 - 80
Aerators ranging from 3 HP to 75 HP are now readily available in the country. They can be either
floating or fixed type. Floating aerators are mounted on pontoons which should be corrosion-free
and which have the advantage of being able to adjust themselves to actual levels obtaining in the
lagoons due to seepage and / or fluctuating inflows. Fixed aerators are mounted on columns and
levelled with regard to the outlet weir level to ensure required submergence.
5.8.1.7.14 Effluent Characteristics
The effluent is generally made to flow over an outlet weir. As the concentration of solids passing
out in the effluent may be nearly the same as that in the lagoon, the BOD corresponding to the
volatile fraction of these solids (assumed as 0.77 mg per mg VSS in effluent) should be added to
the value of the soluble BOD, obtained by use of Equation (5.32) or Figure 5-41. Thus, the final
effluent BOD is given by:
Final BOD, mg/l = Soluble BOD, mg/l + (0.77) (VSS in effluent), mg/l (5.35)
It is because of the suspended solids (expected to range from 40 to 60 mg/l in case of sewage in
the final effluent that the total effluent BOD is difficult to reduce below 30-40 mg/l in winter. At other
times of the year BOD of less than 30 mg/l may be possible. This range of BOD is more than
adequate for irrigation purposes. For river discharge, the applicable standards should be
ascertained and design made accordingly, Where necessary, further reduction of BOD can be
achieved either by a small increase in detention time or by more efficient interception of solids
flowing out (e.g. deeper baffle plate ahead of outlet weir) or by provision of an additional treatment
unit. Nitrification is not likely to occur in aerated lagoons, Coliform removal shows considerable
seasonal variation (60 - 90% removal).
5.8.1.7.15 Sludge Accumulation
Sludge accumulation occurs at the rate of 0.03 to 0.05 cum per person per year as in the case of
oxidation ponds and is manually removed once in 5-10 years and used as good agricultural soil filler.
The depth of the lagoon may be increased a little to allow for sludge accumulation, if desired.
5.8.1.7.16 Conclusion
The removal efficiencies in terms of power input are comparable to some of the other aerobic
treatment methods seen earlier in this chapter but the greatest advantage with aerated lagoons lies
in their simplicity and ruggedness in operation, the only moving piece of equipment being the aerator.
Civil construction is mainly earthwork, and land requirement is not excessive.
5.8.2 Attached Growth Systems
5.8.2.1 Historical Development of Attached Growth in Rock Media Filters
The earliest known attached growth systems were cases of raw sewage cascading over rock
beds in river courses and microbes growing over the rock surfaces thus bringing about a variety
of aerobic metabolism in the upper layers, anaerobic metabolism in the benthic layers and facultative
metabolism in the intermediate sections.
5 - 81
The nearest to this can be seen in Rajneesh Ashram in Pune, where the raw sewage of a nearby
economically weaker section habitation is diverted into a similar manmade cascading nullah and a
light forestry is grown on both sides to encourage evapotranspiration. There are locations where
benches have been put up along the course where people can sit and no foul odour perceptible. At
the end of the nullah, the treated sewage is clear, odourless and colourless and is pumped over a
mini rock built water fall. It is aesthetically a acceptable quality perhaps used downstream for
agriculture and horticulture. Scientific data is not available on actual quality improvement, but is an
accepted solution by the local population in the absence of an organized STP
5.8.2.2 Development of Modern Synthetic Media
The trickling filter and intermittent sand filters are the earliest treatment processes. The trickling
filter media was rock media of about 100 mm to 150 mm stones loosely placed by hand. Design
data were evolved for these trickling filters by compiling the data on their performances especially
in the USA and the famous National Research Council (NRC) and Ten State Standards were purely
mathematical equations of best fit of the data. Eckenfelder Sr and Rankin were some authors
who postulated theoretical approaches and these were used in some situations. However, with
passage of time, the stone media has been given up the world over. In India also, the largest known
installation at Piranha sewage farm has been since converted to ASP. The reasons were mainly the
clogging and choking of the flow channels between the rocks and under drains due to the slow erosion
of the stone and due to microbial corrosion and attrition. Consequently it was needed to physically
remove and repack the whole filter volume of rocks. The rotary reverse je t distributor also created its
own problems due to grit settling in the arm ducts and the turn-table immediately being stuck.
This differential weight crushed the ball race and twisted the ball retainer rings in the turn-table.
This has prompted innovations whereby light weight synthetic media of much higher surface area
per unit volume have come up in the market.
The variations in physical arrangement are:
a) Fixed Film Reactors (FFR) which are attached growth on fixed film on stationary media and the
applied sewage trickles down the exposed surfaces of the media.
b) Submerged Fixed Bed Reactors (SFBR) are attached growth on fixed film on submerged
stationary media in the reactor and sewage flows through the media upward. The commercially
known technologies as Submerged Aeration Fixed Film (SAFF), Rotating Biological Contactor
(RBC), Fixed Bed Biofilm Activated Sludge Process (FBAS), etc., come under this and can again
be either aerobic or anaerobic.
In both these cases, the microbes grow on the surfaces of the media and increase in thickness by
the subsequent microbes adhering on the previous film and once the thickness becomes weighty the
microbial film sloughs off the media and fresh microbes start developing. This is a cyclic process and
the degree of organic matter removal can be intermittently fluctuating.
The advantage of the FFR is that huge liquid retaining reactors like aeration tanks need not be
constructed and the FFR can be designed and constructed as simple silos and save the energy for
mixing the contents.
5 - 82
These have to be structurally designed as liquid retaining structures because; it is necessary to

flush the media periodically when organisms have grown too much and choke the flow pathways. The
flushing is done by filling the entire height of the reactor with sewage after closing the outlet gate and
suddenly draining it by opening the gate.
5.8.2.3 Physical Features
5.8.2.3.1 Shape of Reactors
Reactors may have circular, rectangular or square shape. Fixed nozzles or nozzles mounted on
moveable arms are used for flow distribution. Rectangular square or circular shapes are used and
the circular shape has the advantage of structural economy.
5.8.2.3.2 Provision for Flooding
This is needed in the case of FFR. Provision for intentional flooding and sudden draining of the
reactors is useful for controlling filter flies and ponding. To enable flooding, the reactor walls must
be designed for the internal water pressure and the main collecting channel must be placed
inside the filter and provided with gate valves. An overflow pipe leading from the filter to the main
collecting channel downstream from the gate valve is also necessary. Provision for filter flooding
should always be made in the case of small reactors. Such a provision in large reactors would not
only increase the cost but also cause hydraulic problems with the sudden discharge of large
volumes of sewage when the flooded reactor is drained. In such cases alternate methods are
needed. These can be pumped spray of treated sewage by hosing it and also air scouring
simultaneously from the bottom.
5.8.2.3.3 Side Walls
The side walls of FFR and SFBR shall be RCC or brickwork subject to structural requirements of
water pressure on side walls.
5.8.2.3.4 Floor
The floor is designed to support the under-drainage system and the superimposed filter media. The
usual practice is to provide an RCC slab over a proper levelling course with slope between 0.5%
and 5% towards the main collecting channel. The flatter slopes are used in larger reactors. The floor
shall permit installation of fixed air headers for fixing diffuser elements therein and provision for gate
controlled draining of the reactor.
5.8.2.3.5 Under Drainage System for FFR
5.8.2.3.5.1 Slope of Under Drains
The under drainage system is intended to collect the trickling sewage and sloughed solids
and to convey them to the main collecting channel and to ventilate the media. The under drain
covers the entire floor of the reactor to form a false bottom and consists of drains with semi-circular
or equivalent inverts.
5 - 83
They can be formed of precast vitrified clay or concrete blocks, complete with perforated cover or
they may be formed in-situ with concrete or brick and covered with perforated precast concrete slabs.
The slope of the under drain should be the same as that of the floor. The drains shall be so sized that
flow occupies less than 50% of the vertical cross-sectional area with velocities not less than 0.6 m/s
at average design flow. The cover over the drains shall be perforated to provide a total area of not
less than 15% of the surface area of the filter as inlet openings into the drains. The under drains may
be open at both ends so that they may be inspected easily and flushed out if they become clogged.
5.8.2.3.5.2 Main Collecting Channel
The main collecting channel is provided to carry away the flow from the under drains and to
admit air to the reactor. In a circular reactor, the main channel may be located along the
diameter with a slight offset from the centre. Alternatively the channel may be provided along the
outer periphery of the reactor. If inside the reactor, the channel shall be provided with perforated
covers to enable drainage and ventilation of the reactor media above the channel. The channel
should be extended outside the reactor, both at the upper end and lower ends with vented manholes
to facilitate ventilation and access for cleaning. The channels shall have semi-circular or other
rounded inverts. The velocity in the channels shall not be less than 0.6 m/s for the average hydraulic
loading. The flow shall be only half-depth particularly where recirculation is low. At the peak
instantaneous hydraulic loading, the water level in the channel should not rise above the inverts of
the under drains at their junctions with the channel.
5.8.2.3.5.3 Ventilation
Adequate natural ventilation can be ensured by proper design of the under drains and effluent
channels. For reactors larger than 30 m dia., a peripheral head channel on the inside of the
reactor with vertical vents is desirable to improve ventilation. One m 2 of open grating in ventilating
manholes and vent stacks should be provided for 250 m 2 of reactor area. The vertical vents can also
be used for flushing the under drains. In extremely deep or heavily loaded reactors there may be
some advantage in forced ventilation if it is properly designed, installed and operated. Such a design
should provide for air flow of one m 3/min/m 2 of reactor area in either direction. It may be necessary
during periods of extremely low air temperature to restrict the flow of air through the reactor to keep it
from freezing. However a minimum air flow of 0.1 m 3/min/m 2 of reactor area should be provided.
5.8.2.3.5.4 Reactor Media
The requirements for reactor media are high specific surface area, high percentage of void space,
resistance to abrasion and good structural strength to withstand deformation during placement,
insolubility in sewage and resistance to spalling and flaking. The media shall be of virgin material of
PVC or PE or HDPE. Recycled materials shall not be used.
5.8.2.3.5.5 Synthetic Media
Synthetic reactor media have of late been used successfully in super rate reactors for the
treatment of strong industrial wastes or sewage mixed with strong industrial wastes.
5 - 84
3 2
The hydraulic loading rates are between 40 to 200 m /d/m and organic loading rates between
0.8 to 6.0 kg BOD/d/m . The media consists of interlocking sheets of plastics which are arranged in a
honeycomb fashion to produce a porous and non-clog reactor media. The sheets are corrugated
so that a strong, lightweight media pack is obtained. Reactors as deep as 12 m are reported to
have been used with this type of synthetic media.
5.8.2.3.5.6 Reactor Dosing
In the case of low rate reactors, the minimum flow rate of sewage inflow may not be sufficient to
rotate the distributor and discharge sewage from all nozzles. Hence, when adequate head is available
dosing tank is provided to collect the settled sewage and dose the reactor through a siphon
intermittently. When head is not adequate, a collection well and pump is provided. The dosing
siphons are designed to dose the reactors once in about 5 minutes under average flow
conditions. In the case of high rate reactors, there is no need for the special dosing device since
continuous dosing is possible.
5.8.2.3.5.7 Flow Distribution
Fixed nozzle distributors are not preferred because of the elaborate piping requirement and the
necessity of dosing tanks, siphons or motor operated valves to obtain variable dosing rates.
Moreover, physical access to each nozzle for cleaning requires the operator to walk over the slippery
slime on the media top surfaces which is risky. Among the moving types, the longitudinally travelling
distributors with limit switches at each end is a solution but the inlet arrangements from a fixed
discharge location to the moving off take of the distributor arms is a challenge for design and upkeep
needing bellows etc. The alternative practice is the reverse jet rotary distributors which generate the
propulsion by the reverse jets on opposite diametrical arms, but here again, the problems cited already
in Section 5.8.2.2 are important. The modern method is to facilitate a peripheral electrically operated
drive similar to edge driven bridges of clarifiers and these are commercially available in the country
up to 60 m dia. The central feed pipe to the well of the distributor is generally taken up from below
the reactor floor or just above the under drains and through the reactor media. The pipe should be
designed for a peak velocity of not greater than 2 .0 m/s and an average velocity not less than 1 m/s.
The reaction type rotary distributor consists of a feed column at the centre of the reactor, a turn
table assembly and two or more hollow radial distributor arms with orifices. The turntable should be
provided with anti-tilt devices and arrangements for correcting the alignment to obtain balanced
rotation. The turntable assembly is provided with a mercury or mechanical water seal at its base. The
current trend is to discourage mercury seals because of the chances of causing mercury pollution.
Facilities should be available for draining the central column of the flow distributor for attending to
repairs and maintenance.
The distributor arms are generally two in number and multiples of two are being adopted. When
multiple arms are provided, low flows are distributed through two arms only and as flow increases,
it is distributed by the additional arms. This is achieved by overflows from weirs incorporated in
the central column diverting the higher flows into the additional arms. The peak velocities in the
distributor arms should not exceed 1.2 m/s.
5 - 85
The distributor arms are generally fabricated of steel and are liable to rapid corrosion. They should
be fabricated and bolted together in such lengths as to facilitate dismantling for periodic
repainting of their inside surfaces. The orifices in the distributor arms should be of light weight
aluminium. Spreader plates, preferably of aluminium, should be provided below the orifices to
spread out the discharge. The clearance between the distributor pipe and the top of the reactor
media should be greater than 15 cm.
Distributor arms should have gates at the end for flushing them. At least one end plate should
have arrangement for a je t impinging on the side wall to flush out fly larvae. The distributor arms may
be of constant cross section for small units but in larger units and they are tapered from the centre
towards the end to maintain the minimum velocity required in the arms.
The distribution arrangements should ensure uniform distribution of the sewage over the reactor
surface for which the size and spacing of the orifices in the distributor arms have to be varied
carefully from the centre towards the end. Under average flow conditions, the rate of dosing per unit
area at any one point in a reactor should be within 1 0 % of the calculated average dosing rate per unit
area for the whole reactor. The distributors should also ensure that the entire surface of the reactor is
wetted and no area is left dry.
Reaction type rotary distributors require adequate hydraulic head for operation. The head
required is generally 1 to 1.5 m measured from the centre line of distribution arms to the low water
level in the distribution well or the siphon dosing tank preceding the reactor. Alternatively, the rotary
distributor driven by electric motor may be used and this type is particularly advantageous where
adequate head is not available. The rotary speed shall ensure intervals of successive closings are
between 15 and 20 seconds.
5.8.2.3.5.8 Pumping Arrangements
In a high rate reactor, pumping is required for recirculation. Pumping may also be required for lifting
the reactor effluent to the clarifier or to the next stage reactor. Except in the case of small plants,
recirculation pumps should be installed in multiple units so that the rate of recirculation rate can
he changed as found necessary. Pumps for lifting the flow-through sewage should have adequate
capacity to pump the peak flows through the plant. The pumps should be installed in multiple units to
take care of diurnal variations which will approximately be the same as the sewage inflow to the plant.
It will further be necessary to provide storage in the suction well equal to about 10 min of discharge
capacity of the lowest duty pump. Float control arrangements are desirable in the suction well for
controlling the number of pumps in operation. In all the cases, at least one pump should be provided
extra as a standby. Furthermore, in the case of recirculation pumps, flow measuring and recording
devices are desirable on the discharge line so that a record can be kept of the recirculation flow.
5.8.2.3.5.9 Ponding Problems
Ponding or clogging of the reactor media is one of the important operational problems in these
submerged type reactors. Ponding decreases reactor ventilation, reduces the effective volume of
the reactor and lowers the reactor efficiency. The ponding or clogging is due to excessive organic
loading, inadequate hydraulic loading and inadequate size of media.
5 - 86
The remedies consist of raking or forking the reactor surface, washing the reactor by
applying a high pressure stream of treated sewage at the surface, stopping the distributor to
allow continuous heavy point by point dosing or chlorinating the influent with a dose not
exceeding 5 kg/100 m 2 of reactor area.
Reactor flies pose another serious operational problem. The problem is more intense in the case
of low rate reactors and in high rate reactors, fly breeding occurs mainly on the inside walls of
the reactor. The problem can be reduced by (a) removing excessive biological growth by the
previously discussed methods (b) flooding the reactor for 24 hours at weekly or bi-weekly
intervals, (c) jetting down the inside walls of the reactor with a high pressure hose, (d) chlorinating
the influent (0.5 to 1.0 mg/l) for several hours at one to two week intervals and (e) applying
insecticides. The insecticide should be applied to the reactor side wall surfaces at intervals of
4-6 weeks. Development of resistant strains should be guarded against.
Reactor odour also presents a problem in these reactors. The odours are most serious when
treating septic effluents in low rate reactors. They can be controlled by providing recirculation and
maintaining a well-ventilated reactor.
In conditions of extreme cold weather, ice cover may form on the surface of the bed. Reduction of
the recirculation flow, adjustment of nozzles or construction of wind breakers are methods used to
reduce icing problems.
5.8.2.3.5.10 Multiple Units
In a single stage plant, it is advisable to split the required reactor volume into two or more units so
that when one reactor is taken out of operation for maintenance or repairs, the entire sewage can be
passed through the remaining units, overloading them temporarily. In a two stage plant, if multiple
units are proposed in each stage, the entire sewage may be routed through the remaining units of
the stage when one reactor in that stage is taken out of operation. However, the recirculation flow is
maintained at the original level and operating the stage at a lower recirculation ratio. If, instead, only
one reactor is proposed for each stage a bypass should be provided for each stage. It is customary
in the design of two stage reactors to use two reactors of equal size.
5.8.2.3.5.11 Plant Hydraulics
The feed pipe to the reactor, the distributor, the under drains and the main collection channel should
be designed for the peak instantaneous hydraulic loading on the reactor. In low rate reactors, the
peak loading will be the peak discharging capacity of the dosing siphon or the dosing pump. In
the case of high rate reactors, the peak loading on the reactors will be the sum of the peak rate of
sewage flow and the constant recirculation rate. When multiple units are used for the high rate
reactors in any stage, the hydraulics of the plant should be checked for peak loading with one reactor
out of operation and the entire flow routed through the remaining units. A reduced recirculation ratio
is adopted for this condition to reduce the peak loading and avoid over sizing of the piping.
When multiple units are used care should be taken to ensure that the flow is divided properly
between the reactors.
5 - 87
5.8.2.4 Design Guidelines
Arising from the position that each media manufacturer claim their own values of surface area to unit
volume of their media, the entire design guidelines being specified as a generic guideline for all these
attached growth units becomes a challenge. At the same time, it is necessary not to lose track of the
advantages of this technology. The real problem arises in specifying the estimate cost of these while
initially preparing the same for according the procedural requirements of DPR and technical sanction
for drafting the technical specifications in the tender document.
Until a relative evaluation of the already functioning reactors is completed and a generic set of
design guidelines are formulated on a country basis, the design is best left to the tenderer in so far as
the unit sizing and associated civil mechanical and piping details are concerned.
Tenders can still be invited and decided based on Section 5.19 titled addressing the recent
technologies in choice of STPs.
5.8.3 Treatment Methods using Immobilization Carrier
5.8.3.1 Historical
As an improvement over the attached growth systems, the concept of trapping the microbes into
the attached media without allowing them to slough off and keeping the media itself in fluidized
state and thus improving on the consistency of the organic removal has been developed. This has
been brought under the generic name of immobilized carriers. As otherwise, this technology is also
schematically referred to as Moving bed biofilm reactors (MBBR) or Fluidized aerobic bed (FAB). The
main reason for this technology to be attractive is its ability to reduce the waste sludge volumes.
5.8.3.2 Specific Microbiology
It has been shown that maintaining high biomass concentration and long solids retention time in a
biological reactor can limit the waste sludge production for a given reduction of BOD. This is due
to the higher biomass concentration in the reactor due to the immobilized biomass and hence the
Food/Microorganism ratio going beyond the extended aeration. It is stated that during aeration, the
synthesis and accumulation of readily biodegradable storage compounds are observed and these
can be used for denitrification under starvation conditions.
5.8.3.3 Status
Enhancing active biomass concentration, prolonging the life of immobilized carrier and
improving the stability of immobilized microorganism play important roles in the process efficiency.
The construction, operation, preventing clogging and reducing renewal costs are challenges in the
commercial engineering of this technology. However the fact remains that there are commercially
operating STPs built with this technology in our country using various patented media of the
respective vendors and with their own design criteria. As such, this technology holds the potential of
reducing the footprint of the STP especially in land locked high density urban centres and thus merits
its relative consideration.
5 - 88
5.8.3.4 Physical Features
5.8.3.4.1 Shape of Reactors
Reactors are usually like aeration tanks and the circular shapes find better acceptance due to
reduced civil construction costs and also permitting tall structures as long as air cooled compressors
can be installed to pump the air against such high heads of water column.
5.8.3.4.2 Floor
The floor shall permit installation of fixed air headers for fixing diffuser elements thereon inside the
reactor and provision for gate controlled draining of the reactor.
5.8.3.4.3 Reactor Media
The requirements for reactor media are high specific surface area, high percent void space, resistance
to abrasion or disintegration during placement, insolubility in sewage and resistance to spalling and
flaking. The inbuilt configuration must permit hydraulic self-cleaning of the media itself and thereby
safeguarding the need to take the reactor out of service to attend to cleaning the clogged media.
5.8.3.4.4 Netting to Hold Back Media
This is an important requirement and is usually provided near the top outlet of the treated sewage in
the form of spread out netting across the entire plan area or a netted cowl around the off take of the
inlet pipe. Care is needed periodically to renew these.
5.8.3.4.5 Auxiliary Mixers in the Reactor
The specific gravity of the media shall have to permit its floatation but at the same time the
required value for keeping it submerged. It will be advantageous to install side wall mounted
slow moving propeller blade mixers which can plummet the media downwards and thereby they
can rise back and again be plummeted downward and thus ensure optimum contact between all
media and the sewage.
This will prevent chances of microbes building up on the floor due to lack of transport velocities.
5.8.3.4.6 Multiple Units
The same guidelines as in section 5.8.2 on attached growth systems apply here also.
5.8.3.4.7 Plant Hydraulics
5.8.3.5 Design Guidelines
5 - 89
5.8.4 Stabilization Ponds
5.8.4.1 General
Stabilization ponds are open, flow-through earthen basins designed and constructed to treat
sewage and provide comparatively long detention periods extending from a few to several days.
During this period the organic matter in sewage is stabilized in the pond through a symbiotic
relationship as illustrated in Figure 5.3 earlier. Lightly loaded ponds are also used as a tertiary step
in sewage treatment for polishing of secondary effluents and destruction of coliform organisms and
are called maturation ponds. In warm climate countries, the pond systems are cheaper to construct
and operate compared to conventional methods. They also do not require skilled operational staff
and their performance does not fluctuate from day to day. The only disadvantage of pond systems
is the relatively large land that they require, but this is sometimes over-emphasized. In addition, land
on the outskirts of a growing city can be a worthwhile investment. Pond systems must be considered
as an alternative when treatment of sewage or upgrading of existing facilities are planned and the
life time costs of various other treatment system should be calculated and compared.
5.8.4.2 Classification
5.8.4.2.1 Aerobic
Aerobic ponds are designed to maintain completely aerobic conditions. The ponds are kept
shallow with depth less than 0.5 m and BOD loadings are 40 to120 kg/ha.d. The pond contents may be
periodically mixed by float mounted paddle mixers. Ponds like these give rise to intense algal
growth and have been used only on experimental basis
5.8.4.2.2 Anaerobic
Completely anaerobic ponds are used as pretreatment sometimes for municipal sewage. They
are also used for digestion of STP sludge. Depending on temperature and waste characteristics,
BOD load of 400 to 3000 kg/ha.d and 5 to 50 day detention period would result in 50 to 85% BOD
reduction. Such ponds are constructed with a depth of 2.5 to 5 m to conserve heat and reduce
land area. They have an odour problem due to sulphide gases.
5.8.4.2.3 Facultative
The facultative pond functions aerobically at the surface while anaerobic conditions prevail at the
bottom. The aerobic upper layer oxidizes the sulphide gases and avoid the foul odours. The
treatment effected is comparable to that of conventional secondary treatment processes. The
facultative pond is suited and commonly used and further discussion in this chapter is therefore,
confined to facultative ponds.
5.8.4.3 Mechanism of Purification
The physical, chemical and biological reactions in engineered pond systems are controlled by the
design criteria. The functioning of a facultative stabilization pond and symbiotic relationship in the
pond are shown schematically in Figure 5-3.
5 - 90
Sewage organics are stabilized by both aerobic and anaerobic reactions. In the top aerobic
layer, where oxygen is supplied through algal photosynthesis, the non-settleable and dissolved
organic matter in the incoming sewage is oxidized to carbon dioxide and water. In addition,
some of the end products of partial anaerobic decomposition such as volatile acids and
alcohols, which may permeate to upper layers, are also oxidized aerobically. The settled sludge mass
originating from raw waste and microbial synthesis in the aerobic layer and dissolved and
suspended organics in the bottom layers undergo stabilization through conversion to
methane which escapes the pond in form of bubbles. For each kg of BOD-ultimate stabilized in this
manner, 0.25 kg or 0.35 m of methane is formed. Another reaction which sometimes occurs in
the anaerobic layers is conversion of hydrogen sulphide to sulphur by photo-synthetic bacteria; if
present in sufficient numbers they give a distinct pink hue to the pond appearance.
5.8.4.3.1 Aerobic and Anaerobic Reactions
The depth of aerobic layer in a facultative pond is a function of solar radiation, waste characteristics,
loading and temperature. As the organic loading is increased, oxygen production by algae falls short
of the oxygen requirement and the depth of aerobic layer decreases. Oxygen diffusing from top
layers is utilized quickly and completely. Further, there is a decrease in the photo-synthetic activity of
algae because of greater turbidity and inhibitory effect of higher concentration of organic matter.
Gasification of organic matter to methane is carried out in distinct steps of acid production by acid
forming bacteria and acid utilization by methane bacteria. Production of methane is fundamental to
BOD reduction by anaerobic metabolism. If the second step does not proceed satisfactorily there is
an accumulation of organic acids in the pond bottom which diffuses towards the top layers.
Furthermore, under such conditions the pH of the bottom layers may go down. This would result
in complete inhibition of methane bacteria and the pond may turn completely anaerobic due to
accumulation of end products of partial anaerobic decomposition, Imbalance between the activities
of the two sets of microorganisms in a pond may result from two possible reasons. The waste may
contain inhibitory substances which would retard the activity of methane producing organisms
and not affect the activity of acid producers to the same extent. In treatment of sewage such a
condition, however, does not arise. The other reason for the imbalance may be a fall in the
temperature of the pond. The activity of methane bacteria decreases much more rapidly with
decreasing temperature as compared to the acid formers and gas production stops at temperatures
lower than 15C. Thus, year round warm temperatures and sunshine provide an ideal environment
for operation of the facultative stabilization ponds.
5.8.4.3.2 Diurnal Variations
Both the dissolved oxygen and pH of the pond are subject to diurnal variation due to photosynthetic
activity of algae which is related to incident solar radiation. A high dissolved oxygen concentration
up to about 4 times the saturation value may be observed in the afternoon hours. Simultaneously,
the pH value may reach a maximum of 9.0 or more due to the conversion of carbon dioxide to
oxygen. Towards the evening or in the night, when photosynthetic activity decreases or ceases,
there is a gradual decrease in both dissolved oxygen and pH.
5 - 91
In properly designed ponds, the dissolved oxygen does not completely disappear from the
top layers at any time. The increase of pH is beneficial as it increases the die off rate of
faecal bacteria like coliforms.
5.8.4.3.3 Odour Control
In a facultative pond, the nuisance associated with anaerobic reactions is eliminated due to the
presence of oxygen in the top layers. The foul smelling end products of anaerobic degradation
which permeate to the top layers are oxidized in an aerobic environment. Furthermore, due to a
high pH in top layers, compounds such as organic acids and hydrogen sulphide, which would
otherwise volatilize from the surface of the pond and cause odour problems are ionized and
held back in solution.
5.8.4.3.4 Algae
In stabilization ponds, the significant algae are green which include Chlorella, Scenedesumus,
Hydrodictyon Chlamydomonas and Ankistrodesmus and blue-green algae which include
Oscillatoria, Spirulina, Merismopedia and Anacystis. The Chlorella, Scendesmus and Hydrodictyon
possess relatively high oxygen donation capacity per unit weight. However, it is not practical to
promote the growth of any particular type of algae in a pond which will depend on such factors
as temperature, characteristics of the waste and intensity of sunlight. Concentration of algae in a
stabilization pond is usually in the range of 1 0 0 to 2 0 0 mg/l which gives the pond effluent a
typical green colour. Floating blue-green algae mats may develop in ponds during summer months.
They are undesirable since they restrict penetration of sunlight leading to reduction in depth of
aerobic layer. They also encourage insect breeding.
5.8.4.4 Design Considerations
The facultative pond system, though simple to operate, is a complex ecosystem. It is only by
experience and understanding of the reactions that rational criteria are evolved. Appendix A.5.14
presents an illustrative design.
5.8.4.4.1 Areal Organic Loading
The permissible areal organic loading for the pond expressed as kg BOD5/ha.d will depend on the
minimum incidence of sunlight that can be expected at a location and on the percentage of the
influent BOD that would have to be satisfied aerobically. Many different methods have been
developed for determining the permissible area loading and two methods are discussed here, being
(a) The BIS has related the permissible loading to the latitude of the pond location to aerobically
stabilize the organic matter and keep the pond odour free (Refer IS: 5611) and
(b) another based on field experience. The recommended loading rates are in Table 5.14 overleaf.
The values are applicable to towns at sea levels and locales where the sky is clear for nearly 75%
of the days in a year.
5 - 92
Table 5.14 Permissible Organic Loadings at Different Latitudes
Latitude (N) degree Organic loading Kg BOD/ha.d
36 150
32 175
28 200
24 225
20 250
16 275
12 300
8 325
The values of organic loading given in Table 5.14 may be modified for elevations above sea level
by dividing by a factor of (1+0.003 EL) where EL is the elevation of the pond site above MSL in
hundred meters. An increase in the pond area has to be made when the sky is clear for less than
75% of the days. For every 10% decrease in the sky clearance factor below 75%, the pond area
may be increased by 3%.
Another design approach, based on field experience in warm climates relates the permissible
area BOD loading to the ambient temperature on the assumption that temperature would depend
on solar radiation:
where
Lo = design organic load in kg BOD 5 /ha/d and

T = average temperature during coldest month of the year in degree Celsius.
The designs based on the two methods given above, as well as other methods developed empirically,
wherever possible should be checked against field experience in the region. When the ponds are
intended to serve small communities or when they are located close to residences, it will be prudent
to adopt lesser BOD loading to fully ensure absence of odours.
5.8.4.4.2 Detention Time and Hydraulic Flow Regimes
The flow of sewage through a pond can approximate either plug flow or complete mixing, which
are two extreme or ideal conditions. If BOD exertion is described by a first order reaction, the pond
efficiency is given by the equation in the next page:
5 - 93
For Plug flow
(5.37)
For Complete Mixing
(5.38)
L, 1+ K,t
where
L. and Le = influent and effluent BOD respectively,

t = detention time,
K i = BOD reaction rate constant.
The value of K| varies between 0.05 and 0.2 per day and is independent of temperatures
above 15C. The lower values were determined for secondary and tertiary ponds.
In practice the hydraulics lies between the two regimes and is described as dispersed flow.
The efficiency of treatment for different degrees of intermixing, characterized by dispersion
numbers, can be determined as given in Section 5.8.1.7.12 for aerated lagoons. Dispersion numbers
are determined by tracer studies. Dispersion numbers for stabilization ponds vary from 0.3 to 1.0.
Choice of a larger value for dispersion number or assumption of complete mixing would give a
conservative design and is recommended.
5.8.4.4.3 Depth
Shallow depths in facultative ponds will allow the growth of aquatic weeds in the ponds. The optimum
range of depth for facultative ponds is 1.0 - 1.5 m. When depth determined from area and detention
period works out lesser than 1 .0 m, the depth should be increased to 1 .0 m, keeping surface area
unchanged.
5.8.4.4.4 Sludge Accumulation
The rate of sludge accumulation in facultative ponds depends primarily on the suspended
solids concentration in the sewage. It varies from 0.05 to 0.10 m 3/capita/year. A value of
0.07 m 3/capita/year forms a reasonable assumption in design. In multiple cell ponds operated in
series, most of the sludge accumulation will be in the primary cells. Continued sludge accumulation
in ponds over many years will cause (i) sludge carryover into the effluent, (ii) development of aquatic
weeds, and (iii) reduction in pond efficiency due to reduction in the detention period, Facultative
ponds therefore require periodical desludging at intervals ranging from 6 to 12 years.
5.8.4.4.5 Bacterial Reduction
Bacterial reduction in ponds is similar to BOD reduction except the BOD reduction rate constant
is replaced by bacterial die off constant, Kb and inputs and outputs are in terms of bacterial
concentrations Ni and Ne, respectively.
5 - 94
It is customary to use completely mixed conditions when calculating bacterial reduction. This gives
a conservative design. Overall bacterial reduction in n ponds of equal detention time t in series is
given by
(5.39)
A commonly used value of Kb for faecal bacteria at 20C is 2.0 per day. The value of Kb at other
temperatures may be calculated by
(5.40)
* V > = 'sW 1 1 9 ) cr' 20>
where,
K and K are values of the constant at T and at 20C respectively.
5 .8 .4 A 6 Mosquito Aspects
It is popularly believed that ponds will promote the growth of mosquitoes. This is not true. The stages
of growth of mosquitoes are shown in Figure 5.43.
Figure 5.43 Stages of Mosquito growth and Larvae Stage Breathing near Water Surface
It may be seen that the mosquito eggs becomes larvae and they must breathe air to survive. This is
why the larvae generally remain just beneath the surface of the water. There are three broad types
of mosquito larvae like this. These are Anopheles, Aedes and Culex. The Anopheles lay parallel to
the waters surface in order to get a supply of oxygen through a breathing opening. The other two
types have siphon tubes and lay beneath the water surface and the siphon pipe punctures the water
and protrudes into the air. After some days in the larval stage they grow to pupa and then adults.
In a well operated pond free of any weeds, the wind causes the water surface to be continuously
oscillating non-stop. Due to this, raw sewage gets into the breathing system of the larvae and chokes
them. Thus the ponds do not promote mosquitoes. Hence, the pond shall be free of weeds which will
otherwise prevent the oscillation of the water surface.
5 - 95
5.8.4.5 Construction Details
5.8.4.5.1 Site Selection
Facultative pond sites should be located as far away as practicable (at least 200 m) from
habitations or from any area likely to be built up within a reasonable future period. If practicable the
pond should be located such that the direction of prevailing wind is towards uninhabited areas.
The pond location should be downhill of ground water supply source to avoid their chemical or
bacterial pollution. Special attention is required in this regard and in porous soils and in fissured rock
formations. The pond site should not be liable to flooding and the elevation of the site should permit
the pond to discharge the effluent by gravity to the receiving streams. The site should preferably
allow an unobstructed sweep of wind across the pond and open to the sun. Trees should not be
grown in the bunds and for an annular distance of 10 m from the toe of the bunds. Advantages should
be taken of natural depressions while locating the ponds.
5.8.4.5.2 Pre-treatment
Medium screens and grit removal devices shall be provided before facultative ponds.
5.8.4.5.3 Construction in Stages
In cases where the design flow will occur only after a long time, it is important to design facultative
ponds in multiple cells and construct the cells in stages. Otherwise, the small flows in the initial years
may not be able to maintain satisfactory water levels in the ponds. This will cause objectionable weed
growths. The weeds will prevent the water surface from oscillation by wind. Hence mosquitoes can
breed and multiply. Construction in stages will also reduce initial costs and help in planning future
stages based on the performance data of the first stage.
5.8.4.5.4 Multiple Units
Multiple cells are recommended for all except small installations (0.5 ha or less). Multiple cells in
parallel facilitate maintenance as any one unit can be taken out of operation temporarily for
desludging or repairs without upsetting the entire treatment process. The parallel system also
provides better distribution of settled solids. Multiple cells in series decrease dispersion number and
enable better BOD and coliform removal and reduced algal concentration in the effluent. The series
system implies a high BOD loading in the primary cells and to avoid anaerobic conditions in these
cells, they should have 65% to 70% of the total surface area requirements. A parallel series system
possesses the advantages of both parallel and series operations. A convenient arrangement for this
system consists of three cells of equal area, of which two are in parallel and serve as primary ponds
and the third serves as secondary pond in series. Individual cell should not exceed 20 ha in area.
5.8.4.5.5 Pond Shape
The shape should be such that there are no narrow or elongated portions. Rectangular ponds with
length not exceeding three times the width are to be preferred. Maximum basin length of 750 m is
generally adopted. The comers should always be rounded to minimize accumulations of floating
matter and to avoid dead pockets.
5 - 96
5.8.4.5.6 Embankment
Ponds are usually constructed partly in excavation and partly in embankment. The volume of
cutting and the volume of embankment should be balanced to the maximum extent possible in
order to economize construction costs. Embankment materials usually consist of material excavated
from the pond site. The material should be fairly impervious and free of vegetation and debris. The
embankment should be compacted sufficiently. The top, width of the embankment should be at least
1.5 m to facilitate inspection and maintenance. The free board should be at least 0.5 m in ponds
less than 0.5 ha in area. In larger installations, the free board should be designed for the probable
wave heights and should be at least 1.0 m. Embankment slopes should be designed based on the
nature of soil, height of embankment and protection proposed against erosion. Outer slopes are
generally 2.0 to 2.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. Inner slopes are made 1.0 to 1.5 when the face is fully
pitched and flatter and 2.0 to 3.0, when the face is unprotected. Inner slopes should not exceed
4 as flatter slopes create shallow areas conducive to the growth of aquatic weeds. The outer faces
of the embankments should be protected against erosion by turfing. The inner faces should
preferably be completely pitched to eliminate problems of erosion and growth of marginal
vegetation. Pitching may be by rough stone revetment or with plain concrete slabs or flat stones
with adequate gravel backing. When complete pitching is not possible, at least partial pitching from
a height 0.3 m above water line to 0.3 m below water line is necessary and the face above the line
of pitching should be turfed to the top of embankment. A properly constructed pond is shown in
Figure 8.10 in this manual.
5.8.4.5.7 Pond Bottom
The pond bottom should be level, with finished elevations not more than 0.10 m from the average
elevation. The bottom should be cleared of all vegetation and debris. The soil formation of the bottom
should be relatively impervious to avoid excessive liquid losses due to seepage. Where the soil is
loose, it should be well compacted. Gravel and fractured rock areas must be avoided.
5.8.4.5.8 Pond Inlets
The pipeline conveying raw sewage to the pond, whether by gravity or by pumping, should be
terminated in a flow measuring chamber located close to the pond. There should be sufficient fall
from the measuring chamber to the pond surface so that the measuring weir may not be submerged.
If the pond installation is in multiple parallel cells, the measuring chamber should have flow splitting
provision and there should be separate pipeline to each cell. The size of the pipeline may be
designed to maintain an average velocity of 0.3 m/s. The pipeline should be semi-flexible and should
be properly supported inside the pond. In case the pond cell is large, multiple inlets should be
provided along the inlet side of the pond at the rate of one for every 0.5 to 1.0 hectare of pond area.
This requirement applies also to outlets. In case the pond is small, a single inlet and a single outlet
will be sufficient. The inlets in the pond shall be so located as to avoid short-circuiting of flow to the
outlets. The inlets should not be upwind of the outlets and should be extended into the pond for
one-third to one-fourth the pond length or 15 to 20 m, whichever is less. The discharge may be
horizontal and at half depth. A concrete apron of adequate size should be provided under the
discharge to prevent erosion of pond bottom, especially when the pond is being filled up.
5 - 97
5.8.4.5.9 Pond Outlets
Multiple outlets are desirable except in small ponds and may be provided at the same rate as for
inlets, one for every 0.5 ha pond area. The outlets should be so located with reference to the inlets as
to avoid short-circuiting. The outlet, structures may consist either of pipes projecting into the ponds
or weir boxes. In the former case vertical tees and in the latter case hanging baffles submerged to
a depth of 0.25 m below the wafer surface should be provided to ensure that floating algal scum is
not drawn along with the effluent. When the outlet structure is a weir box, it is desirable to provide
adjustable weir plates so that the operating depth in the pond can be altered if required. Where the
pond effluent is to be used for farming and involves pumping, the outlet pipe should be led to a sump
of adequate capacity (30 minutes at the rate of pumping). All piping should be provided with suitable
valves to facilitate operation and maintenance.
5.8.4.5.10 Pond Interconnections
Pond interconnections are required when ponds are designed in multiple cells in series. These
interconnections should be such that the effluent from one cell withdrawn from the aerobic zone
can he introduced at the bottom of the next cell. Simple interconnections may be formed by pipes
laid through the separating embankments. At their upstream ends, the interconnecting pipes should
be submerged about 0.25 m below the water level. The downstream ends may be provided with a
bend, facing downward, to avoid short-circuiting by thermal stratification, care being taken to prevent
erosion of the embankment.
5.8.4.5.11 Other Aspects
Provision should be made for flow measurement both at inlet and outlet of the ponds, wherever
practicable, facilities should be available to drain out the pond completely by gravity through a sluice
arrangement. The pond site should be fenced to prevent entry of cattle and discourage trespassing.
Public warning boards should also be put up near the ponds clearly indicating that the pond is a
sewage treatment facility.
5.8.4.6 Performance
The algae in the pond effluent will exert BOD in the standard laboratory BOD test involving
darkroom incubation and will give high SS values. The BOD and SS values may each be in the
range of 50 to 100 mg/l. However, the effluent will not cause nuisance when disposed of on land or
discharged into receiving waters because the algal cells do not readily decompose or exert oxygen
demand under natural conditions, in fact, the algae increases the oxygen levels in the receiving
water by continued photosynthesis.
Because of the above reasons, the standard BOD and SS tests are not considered useful for
evaluating the quality of facultative pond effluents.
The quality is usually assessed based on the BOD 5 of the filtered effluent, the assumption being that
the suspended solids in the effluent are all algae. The filtration procedure adopted for the test is the
same as for the suspended solids test.
5 - 98
Well designed facultative ponds give about 80% to 90% BOD reduction based on the filtered BOD 5
of the effluent. Facultative ponds also effect high bacterial reduction, the efficiency being particularly
high in multi cell ponds operated in series. Coliform and faecal streptococci removals are as high as
99.99%. Intestinal pathogens belonging to Salmonella and Shigella groups are reportedly eliminated
in stabilization ponds. Cysts of Entamoeba Histolytica and Helminthic larvae are also eliminated.
5.8.4.7 Construction for Filtering Out Algae
The algae flowing out of the pond need not be removed when the treated sewage is used for crop
irrigation. The most appropriate technique for this is a rock filter, which consists of a submerged
porous rock bed within which algae settle out as the effluent flows through. The algae decompose
releasing nutrients which are utilized by bacteria growing on the surface of the rocks. In addition
to algal removal, significant ammonia removal may also take place through the activity of nitrifying
bacteria growing on the surface of the filter medium. The performance depends on loading rate,
temperature and rock size and shape. The permissible loading increases with temperature and in
general an application rate of 1.0 m 3 of pond effluent per m 3 rock bed per day should be used. Rock
size is important, as surface area for microbial film formation increases with decreasing rock size but,
if the rocks are too small, then problems can occur with clogging. Rock size is normally 75 to 100 mm,
with a bed depth of 1.5 to 2.0 m. A typical rock filter is shown in Figure 5.44.
Source. Duncan Mara

Figure 5.44 Rock Filter Installed in the Corner of a Pond at Veneta, Oregon, USA
The effluent should be introduced just below the surface layer because odour problems are
sometimes encountered with cyanobacterial films developing on wet surface rocks exposed to the
light. Construction costs are low and very little maintenance is required, although periodic cleaning to
remove accumulated humus is necessary, but this can be carried out during the cooler months when
algal concentrations are lowest.
5 - 99
5.8.4.8 Applications
The facultative pond is simple and economical to construct. It does not require skilled operation
and is easy to maintain. Properly designed, the pond also gives consistently good performance.
The facultative pond has therefore become very popular for sewage treatment. The method is
suited wherever land is cheap and readily available and may be used for treating sewage either
for discharge into streams or lakes or for use on land. The method is particularly useful for interim
sewage treatment when due to lack of funds or due to meagre flow in the initial stages, it is
considered inexpedient to construct initially the treatment plant envisaged ultimately.
Their performance in terms of pathogen removal and reliability is high. The treated sewage can be
used for agriculture in conformity with the quality stated in Table 7.19. In regard to pisciculture pl
refer to section 4.15 of Part B manual.
5.8.5 Anaerobic Treatment of Sewage
Anaerobic treatment of sewage has a number of advantages over aerobic treatment processes.
These are (a) lesser electrical energy input of the system because oxygen is not required and
hence, aeration is not needed and (b) Methane gas, which has a thermal value is produced from
which electrical energy can be generated, However, there is a disadvantage in that the corrosive
Hydrogen Sulphide gas is produced from the sulphate present in the sewage. Anaerobic digestion
as a unit process in municipal sewage treatment has been in use since the beginning of this century.
It is employed for stabilization of sludge solids from primary and secondary sedimentation tanks
either in closed digesters or open lagoons. Anaerobic lagoons are also used for treatment of industrial
wastes. Conventionally, the anaerobic process is considered a slow process requiring digesters of
large hydraulic retention time (HRT). In recent years a number of high rate systems have been
constructed to treat concentrated liquid industrial wastes and for direct treatment of municipal
sewage. Application of anaerobic treatment technology, for treatment of municipal sewage has
special significance in India because of high-energy savings and low capital and O&M and
renewal and replacement costs. This section briefly reviews various high rate systems and
summarizes the available design criteria. It also lists aspects of anaerobic treatment, which must
be evaluated in the designs.
5.8.5.2 High Rate Anaerobic Systems
High rates of conversion of organics into methane can be obtained by maintaining a high
concentration of microorganisms in a reactor and preventing them from escaping with the
effluent. This concept is expressed as Sludge Retention Time (SRT) and is the ratio of mass of
biological solids in the system to that escaping from the reactor. Maximal SRT is desirable for
process stability, minimal sludge production and minimal reactor volume and thus reduces capital
costs. Other requirements of high rate systems are intimate contact between incoming waste and
the biological solids and maintenance of sufficiently warm temperatures.
Figure 5.45 (overleaf) shows the basic configurations of high rate anaerobic systems.
5 - 100
GAS GAS
-r
RECYCLE
L '-t.'
i.;
(e)
FEED
(d) FLUIDIZED/EXPANDED
BED
GAS
(e) UPFLOW ANAEROBIC

SLUDGE BLANKET
Figure 5.45 Configurations of High Rate Anaerobic Systems
5.8.5.2.1 Anaerobic Contact Process
The Anaerobic Contact process as in Figure 5.45 (a) is a stirred tank reactor in which the biomass
leaving with the reactor effluent is settled in a sedimentation tank and recycled, thus increasing the
SRT. The settling of the anaerobic sludge may at times be a limiting factor. Biomass separation
may be improved using parallel plate separators. The process lends itself to concentrated wastes
containing refractory suspended matter. Continuous and complete mixing in the reactor is not
recommended, since this may adversely affect settling characteristics of the sludge, On the other
hand, inadequate mixing may result in formation of dead zones inside the reactor. This process
has been used for treatment of industrial wastewaters.
5 - 101
5.8.5.2.2 Anaerobic Filter
The Anaerobic Filter as in Figure 5.45 (b) is a tank in which microbial cells are both entrapped as
clumps of cells in the interstices between packing material and as biofilm attached to the surface
of the packing material. The packing or filter media is usually of naturally crushed rock of 15 mm to
25 mm size or consisting of plastic or ceramic material. The filter media should have high specific
surface and porosity to allow for maximum possible film growth and retention of biomass. The
reactor is operated as up flow submerged packed bed reactor. A number of such filters have been
constructed for treatment of low strength wastes such as municipal sewage.
5.8.5.2.3 Anaerobic Fixed Films Reactor
The Anaerobic Fixed Film Reactor as in Figure 5.45 (c) is a tank in which the microbial mass is
immobilized on fixed surfaces in the reactor. It is operated in down flow mode to prevent
accumulation of refractory particulates contained in the influent and sloughed biofilm.
The sloughed biofilm is also discharged with the effluent. The reactor may be operated in either
submerged or non-submerged condition. The reactor packing is usually of modular construction
consisting of plastic sheets providing a high void ratio. Such reactors have been constructed to treat
high strength wastes.
5.8.5.2.4 Fluidized and Expanded Bed Reactor
The Fluidized Bed reactor as in Figure 5.45 (d) is a tank which incorporates an up flow reactor partly
filled with sand or a low density carrier such as coal or plastic beads. A very large surface area is
provided by the carrier material for growth of biofilm. The system readily allows passage of
particulates, which could plug a packed bed, but requires energy for fluidization. Expanded Bed (EB)
reactors do not aim at complete fluidization and use a lower up flow velocity resulting in lesser energy
requirement. These reactors can be used for treatment of municipal sewage as well.
5.8.5.2.5 Up flow Anaerobic Sludge Blanket Reactor
The Up flow Anaerobic Sludge Blanket Reactor (UASB), Figure 5.45 (e), maintains a high
concentration of biomass through formation of highly settleable microbial aggregates. The
sewage flows upwards through a layer of sludge. At the top of the reactor phase, separation between
gas-solid-liquid takes place. Any biomass leaving the reaction zone is directly recirculated from
the settling zone. The process is suitable for both soluble wastes and those containing particulate
matter. The process has been used for treatment of municipal sewage at few locations and hence
limited performance data and experience is available presently.
5.8.5.3 Design and Operational Considerations
Appendix A.5.15 presents an illustrative design of Upflow Anaerobic Sludge Blanket Reactor.
Appendix A.5.16 presents an illustrative design of Anaerobic Filter.
5 - 102
5.8.5.3.1 Organic Load and Sludge Retention Time
It is customary to express the organic matter in sewage in terms of Biochemical Oxygen Demand
(BOD) or Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD). In anaerobic treatment systems, the COD value is
finding greater usage, which lends itself directly to mass balance calculations. Reduction in COD
for municipal sewage would normally correspond to equivalent amount of ultimate BOD reduction.
Table 5.15 summarizes volumetric organic loads used in some of reactors for municipal sewage.
Table 5.15 Organic Loadings and Performance Efficiencies of Some High Rate Anaerobic Reactors
Reactor Type Organic Load kg COD/m3d Efficiency %

k>
CO
AF 65-75
O
UASB 1.0-2.0 50-70
SRT, which is a more rational design parameter, is difficult to calculate for anaerobic reactors. For
anaerobic contact and UASB, it ranges between 15 to 30 days while for other systems it is estimated
to be about 10 0 days or more, giving them greater operational stability.
5.8.5.3.2 Hydraulic Load
For dilute wastes, the minimum HRT at average flow may be 6 to 12 hours for wastes
containing suspended organic matter. In UASB reactors where a settling zone is provided, the
average hydraulic over flow rate should not exceed 1 m/hour for flocculent sludge and 3 m/hour for
granular sludge. The velocity through port between reaction zone and settling zone for the two
types of sludge should not exceed 3 and 12 m/hour respectively. The face velocities depend on the
characteristics of the media used.
5.8.5.3.3 Effect of Temperature
Activity of methanogenic bacteria is strongly influenced by temperature. It approximately

doubles for every 10C rise in temperature in the range of 18 to 38C. However, high micro-organism
concentration in high rate anaerobic reactor compensates the decreased activities of the anaerobic
organisms at lower temperature.
5.8.5.3.4 Excess Sludge Production and Nutrient Requirement
In UASB treatment systems directly treating municipal sewage, the sludge production is reported to
be 0.1 to 0.2 kg dry matter/m 3 sewage treated or 0.4 to 0.7 kg dry matter / kg BOD removed, and
these include both inert matters present in raw sewage and end products of biological synthesis.
The sludge production due to microbial synthesis from anaerobic systems is of the order of 0.01
to 0.1 kg VSS/kg COD removed. The lower values are for systems maintaining high SRT values.
Consequently, the requirement of nitrogen and phosphorus is also low. In addition to nitrogen and
phosphorus, methanogenic bacteria also require iron, cobalt, nickel and sulphide. These elements
are usually present in sewage, but may have to be added if needed.
5 - 103
5.8.5.3.5 Toxicity
Anaerobic bacteria like most micro-organisms can be acclimated to different levels of various
toxicants. However, because of their slow growth rate the acclimatization period may be
comparatively longer. The sewage characteristics should be evaluated for their toxic effects before
anaerobic treatment is adopted.
5.8.5.3.6 Recirculation
Recirculation may be practiced for dilution of incoming waste organic matter and/or biodegradable
toxicants; it also provides flow for fluidization in case of FB/EB reactors. In case of municipal sewage,
no recirculation is required except for fluidization in FB/EB reactors.
5.8.5.3.7 Gas Yield and Utilization
Methane production can be directly related to degree of treatment based on of COD value of
methane produced and COD reduction. Theoretically, 0.35 m 3 methane is produced per kg COD
reduction. Biogas normally contains 65% to 70% methane and 30% to 35% carbon dioxide. Since
for low strength wastes there is considerable throughput of liquid in a high rate anaerobic treatment
system, the gases also escape from the system with the effluent in soluble form. For municipal
sewage, therefore, only 0.15 to 0.2 m 3 methane/kg COD removed may be recovered. Further,
because of considerably higher solubility of carbon dioxide in comparison to methane, the off gas is
enriched in its methane content to about 90%.
The generation of biogas is considered an asset of anaerobic sewage treatment. It is true for
anaerobic digestion of sludge and strong industrial wastes where large amounts of gas may be
generated. However, in the case of "weak municipal sewage the recovery is less. Furthermore, for
financial viability there should be an opportunity for utilization of the gas. Direct use of biogas in boiler
houses in industries, utilization in institutions or in households is a more attractive option compared to
generation of electricity which requires greater initial investment and operational and maintenance cost.
5.8.5.4 Pre-Treatment
Screening and grit removal are commonly used pre-treatment unit operations before direct anaerobic
treatment.
5.8.5.5 Effluent Quality and Post Treatment
In the case of treatment of municipal sewage, the effluent BOD can be expected to be about 50
mg/l assuming influent BOD of 200 mg/l. For concentrated wastes, the BOD concentration would be
higher. Depending on the situation, one or more of the following post-treatment operations may be
considered:
i) Holding pond of one day detention time followed by Fish pond/aqua culture pond
ii) Aerobic treatment (aerated lagoons, oxidation pond, etc.)
iii) Tertiary chemical treatment processes
5 - 104
5.8.5.6 Choice of Process
In general, anaerobic treatment does not produce the treated sewage quality fit for discharge for any
of the receiving environments and invariably a downstream aerobic treatment is needed. Further,
the generation of foul odours as sulphide and potential methane which can ignite and are relevant.
These are the experiences with UASB plants adapted for sewage in India have also not been greatly
enthusing. As such, the following recommendations are made out.
a) Where facultative ponds are proposed, anaerobic ponds may be used as pre-treatment to
reduce the land area of the downstream facultative pond and if feasible the methane gas can be
collected by a synthetic gas dome and used if necessary after sulphide stripping.
b) The use of UASB shall be discontinued gradually, over a period of time.
5.8.6 Supplemental Treatment Processes
5.8.6.1 Historical
Historically, the general objective of sewage treatment has been to achieve a BOD of 20 mg/l and
SS of 30 mg/l. With the passage of time, the need to ensure against waterborne pathogen removal
and against eutrophication, the recent STP tenders brought in the additional stipulations to control the
eutrophication of receiving waters and ensuring better removal of waterborne pathogenic organisms
in treated sewage, besides reducing the oil and grease limit to 5 mg/l. These requirements have
necessitated augmentations of conventional secondary treatment and technologies beyond the
secondary treatment and referred to as the tertiary treatment. The technologies are dealt with below.
5.8.6.2 Tertiary Treatment Technologies
By definition, these are removal of constituents beyond the ability of secondary treatment. These are
Chemical Precipitation and Membrane Technologies.
5.8.6.2.1 Chemical Precipitation
This is required to remove the phosphorous for control of eutrophication in receiving waters, salts if
the treated sewage is to be used for industrial purposes and heavy metals. The technology part alone
is dealt with here. The guidelines for these are dealt with in Chapter 7. The precipitation reactions in
water are shown in Table 5.16 (overleaf) for an illustrative composition in water.
If we refer to the Table 5.16 there are five rows for each chemical to be removed. For example, if we
consider the removal of magnesium sulphate, the first row names the chemical being considered, the
second row presents the chemical reaction formula, the third row shows the stoichiometry, the fourth
row shows the actual quantity of the chemical and the quantity of the reactant needed and the fifth
row verifies the stoichiometry of the actual reaction.
The last rows sum up the weight of chemicals added and the weight of chemicals precipitated.
These are theoretical equations and in actual practice, the minimum solubility of each chemical ion
plays a part.
5 - 105
Table 5.16 Illustrative Chemical Water Hardness Precipitation Reactions and Chemical Needs
Precipitation Reactions of M gS0 4 - C aS0 4

M gS0 4 + Ca(OH )2 = Mg(OH) 2 + C aS 0 4
120 74 = 58 + 136
194 = 194
2066 + 1274 = 999 + 2341
3340 = 3340
Precipitation Reactions of MgCI2 - CaCI2
MgCI2 + Ca(OH ) 2 = Mg(OH ) 2 + CaCI2
95 74 = 58 + 111
169 = 169
4253 + 3313 = 2597 + 4969
6410 = 6410
Precipitation Reactions of CaCI2
CaCI2 + Na2C 0 3 = C aC 0 3 + 2NaCI
111 + 106 = 100 + 117
217 = 217
4969 + 4745 = 4477 + 5237
9714 = 9714
Precipitation Reactions of C aS0 4 - Na2S 0 4
C aS 0 4 + Na2C 0 3 = C aC 0 3 + Na2S 0 4
136 106 = 100 + 142
242 = 242
2341+4313=6654 + 5186 = 4893 + 6947
11840 = 11840
Precipitation Reactions of Na2S 0 4 - No further precipitations needed
Na2S 0 4 + BaCI2 = B aS0 4 + 2NaCI
142 208 = 233 + 117
350 = 350
6947 + 10176 = 11399 + 5724
17123 = 17123
Chemicals added
Ca(OH ) 2 = 1274 + 3313 = 4587 (+) Na2C 0 3 = 4745 + 5186 = 9931 (+) BaCI2 = 10176 =
24694 mg/l
Precipitates
C aC 0 3 = 4477 + 4893 = 9370 (+) Mg(OH) 2 = 999 + 2597= 3596 (+) BaS0 4 = 11399 (+) 92
S i0 2= 24457 mg/l
Mass balance becomes 24694 Vs 24457. This yields 99 % and is ok. If decimals are accounted for,
there will be 1 0 0 % balance
5 - 106
For example, the Calcium and Magnesium can never be precipitated all the way down to zero and
there will be a residual of 15 to 20 mg/l remaining as ion in solution. Moreover, the equations are pH
dependant especially for Ca and Mg as shown in Figure 5.46 and Figure 5.47.
High Lime Reaction 2/11
pH 7 9.3 10.5 PH 7
A______ Mg precipitates out. Ca goes into solution
Figure 5.46 Calcium and magnesium solubility with pH variation in water
Carbonate Equilibrium Diagram
3 4 5 6 T 8 9 10 11 12 13
pH @ 25 C
'Carbort Dioxide Bicarbonate nate ---------- Hydrogen Ions ------------Hydroxide .............Sample
Figure 5.47 Calcium carbonate equilibrium at pH variations
5 - 107
An important factor to be considered in applying these equations to sewage is the fact that even a
trace of phosphorous interferes with the precipitation of the compounds of reaction because it coats
these compounds as a slimy layer similar to what occurs when Calcium Phosphate when used to
prevent scale formation in cooling water circuits. Thus, in applying the equations of Table 5-16 to
sewage, it needs to be stressed that the organic matter is to be first removed along with as much
phosphorous in secondary treatment by augmenting the same and then only the hardness removal
by chemical softening has to be thought off.
This again brings in the question of first removing the phosphorous before attempting to remove the
hardness implying a two stage chemical softening. The chemical precipitation of phosphorous is by
the use of Ferric or Aluminium salts.
For each Kg of phosphorous 0.9 kg of Aluminium or 1.8 kg of Iron is needed, showing that the sludge
production is less by half by using Aluminium. The chemical equations are as under
Al2(SO4)3 18H2O+ 2H3PO 4 = 2AlPO 4 + 3H 2SO 4 + 18H2O (5.41)
FeCl3 6 H2O + H2PO4- + 2HCO3- = FePO 4 + 3Cl- + 2CO 2 + 8 H2O (5.42)
Figure 5-48 shows the phosphorus solubility with pH variation in water.
High Lime Reaction 3/11
B______ Phosphate precipitates out
Figure 5.48 Phosphorus solubility with pH variation in water
There are different locations for the addition of the chemical as per various authors. It is added either
in the primary clarifier or the aeration tank or in the tertiary stage as in Figure 5.49 (overleaf). In actual
practice a separate tertiary stage gives more flexibility and control.
5 - 108
Figure 5.49 Optional points of addition of coagulant chemical in STP

for phosphorus precipitation
5 - 109
Another technology is the high Lime followed by carbonation or acidification. In this case, Lime is added
to increase the pH to above 10.5, whereby the Magnesium and Phosphorous are precipitated and
simultaneously Silica is co-precipitated with Magnesium at 1:5 as ions. At the same time, by providing
a contact period of minimum 45 minutes the waterborne pathogenic organisms are rendered immobile
by a process of solidifying their protoplasm thus killing them. In addition, the trace metals present in
the aqueous medium are precipitated as their oxides, as the pH increases and once precipitated,
they cannot go back into solution. After settling out, pH of the supernatant is carbonated by diffusing
carbon dioxide gas. Two-stage carbonation is preferred. In the first stage, the pH is kept around 9.3 to
bring about maximum precipitation of the dissolved Calcium as the Calcium carbonate. The pH of the
settled overflow is then reduced to around 7 in a separate second stage to dissolve all Calcium as
Calcium bicarbonate. The pH can also be reduced by acidifying, but this will convert the Calcium
to its sulphate or chloride and increase the TDS.
This high Lime and carbonation technology was evolved many decades back and is very useful in
industrial reuse of treated sewage for cooling purposes.
5.8.6.2.2 Membrane Technologies
These are the alternative to removal of hardness, but they result in the removed salts as reject
solution, which will need either an ocean disposal or thermal evaporation. Besides they require
extensive pre-treatment to eliminate suspended solids altogether. The design guidelines for these are
presented in Section 5.18.10.3.
5.9 DISINFECTION FACILITIES
5.9.1 Need for Disinfection
Disinfection of treated sewage may be needed when the receiving water quality may be affected by
the Coliforms after the discharge. A case in point is the documentary of the fate of Coliform organisms
in Indias most revered and most used river Ganga. The habitations supported by this river basin and
its tributaries are shown in Figure 5-50 (overleaf) . The results in Table 5-17 shows the BOD and D O
at the origin, en route and final confluence over a traverse of 2525 km covering 23% of the country
and supporting 43% of its population. Recognizing the seriousness of the pollution, the Ganga Action
Plan was completed between the years 1993 and 2000 for sewering and, STPs for 53 habitations
covering 1000 MLD. The impact was surely felt, but was not complete enough as can be seen from
Table 5.2 read along with Table 5.18.
The point of concern is that despite such massive implementation of sewerage and sewage
treatment, almost all stretches elude their up-gradation to the desired grade of at least C, for the rest of the
2100 km after the initial 400 km.
A more recent ongoing work by the IITs reveals the rather high levels of Total coliforms and Faecal
coliforms along this entire course as in Figure 5.51 and Figure 5.52.
The issues of concern are to be read along with Table 5-17, Table 5.2 and Table 5.18 which
correlates the total coliform limits for the river classifications A to E.
5 - 110
Source: MOEF, 2009
Figure 5.50 The Traverse of Ganga, the Countrys most revered and longest river.
5 - 111
Table 5.17 Variation of data of Ganga River during 1986-2008
S ta n d a rd
1986 1993 2002 2005 2008
No L o ca tio n km V a lu e s
(a) (b) (a) (b) (a) (b) (a) (b) (a) (b) (a) (b)
1 R ish ike sh 0 8.1 1.7 9.0 1.3 8.2 1.2 8.5 1.0 8.1 1.2 5.0 3.0
2 H a rid w a r 30 8.1 1.8 7.2 1.4 7.8 1.7 8.1 1.4 7.9 1.4 5.0 3.0
3 G a rh m u k te s h w a r 175 7.8 2.2 8.5 1.6 7.5 2.1 7.8 2.0 7.8 1.9 5.0 3.0
4 K a n n a u j U /S 430 7.2 5.5 7.2 2.3 7.7 1.2 8.5 1.7 6.5 2.9 5.0 3.0
5 K a n n a u j D /S 433 6.5 5.1 8.4 2.5 6.5 4.2 7.6 4.5 6.2 3.1 5.0 3.0
6 K a n p u r U /S 530 7.2 7.2 7.5 1.9 6.3 3.8 6.2 4.3 4.9 3.4 5.0 3.0
7 K a n p u r D /S 548 6.7 8.6 5.2 24.5 6.7 4.9 4.7 5.4 6.0 4.1 5.0 3.0
8 A lla h a b a d U /S 733 6.4 11.4 6.9 1.8 13.0 8.0 8.5 5.5 8.4 4.8 5.0 3.0
9 A lla h a b a d D /S 743 6.6 15.5 7.2 1.9 8.2 3.8 8.4 3.1 7.7 3.2 5.0 3.0
10 V a ra n a si U /S 908 5.6 10.1 8.2 0.8 10.8 3.0 8.6 2.0 7.5 2.2 5.0 3.0
11 V a ra n a si D /S 916 5.9 10.6 7.6 1.0 7.5 2.5 8.3 2.3 7.3 3.0 5.0 3.0
12 P atn a U/S 1188 8.4 2.0 8.2 1.2 7.1 1.9 7.4 2.0 6.0 1.7 5.0 3.0
13 P atn a D/S 1198 8.1 2.2 8.0 1.5 7.1 2.0 8.0 2.2 5.9 2.4 5.0 3.0
14 R a jm a h a l 1508 7.8 1.8 8.5 0.7 7.9 1.5 7.4 1.8 6.2 2.0 5.0 3.0
15 P alta 2050 7.3 1.0 7.1 0.9 7.3 2.7 7.0 3.0 6.9 2.2 5.0 3.0
16 U lu b e ria 2500 5.8 1.1 6.1 0.9 5.4 1.9 5.4 2.6 5.3 3.6 5.0 3.0
(a) = DO in mg/l, (b) = BOD in mg / 1
Source: MOEF, 2009
5-112
Table 5.18 Classification of Ganga water at various locations according to designated best use
Desired Observed Class

Locations
Class 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2008*
Rishikesh A D B C NA C B
Haridwar B C C C NA C B
Garhmukteshwar B B D NA D NA
Kannauj U/S B D D D D D D
Kannauj D/S B D D D D D D
Kanpur D/S B D NA D D D D
Raibarreilly B D D D NA NA NA
Allahabad U/S B D E D NA NA C
Allahabad D/S B D E D NA NA D
Varanasi U/S B D D D D D
Varanasi D/S E E E E NA NA D
Gazipur B D D D D NA NA
Buxar B D D D D D C
Patna U/S B D D D D D NA
Patna D/S B D D D D D NA
Rajmahal B D D D D D D
Palta B D B NA D D D
Uluberia B D B NA D D D
Critical Parameter
Locations
1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2008*
Rishikesh CF CF CF
Haridwar CF CF CF
Garhm ukteshwar BOD BOD BOD.CF
Kannauj U/S BOD,CF BOD CF CF CF CF
Kannauj D/S BOD,CF BOD CF BOD,CF BOD.CF BOD.CF
Kanpur D/S BOD,CF CF CF CF CF
Raibarreilly CF CF CF
Allahabad U/S BOD,CF CF CF CF,BOD
Allahabad D/S BOD,CF CF CF CF,BOD
Varanasi U/S BOD,CF BOD CF CF BOD.CF
Varanasi D/S DO,BOD,CF DO,BOD BOD BOD.CF
Gazipur BOD,CF BOD BOD CF
Buxar BOD CF CF CF CF CF
Patna U/S CF CF CF CF CF
Patna D/S CF CF CF CF CF
Rajmahal CF CF CF CF CF CF
Palta BOD BOD.CF BOD.CF CF
Uluberia BOD.CF BOD.CF
A- Drinking W ater Source without conventional treatment but alter disinfection

B- Outdoor bathing (Organized)
C- Drinking Water Source with Conventional treatm ent followed by disinfection
D- Propagation of wild life and fisheries
E- Irrigation, industrial cooling and controlled waste disposal
CF-Coliform Indicator Organisms
Source: MOEF, 2009
5 - 113
Fecal Coliform (MPN/100 ml)

(Log scale)
Locations
1986-1990 1991-1995 1996-2000 * 2001-2005 - * - 2 0 0 6 -2 0 1 0
1 Uttarkashi u/s (Bhagirathi) 15 Bijnore u/s (Ganga) 29 D/s Deehaghat 43 Hajipur u/s (River Gandak) 57 Sultanganj d/s
2 Uttarkashi d/s (Bhagirathi) 16 Bijnore d/s (Ganga) 30 Vindhyachal, Pakka Ghat 44 Hajipur d/s (River Gandak) 58 Bhagalpuru/s
3 Devprayag u/s (Bhagirathi) 17 Garhmukteshwar u/s 31 Varanasi u/s 45 Patna u/s 59 Bhagalpurd/s
4 Devprayag u/s (Alaknanda) 18 Garhmukteshwar d/s 32 Dashashawmedh Ghat 46 Patna d/s 60 D/s Champanala
5 Devprayag d/s (Ganga) 19 Anoopshahr u/s (Ganga) 33 D/s at Kaithy 47 Fatuha u/s 61 Kahalgaon u/s
6 Ranipur u/s (Ganga) 20 Anoopshahr d/s (Ganga) 34 Near Malviya Bridge 48 Fatuha d/s 62 Kahalgaon d/s
7 R anipurd/s (Ganga) 21 Fatehgarh u/s 35 Tarighat 49 Barh u/s 63 D/s NTPC Drain
8 Rishikesh u/s 22 Kannauj u/s (a/c with Ramganga & b/c with Kali) 36 Buxar u/s 50 Barh d/s 64 Sahebganj u/s
9 Rishikesh d/s 23 Kannauj d/s (a/c with Kali) 37 Buxar d/s 51 Mokama u/s 65 Sahebganj d/s
10 Haridwar u/s 24 Kanpur u/s (Bithoor) 38 Chapra u/s (Ghaghra) 52 Mokama d/s 66 Rajmahal d/s
11 Har-ki-Paudi 25 Kanpur d/s (Shuklaganj) 39 Chapra d/s (Chapra) 53 D/s Bata - McDowell 67 Berhampore (Middle)
12 Lalta Rao 26 Kanpur d/s (Jane Village) 40 Arrah u/s (River Gangi) 54 Munger u/s 68 Palta (Middle)
13 Dam Kothi 27 Allahbad u/s (Ujahni, Fatehpur) 41 Arrah d/s (River Gangi) 55 Munger d/s 69 Dakshineswar (Middle)
14 Mishrpur 28 Bathing Ghats at Sangam 42 Koliwar (River Sone) 56 Sultanganj u/s 70 Uluberia (Middle)
Figure 5.51 Variation in 5-year average Faecal Coliform at various locations along the Ganga River
5-114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70
Locations
1986-1990 1991-1995 1996-2000 2001-2005 2006-2010 Class A Class B Class C
1 Uttarkashi u/s (Bhagirathi) 15 Bijnore u/s (Ganga) 29 D/s D eehaghat 43 Hajipur u/s (River Gandak) 57 Sultanganj d/s
2 Uttarkashi d/s (Bhagirathi) 16 Bijnore d/s (Ganga) 30 Vindhyachal, Pakka Ghat 44 Hajipur d/s (River Gandak) 58 B hagalpuru/s
3 Devprayag u/s (Bhagirathi) 17 Garhm ukteshwar u/s 31 Varanasi u/s 45 Patna u/s 59 B hagalpurd/s
4 Devprayag u/s (Alaknanda) 18 G arhm ukteshw ard/s 32 Dashashawmedh Ghat 46 Patna d/s 60 D/s Champanala
5 Devprayag d/s (Ganga) 19 A noopshahr u/s (Ganga) 33 D/s at Kaithy 47 Fatuha u/s 61 Kahalgaon u/s
6 Ranipur u/s (Ganga) 20 A noopshahr d/s (Ganga) 34 Near Malviya Bridge 48 Fatuha d/s 62 Kahalgaon d/s
7 R anipurd/s (Ganga) 21 Fatehgarh u/s 35 Tarighat 49 Barh u/s 63 D/s NTPC Drain
8 Rishikesh u/s 22 Kannauj u/s (a/c with Ramganga & b/c with Kali) 36 Buxar u/s 50 Barh d/s 64 Sahebganj u/s
9 Rishikesh d/s 23 Kannauj d/s (a/c with Kali) 37 Buxar d/s 51 Mokama u/s 65 Sahebganj d/s
10 Haridwar u/s 24 Kanpur u/s (Bithoor) 38 Chapra u/s (Ghaghra) 52 Mokama d/s 66 Rajmahal d/s
11 Har-ki-Paudi 25 Kanpur d/s (Shuklaganj) 39 Chapra d/s (Chapra) 53 D/s Bata - McDowell 67 Berhampore (Middle)
12 Lalta Rao 26 Kanpur d/s (Jane Village) 40 Arrah u/s (River Gangi) 54 M unger u/s 68 Palta (Middle)
13 Dam Kothi 27 Allahbad u/s (Ujahni, Fatehpur) 41 Arrah d/s (River Gangi) 55 M unger d/s 69 D akshineswar (Middle)
14 M ishm ur 28 Bathing Ghats at Sangam 42 Koliwar (River Sone) 56 Su Itanganju/s 70 Uluberia (Middle)
Figure 5.52 Variation in 5-year average Total Coliform at various locations along the Ganga River
5-115
Thus, it is to be conceded that once the initial 400 km is traversed, almost the entire remaining
stretch is not fit to the desired classification of at least C water quality. Here is the realistic need for
disinfection of the treated sewage discharges to reverse the trend. Coliform organisms are indicator
organisms for presence of waterborne disease causing organisms like potentially epidemic causing
Cholera, Typhoid, Jaundice, etc. The faecal coliforms are a sub-group within the total coliforms and are a
reinforcing indicator-organisms. The present situation does not portend well for the future of this river.
The origins of faecal coliforms can be only from human activities of improper sewerage and inadequate
sanitation. As such, there arises a need to look into more of coliform aspects and extend beyond the
typical discharge standards of 2 0 mg/l BOD and 30 mg/l of SS when specifying discharge standards
for treated sewage discharging into surface waters, which are to be used as potable water sources.
Reference to Appendix A.2.1 also needs to be recalled in this context of faecal coliforms. The position
in other non-perennial water-courses in the country cannot be anything better.
Recent tenders for STPs are already restricting the Faecal Coliform limit at not over 200/100 ml but the
raw sewage value is in the range of 16,00,000/100 ml. As earlier shown in Table 5.5, the reduction even
in ASP is only about 96%, which means the treated sewage will have 64,000/100 ml, in order to kill the
same and attain the limitation, disinfection of the treated sewage is needed.
5.9.2 Disinfection by Chlorination
This is the most widely used technology in both water supply and sewage treatment. As the treated
sewage is fresh from secondary aerobic biological treatment, the chlorination of such effluents does
not result in hazards. In the case of effluents from anaerobic processes like UASB, the provision of an
aerobic polishing treatment is mandatory before chlorination. The usual dosage used is 10 mg/l and the
flow through detention time in the contact tank is 30 minutes based on average flow. Suitable baffles
are provided in these tanks to maximize the contact. These tanks shall not be covered. This is because
the chlorine gas may permeate into the concrete in the roof and corrode the concrete slab. There is
no way this can be detected periodically. It will be known only when the roof collapses. The worst
situation will be when operators are standing on the roof. Hence, open tanks and free wind
movement must be allowed to blow across the tank. This will also help in detecting excess chlorination.
The residual chlorine after the contact has been generally detected at 1 to 1.5 mg/l at the maximum and
there are no offensive odours arising there from. In actual practice, the dosage can be varied to be in
conformity with faecal coliform limits.
5.9.2.1 De-chlorination
Excess of residual chlorine if any is nullified by dechlorination chemicals like sulphur dioxide
(SO 2) gas or salts as sodium thiosulfate (Na2 S 2 O 3), sodium sulphite (Na2 SO 3 ), sodium bisulfite
(NaHSO 3), sodium metabisulfite (Na2 S 2 O 5), calcium thiosulfate (CaS 2 O 3), ascorbic acid (Vitamin C)
and sodium ascorbate. sodium bisulfite is used by some utilities due to its lower cost and higher rate
of de-chlorination. Sodium sulphite tablets are chosen by utilities due to ease of storage and handling,
and its ease of use for de-chlorinating constant, low flow rate releases. Sodium thiosulfate is used for
de-chlorination since it is less hazardous in handling and consumes less oxygen than sodium bisulfite
and sodium sulphite. Ascorbic acid and sodium ascorbate are used because they do not impact the
D O concentrations. Several chemicals are available for de-chlorination.
5 - 116
Additionally, chemicals such as Sodium Metabisulfite, Sodium Sulphite and Sodium Thiosulfate may
deplete D O of receiving streams under certain circumstances. Sodium Metabisulfite and Ascorbic
acid may decrease the pH of some waters. It is necessary to determine in the laboratory the choice of
the chemical for the given sewage quality and keep stock of the chemical for a demand of at least a
week. The standard engineering procedures for dispensation shall be organized in consultation with the
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) and the recommendations of the authorised supplier.
5.9.3 Ultraviolet Radiation Disinfection
Ultraviolet rays are most commonly produced by a low pressure mercury lamp constructed of
quartz or special glass which is transparent and produces a narrow band of radiation energy at
2537 A0 emitted by the mercury vapour etc. Though this is a standard chemistry, in actual practice, its
efficiency is largely constrained by the requirements of (a) The water to be free from suspended and
colloidal substances causing turbidity, (b) The water does not contain light absorbing substances
such as phenols, ABS and other aromatic compounds, (c) The water is flowing in thin film sheets and
is well mixed and (d) Adequate intensity and time of exposure of UV rays. The advantage of UV is that
exposure is only for short periods, no foreign matter is actually introduced and no toxic and no odour is
produced. Over exposure does not result in any harmful effects. The disadvantages are that no residual
effect is available and there is lack of field test for assessing the treatment efficiency. Moreover, the
equipment needed is expensive.
5.9.4 Ozone Systems
It is a faintly blue gas of pungent odour. Being unstable, it breaks down to normal oxygen and nascent
oxygen. This nascent oxygen is a powerful oxidizing agent and germicidal agent. Ozone is produced by
the corona discharge of high voltage into dry air and being unstable has to be produced on-site. It poses
more superior bactericidal properties than chlorine and is highly effective in removal of tastes, odours,
iron and manganese. As Ozone reacts with chemical impurities prior to attacking the microorganisms,
it produces essentially no disinfectant unless ozone demand of water has been satisfied, but much
more rapid kills are achieved once free ozone residuals are available. Studies have reported 99.99%
kills of E Coliform within less than 100 seconds in the presence of only 10 mg/l of free residual ozone.
Moreover, the efficiency of its disinfection is unaffected by pH or temperature of the water over a wide
range. Among the disadvantages are (a) its high cost of production, (b) its inability to provide residual
protection against recontamination and (c) the compulsion for its generation on-site due to instability.
5.9.5 Relative Aspects of Disinfection Processes
In a recent finding the US Water Environment Federation (WEF) observed that disinfection of
wastewater protects the public from potential exposure to pathogenic microorganisms that would
otherwise be present in wastewater effluent that is discharged into water bodies that may be used
for recreation or drinking water. Wastewater disinfection has traditionally been accomplished
using some form of chlorination. In fact, more than 60% of the 20,000 municipal wastewater treatment
plants in North America use chlorination as the primary method of disinfecting effluent. Although an
effective disinfectant, chlorine (and related compounds) has come under increased scrutiny because of
regulatory, safety and security issues.
5 - 117
An on-going unpublished work observes that after studying the performance of disinfectants of
chlorination, its variants, solar, UV, Ozone and Peracetic acid, the faecal coliform removal was about
the same at up to 4<5 log unit, except in the case of solar where it was up to 2<3 and total coliforms
<1000 for all except UV at <100 and Ozone at < 50.
The occurrence and fate of disinfection by-products and related residuals are not readily available in
validated reportings.
The relative efficiencies of disinfectants vs. their by-products is long engaging the attention
worldwide. Most of the reported works are only in respect of surface waters, ground waters, surface
runoff waters, etc. The findings of these studies do not fully apply to disinfection of treated sewage.
The US-EPA-Design Manual on Municipal Wastewater Disinfection-EPA/625/1-86/021 observes that
even otherwise, the issue of attention has been the disinfection by-products. Though it is contended
that chlorination may result in by-products of Trihalomethanes, it needs to be realized that it is the
case only when chlorination of humic substances takes place and a treated sewage from an aerobic
STP does not have humic substances. Moreover, the inherent alkalinity in sewage curtails on the THM
formation potential because the alkalinity in sewage scavenges any hydroxyl free radicals.
In respect of UV, the distribution of biologically stable water is realized by reducing the AOC
concentration using GAC filtration only after UV disinfection and as such, UV by itself is not a complete
treatment. In respect of Ozonation, the overall effect of ozone on effluent toxicity have found the effects
to be variable as ozonation of secondary sewage can both decrease or increase effluent toxicity.
Considerable research is still needed on the formation of ozone by-products and the effect of ozone on
the treated sewage. It also proposes an approach as in Table 5.19.
Table 5.19 Technical factors and feasibility considerations in disinfectant choice
C hlorine
No. C o n side ra tio ns C hlorine O zone UV
D ioxide
1 F le xibility 2 2 2 2
2 R e liability 1 2 3 2
3 C o m p le xity 2 3 3 2
4 E ffe ctive ne ss 2 1 1 2
5 Need fo r Piloting 1 4 3 3
Rating based on scale o f 1 to 5 w ith 1 indicating best d egree o f co nfid e nce
Source: USEPA-EPA/625/1-86/021
In considering the foregoing in this sub-section, the recommendation of the CPCB in its publication
titled (Performance of Sewage Treatment Plants - Coliform Reduction - CUPS/ 69 /2008-CPCB) that
"one of the best methods of achieving 1 0 0 % faecal microbes removal is coagulation-flocculation
followed by chlorination after secondary treatment appears appropriate as of now, pending more
conclusive publications on other disinfection methods.
5 - 118
5.10 THE ISSUES OF NITROGEN AND PHOSPHORUS
It is to be recognized that large volumes of sewage, which far exceed the treatment capacity of
sewerage systems and the natural capacity of rivers to purify water, are discharged untreated into
rivers untreated. There is thus a serious degradation of the quality of river water, as well as
deterioration of the living conditions in urban areas (Source : JICA Press Release-NR/2007 2 April 2,
2007). An example is the Agra city-water supply project, where ammonia pollution of the Yamuna river
water is attributable to partly treated sewage discharged into it. The proposed treatment is a biological
MBBR and ultra filtration membrane system for biological nitrification-denitrification of the raw water.
By instituting this biological nitrification-denitrification in STPs itself, it is relatively easier to deal with far
less volumes as compared to higher volumes of polluted water in such WTPs.
The nitrogen in sewage consists of organic nitrogen and ammoniacal nitrogen and their sum
total is expressed as Total Kjeldahl nitrogen (TKN). The phosphorous is consisting of dissolved
phosphorus and total phosphorus. The discharge standards permit the TKN at 100 mg/l and dissolved
phosphorous at 5 mg/l. These chemicals are well known to contribute to eutrophication in receiving
waters, especially stagnant ones.
There has been at least one instance in the country in which the uncontrolled sewage nutrients got
accumulated in a downstream impoundment and the drought of that year resulted in high algal growth.
The conventional water treatment plant with coagulation, sand filtration and disinfection could not
remove the algal stench and the colour and the WTP was rejected outright by the population of Hosur
town and water famine loomed large. The ground water was also at least 100 m deep. Emergency
treatment was carried out for removal of nitrogen and phosphorous and algae by high lime and
ammonia stripping followed by carbonation and sand filtration with final chlorination. The WTP was
retrieved and the population was spared of a water chaos. (Source: S Saktheeswaran, 2011) The
eutrophication issue has not assumed such proportions in the other water courses of the country.
However, if biological nitrification-denitrification can be done in STPs, such difficulties will not recur in
the receiving waters.
Biological removal of phosphorous has undergone many advances since the days of Professor
James L Barnard, the father of biological phosphorous removal. It is prudent to adopt such
biological treatments in the STPs along with the traditional BOD removal.
Some of the biological STPs built in India have already established such a performance like the
Koramangala and Chellagatta (K&C) valley STP at Bengaluru, constructed during 2004 under JICA
assistance and some of the recent SBR plants.
5.11 DESIRABLE TREATED SEWAGE QUALITY AND PROCESSES
Considering the foregoing aspects and taking a comprehensive view, it appears necessary to embark
on a set of tougher limitations of BOD, nitrogen and phosphorous especially in respect of treated
sewage discharges into water bodies, which becomes a raw water source for drinking water projects of
downstream habitations.
5 - 119
Kazmi et.al. after studies in respect of removal of coliforms in full-scale activated sludge plants
operating in northern regions of India, concluded that the inter-relationship of BOD and SS with
coliforms manifest.
The improvement of the microbiological quality of sewage could be linked with the removal of SS,
and therefore, SS can serve as a regulatory tool in the absence of an explicit coliforms standard.
(Kazmi et al., 2008).
Hence, it is recommended that the stringent limitations shall be henceforth adopted as

guidelines for treated sewage discharge into surface water which after some travel may join a
drinking water source to be used as source of supply for drinking as given in following Table 5.20
Table 5.20 Recommended Guidelines for Treated Sewage if Discharged into

Surface Water to be used as source of Drinking Water
Parameter MOEF Standards (A) Recommended Values

BOD, mg/L 30 Less than 10
SS, mg/L 100 Less than 10
TN, mg/L 100 Less than 10
Dissolved P, mg/L 5 Less than 2
Faecal Coliforms, MPN/100 ml. Not specified Less than 230
(A) General Standards, Environmental Protection Rule, 1986 & as authorised by PCB
In order to achieve this, the treatment process would need to be designed for nutrient removal in
addition to the conventional BOD and SS removal.
It has also been reported that if the nutrients were removed to the levels mentioned in Table 5.20, then
the amount of chlorine required for disinfection would be less at about 5 mg/l.
However, the central and local regulatory agencies / bodies can set the discharge standards as
felt appropriate.
Disinfection as in Section 5.9 will be required to achieve the Faecal Coliform (FC) limit. The following
treatment processes shown in Figure 5.53 (overleaf) could be used for achieving nutrient removal.
If effluent BOD and SS of less than 10 mg/L cannot be achieved by biological processes, then they
shall be followed by chemically enhanced settling process. The option of primary clarification and
anaerobic digestion of sludge and gas recovery can also be considered based on capacity of plant
and actual design values.
It also needs to be mentioned that discharge of treated sewage and untreated sewage mixing is to
be totally avoided and hence interceptor sewers for transportation of the untreated sewage up to the
STP should be practiced.
5 - 120
Case 1: Modified Ludzack Ettinger (MLE) Process with chemical enhanced settling & Chlorination
Case 2: Bardenpho process with Chlorination
Return activated sludge
Case 3: Bardenpho process with Chlorination
Figure 5.53 Nutrient removal processes
5 - 121
5.12 ELECTRICAL AND INSTRUMENTATION
5.12.1 General
The electrical and instrumentation system in a sewage pumping station or sewage treatment plant is
the same as any other system in other infrastructure projects. However, in addition, the following must
be looked into.
a) Corrosive gas: Hydrogen Sulphide is a corrosive gas, which may be present in the air in some
locations like sewage wells, pump dry pits and many of the treatment plant units. This gas can be
more corrosive when humidity is very high like in coastal zones where it can be high. These gases
can attack and damage the electrical contacts, in conductors and switches.
b) Inflammable gas: Methane is an inflammable gas, which may be present in the air in many units of
the sewage pumping stations and treatment plants.
c) Variations of raw sewage flows: This causes the motors and switches to start and stop frequently,
more than the recommended operations.
These needs, along with other general requirements of an electrical system have to be satisfied while
deciding on the rating, sizing and designing of the electrical and instrumentation system.
These can be broadly classified into the following groups;
i) Power receiving and transforming equipment (Substation & Transformers)
ii) Motors and motor controllers (Starters, Cabling, etc.)
iii) Generators for captive / back-up power supply
iv) Uninterruptible power supply for protection and control circuits
v) Instrumentation facilities
vi) Supervisory control and data acquisition system (SCADA)
5.12.2 Power Receiving and Transformation Equipment
Indoor / Outdoor substations are to be provided for higher voltage transformers in the upstream of
indoor switchgear. A typical substation has the following major units.
1. Supply System:
a) Low Tension Supply up to 150 HP (50Hz - 3Phase - 433V between phases)
b) High Tension Supply above 150 HP through Indoor/Outdoor Substation (50 Hz-3Phase-11
KV/22 KV/33 KV in between phases)
2. Lightning arresters
3. Group operated switches (GOS) on both sides of the Circuit Breaker for 1000 KVA and above
4. Circuit Breakers
5 - 122
5. Drop out fuses for outdoor substations
6. Overhead bus bars, conductors and insulators
7. Transformers
8. Current transformer and potential transformer for power measurement
9. Current transformer and potential transformers for protection in substations of above

1000 KVA
10. Fencing and Yard-lighting
11. Earthing
5.12.2.1 Location
The Load switch/Substation is normally located at one end of the plant, preferably in the vicinity of the
largest load centre in the plant and the easy and unhindered accessibility of the power supply agency
should be considered. An overhead line or underground cable from the LT or HT supply system of the
power supply company may have to be brought and terminated at the Load switch/station. In the case
of a sewage treatment plant, normally the raw sewage pumping station is usually the largest power
centre, followed by the aerators/air compressors and recirculation pumps. The substation location is to
be at an elevated place to avoid any flooding risks. Due consideration shall be given to easy entry and
easy exit for vehicles at all times.
5.12.2.2 Rating and Supply Voltage
The rating of transformers is to be worked out by summing up all electrical loads that would work at a
time, and adding a margin to it. The transformer is specified to work at its peak efficiency at about 75%
of its rating so that a cushion is always available for any expansion, temporary loads, starting loads, and
de-rating factors like possibility of higher ambient temperature, altitude, etc. The supply voltage of the
substation will be decided by the total load current and the nearest supply voltage available.
5.12.2.3 Lightning Arresters
These are to be provided at the commencement of a substation conductor to draw away any
power spike due to atmospheric and switching surges, and to protect the downstream equipment. The
lightning arresters are earthed to conduct away the surge currents to the earth via earthing conductors
and through earth pits.
5.12.2.4 Group Operating Switches (GOS)
These are to be provided as isolating facility to major equipment, such as a transformer or HT

switchgear and come in different versions like single throw, double throw, earthed and unearthed for
different applications and at a safe clearance height from the ground. These are made up from three
separate switch units for each of the 3 phases, adding a common operating lever/rod, for operation
from ground level. They are suitable for opening only when there is no load on the downstream side. In
short, the downstream major loads should be switched off before switching off the supply by a GOS and
the GOS should be locked in the open position to enable repair works to be done safely.
5 - 123
5.12.2.5 Circuit Breaker (CB)
These are insisted as an isolating mechanism for stations with transformers above 750 kVA by the
power supply/Inspectorate authorities. However, it is common to provide Circuit Breakers even for
500 kVA transformer substations in the interest of a safe and reliable operation. The main difference
between a GOS and CB is that, while GOS can be operated in the no-load condition only, a CB can be
operated when the station load is on and more importantly, the CB has provision for tripping through a
remote signal. This remote signal is useful for switching off supply when a fault or abnormal condition
is sensed by the electrical metering / protection equipment. For small stations, there will be a single
CB as main switchgear and one or more transformers will have GOS. For large substations there can
be a main and additional transformer control CBs too. The sequence of operation of the CBs in such a
case will be decided by suitably grading the currents at which the switchgear will trip. This is done at the
protective relay taps. The tripping time of CBs is very short and is specified in milliseconds and these
are of several types based on the insulating medium such as oil, vacuum, SF -6 gas, etc. Further, they
are also classified on the voltage class as 3.6 kV, 7.2 kV, 12 kV, 24 kV, 36 kV, 72.4 kV, 123 kV etc.
5.12.2.6 Drop Out Fuses (DOF)
These are a means of protection to a fault current for small transformers up to 500 kVA. They are
to be suspended from the pole and conductor connecting to the transformer primary. When the
current exceeds a specified limit, the fuse wire in it melts and disconnects the supply and at the same
time dropping off indicating the fault. They are normally connected just before the transformer primary
connection. The fuse wires are made of an alloy of lead and tin and with inverse time characteristics.
This means that the higher the short-circuit current, the faster will be the fuse blow-out time.
5.12.2.7 Overhead Bus Bars
These are conductors to carry power from each component to the next component in the power circuit
in an outdoor station. They are to be rated to carry the maximum rated current continuously and the
short-circuit current for a short time without damage.
5.12.2.8 Transformer
This is the most important component in the substation. It receives the electrical power at a higher
voltage and steps it down to a lower service voltage. The transformers have insulating oil in their tanks
where the HT and LT coils are wound around a core. The oil serves as an insulating and a cooling
medium to disperse the heat that is generated during the operation. The oil is in turn cooled by
circulating air around radiator fins. The connections on HT and LT side shall be through overhead
bushings, cable termination or a combination of these. Being a large equipment and not readily
available, it is preferable to have two transformers instead of one in a plant substation. For a standard
ASP of conventional design, the normal power consumption is as in Table 5.21 overleaf.
There are essentially two types of transformers, Oil and Cast Resin. The oil cooled transformers are
covered under IS: 2026 & IEC 60076. The cast resin transformers are covered under IS: 11171. It is an
improved version compared to the oil cooled transformers up to 1600 kVA capacity. They are capable
to withstand mechanical and thermal stresses caused by short circuit currents.
5 - 124
Table 5.21 Requirement of power for different capacities of STP (Activated sludge process)
Modular units Approx.

Power in kVA Recommended
STP Daily
Back-up supply
capacity Energy
Lower Upper (Essential loads, Number of MLD of
MLD consumed
value value max 8 hours), kVA Modules each kWh
2.5 250 250 1 2.5 1 ,2 0 0
5 315 250 2 2.5 2,500
10 400 500 300 2 5 4,800
20 750 900 500 2 10 9,000
30 1250 1500 750 3 10 12,500
40 1500 1750 1000 2 20 16,000
50 2000 2500 1500 2 25 2 0 ,0 0 0
60 2250 2750 1800 3 20 24,500
75 3000 3500 2250 3 25 28,000
Note : The above power considers:
a) A peak load of 200% for 4 hours and 150% for 6 hours
b) A nominal lifting of 6 m at the beginning of process. If additional lifting is required suitable

revision will be required.
Their cores are made with cold-rolled grain-oriented high-grade steel and copper windings. The resin
is filled and cured.
The maintenance is easy due to non existence of transformer oil.
The standard accessories are lifting lugs, mounting channels, Ratings and Diagram Plate. HV
and LV Bushings, Terminal Connectors and Temperature sensing devices etc.
The specifications are:
Frequency 50 Hz,
Primary Voltages: 33000/22000/11000 V;
Secondary Voltages: 230 / 430V;
Tappings: 5% in steps of 2.5% or any % as per site requirement;
Impedance 2% to 5%;
Basic Impulse Levels: 60, 75, 95 or as per requirement.
5 - 125
5.12.2.9 Parallel Operation
More than one transformer can be used in a substation to share the power supply and to keep the
transformer size within handling limits or to act as standby. This is termed as Parallel operation. It is
usual to have two transformers of equal kVA capacity in parallel, where both can share the load, or
one can be on load (on duty) and the second as standby (off duty). Even multiple transformers can
be used, where one group share the load (on duty) at a time and the other group is standby (off duty).
The off duty transformers are kept charged on the primary side and open on the secondary, to avoid
the transformer becoming cold and to ensure that the unit is ready to take on duty at any time. Parallel
operating transformers should have same voltage ratio, compatible vector group and sequence, same
impedance, and usually same rating.
5.12.2.10 Instrument Transformer for Metering
These are used in substations to measure the primary current, voltages and other electrical parameters
and monitoring these parameters gives an indication of the health of the system.
5.12.2.11 Instrument Transformers for Protection
These are used to measure accurately the load and system condition at any time and send
control signals at any preset abnormal condition to annunciate or trip the main switchgear. The proper
functioning of the protective system will save a lot of time, cost and interruptions by pre-empting a
dangerous situation.
5.12.2.12 Substation Fencing and Lighting
Proper fencing with separate entry and exit gates shall be provided to prevent any unauthorised entry
by persons or animals, etc. Usually chain link fencing is sufficient. The gates should always be kept
under lock and the key should be in a prominent place.
5.12.2.13 Earthing and Lightning Protection
These are essential to the substation to safeguard the equipment and operating staff from any
electrical shock. In addition, the earth fault sensing relays act based on the leakage current through the
earth path which should have minimum resistance to current flow at such times. An underground grid
of conducting mat is to be formed in the entire substation area, which is connected to several earth pits
forming a low resistive path to any leakage current. Similarly, the top of the substation structures are to
be connected by a wire grid to intercept lightning strokes and conduct it safely to the ground.
All the above equipments should be provided strictly as per regulations and guidelines under the Indian
Electricity Act 2007, and appropriate power regulations.
5.12.3 Prime Movers - Motors and Motor Controllers
The pumps used in sewerage are driven either by electric motors or by diesel engines.
5 - 126
5.12.3.1 Motors
Electric motors are the most widely used and are mainly of three types, Induction (AC) motors,
synchronous (AC) motors and DC motors. Amongst these, the Induction motors are the most common.
Synchronous motors merit consideration when large HP, low speed motors are required. DC motors
are used occasionally, especially for the speed variation duties.
5.12.3.2 Selection Criteria
The type of motor has to be selected considering various criteria such as the constructional features
desired, environmental conditions, type of duty, simplicity and ruggedness of construction, endurance
life cycle, capital and operating costs.
5.12.3.3 Constructional Features of Induction Motors
The most commonly used induction motors are of Squirrel cage type. Normally, the starting torque
requirement of centrifugal pumps is quite low for which this squirrel cage motors are suitable. Slip ring
or wound-rotor motors are used where required starting torque is high as in positive displacement
pumps or for centrifugal pumps handling thick sludge. The rotor is a circular cylindrical stack of
laminated iron stampings with high magnetic permeability, shorted at both ends by a ring of aluminium
or copper, and the stator is a cage of copper winding. The cage itself is again made of circular stampings
with slots, which are aligned to allow copper winding to be inserted. The insulated windings are grouped
into series and parallel sets based on the design and connected suitably to bring out the terminals.
Normally, six terminals, two for each phase are brought out to the terminal box where the incoming
cable can be connected, to form either STAR or DELTA connection. The rotor is positioned on bearings
to rotate freely within the stator cage.
When the stator core is magnetized due to current flow in the winding a rotating magnetic field is
created which pulls the rotor to rotate, following the rotating field. When power is disconnected, the
stator core loses its magnetism, thereby the rotor stops slowly.
5.12.3.4 Method of Starting
Squirrel cage motors when started direct-on-line (with DOL starters) draw starting current about 6 times
the full load (FL) current and in case of large motors, this could affect the system voltage and other
running loads and may trip the system too.
If the starting current has to be within the regulatory limits specified by the power supply authorities, the
squirrel cage motors shall be provided with a starter, which reduces the starting current.
5.12.3.5 Voltage Ratings
Table 5.22 (overleaf) gives the standard voltages and corresponding range of motor ratings.
For motors of ratings 225 kW and above, where HT voltages are 3.3 KV, 6 .6 KV and 11 KV can be
chosen, the choice shall be made by working out relative economics of investment and running costs,
taking into consideration costs of transformer, motor, switchgear, cables and others.
5 - 127
Table 5.22 General motor ratings for various voltage ranges
Range of Motor rating in kW

Supply Voltage
Minimum Maximum
1 cp AC 230 V 0.3 2.5
3 cp AC 415 V - 250
3.3 KV 225 750
6 .6 KV 400 -
11 KV 600 -
DC 230 V - 150
Source: CPHEEO, 1993 N.B. When no minimum is given, very small motors are feasible.
When no maximum is given very large motors are feasible.
5.12.3.6 Types of Enclosure
The type of enclosure for the motor shall be as in Table 5.23.
Table 5.23 Protective enclosures and types of environment

Enclo-
Type -sure Description of environment
type
Screen-
protected IP. 11 Indoor, clean(dust free) environment
drip proof
Totally Protected against solid objects over 1 mm (tools, wires, and

enclosed, IP.44 small wires), Protection against water sprayed from all directions
air cooled - limited ingress permitted. Indoor, dust-prone areas
Totally Protected against dust limited ingress (no harmful deposit),

Enclosed, IP. 54 Protection against water sprayed from all directions - limited
Fan cooled, ingress permitted.
Protected against dust limited ingress (no harmful deposit),

Outdoor
IP. 55 Protected against low pressure jets of water from all
application
directions - limited ingress.
Submersible Protected against ingress of any dust while exposed and

IP 68
application sewage or sludge while submerged
Source:CPHEEO, 1993
Ingress Protection (IP) ratings are developed by the European Committee for Electro Technical
Standardization (CENELEC)/(NEMA IEC 60529 Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures IP
Code), specify the environmental protection as an IP rating with two numbers where the first digit is the
protection from ingress of solid objects or materials and the second digit is the protection from ingress
of liquids (water).
5 - 128
5.12.3.7 Class of Duty
All motors shall be suitable for continuous duty i.e. class S1 as specified in IS: 325 and additionally, it is
recommended that motors should be suitable for maximum six equally spaced starts per hour and the
motor shall be suitable for at least one hot restart.
5.12.3.8 Insulation
Class B insulation is generally satisfactory, since it permits temperature rise up to 80C. At cool places
having maximum ambient temperature of 30oC or less, motors with Class E insulation can also be
considered. At hot places having maximum ambient temperature of above 40C, motors with Class F
insulation shall be considered. The present practice for HT Motors is to specify with class F (155C)
insulation with temperature limited to Class B (130C).
5.12.3.9 Margin in Brake Kilowatts (BkW)
Motors are rated as per the output shaft horsepower (Brake kilowatts, BKW) but their rating shall be
selected as to provide margins over the BKW required by the pump at its operating point as in Table 5.24.
Table 5.24 Margins for motor-ratings
Required BkW of Pump Multiplying factor to decide motor-rating
Up to 1.5 1.5
1.5 to 3.7 1.4
3.7 to 7.5 1.3
7.5 to 15 1.2
15 to 75 1.15
Above 75 1.1
5.12.3.10 Electrical Switchgear and Control Equipment
The electrical equipment selected shall be adequate, reliable and safe, and the adequacy shall be
determined by the continuous current required for the station-load and the available short-circuit
characteristics of the power supply.
The reliability depends upon the capability of the electrical system to deliver power, when and where
it is required, under normal as well as abnormal conditions.
Safety involves the protection to the plant personnel and the safeguarding of the equipment under
all conditions of O&M.
5 - 129
These three aspects shall not be sacrificed for the sake of initial economy. The electrical system
shall be designed with such flexibility as to permit one or more components to be taken out of service
at any time without interrupting the continuous operation of the station. A proper selection of
voltages in the electrical system is one of the most important decisions that will affect the overall
system-characteristics and the plant-performance. The station bus bar voltage shall be at the level
that is most suitable for the pump-motors, which constitute the major part of the load.
5.12.3.11 Switch Gear
The functions of a switchgear in a power distribution system include normal switching on, normal
switching off, fault-tripping operations and equipment protection. Motor-starting function can
sometimes be vested in the switchgear, but only when the frequency of starting and stopping is low or in
applications where the motors are of such magnitude that no other equipment is suitable.
5.12.3.12 Switchboards
Various configurations of switchboards can be used in sewerage. Due to the distances between
various components, a single switchboard is not feasible. Therefore, a master switchboard, with
about 8 to 10 feeders will be located near the substation. The various feeders shall branch out to
major load-centres in the plant where they will terminate in smaller sub-switchboards. This will help in
suitable grading of fuses and protective relays so that the entire power supply is not interrupted due
to a small fault in a remote section.
5.12.3.13 Starters
A starter for electric motor is a control device to start and stop a motor. The starting, protection during
starting and running, stopping and any operational control during running of the motor are handled
by the motor starter. Since the motor accelerates from zero speed to full speed in a short time, and
sometimes drives a heavy load during starting itself, a proper starting method is required to protect the
motor from electrical and mechanical stresses and possible failure. These can be of different types,
viz., direct on line (DOL), Star-Delta, autotransformer and stator-rotor. Fully automatic starters are pref
erable. The stator rotor starter is meant for slip-ring motor and the others are used for squirrel-cage
motors. A new generation of starters termed soft starters have been developed in the past decade
with either reactance coil, or thyrister circuit to give a smooth ramp of starting torque and limit the
starting current to as low as 3 times the full load current. Such starters put less strain on the motor during
starting and thereby extend the motors life and reduce failure rate and are recommended.
The general guidelines regarding the use of starters for squirrel cage motors are given in Table 5.25
overleaf. Ingress Protection (IP) is applicable for starters too. Outdoor starters such as those for
aerators and raw sewage screens shall be in weatherproof enclosure. Even flameproof enclosure
(IP65) may be required where there could be methane gas exposure, like locations near digesters.
All copper contacts shall be covered with heat shrinkable sleeves or petroleum jelly to protect them
from the corrosive atmosphere prevalent in the STP to protect the copper parts from oxidation and
resultant loose contact and damage to the connections.
5 - 130
Table 5.25 Guidelines for starters for squirrel-cage motors
Percentage
Type of Maximum Ratio of starting torque to
of Voltage
Starter Starting Current locked rotor torques %
Reduction
DOL Nil 6 x FLC 100
Star-delta 58% 2 x FLC 33
Auto-Transformer tap 50% 1.68 x FLC 25
tap 65% 2.7 x FLC 42
tap 80% 4 x FLC 64
Soft Start 40% to 65% 3 x FLC
Variable
40% to 90% 2.5 x FLC to 5 x FLC 2 0 to 80
Frequency Drive
FLC= Full Load Current.
Note: As per torque speed characteristics of the motor, the torque of the motor at the chosen
percentage of reduced voltage shall be adequate to accelerate the pump to the full speed.
The starting torque of a pump is usually low at about 20% to 25% of the full load torque.
Therefore, even a voltage reduction of 60% to 65% during starting can accelerate the pump.
5.12.3.14 Capacitors
The electrical motors are inductive loads, which reduce the power factor. The induction motors work at
a power factor of around 0.84 to 0.87 lag. Many power supply agreements stipulate a minimum power
factor of load to avoid penalty, which is usually in the range of 0.9 lag. Therefore, for improvement of
power factor to acceptable levels, appropriate capacitors shall be provided. Capacitors conforming to
IS: 2834 are static units that can be located in the motor control panel or as a bank for a group of loads,
or even at the substation level. Normally the capacitors are connected at the motor starter or switchgear
so that it will come into the circuit simultaneously with the motor and go off the circuit when the motor
is switched off.
In case of existence of backup power supply, the capacitor bank shall be connected to main Panel
with automatic switching contactors to cut in or cut out capacitor units (APFC). Capacitors are
provided to improve the overall power factor to around 0.97 lag. An improved power factor as near to
unity as possible will reduce the reactive load, which is also otherwise metered as demand charges in
a HT installation.
An overall power factor of unity can also be achieved by sensing HV side power factor and adding
capacitors on the HV side. There shall be HT or LT capacitors based on the operating voltage
of the motors.
5 - 131
5.12.3.15 Speed Control of Motors
The speed of an electric motor is dependent on the supply frequency and the number of magnetic
poles created in the stator winding. It is given by the formula:
N = 120xf/P (5.43)
Where
f= Supply frequency in cycles/second and
P= Number of magnetic poles created in the stator winding.
A normal 4-pole motor runs at a nominal speed of 1500 rpm. By selecting different pairs of poles from
2 to 8 , nominal speeds between 300 rpm and 750 rpm can be obtained.
However, where the process demands a speed variation, variable speed drives are applied whereby the
frequency is varied to change the motor speed. These are also called variable frequency drives (VFDs)
and are made part of the motor starting circuit to act as a starting control and as a speed controller.
Other types of speed control like phase shifting type are also available. In the case of pumps in sewage
duty, the change in plant load over a day may need different flow rate pumps for which variable speed
motors may be considered. Variable speed pumps are efficient where the friction loss component is
dominating as compared to the static lift. In most cases of STPs, the static heads are the dominant
factor since the pipeline lengths are low and this reason combined with the sensitive electronic
equipment associated with the power circuit and the corrosive environment make the application of
variable speed motors for pump application as very few.
The variable flow can be more easily achieved by running one more pump or one less pump. VFDs
are useful to control the speed of the motors controlling the surface aerators, air compressors
or air blowers, as the case may be. This is required to save electrical energy to maintain only the
required dissolved oxygen (DO) level at all times. An instrumentation controlled interactive automation
is advisable in large installations.
5.12.3.16 Cables
The flow of power from transformer to switchgear and from there to starter and to motor and other
related equipment like capacitors are through power cables and Table 5.26 (overleaf) gives
guidance on these.
Consequent to progress in PVC and XLPE cable manufacturing technology, paper insulated,
lead-sheathed, jelly-filled and other forms of cables are now discontinued in general and only PVC for
LT and PVC/XLPE for HT cabling shall be used and are to be of aluminium conductor and armoured to
protect from underground hazards. The size of the cable should be selected such that the total drop in the
voltage when calculated as the product of current and resistance of the cable shall not exceed 3%.
The values of the resistance of the cable are available from the cable-manufacturers.
In selecting the size of the cable, the following points (overleaf) shall be considered.
5 - 132
Table 5.26 Types of cables for different voltages
No Range of Voltage Type of Cable to be used IS Ref.
1 phase - 230 V
1. PVC insulated, PVC Sheathed IS: 1554
3 phase - 415 V
2. Up to 6 .6 KV PVC insulated, PVC Sheathed IS: 1554
XLPE- Cross Linked, Polyethylene

4 11 KV 3 phase IS :7098
insulated, PVC sheathed Cable
5 1 phase - 230 V Paper insulated, lead sheathed IS: 692
a) The current carrying capacity shall be appropriate for the lowest voltage, the lowest power factor
and the worst condition of installation i.e., duct-condition
b) The cable shall also be suitable for carrying the short circuit current for the duration of the fault. The
duration of the fault should preferably be restricted to 0.1 seconds by proper relay setting.
c) Appropriate rating factors shall apply when laid in groups (bunched) and/or laid below ground.
d) For laying cables, IS: 1255 shall be followed.
5.12.3.17 Controls
The controls shall be simple, direct and reliable. Large pumping systems may have controls that
automatically start and stop the pump-units and associated valves and auxiliaries. A proper
hand-operated selector switch may also be provided to avoid over-working of any one pumping unit.
Liquid level controls generally employ floats, ceramic floats being preferred to metal floats as the latter
are affected by the chemical action of the sewage.
All floats are subject to accumulation of grease and scum and shall be periodically revamped.
As a recent development, various other level sensors, such as, ultrasonic type, radar type, capacitance
type, etc., are also being used.
The various functions, which a control-panel has to serve and the corresponding provisions to be
made in the panel are detailed below:
1. For receiving the supply- Circuit breaker or switch and fuse units
2. For distribution- Bus bar, Switch fuses units, Circuit breakers
3. For controls - Starters, Level-sensors, Flow-sensors, Time-delay relays,
4. As protections - Under voltage, over current, earth fault and Motor Protection Relays.
5 - 133
5. For indications and readings Phase indicating lamps, Voltmeters, Ammeters, Frequency
meter, Power factor meter, Temperature scanners. Indicators for state of relays, Indicators for
levels, Indicators of valve positions, if valves are power actuated.
The scope and extent of provisions to be made on the panel would depend upon the size and
importance of the pumping station. The space clearances shall be ensured as per Indian Electricity Act,
rules and regulations.
5.12.3.18 Submersible Pump Motors
The submersible pumps are widely used and are monoblock pump sets with motor enclosed in a
watertight compartment and the submergence in sewage serving the cooling purpose of the motor.
Since the motor casing is continuously cooled by the sewage, the motor can work at higher current
loads without being overheated. The cable connection is also through a watertight gland.
The sewage submersible pump testing shall conform to IS: 9137 and IS: 1520.
The sewage submersible motor test shall conform to IS: 325 and IS: 4029.
Some salient features of submersible sewage pump are listed below:
a) The pumps are provided with maintenance-free anti friction bearings permanently grease-filled to
sustain the axial and radial forces.
b) Impeller is of non-clog design capable of handling unscreened sewage and solids up to 75 mm

size without clogging.
c) The mechanical seals have silicon carbide facing, and are effective in both directions of rotation.
d) The pump has a bolt-free connection facility for easy lifting and lowering. A flanged clamp with a
vertical mating face is fixed to the beginning of delivery pipe at the low level of wet well. The pump
delivery has a corresponding mating clamp with rubber ring on the vertical mating face. When the
pump is lowered, the two mating faces get joined with the rubber ring to seal. Fixed clamp is given
a slight taper as to make the joint water-tight as the pump is fully lowered and its own weight makes
it tightly sealed.
e) All fasteners are of stainless steel.
f) The motor is a class F IP 6 8 protection enclosure with resin-impregnated windings.
g) Normally motors up to 65 kW are dry type with cooling fines and the cooling is effected by the
surrounding fluid being pumped. For higher rated motors in-built closed loop liquid (water glycol
coolant) cooling system are used. A separate impeller mounted on the pump shaft itself shall effect
coolant flow within motor. An in-built heat exchanger without cooling fines, like the cooling jacket
shall be provided for cooling of the coolant by the pumped liquid.
5 - 134
5.12.3.19 Single Line Diagram
A Single Line Diagram (SLD) depicts the power circuit from the supply point to the Switchgear,
and up to the individual equipment. This also indicates the tappings for metering and protection,
Circuit Breakers, Transformers, Generators, indications of where cables are connected, and important
rating/specifications for the power equipment. Several electrical symbols are used in the SLD for
notation of the various power equipment. All the Graphical symbols used for the various electrical
components are standardized through IEC 60617- Graphical symbols for Diagrams which contain
some 1750 symbols. A typical single line diagram is shown in Figure 5-54 overleaf.
5.12.4 Backup Power Supply
All STPs shall be equipped with diesel generators. The rating shall be able to run continuously and
give power supply to all the essential equipment of the plant (e.g., pumps, aerators, laboratory, etc.)
plus lighting and the location shall be as near as possible to the major load centre or near the main LT
panel to which the power will be supplied. The number of units shall be split into two or three generators
instead of one large generator so that in case of requirement during lean load period, only one
generator may be run to cater to the reduced load. Further, any one unit can be taken up for
maintenance without the risk of total absence of standby facility.
Where the raw water pumping or terminal pumping station within the STP is considerably away from
the other power-intensive units, two separate standby power supply systems can also be installed, one
set for the pumping station and connected loads , and another for the rest of the plant. The generator
shall have its own switchboard with an incomer and one or more feeder switches. The incomer shall
receive supply from the generator through an incoming circuit breaker; the feeders will supply power to
the recipient switchboard. This is required to protect the generator from any fault in the recipient load
and protect the downstream load from any abnormal output from the generator.
5.12.4.1 Parallel Operation of Generators
When more than one generator is to be operated to share the load, the units have to be synchronized
before they are allowed to share the load. The synchronization means equal voltage, equal frequency
and equal phase sequence. For this, a synchroscope shall be installed in the generator panel or the
coupling panel, which will indicate the right time to close the circuit breaker.
5.12.4.2 Fuel Storage
Adequate fuel has to be stocked so that the bulk fuel storage normally caters to seven days demand
of fuel. Since the diesel is inflammable, adequate precautions shall be taken for storage, protection
and upkeep of the storage facility.
5.12.4.3 Cost of Captive Power
Larger the generator size, lower is the cost per unit generated. However, larger units also consume
more fuel during idle running. The cost of captive power generation is usually more than the cost of
power obtained from electricity supply company.
5 - 135
LEG END
FROM ESCOM SUPPLY METER
11KV CIRCUIT BREAKER IN KIOSK/PANEL
j 400A ISOLATOR DRAWOUT TYPE CIRCUIT BREAKER

T^ME) ACB - FOUR POLE AIR CIRCUIT BREAKER
SWITCH /ISOLATOR - j_ EARTHED
] 12 KV800AVCB INCOMER
HRC LINK TYPE FUSE T
;0 0 0 ( g )
THREE PHASE POWER TRANSFORMER
INDOOR STATION / i ; OCR,EFR,DIST
OUTDOOR PANEL
CURRENT TRANSFORMER
[ } <1)(12KV800A\ CB FEEDERS) (2) [

VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER
OCR,EFR, Diffl OCR,EFR, Diffl f

CABLE TERMINATION
S:
GENERATOR SUPPLY SPRING RETURN TYPE CONTROL SWITCH WITH
RED, AMBER AND GREEN INDICATING LAMPS.
I ----------1
3C 120 SQMM 6.6 KV X L P E # R C lif" " |
11KV 400A
ISOLATOR
I
|
i
iI

T
" ' T r i
i DIESEL GENERATOR SET
d a c b -e ; _L EARTH CONNECTION
i
IN S T R U M E N T A T IO N
AMMETER

h 3.60^650/1100V AYFY CABLE
VOLTMETER Iv a VOLTMETER SELECTOR SWITCH
(kw ) KILOWATT METER |K W H I KILOWATT HOUR METER
(C O S 0) POWER FACTOR METER @ FREQUENCY METER
RELAYING
27 AC UNDER VOLTAGE RELAY

415V INDOOR MASTER SWITCHBOARD
1. INCOMER BREAKERS A AND B AND BUS SECTION BREAKER C

SHOULD BE PROVIDED WITH CASTLE KEY INTERLOCK TO ALLOW A
MAX OF TWO BREAKERS CLOSED AT A TIME.
2. GRID SYNCHRONIZATION WITH D G SUPPLY IS NOT ENVISAGED.

EITHER GRID SUPPLY ONLY OR D G SUPPLY ONLY WILL HAVE TO
ENERGISE THE MAIN PANEL. APPROPRIATE INTERLOCKS BETWEEN
THE INCOMER ACB TO BE PROVIDED.
3.a) UNDER NORMAL CONDITION, PANEL WILL HAVE INCOMER ACBs A1

AND B CLOSED AND BUS COUPLER ACB C OPEN.
3.b) ON GRID SUPPLY FAILURE, ACBs A' AND 'B' WILL OPEN ON
UNDERVOLTAGE; D G SET WILL START AUTOMATICALLY. ACB 'D' WILL
CLOSE AFTER ENSURING THAT ACB 'A' AND 'B' ARE OPEN.
BUS COUPLER ACB 'C' WILL BE CLOSED MANUALLY. SIMILAR CYCLE
WHEN GRID POWER RETURNS MAY BE DETERMINED.
4. ALL ACBs SHALL BE OF 4-POLE TYPE.
Figure 5.54 Typical Single Line Diagram of 11 KV yard and master L.T. switchboard
5 - 136
On an average, one unit of energy will need between 0.25 to 0.4 litres of diesel, depending on its
size. In addition, the generator also needs lubricating oil, maintenance, etc., and therefore, the use
of generator shall be resorted to, only when necessary.
5.12.4.4 Electricity Room and Generator Room
The Electrical Switchgear room shall be well illuminated and well ventilated. The ceiling height is
stipulated to be at least 1 .8 m above the highest point of the switchgear to the lowest point of the
ceiling. Generally, this is not less than 3.2 m, where use of tripod is not envisaged for moving/
erection of the panels. Even higher levels of ceiling are common to ensure better air ventilation,
natural lighting and equipment handling needs. The clearance between side and rear of panels and
the wall shall be not less than 700 mm in case of LT Panels and 1000 mm in case of HT panels.
Ample space is required to be available in front of panels for operation, monitoring and repairs.
Where draw-out type breakers are employed, the draw-out distance has also to be considered. Entry
of cable ducts to the rooms should be done in such a way as to prevent water entry through the duct.
The duct can be of brickwork with internal plastering and angle supports to keep cables clear of the
duct floor. Multi-tier cable racks are used to lay power and control cables.
Galvanized steel cable trays are also advisable as the ducts are mostly covered and can be
humid due to the low ventilation. Earthing strips from switchgear should be taken through the cable
ducts with clear identification. Battery rooms should be well ventilated with exhaust fan and have
acid-resistant floor and wall tiles. The operators table if located in the switchgear room shall be
strategically located as to facilitate proper supervision.
5.12.4.5 Clearance from Statutory Authorities
For 11 KV and higher voltage substations, clearance to the layout drawings shall be obtained from
The Jurisdictional Electrical Inspector of the Government before commencement of work. The written
concurrence shall have to be obtained from the Electrical inspector again prior to commissioning, for
compliance to the rules and safety aspects.
In case of generators, approval of the location and layout shall be obtained prior to erection and again
before commissioning.
5.12.5 Automatic Mains Failure Panel
Failure of mains supply to the plant can occur at any time. In order to ensure that the treatment
process is not unduly interrupted, an automatic changeover panel is installed. The automatic
changeover panel is also called automatic mains failure panel (AMF) and it ensures that
a) When the main power supply is interrupted, the generator will start automatically after a certain
time lapse to resume power supply to the plant.
b) When the main power supply is back, mains power supply will be resumed instantaneously after
cutting-off the power from the generator. However, the engine should run for some more time on
no load to facilitate the cooling down of the engine.
5 - 137
A set of changeover power contactors are normally employed for transfer of source between Mains
and backup, ensuring that there is no faulty operation. AMF Panels are available from 15 KVA
onwards. For successful operation of AMF Panel, the generator set and its controls have to be in
good working condition, ready to start any time.
5.12.5.1 Sequence of Operation of AMF Panel
The sequence of operation of the AMF panel is described briefly below:
1. The mains supply source, which supplies power to the plant shall be constantly monitored by a
mains voltage monitor. It will also monitor the readiness of the generator to start.
2. When mains voltage fails or drops below 70% to 80% of the rated voltage, the automatic
control system shall give a starting signal to the diesel generator set.
3. The diesel engine will start. Once the diesel generator set reaches its operating speed and the
alternator attains its operating voltage, a change over switching operation will occur through a
set of relays whereby the mains supply switch will open and the backup supply switch will close.
Thus, the load is transferred to the generator set. During this start-up and change over period, for
a short time there will be no power to the plant during this operation.
4. Upon the return of the normal source voltage to the rated voltage or 90% of rated voltage for at
least one minute (or any such stabilizing time), the changeover relays will activate opening of
backup supply switch and closing of mains supply switch. In many cases this is done with such a
short time gap that the plant runs uninterrupted.
5. The diesel engine continues to run on no load for some time. After a time-gap the engine stops.
The automatic control system then resets itself and in readiness to start the engine in the case of
the failure of the normal source.
6 . In the event of failure of the diesel generator set to start/ deliver the power due to faulty starting
within a specified period, there shall be an audio alarm. On hearing the alarm, the situation shall
be investigated and remedial measures shall be taken without any delay. The changeover logic
will be locked not to operate, until the generator problem is set right.
It is inevitable that all the electrical equipment will stop for a short while during the transition from the
mains supply to the generator supply.
By the use of AMF Panel for automatic changeover of supply from grid supply to generator supply
and vice versa, the interruption to operations is minimized. The station operator only needs to restart
the components of the plant during the first changeover, and only monitor the smooth transfer during
the second changeover.
A manual / automatic selection switch is also provided for manual operation in case of any problem.
The safety requirements of AMF panel are furnished in NEMA standard ICSL 2447.
5 - 138
5.12.5.2 Inbuilt Timers for Safety of the Operation
There are various inbuilt timers for the safety of the operation of the AMF. They are
Start Delay or Blackout Timer: Time delay from mains failure to Diesel Genset starting
Warm up Timer: Time delay from Genset running to load transfer on DG supply
Mains Ok Timer: Time delay from mains sensing to load transfer on restoration of mains supply
Cool down Timer: Time delay after load transfer on mains to DG shut down
LOP Bypass Timer: Time delay during which LOP signal is NOT sensed
Fault Relay Timer: Maximum time duration for sounding hooter after fault is sensed (If reset
key is not pressed).
5.12.6 Uninterruptible Power Supply
The uninterruptible power supply (UPS) is an auxiliary piece of equipment, which provides back
up power in electrical circuitry by drawing from a backup rechargeable battery or batteries for
smaller drawals and through diesel driven generators for higher drawals. It is like an ambulance to take
a patient to a hospital with oxygen and drips, etc., during the transit. Modern systems use a
"double conversion method of accepting AC input, rectifying to DC for passing through the
rechargeable battery and then inverting back to AC for powering the protected equipment through a
line-interactive UPS.
Most UPS below 1 kVA rating is line-interactive type where there is an additional multi-tap
variable-voltage autotransformer which can boost or buck the powered coils of wire to regulate the
output voltage fairly steady. However, the battery is charged only in high voltage mode but not in
low voltage mode. For bigger systems, a synchronous motor/alternator can be brought in through
a choke and energy stored in a flywheel. So that when the mains power trips, an eddy-current
regulation maintains the power on the load as long as the energy of the flywheel can withstand.
The UPS can also be combined with a diesel generator to bring on the standby power after a brief
delay and is referred to as DUPS and power during this delay to start the generator supplied by
another UPS. Generally, the local electricity authority has provisions to supply power by a dedicated
feeder instead of supplying the power from a public distribution grid. These feeders are given to
hospitals, water treatment plants and fire fighting services etc., and effort shall be made to draw
power for STPs from such dedicated feeders and have duplicate feeders to ensure that power
supply to the STP is really uninterruptible.
However, for personal computers, SCADA systems, etc., it is necessary to provide an appropriate
line interactive UPS.
In STPs, this type of power back up shall be ensured for at least the biological aeration systems and
the return sludge pumps.
5 - 139
5.12.7 Instrumentation Facilities
The most important instrumentation needed in an STP is for the sensing of dissolved oxygen in
biological aeration tanks to make sure that the microbes do not die off for want of oxygen. This is
measured through a galvanic cell controlled probe principle as in Figure 5-55 and a hand held meter
with a probe as in Figure 5.56 and the probe can also be used in the laboratory in a BOD bottle.
Source: Yokogawa Electric homepage

Figure 5.55 Principle of a dissolved oxygen probe
fi.
Source: M/s YSI catalogue
K
Figure 5.56 Hand held DO meter with probe for field use as well as laboratory use in BOD bottle
5.12.7.1 Principle of Working of DO Probe
When the probe is dipped into the mixed liquor of the aeration tank or into the BOD bottle
containing the sample, the dissolved oxygen permeates through an oxygen permeable membrane
covering the tip of the probe.
5 - 140
Then it enters the electrolytic solution in which an anode (base metal) and cathode (noble metal)
are adjacent to each other, a current proportional to the quantity of DO is generated and is
measured by the electrical circuitry and pre-calibrated to display the DO concentration directly.
5.12.7.2 Advantages and Disadvantages
The advantages are the detecting system is compact and portable with the cable length between
the meter and the probe being available even up to 30 m. The disadvantage is the probe has to be
cleaned almost every week and fresh membrane disc replaced with new electrolyte solution and the
tip of the electrodes gently scraped to remove adhesions and oxidative residues.
5.12.7.3 Standard Procedures
The meter can go on, but the probe needs frequent attention. In the field, the D O can be measured
at any depth and at any co-ordinates of the aeration tank to get an idea of the uniformity of D O and in
case there are very low values in a zone, it may indicate that the air diffusers might have got choked.
In order to do so, the probes can be tied securely to light weight but rigid pipes and immersed at the
chosen location by standing on the platform. However, in the case of aeration tanks using surface
aerators, these should be used only near the sidewalls and floor near the walls as otherwise the cable
may get entwined in the swirl of the mixed liquor and may even draw the operator into the tank.
5.12.7.4 Minimum Velocity
There has to be a velocity of the liquid across the probe surface to induce the required hydraulic shear.
In aeration tanks this is automatically obtained. In BOD bottles, a magnetic stirring glass capsule iron
needle is first dropped into the BOD bottle and the bottle mounted on a magnetic stirrer so that the
liquid inside the bottle is stirred to induce the required velocity. Alternatively self stirring probes are
also available which have a rotating fine brush eccentrically to the probe axis which serves to agitate.
The illustrations are shown in Figure 5.57 and Figure 5.58 overleaf.
Source M/S YSI catalogue
Figure 5-.57 Setup with magnetic mixer and mixed needle for agitation
5 - 141
Source M/S YSI catalogue
Figure 5.58 Eccentric axis self stirring probe with the D O probe to generate velocity in the liquid
5.12.7.5 Slime Build up on Probes in Aeration Tanks
The probe if left into the aeration tank will have a tendency to build the slime onto the probe
membrane and hence the probe has to be taken out and scrubbed gently and put back every day.
This can be got over by using the self-stirring probes as in Figure 5.58
5.12.7.6 Instrumentation
Concerning instrumentation, the D O probe can be fixed at a desired location inside the aeration
tank and the output signal of 4 to 20 mA can be relayed to the meter in the operator room and in turn
can be hooked onto a desktop computer. The DO can be either measured and displayed 24 * 7 or
checked at random by the operator.
5.12.8 Instrumentation Facilities - BOD
There are sophisticated BOD measuring analyzers, which use the principle of measuring the rate
of initial D O depletion for about 10 to 15 minutes inside the BOD bottle. This is done by the D O
probes fixed to the bottle instead of the usual ground glass corks and kept inside the incubator and
thereafter extrapolating the same to the desired conventional 5 days or the recent 3 days while the
incubator maintains the required temperature of 20C or 27C respectively. The extrapolation
software is microprocessor based and is pre-set for a given sewage by initial calibration and
recalibrated as often as needed by correlating with actual BOD values measured after the
5 days and 3 days.
These instruments help in getting a quick idea, instead of waiting for at least 3 days, if there are
problems at the field STP like dropping of DO, poor settling due to sludge bulking requiring immediate
adjustments of ratio of sewage to return sludge, changing excess sludge bleed, etc. These are stated
to be versatile enough for direct field use. The only issue is when procured at a high cost, the repairs
are to be borne by the O&M only and if these are part of 5 year procurement with replacements
included, it may be worth. The portable BOD instrument is shown in Figure 5-59 overleaf.
5.12.9 Instrumentation Facilities - pH
In STPs, it will be useful to install a remote monitoring system for pH and residual D O in the
biological aeration reactor subject to the day-to-day preventive maintenance against slime build up
as in sub section 5.12.7.5.
5 - 142
Source: M/s HANNA

Figure 5-59 Portable BOD test instrument
5.12.10 Non-instrumentation Method of Quick BOD Measurement
The COD test can be completed in two hours with a one-hour reflux and a graph can be constructed
for a given sewage showing the COD Vs. BOD at various stages of treatment and a COD reading
obtained after two hours can be used to correlate the likely BOD values for a quick field check.
5.12.11 Flow Measurement
5.12.11.1 Magnetic Flow Meters
Magnetic flow meters work on the principle of electromagnetic induction. The induced voltage
generated by an electrical conductor in a magnetic field is directly proportional to the conductors
velocity. Thus, the sewage is the conductor and these meters are suitable at almost all piping like,
raw sewage, settled Sewage, primary sludge, return activated sludge, waste activated sludge
and treated sewage. These are non-invasive and used in almost all pipelines, but of course, initial
calibration is needed. The output is the standard 4 to 20 mA signal, which is relayed to the central
monitoring system.
5.12.11.2 Ultrasonic Flow Meters
When ultrasonic impulses are released onto a pipe surface carrying sewage, the impulses are
deflected along the flow direction based on the velocity of the flow before they impinge on the
opposite sidewall of the pipe. The time taken is measured and is correlated to the velocity and then
to the diameter of the pipeline and hence the flow rate is arrived at. Like magnetic flow meters, these
are also non-invasive and used in almost all pipelines but of course, initial calibration will be needed.
The output is the standard 4 to 20 mA signal, which is relayed to the central monitoring system.
5 - 143
5.12.11.3 Ultrasonic Level Sensors
These also work on the same principle as above and the time taken to reach the water surface and
get back to the sonic emission probe mounted on top of a channel is used to measure the depth of
the liquid surface. By integrating with the depth of the floor of the channel from the probe, the depth
of sewage flow is arrived at. These are useful in Parshall flumes in raw sewage channels. The output
is the standard 4 to 20 mA signal, which is relayed to the central monitoring system. This signal from
ultrasonic level sensor can be fed to a microprocessor, which can be programmed to give output as
flow in an open channel like the Parshall flume.
5.12.12 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition System (SCADA)
SCADA is an acronym for Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition. This presents the data as
a viewable and controllable system on the screen of a computer. The data thus collected can be
stored and analyzed for optimization of the process and for better real time process control. This
assists plant-operating personnel by monitoring and announcing off normal conditions and failures of
equipment. This allows the operators to perform calculations based on the sensor inputs. Using the
stored data daily, weekly and monthly reports can be prepared. It also allows the operator to know
the state of a process and an alarm associated with it. It is also possible for an authorised operator
to intervene and operate equipment at a remote location through a remote terminal unit (RTU) under
this SCADA network.
A typical SCADA communication overview is shown in Figure 5.-60.
U
Source: Kruger
Figure 5.60 Typical SCADA communication overview
5 - 144
5.12.12.1 Components of SCADA System
The various components of a SCADA system are
a) Personal computers: These are used by the operator to view the data acquired and allow the
operator to control and improve optimization.
b) Programmable Logic Controllers: They control the outputs based on the inputs being monitored
in the required sequential steps and it also communicates with the personal computers.
c) Modems: They are used to transfer data from the sewage-treatment plant site, to the
centralized control station.
d) Remote terminal units (RTU): They allow the central SCADA to communicate with the various
instruments at the sewage treatment plant. It controls, acquires and transfers data from the
process equipment at the site, in conjunction with the central SCADA.
5.12.12.2 SCADA Software
There is standard SCADA software available which can be installed in application servers at the
plant site, but they should be capable of controlling and monitoring the various instruments. The data
acquired from the RTU should be displayed in the SCADA screen and the logs of each site
station measurement should be transferable using data export to data base processing software
like Oracle, Microsoft Excel, etc. It should also support internet connectivity for data transfer.
5.12.12.3 SCADA Security Level
In order to prevent misuse and to restrict access to a site station measurement there should be
privileges to the various users of the SCADA. Typically, there are three levels, which are (1) Operator
Level, (2) Engineer Level and (3) Manager Level.
5.12.12.3.1 RTU Security Level
The RTU communication port should have a configurable access level for its security. The minimum
access levels are described in the following sub-section. These access levels are required to control
read and write access to that port. Hence, once all the RTU ports are configured with these varying
access levels depending on the requirement, then it becomes secure against unauthorised usage. It
can be re-configured only after unlocking the RTU common port.
5.12.12.3.2 Minimum Access Levels of Programming and Configuration Interface
The interface shall have the minimum varying levels of user access that can be configured by the
system controller. They are:
a) Unlimited Access: This will allow the user to read and write all RTU configuration parameters
such as local, network and system registers, Hardware input and output registers, event logs
and logic programs.
5 - 145
b) Access without configuration: This will allow reading and writing of all RTU configuration
parameters except system registers and ladder logic.
c) Access limited to only reading the RTU parameters
d) Access limited to RTU port configuration.
5.12.12.4 SCADA User Interface
The SCADA system shall permit the user to access displays via printing device and/or soft key menus
with a choice of function keys, cursor, control keys or any key on the keyboard. The system shall
support operator access to multiple displays at one time, including split screens where the operator
may view more than one process area at a time and permit pop-up displays.
The operator shall be able to have access to context sensitive help at any time during operation of the
system. The operator shall be able to access multiple data sources/items with a single tag name.
5.12.12.4.1 Command/Control Functions
The system shall allow the user to control a specific set point or to adjust a set of points depending on the
operating limits. Control of individual set points shall be enabled based upon a users security level.
5.12.12.4.2 Display Capability
The system shall allow the user to view animated graphics for process templates including valves,
meters, etc. The system shall support the capability for the operator to view scanned images and be
possible to animate these images.
5.12.12.4.3 Text Description
The system shall support use of true-type scale able fonts that may be scaled according to the
desired size of the text. The fonts shall be loaded by the operating system.
Text shall be able to blink based upon any user definable condition occurring in the system such as
an alarm on a particular set point.
5.12.12.5 Alarm Capabilities
5.12.12.5.1 Alarm Display Capability
The system shall support alarm display capability on the display. Current alarms shall be available as
an alarm summary object and a chronological summary of alarms shall be available.
It shall be possible to inform the operator of an alarm condition via an audible tone, a pop-up display
or any combination of animation types on the screen.
Alarm acknowledgement may be performed on all alarms, alarms in a single group, and alarms in a
collection of groups in defined in alarm group hierarchy or on a point-by-point basis.
5 - 146
5.12.12.5.2 Alarm File Capability
Alarms shall be logged to a file for future viewing or review of alarm history data. The user shall have
the capability to review the file for cause and event analysis. The alarms that are logged shall be
configurable from a choice of the parameters listed during configuration.
5.12.12.5.3 Alarm Printing Capability
Alarms shall be allowed to be printed and the format shall be configurable and made up of any of the
parameters listed during configuration.
5.13 DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEM
5.13.1 Description
For a fairly large sewerage system with many pumping stations, STPs, etc., it is possible to have a
centralized control station to monitor, data logging, interfere and control the various operations by a
Distributed Control System (DCS), with a network of PLCs and RTUs.
The DCS developed in 1975 was first used by pulp and paper mills and is rather widely used off late.
It consists of distributed microprocessor based single loop controllers connected to a shared
video-based operator station. It has substituted analogue controllers with Direct Digital Control
(DDC). The video based operator station eliminated the need of large instrument panels, which was
important prerequisite for operators.
DCS is the best choice for a system with many operational units (say, sewage pumping stations)
at various locations away from the main control station (say, at the STP), linked through various
methods of digital communication. However, this is complex and expensive, but provides various
controls, functions and other reliability features.
Presently, DCSs are available in miniaturized versions for multitasking, multivariable, multi-loop
controller used for process control. It is a functionally and geographically distributed system.
Equipment making up a DCS is separated by function and is installed in multiple working areas.
The operator can view information transmitted from various units and displayed on a video display
unit (VDU) and can change control conditions from a computer key board.
5.14 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROL
5.14.1 Description
For a single operating unit (say, sewage pumping station), the Programmable Logic Controller
(PLC) is the very vastly employed automatic controller, helpful in eliminating continuous human
monitoring and control.
Various matrix of operations are pre-programmed with various inputs from instruments, such as
level transducer, pressure transducer, flow transducer, motor bearing temperature monitor, vibration
monitor, etc.
5 - 147
PLC is to change, than re-lay panels. This would reduce the installation and operational cost of the
control system compared with the electro-mechanical relay system. PLC offers the advantages such
as, ease of programming and re-programming, programming language is based on re-lay wiring
symbols familiar to most operating personnel, high reliability and minimal maintenance, small
physical size, ability to communicate with other computer systems, moderate low initial investment
cost and availability of modular designs.
5.15 CORROSION PROTECTION AND CONTROL
5.15.1 General
Corrosion is the phenomenon of the interaction of a material with the environment (water, soil or
air) resulting in its deterioration. There are many types of corrosion, the major types being galvanic,
concentration cell, stray current, stress and bacterial.
Sewage collection and treatment systems are more prone to corrosion in view of the nature of
the sewage. Raw sewage contains solids like grit that cause abrasion in sewers, pumps and their
components, thus removing the protective coatings. This exposes the metal and accelerates the
corrosion process. Hence, corrosion control becomes important in SST. It is particularly severe
in areas where sewage strength is high, sulphate content of water is substantial and average
temperature is above 20C. The corrosion problem in SST can be categorized as (1) Corrosion of
material of sewers and (2) Corrosion of metal and concrete in treatment plants. The corrosion of
sewers and relevant prevention and control are described in detail in section 3.69 in this manual.
Corrosion in case of treatment systems is described below.
5.15.2 Corrosion of Treatment Systems
The important units from the corrosion point of view are civil tanks for raw sewage collection, clarifiers
and sludge digesters. In addition, all metal parts like in the pumps, valves, screens and grit chamber
equipment are also important.
5.15.2.1 Raw Sewage Collection and pH Neutralization
In general, raw sewage pH will always be near neutral in pH and is not corrosive. Large
variations in acidic or alkaline pH can result only when huge industrial wastewaters get into sewers.
The manual clearly recommends in section 3.8 that allowing industrial effluents into sewers shall
be discouraged. If such a contingency is foreseen, it may be only for a brief period before the entry
is detected and cut off. In such cases, sodium hydroxide shall be used if the pH is corrosive and
hydrochloric acid shall be used if the pH is alkaline. The neutralizing chemicals would need to
be stored in acid or alkali resistant containers and the solutions led to the neutralizing tank by
non-corrosive, thick walled PVC piping.
5.15.2.2 Clarifiers
The floor bottom of the clarifiers is scraped by mechanical scrapers in order to divert the sludge to the
central sludge pit. These scraper arms and the squeegees are constantly immersed in sewage and
are not subjected to severe corrosion because they are not exposed to the air.
5 - 148
The specification for the steel used for the underwater mechanisms should be carefully drawn to
ensure maximum protection from corrosion. It is normally specified that all the steel below liquid
level shall be at least 6 mm thick. It is a good practice to keep all chains, bearings or brackets above
the liquid surface. All castings in the drive mechanism should be of high-grade cast iron. It is also
possible to give cathodic protection to the scraper mechanism either by sacrificial anode or by
impressed current. The choice of either of the method will depend upon the comparative costs.
In any case, the cost of such a protective measure will not be higher than the cost of good quality
acid resistant paint.
5.15.2.3 Sludge Digestion
Corrosion problem in sludge digestion tank is described in section 6.11.1 in this manual.
5.15.2.4 Activated Sludge
In the activated sludge plant, oxygen is provided to the sewage either by surface aeration or by
compressed air system. In the compressed aeration system, air supply is normally provided
through mild steel pipelines. Though the air is filtered and moisture is removed before sending to
compressors, still there can be problems and these can be minimized by use of air supply pipelines
of non-corrosive material.
In surface aeration, proper material selection and coating are necessary for protection of the exposed
parts of the aerator blades. It may be mentioned here that the protective coating has to be applied
at regular intervals, since it is found that such coatings have very short life. PVC lining may not be
easy to provide due to the shape of rotor while fibre glass lining can be relatively easier. For floating
aerators, it is desirable to have corrosion resistant lining, such as fibre glass for the floats.
5.15.2.5 Attached / Fluidized / Immobilized Media Systems
In these systems, the mechanical components include the header, the distribution arm and the
distribution nozzles. The header and the distribution arm are normally of mild steel and should be
protected from corrosion by proper painting.
The corrosion and the resulting blockage of distribution nozzles are of common occurrence. This can
be avoided by selection of corrosion resistant materials such as brass or PVC for nozzles.
5.15.3 Sewage and Sewage Pumps
For pumps and pumping equipment, proper materials selection is of paramount importance. The
pump casing is normally of close-grained cast iron capable of resisting erosion of abrasive material
in the waste. For handling sewage and other corrosive wastes, the impeller is generally made of
high-grade phosphor bronze or equivalent materials. The wearing rings for impeller should be of
good corrosion resistant materials such as bronze. The shafts are normally made of high tensile steel
and replaceable shaft sleeves are recommended.
For pump and pumping equipment, painting is the usual protective measure. Both, the interior and
exterior surfaces of pumps should be painted after rust, scale and deposits are removed by sand
blasting, wire brushing or rubbing with sand paper
5 - 149
5.15.4 Preventive Maintenance
It will be seen from the above that anti-corrosive paints, coating and linings have to be used in
various equipment to prevent corrosion. The paints, coatings and linings require periodical renewal,
Proper maintenance demands that a schedule be drawn up so that the operator may abide by it and
undertake repainting or cleaning at appropriate intervals without waiting for corrosion
to become obvious.
5.15.5 Piping Requirements in Treatment Plants
Piping requirement in sewage treatment plants range from sewage and sludge conduits, drains
and water lines to chemical process piping, if any. Materials for various pipeline applications
are given in Table 5.27 (overleaf). In order to facilitate identification of piping, particularly in the large
plants, it is suggested that the different lines shall be colour-coded. The contents and direction of
flow shall be stencilled on the piping in a contrasting colour. Typical colour code appears below
(WEF, MOP 8 , 2010):
- Orange: energized equipment and flammable gas lines
- Blue: potable water
- Yellow: chlorine
- Black: raw sludge
- Brown: treated bio solids
- Purple: radiation hazards
- Green: compressed air
- Jade green: non-potable process or flushing water
- Grey: sewage
- Orange with blue letters: steam
- White: traffic and housekeeping operations
- Red: fire protection equipment and digester gas lines
5.15.6 Modification of Materials
Normally, choice of materials shall be suitable under the circumstances likely to be encountered and
commensurate with economy. If justified economically, corrosion resistant construction material can
be used initially, as this may not require any additional protective coating frequently.
Stainless steel, aluminium and plastics are examples of materials of this nature. It is possible that the
use of such corrosion-resistant materials would be cost-effective in the long run.
However, in treatment plants, it is found that it is usually less expensive to use ordinary structural
steel to which protective coatings are applied.
5 - 150
Table 5.27 Piping Materials in Sewerage and Sewage Treatment
Typical Application Concentration in % Materials
Influent 0.5 to 2 C, CL, RCP, RC, VC
Secondary Solids 0.5 to 2 C, HP, PE, Cl
Primary solids 0 .2 to 1 C, G, T, HP, PE, D, Cl
Thickened Sludge 4 to 10 C, HP, PE, T, Cl, D
Digested Sludge 3 to 10 C, HP, PE, T, Cl
Chem ically treated sludge 8 to 26 C, HP, PE, H, Cl
Dewatered sludge 8 to 25 C, Cl
Heat Exchanger < 0.1 S
Spray irrigation < 0.1 C, Cl, T, A, HP, PE
Chemical Process Piping C, Cl, S, G, T, HP, PE, H, D
Alum inium Sulphate 15 to 22 C, D, H, HP, PE, T, S
Calcium Hydroxide 63 to 73 C, Cl, D, G, H, HP, PE, S, T
Calcium Hydroxide 85 to 99 C, Cl, D, G, H, HP, PE, S, T
Sulphuric Acid 93 S, G
Ferric Chloride 59 to 98 C, H
Sodium Hydroxide 73 C, S, H
Carbon Slurry 20 to 30 G
C - Carbon Steel S - Stainless Steel

G - Glass Lined A - Aluminium
T - Teflon lined P - High Density Polyethylene
PE - Polyethylene
CI - Cast Iron D - Ductile iron
H - Plastic or rubber hose RCP- Reinforced Plastic mortar
RC - Reinforced concrete VC - Vitrified clay
5 - 151
5.16 REHABILITATION OF SEWAGE TREATMENT FACILITIES
5.16.1 Criteria for Rehabilitation of STPs
In simple terms, the word rehabilitation refers to a situation that needs cure. Thus, rehabilitation
shall be specific to non-performance and not a wholesale rehabilitation. Rehabilitation may not
include capacity upgradation, but it can be other way about. In any case, except for the electrical
control panels and cabling, all other rehabilitation efforts in STP should be taken up inter-alia
between all unit operations, process technology and mechanical equipment all at the same time,
instead of piece meal. Instances like the burn out of a motor winding are exceptions to be attended
immediately and will come under the terminology of repairs and not rehabilitation. To this end, the
primary responsibility of deciding whether it is rehabilitation or repair or upgradation is to be owned
up at designated levels of authority before proposals are initiated.
As the overall administration of the STP is a complex discipline involving academicians,

technocrats and financial managers, it is necessary to bring about the programme under a joint
responsibility as in Figure 5.61 overleaf.
5.16.1.1 Upgradation of Facilities
Upgradation of STPs would normally arise in regard to capacity upgradation and there are
technological strategies in hand in the present context. Some possible options are:
1. A conventional ASP can be upgraded without increasing the footprint by opting for an MBBR
to be inscribed in the aeration tank and duplicating the hydraulic piping and pump sets and the
primary clarifiers can be modified as rim flow clarifiers and secondary clarifiers inscribed
with tube settlers.
2. The effluent quality of the existing ASP can be upgraded by adding tertiary coagulation and/or
sand filtration, ultrafiltration.
3. Existing UASB can be upgraded by dismantling final polishing units and replacing it with activated
sludge process or its variants such as SBR (A A Khan et al., 2012), SAF, MBBR, etc.
4. Stabilization ponds can be upgraded to aerated lagoons on extended aeration mode with bund
partitions, to carve out the sedimentation zones.
5. Aerated lagoons can be upgraded with bio-towers inscribed at one end and boosting the delivery
head of pump sets or replacements.
6 . Large diameter old trickling filters can be upgraded into conventional ASP by constructing a radial
wall and allowing the mixed liquor to flow annularly and equipped with floating surface aerators.
7. Conventional aeration tanks can be partitioned to change the process to contact

stabilization and maximize treatment capacity for the same volume. The partitioning has to be by
inscribing a separate structure for contact aeration preferably circular and without opening out
the reinforcements of the old tank base slab or sidewalls.
5 - 152
Figure 5.61 Algorithm for rehabilitation programme of STPs
5 - 153
8 . The Melbourne Eastern STP upgrade is often cited in literature. It is from a conventional
primary-aeration-secondary to online add on tertiary by ozonation-biological filters-
ozonation-UV-chlorination before selling the reclaimed water to retailers who in turn sell it to
end users. The biological filters used here are an unique component to biodegrade the residual
organic matter and reduce ammonia, oil and grease, foam, litter and solids. The final water is to
be used in farms, market gardens, vineyards, golf courses and sporting grounds in the city and
at the plant, for every day operations to clean screens, to wash down work areas, for cooling and
to water the grounds. The excess treated sewage will be discharged to the ocean where water
contact sports will continue to take place. The significance of this to the Indian situation lies in
the residual levels of phosphorous and nitrogen because of the higher concentrations in sewage
due to lower per capita water supply and hence, mere add on units like the above may not be
adequate and specific nutrient removal enhancements will also be needed.
9. Each situation needs to be approached individually and the question of following another
locations experience has to be tempered with reasoning.
10. The other issue is the procurement of the recent patented technologies, which of course have to
be secured against reasonable competition anyway.
5.16.1.2 Energy Saving Measures
In the case of new STPs, it is preferable to design the treatment process to include primary
treatment and secondary treatment with an F/M ratio in the conventional regime whereby the
blended sludge becomes available for biomethanation in digesters and generation of electricity
there from. This saves the electrical power needed for the STP. The 40 MLD ASP at Chennai is
reported as performing on these lines. The economics of such gas generation and utilization is
influenced by the capacity of the plant and the raw sewage BOD and VSS.
Hence, in the preparation of DPRs, proposals for such utilization of electrical generation should be
carefully weighed by a net present value (NPV) of the costs of (a) Hydrogen Sulphide stripping, Gas/
dual fuel engines, repairs and renewals of these additions, their inherent O&M and electrical power
needs, establishment costs and (b) cost of electricity that will otherwise be payable to the local
electricity authority over the design period cited in Table 2.1.
5.17 CARBON CREDIT
This term qualifies the holder to emit one ton of carbon dioxide into the atmosphere and is awarded
to institutions or countries that have reduced their greenhouse gases below their emission quota,
which literally means emission standards. These carbon credits can be traded in the international
market at their current market price. There are firms that have earned carbon credits and offer them
to other firms who are interested in lowering their carbon emissions on a voluntary basis. They
purchase the credits from an investment fund or a carbon development company that has
aggregated the credits from individual projects. Buyers and sellers can also use an exchange
platform to trade, such as the Carbon Trade Exchange, which is like a stock exchange for carbon
credits. The global and Indian position are presented in Figure 5.62 and Figure 5.63 overleaf.
5 - 154
Part A: Engineering_______________________________________________ SEWAGE TREATMENT FACILITIES
Carbon Credits Market: Registered Project Activities under CDM by Scope(World),

2008-09
Others lnclia
17%
Mexic
4%
Brazil
9%
South
7%
Others include projects related to

Afforestation and reforestation, Metal
Production, Transport, Construction, Note: all figures are rounded;the base
Energy Distribution etc. yearis2008-Source; Frssuivan
Figure 5.62 Country wise carbon credit market as of year 2009
Carbon Credits M a rk e t: Expected CERs from Registered Projects annually by Percent

(World), 2008-09
Total Expected CERs annually : 1,94.943
ChemfcalA9 e Others
Industries 0 /"3.7%
.. , , . 2.6%
Manufacturing
Industries-----------
47%
Fugitive
Emissions From ' \
Fuels
57% Waste
'
H a n d lin g ^ ^ Z * ^
SDisposal
17.6%
Others Include Indonesia,

Malaysia, South Africa, Qatar,
South Africa. Africa, Argentina Note: all figures are rounded;the base
year is 2008,Source: Frost&Sullivan
Figure 5.63 Project wise carbon credit market as of year 2009
India has the second-highest carbon credit transacted volumes in the world. India is the pioneer
in the biomethanation from STPs as demonstrated in the Dadar STP in Mumbai back in 1970s
itself. The gas was directly piped to nearby institutions for their fuel and revenue was earned. The
availability of duel fuel (diesel as well as biogas) as well as exclusive gas based engines came up
subsequently in the 1980s and the generation plant was put up in Okhla STP in Delhi. With passage
of time, the STPs have, by now perfected the technology of biomethanation and generate electrical
energy and thus have accumulated the carbon credits.
Surat is perhaps the largest producer of biomethanation from STPs and treats about 600 MLD, out of
which 3.5 MW of power is reportedly generated. This translates to 50,000 carbon credit units per year.
The magnitude of the carbon credits programme can be understood from the news article
that India has bagged the worlds largest carbon credit project that will help replace 400 million
incandescent light bulbs with compact energy saving (CFL) bulbs at cheap prices in a year while
preventing 40 million tonnes of carbon from entering the atmosphere annually.
5 - 155
The project will allow the government, investors, distribution companies (discoms) and CFL
manufacturers to sell CFLs at Rs.15 each, instead of the Rs.100 they currently cost on an
average, and have been approved by the UN under the global carbon credit scheme called Clean
Development Mechanism. Thus, the need to plan STPs with inbuilt biomethanation and energy
recovery is imperative. An illustrative comparison of the potential for energy recovery and the power
actually needed for a STP with conventional ASP is shown in Table 5.28.
Table 5.28 Estimated and actual achieved electrical energy recovery
Design Flow 40 MLD

Primary Sludge - Suspended Solids 450 mg/l
Primary Sludge VSS as % 60%
SS Removal Efficiency 60%
Quantity of Primary Sludge 10890 kg/day
Percentage of VS in Primary Sludge 60%
Quantity of VS in Primary Sludge 6480 kg/day
Quantity of excess sludge at 0.35 kg/kg of BOD removed 3150 kg/day
Percentage of VS in Excess Sludge 85%
Quantity of VS in Excess Sludge 2677.5 kg/day
Total VS 9157.5 kg/day
VS Destruction Efficiency 55%
Bio-Gas Yield 0.75 Ncum/kg VS destroyed
Bio-Gas Generated 3777 m3/day
Calorific Value 6.0 kWh/cum
Power Generated by Gas Engine 7931 kW/day
Power Required 7850 kW/day
Average of past two years

Bio-gas Generated 3200 m3/day
Electrical Energy Generated 6600 kWh
It may be seen that as long as the designed sewage flow and the designed raw sewage BOD
are available, the plant has the ability to not only be self-sufficient in power, but also capable of
generating additional energy for nearby institutions and sell at an unfailing pattern and earn revenue
as well. The caution needed at the time of design will however be, to opt for minimum of two gas
engines and install only one to start with until the sewage quantities, qualities and biomethanation
kinetics are established. After one engine is established, the second engine can be suitably sized
to exploit extra power production if it becomes possible and make it a commercial proposition by
feeding the local electricity grid, instead of drawing from it.
The 40 MLD conventional ASP at Chennai has been built with biogas utilization facilities by way of
digester gas collection, wet scrubbing and dual fuel engine.
5 - 156
5.18 RECENT TECHNOLOGIES IN SEWAGE TREATMENT
There are many new technologies emerging for the treatment and reuse of sewage and sludge.
The objectives of sewage treatment are
(a) to metabolise the organic matter so as to produce an effluent which can be disposed in the
environment without causing health hazards or nuisance and
(b) to produce a sludge which can be used as a soil filler if it comes out of a biological treatment or
as a soil-sludge immobilized product like walkway paver blocks or compound wall bricks and thus
preserve the environment from dumping waste products.
The discharge standards are formulated and specified for each case by the statutory authority of
Pollution Control Board (PCB). Where there is reuse, the PCB requires a zero liquid waste discharge,
which as far as the sludge is concerned, addresses its reuse or secure landfill.
Thus, the degree of treatment is dictated by the type of end use and the chemical characteristics
specific to these.
Thus, there cannot be a fixed type of treatment technology for a reuse situation even within the
same category of industries or situations. It is here that the emerging trends in technology play a
crucial part and come in handy.
For example, an industry in a land locked area may find a roof top MBR as the best choice in view of
its most precious land area at ground level which it can use for increasing the production, whereas
for a municipality, such a concept does not arise in the first place.
However, even for the publicly funded STPs, the recent trend is to include nutrient removal and this
has brought up a recent trend in extending well beyond conventional secondary treatment.
Thus, it is necessary to recognize and understand the emerging trends. At the same time, it needs
to be also recognized that an emerging trend in India might have long been a standard trend
elsewhere. At the same time, India cannot plumb for a trend of technology merely because it is
in use elsewhere, especially in view of the introductory remarks in this Chapter 5 explaining
why such blanket adoptions need local validation.
Thus, for the purpose if this chapter, any technology that is working successfully for
more than 5 years on the same scale or larger in other countries, than at which it is intended
to be used here in India and has potential to be sustainable in the Indian context, is considered
as emerging trends in this section.
5.18.1 Objective Oriented Emerging Technologies
The type, objectives, process name, and outline of new sewage treatment technologies are
summarised in Table 5.29 overleaf.
5 - 157
Table 5.29 Types of sewage treatm ent technologies
Type O bjective Process Description
Recycled
C oncurrent with carbonaceous BOD removal nitrification is achieved by additional oxygen
biological
input and the mixed liquor and return sludge are recycled first into an anoxic tank receiving
N itrification/
the raw sew age w here the nitrates are denitrified by the m icrobes and partial BOD removal
Denitrificatio
and alm ost com plete removal o f nitrates are obtained thus elim inating nitrogen altogether.
n process
This is a single sludge nitrification system with a dow nstream anoxic reactor. The influent
enters into the aerobic tank w here nitrification develops together with BOD removal and the
nitrified mixed liquor passes to the anoxic reactor w here the sludge is kept in suspension by
W uhrm ann
Nitrogen m oderate stirring, but no aeration. The denitrification takes place by m icrobes in their quest
Process
Tertiary (N) for oxygen. The classical difficulty here is the food requirem ents o f the m icrobes which has
removal otherw ise been already removed in the aerobic reactor and hence, this process is suited
only for sew ages with little incoming nitrogen.
Step-Feed This process has been developed to enable efficient nitrogen removal from sew age w ithout
M ultistage a m ajor renovation The unit which consists o f an anoxic tank and an oxic tank is arranged in
Biological several serial stages. The prim ary effluent is split and fed equally into an anoxic tank of
Nitrogen each stage, and BOD load to M LSS in each stage is equalized. This method enables
Removal efficient nitrogen rem oval and easy m aintenance o f the process. The nitrified liquor internal
Process recirculation from oxic to anoxic tank is carried out as needed.
5-158
Am m onia C hlorination to mono, di & tri chloram ines eventually releases nitrogen gas into atm osphere.
oxidation It is a sim ple process, but the storage and handling o f chlorination are a real challenge.
Am m onia in raw sew age is present as am m onium carbonate and is a dissolved salt. By
raising the pH to near 9.3, this is de-ionized and the am m onia becom es dissolved am m onia
Am m onia
gas. It is then stripped in counter current tow ers where the sew age is sprayed from the top
Stripping
and air is blown from the bottom w hereby the three phase mass transfer takes place and
the resulting air am m onia gas mixture rises into the plume. The air volum e and plume
velocity are adjusted to keep the released am m onia concentration within threshold limits
C linoptinolite is a resin occurring in som e parts of the world which has the ability to
Ion
exchange the am m onium ion and has applications in very small units needing cleaner
Exchange
operations and w here secure landfill o f spent resin is possible.
Under controlled conditions o f anaerobiasis as absence of oxygen, luxury phosphorous

A naerobic- uptake by the m icrobes is reported, but the m echanism is not fully understood. However,
Phosphor Oxic sim ultaneous denitrification can also occur from return activated sludge. Process operation
us (P) Activated with a plug flow regim e & non-aerated but gently mixed zone in the first part o f the activated
removal Sludge sludge are stated as critical conditions to rem ove considerable phosphorus. However, the
Process process control is influenced by varying phosphorous concentrations and som etim es it may
be necessary to chem ically precipitate the residual phosphorous by chem ical addition.
5-159
Type O bjective P rocess D escription
C hem ical
A lu m in iu m a n d /o r Ferric salts pre cipita te the pho sp ho ro u s. T h is is e asy to control.
precipitation
In this fo u r-sta g e process, the first tw o stages are identical to the M odified L ud zck E tting e r
(M LE ) process o f an a no xic zo ne follo w ed by an aeration zo n e w ith a n itra te -rich recycle
B ardenpho from the aeration to the a n o xic zone. T he third stage is a s e c o n d a ry a n o xic zo n e fo r fu rth e r
process den itrifica tio n to the portion o f the flo w th a t is not a lre a d y recycled in firs t tw o -stag e s. A
so urce like M ethanol m ay be added to this third stage fo r m icrobial carbon. T h e fou rth and
final is a re-aeration zo ne to strip any nitrogen gas and in cre ase the DO co nce n tratio n .
( N ) & (P)
S im ultan
eous T h is process is a com b ina tio n o f the biological p ho sp ho ru s rem oval process and the
rem oval biological nitrogen rem oval process. It consists o f tanks a rranged in the se q u e n ce o f
A n a e ro b ic- a n a e ro b ic tank, a n o xic tan k and o xic tank. Influent and return activated slu d ge flo w into the
A n o xic-O xic a n a e ro b ic tan k w h ile nitrified liq u or is recycled w ith a circulating pum p from the oxic
P rocess (n itrifica tio n) tan k to the a no xic (d e n itrifica tio n ) tank. A m m o n ia nitrogen is o xidized to nitrite
o r n itrate in the o xic tank, and then nitrite o r nitrate is d enitrified to nitrogen gas in the
a n o xic tank. A lu m in iu m and Ferric salts are added to c h e m ica lly utilize the ionized
A lu m in iu m o r iron & pre cipita te the p hosphorous. T h is is a stra ig htfo rw a rd one fo r control.
P olishing
T he soil o rg a n ism s bring a bo u t fu rth e r m icrobial a ctivity is polishing th e se p aram eters and
BOD, SS, Soil a qu ife r
S e co n da ry is a slo w long term process. It is unique to the soil conditions, clim atology, precipitation,
P athogen tre a tm e n t
flo oding and inundation th a t m ay bring in a gricultu ra l re sid ue s o f in se cticide s & pesticides.
rem oval
5-160
This process utilizes a fill-and-draw reactor with com plete mixing during the batch reaction
step (after filling) and where the subsequent steps o f aeration and clarification occur in the
Sequencing
sam e tank. All S BR system s have com m on steps as (1) fill, (2) react (aeration), (3)
Batch
sedim entation, (4) decant and (5) idle. For continuous-flow applications, at least two SBR
Reactor
tanks are provided in parallel so that one receives the sew age while the other com pletes its
(SBR)
treatm ent cycle. Several process m odifications have been made in the tim e durations
associated with each step to achieve nitrogen and phosphorus removal.
This process is based on several synthetic biofilm carrier elem ents (patented and non
patented) developed for use in the aeration tank o f the ASP and are suspended in the
Moving Bed activated sludge mixed liquor in the aeration tank. These processes are intended to
Biofilm enhance the activated sludge process by providing a greater surface area to unit volum e of
Reactor the aeration tank for the additional surfaces for increased m icrobial population and
(M BBR) m etabolism and hence, the biom ass concentration in the tank and offers the potential to
reduce the basin volum es. They are used to im prove the volum etric nitrification rates and to
accom plish the denitrification in aeration tanks by anoxic zones within the biofilm thickness.
This process consists o f a series o f aerated reactors, filtration units and final polishing units.
Fixed bed
Plants with extensive root system s are placed on a supporting mesh slightly below the
bio film
w ater level in the open aerated reactors and their roots dangling about 1.5 m etres into the
activated
sewage is claim ed to provide a healthy habitat for bacteria and a w hole range o f other
sludge
organism s such as protozoa, zooplankton, worm s, snails and even fish. As sewage flows
process
through these different ecosystem s in each tank, a series o f se lf m anaging, cascading
(FFASP)
ecologies are stated to provide a highly robust and efficient system.
5-161
This process is used fo r cleaning up polluted w a ter sources such as sew age drains,
polluted rivers, ponds, lakes, etc. The blocks are produced by m ixing effective m icrobes
Im m obilized
with zeolites (volcanic porous stones), and alkaline cem ent. O nce EBB is placed in polluted
Biofiim
water, the effective m icrobes w ould multiply, treat the w astes effectively in a faste r m anner
P rocess (Eco
and clean the w ater body w ithout causing any harm to plants and fish. EBB does not
Bio Block,
require energy, m anpow er and m aintenance to perform the cleaning process. There is no
EBB)
operational cost practically. S ince it is an online treatm ent, additional large land space is not
required. However, the hydraulics o f the drains needs validation with EBB in place
M em brane Filtration is used to rem ove m inute solids, colloidal m aterial, dissolved organic
M inute
matter, etc. from secondary effluents using several kinds o f m em branes. A ccording to
S olids in
separating particles size, m em branes are classified as follows:
sus
M em brane M icro filtration (M F) fo r 0.08 to 2.0 m icrons
pension
filtration Ultra filtration (UF) fo r 0.005 to 0.2 m icrons
colloidal
Nano filtration (NF) fo r 0.001 to 0.01 m icrons
m aterials,
Advanced Reverse osm osis (RO ) fo r 0.0001 to 0.001 m icrons
dissolved
processes The RO m em brane is essentially a desalination adaptation fo r rem oval o f TDS
organic
matter,
This process is a sort o f aeration tank and secondary clarifier being a tw o in one. The
TDS
secondary cla rifie r is avoided by filtration of m ixed liquor by m em brane m odules either
m icrobes, M em brane
im m ersed into the aeration tan k m ixed liquor or externally fitted and the m ixed liquor routed
etc. B ioreactor
through these. E ssentially it has a suspended solids free treated sew age and retains higher
rem oval
M LSS and reduces the volum e o f aeration tanks.
Note: These are not a com prehensive listing as m any new er processes keep evolving at any given tim e. However, in respect of
biological processes, the descriptions above are m eant fo r understanding the basics o f the stated processes.
5-162
5.18.2 Recycled Nitrification / Denitrification Process
5.18.2.1 Description
Single-stage systems are those in which nutrient removal is achieved in a single basin and
clarifier. Removal of nitrogen is achieved by combined nitrification (under aerobic conditions) and
denitrification (under anoxic conditions). A single-stage system using one anoxic zone can achieve
an effluent total nitrogen concentration of 4 to 11 mg/l as nitrogen. This is commonly called as
Modified Ludzack-Ettinger (MLE) Process. The aspects of this are as follows:-
a) Nitrification is influenced by temperature, pH, DO and toxic or inhibiting substances.
b) Nitrification is possible between 5 to 50C. The optimum range is between 25 to 35C.
c) Nitrification is possible between pH 6.5 to 8.0 and the optimum condition is around pH 7.2.
d) The recommended level of dissolved oxygen is 2 mg/L
e) In order to promote biological reaction and to prevent deposits of activated sludge organisms,
mixers are to be installed in the anoxic tank. The schematic drawing is shown in Figure 5-64.
Figure 5.64 Configuration of recycled nitrification/denitrification process
5.18.2.2 Application Examples
The performance of full-scale recycled nitrification / denitrification process of Yoshinogawa STP,

Yoshinogawa regional sewerage system of Nara Prefecture, Japan is shown in Tables 5-30 and 5-31.
Table 5.30 Operational conditions of Yoshinogawa STP, Japan (FY 2009)
In flu e n t H R T (hrs) S lu d g e In te rn a l R eturn

F low F/M M LSS Age R e circu la S lu d g e
Index
(m 3/d ) (m g /l) (d a ys) tio n (% ) (% )
A n o x ic O xic
A v e ra g e 50 3.3 8 .4 0 .0 8 3 2 ,1 3 0 17.0 51
8 ,2 8 7 2 .9 7 .3 .0 5 8 ,8 1 0 1 3 .2 75
R an ge 5 0 -5 4
11,265 3.6 9.1 0.122 2 ,3 7 0 2 0 .3
Source:Regional Sewerage Centre of Nara Prefecture, Japan, 2009
5 - 163
Table 5.31 Performance o f Yoshinogawa STP, Japan (FY 2009
B O D , m g /L S S , m g /L T N , m g /L
In flu e n t / E fflu e n t / % R e m o v a l 173 3 .3 98.1 186 6 9 6 .8 2 8 .6 7 7 5 .5
Source: Regional Sewerage Centre of Nara Prefecture, Japan, 2009
5.18.2.3 The K&C Valley STP at Bengaluru
This is the first STP in India for BOD removal and biological nitrification and denitrification under
JICA funding for Bangalore and functioning to its 30 MLD capacity. The criteria and performance are
compared in Table 5.32 with the design criteria as in the often referenced textbook Wastewater
Engineering by Metcalf & Eddy bringing out the need for similarly criteria for other projects as well.
Table 5.32 Design criteria for biological nitrification-denitrification from results of the 31 MLD
average flow Koramangala & Chellagatta (K&C) Valley STP at Bengaluru
No. Design Parameter (A) (B)
1. Raw sewage BOD, mg/l 350 140
2. Final BOD, mg/l 17 9
3. Raw TKN, mg/l 37 35
4. Final TKN, mg/l 8 6
5. Raw sewage suspended solids, mg/l 400 70
6. Final suspended solids, mg/l 26 10
7. HRT in anoxic zone at average flow, hrs 1.6 2.5
8. HRT in aeration zone at average flow, hrs 20.5 9
9. MLSS in aeration zone, mg/l 3500 3000
10. Average DO in aeration tank 2 2
11. F/M in aeration 0 .1 2 0.16
12. Ratio of RAS to plant flow 1.0 0 .6
13. Ratio of MLSS return to plant flow 2 .0 3.1
14. Surface loading in clarifier at average flow in m 3/m2/day 12 24
15. HRT in clarifier at average flow + RAS, hrs 3.5 NG
16. SWD of clarifier, m 3.5 NG
17. Solids loading in clarifier kg MLSS/m2/day 84 115
18. Oxygen kg for kg BOD applied 1.2 1.48
(A)- Performance of K&C Valley STP at Bengaluru, (B)- As per Example 8-2 & 8-5 of Wastewater
Engineering-Metcalf & Eddy-4th Edition, NG-Not Given
5 - 164
The advantages and disadvantages of this process are as follows:
a. Advantages
i. As for usual municipal sewage, up to 85% of nitrogen removal can be expected in this process
ii. This process allows controlling the discharge of nitrogen to the receiving natural waters, which
could create eutrophication problems. In this case the reduction of phosphorus is also required
iii. To limit the consumption of oxygen in the water bodies, because it requires approximately 4.57 mg
of oxygen to oxidize 1 mg of nitrogen
iv. To facilitate the reuse of treated water in certain activities which require waters with low
levels of nitrogen
b. Disadvantages
i. Denitrification is possible only if a good nitrification has been achieved
ii. Nitrification is possible only if adequate bicarbonate alkalinity is available, otherwise bicarbonate
alkalinity is to be added
iii. Precise control of floor level gentle mixing in anoxic tank and residual DO control in oxic
tank are required
iv. Toxic and inhibiting substances may affect the activity of the nitrifying bacteria, this of course
being common irrespective of the process used
5.18.2.5 Typical Design Parameters
The design criteria in Table 5.32 of the Koramangala & Chellagatta (K&C) Valley STP at Bengaluru is
to be relied upon until further validations become available for Indian conditions.
5.18.2.6 Applicability
This process can remove 70% to 85% of the Total Nitrogen in the sewage. It is used for nitrogen control
where inhibitory industrial waste is not present. It is easier to install in new plants and also upgrade
existing ASPs as the additions are stand alone and are only a half hour anoxic tank, MLSS return
and additional air supply.
5.18.3 Wuhrmann Process
The Wuhrmann process configuration, as shown in Figure 5.65 (overleaf), is a single-stage

nitrification system with the addition of an unaerated anoxic reactor. By this reason this process is also
called post-denitrification.
5 - 165
Figure 5.65 Configuration of Wuhrmann process
The possible lack of available carbonaceous substrate in the reactor significantly limits the
denitrification rate of this configuration. To solve this problem an updated solution has been
proposed by Ludzack and Ettinger in which the anoxic tank is the first in the sequence and is
followed by the aerobic tank. Sludge from the secondary sedimentation is also recirculated
to the inlet and mixed with the influent as shown in Figure 5-66. This process has a
disadvantage in that a fraction of the nitrate generated in the aerobic tank is sent to the
secondary sedimentation without denitrification.
Figure 5.66 Configuration of Ludzack & Ettinger process - Wuhrmann modified
The process diagram and performance of full-scale Wuhrmann processes of Hamamatsu City
sewage treatment plant, Japan are shown in Figure 5.67 and Table 5.33.
Source:Moriyama et al., 1988
Figure 5.67 Hamamatsu City sewage treatment plant process diagram
5 - 166
Table 5.33 Performance of Hamamatsu City sewage treatment plant
Parameter Values Parameter Values
Water temperature (C) 1 3 .5 -1 6 .0 Influent
Flow rate (m 3/day) 9 1 9 -1 ,0 0 8 BOD 1 0 0 -4 0 0
Return sludge ratio (%) 8 6 -1 0 5 T-N 3 0 -5 0
Retention time (hours) 23.0 -2 5 .1 N H /-N 2 0 -3 0
Waste sludge (m 3/day) 10.6 -1 9 .2 Effluent
MLSS (mg/l) 3 ,6 7 0 -3 ,8 8 0 BOD average 15
SRT (days) 22.7 -3 7 .6 T-N 5-10
BOD - SS loading (kg/kg/day) 0 .1 5 -0 .2 3
T N - SS loading (kg/kg/day) 0 .0 2 8 -0 .0 3 7
Sludge aeration time (days) 9.1 - 15.0
Source:Moriyama et al., 1988
a. Advantages
i. Process can virtually remove all nitrogen
ii. The influent enters into the first reactor, where nitrification develops, together with removal of
almost all the biodegradable, organic material
iii. The nitrified mixed liquor passes to the second reactor, where the reduction of nitrate takes
place
b. Disadvantages
i. In practice, re-aeration step is usually needed after anoxic zone
ii. For high N-removal, anoxic zone is very large
iii. The anoxic tank sometimes requires the addition of organic matter to allow denitrification.
So, some organic matter in excess is added to the treatment process whose objective is to
reduce the organic matter content
Typical criteria for nitrification-denitrification systems, Pre-denitrification (Modified Ludzack

Ettinger process), Post-denitrification (Wuhrmann process), and Combined pre-and
post-denitrification (Bardenpho process) are as in Table 5.34 (overleaf).
5 - 167
Table 5.34 Typical criteria for nitrification-denitrification systems (20C MLSS temperature)
C om bined
Pre P ost
P aram eter Pre- and P ost
denitrification denitrification
denitrification
S ystem SRT, days 6-30 6-30 8-40
HRT, hours
First a n oxic zone 2-8 - 2-6
First a e ro b ic zone 6-12 6-12 6-12
S econd a n o xic zone - 2-6 2-5
R eaeration zone - - 0.5-1.0
M LSS, m g/l 1500-4000 1500-4000 2 000-50 00
N itrate recycle 2-4 Q* 2-4 Q
RAS flow 0.5-1 Q 0.5-1 Q 100% (Q design)
D issolved oxygen, m g/l
A n o x ic zone s 0 0 0
A e ro b ic zones 1-4 1-4 1-4
M ixing re quirem ents
A n o x ic zones, kw /10 3 m 3 4-10 4-10 4-10
A e ro b ic zones, kw /1 03 m 3 20-40 20-40 20-40
A irflow , aerobic, m 3/m in 103 m 3 10-30 10-30 10-40
* Energy input is an important parameter; however, the manufacturer should be consulted for
determining the number and placement of mixers.
Propeller and turbine mixers have been used successfully.
Source:WEF, 2010
If there is no data for DO inf, then assume a value of 2mg/l at 15C or less; 1 mg/l at 15C to 20C;
and 0.5 mg/l at temperatures greater than 20C. The DONR can be assumed equal to the dissolved
oxygen of the mixed liquor in the vicinity of where the nitrate recycle pump is located. They may be
equal to the dissolved oxygen at the end of the aerobic zone. The dissolved oxygen of the RAS is
difficult to determine without sampling the RAS or the clarifier blanket. In the absence of any data, it
may be assumed that it is half the dissolved oxygen level at the end of the aerobic zone. Calculate
the nitrite-nitrogen and nitrate-nitrogen load entering the pre-anoxic zone (kg/d). The criteria about
nitrification, denitrification and oxygen demand are shown below:
a. Total oxygen required, as part of organic material, is 4.57 mg O2/mgN for nitrification of which
2.86 mg O2/mgN is released in denitrification.
5 - 168
b. Denitrification reduces the oxygen demand by 23g O 2/hab/d (8^2.86).
c. For an assumed contribution of nitrogen of 10 g N/person/d and an estimated

requirement for sludge production of 2 g N/person/d (i.e., 20% of the influent TKN), the
nitrification potential is 8 g N/person/d.
d. For complete denitrification, the nitrate mass to be denitrified equals 8 g N/hab/d.
e. If methanol is used as external organic material, the consumption is 2.5 g CH 3OH/g N.
f. The per capita contribution of nitrogen varies from 2 to 5g/p/d of organic nitrogen and 3 to 7g/p/d
of ammonia. The contribution of NO 3 is negligible. However, industrial activity can contribute
with big amounts of nitrogen compounds.
The simple nitrification-denitrification systems shown in this section are one of the processes used for
nitrogen removal in sewage treatment as an option to control eutrophication. These processes can
remove 70% - 80% of the total nitrogen in the sewage.
5.18.4 Step-feed Multistage Biological Nitrogen Removal Process
In step-feed process, the basin is divided into several stages and raw influent is introduced to each
stage proportionately. All return micro-organisms (sludge) are introduced at the head of the basin.
By splitting the flow to several influent feed locations and directing recovered sludge to the
beginning of the process, a higher solids retention time is achieved compared to plug-flow system
with the same basin volume.
Common features include anoxic zones for denitrification, and oxic zones for oxidation of organic
material, nitrification and phosphorus uptake. Nitrified mixed liquor is returned from the oxic zone to
the anoxic zones for denitrification.
The application example of step-feed multistage biological nitrogen removal process of Stamford
STP, Stamford, CT, USA is shown in Figure 5-68 overleaf.
The original STP was a traditional activated sludge system. It was updated to reduce nitrogen
in the effluent to the bay.
The aeration tanks were divided in 4 phases with 25% each to operate with step feed. The incoming
load was divided in 4 tanks and RAS was added in the first tank.
The yearly average discharge of TSS is 10mg/L and BOD is 6 mg/l.
Nitrogen was reduced from 8-7.5mg/L to an average of 3mg/l.
5 - 169
Influent
Source: Christine deBarbalillo et al., 2002

( AX - Anoxic, OX - Oxic, SC - Secondary Clarifier )
Figure 5.68 Step feed schematic for four pass anoxic-oxic system in Stamford
a. Advantages
i. Better equalization of the waste load
ii. Operation flexibility
iii. More uniform oxygen demand along the aeration tank, with lower peak demand
iv. Allows operational control of the sludge age and hydraulic residence time
v. Can be used in preventing gross process failure due to hydraulic overloading or sludge bulking
vi. The sludge is reused several times down the tank, allowing for higher BOD treatment capacity
vii. This design reduces aeration tank size and aeration time, while BOD removal efficiency is
maintained. The shorter aeration time reduces capital expenses.
b. Disadvantages
i. Requires good O&M of mechanical and control equipment to assure the right flow distribution
and liquid recirculation
The main design criteria of this process are shown in Table 5-35 overleaf. The important
considerations related to design of this process are as follows:
a. Anoxic tank with DO 0.2 mg/L and Oxic tank with DO 2.0 mg/l.
b. Denitrification Rate: 60% - 80%
c. It is a compact design. With the reduction in hydraulic retention time, the tank capacity is
reduced to half that of a conventional circulating process.
d. It is energy-efficient. According to the need of nitrified liquid recirculation, energy consumption

can be cut to about 70% of the usual recirculation process.
5 - 170
Table 5.35 Typical criteria for Step-feed multistage biological nitrogen removal process
V olum etric Return A ctivated

SRT F/M M LSS H RT (V/Q)
Loading S ludge
(days) as M LVSS (m g/l) (hours)
(kg B O D 5/m 3/d) Qr/Q
5-15 0 .2 - 0 .4 0.64-0.96 2,000-3,500 3-5 0.25-0.75
Source: Metcalf & Eddy, 2003
Existing facilities can be modified. Modification can be carried out without sacrificing existing
treatment capacity, installing partitions in the reaction tank, creating anoxic and aerobic zones and
adding distribution system for the step-feed of the primary effluent.
To be effective, all of the recirculated sludge needs to be returned to the front end of the tank, and not
mixed with the influent sewage.
It addresses the common problem of filaments caused by high F/M at the front end of the tank and
filaments caused by low F/M at the back end of the tank.
5.18.5 Anaerobic-oxic Activated Sludge Process
Anaerobic-Oxic (Aerobic) activated sludge process is a biological phosphorus removal (BPR)

process which removes phosphorus from sewage due to luxury uptake of phosphorus by activated
sludge microorganisms. The schematic is shown in Figure 5.69.
Figure 5.69 Configuration of anaerobic-oxic activated sludge process
Phosphorus is an important element of activated sludge microorganisms. Although the phosphorus

content of activated sludge microorganisms is generally between 1.5 to 3%, it is possible to absorb
phosphorus at a high concentration level between 2.5 to 5% by placing activated sludge under a
special condition.
5 - 171
Specifically, activated sludge microorganisms release phosphorus into sewage in an anaerobic

condition (where neither dissolved oxygen nor joint oxygen such as nitrate exists in water), and in
an aerobic condition which follows the anaerobic condition, activated sludge microorganisms absorb
more phosphorus than that emitted into sewage.
This phenomenon is called luxury uptake of phosphorus by activated sludge microorganisms.
This is an outstanding method for removing a considerable quantity of phosphorus from sewage
without adding chemicals.
However, since the phosphorus removal efficiency of this system is affected by seasonal changes
and climate such as rainfall, it is necessary to compensate for these changes by adding flocculating
agent to tackle the in organic phosphorus.
Some examples of performance of the full-scale AO processes are shown in Table 5.36.
Table 5.36 Performance of AO processes
HRT (hours) Total Phosphorous (mg/L)

Site MLSS (mg/l) Ref
Anaerobic Oxic Influent Effluent Removal %
Largo,
1.5 2.6 - 8.9 1.85 79.2 1
USA
Pontiac,
1.8 6.7 2,430-2,820 3.0-4.1 0.4-0.8 80.0 2
USA
Kawasaki
2.0 3.5 2,200 2.05-4.54 0.16-0.45 90.8 3
JP
Fukuoka
3.3 9.7 1,620 8.2 0.63 92.3 3
JP
Ref 1: USEPA, 1987

Ref 2: USEPA, 1987
Ref 3: Murata, 1992
a. Advantages
i. For municipal sewage, about 80% of organic phosphorus removal efficiency can be expected.
ii. It is known that this process can control bulking of activated sludge caused by filamentous
bacteria in addition to phosphorus removal.
5 - 172
b. Disadvantages
i. When the organic matter concentration (BOD or COD) of influent is low on rainy days, etc.,
phosphorus contained in the activated sludge microorganisms is not adequately released to
liquid phase in the anaerobic tank; therefore, the removal efficiency of phosphorus deteriorates.
It is desirable to maintain BOD/P in excess of 20 to 25 for good phosphorus removal.
ii. This process is susceptible to side stream containing high concentration of phosphorus from a
sludge treatment system.
According to the performance of the actual AO processes and references on the AO process,
typical design parameters of this process are integrated as shown in Table 5.37.
Table 5.37 Typical design parameters of AO process
HRT(hours) Return activated

F/M as SRT MLSS
sludge
MLVSS (days) (mg/l)
Anaerobic Oxic (% of influent)
0.2-0.7 2-25 2,000-4,000 0.5-1.5 1-3 25-40
Source: Pennsylvania Department of Environmental Protection
Important considerations related to design and maintenance of this process are as follows:
a On rainy days, etc., the removal efficiency of phosphorus deteriorates in this process. To remove
phosphorus in a stable manner, equipment for adding chemical coagulant or filtration equipment,
etc., need to be installed as auxiliary equipment.
b. Division wall between aerobic and anaerobic tank must be installed to prevent the adverse
current of the activated sludge mixed liquor as far as possible. Moreover, since scum occurs in
the anaerobic tank, it is desirable to install equipment that eliminates the generated scum.
c. To promote biological reaction and to prevent deposition of activated sludge, mixers are to be
installed in the anaerobic tank.
d. The structure of the primary and final sedimentation tank should be the same as that used in a
conventional activated sludge process.
e. In a sludge treatment facility, when waste activated sludge remains in the anaerobic
condition, phosphorus contained in activated sludge microorganisms is released to the
liquid phase.
Therefore, it is necessary to take measures to prevent such a phenomenon so that the

phosphorus concentration in treated water does not increase in response to the
influence of phosphorus load of the side stream.
5 - 173
This process can treat BOD and SS of municipal sewage to a level equivalent to that of
conventional activated sludge process, and the phosphorus removal efficiency of the A/O process
depends primarily on the ratio of the BOD concentration to the phosphorus concentration in the influent.
Effluent soluble phosphorus concentrations as low as 1 mg/L are possible when this ratio exceeds 10:1.
5.18.6 Bardenpho Process
The first two stages of the four-stage Bardenpho process are identical to the Modified Ludzack
Ettinger (MLE) system (anoxic zone followed by an aeration zone with a nitrate-rich recycle
from the aeration to the anoxic zone). The third stage is a secondary anoxic zone to provide
denitrification to the portion of the flow that is not recycled to the primary anoxic zone. Methanol or
another carbon source can be added to this zone to enhance denitrification. The fourth and final
zone is a re-aeration zone that serves to strip any nitrogen gas and increase the DO concentration
before clarification. This process can achieve effluent TN levels of 3 to 5 mg/L (USEPA, 2009).
The schematic is shown in Figure 5.70.
Figure 5.70 Configuration of Bardenpho process (4-stage)
The four stage Bardenpho process can be modified for the five stage system to remove both
nitrogen and phosphorus. This system provides anaerobic, anoxic, and aerobic stages for
phosphorus, nitrogen, and carbon removal. A second anoxic stage is provided for additional
denitrification using nitrate produced in the aerobic stage as the electron acceptor, and the
endogenous organic carbon as the electron donor. The final aerobic stage is used to strip
residual nitrogen gas from solution and to minimize the release of phosphorus in the final clarifier.
Mixed liquor from the first aerobic zone is recycled to the anoxic zone. The schematic is
shown in Figure 5.71.
Recycle
Influent
Pump
Figure 5.71 Configuration of modified Bardenpho process (5-stage)
5 - 174
The performance of full-scale Bardenpho process of 42 MLD Kelowna STP, the City of Kelowna,
Canada is shown in Table 5.38.
Table 5.38 Performance of 42 MLD Bardenpho process, Kelowna STP, Canada
Parameter Unit Influent Effluent
TSS mg/l 350.0 2 .0
BOD 5 mg/l 186.0 5.0
T-P mg/l 8.50 0.14
T-N mg/l 36.39 4.03
Faecal Coliform cfu/ 1 0 0 ml N/A 0 .2
Flow Capacity: 42 MLD

Process configuration: Bardenpho process + Dual media filtration process + UV disinfection process
Source: Environmental Operators Certification Program http://www.eocp.org/plants-kelowna.html
a. Advantages
i. The Bardenpho process removes nitrogen to low concentrations.
ii. Addition of an anaerobic zone at the beginning of the process enables phosphorus removal.
iii. Since the nitrates in the RAS ranges from 1 to 3 mg/L, it does not seriously interfere with the
mechanism for phosphorus removal as can happen in the 3 Stage Pho-redox process.
b. Disadvantages
i. Larger reactor volumes are required.
ii. Precise control of anaerobic, anoxic, and oxic conditions in the tanks is required.
iii. Toxic and inhibiting substances may affect the activity of the nitrifying bacteria.
Typical design parameters are shown in Table 5.39 overleaf.
This process can achieve 3-5 mg/L T-N in unfiltered effluent.
5 - 175
Table 5.39 Typical design parameters of Bardenpho process
Retention time (hrs) Return

Internal
Activated
SRT MLSS Recycle %
Process Sludge % of
(d) (mg/L) of influent
Total Anaerobic Anoxic Aerobic influent
(%)
(%)
Bardenpho 1-3 (1st stage) 4-12 (2nd stage)

10-20 3,000-4,000 8-20 - 50-100 200-400
(4-stage) 2-4 (3rd stage) 0.5-1 (4th stage)
Bardenpho 1-3 (2nd stage) 4-12 (3rd stage)

10-20 3,000-4,000 9-22 0.5-1.5 50-100 200-400
(5-stage) 2-4 (4th stage) 0.5-1 (5thstage)
5.18.7 Anaerobic-anoxic-oxic (A2O) Process (Biological Nitrogen and Phosphorus Removal

Process)
This process consists of tanks arranged in the sequence: anaerobic tank, anoxic tank and oxic tank.
Influent and return activated sludge flow into the anaerobic tank while nitrified liquor is recycled
with a circulating pump from the oxic (nitrification) tank to the anoxic (denitrification) tank.
Ammonia nitrogen is oxidized to nitrite or nitrate in the oxic tank, and then nitrite or nitrate is
denitrified to nitrogen gas in the anoxic tank. Depending on the water quality of influent to the
reaction tank, it may be necessary to add organic matter such as methanol and sodium hydroxide
etc., to the reaction tank. Coagulant may be added to the reaction tank if more stable phosphorus
removal is needed. The schematic is shown in Figure 5.72
Figure 5.72 Configuration of anaerobic-anoxic-oxic activated sludge process
The performance of full-scale A2O process of Toba STP in Japan is shown in Table 5 40 overleaf.
5 - 176
Table 5.40 Performance of A2O process (Toba STP, Kyoto, Japan)

Water HRT (hr)
MLSS TN or Influent Effluent Removal
Run Temp. Anaer F/M
Anoxic Oxic (mg/l) TP mg/l mg/l (%)
(C) obic
TN 27.0 8.3 69
1 17.6 1.3 2.7 6.0 0.12 1,570
TP 2.7 0.8 70
TN 26.9 10.0 63
2 14.9 1.3 2.6 6.0 0.14 1,560
TP 2.8 1.1 61
TN 24.7 8.9 64
3 20.6 1.3 2.7 6.1 0.12 1,810
TP 3.0 0.3 90
TN 17.5 6.9 61
4 23.8 1.3 2.6 5.8 0.08 1,930
TP 1.9 1.5 21
Source: Murata, 1992
a. Advantages
i. Both nitrogen and phosphorus are removed simultaneously in this process.
ii. A portion of alkalinity consumed in the aerobic tank is recovered by denitrification reaction in the
anaerobic reaction tank by recycling nitrified liquor from the aerobic tank to the anoxic tank.
b. Disadvantages
i. Generally, this process needs larger volume of reaction tank than that used in the standard
activated sludge process.
ii. The process operating parameters of nitrogen removal, such as SRT conflict with that of
phosphorus removal; therefore, the optimum SRT condition needs to be set to remove both
nitrogen and phosphorus. Generally, the phosphorus removal efficiency is less than that of the
AO process because higher SRT value is needed than in the AO process.
According to the performance of the actual A2O processes and references on the A2O process,
typical design parameters of this process are integrated as shown in Table 5.41.
Table 5.41 Typical design parameters of A2O process
HRT(hours) Return Nitrified

F/M SRT MLSS activated Recycle
as MLVSS (days) (mg/L) Anaer sludge (% of
Anoxic Oxic
obic (% of influent) influent)
0.5 0.5 3.5
0.15-0.25 4-27 3,000-5,000 20-50 100-300
1.5 1.0 6 .0
Source: Pennsylvania Department of Environmental Protection
5 - 177
For municipal sewage of ordinary water quality, the nitrogen removal efficiency of this process is
expected to be 60 to 70% and phosphorus removal efficiency is expected to be 70 to 80%.
5.18.8 Other Reported Processes
5.18.8.1 Sharon-Anammox Processes
The acronyms Sharon is from "Single High rate Ammonia Removal over Nitrite and
Anammox is from "Anaerobic Ammonia Oxidation. . In this process, it is stated that a portion of the
incoming ammonia is partially oxidized to nitrite and the balance ammonium is retained. These are
subsequently converted into nitrogen gas under anaerobic conditions without the need to add an
external carbon source. It is claimed that 40% less oxygen is adequate as compared to conventional
biological nitrification, organic carbon source is not required, and sludge production is negligible.
Its development into a functional plant is however, still in its nascent stage. A schematic of
nitrogen transformations is in Figure 5.73.
Figure 5.73 Schematic of Sharon-Anammox process for nitrogen removal
5.18.9 Guiding Principles of Biological Nutrient Removal Processes
Guiding principles of the biological nutrient removal processes which are described in the
foregoing sub-sections are summarised as under:
a. Make sure whether nitrogen and phosphorous removal is required as per the discharge
standards or the sewage and quality standards.
b. Decide whether removal of N or P or both is required.
c. All the design criteria are applicable for developed countries where detergents used are
non-phosphate (biological) detergents. Check whether design criteria are directly applicable to
India or not, where soaps and detergents containing chemical phosphates are commonly used.
d. Arising out of this, conduct a pilot-scale study to evolve guidelines that are to be followed
especially for phosphorous.
e. If laboratory study is difficult, chemical removal (precipitation) of phosphorous by lime or alum is

practicable.
5 - 178
f. In India, large scale STPs using such technologies have already been provided by the BWSSB in
their STPs under the JBIC funding and these can be referred upon to draw factual data on design
criteria vis a vis actual performance. Here again, this design is to be taken only as a guide and
not replicated because biological nutrient removal is a complex process and has to be specific to
the situation on hand based on BOD, nitrogen and phosphorous variations.
5.18.10 Membrane Filtration (MF, UF, NF, RO)
Filtration membranes are classified according to the pore size or the size of solute they screen out
as shown in Figure 5.74:
Figure 5.74 Membrane characteristics
MF - Microfiltration membranes are porous membranes with pore sizes between 0.1 and
1 micron (1 micron=1000 nanometre). They allow almost all dissolved solids to get through
and retain only solids particles over the pore size.
UF - Ultrafiltration membranes are asymmetric or composite membranes with pore sizes around
between 0.005 and 0.05 micron. They allow almost mineral salts and organic molecules to get
through and retain only macromolecules
NF - Nanofiltration membranes are reverse osmosis with pore sizes around 0.001 micron. They
retain multivalent ions and organic solutes that are larger than 0 .0 0 1 micron.
RO - Reverse osmosis membranes are dense skin, asymmetric or composite membranes that let
water get through and reject almost all salts.
5 - 179
a. Advantages
i. Membranes can reduce contaminants to the levels required by specific reuse application.
ii. Membranes may be added at any moment in existing sewage treatment plant and may be
designed for the amount of treated water needed
b. Disadvantages
i. This process is only possible after appropriate treatment.
ii. High operation and maintenance costs
iii. Part of the water produced must be used for backwash
iv. Backwash water must be incorporated to the influent water
v. In case of RO, disposal of rejects with high dissolved solids is a problem, unless coastal
discharge is available.
The appropriate combination of feed flow rate and TMP (Transmembrane Pressure) will
maximize the flux while minimizing the impact of pumping and shear on the product. The appropriate
combination of these two parameters will also minimize processing time and/or membrane area.
Membrane Area [m2] = Process Volume [L] / (Flux [LMH] Process Time [h])
Pump feed rate [L/min] = Feed flux [L/min/m2] Area [m2]
LMH: L/m2/h
These are fixed by membrane manufacturers.
Membrane filtration is used for polishing water for specific uses like industry process water, or for
aquifer infiltration.
In India, membrane filtration is widely used in the water and wastewater sectors. The recent sewage
reclamation plants in India have all used membrane filtration to recover usable grade water from
sewage in the final filtration section. It is used in various industries, airport complexes, and so on.
The difference between the UF, NF and RO is essentially the particle size removal since they
depend on the pore size and colloidal particles can be removed by ultra filtration whereas dissolved
salts will require reverse osmosis.
5 - 180
5.18.10.5 Guiding Principles
Membranes should be recognized more for the reject streams they generate and which are
concentrated in pollutants. Unless it is addressed, the membrane technology will not be useful.
Spiral wound membranes need pre-treatment for complete elimination of SS, limiting COD to less
than 100 mg/l and silt density index to less than 3 units besides elimination of all organics and
refractory organic colour which are extremely important and complete sterilization of the feed which
are challenges not easily surmountable.
Tube and disc arrangement of membranes, where the fluid passes over only one membrane film
at a time and drains out in upward movement is relatively better as it can take feed with BOD, COD,
SS etc. but these are costlier than spiral wound membranes.
5.18.11 Membrane Bioreactor
The membrane bioreactor (MBR) process is a combination of activated sludge process and
membrane separation process. Low pressure membranes (ultrafiltration or microfiltration) are
commonly used. Membranes can be submerged in the biological reactor or located in a
separate stage or compartment and are used for liquid-solid separation instead of the usual settling
process. Primary sedimentation tank, final sedimentation tank and disinfection facilities are not
installed in this process. The reaction tanks comprise an anoxic tank and an aerobic tank, and
the membrane modules are immersed in the aerobic tank. Pre-treated, screened influent enters
the membrane bioreactor, where biodegradation takes place. The mixed liquor is withdrawn by
water head difference or suction pump through membrane modules in a reaction tank, being filtered
and separated into biosolids and liquid. Surfaces of the membrane are continuously washed down
during operation by the mixed flow of air and liquid generated by air diffusers installed at the bottom
of the reaction tank.
The permeate from the membranes is the treated effluent.
The schematic is shown in Figure 5-75 overleaf.
a. 4.54 MLD STP using MBR technology in the Games Village Complex, Delhi
The schematic flow diagram of 4.54 MLD STP using MBR technology in the Games Village Complex
is shown in Figure 5.76 and the description of each process of this plant are shown in Table 5.42
The plant data are as follows:
Average flow: 4.54 MLD

Peak Flow: 11.35 MLD
Lean Flow: 2.0 MLD
5 - 181
Source:JSWA, 2003
Figure 5.75 Configuration of membrane bioreactor system
5 - 182
Source: Pamphlet issued by DJB
Figure 5.76 The schematic flow diagram of 4.54 MLD STP using MBR technology, Delhi
Table 5.42 Description of each process
T reated
Equalization/ Ultra Membrane
Bar Fine Anoxic Aeration Water
Balancing Fine Bio
Screen Screen Tank Tank Holding
Tank Screen Reactor
Tank
1 Nos. 1 Nos. 1 Nos. 2 Nos. 2 Nos. 2 Nos. 4 Nos. 1 Nos.
370 m3 830 m 3
Opening Opening 2,900 m 3 Opening (Total) (Total) 473 m 3
2,244 m 3
2 0 mm 6 mm (HRT 6 hrs) 1 mm, (HRT 1.9 (HRT 6.5 (Total)
hrs) hrs)
The performance of the MBR based STP at the Games village complex in Delhi is mentioned in
Table 5.43 overleaf.
b. Nordkanal Sewage Treatment Plant, Germany
The operating conditions and the performance of full scale MBR process in Germany (Applied for
the recycled nitrification-denitrification process) are shown in Table 5.44 and Table 5.45 overleaf.
3
The average flow of the MBR process is 1,024m /h.
5 - 183
Table 5.43 Performance of 4.54 MLD STP using MBR technology, Delhi
Parameter Unit Influent Effluent
pH - 7 .0 -7 .6 6 .8 - 7 . 8
Temperature C 18-38 -
TSS mg/l 400 < 1.0
BOD5 mg/l 250 <2
Total COD mg/l 750 -
Total Kjeldahl Nitrogen mg/l 40 < 1.0
Total N H /-N mg/l 25 <0.5
Total Alkalinity mg/l 305 -
Total Coliform MPN/100 ml - 2
Table 5.44 Operating conditions of MBR process (Nordkanal STP)
HRT(hours) SRT MLSS Flux Nitrified Recycle

F/M
Anoxic Oxic (days) (mg/l (l/sqm/day) (% of influent)
0.04 3.1-4.9 4.8-7 .6 25.0-28.6 9,200 288-552 400
Source: Moreau, 2010
Table 5.45 Performance of MBR process (Nordkanal STP)
COD N H /-N N 0 3--N P 0 43'-P TSS
Influent, mg/l 997-1,210 38.9 - 8.7 11,600- 14,800
Effluent, mg/l 17.4-22.1 0 2.57-3.5 0.26-0.3 -
Removal, % 98.2 100 - 96.8(A) -
(A) Ferric chloride addition

Source: Moreau, 2010
c. Arakawa Sewage Treatment Plant, Japan
The operating condition and the performance of pilot scale MBR process in Japan (Applied for
the recycled nitrification-denitrification process) are shown in Table 5.46 and Table 5.47 overleaf.
Average flow of the MBR process is 54m 3/h.
5 - 184
Table 5.46 Operating condition of MBR process (Arakawa STP)
HRT(hours) Nitrified
Applied
SRT MLSS Flux Recycle
Vacuum
(days) (mg/L) (L/m 2/day) (% of
(kPa)
influent)
Anoxic Oxic
3.0 3.0 2 0 .0 9,200 500-1,000 15-35 300
Source: JSWA, 2003
Table 5-47 Performance of MBR process (Arakawa STP)
T- S-
pH TSS TN TP TColiform Al
BOD BOD
(A) 7.15 191 43.1 222 34.1 4.75 3.6E+05 2.48

Inf.
mg/L 6.97 92 21.5 65 21.5 2.74 9.6E+04 - 0.78
(R) 7.47 497 78.6 867 58.7 9.51 7.3E+05 11.63
(A) 7.17 1.0 - <0.4 5.0 0.52 0.24 0.03

Eff.
mg/L 6.80 0.5 <0.4 2 .1 0.09 ND- 0 .0 2
(R) -
7.50 2.3 0.7 6.9 2.16 1 1.00 0.06
Removal
(A) - 99.5 - 99.8 85.3 89.1 99.9 98.8
(%)
T-BOD: Total BOD, s-BOD: Soluble BOD, TSS: Total suspended solids, T-N: Total nitrogen,
T-P: Total phosphorus, Al: Aluminium, T-coliform: Total coliform, ND: Non- detected, E: Exponent
Source: JSWA, 2003
d. MBR for park horticulture, Bangalore
The local authority has put up an automated MBR for horticulture of the citys famous Cubbon park.
It uses the city sewage. It is under O&M by the contractor firm.
e. Porlock Sewage Treatment Plant, the United Kingdom
Porlock sewage treatment plant is the first sewage treatment plant introducing MBR process in the
globe. The plant started operation in 1997 with capacity of 1.9 MLD.
The performance of the plant and number of membrane panels replaced are shown in Table 5-48 and
Table 5-49 overleaf.
5 - 185
Table 5-48 Performance of MBR process
Parameter BOD COD TSS
lnfluent(mg/l) 208 424 210
Effluent(mg/I) <4 22 <2
Source: Churchhouse, 2003
Table 5.49 Number of membrane panels replaced
Period of Number of Membrane Panels

membrane panels
used (year) Installed (a) replaced (b) Ratio of b) / (a)
1 85,000 162 0 .2
2 73,936 227 0.3
3 36,036 514 1.5
4 15,386 29 0 .2
5 15,386 16 0.1
6 4,286 20 0.5
7 686 <15 2.9
Source: JSWA,2003
f. Fukuzaki Sewage Treatment Plant, Japan
Fukuzaki sewage treatment plant is the first MBR plant in Japan.
The plant started operation in 2005 with capacity of 4.2 MLD. The plant also attempts to remove
nitrogen and phosphorus.
The operating conditions and the performance of the MBR process are shown in Table 5.50 and
Table 5.51.
Table 5.50 Operating condition of MBR process
Source: JSWA
5 - 186
Table 5.51 Performance of MBR process
BOD COD T-N T-P

Inf Eff Inf Eff Inf Eff Removal Inf Eff
(mg/l) (mg/l) (mg/l) (mg/l) (mg/l) (mg/l) ratio (%) (mg/l) (mg/l)
FY2005 124 0.7 75.9 5.6 33.5 5.8 82.7 3.28 0.36
FY2006 159 0.9 85.2 5.4 38.3 4.9 87.2 3.61 0 .2 0
FY2007 177 2 .6 96.3 5.9 40.1 7.1 82.3 4.08 0.21
FY2008 177 3.8 109 6 .0 46.1 8.3 82.0 4.66 0.08
FY2009 244 1.2 112 5.7 34.6 7.3 78.9 4.23 0.26
FY2010 263 1.5 98.4 5.5 33.1 7.3 78.0 3.49 0.29
Source: JSWA
a. Advantages
i. This process does not need primary and final sedimentation tanks, and disinfection facilities;
therefore, it requires smaller space than conventional biological systems (generally around
1/3 of ASP system).
ii. Since high MLSS concentration can be maintained in a reaction tank, MBRs operate at higher
volumetric loading rates which result in lower hydraulic retention times. The low retention times
mean that less space is required compared to a conventional system.
iii. High MLSS concentration in a reaction tank enables dewatering of the excess sludge withdrawn
from the reaction tank directly without thickening.
iv. The effluent from MBRs is transparent containing almost no TSS. Organic matters (BOD) are well
removed because of lower concentration of TSS compared with ASP process. Phosphorus can
also be removed by adding coagulant in reaction tank.
v. Long solids residence times (SRTs) of MBR, because of high MLSS concentration, is prone to
nitrification reaction in its process. Therefore, if anoxic zone is applied in reaction tank, nitrogen
is expected to be removed by biological nitrification and de-nitrification reaction.
vi. E-coli is almost certainly blocked by MF membrane with pore size of less than 0.4 micro meters
which is generally used for MBR system.
vii. Treated sewage by MBR can be reused for various purposes such as toilet flushing, gardening,
etc. without additional treatment.
5 - 187
viii. O & M works are easy and free from control of bulking and sludge recirculation because
final sedimentation tank is not required. Monitoring and control of treatment process
can easily be automated.
b. Disadvantages
i. Oil and grease is to be fully removed as otherwise membranes will get be choked and become
unusable.
ii. Needs higher capital and operating costs than conventional systems for the same throughput.
iii. Needs a flow equalization tank to regulate fluctuation of the influent flows.
iv. Needs fine screens for pre-treatment to protect membranes.
According to the performance of the actual MBR processes and references on the MBR
process, typical design parameters of this process and effluent quality are integrated as shown in
Table 5.52 and Table 5.53.
Table 5.52 Typical design parameters of MBR process
COD Applied
F/M SRT MLSS Flux DO
Loading Vacuum
as MLVSS (days) (mg/l) (l/m 2/day) (mg/l)
(kg/m 3/day) (kPa)
1.2-3.2 0.1-0.4 5-20 5,000-20,000 600-1,100 4-35 0.5-1.0
Table 5.53 Typical effluent quality
Effluent
Turbidity
BOD, mg/l COD, mg/l N H /-N , mg/l T- N, mg/l
<5 <30 <1 <10 <1
Important considerations related to design and maintenance of this process are as follows:
a. Since constant volume of influent needs to be supplied to membrane modules, it is necessary to

install a flow equalization tank to regulate the fluctuation in influent rate of flow.
b. There are two basic configurations of membrane: hollow fibre bundles and plate membranes.
There is no difference in the removal efficiency of these two configurations.
c. Since the permeation flux of membranes decreases as water temperature falls, capacity of
membranes should be designed considering influent temperature.
5 - 188
d. The area of opening of division wall between anoxic and oxic tanks must be adequate so that
reverse mixing between these tanks do not occur. Moreover, the reaction tank should be covered
so that foreign objects do not enter it.
e. Total amount of air required in aeration tank should be designed considering amount of air
required for biological treatment and for scrubbing the surface of the membranes.
f. It is recommended that the installation include one additional membrane tank/unit beyond what
the design would nominally call for considering operation and maintenance.
g. Some types of membrane require a separate washing tank for membrane modules.
h. MBR systems are configured with the membranes actually immersed in the biological reactor or,
in a separate vessel through which mixed liquor from the biological reactor is filtered.
For new installations, the use of MBR systems allows for higher sewage flow or improved
treatment performance in a smaller space than a conventional biological system using activated
sludge because there are no installations of secondary sedimentation tanks, sand filters and
disinfection facilities. This process has been used in the past only in smaller-flow systems due to the
high capital cost of the equipment and high operation and maintenance (O&M) costs.
Presently, they are being increasingly used in larger systems. MBR systems are also well suited for
some industrial and commercial applications. The high-quality effluent produced by MBRs makes it
particularly suitable for reuse applications and for surface water discharge applications requiring
extensive nutrient (nitrogen and phosphorus) removal.
a. Maintenance of higher MLSS concentration is not easy. In practice, high MLSS

concentration cannot be sustained. So smaller reaction tank is provided; and effluent BOD is
not as desired. Adequate safety factor has to be considered for reaction tank.
b. Manufacturer can estimate the value of MLSS for pilot equipment and then design the plant
based on the estimated MLSS. Pilot equipment cost can be borne by the owner.
5.18.12 Sequencing Batch Reactors (SBR)
In its functional process scheme, a Sequencing Batch Reactor (SBR) is the same as the activated
sludge process. The only difference is in the activated sludge process, the sewage flows through a
primary clarifier, an aeration tank and then through a secondary clarifier continuously whereas in the
SBR, the aeration and settling are carried out in batch mode one after the other in the same tank.
An illustrative schematic diagram is in Figure 5.77 overleaf.
5 - 189
Part A: Engineering_______________________________________________ SEWAGE TREATMENT FACILITIES
*-
Note: All the four steps shown above take place in the same tank one following the other on a time
interval basis but are shown separately in this figure for easy understanding.
Figure 5.77 Illustrative Schematic of SBR operation in the same Basin
Primary clarifiers do not seem to be provided. Consequently, at least two SBR basins are needed in
parallel so that when one is in aeration, the other can be in settling and decanting of the supernatant.
In fact the activated process can be referred to as continuous flow reactor (CFR). For this reason,
the footprint on like to like basis of this type of SBR will be higher. In the CFR the suspended solids
in the settling tank are constantly under simultaneous influence of opposing upward hydraulics of
the overflowing treated sewage and gravitational setting of the suspended solids. In the SBR, this is
got over by batch settling.
In fact, the CFR can also be designed with the settling tank alone in parallel modules and in batch
settling alternatively. The SBR does have some advantages and they are addressed herein.
SBRs are typically configured and operated as multiple parallel basins. It aims to provide process
and equipment performance, and variously include an instrumental control system that regulates
timed sequences for filling, reaction, settling and effluent decanting. All these are referred to as one
cycle of process control operation. It is the time duration between successive decanting sequences
during which the liquid level moves from a lower water depth (bottom water level) to its fill depth (top
water level) and back to its lower water depth (bottom water level). This volume progression takes
place in repetitive sequences that permit reactive filling to be followed by solids liquid separation. The
operational and process controls are governed as flows
a. A batch reactor consisting of a single tank equipped with an inlet for raw sewage, air diffusers,
with associated compressors and piping for aeration; a sludge draw-off mechanism for waste
sludge; a decant mechanism to remove the supernatant after settling; and a control mechanism
to time and sequence the processes.
b. Decanting of the settled supernatant is carried out by equipment called as decanters. These
consist of sharp edged weir plates over which the settled supernatant overflows similar to
conventional clarifier weirs.
5 - 190
The scum baffles are provided before these weir plates similar to the primary
clarifiers. The difference between clarifiers and these decanters is that in the case of
clarifiers, the water surface remains constant and the weir plates are fixed permanently at that
water surface. In the case of SBRs, the water surface will keep going down as the settled
sewage is withdrawn because there is no inflow during this period. Hence, the weir plate has
to move simultaneously down with the water surface and the collected settled sewage has to be
discharged out of the SBR basin through a fixed pipe outlet. This is achieved by unique
mechanisms called decanters. There are mainly three types of decanters namely
(a) mechanized float controlled, (b) mechanized swing controlled and (c) hydraulically float
controlled. These are shown in Figure 5.78 overleaf. The country has very limited experience
on the performance of the various type of decanters. While selecting a decanter the competent
authority may decide the type of decanter after ascertaining their field performance in the
country or elsewhere in the world under similar conditions.
c. Wasting of surplus sludge typically occurs during the non mixed (aerated) stage. The sequence
to take advantage of the higher concentrations of settled mixed liquor; wasting can equally take
place in an aerated mixed condition.
d. SBR plants consist of a minimum of two reactors in a plant. When one reactor is in the fill and
aeration mode, the other reactor can be in settling and decanting mode of the cycle.
e. In the reaction stage, the oxygen is supplied to the system within the time frame of
the reaction cycle.
f. Each single SBR basin has the same floor area for all sequences in each cycle of operation.
As with CFRs, there are a number of types of SBRs all of which are easily differentiated. The
main differences relate to their cyclic sequencing operation. The SBR efficiency derives from a
capacity to maintain good sludge settling through batch settling. As with CFRs, nitrogen removal by
biological nitrification-denitrification as also biological phosphorous removal by upstream
anaerobiasis can also be built into the SBRs. Generally, the SBRs are reported in F/M ratios
bordering on the extended aeration mode for the full quantity of the treated sewage.
However, these can also be used with primary settling and F/M ratios like in conventional ASP
in CFRs to generate biomethanation from primary and excess volatile sludges and electricity
production from the methane and thus save on electricity costs. There are variants of this basic
SBR technology. Some of these are as follows:
a. Intermittent Feed and Intermittent Decant SBR Process
In this process, the inflow and outflow are intermittent at the beginning and end of the treatment
cycle. Interrupted inflow during the settle and decant sequencing provides the best possible
environment for solids liquid separation. Operation with specific initial fill only sequencing to
generate 30% to 50% bulk in basin biological selectivity mechanisms against filamentous sludge
bulking; typically this is thirty percent to fifty percent of the fill-react sequence in a cycle.
5 - 191
Figure 5.78 Types of Decanters
5 - 192
Cyclic flow interruption during settle and decant sequences to positively prevent by pass flow of
untreated sewage that can otherwise degrade effluent quality; all influent sewage receives aeration
during a cycle. Operational protocols that maximize nitrogen removal through conventional
sequenced aeration for nitrification followed by sequenced anoxic mixing for denitrification for which
total cycle times are typically 6 hours. In addition appreciable denitrification also takes place during
settling (Kazmi and Furumai, 2000).
This conventional SBR configuration uses sequences described as Fill, React, Settle, Decant, and
Idle are shown in Figure 5.79.
Source:Nishihara Environment Co., Ltd.
Figure 5.79 Typical operating cycles of intermittent SBR process
c. Continuous Flow SBR Process
It is stated that the need for at least two parallel modules and hence relatively larger foot print than
CFR, has been sought to be got over in this process where a single reactor is divided as the pre-treat
zone and downstream main-react zone and interconnected at floor level.
To start with, the liquid depth in both these zones is reduced by the depth by which the supernatant is
decanted in the main-react zone. At this stage, the raw sewage continues to enter the pre-treat zone
reacts with the returned MLSS and depending on the objectives, this can be run as anaerobic, anoxic
or aeration or a sequential mix. The reacted MLSS flows into the main-react zone at the floor level and
at an appropriate time, the air agitation is cut off permitting the solids liquid separation and the
supernatant is drawn off by the decanter of the swing down or float type and sludge wasting takes
place simultaneously. An advantage stated is the elimination of a separate return sludge pumpset.
An illustrative schematic is shown in Figure 5.80 overleaf.
5 - 193
Source:http://www.ittwww.com.au/brochures/abj_brochures.pdf
Figure 5.80 Typical configuration of Continuous Flow SBR
d. Selector Zone Incorporated SBR Process
Bioreactors operating in low F/M ratio and long sludge ages may sometimes experience problems
due to filamentous organisms causing bulking sludge.
A customary solution is to provide a selector tank with a hydraulic retention time of about
30 minutes before the bioreactor and operate at a high F/M ratio which ensures growth of floc
forming microorganisms while suppressing filamentous growth. The selector also helps in removing
some of the organic phosphorus without chemical addition. This is also used in the case of SBR.
The reactor is partitioned initially for the selector zone.
e. Chemically Enhanced SBR Phosphorous Removal Process
Addition of metal salts if necessary by supplementing the bicarbonate alkalinity is also another
customary solution in removing phosphorous which remains in excess of the uptake.
This is also used in the case of SBR by adding the alkalinity as needed in the react cum fill stage and
the metal salt in the subsequent react stage.
All sewage received in a cycle is similarly treated as in the conventional SBR. Purposely designed
and controlled reaction environments of aerobic, anoxic and anaerobic are a feature of this variation
of a conventional SBR.
a. Mundhwa Sewage Treatment Plant, Pune, India
The design details of the Mundhwa STP reproduced in Table 5.54 (overleaf) are extracted from the
IIT Roorkee report August 2010.
The performance results are extracted from the IWWA 2011, It is stated that the raw sewage values
of BOD, SS, TKN and PO4-P are 205 mg/l, 262 mg/l, 45 mg/l and 2.3 mg/l and the treated sewage
values of BOD, SS, TKN are reduced to less than 10 mg/l, and PO4-P is reduced to 0.7 mg/l.
5 - 194
Table 5.54 Design criteria stated as used in the 45 MLD Cyclic Activated Sludge process based
SBR at Mundhwa STP in Pune
Design Flow
Average flow 45 MLD
Peak factor 2.25 tim es average flow
Peak flow 95 MLD
Influent Quality to SBR Basin
BOD 250 mg/l
SS 350 mg/l
TKN 45 mg/l
TP 5 mg/l
Faecal coliform 10 M PN/100 ml
Effluent Q uality of SBR Basin
BOD < 10 mg/l
SS < 1 0 mg/l
TKN < 1 0 mg/l
TP < 2 mg/l
Faecal coliform < 100 MPN/100 ml
No. of basins 4
Each basin area 1431 m2
Basin foot print 127.5 m2/1000 m 3/d
Decant volum e 3377 m3
Decanter loading 300 m 3/1000 m3/d
Hourly flow rate 1875 m3/h
Hourly flow rate to each basin 937 m 3/h
No. of cycles per day/basin 8
Filling and aeration 90 min.
Settling phase 45 min.
Decanting phase 45 min.
Total cycle time 3 h
Hours of aeration tim e/day/basin 12 h

MLSS 4300 mg/l
MLVSS 3440 mg/l
F/M 0.08
HRT 16.30 h
SRT 14.86 days

Selector (Anoxic) Zone 1
Num ber of selector 50 min.
com partm ents/basin
Retention tim e in selector zone
Disinfection
Chlorine dose after SBR Basin 2.5 mg/l
Source: IIT Roorkee, August 2010
5 - 195
b. Culver Sewage Treatment Plant, USA
The operating conditions and the performance of the Culver SBR process in USA are shown in
Table 5.55 and Table 5.56.
Table 5.55 Operating conditions of the Culver SBR process
Mode o f O peration (m inutes)

Average Num ber
MLSS SRT
flow Fill Total of F/M (a)
Fill and (m g/L) (days)
(MLD) and React Settle Decant Idle cycle Basins
Aeration
Mix time
1.34 54 126 42 42 42 60 366 2 5,000 0.08-0.16 15.5
Source: USEPA, 1986, USEPA, 1983
Table 5.56 Performance of the Culver SBR process
NH4+-N +
BOD TSS T- P
N 0 3 -N
Influent (mg/L) 170 150 2 2 .0 6.5
Effluent (mg/L) 10.5 5.5 2.4 0.75
% Removal 94 96 89 88
Source: USEPA, 1986, USEPA, 1983
a. Advantages
i. One single reactor basin provides all of the unit operations and processes that require two
separate basins in a conventional activated sludge plant configuration that can provide an
effluent quality suitable for reuse. Equalization, primary clarification (in most cases), biological
treatment, and secondary clarification can be achieved in a single reactor vessel.
ii. This process can be operated and controlled with flexibility for efficient removal of organic
matter, suspended solids, nitrogen, and phosphorus under all loading conditions. Provides
enhanced organic phosphorus removal with or without chemical augmentation.
iii. This process can control the growth of filamentous bacteria and hence prevent bulking of
activated sludge.
iv. This process saves capital cost by eliminating final sedimentation tanks. As secondary
sedimentation tanks are not required in this process, footprint area needed is also minimal as
simultaneous multiprocessing takes place in a single reactor basin (approximately
100m 2/1000m 3 only needed for SBR Tanks).
5 - 196
v. Can be used with primary clarifiers and power generation configurations where the ratio of
VSS:TSS is high.
vi. Allows for easy modular expansion for population growth, modular configurations and cyclic
operation is easily managed to provide continuous inflow and outflow hydraulic profiles,
dispensing with the need for outflow hydraulic balancing
b. Disadvantages
i. Compared to the conventional activated sludge system, a higher level of sophistication and
maintenance can be associated with more automated switches and valves.
ii. Basin depth should be sufficient to provide an adequate clear water depth over the sludge blanket
to prevent settled solids entrainment.
iii. In small single stream SBR systems approximately less than 10 MLD, effluent flow balancing
may be needed for downstream processing, such as filtration or disinfection.
iv. Short-circuiting of influent conservative parameters (ammonia nitrogen, orthophosphate) under

the non-interrupted inflow protocol may be a process failure consideration in some SBRs.
v. Larger capacity aeration system, relative to aeration time per cycle and per day, is required
compared as to conventional activated sludge system.
vi. The potential for discharging floating or settled sludge during the decant phase with certain
SBR configurations.
vii. Potential plugging of aeration devices during selected operating cycles depending on the
aeration system used by the manufacturer.
viii. There should be sufficient allowance of clear water depth from the sludge blanket to minimize
sludge carryover. The volume of water decanted should be limited to prevent scouring of solids.
ix. All the SBR plants must be designed to cater to the peak flows. A minimum of two tank system
is required.
A compilation of typical process details that would feature in the use of SBR facilities is
mentioned in Table 5.57. It has to be recognized that as with all similar technologies, these are
only of informative value for India and it is mandatory that there is a demonstrated available level
of Indian expertise and support services for the design of SBR systems and its operational
methodology for India which is to be hereafter evolved with reference to a validation of
design vs. actual performance of SBRs built in India.
One of the classical difficulties that pertain to establishing the design parameters for SBR is the
biomass metabolism. In the ASP and CFR, it takes place under "steady state conditions where a
steady BOD profile from inlet to outlet is existing in the aeration tank irrespective of time.
5 - 197
Table 5.57 Typical process parameters for SBR configurations (for unsettled sludge)
Continuous Intermittent
S. Flow and Flow and
Parameters Units
No. Intermittent Intermittent
Decant Decant
1 F/M ratio d '1 0 .0 5 -0 .0 8 0 .0 5 -0 .3
2 Sludge Age d 15-20 4-20

kg dry solids/
3 Sludge Yield 0 .7 5 -0 .8 5 0.75-1.0
kg BOD
4 MLSS mg/L 3 ,0 0 0 -4 ,0 0 0 3 ,5 0 0 - 5 ,0 0 0
5 Cycle Time h 4 -8 2.5-6
6 Settling Time h > 0.5 > 0.5
7 Decant Depth m 1.5 2.5
8 Fill Volume Base - Peak Flow Peak Flow
9 Process Oxygen
BOD kg 0 2/kg BOD 1.1 1.1
TKN kg 0 2/kg TN 4.6 4.6
* For Phosphorous < 1 mg/L, after bio-P removal, metal precipitant (Fe3+ or A l3+)
shall be added. Sludge yield factor and sludge age not applicable for primary
settled sewage; typical prim ary TSS removal 60%, BOD 30%.
In the case of SBR, the biomass metabolism takes place under "unsteady state conditions where
the BOD profile decreases with time during the batch time interval. Thus, calculating the oxygen
requirements is a challenge depending on many factors. In actual practice, the oxygen
requirement is calculated as though it is a steady state condition as in the CFR and then the rate of air
delivery to the basin is calculated by delivering the entire volume of air in the actual aeration
interval. This will need a much bigger air compressor and air diffuser system.
However the motor is controlled by VFD and thereby the delivery of the compressor is gradually
adjusted down to suit the real need or maintained as it is based on maintaining the required residual
D O in the basin at the end of aeration. It is a unique feature in the design of SBR aeration facilities.
However, it needs a focussed study to establish the actual oxygen uptake rate as a function of
aeration interval to make future designs more realistic. Such data as validated by actual
observations is not found in literature.
5.18.12.4.1 Disinfection tank volume
The capacity of the chlorine contact tank for the treated sewage of batch processes such as the SBR
will be based on 30 minutes detention time of the rate of decant flow calculated as volume of decant
flow divided by the duration of decanting of any one or multiple reactors decanting simultaneously.
5 - 198
Municipal sewage is successfully treated in SBR systems. As with conventional activated sludge
plants, SBRs can be used for all plant sizes. Current practice examples large scale facilities in
municipal applications to about 270 MLD, (Goronszy, 2008), Especially where land availability is
limited; plants can easily be installed on a multi-level basis, like the one reported to be in use at
Thailand as in Figure 5.81.
Figure 5.81 Yannawa STP, Thailand
With proper anticipations in the design stage, the SBR process can be installed with good flexibility
to adapt to future regulatory changes for effluent parameters such as for nutrient removal. As with
conventional activated sludge variants, there are several SBR variants each of which requires their
own design considerations. Design and operation for efficient nitrogen removal provides enhanced
process stability, especially with operating temperatures greater than 20C. It is necessary to bear in
mind that there are no procedures to design the SBR, like all other biological processes for obtaining
a desired removal of coliform organisms. At best one can cite another functioning SBR but the result
of that STP need not necessarily be the same for the new SBR even though it is designed on the
same lines. It applies to almost all such biological processes. Hence, provision for variable chlorine
dosage of the SBR basin effluent should be made.
5.18.13 Moving Bed Biofilm Reactors (MBBR)
The moving bed biofilm reactor (MBBR) is based on the biofilm carrier elements. Several types of
synthetic biofilm carrier elements have been developed. These biofilm carrier elements are floated
in the mixed liquor in the aeration tank and are kept floating by the air from the diffusers. They
have a tendency to accumulate at the top zones. Hence wall mounted mixers propel the media
downwards so that they again float and are in circulation in the mixed liquor. They are retained by
suitably sized sieves at the outlet.
5 - 199
This process is intended to enhance the activated sludge process by providing a greater
biomass concentration in the aeration tank and thus offer the potential to reduce the basin volume
requirements. They have also been used to improve the volumetric nitrification rates and to
accomplish the denitrification in aeration tanks by having anoxic zones within the biofilm depth.
Because of the complexity of the process and issues related to understanding the biofilm area and
activity, the processes design is empirical. There are now more than 10 different variations of the
processes in which a biofilm carrier material of various types are suspended in the aeration tank
of the activated sludge process. There are many examples of such activated sludge treatment
process with suspended biofilm carrier in the world. In this section, some of the more widely cited
processes such as the Captor, Linpor, Pegasus, and Kaldnes are described and some design
considerations and parameters are cited.
a. Captor and Linpor process
In the Captor and Linpor processes, foam pads with a specific density of about 0.95 g/cm are
placed in the bioreactor in a free-floating fashion and retained by an effluent screen. The pad
volume can account for 20% to 30% of the reactor volume. Dimensions of the carrier materials are
presented in Table 5.58.
Table 5.58 Dimensions of the carrier materials
Carrier specifications
Name
Material Dimension, mm
Captor Polyurethane 30x25x25
Linpor Polyurethane 10 to 13 cubes
Mixing from the diffused aeration circulates the foam pads in the system, but without
additional mixing methods. They may tend to accumulate at the effluent end of the aeration
basin and float at the surface. An air knife has been installed to clean the screen continuously and
a pump is used to return the carrier material to the influent end of the reactor. Solids are removed
by a conventional secondary clarifier and wasting is from the return line as in the ASP
The principal advantage for the sponge carrier system is the ability to increase the loading of an
existing plant without increasing the solids load on existing secondary clarifiers, as most of the
biomass is retained in the aeration basin. Loading rates for BOD of 1.5 to 4.0 kg/m3/d with the
equivalent MLSS concentration of 5,000 to 9,000mg/L have been achieved with these processes.
Based on the results with full-scale and pilot-scale tests with the sponge carrier installed, it appears
that the nitrification can occur at the apparent lower SRT values, based on the suspended growth
mixed liquor, than those for activated sludge without internal carrier. Compared to other biofilm
carriers, Captor and Linpor Cubes are larger; meaning the openings of the screen used to block
the outflow of the biofilm carriers can also be larger.
5 - 200
Therefore, there is less clogging of the screen due to scum. Furthermore, Linpor Cubes are
stated to have better durability and it is stated that even after a long period use, replacement is not
necessary. The Linpor system was developed by Linde AG in the mid-1970s, Linpor-CN Process
and Linpor Cubes carrying sludge are shown in Figure 5.82 and Figure 5.83.
E xcess sludge
Source: Nishihara Environment Co., Ltd.
Figure 5.82 Linpor-CN process flow diagram
Source:Nishihara Environment Co., Ltd.

Figure 5.83 Linpor Cubes carrying sludge (12^12^15 mm)
b. Pegasus/Bio-cube process
The Pegasus system is based on the immobilization of nitrifying bacteria in organic gel pellets called
bio-n-cubes which are non-biodegradable organic matrix consisting of a mixture of polyethylene
glycol and nitrifying activated sludge. The number of immobilised autotrophic bacteria is
independent of the sludge age and thus higher than in comparable low-loaded activated sludge
systems. The immobilization prevents the autotrophic bacteria from wash-out, improves the
nitrification kinetics and results in a lower temperature dependency for the ammonia removal
process. The bio-n-cubes are maintained in suspension in the aeration tank and wash-out is
prevented by a retention grid at the outlet of the tank.
5 - 201
If the existing volume of the activated sludge tank enables the hydraulic retention time of the
sewage to be at least five hours, total nitrogen removal is stated as implemented directly in the
activated sludge by means of the Pegasus immobilised culture system. The biopellets used
in the Pegasus process, called bio-n-cubes are relatively small in size and produced in a way to
ensure a balance between oxygen transfer, biomass growth and suspendability. The annual
wear rate of volume of bio-n-cubes is stated as 1%. The bio-n-cubes are proprietary products of
Hitachi Plant Technologies, Ltd. The schematic is shown in Figure 5.84. The bio-cubes are shown
in Figure 5.85. The parameters of the pellets used are given in Table 5.59.
Agitator
Source:Hitachi Plant Technologies, Ltd., 2010

Figure 5.84 Pegasus process flow diagram
Source: Hitachi Plant Technologies, Ltd 2010

Figure 5.85 Pegasus bio-n-cubes (3 x 3 x 3 mm)
Table 5.59 Parameters of the pellets of the Pegasus process
Pellet material Polyethylene glycol (PEG)

Pellet size 3^3x3 mm
PEG volume fraction 1 0 - 20%
Micro-organism fraction 2%
Density 1.03 g/cm 3

Surface area 700 m2/m 3 reactor volume
Biofilm thickness ~ 60 |jm
Source: Hitachi Plant Technologies, Ltd., 2010
5 - 202
c. Kaldnes process
This technology was developed by the Norwegian firm of M/S Kaldnes Miljoteknologi. The
processes consist of adding small cylindrical shaped polyethylene carrier elements (specific gravity
of 0.96 g/m3) in aerated or non-aerated tanks to support biofilm growth. The small cylinders are about
10 mm in diameter and 7 mm in height with a cross inside the cylinder and longitudinal fins on the
outside. The biofilm carriers are maintained in the reactor by a perforated plate (5*25 mm slots) at the
tank outlet. A ir agitator or mixers are used to circulate the packing continuously. The packing may fill
25% to 50% of the tank volume. The specific surface area of the packing is about 500 m2/m 3 of bulk
packing volume. The typical reactors are shown in Figure 5.86. The biofilm carriers are shown in
Figure 5.87. The schematic is shown in Figure 5-88 overleaf.

Figure 5.86 Typical reactors of MBBR process
Source:Stowa Webpage
Figure 5.87 Kaldnes biofilm carriers (About 10 mm diameter * 7 mm height)
5 - 203
Figure 5.88 Schematic flow diagram of MBBR process for removal of BOD and nutrients
d. FAB Technology
The fluidized aerobic bioreactor includes a tank in any shape filled up with small carrier
elements. The elements are specially developed materials of controlled density such that they can
be fluidized using an aeration device.
A biofilm develops on the elements, which move along with the effluent in the
reactor. The movement within the reactor is generated by providing aeration with the help of
diffusers placed at the bottom of the reactor. The thin biofilm on the elements enables the bacteria
to act upon the biodegradable matter in the effluent and reduce BOD/COD content in the presence
of oxygen from the air used for fluidization. The technology is shown in Figure 5.89.
Figure 5.89 FAB technology
The merits of the FAB technology as stated by its promoter is mentioned in Table 5.60 overleaf.
5 - 204
Table 5.60 Merits of FAB technology as stated by its Promoter
Features Benefits
No sludge recycle
Attached growth process No monitoring of MLSS
Low sludge production
High loading rates
High Biofilm surface area Compact plants
Small foot print
Non clogging design
Better oxygen transfer efficiency
Reduced power consumption
Fluidised Bed
Reduces coliform
Low maintenance
Tank of any shape can be utilized
a. Captor and Linpor process
The design details and the performance data of the Linpor CN Process for a biological
nitrification-denitrification STP of Freising, Germany are mentioned in Table 5.61 and Table 5.62.
Table 5.61 Design Details of the biological nitrification-denitrification Linpor process

(Freising, Germany)
Flow MLSS(mg/L) Carrier

F/M
rate Volume
Suspended Fixed Average ( 1 /d)
(MLD) (%)
Design 23.6 3,800 15,000 5,800 22 0 .1 2
Operation 21.4 5,700 18,000 7,700 20 0.04
Source: Gilligan and Morper, 1999
Table 5.62 Performance of the biological nitrification-denitrification Linpor process

(Freising, Germany)
Design Operation
Influent Effluent Influent Effluent
BOD (mg/l) 222 - 106 3
COD (mg/l) 397 - 208 -
TKN (mg/l) 46.6 - 29 < 0 .6
NH4"-N (mg/l) 35.9 <5 16 < 0.1
NOx'-N (mg/l) 2 .6 - - 9.9
Total-N (mg/l) 49.2 <18 29 9.9
Source: Gilligan and Morper, 1999
5 - 205
The design details and the performance data of Pegasus process for a biological
nitrification-denitrification STP of Munakata City, Japan are in Table 5.63 and Table 5.64.
Table 5.63 Design details of the biological nitrification-denitrification Pegasus process

(Munakata City, Japan)
Maximum daily low (m3/day) 11,300
Primary settling Surface-loading (m 3/m 2/day) 36

tank Retention time (hours) 1.7
Capacity (m3) 2,008

Anoxic tank
Retention time (hours) 4.3
Capacity (m3) 1,436

Oxic tank
Pellet dosing ratio (%) 7.5
Circulation ratio of nitrified
1.5-3.0
liquor to influent flow (-)
Surface-loading (m 3/m 2/day) 25
Final settling tank
Dosage of coagulant
70
PAC feeder (L/ 1 ,0 0 0 m3)
A/p (-) 1
Source: Hitachi Plant Technologies, Ltd.
Table 5.64 Performance of the biological nitrification-denitrification Pegasus process

(Munakata City, Japan)
Effluent from
Water quality Influent secondary settling After rapid filtration
tank
BOD (mg/l) 210 14.2 10
SS (mg/l) 250 20.5 5
T-N (mg/l) 40 1 0.2 10
T-P (mg/l) 6 0.4 0.3
Source: Hitachi Plant Technologies, Ltd.
5 - 206
c. Kaldnes process
The performance data and the schematic flow diagram of the Kaldnes process in Lillehammer
STP of Norway, which applies the biological nitrification-denitrification and phosphorus removal
by chemical precipitation, are shown in Table 5.65 and Figure 5.90.
Table 5.65 Performance of the Lillehammer Kaldnes process
Influent (mg/l) Effluent (mg/l) Removal (%)
BODy 81.67 3.33 96
T-N 25.46 5.17 80
T-P 3.67 0.08 98
STP for Nitrogen and Phosphorus removal Lillehammer, Norway.

Dimensioning flow: 1,200 m 3/hr, Maximum flow: 1,900 m3/hr
Design Temperature: 10C
Source: Kaldnes Web page
Source: Kaldnes Web page
Figure 5.90 Schematic flow diagram of Lillehammer Kaldnes process for removal of
BOD and nutrients
The advantages and disadvantages of these MBBR processes are as follows:
a. Advantages
i. These processes can enhance the activated sludge process by providing a greater
biomass concentration in the aeration tank and thus offer the potential to reduce the basin
size requirements.
ii. Packing materials can maintain the concentration of nitrifying bacteria in the aerobic tank at
a high level, and the nitrification reaction proceeds efficiently. Hence, these processes can
improve the volumetric nitrification rates and accomplish the denitrification in aeration tanks by
having anoxic zones within the biofilm depth.
iii. These processes can be used for the upgrading of existing STP, especially when space is
an issue.
5 - 207
iv. These processes can upgrade the plant by reducing the solids loading on the existing
sedimentation tank.
b. Disadvantages
i. Because of the complexity of the process and issues related to understanding the biofilm
area and activity, the processes designs are empirical and based on prior pilot-plant or limited
full-scale results.
ii. When upgrading existing treatment plants that operate without primary settling and rather large
screen sizes, the carrier material should be chosen appropriately to prevent clogging.
iii. In the aeration tank of these processes, the concentration of dissolved oxygen (D O) has to
be relatively high because the D O concentration is the limiting factor in the biofilm processes.
A high driving force in terms of D O concentration across the biofilm is therefore required.
a. Linpor process
Typical design parameters of the Linpor process are shown below:
i. MLSS suspended: 3,800 (mg/L)

ii. MLSS fixed: 15,000 (mg/L)
iii. MLSS total: 5,800 (mg/L)
iv. Carrier volume: 22 (%)
v. F/M: 0.12 (1/d)
(Gilligan and Morper, 1999)
Typical design parameters of the Pegasus process are shown below:
i. HRT (Anoxic tank + Oxic tank): 6 -8 (hours)

ii. Carrier volume: 10-20 (%)
iii. Circulation ratio of nitrified liquor to influent flow: 1.5-3.0 (-)
iv. Final sedimentation tank hydraulic application rate: about 1.0 (m/hr)
(Hitachi Plant Technologies, Ltd.)
c. Kaldnes process
Typical design parameters of the Kaldnes process are shown below:
i. Anoxic detention time: 1.0-1.2 (hours)

ii. Aerobic detention time: 3.5-4.5 (hours)
iii. Biofilm area: 200-250 (m 2/m 3)
iv. BOD loading: 1.0-1.4 (kg/ m 3/d)
v. Final sedimentation tank hydraulic application rate: 0.5-0.8 (m/hr)
(Metcalf & Eddy, 2003)
5 - 208
The MBBR processes are used in municipal sewage treatment for BOD removal and nutrients
removal. These processes are frequently used for upgrading an existing plant, especially when space
is an issue. The existing reaction tanks can be either retrofitted with Linpor, Pegasus, or Kaldnes
or similar other such technologies in the world. The one handicap is the inability to derive the design
guidelines for an STP. This is because, depending on the media that is used the available area for
microbes to grow in a given volume of the reaction tanks varies rather widely and this compounds
the formulation of a fundamentally reliable design equation. At this moment, heavy reliance on the
eventual builders of these MBBR type STPs and the realization as well as the intangibles of their
guarantees seems unavoidable.
a. There are several types of MBBR processes and the design guidelines should be studied and
evaluated consciously.
b. Life cycle of media of MBBRs is uncertain as of now and it appears that one possible method
of sustaining competition may be to opt for a contract including the replacements for a specified
number of years as part of the contract itself.
5.18.14 Fixed Bed Biofilm Activated Sludge Process
The FBAS process is an essentially an activated sludge attached growth process where the
plant roots provide the area for the biofilm to develop and grow. The aeration system is divided
into a series of biological reactors where fixed biofilm is maintained in every stage of the process.
Biodegradation of influent contaminants takes place mainly with the help of fixed biological cultures,
where plant roots are used as biofilm carriers; additional textile media is used in the reactors as
additional biofilm carriers. As a standard feature of the technology the reactors are covered by a
shading structure or a greenhouse. As the influent travels through the cascade, the available nutrient
quantity is consumed and as a result, the composition of the ecosystem fixed in the biofilm changes
from reactor to reactor, gradually adapting itself to the decreasing nutrient concentration. In each
cascade stage, a specially adapted ecosystem will form, thus maximizing the decomposition of
contaminants. It is stated that 32 plants with such technologies have been set up in different
countries including Hungary, China and France, etc. in last 10 years. However, it will be useful to
demonstrate this project under Indian conditions.
(Organica technology) is stated to enhance the forces of nature to purify the sewage by
harnessing the metabolic processes of living organisms that digest organic pollutants. In addition
to the bacteria found in traditional activated sludge systems, the Organica STP are stated to be
inoculated with 3,000 species of plants, animals, and microbes. The STP consist of a series of
aerated reactors, filtration units and final polishing units. Plants with extensive root systems are
placed on a supporting mesh slightly below the liquid level in the open aerobic reactors.
5 - 209
The roots of these plants, suspended 1.5 metres into the water, provide a healthy habitat for the
bacteria and a whole range of other organisms such as protozoa, zooplankton, worms, snails, clams
and even fish. As sewage flows through the technology train, different ecosystems develop in each
tank. It is stated that there are two types of Organica treatment process. One is the Organica Fed
Batch Reactor (FBR) process which combines conventional Sequence Batch Reactors (SBR) and
continuous flow sewage treatment technologies. The other is the Organica cascade which is a
continuous flow treatment process through a series of connected biological reactors.
a. Organica FBR (Fed Batch Reactor) process
i. Shenzhen, China
Technology applied: Single train FBR process

2
Footprint: 975 m
Hydraulic Capacity: 400 m /day
Community Served: 1,700 people
ii. Etyek, Hungary
Technology applied: Two train FBR process

2
Footprint: 570 m
Hydraulic Capacity: 1,100 m / d a y
iii. Le Lude, France
Footprint: 380 m2
iv. Telki, Hungary
Footprint: 360 m2
b. Organica cascade process
i. Budapest Hungary
Technology applied: Cascade process
Footprint: 340 m2
5 - 210
3
ii. Szarvas, Hungary
Technology applied: Cascade process
Footprint: 540 m
3
Hydraulic Capacity: 1,600 m /day
Independent evaluation of the results of the performance is not readily traceable in literature.
a. Advantages
i. The process is stated to require much lesser land area than conventional activated sludge
ii. The process is stated to be odourless and hence the STPs are stated to be easily built in urban
area with no negative impact on the value of adjoining areas.
iii. It is stated that it can operate at a much lesser loading rates during initial days of setting up the
plant in new habitations and it is stated that due to small area requirements, this technology can
offer decentralized solutions and recycling water in local areas.
iv. The technology allows for design flexibility and can be adopted for nutrient removal such as
phosphorous and nitrogen, which are today the major concern of pollution in rivers.
b. Disadvantages
i. In colder climates where the temperature drops to sub normal, the plants may have to be
protected with a greenhouse otherwise the biota may freeze up.
ii. Because of higher automation, the technology is not attractive for smaller sizes of plants
iii. The technology requires more qualified operators than in other technologies.
iv. Yet to be validated on reasonable number and sizes of STPs in India
Organica treatment plants are also on-site sewage treatment systems and the fate of disposal and
regrowth of over grown plants is to be addressed with the possibility of biomethanation of the
harvested over growths just like the biomethanation of fodder.
5 - 211
These require to have continuous feed for sustaining the microbes and as such are not
recommended for places like hostels, which may lie vacant during holiday seasons and after exam
seasons. These may be better for controlled housing colonies without industrial activity but only after
an oil and grease trap and with potential for using the treated sewage for avenue trees by dedicated
pipeline and root zone drip irrigation but are yet to be validated on reasonable number and sizes of
STPs in India.
The toxic or otherwise of the inoculum of 3,000 species and their residues when discharged into
aquatic environment like rivers, ponds etc are unknown at this stage and the treated sewage may
have to be put through a toxicological clearance from a competent authority before the technology
can be taken on board in JnNURM funded STPs.
5.18.15 Submerged Immobilized Biofilm Technology
These are stated to be exfoliated bricks of volcanic ash which do not degrade by themselves but
offer microbes have a chance to get into the crevices and stay there as immobilized habitats. These
microbes bring about the aerobic anaerobic or facultative activity based on prevailing oxygen
conditions or septic conditions. These are confined in application to small sized plants and polishing
of sewage effluent from STPs. These are stated as patented makes. This can be recommended for
outfalls of secondary effluent prior to discharge in the water bodies for polishing of effluents wherever
required to meet the discharge standards.
An STP with Eco-Bio-Block (EBB) has been installed and functioning at Indian Institute of
Science Education and Research (IISER), Mohali in small scale and the same needs to be
evaluated. Further piloting is required. Based on the performance, the same may be recommended
for on-site and decentralized wastewater management systems.
a. EBB performance test with Ministry of Land, Infrastructure, Transport and Tourism,
Nobeoka City, Japan
EBB performance test was carried out by Nobeoka City with Ministry of Land, Infrastructure,
Transport and Tourism using the EBB blocks at a river in Nobeoka City.
i. Study year: 2001
ii. Test area of river: 2m width, 30m length
iii. Type of EBB block: EBB 300 (300x300x60mm)
The performance of EBB blocks in treating the drain sewage is mentioned in Table 5.66 overleaf.
5 - 212
Table 5.66 Performance of EBB test in Nobeoka city
A fter EBB
Before EBB
7days 14days
pH 6.9 6.6 6.5

DO (mg/l) 6.0 7.4 7.5
BOD (mg/l) 2.5 0.7 0.7
C O D Mn (mg/l) 8.3 2.7 4.0

SS (mg/l) 110 10 5
Total coliform (102) (M PN/100m l) 7.9 4.6 1.3
T-N (mg/l) 1.30 0.39 0.30
T-P (mg/l) 0.34 0.096 0.041
Turbidity 31 5.4 2.8
Source: http://www.ariakeebb.com
5.18.16 BIOFOR Technology (Biological Filtration and Oxygenated Reactor)
5.18.16.1 Key Features of the Technology
Enhanced primary treatment with addition of coagulants and flocculants
High rate primary tube settlers and integrated thickening offering space economy
Two stage high rate filtration through a biologically active media and with enhanced
external aeration
Co-current up flow movement of sewage and enable higher retention and contact
Treatment scheme excluding secondary sedimentation but recycling of primary sludge
Deep reactors enabling low land requirements
A compact and robust system
The process flow diagram of BIOFOR technology is presented in Figure 5.91.

wastewater
Treated
Sludge drying Beds

Source: MoUD, 2012
Figure 5.91 Process flow diagram of BIOFOR Technology
5 - 213
a. Advantages
i. Compact layout because of high rate processes.

ii. Higher aeration efficiency through co-current diffused aeration system
iii. Space saving as secondary sedimentation tank is dispensed

iv. Ability to withstand fluctuations in flow rate and organic loads
v. Compliance with stricter discharge standards
vi. High quality effluent for reuse without separate nutrient removal and fine filtration
vii. Effluent suitable for UV disinfection without filtration
viii. Absence of aerosol and odour nuisance in the working area
ix. Absence of corrosive gases in the area

x. Lower operation supervision enables lesser manpower requirement
b. Disadvantages
i. Continuous and high chemical dosing in primary clarification

ii. Large sludge generation due to the addition of chemicals
iii. Undigested sludge from primary clarification requiring post treatment

iv. Yet to be validated on reasonable number and sizes of STPs in India.
5.18.17 High Rate Activated Sludge BIOFOR-F Technology
5.18.17.1 Key Features of this Technology
In general, high level of mechanization and sophistication
The flow scheme excludes primary sedimentation tank

Superior aerated grit chamber and classifier
Circular aeration tank with tapered air diffusion system
Second stage aeration and rapid sand filtration through a biologically active filter media
Dissolved air floatation for sludge thickening
Digester heating and temperature controlled anaerobic sludge digestion
Mixing of digester contents through biogas

Dynamic cogeneration of electrical and thermal energy through gas and dual fuel engines
The process flow diagram of High Rate Activated Sludge BIOFOR-F Technology is presented in
Figure 5.92 overleaf.
5 - 214
L ________________________ j
Source: MoUD, 2012
Figure 5.92 Process flow diagram of High Rate Activated Sludge BIOFOR-F technology
a. Advantages
i. Compact layout as a result of high rate processes
ii. Higher aeration efficiency through diffused and tapered aeration system
iii. Space saving as primary sedimentation is dispensed
iv. Compliance with stricter discharge standards
v. Effluent suitable for high end industrial applications
vi. Stable digester performance and consistent gas production
vii. Almost self-sufficient in energy requirement due to gas engine based cogeneration system
viii.Absence of aerosol and odour nuisance in the working area
b. Disadvantages
i. None, except high cost
5 - 215
5.18.18 Submerged Aeration Fixed Film (SAFF) Technology
5.18.18.1 Key Features of the Technology
Essentially a fixed film media with enhanced oxygen supply through submerged aeration
Unconventional plastic media offering high void ratio and specific area compared to stone
and aggregates
Large biomass and long solid retention time in the reactor leading to low food to micro-organism
ratio and higher organic removal
Two stage biological oxidation

Treatment scheme excluding primary sedimentation and sludge digestion
Reactors up to 6 m deep enabling low land requirements

Many plants based on such technology are functioning in industrial wastewater applications.
Pilot study is required for municipal sewage applications.
Process flow diagram of Submerged Aeration Fixed Film (SAFF) Technology is presented
in Figure 5.93.
Source: MoUD, 2012
Figure 5.93 Process flow diagram of Submerged Aeration Fixed Film (SAFF) Technology
a. Advantages
i. Deep reactors enabling small space requirements
ii. Ability to effectively treat dilute domestic sewage

iii. Low and stabilised sludge production eliminating the need for sludge digestion
iv. Absence of odour and improved aesthetics

v. Absence of emission of corrosive gases.
5 - 216
b. Disadvantages
i. Clogging of reactor due to absence of primary sedimentation
ii. Reliance on proprietary filter media.
iii. Strict quality control on media.
iv. High reliance on external energy input.
v. Requires skilled manpower.
vi. Yet to be validated on reasonable number and sizes of STPs in India
The SAFF technology based system is particularly applicable for:
Small to medium flows in congested locations
Sensitive locations
Decentralised approach
Relieving existing overloaded trickling filters.
5.18.19 Rim Flow Sludge Suction Clarifiers
These are clarifiers with inlet along the rim and sludge is sucked out at the floor through suction
boxed arms instead of scrappers and is reported to save on foot print and denser sludge and quicker
return to aeration tank without lysis of the live sludge.
5.18.19.1 Advantages
It is claimed that given the same clarifier volume as conventional centre feed
clarifiers, these types of clarifiers can handle much higher throughputs and the rising sludge
phenomenon is minimized.
The need for a buried central feed pipe in large central feed clarifiers is avoided.
The sludge is sucked out as soon as it settles on the floor and transferred to aeration tank and
thus avoiding cell lysis.
5.18.19.2 Disadvantages
Here again, each vendor advocates their own criteria for the equipment and their types which
makes it difficult to bring about a common and validated design criteria.
The sludge suction arrangement if it gets into repair necessitates the emptying of the clarifier
for repairs.
5 - 217
5.18.20 Improved Circular Secondary Clarifier (HYDROPLUME) CSIR-NEERI
The conventional secondary clarifiers do not take hydraulic energy dissipation into account. They
are either too large or often fail in giving the efficient solids-liquid separation. In this endeavour,
CSIR - NEERI has developed a clarifier design radically different from the conventional circular
clarifiers. It is called as HYDROPLUME, which is an effective hydraulic energy dissipating, solids
contact and sludge recirculation type high rate secondary clarifier that provides natural flocculation
through plume formation.
It produces excellent effluent quality and helps in attaining the treated effluent quality conforming
to discharge standards and the settled sludge is removed through a specially designed suction
mechanism. The sludge removal mechanism is designed and fabricated to remove sludge from all
around the clarifier and discharging it from a stationary outlet as depicted in Figure 5.94.
Source: Pophali et al., 2009
Figure 5.94 Sectional Drawing of HYDROPLUME Clarifier showing the principle of functioning of
plume formation, solids-liquid separation and sludge withdrawal (US Patent No. 7637379 B2)
5.18.20.1 Salient Features of HYDROPLUME
Hydrodynamics- Optimization of velocity gradient and hydraulic energy dissipation to ensure

natural flocculation
Geometry- Provision of an improved inlet design and bottom to enhance the solids-liquid
separation and facilitate sludge removal
Sludge Removal Mechanism- Development of an improved sludge removal suction mechanism

to remove the settled sludge
5 - 218
5.18.20.2 Advantages
Improved solids-liquid separation ensures minimum SS in the treated effluent
High underflow solids concentration minimizes pumping rate, and maintains desired active
biomass concentration in aeration tank
Requires less surface area and operates at low hydraulic retention time (1.5 - 2.0 hrs HRT),
thereby facilitates savings in capital cost
It does not require a separate sump cum pump house for sludge recycling / removal and thereby
saves capital and recurring costs
It provides natural flocculation and does not require separate flocculation facility and thereby
reduces capital and recurring cost
The design has been validated using computational fluid dynamics studies for its plume
behaviour and hydraulic energy dissipation besides other parameters.
The next step is to take it up in field scale trials for firming up the design criteria for use in STPs.
5.19 ADDRESSING THE RECENT TECHNOLOGIES IN CHOICE OF STP
A reference is made to the advisory on recent trends in technologies in sewerage system issued
by the MoUD in March 2012, to encourage the implementers in the field to innovate and explore
new technologies as well as Public Private Participation (PPP) models without compromising on the
basic safeguards both technical and financial. It states that, "There are various technology options
available for treating sewage. The technology option as well as the project cost would be outlined
in the detailed project report prepared for implementing the project. Irrespective of the technology
chosen, STP projects could be developed on a long term commitment from the private sector
partner either on PPP / build own operate transfer (BOOT) basis or on engineering procurement con
struction (EPC) plus O&M for 15 years where a part of the EPC cost is payable over a long-term O&M
period. However, it is suggested that no new technologies will be considered under EPC contract.
Box No. 5.1 Honouring Edward Ardern, MSc and William T Lockett, MSc
It was on April-3-1914 that Edward Ardern, MSc and William T. Lockett, MSc, presented their
paper titled "Experiments on the Oxidation of Sewage without the Aid of Filters (at the Society of
Chemical Industry in Manchester, England), in which they made the first reported use of the term
"activated sludge to refer to biological solids that they settled out of aerated sewage and recycled
these back into the treatment process. Almost all the aerobic biological treatment processes to
date, trace their lineage to this epoch making invention of the Activated Sludge Process. They
continued to lead distinguished research and are reported to have published over 25 papers.
This manual honours them in the centenary year of 2014.
5 - 219
Part A: Engineering SLUDGE TREATMENT FACILITIES
CHAPTER 6: DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF SLUDGE TREATMENT FACILITIES
6.1 THE APPROACH
In STP, sludge means the following.
Primary sludge - When raw sewage is settled in a primary clarifier, the suspended solids
settle down by gravity. These are drawn out from the conical floor of the clarifier. This is called
primary sludge (PS). It will have mostly organic substances and also inorganic substances. If it is
stored, the organic substances will undergo anaerobic reaction as in Figure 5.2. This will result in
production of Methane and Hydrogen Sulphide gases.
Secondary sludge - When the sewage is aerated in aeration tanks, biological microorganisms
grow and multiply. The aerated liquid is called the mixed liquor. It is settled in secondary clarifiers
to separate the microorganisms by gravity. These are drawn out from the conical floor of the
clarifier. This is called secondary sludge.
Return sludge - A major portion of the secondary sludge is returned to the aeration tank for
seeding the microorganisms. This is called return sludge (RS).
Excess sludge - A small portion of secondary sludge is wasted. This is equal to secondary sludge
minus return sludge. This is called excess sludge (ES) on waste sludge (WS).
Chemical sludge - When raw sewage or secondary treated sewage is subjected to chemical
precipitation, the resulting sludge is called chemical sludge (CS).
In treatment units such as MBR, there are two optional arrangements for separating the
treated sewage from the aerated mixed liquor.
In one type, the filtration membranes are submerged into the mixed liquor and the treated
sewage is sucked out as the filtrate. In this case, there is no secondary sludge or return sludge.
The mixed liquor itself is separately wasted as excess sludge.
In another type of MBR, the membranes are outside the aeration tank and the mixed liquor is
filtered into treated sewage and secondary sludge.
The primary and excess sludge are to be further treated to produce fully inert matter which will not
decay any further. Normally this is achieved by the treatment process in Figure 5.2. Here the
organisms themselves are food source for new organisms till almost all organisms are reduced.
This process also produces methane and hydrogen sulphide gases. The hydrogen sulphide is
removed and the methane is sent to gas engines to generate electricity.
Alternatively, it can also be achieved by the treatment process in Figure 5.1, but this will need
aeration and hence electrical energy is to be spent.
The typical sludge generation values are shown in Table 6-1 overleaf.
T h e illu s tra tiv e c o m p u ta tio n o f s lu d g e g e n e ra tio n va lu e s from A S P is in A p p e n d ix A .6.1.
6- 1
Table 6.1 Typical sludge generation values
Process kg Sludge/kg BOD removed
as VSS as TSS
Primary alone 1.92 3.20
Primary and secondary as conventional ASP 0.86 1.31
Extended aeration ASP 0.26 0.93
The capacity of each sludge treatment unit is determined by considering the operating hours,
sludge moisture content, retention time, etc., and is based on the solids balance of the entire sludge
treatment facility. The solids balance considers the reduction due to gasification, return load from
each facility and the increase due to addition of chemicals, etc. This is important for sizing the
sludge treatment units.
In general, the primary and excess sludge will need a blending tank before further treatment so that
the properties are made almost uniform when feeding the units. After this, if the thickened sludge
is put through anaerobic digestion as in Figure 5.2 for producing Methane, it is called anaerobic
digester. If it is oxidized as in Figure 5.1, it is called aerobic digester. In both cases, the
digested sludge will have to be dewatered. There are many types of equipments like centrifuge
or filter press or natural solar drying beds for this purpose. The solids concentrations by different
treatment processes are listed in Table 6.2.
Table 6.2 Solids concentration by treatment process
Solids concentration (%)

Treatment process
Excess sludge Mixed sludge
Conventional activated sludge process 0.5-1.0 1.0
Oxidation ditch process 0.5-1.0 -
Extended aeration process 0.5-1.0 -
Sequencing batch reactor process (low load) 0.5-1.0 -
Biological aerobic filtration process - 1.0
Contact oxidation process 0.8 1.0
Source: Guideline and Manual for Planning and Design in Japan, JSWA, 2009
An illustrative solids balance in two different types of sludge treatment processes is shown in
Figure 6.1 overleaf. In this figure, a pertains to direct dewatering and incineration and b pertains
to the case of digestion, dewatering and incineration.
A p p e n d ix A .6 .2 illu s tra te s th e c a lc u la tio n s further.
6-2
Figure 6.1 Example of solids balance (Conventional Activated Sludge Process)
In case of option a (dewatering and incineration) the solids balance occurs as follows.
The solids load from the STP to the sludge treatment section is taken as 100.
The solids load from the recirculation from the various units is taken as 22.1.
Thus, the solids load entering the sludge treatment units is 122.1
The solids load escaping in the liquid portion from the blending tank is taken as 10
Thus, the solids load entering the sludge thickener becomes 112.1
The solids load escaping in the liquid portion from the thickener is taken as 11.2
The solids load leaving the thickener becomes 100.9.

In the dewatering centrifuge, solids load from polyelectrolyte is 0.8
Thus solids load entering the dewatering centrifuge is 101.7
The solids load in the dewatered cake is 96.6

The solids load of 5.1 is in the filtrate and is recirculated
The solids load of 96.6 in the dewatered cake is sent to fluidized bed and incinerator
Here, the solids load of 67.6 goes into the formation of combustion gases
The solids load of 5.8 escapes in the liquid portion of the fluidized bed
The solids load of 23.2 remains in the final product as ash.
Similarly, in the case of process b, the solids load in the final product becomes 22.7 instead of 23.2 in
process a. Moreover, a digestion gas equivalent of 39.5 is gained, which in turn is a source of energy.
6-3
Thus, anaerobic digestion has its importance. The solids recovery rate varies at each stage of sludge
treatment and is shown in Table 6.3.
Table 6.3 Example of solids recovery rate in each treatment stage
Process Solids recovery rate
Gravity thickening 80 to 90%

Sludge Centrifugal thickening 85 to 95%
thickening Air floatation thickening (dispersed air) More than 95%
Gravity belt thickening More than 95%
Sludge Sludge reduction ratio due to

30 to 40%
digestion formation of gas, etc.
Pressure-type screw press dewatering More than 95%

Sludge Rotary pressure dewatering More than 95%
dewatering Belt press dewatering 90 to 95%
Centrifugal dewatering More than 95%
Sludge Sludge reduction ratio due to formation of gas, etc. 40 to 80%

incineration Recovery rate 80 to 90%
Source: Guideline and Manual for Planning and Design in Japan, JSWA, 2009
6.2 HYDRAULICS OF SLUDGE PIPELINES
6.2.1 Sludge Piping
Sludge piping can be by gravity or by pumping. For example, when primary sludge is drawn from
clarifiers, it is sometimes by gravity and sometimes by direct suction using pumps. The friction loss
in gravity pipelines and pumped pipelines are calculated as follows.
6.2.1.1 Friction losses in Gravity Sludge Pipelines
1. Calculate friction loss using Mannings formula as though it is flowing with water.
2. This friction loss is multiplied by a friction compounding factor (F) as follows
3. Estimate the solids content in the sludge (P).

4. F for undigested sludge is = 2.88 + (0.176xPxP) - (0.866xP)
5. F for digested sludge is = 1.52 + (0.041xPxP) - (0.227xP)
6 . Allow for an additional factor of safety of 10%.
6.2.1.2 Friction Losses in Pumped Sludge Pipelines
First calculate the head loss as though it is pumping water by using the Hazen Williams formula
with the value of C taken from Table 6.4 overleaf. Then, multiply the head loss by the factor k from
Figure 6.2 for the given solids content (P).
6-4
Table 6.4 Hazen Williams value of C for sludge flows
Sludge Sludge Sludge

Raw Digested Raw Digested Raw Digested
solids solids solids
Sludge Sludge Sludge Sludge Sludge Sludge
(%) (%) (%)
0 100 100 4 53 78 8 33 60
1 83 100 5 47 73 9 29 55
2 71 91 6 42 69 10 25 48
3 60 83 7 37 65
14 ------ 1------ 1------ 1------ 1------ 1------ 1------ 1------ 1------ r
0 ______ i--------- 1______ i----------1______ i______ i______ i---------- 1______ i----------

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 . 1 0
Sludge concentration, % solids by weight
Source: Metcalf & Eddy
Figure 6.2 Head loss Multiplication Factor for Different Sludge Types and Concentrations
The equations for these curves are simplified as follows where P is the % of sludge solids.
k for undigested sludge = 0.125P - 0.1656P + 1.5733

k for digested sludge = 0.0354P2 - 0.0699P + 1.0858
The calculations for these friction losses are illustrated in Appendix A 6.3.
6.2.2 Sludge Pump Types and Applications
There are specific considerations to be borne in mind in the use of different types of pumps for
handling sludge. The relative applicability of these is shown in Table 6.5.
The illustrations of the internal arrangements of these are compiled in Figure 6.3 (overleaf) a to d
and indexed to serial numbers in Table 6.5 for an easier visual understanding of these. In respect of
impellers in centrifugal pumpsets, the rotary speed is advised not to exceed 960 rpm especially when
pumping return sludge.
6-5
Table 6.5 Types of sludge pum ps and their application
Prim ary Return Excess Chem ical Thickened Digested

No Type of Pump
sludge sludge sludge sludge sludge sludge
1 A ir lift s y
2 Archim edean screw s s
3 Centrifugal s s S
4 Double diaphragm S V V S s V
5 P lunger V V
6 Progressive cavity s s v s
7 Reciprocating piston s
8 Rotary-lobe S s
9 Single diaphragm s
10 S crew centrifugal s s s
11 Torque flow
6 -6
Torque Flow Pumps
i
f H
h ttp ://w w w .a x flo w .c o m h ttp ://w w w .a x fio w .c o m w w w .w e irp o w e rin d u s tria l.c o m
T o rq u e F lo w P u m p s -T h e e n e rg y is s ta ted to b e tra n s m itte d to th e liquid by an in d u ced v o rte x m otion (1 1 )
S ta to r-R o to r p u m p or P ro g re s s iv e C a v ity p u m p .(6 )

S o u rc e : D ra w in g fro m h ttp ://n e w s .th o m a s n e t.c o m . P h o to fro m h ttp ://w w w .g lo b a lp u m p s .c o m .a u
Illustrations are only for familiarity of explanations & not standalone endorsements
Figure 6.3 a Types of sludge pumps
6-7
Double acting Diaphragm pumps (4).
W hen the diaphragm set is pushed to the right, it displaces the sludge upwards on that side as the ball valve
below prevents the sludge from going downwards. After this, when the diaphragm set is pushed to the left, it
displaces the sludge already in the left compartment upwards as the corresponding ball valve prevents the
sludge going downwards. At this time, sludge is drawn into the right side compartment by pushing the ball
valve upwards. Thus, a near continuous sludge displacement is got. T he diaphragm to and fro movement is by
pneumatic Source: Drawing from http://www.tapflo.com. Photo from http://www.coleparmer.com
Single diaphragm pump (9).
Only one diaphragm is used. Thus, sludge drawal can be intermittent. A photo of an installation during mid
1 9 9 0 s at the Nesapakkam STP of C M W S S B for primary clarifier sludge is shown in upper row. These suit
primary clarifier sludge drawal from small sized clarifiers as the rate of sludge accumulation is much lesser
than the commercially available sludge pump sets. W hen such pumps are started, initially the settled sludge is
drawn but soon after the clarifier liquid starts flowing out. This is called as the cone of depression. These can
be operated intermittently to allow sufficient accumulation of sludge each time the pump is activated. This can
be done by electrical or pneumatic control. Source: From public websites & courtesy C M W S S B .
Illustrations are only for familiarity of explanations & not standalone endorsements
F ig u re 6 .3 b T ypes o f slu d g e p u m p s-co n tin u e d
6-8
F ig ure 6 .3 c T ypes o f slu d g e p u m p s-co n tin u e d
6-9
Figure 6.3 d Types of sludge pumps-continued
6.2.2.1 Centrifugal Pumps
Centrifugal pumps (as in notation 3 in Table 6.5 and Figure 6.3 a) for handling sludge must be
of the non-clog type. They should be robust and should have easily accessible hand-holes for
cleaning. Pumps of the macerator type impeller or additional cutters with a cutting ring whereby
stringy rags and other fibrous material can get shredded are preferable. When the specific
speed of the pump is low, non-clog impellers are designed with less number of blades
than in impellers for handling clear liquids. In pumps of high specific speed, the mixed
flow impeller should generally have wide passages. Centrifugal pumps with non-clog
impellers have less efficiency than those of normal design for handling clear liquids. The rating
for the drive motor has to be selected keeping this in mind. The specific speed of the pump also
affects the suction-lift capability of the pump. This can be overcome by selecting a vertical
centrifugal pump to be so installed that the impeller would be adequately submerged always. The
impellers are best chosen as open impellers or semi open impellers or centrifugal screw impellers.
6 - 10
6.2.2.2 Air-Lift Pumps
Air lift pumps (as in notation 1 in Table 6.5 and Figure 6.3 d). These are used in small extended
aeration plants to return the sludge and scum to the aeration tank. Small air bubbles are formed in the
liquid, which makes the air-water mixing less dense to get lifted to the discharge point.
A compressor / blower supplies the air. Air-lift pumps and ejectors are pumping systems, which are
though inherently inefficient, there are no moving parts inside and hence, their operation is fairly
trouble-free.
6.2.2.3 Screw Pumps
These are three major variations of these as under
1. Archimedean Screw (as in notation 2 in Table 6.5 and Figure 6.3 c)

2. Stator-Rotor or Progressive Cavity (as in notation 6 in Table 6.5 and Figure 6.3 a)
3. Centrifugal Screw Impeller (as in notation 10 in Table 6.5 and Figure 6.3 c)
In the Archimedean screw pumps, the sludge enters the screw pump by a screw conveyor, which
moves solids to an open impeller and lifts them to the point of discharge. The submerged lower
bearing is of the enclosed and sealed type and the upper bearing is usually grease-lubricated
with anti-friction bearing. The discharge rate plotted on x axis and head plotted on y axis will be a
horizontal line in these pumps. In general, these are ideal for return sludge because it permits
incidental additional aeration over the screws and rotates at gentle speeds of just about 20 or 30 rpm.
They also permit visual inspection of the sludge.
A variation of the screw pump is the stator rotor or progressive cavity pump. The pumping element is
a helical rotor of steel. It has a compressible stator or lining inside a cast iron body and is contoured
to mesh with the helical rotor. Although the pump has some self-priming capability, the rotor must
never run dry against the rubber stator. The pump can pump forward or reverse depending upon
the direction of rotation. They are not advised for return sludge as the live organisms will be
squeezed in the stator and rotor.
The centrifugal screw impeller has a shape of an Archimedean screw with widening diameter of
each successive spiral. They can be mounted both vertically and horizontally. The impeller weight is
usually heavier as compared to other screw pumps. They however, have the advantage of a
truly non-clog design and are especially suited for sludge drawal from primary clarifiers because the
possible fibrous materials or rags etc which might get into the clarifier sludge will be gliding over the
impeller screw and are pushed out without choking the impeller. They are also useful in return sludge
pumping as the live organisms do not get hit at the impeller or casing surfaces.
6.2.2.4 Reciprocating Plunger
Plunger type pumps (as in notation 5 in Table 6.5 and Figure 6.3 a) have a plunger reciprocating
in a cylinder. A pump can have one or more plungers connected to common crankshaft, thereby
obtaining arrangements called simplex, duplex, triplex, etc. Their capacities are of the order of 150 to
250 rpm per plunger. The pump speeds should be between 40 to 50 rpm.
6 - 11
They are self-priming and can usually work well with suction-lifts up to 3m. The suction-lift capability
depends on the design of the pump, especially the suction valve. The pumps can develop high
heads and are hence, suitable where accumulation of grease in piping can cause progressive
increase in head.
However, if the delivery piping is likely to get choked, the pumps may develop very high pressures
and this can cause a burst. A relief valve is provided to protect the pump in case of a clogged
delivery piping after each use. The pump should be flushed so that no solids settle in the cylinder
which could damage the pump during the next start. The suction and delivery valves are the main
source of trouble. The valves should be easily accessible for quick cleaning, in case the valves
fail to seat properly.
6.2.2.5 Diaphragm Pumps
The diaphragm pumps (as in notation 4 & 9 in Table 6.5 and Figure 6.3 b) have a flexible
diaphragm, usually of rubber and actuated by a reciprocating movement. They can be either a single
diaphragm or double diaphragm type.
The diaphragm is fastened peripherally to the casing, which also houses the suction and delivery
valves. The interesting feature of the diaphragm pumps is that the components of the reciprocating
mechanism, which are most prone to wear, are isolated from the path of the sludge. Pneumatic or
hydraulic drives can also be employed for the reciprocating movement. These are suited for
intermittent pumping of primary clarifier sludge.
6.2.2.6 Torque Flow Pumps
The torque flow pumps (as in notation 11 in Table 6.5 and Figure 6.3 a) can handle solids up to
the full delivery bore size on the discharge side. The energy imparted to the liquid is by the
principle of hydro-dynamic liquid coupling The shape of the impeller helps to generate the
necessary swirl inside the casing and this acts as a pumping impeller component.
It is stated as a non-clog concept in pumping. In essence, the sludge that is drawn on the suction
side is made to pick up the energy and glide around the inside of the volute before going out with
the delivery head.
6.2.2.7 Rotary Lobe pumps
Rotary Lobe Pumps (as in notation 8 in Table 6.5 and Figure 6.3 c). Liquid flows around the
interior of the casing, but without making contact. This is prevented by external timing gears
located in the gearbox. Pump shaft support bearings are located in the gearbox, and since the
bearings are out of the pumped liquid, pressure is limited by bearing location and shaft deflection.
As the lobes come out of mesh, they create expanding volume on the inlet side of the pump. Liquid
flows into the cavity and is trapped by the lobes as they rotate. Liquid travels around the interior of the
casing in the pockets between the lobes and the casing. The liquid does not pass between the lobes.
The meshing of the lobes forces the liquid through the outlet port under pressure.
6 - 12
6.2.2.8 Operational Problems
The gases like Hydrogen Sulphide often get liberated when the sludge, particularly the digested
sludge, is subjected to suction. This hampers the proper operation of the pump. The pumps should
be installed, as far as possible, with positive suction. If the suction arrangements are improperly
designed, a vortex-cone or sink developing in the sludge blanket will cause the watery sludge or
supernatant to be drawn instead of the sludge.
The suction pipe should not be too long, nor should the pumping be too long or too fast. It is better
to pump more often than at reduced speed. When a pump is equipped with variable speed drive,
it can be started at a relatively high speed and the speed can then be reduced.
Sludge from two settling tanks should not be connected to the suction of a common pump. The
settling tank with the thinner sludge will get pumped and the thickened sludge in the other tank
will not get pumped. Similar problem will happen, if the suction lines from the two tanks will have
differential frictional losses.
The tank with higher frictional loss in its suction piping, which may be because of more length or
because of choking, will not get pumped. The capacity of sludge pumps is required to be regulated
according to the sewage load. Further, variable speed drives are more appropriate for regulation
because delivery valves present in the sludge pumping system makes the system inefficient and
prone to trouble.
6.2.2.9 Requirement of Standby Units
The number of pumping units required including the standby is determined by several factors like
the particular function involved, the size of the plant and the arrangement of the units, especially
having combination of more than one function. A standby capacity of 16 hours in 2 shifts,
7 days working 100% standby is recommended wherever mechanical thickening and mechanical
dewatering is practised. However, these standby units are not required for gravity thickening with
picket fence. Since sludge pumping is an important function, standby pumps are provided in equal
numbers or by such arrangement that permits dual duty. The scum is usually mixed with primary
sludge and pumped.
6.2.2.10 Pump Appurtenances
The performance of the sludge pumps can be more efficient and their control can be better if
various appurtenances such as air chambers, sampling devices, measuring devices, valves, gauges
are incorporated in the system and facilities such as revolution counters, gland seals, time clocks,
etc., are kept available at the plant.
6.2.2.10.1 Air Chamber
An air chamber of adequate size is necessary for all plunger type sludge pumps on the discharge
side of the pump as well as the suction side of the pumps, particularly where positive suction head
exists. Such chambers absorb the shock of plunger pump pulsations.
6 - 13
6.2.2.10.2 Revolution Counter
Plunger-type sludge pumps should be equipped with revolution counters or integrating recorders
to help the operator to determine the quantity of sludge pumped in duplicate pump installations.
These pumps aid in equalizing the service and wear of each pump.
6.2.2.10.3 Gland Seals
In the case of centrifugal pumps, external sealing is provided in the stuffing box to prevent the
ingress of air into the pump. The external sealing may be grease seal or water seal. The water seals are
preferable, as it helps the grit and dirt to be washed away. The water to the water-seal has to be
potable water. However, the connection of potable water should not be taken directly from supply lines.
6.2.2.10.4 Valves
When a dry pit pump has positive suction head in the wet well, there should be an isolating valve.
Usually a gate-valve or a knife edge valve on the suction line, is used to facilitate isolating the
pump for maintenance. On the delivery side of centrifugal pumps, a non-return valve is necessary, so
that the pump would not experience the back-pressure from the delivery head when the pump has
to be switched off. To minimize the pressure-drop across the valve during the running of the pump,
the non-return valve should be of the swing-check or the ball-check type.
To avoid water-hammer, which is likely to be caused by the closure of the valve, the valve may be
provided with an anti-slam device, either of the lever and dead-weight type or of the spring-loading
type or of the dash pot type. Dual check valves are sometimes used, which gives more consistent
operation and facilitates for the use of the pump as metering device. All the valves may be provided
with drain plugs. In larger size plants, where pumps may run in parallel operation with different
permutation of the standbys, isolation valves are required to isolate those pumps that may be idle.
All valves should preferably be of the rising stem type, since they offer the advantage of visual
indication of the valve-position.
For exterior underground locations, gate valves are generally used. Underground sludge valves
should be avoided as far as possible by taking advantage of the hydrostatic pressure for sludge
withdrawal through a slant pipe and valve.
6.2.2.10.5 Gauges
Pressure gauges should be provided on both the suction and delivery sides. For pumps having
suction lift, the gauge on the suction side should be a composite vacuum-pressure gauge. The
gauges should be with a cast iron bowl and an oil-resistant rubber diaphragm to keep the sludge
away from the finer working parts of the gauges.
6.2.2.10.6 Sampling Devices
All sludge pumps shall be provided with sampling taps either within themselves or in the piping
adjacent to the pump. These are usually plug valves, normally of size NS 40. Plug valves are simple
and easy to operate for taking samples.
6 - 14
6.2.2.10.7 Washouts and Drains
Washout or flushing arrangements are provided for sludge pumps to facilitate easy and rapid cleansing.
The drains on the pump body should be of ample size to ensure release of pressure and drainage of the
liquid. The outlet of the drain should be connected to an adjacent floor drain to keep the floor clean.
6.2.2.10.8 Time Clocks
Time clocks, wired across the magnetic starters or motor leads of sludge pumps can be a valuable
help to the operators. They help to keep an accurate record of the time taken to run the pump for
observing the preventive maintenance schedules in respect to attending to the lubrication,
equalization of wear and tear, etc.
6.2.2.10.9 Measuring Devices
While time clocks and counters are adequate for small plants, supplementary flow-metering
arrangements, such as flow tubes with flushing provisions are used in large plants for measuring
and recording the quantities of sludge handling. Magnetic meters are more suitable for sludge
metering. Sludge density meters to be installed in the return sludge line of plants for more than
1 mld capacity and an advisory for small plants so that they can install if they want in STPs of less
than 1 mld capacity.
6.2.2.11 Pump Drive Equipment
The prime movers for the pumps are usually the electric motors, which have been discussed in detail
in Section 5.12.3 of Chapter 5. It is desirable to use flame-proof motors. I.C. engines can be used for
standby services in the case of failure of electric power. Again, the I.C. engine is better used as prime
mover for a standby generator than as a prime mover for the pump, because the standby generator
can then provide the power for lighting and ventilation facilities. Gas engines using sludge gas as fuel
would help not only as a standby power supply facility, but also as an effective energy conservation
in the operation of the plants.
6.2.3 Physical Features of Sludge Piping for Pumps
After selecting the type of pump, the next important thing is to design the suction and delivery
pipelines. The design is based on the sludge pumping rate, the velocity in the pipeline, a layout with
minimum bends and a material that is corrosion and abrasion resistant.
Sewage sludge flows like a thin plastic material and hence, the formulae for the flow of water are not
applicable. The velocity of flow should be in the critical range above the upper limit of the laminar flow
and below the lower limit of the turbulent flow, in order to avoid clogging and deposition of grease,
so that the application of the hydraulic formulae for flow of water becomes permissible. In general,
velocities between 1.5 and 2.5 m/s are to be considered.
The diameter of sludge pipes is important to permit cleaning. Where sludge is drawn intermittently as
in primary clarifiers, it is advisable that it should be at least 150 mm for suction drawal and 200 mm
for gravity drawal.
6 - 15
Provision shall be mandatorily provided for periodical flushing of the pipeline. This can be made
by inserting a Y branch double flanged special and closing the free side of the flange by a knife
edge valve and then another double flange short pipe with blank flange. For flushing the pipeline,
first the sludge pump shall be stopped or if it is by gravity, the delivery side valve should be closed.
Thereafter, the delivery side of the service line of the plant air compressor or a branch line from
the final treated sewage pump shall be suitably connected to the free flange of the short pipe after
removing the blank flange. Thereafter, the knife gate valve shall be slowly opened and the air or
treated sewage gradually allowed to dislodge any choked sludge back into the clarifier.
For smaller STPs the single diaphragm sludge pump arrangement can be used to advantage. In
order to take care of thin sludge to flow by gravity for short distances within the STP, a 3% or greater
slope should be adopted.
The suction and discharge piping shall be arranged in such a way that their lengths are as short as
possible, straight and with minimum bends. Adequate provision shall be made to facilitate cleaning.
Large radius elbows and sweep tees are usually adopted for change in direction. High points should
be avoided, as far as possible, to prevent gas pockets. Suitable recess and sleeves are usually
provided for all pipes passing through masonry. Double-flanged pipes are usually adopted for
sludge lines with at least one 45 degrees double flanged joint in the line for easy dismantling and
reassembling. Valves shall be provided at selected locations to clean the lines.
6.2.4 Adverse Effects of Heavy Metals and Sludge Components on Unit Processes
Heavy metals may have adverse effects upon the sludge digestion which is a biological process. If
concentrations of certain materials (e.g., ammonia, heavy metals, light metal cations and sulphide)
increase significantly, they can create unstable conditions in the anaerobic digester. A shock load of
such materials in the plant influent or a sudden change in digester operation (e.g., overfeeding solids
or adding excessive chemicals) can create toxic conditions in the digester.
Typically, excess concentrations of such toxicants inhibit methane formation, which leads to
volatile acid accumulation, pH depression and digester upset. Depending on the concentration
and type of toxics, the effect can be acute (e.g., instant process failure) or chronic (e.g., depressed
performance). Chemicals can control the concentrations of dissolved toxics (e.g., using iron salts
to control sulphide). A sound monitoring and control programme, and an understanding of toxic
agents, can greatly improve the design of mitigation systems.
6.2.5 Sludge Digestion or Stabilization Requirements including Appropriate Pathogen and

Vector Attraction Reduction
Processes that significantly reduce pathogen levels in sludge include aerobic and anaerobic
digestion, air drying, alkaline stabilization and composting. Processes that further reduce
pathogens include Beta or Gamma ray irradiation, composting, heat drying, heat treatment,
pasteurization and thermophilic anaerobic digestion.
T h e S T P s ty p ic a lly use th e fo llo w in g fo u r p ro ce sse s to re d u ce p a th o g e n level in sludge.
6 - 16
1) Heat drying
2) Aerobic and anaerobic digestion
3) Composting
4) Alkaline stabilization
The pathogens in sludge pose risk only if there are routes by which these come into contact with
humans or animals. The route for transport of pathogens is transmission by vectors such as insects,
rodents and birds. These are capable of transmitting a pathogen from one organism to another either
mechanically (by simply transporting the pathogen) or biologically by playing a specific role in the life
cycle of the pathogen. Suitable methods for measuring vector attraction directly are not available.
Vector attraction reduction is accomplished by employing one of the following:
i. Biological processes which breakdown volatile solids and thereby reducing the available food
nutrients for microbial activities and odour potential
ii. Chemical or physical conditions that stop microbial activity
iii. Physical barriers between vectors and volatile solids in the sewage sludge
6.2.6 Return Flow Treatment Requirements
The thickened centrate, digested supernatant liquor, dewatered filtrate, etc., generated in each sludge
treatment process are known by the general name "return flow and this return flow is generally
returned to the STP and treated. In this case, the water quality that requires to be checked in the
return flow generated in each treatment stage is as follows:
1) Thickening: SS, nitrogen, phosphorous
2) Anaerobic digestion: Nitrogen, phosphorous, COD
3) Dewatering: although the items vary depending on the treatment process up to dewatering, the
digestion process exits nitrogen and phosphorus
In a STP that treats only sludge generated from individual treatment plants, the return flow
is generally assumed to have no adverse effect when designing the STP considering the
return flow loads generated from the sludge treatment. However, when temporal changes in quantity
or quality of the return flow are large, measures should be adopted such as installing a return flow
storage tank, temporarily storing the return flow and returning the averaged return flow to the sewage
treatment facilities. The return destination is taken as the grit chamber or the primary settling tank on
the influent side, but in case of the former, considerations are necessary to sample influent sewage
that does not include the return flow.
Sometimes, the return flow may be independently treated as a method of reducing the return flow
load circulating between the STP and the sludge treatment facilities. When sludge is received from
another treatment plant and anaerobic digestion is being performed, the BOD, SS, COD, nitrogen
and phosphorus loads of the return flow will increase.
6 - 17
Therefore, independent return flow treatment or some other form of pre-treatment and returning
to the STP may be considered. There are two methods for independently treating return flows
so that the treated water quality is approximately the same as that of the influent and returning
it to the secondary treatment facility; and the method of treating it as far as possible by direct
discharge. However, the method should be decided after making an overall judgment considering
economics including treatment cost and the stability of treated water.
6.2.7 Sludge Storage Requirements
Sludge storage tanks are installed when sludge is to be stored or transferred between various
facilities when the sludge withdrawn intermittently from primary settling tank, secondary settling tank
and gravity thickener is to be continuously loaded to the post treatment stages.
These tanks may sometimes be installed when sludge has to be stored for a comparatively long
period such as when sludge dewatering equipment needs to be operated only during day time
and sludge generated in a small-scale facility needs to be stored, or sludge has to be temporarily
transported. A sludge storage tank should be decided as described below.
6.2.7.1 Capacity of Sludge Storage Tank
Tank capacity should be decided considering the amount of sludge loaded into and drawn off from the
tank, the sludge transfer process (continuous, intermittent), and the storage time required for O&M.
6.2.7.2 Structure
Sludge storage tanks are generally located underground; therefore, reinforced concrete structure
should be adopted as watertight structure with no permeation of groundwater.
Corrosive gases such as hydrogen sulphide may be emitted and hence, anti-corrosive coating should
be applied on the internal surface of the tank to protect from corrosion.
6.2.7.3 Number of Tanks
A minimum of two tanks of each 50 percent capacity may be provided.
6.2.7.4 Agitator
When sludge is stored for a long period, it will decompose in accordance with Figure 5-2 in
chapter 5. In this process, scum will form and sediments will form at the bottom. Hence, air should
be blown as necessary or an agitator or scum skimmer should be installed.
6.2.7.5 Odours in Tank and Deodorization
In principle, odours should be captured and deodorized to prevent leakages.
When air agitation is used, the suction capacity should be greater than the blowing capacity.
6 - 18
6.2.8 Methods of Ultimate Disposal
The methods of ultimate disposal are as follows:
1. Dewatered sludge reused as it is in agricultural land or in landfills.
2. Agricultural land applications have the advantages of simplicity and low costs, but there are safety
issues such as bacteria; therefore, introduction of a digestion stage and stabilization of quality are
recommended. There are also issues related to generation of odours and transportation issues
in this treatment process; thus, considerations for the surrounding environment are necessary.
Special measures are necessary when sun-dried beds are adopted.
3. Method in which dewatered sludge is processed and used in agricultural land as fertilizer; sludge
is dried in granular form by mechanical drying or solar drying or by composting to improve safety
and handling ability. Hence, this form is recommended for agricultural land applications.
4. Dewatered sludge is incinerated or fused, and ash or slag is effectively used as building material,
etc., or used as landfills.
5. Thermal or solar dried sludge can be used as low-grade fuel with the concurrence of PCB
6.2.9 Back-up Techniques of Sludge Handling and Disposal
It is necessary to prepare the back-up techniques of sludge handling and disposal for the case where
sludge treatment and disposal cannot be performed due to failure of sludge treatment facilities. The
following back-up techniques may be considered.
1. Storage of liquid sludge in vacant or unoccupied settling tanks, etc. and storage of solid sludge in
open space at STPs if available.
2. Transportation of liquid sludge using a tanker lorry to other STPs.
3. Preparation of the mobile dewatering machine.
6.3 SLUDGE THICKENING
This is to thicken the concentration of sludge solids generated in the clarifier to make sludge
digestion and sludge dewatering more effective. Sludge to be thickened may be primary sludge or
combined sludge from primary and excess sludge. Thickening may be broadly classified into three
types namely, gravity, centrifugal and floatation. The floatation can further be dissolved-air floatation
or dispersed-air floatation. When the thickening of sludge is inadequate, the filtrate from dewatering
will have large amounts of suspended solids returning to the STP and affect the water quality. Hence,
excess sludge is increasingly being mechanically thickened using centrifugal thickening machines
or floatation thickeners. Moreover, when performing sludge treatment for sludge collected from
various STPs, sludge with varying properties is likely to be treated; therefore, forced sludge
thickening process such as by using mechanical thickening equipment is indispensable.
Degritting and debris removal equipment preferably be installed as the pre-treatment process
before thickening unless the STP itself has such facilities in the raw sewage stage.
6 - 19
6.3.1 Gravity Thickening
Gravity thickening is the most common practice for concentrating the sludge. It is adopted for
primary sludge or combined primary and activated sludge, but is not successful in dealing with
excess sludge independently. Gravity thickening of combined sludge is not effective when excess
activated sludge exceeds 40% of the total sludge weight. In such cases, other methods of thickening
of the excess activated sludge have to be considered. Gravity thickeners are either continuous flow
or fill and draw type, with or without addition of chemicals. Use of slowly revolving stirrers improves
the efficiency. Continuous flow tanks are deep circular tanks with central feed and overflow at the
2
periphery. They are designed for a hydraulic loading of 20,000 to 25,000 lpd/m . Loading rates less
than 1 2 .0 0 0 lpd/m 2 are likely to give too much solids to permit this loading hence, it is necessary to
dilute the sludge with plant effluent and it is referred to as dilution water. Better efficiencies can be
obtained for gassy sludge by slow revolving stirrers.
The surface loadings for various types of sludge are given in Table 6 .6 along with solid concentration
of various types of thickened sludge.
Table 6 .6 Surface loadings and solids concentration
Solids Surface Loading Thickened Sludge Solids

Type of Sludge
(kg/day/sqm) Concentration (%)
Separate Sludge
Primary 90-140 5-10
Activated 25- 30 2.5-3.0
Trickling filter 40- 45 7-9
Combined Sludge
Primary + activated 30- 50 5-8
Primary + trickling filter 50- 60 7-9
Continuous thickeners are mostly circular with a side water depth of about 3 m. Concentration of the
underflow solids is governed by the depth of sludge blanket up to 1 m beyond which, there is very
little influence of the blanket. If underflow solids concentration is increased with increased sludge
detention time, 24 hours is required to achieve maximum compaction. Sludge blanket depths may
vary with fluctuation in solids production to achieve good compaction. During peak conditions, lesser
detention times will have to be adopted to keep the sludge blanket depth sufficiently below the
overflow weirs to prevent excessive solids carryover. It is necessary to ensure provisions for
(a) regulating the quantity of dilution water needed; (b) adequate sludge pumping capacity to
maintain any desired solids concentration, continuous feed and underflow pumping; (c) protection
against torque overload and (d) sludge blanket detection.
6.3.1.1 Capacity
The tank capacity is decided considering the following:

2
1) Consider solids load as 60 to 90 kg.dry solids / (m .d) approximately.
2) Consider effective water depth as approximately 4m.
6 - 20
6.3.1.2 Shape and Number
The shape and number of tanks are decided considering the following:
1. In principle, the tank should be of circular shape.
2. Consider the slope of the tank bottom as follows:
i. A slope as 5/100 or greater if a sludge scraper is installed.
ii. If no sludge scraper is installed, assume hopper system and take a slope of 60 degrees
or greater with respect to the horizontal.
3. In principle, the number of tanks should be two or more tanks.
6.3.1.3 Structure
The structure of the tank is decided after considering the following:
1. In principle, the tank should be of RCC with consideration given to anti-corrosion.
2. Provide sludge inlet pipes, sludge draw-off pipes and overflow weirs.
6.3.1.4 Appurtenances
Decide the appurtenances after considering the following:
1. The speed of the sludge scraper should not agitate the deposited sludge
2. In principle, draw off the sludge using a pump.
3. Use ductile or cast iron pipe as far as possible.
4. Provide backwash pipes at appropriate locations considering that the sludge draw-off pipe
may be blocked.
5. If multiple tanks are present, install the distribution tank at the front end.
6 . Install a scum skimmer on the liquid surface of tank. Take steps to ensure that the overflow weir
can be cleaned.
7. If necessary, install de-gritting and debris removal equipment before thickening.
8 . If necessary, cover the tank and install ventilation and deodorization equipment as dealt
with in Chapter 5.
6.3.2 Centrifugal Thickening
Thickening by centrifugation is applied only when there is space limitation or sludge characteristics
will not permit the adoption of the other two methods. This method involves high maintenance and
power costs. Centrifuges employed are of either disc or solid bowl type. Disc centrifuges are prone
to clogging while the latter gives a lower quality of effluent.
6 - 21
6.3.2.1 Centrifugal Thickener
1. In principle, two or more thickeners should be installed.
2. Take the water content of thickened sludge as 96% approximately, and the standard solids
recovery rate as 85% to 95%.
3. Use durable material.
6.3.2.2 Sludge Feed Pump
Decide the sludge feed pump after considering the following:
1. Select a pump with adequate capacity.
2. Install separate pumps for each centrifugal thickener.
1. If necessary, install de-gritting and debris removal equipment before thickening.
2. Install sludge feed tank.
3. Install thickened sludge storage tank.
4. Install water supply system for internal cleaning of the centrifugal thickener and for cooling the
bearing.
5. Formulate measures against vibration and noise. Install ventilating equipment and deodorization
equipment, if necessary.
6 . Install equipment for controlling the water content of thickened sludge.
7. If necessary, install chemical dosing equipment.
6.3.3 Air Floatation Thickening
Air floatation units employ floatation of sludge by air under pressure or vacuum and are normally
used for thickening the waste activated sludge. These units involve additional equipment,
higher operating costs, higher power requirements, and more skilled maintenance and operation.
However, the removal of oil and grease, solids, grit and other material as also odour control
are distinct advantages.
2
In the pressure type floatation units, a portion of the subnatant is pressurized from 3 to 5 kg/cm-
and then saturated with air in a pressurization chamber. The effluent from this is mixed with
influent sludge immediately before it is released into the flotation tank. Excess dissolved air then
rises up in the form of bubbles at atmospheric pressure attaching themselves to particles which
form the sludge blanket. Thickened blanket is skimmed off while the un-recycled subnatant is
returned to the plant.
6 - 22
The vacuum type employs the addition of air to saturation and applying vacuum to the unit to
release the air bubbles which float the solids to the surface.
The efficiency of air floatation units is increased by the addition of chemicals like alum and
polyelectrolytes. The addition of polyelectrolytes does not increase the solids concentration, but
improves the solids recovery rate from 90% to 98%.
6.3.3.1 Dissolved-air Floatation Thickening
Dissolved-air floatation thickening refers to the process of making fine air bubbles stick to sludge
particles, to reduce the apparent specific gravity of sludge with respect to water, and make the
particles buoyant so as to separate solids and liquids. Systems include partial-flow pressurization,
full-flow pressurization and return flow pressurization.
It is important that the appropriate size of fine air bubbles is generated and these attach effectively
to sludge particles. The attachment of bubbles may be easy or difficult depending on the physical
and chemical characteristics of the surface of particle; sometimes, addition of coagulant may be
necessary depending on the particle. Dissolved-air floatation thickening equipment consists of
dissolved-air floatation tank, pressurization pump and air dissolution tank.
Partial-flow pressurization is not used much for sludge treatment since the air dissolution level is
low compared to other methods because a part of the loaded sludge is directly conveyed to the air
dissolution tank by the pressurization pump.
Full-flow pressurization system is simpler than the return flow pressurization system, since the
complete volume of loaded sludge is sent to the air dissolution tank by the pressurization pump.
However, since there is a limit to air solubility, it is mostly used when the concentration of loaded
sludge is comparatively small.
Return flow pressurization is one in which loaded sludge and pressurized water are mixed by
an ejector. The power of the sludge pump can be reduced, but its suitability depends on the
properties of sludge.
In recent years, the system of mixing and pressurizing loaded sludge in pressurized sewage (mixing
under pressure) and the system of mixing loaded sludge immediately after reducing the pressure of
pressurized sewage (mixing under reduced pressure) are being used. The return flow pressurization
system uses centrate or treated water.
6.3.3.1.1 Capacity
The floatation tank capacity is decided considering the following:
1. Consider the solids load as 100 to 120 kg dry solids / (m .d) and the standard solids recovery
rate as 85% to 95%.
2. Consider the standard effective depth of tank as 4.0 m to 5.0 m.
6 - 23
6.3.3.1.2 Shape and Number
The shape and number of floatation tanks are determined considering the following:
1. The shape of the tank is to be circular, square or rectangular.
6.3.3.1.3 Structure
The structure of floatation tank is decided considering the following:
1. The material should be watertight reinforced concrete or equivalent.
2. To adjust the water surface, install weir and other equipments.
6.3.3.1.4 Sludge Remover and Sludge Scraper
A froth remover that removes the froth and a sludge scraper that scrapes and collects the settled
sludge are installed in the floatation tank.
6.3.3.1.5 Pressurizing Pump
Decide the pressurizing pump after considering the following:
1. Select discharge pressure in the range of 0.2 to 0.4 MPa (2 to 4 kgf/cm2).
2. The capacity is decided as follows:
i) In case of the partial-flow pressurization, consider the concentration of sludge and pressure so
that the desired air-solid ratio is obtained.
ii) In case of the full-flow pressurization, take the loaded sludge amount.
iii) In case of the return flow pressurization, take the loaded sludge amount and decide the capacity
after considering the concentration of sludge and pressure.
6.3.3.1.6 Air Dissolution Tank
The structure of air dissolution tank is decided considering the following:
1. The structure should comply with pressure vessel construction standards, and should be capable
of giving good air dissolution efficiency.
2. The capacity should be decided based on a retention time of about 2 minutes.
3. Dispersion equipment, pressure gauge, safety valve, manhole for internal inspection, etc., should
be provided.
6 - 24
6.3.3.1.7 Appurtenances
1. Install a sludge storage tank.
2. Install floatation sludge degassing tank.
3. Install thickened sludge storage tank.

4. Install sludge pump.
5. Install return flow tank (in case of return flow pressurization system).
6 . If necessary, cover it and install ventilation and deodorization equipment.
7. If necessary, install chemical dosing equipment.
6.3.3.2 Dispersed-air Floatation Thickening
In this process, air bubbles generated by adding a foaming agent are attached to solids in the
sludge, mixing equipment by adding a polymer coagulant and sludge is floated. The main equipment
consists of floatation equipment, foaming equipment, mixing equipment, water level adjusting
equipment and auxiliary equipment such as sludge pump and floatation sludge de-aeration tank.
Foaming agent and air mixed in water are agitated mechanically in foaming equipment and fine
bubbles are generated under atmospheric pressure.
These bubbles are made to attach to the solids to which polymer coagulant is added and solids of
bubbles and floc with strong bonding strength are formed.
The solids made of floc and bubbles are transferred to the floatation equipment and are floated,
separated and removed, and the fine bubbles in sludge are mechanically agitated and removed. The
centrate is drained out and it overflows from the water level adjusting equipment.
6.3.3.2.1 Capacity
The floatation tank capacity is determined considering the following:
1. The solids load is 25 kg dry solids/ (m 2h) approximately, and the standard solids recovery rate
is 95% and above.
2. Consider the effective water depth as approximately 4 m.
6.3.3.2.2 Shape and Number
The shape and number of floatation tanks are decided considering the following:
1. The standard shape of the tank is circular.
6 - 25
6.3.3.2.3 Structure
The structure of floatation tank is determined considering the following:
1. The standard material is durable and corrosion resistant steel.
2. To adjust the water surface, install weir and other equipments.
6.3.3.2.4 Sludge Remover and Sludge Scraper
A sludge remover that removes the froth and a sludge collector that scrapes and collects the settled
sludge are installed in the floatation tank.
6.3.3.2.5 Control of Foaming
Sometimes sludge digesters are found to be foaming inside the digester. Technically this does not
interfere with the treatment process and as long as it does not escape from the digesters into the
atmosphere, this can be ignored. It tends to get controlled by itself. If the problem persists and foam
is found in the sludge gas, commercially available anti-foaming chemicals can be briefly used as per
the guidelines of respective manufacturers with proven track record in such applications.
6.3.4 Belt Type Thickening
When coagulant is loaded, the belt type thickener performs gravity filtering and thickening on
a travelling belt, which may be a stainless steel belt or a plastic belt. While being transported to the
discharge side, the sludge is filtered by gravity and thickened; it is separated by a scraper at the
concentrated sludge discharge unit. The belt is subsequently washed with filtrate. Chemical
conditioning equipment is used to mix sludge and polymer coagulant. In addition to the stand alone
equipment, line mixing type equipment are also available.
6.3.4.1 Capacity
The capacity of belt filter press thickener is decided after considering the following:
1. The sludge volume is approximately 10 m3/hour to 100m 3/hour.
2. The standard thickening performance is as given below.
i) Thickened concentration: 4-5% approx
ii) Chemical addition rate: 0.3% approximately (percent solid)
iii) SS recovery rate: 95% or greater
6.3.4.2 Shape and Number
The shape and number are decided after considering the following:
1. The standard shape is rectangular with the longer side being horizontal
2. In principle, the number should be two or more units
6 - 26
6.3.4.3 Chemical Dosing Equipment
Decide the chemical dosing equipment after considering the following:
1. Install coagulant dissolution tank
2. Install coagulant feeder
3. Install coagulant dosing pump
1. Install sludge feed tank
2. Install thickened sludge storage tank
3. Install sludge pump
4. If necessary, cover it and install ventilation and deodorization equipment
6.3.5 Comparison of Different Types of Sludge Thickening
A comparison of different sludge thickening processes is presented in Table 6-7 overleaf.
6.4 ANAEROBIC SLUDGE DIGESTION
6.4.1 General
This is the biological degradation of organic matter in the absence of oxygen. In this process, much
of the organic matter is converted to methane, carbon-dioxide and water and therefore, it is a net
energy producer. Since, little carbon and energy alone is available to sustain further biological
activity, the remaining solids are rendered stable.
6.4.1.1 Microbiology of the Process
Anaerobic digestion involves several successive biochemical reactions earned by a mixed culture
of microorganisms. There are three degradation stages namely, hydrolysis, acid formation and
methane formation. The reactions involved in anaerobic digestion are shown in Figure 6.4 overleaf.
In the first stage of digestion, complex organic matter like proteins, cellulose, lipids are converted
by extra cellular enzymes into simple soluble organic matter. In the second stage, soluble organic
matter is converted by acetogenic bacteria into acetic acid, hydrogen, carbon dioxide and other
low molecular weight organic acids. In the third stage, two groups of strictly anaerobic
methanogenic bacteria, are active. While one group converts acetate into methane and
bicarbonate, the other group converts hydrogen and carbon-dioxide into methane. For satisfactory
performance of an anaerobic digester, the second and third stages of degradation should be in
dynamic equilibrium, that is, the volatile organic acids should be converted into methane at the
same rate as they are produced.
6 - 27
Table 6.7 Comparative Evaluation of Different Sludge Thickening Processes
Evaluation Dissolved Gravity Rotating

Gravity Centrifugation
Criteria Air Flotation Belt Drum
Space
High Medium Low Medium Medium
requirement
Operation and
Simple Medium High Medium Medium
maintenance
Primary Waste Waste Waste Waste
Typical
and activated activated activated activated
Application
Combined sludge sludge sludge sludge
Conditioning
None High High Medium Medium
Chemicals
Power
Low High High Medium Medium
requirement
Capital Cost Low High High Medium Medium
Operation Cost Low High High Medium Medium
Thickened
Medium to Medium to
Sludge solids Medium Low High
high high
concentration
Building
corrosion if High Medium None Medium Medium
enclosed
Odour problem Serious Moderate Low Moderate Moderate
F ig ure 6 .4 A n a e ro b ic d ig e stio n m e ch a n ism s
6 - 28
However, methanogenic microorganisms are inherently slow growing compared with the volatile
acid formers and they are adversely affected by fluctuations in pH, concentration of substrates and
temperature. Hence, the anaerobic process is essentially controlled by the methanogenic
microorganisms.
6.4.2 Digestion Types
Two different types in anaerobic sludge digestion processes are namely, low rate and high rate and
are used in practice. The basic features are in Figure 6.5
Figure 6.5 Sludge digestion system
6.4.2.1 Low Rate Digestion
Raw sludge is fed into the digester intermittently. Bubbles of sewage gas are generated and their
rise to the surface provides some mixing. In the case of few old digesters, screw pumps have been
installed to provide additional intermittent mixing of the contents, say once in 8 hours for about
an hour. As a result, the digester contents are allowed to stratify, thereby, forming four distinct
layers: a floating layer of scum, layer of supernatant, layer of actively digesting sludge and a bottom
layer of digested sludge; essentially the decomposition is restricted to the middle and bottom layers.
Stabilized sludge that accumulates and thickens at the bottom of the tank is periodically drawn off
from the centre of the floor. Supernatant is removed from the side of the digester and returned to the
treatment plant.
6.4.2.2 High Rate Digestion
The essential elements of high rate digestion are complete mixing and more or less uniform
feeding of raw sludge.
6 - 29
Pre-thickening of raw sludge and heating of the digester contents are optional features of a high
rate digestion system. All these four features provide the best environmental conditions for the
biological process and the net results are reduced digester volume requirement and increased
process stability.
Complete mixing of sludge in high rate digesters creates a homogeneous environment throughout
the digester. It also quickly brings the raw sludge into contact with microorganisms and evenly
distributes toxic substances, if any, present in the raw sludge.
Furthermore, when stratification is prevented because of mixing, the entire digester is available for
active decomposition, thereby increasing the effective solids retention time.
Pre-thickening of raw sludge before digestion results in the following benefits:
1. Large reduction in digester volume requirements
2. The thickener supernatant is of far better quality than digester supernatant; thereby, it has less
adverse impact when returned to the STP
3. Less heating energy requirements
4. Less mixing energy requirements
There is however, a point beyond which further thickening of raw sludge has the following
effects on digestion:
a) Solid concentration higher than 6 % in the digester affects the viscosity, which in turn affects
mixing, hence deserves special consideration.
b) In case of highly thickened raw sludge, the concentration of salts and heavy metals present
in the raw sludge and end products of digestion, such as volatile acids and ammonium salts,
may exceed the toxic levels.
6.4.2.3 Sludge Temperature
Sludge temperature is one of the important environmental factors. Where the digester sludge
temperatures are low, digester heating is beneficial because of the rate of microbial growth and
therefore, the rate of digestion increases with temperature.
Depending upon the temperature, different kinds of microorganisms are active in the digester. For
an operating temperature of 20 to 40C, the range is known as mesophilic and for 40 to 60C, the
range is known as thermophilic.
The ambient temperature in our country is generally favourable for operation under mesophilic
condition throughout the year. However, in special conditions such as hilly regions, where extremely
low temperatures are likely to be encountered, it may be necessary to heat the digesters during
specific periods of the year.
6 - 30
6.4.3 Digester Tank Volume
The determination of digester tank volume is a critical step in the design of anaerobic system.
The digester volume must be sufficient to prevent the process from failing under all accepted
conditions. Process failure is defined as accumulation of volatile acids that results in decrease in pH,
when volatile acids/alkalinity ratio becomes greater than 0.5 and methane production stops.
Once the digester turns sour, it usually takes several days to return to normal operation after the
corrective actions are taken.
The digester capacity must also be large enough to ensure that raw sludge is adequately stabilized
as discussed below in the section on solids retention time. The relationship between percentage
volatile matter in the raw sludge, its reduction and detention time is shown in Figure 6 .6 .
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
D E T E N T IO N IN D IG E S TE R (D A Y S )

Figure 6 .6 Reduction of volatile matter as related to digester detention time
6 - 31
6.4.4 Sludge Loading Rate
6.4.4.1 Loading Criteria
Traditionally, volume requirements for anaerobic digestion have been determined from empirical
loading criteria. Volatile solids loading rate (kg VSS/day/m3) criteria have been commonly used to
size anaerobic digesters. Table 6 .8 lists the typical loading rates used for design purpose. However,
it is now recognized that process performance is better correlated to solids retention time (SRT),
as shown in the table and is discussed subsequently.
Table 6 .8 Typical design criteria for sizing mesophilic anaerobic sludge digesters
Parameters Low Rate Digestion High Rate Digestion
Volatile Solids Loading Rate, kgVSS/day/m 3 0 .6 - 1.6 1.6-6.4
Solids Retention Time, days (*) 1 0 -2 0
Hydraulic Retention Time, days 30-40 1 0 -2 0
Note: (*) Computation of actual SRT is difficult as it depends on the capacity utilization.
6.4.4.2 Solids Retention Time and Temperature
The most important consideration in sizing anaerobic digester is that the microorganisms must be
given sufficient time to reproduce so that they can (a) replace the cells lost with the withdrawn
sludge and (b) adjust the microbial mass to the organic loading and its fluctuation.
The key design parameter for anaerobic biological treatment is the biological solids retention
time (SRT), which is the average time a unit of microbial mass is retained in the anaerobic
digester without recycling. The SRT is equivalent to the hydraulic retention time, that is,
volume of digester/volume of sludge withdrawn per day.
Experiments have proved that percentage of destruction of volatile solids and formation of methane
decreases as the SRT is reduced. The SRT can be lowered to a critical point (SRTc) beyond which
the process will fail completely.
The temperature has an important effect on bacterial growth rates and accordingly changes the
relationship between SRT and digester performance. The effect of temperature on volatile solids
destruction is presented in Figure 6.7 overleaf.
The inset in Figure 6.7 shows that at SRT values greater than 30 days, fluctuations in temperature
do not affect the digester stability, that is, no significant change in percentage volatile solids
reduction.The size of anaerobic digester should be adequate enough to ensure that the solids
retention time in the system is always well above the SRTc. Typical solids retention time design
criteria followed for high rate digestion design are given in Table 6.9 overleaf.
6 - 32
T E M P E R A T U R E (C)
100
90

Z 80
O
<J 70
S O LID S R E T E N T IO N TIM E (DAYS)
Figure 6.7 Effect of solids retention time and temperature on volatile solids reduction in a
laboratory scale completely mixed aerobic digester
Table 6.9 Solids retention time at different temperatures (high rate digestion)
Solids Retention Time, days

Operating Temperature, C
SRTc Suggested for Design (SRTd) Ratio
18 11 28 28/11 = 2 .5 4
24 8 20 20/8 = 2.5
30 6 14 14/6 = 2.3
35 4 10 10/4 = 2.5
40 4 10 10/4 = 2.5
6 - 33
The SRT design criteria must be met under all anticipated conditions including:
1. Maximum grit and scum accumulations: Considerable amount of grit and scum may accumulate
before a digester is cleaned. This reduces the active volume of the tank. Hence, about 0.6m to
1 .0 m additional depth for grit and scum accumulation must be provided.
2 . Free Board: About 0.6 to 0.8m free board (from rim of the digester wall to the highest liquid
level) must be allowed for differences in the rate of feeding and withdrawing and to provide
reasonable operational flexibility.
6.4.4.3 Storage for Digested Sludge
Storage capacity for digested sludge is required in places where digested sludge is applied to
drying beds for dewatering, and use of sludge drying beds is interrupted during monsoon periods.
This additional capacity requirement can be met either by increasing the digester capacity or by
providing a separate digested sludge holding tank. Normally, an additional 10-15 days digested
sludge storage capacity can be sufficient. However, if local meteorological data is available, such
data should be used to determine the capacity of storage.
6.4.5 Sizing
6.4.5.1 Sizing of Low Rate Digesters
Lack of proper mixing in the conventional digesters leads to stratification, and gives rise to
distinct layers of scum, supernatant, actively digesting sludge and digested sludge. The supernatant
is withdrawn periodically and returned to the influent of the treatment plant, while the sludge
is added at mid depth and withdrawn from the bottom. Since the supernatant is removed during
digestion resulting in a decrease in digested sludge volume, the capacity of the digester is given
by the expression:
V=[Vf -2/3(Vf -Vd)]T 1 (6 .1)
Where,
3
V : Volume of digester, m
3
Vf : Volume of fresh sludge m added per day
3
Vd : Volume of digested sludge m withdrawn per day
T 1 : HRT, days
Sometimes sludge drying beds alone are used and left in the open under the sky. In such cases, the
rainfall in monsoon times results in many environmental problems. Hence, sludge storage facilities
for the monsoon season are to be provided. The volume is given by the expression:
Additional monsoon storage volume = Vd T 2 (6.2)
Where, T 2 is the storage in days, during monsoon
6 - 34
The digester can be a single unit or two units - the primary and the secondary, the former being
provided with the needed time for digestion and the latter to meet the requirements of monsoon
storage. As discussed in the above Subsection 6.4.3, further additional capacity to compensate for grit
accumulation and free board should be provided.
6.4.5.2 Sizing of High Rate Digester
Due to good mixing, there is no stratification hence, no loss of capacity due to scum or supernatant
layers. By adopting more or less continuous addition of raw sludge and resorting to pre-thickening of
the raw sludge to a solid content of about 6 %, the digester volume can be designed for 10-15 days
retention time.
When the digested sludge is to be dewatered on sludge drying bed, a second stage digester is normally
provided where separation of supernatant and reduction in volume of sludge due to gravity thickening
take place and digestion is completed. Additional storage capacity needed for the monsoon period
can also be provided in the second stand digester. Capacities for high rate digestion may be
determined by:
(6.3)
V= Vf T h
V = [Vf -2/3(Vf -Vd)]T -Vd T 2 (6.4)
Where,
V : Volume of first stage digester, m 3

V : Volume of second stage digester, m 3
Vf : Volume of fresh sludge m3 added per day
Vd : Volume of digested sludge m 3 withdrawn per day
Th : Detention time in the high rate digester, days
T : Detention time in the second stage digester which is of the order of 10 days and
T 2 : Storage in days, during monsoon
As discussed in the above subsection 6.4.3, while computing the digester volume, additional volume
to compensate for grit accumulation and free board should be provided.
The mass balance calculation in the 1993 edition in word has since been converted to M S Excel
format and is presented as Appendix A.6-1. An example of digester sizing is presented in
Appendix A.6.4.
6.4.6 Structure
6.4.6.1 Number of Units
Conventional digesters are designed as single units for plants treating up to 4 MLD. For larger
plants, units are provided in multiples of two, the individual capacity not exceeding 3 MLD. High rate
digesters are designed comprising primary and secondary digestion tanks, each unit generally
capable of handling sludge from treatment plants up to 20 MLD.
6 - 35
6.4.6.2 Digester Shape and Size
The most common digester shape is a low, vertical cylinder with diameter ranging from 6 to 38 m
and with height ranging from 6 to12 m. Digester mixing is effective when the ratio of digester
diameter to sludge depth is between 1.5 and 4. Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD) to decide on
structural design is used. Figure 6 .8 shows typical Low height cylindrical, Egg shaped and tall
form cylindrical digesters.
Figure 6 .8 Typical low height cylindrical, egg shaped and tall form cylindrical digesters
6.4.6.3 Free Board and Depth
The free board is dependent upon the type of cover and the maximum gas pressure. For fixed
dome or conical roofs, free board between the liquid level and the rim of the digester wall should not
be less than 0.6m. For flat covers, the free board between water level and the top of the tank wall
should preferably be not below 0.6 m. For fixed slab roofs, a free board of 0.8m is recommended.
Sludge depth in a digester has to be carefully worked out. Too deep a digester causes excessive
foaming, which may result in choking of the gas pipes and building up high pressures in the digester.
3
In case of conventional low rate digester, when gas production reaches, a figure of about 9 m /day/
2
m of top surface of sludge foaming becomes noticeable. Therefore, before the tank depth and
surface area of a digester are worked out, maximum gas production rate should be determined. An
3
average of about 0.9 m of gas is produced per kg of volatile solids destroyed. The optimum diameter
of depth of digester is calculated such that at the average rate of daily gas production, the value of
3 2
9 m per m of tank area is not exceeded.
6.4.6.4 Floor Slope
The floor slope should be in the range of 1 in 6 to 1 in 10 to facilitate easy withdrawal of sludge
The digester floor should be designed for uplift pressure due to the subsoil water or suitably
protected by anchoring.
6 - 36
6.4.6.5 Roofing
Sludge digesters can have either fixed or floating roofs. Reinforced concrete domes, conical or flat
slabs are used for fixed roof and steel domes are used for floating cover. Steel floating covers may
either rest on the liquid or act as gas holders in the digesters themselves. If a floating cover is used
for gas holder in a digestion tank, an effective vertical travel of 1.2 to 2 m should be provided.
6.4.6.6 Digester Control Room
Normally a control room is provided near the digesters to house the piping and the process
control equipment, which are principally the sludge heating units (if used), sludge transfer and
recirculation pumps, sludge sampling sinks, thermometers, blowers for ventilation and electrical
control equipment. Where heating of sludge digesters is practiced, the operation could be managed
by locating conveniently the necessary valves for supernatant and sludge withdrawal in the
digester wall itself. However, in sewage treatment plants having more than four digesters, it is
advisable to have a separate operation control room to house the necessary control equipment
for convenient operation.
6.4.7 Mixing System
A certain amount of natural mixing occurs in anaerobic digester caused by both the rise of sludge
gas bubbles and the thermal convection currents created by the addition of fresh or heated
sludge. This effect of natural mixing is significant, particularly in case of high rate digesters fed
continuously. However, this natural mixing is not sufficient to ensure stable performance of the
digestion process. Therefore, methods used for mixing include external pumped circulation, internal
mechanical mixing and internal gas mixing.
External pumped circulation while relatively simple is limited in application because of large flow
rates involved. However, this method can achieve substantial mixing, provided sufficient energy in
the range of 5 to 8 watts/m 3 is dissipated in the digester. More energy will be required if piping
losses are significant. Pumped circulation allows external heat exchanges to be used for heating the
digester contents and uniform blending of raw sludge with heated circulating sludge prior to the raw
sludge entry to the digester.
Internal mechanical mixing by means of propellers, flat-bladed turbines, or draft tube mixers are also
often used. Mechanical mixers can be installed through the cover or walls of the digester.
Substantial mixing can be effected with about 5 to 8 watts/m of digester content is dissipated
in the digester.
Internal gas mixing types normally used for digesters are
1. The injection of a large sludge gas bubble at the bottom of a 30 cm diameter tube to create piston
pumping action and periodic surface agitation
2. The injection of sludge gas sequentially through a series of lances suspended from the covers to
as great a depth as possible, depending on cover movement
6 - 37
3. The free or unconfirmed release of gas from a ring of spargers mounted on the floor
4. The confined release of gas within a draft tube positioned inside the tank
The first method generally has a low power requirement and consequently, produces only a low level
of mixing. As a result, the major benefit derived from its use is in scum control. Lance free gas lift and
draft tube gas mixing, however, can be scaled to induce strong mixing of the digester contents.
The circulation patterns produced by these two mixing methods differ. In the free gas lift system,
the gas bubble velocity at the bottom of the tank is zero, accelerating to a maximum as the bubble
reaches the liquid surface. Since the pumping action of the gas is directly related to the velocity of the
bubble, there is no pumping from the bottom of the tank with a free gas lift system.
In contrast, a draft tube acts as a gas lift pump which, by the law of continuity, causes the flow of
sludge entering the bottom of the draft tube to be the same as that exiting at the top. Thus, the
pumping rate is largely independent of height.
The significance of this difference is that draft tube mixers induce bottom currents to prevent or
at least reduce accumulations of settling material. Another difference among internal gas mixing
systems is that the gas injection devices in a free gas lift system are fixed on the bottom of the
digester and thus, cannot be removed for cleaning without draining the tank.
To reduce clogging problems, provisions should be made for flushing the gas lines and diffusers with
high pressure water.
With the lance and draft tube systems, the gas diffusers are inserted from the roof and, therefore,
can lie withdrawn for cleaning without removing the contents of the tank.
A drawback in these systems, is that the draft tube and gas lines inside the tank may foul with rags
and debris in the digesting sludge. Some of these are compiled in Figure 6-9 and Figure 6-10.
There are many types of sludge mixing arrangements in tandem with the shape of digesters.
However, as far as India is concerned, the cylindrical digesters with either mechanical agitator
mixers or externally sludge recirculated pump sets are more common.
The cylindrical digester with the upper and lower compartments and gas induced central draft tube
mixing system is in use in cattle dung, abattoir waste and vegetable market waste biomethanation
plants with subsidy from the Ministry of New and Renewable Energy (MNRE).
However, there is very limited information either in India or elsewhere on the effectiveness of
their geometry Vs the efficiency of mixing system. Recently, this had engaged the attention and
Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD) modelling approach is being explored to optimize the
degree of mixing for the energy put in.
The usefulness of this type of modelling can be seen from the documentation of a reported study as
reproduced in Figure 6.11.
6 - 38
Source: WEF Manual of Practice 8
F ig ure 6.9 S om e o f th e m e ch a n ica l m ixing syste m s in d ig e ste rs
6 - 39
Sources: (1) WEF Manual of Practice- 8 ,

(2) Article on Biomethanation by AK Dhussa and VK Jain, Newsletter, National
Bioenergy Board, MNRE, March 2002.
F igure 6 .1 0 S o m e o f th e gas based m ixing s y s te m s in d ig e ste rs
6 - 40
Source: D Harrison et. al., 2006
Figure 6-11 CFD Modelling results of digester mixing efficiency
CFD is a mathematical modelling technique that solves fundamental flow equations for each cell
in a mesh, 1.6 million in this instance, to form a construct of the equipment being investigated. The
flow field within the equipment is simulated and flow patterns, velocities, residence time distributions,
additive blend times, pressure drops and other relevant parameters can be determined. Many single
and some multi-phase flows can be modelled. Knatz. et. al. (2010).
To assess this effect a CFD model of the digester is stated to have been constructed at the Orange
County Sanitation District STP in USA using both physical and CFD models. The mixing system is
stated to have been simulated at 2 percent, 4 percent and 6 percent dry solids concentration. At
2 percent dry solids concentration, the mixing was shown to be very effective with over 90 percent of
the digester volume being actively mixed and the feed blend time being calculated as 1.7 hours. At
4 percent digested solids concentrations the active volume was calculated as 45 percent with a blend
time of 8.5 hours and at 6 percent dry solids concentration the active volume was greatly reduced to
less than 28 percent and blend time was in excess of a day.
It was inferred that doubling the dry solids concentration within the digester will be more than halve
the active volume provided by the digester mixing system.
6 - 41
The CFD model is not just a tool to evaluate the effect of increasing viscosity on digester mixing
performance. Once constructed and calibrated, the CFD model can also be used to test modifications
to the digester mixing system to improve performance at elevated dry solids concentrations.
Accordingly, it is to be recognized that investigating the integrated approach to size, shape and
mixing efficiency is to be given its due importance in firming up future digester systems.
6.4.8 Heating System
Heating and boiler systems are decided after considering the following:
1. Heating method
1. Direct heating method (steam blow-in system). This consists of blowing high-temperature steam
directly into the sludge in the tank. As long as agitation is satisfactory, the degradation of biotic
action due to steam is small, both equipment and operation are simple, so this method is widely
used. This requires boiler make-up water equivalent to the steam blow-in quantity.
ii. Indirect heating system (system using heat exchanger) - The indirect heating system consists of
a heat exchanger installed outside the tank. The sludge that circulates around the tank and heat
exchanger are heated by the hot water circulating around the heat supply source and the heat
exchanger. The heat exchanger may be of two types - double tube and spiral type.
The double tube heat exchanger consists of an inner tube in which the sludge flows and an outer
tube around which hot water flows in the opposite direction.
The spiral type heat exchanger consists of heat transfer plate wound in spiral form within the
cylindrical pipes in which sludge and hot water flow in opposite directions.
The indirect heating system has more equipment such as circulating pump and heat exchanger,
compared to the steam blow-in system, but since digested sludge circulates, agitation of the
sludge is facilitated.
2. Heat required for heating consists of the heat required for the loaded sludge, and the radiation
heat loss to surrounding from the heating pipes and tank.
3. The boiler capacity is decided after considering the maximum heat of the sludge digestion
tank, the operating hours and the number of boilers. The number of boilers should be two or
more in principle.
4. The construction of the boiler should be based on relevant laws and standards, and should be
such that boiler can be operated in a stable manner.
5. Steam pipes should be covered by insulating material; steam trap and vacuum breaker should be
installed in the steam piping system. Liquid depth at blow-off and shape of blow-in part should be
considered so as to prevent abnormal noise and vibration in the steam blow-in pipes.
6 - 42
6.4.9 Sludge Inlets and Draw-offs
Sludge inlets and draw-offs are decided after considering the following:
1. Thickened sludge inlet pipe should be installed at such a position that sludge is dispersed
uniformly in the tank.
2. The sludge withdrawal pipe should be at least 150 mm in suction drawal and 200 mm in
gravity drawal.
3. Consideration should be given to preventing clogging of sludge pipes.
4. Considerations should be given to power outages for sludge draw-off valve.
6.4.10 Supernatant Withdrawal and Treatment
For withdrawal and treatment of supernatant liquor, the following should be considered.
6.4.10.1 Supernatant Liquor Draw-off Pipe
The supernatant liquor draw-off pipes should be laid such that supernatant liquor can be drawn
off at varying water depths. In a secondary tank for two-stage digestion, supernatant liquor with
small SS concentration occurs between the concentrated digested sludge at the bottom and the
layer with a major concentration of floating solids near the water surface. The water depth at which
satisfactory supernatant liquor is generated differs depending on the digestion level; therefore,
draw-off pipes should be installed at 3 to 4 different locations from half the depth of the tank, and
the best location from these should be selected.
The draw-off of supernatant liquor in the secondary tank should be performed from the overflow pipe.
Piping to bypass the overflow pipe should be kept ready, considering operation by controlling the
liquid level during transfer to secondary tank, draw-off of supernatant liquor and withdrawal of
digested sludge. The pipe diameter should be minimum 150 mm.
6.4.10.2 Supernatant Liquor Return Piping
After directly treating the supernatant liquor, piping should be laid such that it can be returned
to the grit chamber or primary settling tank and so on.
The quantity of supernatant liquor is small compared with the influent sewage, but consideration
should be given from the beginning so that high load does not act temporarily on sewage
treatment. Although it is common to return the supernatant liquor to the grit chamber and primary
settling tank and treated, it may be returned and treated independently if necessary. If discharge
piping within the premises is used as return piping, it becomes difficult to understand the quality
of influent sewage because of its mixing in the grit chamber.
In case of combined sewerage system, issues of effluent delivery during rainfall exist; therefore,
it is preferable to use dedicated piping that is separate from the discharge piping within
the premises.
6 - 43
Treatment of supernatant liquor containing highly concentrated COD, phosphorous,

nitrogen, etc., should be studied in conjunction with the return flow from other sludge treatment
facilities. Measures for return flow with the aim of removing phosphorous include the MAP
method developed recently (crystallization of MAP granules). Although the generated MAP
granules include potassium, it also includes components and has properties that are suitable
for fertilizer, such as nitrogen and phosphorous.
6.4.11 Guidelines for Sludge Piping Architecture
The following guidelines taken from "Design Guidelines for Sewage Works, 2008, Ministry of the
Environment, Ontario, PIBS 6879 are considered useful.
1. Digested sludge withdrawal piping should have a minimum diameter of 200 mm (NPS- 8 ) for
gravity and 150 mm (NPS-6 ) for pump suction and discharge lines.
2. Clearance between the end of the withdrawal line and the hopper walls should be sufficient to
prevent bridging of the sludge.
3. Adequate provisions should be made for rodding or back-flushing pipe lengths.
4. Where withdrawal is by gravity, the available head on the discharge pipe should be at least
120 cm and more. The same is good for pumped deliveries also.
5. Gravity piping should be laid on uniform grade and alignment.
6. Slopes on gravity discharge piping should be at least 3 percent for primary sludge and at least
2 percent for aerobically digested sludge
7. Where gravity sludge transfer is proposed, provision should be made for a pumped transfer on
a regular basis to remove deposits and clean out the lines.
8. Valves should be provided to allow for both gravity and pumped transfer. Cleanouts should be
provided for all gravity sludge piping.
9. The section of piping between isolation valves should have drain and vent valves or
other means to relieve built-up pressure, due to gas formation, prior to dismantling the piping
for cleaning or repairs.
10. Special consideration should be given to the corrosion resistance and permanence of
supporting systems for piping located inside the digestion tank.
11. Adequate provisions should be made for rodding or back-flushing individual pipe runs. Piping
should be provided to remove sludge for further processing.
12. Air-lift pumps are not recommended for the removal of primary sludge.
13. The tank bottom should slope to drain toward the withdrawal pipe. For tanks equipped with a
suction mechanism for sludge withdrawal, a bottom slope not less than 1 to 12 is required.
6 - 44
14. Where the sludge is to be removed by gravity a 1 to 4 slope is recommended.
15. Maximum flexibility should be provided in terms of sludge transfer (a) from primary and
secondary units to the digesters, (b) between primary and secondary digesters and (c) from
digesters to subsequent treated sludge or biosolids handling operations.
16. An unvalved vented overflow should be provided to prevent damage to the digestion tank and
cover in case of accidental overfilling.
17. This emergency overflow should be piped to an suitable point and at an suitable rate to the
STP liquid train or side stream treatment facilities to minimize the impact on process units.
18. Many clean outs and plugged tees or crosses should be provided. Elbows and sharp turns
should be avoided.
19. If the sludge flow is small, large capacity pumping with a timer should be used to flush the line
during the pumping cycle. The pump should have sufficient head to move the settled solids.
20. Provision for high-pressure water jet, pipe rodding and cleaning devices is needed.
21. Long sludge lines should have bypass lines for cleaning and maintenance.
6.4.12 Gas Collection and Storage
6.4.12.1 Gas Collection
Sludge gas is normally composed of about 60% to 70% methane and 25% to 35% carbon dioxide
by volume, with smaller quantities of other gases like hydrogen sulphide, hydrogen, nitrogen and
oxygen. The combustible constituent in the gas is primarily the methane.
Depending upon the sulphate content of the sewage and the sludge, the concentration of hydrogen
sulphide in the gas varies. Hydrogen sulphide in addition to its corrosive properties imposes a limit
on the usability or causes nuisance during the burning of the gas.
The gas can be used as heat energy in a gas engine to generate electricity for in plant consumption
or piped to nearby institutions like the case of the Dadar STP at Mumbai or merely flared.
Minimum or maximum rates of gas production will however, depend upon the mode of feeding
of raw sludge into the digester, when batch feeding is practiced, the minimum and maximum gas
production rates may vary from 45% to more than 200%.
In the continuous feeding system, the difference between the maximum and the minimum is
considerably reduced. Intermittent mixing of digester contents is also responsible for wide
fluctuations in gas production rates.
It is, therefore, desirable to feed the high rate digesters with raw sludge and run the mixing
device as continuously as possible to obtain not only a uniform rate of digestion, but also uniform
production of gas.
6 - 45
Sludge gas should be collected under positive pressure to prevent its mixing with air and causing
explosion. The explosive range of sludge gas is between 5% and 15% by volume of gas with air. The
gas may be collected directly from under a floating cover on the digester or from the fixed cover by
maintaining a constant water level. Where primary and secondary units are provided to operate in series
with the primary having a fixed cover and the secondary with a gas holding or floating cover, the gas
piping from each digester should be interconnected. A separate gas holder may be provided to collect
the gas from the primary unit where the secondary units are kept open.
A fixed integrally built gas dome above the digester roof is advantageous for gas take off. The
velocity in sludge gas piping should not exceed 3.5 m/s to prevent carryover of the condensate from
the condensation traps and avoid high pressure loss and damage to meters or flame traps and other
appurtenances of the system.
An integrating meter made of corrosion resistant material should be used to measure gas
production from the digesters. Removal of condensate from the meter is also desirable. Pressure
release valves are provided for controlling the gas in the digester by releasing gas pressure
exceeding 200 to 300 mm of water and also preventing partial vacuum and possible cover collapse
during rapid withdrawal of sludge or gas.
A mandatory distance of at least 30 m should be kept between a waste gas burner and a digestion
tank or gas holder to avoid the possibility of igniting the gas mixture. Waste gas burners should be
located in the open for easy observation. A pilot device should also be provided with the waste gas
burners. Condensate traps, pressure release valves and flame traps should also be provided ahead
of waste gas burners. Manometers indicating the gas pressure in cm of water may be used on the
main gas line from the digester or ahead of the gas utilization device. A common open end U tube
manometer should not be used for such purposes as it may be hazardous.
6.4.12.2 Storage (Gas Holder)
The primary purpose of a gas holder is to adjust the difference in the rate of gas production and
consumption as well as to maintain uniform pressure at the burner. When gas holders are also used
for storage of gas for utilization, a storage capacity of at least 25% of the total daily gas production
should be provided. The gas holders may be of the following types:
1. A bell shaped cylindrical tank submerged in water installed either on the top of a digester or as a
separate unit. The structure holding the water may be made of RCC. As the gas enters or leaves,
the holder rises or falls.
2. A pontoon cover type that floats on the liquid content of the digester consisting of steel ceiling,
skirt plates, a gas dome and steel trusses
3. Dry type gas holder consisting of a cylindrical steel tank in which a disc-shaped piston makes
contact at its periphery with the inside of the tank. The gas enters the holder from beneath the
piston which floats on the gas. Leakage of gas is prevented by either tar or a felt seal around the
edge of the piston. A suitable roof should be provided if this type of dry gas holder is installed.
6 - 46
4. A high pressure holder either cylindrical or spherical in shape and made of either welded or netted
steel, for storing the gas under high pressure. This type of gas holder is seldom used for sewage
treatment plants unless the gas has to be utilized for special purposes.
5. A relatively trouble-free gas holder is the flexible inflatable fabric top, as it does not react with
the H2S in the biogas and is integral to the digester. These types of covers are often used with
plug-flow and complete-mix digesters. Flexible membrane materials commonly used for these
gas holders include high-density polyethylene (HDPE), low-density polyethylene (LDPE), linear
low density polyethylene (LLDPE), and chlorosulfonated polyethylene covered polyester.
The appurtenances for gas holders include ladders, condensate drains, pressure gauges and safety
valves. Typical drawings and photographs are as in Figure 6.12 and Figure 6.13.
Figure 6.12 Illustrative flexible gas holder configurations.
At left in Figure 6.12 is a top held holder. It expands in the shape of a cone and is housed inside a
structure. The left half shows the inside and the right half is the outer with doorway, vents and ladder.
At right in Figure 6.12 is a bottom held holder. It expands as a sphere and is protected by another
outer sphere. The filling and withdrawal of gas is at the bottom. Lightning arresters are mandatory.
(There are many other configurations and the ones shown here are only illustrative).
Figure 6.13 A view of the gas holders.
6.4.13 Piping
Cast iron is commonly used for pipelines carrying sludge including fittings and joints. Pipes should be
well supported and be capable of being drained. Vents should be provided at high points in order that
the gas generated by the digesting sludge does not accumulate in these pipelines.
6 - 47
Adequate number of flanges and flexible couplings should be provided on exposed sludge lines to
facilitate dismantling and insertion of cleaning equipment whenever necessary. In long pipe runs, tees
with flanges equipped with 40 to 60 mm hose connectors should be provided for easy cleaning and
flushing of the pipe. Flushing is an important requirement and arrangements should be provided for
flushing with water or treated sewage.
A minimum diameter of 200 mm should be used for the sludge pipelines for both gravity withdrawal
and suction to pumps. Velocities of 1.5 to 2.4 m/s should preferably be maintained to prevent solids
deposition and accumulation of grease.
Primary and digested sludge have different hydraulic characteristics from those of water, though
the secondary sludge is almost similar to water in its characteristics. The head loss in sludge pipes
increase with the increase in percentage of solids and as such C values of 40 to 50 in the Hazen
William formula should be used for designing the pipelines.
For gas lines CI, GI or HDPE are commonly used. Galvanized steel may also be used for
exposed gas piping. Flanged joints may be provided for exposed gas piping of sizes 100 mm and
above in diameter while screw or welded type joints are recommended for pipe less than 1 0 0 mm.
Mechanical joints should be used for underground piping. It is necessary that all gas piping be
located at a level that will allow proper draining of the condensate. It is desirable to maintain a gas
pipe slope of 1 in 50 with a minimum of slope of 1 in 100 for adequate drainage. Gas pipes should
preferably be painted with bituminous coating. For a diameter of 100 mm and above, CI with flanged
joints or flexible mechanical joints are used.
Adequate pipe supports should be provided to prevent breakage. It is desirable to provide a flanged
pipe bypass before a gas meter, a firm foundation should also be laid below the pipe and caution
must be exercised during back filling to prevent any disturbance of the alignment and grade. In highly
acidic or alkaline soils, the pipe must be wrapped with either asbestos or some other protective
material. Coal tar enamel may also be used in some cases. Cathodic protection is not generally
needed on gas lines.
Adequate number of drip traps must be provided in gas pipelines, especially at the downward
bends. Suitable number of tees should also be provided with removable screwed plugs or flanges for
cleaning purposes. A drip trap of 1 litre capacity would be satisfactory. Trap outlets should run to
floor drains wherever convenient. It is preferable to use positive type traps, which prevent gas from
escaping while emptying the condensate.
6.4.14 Appurtenances
6.4.14.1 Sampling Sinks and Valves
A sink should be provided for each digester unit for drawing the supernatant liquor and sludge from
various levels in the digester. Sinks should either be of white enamelled cast iron or of stainless
steel. They should be made at least 30 cm deep. The supply of adequate water for flushing the
sinks should also be provided. The sludge sampling pipes of SS should be short and 40 to 50 mm in
diameter and arranged to draw samples from at least three levels at 0.6 m intervals. Sink valves
should be brass plug type or CI flanged type.
6 - 48
6.4.14.2 Liquid Level Indicator
The digester may be designed for a fixed liquid level. Alternatively, a liquid level indicator with gauge
board or any other device may be used for each digester.
6.4.15 Corrosion Prevention
The temperature and humidity of digester gas are high, and the gas contains hydrogen sulphide,
hence, it is strongly corrosive. Therefore, preventive measures are necessary for parts in
contact with sludge including digester gas. The following should be considered in relation
to preventing corrosion:
6.4.15.1 Material of Equipment and Piping Parts in Contact with Sludge and Digester Gas
before Desulphurization
Stainless steel and ductile cast iron coated with epoxy powder coating, etc., should be used as
the material of equipment and piping parts in contact with sludge and digester gas before
desulphurization. If the use of carbon steel is unavoidable, adequate measures such as
preventing corrosion by providing a lining, etc., should be considered. Corrosion resistant synthetic
rubber should be used in gaskets of flanges. Natural rubber should not be used.
6.4.15.2 Coating of Parts of Piping and Equipment in Contact with Digester Gas and Sludge
Epoxy resin-based paints and coating should be used considering resistance to heat and chemical
action for coating on parts in contact with digester gas and sludge. To prevent rise in temperature of
gas holder due to sunlight, the coating on the outside should preferably be in a colour that absorbs
very little light from the sun.
6.4.15.3 Stripping of Hydrogen Sulphide in Digester Gas
Typically, the digester gas contains Methane (CH 4 ), Hydrogen Sulphide ( ^ S ) and Carbon Di-oxide
(CO 2). Standard requirements for dealing with digester gas are either electricity generation by using
appropriate engines or flaring in the atmosphere. In the case of flare, the auto ignition temperature
of H2 S is 260C and that for CH 4 is 595C thus, well before ignition of CH 4 the ^ S is disintegrated
and the foul odour aspect is not relevant.
In the case of feeding into engines, the ^ S in the presence of moisture gets converted to
sulphurous acid, which is corrosive and damages the burner hence, the removal of this, is essential
before using the gas in engines. It is not that it has to be eliminated fully. Engines can generally
tolerate up to about 200 ppm of this gas volume by volume. The permissible concentration of
sulphates in drinking water is 2 0 0 mg/l and the limit permissible when alternate sources are not
available is 400 mg/l. Thus, wherever STPs are planned, the issue of sulphates in raw sewage would
appropriately dictate the need for the removal of sulphide in case the biomethanation route and
electricity generation from engines is contemplated.
The CMWSSB has installed and is operating three different types of stripping facilities for digester
gas in three different STPs. The operating principle of each of these and a summary of observations
is compiled in the following section.
6 - 49
6.4.15.3.1 Biochemical Process
The raw biogas containing ^ S is passed through a scrubbing tower from the bottom and the
process liquid containing thiobacillus is sprayed from the top. The tower is filled with raschig rings for
enhancing the contact between biogas and process liquid whereby, the ^ S is washed and carried
away in the liquid and circulated via a reactor tank. The reactions are
H2S + OH = HS + H2O
HS + (O2)/2 = S + OH
The regeneration of process liquid involves (a) Caustic solution, (b) Nutrient for thiobacillus,
(c) Oxygen by way of air and (d) Demineralized water. The process liquid is transferred to a
settling tank where the sulphur is stated to be settled and the supernatant flows back to the
reactor tank. The settled sulphur is to be pumped to drying beds for recovering elemental sulphur.
The controlling parameters are pH, Redox potential and TDS of process liquid. The process units
are scrubber tower, reactor tank, settling tank and drying beds.
The process machineries are biogas blower, air blower, spray pump, caustic dosing pumps,
measuring pumps and sludge recirculation pumps. An issue is the sludge, which if not used as
recovered sulphur would become a hazardous sludge and need secure landfill.
6.4.15.3.2 Biological Process
The biogas containing ^ S is stated to be oxidized to Sulphate according to the equations by using
the sulphur oxidizing thiobacillus organisms grown on fluidized media in the tower.
2HS + O 2 = 2S + 2 OH
2HS + 4O 2 = 2SO 4 + 2 H
The process units involved are packing media in the tower for growth of thiobacillus, air
supplying blower, recirculation pump to provide moisture for the bacteria and nutrient feed pump for
maintaining the nitrogen, potassium and phosphorous balance. The removed ^ S ends up as the
dissolved sulphate in the product residue stream which is returned to the inlet of the STP
The issue of importance is the Stoichiometric increment in SO 4 hence, the TDS in the final treated
sewage may not be significant as the ^ S itself is derived from the SO 4 present in the raw sewage.
The system is provided with its SCADA.
6.4.15.3.3 Chemical Process
The biogas containing the ^ S is first passed through a venturi scrubber sprayed with caustic
solution at two or three stages under pressure followed by a second in a counter current packed
bed tower filled with porous raschig rings and the ^ S gets dissolved into the caustic and water.
The water coming out of the scrubber will be acidic and is treated with caustic solution which is
re-circulated again.
6 - 50
The scrubbed gases are drawn through induced draft fan and forced into the downstream engines.
The venturi as well as the packed towers is mounted on the same reservoir and the two liquids are
segregated by compartments and individual recirculation pumps are provided, which circulate the
liquids till they reach saturation.
The units are venturi scrubber, packed bed tower, water circulation tank, water circulation pump,
chemical dosing system comprising dosing pumps and pH controller, dosing pumps for chemical
storage tanks, water circulation pipe with valves, fittings and controls. The system has a custom built
instrumentation unit for control.
6.4.15.3.4 Observations of the Systems
The results of performance of the three systems as functioning at the STPs of CMWSSB are
compiled in Table 6.10. The installations are shown in Figure 6-14 overleaf.
Table 6.10 Observed performances of the three systems for removing H2S gas
No. Parameter Inlet Representative values in the processes
1 CH 4 % 60 to 63 64.00 to 70.20
2 C02 % 2 0 to 28 20.51 to 27.20
3 Hydrogen % Nil to 2 Trace to 7.20
4 Nitrogen % 1.3 to 6.4 1.1 to 6 .8
5 Oxygen % 0.5 to 1.2 0.40 to 2.25
6 H2S ppm 200 to 500 1 0 - 2 0 ppm
7 Moisture % varying About 50 ppm
8 Calorific value 4,400 to 4,800 5,500 to 5,800 kcal/nm 3
6.4.15.3.5 Appraisal of the Systems in Terms of O&M
The chemical system is the oldest and the bio chemical system is the next generation with the
biological system as the recent system. In terms of relative comparison, the biological system has
least residues, but has to be maintained and managed carefully for the thiobacillus biomass to
be maintained with respect to its nutrient requirements and the avoiding of the media getting too
much growth thereon and getting clogged.
The bio-chemical system uses the porous raschig rings and to that extent, its excessive growth and
clogging is a matter of concern and nutrient addition is also to be maintained.
The recovery of elemental sulphur, for example, if the raw sewage has a SO4 concentration of
300 mg/l, the elemental sulphur recovery even at 100% can be about 100 kg/MLD, but the aspects
of its purity and consistent yield are to be critically rated.
6 - 51
Top Left: Bio-chemical scrubber in the foreground and dewatering beds at far end for
Sulphur at Perungudi STP, Chennai, Right: Biological scrubber and sulphide gas
disposed off as dissolved sulphate to inlet of the Perungudi STP, Chennai, Bottom Left:
Chemical scrubber with first stage venturi and second stage packed bed at Koyambedu
STP, Chennai, Caustic is used for naturalization is bled when saturation limit is met with
Figure 6.14 Digester gas stripping systems in use for stripping hydrogen sulphide.
Moreover, if the ^ S cannot be reduced fully the foul odour may persist. Upsets in biological
sustainability is a common factor for both these processes. The chemical process has the
advantage of not relying on the microbial population and its control, but the potential to achieve
a 1 0 0 % stripping of ^ S demands a continuous monitoring and day-to-day adjustments of
chemical dosages, which is further compounded by variations in raw sewage quality and hence,
variations in sludge gas produced.
Between the biological and chemical processes, relatively higher electrical consumption and feed
of caustic are to be considered. Each system needs to be evaluated for the given project on hand.
6.5 AEROBIC SLUDGE DIGESTION
6.5.1 General
Aerobic digestion is also a useful method of stabilizing sewage sludge. It can be used for
secondary tank humus or for a mixture of primary and secondary sludge, but not for primary
sludge alone. The advantages of aerobic digestion over the anaerobic digestion are listed overleaf:
6 - 52
1) lower BOD concentration in digester supernatant
2) odourless and easily de-watered biologically stable digested sludge
3) recovery of more basic fertilizer value in the digested sludge
4) lower capital cost and
5) fewer operational problems
Due to these advantages, aerobic digesters are being increasingly used particularly in small STP
However, operating cost in terms of the power cost is much higher than for anaerobic digesters.
The factors that should be considered in designing an aerobic digester include detention time,
loading criteria, oxygen requirement, mixing and process operation. The volatile solids destroyed
in aerobic digestion in 10 to 12 days at a temperature of 20C would be 35 to 45%.
Higher temperature will result in reduction in the period of digestion. Oxygen requirements normally
vary between 1.7 to 1.9 gm / gm of volatile solids destroyed. It is also desirable to maintain the
dissolved oxygen between 1 to 2 mg/l in the system. Operational difficulties may be expected if
compressed aeration is practiced. Extended aeration system including oxidation ditches are
examples of aerobic digestion.Mechanical or jet aerators or sparger systems are preferable.
6.5.2 Tank Capacity
6.5.2.1 Volume Required
The following digestion tank capacities are based on a solids concentration of 2% with supernatant
separation performed in a separate tank. If supernatant separation is performed in the digestion tank,
a minimum of 25% additional volume is required. These capacities shall be provided unless sludge
thickening facilities are utilized to thicken the feed solids concentration to greater than 2%. If it is
provided, the digestion volumes may be decreased proportionally. The sludge source and volume/
population equivalent is in Table 6.11.
Table 6.11 Sludge source and volume/population equivalent
Sludge Source (m 3/P E .)

Waste activated sludge - no primary settling 0.13 (A)
Primary plus waste activated sludge 0.11 (A)
Waste activated sludge excluding primary sludge 0.06 (A)
Extended aeration activated sludge 0.09
Primary & attached growth biological reactor sludge 0.09
Note: (A) These volumes also apply to waste activated sludge from single stage nitrification with
less than 24 hours detention time based on design average flow;
P.E.-population equivalent as design flow divided by per capita sewage flow.
6 - 53
6.5.2.2 Effect of Temperature on Volume
The volumes in Section 6.5.2.1 are based on digester temperatures of 15C and a solids retention
time of 27 days. Aerobic digesters should be covered to minimize heat loss for colder temperature
applications. Additional volume or supplemental heat may be required if the land application method
is used. Refer to Section 6.5.9 for necessary sludge storage.
6.5.3 Mixing
Aerobic digesters shall be provided with mixing equipment which can maintain solids in suspension
and ensure complete mixing of the digester contents.
6.5.4 Air Requirements
Sufficient air shall be provided to keep the solids in suspension and maintain dissolved oxygen
between 1 mg/l and 2 mg/l. For minimum mixing and oxygen requirements, an air supply of 0.5 l/(m3
s) of tank volume shall be provided with the largest blower out of service. If diffusers are used, the
non-clog type is recommended and they should be designed to permit continuity of service.
If mechanical turbine aerators are utilized, at least two turbine aerators per tank shall be provided to
permit continuity of service.
Mechanical aerators are not recommended for use in aerobic digesters where freezing conditions will
cause ice build-up on the aerator and support structures.
6.5.5 Supernatant Separation
Facilities shall be provided for effective separation or decanting of supernatant. Separate facilities
are recommended; however, supernatant separation may be accomplished in the digestion tank
provided additional volume is provided as per Section 6.5.2. The supernatant draw-off unit shall be
designed to prevent return of scum and grease back to plant process units. Provision should be made
to withdraw supernatant from multiple levels of the supernatant withdrawal zone.
6.5.6 Scum and Grease Removal
Facilities shall be provided for the effective collection of scum and grease from the aerobic digester
for final disposal and to prevent its return to the plant process and to prevent long term accumulation
and potential discharge in the effluent.
6.5.7 High Level Emergency Overflow
A high level overflow without any valve and all necessary piping shall be provided to return the
digester overflow to the head of the plant or to the aeration process in case of accidental overfilling.
Design considerations related to the digester overflow shall include waste sludge rate and duration
during the period the plant is unattended, potential effects on plant process units, discharge location
of the emergency overflow and potential discharge of suspended solids in the plant effluent.
6 - 54
6.5.8 Aerobic Digestion Sludge Production
For calculating sludge handling and disposal needs, sludge production values from aerobic digesters
shall be based on a maximum solids concentration of 2 % without additional thickening.
The solids production on dry weight basis shall be as follows.
Primary plus waste activated sludge - at least 0.07 kg/(Population Equivalent per day).
Primary plus fixed film sludge - at least 0.05 kg/(Population Equivalent per day).
6.5.9 Digested Sludge Storage Volume
6.5.9.1 Sludge Storage Volume
Sludge storage must be provided in accordance with Section 6.2.7 to accommodate daily sludge
production volumes and as an operational buffer for unit outage and adverse weather conditions.
Designs utilizing increased sludge age in the activated sludge system as a means of storage
are not acceptable.
6.5.9.2 Liquid Sludge Storage
Liquid sludge storage facilities shall be based on the following values unless digested sludge
thickening facilities are utilized (refer to Section 6.3) to provide solids concentrations of greater than
2%. The sludge source and volume / population equivalent is given in Table 6.12.
Table 6.12 Sludge source and volume/population equivalent
Sludge Source m 3/(P.E.)
Primary plus waste activated sludge (WAS), extended aeration WAS 0.004
Waste activated sludge exclusive of primary sludge 0.002
Primary plus attached growth biological reactor sludge 0.003
P.E.-population equivalent as design flow divided by per capita sewage flow.
6.6 SLUDGE DRYING BEDS
6.6.1 Applicability
This method can be used in all places where adequate land is available and dried sludge can be used
for soil conditioning. Where digested sludge is deposited on well drained bed of sand and gravel, the
dissolved gases tend to buoy up and float the solids leaving a clear liquid at the bottom, which drains
through the sand rapidly.
The liquid drains off in a few hours after which drying commences by evaporation.
6 - 55
The sludge cake shrinks producing cracks, which accelerates evaporation from the sludge surface.
The areas having greater sunshine, lower rainfall and lesser relative humidity, the drying time may
be about two weeks while in other areas, it could be four weeks or more. Covered beds are not
generally necessary.
6.6.2 Unit Sizing
The sludge drying process is affected by weather, sludge characteristics, system design (including
depth of bed) and length of time between scraping and lifting of sludge material. High temperature
and high wind velocity improve drying, while high relative humidity and precipitation retard drying.
6.6.2.1 Area of Beds
The area needed for dewatering and drying the sludge is dependent on the volume of the
sludge, cycle time required to retain sludge for dewatering, drying and removal of sludge and
making the sand bed ready for next cycle of application and depth of application of sludge on
drying bed. The cycle time between two drying cycles of sludge on drying beds primarily depends on
the characteristics of sludge including factors affecting its ability to allow drainage and evaporation
of water, the climatic parameters that influence evaporation of water from sludge and the moisture
content allowed in dried sludge. The cycle time may vary widely, lesser time required for aerobically
stabilized sludge than for anaerobically digested sludge and for hot and dry weather conditions than for
cold and/or wet weather conditions.
The area of land required for sludge can be quite substantial with values of 0.1 to 0.25 m3/capita being
reported for anaerobically digested sludge under conditions that are unfavourable for dewatering and
drying. The average cycle time for drying may range from a few days to 2 weeks in warmer climates to 3 to
6 weeks or even more in unfavourable ones. The worked out example is presented at Appendix A.6.5.
6.6.3 Percolation Type Bed Components
A sludge drying bed usually consists of a bottom layer of gravel of uniform size over which, a bed
of clean sand is laid. Open jointed tile under drains are laid in the gravel layer to provide positive
drainage as the liquid passes through the sand and gravel.
6.6.3.1 Gravel
Graded gravel is placed around the under drains in layers up to 30cm with a minimum of 15 cm above
the top of under drains. At least 3 cm of the top layer shall be gravel of 3 mm to 6 mm.
6.6.3.2 Sand
Clean sand of effective size of 0.5 mm to 0.75 mm and uniformity coefficient not greater than 4.0 is
used. The depth of sand may vary from 20 cm to 30 cm. The finished sand shall be levelled.
6.6.3.3 Under Drains
Under drains are made of vitrified clay pipes or tiles or other suitable materials of at least 10 cm
diameter laid with open joints. Under drains shall not be more than 6 m apart.
6 - 56
6.6.3.4 Walls
Walls shall preferably be of masonry and extend at least 40 cm above the sand surface.
Outer walls should be kerbed to prevent washing outside soil on to beds.
6.6.3.5 Dimensions
Drying beds are commonly 6 m to 8 m wide and 30 to 45 m long. A length of 30 m away from the
inlet should not be exceeded with a single point of wet sludge discharge, when the bed slope is
about 0.5 %. Multiple discharge points may be used with large sludge beds to reduce the length
of wet sludge travel.
6.6.3.6 Sludge Inlet
All sludge pipes and sludge inlets are so arranged to easily drain and have a minimum of 200 mm
diameter terminating at least 30 cm above the sand surface. Splash plates should be provided at
discharge points to spread the sludge uniformly over the bed and to prevent erosion of the sand.
6.6.3.7 Cover
Sludge drying bed in high rainfall areas in the country needs cover with FRP etc., in accordance with
requirement.
6.6.3.8 Drainage
Drainage from beds should be returned to the primary settling units if it cannot be satisfactorily
disposed of otherwise.
6.6.4 Sludge Removal
6.6.4.1 Preparation of Bed
Sludge drying beds should be prepared well in advance of the time of application of a fresh batch
of sludge. All dewatered sludge, which has formed a cake, should be removed by rakes and shovels
or scrapers, care being taken not to pick up sand with the sludge.
After the complete removal of sludge cake, the surface of the bed is cleaned, weeds and vegetation
removed, the sand levelled and finally the surface properly raked before adding the sludge. The
raking reduces the compaction of the sand and improves the filterability of the bed.
Only properly digested sludge should be applied to the drying beds.
Poorly digested sludge will take a much longer time for dewatering. Sludge containing oils, grease
and floating matter clog the sand and interfere with percolation.
Sludge samples from the digester should be examined for the physical and chemical characteristics
to ensure that it is ready for withdrawal.
6 - 57
6.6.4.2 Withdrawal of Sludge
Sludge should be withdrawn from the digester at a sufficiently high rate to clear the pipeline.
Rodding and back-flushing of the inlet pipe may sometimes become necessary to make the
material flow easily. Valves must be opened fully to start with and later adjusted to maintain
regular flow. The flow may be regulated to keep the pipe inlet from being submerged. Naked
flames should be prohibited while opening sludge valves and exposed discharge channels.
6.6.4.3 Removal of Sludge Cake
Dried sludge cake can be removed by shovel or forks when the moisture content is less than 70 %.
When the moisture content reaches 40 % the cake becomes lighter and suitable for grinding. Some
sand always clings to the bottom of the sludge cake and results in loss of sand thus reducing the
depth of the bed. When the depth of the bed is reduced to 10 cm, clean coarse sand that matches the
original sand already in the bed should be used for replenishment to the original depth of the bed.
6.6.4.4 Hauling and Storage of Sludge Cakes
Wheel barrows or pickup trucks are used for hauling of sludge cakes. In large plants mechanical
loaders and conveyors may be required to handle large quantities of dried sludge. Sludge removed
from the bed may be disposal of directly or stored to make it friable, thereby improving its suitability
for application to soil.
6.7 SLUDGE DEWATERING
6.7.1 General
Most of the digested primary or mixed sludge can be compacted to a water content of about
90% in the digester itself by gravity, but mechanical dewatering with or without coagulant aids or
prolonged drying on open sludge drying beds (SDB) may be required to reduce the water content
further. The dewatering of digested sludge is usually accomplished on SDB, which can
reduce the moisture content to below 70% or by mechanical equipment. However, excess oil
or grease in the sludge will interfere with the process. Where the required space for SDB is not
available, sludge conditioning, followed by mechanical dewatering in vacuum filters, filter presses
or centrifugation followed by heat drying or incineration can be adopted. In most parts of the
country, the climate is favourable for open SDB, which is economical and easy to manage.
Dewatering methods include filtration and mechanical separation. Filtration may be performed
by pressure filtration or filtration by belt press filter, pressure filter, vacuum filter, screw press
dewatering equipment and multi disc dehydrator. Of these, the dewatering performance and
operability and maintainability (especially increase in dewatered sludge) of pressure filter and
vacuum filter are inferior compared to those of other systems; therefore, instances of using these
together have reduced, and in recent years, there are practically no instances of adoption of new
pressure and vacuum filters.
In recent years, modifications have been made to screw press dewatering equipment, and these are
being used in small-scale facilities.
6 - 58
6.7.2 Features
Vacuum filtration is the most common mechanical method of dewatering, with filter presses and
centrifugation being the other methods. Chemical conditioning is normally required prior to
mechanical methods of dewatering. Mechanical methods may be used to dewater raw or digested
sludge preparatory to heat treatment or before burial or landfill. Raw sludge is more amenable to
dewatering by vacuum filtration because the coarse solids are rendered fine during digestion.
Hence, filtration of raw primary mixture of primary and secondary sludge permits slightly better
yields, lower chemical requirement and lower cake moisture contents than filtration of
digested sludge. When the ratio of secondary to primary sludge increases, it becomes more and
more difficult to dewater in the filter. The feed solids concentration has a great influence, the optimum
being 8 % to 10%. Beyond 10% sludge becomes too difficult to pump and lower solids
concentration would demand unduly large filter surface. In this method, conditioned sludge is spread
out in a thin layer in the filtering medium, the water portion being separated due to the vacuum
and the moisture content is reduced quickly.
6.7.3 Dewatering Principle
Belt press filter comprises two mechanisms; filtering and dewatering by compression. The gravity
dewatering part in a belt press filter corresponds to the filter, while the compression part corresponds
to dewatering by compressing the sludge. The centrifugal dewatering machine performs dewatering
by solid-liquid separation by centrifugal force.
The filtration rate can be expressed by the flow rate of the filtrate. The filtration rate per unit filter area
can be expressed by pressure and filtration area.
Dewatering by compression between rolls consists of compressing air gaps in the dewatered sludge
and squeezing out the pore water.
The centrifugal separation characteristics vary according to the diameter of particles in sludge,
density and mixing action. Centrifugal dewatering machines may be classified according to the
solids separating function and the dewatering function that reduces the water content of solids that
are settled and separated.
6.7.4 Sludge Conditioning
Thickened sludge and digested sludge includes large amount of organic matter with high affinity to
water; moreover, the sludge has particles of various sizes and shapes, so the sludge is difficult to
compress and dewatering the sludge as-is, is difficult.
To improve dewatering of the sludge, the quality of sludge should be improved physically and
chemically before dewatering it and sludge should be conditioned with the aim of stabilizing its
properties and coagulating it. In recent years, treatment plants have been adopting the so-called
separation and thickening method in which, the primary sludge is thickened by gravity with
mechanical thickening method used for excess sludge.
6 - 59
This method is being increasingly used because of the difficulty in thickening sludge generated
from treatment systems. In such cases also, sludge conditioning is necessary for stabilizing sludge
properties by uniformly mixing two kinds of sludge with varying properties. Sludge conditioning
includes mixing of sludge, elutriation of sludge and adding of coagulant. Sludge mixing refers to the
quantitative mixing of two or more kinds of sludge with varying properties based on the generated
solids volume ratio to achieve consistency.
For elutriation of sludge, the digested sludge is elutriated with secondary treated water and the
alkalinity of sludge is reduced so that the usage of coagulants can be reduced. It is often
omitted when organic coagulants are used in the dewatering process. Chemical addition combines
fine particles in sludge and makes solid-liquid separation easy, generates floc, and improves
dewatering of sludge. Coagulants used may be organic or inorganic.
Coagulants are determined by the kind of dewatering machine used. That is, inorganic
coagulants are used in vacuum filters and pressure filters, while organic coagulants are used in
belt press filters, centrifugal dewatering machines and screw press dewatering machines. In
recent years, belt press filters and centrifugal dewatering machines are mostly adopted and organic
coagulants are widely used.
Prior conditioning of sludge before application of dewatering methods renders it more amenable to
dewatering. Chemical conditioning and heat treatment are the two processes normally employed.
6.7.4.1 Chemical Conditioning
Chemical conditioning is the process of adding certain chemicals to enable coalescence of sludge
particles facilitating easy extraction of moisture. The chemicals used are ferric and aluminium salts
and lime, the more common being ferric chloride with or without lime. Digested sludge, because of
its high alkalinity exerts a huge chemical demand and therefore, the alkalinity has to be reduced to
effect a saving on the chemicals. This can be accomplished by elutriation.
Polyelectrolyte is useful for sludge with finely dispersed solids. The choice of chemical depends on
pH, ash content of sludge, temperature and other factors. Optimum pH values and chemical dosage
for different kinds of sludge has to be based on standard laboratory tests.
The dosage of ferric chloride and alum for elutriated digested sludge is 1.0 kg/m 3 of sludge.
Alum when vigorously mixed with the sludge reacts with the carbonate salts and release CO2, which
causes the sludge to separate and water drains out more easily. Hence, for effective results, alum
must be mixed quickly and thoroughly. The alum floc, however, is very fragile and its usefulness has
to be evaluated vis-a-vis ferric chloride before resorting to its application.
Feeding devices are necessary for applying chemicals. Mixing of chemicals with sludge should be gentle,
but thorough, taking not more than 20 to 30 seconds. Mixing tanks are generally of the vertical type for
the small plants and of the horizontal type for large plants. They are provided with mechanical agitators
rotated at 2 0 rpm to 80 rpm.
6 - 60
6.7.4.2 Use of Polyelectrolytes
In the use of mechanical dewatering of digested sludge, equipment such as filter press and
centrifuge are relatively popular in usage. The performance of these would however be enhanced if
the feed sludge is conditioned by use of polyelectrolyte. It is difficult to specify any formula suitable
for a polyelectrolyte. Even though there are quite a few such polyelectrolytes in the market, it is best
to carry out an actual laboratory scale testing before launching into the procurement. In general,
polyelectrolytes are available in both powder form and viscous liquid form. In essence both are same
as far as usage is concerned, because the powder immediately on being added to water will also
become viscous. Usually the dosage needed is expressed as kg of polyelectrolyte needed for ton of
dry solids in the sludge to be conditioned for subsequent mechanical dewatering.
The solution for dosing is mostly a 0.1% solution and is injected into the feed line to dewatering
equipment with adequate length and velocity ahead of the dewatering equipment. The type of
pump which can be generally suitable is the diaphragm pump powered by a reciprocating shaft of a
push-pull motion, which injects the calculated dosages as intermittent jets. Peristaltic pump sets are
also used sometimes when the viscosity of the feed sludge solution is not very high. In all cases,
actual on-site treatability evaluation is called for in respect of choice of polyelectrolytes.
6.7.4.3 Elutriation
The purpose of elutriation of sludge is to reduce the coagulant demand exerted by the alkalinity of the
digested sludge, by dilution with water of lower alkalinity followed by sedimentation and decantation.
Some end products of digestion such as ammonium bicarbonate, which exert increased demand of
chemicals in conditioning, are removed in the process.
There are three methods of elutriation: single stage, multi-stage and counter-current washing, the
water requirement being dependent upon the method used. For a given alkalinity reduction, single
stage elutriation requires 2.5 times as much water as the two stage and 5 times as much water as
counter-current washing. Hence, single stage washing is used only in small plants.
Counter-current washing, although higher in initial cost, is adopted in all large plants. Water
requirement also depends on alkalinity of dilution water, alkalinity of sludge and desired alkalinity of
elutriated sludge. Sludge and water are mixed in a chamber with mechanical mixing arrangement,
the detention period being about 20 seconds. The sludge is then settled in settling tanks and
excess water decanted. A maximum surface loading on settling tank of about 40m3/m 3/day and a
detention period of about 4 hours are adopted.
Counter-current elutriation is generally carried out in twin tanks similar to sedimentation

tanks, in which sludge and wash water enter at opposite ends. Piping and channels are so
arranged that wash water entering the second stage tank comes first in contact with sludge already
washed in the first stage tank. The volume of wash water required is roughly 2 to 3 times the
volume of sludge elutriated.
The dosage of chemicals detention period and flow of conditioned sludge to mechanical
dewatering units are automatically controlled by float switches, so that these variables are adjusted
on the basis of performance and the quality of sludge cake coming out.
6 - 61
6.7.4.4 Heat Treatment
In this process, sludge is heated for short periods of time under pressure. Sludge is preheated in a
heat exchanger before it enters a reactor vessel where steam is injected to bring the temperature
to 145C to 200C at a pressure of 10 to 15kg/cm2. After a 30-minute contact time, the sludge is
discharged through the heat exchanger to a sludge separation tank. The sludge can be filtered
3
through a vacuum filter to a solid content of 40% to 50% with filter yields of 100 kg/m /hr.
6.7.5 Screw Press
There are presently two major types of screw presses used in municipal dewatering applications:
horizontal and inclined. Inclined screw presses are at angles 15 to 20 degrees from the horizontal. Other
areas of difference pertain to sludge inlet configuration, screen basket design (wedge wire), basket
cleaning from the inside and outside (brushes and rotating wash system) and filtrate water collection.
The major elements of a screw press dewatering system are the sludge feed pump, polymer
makeup and feed system, polymer injection and mixing device (injection ring and mixing valve),
flocculation vessel with mixer, sludge inlet headbox or pipe, screw driver mechanism, shafted screw
enclosed within a screen, a rectangular or circular cross-section enclosure compartment, and an
outlet for dewatered cake. Some horizontal screw press systems (e.g., the combined dewatering
and pasteurization process) include a rotary screen thickener before the screw press, which may be
desirable for reducing the hydraulic load to the screw press given certain feed sludge characteristics
in conventional applications.
A screw press is a simple, slow moving device that achieves continuous dewatering. Polymer is
combined with sludge in flocculation vessels upstream of the screw press to enhance the sludges
dewatering characteristics. Screw press dewater sludge first by gravity drainage at the inlet
section of the screw and then by squeezing free water out of the sludge as they are conveyed to the
discharge end of the screw under gradually increasing pressure and friction. The increased pressure
to compress the sludge is generated by progressively reducing the available cross-sectional area
for the sludge. The released water is allowed to escape through perforated screens surrounding
the screw, while the sludge is retained inside the press. The liquid forced out through the screens
is collected and conveyed from the press and the dewatered sludge is dropped through the screws
discharge outlet at the end of the press. The screw speed, configuration, screen size and orientation
can be tailored for each application. The machine is shown in Figure 6.15 overleaf.
Advantages
1) Low rotational speed results in low maintenance and noise.
2) Low operating energy consumption
3) Containment of odours and aerosol, low building corrosion potential
4) Simple operation with low operator attention
5) Wash water demand and pressure requirements lower than belt presses.
6 - 62
Source: ISHIGAKI COMPANY, LTD

Figure 6.15 Screw press dewatering machine
Disadvantages
1) Cake concentration may be relatively low when there are no primary clarifiers.
2) Larger footprint
3) Only few manufacturers are available and equipment cannot be specified "as-equal. It must
be sole-sourced or pre-purchased.
4) Requires wash water
5) Lower solids capture than other dewatering processes in some cases.
6.7.6 Rotary Press
Rotary press dewatering technology relies on gravity, friction, and pressure differential to dewater
sludge. Sludge is dosed with polymer and fed into a channel bound by screens on each side. The
channel curves with the circumference of the unit, making a 180 turn from inlet to outlet. Free water
passes through the screens, which move in continuous, slow, concentric motion. The motion of the
screens creates a "gripping effect toward the end of the channel, where cake accumulates against
the outlet gate, and the motion of the screens squeezes out more water. The cake is continuously
released in pressure-controlled outlet.
The major elements of a rotary press are the polymer feed and mixing system, parallel filtering
screens, a circular channel between the screens, the rotation shaft and a pressure-controlled outlet.
The screens consist of two layers of perforated stainless steel, with each layer having different sieve
size. The rotary press drive configuration allows up to six rotary press channels to be operated on a
single drive. Each channel has bearings and the combined unit has an outboard bearing
cantilevered on one end. The rotary press dewatering machine is shown in Figure 6.16 overleaf.
6 - 63
Source: Sanki Engineering Co., Ltd.
Figure 6.16 Rotary press dewatering machine (1,200^, 4 channels)
Advantages
1) Uses less energy than centrifuges or belt filter presses
2) Small footprint
3) Odours contained
4) Low shear
5) Minimal moving parts
6) Minimal building requirements
7) Minimal start-up and shutdown time
8) Uses less wash water than belt filter presses
9) Low vibration, low noise
10) Modular design
Disadvantages
1) May be more dependent on polymer performance than centrifuges or belt filter presses
2) Low throughput compared to other mechanical dewatering processes

3) Screen clogging potential
4) Need for heavy rated overhead crane to lift and maintain channels
5) High capital cost
6 - 64
6.7.7 Belt Press
Belt filter presses continuously dewater sludge using two or three moving belts and a series of
rollers. The filter belt separates water from sludge via gravity drainage and compression. Sludge
sandwiched between two tensioned porous belts is passed over and under rollers of various
diameters. Increased pressure is created as the belt passes over rollers which decrease in
diameter. Many designs of belt filtration processes are available, but all incorporate the following
basic features: polymer conditioning zone, gravity drainage zones, low pressure squeezing zone and
high pressure squeezing zones.
Each belt press manufacturer produces machines with slightly different mechanical features and
operating characteristics. Presses are available in widths ranging from about 0.5 m to 3.5 m. Most
belt filter press in municipal STP use belts of 1 m to 2 m width. The main components of a belt filter
press include feed equipment and piping frame, belts, belt-tracking and tensioning systems, belt
wash system, rollers and bearings, cake-discharge blades, chutes, cake conveyance, drive system,
belt-speed control and chemical conditioning and flocculation as in Figure 6.17.
Figure 6.17 Belt press dewatering machine
Personnel safety must be fully considered and incorporated into the design. The design must
provide for and facilitate maintenance, provide safety stops, for instance with ultraviolet sensor and
trip wires around the belt press and any cake conveyors, convenient and safe equipment access,
drainage and spill containment, non-slip walkways and floors, sufficient lighting, noise reduction,
ventilation and odour control. System interlocks should be provided to stop the solids and polymer
feed pumps when the press is shut down.
Advantages
1) Staffing requirements are low, especially if the equipment processes the solids in one shift
6 - 65
2) Maintenance is relatively simple and can usually be completed by a sewage treatment plant
maintenance crew.
3) Energy requirements are relatively low compared to some other types of dewatering equipment
4) Belt presses can be started and shut down quickly compared to centrifuges, which require up to
an hour to build up speed
5) There is less noise associated with belt presses compared to centrifuges
Disadvantages
1) Because of the open nature of a belt press, there is a significant potential for odours and sprays.
Workers in the belt press areas can be exposed to aerosols from the belt-wash spray nozzles, as
well as pathogens and hazardous gases (e.g., hydrogen sulphide).
2) Belt presses require more operator attention if the feed sludge varies in the solids
concentration or organic matter. This should not be a problem if the belt presses are fed from
well-mixed digesters.
3) Sludge with higher concentrations of oil and grease can result in blinding the belt filter and lower
solids content cake.
4) Sludge must be screened and/or ground to minimize the risk of sharp objects
damaging the belt.
5) Belt washing at the end of each shift, or more frequently, can be time consuming and
require large amounts of water. An automatic belt washing system and the use of effluent can
minimize these costs.
6 ) Replacing the belt is the major maintenance cost
6.7.8 Filter Press
Pressure filtration uses a positive pressure differential to separate suspended solids from liquid
slurry. Recessed-chamber filter presses are operated as a batch process. Solids pumped to the filter
press under pressure ranging from 100 to 300 psi force the liquid through a filter medium, leaving
a concentrated solids cake trapped between the filter cloths that cover the recessed plates. The
filtrate drains into internal conduits and collects at the end of the press for discharge. Then the plates
separate and the cake falls into a conveyor to the collection truck. Two types of filter presses typically
are used to dewater sludge.
The most common is the fixed-volume, recessed-chamber filter press. The other is the variable
volume, recessed-chamber filter press (also called the diaphragm filter press).
The main mechanical components of filter press include the structural frame, filter press plates,
diaphragms,filter cloths and plate sifters. Various options are available for each component.
6 - 66
Advantages
1) The main advantage of a pressure filter press system is that it typically produces cakes that are
drier than those produced by other dewatering equipments.
2) If the cake solids content are more than 35%, then filter presses can be a cost-effective
dewatering option.
3) Filter press can adapt to a wide range of sludge characteristics.
4) Filter press produce a high-quality filtrate that lowers recycle stream treatment requirements.
5) Pressure filter press are cost-effective when the dewatered cake are incinerated.
Disadvantages
1) The main disadvantages of filter press are their high capital cost, relatively high O&M costs and
substantial quantities of treatment chemicals.
2) The periodic adherence of cake to the filter medium must be manually removed. This problem
may indicate the need to wash the filter media or increase conditioner dosages.
3) It requires significant amounts of energy to pressurize the units. Typical energy requirements
are in order of 0.04 to 0.07 kWh per kilogram of dry sludge processed.
6.7.9 Centrifugal Dewatering Machine
The process of high speed centrifuging has been found useful to reduce the moisture in sludge to
around 60 %. Usually the liquor from the centrifuge has higher solids content than filtrate from sand
drying beds. Return of this liquor to the treatment plant may result in a larger recalculated load of
these fine solids to the primary settling and sludge system and also in reduced effluent quality.
Advantages
1) Centrifuge may offer lower overall operation and maintenance costs and can outperform
conventional belt filter presses.
2) Centrifuge require a small amount of floor space relative to their capacity.
3) Centrifuge require minimal operator attention when operations are stable.
4) Low exposure to pathogens, aerosols, hydrogen sulphide or other odours.
5) Centrifuge are easy to clean.
6 ) Centrifuge can handle higher than design loadings and the percent solids recovery can usually
be maintained with the addition of a higher polymer dosage.
7) Major maintenance items can be easily removed and replaced. Repair work is usually performed
by the manufacturer.
6 - 67
Disadvantages
1) Centrifuge have high power consumption and are fairly noisy.
2) Experience of operating the equipment is required to optimize performance.
3) Performance is difficult to monitor because the operators view of centrate and feed is obstructed.
4) Special structural considerations must be taken into account. As with any piece of high speed
rotary equipment, the base must be stationary and level due to dynamic loading.
5) Spare parts are expensive and internal parts are subject to abrasive wear.
6 ) Start-up and shut-down may take an hour to gradually bring the centrifuge up to speed and slow
it down for clean out prior to shut-down.
6.7.10 Vacuum Filter
The vacuum filter consists of a cylindrical drum over which a filtering medium of wool, cloth or felt,
synthetic fibre or plastic, or stainless steel mesh or coil springs is fixed. The drum is suspended
horizontally so that one quarter of its diameter is submerged in a tank containing sludge.
Valves and piping are arranged to apply a vacuum on the inner side of the filter medium as the drum
rotates slowly in the sludge. The vacuum holds the sludge against the drum as it continues to be
applied as the drum rotates out of the sludge tank. This pulls water away from the sludge leaving a
moist cake mat on the outer surface.
The sludge cake on the filter medium is scraped from the drum, just before it enters the sludge tank
again. Vacuum pumps, moisture traps, filtrate pumps, filtrate receivers, conveyors and pipes and
valves are necessary adjuncts to the filter.
Operating costs of vacuum filters are usually higher than for sludge drying beds. However, they
require less area since dewatering is rapid. The operation is independent of weather conditions
and it can be used for dewatering raw or partially digested sludge requiring drying or incineration.
The capacity of the filter varies with the type of sludge being filtered and in calculating the size of filter
the desired moisture content of the filter cake is a factor.
If wet cake is acceptable, higher filtration rates and lower coagulant dosage can be used.
The filtration rate is expressed in kg of dry solids per square meter of medium per hour. It varies from
10 kg/m2/hr for activated sludge alone to 50 kg/m2/hr for primary sludge.
2
A design rate of 15 kg/m /hr is a conservative figure that can be used when the quality of the sludge
and the type of the filter to be used are not known.
Filter drums are rotated at a speed of 7 rpm to 40 rpm with a vacuum range of 500 mm to
650 mm of mercury. The filter run does not exceed 30 hours per week in small plants to allow
time for conditioning, clean up and delays. At larger plants, it may work for 20 hours a day.
The moisture of the filtered cake varies normally from 80% in case of raw activated sludge to
70% for digested primary sludge.
6 - 68
Filters should be operated to produce a cake of 60% to 70% moisture if it is to be heated, dried or
incinerated. At the end of each filter run, the filter fabric is cleaned to remove sticking sludge.
A high pressure stream of water is used to clean the filter cloth. The filters are usually located in a
separate room or building with adequate light and ventilation.
Advantages
1) Operation is easy to understand because formation and discharge of sludge cake

are easily visible.
2) Does not require highly-skilled operator
3) Will continue to operate even if the chemical conditioning dosage is not optimized, although this
may cause discharge problems
4) Has low maintenance requirement for a continuously operating piece of equipment, except in
certain cases with lime conditioning
Disadvantages
1) Consumes a large amount of energy per unit of sludge dewatered
2) Vacuum pumps are noisy.
3) Lime and Ferric chloride conditioning can cause considerable maintenance cleaning problems.
4) The use of lime for conditioning can produce strong ammonia odours with digested sludge.
5) Best performance is usually achieved at feed solids of 3 to 4%. However, some well-conditioned
sludge are filtered successfully at concentrations of <2%.
6) Ferric chloride and lime conditioning costs are higher than polymer conditioning costs. Polymer
conditioning is not always effective on vacuum filters.
6.7.11 Comparison of Dewatering Systems
The advantages and disadvantages of dewatering systems are compared in Table 6.13 overleaf.
6.8 SLUDGE DISINFECTION
6.8.1 Heat Drying
The purpose of heat drying is to reduce the moisture content and volume of dewatered sludge, so
that it can be used after drying without causing offensive odours or risk to public health.
Several methods such as sludge drying under controlled heat, flash drying, rotary kiln, multiple hearth
furnaces, etc., have been used in combination with incineration devices. Drying is brought about by
directing a stream of heated air or other gases at about 350C.
6 - 69
Table 6.13 C om parison of advantages and disadvantages o f dew atering system s
Advantages Disadvantages
1 )Low rotational speed results in low m aintenance and noise. 1) Cake concentration may be relatively low for prim ary sludges.
Cf)
C/5 2) Low operating energy consum ption 2) Larger footprint
0
Q. 3)C ontainm ent o f odours and aerosol, 3) Few indigenous m anufacturers available as of this tim e
5 4 )L o w building corrosion potential 4) Requires wash w ater
i0_
CJ 5 )S im ple operation with low operator attention 5) Low er solids capture than other processes in som e cases.
C/D
6 ) Low er wash w ater and pressure than belt presses. 6 ) More dependency on supplier for repairs
w 1 ) Uses less energy than centrifuges or belt filte r presses 1) More dependent on polym ers than centrifuges / belt filte r presses
C/5
2)S m all footprint, m inim um building size, O dours contained, 2) Low throughput than other m echanical dewatering processes
n
LL-
L. 3)M inim al moving parts, less vibration 3) Screen clogging potential
03*
-t 4)M inim al start-up and shutdown time 4) Heavy rated overhead crane to lift and maintain channels
V'
cn 5 )Uses less wash w ater than belt filte r presses 5) H igher building requirem ents in structurals
1 )Staffing requirem ents are less. 1) A significant potential for odours and sprays
&
c/)
2) M aintenance is relatively sim ple. Belt change is the m ajor cost. 2) More operator attention when feed sludge contents varies
j
CD
3) Energy is relatively low than som e other dew atering equipm ent. 3) High oil & grease causes blinding the belt and lesser cake solids
11
n
4) Can be started and shut down quickly com pared to centrifuges. 4) Sludge to be screened / ground as sharp objects dam age to belt
w
CQ 5) Less noise com pared to centrifuges. 5) Belt washing tim e consum ing and requires more wash water.
6) The rotary speed is lesser as com pared to centrifuges. 6 ) R oller alignm ents requires skilled setting in repairs
6-70
Advantages Disadvantages
1)Low rotational speed results in low maintenance and noise. 1) Cake concentration may be relatively low for prim ary sludges.
Cf)
C/5 2 ) Low operating energy consumption 2) Larger footprint
0
Q. 3)C ontainm ent o f odours and aerosol, 3) Few indigenous manufacturers available as of this time
5 4 )L o w building corrosion potential 4) Requires wash w ater
i0_
o 5)S im ple operation with low operator attention 5) Low er solids capture than other processes in some cases.
CO
6 )Low er wash w ater and pressure than belt presses. 6) More dependency on supplier for repairs
(I) 1 ) Uses less energy than centrifuges or belt filter presses 1) More dependent on polym ers than centrifuges / belt filter presses
(/)
2 2)S m all footprint, minimum building size, O dours contained, 2) Low throughput than other mechanical dewatering processes
LL-
n
L. 3)M inim al moving parts, less vibration 3) Screen clogging potential
03*
-t 4)M inim al start-up and shutdown time 4) Heavy rated overhead crane to lift and maintain channels
V'
5 )Uses less wash w ater than belt filte r presses 5) Higher building requirem ents in structurals
1)Staffing requirem ents are less. 1) A significant potential for odours and sprays
(/)
cn
2) Maintenance is relatively simple. Belt change is the m ajor cost. 2) More operator attention when feed sludge contents varies
CD
j 3) Energy is relatively low than some other dewatering equipment. 3) High oil & grease causes blinding the belt and lesser cake solids
11
n
4 )Can be started and shut down quickly com pared to centrifuges. 4) Sludge to be screened / ground as sharp objects dam age to belt
U/
CQ 5) Less noise com pared to centrifuges. 5) Belt washing tim e consum ing and requires more wash water.
6) The rotary speed is lesser as compared to centrifuges. 6) Roller alignm ents requires skilled setting in repairs
6 - 71
The hot gases, dust and ash released during combustion are to be removed by suitable control
mechanisms to minimize air pollution. The dried sludge removed from the kilns is granular and
clinker-like, which may be pulverized before use as soil conditioner.
6.8.2 Incineration
The purpose of incineration is to destroy the organic material, the residual ash being generally
used as landfill. During the process all the gases released from the sludge are burnt off and all the
organisms are destroyed. Dewatered or digested sludge is subjected to temperatures between
650C to 750C. Cyclone or multiple hearth and flash type furnaces are used with proper heating
arrangements with temperature control and drying mechanisms. Dust, fly ash and soot are
collected for use as landfill.
It has the advantages of freedom from odours and a great reduction in volume and weight of
materials to be disposed of finally, but the process requires high capital and recurring costs,
installation of machinery and skilled operation. Controlled drying and partial incineration have also
been employed for dewatering of sludge, before being put on drying beds.
6.9 SLUDGE COMPOSTING
6.9.1 Outline
Sludge composting is a method, in which microorganisms decompose the degradable organic matter
in sludge under the aerobic condition and create stable material that is easy to handle, store and use
for farmland. Sludge compost is humus-like material without detectable levels of pathogens that can
be applied as a soil conditioner and fertilizer to gardens, food and feed crops and farmland.
Sludge compost provides large quantities of organic matter and nutrients such as nitrogen and
potassium to the soil. It improves the soil texture, elevates soil cation exchange capacity (an
indication of the soils ability to hold nutrients), all characteristics of a good organic fertilizer. Sludge
compost is safe to use and generally has a high degree of acceptability by the public.
Sludge composting involve mixing dewatered sludge with a bulking agent to provide carbon and
increase porosity. The resulting mixture is piled or placed in a vessel where microbial activity
causes the temperature of the mixture to rise during the first phase active composting period. The
specific temperatures that must be achieved and maintained for successful composting vary based
on the method and use of the end product. After the first phase, active composting period of the
material is cured and in the second phase, it becomes compost and is distributed.
6.9.2 Types of Composting Methods
Sludge composting methods are divided into, aerated static pile, windrow and in-vessel.
a. Aerated static pile
Fig ure 6 .1 8 (o v e rle a f) sh o w s an a e ra te d s ta tic pile c o m p o stin g m ethod.
6 - 72
Part A : Engineering SLUDGE TREATMENT FACILITIES
Yard Trimmings,
Source-separated organics,
or Mixed M SW
Odor Filter Blower
Source:Hickman Jr., H.Lanier, 1999
Figure 6.18 Configuration of an aerated static pile composting method
Dewatered sludge cake is mechanically mixed with a bulking agent and stacked into long piles over
a bed of pipes, through which air is transferred to the composting material. After the first phase
composting i.e., active composting, as the pile is starting to cool down, the material is moved into
the second phase composting i.e., a curing pile. The bulking agent is often reused in this composting
method and may be screened before or after curing so that it can be reused.
b. Windrow
Dewatered sludge cake is mixed with bulking agent and piled in long rows because there is no
piping to supply air to the piles; they are mechanically turned to increase the amount of
oxygen. This periodic mixing is essential to move outer surfaces of material inward so they
are subjected to the higher temperatures deeper in the pile. A number of turning devices are
available. As with aerated static pile composting, the material is moved into the second phase
composting i.e., curing piles after the first phase composting, it is active composting. Several
rows may be placed into a larger pile for curing
c. In-Vessel
There are two types of In-Vessel composting reactor, a vertical type and a horizontal type.
Figure 6-19 (overleaf) shows an example of vertical type In-Vessel composting reactor.
A mixture of dewatered sludge cake and bulking agent is fed into a silo, tunnel, channel, or
vessel. Augers, conveyors, rams, or other devices are used to aerate, mix and move the product
through the vessel to the discharge point. Air is generally blown into the mixture. After the first phase
composting i.e., active composting, the finished product is usually stored in a pile for the second
phase composting i.e., curing prior to distribution.
6 - 73
TO OD
CONTF
INFEED
CONVEYOR
DISTRIBUTOR
AIRFLOW
'DIRECTION
DISCHARGE
SCREW S \
COMPOST TO 'AERATION PIPWG

DISCHARGE CONVEY OH
Source: USEPA, 1989
Figure 6.19 In-Vessel composting reactor - Taulman composting system
All the three composting methods require the use of bulking agents; wood chips, saw dust, and
shredded tires are commonly used, but many other materials are suitable.
6.9.3 Applicability
The physical characteristics of most sewage sludge allow for their successful composting. However,
many characteristics (including moisture content, volatile solids content, carbon content, nitrogen
content, and bulk density) will impact design decisions for the composting method. Both digested and
raw solids can be composted, but some degree of digestion (or similar stabilization) is desirable to
reduce the potential for generation of foul odours from the composting operation. This is particularly
important for aerated static pile and windrow operations.
Carbon and nitrogen content of the sewage sludge must be balanced against that of the
bulking agent to achieve a suitable carbon to nitrogen ratio of between 25 and 35 parts carbon
to one part nitrogen.
Site characteristics make composting more suitable for some sewage treatment plants than
others. An adequate buffer zone from neighbouring residents is desirable to reduce the potential for
nuisance complaints. In urban and suburban settings, in-vessel technology may be more suitable
than other composting technologies because the in-vessel method allows for containment and
treatment of air to remove odours before release.
The requirement for a relatively small amount of land also increases the applicability of in-vessel
composting in these settings.
6 - 74
6.9.4 Advantages and Disadvantages
The advantages and disadvantages of sludge composting are as follows:
a. Advantages
Sludge composting reduces landfill space of sludge by utilizing sewage compost as a soil
conditioner or fertilizer.
Sludge compost has market value and revenue is expected by selling it.
Sludge compost is easy to store, handle and use.
Addition of sludge compost to soil increases the soils phosphorus, potassium, nitrogen and
organic carbon content.
b. Disadvantages
Odour is produced at the composting site.
Pathogens possibly survive and exist in sludge compost.
Sludge compost lacks consistency in product quality with reference to metals, stability, and
maturity.
6.9.5 Design Considerations
The important matters related to design of sludge composting system are as follows:
Sewage sludge characteristics such as moisture content, volatile solids content, carbon content,
nitrogen content, and bulk density are to be considered when designing a composting system.
It is essential for sludge composting to maintain uniform aerobic conditions during composting.
Proper air supply procedures are required such as turning of piles or adequate aeration and
selection of proper bulking agent is also necessary.
Compaction of the composting mass should be avoided to maintain sufficient pore

space for aeration.
Bulking agent appropriate for sludge characteristics should be selected considering its
characteristics such as size, cost/availability, recoverability, carbon availability, pre-processing
requirements, porosity and moisture content.
Metal content of the sewage sludge should be considered in the design to ensure a market
for the final product.
An odour control system should be considered especially for an in-vessel composting system.
Composting detention time and temperature are determined considering the quality of product
compost. For an aerated static pile or an in-vessel system, it should be kept at 55C for at least
3 days and for windrow, 55C for at least 15 days with 5 turns.
6 - 75
6.9.6 Mixed Composting of Sewage Sludge and Municipal Solid Waste
Dewatered sludge could be mixed with grounded organic municipal solid waste and could be used
as a good soil conditioner (compost). However, this process needs proper policy guidelines, stringent
regulations, standards and above all community awareness. Figure 6.20 shows a flow chart example
of mixed composting of sewage and municipal solid waste.
Source: Ebara Engineering Service Co., Ltd. (there are many others also)
Figure 6.20 Mixed composting of sewage and municipal solid waste
6.10 SLUDGE DISPOSAL
6.10.1 Sludge Storage
6.10.1.1 General
Sludge storage facilities shall be provided at all mechanized STP. Appropriate storage facilities
may consist of any combination of drying beds, separate tanks, additional volume in sludge
stabilization units, pad areas or other means to store either liquid or dried sludge. The design
shall provide for odour control in sludge storage tanks and sludge storage yard, covering,
or other appropriate means.
6.10.1.2 Volume
Rational calculations justifying the number of days of storage to be provided shall be submitted and
shall be based on the total sludge handling and disposal system.
6 - 76
Refer to Section 6.4 and 6.5 for anaerobic and aerobic digested sludge production values. Sludge
production values for other stabilization processes should be justified on the basis of design. If the
land application method of sludge disposal is the only means of disposal utilized at a STP, storage
shall be provided based on considerations including at least the following items:
1) Inclement weather effects on access to the application land
2) Temperatures including frozen ground and stored sludge cake conditions
3) Haul road restrictions including spring thawing conditions
4) Area wise seasonal rainfall patterns
5) Cropping practices on available land
6) Potential for increased sludge volumes from industrial sources
7) Available area for expanding sludge storage
8) Appropriate pathogen reduction and vector attraction reduction requirements.
A minimum range of 120 to 180 days storage should be provided for the design life of the plant
unless a different period is approved by the reviewing authority.
6.10.2 Disposal
Sludge is usually disposed of on land as manure to soil, or as a soil conditioner, or barged into
sea. Burial is generally resorted to for small quantities of putrid sludge. The most common method
is to utilize it as a fertilizer. Ash from incinerated sludge is used as a landfill. In some cases, wet
sludge, raw or digested, as well as supernatant from digester can be constructed as lagoons as
a temporary measure, but such practice may create problems like odour nuisance, groundwater
pollution and other public health hazards. Wet or digested sludge can be used as sanitary landfill
or for mechanized composting with city refuse. Disposal of sludge shall have to be as per the
hazardous waste (handling and management) rules of MoEF if Table 6.14 and faecal
coliform limits are violated.
6.10.2.1 Sludge as Soil Filler
The use of raw sludge as a soil filler directly on land for raising crops as a means of disposal is not
desirable since it is fraught with health hazards. Application of sewage sludge to soils should take
into consideration the following guiding principles:
1. Sludge from open air drying beds should not be used on soils where it is likely to come into direct
contact with the vegetables and fruits.
2) Sludge from drying beds should be ploughed into the soil before raising crops. Top dressing of
soil with sludge should be prohibited.
3) Dried sludge may be used for lawns and for growing deep rooted cash crops and fodder grass
where direct contact with edible part is minimized.
6 - 77
4) Heat dried sludge is the safest from public health point of view. Though deficient in humus, it is
convenient in handling and distribution. It should be used along with farmyard manure.
5) Liquid sludge either raw or digested is unsafe to use. It is unsatisfactory as fertilizer or soil
conditions. If used, it must be thoroughly incorporated into the soil and land should be given rest,
so that biological transformation of organic material takes place. It should be used in such a way
as to avoid all possible direct human contact.
6.10.2.1.1 Heavy metal and Faecal coliform ceiling concentration in treated sewage sludge
The ceiling concentration of the heavy metals in the treated sewage sludge should not exceed the
values mentioned in Table 6.14.
Table 6.14 Ceiling concentration of heavy metals in treated sewage sludge for use in agriculture
Ceiling Ceiling
No. Chemical No. Chemical
concentration (A) concentration (A)
1 Arsenic 75 6 Chromium 500(total)
2 Cadmium 85 7 Selenium 100
3 Copper 4300 8 Zinc 7500
4 Mercury 57 9 Molybdenum 75
5 Nickel 420 10 Lead 840
(A)-Expressed as mg/kg on dry weight basis
If the concentrations in the treated sewage sludge exceed the values as in Table 6.14 land
application shall not be permitted and the sludge shall have to be disposed or contained as
per the hazardous waste (handling and management) rules of MoEF. In addition to the above heavy
metal limits, the faecal coliform limit for sewage sludge shall be as under.
At least seven sewage sludge samples should be collected at the time of use or disposed and
analyzed for faecal coliforms during each monitoring period. The geometric mean of the densities of
these samples will be calculated and should meet the following criteria.
Less than 20,00,000 most probable number per gram of total dry solids (20,00,000 MPN / gTS)
Or
Less than 20,00,000 colony forming units per gram of total dry solids (20,00,000 CFU / gTS)
In general, digested sludge is indelicate, but definite value as a source of slowly available nitrogen
and some phosphate.
It is comparable to farmyard manure except for its deficiency in potash.
It also contains essential elements to plant life and minor nutrients, in the form of trace metals.
6 - 78
The sludge humus also increases the water holding capacity of the soil and reduces soil erosion
making it an excellent soil conditioner especially in arid regions by making available needed humus
content which results in greater fertility.
6.10.2.2 Sludge Storage Yard
Dewatered cake typically is stored before additional treatment (e.g., heat drying) or being hauled
off-site for use or disposal. Most flammable liquids would have been removed during dewatering
and methane-generating microorganisms do not thrive in dry aerobic environments.
The amount of storage needed depends on the end use of the sludge cake. Often, biosolids will
only be held for a few days or weeks before being treated further or hauled off-site. In this case,
they are typically stored in large roll-off containers, 18 wheel dump trailers, concrete bunkers
with push walls, or bins with augurs. However, if the biosolids will be applied on land or surface
disposed, long-term storage may be required. In these cases, they often are stockpiled on concrete
slabs or other impervious pads. When designing long-term storage facilities, it is needed to consider
buffering, odour control, and accessibility. It is also needed to determine whether the storage facility
should be open or covered.
Dried solids typically are stored either on-site or at a land-application site before disposal
or beneficial use. They may be stored in stockpiles or silos. Because dried solids contain a
significant amount of combustible organic material that can be released as dust, temperature
control is important. If silos are used, it should be designed to promote cooling and maximize heat
dissipation. Therefore, tall, narrow silos are better than wide ones. Narrow silos also make fires
easier to control. However, if the silo is too narrow, it will make relief venting problematic. If
multiple silos are used, there should be procedures to ensure that they are emptied cyclically to
avoid exceeding safe residence times. Also, it is needed to consider the stored products thermal
stability in case a prolonged plant shutdown or if silo blockage occurs.
6.10.2.3 Sanitary Land Fill
When organic solids are placed in a landfill, decomposition may result in odour if sufficient cover
is not available. Besides surface water contamination and leaching of sludge components to the
groundwater must be considered. Decomposition may result in soil settlement resulting in surface
water pond above the fill. Typical depths of soil cover over the fill area are 0.2m after each daily
deposit and 0 .6 m over an area that has been filled completely.
Surface topography should be finished to allow rainfall to drain away and not allow it to infiltrate
into the solid landfill. Land fill leachate requires long term monitoring and should satisfy the relavent
water pollution control standards for land applications. Vegetation must be established quickly on
completed areas to provide for erosion control. It is general practice not to crop the landfill area for a
number of years after completion.
Land fills are not usually recommended for disposal of STP sludge. In case they are adopted, the
above points should be considered.
6 - 79
6.10.2.4 Disposal in Water or Sea
This is not a common method of disposal because it is contingent on the availability of a large body of
water adequate to permit dilution at some sea coast sites. The sludge, either raw or digested, may be
barged to sea far enough to make available the required dilution and dispersion. The method requires
careful consideration of all factors including flora and fauna for proper design and siting of outfall to
prevent any coastal pollution or interference with navigation.
6.11 CORROSION PREVENTION AND CONTROL
6.11.1 Anaerobic Sludge Digesters
In sludge digestion tank, digestion of sludge is carried out under anaerobic conditions for a long
period. During the normal functioning of the digester, and more so, during faulty operations,
various acids are produced for a temporary period. The waste may contain appreciable quantity of
sulphates due to seepage of sea water in coastal regions or due to industrial wastes. Under anaerobic
conditions in digester the sulphate will be converted to hydrogen sulphide. The corrosion due to
hydrogen sulphide is in fact due to sulphuric acid formed in the presence of moisture. This will attack
the digester walls and also the mechanical equipment to such an extent that breakdown may occur
ultimately. Cement that is resistant against H2S, such as blast furnace slag cement, should be used
in the construction of digesters.
It is observed that the draft tubes inside the digester are sometimes provided of mild steel. This is
not a good practice, since the life of such metallic tubes in the highly corrosive interior will be very
limited. Hume or concrete pipes of thicker cross section are therefore, recommended for use as
draft tubes. Use of guy ropes inside the digesters should also be discouraged. Screw pumps are
provided in the digester for proper circulation of the tank contents. The blades of this screw pump
should be of corrosion resistant materials. In many installations the sludge gas is collected and
burnt or utilized for other purposes. If the gas contains H2S, this will be very corrosive under moist
conditions to the gas engines, gas meters and all the equipment and piping. It is therefore, necessary
to remove H2S by scrubbing in such cases.
6.11.2 Sludge Pumps
For pumps and pumping equipment, proper material selection is of paramount importance. The
pump casing is normally of close grained cast iron capable of resisting erosion on account of
abrasive material in the waste.
For handling corrosive sludge, the impeller is generally made of high grade phosphor bronze or
equivalent materials. The wearing rings for impeller should be of good corrosion resistant material
such as bronze. The shafts are normally made of high tensile steel and replaceable shaft sleeves are
recommended.
For pumps and pumping equipments, painting is the usual protective measure. Both the interior
and exterior surfaces of pumps should be painted after rust scale and deposits are removed by
sand blasting, wire brushing or rubbing with sand paper.
6 - 80
Part A : Engineering SLUDGE TREATMENT FACILITIES
6.11.3 Piping Requirements in Treatment Plants
Piping in STP would be required in sewage and sludge conduits, drains and water lines to chemical
process piping. Materials for various pipe line applications are mentioned in Table 5-27 of chapter 5
in Part A Manual.
6.11.4 Modification of Materials
Normally, the materials that are most suitable under the circumstances likely to be encountered
should be used to be commensurate with economy. If justified economically, corrosion resistant
construction material can be used initially. This may not require any additional protective coating
frequently. Stainless steel, aluminium and plastics are examples of materials of this nature. It is
possible that the use of such corrosion-resistant materials would be cost-effective in the long run.
However, in STP, it is found that it is usually less expensive to use ordinary structural steel to which
protective coatings are applied.
6.12 UPGRADING AND RETROFITTING OF SLUDGE FACILITIES
Over a passage of time, systems need to be upgraded and retrofitted. Keeping this in view,
plants which have (a) SDB can implement mechanical dewatering methods, (b) gravity
thickening can implement mechanical thickening. The area occupied by the SDB are needed
for reconstruction and rehabilitation of sludge facilities and hence, in places of land shortage,
SDB can be demolished and mechanical dewatering be adopted in those areas. However,
as a matter of providing standby SDB for about 15 % requirement should be provided so that
they can be used in case of any accidental breakdown of mechanical sludge dewatering
equipment, but the width of the SDB shall be restricted to 3 m to enable its covering if
required during times such as monsoons, etc.
The reconstruction of the sludge treatment facility should take each of following into consideration.
1) Study of basic policy
When reconstructing a sludge treatment facility, after studying the basic policy synthetically from
the following viewpoint, it is necessary to determine details such as (a) Independent treatment or
intensive treatment, (b) Simple reconstruction or improvement in functional use (addition,
change, etc. of sludge treatment process), (c) Package of handling process, or reconstruction
in each process and series unit, (d) Treatment of return flow from sludge treatment facility, (e)
The future amount of sludge treatment, (f) The effective use (final disposal) method, (g) Energy
saving, (h) Degree of aging, (i) Earthquake-proof, (j) Degradation of function, (k) Ease with
maintenance and (l) Environment
2) Confirmation of space for reconstruction
In cases where space in the existing building and at site is adequate for the needs without
being able to remove existing facilities, it can be constructed in the space. In cases where there
is no space, removal and reconstruction is done for every series and process, or construction
in another land is considered.
6 - 81
3) Intensity confirmation of existing building
In cases where it uses existing building, after taking the load of apparatus into consideration,
intensity calculation of building is done. In cases where it extends [altering building and], seismic
capacity evaluation and earthquake-proof construction may be needed.
4) Reconstruction procedure
In the following case, reconstruction procedures differ.
a) Independent treatment or intensive treatment
b) The whole sludge treatment process reconstruction, or each process and series unit
During construction period, reduction of the amount of sludge treatment and taking out the
sludge to other facilities may be needed.
After considering the safety and economical efficiency, the reconstruction procedure is studied
so that construction period can be shortened as much as possible.
5) The necessity for temporary facilities
In cases where it cannot perform reduction of the amount of sludge treatment, and another
treatment, or in cases where safety, economical efficiency, and O & M are advantageous, sludge
treatment by temporary facilities is carried out.
The necessity for temporary facilities of each process is based on the following as reference.
a) Thickening
Is taking out of sludge possible by vacuum vehicle etc. to other facilities or not?
b) Digestion
Is taking out of sludge possible to other facilities or not?
c) Dewatering
In cases where reconstruction is in a small scale and for a short period of time, can mobile
dewatering system be used or not?
In addition, to installing temporary facilities, it needs careful adjustment of the amount of sludge
treatment, operation stop time at the time of change, installation period of adjustment of facilities, etc.
6.12.1 Energy Saving Measures
The following is related to energy-saving technologies in sludge treatment process.
According to reconstruction stage, energy-saving equipment is introduced intentionally, and also it is

desirable to save the energy of the whole system.
6 - 82
1) Thickening
a) Improvement in thickening performance

b) Improvement in solid recovery rate
c) Reduction of machine thickening power
2) Digestion tank
a) Management of injection sludge concentration to digestion tank

b) Temperature management of digestion tank
c Strengthening of keeping warm of digestion tank
d) Low motorization of stirrer of digestion tank
e) Strengthening of heat insulation to steam piping (warming facilities)
f) Automatic control of boiler for warming and automatic control of hot water heater
3) Dewatering
a) Management of supply sludge concentration

b) Reduction in moisture content of dehydration sludge
c) Control of series of dehydrator also including conveyance facilities
d) Reduction of mechanical dehydration power
6.13 BIOMETHANATION AND ENERGY RECOVERY (CARBON CREDIT)
6.13.1 General
Sewage sludge includes organic matter made of carbon, hydrogen, sulphur, and so on, and
is a potential energy source of high value. Energy utilization methods include the method of
recovering digester gas as energy and using it as heating fuel or in power generation, and the method of
using it as fuel after drying. The water content in sludge has a major effect on energy consumption and
energy recovery aspects with regard to utilization of sludge as energy. Therefore, water content
should be reduced as far as possible starting from the sludge thickening stage to the dewatering
and incineration stages. It is important to improve the overall energy utilization rate. Overall energy
utilization of sludge has just made a beginning. Henceforth, the energy self-sufficiency of STP will
need to be enhanced and stability in operation of STPs will need to be ensured over the long term.
Moreover, these energy uses need to be promoted so as to contribute to the protection of the global
environment. Utilization of digester gas, dried sludge and carbonized sludge is described hereafter.
6.13.2 Digester Gas Utilization
The utilization of digester gas from an operating STP at Nesapakkam in Chennai is presented in
Section 5.16.1.2, Table 5-28. Generally, digester gas is used as fuel in boilers for heating sludge
digestion tanks; surplus gas is incinerated in biogas combustion units and discharged to the
atmosphere. When surplus gas exists in large amounts, the energy possessed by the gas can be
effectively utilized and energy savings can be achieved in the entire system.
6 - 83
When considering the effective utilization of this unused energy, if there is a demand for heat for
direct use such as auxiliary fuel for incinerating sludge, fuel for boiler (for hot water supply, for
cooling and heating), a simple and highly efficient system is preferable. In recent years, power
generating equipments using heat engines including gas engines have been on the rise. Moreover,
there are practical instances of heat recovered from exhaust gas as well as cooling water in addition
to power generation from gas engines. However, as the system becomes complex, studies from the
viewpoint of construction cost and O & M are necessary. When digester gas obtained from anaerobic
fermentation of sewage sludge is to be used for power generation, siloxane included in minute
quantities in the digester gas sticks to the internal surface of cylinders and gas engine plugs
causing accidents due to misfiring and abnormal ignition; therefore, measures against siloxane need
to be adopted. Silicone, which is the source from which siloxane is generated, is included in major
proportion in shampoo and rinse, used in the bathroom.
For this reason, siloxane have often been found in sewage in recent years. Siloxane gets
volatilized at room temperature. If the temperature is higher, larger amount of siloxane gets volatilized.
A large amount of siloxane moves to the digester gas in the digestion tank during heating, and its
3
concentration becomes 10-100 mg/Nm approximately. Research on this feature has been carried
out in recent years. It has been verified that the major part of siloxane can be removed by activated
carbon adsorption and high pressure water absorption.
Other policies for effective energy utilization are fuel cells, microgas turbine power generation, and
automotive fuel gas applications, which have been practically realized. The features of fuel cell are
its high efficiency and no rotating parts. Thus, there is no noise, O & M are easy and exhaust is also
clean. Although it is necessary to study the effects of construction cost, life of fuel cells, sulphur
included in digester gas, effective utilization of digester gas may be anticipated in the
future. Figure 6.21 is an example of flow of power generated from digester gas (gas engine).
Figure 6.21 Example of flow of power generated from digester gas
It is important to study thoroughly the construction cost, quantity of digester gas generated outside
of O & M cost, quantity of gas required for heating digester tank, quantity of surplus gas, and the
temporal and seasonal variations of these and to confirm whether operation can be carried out at a
high operating rate and at high efficiency.
6 - 84
6.13.3 Utilization of Dried Sludge
The utilization of dried sludge is mentioned in Section 6.14.2.
6.14 RECENT TECHNOLOGIES IN SLUDGE TREATMENT
6.14.1 Necessity of Sludge Treatment
With the progress of sewerage systems in urban areas, the amount of sewage volume increases
and the amount of sludge generated during sewage treatment also increases naturally. Sewage
treatment necessarily generates sludge and the bottom line of sewage treatment is effective, stable
and lasting sludge treatment.
At present, in India, sludge is treated mainly by drying in sludge drying beds and dried sludge is
utilized as soil filler. However, the increase in sludge volume, progress in urbanization and rise in
the environmental awareness of people, etc., call for the adoption of new technologies such as
mechanical dewatering, incineration, melting, etc., which are technologies for treating sludge more
efficiently and reducing the sludge volume. The sludge volume is reduced gradually in each step of
sludge treatment process. The sludge volume reductions in case of each step are roughly estimated
as under in Figure 6.22.
C o n te n t
Figure 6.22 Sludge volume reduction of each step of sludge treatment process
On the other hand, sewage sludge is a useful resource, which consists of organic matter that can
be used as fertilizer and inorganic substances like a soil-sludge that is used as immobilized bricks.
Dry solids of sewage sludge also have calorific value near to coal. Therefore, it is desirable to
use the sludge effectively as green farmland soil filler, construction materials, energy sources,
etc. Proper utilization of sludge enables reduction of the quantity of sludge to be disposed off.
Furthermore, adoption of measures against global warming is an important topic. Since sewage
sludge is one of the typical biomass with carbon neutral character, its utilization is likely to contribute
to reduction of greenhouse gas. This section describes new sludge treatment technologies based
on the above viewpoints.
6.14.2 Types of Sludge Treatment Technologies
T h e n e w s lu d g e tre a tm e n t te c h n o lo g ie s are su m m a rise d in Table 6 .1 5 overleaf.
6 - 85
Table 6.15 Types of sludge treatment technologies
Process Objectives Description
This implies a well dried sludge which is non-volatile and

Utilisation mixing with controlled amount of clay and clinker or fly ash
Soil
as material or cement and burning like bricks. These are suitable only
sludge
for for chemical precipitated sludge and which are fully dried
immobili
immobilized and volatilized before use. The immobilized blocks are
zation
blocks used as paver blocks in walkways or compound walls
where these are only panel fillers and not load bearing.
Sludge drying system is one of several methods that can
be used to reduce the moisture content and volume and
Utilisation improve the quality of sewage sludge. Dried sludge is
Sludge
as Soil filler, usually used as soil conditioner and soil filler, and is
Drying
Fuel recently being used as fuel. These are also used as pre
treatment in sludge incineration, melting and
carbonization.
6.14.3 Heat Drying
Sludge drying methods include heat drying and solar drying. Heat drying systems are described in
this section. Heat drying system is one of several methods that can be used to reduce the moisture
content and volume and improve the quality of sewage sludge. Dried sludge is usually used as soil
conditioner and fertilizer and is recently being used as fuel. Heat drying systems are also used as
pre-treatment for sludge incineration, melting and carbonization. Heat drying systems are divided
broadly into direct drying and indirect drying, according to the heating method. The two systems
differ in the process flow and drying characteristics. In order to select a drying system, it is necessary
to consider the desirable moisture content of dried sludge. The technology is to spread on concrete
platforms on a side open with roofed sludge shed and blow hot air over the width by a moving facil
ity with arm extending to full width and with downward air diffusers and the to and fro movement
controlled by trip switches. The air heater is integral to the pipeline and the cable alone travels to
and fro. The quantity of air, heat and the rate of travel are tapered as the heating progresses. Cross
ventilation of the shed and surrounding farm forestry in two layers are needed.
a. Advantages
It produces a sludge that can be easily transported to point of use without spillages.
b. Disadvantages
Requires careful on-site adjustments to prevent dried sludge from being blown up and stopping
the drying when the moisture content reaches about 25%.
High O&M cost due to power requirement for heat generation.
6 - 86
6.14.3.3 Design Considerations
These are situation specific and the only guideline is to apply sludge in not less than 20 cm
layers and not over 30 cm layers. To start with, and include a tiller in the hot air arm that can be
used once in a while by manipulating the control as a level arm and a length of pipelines over the
bed not exceeding 3 m.
Heat drying is an effective sewage sludge management option for many facilities that need to
reduce sewage sludge volume while also producing an end product that can be beneficially reused.
Heat drying is applicable to urban settings because it requires a relatively small amount of land and
facility design allows process air to be captured for treatment. These are not yet applicable in India.
When India has a huge agrarian base it is not correct to destroy the biological sludge which is a
good soil filler.
6.14.4 Solar Drying
The main reason for drying the sludge is the high cost of sludge disposal. Hence, every ton of water
extracted from the sludge lowers the disposal cost for the STPs. Drying of the filter cake through
thermal means, is one of the technically viable schemes. However, the energy requirement of the
thermal drying process makes the operating cost prohibitively high.
Since solar radiation is the cheapest form of thermal energy, solar drying is a techno economic
solution for sludge drying.
6.14.4.2 Main Components of Solar Sludge Drying System
The main components of a solar sludge drying system are as follows:
a. Sludge Drying Hall
This is like a Greenhouse, trapping solar radiation and ensures that the rain is kept out.
b. TURNING machine
The solar radiation warms the sludges surface. The rise in the temperature forces the water
molecules out into the surrounding air. The moist air transports the water and has to be evacuated.
However, while the surface dries the lower parts remain moist and have to be turned. This is achieved
by a machine, which turns and also conveys the sludge across the floor of the drying hall. This also
eliminates anaerobic areas that generate bad odour during sludge drying.
c. Control Panel
A PLC based control panel to ensure that the sludge drying process is monitored and controlled so
that sufficient dryness is achieved in the final product.
6 - 87
d. Instruments
Various instruments to monitor parameters like Temperature, Humidity, Wind, Rain, etc., are
provided to monitor the drying process.
The schematic of the process and infrastructure are shown in Figure 6.23 and Figure 6.24.
Figure 6.23 Typical operations in solar sludge drying
Source: http://www.veoliawaterst.com/solia/en/
F igure 6 .2 4 T ypical s o la r s lu d g e drying
6 - 88
a. Advantages
The cost of disposal is reduced by 75% to 80% as the solids content in the sludge is increased
from 2 0 % to 80% during drying.
The process produces easy to handle bulk pellets from the sludge.
Uses solar heat for the drying process instead of electricity thereby reducing the operating cost.
The covered sludge drying area ensures continuous operation throughout the year, even during
the rainy season.
This ensures complete aeration and turning of the sludge in the entire sludge drying area.
Eliminates anaerobic areas that generate bad odour during sludge drying
Completely automatic process, without any human intervention during the drying process.
b. Disadvantages
Proper precaution has to be ensured so as to ensure no fire hazard takes place in the solar
sludge drying bed.
6.14.4.4 Potential Uses for Dried Sludge
The dried sludge can be used as manure/soil conditioners.
The dried sludge pellets can also be used as a fuel source in coal fired power plants and in
cement kilns.
6.15 ULTRASONIC DISINTEGRATION OF FEED SLUDGE TO DIGESTER
A technology to disintegrate the sludge biosolids by using ultrasonic frequency (sonication) before
feeding to anaerobic sludge digesters has been engaging the interest of a few research studies.
A research study from Gdansk University of Technology, Poland and Vilnius Gediminas Technical
University, Lithuania reported that the disintegration is stated to result in a more dispersed and
homogenous flocs of activated sludge as in Figure 6.25 (overleaf) and intensified the biogas
production and improved the quality of digested sludge.
The experiment is stated to have been carried out in laboratory scale digester using two reactors
of each 15 days hydraulic retention time under mesophilic conditions. The results are reported to
have showed a 2 0 % increase of biogas and 1 0 % increase of methane as compared to that from the
digester fed with sludge biosolids without the ultrasonic disintegration. The authors concluded that
due to sludge disintegration, the organic compounds were transferred from the sludge solids into the
aqueous phase resulting in an enhanced biodegradability.
6 - 89
Source: Renata Tomczak-Wandzel. et. al., 2011

Figure 6.25. Activated Sludge before (left) and after (right) Ultrasonic Disintegration
The experiment demonstrated that this technology has the advantages of increase of sludge
digestion efficiency, increase of about 2 0 % of the volume of biogas produced, increase of about 1 0 %
of the methane content in biogas and reduction of the volume of residual sludge by 1 2 %.
In another study by the Centre for Advanced Water Technology and the Public Utilities Board of
Singapore, the ultrasound disintegration technology is stated as potentially useful to disintegrate
feed sludge solids and enhance anaerobic digestion and gas yield. Two full scale digesters of 5000
cum capacity, each are reported as tested simultaneously in Singapore one with and the other
without ultrasonic disintegration of feed sludge. It is reported that in comparison with the control,
i.e., without sonication, the five-month field study showed that ultrasound pre-treatment of the
sludge increased the daily biogas production up to 45% and there were no significant
differences in biogas composition from the two digesters. It is inferred that an increase in
sludge solids removal of up to 30% is expected under optimal operation conditions. (Source Rongjing
Xie, et.al., 2007).
These technologies appears to hold promise towards energy savings and reduction in volumes of
anaerobic digesters for sewage treatment.
6.16 GUIDING PRINCIPLES OF SLUDGE TREATMENT TECHNOLOGIES
Every effort should be made to go eco-friendly in dealing with biological sludge from STPs.
They need to be dried to about 20% moisture and then integrated with the agriculture and farm
forestry. If needed to be applied on sensitive lawns, Gamma ray irradiation of the sludge is mandatory
before such application. The advancement in anaerobic sludge digestion in the coming years
may address these processes, whereby the raw sludge will be preheated from 60C to 80C for
pasteurization and mixed with recycled hot digester gas.
If needed, it will be supplemented with steam thus, bringing about biological hydrolysis, which
can generate more renewable energy than conventional thermal hydrolysis as in the present
day digesters.
6 - 90
CHAPTER 7: RECYCLING AND
Part A: Engineering REUSE OF SEWAGE
CHAPTER 7: RECYCLING AND REUSE OF SEWAGE
No higher quality water should be used for a purpose that can tolerate a lower grade
UN Council Resolution-1958
Many o f the wars this century were about oil, but those o f the next century will be over water.- Ismail
Serageldin, Vice President, World Bank-1995
Q u estio n to fin alists
Technology is good for comfortable life; It is also blamed for environmental problems; How do you link
Technology & Environmental Conservation?
A n s w e r b y w inning finalist
Agrarian economy must reuse water safely
From the Miss Earth contest, Manila, Sponsored by WHO 2001
Water should not be judged by its history, but by its quality. Dr. Lucas van Vuuren, one o f the
pioneers of the Windhoek water reclamation system.
7.1 INTRODUCTION
With 80 countries and 40% of the worlds population facing chronic water problems and with the
demand for water doubling every two decades, these extracts mentioned above merit action. The
largest source of reuse resides in agriculture and the equally largest misplaced resource is sewage
in the habitations. In the "Handbook on Service Level Benchmarking by MoUD, reuse and recycling
of sewage is defined as the percentage of sewage recycled or reused after appropriate treatment
in gardens and parks, irrigation, etc. and, is to be at least 20% to begin with. The objective of this
chapter is to bring out guiding principles for practice in India.
7.1.1 Overview of Current Practices in India
In India treated sewage is being used for a variety of applications such as (a) Farm Forestry,
(b) Horticulture, (c) Toilet flushing, (d) Industrial use as in non-human contact cooling towers,
(e) Fish culture and (f) Indirect and incidental uses. They are briefly mentioned hereunder.
a) The CMWSSB has been promoting the growth of farm forestry in Chennai from the 1980s and
this helps to promote a micro climate in a city environment.
b) The Indian Agricultural Research Institute, Karnal has carried out research work on sewage
farming and has recommended an irrigation method for sewage fed tree plantations.
c) The University of Agricultural Sciences, Dharwad, Karnataka has found that sewage could be
used in producing vermicompost to be used for tree plantations provided its details with respect
to composition of toxic substances are known.
d) Chandigarh is using treated sewage for horticulture needs of its green areas.
e) Delhi has put in place planned reuse of treated sewage for designated institutional centres.
7- 1
f) The Government of Karnataka has issued an official directive to take all necessary steps to
ensure that only tertiary treated sewage is used for non-potable purposes, like all gardening
including parks, resorts and golf course. The Bangalore Water Supply and Sewerage Board will
make all arrangements including construction of filling points, installation of vending machines at
STP for supply of tertiary treated sewage in multiples of thousand litres and that non-compliance
of the directions attracts penal provisions in accordance with section 15 and section 17 of the
Environment (Protection) Act 1986.
g) In major metropolitan cities like Delhi, Mumbai, Bangalore and Chennai treated grey water
is being used for toilet flushing in some of the major condominiums and high rise apartment
complexes on a pilot scale. Care should be taken to ensure that Ultra filtration membranes are
used in the treatment process to safeguard against chances of waterborne diseases.
h) Secondary treated sewage is purchased and treated for use in cooling water makeup in the
industrial sector from as early as 1991 in major industries like Madras Refineries, Madras
Fertilizers, GMR Vasavi Power plant in Chennai as also in Rashtriya Chemicals and
Fertilizsers in Maharashtra and most recently in the Indira Gandhi International Airport in Delhi and
Mumbai International Airport.
i) In Kolkata, the Mudiali fish farm occupying an area of 400 hectares is used for growing fish, which
is then sold for human consumption.
j) The UNDP conducted a detailed study in the 1970s and identified a sand basin on the coast of
Bay of Bengal, where secondary treated sewage of the Chennai city can be infiltrated through
percolation ponds and extracted for specific industrial use in the nearby petro-chemical complex.
However, this project has not been implemented.
k) The Bengaluru city is facing a freshwater crisis and it has been considered to study a pilot
model of the Singapore NEWater for indirect augmentation of water by advanced treatment of
secondary facilities. At present, this project proposal is a statement of capability to formulate a
technically feasible and financially viable project and of course the biggest challenge of going
through and obtaining public acceptance is understandably a long drawn out process.
7.1.2 Overview of Current Practices in the World
The use of treated sewage elsewhere in the world is listed herein and in Appendix 7.3.
a) Agriculture: It is used for irrigation in certain places in Africa, Israel, Mexico and Kuwait.
b) Farm Forestry: Treated sewage is used for watering urban forests, public gardens, trees, shrubs
and grassed areas along roadways in certain places in Egypt, Abu Dhabi, Woodburn in Oregon
USA. It is also used for timber plantation in Widebay Water Corporation in Queensland, Australia.
It is used for alfalfa plantation in Albirch Palestine.
c) Horticulture: Certain places in Elpaso in Texas, Durbin Creek in Western California in USA.
d) Toilet flushing: Certain locations in Chiba Prefecture, Kobe City, and Fukuoka City and Tokyo
Metropolitan in Japan.
7-2
e) Industrial and commercial: essentially used for cooling purposes in Sakaihama Treated
Wastewater Supply Project, Japan, Bethlehem Steel mills, USA. Sewage reclaimed as high
quality water is supplied to Mondi Paper Mill and SAPREF Refinery in Durban, South Africa.
Landscape and golf course irrigation in Hawai,
f) Fish culture: It is used in fish hatcheries / fish ponds in Vietnam and in Bangladesh
g) Groundwater recharge: Orlando and Orange County Florida, Orange County California, Phoenix
(Arizona), Santa Rosa (California) Recharge Project all in USA.
h) Indirect recharge of impoundments: Restoration of Meguro River in Japan, NEWater project in

Singapore, W indhoek in Namibia, Berlin in Germany
i) Other uses: Coach cleaning, subway washing and water for building construction is being
practised in Jungnang, Nanji, Tancheon, Seonam in Seoul and treated sewage sprinkled on
the water retentive pavement that can store water inside paving material at Shiodome Land
Readjustment District (Shio Site) in Tokyo and this reduces the surface temperature.
7.2 CASE STUDIES IN RECYCLING AND REUSE OF SEWAGE
7.2.1 Raw Sewage Treatment and Reuse as Cooling Water at M/S GMR Vasavi
Power Plant, Chennai, India
7.2.1.1 The Pride of Place
This plant is the first of its kind in Asia commissioned as early as 1999, where the raw sewage of
Chennai city is treated to recover (a) water of grade suitable for makeup in the cooling water and
(b) is also further treated to recover a water of boiler grade.
7.2.1.2 Treatment Schematic
This is shown in Figure 7.1.
7.2.1.3 Raw and Recovered Sewage Qualities
These are given in Table 7.1 and Table 7.2
7.2.1.4 Step by Step Reasoning of the Treatment
Need for Equalization Basin Up Front: The flow of sewage is not uniform throughout 24 hours
and the biological treatment plant can absorb the fluctuations and still yield a fairly steady level of
treated sewage quality. However, in the Lime addition of the chemical system, the flow rate should be
necessarily uniform, to facilitate dosing of chemical uniformly. This implies flow equalization
necessarily at some point. It was decided to have this before the biological treatment itself,
so that the dosage of Sodium bicarbonate whenever needed (before the primary clarifier to
ensure adequate bicarbonate alkalinity for biological nitrification in the aeration tank) can be
controlled easily in a steady state, which will further avoid unduly high Sodium in the resulting
sewage. An example of sizing the equalization tank volume is given in Appendix A.5.2.
7-3
CHAPTER 7 : RECYCLING AND
C ity raw Flow & O rganic S creens, detritors, BO D rem oval &
sew age equalization and FOG rem oval N itrification
T
t
S ecure landfill Lim e added <4 _ Belt F ilter & Sludge
inside cam pus P addle M ixing centrifuge th icke n e r
High Lime & two stage

recarbonation / acidification
Blended Rejects
at T D S < 2,100
____________________t
M akeup w a te r at Ion E xchange fo r S creenings, grit & oil
TD S < 500 boile r w a ter
B ackw ash line
Final rejects
S ludge line
Figure 7.1 Treatment schematic of the M/S GMR Vasavi power plant sewage reuse plant
7-4
Table 7.1 Raw sewage quality variations taken for the design
No. Parameters Max Min No. Parameters Max Min

1 pH 7.9 7.6 14 Phe. Aik. as C a C 0 3
2 Total Dis. Solids 1360 980 15 Total Aik. as C a C 0 3 670 530
3 Inorg. Dis. Solids 95% 94% 16 Sodium as Na 370 280
4 Suspended Solids 590 460 17 Chloride as Cl 400 380
5 BOD 5 days 20C 540 350 18 Sulphates as S 0 4 130 130
6 COD, 2 hours reflux 850 520 19 Oil and grease 16 6.4
7 Ammonia N as N 60 37 20 Phenolics 0.5 0.45
8 TKN as N 105 83 21 Surfactants 7.8 5.8
9 Ortho P as P 0 4 33 28 22 Sulphide as S 16 11
10 Total P as P 0 4 39 35 23 Fluoride as F 1.2 0.9

11 Ca as C a C 0 3 170 120 24 Silica as S i0 2 38 32
12 Mg as C a C 0 3 230 180 25 Summer temp, as C 39.5 39
13 Tot Hardness, C a C 0 3 400 300 26 W inter temp, as C 29 28
Table 7.2 Makeup water quality required for recirculation cooling
No Parameters Range No Parameters Range

1 Langelier Index 0.1 to 0 .2 4 Phosphate Nil
2 Total Dis. Solids 550 to 600 5 Ammonia Nil
3 Silica as S i0 2 2 to 3 6 Others As arising
In 1997, the aerators used were mostly slow speed surface aerators, and it was not easy to adjust
the air input unlike the diffused aeration, where the VFD controlled motor permitted variations of air
flow and hence, the oxygen input into aeration system based on the peak, average and lean flow
durations could not be pro-rata adjusted. Hence, it was necessary for upfront equalization.
Before feeding to the RO plant, the ammonia and phosphorous have to be removed as these can
cause corrosion of some metal surfaces and biofouling in the circulating water respectively.
For this purpose, ammonia removal options of high lime induced air stripping, biological
nitrification, chlorination and Clinoptinolite resin exchange were evaluated and it was decided to
follow the biological nitrification route, given its high degree of reliability and the fact that nitrates can be
rejected in the RO and residual presence in permeate was not prohibited.
The combined BOD removal and ammonia nitrification in the same aeration tank was chosen
because of its well proven performance in the Chennai TWAD Board R&D unit. Studies on field
scale pilot plant validations of localized design criteria were carried out between 1965 to 1980 at
Kodungaiyur R&D facility, which eventually became the forerunner for such prototype plants in India.
7-5
The desired cooling water makeup needed a quality where silica was to be restricted to less than
3 mg/l. The raw sewage silica content was about 38 mg/l. The magnesium (Mg) content was
180 mg/l at the minimum. This when precipitated at pH above 10.5, will reduce Mg to less than
25 mg/l. Thus Mg removal could be 155 mg/l. This can co-precipitate silica by 155/5 = 31 mg/l,
which meets the requirement of silica removal before entering RO to less than 5 mg/l, further by
restricting the recovery at about 75%, the silica in the permeate can be held down to 1 mg/l and
reject silica can well be about 2 0 mg/l.
Maximum removal of Mg is possible only at a pH of above 10 and hence, the high lime process
of the biologically treated sewage was decided upon.
The incidental advantages of complete precipitation of phosphorous, alkaline oxidation of residual

organic matter, destruction of colour and especially inactivating the pathogenic organisms after at
least 45 minutes contact time and precipitation of heavy metals as their oxides were all recognized
as incidental to the high lime process and hence this was chosen.
The neutralization of high lime treated effluent was chosen to be used through two stage carbonation,
whereby the first stage will be cut off at a pH of about 9.3 to enable precipitation of the originally
available calcium and the added calcium. The second stage neutralization will be to reach the pH of
close to 6.5 which is the desired limit in RO feed water. The proposed carbon dioxide cylinders are
easily available locally. Alternative acidification is also used.
The restriction in the disposal of the plant reject is governed by a TDS limitation of 2,100 mg/l. In
order not to exceed this limit, the biological and chemical treatment segments were of higher capacity,
than actually required to feed to RO to obtain the required permeate volume. The excess volume with a
TDS reduced by about 550 mg/l in the chemical treatment segment was used to dilute the RO rejects.
Even though phosphorous precipitation was expected to be complete in the high lime stage, a
backup was provided by dosing FeCl3 on line and providing a static mixer after the carbonation in the
feed pipe line of pressure sand filters.
A dual media filter was chosen to further filter out the chemically treated water, thereby
ensuring that even a chance occurrence of phosphorous in the RO feed is avoided entirely. By this, the
contributory cause of bio fouling of the RO membrane could also be avoided. The treatment
schematic as in Figure 7-1 (overleaf) above was thus chosen to be implemented.
7.2.1.5 Key Design Criteria
Primary and secondary clarifiers were generally as per CPHEEO guidelines
Sludge withdrawal was by direct suction to ensure adequate velocity of drawal
The F/M value was 0.25 and HRT for DWF was 8 hours in aeration tank
Alpha and Beta Factors were 0.75 and 0.95 with residual DO of 2 mg/l
The MLSS was designed at 2,500 mg/l and was adjusted based on field conditions
7-6
Mixing power was maintained at 20 watts per cum of aeration tank volume
HRT in excess lime and first carbonation clarifiers were as per CPHEEO guidelines
RO system design was as per the membrane manufacturer.
7.2.1.6 Performance Results
The plant is in continuous O&M ever since 1999 and has attained the desired key criteria of TDS less
than 600, silica almost nil, etc. besides clear and colourless nature of the RO feed ever since.
7.2.1.7 Pointers for the Future
The expected precipitation of calcium in the first stage carbonation was sometimes erratic leading
to calcium escape. Though this was dissolved into bicarbonate in the second stage carbonation,
at times this was difficult and the neutralization was switched over to use of hydrochloric acid. This
increased the calcium content in feed to RO and required readjustments of the blending to peg the
TDS in the product water. The use of a solids contact clarifier instead of the plain clarifier could have
been a better choice, but the possibility of the calcium carbonate sludge solidifying therein, and
choking the sludge withdrawal lines were the other issues.
Conventional precipitation of Ca and Mg could have been tried instead of high lime carbonation,
but the fact that phosphorous even at 0.1 mg/l prevents solids liquid separation of the precipitated
carbonate thus, defeating the objective was the reason. All the same, future plants need to carefully
assess these options.
The original RO membranes of brackish water grade though were guaranteed for only 4 years by
the manufacturer, lasted for as many as 7 years before the recovery dropped by 10%. This is clearly
traceable to the total sterility of the water exiting the high lime stage.
Lately, the use of UF membrane has increased in India. The historical Water Factory 21 in
California has also originally used the high lime carbonation route, but later changed over to
microfiltration route. Though this may look attractive prima facie, the need to look into phosphorous
removal, which can be fully possible only in high lime has to be borne in mind. Whereas the
water factory was tackling the raw sewage phosphorous of only single digit, the plant cited here was
tackling as much as 35 mg/l. In that case, there is no way, the MF or UF can eliminate phosphorous,
especially, if it is in colloidal form.
Moreover, soaps and detergents in India continue to bring in inorganic phosphates in the raw
sewage. As far as sewage is concerned, this single factor may lead to bio-fouling of RO
membranes. A combination of high lime and UF would perhaps be the best available technology.
With respect to the sludge cake, the wet biological sludge from the filter press machines, was
blended with the high Lime precipitated sludge, and the cake was further treated to raise the pH of
the same to about 9.3 by a paddle mixer. The resulting sludge mass was being used to raise the low
lying areas and served as a secure land fill in the clayey soil. This pH adjustment of the sludge cake
was worthy of consideration.
7-7
7.2.2 Reuse Plant at Indira Gandhi International Airport, Delhi, India
This is the latest plant in India. The raw water is taken from local piped water as also from local
bore well water as a backup & treated in RO. The rejects from this system, the sewage
from the new terminal building and from the old infrastructure are all blended as a sort of
pseudo sewage as different from conventional city sewage in regard to ammonia to BOD ratio
being much higher. This was due to the nature of usage of toilets in the terminal building almost
entirely for urination as compared to the water closets. This pseudo sewage was taken to a biological
nitrification-denitrification reactor using the MLE process. Further, the biological treated sewage
is equalized before being filtered through DMF after on line injection of FeCl to remove possible
colloidal phosphorous, and thereafter through UF, cartridge filter and RO. The bio-reactor is unique
in shape so that the plug flow configuration can be covered by a funicular polygon, if needed later on.
The water balance in this plant is shown in Figure 7.2.
9 MLD, TD S - 1785, S i0 2 - 30, N 0 3 - 49
Figure 7.2 Water balance in the New Delhi IGI airport sewage reuse plant
7-8
7.2.2.1 Water Routing of this Plant
As shown in Figure 7-2, bore well water will be treated in RO and the product water supplied to the
new Terminal building for utilities and potable uses. The treated sewage will be equalized for flow
and filtered through Dual Media Filters (DMF) with on line FeCl3 addition and reused partly in toilet
flush as a water conservation initiative. This component will actually be a closed loop. The rest of
the treated sewage will be split into two streams one for greenery and the other for RO to use the
permeate as cooling tower makeup water. The rejects from the RO plants and the bypass of treated
sewage will be blended and used for sustaining the greenery with maximum water conservation and
ensuring blended TDS of less than 2100 mg/.
7.2.2.2 Key Design Criteria
1. An important issue is the relatively higher presence of ammonia as passengers in terminal

building do not use the water closet very often, but they use the urinal.
2. The temperature for biological design was 37C and 10C in summer and winter respectively
3. The raw sewage BOD was taken as maximum of 200 mg/l and SS of 400 mg/l
4. The peak factor was taken as 1.5 as the terminal building was used almost continuously
5. The RAS was at unity and IRR from aeration tank was twice the DWF
6 . HRT in anoxic tank was at 0.5 hours based on all flows through it
7. HRT in aeration tank was 18 hours based on DWF
8 . Alpha value was consciously restricted to 0.6 as Kla was retarded in this sewage
9. Nitrification oxygen was taken as 4.8 and oxygen credit was taken as 2.86
10. Mixing air was taken as 30 cum/minute/1000 cum of aeration tank
11.The phosphorous leaving the DMF in dissolved form was allowed to go through UF and RO
12. The only solid waste from the plant is the biological sludge cake. This is used in the root zone of
trees in the greenery as a soil filler/organic fertilizer
13. The quality of the blended discharge for greenery meets the requirements of pollution control
14. The plant is user friendly with PLCs and permits off-site monitoring
15. Simplified treatment scheme is shown in Figure 7.3.
Extended Ferric salt D M F -U F for Spiral wound

Dissolved
aeration with addition for rem oval of SS R O m em b rane
air
biological precipitating & pathogens - train for
nitrification and chance escap e and for recovery of
denitrification of phosphorous concordant S D I useable w ater
Figure 7.3 Simplified treatment scheme for IGI airport Delhi STP
7-9
7.2.2.3 Performance Results
The STP receives raw sewage from the airport terminal building and though it has higher
nitrogen content as compared to domestic sewage because passengers use the urinals much
more than toilets. Yet the design wetted by IIT Delhi is able to handle the biological
nitrification-denitrification. The performance of the STP for raw sewage and biological treated
sewage is shown in Table 7.3.
Table 7.3 Performance of the STP at DIAL for higher Nitrogen loaded sewage
Ammonia
No Location BOD SS
Nitrogen
1 Raw Sewage 110 to 130 45 to 53 240 to 280
Biological Treated
2 8 to 10 1.5 to 3 10 to 15
sewage
The design of bioreactor is based on mixed liquor return at twice the average flow, return sludge at
equal to average flow, volume of anoxic tank at 30 minutes of all flows and volume of aeration tank
at 18 hours of average flow. The results reported here are at 67% of design flow
7.2.3 Reuse Plant at Mumbai International Airport Limited (MIAL), India
This is a circular SBR tank followed by hypo chlorination, pressure sand filtration and ultra filtration
to produce a grade of recovered sewage free of colour, organics and odour. The treated effluent
is partly used for toilet flush and the rest is put through RO membranes to recover make up grade
water for HVAC.
The sewage from the terminal building is disproportionately high with urine and nitrogen as
compared to normal domestic sewage and MIAL has evolved its own process design for SBR based
on extended aeration.
The design for 4 MLD average flow has 2 numbers of SBR basins of each 20 m diameter and 6.5 m
liquid depth, floor mounted fine bubble diffusers, floating floor level anoxic mixers, floating decanter,
Alpha value as 0.85, Beta value as 0.95, F/M as 0.08, MLSS as 4500, Kg Oxygen for Kg BOD at
1.25, Kg Oxygen for Kg ammonia at 4.6, number of cycles per day as 5, alkalinity used up as
7.2 mg / mg of nitrified N, alkalinity released as 3.6 mg / mg of denitrified N and the performance at
50% of design flow as in Table 7.4.
Table 7.4 Performance of the SBR at MIAL for higher Nitrogen loaded sewage
No Location BOD COD SS TKN Alkalinity TP pH
1 Raw Sewage 1 0 2 .0 230.00 55.0 42.0 190 8 .0 6.95
2 SBR effluent 3.4 15.26 6.5 5.2 10 1.7 6.90
7 - 10
A photo of one of the SBR tanks with floating decanter and central draft tube anoxic mixer
- 5 -
"~
~| f
* jJT ; m
.
. 1 - ll
Figure 7.4 Circular SBR based STP at MIAL with floating decanter
It shows that the heavily loaded nitrogen relative to organic matter can still be treated successfully in
biological SBR at the design criteria as above and a hydraulic detention time of 24 hours in the SBR.
The final disinfection is by hypochlorite and the baffled chlorinating tank is circumventing the SBR.
7.2.4 Pointers for the Future
1. In dealing with these institutional pseudo sewage of types similar to airport terminals, the MLE
process of biological nitrification-denitrification works well even when the ammonia content is
higher, but then it takes about 3 months to establish the microorganisms culture with a steady
dosage of micro nutrients as in Table 7.5 (overleaf). This is very important.
2. The use of extended aeration is to be preferred as conventional ASP with F/M in the range of
0.3 to 0.5 may suffer upsets when ammonia dominates in the sewage.
3. Biological phosphorous removal in upstream anaerobic reactor may or may not yield expected
results in this type of sewage, where ammonia dominates the BOD at various times.
4. As long as the phosphorous is ensured to be in dissolved form it can be allowed through the
UF and RO membranes, and there is no need for an exclusive phosphorous removal unit.
5. The raw sewage pump sets were of the centrifugal screw impeller in wet submersible sumps.
Though it had to be imported, they were considered to be fail-proof to handle raw sewage in
this sensitive location without getting choked by unexpected obstructing matters entering the
sewage and may instantaneously affect the air conditioning in the terminal.
7 - 11
Table 7.5 Micro nutrients to be added to biological systems where microbial growth is detectable as
retarded (as done at IGI Airport STP)
A B C D E F G H I J
1 Designer to use this space for his notes
4 Flow in mid 4 BOD at Inlet 300
mg/mg of
Atomic mg/mg of BOD, as Molecular Calculation of weight of kg needed,
5 Market Chemical Chemical Formula BOD, as
Weight element Weight compound once a month
compound
8 Calcium Ca 40 62x10 power minus 4 Calcium carbonate CaCCh 100 62* POWER((10),(-4))*G7/C7 0.0155 18.60
9 Cobalt Co 58 13x10 power minus 5 Cobaltic chloride CoCI2(6H20) 238 13* POWER((10),(-5))*G8/C8 0.0005 0.64
10 Copper Cu 64 15x10 power minus 5 Cupric sulphate Cu(S04) 160 15* PC>WER((10),(-5))*G9/C9 0.0004 0.45
FeS04
Ferrous ammonium
11 Iron Fe 56 12x10 power minus 3 (NH4)2(S04) (6 392 12* POWER((10),(-3))*G10/C10 0.0840 100.80
sulphate
H20)
Magnesium
12 Magnesium Mg 24 30 x1 0 power minus 4 MgCI2 95 30* POWER((10),(-4))*G11/C11 0.0119 14.25
chloride
Manganese
13 Manganese Mn 55 10x10 power minus 5 MnCI2(4H20) 198 10* POWER((10),(-5))*G12/C12 0.0004 0.43
chloride
14 Molybdenum Mo 96 4 3 x1 0 power minus 5 Molybdic acid M oS2 106 43* POWER((10),(-5))*G13/C13 0.0005 0.57
15 Potassium K 39 4 5 x1 0 power minus 4 Potassium chloride KCI 75 45* POWER((10),(-4))*G14/C14 0.0087 10.38
1 4 x 1 0 power minus
16 Selenium Se 79 Selenium chloride SeCk 228.825 14* POWER((10),(-4))*G15/C15 0.0041 4.87
10
17 Sodium Na 23 5 x 1 0 power minus 5 Sodium chloride NaCI 59 5* POWER((10),(-5))*G16/C16 0.0001 0.15
18 Zinc Zn 66 16x10 power minus 5 Zinc oxide ZnO 82 16* POWER((10),(-5))*G17/C17 0.0002 0.24
The M S Excel sheets for calculating these for continuous and batch flow systems are given as Appendix 7.1 and 7.2 in the soft copy version.
7-12
7.2.5 Reuse Plants at Chennai Petroleum Corporation Ltd. (CPCL) and

Madras Fertilizers Ltd. (MFL)
These are the earliest plants designed and constructed in India between 1989 and 1991 for
recovering makeup grade cooling water from Chennai city sewage. These plants however,
received only the secondary treated sewage from Chennai city STPs. All the same, they still
provide the biological nitrification and thereafter, high lime acidification and then RO. The RO rejects
are let into the backwater zone and not directly into the marine area. The flow schematics of these
plants are in Figure 7.5 and Figure 7.6. The plants treat about 12.5 mld and 17.5 mld, respectively.
Reject To Sea
Figure 7.5 Sewage reuse schematic at M/S CPCL, Chennai
Reject To Sea
Figure 7.6 Sewage reuse schematic at M/S. MFL, Chennai
7 - 13
7.2.6 Sewage Reuse Plant at M/S Rashtriya Chemicals and Fertilizers, Mumbai
This is a plant receiving raw sewage and recovering cooling grade makeup water. Its flow scheme
Figure 7.7 Sewage reuse schematic at M/S RCF, Mumbai
The 23 mld STP commissioned in the year 2000 treats a complex municipal sewage heavily
contaminated with various industrial wastes. Though originally conceived with a single step
chemical treatment after biological treatment, subsequently some additional treatment steps like use
of UF became necessary in order to improve the quality of the water reaching the RO system
(keeping the silt density index, SDI < 3.0) owing to the more polluted nature of the influent sewage.
This is a classic scenario of the need to design the treatment process to be flexible for impacts by
industrial effluents in the raw sewage and especially the trace metals and heavy metals. These are
possibly better served by the high lime and neutralization than a single stage chemical treatment.
7.2.7 Bengaluru, India
The Bengaluru city freshwater crisis is so high that its present quota of freshwater from the
river Cauvery will get exhausted soon and the demand of the city may overtake the supply.
It was considered to study a pilot model of the Singapore NEWater for indirect augmentation by
advanced treatment of secondary facilities.
7 - 14
The proposal was to add biological nitrification denitrification and tertiary treatment in chemical
precipitation of phosphorous and cascade the treated water over 20 km and a 65 m fall in a
river course.
The runoff will be intercepted and subjected to conventional water treatment with dariflocculators
and rapid sand filters and then pumped back through the 65 m rise by a pipeline with chlorination.
Thereafter, it will be put through dual media and activated carbon filtration followed by UF and
RO membranes.
The idea was to ensure removal of endocrine disruptor chemicals (EDCs) by activated carbon
and enteroviruses by ultra filtration membranes. The RO will bring back the TDS to the freshwater
levels and ensure additional removals of virus if any. The RO rejects will be put through accelerated
evaporation spray ponds.
The RO permeate will be let into a freshwater river course to travel about 8 km before it enters a
freshwater impoundment. The detention period calculated by the volume of the impoundment and
the volume of renovated water will be close to two years to bring out limnological equilibrium of the
blended water through the seasons before drawal into a conventional water treatment plant (WTP)
and chlorination before being blended with the freshwater supplies.
The sludge from the WTP will be stored in secure landfills subject to further studies on soil sludge
immobilization for making paver blocks for walkways and compound walls.
The volume of such indirect augmentation will become close to 140 mld compared to the availability
of treated sewage of 1500 mld by the time the project could be completed after due public hearing,
subject to which, the project has been accorded sanction by the JnNURM as a pilot project.
Understandably, such projects will take time to materialize.
The schematic of this treatment is shown in Figure 7.8 (overleaf).
A subsequent thinking is to explore the possibility of a dedicated cascade channel along the
2 0 km river course if the river purification gets into time delays by the time these two are to dovetail
in the future. The cost of the renovation was Rs.15.6 per kilo litre of water produced and compares
favourably with the cost of freshwater production at Rs.14.2 per kilo litre.
At this time, this project proposal is a statement of capability to formulate a technically feasible and
financially viable project and of course the biggest challenge of going through and obtaining
public acceptance is understandably a long drawn out process.
The treatment sequence proposed in this project is shown in Table 7.6 and is compared with the
treatment sequence used in other similar known installations elsewhere.
7.2.8 Karnal, India
The Indian Agricultural Research Institute at Karnal, India has carried out work on sewage farming
and has recommended that growing tree on ridges 1 m wide and 50 cm high with even untreated
sewage in furrows can still be considered.
7 - 15
Table 7.6 Comparison of treatment barriers used in projects in the World for indirect potable reuse of treated sewage
No. Location A B c D E F G H I J K L M N 0
W indhoek,
1
Namibia
V V V V V V
2 Occoquan, USA V V V V
3 Singapore V V V V V
V. Valley,
4
Bangalore
V V V (*) NR-1 V V V V V NR-2 V V V V
Explanatory Notes of Treatm ent Com ponents
Tertiary treatment including removal of Sand Filtration to hold back escaping R 0 membrane filtration for reducing the
A F K
nitrogen and phosphorous besides organics suspended solids and improving carry overs hardness of recovered water as needed
18 Km travel of tertiary treated sewage in Chlorination in pumping main with 6 hours 7 km of travel of pathogen free water in
B G L
river course for natural self rejuvenation contact in booster doses en route natural river valley for naturalization
450 days in open reservoir for

Storage in pick up weir for disinfection by Activated Carbon Treatment for removing
c sun rays & natural aquatic equilibrium
H
trace organics and chance THMs
M disinfection by sun rays & natural aquatic
equilibrium
High Lime for inactivation of pathogenic Ultra Filtration for removal of enteric Conventional water treatment for floating
D I N
organisms & heavy metal precipitation pathogens and specifically viruses matters and hardness reduction
Two stage carbonation to remove the Micro filtration for removal of upto bacteria Residual chlorination of treated water to
E J 0
increased TDS due to high Lime treatment alone (but not viruses) ensure detection of sterility
(*) Pathogen removal in high lime in Occoquan is instead met by UF in the proposed project and avoids problems of chemical sludge.
NR-1 The 2 stage carbonation as practiced in Occoquan is not required in the proposed project as the pH is not raised in the treatment.
NR-2 Hardness Removal is achieved in the Lime water treatment process in the final stage in the chain of treatment.
Source: Bangalore Water Supply and Sewerage Board, 2008
The treatment sequence adopted in the V. Valley scheme at Bangalore is more rugged and has multiple layers of sequential safety. It is too
early to embark on this till the results of the Bengaluru piloting are validated.
7-16
0
0
Virshavhavathi STP - 180 MLD
TG Halli Reservoir Mailasanvra STP - 75 MLD

Capacity 95 million cum
0 Kengeri STP - 60 MLD
0
0
Chodenapura STP - 40 MLD
-
(5) 65 metre Cascade Fall in River over 20 Km
0 Water Treatment Plant at Ampapura - 152 MLD
0 (5 )
-
1700 mm Pumping main for 33 Km - 147 MLD
U F and R O plant at Tavarakere - 147 MLD
0
(7) Pathogen free water to river valley - 140 MLD
0
Entry location into Arkavathi fresh water course
Entry into T. G. Halli fresh water reservoir
0 Water treatment plant with hardness removal

0 (TO) Pumping mains to Bangalore City distribution
-
Bangalore City
Status o f Bangalore Water Demand and A vailability

Costs
Population Million Liters Daily (MLD)
Capital Cost - Rs 4000 m illio n Year
m illio n D em and A v a ila b ility Shortage
W ater a t - Rs. 15.6 per K ilo litre
Cauvery W a te r-R s . 14.2 per K ilo litre
2001 5.4 8 70 540 330
2007 7.5 1219 840 379
Quality Renovation b y the Advanced Treatment
2015 8.8 1720 1500 220
Colour Odour BOO COD N P TDS pH Pathogens
2021 10 2125 1500 625
Raw Sewage Grey F ow l 350 750 A s occurs 650 7.2 - 7.5 A s occurs
2036 12.5 2550 1500 1050
Water at (To) Clear Fresh N il 70 N il N il 275 6 .7 -7 3 N il
Status o f Bangalore Water Demand and Availability
Pilot Indirect Potable Water A ugm entation by 135 MLD by Advanced Reuse from City Sewage at Bangalore
Sanctioned in January 2008 under JnNURM Grant Funding for Seeking Public Acceptance Which is o f course a Long Drawn Process
Figure 7.8 Schematic of treatment for reuse in Bangalore

7-17
The amount of the sewage / effluents to be disposed of depends upon the age, type of plants, climatic
conditions, soil texture and quality of effluents. The total discharge of effluent is so regulated that
it is consumed within 12-18 hours and there is no standing water left in the trenches. Through this
technique, it is possible to dispose of 0.3 to 1.0 ML of effluent per day per hectare. This technique
utilizes the entire biomass as living filter for supplying nutrients to soil and plant; irrigation renovates
the effluent for atmospheric re-charge and ground storage. Further, as forest plants are to be used
for fuel wood, timber or pulp, there is no chance of pathogens, heavy metals and organic compounds
to enter into the human food chain system, a point that is a limiting factor when vegetables or other
crops are grown with sewage.
Though most of the plants are suitable for utilizing the effluents, yet, those tree species
which are fast growing can transpire high amounts of water and are able to withstand high
moisture content in the root environment are most suitable for such purposes. Eucalyptus is
one such species, which has the capacity to transpire large amounts of water and remains
active throughout the year. Other species suitable for this purpose are poplar and leucaena.
Out of these three species, eucalyptus seems to be the best choice as poplar remains dormant
in winter thus, cannot bio-drain effluent during winter months. However, if area is available and
the volume of effluent is small, a combination of poplar and eucalyptus is the best propagation.
This technology for sewage water use is relatively cheap and no major capital is involved. The
expenditure of adopting this technology involves cost of making ridges, cost of plantation and their
care. This system generates gross returns from the sale of fuel wood. The sludge accumulating in
the furrows along with the decaying forest litter can be exploited as an additional source of revenue.
As the sewage water itself provides nutrients and irrigation ameliorates the sodic soil by lowering
the pH, relatively unfertile wastelands can be used for this purpose. This technology is economically
viable as it involves only the cost of water conveyance from source to fields for irrigation and
does not require highly skilled personnel as well. The institute mentions this technology to be
the most appropriate and economical viable proposition for the rural areas as this technology is
used to raise forestry, which would aid in restoring the environment and to generate biomass.
The irrigation method is shown in Figure 7.9.
Source: CSSRI, Karnal
Figure 7.9 Irrigation method for sewage fed tree plantation as per Karnal Institute
7 - 18
7.2.9 Mudiali (Kolkata), India
About 400 hectares of fish ponds are in use at Kolkata. Individual ponds are about 40 hectares in
area and have five distinct phases covering pond preparation, primary fertilization, fish stocking,
secondary fertilization and fish harvesting. The photosynthetic activity in the pond is the basis
for biological purification of the sewage. Once the water turns completely green, stocking of fish is
initiated and repeated several times in a year. Catla (Catlacatla), Rohu (Labeo rohita), Mrigal
(Cirrhinus Mrigala) and Bata (Labeo Bata) are mainly grown in bulk for the stock consisting of
mrigal. Exotic fish like Silver Carp (Hypophthalmichthys molitrix), Grass Carp (Ctenopharyngodon
idella) and common carp (Cyprinus carpio) are stocked as a small percentage. However, the popularity
of tilapias (Oreochromis niloticus and O. mossambicus) is increasing. Sewage is drawn at 1 to10%
of the total volume of water in the pond at intervals throughout the culture period and thereafter,
continuous inflow and outflow are maintained by allowing the same level of water to flow out of the pond.
Aquatic weeds like water hyacinth are grown along pond dikes of larger ponds to break waves and
prevent damage to dikes. In addition, these weeded areas, provide shelter to fish when the
temperature rises, prevent poaching of fishes to some degree and most importantly serve as filters to
extract nutrients and metals from the system. When these weeds grow in excess, they are periodically
harvested and decomposed in the pond to enhance fertility of water. In sewage fed farms, bacterial
diseases are not common. Even when there were problems with Epizootic Ulcerative Disease (EUS)
in recent years with carps in other areas, carps in these sewage-fed ponds remained uninfected.
However, parasitic infections by Lernea (anchor worm) and Argulus are common and there is a
need to develop techniques for the control of this problem. This has been partly attributed to the good
nutrition obtained from the rich plankton growth in ponds. Figure 7.10 shows the procedures in tending
to the ponds as a routine and Figure 7.11 and Figure 7.12 shows the ponds and the catch.
Left to Right, Sewage fed ponds are pumped out to dry, Drying of ponds is undertaken
during winter, Silt is removed at least once in three years, Dried water hyacinth is kept in
heaps in the ponds for decomposition.
Figure 7.10 Stages of fish farming
Figure 7.11 Ponds and high rise buildings Figure 7.12 Full grown & fresh harvested fish
7 - 19
Studies on infections carried by the fish revealed that though there were stray concerns, the fact that
all fish is well cooked before eating negates any risk of ingestion. The farm is a staple supplier of
edible fish to Kolkata and thus, the demand is steady throughout the year.
7.2.10 Orange County California, USA
Water scarcity is a major issue in Southern California. A scarcity of freshwater resources,

combined with the threat of saline ingress from the Pacific Ocean, create an urgent need for alternative
resources. As a result, an ambitious water reclamation project, "Water Factory 21 (WF21)-the first
groundwater recharge project allowed in California, was started in 1971 by the Orange County Water
district (OCWD). Its purpose was to create a seawater intrusion barrier by injecting a 50:50 blend
of reclaimed water and other water (deep well water or imported freshwater from neighbouring river
basins like Colorado River) in infiltration facilities. The recycled water was pumped to spreading
basins and followed the same natural path as rainwater runoff. The water produced was of very
high quality due to a multi-barrier process involving multimedia filtration. In 1977, reverse osmosis
treatment (RO) was added. Considering the consistent high quality of water produced, the ratio of
reclaimed water was progressively increased, and in 1991 the WF21 obtained a permit to inject from
3
67% to 100% reclaimed water. The plant produced 57,000 m /d of reclaimed water.
In 1997, the OCWD launched a new project, using membrane technology: the Groundwater
Replenishment System (GWRS). As a result, WF21 was shut down to allow the construction of
an improved and larger high-tech purification plant, called the Advanced Water Purification Facility
(AWPF). The new plant started operation in January 2008, which used a multi-barrier process involving
microfiltration (MF), RO and UV and hydrogen peroxide disinfection, and produced up to
265,000 m3/d of near-distilled quality water. Of this, approximately 132,500 m3/d is pumped into
injection wells to create a seawater intrusion barrier. Remaining 132,500 m3/d is pumped to OCWD
percolation basins in Anaheim where the GWRS water naturally filters through sand and gravel to the
deep aquifers of the groundwater basin as in Figure 7.13 and Figure 7.14 (overleaf).
Anaheim Infiltration
Santa Ana
River
Figure 7.13 Relative locations of treatment plant and infiltration facilities at Anaheim
7 - 20
Source:OCWD home page
Figure 7.14 Purified water from the GWRS is piped to OCW Ds percolation ponds in Anaheim,
California
The AWPF has many advantages over other solutions for water production, especially compared to
the old WF21 plant: the MF stage occupies less space, requires less maintenance and improves the
performance of the downstream process compared to the conventional pre-treatment used at WF21.
This project was accepted after a cost-benefit analysis that showed that the construction of the
AWPF was the most cost-effective solution. The reclaimed water was expected to be produced for
approximately 0.39$/m , whereas desalinated water would cost at least twice as much. Moreover,
the cost of the GWRS is less than the cost of treated imported water, and a study showed that
reclaimed water was 50% less energy-consuming than water importation.
The main purpose of the GWRS remains the recharge of the aquifer: it will be able to supply about
22% of the water needed to recharge the Orange County groundwater basin in the year 2020, which
is forecast to reach over 500 million m /y. Groundwater recharge will limit seawater intrusion and
thus, improve regional water quality by lowering salinity in the water supply, especially since this
high quality water will contain less dissolved solids than imported water from the Colorado River.
Furthermore, the GWRS will be used to reduce peak-flow under wet weather conditions and
the excess flow can be diverted through the GWRS. As a result, there is no immediate need for
a new ocean outfall, which is beneficial both from an economic and environmental point of view
(Mediterranean Wastewater Reuse Working Group, 2007).
7.2.11 Tokyo Metropolitan, Japan
2 3
In Tokyo, municipal sewerage service covers almost the whole area (2,187km ) and 5.5 million m
sewage is treated in a day. Tokyo Metropolitan Government (TMG) is now promoting the reuse of
wastewater for toilet-flushing by area-wide water recycling system. In this system, the secondary
effluent of municipal sewer system is treated by tertiary or advanced process and reclaimed water is
supplied to buildings for toilet-flushing use.
In 1984, a model business of area-wide water recycling system was started, which supplied
reclaimed wastewater to commercial buildings in Shinjuku for toilet-flushing use (Figure 7.15).
7 - 21
B u s in e s s B u ild in g s
D is c h a r g in g th e K a n d a R ive r
Source:Tokyo Metropolitan Government webpage
Figure 7.15 Schematic of recycling system in Shinjuku
This project is the first milestone of area-wide water recycling system in Japan. Now, 4,000 m of
secondary effluent is treated by rapid sand-filtration system in Ochiai Wastewater Treatment Plant
and supplied to 28 high-rise buildings. This type of area-wide recycling system is continuously
3
introduced into bay side redeveloped area. In 2006, approximately 3 million m of reclaimed water
(daily average amount was 8,400 m3) was produced at three STP and supplied to
129 buildings in five areas and two more areas will be added into supply plan. To promote this type of
water reuse further, TMG asks owners of buildings to install dual pipe systems when they construct
large buildings having a certain scale.
In addition, Ochiai STP also discharged tertiary treated wastewater by rapid sand-filtration system
to urban rivers (Meguro River) to the amount of 110,000 m3/day in 2005. Reclaimed water is also
distributed to artificial streams or ponds in adjacent parks (after RO treatment), industries,
incineration plants of domestic waste, a railway company, and tanks for fire fighting use. In order to
improve colour and odour of reclaimed water, TMG had developed a reclamation system with
"Ozone-resistant membrane . This system is composed of pre-ozonation, bio-filtration, ozonation
and micro-filtration after secondary treatment (Yamada, et al).
7.2.12 Restoration of Meguro River, Japan
The Meguro River, which flows through a residential area in Tokyo, had been abandoned by residents
due to the decreasing flow of water and increasing pollution with an unpleasant colour and odour
due to ever increasing urbanization since the Meiji Period. In order to restore river water quality
and biodiversity, the TMG used highly treated effluent from the Ochiai Water Reclamation Centre to
discharge into the river. Located very close to the sub-centre of the Shinjuku area, the Ochiai Water
Reclamation Centre is environment-friendly and thoroughly controlled as a water reclamation centre
surrounded by residential districts.
7 - 22
The treatment area includes most of Nakano-ward and a part of Shijuku-ward, Setagaya-ward,
Shibuya-ward, Suginami-ward, Toshima-ward and Nerima-ward, totalling 3,506 ha in area.
The treatment units of the reclamation centre include grit chamber and primary sedimentation tank as
preliminary and primary treatment, activated sludge process (ASP) as secondary treatment and A2O
process for nutrient removal, sand and membrane filtration and UV radiation as tertiary treatment.
The schematic of the sequence of various treatment units of the Ochiai Water Reclamation Centre is
presented in Figure 7.16.
Figure 7.16 Sequence of treatment units in Ochiai Water Reclamation Facility

for wastewater reclamation
The highly treated water (Table 7.7) is discharged for restoration of streams in Meguro River and
other two rivers, which nearly dried up in the southern downtown area of Tokyo.
Table 7.7 Average influent and effluent water quality for the Ochiai Water Reclamation Facility
Intake water Discharge Water Regional water

Parameters
Low stage High stage High stage quality standards
BOD 5 (mg/l) 220 190 1 25 or below

COD (mg/l) 92 92 7 -
TN (mg/l) 31.7 27.9 11.5 30 or below
TP (mg/l) 3.7 3.0 1.5 3.0 or below
Source: Tokyo Metropolitan Government
Some parts of the treated water is used effectively for flushing water in toilet in buildings of
Nishi-shinjuku and Nakano-sakaue districts. The generated sludge is pumped through pressure
pipelines to Tobu sludge plant for treatment. With the drastic improvement in water volume and
quality, various living species have returned to the Meguro River. The condition of the Meguro River
before and after restoration is shown in Figure 7.17 (overleaf).
7 - 23
Source:Tokyo Metropolitan Government

Figure 7.17 Condition of Meguro River (a) before and (b) after the restoration using
reclaimed wastewater
Many insects and small animal populations have been re-established, and fish such as
Japanese trout, striped mullets and gobies also returned to the river after the introduction of highly
treated water. The biodiversity and environmental amenities have thus, been restored effectively
with wastewater reuse.
7.2.13 Road Washing and Subway Coach Cleaning, Republic of Korea
Around 16.07 billion tons of treated water is produced annually from 4 sewage treatment plants
(Jungnang, Nanji, Tancheon, Seonam) in Seoul. Out of this amount, around 48.7 million tons are
reused and Seoul is planning further to extend the scope of reusing as in Figure 7.18.
Source:Tokyo Metropolitan Government, Bureau of Sewerage webpage

Figure 7.18 Water from Jungnang sewage treatment plant reused for road cleaning
7 - 24
Around 16,546,000 tons of treated water from Jungnang sewage treatment plant is used as cleaning
or wiping water every year within the plant. About 19,000 tons is provided to be used for cleaning
roads outside the plant. Every year 82,000 tons of water from the plant is used at nearby subway
coach depot for cleaning of coaches as in Figure 7.19.
Source:Tokyo Metropolitan Government, Bureau of Sewerage webpage

Figure 7.19 Highly treated sewage used at subway coach depot for cleaning
7.2.14 Ground Cooling, Japan
In Japan, reclaimed wastewater has been recycled widely for non-potable urban applications such
as toilet flushing, landscape irrigation, cleaning roads and snow melting. The government policy
of "Sewerage Vision 2100 suggested creating sound water cycles by using reclaimed wastewater
effectively. In this respect, attention has focused on a new way of using reclaimed wastewater;
sprinkling it on roads for heat island mitigation as in Figure 7.20 (overleaf).
The term "heat island refers to urban air and surface temperatures that are higher than nearby rural
areas. Heatstroke is one of the impacts caused by the heat island. "The Policy Framework to Reduce
Urban Heat Island Effect was set in March 2004 including countermeasures such as: reduction of
anthropogenic heat; urban surface improvement to regain natural cooling effect of soil and plant
evapotranspiration; improvement of urban structure with green and water network to reduce the heat
from the city; and promotion of energy saving life. Sprinkling reclaimed wastewater or other unused
water on roads in urban areas is one of the means of improving urban surface in summer.
7 - 25
Source:Yamagata et al., 2008
Figure 7.20 Road sprinkling with treated wastewater
As a pioneer, treated wastewater is sprinkled on the water retentive pavement that can store
water inside paving material at Shiodome Land Readjustment District (Shio Site) in Tokyo. Research
projects have been carried out there on the heat island mitigation by sprinkling reclaimed wastewater
on roads. Treated wastewater from plants using advanced processes such as biological filtration,
ozonation, or microfiltration, is used for spreading on the roads (Yamagata, et al, 2008).
It was observed that sprinkling treated wastewater on water retentive pavement decreased the road
surface temperature by 8 degrees during the daytime and by 3 degrees at night and the road surface
temperature was decreased to same level as that on planting zones. Especially, the decrease of road
surface temperature continued all the night by sprinkling water in the evening.
7.2.15 Singapore NEWater
The island of Singapore suffers from serious issues of water scarcity, as Singapores domestic
resources only meet about 50% of its needs and purchases water from nearby Malaysia. Water
reuse has always been an important component of Singapores water management: reuse of tertiary
quality effluents for industrial activities began in the early 1970s. Nowadays, water recycling is part of
the governments "Four Taps Strategy to ensure a sustainable water supply by diversifying its water
resources: imported Malaysian water, seawater desalination, collection and treatment of local
surface run-off and water reuse.
Singapores Public Utility Board (PUB) manages the nations water resources. In 1998, the
PUB launched a joint initiative to determine the suitability of reclaimed water, which underwent
advanced treatment processes of multi-barriers filtration and ultraviolet (UV) disinfection as a source
of raw water for drinking water production.
7 - 26
A 10,000 m3/d demonstration plant was built in 2000, and its successful performance resulted in the
launch of the NEWater project. At that time, two full-scale plants were launched within one week of
each other: Kranji (40,000 m 3/d) and Bedok (32,000 m 3/d) as in Figure 7.21.
MALAYSIA
JtfM fUV
Source:Mediterranean Wastewater Reuse Working Group, 2007

Figure 7.21 Map showing location of NEWater facilities in Singapore
In 2001, PUB officially named "NEWater the recycled water produced by the reclamation plants.
In 2003, potable and non-potable production of NEWater was officially opened with direct supply
3
from three NEWater plants at Bedok and Kranji with a combined capacity of 72,000 m /day. In 2004
and 2007, two new reclamation plants were opened. They are Seletar (24,000 m 3/d) and Ulu Pandan
(116,000 m 3/d) respectively.
Most of the NEWater is used for non-potable applications in the wafer fabrication/ microelectronics
industry. Concerning indirect potable reuse (IPR) (through recharge of the freshwater catchment
reservoirs) it consists currently of 1% of the total volume of water consumed daily. The NEWater
produced is blended with the raw water in the surface reservoirs. Then this water undergoes
conventional water treatment to produce drinking water. Only a small part (1%) of tap water contains
diluted, blended and treated NEWater. Two programs have also been undertaken to assess the
quality of water being produced. They are Sampling and Monitoring Program (SAMP) and Health
Effects Testing Program (HETP).
7.3 GUIDING PRINCIPLES FOR INDIA
Though the possibilities of using treated sewage for various uses in other parts of the world are
inspirational, still a blanket adoption in India needs to be tempered with local factors of affordability,
sustainability and above all public acceptance. Moreover, though there are exotic quality
guidelines brought out for specific applications, the inheritance of these may not be pragmatic in that
some of the parameters mentioned there are not easily decipherable leave alone being carried out.
7 - 27
Moreover, each situation needs to be evaluated on its own and beyond the secondary treatment, all
technologies are necessity driven are discussed hereunder and much less the treatment
chain is utility purpose driven. As such, there is a need to have a set of guidelines for the
mentioned reuse prospects.
7.3.1 Agriculture
7.3.1.1 Key Principles
Following key principles should be paid attention before deciding use of treated sewage for agriculture:
a) Being an agrarian economy, this is a very compelling use for India, but should never be used for
edible crops or plants that produce millets, etc.
b) The use of untreated sewage for whatever form of agriculture leads to a situation where the
treated sewage entering another basin from its parental basin creates issues of water rights and
as far as possible, inter basin transfer of such reuse are not to be encouraged
c) Agricultural use being more pertinent in rural settings, local sewage is best treated with
stabilization ponds followed by maturation ponds
d) Rotational crop pattern shall be investigated for an all the year round utilization and designed
such that the runoff of treated sewage in summer is minimized
e) As far as possible, manual direct handling shall be avoided and field channels are better suited
as compared to sophisticated drip irrigation etc
f) The discharge standards for disposal on land is prescribed by the MoEF are mentioned
in Chapter 5 of Part A manual
g) Specific limitations on individual parameters when the treated sewage is to be considered for
irrigation are addressed herein
The quality of water for irrigation is determined by the effects of its constituents both on the crop and the
soil. The deleterious effects of the constituents of the irrigation water on plant growth can result from
(i) direct osmotic effects of salts in preventing water uptake by plants,
(ii) direct chemical effects upon the metabolic reactions in the plant and
(iii) any indirect effect through changes in soil structure permeability and aeration.
The suitability of the irrigation water is judged on the basis of soil properties, quality of irrigation water
and salt tolerance behaviour of the crop grown in a particular climate. The water quality ratings along
with the specific soil conditions recommended are shown in Table 7-8 (overleaf).
These limits apply to the situations where the groundwater table is always at 1.5 m below the ground
level. The values have to be reduced by half, if the water table comes up to the root zone.
7 - 28
Table 7.8 Water quality ratings
Perm issible limit o f Electrical

Crop to be
Nature o f soil Conductivity o f w ater for safe
grown
irrigation (m icro-m hos/cm )
Deep black soils and alluvial soils

Semi-Tolerant 1,500
having a clay content more than 30%
Fairly to m oderately well drained soils Tolerant 2,000
Heavy textured soils having a clay

Semi-Tolerant 2,000
content of 20-30%
Soils well drained internally and

Tolerant 4,000
having good surface drainage system
Medium textured soils having a clay

Semi-Tolerant 4,000
content of 10-20%
Soils very well drained internally and

Tolerant 6,000
having good surface drainage system
Light textured soils having a clay

Semi-Tolerant 6,000
content of less than 10%
Soils having excellent internal and

Tolerant 8,000
surface drainage
If the soils have impeded internal drainage either on account of presence of hard stratum,
unusually high amounts of clay or other morphologic reasons, the limit of water quality should again be
deliberately reduced to half. In cases where canal irrigation exists during the lean period, treated
sewage of higher electrical conductivity could be used.
7.3.1.2 Osmotic Effects
When water is applied for cultivation on land, some of it may run off as surface flow or be lost
by direct surface evaporation, while the remainder can be infiltrated into the soil. Of the infiltrated
water, a part of it can be for consumptive use, and part is held by the soil for subsequent
evapotranspiration and the remaining surplus percolates or moves internally through the soil.
The water retained in the soil is known as the soil solution and tends to become more
concentrated with dissolved constituents as plants take relatively purer water. An excessive
concentration of salts in the soil solution prevents water uptake by plants. Table 7-8 mentions the
permissible levels of electrical conductivity (EC) and hence, total salts in water for safe irrigation
in the four types of soils. It may be pointed out that good drainage of the soils may be a more
important factor for crop growth than the EC of the irrigation water, as leaching of soils results in
maintaining a low level of salt in soil solution in the root zone.
7 - 29
7.3.1.3 Toxic Effects
Individual ions in irrigation water may have toxic effects on plant growth. Table 7-9 lists some of the
known toxic elements and their permissible concentration in irrigation waters when continuously
applied on all soils and also when used on fine texture soils for short terms.
Table 7.9 Maximum permissible concentration of toxic elements in irrigation waters
Maxim um perm issible concentration (mg/l)

Elem ent On all soils in continuous For short term use of
use or acidic soils textured alkaline soils
Alum inium Al 1 .0 2 0 .0
Arsenic As 0.1 2 .0
Beryllium Be 0.1 0.5

Boron B 0.5 1 .0
Cadm ium Cd 0 .0 1 0.05

Chrom ium Cr 0 .1 0 1 .0
Cobalt Co 0.05 5.0

C opper Cu 0 .2 5.0
Iron Fe 5.0 2 0 .0
Lead Pb 5.0 1 0 .0
Lithium Li 2.5 2.5

M anganese Mn 0 .2 0 1 0 .0
Molybdenum Mo 0 .0 1 0 .0 1
Nickel Ni 0 .2 0 2 .0
Selenium Se 0.005 0 .0 1
Vanadium V 0 .1 0 1 .0
Zinc Zn 2 .0 1 0 .0
Source: Environment Studies Board, 1973, CPHEEO, 1993
Many of these are also essential for plant growth. The suggested values for major inorganic
constituents in water applied to land are presented in Table 7.10.
Table 7.11 presents the suggested limits for salinity in irrigation waters.
7 - 30
Table 7.10 Suggested values for major inorganic constituents in water applied to the land
Impact on the land

Problem and Related Constituent
increasing
No problem Severe
Problem
Salinity
Conductivity of Irrigation water

< 0.75 0 .7 5 -3 .0 0 > 3.00
(millimhos/cm)
Permeability
Conductivity of Irrigation water

< 0.50 < 0.50 < 0.20
(millimhos/cm)
Sodium absorption ratio (SAR) < 18.0 1 8 .0 -2 6 .0 26.0
Specific Ion Toxicity (from root absorption)
Residual Sodium Carbonate (RSC), (meq/l) < 1.25 1 .2 5 -2 .5 > 2.5
Sodium (Na, %) (A) (A) (A)
Chloride, meq/l (B) (B) (B)
142.00
Chloride, mg/l < 142.00 > 355.00
-355.00
Boron, mg/l < 1 1 -4 >4
Specific Ion Toxicity (from foliar absorption, sprinklers)
Sodium (Na, %) (C) < 40 (C) 40 - 60 (C) > 60
Chloride, meq/l <250 2 5 0 - 1,000 > 1,000
Miscellaneous
N 0 3( mg/l) for sensitive crops (D) (D) (D)
pH 6 .5 - 8 .5
Source: IS: 10500

Note :
(A) - No guidelines laid down, but increasing concentration affects soil structure and permeability
(B) - No guidelines laid down, but may have direct toxic effect with sodium
(C) - No guidelines laid down, but these are recommended values
(D) - No guidelines - it is an essential plant nutrient, but excess may delay the maturity of seed
growth in some plants.
7 - 31
Table 7.11 Suggested limits for salinity in irrigation waters
Crop Response TDS mg/L EC, mhos/cm
No detrim ental effects will usually be noticed 500 0.75
Can have detrim ental effect on sensitive crops 5 0 0 - 1,000 0.75 -1 .5 0
May have adverse effects on m any crops 1 ,0 0 0 - 2 ,0 0 0 1 .5 0 -3 .0 0
Can be used fo r salt tolerant plants on perm eable soils

2 ,0 0 0 -5 ,0 0 0 3 .0 0 -7 .5 0
with careful m anagem ent practices
7.3.1.4 Sodium Hazard
In most normal soils, calcium and magnesium are the principal cations held by the soil in replaceable
or exchangeable form. Sodium tends to replace calcium and magnesium when continuously
applied through irrigation water. An increase of exchangeable sodium in the soil causes deflocculating
of soil particles and promotes compaction, thereby impairing soil porosity and the water and air
relations of plants.
The sodium hazard of irrigation water is commonly expressed either in terms of percent soluble
sodium (PSS) or sodium adsorption ratio (SAR).
(7.1)
where the cations are expressed as meq/l.
Generally the sodium hazard of soil increases with the increase of PSS or SAR of irrigation
water and exchangeable sodium percentage of the soil. The maximum permissible value of PSS in
irrigation water is 60. Where waters with higher PSS values are used, gypsum should be added
to the soil occasionally for soil amendment. SAR values greater than 18 may adversely affect the
permeability of soils.
7 - 32
7.3.1.5 Residual Sodium Carbonate
Hazardous effect of sodium is also increased, if the water contains bicarbonate and carbonate
ions in excess of the calcium and magnesium. In such cases there is a tendency for calcium and
magnesium to precipitate as carbonates from the soil solution and thereby increase in the relative
proportion of exchangeable sodium. Values of residual sodium carbonate (RSC) less than
1.25 mg/l are considered safe and above 2.5 mg/l as unsuitable.
RSC = (CO32- + HCO3-) - ( Ca2+ + Mg2+) (7.2)
where all ionic concentrations are expressed as mg/l. However, it has been witnessed in some
arid locations that after the micro irrigation and spray irrigation on land, the bicarbonate salt of
Calcium precipitates as its carbonates due to incremental water loss and heating from sun rays.
In sensitive locations as lawns in recreational areas, it may be better to convert the bicarbonate to
chlorides by acidification if needed. The effect of potassium on soil is similar to that of sodium,
but since the concentration of potassium is generally quite small in irrigation waters, it is often
omitted from consideration.
7.3.1.6 Organic Solids
While stable organic matter improves porosity of soil, thereby facilitating aeration, an excessive
application of unstable organic matter would lead to oxygen depletion in the soil. Depositing of
sediments especially when they consist primarily of clays or colloidal material may cause crust
formations, which impede emergence of seedlings. In addition, these crusts reduce infiltration with
the consequent reduction of irrigation efficiency and less leaching of saline soils.
7.3.1.7 Other Considerations
Soils are usually well buffered systems. The pH is not significantly affected by application of
irrigation water. However, extreme values below 5.5 and above 9.0 will cause soil deterioration.
Development of low pH values in soils promotes dissolution of elements such as iron, aluminium or
manganese in concentrations large enough to be toxic to plant growth. Similarly, water having high pH
values may contain high concentration of sodium, carbonates and bicarbonates, the effect of which
has been discussed earlier.
Chlorides and sulphates are toxic to most crops in high concentrations. Ordinarily, the detrimental
effects of salinity on crop growth become perceptible first. Excessively high or low temperature in irrigation
water may affect crop growth and yields. A desirable range of water temperature is from 12 to 30C.
7.3.1.8 Design and Management of Sewage Farms
Optimum utilization of sewage in agriculture means the complete and judicious use of its three main
components, viz., water, plant nutrients and organic matter on the farms in such a way that (a)
the pathogenic infection is neither spread among the farm workers, nor among the consumer of
sewage farm products, (b) the groundwater is not contaminated, (c) there is maximum output per
unit volume of sewage, (d) there is no deterioration of the soil properties and (e) none of the three
components are wasted.
7 - 33
7.3.1.9 Management of W ater in Sewage Farming
The principle to be borne in mind in irrigation management is to irrigate only when it is required and
only to the extent it is required by the crop. The water requirement depends on the soil type, the crop
and the climate. The water requirement (cm) of main soil types to be wetted to a depth of 30 cm
required by most of the crops is given in Table 7.12.
Table 7.12 Water requirements (cm) to wet different soils to a depth of 30 cm
No. Soil Requirement No. Soil Requirement

1 Sandy 1.25 4 Clay Loam 6.25
2 Sandy Loam 2.50 5 Clayey 7.50
3 Loam 5.00
Water requirement of crops vary with the duration of their growing season and the amount of
growth in unit time. Details for some of the Indian crops that can be grown on sewage farms are
given in Table 7.13.
Table 7-13 Water requirements of crops
Growing Total water Optimum

No. Crops
period, (days) requirement ,cm) pH range
1 Soybean 1 1 0 -1 2 0 37.50 6 .0 - 8 .5
2 Mustard 120-140 37.50-55.00 6 .0-9.5
3 Sunflower (kharif) 1 0 0 -1 1 0 37.50 6 .0 - 8 .5

4 Sunflower (rabi) 1 1 0 -1 2 0 87.50 6 .0 - 8 .5
5 Barley 88 35.25 6 .5-8.5
6 Cotton 202 105.50 5.0-6.05

7 Jowar 124 64.25 5.5-7.5
8 Maize 100 44.50 5.5-7.5
9 Linseed 88 31.75 5.0-6.5
10 Rice 98 104.25 5.0-6.0
11 Milling Varieties of sugarcane 365 237.50 6 .0 - 8 .0
12 Wheat 88 37.00 5.5-7.5
7.3.1.9.1 Hydraulic Loading
The elements to be considered in determining hydraulic loading are the quantity of effluent to
be applied, precipitation, evapotranspiration, percolation and runoff. For irrigation systems, the
amount of effluent applied plus precipitation should equal the evapotranspiration plus the amount of
percolation. In most cases, surface runoff from fields irrigated with sewage effluent is not allowed or
must be controlled.
7 - 34
The water balance.
Precipitation + Sewage application = Evapotranspiration + Percolation
Seasonal variations in each of these values should be taken into account by evaluating the water
balance for each month as well as the annual balance. The irrigation requirement of any crop is
not uniform throughout its growing period. It varies with the stage of growth. For example grain
crops require maximum irrigation during the time of ear-head and grain formation. Sugarcane
requires more frequent irrigation from about the sixth or the seventh month onwards. In case of
fruit trees the irrigation has to be stopped during their resting period. If the irrigation is not given at
critical growth stages of the crop, it results in lower yields.
The water requirement of crop at different stages of growth can be determined either directly
(gravimetrically) or indirectly by use of tensiometers or irrometers or gypsum blocks. Normally, when
there is about 50% depletion of available moisture in the soil, irrigation is recommended. The crop
plants themselves show signs of moisture stress. One has to be always on the lookout for such
first symptoms to determine the need for irrigation. Some plants like sunflower also serve as good
indicators of stress symptoms. Sunken screen pan evaporimeter could also be used for estimating
use of water by crop plant and scheduling irrigation.
The extent of irrigation depends on the depth of irrigation to be given and volume of water required for
wetting the soil to the required depth. If tensiometers or gypsum blocks are embedded at the required
depths, they would indicate the stage when the soil at that depth is saturated. Nearly about 70% to
80% roots of most crops are found in the first 30 cm of the soil. Some may go deeper to the next
30 cm. Normally, in irrigating medium type of soil it is wetted to about 30 cm depth or a little more.
If the figures for water requirements for crops as mentioned in Table 7.13 are to be satisfied, much
higher hydraulic loadings have to be applied since a portion of sewage after its passage through the
soil is carried away by the sub-soil under drainage system. The extent of desirable percolation rate
depends upon the salinity of the irrigation water. The applicable hydraulic loadings of settled sewage
are therefore dependent upon the type of soil and the recommended rates are given in Table 7.14.
Table 7.14 Recommended hydraulic loadings
Hydraulic Loading Hydraulic Loading

No. Soil No. Soil
(cum/ha/day) (cum/ha/day)
1 Sandy 200 - 250 4 Clay Loam 5 0 -1 0 0
2 Sandy Loam 150 -2 0 0 5 Clayey 3 0 -5 0
3 Loam 1 0 0 -1 5 0
Sewage conforming to the norms should be applied to the soil by strip, basin or furrow irrigation, Wild
flooding should not be adopted. Sprinkler irrigation could be used for adequately treated sewage. The
distribution channels should be properly graded to avoid ponding and silting. It is advisable that the
main distributary channel is lined.
7 - 35
7.3.1.9.2 Organic Loading
Values of 11.0 to 28.0 kg/ha/day of organic loading in terms of BOD 5 is needed to maintain a static
organic matter content in the soil that helps to condition the soil by microorganisms without
solid clogging. Higher loading rates can be managed depending on the type of system and the
resting period. When primary effluent is used, organic loading rates may exceed 22.0 kg/ha/day
without causing problems.
7.3.1.9.3 Irrigation Interval
Resting periods for surface irrigation can be as long as 6 weeks, but is usually between one and two
weeks during which, the soil bacteria break down organic matter and the water is allowed to drain
from the top few centimetres, thus restoring aerobic condition in the soil. It depends upon the crops,
the number of individual plots in the rotation cycle and management consideration.
7.3.1.10 Management of Soil
A well-planned programme of crop growth and harvesting can help to maintain a soil receptive to
effluent application. Crop uptake of nutrients followed by removal of the crop from the field
increases the capacity of the land for removal of nutrients from the next effluent application. It is
necessary that the soil is given rest for about 3 to 4 months every alternate or third year preferably in
summer months. This can be achieved if the farm is designed on the basis of water requirement in
the winter season. After the harvest of the crop, the soil may be opened up by deep ploughing and
cultivated appropriately to make it as porous and permeable as possible before the
next crop is raised.
The maintenance of soil oxygen level is very important as it is required for root respiration and a
number of biological processes in the soil. Refilling of oxygen in the pores in the surface layers of soil
depends upon the reestablishment of contact of the soil with the atmosphere. This process can be
accelerated by suitable cultural practices and by providing sufficient irrigation intervals. It is therefore,
desirable that an intercultural operation is followed as soon as the soil condition allows working after
every irrigation. It should always be seen that the soils of sewage farm should have a surplus of
oxygen than that normally required in the ordinary farm because the soil oxygen has to perform an
additional job of satisfying the BOD of sewage.
The intercultural operation following one or two irrigations is all the more necessary in the case of
clayey soil. In areas where rainfall is low, it is desirable to flood the soils with irrigation water at least
once a year to leach down the salts accumulated in the soil. If the soil salinity and alkalinity pose
a serious problem, amendment of soil with the required quantity of gypsum should be carried out.
Subsoil drainage is very important. Poor drainage should be improved by installing underground
drains. Sewage farm fields must be laid out in accordance with the natural slope of the terrain to
eliminate the irregularities of distribution.
On sewage farms, no sewage should be allowed to flow beyond the farm boundaries. With this in
view, protection banks are arranged along the lowest lying boundaries of each crop rotation field.
7 - 36
7.3.1.11 Nutrients Loading
Sewage contains 26-70 mg/1 of nitrogen (N), 9-30 mg/l of Phosphate (P2O5) and 12-40 mg/l or even
more of potash (K2O). The recommended dosages for N, P and K for majority of field crops are in
the ratio of 5:3:2 or 3 respectively. The figures for N, P, and K contents of sewage on the other hand
show that sewage is relatively poor in phosphates. Excess potash is not of significance, but a relative
excess of nitrogen affects crop growth and development.
Crops receiving excessive dosage of nitrogen show superfluous vegetative growth and decrease
in grain or fruit yield. The phosphate deficit of sewage, therefore, should be made good by
supplementing with phosphate fertilizers, the extent of phosphate fortification depending upon the
nature of crop and its phosphate requirements. As the availability of phosphate is low in the
irrigation water it would be desirable to apply the required quantity of phosphatic fertilizer at the
time or even (about a fortnight) before the sowing or planting of the crop.
Even when sewage nutrients are balanced by fortification, irrigation with such sewage may
supply excessive amount of nutrients resulting in waste or unbalanced growth of plants with adverse
effects on yields. It may therefore be necessary to dilute the sewage. Dilution also helps in
reducing the concentration of dissolved salts and decomposable organic matter in the sewage thus,
decreasing hazards to the fertility of the soil. It is desirable to limit the BOD and total suspended solids of
sewage to be disposed on land for irrigation, as per relevant standards. There is a need to take caution
on describing nutrient supply capacity of sewage particularly in the case of availability of phosphorus
because there is a possible conversion of available phosphorus in unavailable mode in the presence of
heavy metals present in the sewerage. This happens commonly in high as well as low pH soils.
7.3.1.12 Land Requirements for Hydraulic and Nitrogen Loadings
The field-area requirement for farming based on the hydraulic loading rate is calculated by:
A = [3.65 Q/L] (7.3)
where
A= Field-area in hectares
Q= Flow rate in cum/day
L= Annual liquid loading, cm/year
For loading of constituents such as Nitrogen
A = [0.365 CQ/Lc ] (7.4)
where
C= Concentration of the constituents, mg/l.

Lc = Loading rate of the constituent, kg/ha/year.
7 - 37
7.3.1.13 Alternative Arrangement during Non-irrigating Periods
During rainy and non-irrigating seasons, sewage farm may not need any water for irrigation. Even
during irrigating season, the water requirement fluctuates significantly. Hence, satisfactory alternative
arrangements have to be made for the disposal of sewage on such occasions either by storing the
excess sewage or discharging it elsewhere without creating environmental hazards. The following
alternatives are generally considered:
a) Provision of holding lagoons for off-season storage. They enable irrigation of a fixed area of land
to varying rates of crop demand. They may also serve as treatment units such as aerated or
stabilization lagoons, provided the minimum volume required for treatment is provided beyond
the flow-balancing requirement.
b) Provision of additional land where treated sewage is not required on the main plot of land
c) Discharge of surplus treated sewage to river or into sea with or without additional
treatment. Combining surface discharge facilities with irrigation system is quite common and
often quite compatible.
d) Resorting to artificial recharge in combination with an irrigation system where feasible.
7.3.1.14 Protection against Health Hazards
Sewage farms should not normally be located within 1 km of sources of centralized water supply,
mineral springs in the vicinity, where water bearing layers prevail; or on areas with groundwater
levels less than 2 m below the surface. Measures should be taken to prevent pollution of artesian
water. Sewage farms must be separated from residential areas by at least 300 m horizontal distance.
The public health aspects of sewage farming should be considered from the viewpoints of exposure
of farm workers to sewage and that of the consumers to the farm products.
Evidence is on the increase to show that labourers working on the sewage farms suffer from a
number of aliments directly attributed to handling of sewage. In view of this it is desirable to disinfect
sewage and where feasible mechanize sewage farm operation.
Sewage of individual enterprises engaged in the processing of raw material of animal origin or
hospitals, bio-factories and slaughter houses should in addition be disinfected before they are taken
to the sewage farms. Agricultural utilization of sewage containing radioactive substances is to be
guided by special instructions.
The staff of sewage farms must be well educated in the sanitary rules on the utilization of sewage
for irrigation as well as with personal hygiene. All persons working in sewage farms must undergo
preventive vaccination against enteric infections and annual medical examination for heliminthoses
and be provided treatment if necessary.
Sewage farms should be provided with adequate space for canteens with proper sanitation,
wash-stands and lockers for irrigation implements and protective clothing. Safe drinking water must be
provided for the farm workers and for population residing within the effective range of the sewage farms.
7 - 38
All farm workers should be provided with gum boots and rubber gloves, which must compulsorily be
worn while at work. They should be forced to observe personal hygiene such as washing after work
as well as washing before taking food. The use of antiseptics in the water used for washing should
be emphasized. The farm worker should be examined medically at regular intervals and necessary
curative measures enforced.
Cultivation of crops that are eaten raw should be banned. Cultivation of paddy in bunded fields
is likely to give rise to sanitation problems and hence is undesirable. Growing of non-edible
commercial crops like cotton, jute, fodder, milling varieties of sugarcane and tobacco would be suitable.
Cultivation of grasses and fodder legumes, medicinal and essential oil yielding plants like
menthal and citronella may be allowed. Cultivation of cereals, pulses, potatoes and other crops that
are cooked before consumption may be permitted, if sewage is treated and care is taken in handling
the harvests to ensure that they are not contaminated. Cultivation of crop exclusively under seed
multiplication programmes would be advantageous as these are not consumed. As an additional
safeguard, sewage irrigation should be discontinued at least two months in advance of harvesting
of fruits and berries, one month for all kinds of vegetables and a fortnight for all other crops. Direct
grazing on sewage farms should be prohibited.
7.3.2 Guiding Principles Farm Forestry
Much of the provisions in Section 7.3.1 shall apply here also except that the SAR and RSC criteria
may not be of serious importance. Besides, the non-water needs in rainy periods are to be borne in
mind for diverting the treated sewage away from the farm forestry. It will be a better proposition to
carry out all treatments at the STP itself and not split between STP and farm.
7.3.3 Guiding Principles - Horticulture
Same as in Section 7.3.2 above, except that the TDS limit shall not exceed the TDS limit of the
groundwater at any time and even if the RSC limitation is met, the alkalinity to be moved from
bicarbonates to chlorides or sulphates to prevent scaling of the tender leaves and petals in high
summer and also choking the soil pores by evaporation of the temporary hardness.
7.3.4 Guiding Principles - Toilet Flushing
Considering that the Indian water closets when flushed can sprout and splash the flush
water above the rim and onto the foot rest areas, it is necessary that such reuse shall be only after
activated carbon and ultra filtration membranes. It shall not be made mandatory in layouts and confined
condominiums and multiplexes and encouragement and persuasion shall be adopted, than a
collision course or mandating it which is not justifiable by any means for if nothing else,
sentimental reasons which rule high in Indian way of life. Similarly, small layouts being mandated to
provide STP is to be viewed as decentralized sewerage and the sustainability of these by the
proposed number of plot owners shall be assessed before sanctioning them, as otherwise, the policy
of septic tanks on-site followed by twin drain shall be encouraged as a practical possibility. In any
case, small layouts shall not be forced to erect reuse practices as absence of proper O&M can only
create a mini epidemic of sorts.
7 - 39
7.3.5 Guiding Principles - Industrial and Commercial
The reclaimed water from the sewage renovation plant of M/S MFL is reported to have been
demonstrated for its quality by the engineer drinking it himself before the team of the World Bank
during 1995. However, it shall not be accepted as an endorsement of drinkability. All the same,
It should be accepted as a statement of the capability, in the country to build a plant of such
advanced technology and encourage similar widespread uses in other industrial sectors for
non-human contact reuse. Industrial reuse of treated sewage includes the following:
Once through cooling water
Recirculating evaporative cooling water
Boiler feed water
Non-human contact process water
Irrigation of landscape around industrial plants
Once through Cooling Water:
In addition to recommended surface water discharge standards, > 1 mg/l residual chlorine can serve
the purpose (US EPA 2004).
Re-circulating or Evaporative Cooling Water:
In addition to the once through cooling standards, additional criteria are salt build-up that is
discussed in the following section. Additional treatment is usually provided to prevent scaling,
corrosion, biological growths, fouling and foaming (US EPA 2004).
Boiler Feed Water:
It requires extensive treatment to reduce hardness and even demineralization. Hence, RO or ion
exchange process with suitable pre-treatment are required to achieve boiler feed water quality for
high pressure boilers.
Process Water:
It depends on the quality of process water required by specific industry on a case-by-case basis.
Irrigation and Maintenance of Landscape around Industrial Plants:
Please refer the guiding principles discussed in above sections.
7.3.5.1 As Cooling Water
Reuse as cooling water is one of the most common industrial applications of reclaimed treated
sewage. Typical guidelines for cooling water quality are given in Table 7.15 (overleaf) and may be
used where specific requirements are not given.
7 - 40
Table 7.15 Cooling water quality guidelines
No. Parameter/Condition Recommended value

(A)-ln make-u p water
6 .8-7.0 (variation less than 0.6 units
1 pH
in 8 hours
Average TDS value (with variation + Cycles of concentration in re
2
25% permissible on 8 hour average) circulating water
3,000 mg/l 2 .0
1 ,0 0 0 mg/l 3.5
500 mg/l 6 .0
3 Oil & grease Absent
4 BOD (5day, 20C) Less than 5.0 mg/l
5 Chlorides (Cl) Less than 175 mg/l
6 Ammonia No appreciable amount
7 Caustic alkalinity Absent
8 Methyl orange alkalinity (as C a C 03) Less than 200 mg/l
(B)-ln re-circulating water
9 Silica (As S i0 2) Less than 150 mg/l
Not to exceed solubility limit in re
10 Phosphates, sulphates
circulating water
Foam not to persist more than 1
11 Alkyl Benzene Sulponate (ABS) minute after 10 seconds of vigorous
shaking of re-circulating water
Langelier index at skin temperature
12 0.50.1
of heat exchange surface
13 Ryzner Stability Index 6.0 to 7.0
Source:CPHEEO, 1993
To determine the quality and quantity of water required for reuse in a cooling system, where an open
re-circulating system is adopted for air conditioning cooling water, the amount of water to be kept for
re-circulating in the system is approximately 11 litres/min for every ton of refrigeration capacity when
the temperature drop is 5C in the cooling tower. For such a situation, the water lost in evaporation
(E) is about 1% of the re-circulating water.
Windage loss (W) is of the order of 0.1 to 0.3% of the recirculating water when mechanical draft towers
are used, but increases to 0.3 to 1.0% for atmospheric towers. Blow down requirement (B) is estimated
from the following equation if the maximum permissible cycles of concentration (C) are known
C -1
where, B, E and W are all in lpm.
For trouble free operation and minimum use of water quality control chemicals in the recirculating
water, the cycles of concentration are generally kept at 2.0 to 3.0 and, in no case, more than 4.0 in
cooling towers where reclaimed water is used.
7 - 41
The quality guidelines for cooling water are included in Table 7 15. Hence, for a 100-ton air-condi
tioning plant recirculating 1100 litres/min of water with a temperature drop of, say 10C through a
mechanical draft tower where cycles of concentration are to be restricted to 2 .0
E = 2% x 1100 = 22 litres/min
W = 0.2% x 1100 = 2.2 litres/min
The total make-up water requirement thus equals 44.2 litres/min (= 22 + 2.2 + 20) or 63.4 m3/day for
24 h working of a 100-ton plant.
Similarly, if 3.0 cycles of concentration are permissible, the total requirement of make-up water
reduces to 47.7 m 3 /day for a 100 ton plant.
When cycles of concentration equal 3.0, the various stable constituents (e.g. chlorides) in
make-up water are theoretically increased by a factor of 3.0 in the re-circulating water. If the
concentration of various constituents in the make-up water lies within the range of values given in
column (A) to (F) of Table 7.16 the corresponding concentration in the recirculating water can be
readily estimated. For example, if Cl is 60 mg/l in the make-up water, they will increase to 180 mg/l in the
re-circulating water. However, the pH of the re-circulating water cannot be estimated in this manner.
The assumption is frequently made that in the absence of phenolphthalein alkalinity, the pH of the
water leaving the cooling tower will be between 8.0 and 8.3, due to elimination of free carbon dioxide
in the tower. Sometimes, for other reasons, a lower or higher pH may be observed. Thus knowing the
pH, the concentrations of calcium, alkalinity and total dissolved solids in the re-circulating water and
the temperature in the hottest part of the system, one can determine the Langelier index and Ryzner
stability index and the tendency of the water to scale or corrode. Assuming that the recirculating
water shows the tendency for deposition of scale, reduction in hardness and in alkalinity is the usual
means of control. Since nothing can be done to reduce temperature, reduction in total solids would
not have much effect on the Index
For this reason, partial zeolite softening (by blending the softened water with by-passed hard water),
plus acid feeding if required for reduction of alkalinity provide a relatively simple and flexible means
of preventing excessive scaling in this type of installation.
The blending ensures a certain amount of hardness in the water, which is useful to protect against
corrosion of ferrous heat exchanger surfaces. The acid treatment (using H2SO4) depends for its
functioning on the fact that calcium and magnesium sulphates are much more soluble than the
carbonates, with the usually adopted dosages and the cycles of concentration obtaining in the
system, calcium sulphate concentrations obtaining in the system.
Calcium sulphate concentrations are well below the solubility limit. Similarly, calcium phosphate is
also kept within the solubility limit.
7 - 42
Automatic dosing and control equipment is normally not provided in plants in India. The clear
water storage tanks helps to maintain uniformity of quality of water pumped to the cooling towers.
Storage ensures that pH, total dissolved solids, etc., do not vary much from hour to hour and the wide
variations in inflow quantities are balanced out.
Pre-chlorination is done as the water enters the coagulation tanks, while post-chlorination is mainly
in the form of periodic shock doses to control lime and algal growths. The latter are likely to form
owing to the presence of nitrates and phosphates in the treated water and the warm and
sunny climate of India.
A typical flow sheet for making sewage water fit for reuse as once through cooling water is
given in Figure 7.22.
Source:CPHEEO, 1993
Figure 7.22 Flow sheet for treatment of municipal sewage for reuse as cooling
tower make-up water
For reuse as make up water in cooling systems, the treatment processes given earlier in Figures 7-1 to
7-6 are to be evaluated and suitable scheme evolved. The removal of ammonia by air stripping is not to
be used as this leads to air pollution issues. Instead biological nitrification-denitrification could be used.
Table 7.16 (overleaf) gives an illustrative example of the change in water quality as fresh municipal
water becomes sewage and is gradually renovated for reuse as cooling and process water.
Where nitrates and phosphates in the make-up water are necessary to be reduced, the
biological treatment given to sewage at the secondary stage can itself be modified to include
nitrification-denitrification and the addition of alum or ferric done in the final settling tank or add on
tertiary high lime treatment with recarbonation is opted to precipitate phosphates.
If high lime is used, it will also knock out silica in proportion to mg and can be enhanced in removal
by adding dolomite to increase the Mg content.
7.3.5.2 As Boiler Feed Water
Reuse as boiler feed water may require additional treatment over that required for cooling purposes.
As boiler feed, the quality of water depends on the boiler pressures at which steam is to be raised.
The higher the boiler pressure, the purer the water required.
7 - 43
Table 7.16 Water quality changes as freshwater becomes sewage and is gradually treated for
reuse (illustrative example)
Water quality at different treatment steps

Fresh Raw After After After
After DS
Item municipal domestic biological coagulation softening &
and DM
water sewage treatment and filtration chlorination
(A) (B) (C) (D) (E) (F)
pH 7.6-7 .8 7.15-7.65 7.2-7 .8 7.1-7.3 7.1-7.2 =7.00

Total
Hardness mg/l 35-40 120-160 120-160 120-170 40 (a) As arising
as C a C 0 3
M.O.
110-180
Alkalinity mg/l 40-45 125-200 125-200 110-180 As arising
(b)
as C a C 0 3
Chlorides
15-20 60-130 60-120 60-130 60-130 As arising
mg/l, as Cl
Sulphates mg/l
1.5-2.5 1 0 -2 0 10-15 15-25 15-25 As arising
as S 0 4
Phosphates Traces -
6-16 3-10 0 .2 - 0 .5 0 .2 - 0 .5 Nil
mg/l as P 0 4 0.1
Nitrates mg/l
1 .0 -2 .0 1.0-3.0 13-19 13-19 13-19 As arising
as N 0 3
Silica mg/l as
8-24 10-24 10-24 1 0 -2 0 1 0 -2 0 As arising
S i0 2
Dissolved 850 850
80-500 800-1,350 600-1150 < 500
solids mg/l 1,350. 1,350
Suspended
5-10 350-450 15-30 Nil. Nil. Nil
solids mg/l
Turbidity
5-10 Turbid 1 0 -2 0 2.0-3.0 2.0-3.0 2.0-3.0
S i0 2, Units
BOD, mg/l 0.1-1.5 200-250 6 -1 0 1 .0 - 2 .0 1 .0 - 1 .5 Nil
COD, mg/l 1 .0 -2 .0 350-500 150-270 150-270 100-180 < 70

Bacteriologic
al quality (as
Safe Unsafe Unsafe Safe Safe Safe
per coliform
standards)
Specific
700
conductance
a) Softened water is blended with un-softened water to give a final hardness of 40 mg/l as in fresh
municipal water.
b) Alkalinity is reduced by acid treatment just prior to use in cooling towers. This increases
sulphate content somewhat since H2S0 4 is used.
7 - 44
Table 7.17 gives an indication of the water quality required for low and medium pressure boilers.
Method of test
Characteristic Requirement for Boiler pressure
(Ref to clause
Up to 2.0 2.1 to 3.9 4.0 to 5.9 IS :3550 IS :3025

Nm/m 2 Nm/m 2 Nm/m 2 (a) (b)
Feed water
a) Total hardness (as C a C 0 3)
1 .0 1 .0 0.5 16.1
mg/l, max
b) pH Value 8.5 to 9.5 8.5 to 9.5 8.5 to 9.5 8
c) Dissolved oxygen mg/l, max 0.1 0 .0 2 0.01 25
d) Silica (as S i0 2) mg/l, max 5 0.5 16

Boiler water
a) Total hardness (of filtered
Not Detectable 16.1
sample) (as C a C 03) mg/l, max
b) Total alkalinity (as C a C 0 3)

700 500 300 13
mg/l, max.
c) Caustic alkalinity (as

350 200 60 15
C a C 0 3)mg/l, max
1 1.0 to 1 0 .0 to 10.5 to
d) pH value 8
1 2 .0 1 2 .0 11.0
e) Residual sodium sulphite

30 to 50 20 to 30 21
(as Na2S 0 3) mg/l
f) Residual Hydrazine (as N2H4) 0.1 to 1 0.1 to 0.5

0.5 to 0.3 26
mg/l (if added) (if added)
g) Ratio Na2S 0 4 caustic alkalinity 2 0 .2

Above 2.5
(as NaOH) and 15
Or
Ratio N aN 0 3 total alkalinity (as 48
Above 0.4
NaOH) and 13
a) Methods of test for routine control for water used in Industry
b) Methods of sampling and test (Physical and Chemical) for water used in Industry.
For low pressure boilers, the quality of water required is more or less similar to that for reuse in
cooling purposes. For high pressure systems, the treatment required can be quite substantial as can
be seen from the water requirements given in Table 7.18 (overleaf).
7 - 45
Table 7.18 Requirements for feed water, boiler water and condensate for
water - tube boilers (drum type)
Requirements for boiler pr<assure Method of test to See also

Characteristic
mm/m 2 (in the drum^ Clause No. of Clause
Above IS :3550 IS: 3025
pH 6.0-7 .8 7.9-9 .8 9.9-11.8
11.8 (a) (b)
Total hardness(1) Nil Nil Nil Nil 16.1
pH value 8.5-9.5 8 .5-9.5 8 .5-9.5 8 .5-9.5 8 2 . 1 . 1 (a)
Oxygen, 0 2 mg/l, max 0.01 0.005 0.005 0.005 25 2 . 1 . 1 (b)
Iron + copper mg/l, max 0 .0 2 0.01 0.01 0.01 (2 ) 2 . 1 . 1 (c)
Silica (S i0 2) max 0.05 0 .0 2 0 .0 2 0 .0 2 (3) 2 . 1.1 (d)
Oil mg/l, max Nil Nil Nil Nil 59

Residual hydrazine(2) 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 26
Conductivity (3) 0.5 0.3 0.3 0.3 7
Oxygen consumed (4) Nil Nil Nil Nil 51
a) Methods of Test for routine control for water used in Industry

b) Methods of sampling and test (Physical and Chemical) for water used in Industry.
(1) as (CaCO3) mg/l, max, (2) as (N2H4) mg/l, max, (3) after passing through cation exchange column at
25 deg C microsimens/cm, max, (4) in 4 hours mg/l, max
A typical flow sheet given in Figure 7.23 includes tertiary treatment in the form of chlorination,
chemically aided sedimentation, sand filtration, sodium zeolite softening followed by cation exchange
on hydrogen cycle, degasification and weak base anion exchange to give practically complete
demineralization. Where the TDS is higher, technologies such as RO, evaporation, etc., should also
be considered.
Figure 7.23 Flow sheet for reuse of treated sewage as high pressure boiler feed when TDS in
sewage is very low in the region of about 300 mg/l or so
7.3.5.3 As Process Water
In order to keep treatment to a minimum for reuse as process water, one benefits from identifying
those processes that must have freshwaters of high quality and those processes that can do with
reclaimed water of low quality (e.g. similar in quality to that used for cooling or for low pressure
boilers). This is done by having a multiple quality water supply system within the industry. Indian
standards for quality tolerances for a few industrial uses are noted below:
IS: 201 Water quality tolerances for the textile industry
IS: 2724 Water quality tolerances for the pulp and paper industry
7 - 46
IS: 3957 Water quality tolerances for ice manufacture
IS: 4251 Water quality tolerances for the processed food industry
IS: 4700 Water quality tolerances for the fermentation industry
It may be noted that generally all the processes in an industry do not require water of the relatively
high quality given in the above noted Indian Standards. There are always several unit processes
and operations where water of lesser quality can be tolerated. The issue of relevance in respect of
industrial use is the crucial factor of reducing the TDS to about 500 mg/l as compared to the typical
sewage value of 1,200 mg/l and above. This at some stage implies recourse to RO and the difficulty
of dealing with rejects. It will be better to allow the user to discharge it back in the sewer itself at an
appropriate location and charge an additional fee for the same, so that the practice will find a wider
acceptance and take off towards a real success. Further the example of increasing the treatment
capacity in the pre RO section to such a quantity that the bypassed stream before RO and the RO
rejects stream when blended will be able to hold the TDS to less than 2,100 mg/l, the permissible
value needs to be followed.
7.3.6 Guiding Principles - Fish Culture
Recognizing that Kolkata city is unique in having fish as an acceptable food and thus, the demand
being steady. Fish ponds otherwise referred to as pisiculture cannot be looked upon as a method of
stand-alone sewage treatment. However, treated / diluted sewage if used for pisiculture on the lines of
the on-going East Kolkata wetlands, this needs to be strictly monitored by Department of Health
and Department of Environment / SPCB and also the social acceptability.
7.3.7 Guiding Principles - Groundwater Recharge
At this point of time, the spread in the infiltration basins is fraught with many challenges as
dust control, algae problems and essentially silica ingress into groundwater, in addition to the
danger of the TDS and nitrate of applied sewage being higher than the TDS and nitrate of the
groundwater. Further, financial ability of local bodies may not support this expenditure, which does not
generate revenue except on a notional scale. On the contrary, if it is deep well injection on the
lines of the first version of the Orange County plant, where injection wells were driven to about
1 0 0 m below ground to prevent seawater intrusion in water short coastal area, can be encouraged
with appropriate safeguards.
7.3.8 Guiding Principles - Indirect Recharge of Impoundments
It is too early to embark on this till the results of the Bengaluru piloting are validated.
7.3.9 Guiding Principles - Indirect Reuse as Potable Raw Water Source
The indirect use of treated sewage has been going on in many ways and is detailed below.
The reason that indirect water reuse is not to be considered to pose a health risk is that the treated
wastewater benefits from natural treatment from storage in surface water and aquifers and is
diluted with ordinary river/ground water before abstraction to ensure good drinking water quality
(part of a multi barrier approach in the water safety plan).
7 - 47
The storage time provides a valuable buffer to measure and control quality (Source: http://www.
ciwem .org/policy-and-international/current-topics/water-m anagem ent/water-reuse/potable-water-
reuse.aspx).
7.3.9.1 Treated Sewage into Perennial Rivers
When sewage is treated and discharged into perennial flowing rivers and the blended river
water is drawn downstream of the point of such blending as raw water for treatment in public water
supply schemes. This is indirect potable use after blending. This is historical and ongoing all around.
However, of late, the organic load due to the discharged treated, partially treated and non point
sewage becomes in excess of the self purifying capacity of the river. Thus, the river water is not
actually freshwater. The water quality of Yamuna river for Agra water supply scheme requires to be
first treated in MBBR to purify the river water to a level as raw water for the downstream WTP. When
it passes through flowing surface water it has the potential disadvantages of contamination by human
and animal activities adding organic matter and waterborne pathogens unless the river stretch is
protected from such activities. The guiding principle in such cases for the ULBs will be to at least
intercept the sewage outfalls and provide adequate STPs and follow the recommended quality
criteria for the treated sewage as in Table 5.20 of Chapter 5 in Part A manual.
7.3.9.2 Treated Sewage into Non-Perennial / Dry River Courses
There are locations where the rivers are not perennial or almost dry throughout the year except
some monsoon runoff. In this case the discharged treated sewage sinks into the aquifer zone and is
extracted by infiltration wells or galleries. The advantage of direct dilution from surface water is
lost, but the additional purification in the soil and dilution from the aquifer water are happening. An
example is the case of the Palar river course in Tamilnadu. The surface water flow in this occurs
only for about a week if the monsoon is normal and if the water spills beyond the upstream
impoundments. The aquifer however supports the public water supply of over 30 habitations along
its dry tract of nearly 80 km before the sea. The partly treated sewage of the en route habitations
do reach this river course as intervals. So far, no epidemics have been met with. This may be due
to the above said additional purification in the soil and dilution by aquifer water. However, if these
are exceeded by the contamination load, there can be immediate health problems. The guiding
principle in such cases for the ULBs will be (a) to keep a check on the raw water quality from the
infiltration wells to detect sudden increase in contaminants and (b) at least intercept the sewage
outfalls and provide adequate STPs.
7.3.9.3 Treated Sewage into Surface W ater Reservoirs
This may occur when the surface water reservoirs receive the inflow from rivers and become
impoundments from which the raw water is taken for public water supplies. Here also, the same
position as in 7.3.9.1. would apply.
When it passes through reservoirs, it has the potential issues of evaporation losses and algae.
The algae creates taste and odour concerns and metabolic products of dead and decaying
organisms as precursors which on chlorination are suspected to cause Trihalomethanes.
7 - 48
Upon chlorination, the residuals of insecticides and fertilizers are referred to as Endocrine Disruptor
chemicals (EDCs) and this requires the use of Granular Activated Carbon filtration and sanitary
protection of the catchments.
The case of Hosur in Tamilnadu is an example. The Kelavarapalli river was impounded here to take
the raw water to the conventional WTP for the town. During 2004, the partial drought resulted in
reduced flow in the river and the impoundment water slowly concentrate with dead and living algae.
The conventional WTP could not treat the foul smelling coloured water and the high Lime and
carbonation technology had to be retrofitted into the WTP on an urgent scale as otherwise, the town
had to be evacuated. The cost of treatment jumped from Rs 4 to 14 per Kilo litre, but there was no
other option. The guiding principle in such cases for the ULBs will be to ensure sanitary protection of
the catchment, monitor the quality of the water entering the reservoir and keep contingency plans to
switch the WTP into an appropriate mode to meet the raw water quality and also keep a contingency
budget allocation for the increased O&M costs in such periods.
7.3.9.4 Treated Sewage into Conjunctive Uses in Surface W ater and Aquifer
Conjunctive use of surface water and aquifer water is also being practiced as a method of indirect
potable reuse.
Berliner Wasserbetriebe is reported to treat the 248 MLD of treated sewage to recharge surface
water lakes, and the surface water is in turn used to recharge aquifers through artificial infiltration
ponds and bank filtration by means of natural lakes.
The groundwater is stated to be then abstracted to supply 3.4 million people in Berlin with drinking
water without chlorination. A schematic depiction is shown in Figure 7.24.
Source: Chartered Institution of Water and Environmental Management (CIWEM) webpage
Figure 7.24 Depiction of aquifer recharge in Berlin
7 - 49
7.3.9.5 Treated Sewage into Soil Zone and Reuse as Industrial / Agricultural Raw Water
This is referred to as Soil Aquifer Treatment (SAT). This indirectly conserves freshwater,
which would have been otherwise used up in industry and agriculture. The Chennai UNDP
studies established the technical and financial feasibility of treated city sewage to be applied on
spreading basin and the SAT water extracted from bore wells around the periphery for cooling needs of
petro-chemical industries some 20 km away is shown in Figure 7.25.
Chennai Soil Aquifer Treatment site Firmed up by the Peripheral Extraction Bore wells of the sam e Chennai Soil
UN D P and is shown as the Rectangular Layout Aquifer Treatment site
Figure 7.25 Chennai Soil Aquifer Treatment site firmed up by the UNDP
However, even after 2 decades, the proposal is yet to take shape.
This is due to public fear of such recharge getting into contact with nearby freshwater aquifers used
by the population and irreversibly contaminating them.
At the same time, similar schemes are successfully operated in many parts of the world for meeting
the agricultural water needs notably in Israel and USA, where the proximity to habitations issues
are not arising and engineered artificial sandy tracts are constructed amidst sand dunes. The issue
here is to that extent, the freshwater is conserved and hence, this is also an indirect reuse. The
guiding principle for ULBs in this case will be to ensure that such SAT is prima facie only after the
sewage is treated to the limits as in Table 5-20 of Chapter 5 in Part A manual and the availability of
a confined aquifer for purposes other than agriculture and industry.
In any case, an assessment of potential impacts on underlying groundwater aquifers shall be

determined comprehensively by extensive public consultation processes.
7 - 50
7.3.9.6 Treated Sewage Deep Well Injection as Seawater Intrusion Barrier
The seawater intrusion into inland coastal aquifers is a classic problem in many coastal locations.
This occurs mainly due to the extraction of the freshwater from the freshwater lens beyond the
safe yield limits. Once the seawater has intruded, this is not easy to be reversed. The Orange
County Water District example in California, USA is perhaps the first in the world during the 1970s to
demonstrate the use of tertiary treated, RO processed sewage to be blended with ground water and
injected into a series of such barrier wells. It is reported that there are over 600 such wells in USA on
the east and west coasts. The quality of the treated sewage before it qualifies itself to be considered
for such an injection is governed by many aspects like volatile and non-volatile organic compounds,
inorganic chemicals, Radionuclides and is typically with quality ranges as TDS of 44 to 416, chloride
of 8 to 60, sulphate of 5 to 148, Total Organic Carbon of 1 to 3 and pH of 7 to 8 (EPA-The Class
V Underground Injection Control Study, Volume 20, EPA/816-R-99-014, September 1999). Though
this may be technically possible, the issue is the costs involved in the extra treatment of Reverse
Osmosis (RO) and disposal of RO rejects into the sea after meeting the discharge limit in Table 5-20
of Chapter 5 in Part A manual In addition, the issues of consistent reliability of treated quality and
safeguards of system redundancies also arise. The other issue is the cost comparison between the
water conserved by such sea water intrusion barrier and that produced by sea water desalination
with the added cost of distributing it all over the habitation by piping. In the case of the conserved
water by seawater barrier injection, it is available for the user to extract it at his convenience right
in the aquifer where he lives. Thus, the guiding principles in the case of seawater barrier injection
option are primarily, public acceptance and the financial sustainability besides risk mitigation to get
over system redundancies.
7.3.10 Guiding Principles - Other Uses
These are already happening anyway and can be continued with appropriate safeguards, the
essentials being the adequate chlorination to maintain residual chlorine of 0.5 mg/l at the point of use
and the colour to be aesthetically acceptable especially while applying in public places.
7.3.11 Standard of Treated Sewage and its Uses
In addition to the guiding principles mentioned earlier the recommended treated sewage
quality as in Table 7.19 (overleaf) is proposed to be achieved for the stated uses. Hence, in
order to achieve the desired water quality, excess chlorination, granular activated carbon adsorption
/ ozonation and/or various kind of filtration including membrane are recommended. For recreational
impoundments for non-human contact, residual chlorine is not required so as to protect aquatic
species of flora and fauna.
However, for use in Wetlands, Wildlife habitat and Stream augmentation the recommended water
quality in Table 5.2 (of Chapter 5 in Part A manual) for inland surface water discharge suffice the
purpose. For uses in the construction industry like (a) Soil compaction, (b) Dust control, (c) Washing
aggregate the recommended water quality in Table 5-2 for inland surface water discharge guidelines
are sufficient. While for preparing concrete mix, the acidity < 50 mg/L as CaCO 3 , SO 4 < 400 mg/L,
TDS < 3,000 mg/L, Chloride < 500 mg/L respectively as in IS: 456 are to be considered.
7 - 51
Table 7.19 Recommended norms of treated sewage quality for specified activities at point of use
Landscaping, Horticulture & Agriculture

Vehicle crops
Toilet Fire Non-contact
Parameter Exterior Horticulture, Non Crops which are eaten
flushing protection impoundments
washing Golf course edible
raw cooked
crops
1 Turbidity (NTU) <2 <2 <2 <2 <2 AA <2 AA
2 SS nil nil nil nil nil 30 nil 30
3 TDS 2100
4 pH 6.5 to 8.3
5 Temperature C Ambient
6 Oil & Grease 10 nil nil nil 10 10 nil Nil
Minimum Residual
7 1 1 1 0.5 1 nil nil nil
Chlorine
Total Kjeldahl Nitrogen
8 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
as N
9 BOD 10 10 10 10 10 20 10 20
10 COD AA AA AA AA AA 30 AA 30
Dissolved Phosphorous
11 1 1 1 1 2 5 2 5
as P
12 Nitrate Nitrogen as N 10 10 10 5 10 10 10 10
Faecal Coliform
13 Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil 230 Nil 230
in 100 ml
14 Helminthic Eggs / litre AA AA AA AA AA <1 <1 <1
15 Colour Colourless Colourless Colourless Colourless Colourless AA Colourless Colourless
16 Odour Aseptic which means not septic and no foul odour
All units in mg/l unless specified; AA-as arising when other parameters are satisfied;
A tolerance of plus 5% is allowable when yearly average values are considered.
7-52
7.3.12 Public Education
Education is the key to overcoming public fears about a reuse system, particularly fears that relate
to public health and water quality. A broad, in-depth public relations programme and a demonstration
project are especially helpful when the reuse project is the first of its kind in the state.
7.3.13 Piping and Cross-connection Control
A residual chlorine > 0.5 mg/l in the distribution system is recommended to reduce odours, slime
and bacterial growth (US EPA 2004). It is crucial to be able to differentiate between piping, valves
and outlets that are used to distribute treated effluent or reclaimed water and those that are used to
distribute potable water. One method used for this purpose is colour-coding the components used to
distribute reclaimed water not intended for drinking water. Another method is to post areas such as
parks and yards with warning signs stating that the piped water there is not for human consumption.
The signages should be in all the major languages of the region.
7.4 LEGAL ISSUES
The legal rights over the sale and revenue issues of reclaimed water are an emerging issue and this
is addressed in Part C as a management aspect.
7 - 53
CHAPTER 8:DECENTRALIZED
Part A: Engineering SEWERAGE SYSTEM
CHAPTER 8: DECENTRALIZED SEWERAGE SYSTEM
8.1 DEFINITION
Decentralized sewerage system is defined as the collection, treatment, disposal / reuse of sewage
from individual homes, clusters of homes, isolated communities or institutional facilities, as well as
from portions of existing communities at or near the point of waste generation. Typical situation in
which decentralized sewerage management should be considered or selected include:
1. Where the operation and maintenance of existing on-site systems must be improved.
2. Where individual on-site systems are failing and the community cannot afford the cost of a
conventional sewage management system.
3. Where the community or facility is remote from existing sewers.
4. Where localized water reuse opportunities are available.
5. Where freshwater for domestic supply is in short supply.
6 . Where existing STP capacity is limited and financing is not available for expansion.
7. Where, for environmental reasons, the quantity of effluent discharged to the environment
must be limited.
8 . Where the expansion of the existing sewage collection and treatment facilities would involve
unnecessary disruption of the community.
9. Where the site or environmental conditions that require further sewage treatment or exportation
of sewage are isolated to certain areas.
10. Where residential density is sparse.
11. Where regionalization would require political annexation that would be unacceptable
to the community.
12. Where specific sewage constituents are treated or altered more appropriately at the
point of generation.
8.2 CHALLENGES IN SUSTAINING A CENTRALIZED SEWERAGE
A centralized sewerage de facto is perceived as an underground sewer system to collect the sewage
from all over a habitation and involves the challenges as described below.
8.2.1 Financial Sustainability
It implies a huge capital cost and mandates a full-fledged occupation of the coverage area to
generate the revenue for its upkeep. In practice however, in the peri-urban areas and rural
habitations, these are nearly impossible and the situation is escalating.
8- 1
8.2.2 Idle Volumes and Time in Conventional Sewerage
Invariably, the sewers as a convention are designed for the ultimate population some 30 years
away and the realization of the sewage volumes to use the designed sewer capacities results in idle
volumes and idle expenditures as in Figure 8-1 and the underground sewers laid there merely
become defunct with time and eventually go into repair. This is a non-productive expenditure in a
sense, implying that the investment could have been utilized elsewhere as brought out in a classical
illustration in Figure 8.1 .
Figure 8.1 Logistics of capacity building in sewerage provision in centralized planning and
decentralized planning of the collection and treatment facilities
8.2.3 Idle Investment in Conventional Sewerage
In conventional sewerage, the sewer sizes are also bigger and this brings in additional
redundancy as in Figure 8.2.
F ig ure 8.2 C o n c e p t o f ce n tra liz e d s yste m at left Vs. d e c e n tra lize d s yste m at right
8-2
For example, by considering the illustration in Figure 8-2, the map to the left shows the typical
conventional sewerage with all the sewers funneling to a single STP and the sector to the top right
is actually sparsely developed and the sewers are designed for a flow some 30 years hence. This
results in a situation where the manhole covers get stolen and people start using the manholes as a
virtual garbage bin, which in turn is compounded by rainfall and lead to a near complete choking of
the sewer system. The net result is, if and when the sector gets populated, a massive rehabilitation
programme of the sewer system becomes implied often leading to indiscriminate cutting open of the
roads. A further difficulty is the STP, which is grossly underutilized and the treated sewage quality
suffers due to prolonged hydraulic retention. By contrast, if we consider the same sector to be served
by a decentralized sewer system as in the map to the right, it can be seen that the above problems
are surmounted not only physically, but also financially investments are saved to begin with.
8.2.4 Problems of House Service Connections
It is also a fact that while the investment on provision of sewerage is usually met out of capital grant
funding, the cost of house service connections is to be met by the house owners and herein lies
another conflict. Whereas houses have not come up in some sectors, these house service
connections get time deferred and to that extent, repeated road cuts become a perpetual
affair over a long time. As and when the houses are built, service connection requests arise. An
approach that has been tried out is the provision of house service connection sewers even in the
beginning itself and blank it at the property boundary and connect it only when the house gets built
up and the applicant pays up the costs thereof.
Here again, it is a question of idle investment at start with no foreseeable return of the same on the
house service connection costs.
Another issue is surreptitious connections by house owners and the impracticality of checking each
and every such connection by the limited staff of the local body and may well be connivance also.
By opting for decentralized sewer system, first of all, the command area to be supervised for such
surreptitious connections get much smaller and the monitoring mechanism becomes effective.
8.2.5 Conflict of Levies for Recovering the Sewer Costs
Whereas the capital costs are mostly met out of grant funding, the O&M expenses are to be
generated by the local body at most times. The meagre revenues generated by taxes and water
and sewerage charges are too meagre to even break even in the local body accounts, leave alone
increasing the reserve funds. When an unwieldy coverage of a conventional sewerage is
implemented, the problem gets compounded all the more because the house service connections
do not keep pace and the revenues are meagre. Thus, even the cost spent on the house sewer
connections becomes a virtual write-off over a period of time.
8.3 CONCEPT OF DECENTRALIZED SEWERAGE
The decentralized sewerage concept implies localized collection and localized treatment of excreta
and sullage in micro zones within a major habitation, keeping it in tandem with densification and
progressively duplicating it, as and when other micro zones densify.
8-3
It will ensure that every micro zone owns up its excreta and sullage management and cannot
expect a faraway habitation to receive and inherit it a prospect, which will sooner or later lead to inter
conflicts and destabilize progress. Thus, the provision of both the collection system and treatment
can be made compatible to the pace of development by juxtaposing on-site sanitation as well in its
fold. The treatment systems of sewage in the on-site system and the off-site system are shown in
Figure 8.3 hereunder.
Figure 8.3 On-site and Off-site sewage treatment system

Note: There can be cases where both black and grey water can be treated together.
8.3.1 Advantages of Decentralized Sewerage
1. In general, prediction of sewage volumes is far easier in decentralized sewerage micro collection
areas and to that extent the design becomes realistic.
2. Flows in a decentralized sewerage are relatively smaller than conventional sewerage and this
implies that environmental damages from any mishaps are also minimal.
3. Given the smaller flows, the sewer sizes are also smaller and the depths of cut are also less thus,
making it easy to construct and maintain.
4. Additions of new service areas which are independent of the existing system and the need to
augment or enlarge the existing sewers and STPs are avoided.
5. The STPs are smaller and it is easier to find the reuse prospects nearby as compared to all the
sewage being treated in one far corner.
6 . It is also easier to layout return lines of treated sewage for use in medians, industrial supplies,
flushing far flung head manholes, etc.
7. The ecology of rivers, streams and receiving waters are better managed by smaller volumes of
discharges of treated sewage at multiple locations than one massive volume in a single location
and also if the single STP is out of order, the entire stretch of the water course is polluted.
8-4
8.4 TECHNOLOGIES OF DECENTRALIZED SEWERAGE
8.4.1 Simplified Sewerage
Simplified sewerage is a technology widely known in Latin America, but much less known in
Africa and Asia. It has been successfully demonstrated in the Orangi habitation of Pakistan (having a
population of about 7.50 lakh, where per capita water supply is about 27 lpd) and since adopted there
in situations similar to the status in the preamble here. Duncan Mara defines simplified sewerage
as "An off-site sanitation technology that removes all wastewater from the household environment.
Conceptually it is the same as conventional sewerage, but with conscious efforts made to eliminate
unnecessarily conservative design features and to match design standards to the local situation. The
simplified sewerage approach is now widely used. Figure 8.4 is one such example at Brazil as an
in-block system rather than - as with conventional sewerage - an in-road system.
Figure 8.4 Simplified sewerage as avoiding public roads unless actually required
The key feature of an in-block system is that sewers are routed in private land, through either back
or front yards. This in-block or back-yard system of simplified sewerage is often termed condominial
sewerage in recognition of the fact that tertiary sewers are located in private or semi-private space
within the boundaries of the condominium. These simplified sewers are laid at shallow depths, often
with covers of 400 mm or less. The minimum allowable sewer diameter is 100 mm, rather than the
150 mm or more that is normally required for conventional sewerage.
The relatively shallow depth allows small access chambers to be used rather than large expensive
manholes as in Figure 8-5, Figure 8 .6 and Figure 8.7 overleaf.
8-5
Source: Mara et al.
Figure 8.5 Pavement (sidewalk) simplified sewerage being installed in the

high-income area of Lago Sul in Brasilia in 1999
Figure 8 .6 Simplified sewerage in the footpath and main road free of manholes in
French Puducherry - early 20th century
Source:Mara et al., 2001

Figure 8.7 Junction chamber for simplified sewerage using larger diameter concrete
pipes, used in Guatemala
8-6
Part A : Engineering SEWERAGE SYSTEM
In regard to design, the basic procedures are the same as any hydraulics. For example, for serving
500 people with a water consumption of 80 lpcd and using a return factor of 0.85, the average daily
sewage flow will be 0.85 x 500 x 80 / 24 / 3600 = 0.4 lps.
Depending on the peak factor as given in Chapter 3, the design flow will be its multiplication and the
design will be as per Mannings formula as in Chapter 3. The design guidelines are available in
http://www.efm.leeds.ac.uk/CIVE/Sewerage/manual/pdf/simplified_sewerage_manual_full.pdf.
The long-term sustainability of simplified sewer systems can be ensured by a good partnership
between the community served by simplified sewerage and the sewerage authority along with the
following key factors:
1. Good design
2. Good construction
3. Good maintenance
4. An adequate, but affordable, tariff structure.
It is in item 4 that the success of the system resides and requires a public hearing and
acceptance, instead of taking the public acceptance for granted. Eventually, when the habitation
becomes fully developed, of course the conventional sewerage can still be incorporated in lieu of the
simplified sewerage.
8.4.2 Small Bore Sewer System
Small bore sewer system is designed to collect and transport only the liquid portion of the domestic
sewage for off-site treatment and disposal. The solids are separated from the sewage in septic tanks
or aqua privies installed upstream of every connection to the small bore sewers. Where conventional
sewers would be inappropriate or infeasible, this system provides an alternative. This system also
provides an economical way to upgrade the existing on-site sanitation facilities to a level of service
comparable to conventional sewers. Since the small bore sewer collects only settled sewage, it
needs reduced water requirements and reduced velocities of flow. This in turn reduces the cost of
excavation, material and treatment. This is also called as settled sewerage.
8.4.2.1 Components of the System
The small bore sewer systems consist of house connections, interceptor tanks, sewers, cleanouts
and manholes, vents and in some cases lift stations.
8.4.2.2 Suitability of the System
This system is suitable under the following conditions, where
1. Effluent from pour-flush toilets and household sullage cannot be disposed off on-site
2. Installation of new schemes is taken up, especially for fringe areas
8-7
3. A planned sequence of incremental sanitation improvements with small bore sewers as a first
stage is contemplated
4. Existing septic tank systems have failed or where there are a number of septic tanks requiring the
effluent to be discharged, but soil and ground water conditions do not permit such a discharge.
Each house sewer is usually connected to an interceptor tank, which is designed as a septic tank.
The optimum number of house sewers to be connected to an interceptor tank can be worked out for
each case. The effluent from the tank is discharged into the small bore sewer system, where flow
occurs by gravity utilizing the head resulting from the difference in elevation of its upstream and
downstream ends. The sewer should be set deep enough to carry these flows.
The diameter of sewer pipe shall be designed for incremental flows between successive
sections. First consider the available ground slope and choose a minimum of 100 mm sewer pipe
and use Mannings formula for pipes flowing full and find out the flow carrying capacity. If this is
lesser than the actual flow in that section, increase the pipe diameter in that section as needed.
Velocity is not a criterion.
Design decisions regarding the location, depth, size and gradient of the sewer must be carefully
made to hold hydraulic losses within the limits of available head. Minimum pipe diameter of 100 mm
is recommended. Maintenance of strict sewer gradients to ensure minimum self-cleansing velocities
is not necessary. The sewer may be constructed with any profile as long as the hydraulic gradient
remains below all interceptor tank outlet inverts. Ventilation is not necessary for small bore sewers,
if they are laid on a falling gradient. A vent cleanout to release air may be provided at every hump.
Profiles are shown in Figure 8 .8 (overleaf). An example on design calculation is also presented
in Appendix A.8.1.
8.4.3 Shallow Sewers
8.4.3.1 System Description
Shallow sewers are designed to receive domestic sewage for off-site treatment and disposal. They
are a modification of the surface drain with covers and consist of a network of pipes laid at flat
gradients in locations away from heavy imposed loads (usually in backyards, sidewalks and lanes
of planned and unplanned settlements). They are usually laid at a minimum depth of 0.4 m. Where
vehicular loading is present and the invert depth of sewer is less than 0 .8 m, a concrete encasement
is provided for the sewer.
8.4.3.2 Components of the System
The shallow sewer system, like the conventional sewer system consists of house connections,
inspection chambers, laterals, street collector sewers, pumping stations where necessary and
treatment plants. Low volume pour flush or cistern-flush water seal toilets are connected to the
inspection chamber by means of a 75 mm diameter sewer.
8-8
7 260
100(p ^
Top left - Schematic o f interceptor tank & sewer Vfwp
Top right - Cleanout structure to be provided
SCUM 230
:/b 1500
at humps for flushing as needed CLEAR SPACE 300
Right - Interceptor tank for above example
SLUDGE 560
3000
Figure 8 .8 Schematics of small bore sewer system

8-9
A vertical ventilation column of the same diameter is provided on the house connection. The
sullage water generated in the house is also connected to the inspection chamber directly when
water consumption is more than 75 lpcd. Where the water consumption is lesser and where grit
is used for cleaning purpose, it is connected through a grit/grease trap. Inspection chambers are
provided along the street collector sewers and along the length of the laterals at intervals not
exceeding 40 m. Usually one chamber is provided for each house. However two or more
houses may share a single inspection chamber. The chamber is provided with a tight-fitting RCC
cover. The laterals are of small diameter (minimum 100 mm) and of stoneware or concrete,
which are buried in a shallow trench. The minimum depth of pipe invert is 0.4 m. In general, they
have a straight alignment between inspection chambers and are suitably aligned around existing
buildings. They may even pass under property boundary walls and also under future building areas.
The inspection chamber however, is located is an open area. The street collector sewer has a usual
minimum diameter of 150 mm, however, 100 mm sewers may also be used if hydraulic capacities
permit. Where community septic tanks are provided at the exit of the lateral sewers, the
street sewers should be designed as small-bore sewers. The pumping stations should, as far as
possible, be avoided in such cases.
8.4.3.3 Design
The design procedure is as much the same as that of gravity sewer design in Chapter 3.
Shallow sewers are suitable where
1 . high density, weaker sections, squatter settlements (1 0 0 to 160 persons per hectare) exist
2 . adverse ground conditions exist and on-site disposal is not possible
3. sludge also has to be disposed off and where the minimum water consumption rate is 25 lpcd.
8.4.3.5 Limitations
Shallow sewerage system is suitable where adequate ground slopes are available. Since these
sewers are laid at flat gradients the solids are likely to get deposited unless flushed at peak flow
conditions. Otherwise, these sewers may get clogged and require frequent cleaning.
8.4.4 Twin Drain System
This is an integral twin drain on both sides of the road. The drain on house side receives the
sewage. The drain on road side is the storm water drain. It is in use in coastal areas of Tamilnadu
particularly in Tsunami affected habitations. The advantage is that even if the per capita sewage falls
to low quantities, say 28 lpcd as is still there in some cases, where water is scarce like in coastal
fishermen communities this can be adopted. The design of the drain with removable cover slabs
permits the daily scraping forward of sediments progressively by each house owner in the portion of
the drain before his premises to the destination treatment site, something that the other options
do not permit that easily.
8 - 10
8.4.4.1 Installation at Kolachel, Tamil Nadu
This is a decentralized sewerage and sewage treatment for Tsunami Rehabilitation for a population
of 2,000 and 350 dwellings and it is in use since July 2007 at Kolachel which is located near the
backwaters of Bay of Bengal in Tamilnadu. A schematic drawing of the self-contained system is
shown in Figure 8.9. The photographs are in Figure 8.10 and Figure 8.11
Figure 8.9 Schematic of the twin drain decentralized sewerage
8.4.4.2 Design Adopted for the System
1) The daily flow is 1,89,000 litres (350 houses - 6 persons per dwelling - 90 litres per head).
2) The septic tank was sized at 2 m x 0.9 m x 1.4 m liquid depth for cleaning at 3 year interval.
3) The up flow filter was sized at 0.7 m x 0.9 m x with floor depressed by 0.5 m.
4) The ablution water is about 6 litres/person/day.
5) The drains were designed for a velocity of 0.3 m/s to conserve depth of excavation.
6 ) The loading for oxidation pond design was 275 kg BOD/hectare/day.
7) The pond was designed for liquid depth of 1.5 m and sludge accumulation of 0.5 m.
8 ) The detention in maturation ponds was 3 days and was 1.5 m deep.
9) The facultative ponds were provided in two parallel modules of each 50% capacity.
10) The maturation ponds were provided in series with two modules of each 50% capacity.
11) The pond bottom was dense clay for 1.5 m and hence, lining was not needed.
12) The treated sewage was flowing out into the backwaters of the Bay of Bengal.
8.4.4.3 Performance of the System
The biochemical parameters of performance are given in Table 8-1.
8.4.4.4 Financial Aspects of the System
By way of comparison, the cost of the collection system starting from septic tank and up to the ponds
was only 38% of what would have been the cost for a conventional underground sewer system.
In respect of the O&M costs, the twin drain system is only 8 % of that for the conventional system.
This illustrates the relative sustainability of this system.
8 - 11
T o p : S e p tic ta n k u p flo w filte r u n d e r c o n s tru c tio n in b r ic k w o rk a n d as c o m p le te d

M id d le : T e rm in a l c h a m b e r & tw in d ra in u n d e r c o n s tru c tio n a n d as c o m p le te d
B o tto m : S ta b iliz a tio n p o n d a n d m a tu r a tio n p o n d a n d safe w a lk w a y a ll-r o u n d .
Source: M/s Kottar Social Service Society, Nagercoil and M/s Caritas India and M/s Caritas Germany
Figure 8.10 Twin drain system
Twin Drain with top perforated cover slabs for storm drain, S alt pan totally spoiled by Tsunam i
w av es overflowing on it and since reclaim ed to acco m m od ate th e S T P pond system
Source:M/s Kottar Social Service Society, Nagercoil and M/s Caritas Swiss
Figure 8.11 Another set up of twin drain system at Kodimunai
8 - 12
Table 8.1 Physico-chemical characteristics of the Kolachel System (Mean values)
No Location BOD COD SS TKN Total P
1 Septic Tank entry 1294 2565 4142 170 30
2 Up flow filter entry 702 1509 1450 111 24
3 Up flow filter outlet 399 1003 628 88 14
4 Grey water 362 615 359 28 16
5 Stabilization pond inlet 51 212 57 14 11
6 Stabilization pond outlet 31 144 42 10 8
7 Maturation pond 1 outlet 32 144 42 10 8
8 Maturation pond 2 outlet 23 124 38 7 6
In most of new layouts the septic tank and open drains on road sides for storm water are a matter
of routine and invariably the septic tank effluent is discharged into the drain which complicates the
environmental hazard in rainy seasons. The twin drain system can stall the pollution by containing
the septic tank effluents, which can be collected and provided with treatment. For new layouts, it will
be useful if the bye-laws can be strengthened to mandate the twin drain instead of the roads drain
alone, which is anyway mandated by the Town and Country planning act.
8.5 APPLICATION OF DECENTRALIZED SEWERAGE IN URBAN AREAS
It is not as though the decentralized sewerage is meant for peri-urban and rural settings alone. In fact,
it is as much applicable to even metropolitan centres as in the case of our major State capitals like
Chennai, Bangalore, Delhi, Ahmedabad, etc. except that the treatment is decentralized, but the
sewerage is conventional sewerage. This is understandable in these locations, but Trichy for example
where over the decades, a decentralized sewerage could have been evolved, but it has been a case
of the entire sewage going down to one far corner and the sewage from one side of the river Cauvery
being pumped to the other side 330 m across. While apparently this may appear paradoxical, it is not
so because the tiny Srirangam habitation from where the sewage is pumped across the major river, is
a highly revered and very densely populated religious centre and positioning a STP at Srirangam was
ruled out from public acceptance point of view. Hence, it has not been possible to decentralize as shown
in Figure 8.12 (overleaf).
The Cauvery and Coleroon (Kollidam) are, perhaps, the biggest rivers in South India.
Trichy (Tiruchirapalli) is situated on the banks of river Cauvery and the STP of the city is located on the
South Eastern corner of the city.
The sewage of the entire habitation between Cauvery and Coleroon rivers could have been routed
towards Coleroon river.
8 - 13
Top left - Trichy town of 150 km 2 area lying on both sides of the perennial river Cauvery
Top right - Panorama of the town illustrating the efficacy of decentralized sewerage
Bottom - Paradox of centralized sewerage over a century
Source: TWAD Board webpage
Figure 8.12 Historical sewerage system of an Indian city
However, the sanctity of the Srirangam town in this location is revered by the followers so highly that
STP was not acceptable by the public and hence, the entire sewage is pumped across the Cauvery
river to the existing STP. This is a case where decentralized sewerage, though technically justifiable
has to give way to public acceptance.
8 - 14
8.6 PUBLIC TOILETS AS DECENTRALIZED SEWERAGE
In effect public toilets are a further decentralization within decentralized sewerage in that it answers
the needs of the floating population in locations as market places, bus terminals and super markets.
These are a compelling necessity as the user is a stranger to the location, who may be passing through
it and may not know what to do and is unable to control the urge to relieve him or herself.
8.6.1 Norms for Public Toilet facilities with focus on attention to gender issues
Provision of public toilet facilities to meet the demands of opposite genders entering a toilet which is
not designated for the accompanying child should be given importance while designing these kinds
of facilities. Mostly the child caring facilities are provided in Womens toilet section and not generally
in Mens toilets section. Absence of such facility would put the men with difficulties, when they
required caring for the accompanying children and kids. Provision of dedicated toilets for differently
abled persons and transgender is also need to be taken care of while designing the public toilet
facilities. The General Norms for Public Toilets and norms for provision of sanitary facilities as
recommended by the Town and Country Planning Organisation (TCPO) in the Model Building
Bye-laws are given in Table 8-2 and Table 8-3 respectively.
Table 8.2 Norms for Toilets in Public spaces
On roads and for open areas @ every 1 km, including in parks, plazas,
open air theatre, swimming area, car parks, fuel stations. Toilets shall
Public Toilet
be disabled-friendly and in 50-50 ratio (M/F). Provision may be made
as for Public Rooms (Table 8.3).
Signboards on main streets shall give directions and mention the

distance to reach the nearest public convenience. Toilets shall have
Signage
m ulti-lingual signage for the convenience of visitors. Helpline number
shall be pasted on all toilets fo r complaints/queries.
Pay & use or free. In pay and use toilets entry is allowed on payment
Modes
to the attendant or by inserting coin and user gets 15 minutes.
The toilet should have both men and women attendants. Alternatively
M aintenance/ autom atic cleaning cycle covering flush, toilet bowl, seat, hand wash
Cleaning basin, disinfecting of floor and complete drying after each use can be
adopted, which takes 40 seconds. Public toilet shall be open 24 hours.
Table 8.3 may well ipso facto apply for transit stations like bus stations, markets and most
importantly road side users. The determination of the numbers for roadside toilet users can be
computed by considering the number of people transiting that road in the day time and providing the
toilets at strategic locations.
Toilets for transgenders can also be appropriately allocated as stand alone without clubbing with
gender based toilets and the doors opening directly into the vastness of the hall instead of a narrow
passage. Toilets for differently abled persons are easily constructed and identified and will almost
invariably have a western toilet, guide rails on both walls, water faucet for ablution and wash basins
at chair level.
8 - 15
Table 8.3 Norms for sanitary facilities in Public Toilets
No. Sanitary Unit For Male For Female (A)
One per 100 persons up to 400 Two for 100 persons up to

persons; for over 400 add at 2 0 0 persons; over 2 0 0 add
1. Water Closet
the rate of one per 250 persons at the rate of one per 100
or part thereof. persons or part thereof.
2. Ablution Taps One in each W.C. One in each W.C.
3. Urinals One for 50 persons or part thereof. Nil
4. Wash Basins One per W.C. and urinal provided One per W.C. provided
Note:
i) It may be assumed that two-thirds of the number are males and one- third females
ii) One water tap with drainage arrangements shall be provided for every 50 persons or part thereof
in the vicinity of water closet and urinals.
* At least 50% of female WCs may be Indian pan and 50% EWC
8.6.2 Off-Site Treatment
As these locations are amidst habitation, it should be possible to connect them to the existing
collection system, whether it is conventional sewerage or a decentralized sewerage or in its absence,
provide a collection tank duly covered and transfer the contents by a sewer lorry to the existing
disposal site/sites. In any case, on-site disposal of these public toilets shall be totally banned.
8.6.3 One-way See through Public Toilets
A key issue of public toilets amidst downtowns especially for women in software firms, etc. brings up
the security concerns which may be possible to be got over by the pay and use type and see
through mirror wall toilets reported to be in use abroad as in Figure 8.13 (overleaf). It shows the
view of the roadside from inside the toilet, thereby facilitating a much needed security for the lone
user in metros at odd hours.
8.7 COMMUNITY TOILETS AS DECENTRALIZED SEWERAGE
The community toilet is to be defined as a facility to be continuously used day in and day out by a
fixed number of users at public locations or residential locations, and where a reasonable control
over the number of users is possible.
Examples are those in economically weaker sections, educational institutions, sites of religious
centres situated away from the main habitation, whether used daily or seasonally or for clusters
of dwellings far away from sewerage and most important meeting locations, which are used in high
numbers by the population though infrequently.
8 - 16
Source: http://www.toxel.com/tech/2009/05/27/transparent-public-toilets-from-switzerland/
Figure 8.13 A toilet reportedly in Switzerland affording security to the user to be aware of the
surroundings through the one way mirror viewable from inside only
8.7.1 Norms
The norms for the number of seats, wash basins, etc., can be appropriated from the nearest
category as in the NBC for railway stations, hostels, educational institutions, which border on community
facilities. In respect of economically weaker sections, the design approach in Chapter 3 shall be
followed to assess the volume of sewage. The issues already discussed under public toilets in
respect to gender related and differently abled persons shall be considered here also. The
designs for community toilets, which also include a washing section and bathing section
have been developed for easy utility by the variety of users in common domain by the National
Institute of Design and needs to be considered for suitable adoption. Their designs of pre-fabricated
toilets and their networking, both in horizontal plane and vertical plane are worthy of adoption. The
problem arises in assessing the needs for fairs, festivals and public meetings in locations where
large number of people congregate though infrequently, like for example the foregrounds of Ana
Sagar in Ajmer. The Norms for Toilet facilities for infrequent events is given in Table 8.4 herein.
Table 8.4 Norms for Toilet facilities for infrequent events
Male Female
Patrons Toilets Urinals Sinks Toilets Sinks
(a) (b) (a) (b) (a) (b) (a) (b) (a) (b)
<500 1 3 2 8 2 2 6 13 2 2
<1000 2 5 4 10 4 4 9 16 4 4
<2000 4 9 8 15 6 7 12 18 6 7
<3000 6 10 15 20 10 14 18 22 10 18
<5000 8 12 25 30 17 20 30 40 17 20
(a)- Where alcohol is not available; (b)-Where alcohol is available
8 - 17
8.8 DEWATS
This is an abbreviation of Decentralized Wastewater Treatment System (DEWATS) and has been
assigned to a typical system of sewage treatment and resource utilization for greening in isolated
habitations. The generalized treatment sequence is shown in Figure 8.14.
Source: ISPIRATION webpage

Figure 8.14 Schematic treatment process of DEWATS technology
This system is addressed to isolated habitations, where there is a need for non-mechanized and
self-operating treatment technology given the premise that adequate land area is available and at
reasonable distance from the habitation itself. Another aspect will be to group the toilets or at least
bring the sewage from the various centres to the Dewats facility. The typical treatment units are:
a) Pre-treatment settler: retention time of about 2 hours; BOD reduction by about 30%
b) Anaerobic Baffled Tank Reactor: retention time of about 24 hours; BOD reduction by about 80%
c) Anaerobic filter: retention time of about 8 hours; BOD reduction by about 90%
d) Planted gravel filter: retention time of about 36 hours; BOD reduction by about 90%
e) Polishing pond.
These have been installed and commissioned in quite a few habitations in India and a compilation of
the facility at the earthquake ravaged place of Bhuj in Gujarat is shown in Figure 8.15. The treatment
process has its advantage of not dependant on mechanized units but requires relatively large areas
away from the habitation and vector propagation control in the planted gravel filters and ponds.
Source: ISPIRATION webpage

Figure 8.15 Typical DEWATS treatment plant components
8 - 18
Part A : Engineering SEWERAGE SYSTEM
8.9 RECOMMENDATIONS
The decentralization concepts and technologies in sewage management need to be systematically

investigated, with focus on its development and practical implementation in India. It may be borne
in mind that the approach adopted for decentralized sewage management system (DSMS) is area
specific and governed by number of issues and conditions prevailing, and also the methodology
adopted and is influenced by (i) technical aspects as covered in this chapter and (ii) financial
aspects, (iii) social aspects, (iv) environmental aspects, and (v) legal aspects that will be covered in
the part C of the manual. It needs to be realized that this aspect and programme of decentralized
sewerage is what the country needs urgently if the MDG is to be achieved especially in the
peri-urban, rural and outlying areas and habitations. Accordingly, the following recommendations
are brought up in deciding on implementing this.
1) As Incremental Sewerage - Decentralized Sewerage has an enormous significance by way of

incremental sewerage and sanitation especially in newly developing peri-urban and rural
settings, where conventional sewerage needs time to qualify itself physically and financially.
2) As a Combination of Collection System Options - It is the interim period from start of the layout
to such time that underground conventional sewerage will qualify itself that is the bane of all
environmental hazards of indiscriminate pollution. Ingenuity of a combination of decentralized
collection systems and incremented treatment capacity of the STP are the remediations for the
country as a whole.
3) Public Acceptance is the Key - However, with the mindset of the people that sewerage de facto
implies only to the underground conventional sewerage, any deviation from a conventional
system will require a public acceptance before implementation and as such, decentralized
sewerage is not an exception. The Srirangam case study is an ideal example. Any attempt in starting
a decentralized treatment there would have never seen the light of the day. This aspect must
not be underestimated and hence, the public consultation process shall be announced well in
advance in local media and repeated one more time giving notice of at least two weeks and
making the venue as local marriage hall or public hall with adequate space and hired chairs and
expenses being met by the local body. The technicalities are to be toned down and the benefits
and costs alone need to be cited elaborately and the opinion elicited. Understandably, it will not be
a full acceptance by all the habitation and there will be various cost recovery models thrown up for
example, built-up area based on; number of families based, history of residence in terms of years,
economically weaker sections, clusters, non-commercial Vs. commercial occupancies, etc., and
these are to be debated to bring the issues on hand to a reasonable level of acceptance. The
exercise needs to be repeated for a second time. At the end, if a consensus is reached, the
project can be considered forward and if it still eludes, the best is pose a conventional sewerage
system to JnNURM and await its turn.
4) Design of Collection System - With regard to design procedures of the collection systems, the
Mannings formula holds good whether it be a circular conduit or a drain.
5) Design of Treatment Plants - With regard to treatment, the guidelines in Chapter 5 will however,
apply as it becomes appropriate to each location.
8 - 19
Part A: Engineering CHAPTER 9: ON-SITE SANITATION
CHAPTER 9: ON-SITE SANITATION
9.1 OVERVIEW OF ON-SITE SANITATION
The areas that are not served by piped sewer systems can adopt on-site systems. The treatment can
be either on-site or off-site like in the case of septage management. These are interim measures till
a decentralised or a full sewerage system is implemented.
It is strongly recommended that the town planning agencies / authorities / ULB / metropolitan
development authorities earmark adequate spaces for laying of sewer lines, construction of SPS
and STP.
9.1.1 On-site Sewage Treatment System
Unlike off-site centralized treatment (sewerage), on-site sewage treatment features individual and
distributed treatment. The on-site treatment system includes a wide range of facilities, such as a
basic sanitation facility like a pit latrine, a simple sewage treatment system that consists of a septic
tank and a soak pit for anaerobic treatment, and an advanced facility like Johkasou that treats
sewage by sophisticated methods.
In an urban area with high population density, an STP intensively treats sewage collected by pipes
laid over a wide area. The on-site system treats sewage near the source.
Accordingly, the latter uses various kinds of treatment technologies according to treatment scale
and the surrounding conditions. Sludge generated in each on-site treatment facility is collected and
treated separately.
9.1.2 On-site Classification
This subsection summarizes the classification of toilets and on-site treatment methods as well as
their features.
9.1.2.1 Historical
The historical pit latrines are rather rudimentary sanitation facilities atleast serving to contain
the spread of faecal organisms from the night soil and bringing about interactions between soil
organisms and feacal organisms in the pit. These have since been upgraded to various types as in
Figure 8.3. In respect of community toilets, installations such as Dewats have also come up.
9.1.2.2 Simple Treatment Method
A septic tank system is a typical on-site treatment facility that consists of a septic tank and a soak
pit and employs two technologies: the first is anaerobic treatment and the second is the methods of
letting treated sewage penetrate the ground.
It shows stable performance, provided that the water temperature is kept suitable to digestion and
the soil has good permeability.
9- 1
However, the septic tank reduces BOD up to 50%, so if underground penetration is impossible
due to high groundwater levels, rocky strata, non-availability of land for soak-pit, another method
must be employed to hygienically treat sewage passing through the septic tank such as anaerobic
filter and contact aeration. When this system is applied to an urban area with high population
density, care must be taken not to have a negative effect on the surrounding environment.
9.1.2.3 Advanced Treatment System
Conventional septic tanks system, if properly designed and with proper septage removal frequency
can effectively remove about 40-50% BOD and 50-70% TSS. However, due to partial treatment
and associated health hazards the effluent can only be discharged into soak pits. Due to recent
groundwater pollution related episodes, unavailability of space for soak pits and under rocky strata,
soak pits are avoided and the effluent is commonly discharged to open stormwater drains. Hence,
it is causing another type of pollution menace such as unsightly conditions, eutrophication, odour,
vector and water related diseases.
Some of the interim solutions are the improved design of septic tanks such as anaerobic baffled
reactor or the post treatment of septic tank effluents by anaerobic filters. Both configurations can
partially solve the pollution related problems by increasing the overall BOD removal to more than
70%. These systems can lessen the burden of organic pollution without any extra energy cost. The
capital cost of these systems may not be more than 20-30% of the conventional septic tank cost.
Nevertheless, due to the limitation of anaerobic sewage treatment, these systems cannot bring down
the BOD and TSS levels up to the national effluent discharge standards. Hence, alternate solution
could be the aerobic type post treatment such as contact aeration. This system can bring down
effluent BOD to less than 30 mg/l and TSS to less than 50 mg/l but at the expense of electrical power
requirement for 24^7 operating air blower with standby equipment and standby power.
One such system is the Japanese type Johkasou system. This system is an integrated septic
tank-anaerobic filter-contact aeration-final settling tank and effluent disinfection facility.
However, due to higher cost considerations, these systems may be affordable only in very fragile
environment. These systems have also been upgraded for even nitrogen removal by providing internal
recirculation. The detail of these systems is provided in the following sections. There are many other
similar package treatment systems elsewhere that can also be used.
9.2 THE PROHIBITION OF EMPLOYMENT AS MANUAL SCAVENGERS AND THEIR

REHABILITATION ACT, 2013
The aforesaid act was notified by the GOI in September 2013. The act shall come into force from
6 th December 2013. The text of the act as in the Gazette is in Appendix A 1.1. The time frame
specified under the Act for the fulfilment of responsibilities and carrying out certain activities are
mentioned in Appendix A 1.2.
9.3 INTERIM MEASURES
There are various on-site systems which can be used but with a caution to prevent ground water and
surface water pollution due to indiscriminate disposal of sewage from these on-site systems.
9-2
9.3.1 Public and Community Toilets
A public toilet, a kind of common toilet installed in stations and on streets, is open to everyone rather
than specified users. In contrast, a community toilet has limited users such as residents. These
common toilets are controlled by local governments, residents, or private sector organizations. A
common toilet normally has two sections: one is for males and the other is for females. In addition,
another section special to persons in a wheelchair (unisex) is sometimes provided.
In general, an on-site common toilet includes a special sewage treatment facility such as a septic
tank. The flow rate of sewage to be treated is derived from the total number of users based on how
many toilet bowls are installed and how frequently they are used.
The toilet is equipped with a water supply unit, a ventilator, and a lighting device. Figure 9.1 shows
example arrangements of faeces, urine, and hand-washing units.
Figure 9.1 Examples of common toilet arrangements
Example of design
The following shows an example of estimating the number of public toilet users.
Basic Setting
Number of toilet bowls [c]: 10 (in total)
Total number of users [n]
n = 16c
= 16 x 10 = 160
9.3.2 Mobile Toilet
Mobile toilets are temporarily installed in places where there is no toilet, such as shelters during
natural disaster, venues for events, and construction sites, or where the number of existing toilets is
short. A mobile toilet box has a tank for storing excreta in its lower part. If the tank is full, a vacuum
tanker collects the stored sewage. Each toilet has a single room or multiple rooms with a hand
washing unit, which is selected according to the flexibility of installation sites and ease of transport
by a truck. In addition, there is a mobile flush toilet that is equipped with a water tank and a pedal.
9-3
Stepping on the latter activates a manual pump to cause washing water to flow. The box is made by
assembling fiberglass-reinforced plastic (FRP) side panels, so its weight is light. Local governments
keep these toilets to prepare for disasters and events, or rental companies lease them. The mobile
toilet features easy installation work on the ground. Figure 9.2 shows a mobile toilet having faeces,
urine, and hand washing units.
Figure 9.2 Mobile toilet
9.3.3 Pour Flush W ater Seal Latrine
In a conventional water flush latrine, the excreta is normally flushed with 10 to 14 litres of water
from a cistern. In a pour flush latrine, as the name suggests, excreta is hand flushed by pouring
about 1.5 to 2.0 litres of water. These pour-flush leaching pit latrines were first developed in India in
mid-forties with a single leach pit and squatting pan placed over it. When the pit in use gets filled
up another pit is dug and the squatting slab is removed and placed over the new pit. The first pit is
covered with earth and the excreta is allowed to digest. After one or two years, the digested
excreta is used as manure.
In the late fifties, a modified design of the system was developed. In this system the leach pit is kept
away from the seat instead of placing it underneath the pan. In a single pit system, desludging has to
be done almost immediately after the pit has been filled up to enable its re-use; this involves handling
of fresh and undigested excreta containing pathogens which is a health hazard. Single leach pit is
appropriate only if it is desludged mechanically by a vacuum tanker. To overcome this shortcoming,
the twin-pit design was introduced and in this case when one pit is full, the excreta is diverted to
the second pit. The filled up pit can be conveniently emptied after 1.5 to 2 years, when most of the
pathogens die off. The sludge can safely be used as manure. Thus the two pits can be used
alternately and perpetually.
With simple care, pour-flush water-seal latrine is a very satisfactory and hygienic sanitation system
and hence it can be located inside the house since the water-seal prevents odour and insect
nuisance from the pit.
9-4
9.3.3.1 Design and Materials
9.3.3.1.1 Squatting Pan, Trap, Footrests, and Connecting Drain
The squatting pan is of special design with steep bottom slope 25 - 28 and a trap having 20 mm
water seal set on a cement concrete floor. The hydraulic design of the pan is such that the human
excreta can be flushed by pouring only 1.5 to 2 litres of water. The squatting pan and trap design
details are shown in Figure 9.3.

Figure 9.3 Squatting pan and trap
9-5
The squatting pan can be of ceramic or glass reinforced plastic (GRP), High Density
Polyethylene (HDPE) or Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC), Polypropylene (PP), Cement mosaic or even
concrete. The squatting pan is connected to the leaching pit through a trap and a pipe or
covered drain. The design and material details for latrine units squatting pan, trap, footrest and the
connecting drain are summarised below in Table 9.1.
Table 9.1 Material and other details for latrine unit
No. Squatting Pan Trap Footrests Connecting Drain

Horizontal length of pan It should be 70 It should be May be non
should be at least 425 to 75 mm with 250x125 mm pressure pipes of
1
mm and longitudinal 2 0 mm water with 15 to 2 0 PVC minimum 75
bottom slope 25 -28 seal mm height mm dia
Material: Ceramic, FRP, Fibre Glass, Ceramic or
Bricks or stone
PP, HDPE, PVC, Ceramic, concrete with
2 semi-circular
Cement mosaic or HDPE or CC mosaic finish
bottom
Cement concrete traps brick or stone
Should conform to IS: Should Should Slope should be 1
3 2556 (Pt. Ill), IS: 11246, conform to IS: conform to IS: in 5 to 1 in 15 as
GRP Sq. Pan 2556 ( Pt. XIII) 2556 ( Pt. X) per site conditions
4 (A) (B)
(A)- Ceramic, FRP, PP are smooth and require less water for flushing. FRP cheaper, lighter and
easier to transport than the other

(B)- The inlet pipe should project 100 mm in to the leach pit.A junction chamber of 250x250 mm
should be provided in case of pipe
9.3.3.1.2 Leach Pits/Twin Pit Latrine
Leach pits serve a dual function of (a) storage and digestion of excreted solids and b) infiltration of
the waste liquids and are therefore, to be designed on the basis of the following parameters:
Sludge accumulation rate
Long term infiltration rate of the liquid fraction across the pit soil interface
Hydraulic loading on the pit
Minimum period required for effective pathogen destruction
Optimal pit emptying frequency.
9.3.3.1.2.1 Sludge Accumulation Rate
The sludge accumulation rate is a function of a wide range of variables including water table level,
pit age, water and excreta loading rates, microbial conditions in the pit, temperature and local soil
conditions and the type of material used for anal cleansing.
9-6
The leach pit is classified as wet or dry depending on whether the ground water table is above
the bottom of pit or below. In dry pits, the pit volume needed is calculated on the basis of solids
accumulation rate, but in wet pits though the sludge accumulation rate is lower - the sludge
digestion rate is high in the presence of water, yet volume of pit has to be increased to prevent
flooding due to surcharge of pits. The sludge accumulation rates given below in Table 9.2 may be
used to calculate the pit volume.
Table 9.2 Sludge accumulation rates
Effective Volume in m3 per Capita per Year (A)
Material used for Pit under Wet conditions

anal cleansing Pit under dry
With successive desludging intervals
conditions
2 years 3 years
Water 0.04 0.095 0.067
Soft Paper 0.053 0.114 0.080
(A) Effective Volume is the volume of the pit below the invert level of pipe or drain.
Source:CPHEEO, 1993
9.3.3.1.2.2 Long Term Infiltration Rate
On account of clogging of soil pores around the leach pits, the long term infiltration capacity
(after clogging) of the soil is always less than the natural percolative capacity. The recommended
design values of the long term infiltrative capacity can be derived for the typical soil conditions
as given below in Table 9.3.
Table 9.3 Long term infiltration rates of different types of soils
No. Soil type litres / sqm / day
1 Sand 50
2 Sandy loam, loams 30
3 Porous silty loams, porous silty, silty clay loams 20
4 Compact silty loams, compact silty clay loams, clay 10
9.3.3.1.2.3 Hydraulic Loading
The hydraulic loading rate is the total volume of liquids entering the leach pit and is expressed in litres
per day although it is often more convenient to consider per capita loadings (litres per capita per day).
For computing the pit hydraulic loading, sewage contribution of 9.5 litres per day per person,
including water used for ablutions and flushing, urine, excreta, etc., can be taken as the basis.
9-7
The outer surface area (perimeter) of the pit from pit bottom to invert level of pipe or drain is to be
considered for infiltration. The pit bottom is not taken into account as it gets clogged in course of time.
The infiltration area required is the total flow in the pit per day divided by the long term infiltrative rate
of the soil where pits will be located. The infiltrative area of leach pits, sized on the basis of sludge
accumulation rate should conform to the computed infiltrative area.
9.3.3.1.2.4 Pathogen Destruction
After a period of almost all pathogens viruses, bacteria, protozoa and helminths die off in the
leach pit or in the surrounding soil, but not Ascaris Lumbricoides (the large human round-worm)
particularly if the leach pit is wet. After about one or one and a half years of storage in the pit, it may
not be hazardous to handle the contents of the pit for use as manure.
9.3.3.1.2.5 Optimal Pit Emptying Frequency
The minimum acceptable design interval between successive manual desludging of each twin leach
pit could be one-and-a-half-years. However, to provide a reasonable degree of operational flexibility,
it is desirable to provide three years storage volume in urban areas and two years in rural areas.
9.3.3.1.2.6 Size of Pits
Sizes of leach pits, [designed as above for different number of users, using water ablution and for
different subsoil water levels], with 3 years sludge storage volume, are in Table 9.4.
Table 9.4 Size of leach pits
5 Users 10 Users 15 Users

Dia Depth (A) Dia Depth (A) Dia Depth (A)
Dry Pits 900 1 ,0 0 0 1 ,1 0 0 1,300 1,300 1,400
W et Pits 1 ,0 0 0 1,300 1,400 1,400 1,600 1,500
Note: (A) Depth from bottom of pit to invert level of incoming pipe or drain (all dimensions in mm)
2
The surface area of these is adequate for soils with long term infiltrative rate down to 20 l/m /day. The
above depths should be increased by 300 mm to provide a free board depth of pit from invert level of
pipe or drain to bottom of pit cover.
9.3.3.1.2.7 Design of Pits under Different Conditions
A typical pour flush latrine with circular pits is shown in Figure 9.4.
In water logged area: The pit top should be raised by 300 mm above the likely level of water above
ground level at the time of water logging. Earth should then be filled well compacted all round the
pits up to 1.0 m distance from the pit and up to its top. The raising of the pit will necessitate raising of
latrine floor also. A typical pour flush latrine in water logged areas is shown in Figure 9.5.
9-8
Part A : Engineering CHAPTER 9: ON-SITE SANITATION
In high subsoil water level: Where the subsoil water level rises to less than 300 mm below ground
level, the top of the pits should be raised by 300 mm above the likely subsoil water level and earth
should be filled all round the pits and latrine floor raised as stated above. A typical pour flush latrine
with leach pits in high subsoil water level is shown in Figure 9.6
In rocky strata: In rocky strata with soil layer in between, the leach pits can be designed on the same
principle as those for low subsoil water level and taking the long term infiltrative capacity as 2 0 l/m 2 /d.
However, in rocks with fissures, chalk formations, old root channels, pollution can flow to very long
distances; hence these conditions demand careful investigation and adoption of pollution safeguards
as stated in paragraph below.
In black cotton soil: Pits in black cotton soil should be designed taking infiltrative rate of 10 l/m /d.
However a vertical fill (envelope) 300 mm in width with sand, gravel or ballast of small sizes should
be provided all round the pit outside the pit lining.
Where space is a constraint: Where circular pits of standard sizes cannot be constructed due to
space constraints, deeper pit with small diameter (not less than 750 mm), or combined oval, square
or rectangular pits divided into two equal compartments by a partition wall may be provided. In case
of combined pits and the partition wall should not have holes. The partition wall should go 225 mm
deeper than the pit lining and plastered on both sides with cement mortar. A typical pour flush latrine
with combined pits is shown in Figure 9.7
Design example of leach pit is given in Appendix A.9.1.
9.3.3.2 Construction of Pour Flush Latrine
9.3.3.2.1 Squatting Pan and Trap
The pan could be ceramic, GRP, PVC, PP, Cement Concrete or Cement Mosaic. Ceramic are
the best but costliest. Mosaic or cement concrete pans have the advantage that these can be
manufactured locally by trained masons but the surface tends to become rough after long use. Their
acceptance is less compared to other types. Traps for ceramic pans are made of the same material
but in case of GRP pans, HDPE traps are used. For mosaic pans, traps are of cement concrete.
9.3.3.2.2 Foot Rests
These can be of ceramic, cement concrete, cement mosaics or brick plastered. The top of the
footrest should be about 2 0 mm above the floor level and inclined slightly outwards in the front.
9.3.3.2.3 Pit Lining
The pits should be lined to avoid collapsing. Bricks joined in 1:6 cement mortar are most
commonly used for lining. Locally manufactured bricks should be used wherever available. Stones or
laterite bricks cement concrete rings could also be used depending upon their availability and cost.
However, for ease of construction, use of concrete rings will be advantageous where the subsoil
water level is above the pit bottom.
9-9
Figure 9.4 Pour flush latrine with circular pits
9 - 10
Source:CPHEEO, 1993
Figure 9.5 Pour flush latrine in water logged areas
9 - 11
Source:CPHEEO, 1993
Figure 9.6 Leach pits in high subsoil water level
9 - 12
rEAR TH FILLING TOP OF PIT LINING PLASTERED IN

CEMENT MORTAR 1:6
SOLID BRICKW ORK IN CEMENT MORTAR 1:6
BRICKW ORK IN CEMENT MORTAR 1:6

WITH HONEYCOMBING IN ALTERNATE
BRICK COURSES NO HOLES IN
PARTITION WALL AND PIT LINING
UPTO 225mm WIDTH ADJOINING THE
PARTITION WALL
S E C T IO N D E
-BRICKWORK IN CEMENT MORTAR 1:6
25mm CEMENT CONCRETE 1:2:4

OVER 75mm CEMENT CONCRETE
1:6:12 AND TOP FINISHED SMOOTH
BY CEMENT PUNNING
TOP OF PIT LINING PLASTERED

IN CEMENT MORTAR 1:6
R.C.C SLAB 1:2:4
SOLID BRICK WORK IN

CEMENT MORTAR 1:6
C.C 1 6:12
BRICK WORK IN CEMENT MORTAR
1:6 WITH HONEYCOMBING IN ALTERNATE
BRICK COURSES UPTO INVERT LEVEL
OF PIPE OR DRAIN
'BASE OF PIT
S E C T IO N A B C
NOTE:
THE SIZE OF HOLES IN HONEY COMBING
SHOULD BE 50mm WIDE AND FULL HEIGHT
A OF BRICK COURSE IN SANDY SOIL OR
WHERE THERE ARE CHANCES OF DAMAGE
A- BY FIELD RATS OR WHERE SAND
ENVELOPE IS PROVIDED WIDTH OF HOLES
BE REDUCED TO 12TO 15mm
112mm THICK CEMENT PLASTER IN 1:6

1 ON BOTH FACES OF PARTITION WALL
OUTLET TO BE OPENED
ALTERNATELY
II II
116 116
<
PLAN
Source:CPHEEO, 1993
Figure 9.7 Pour flush latrine with combined pits
9 - 13
The lining in brick work should be 115 mm thick (half brick) with honey combing up to the invert
level of incoming pipe or drain; the size of holes should be about 50 mm wide up to the height of the
brick course. For ease of construction, holes should be provided in alternate brick courses. In case
the soil is sandy and sand envelope is provided, the width of openings should be reduced to 12 to
15 mm. Where foundation of building is close to the pit, no holes should be provided in the portion
of lining facing the foundation and in rest of the lining 12 to 15 mm wide holes should be provided.
The lining above the invert level of pipe or drain up to the bottom of pits cover should be in solid
brick work, i.e., with no openings.
The concrete rings used for lining should be 50 mm thick, about 450 mm in height and of required
diameter in 1:3:6 cement concrete and have 40 mm circular holes staggered about 200 mm apart.
The rings are not jointed with mortar, but are put one over the other. The rings above the invert level
of pipe or drain should not have holes and are jointed with cement mortar.
9.3.3.2.4 Pit Bottom
Except where precautions are to be taken to prevent pollution of water sources, the pit bottom should
be left in natural condition.
9.3.3.2.5 Pit Cover
Usually RCC slabs are used for covering the pits, but depending upon the availability and cost, flag
stones can also be used. The RCC Slab may be centrally cast in pieces for convenience of handling.
9.3.3.2.6 Leach Pit Connection
The toilet pan is connected to the pit through a 75 mm brick channel of U shape covered with
loosely jointed bricks or 75 mm dia AC or PVC non-pressure pipe laid in 1:15 gradient. In case pipes
are used, a chamber of minimum size 225 * 225 mm is provided at the bifurcation point to facilitate
cleaning and allowing flow to one pit at a time. In case of drain, Y portion of the drain serves the
purpose by taking out the brick cover.
9.3.3.3 Pollution Safeguards
In order to reduce the pollution risk of ground water and water sources, the following safeguards
should be taken while locating the pits.
9.3.3.3.1 Safe Distance from Drinking Water Sources
In dry pits or unsaturated soil conditions, i.e. where the height between the bottom of the pit and the
maximum ground water level throughout the year is 2 m and more.
a) The pits can be located at a minimum distance of 3 m from the water sources such as tube wells
and dug wells if the effective size (ES) of the soil is 0.2 mm or less, and
b. For coarser soils (with ES greater than 0.2 mm) the same distance can be maintained if the
bottom of the pit is sealed off by an impervious material such as puddle clay or plastic sheet and
500 mm thick envelope of fine sand of 0.2 mm effective size is provided around the pit.
9 - 14
In wet pit saturated soil conditions, i.e. where the distance between the bottom of the pit and the
maximum ground water level during any part of the year is less than 2 m,
a. The pits can be located at a minimum distance of 10 m from the water sources such as tube wells
and dug wells if the ES of the soil is 0.2 mm or less, and
b. For coarser soils (with ES more than 0.2 mm), minimum distance of 10 m can be maintained if
the pit is sealed off by an impervious material such as puddle clay or plastic sheet with 500 mm
thick envelope of fine sand of 0 .2 mm, effective size provided all round the pit.
9.3.3.3.2 Safe Distance from Water Supply Mains
Lateral distance between the leach pit and the water mains should be at least 3 m provided the water
table does not rise during any part of the year above the pit bottom and the inlet of the pipe or drain
to the leach pit is below the level of water main. If the water table rises above the bottom of the pit,
then the safe lateral distance should be kept as 8 m. If this cannot be achieved, then the pipes should
be completely encased to a length of at least 3 m on either side of the pit.
When the pits are located either under the foot path or under the road, or the water supply main is
within a distance of 3 m from the pits, the invert of the inlet pipe should be kept at least 1 m below the
ground level. This would ensure that the liquid level in the pits does not reach the level of the water
main as the water mains are generally laid at 0.9 m depth.
The water pipe should not cut across the pit, but where this is unavoidable; the water pipe should be
completely encased for length of 3 m on either side of the pit including the portion across the pit to
prevent infiltration or exfiltration.
A study is reported by National Institute of Technology, Calicut, Kerala in respect of safe distance in
laterite type of soils (Biju.et.al.2011)
The study area had houses with either the septic tank-soak pit system or pit latrines, the latter
being more common with open wells as the source of water at 1.2 m to 2.4 m below ground in
laterite soil. The horizontal distance between well and the soak pit / pit latrines varied from 5 m to
31 m. The MPN of total coliform from nearly 35 wells was studied and it was found that the number
of total coliform correlated with the length of a specific parabolic curve connecting the soak pit / pit
latrine and the well. This relationship was used to calculate the safe distance between the soak pit /
pit latrine and open well so that the total coliform was not exceeding the MoEF classification of class
"A water in the well water and which is "Drinking water source without conventional treatment but
after disinfection at total coliform of not exceeding 50/100 ml. The distance evaluated was 21 m,
where the water table rises to the level of soak-pit / pit latrine and the well.
9.3.3.3.3 Location of Pits
The ideal position for locating the pits is that the pits are placed symmetrically at the backside of
pan. The pits may be located within the premises, under footpath or narrow lanes or under the road.
9 - 15
The minimum space between two pits should be equivalent to at least the effective depth (distance
between the bottom of the pit and invert level of pipe or drain. Spacing can be reduced by providing
an impervious barrier like cut off screen or puddle wall.
In many cases, the space available for constructing leach pits may be small and placement of pits
near existing structure may be unavoidable. The digging of pits and subsequent seepage may
disturb the soil around the pits.
The safe distance of the leach pits from the foundations of existing building depends upon the soil
characteristics, depth as well as type of foundation of the structure, depth of the leaching pits etc.,
and varies from 0.2 to 1.3 m.
However, in cases where the leach pits are quite close to the existing building foundation, the
opening in the brick work lining of the leach pit may be reduced to 12 to 15 mm.
Where the bottom of the pit is submerged below the maximum ground water level:
i. The top of the pits should be raised above the ground level, if necessary, so that the pipe into the
pit is at least 0.75 m above the maximum ground water level.
ii) The sand envelope is taken up to 0.3 m above the top of the inlet pipe and confined suitably to
exclude any surface drainage including rain water directly entering the sand envelope.
iii) In mound type latrines, 1 m high earth filling be provided at least 0.25 m beyond the sand
envelope with the edges chamfered to lead away the rain or surface water, and
iv) The honeycomb brick work for the pit lining should be substituted by brick work in cement mortar
1:6 with open vertical joints, i.e. without mortar. Where sand is not available economically, local
soil of effective size of 0 .2 mm can also be used.
9.3.3.3.4 Subsoil Conditions
In depression and waterlogged areas, location of pits should be avoided, as far as possible, in
depression where sewage or rain water is likely to remain collected all round and over the pits. If it
cannot be avoided or the pits are to be constructed adjacent to ponds or tanks, then the top of pits
should be raised to 0 .6 m to 0 .8 m above the ground level and earth filling should be done all around
the pits up to a distance of 1.5 m right up to the pit top.
The raising of pit may necessitate raising the latrine floor also.
9.3.3.4 Night Soil Digesters
The night soil can be anaerobically digested either alone or in combination with cattle dung. It is rich
in nitrogen and phosphorus in comparison to cow dung.
The characteristics of night soil are different from the cow dung and are mentioned in
Table 9.5 (overleaf).
9 - 16
Table 9.5 Characteristics of night-soil and cow-dung
No. Characteristics Night Soil Cow Dung
1 Moisture content, % 85-90 74-82
2 Volatile solids as % of Total Solids 80-88 70-80
3 Total Nitrogen as N, % on dry basis 3 -5 1. 4- 1.8
4 Total Phosphorus as P20 5, % on dry basis 2.5-4.4 1.1 - 2 .0
5 Potassium as K20 , % on dry basis 0. 7- 1.9 0 .8 - 1.2
9.3.3.4.1 Design Criteria
The design criteria for night soil digester are listed in Table 9.6.
Table 9.6 Design criteria and performance parameters for digester
No. Item Magnitude

o
1 Volumetric Organic loading, kg VS/m d 1.6
2 Hydraulic residence time, d 25-30
3 Solids concentration of slurry fed to digester, % 5
4 Volatile solids destroyed during digestion, % 45-55

3 3
5 Gas yield, m /kg of VS added in m /capita/d 0.5
3
6 m /capita/d 0.034
The night soil digesters are constructed in a similar manner as anaerobic digesters and essentially
consist of the following components:
i. Inlet tank with a feed pipe leading to digester
ii. Digester tank with fixed or floating dome for gas collection
iii. Outlet pipe from digester discharging digested slurry into a masonry chamber.
9 - 17
9.3.4 Conventional Septic Tank
A septic tank is a combined sedimentation and digestion tank where the sewage is held for one to
two days. During this period, the suspended solids settle down to the bottom. This is accompanied
by anaerobic digestion of settled solids (sludge) and liquid, resulting in reasonable reduction in the
volume of sludge, reduction in biodegradable organic matter and release of gases like carbon
dioxide, methane and hydrogen sulphide. The effluent although clarified to a large extent, will still
contain appreciable amount of dissolved and suspended putrescible organic solids and pathogens.
Therefore, the septic tank effluent disposal merits careful consideration. Due to unsatisfactory
quality of the effluent and also the difficulty in providing a proper effluent disposal system,
septic tanks are recommended only for individual homes and small communities and institutions,
whose contributory population does not exceed 300. For larger communities, septic tanks may be
adopted with appropriate effluent treatment and disposal facilities. However, in both cases the
sewage from the septic tank should be discharged into a lined channel constructed along with storm
water drain as an interim measure till a proper sewerage system is laid. The outfall from such drains
should be connected to a decentralised or centralised sewage collection system.
9.3.4.1 Design
Several experiments and performance evaluation studies have established that only about 30% of
the settled solids are anaerobically digested in a septic tank. In case of frequent desludging, which
is necessary for satisfactory effluent quality, still lower digestion rates have been reported. All these
studies have proved that when the septic tank is not desludged for a longer period i.e., more than
the design period, substantial portion of solids escape with the effluent. Therefore, for the septic
tank to be an efficient suspended solids remover, it should be of sufficient capacity with proper
inlet and outlet arrangements. It should be designed in such a way that the sludge can settle at the
bottom and scum accumulates at the surface, while enough space is left in between, for the sewage
to flow through without dislocating either the scum or the settled sludge.
Normally, sufficient capacity is provided to the extent that the accumulated sludge and scum occupy
only half or maximum two-thirds the tank capacity, at the end of the design storage period.
Experience has shown that in order to provide sufficiently quiescent conditions for effective
sedimentation of the suspended solids, the minimum liquid retention time should be 24 hours.
Therefore, considering the volume required for sludge and scum accumulation, the septic tank may
be designed for 1 to 2 days of sewage retention.
The septic tanks are normally rectangular in shape and can either be a single tank or a double
tank. In case of double tank, the effluent solids concentration is considerably lower and the first
compartment is usually twice the size of the second. The liquid depth is 1-2 m and the length to
breadth ratio is 2-3 to 1.
Recommended sizes of septic tanks for individual households (up to 20 users) and for housing
colonies (up to 300 users) are given below in Table 9.7 and Table 9.8 respectively.
9 - 18
Table 9.7 Recommended size of septic tank up to 20 users
Liquid depth (m ) (cleaning interval of)

No. of Users Length (m ) Breadth (m)
2 years 3 years
5 1.5 0 .7 5 1.0 1.05
10 2 .0 0 .9 0 1.0 1.40
15 2 .0 0 .9 0 1.3 2 .0 0
20 2 .3 1.10 1.3 1.80
Note 1: The capacities are recommended on the assumption that discharge from only WC will be
treated in the septic tank
Note 2: A provision of 300 mm should be made for free broad.
Note 3: The sizes of septic tank are based on certain assumption on peak discharges, as estimated in
IS: 2470 (part 1 ) and while choosing the size of septic tank exact calculations shall be made.
Table 9.8 Recommended size of septic tank for housing colony upto 300 users
Length Breadth Liquid depth (cleaning interval of)

No. of Users
(m ) (m ) 2 years 3 years
50 5 .0 2 .0 0 1.0 1.24
100 7 .5 2 .6 5 1.0 1.24
150 10.0 3 .0 0 1.0 1.24
200 12.0 3 .3 0 1.0 1.24
300 15.0 4 .0 0 1.0 1.24
Note 1: A provision of 300 mm should be made for free board.
Note 2: The sizes of septic tanks are based on certain assumptions on peak discharges, as
estimated in IS: 2470 (Part 1) and while choosing the size of septic tank exact calculations
shall be made.
Note 3: For population over 100, the tank may be divided into independent parallel chambers of
maintenance and cleaning.
9.3.4.2 Construction Details
The inlet and outlet should not be located at such levels where the sludge or scum is formed as
otherwise, the force of water entering or leaving the tank will unduly disturb the sludge or scum.
Further, to avoid short-circuiting, the inlet and outlet should be located as far away as possible from
each other and at different levels. Baffles are generally provided at both inlet and outlet and should dip
25 cm to 30 cm into and project 15 cm above the liquid. The baffles should be placed at a distance of
one-fifth of the tank length from the mouth of the straight inlet pipe. The invert of the outlet pipe should
be placed at a level 5 to 7 cm below the invert level of inlet pipe.
9 - 19
Baffled inlet will distribute the flow more evenly along the width of the tank and similarly a baffled outlet
pipe will serve better than a tee-pipe.
For larger capacities, a two-compartment tank constructed with the partition wall at a distance of
about two-thirds the length from the inlet gives a better performance than a single compartment
tank. The two compartments should be interconnected above the sludge storage level by means
of pipes or square openings of diameter or side length respectively of not less than 75 mm. Every
septic tank should be provided with ventilation pipes, the top being covered with a suitable mosquito
proof wire mesh. The height of the pipe should extend at least 2 m above the top of the highest
building within a radius of 20 m. Septic tanks may either be constructed in brick work, stone masonry or
concrete cast in situ or pre-cast materials. Pre-cast household tank made of materials such as
asbestos cement / HDPE could also be used, provided they are watertight and possess adequate
strength in handling and installing and bear the static earth and superimposed loads.
All septic tanks shall be provided with watertight covers of adequate strength. Access manholes
(minimum two numbers one on opposite ends in the longer direction) of adequate size shall also be
provided for purposes of inspection and desludging of tanks.
The floor of the tank should be of cement concrete and sloped towards the sludge outlet. Both the
floor and side wall shall be plastered with cement mortar to render the surfaces smooth and to make
them water tight. A typical two compartment septic tank is shown in Figure 9.8 (overleaf).
9.3.4.3 Sludge Withdrawal and Disposal
When sludge is drawn off from the bottom of the tank, at first the small quantity of sludge in the
immediate vicinity of the outlet or suction pipe is withdrawn. This is followed by drawing off sewage,
because the sludge, being only slightly heavier, but much more viscous than the sewage, lies away
from the point of outlet and the scum remains floating on the surface. With continued draw-off more
sewage is removed, until finally only sludge and scum remain in the tank. These come off last, and
then only if there is sufficient slope on the floor of the tank, force them to gravitate to the outlet. This
is the reason for the slow bleeding-off of sludge from steep bottomed pyramidal sedimentation tanks
and for desludging by complete emptying. If septic tanks are desludged by only partial removal of the
contents, then they become more and more full with sludge and scum, and the quality of the effluent
deteriorates soon.
For certain reasons, desludging of septic tanks under hydrostatic head by means of a sludge pipe
collecting of sludge from the lowest point in the tank and discharging at a higher level - should be
discouraged. The manual handling of sludge should be avoided.
The mechanical vacuum tankers should be used by the municipal authorities to empty the septic
tanks. Alternately, where space is not a constraint, a sludge-pipe with a delivery valve to draw the
sludge as and when required, should be installed at the bottom of the tank to empty its contents into
a sump, for subsequent disposal on land or sent for further treatment. Spreading of sludge on the
ground in the vicinity should not be allowed. Portable pumps may also be used for desludging, in
which case there will be no need for sludge pipe or sludge sump.
9 - 20
>NLET C H A M B E R
P E N S T OC K A
BAFFLE
S C U M -^
A BOAR D
6.
T $ [
z
O ( OVER 1200)
& <? T
i
^ r- 30': J_ 150 OUT LET
<^-p----- O E F L E C TOf t
SECTION XX
ALL DIMENSIONS ]N mm
TY P IC A L SKETCH OF TWO COMPARTMENT SEPTEC TANK FOR

POPULATJONS OVER 50 Us ^ * t o I p a r t i I - i j s s i

Figure 9.8 Structure of a septic tank
9-21
Yearly desludging of septic tank is desirable, but if it is not feasible or economical, then septic tanks
should be cleaned at least once in two - three years, provided the tank is not overloaded due to use
by more than the number of persons for which it is designed.
9.3.4.4 Secondary Treatment and Disposal of Effluent
The septic tank effluent will be malodorous, containing sizable portion of dissolved organic content
and pathogenic organisms and hence, need to be treated before its final, safe disposal. Depending
upon the situation the size, treatment objective, resources available etc., the extent and type of
secondary treatment facility can vary from the most conventional land disposal methods like soak pits
or dispersion trenches to additional secondary biological treatment systems.
Normally, the land disposal methods are designed to achieve subsurface percolation or seepage
into the soil. Satisfactory disposal therefore depends, to a great extent, on porosity and percolation
characteristics of the soil.
In addition, other factors, such as level of subsoil water table, the climatic conditions,
presence of vegetation, aeration of solid and concentration of suspended solids in the effluent also
influence the application of these methods. Soak pits or dispersion trenches can be
adopted in all porous soils, where soak percolation rate is below 25 minutes per cm and the depth of
water table is 2 m or more from the ground level. Method of soil percolation test is described in
Appendix A.9.2. Dispersion trenches should be preferred in soils with percolation rates between
12 and 25 minutes/cm, if adequate land is available. In areas with higher water table, dispersion
trenches should be located partly or fully above ground level, in a mound.
The subsoil dispersion system shall be at least 20 m away from any source of drinking water. It should
also be as far as possible from the nearest dwellings, but not closer than 7 m to avoid any corrosive
effect due to tank gases vented into atmosphere. Subsoil dispersion system is not recommended
in limestone or crevice rock formations, where there may be solution cavities that may convey the
pollution to long distances and pollute water resources. In impervious soils such as dense clays and
rocks, where percolation rate exceeds 25 minutes/cm, adoption of up flow or reverse filters, trickling
filters, subsurface sand filters or open sand filters followed by chlorination should be considered,
particularly for larger installations.
In the absence of information relating to ground water or subsoil, subsurface explorations are
necessary. Percolation tests determine the acceptability of the site and serve as the basis of design
for liquid absorption. The total subsurface soil area required for soak pits or dispersion trenches is
given by the empirical relation:
where
Q= Maximum rate of effluent application in l/d/m of leaching surface, and
t= Standard percolation rate for the soil in minutes.
9 - 22
In calculating the effective leaching area required, the area of trench bottom in case of dispersion
trenches and effective side wall area below the inlet level for soak pits should be considered.
9.3.4.5 Soak Pits
Soak pits are cheap to construct and are extensively used. They need no media when lined or
filled with rubble or brick bats. The pits may be of any regular shape, circular or square being more
common. When water table is sufficiently below ground level, soak pits should be preferred only
when land is limited or when a porous layer underlies an impervious layer at the top, which permits
easier vertical downward flow than horizontal spread out as in the case of dispersion trenches.
Minimum horizontal dimension of soak pit should be 1 m, the depth below the invert level or
inlet pipe being at 1 m. The pit should be covered and the top raised above the adjacent ground to
prevent damage by flooding. It is being recommended that these are to be phased out in
due course of time.
9.3.4.6 Dispersion Trenches
Dispersion trenches consist of relatively narrow and shallow trenches about 0.5 to 1 m deep and
0.3 to 1 m wide excavated to a slight gradient of about 0.25%. Open joined earthenware or concrete
pipes of 80 to 100 mm size are laid in the trenches over a bed of 15 cm to 25 cm of washed gravel or
crushed stone. The top of pipes shall be covered by coarse gravel and crushed stone to a minimum
depth of 15 cm and the balance depth of trench filled with excavated earth and finished with a mound
above the ground level to prevent direct flooding of trench during rains. The effluent from the septic
tank is led into a small distribution box from which several such trenches could radiate out. The total
length of trench required shall be calculated from the Eq. (9.1) and the number of trenches worked
out on the basis of a maximum length of 30 m for each trench and spaced not closer than 2 m apart.
Parallel distribution should be such that a distribution box should be provided for 3 to 4 trenches. It is
being recommended that these are to be phased out in due course of time.
9.3.5 Improved Septic Tank
9.3.5.1 Up-Flow Anaerobic Filter
The up-flow filter can be successfully used for secondary treatment of septic tank effluent in areas
where dense soil conditions, high water table and limited availability of land preclude soil absorption
or the leaching system for effluent disposal. It is a submerged filter with stone media or half broken
chamber well burnt bricks by hand and the septic tank effluent is introduced from the bottom.
The microbial growth is retained on the stone media, making possible higher loading rates and
efficient digestion. The capacity of the unit is 0.04 to 0.05 m3 per capita or 1/3 to 1/2 the liquid
capacity of the septic tank it serves. BOD removals of 70% can be expected. The effluent is clear
and free from odour. This unit has several advantages viz, (a) high degree of stabilization; (b) little
sludge production; (c) low capital and operating cost; and (d) low loss of head in the filter (10 to 15
cm) in normal operation.
9 - 23
The up-flow anaerobic filter can either be a separate unit or constructed as an extended part of septic
tanks. An anaerobic filter is a fixed-bed biological reactor.
Dissolved organic matter and non-settleable solids are filtered and anaerobically digested by the
bacteria in the biofilm attached to the filter media.
Anaerobic filters are widely used as secondary treatment in household black or grey
water systems and to improve the solid removal compared to septic tanks or anaerobic baffled
reactors. Since anaerobic filters work by anaerobic digestion, they can be designed as anaerobic
digesters allowing recovering the produced biogas.
Multi-chamber septic tank system prevents sludge carryover. The schematic diagrams of anaerobic
filter, anaerobic baffled reactor, and multi chamber anaerobic filter is provided in Figure 9.9, Figure
9.10 and Figure 9.11 respectively.
Simple one unit anaerobic Filter integrated in the second chamber of a septic tank.
Gas is evacuated by the venting opening at the upper right.
Source: Tilley et al., 2008

Figure 9.9 Anaerobic filter
A typical septic tank up flow filter for 10 persons is shown in Figure 9.12. A typical septic tank - up
flow filter evapotranspiration system is shown in Figure 9.13.
9 - 24
F loating Material
Figure 9.10 A naerobic baffled reactor
Gas release
Figure 9.11 Multi cham ber anaerobic filter
9-25
PVC T1Q WITH COWL OUTLET PIPE 6 " PVC WITH TOP OF PIPE AT 6 ABOVE G .L.
DETAILS QF
PRE CAS T COVER SLAB
TYP. JQJN1 BETAIL5
BOTTOM COVER 2 5 MM FOR P R E C A S T S LAB.
a 'd iE
W , DETAIL PF PRECAST SLftfl.
SECTION e - B
plan or precast sla

iq w s. ea LINTEL BEAM DLTftJL
1. FINISHED FLOOR LVL O F BUILDING IS + 1 ' - B * LVL.

v-Z'.zl 5* U K - P.C-C 1:4 :a
2. TOILET FLOOR LVL IS + 3 , - 0 * LVL.
lOCAR W Cir ONE FOOT FOE PIPE 3. ALL BRICK WORK IN C EM ENT MORTAR 1 :5
SECTIO N A -A
4. ALL BRICK WORK PLASTERED IN C.M. 1 : 3 FOR 15 MM
5. ALL P IPES SHOULD BE 110 MM UPVC
CUTLET 4 PVC PIPE 6. ALL CONCRETE IN M 2 0
INLET 4 PVC PIPE
(HALF BROKEN CHAMBER BURNT BRICKS LOOSELY PLASEO B * HAND) < DEEP
PLAN OF SEPTIC TANK AND U PFLO W FILTER
Figure 9.12 Typical septic tank up flow filter fo r ten persons
9-26
Location Elevation Location Elevation /Oy Polyethlere septic tank model S of M/S. United sanitation devices, United buildng.
G.L 5m Level of top of upflow filter metis 4.7 m O / A mala nagar, P.O., Thrissur 01., Kerala, 680 555 Ph. 0847 - 2307791,2305792,'
E-mail [email protected], [email protected]
Factory floor 5.3 m Level of dispersion trench sewer 4.7 m
Seat of European water closet 5.7 m Botlom level of dispersion trench 4.2 m
Level of sewer outlet 5.2 m Top of gravel layer in dispersion trench 5.0 m
B) Chemical / acid storage HDPE tank model no. CCV-250-01 of M/S. Slntex
of diameter 1508mm A height 1701mm with manhole dia meter of 450 mm from
Level of sewer entering sepbc tank 5.0 m Top of dispersion trench 6.0 m Sintex Industries Ltd, Plastic Division, 166, Anna Salai, Little Mount, Chennai-600015,
Level of sewer leaving septic tank 5.0 m Ph.: 22200302, 22200405, Fax: 044-22353225, E-mail: [email protected]
Figure 9 . 1 3 S eptic tank - Up flow filte r evapotranspiration system
9-27
The arrangement shown in Figure 9.13 is septic tank followed by up flow filter. The effluent of the
up flow filter normally will discharge into nearby drains and will find its way to a public water course.
However in some cases even the public drain may not be available and it becomes a challenge
to dispose off the up flow filter effluent. In such a case the effluent will stagnate and will lead to
propagation of flies, mosquitoes etc. leading to environmental problems. This can be avoided by a
raising the elevation of the pan in the toilet so that effluent comes out of the septic tank at higher
than the ground level. Further this effluent will go through the up flow filter before it finally comes
out as treated effluent and this will involve additional drop of the sewage level. All these have to be
considered so that the final effluent from the up flow filter will come out at least 30 to 45 cm above the
ground level. At this location an elevated mound of sand can be constructed as a dispersion mound
and flowering small plants can be grown for evapotranspiration. This system in Figure 9.13 is one
such and meant for a factory with 25 persons working for whom the septic tank volume is 4.7 cum and
is met by the above specified septic tank and the volume of up flow filter at one third volume of septic
tank is also met with comfortably. The dispersion trench requirement is 13 sqm. The area provided
is 28 x 0.8 = 22 sqm. The maximum uplift pressure can be as high as 5 - 3 = 2 m. This is countered
by stone masonry floor of 0.8 m thickness which equates to 0.8 x 2.5 = 2 m of water column. On the
same lines the top of the stone masonry side walls are increased to 6 m and thus the system is safe.
The inter-space between the side wall and the filter and the septic tank will be filled with excavated
sand and plastered in a chamber so that rain water flows away and does not get into the structure.
The stone masonry itself will be random rubble using boulders available at site with base slab 0.8
m thick and sidewalls 0.5 m thick set in cement mortar 1.5 with only pointing. Later on, when the
full-fledged sewerage system becomes functional, this on-site system can be dismantled and
the entire stone masonry, septic tank, up flow filter are all reusable in other construction sites to
advantage, The dispersion trench functions mainly by evapotranspiration due to the button rose
plantation whose roots act like a pump is the capillary action. During times of rainfall, it will be
necessary, to provide a temporary cover to prevent direct rainfall over the dispersion trench by simple
arrangements like a tarpaulin sheet placed around it and stone boulders kept on the edges at GL.
9.3.6 Package Septic Tank - Anaerobic Filter Type System
The disadvantage of the septic tank is its low treatment efficiency (30-60% BOD and SS removal)
and associated cost and space requirements for the construction of soak pit. Many situations such
as presence of rocky ground, highly permeable soil and high groundwater table do not allow the
construction of soak pits. In such cases, it is often a common practice to discharge effluent
directly into an open drain causing surface water pollution. Another disadvantage of septic tank is its
incapability to handle hydraulic shock loads, as peak flow disturbs the settling zone and causes high
suspended solids in the effluent. One of the recommended solutions is the provision of anaerobic
filter type system for the treatment of septic tank effluent (MoUD, 2008). Hence, package type septic
tank- anaerobic filter system can be used to enhance the removals
Typically, this type of package on-site treatment system is made up of LLDPE (Linear Low Density
Polyethylene) and can be installed easily in a very short time. It consists of two chambers, i.e.,
settling and anaerobic filter. The first chamber works as a septic tank, where settleable solids are
settled down and further degraded anaerobically at the bottom zone.
9 - 28
The second chamber consists of up flow anaerobic filter, where further removal of organic matter
takes place and made up of synthetic media with specific surface area of as high as 100 m 2/m 3. This
provides additional surfaces for the growth of organisms that purify the sewage further. There are a
couple of manufacturers in the country as also many others elsewhere, but published and documented
performing data are not available. All the same, the relative performance as compared to mere septic
tank alone is expected to be better. Precautions to be taken are the use of media from virgin material,
their specific gravity being close to water and the percent volume of packing within the reactor so that
the microbes do not overgrow, bridge up and eventually choke the entire filter. However, it should be
noted that this effluent would still contain pathogens and nutrients that are capable of causing public
health and environmental problems and there remains the ambiguity about the technology, its
feasibility and technical robustness. Such systems can be easily modified and applied to India, where
localized on-site treatment systems are most desirable. Lab scale testing has been carried out at IIT
Roorkee and the test facility dimensions are shown in Figure 9-14.
The COD was in the range of 472 to 600 in raw sewage, 111 to 154 mg/l in septic tank effluent and
57 to 60 mg/l in the anaerobic filter effluent. Further studies are being pursued for pilot scale testing,
followed by actual field units in a school campus and in a household and evaluate the parameters
of hydraulic and organic loadings, performance results of removal of BOD, COD and coliforms and
engineering modifications to bring out a design and O&M manual.
9.3.7 On-site Package Septic Tank - Contact Aeration Type System
Another improvement of the septic tank is to provide contact aeration tank after the
septic tank. Hence, in package type septic tank - contact aeration system is developed in the line of
well-established Japanese on-site treatment systems called Johkasou.
9 - 29
This type of package on-site treatment system is made up of LLDPE (Low Linear Density
Polyethylene) and can be installed easily in a very short time. It consists of two chambers, i.e.,
settling and contact aeration with pall ring media.
The first chamber works as a septic tank, where settleable solids are settled down and further
degraded anaerobically at the bottom zone. Second stage is high specific surface area (100 m 2/m 3),
fixed film plastic media to retain high mass of aerobic microorganism to degrade the organic
matter in the sewage aided by continuous diffusion of controlled air supply from a blower.
The high specific surface area not only prevents clogging, but also provides intensive contact
between the sewage and the fixed film aerobic bacteria for the fast degradation of organic matter.
The treatment performance may be possible to be enhanced to 80-95% for BOD and SS removal.
A possible section is illustrated in Figure 9.15.
Figure 9.15 Illustrative configuration of an integral septic tank and contact aeration unit
9 - 30
9.3.8 Advanced Anaerobic - Aerobic Type On-site Treatment System (Johkasou)
There are various kinds of packaged treatment technologies. This subsection describes
package type treatment plant, taking Japanese Johkasou as an example, and on-site construction
type treatment plant.
9.3.8.1 Classification of Treatment Systems
Treatment systems are classified into various types according to capacity and performance.
i. Capacity
Treatment systems are classified into three types according to capacity: a small-scale unit is for
several to more than a dozen people, who live in individual houses, a medium-scale system is for
up to hundreds of people, who live in a condominium or small village and a large-scale system is for
thousands of people in a large commercial building or factory.
Package-type is applied from small to large-scale systems. When unit is applied to large-scale,
multiple tanks are connected. Package-type is made from plastics such as GFRP (Glass fibre
reinforced plastics) or steel plates (that depends on the treatment method), so they can be
manufactured in a factory.
The on-site construction type is made from RC and constructed on-site, so it looks nearly like a
small-scale sewage treatment plant.
The classification according to the treatment capacity is mentioned in Table 9.9
Table 9.9 Classification according to treatment capacity (Example of Japan)
Package-type On-site construction-type
Medium-
Small-scale Large-scale Medium/Large-scale
scale
(Approx. 500
(About 51 to
(About 5 to 50 people) to 5,000 (More than 500 people)
500 people)
people)
fcfcssraijf l |
1
|
s*0 m i
9 - 31
ii. Performance
Treatment processes are classified into three kinds according to performance:
1. Process that mainly removes BOD-related contaminants,

2. Process that removes BOD-related contaminants and nitrogen, and
3. Process that removes BOD-related contaminants, nitrogen, and phosphorus.
In addition, advanced treatment for better effluent quality is possible by applying membrane
separator or flocculation separation or activated carbon adsorption, etc. Some package-types
contain membrane separator unit in it. The classification according to the treatment performance is
mentioned in Table 9.10.
Table 9.10 Classification according to treatment performance (Example of Japan)
Treated water quality, mg/L

Type Treatment Method
BOD T-N T-P
BOD reduction <20
Package type Nitrogen removal <20 <20
Small scale Nitrogen and phosphorus removal <20 <20 <1

Medium scale
Large-scale Membrane separation <5
Nitrogen and phosphorus removal <5 <10 <1
Contact aeration
On-site
<20
construction
Activated sludge
Type
Flocculation separation (A) <10 <1
Medium scale
Large scale
(A) and activated carbon absorption <10 <1
9.3.8.2 System Configuration
A treatment system consists mainly of pre-treatment, main treatment, advanced treatment

(if necessary), and disinfection processes.
i. Pre-treatment process
This process removes insoluble substances that are difficult to decompose biologically by means
of sedimentation, floating, and screening. In the large-scale system, a flow equalizer is planned
for stabilizing the biological treatment.
9 - 32
ii. Main treatment process
The main treatment process biologically removes BOD-related contaminants by aerobic

treatment and removes nitrogen by combination of anoxic and aerobic treatment. The system
employs a sedimentation tank for solid-liquid separation in most cases, but use of a membrane
separator in place of the sedimentation tank makes it possible to downsize the system and to
improve the quality of treated sewage further.
iii. Advanced treatment process (to be installed if necessary)
This process removes COD-related contaminants and phosphorus from the biologically
treated sewage by means of flocculation sedimentation, sand filtration, activated carbon
absorption, and dephosphorization.
iv. Disinfection process
This process disinfects E. coli and other bacteria to make effluent water safer.
9.3.8.3 Example Design in Japan
Treatment flowchart and system configuration
Figure 9.16 shows the flowchart and configuration of a package-type treatment system based
on the "anaerobic filter and contact aeration method (for BOD reduction) as an example. This
system consists of anaerobic filter, contact aeration, sedimentation, and disinfection tanks.
Figure 9.16 Treatment system based on the anaerobic filter and contact aeration method
9 - 33
Outline of the system components
- Anaerobic filter tank
The main purpose of this tank is to remove solid matter that cannot be removed by
biological treatment. In addition, anaerobic microorganisms adhering to the surface of the filter
media submerged in this tank decompose part of BOD-related contaminants.
- Contact aeration tank
In this tank, the aerobic microorganisms are activated by the air supplied by blower and
biodegradation takes place. That is, BOD-related contaminants are consumed and decomposed
by the microorganisms. The contact media is installed in this tank and microorganisms are
adhered on it to improve contact efficiency. Introduction of moving bed bioreactor (MBBR)
contributes to reduce size of the package-type.
- Sedimentation tank
The purpose of this tank is solid-liquid separation. Supernatant and sludge contained in
biologically treated sewage are separated by gravity sedimentation. Supernatant is transferred to
subsequent process and the settled and separated sludge returns to the previous tank, resulting
in a gradual rise in the sludge concentration of the aeration tank.
- Disinfection unit
This process disinfects E. coli and other bacteria contained in the supernatant from
sedimentation tank to make effluent water safer. As the disinfectant, solid chlorine is used.
Example specifications
Table 9.11 (overleaf) shows a package-type treatment system for 10 persons.
ii. On-site construction-type
Treatment flowchart and system configuration
As an example of on-site construction-type treatment systems based on "the contact

aeration method and the flocculation sedimentation method, Figure 9.17 (overleaf) shows the
flowchart and configuration. This system consists of a screen, a flow equalization tank, a contact
aeration tank, a flocculation sedimentation tank, a disinfection unit, and a sludge treatment unit.
Outline of the system components
- Screen
The purpose of this screen is to remove foreign matter. The screen is classified into three types
according to mesh size: the coarse, fine and micro screens. A combination of them is planned
according to the characteristics of sewage.
9 - 34
Table 9.11 Example specifications for a package-type treatment system in Japan
(A):The daily amount of sewage per person is 200 L.
Figure 9.17 Flowchart of the contact aeration method and flocculation sedimentation method
9 - 35
- Flow equalization tank
In the on-site small-scale treatment system, load changes due to rise or reduction in the flow rate
of sewage and have a direct impact on the biological treatment function. This tank is installed
before the biological reaction tank to have a stable load on it. The capacity of the flow equalization
tank shall be specified according to changes in the flow rate of sewage.
This unit consists of contact aeration and sedimentation tanks. The former is filled with a contact
media to form and put biological film on the media surface and to biologically treat the sewage
by letting it come into contact with the film under aerobic conditions. The contact aeration tank is
equipped with an aerator that maintains the aerobic environment, and a back washing machine
that removes biota generated excessively from the contact media.
- Flocculation sedimentation tank
This tank removes COD-related contaminants and phosphorus by adding a flocculent to the
sewage. The agent is classified into two types: one is an aluminium coagulant (e.g. aluminium
sulphate) and the other is a ferric flocculent (e.g. polyferric sulphate). The unit consists of flow
equalization, flocculation and flocculation sedimentation tanks.
- Disinfection unit
This unit disinfects the treated effluent. Solid or liquid (sodium hypochlorite) chlorine is used
as the disinfectant.
- Sludge treatment unit
This unit receives and stores sludge generated in the biological reaction and flocculation
sedimentation tanks. In certain circumstances, a sludge thickening or dehydrating unit
may be planned. The stored sludge shall be regularly extracted and delivered to the
outside. An example of designing an on-site construction-type sewage treatment system is
shown in Appendix A.9.3.
9.3.8.4 Features
i. Advantages
Since package-type treatment equipment can be fully manufactured in a factory, quality control of
the product is easy and the price can be reduced due to a mass production effect.
2
A treatment system for home use (5 to 10 persons) requires an area of 3 to 5 m ; that is to say, it
is a compact system. Moreover, when it is installed underground, the space above can be used
for several purposes such as a garage.
This system, being a product manufactured in a factory, does not require complicated work on
site during installation, so the installation time is short (about one week). Accordingly, it can
improve environmental sanitation quickly.
9 - 36
The treatment system requires running costs, such as electric charges and chemical
expenses, and the treated water is comparable to that of conventional treatment system.
In addition, planning advanced treatment can result cleaner effluent and remove nitrogen
and phosphorus.
Where membrane separator is applied, BOD contained in the effluent is reduced to less than
5 mg/l, and the treated effluent can be reused for various purposes.
The treatment system can be constructed more cost-effectively and faster, because sewer is
shorter compared with conventional system, especially in areas with low-medium population
density, areas that have not been covered by sewer and individual houses or buildings.
ii. Notes on application
Keeping the performance of a treatment system high requires proper maintenance, which
varies depending on the scale and treatment method of the system. Common works to
achieve this are listed below. Each work requires expertise, so it is necessary to build up an
implementation system, to train inspectors (vendors), and to educate users to increase their
awareness of the importance of maintenance. For more information about the maintenance of
treatment systems, see Part B Operation and Maintenance.
Maintenance and inspection
Inspecting mechanical components including the blower, replenishing tanks with chemicals
including disinfectants, etc.
Water quality check
Checking the aeration tank for DO testing the quality of the discharged water, etc.
Cleaning
Removing foreign matter from the screen and extracting generated sludge.
9.4 DECISION MAKING FOR ON-SITE TREATMENT TECHNOLOGY
9.4.1 General
Employing on-site sewage treatment technology requires an in-depth survey of requirements of the
installation site, such as the volume and quality of treated sewage, the selection of a method based
on the resulting data and the determination of the scale. After the determination of the basically
required performance and scale, the treatment method shall be chosen in consideration of the
following requirements:
i) The method shall be as simple as possible.
ii) The maintenance shall be easy.
iii) The construction and maintenance costs shall be low.
9 - 37
iv) The method shall contribute to environmental preservation and water quality improvement.
v) The quality characteristics of incoming sewage shall be understood.
vi) Changes in the quality and rate of incoming sewage shall be taken into consideration.
Any sewage treatment system is required to be made available always and display its function and
performance, but the installer may have little knowledge about it. The selection of an appropriate
treatment method requires consideration of preserving the water quality environment in receiving
water bodies and fund necessary for construction and maintenance.
9.4.2 Problems with Existing On-site System
9.4.2.1 Natural Characteristics
A natural condition requiring caution is weather, such as temperature changes and precipitation. In
addition, it is necessary to investigate geographical features and groundwater levels.
The effect of temperature on the sewage treatment function varies depending on the type of
treatment facilities, the degree of load, and the kinds of contaminants to be removed.
A combination of nitrification and denitrification is susceptible to temperature changes; the reaction
rate at 23C is 2 to 2.5 times that at 13C, the higher the water temperature, the higher the reaction
rate. Accordingly, if this technology is applied to cold areas, it is effective to set up BOD and nitrogen
loads lower than the design values.
Precipitation is one of the local characteristics. Mixing a large amount of rainwater with sewage
reduces the treatment function. Particularly in a housing estate where sewage is collected and
treated, it is necessary to employ an advanced construction technology in consideration of the effect
of the amount of rainwater.
9.4.2.2 Social Requirements
If the treated sewage receiving water body is a source of drinking water, it is essential to employ a
treatment method that can remove nitrogen and phosphorus and faecal coliforms to preserve
the water source. In addition, the features of site where a sewage treatment tank is installed shall be
taken into consideration. For example, a region with low population density can provide a relatively
extensive site, which makes it possible to employ a treatment method featuring easy maintenance,
while an urban area is obliged to use a compact treatment method. In addition, the latter case has
the risk of troubling the neighbouring people with noise and offensive odour generated by the sewage
treatment system.
Accordingly, it is essential to select a treatment method that does not cause such problems or to take
measures to mitigate them.
The extent of maintaining a sewage treatment system has an effect on the treatment function and
performance. Therefore, a small-scale system shall employ a method featuring as easy maintenance
as possible. In addition, it is necessary to select an installation site in consideration of the smooth
extraction, transportation, and treatment of sludge.
9 - 38
9.4.3 Elements of Successful Programme
Planning an on-site system and making it successful require the following decision-making
processes (Stages 1 to 5).
Stage 1: Outline survey of settlements and services
The objective of the first stage is to gather information about the coverage and quality of existing
services to clarify the key problems to be addressed and priority locations for improvement.
This investigation might be done citywide or within areas of the town that have already been
earmarked for attention. The information can be obtained from (a) maps and other secondary sources;
(b) from a rapid physical inspection on the ground; and (c) from informal discussion with residents.
This preparatory work does not involve systematic user consultation, which follows in Stage 2.The
output includes one or more maps that show the existing sanitation infrastructure and services, and
highlights areas where sanitation problems are most acute.
Stage 2: The Need for assessment and consultation
Stage 2 entails a more detailed analysis of the current situation to reveal what types of
improvements are needed and where they will have the most beneficial impact. It involves further
technical investigations in priority areas identified from Stage 1, plus an assessment of existing
services from the users point of view.
This should provide a fuller understanding of why existing services have failed or are otherwise
inadequate. This is also an opportunity to find out what type of improvements users want and would
be willing to pay for, or at least contribute towards.
Stage 3: Identification of appropriate technologies
The objective of this stage is to eliminate technologies that are unlikely to be viable from a technical
perspective and thus, narrow the field of options. The key question for each option at this stage is:
Can it work? A variety of additional factors (some of them financial and managerial) affect whether
an option would in fact be viable and these are considered in Stage 4.
Stage 4: Development of cost options
Stage 3 identified technology options that are viable from a technical perspective. In order that
technology choices can be made, this stage estimates the capital and operating costs associated
with each option over its anticipated lifetime, and considers how the new services could be operated
and maintained. This should confirm whether the technologies are viable in terms of the human and
financial resources available locally.
For those that are viable, cost packages can be presented to the community in Stage 5 and
agreement reached on the final choice.
9 - 39
Stage 5: Reaching consensus on preferred options
In the final stage, the options developed in Stage 4 can be presented back to the community. For
each package, the technical, managerial and financial implications - including proposed operation
and maintenance arrangements - need to be explained clearly. This should enable residents to
engage in an informed discussion with municipal representatives resulting, hopefully, in consensus
on the way forward.
The following shows preconditions important for a successful on-site system:
Establish and enforce clear and effective policy frameworks
- Update and enforce septic tank design codes

- Mandate scheduled desludging
Strengthen institutional and implementation capacity
- Develop comprehensive awareness programmes, especially targeting septic tank users

- Develop mechanisms for inter-agency coordination and dialogue
- Develop comprehensive capacity building programmes that engage educational institutions
- Apply economies of scale in deploying septage services
- Leverage real estate development to build sewerage infrastructure
- Engage private service providers
Increase funding for septage management
- Strengthen National financial support for septage management

- Promote creative financing
- Design innovative sewerage tariff structures
- Develop progressive fee structures in line with willingness to pay
- Create opportunities and incentives for commercial activities
9.4.4 Transport and Fate of Sludge
Sludge resulting from on-site treatment shall be treated and disposed of in consideration of its impact
on the surrounding environment. The following shows precautions for this work:
Sludge shall not pollute the environment
Sludge shall not produce any diseases and pests
Sludge shall not be disposed off illegally

Sludge shall be reused as effectively as possible.
In any case, it is recommended to effectively change the septage and sludge to compost for
agricultural use or to soil conditioners in its final disposition. The septage shall be disposed as per the
advisory note issued by the MoUD, http://urbanindia.nic.in/programme/uwss/Advisory_SMUI.pdf
9 - 40
9.5 DEALING WITH SEPTAGE
The effluent from the septic tank can be collected in a network of drains and/or sewers and
treated in a treatment plant designed appropriately on the lines discussed in Chapter 5. The
accumulating sludge at the bottom of the septic tank however, has to be also removed and treated once
it has reached the designed depth or at the end of the designed desludging period whichever occurs
earlier. Such a removal is possible only by trucks. While sucking out the sludge, the liquid in the
septic tank will also be sucked out. Such a mixture is referred to as septage. Obviously, the removal
of septage from a household septic tank will occur approximately once in two or three years only.
9.5.1 Characterisation of Septage
9.5.1.1 Septic Tanks used only for Water Closets
In general, the septic tank is intended to be used only for the water closet and hence, the night soil
alone is the causative factor for the organic load. Thus, as far as the BOD is concerned, the per capita
contribution of night soil and the volume of ablution water and its frequency per day are relevant. The
urine is the factor for the nitrogen content. The septic tank system reported in the twin drain system
has recorded a range of characteristics of BOD, COD and SS as in Table 9.12 and in Table 8.1.
Table 9.12 Range values of BOD, COD and SS at inlet to septic tank in India
No. Indicator BOD, mg/L COD, mg/L SS, mg/L
1 Mean 1,290 2,570 4,140
2 Standard Deviation 143 290 542
3 Range 970 to 1,550 1,920 to 3,050 2,550 to 4,860
The average amount of ablution water used at this location was about 6 litres per use. The BOD
from defecation is about 8 grams/day. This corresponds to the BOD value in the above table. This
value of BOD can however vary drastically based on the volume of ablution water and the number
of times per day though the usage rarely exceeds one usage per day. It stands to reason to infer
that the BOD of septage is relatable to the liquid portion and the suspended matter and the rates at
which these have undergone some degradation by anaerobiasis in the tank and the accumulation
especially in the sludge zone. All these are highly variable and as such a theoretical basis for arriving
at the characteristics of septage is fraught with uncertainty. In respect of the literature values reported
from advanced countries in the west, the personal habits of ablution water vs. toilet paper is a crucial
influencing factor defying the flat out adoption of the characteristics reported from those locations.
9.5.1.2 Septic Tanks used for all Domestic Sewage
The per capita BOD being 36 g per day and a water usage at about 100 lpcd will imply a BOD of 360
mg/l though it will be higher if the lpcd goes down.
9 - 41
9.5.1.3 Septic Tanks used for Sewage from Water Closets and Bathing
The US EPA "Handbook on Septage Treatment and Disposal - 62568409 identifies Septage as
arising from water closets and bath tubs. This is understandably off the mark for the average Indian
conditions where the bath tub is first of all a non-entity in the household except in high profile urban
living, where incidentally the conventional sewage prima facie eliminates the septage issue.
9.5.1.4 Values Reported from Elsewhere
Given the above understanding of the overall scenario, it stands to reason not to be guided
by the characterization data from western countries in the bath tub usage category. A value
reported is "BOD concentrations between 2,000 and 20,000 mg/l and TSS values in excess of 50,000
mg/l, where septic tank effluent has values averaging 200 mg/l BOD and 300 mg/l TSS (Septage
Management Guide for Local Governments-David M Robbins). The US EPA in "Handbook on Septage
Treatment and Disposal - 62568409 has reported the organic and heavy metals in septage as in
Table 9-13 and Table 9-14 (overleaf). The characteristics of Septage reported from the city of Surabaya,
Indonesia are BOD of 8,250 mg/l, COD of 17,250 mg/l, and TSS of 2,000 mg/l.
9.5.1.5 Values to be considered for Indian Conditions
Given the above wide variations in literature values and the various influencing factors, it becomes
risky to hazard a guess on advocating a set of characteristics for septage in Indian conditions.
However, in order to bring about an example of treatment of septage, the values in
Table 9-15 (overleaf) are proposed to be advocated purely for illustration and it should be mandatory
to carry out local sampling and analysis before designing the treatment and disposal system.
9.6 LOGISTICS OF SEPTAGE COLLECTION
Basically the septage collected should be treated as it cannot be let into the environment directly
because of the characteristics in Table 9-15. Because of this, a treatment facility shall be set up or
the septage added to an existing septage treatment facility. This implies a near uniform loading all the
year round instead of peaking the discharge at certain days alone. This in turn demands the planned
septage collection logistics round the year by the septage trucks. Hence the establishment of a
septage collection unit becomes an adjunct to the decentralized sewerage system where septic
tanks are the primary treatment at households.
9.7 SEPTAGE TREATMENT FACILITY
Sludge generated in an on-site treatment facility is regularly extracted and hygienically treated. The
sludge treatment method includes ( 1) delivery to a sewage treatment facility and treatment with
sludge generated in the sewage treatment process, (2 ) treatment in a special sludge treatment
facility, (3) solar drying on a floor, and (4) treatment by a mobile dehydrating truck. This section
describes the first and second method.
9.8 TREATMENT OF SEPTAGE IN EXISTING STP
This can be brought about in (a) existing STPs depending on the concentrations of BOD, flows and
spare capacity available in them and (b) separate dedicated treatment facility for septage.
9 - 42
Table 9.13 Septage characteristics as per US EPA
United States Europe/Canada Suggested

EPA
Parameter Design
Average Minimum Maximum Variance Average Minimum Maximum Variance Mean
Value
TS 34,106 1,132 130,475 115 33,800 200 123,860 619 38,800 40,000
TVS 23,100 353 71,402 202 31,600 160 67,570 422 25,260 25,000
TSS 12,862 310 93,378 301 45,000 5,000 70,920 14 13,000 15,000
VSS 9,027 95 51,500 542 29,900 4,000 52,370 13 8,720 10,000
bod5 6,480 440 78,600 179 8,343 700 25,000 36 5,000 7,000
COD 31,900 1,500 703,000 469 28,975 1,300 114,870 88 42,850 15,000
TKN 588 66 1,060 16 1,067 150 2,570 17 677 700
n h 3- n 97 3 116 39 - - - - 157 150
Total P 210 20 760 38 155 20 636 32 253 250
Alkalinity 970 522 4,190 8 - - - - - 1,000
Grease 5,600 208 23,368 112 - - - - 9,090 8,000
pH - 1.5 12.6 8 - 5.2 9.0 6.9 6.0
LAS - 110 200 2 - - - 157 150
i) Values expressed as mg/L, except for pH.

ii) The data presented in this Table were compiled from many sources. The inconsistency of individual data sets results in some skewing of
the data and discrepancies when individual parameters are compared. This is taken into account in offering suggested design values.
Source: USEPA
9-43
Table 9.14 Heavy metals in septage as per US EPA
United States Europe/Canada Typical US Suggested

EPA
Parameter Domestic Design Value
Mean
Average Minimum Maximum Average Minimum Maximum Sludge Ranges for Septage
Al 48.00 2.00 200.0 - - - - 48.00 50.00
As 0.16 0.03 0.5 - - - 0-0.7 0.16 0.20
Cd 0.27 0.03 10.8 0.05 - 0.35 0.1-44 0.71 0.70
Cr 0.92 0.60 2.2 0.63 - 5.00 0.9-1,200 1.10 1.00
Cu 8.27 0.30 34.0 4.65 1.25 15.00 3.4-416 6.40 8.00
Fe 191.00 3.00 750.0 - - - - 200.00 200.00
Hg 0.23 0.0002 4.0 - 0.15 0.20 0-2.2 0.28 0.25
Mn 3.97 0.20 32.0 - - - - 5.00 5.00
Ni 0.75 0.20 37.0 0.58 - 2.50 0.5-112 0.90 1.00
Pb 5.20 2.00 8.4 3.88 - 21.25 3.2-1,040 8.40 10.00
Se 0.076 0.02 0.3 - - - - 0.10 0.10
Zn 27.4 2.90 153.0 38.85 1.25 90.00 79-655 49.00 40.00
Note:
i) Values expressed as mg/L.
ii) Values converted from pg/g assuming TS=40,000 mg/L.
Source: USEPA
9-44
Table 9.15 Illustrative characteristics of septage for Indian Conditions
Type A Type B
Source Public toilet or bucket
Septage
latrine sludge
No.
Highly concentrated, Faecal Sludge of low
mostly fresh Faecal concentration; usually stored
Characteristics
Sludge; stored for for several years; more
days or weeks only stabilized than Type A
1 COD (mg/L) 20-50,000 <15,000
2 COD/BOD 5:1 to 10:1 5:1 to 10:1
3 NH4-N (mg/l) 2-5,000 < 1 ,0 0 0
4 TS (%) > 3.5 % <3%
5 SS (mg/l) >30,000 7,000 (approx.)
6 Helminth Eggs 20-60,000 4,000 (approx.)
9.8.1 Pre-Treatment of Septage
This is needed to (a) ensure a flow equalization tank for the septage flow so that it can be loaded
onto the STP at as much uniform flow as possible through the 24 hours, (b) a degritting facility to
segregate the grit content and prevent it from getting into aeration units and pumps etc. and
(c) separate the liquid stream and sludge stream.
The equalization tank may be a relatively deeper tank equipped with sub surface mixers to maintain
the contents in suspension. The surface aerators and diffused aeration will create odour problems.
The degritting facility is best designed as a vortex separator similar to the one described in
Chapter 5. The sludge-liquid separation facility can be a filter press or belt press or screw press or
centrifuges depending on the feed solids concentration being within the capacity of these equipment.
Their designs will be the same as in Chapters 5 and 6 .
The pumps however, can be submersible pump sets with open impellers. A typical receiving station
facility is shown in Figure 9.18 (overleaf)
9.8.1.1 Co-treatment in Existing STPs-Liquid Stream
The basic consideration is the spare capacity at the existing STP. Normally, the septage volumes are
not unduly significant in relation to the full-fledged STP volumes and would seldom exceed about
say 5% and this way, even if the STP is functioning at design capacity, volume wise, it will not be a
problem to add even up to 5% of flows. But it is the BOD load that comes in the way.
Considering a typical STP with about 300 mg/l of raw BOD and a septage volume of about 3% with
a BOD of say 4,000 mg/l, this would result in a situation mentioned overleaf.
9 - 45
Figure 9.18 Typical septage receiving facility
Design capacity of the STP = 1 mld

Actual operating capacity = 0.65 mld
BOD load in to the STP = 0.65 mld x 300 mg/l = 195 kg/day
BOD load from septage = 0.03 mld x 4,000 mg/l = 120 kg/day
Total resulting BOD load = 195 + 120 = 315 kg/day
Designed ability of the STP for BOD load = 1 x 300 = 300 kg/day
Thus, it may be possible to accommodate the septage as long as the actual flow to STP does not
increase. But then, over a period of time both the sewage volume and septage will increase and
hence, it is not easy to use this option as a permanent measure. At the same time, if the spare
capacity is available, then it is wiser to opt for this instead of rushing into a dedicated septage
treatment facility. Yet another option will be to augment or upgrade the STP capacity, which is by far
simpler and so far as the liquid stream is concerned.
9.8.1.2 Co-treatment in Existing STPs-Sludge Stream
The computations similar to that in respect of liquid stream shall be evaluated to verify whether the
sludge treatment facilities of the existing STP can handle the extra sludge from the septage. Most
often, this may be possible. In case it is not possible, add on sludge treatment standalone facilities
shall be designed and constructed instead of trying to invasive augmentations of existing facilities.
9.8.1.3 Points of Addition of the Liquid and Sludge Streams
The points of addition of liquid and sludge streams provided spare capacities are available are
suggested in Figure 9.19 (overleaf)
9.9 TREATMENT OF SEPTAGE AT INDEPENDENT SeTP
When the distance or the capacity of the plant becomes a limiting factor, it is not a feasible option to
transport and treat the septage to the sewage treatment facilities.
9 - 46
In this case treatment plants specially meant for septage treatment becomes an attractive option.
Independent septage treatment plants are designed specifically for septage treatment and usually
have separate unit processes to handle both the liquid and solid portions of septage.
These facilities include mechanical dewatering, sludge drying beds, Waste stabilization ponds, etc.
The benefit of using these treatment plants is that they provide a regional solution to septage man
agement. Many septage treatment plants use lime to provide both conditioning and stabilization
before the septage is dewatered. Dewatered sludge can be used as organic fertilizer after drying
and composting. The remaining effluent/filtrate/supernatant can be released to another treatment
process such as WSP, Anaerobic baffled reactor, constructed wetland or combination of these of
extended aeration activated sludge where it can undergo further treatment and then finally can
be safely discharged.
Choosing an appropriate septage management method relies not only on technical

aspect but also on regulatory requirements. The management option selected should be in
conformity with local, State and Central regulations. Some of the factors that determine the process of
selection include: land availability and site conditions, buffer zone requirements, hauling distance,
fuel costs, labour costs, disposal costs and other legal and regulatory requirements.
The technical options could be as follows:
Case 1: Land Area is not limited but Funds are Limited
Option - 1
Pretreatment - Anaerobic Digesters - Dewatered and Dried Sludge - Composting - Reuse as

Organic Fertilizer; Filtrate of Sludge Drying Bed and Digester supernatant - Pumping - Reed beds
(or) Constructed wetlands - Electricity generation from digester gas. Totally nature based system
with mechanical equipment as needed.
Constructed wetlands are essentially on-site technologies involving sequential treatment of sewage
on-site, in selective filter media and finally greenbelt development and have been developed by IIT
Powai and called Soil Bio Technology and also NEERI and called as Phytorid.
A septage treatment facility handling nearly 51 MLD at Nonthaburi in Thailand is widely reported in
literature. The treatment process is shown in Figure 9.20.
It is reported that the treatment is anaerobic digestion and the digested sludge is sent to drying beds.
The filtrate is dewatered in sand beds and is sent to ponds and the pond effluent is used on public
parks. The use of constructed wetlands has also been reported with solids loading rate of 250 kg/m2/
year, once a week application and percolate impounding for 6 days and harvesting twice a year with
COD removal efficiency of 80 to 90%, and solids accumulation at 12 cm/year in the impoundment.
A photo view is presented in Figure 9.21.
9 - 47
Si
Sew er
S*-Se:
Note:
Figure 9.19 Points of likely addition of liquid and solids from septage on to existing STPs
9-48
------ Solids as fertilizer
Septage
FTo tank --------- > -
Oxidation pond y
V.
Liquid V -
Anaerobic digeste Sludge drying bed effluent
\
1
Reuse fo r horticulture
'
Source:USAID, 2010
Figure 9.20 Septage treatment process at Nonthaburi, Thailand
The Nonthaburi Municipalitys septage treatment facility has 30 anaerobic digestion

tanks and is one of the best run facilities of its kind in Thailand. As part of a pilot project
to improve septage treatment in Lampang, the Asian Institute of Technology partnered
with Lampang Municipality to build a treatment facility that uses a grid of reed beds to
treat septage leachate to secondary levels.
Source:USAID, 2010
Figure 9.21 A photo view of septage treatment process at Nonthaburi in Thailand
Option - 2
Pretreatment - lime stabilization (optional) - Pumping - Sludge Drying beds (FRP covered in regions
of high rainfall) - Dewatered & Dried Sludge - Composting - Reuse as Organic Fertilizer; Filtrate of
Sludge Drying Bed - Pumping - Anaerobic Baffled Reactor / Covered Anaerobic Ponds - Facultative
- Aerobic / Maturation Ponds - chlorination - discharge
Case 2: Land Area is Limited and Funds are also Limited.
Option - 1
Pretreatment - lime stabilization (optional) - Pumping - Mechanical Sludge dewatering system -

Dewatered sludge - Solar drying or/and Composting - Reuse as Organic Fertilizer; Filtrate of
Mechanical Dewatering Machine - Pumping - Anaerobic Baffled Reactor / Covered Anaerobic Ponds
- Facultative - Aerobic / Maturation Ponds - chlorination - discharge. There should be 25% additional
capacity of sludge drying beds in case of maintenance of dewatering machine and or unavailability
of polyelectrolyte.
9 - 49
Option - 2
Pre-treatment - lime stabilization (optional) - Pumping - Sludge drying beds (FRP

covered in regions of high rainfall) - Dewatered & Dried Sludge - Composting - Reuse as Organic
Fertilizer; Filtrate of Sludge / septage Drying Bed - Pumping - Extended Aeration - Activated Sludge
Process (Continuous or Batch) - chlorination - discharge
Case 3. Land Area is Limited and Funds are not limited
Pretreatment - lime stabilization (optional) - Pumping - Mechanical Sludge

dewatering system - Dewatered sludge - Solar drying or/and Composting - Reuse as
Organic Fertilizer; Filtrate of Mechanical dewatering machines - Pumping - Extended Aeration
Activated Sludge Process (Continuous or Batch) - chlorination - discharge. There should be 25%
addition capacity of sludge drying beds in case of maintenance of dewatering machine and or
unavailability of polyelectrolyte.
9.9.1 Pre-Treatment of Septage
The pre-treatment facilities discussed earlier are the same in this case also (Figure 9-18).
In addition, if possible there should be lime stabilization facility to control odour, vector and pathogen
destruction. Lime stabilization involves adding and thoroughly mixing lime (alkali) with each load of
septage to ensure that the pH is raised to at least 12 for at least 30 minutes.
Lime addition could be done at any of these three points:
i) To the hauler truck before the septage is pumped,
ii) To the hauler truck while the septage is being pumped, or
iii) To a septage storage tank where septage is discharged from a pumper truck is shown in
Figure 9.22 (overleaf)
9.9.2 Septage Dewatering
The septage after lime dosing is pumped to screw press or any other mechanical dewatering
machine. Polyelectrolyte is added to increase the dewatering efficiency of the machine.
The liquid residual / pressate / filtrate / supernatant from dewatering machine can be discharged
for further biological treatment. The dewatered sludge can be send for further drying or
composting prior to reuse as organic fertilizer. The typical mechanical septage dewatering system
is shown in Figure 9.23 (overleaf)
Instead of Screw Press the options can be:
i) Centrifuge
ii) Belt Press
iii) Filter Press
9 - 50
Supernatant to pH neutralization and dedicated STP

Underflow to mechanical dewatering with polyelectrolyte
Figure 9.22 Lime stabilization of septage
Figure 9.23 Typical Mechanical Septage Dewatering System
9 - 51
9.10 ADVANTAGES AND DISADVANTAGES OF THE SYSTEMS
Advantages and disadvantages of septage treatment at STPs and at independent septage treatment
facility are given in Table 9.16 and Table 9.17, respectively.
Table 9-16 Advantages and disadvantages of septage treatment at sewage treatment plant
Method Description Advantages Disadvantages
Treatment Septage is added to the Most STPs in India are Potential for
at STPs or pumping station, upstream underutilized and are STP upset if
Independe manhole or sludge treatment capable to handle plants are
nt septage process for co-treatment with some septage. As running at full
treatment sewage sludge. Septage skilled personnel and capacity.
facility in volumes that can be laboratory facilities are Increased
the vicinity accommodated depend on available in STPs, sludge
of STPs plant capacity and types of easy to operate and treatment cost.
unit processes employed. maintain.
Table 9.17 Advantages and disadvantages of independent septage treatment facility
Method Description Advantages Disadvantages
Treatment A facility is constructed Provides regional High capital and

at solely for the treatment solutions to the operation and
independent of septage. Treatment septage maintenance cost.
septage generates residuals, management.
treatment i.e., dewatered sludge Requires high skills of
plants and filtrate which must operation in case of
be dried composted mechanical dewatering.
(dewatered sludge) and
properly treated
(filtrate) prior to being
disposed off.
9.11 COMPOSTING OF DEWATERED SEPTAGE OR SLUDGE
Another feasible option is composting where bulking agents are easily available. The humus is
produced after composting that can be used as a soil conditioner. Composting is the stabilization of
organic waste through aerobic biological decomposition. As described in more detail in Chapter 6 ,
the process can be accomplished in various configurations. The different types of composting include
two open-area methods: windrow and static pile composting and in-vessel mechanical composting.
Operational parameters for septage composting are presented in Table 9-18 (overleaf) Compost
products can be sold or given away.
9 - 52
Table 9.18 Operational parameters for dewatered septage composting
Parameter Optimum range Control mechanisms
Moisture Dewatering of septage to 10 to 20% solids

content of followed by addition of bulking material
40-60%
compost (amendments such as sawdust and woodchips),
mixture 3:1 by volume amendment: dewatered septage.
Periodic turning (windrow), forced aeration (static

Oxygen 5-15% pile), mechanical agitation with compressed air
(mechanical).
Temperature
Natural result of biological activity in piles. Too
(compost must 55-65C
much aeration will reduce temperature.
reach)
Septage is generally within this pH range,

pH 5-8
adjustments not normally necessary.
Carbon/nitrogen
20:1 to 30:1 Addition of bulking material.
ratio
9.12 DEWATERED SEPTAGE SLUDGE REUSE
For dewatered septage/sludge agriculture application, it should satisfy the following criteria of Class
A Biosolids of US EPA either by lime stabilization, solar drying and or composting.
A faecal coliform density of less than 1,000 MPN/g total dry solids
Salmonella sp. density of less than 3 MPN per 4 g of total dry solids (3 MPN/4 g TS)
Properly treated sludge can be reused to reclaim parched land by application as soil conditioner, and
as a fertilizer in agriculture. Deteriorated land areas, which cannot support the plant vegetation due
to lack of nutrients, soil organic matter, low pH and low water holding capacity, can be reclaimed and
improved by the application of sludge.
Septage sludge has a pH buffering capacity resulting from lime addition that is beneficial in the
reclamation of acidic sites, like acid mine spoils, and acidic coal refuse materials.
Sludge with a solid content of 30% or more handled with conventional end-loading equipment, and
applied with agricultural manure spreaders. Liquid sludge, typically with solid content less than 6 %
managed and handled by normal hydraulic equipment.
Agricultural use of sludge matches best with priorities in waste management. Sewage sludge
contains nutrients in considerable amounts, which can be used as discussed in Chapter 6 of the
part A manual.
9 - 53
CHAPTER 10: PREPARATION OF CITY
Part A: Engineering SANITATION PLAN
CHAPTER 10: PREPARATION OF CITY SANITATION PLAN
10.1 THE PLANNING PROCESS
Planning is a thinking process. In sewerage and sewage treatment, it aims at identifying how best the
required infrastructure can be conceived in mind and given shape within the restrictions of available
funds and satisfying the public as far as possible. For example, a twin pit latrine is a boon in remote
hilly area, but totally unfit in a city. Thus, planning has to be above all "relevant to situation on hand .
The planning process is a systematic method of:
1. Understanding the existing needs
2. Identifying the limitations and restrictions of funds
3. Collecting and analyzing available records of these
4. Identifying the options of potential remedies
5. Suggesting a set of actions, which may change the situation and step-by-step eliminate the
problems
6 . Evolve a suitable strategy for implementation with respect to a time frame
7. Go through a consultative process with the stakeholders to evolve a complete acceptance of

physical, financial and managerial aspects
8 . Evaluation of the actions taken for their success or failure and documentation for posterity
9. Thus, planning is a continual process and not a one-time process adopting principles and
technology which are environment friendly, economically viable and sustainable
10. It also includes the reuse of the reclaimed water from treated sewage and conditioned sludge for
feasible purposes that are hygienically safe
11. It needs close collaboration with other planning agencies at local, state and national levels to
ensure co-ordination in allocation of priorities and resources
12. All these must be aimed to be reached in a step-by-step manner so that the lessons of the earlier
step will improve the efforts in the next step
10.2 THE CITY SANITATION PLAN (CSP)
A city sanitation plan (CSP) is a living document as a result of the planning process.
Every ULB should have a city sanitation plan and undertake to implement it for all its citizens in an
economic, environmentally friendly and sustainable manner.
10 - 1
10.3 DESIGN PERIOD
The following design period could be considered:
i) Short-term plan up to 5 years from base year

ii) Medium-term plan up to 15 years
iii) Long-term plan 30 years
The base year for short term will start when the completed infrastructure is put to use. The years of
medium term and long term will start from the year of planning
The planning process involves close collaboration with other planning agencies at local, state
and national levels to ensure better coordination in allocation of priorities and resources. The
collection, transportation, treatment and disposal aspects, facilities, augmentation and
replacement of the equipment and sites, allocation of priorities and resources should invariably
be decided keeping in view the design period of the CSP.
The design population will have to be estimated considering the decadal growth pattern and factors
impacting growth such as economy, social, etc. Special factors causing sudden emigration or influx
of population should also be foreseen to the extent possible. Worked out examples for estimation of
the future population are given in Appendix A.2.2.
10.5 BASIC PLANNING MODEL
10.5.1 Draft Framework for a CSP under NUSP
10.5.1.1 Generic Elements of Planning
This shall be in accordance with the chart as contained in the National Urban Sanitation Policy
(NUSP) and reproduced here as Figure 10.1 overleaf.
10.5.1.2 Purpose
The purpose of this framework is to assist ULBs, NGOs, community based organizations,
citizens and private sector agencies through a series of steps towards the development of a plan for
achieving the goal of 100% sanitation in their cities. The focus is the approach and "how to go
about the process to develop a comprehensive, wholesome citywide sanitation plan. Since each
city will make choices based on demand and need, local context, availability of financial and human
resources, and the opportunity for innovations, this chapter does not prescribe the options to choose.
The framework may be adapted to suit the states urban sanitation strategy and used for its cities.
To assist in thinking through the challenge, some core building blocks are outlined in Figure 10.1.
Though apparently linear, the process needs to be iterative.
10 - 2
P artA : Engineering
___________________ SANITATION PLAN
Specify Legal Technology Choice O&M and State and

and Up-gradation, New Service City Level
Regulatory Investments, O&M Delivery Reward
Responsibility Management Systems Schemes
Setting up City
Sanitation
Fixing
Permanent
I
Citywide Implementation
I
Evaluation Monitoring
Sanitation Management of 1 0 0 % of 1 0 0 %
Task Force Institutional Plan (CSP) - and M&E - Sanitation Sanitation
and Responsibility and Supervision Status Status
Implementing and Sanitation Financing
Agency Implementation Consultations
Roles 4 Canac'itv
Multi-
t t Building
Stakeholder
Baseline Data Special
Meeting, Public
Collection and Approaches
Resolution and
concurrent use of for Sanitation
IEC Campaign
data in initial actions, for the Poor
IEC Campaigns, and
detailed planning
Source: MoUD, 2008

Figure 10.1 Generic elements of planning, implementation and monitoring and evaluation of citywide sanitation
10-3
The states will need to determine time-frames and deadlines to achieve the goals mentioned in
the NUSP and will need to spell out a detailed road map, including the incremental targets for
achievement of goals. For example, to achieve the goal of open defecation free (ODF) by the
year 2013, a detailed plan for extending access will need to be formulated and implemented in a
time-bound manner. The steps towards achieving universal access through individual,
community or public toilets, the capital and operation and maintenance costs and the management
arrangements needs to be detailed and made operational under the CSP. While some of the activities
in the sanitation plan may be possible to complete with little financial resources e.g., better
utilization of existing facilities, improved management systems for septage cleaning, awareness
generation, etc.; others e.g. reconditioning or laying new sewers, may be more resource-intensive.
The CSP will need to be prepared keeping in view the citys current sanitation arrangement and
their technical and financial capability. It will be prudent to improve the effectiveness of existing
facilities before embarking on new projects. Further, comprehensive and citywide solutions,
and not just some piecemeal solution, will be necessary to achieve the goals in a comprehensive
and systematic manner.
10.5.2 Steps for Achieving 100% Sanitation
10.5.2.1 Key Principles
The NUSP identified the following core principles that need to be addressed. These must be used as
a guide by the cities:
Institutional roles and responsibilities

Awareness generation for changing mind-sets
Citywide Approach
Technology choice
Reaching the un-served and poor
Client focus and generation of demand

Sustained improvements
10.5.2.2 Preparatory Actions
10.5.2.2.1 City Sanitation Task Force
Mobilize Stakeholders: The first step in making the cities 100% sanitized is to create awareness on
the need to improve sanitation in the mind of municipal agencies, civil society and most importantly,
amongst the people of the city. These can be done by the following approaches.
a) Constitute a multi-stakeholder City Sanitation Task Force comprising representatives from
Agencies directly responsible for sanitation including on-site sanitation, sewerage, water supply,
solid waste, drainage, etc., including the different divisions and departments of the Urban Local
Bodies (ULB), Public Health Engineering Department (PHED), etc.,
10 - 4
Agencies indirectly involved in or impacted by sanitation conditions including representatives

from the civil society, colonies, slum areas, apartment buildings, etc.,
Eminent persons and practitioners in civic affairs, health, urban poverty,
Representatives from shops and establishments,
Representatives of other large institutions in the city (e.g. Cantonment Boards, Government of
India or State Government. Enterprise campuses, etc.),
NGOs working on water and sanitation, urban development and slums, health and environment,
Representatives of unions of safai karamcharis, sewerage sanitary workers, recycling

agents / kabaris, etc.,
Representatives from private firms/contractors formally or informally working in the sanitation

sector (e.g. garbage collectors, septic tank desludging firms, technology providers for sewage
and sludge treatment, etc.),
Representatives from educational and cultural institutions,
Elected members from the State Assembly and City Councils,
Any other significant or interested stakeholders.
The Task Force should be headed by the Mayor with the executive head (e.g., Municipal
Commissioner) as the Convener. Cities can also choose to appoint, as a part of the Task Force,
City Sanitation Ambassadors chosen from eminent people, who enjoy outstanding credibility and
influence amongst the citys leadership and population. Political leadership from all political parties
and persuasions must be involved in the planning process so that the sanitation campaign has their
full support and no opposition from any group.
One of the things to be considered by the Task Force is to organize a multi-stakeholder, multi-party
meeting in the preparatory stage, and take a formal resolution to make the city 1 0 0 % sanitized,
and publicize the same and disclosing with all signatories.
b) The City Sanitation Task Force will be responsible for:
Launching the City 100% Sanitation Campaign
Generating awareness amongst the citys citizens and stakeholders
Approving materials and progress reports provided by the implementing agency, other
public agencies, as well as NGOs and private parties contracted by the Implementing Agency, for
different aspects of implementation
Approving the CSP for the city prepared by the Sanitation Implementation Agency after
consultations with citizens
Undertaking field visits from time to time to supervise progress
10 - 5
Issue briefings to the press/media and state government about progress
Providing overall guidance to the Implementation Agency
Recommend to the ULB fixing of responsibilities for citywide sanitation on a permanent basis
The Task Force should meet formally frequently (at least once in two months) in the initial stages
to monitor and guide the process of planning and implementation. At a later stage, meetings and
field visits can be on an as-needed basis. In some cities, the City Sanitation Task Force may divide
up roles and responsibilities amongst smaller sub-committees to focus on different aspects closely
while keeping the overall character of the Task Force intact.
c) The Task Force should appoint one of the key agencies, preferably the ULB, as the
Implementing Agency, which will be responsible for the implementation of the CSP for the city.
This agency will be responsible for day-to-day coordination, management and implementation of the
sanitation programmes on a citywide basis. The agency will coordinate with and agree on joint
actions with other public agencies, and contract in and supervise the services of NGOs (through
Memorandum of Understanding) and private parties (through contracts) for preparing and
disseminating materials for Information, Education and Communication (IEC), conducting baseline
surveys and stakeholder consultations, maintaining a comprehensive GIS-based database,
implementing physical works, letting out and supervising O&M management contracts, etc.
The ULB should formally notify and publicize the appointment of the City Sanitation Task Force
and Implementing Agency.
d) Assign Institutional Responsibilities:
One of the key gaps in urban sanitation is lack of clear and complementary institutional
responsibilities. This comprises two aspects: a) roles and responsibilities institutionalized on a
permanent basis; and b) roles and responsibilities for the immediate campaign, planning and
implementation of the Citys Sanitation Plan - based on which the former can be outlined,
experimented with, and finally institutionalized.
The Sanitation Task Force will recommend the assigning of permanent responsibilities for citywide
sanitation to the ULB or other agencies including the following aspects:
The ULB to have final overall responsibility for citywide sanitation, including devolving power,
functions, functionaries and funds to them
Planning and Financing including State Government and Government of India schemes
Asset creation including improvement and augmentation
Operations and Management (O&M) arrangements for all networks, on-site, community and
public sanitation facilities and systems (including transportation up to final treatment and
disposal of wastes)
10 - 6
Fixing tariffs and revenue collections in order to make O&M sustainable
Improving access and instituting special O&M arrangements for the urban poor and un-served
populations in slum areas and in mixed areas
Adopting standards for:
- Environment Outcomes (e.g. State Pollution Control Board standards on

effluent parameters),
- Public Health Outcomes (e.g. State Health Departments),
- Processes (e.g. safe disposal of on-site septage) and
- Infrastructure (e.g. design standards) (PHEDs/Parastatals), and
- Service Delivery standards (e.g. by Urban Development Departments)
Adoption of Regulatory roles including environmental standards (e.g. State Pollution Control
Boards), health outcomes (e.g. Health Departments).
Measures in case specific stakeholders do not discharge their responsibilities properly
Training and Capacity Building of implementing agency and related personnel
Monitoring of 100% Sanitation involving multiple stakeholders
While the responsibilities for each of the above roles may temporarily be vested in one or the other
stakeholders, for reasons of efficiency and effectiveness during the campaign period, the Task Force
will recognize that these roles must be permanently institutionalized in the ULB and amongst other
stakeholders. Therefore, the recommendation of later permanent roles may be different from those
in the Campaign Period.
In many cases, Acts, rules and regulations exist, but these are not enforced. This may be a good
entry point to start on roles and responsibilities. The roles and responsibilities for the Sanitation
Plan implementation are outlined in the next section - this will also be the task of the City Sanitation
Task Force.
10.5.2.3 Baseline Data Collection for Database / GIS
In parallel with the preparatory steps, the ULB / implementing Agency will collate the information
on the current sanitation situation that exists in the city. This will include demographic, institutional,
technical, social and financial information. In addition, it will commission a private agency or an
NGO or both to carry out primary data collection on the missing items - the surveys will use a mix of
structured and participatory techniques. All the data collected must be amenable to linking to an
existing or proposed Geographic Information Systems (GIS) for the city. (If this does not exist, it is
recommended that a GIS for water, sanitation and solid waste management be set up at the earliest).
The baseline will be overlaid on plans for development of new areas and colonization, based on the
Master Plan of the City. If a Master Plan does not exist, appropriate projections will be made after
consulting real estate development public authorities as well as private agencies.
10 - 7
The combined database from the above exercise will form the basis for planning and implementing
the campaign. Since such data collection can be time-consuming, ULBs must start very early on this
activity and start using data as and when it starts becoming available.
One of the methods to make data collation and database preparation process efficient and adaptive to
planning and implementation actions, is to break it down into simplified components like:
Stage I Data: use for initial preparatory actions
ULB, and utility/service provider data on institutional parameters (organizational structure,

investments and assets, personnel, O&M systems and finances),
Census 2011 data on households, JnNURM / Urban infrastructure development scheme for small
and medium towns (UIDSSMT) or other schemes data compiled for poor households
ULB and utility/service provider data on public sanitation and available crude data on
conveyance and treatment.
Stage II Data: use for IEC Campaign and planning to achieve universal access to sanitation
on a citywide basis.
Refined secondary data on existing conditions of disposal and conveyance (sewers, on-site pits,
availability and use of suction machines, etc.) and treatment systems (landfill sites, recycling, etc.)
Baseline primary data on household arrangements for sanitation and waste disposal, and
hygiene behaviour and perceptions about service providers
Baseline primary data on citizens demands and perceptions about sanitation arrangements,
outcomes, health and environmental linkages
Stage III Data: Use for planning and implementing institutional changes, social mobilization and
upgradation, improvements and new investments in assets and systems of O&M, monitoring
and evaluation, etc.
Primary data based on sample condition assessment surveys (see parameters above) of
arrangements, disposal and treatment systems.
Institutional Assessment detailed information on existing and required skills and capacities,
systems and procedures, financial position
Social - personal hygiene and public health behaviour and practices
Economic - Surveys on willingness to pay for different options
Financial - Costs of O&M, Revenue and tariffs, systems of community management of

community and neighbourhood level systems
10 - 8
Usually, a baseline study needs to be completed in about three to four months (Class II and above),
depending on the size of the city and complexities involved. About two months is adequate to
complete baseline in cities of Class III and below. Combining participatory approaches with
institutional and other stakeholders, with observation and community and household interactions
using checklists, schedules, etc., makes the data collection efficient and economical. It may be
noted that the baseline is not a census of all properties and households/units. It is rather an
assessment, usually using sampling to cover all representative types of situations prevailing in
the city, in order that progress can be measured at later points comparing with the baseline. Most
immediately, baseline studies are required for planning the citywide sanitation plan. It is advisable to
cover all aspects during the baseline: technical, institutional, social, economic, financial, urban poor,
etc., and be cautious that none of the aspects are left out. Even if the baseline studies are completed
in a short period - this is necessary so that planning processes are not kept on hold for long - further
data collection and updating of records must continue later on too, and become a part of the ULB/
Implementation Agencys implementation management system.
10.5.2.4 Awareness Generation and Launch of 100% Sanitation Campaign
After a reasonable amount of data has been collated from secondary and primary sources,
and the Task Force is in place, the first task will be launching a citywide 100% Sanitation
Campaign. This will be ideally timed with GOI national media campaign, and a state wide
campaign that the state government may choose to launch. If required, a professional media
agency to work closely with the Task Force and Implementing Agency to package the messages
and direct them effectively to different stakeholder groups in the city. NGOs may be commissioned
to do group messaging and door-to-door campaigns with special stakeholders like slum-dwellers
etc. Schools and Colleges can play a special role in propagating the messages in their institutions
as well as in their families.
At the city level, it will be advisable to launch the campaign as a time-bound programme that all
stakeholders need to work towards. Appropriate media like Newspapers, TV and city and ward/
neighbourhood level programmes (sweeping streets, health camps, tree-planting, etc.) may be
engaged. There should be an intensive first round followed by successive rounds that may be
focused on specific aspects and/or special type of stakeholders, or neighbourhoods. One of the
methods that some cities or neighbourhoods may try out is to declare Clean City Week every year or
half-year. The Task Force should enlist the participation of leaders and eminent persons to lead the
campaigns. The messages and media/campaign strategy for each of the successive rounds must
be planned carefully. There are a number of other programmes (e.g. health, education, HIV/AIDS,
etc.) that have media campaigns. The 100% Sanitation campaign should be coordinated with such
agencies so that maximum multipliers can be gained by collaborative and calibrated working of these
initiatives. W herever possible, messages should be put in other campaigns to reinforce the impact.
10.5.2.5 Specifying Legal and Regulatory Institutional Responsibilities
Even though there are municipal laws with regard to sanitation responsibilities of households and
ULB, etc., these are neither clearly laid out nor comprehensive. The Implementing Agency will
examine the law and rules in this regard and make recommendations regarding:
10 - 9
Safe sanitary arrangements at unit level (household, establishment)

Designs and systems for safe collection
Norms for transport/conveyance
Treatment and final disposal
The recommended standards and guidelines are available from the CPHEEO and the Environment
Acts. These will need to be formally adopted including laying down the monitoring and regulatory
responsibilities, and incentives and disincentives for doing so. This must include the system of user
charges/fees, fines and community pressure mechanisms to help people move to desirable public
health behaviour. Actions to be taken in case of institutional failure will also be specified clearly.
All the above recommendations will be considered by the Task Force and recommended to the ULB
for appropriate action. Executive changes may be implemented immediately, whereas legal matters
may be referred to the State Government if not within the ambit of the ULB. Expert advisors on the
Sanitation Task Force will be the resources to utilize for this task - matters may be discussed with
national or state level agencies if standards are not clear, or need to be further detailed. Interim and
working standards may suffice in many cases to immediately adopt and implement, whereas the
codification and detailing may be undertaken in parallel. In all cases, the Task Force will strive to
make standards based on the goals of 100% Sanitation, as much as possible, simple and easy for
ULBs and public to understand and adhere to.
10.5.2.6 Planning and Financing
The task of planning and finding sources of funding will be under the oversight of the Task Force, but
carried out by the Implementing Agency. The Agency will take assistance from consultants, etc., to
help prepare plans for the city for different aspects including institutional, social, technical, financial,
etc. At all stages, the plans must be comprehensive and cover the whole of the city, and not just one
part or aspect. Therefore, a number of innovative measures may have to be used.
The Government of Indias Jawaharlal Nehru National Urban Renewal Mission (JNNURM),
Basic Services to Urban Poor (BSUP), and Thirteenth Finance Commission (TFC) are the key
programmes to source funding (others being special programmes for the North-East and satellite
towns schemes, etc.), apart from State Governments own resources. Planning should be aligned to
the above funding sources (as well as what customers are willing to pay by way of connection fees,
user charges, etc.), and seek to derive maximum benefits from these sources for achieving 1 0 0 %
sanitation. The City and States will also need to explore other sources of finance to fund their
sanitation plans since Government of India scheme resources may not be enough to fulfill all
requirements. In this context, it may also be noted that investments will need to be financially
sustainable and hence, cities may lay down options (different levels of infrastructure and service
levels) depending on what they can afford in the medium term, and what will prevent them from
getting trapped in high loan repayment liabilities, or O&M management expenditure bubble at a
later point in time. The CSP must be prepared and presented by the Implementing Agency and
presented to the Task Force for approval. While the exact contents of the CSP may vary depending
on the local situation, the aspects mentioned overleaf must be covered:
10 - 10
Plan for Development of Institutions/Organizations responsible for sanitation, and their

roles and responsibilities
Plan for ensuring 100% Sanitation Access to different socio-economic groups, and related O&M
systems (including improving existing systems, supplementary facilities, O&M Management
contracts using PPP and community management, etc.)
Costs and tariffs for service provision
The issue of collection of dues needs to be emphasized as a means of ensuring accountability as

well as financial sustainability.
Investments and O&M systems for new development areas/market and public places, and
residential and other habitations
Plan for safe collection, conveyance and treatment of household wastes
Plan for Monitoring and Evaluation of implementation, and of achieving and sustaining 100%
Sanitation (including use of community monitoring, etc.)
Issues such as diminishing water resources, impact of climate change, use of low energy
intensive on-site/decentralized sewage treatment technologies, distributed utilities, etc.
Manpower issues such as adequate remuneration, hazardous nature of work,

employment on transparent terms and conditions, use of modern and safe technology,
provision of adequate safety equipment such as gloves, boots, masks, regular health
check-ups, medical and accident insurance cover, etc.
Plans for other locally significant aspects.
Some of the bigger cities may choose to prepare the plans on a regional/district or ward-wise basis.
This may be a good way to mobilize stakeholders of the respective wards/regions and generate
competition. However, at all times, it must be emphasized that such divisions are only limited to
convenience in execution and monitoring, and sanitation must be a citywide achievement. Hence,
the Task Force will have a special role in ensuring the integration of all the regional or functional
components of the CSP as outlined above.
In order to promote wide ownership reflecting the collective and collaborative spirit of the
sanitation endeavour, the CSP should be presented to the public for feedback at different stages
of its development. Notwithstanding the inclusive and representative character of the City Sanitation
Task Force, it is to the citys benefit if all or significant number of city stakeholders is able to contribute
to the Plan. Holding of at least one, preferably two (draft and final stages) public meetings, needs to
be considered by the Task Force.
10.5.2.7 Technical Options
Technology choice poses a major problem in Indian cities not only because of lack of information
on what exists at present, but also because of the constraints of land, tenure, and low budgetary
priority accorded to sanitation historically.
10 - 11
This leads to estimations of investments using conventional technologies that are mind-boggling and
paralyze any incremental action.
The key issues about the technical options are:
Technologies come with attendant capital and O&M costs, and management systems that may or
may not be appropriate to a citys situation at a given time. Very often we can fall into the trap of
planning systems that are difficult to finance, institutions are not ready and geared to operate and
maintain them, and people are not ready or willing to adopt these and pay for service provision.
Also, technology is linked to a whole set of environmental, behavioural and cultural parameters
that need be taken into account. A holistic approach is required for technology choice.
Approach to difficult existing situations (e.g. dense on-site systems draining into nallahs) is to
think about upgradation and retrofitting options to make the systems sanitary and safe and also
perform to their existing capacity.
Technologies need to be incremental - for instance, even if sewers are ideal for dense
settlements, they may not be feasible to immediately execute. In such cases, interim (e.g.
on-site, or community septic tanks, improved septic tanks, Japanese Johkasou, or latrines
if space is a constraint) systems may be planned with a view to later upgrade these to more
sophisticated system (e.g. sewerage). Refer to Chapter 9 On-site Sanitation for details.
Technologies and attendant systems for new development areas can be planned in advance.
This results in early investments leading to cheaper and more sustainable systems in future.
Technologies are only a means and not an end. They are to enable sanitary and safe confinement
and disposal and hence, the approach to design must be keeping these ends in view.
Technologies that promote recycle and reuse of treated sewage should be encouraged.
There is considerable information available on existing options as also the experience with some
new systems and processes. These need to be reviewed by the Implementing Agency and where
needed, specialist advice sought from state and national level agencies, and the private and
community sectors. Exposure visits and training programmes will be required to take an informed
decision. Finally, customers are at the heart of such systems - households and establishments must
be consulted on expressing their preference after being made aware of the pros and cons of each of
the systems under consideration. Technology choice again should address the citywide nature of the
challenge - a mix of options must add up to addressing the issue completely, not just in bits.
Finally, technologies need to be planned for the full cycle of arrangements at the unit level,
conveyance/transport, and final treatment and disposal into the environment. Any combination
of systems that does not lead to the output of 1 0 0 % safe collection, conveyance, treatment, and
disposal will not serve the purpose of achieving 1 0 0 % sanitation for the city.
Situation Analysis: Studies show that the bulk of decision-making and unit level investments are
made by households and establishments - with more focus on sanitation arrangements, and less
attention to collection, treatment and disposal. Public agencies are concerned with collection,
treatment and disposal, but boundaries of roles and responsibilities are not clear.
10 - 12
In many if not most of the cases, public agencies are also unable to accord much attention to the
public infrastructure and systems for collection, treatment, and disposal (e.g. sewerage systems,
sewage treatment plants), or leave it for the households to resolve their problems (e.g. cleaning
of septage). Thus, issues of O&M and sustainability need to be kept in view when planning for
technology options.
10.5.2.8 Reaching the Un-served Populations and Urban Poor
Experiences from many Indian cities show that a differentiated approach is necessary to extend good
quality sanitation services to the poor - the group that suffers the most in terms of adverse impacts
on health and lost earnings.
Participatory approaches are needed to consult the poor settlements and involve them in the process
of planning and management of sanitation arrangements. Many settlements may have the necessary
conditions to support the provision of individual on-site sanitation arrangements (e.g. as tried out in
some pockets in Ahmedabad, etc.) that are ideal, in many others, tenure and legal issues prevent
provision of individual toilets and hence, community toilets (CTs) are the only way for immediate
succour and access (e.g., as is the case with Mumbai, Pune, etc.). In some places, conventional
and shallow sewers have also been tried out as alternative to on-site solutions in dense settlements.
Examination of legal/tenurial, space and affordability issues in close consultation with communities
becomes a key step in planning innovative means that are owned by users and will be sustainably
managed by them.
NGOs can play an important role in mobilizing slum communities. Further, when community groups
themselves take over the O&M of community facilities, then sustainable services become possible.
This is also a way of reducing costs (compared to say, pay and use public toilets) and making
services affordable to the poorest of families.
Another segment of population normally without sanitation is those who live in dispersed urban
locations not being slums or in groups of houses that have legally not been notified as slums.
Innovative approaches are required to extend services to these population groups too. It may be
noted that public sanitation is for general public or floating populations, whereas CTs are those,
where an identifiable core group of users exist, even if floating population may occasionally
use these facilities.
The Implementing Agency will need to take stock of the legal and non-notified settlements in the
city, and in partnership with NGOs and Community Based Organizations (CBOs), initiate a process
of collaborative planning and delivery of services. Sanitation services also serve as an entry point
for improved water supply, drainage improvements and community managed solid waste disposal
systems - these areas should also be targeted while planning for sanitation is being undertaken.
At least 20% of the funds under the sanitation sector should be earmarked for the urban poor.
The issues of cross subsidization of the urban poor and their involvement in the collection of O&M
charges should be addressed.
10 - 13
Finally and not least of all the obstacles, is the mind set of officers of ULBs and other citizens: bias
and myths often hinder proper service provision to poor settlements. There must be a concerted
effort to raise awareness amongst all stakeholders about the huge health and environmental costs
that all have to bear if services are not comprehensively provided to all citizens.
Two steps are necessary to achieve this change in mind-sets: a) orientation programmes must be
conducted for ULB functionaries; and b) setting up permanent systems in ULBs, complemented with
agreements with NGOs and CBOs, to deliver services and monitor outcomes on an urgent basis to
all poor households, as well as others, who are either un-served or have insanitary arrangements for
defecation, collection or disposal.
10.5.2.9 O&M and Service Delivery Systems
Institutional systems for O&M are at the heart of any successful set of systems and procedures to
achieve and sustain 100% sanitation. As outlined above, responsibilities for institutions are weakly
defined and even if stipulated hardly followed properly.
Therefore, existing systems must be examined with the question: which agency or institution is
responsible for operating and maintaining the system or a part thereof? If they do not discharge
their responsibilities, what corrective action or recourse exists and who is responsible for this? For
new investments similar questions need to be asked so that assets and services do not suffer from
lack of proper O&M. A citywide perspective is necessary since O&M is required for all parts of the
sanitation systems, whether it is excreta removal, or drainage or solid waste management. Assigning
institutional responsibility also must go hand in hand with technology selection, design and
implementation/creation of assets.
While sewerage systems have limited responsibility of households (from own property to nearest
street connection), institutions responsible for the rest of the conveyance systems are faced with
a number of personnel, finance and incentives related constraints. These need to be mapped and
clearly addressed - even with little resources; innovations need to be made in the organization
responsible (relevant ULB department or service provider unit) to seek immediate remedies while a
more systematic planned set of steps to improve O&M may be implemented during the plan.
In most on-site systems, households are left to fend for themselves - often, there is no check on
unhealthy and illegal practices such as draining wastes in to nallahs and drains. These also need to
be brought under the remit of the respective public agency and properly dealt with. Septage clearance
services are another area where quick action can be initiated and the necessary fees charged
from households. In drainage and solid waste too, a number of steps can be initiated (some of
these have been successfully tried out in solid waste management in many Indian cities)
to ensure proper O&M and service delivery, in which consumer households also have a stake
and roles built in.
Preparing O&M Protocol for each of the sanitation facilities in the city is a good step in this
direction, and their adherence needs to be monitored by senior officers, elected representatives and
community members.
10 - 14
O&M systems often suffer because customers do not recognize this as a service, and do not pay
for the poor service levels. O&M is closely related to the financial sustainability of service provision,
and hence, the Implementing Agency must take full stock of the financial implications of improving
current and future service levels. These should lead to proposals to the City Task Force, as a part of
the CSP, on how to recover or fund the costs of O&M.
Customer complaints and redressal systems is another major area needing attention. One of the
important changes that need to be effective amongst the ULB, or service providing agency is to treat
citizens as customers of services. Accordingly, complaints, redressal and feedback systems can
be instituted for sustained improvements. Preparing proper customer records and taking structured
feedback are ways already tried out in other sectors with satisfactory results in improving public
services. Providing orientation and training programmes, implementing customer relationship
systems, and linking O&M performance to personnel performance are ways to examine improved
service delivery systems.
Finally, in many cases, households and communities may be in a better position to carry out
O&M tasks or monitor performance thereof. This approach works specially when communities
have incentives to work together and/or there are considerable externalities of a particular
behaviour (individual actions affecting others easily).
Maintenance management of CTs, maintaining cleanliness in neighbourhoods, keeping drains and

nallahs clean, street sweeping, etc., are examples where community groups can easily monitor
the performance of service providers. In case of poorer neighbourhoods and slums, some of these
tasks may be formally entrusted to local groups too.
10.5.2.10 Capacity Building and Training
The role of capacity building and training is crucial in achieving and sustaining 100% sanitation.
Because of the historical neglect, the know-how of sanitation is limited to a minuscule group of
personnel in ULBs/service providing agencies - even these skills run down over time due to little
scope for application and sometimes the narrow nature of the specific job. Therefore, two broad kinds
of interventions are necessary:
a) Orientation, building of skills and aptitude for carrying out different types of activities in respect
of total sanitation
b) Designing and implementing working systems in ULBs or service providing agencies to provide
the right kind of structures, linkages and organizational systems and environments that utilize the
skills and perspectives imparted above.
The task of building capacities is huge - this is compounded by the generally low levels of
synthesis and dissemination of existing knowledge and experiences of working with different kind of
technologies, management regimes, organizational systems and processes and institutional
relationships. Therefore, there is a dual agenda of consolidating and applying existing and new
knowledge in a learning-by-doing framework, and building capacities thereon in an adaptive manner
that is able to accommodate a range of personnel with different kind of backgrounds.
10 - 15
The National and State level Resource Organizations including NGOs, need to be brought in by the
City Task Forces, to assist in this huge agenda that needs to be woven closely with the sanitation
campaign, planning, implementation, and monitoring and evaluation. Similarly, experts need to be
deployed early with assistance of the Union and State Governments, so that the knowledge
development on technologies and management regimes is quickly made available for the city to
adapt. The role of NGOs will be valuable in training and capacity building for participatory methods
and consultation techniques to be used with the urban poor and un-served households.
Two strategies are worth considering in the capacity building agenda: a) bulk training for a range
of municipal, NGO/CBO, private sector personnel - right from the start of the campaign in the
city; b) Differentiated and specialized training on a demand-basis to personnel in and outside the
government over the period of the Sanitation Plan implementation.
One of the common failures of training and capacity building is the lack of incentives and
organizational environment to practice the learnt perspectives and skills. This highlights the need
for the Task Force and implementing organizations to plan the training of their personnel in such a
manner that their skills can be put to productive use.
Agencies from the private sector, public and NGO training and capacity building institutions must be
involved in the campaign process to carry out the necessary assessments and help the Task Force
plan and devise a strategy for Human Resource Development and capacity development through
the implementation cycle, and institute appropriate practices within the institutional framework of
the ULB and other stakeholders for the future.
10.5.2.11 Implementation, Management, Monitoring and Evaluation
10.5.2.11.1 Implementation Management
The task of implementation management can prove to be onerous if the planning stages are
done in a hurry or are inadequate in taking account of ground reality (including current assets,
finances, capacities and availability of suppliers and vendors, and other environmental conditions).
While the Implementation Agency will be responsible for overall implementation, it is useful to think
about plan implementation and delivery mechanisms for each of the components of the Plan.
The typical components indicate that there need to be either in-house resources deployed for these
tasks (e.g. as in bigger ULBs) or private and NGO service providers need to be contracted or
commissioned to carry out the implementation. The following types of skills and competencies are
required in these implementation agents:
Institutions/Organizations Development, and financial (capital and O&M costs, tariffs,

ULB finances, etc.)
Socio-economic and community management
Urban planning
Health and environmental linkages to sanitation
10 - 16
Technical capacities to implement new assets and facilities and set up O&M systems for new
development areas
Monitoring and Evaluation (M&E)
Capacities to address plans for other local aspects
Expert institutions, Consultants, NGOs, etc. who were involved in planning, may be considered for
participating in and providing project management support to the Implementation Agency. In some
of the larger cities, this may be an effective way to achieve efficient implementation of a large-scale
sanitation plan for which the city may not have all expertise and management competencies within
the ULB, or where many parallel activities are to be implemented leading to shortage of personnel
during peak activities.
Contracts and their management are crucial in making sure that the implementation is without
delays and adheres to appropriate quality standards. Two broad kinds of services are required:
hardware related capacities that have to do with implementing physical works and
software/process related capacities, e.g., social mobilization, institutional development, training, etc.
Since the ULB may not have requisite capacities and systems to effectively deal with the challenges
of contracting and supervision of contracts, innovations are needed: these include taking assistance
from State level agencies in selection and procurement; appointing contractors and consultants on
a cost-plus basis; lump-sum or unit-price contracts for other components and so on. Memoranda of
Understanding (MoU) (e.g. with NGOs) to arrive at a common shared understanding of
responsibilities and deliverables are another tool to address some of the components. Finally,
training in contract management may be an area that core members of the Implementing Agency
need to go through if, requisite capacities are deemed to be wanting.
The presence and guidance of the City Sanitation Task Force will be an assurance of quality
procedures, fairness, and focus on deliverables. Supervision and M&E of implementation will
provide other methods of mid-course correction.
10.5.2.11.2 Monitoring, Evaluation and Supervision of Progress
The City Sanitation Task Force and the Implementing Agency need to think about M&E of the
implementation as an integral part of the CSP. The mechanisms to be used in monitoring
implementation include:
Administrative data from Implementing Agency Reports and from the implementing
consultants, contractors
Task Force field visits to different parts of the city
NGOs working in different parts of the city, e.g. an NGO working in certain slum pockets
may be able to monitor changes in the relevant settlements since they work there, visit and
interact with people regularly. A Memorandum of Understanding or undertaking to provide
additional expenses may be required from the ULB, whereas some NGOs, especially those
working on health, may be collecting some of this data as a part of their own work;
10 - 17
Community groups asked to provide structured feedback to the implementing agency and the
task force on progress of implementation and the condition in their respective neighbourhoods
Independent third party assessments
Concurrent evaluations by a survey agency.
An important aspect of monitoring and evaluation is to make the findings and reports available to
the public so that feedback and suggestions can be received from other stakeholders. Sharing key
features in monthly task force meetings and press briefings are also another way of mobilizing city
stakeholders and eliciting their cooperation.
10.5.3 Evaluation of 100% Sanitation Status
The mechanisms and systems used for M&E often determine the quality of assessments of results as
well as to a large extent the responses of different stakeholders. The Ministry of Urban Development
Rating of Cities lists M&E indicators in terms of output, process and outcome related parameters.
While the Task Force and Implementing Agency may use a combination of mechanisms suggested
above for implementation, for evaluation of 100% Sanitation Milestone achievements, a number of
tools can be considered:
A mix of self-assessment by the city sanitation task force - based on implementation agency
data, citizens groups feedback, and primary field visits
Independent report cards and evaluation missions commissioned by the City Task Force and/or
mounted by the State Government
Cross-city monitoring with participation of State level and other-city stakeholders
Government of India rating of cities, service level benchmarks, monitoring missions and
independent agencies
Experiences from other sectors shows that multi-stakeholder M&E systems, using simplified formats
to assess objective indicators are likely to build a shared ownership, and economically produce
reliable results. Therefore, the City Sanitation Task Force may consider publicizing, as a part of the
initial awareness generation campaign, the key indicators that all stakeholders should monitor, and
devise a simplified mechanism to collect data and report on.
Introduction of competitive reward schemes within cities are another way to improve the quality of
monitoring and evaluation of 1 0 0 % sanitation achievements.
10.5.4 Monitoring of 100% Sanitation Status
In order to ensure that after the city or parts thereof do not slip back after the achievement of the
milestone, there need to be systems instituted to ensure that this is not a one-time achievement,
rather a permanent change in behaviour, systems and practices.
10 - 18
Again, multiple stakeholders need to be involved in this process, while the ULB or the Task Force
may take the lead in doing so. The mechanisms to institute sustenance of change include:
ULB Roles in monitoring processes, outputs and outcomes: the ULB will need to assume
leadership and institutionalize the means of monitoring the 100% sanitation status. This will be
closely tied to new investments and O&M roles and responsibilities within the ULB divisions, but
it is recommended that a unit separate from the above units is made responsible for the overall
outcomes of the citys achievements and their sustenance. The ULB will also be able to do this
more effectively if it involves other government agencies (Environment, Health related within and
outside its own organization) NGOs, CBOs, the urban poor, etc.
The role of Citizens Groups in monitoring on a day-to-day basis is invaluable and should be
mobilized especially for the protection of neighbourhoods, incremental improvements, as well as
immediate reporting of any deviance that needs solutions. At the overall city level of course, the
erstwhile monitoring of implementation will transform into adding the responsibilities related to
sustained change at the ground level.
The best method of sustaining change is to regularly collect formal data and informal
information and feedback, and make it public so that there is pressure created equally on the
public agencies, private service providers, as well as households and communities, to keep to
sustained practices. Rewards again serve as triggers for sustenance and in many cases, also
to make improvements that will earn credit to the city. As outlined in Section 10.5.5 below, there
are a number of other indirect benefits that accrue to cities becoming 1 0 0 % sanitized and
making constant improvements.
10.5.5 City Reward Schemes
Cities can institute their own reward schemes to incentivise local stakeholders to participate in
the process of improvements for reaching 100% sanitation. Rewards could be given following the
national guidelines on an area basis. For example, the following could be units for rewards:
a) Municipal Wards
b) Colonies or Residents Associations
c) Schools, colleges and other educational institutions
d) Market and Bazaar Committees
e) City-based institutions or localities, e.g., Railway stations, Bus Depot, Office Bhawans, etc.
f) Other locations and institutions that may be in the city.
The reward may contain a nominal amount of money for further upkeep and maintenance of sanitary
systems, improvements in infrastructure targeted to better health and environment, as also special
purposes like holding environment fairs, health camps, etc. A scroll of honour, public function to
accord recognition, and rating of wards may also be considered as a part of rewards. While such
rewards are being instituted, it must be emphasized that the responsibility of any group or locality is
not over by just its own achievements. It must be a citywide enterprise and no one will be safe and
benefit from a healthy life and environment unless everyone in the city and its surroundings adopts
improved personal and community practices of 1 0 0 % sanitation.
10 - 19
The leadership of municipal ward elected representatives, local community leaders, citizens groups
and community based organizations, will be crucial in achieving and sustaining 1 0 0 % sanitized
wards or localities. They must be mobilized to compete in a healthy manner in achieving sanitation.
Therefore, the reward scheme should become important in local community civic affairs, politics, and
valorize the local economy too.
10.5.6 Cities with Special Institutions and Characteristics
i) There may be cities that have special institutional arrangements: cities where ULBs are not in
place or have responsibilities only for a part of the city (other parts coming under a cantonment
or a development authority). In such cities, a multi-agency Task Force will need to be created that
can plan, guide and monitor the 100% sanitation campaign. It will be crucial that no part of the
city is left out and as convenient and efficient, the authorities implement similar measures in their
respective jurisdictions.
ii) Cities where ULBs are only partially responsible for sanitation, other responsibilities are vested in
parastatal agencies like PHED/PWD, Water Boards, etc. The City Sanitation Task Force must involve
representatives from all agencies involved in sanitation. This will include all agencies responsible for
household/unit level sanitation, sewerage, water supply, health and environment.
iii) Some cities have unique topographical, environmental features (e.g., hilly or coastal regions),
and therefore may be vulnerable to natural phenomena like floods, landslides, earthquakes, etc.
Specialist advice may be sought by such cities from relevant national and state level agencies,
and private firms. Such specialists may be invited to become members in the City Sanitation Task
Force, and contribute their specialist knowledge and advice to the process. In cities vulnerable to
natural disasters, special measures for sanitation must be explicitly incorporated in their Disaster
Preparedness and Mitigation Plan.
If such a plan does not exist, the Task Force must layout the steps to be taken for the city to cope
with such disasters including:
a) Institutional roles and responsibilities for disaster preparedness
b) Incorporation of disaster preparedness in the design and O&M of sanitation arrangements and
systems (at household/unit level, in transport and conveyance, and in sewage treatment / disposal)
c) Emergency measures and rehabilitation measures in the event of disasters
d) Building key points from above in public awareness generation campaigns.
10.6 COORDINATION BETWEEN CMP AND CSP
The essence of planning is coordination. Planning requires resolution of conflicting interests,

allocation of available funds and other resources, inter and intra central and state government
departmental cooperation, and establishment of priorities.
The City Master Plan (CMP) describes the vision for the citys future.
10 - 20
A comprehensive CMP guides development, conservation and capital improvement projects to

improve the quality of life in the community. The plan must comply with the States regulatory
requirements, one of which is in review every 10 years.
Topics addressed in the CMP include the Citys goals and objectives, land use plan, urban design,
housing, infrastructure, parks, open space, transportation, economic development and preservation
of historical monuments.
The CMP is constantly under revision as the needs of the community change and state or ULB
requirements are incorporated into the document. Residents are welcome to share input on the CMP
and are encouraged to get involved keeping in view of environmental and physical status of the city.
The planning period of CMP is a function of various developmental plans as stated above and should
be fairly of a longer period for sustainability of other development plans.
In order to have sustainable CMP and other developmental plans, there is a need for inter and intra
departmental coordination of central and state departments including parastatal agencies.
From the standpoint of the direction and overall needs of National Government, a CSP is one among
several functional plans, such as those dealing with highways, natural resources, education, health,
etc. CSP, therefore, should relate to, and not conflict with, other plans of the city.
It is essential that the city sanitation planning be included in the overall plan of the jurisdiction that will
ultimately implement it. In this way, the agency responsible for sanitation services will be able to
compete effectively for funds, personnel, and other resources and facilities.
10.7 CITY SANITATION PLAN OUTLINE
The basic planning model can be translated into an outline for reporting the established plan.
Such a format communicates the logic inherent in the planning procedure. Planning initiative and
innovation are desirable.
However, each civic body is expected to formulate its own systematic outline and report, taking
into account its particular needs as indicated in the sample format, described later in this chapter,
for the preparation of the CSP
10.8 ALGORITHM FOR DECISION MAKING ON SEWERAGE OPTIONS
The algorithm is presented in Figure 10.2 overleaf.
10.9 REPORTING
The report shall be simple, easy to read as a running text including all calculations, charts and tabular
columns in the Annexure for easy understanding of readers. This will help in a quick grasp for the
management decisions.
The contents can be on the following sequence.
10 - 21
EWS: Economically Weaker Section

Bahao toilets are the toilets directly connected to stormwater drain
Non Conventional sewers: simplified sewers, settled sewers and twin drains
Figure 10.2 Decision Tree: Selecting the technical option (On-site, Decentralized or Conventional)
10 - 22
1) Introduction and Need - not to exceed one page
2) Executive summary - not to exceed one page
3) Physical setting of the study area
4) Existing sanitation arrangements
5) Socio-economic setting of the study area
6) Health statistics of the study area
7) Financial position of the local authority
8) Human resources of the local body
9) Recommended sanitation Plan
10) Ways and means to strengthen the resources of the local body
11 ) Optional models for project delivery mechanisms.
The sample format for preparing the city sanitation plan is mentioned in Table 10.1 (overleaf).
10 - 23
Table 10.1 Sample format for preparing City Sanitation Plan
Elements of the Report
Section I Introduction
Purposes of the plan.
Section II Executive Summary
(Note: This section should be written last and may come at the beginning of the report)
Section III Background of the Planning Area
1. Jurisdictions
a. National
b. State
c. City/Town
(Civic Authorities)
d. Location Map
e. Population (size and densities)
f. Housing (types and locations)
g. Land uses (residential, commercial, industrial, agricultural, extractive, recreational, and
other relevant land uses)
h. Transportation corridors
Section IV Existing Sanitation Conditions
1. Arrange data according to specific needs of the planning agency. As far as possible all the
information related to sanitation has to be collected.
2. Describe and analyse all existing conditions affecting management of sanitation.
a. Storage and collection o f sewage
b. Quantities of sewage generated, collected, treated, reused and disposed of
c. Reuse and disposal practices
d. General management practices (e.g., utilization of manpower and equipment)
e. Public awareness and knowledge about sanitation problems and willingness to pay for
better services
f. Expenditures for sanitation management
Section V Future Conditions and Problem Definition
1. Relevancy for the future (from the analysis of the data o f existing conditions accumulated in sections III
and IV, determine which conditions will have a bearing on the future).
Continued
10 - 24
2. Future problems defined
a. Types
b. Locations
c. Extent
d. Persistence
e. Others
3. All existing conditions and problems bearing upon the future should be forecast at this stage.
Section VI Objectives
Objectives should be clearly stated and based upon need to solve problems defined earlier. Civic author
ity might specify any of the following objectives to solve its sanitation problems:
1. Acceptable methods for storage

2. Acceptable methods for collection of sewage and septage
3. Acceptable sewage treatment practices
4. Acceptable sludge treatm ent practices
5. Acceptable method of recycle and reuse
6 . Acceptable methods of disposal
7. Development of sanitation management organizational structure
8 . Development of better trained personnel (operating and management levels)
9. Better informed public regarding sanitation problems and service requirements
10. Provision of sufficient financial support for sanitation
11. Others
Section VII Recommendations for Solution (The Plan)
1. This section should specify w hat the civic authority intends to accomplish in order to solve its sanitation
problems. It should include designation of the following:
a. System improvement
b. Timing and priorities of intended action (consider short and long-term objectives)
c. Who should act (i.e. agency, department)
d. Estimated costs
e. Problems that will be solved
f. Others
2. It is suggested that the following aspects should be considered in the intended action plan. Proposals
for this action should be accompanied by procedures for accomplishment and a schedule of initiation
of this action.
a. Establishment of sanitation operating departments and identifying its jurisdictions

b. Recruitment, selection and hiring of operating personnel
c. Human resources development programme
Continued
10 - 25
d. Technical assistance to operating units

e. Provisions for inspection and enforcement
f. Licensing of facilities
g. Framing legislation, amendments to rules and regulations
h. Development o f budgeting procedures, financing, cost-effectiveness, special charge features
and other operating management features
i. Public information, education and communication programme/system
j. Others
Section VIII Implementation (occurs outside the plan document but is guided by it)
Appendices
This section of the report should include supporting materials and information used to develop the analy
ses, objectives, and plan. Content of this section might include:
a. Charts
b. Additional tables
c. References
d. Legislation and regulations
e. Definition of terms
f. Methodologies of research and analyses
g. Others
Section IX Monitoring and Performance Evaluation of the Programme

This section of the report should include monitoring of various activities of sanitation services and also
evaluation of the performance of all the related activities with reference to the objectives/targets
envisaged, once the programme is implemented.
Source: MoUD, 2008

The text of the CSP for a city should explain in detail all the above elements that are to be
contained in the plan report and conforming to the above outline.
10 - 26
Government of India
Ministry of Urban Development

Nirman Bhawan, New Delhi 110 011, India
http://moud.gov.in
http://cpheeo.nic.in/
APPENDICES
ABBREVIATIONS
AL Aluminium LT Low Tension
ASP Activated Sludge Process M Meter
Avg Average MBR Membrane Bio Reactor
BIS Bureau of Indian Standards MBBR Moving Bed Bio Reactor
BOD Biochemical Oxygen Demand ML Million litres
BOD -T Biochemical Oxygen Demand - Total MLD Million Litres Daily
BOD-S Biochemical Oxygen Demand - Soluble MLSS Mixed Liquor Suspended Solids
CPCL Chennai Petroleum Corporation Ltd MPN Most Probable Number
COD Chemical Oxygen Demand ORP Oxidation Reduction Potential
COD -T Chemical Oxygen Demand - Total PAC Poly Aluminium Chloride
COD-S Chemical Oxygen Demand - Soluble S Slope
DEWAT Decentralised Wastewater Treatment SBR Sequencing Batch Reactor
DO Dissolved Oxygen SD Standard Deviation
E coli Escherichia Coliform ST Sewage Treatment
Fe Iron STP Sewage Treatment Plant
HRT Hydraulic Retention Time SVI Sludge Volume Index
IIT Indian Institute of Technology TSS Total Suspended Solids
KW Kilowatt V Valley Vrishabhavathi valley

Part A: Engineering APPENDIX
A p p e n d ix Title o f A p p e n d ix Page
A Symbols...............................................................................................................................A-1
AA List of Indian Standards Relating to Sewerage and Sewage Treatment..................A-2
A 1.1 The Prohibition of Employment as Manual Scavengers and their
Rehabilitation Act, 2013..................................................................................................A-23
A 1.2 Time frame for fulfilment of responsibilities and certain activities and
Implementing Agencies...................................................................................................A-38
A 2.1 Performance of Known Sewage Treatment Processes under Indian Conditions..A-40
A 2.2 Estimation of Future Population.................................................................................... A-47
A 3.1 Computation of Storm Runoff and Design of Storm Sewer......................................A-50
A 3.2 A Nomogram for Mannings Formula for Gravity Sewers Flowing Full and
Mannings n value of 0.013............................................................................................ A-56
A 3.2 B Nomogram for Mannings Formula for Gravity Sewers Flowing Full and
Mannings n value of 0.013............................................................................................ A-57
A 3.3 MS Excel for Manning Formula for Circular Gravity Pipes Flowing Full.................A-58
A 3.4 A Computations of Diameter, Slopes, Discharges in Gravity Sewers by using
Appendix A 3 .3 ................................................................................................................ A-59
A 3.4 B MS Excel for Manning Formula for Circular Gravity Pipes Flowing Full.................A-60
A 3.5 A Nomogram for Hazen Williams Formula for Mains Flowing Full and
C value of 100.................................................................................................................. A-61
A 3.5 B Nomogram for Hazen Williams Formula for Mains Flowing Full and
C value of 100.................................................................................................................. A-62
A 3.6 Hazen Williams Formula for Circular Sewers Flowing Under Pressure..................A-63
A 3.7 Design of sanitary sewer system.................................................................................. A-64
A 3.8 Illustrative Examples for Structural Design of Buried Conduits............................... A-67
A 3.9 Three Edge Bearing Tests for Pipe Strength.............................................................. A-74
A 3.10 Relative Limitations on Use of Sewers Pipe Materials in Specific Locations.........A-75
A 4.1 Computation of Friction Factor in Pumping Mains..................................................... A-78
A 4.2 Calculation of Kw needed for Pumping........................................................................ A-80
A 4.3 Effects of Silting and Erosion Sewage Pumping Main Performance...................... A-81
A 4.4 Evaluating Options for Sizing the Sewage Pumping Main and Pump sets............ A-85
A 5.1 Odour Control.................................................................................................................. A-86
A 5.2 Mass Diagram for Raw sewage flow pattern at the koyambedu stp, chennai.......A-97
A 5.3 Laboratory......................................................................................................................... A-98
A 5.4 Minimum Laboratory Equipments Needed for Tests................................................A-103
A 5.5 Tests Recommended to be Carried Out on Units of Sewage Treatment Plants..A-105
A- I
A p p e n d ix Title o f A p p e n d ix Page
A 5.6 Example for Hydraulic Design of Mechanically Cleaned Bar Rack and
Screen Chamber............................................................................................................A-106
A 5.7 Design Example For Grit Chamber With Proportional Flow Weir As Hydraulic
Control Device................................................................................................................ A-111
A 5.8 Design Example For Detritor........................................................................................A-114
A 5.9 Calculating Size of Approach Channel for Parshall Plume.....................................A-115
A 5.10 Detention Times of Clarifiers in STPs Evaluated by NEERI ................................. A-116
A 5.11 Illustrative Sizing of Clarifiers in Activated Sludge................................................... A-117
A 5.12 Illustrative Design of conventional ASP aeration..................................................... A-119
A 5.13 Design Example of Facultative Aerated Lagoon...................................................... A-125
A 5.14 Design Example of Facultative Stabilization Pond.................................................. A-127
A 5.15 Design Example for Upflow Anaerobic Sludge Blanket Reactor............................A-131
A 5.16 Design Example for Anaerobic Filter.......................................................................... A-132
A 6.1 Illustrative Computation of Sludge weights and volumes from ASP...................... A-133
A 6.2 Illustrative Calculation Of Sludge W eights................................................................ A-136
A 6.3 Friction Losses in Sludge Pipelines Under Gravity and Pumped Conditions......A-138
A 6.4 Design Example of Sludge Digesters........................................................................ A-140
A 6.5 Design Example of Sludge Drying Beds....................................................................A-143
A 7.1 Table of Micro Nutrients to be added to biological systems per month till
MLSS builds up to 3000 mg/l for continuous flow reactors.....................................A-144
A 7.2 Table of Micro Nutrients to be added to biological systems per month till
MLSS builds up to 3000 mg/l for batch flow reactors..............................................A-145
A 7.3 Case Studies in Recycling and Reuse of Sewage................................................... A-146
A 8.1 Design Example of Interceptor Tank.......................................................................... A-180
A 9.1 Design Example of Leach Pit.......................................................................................A-181
A 9.2 Soil Percolation Test..................................................................................................... A-183
A 9.3 Example of Design of Mini-packaged Treatment Plant
(On-site construction type)........................................................................................... A-184
References.....................................................................................................................A-186
A - II
A P P E N D IX -A
Symbols
(Retained as in 1993 edition of this manual and updated)
deg C degrees centigrade kwh kilowatt hour
amp ampere 1 litre
bod5 5 days BOD Ipm litre per minute
cc cubic centimetre Ips litre per second
cm centimetre m metre
CM cement mortar m2 square metre
cumecs cubic metre per second m3 cubic metre
d day meq mill equivalent
eq or eqn equation min minute
F/M food to micro-organisms ratio ml millilitre
Gl galvanised iron mld million litres per day
gm gram mm millimetre
h, hr hour mps metre per second
ha hectare MWL maximum water level
HSV hydraulic subsidence value ORP oxidation reduction potential
IS Indian standard Pr primary
kcal kilo calorie PSS percent soluble sodium
kg kilogram rph revolution per hour
kgf kilogram force rpm revolution per minute
kL kilo litre S.S.T secondary sedimentation tank
kLD kilo litre per day T tonnes
km kilometre TF trickling filter
kw kilowatt w watt
A- 1
APPENDIX.AA-List of Indian Standards Relating to Sewerage and Sewage Treatment

Also refer to (http://www.bis.org.in/) for further Standards under a particular subhead.
No IS code Indian Standard
1 SP 7 National Building Code of India 2005 (group 1 to 5)
Handbook on Water Supply and Drainage with special emphasis

2 SP 35
on plumbing
3 IS 15883 : Part 1 Construction project management - Guidelines : Part 1 General
4 IS 269 Specification for ordinary and low heat portland cement
Specification for coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources

5 IS: 383
for concrete
Specification for mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard
6 IS: 432
drawn steel wire for concrete reinforcement
Specification for high strength deformed steel bars and wires for
7 IS : 1786
concrete reinforcement
8 IS 456 Code of practice for plan and reinforced concrete
Code of practice for general construction of plain and reinforced

9 IS 457
concrete for dams and other massive structures
10 IS 460 : Part 1 Specification for test sieves part I wire cloth test sieves
11 IS 460 : Part 2 Specification test sieves part II Perforated plate test sieves
12 IS 460 : Part 3 Specification for test sieves : part III methods of examination of
apertures of test sieves
13 IS: 2116 Specification for sand for masonry mortars
14 IS: 2250 Code of practice for preparation and use of masonry mortars
15 IS 962 Code of practice for architectural and building drawings
16 IS 1200 : Part 16 Code of practice for architectural and building drawings
Method of measurement of building and civil engineering works

17 IS 1200 : Part 19
Part 19: water supply, plumbing and drains
A-2
18 IS 1343 Code of practice for prestressed concrete
PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric cables: Part 1 For working voltage up
19 IS 1554 : Part 1
to and including 1100 volts
20 PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric cables: Part 2 For working voltage
IS 1554 : Part 2
form 3.3 KV up to and including 11 KV.
21 IS 1607 Methods for test sieving
Code of practice for selections, installation and maintenance of sanitary

22 IS 2064
appliances
23 IS 2212 Code of practice for brickworks
Steel wheel barrows (single wheel type) Specification for steel wheel
24 IS 2431
barrows (single
Code of practice for concrete structures for the storage of liquids;

25 IS 3370 : Part 1
part 1 General requirements
Code of practice for concrete structures for the storage of liquids: Part II
26 IS 3370 : Part 2
reinforced concrete structures.
27 IS 3370 : Part 3 Code of practice for concrete structures for the storage of liquids: Part II
Prestressed Concretes Structures.
28 IS 3370 : Part 4 Code of practices of concrete structures for the storage of liquids:
Part IV Design tables.
29 IS 3764 Safety code for excavation work.
30 IS 3861 Method of measurement of plinth, carpet and rentable area of buildings
31 IS 4081 Safety code for blasting and related drilling operations.
Code of practice of for lining of vessels and equipment for chemical

32 IS 4682 : Part 1
processes Part I Rubber lining.
33 IS 1200 : Part 16 Part 2 Glass Enamel lining
34 IS 4682 : Part 3 Part 3 Lead lining
35 IS 4682 : Part 4 Part 4 Lining with Sheet Thermoplastics
A-3
36 IS 4682 : Part 5 Part 5 Epoxide resin lining
37 IS 4682 : Part 6 Part 6 Phenolic resin lining
38 IS 4682 : Part 7 Part 7 Corrosion and heat resistant metals
39 IS 4682 : Part 8 Part 8 Precious metal
40 IS 4682 : Part 9 Part 9 Titanium
41 IS 4682 : Part 10 Part 10 Brick and tile
Glossary of terms for valves and their parts: Part 1 Screw down stop
42 IS 4854 : Part 1
check and gate valve and their parts.
Glossary of terms for valves and their parts: Part 2 Plug valves and cocks
43 IS 4854 : Part 2
and their parts.
44 IS 4854 : Part 3 Glossary of terms for valves and their parts: Part 3 Butterfly valves
45 IS 4885 Specification for sewer bricks
46 IS 4926 Ready mixed concrete - Code of Practice
47 IS 5421 Glossary of terms relating to test sieves and test sieving
Terms and symbols for sieve bottoms: Part 1 Woven and welded
48 IS 5742 : Part 1
wire screens
49 IS 5742 : Part 2 Terms and symbols for sieve bottoms: Part II Perforated Plates.
50 IS 7331 Code of practice for inspection and maintenance of cross-drainage works
51 IS 7357 Code of practice for structural design of surge tanks
52 IS 7784 : Part 1 Code of practice for design and of cross drainage work : Part 1
General features
53 IS 7784 : Part 2 : Code of practice for design of cross drainage works: Part 2
Sec 1 Specific requirements section 1 Aqueducts.
54 IS 7784 : Part 2 : Code of practice for design of cross drainage works: Part 2 specific re
Sec 2 quirements section 2 Super passages.
55 IS 7784 : Part 2 : Code of practice for design of cross drainage works : Part 2 Specific
Sec 3 requirements section 3 Canal syphons
A-4
IS 7784 : Part 2 : Code of practice for design of cross drainage works : Part 2 Specific
56
Sec 4 requirements section 4 Level Crossings
IS 7784 : Part 2 : Code of practice for design of cross drainage works : Part 2 Specific
57
Sec 5 requirements section 5 Syphon aqueducts
Code of practice for extreme weather concreting part 1 Recommended

58 IS 7861 : Part 1
practice for hot weather concreting
Code of practice for extreme weather concerting: Part II Recommended

59 IS 7861 : Part 2
practice for cold weather concreting.
60 IS 7969 Safety code for handling and storage of building materials
61 IS 9913 Code of practice for construction of cross drainage works
62 IS 10262 Recommended guidelines for concrete mix design proportioning
Code for designating perforation of industrial plate sieves (Identical with

63 IS 10483
ISO/DIS 7806)
64 IS 11389 Methods of test for performance of concrete vibrators; immersion type
65 IS 11993 Code of practice tor use of screed board concrete vibrators.
66 IS 12119 General requirements for pan mixers for concrete
67 IS 12440 Specification for precast concrete stone masonry blocks
68 IS: 1077 Specification for common burnt clay building bricks
69 IS: 3495 Methods of tests of burnt clay building bricks
70 IS 12468 General requirements for vibrators for mass concreting : immersion type
71 IS 12592 Precast concrete manhole covers and frames
72 IS 5329 Code of practice for sanitary pipe work above ground for buildings
Pipes and Fittings
73 IS 782 Specification for Caulking lead
74 IS 5382 Specification for Rubber sealing rings for gas mains, water mains and
sewers
75 IS 6837 Specification for Three wheel type pipe cutter
A-5
76 IS 6843 Technical supply conditions for pipe cutters
77 IS 6881 Specification for Link type pipe cutters
78 IS 10883 Specification for Single wheel type pipe cutters
Recommendations for cement-mortar lining for cast-iron, mild steel and

79 IS 11906
ductile-iron pipes and fittings for transportation of water
Dimensional requirements for rubber gaskets for mechanical joints and

bush joints for use with cast iron pipes water, gas and sewage. Dimen
80 IS 12820 sional Requirements of Rubber Gaskets for Mechanical Joints and Push-
on Joints for Use with Cast Iron Pipes and Fit
Concrete
81 IS 458 Precast Concrete Pipes (with and without reinforcement)
82 IS 783 Code of practice for laying of concrete pipes
83 IS 784 Prestressed concrete pipes (including fittings)
84 IS 1916 Steel cylinder pipe with concrete lining and coating
85 IS 3597 Methods of test for concrete pipes
86 IS 7322 Specials for steel cylinder reinforced concrete pipes
87 IS: 516 Methods of tests for strength of concrete
Asbestos Cement
88 IS 6908 Asbestos cement pipes and fittings for sewerage and drainage
89 IS 5531 Cast iron specials for asbestos cement pressure pipes for water,
Gas and Sewage
90 IS 5913 Methods of test for asbestos cement products
91 IS 6530 Code of practice for laying of asbestos cement pressure pipes
92 IS 8794 Cast iron detachable joints for use with asbestos cement pressure pipe
93 IS 9627 Specification for asbestos cement pressure pipes (light duty)
A-6
Dimensional requirement for rubber sealing rings for cast iron detachable
94 IS 10232
joints in asbestos cement piping
Cast Iron saddle pieces for service connection from asbestos cement
95 IS 10299 pressure pipes
Guidelines for safe use of products containing asbestos: Part 1 Asbestos

96 IS 11769 : Part 1
cement products
Guidelines for safe use of products containing asbestos- Cast Iron de

97 IS 12987
tachable joints for use with asbestos cement pressure pipes (light duty)
Dimensional requirements for rubber sealing rings for CID joints in

98 IS 12988
asbestos cement piping for light duty AC pipes
Cast Iron pipes
Cast iron rain water pipes and fittings. Cast iron/Ductile iron Drainage
99 IS 1729 Pipes and Pipe Fittings for over ground non pressure pipeline socket and
spigot series.
100 IS 1536 Centrifugally cast (spun) iron pressure pipe for water, gas and sewage
101 IS 1537 vertically cast iron pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage
102 IS 1538 Cast iron Fittings for pressure pipes for water, gas and sewerage
103 IS 1879 Malleable cast iron pipe fittings
104 IS 3114 Code for practice for laying of cast iron pipes
Centrifugally cast (spun) iron spigot and socket soil, waste and ventilating
105 IS 3989
pipes, fittings and accessories
106 IS 12592 Horizontally cast iron double flanged pipes for water, gas and sewage
107 IS 8329 Centrifugally cast (spun) ductile iron pressure pipes for water gas and
sewage
108 IS 11606 Methods of sampling of cast iron pipes and fittings.
109 IS 12288 Code of practice for use and laying of ductile iron pipes
Steel
A-7
Electrically welded steel pipes for water, gas and sewage (150 to 2000
110 IS 3589
mm nominal size )
111 IS 5504 Specification for Spiral welded pipes
Code of practice for laying of electrically welded steel pipes for water
112 IS 5822
supply
113 IS 6392 Steel pipe flanges
114 IS 8062 : Part 2 Code of Practice for Cathodic Protection of Steel Structures - Part II :
Underground Pipelines
Stoneware
115 IS 651 Glazed stoneware pipe and fittings - Specification
116 IS 3006 Chemical resistant glazed stoneware pipes and fitting
117 IS 4127 Code of practice for laying of glazed stoneware pipes
Plastic (Please also refer no 357 and 358)
118 IS 4984 High density polyethylene pipes for potable water supplies, sewage
and industrial effluents
Code of practice for plastic pipe work for potable water supplies-Choice
119 IS 7634 : Part 1
of materials and general recommendations
Code of practice for plastics pipe work for potable water supplies-Laying
120 IS 7634 : Part 2 and jointing of polyethylene (PE) pipes.
Plastics Pipe Selection, Handling, Storage and Installation for Potable

121 IS 7634 : Part 3 Water Supplies - Code of Practice : Part 3 - Laying and Jointing
of UPVC Pipes
122 IS 8008 : Part 1 Specification for injection moulded HDPE fittings for potable water
supplies: Part 1 General requirements
123 IS 8008 : Part 2 Specification for injection moulded HDPE fittings for potable water sup
plies: Part 2 Specific requirements for 90 degrees bends.
124 IS 8008 : Part 3 Specification for injection moulded HDPE fittings for potable water
supplies: Part 3 Specific requirements for 90 degrees tees.
A-8
Specification for injection moulded HDPE fittings for potable water

125 IS 8008 : Part 4
supplies: Part 4 Specific requirements for reducers.

126 IS 8008 : Part 5 supplies: Part 5 Specific requirements for ferrule reducers.

127 IS 8008 : Part 6
supplies: Part 6 Specific requirements for pipe ends.

128 IS 8008 : Part 7
supplies: Part 7 Specific requirements for sandwich flanges
Injection Moulded/Machined High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Fit

129 IS 8008 : Part 8 tings for Potable Water Supplies - : Part 8 Specific Requirements for
Reducing Tees
Injection Moulded/Machined High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Fittings

130 IS 8008 : Part 9 for Potable Water Supplies - : Part 9 Specific Requirements for Ends
Caps
Fabricated high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water

131 IS 8360 : Part 1
supplies: Part 1 General requirements
Specification for Fabricated high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for

132 IS 8360 : Part 2
potable water supplies: Part 2 Specific requirements for 90 degree tees.
Specification for Fabricated high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings

133 IS 8360 : Part 3 for potable water supplies: Part 3 Specific requirements for 90 degree
bends.
Specification to glass fibre reinforced plastics (GRP) pipes for use for
134 IS 12709
water supply
GRP pipes joints and fittings for use sewerage, industrial waste and
135 IS 14402
water (other than potable)
Unplasticized Non-Pressure Polyvinyl Chloride ( PVC -U ) Pipes for use

136 IS 15328
in Underground Drainage and Sewerage Systems
Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride (UPVC) Single Wall Corrugated Pipes

137 IS: 9271
for Drainage
Pitch Impregnated Fibre
138 IS 11925 Specification for pitch-impregnated fibre pipes and fittings for drainage
purposes
Public Health & Sanitation
A-9
Waste water handling equipment
139 IS 5600 Pumps - Sewage and Drainage - Specification
140 IS 6279 Specification for Equipment for grit removal devices
141 IS 6280 Specification for Sewage screens
142 IS 7232 Method for imhoff cone test.
143 IS 8413 : Part 1 Requirements for biological treatment equipment part 1 trickling filters
144 IS 8413 : Part 2 Requirements for biological treatment equipment part 2 activated sludge
process and its modifications
Specification for Hand operated augers for cleaning water closets, pipes
145 IS 9110
and sewers.
146 IS 9213 Specification for BOD Bottle
Requirements for sludge dewatering equipment Part 1 Sludge drying

147 IS 10037 : Part 1
beds-sand, gravel and under drains.
Requirements for sludge dewatering equipment Part 2 vacuum filtration

148 IS 10037 : Part 2
equipment
Requirements for sludge dewatering equipment Part 3 Centrifugal

149 IS 10037 : Part 3
equipment (Solid bowl type)
150 IS 10261 Requirements for settling tank (clarifier equipment) for waste wafer
151 IS 10552 Specification for buckets to be used in power driven buckets type sewer
cleaning machine
Requirements for chlorination equipment: Part I General guidelines for

152 IS 10553 : Part 1 chlorination plants including handling, storage and safety of chlorine
cylinders and drums
Requirements for chlorination equipment: Part 2 Vacuum feed type

153 IS 10553 : Part 2
chlorinators
154 IS 10553 : Part 4 Requirements for chlorination equipment: Part 4 Gravity feed type
gaseous chlorinators
A - 10
Requirements of chlorination equipment: Part 5 Bleaching powder solu

155 IS 10553 : Part 5
tion feeder displacement type chlorinator
156 IS 10595 Requirements for power driven bucket-type sewer cleaning machine
157 IS 11117 Requirements for power driven rodding machine for sewers.
158 IS 11387 Requirements for high pressure jetting machine for sewer cleaning.
Specification for attachment tools for power driven rodding machine for
159 IS 11397
sewers.
Code of Practice
160 IS 1172 Code of basic requirements for water supply, drainage and sanitation
Code of practice for fixing rainwater gutters and downpipes for

161 IS 2527
roof drainage
162 IS 1742 Code of practice for Building drainage
163 Code of practice for installation of septic tanks; Part 1 Design, criteria and
IS 2470 : Part 1
construction
Code of practice for installation of septic tanks : Part 2 secondary treat

164 IS 2470 : Part 2
ment and disposal of septic tank effluent
165 IS 9872 Precast concrete septic tanks
166 IS 4111 : Part 1 Code of practice for ancillary structures in sewerage system -Manholes
Code of practice for ancillary structures in sewerage system -Flushing

167 IS 4111 : Part 2
tanks
168 IS 4111 : Part 3 Code of practice for ancillary structures in sewerage system Inverted
syphon
Code of practice for ancillary structures in sewerage system-Pumping

169 IS 4111 : Part 4
stations and pumping mains (rising main).
170 IS 4111 : Part 5 Code of practice for ancillary structures in sewerage system-Tidal outfalls
171 IS 5455 Specification for cast-iron steps for manholes
172 IS 210 Specification for grey iron castings
A - 11
173 IS 5329 Code of practice for sanitary pipe work above ground for buildings
174 IS 5611 Code of practice for waste stabilization ponds (facultative type)
Code of practice for water supply and drainage in high attitudes and/or
175 IS 6295
sub-zero temperature regions (first revision)
176 Code of practice for the construction of refuse chutes in

IS 6924
multi-storeyed buildings
177 IS 7740 Code of practice for construction and maintenance of road gullies
178 IS 9872 Specifications for precast concrete septic tanks.
179 IS 12251 Code of practice for drainage of building basements
180 IS 12314 Code of practice for sanitation with leaching pits for rural communities.
181 IS 11972 Code of practice for safety precautions to be taken when entering
a sewerage system
Solid wastes
Code of practice
Guidelines for utilization and disposal of solid waste from integrated steel
182 S 10447 plants.
183 Guidelines for collection equipments. Solid Waste Management

IS 12647
System - Collection Equipment
Guidelines for use of vehicles for collection of municipal solid wastes :

184 IS 12662 : Part 1
Part 1 Selection of vehicles
185 IS 12662 : Part 2 Vehicles for Collection of Municipal Solid Wastes - Part 2 : Guidelines for
Maintenance
Methods of testing
186 IS 9234 Methods for preparation of solid waste sample for chemical and
microbiological analysis.
187 IS 9235 Methods for physical analysis and determination of moisture in solid
wastes (excluding industrial wastes)
188 IS 10158 Method of analysis of solid wastes (Excluding industrial wastes)
A - 12
Glossary of Terms-Water Pollution
189 IS 7022 : Part 1 Glossary of terms relating to water, sewage and industrial effluent part 1
190 IS 7022 : Part 2 Glossary of terms relating to water, sewage and industrial effluent part 2
191 IS 10446 Glossary of terms for water supply and sanitation.
Methods of sampling and analysis- Sewage and

industrial effluents
Bio-assay methods for evaluating acute toxicity of industrial

192 IS 6582 effluents and waste waters.
Bio-assay methods for evaluating acute toxicity of industrial effluents

193 IS 6582 : Part 2
and wastewaters : Part 2 Using Toxicity Factor to Zebra Fish
Methods of sampling and analysis- wastewater
194 IS 1622 Methods of sampling and microbiological examination of water
195 Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water and
IS 3025 : Part 1
wastewater-Sampling
Methods of Sampling and Test (Physical and Chemical) for water and
196 IS 3025 : Part 2 Wastewater - Part 2 : Determination of 33 Elements by Inductively Cou
pled Plasma Atomic Emission Spectroscopy
197 IS 3025 : Part 3
Wastewater - Part 3 : Precision and Accuracy
198 IS 3025 : Part 4
Wastewater - Part 4 : Colour
199 IS 3025 : Part 5 Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water and
wastewater-Odour
wastewater-Odour threshold
Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water and
201 IS 3025 : Part 7
wastewater-Taste threshold
wastewater-Taste rating
203 IS 3025 : Part 9
wastewater-Temperature
wastewater-Turbidity
A - 13
205 IS 3025 Part 11
wastewater-PH Value
206 IS 3025 Part 14
wastewater-Specific conductance (Wheatstone bridge, conductance cell)
207 IS 3025 : Part 15
wastewater-Total residue (total solids- dissolved and suspended)
wastewater-Filterable residue (Total Dissolved solids)
209 IS 3025 Part 17
wastewater-Non-filterable residue (total suspended solid)
210 IS 3025 Part 18
wastewater-Volatile and fixed residue (total filterable and non filterable)
211 IS 3025 Part 19 wastewater-Settle able matter
212 IS 3025 Part 20 Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water and
wastewater-Volatile and fixed residue (total filterable and non filterable)
213 IS 3025 Part 21 wastewater-Total hardness
214 Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical) for water and
IS 3025 Part 22
wastewater-Acidity
215 IS 3025 Part 23
wastewater-Alkalinity
wastewater-Sulphates
wastewater-Chlorine, demand
wastewater-Chlorine, residual
219 IS 3025 Part 27 wastewater-Cyanide
220 IS 3025 Part 28
wastewater-Sulphite
221 IS 3025 Part 29
wastewater-Sulphide
A - 14
222 IS 3025 : Part 30
wastewater-Bromide
223 IS 3025 : Part 31
wastewater-Phosphorous
224 IS 3025 : Part 32
wastewater-Chloride
wastewater-Iodide
226 IS 3025 : Part 34
wastewater-Nitrogen
227 IS 3025 : Part 35
wastewater-Silica
228 IS 3025 : Part 36 wastewater-Ozone, residual
wastewater-Arsenic
230 IS 3025 : Part 38 wastewater-Dissolved oxygen
231 IS 3550 Methods of test for routine control for water used in industry.
Treatment and Disposal of industries effluents
232 IS 7967 Criteria for controlling pollution of marine coastal areas.
233 IS 8032 Guide for treatment and disposal of distillery effluents.
234 IS 8073 Guide for treatment and disposal of steel plant effluents
235 IS 8682 Guide for treatment of effluents of dairy industry
236 IS 9427 Code of practice for operation and maintenance of deionizing columns
Guide for treatment and disposal of effluents of cotton and synthetic tex
237 IS 9508
tile industry.
238 IS 9509 Guide for treatment and disposal of effluents of viscose rayon industry
A - 15
239 IS 9841 Guide for treatment and disposal of effluents of fertilizer industry.
240 IS 10044 Guide for treatment and disposal of effluents of petroleum refining
industry.
241 IS 10495 Guide for treatment and disposal of effluents of wool processing industry
Chemical hazards
General
242 IS 1446 Classification of dangerous goods.
Glossary of terms relating to chemical and radiation hazards and

243 IS 4155
hazardous chemicals
Code of Safety
244 IS 4209 Code of safety in Chemical laboratories
245 IS 4262 Sulphuric acid- Code of safety
246 IS 4263 Code of safety for Chlorine
247 IS 4264 Code of safety for Caustic soda
248 IS 4312 Code of safety for Lead and its compounds
249 IS 4544 Ammonia- Code of safety
250 IS 4560 Code of safety for Nitric Acid
251 IS 4644 Code of safety for Benzene, toluene and xylene
252 IS 4906 Code of safety for Radiochemical laboratory
253 IS 5184 Code of safety for Hydrofluoric Acid
254 IS 5208 Code of safety for Acetic acid
255 IS 5311 Acetic anhydride Code of safety for Carbon Tetrachloride
Carbon Tetrachloride Code of safety for Carbon Disulphide (Carbon

256 IS 5685 Bisulphide)
A - 16
257 IS 5931 Code of safety for Handling of cryogenic liquids
258 IS 6156 Code of safety for Chlorosulphonic acid
259 IS 6164 Code of safety for Hydrochloric acid
260 IS 6269 Code of safety for Ethylene oxide
261 IS 6270 Code of safety for Phenol
262 IS 6818 Code of safety for Phosphoric acid
263 IS 6819 Code of safety for Calcium carbide
264 IS 6955 Code of safety for Bromine
265 IS 6954 Code of safety for Caustic potash
266 IS 7415 Code of safety for Aniline
267 IS 7420 Code of safety for phthalic anhydride
268 IS 7444 Code of safety for Methanol
269 IS 7445 Code of safety for Acetone
270 IS 7812 Code of safety for Mercury
271 IS 8185 Code of safety for Phosgene
272 IS 8388 Code of safety for Nitrobenzene
273 IS 9052 Code of safety for Aluminium chloride, anhydrous
274 IS 9053 Code of safety for M-dinitrobenzene
275 IS 9277 Code of safety for Monochlorobenzene
276 IS 9278 Code of safety for Zinc phosphide
277 IS 9279 Code of safety for Aluminium phosphide
278 IS 9744 Code of safety for thionyl chloride
279 IS 9785 Code of safety for Aluminium alkyls
280 IS 9786 Code of safety for Vinyl chloride monomer (VCM)
A - 17
281 IS 9787 Code of safety for Phosphoryl chloride
282 IS 10870 Code of safety for Hexane
283 IS 10872 Code of safety for Malathion
284 IS 10920 Code of safety for Phosphorus Trichloride
285 IS 11141 Code of safety for Acrylonitrile
286 IS 12033 Code of safety for Dinitro Toluene (DNT)
287 IS 12034 Code of safety for Methyl bromide
288 IS 12035 Code of safety in Microbiological Laboratories
289 IS 12141 Code of safety for methyl ethyl ketone
290 IS 12142 Code of safety for 1.1.1 trichloro ethane
291 IS 12143 Code of safety for tetrachloroethane
Sanitary Appliances & Valves
Specification for glazed fire clay sanitary appliances: part 1

292 IS 771 : Part 1
General requirements.
Specification for glazed fire-clay sanitary appliances : part 2

293 IS 771 : Part 2
specific requirements of kitchen and laboratory sinks
IS 771 : Part 3 Specification for glazed fire-clay sanitary appliances part 3

294
: Sec 1 specific requirements of urinals section 1 slab urinals
IS 771 : Part 3 : Specification for glazed fire-clay sanitary appliances part 3

295 Sec 2 specific requirements of urinals section 2 stall urinals
Specification for glazed fire-clay sanitary appliances part 4

296 IS 771 : Part 4
specific requirements of post-mortem slabs

297 IS 771 : Part 5
specific requirements of shower trays
298 Specification for glazed fire-clay sanitary appliances part 6

IS 771 : Part 6
specific requirements of bed pan sinks

299 IS 771 : Part 7
specific requirements of slope sinks
A - 18
Specification for general requirements for enamelled cast iron sanitary

300 IS 772
appliances
Specification for flushing cistern for water closets and urinals (other than
301 IS 774
plastic cisterns)
302 Specification for Sluice Valve for Water Works Purposes

IS 14846
(50 to 1200 mm Size)
303 IS 1726 Specification for cast iron manhole covers and frames
304 IS: 5455 Specification for cast iron steps for manholes
Code of practice for selection, installation and maintenance of

305 IS 2064
sanitary appliances
306 IS 2326 Specification for automatic flushing cisterns for urinals
Specification for plastic seats and covers for water closets :

307 IS 2548 : Part 1
part 1 Thermo set seats and covers
Specification for plastic seats and covers for water closets :

308 IS 2548 : Part 2
part 2 Thermo set plastic seats and covers
Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china) :

309 IS 2556 : Part 1
Part 1 General requirements
Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (Vitreous china) :

310 IS 2556 : Part 2
part 2 specific requirements of wash down water-closets
Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (Vitreous china) :

311 IS 2556 : Part 3
part 3 specific requirements of squatting pans
312 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (Citreous china):

IS 2556 : Part 4
part 4 specific requirements of wash basins

313 IS 2556 : Part 5
part 5 specific requirements of laboratory sinks
314 IS 2556 : Part 6 Specific requirement of urinals and partition plates
Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china)

315 IS 2556 : Part 7 Part 7 Specific requirements of half round channels Specific
requirements of accessories for sanitary appliances

316 IS 2556 : Part 8 Part 8 Specific requirements of pedestal closed coupled
wash-down and syphonic water closets
A - 19

317 IS 2556 : Part 9
Part 9 Specific requirements of pedestal type bidets
Specification tor vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china):

318 IS 2556 : Part 14
Part 14 Specific requirements of integrated squatting pans.

319 IS 2556 : Part 15
Part 15 specific requirements of universal water closets.
Code of practice for selection, installation and maintenance of

320 IS 2685
sluice valves
321 IS 2963 Specification for copper alloy waste fittings for wash basins and sinks
322 IS 3042 Specification for single faced sluice gates (200 to 1200 mm size)
Specification for waste plug and its accessories for sinks and
323 IS 3311
wash-basins
324 IS 3950 Specification for surface boxes for sluice valves
325 IS 4038 Specification for foot valves for water works purposes
326 IS 4346 Specification for washers for use with fittings for water services
327 IS 5219 Specification for cast copper alloys traps, part 1 P and S traps
Swing Check Type Reflux (Non-Return] Valves for Water Works

328 IS 5312 : Part 1
Purposes - Part 1 : Single-Door Pattern
Swing Check Type Reflux (non-return) Valves for Water Works

329 IS 5312 : Part 2
Purpose - Part 2 : Multi-Door Pattern
330 IS 5961 Cast iron gratings for drainage purposes
331 IS 6411 Gel-coated glass fibre reinforced polyester resin bath tubs
332 IS 7231 Plastic flushing cisterns for water closets and urinals
Specification for pressure reducing valves for domestic

333 IS 9739
water supply systems.
334 IS 9758 Specification for flush valves and fittings for water closets and urinals
335 IS 9762 Specification for polyethylene floats (spherical) for float valves
A - 20
Specification for glass fibre reinforced polyester resins (GRP)

336 IS 11246
squatting pans
337 IS 12234 Specification for plastic equilibrium float valves for cold water services
338 IS 12701 Specification for rotational moulded polyethylene water storage tanks.
Fluid Flow Measurements
339 IS 1192 Velocity area methods for measurement of flow of water in

open channels.
340 IS 2912 Liquid Flow Measurement in Open Channels - Slope Area Method
341 IS 15122 Measurement of Liquid Flow in Open Channels Under Tidal Conditions
Measurement of Liquid Flow in Open Channels - Part 1 : Establishment

342 IS 15119 : Part 1
and Operation of a Gauging Station
Measurement of Liquid Flow in Open Channels - Part 2 : Determination

343 IS 15119 : Part 2
of the Stage-Discharge Relation
Measurement of Fluid Flow by Means of Pressure Differential

344 IS 14615 : Part 1 Devices - Part 1 : Orifice Plates, Nozzles and Venturi Tubes Inserted in
Circular cross-section conduits running full
Methods of measurement of fluid flow by means of venturi meters

345 IS 4477 : Part 2
Part 2 compressible fluids
Liquid flow Measurement in Open Channels by Weirs and Flumes -

346 IS 14974 Rectangular Broad-crested Weirs
Method of measurement of flow of water in open channels using

347 IS 6062 standing wave flume - fall.
Method of measurement of flow of water in open channels using

348 IS 6063
standing wave flumes
Liquid Flow Measurement in Open Channels by Weirs and Flumes - End

349 IS 6330 Depth Method for Estimation of Flow in Rectangular Channels
with a Free Overfall (Approximate Method)
350 IS 9108 Liquid flow measurement in open channels using thin plate weirs
Method for estimation of incompressible fluid flow in closed conduits

351 IS 9115
by bend meters
Measurement of Liquid Flow in Open Channels by Weirs and

352 IS 14574 Flumes - End Depth Method for Estimation of Flow in Non-rectangular
Channels with a Free Overfall (Approximate Method)
A - 21
353 IS 9119 Method for flow estimation by jet characteristics (approximate method).
Dilution methods of measurement of steady flow part 1 constant rate

354 IS 9163 : Part 1
injection method.
Measurement of Liquid Flow in Open Channels - General Guidelines

355 IS 9922
for Selection of Method
356 IS 12752 Guidelines for the selection of flow gauging structures
Structured Wall Plastics Piping Systems for Non-pressure Drainage and

357 IS 16098 : Part 1
Sewerage, Pipes and Fittings with smooth external surface, Type A
Structured Wall Plastics Piping Systems for Non-pressure Drainage and

358 IS 16098 : Part 2
Sewerage, Pipes and Fittings with non-smooth external surface, Type B.
Note: For the elaborate list refer to the Bureau of Indian Standards.
A - 22
APPENDIX A.1.1 THE PROHIBITION OF EMPLOYMENT AS MANUAL SCAVENGERS AND

THEIR REHABILITATION ACT, 2013
^t TT^fo (1 ^ )04/0007/2003 13 REGISTERED NO. DL (N)04/0007/2003 13
the âsctte of Jhddia

EXTRAORDINARY
^TFT II 1
PART II Section 1
snf^^R^r y+ifeM
PUBLISHED BY AUTHORITY
35] M ^WPdolK, RHdH< 19, 2013/ 28, 1935 C?FF)

No. 35] NEW DELHI, THURSDAY, SEPTEMBER 19,2013/ BHADRA 28,1935 (SAKA)
* tft 3 f*F T ^ w n ^ t % qf 3^ ^ 3 h i t ît ^ 1
Separate paging is given to this P art in order that it may be filed as a separate com pilation.
MINISTRY OF LAW AND JUSTICE

(Legislative Department)
New Delhi, the 19th September , 2013/Bhadra 28,1935 (Saka )
The following Act of Parliament received the assent of the President on the
18th September, 2013, and is hereby published for general information:
THE PROHIBITION OF EMPLOYMENT AS MANUAL SCAVENGERS

AND THEIR REHABILITATION ACT, 2013
No. 25 of 2013
[18th September, 2013.]
An Act to provide for the prohibition of employment as manual scavengers,
rehabilitation of manual scavengers and their families, and for matters
connected therewith or incidental thereto.
W h e re a s promoting among the citizens fraternity assuring the dignity of the individual
is enshrined as one of the goals in the Preamble to the Constitution;
A n d w h erea s the right to live with dignity is also implicit in the Fundamental Rights
guaranteed in Part 111 of the Constitution;
A n d w h e r e a s article 46 of the Constitution, inter alia, provides that the State shall
protect the weaker sections, and, particularly, the Scheduled Castes and the Scheduled
Tribes from social injustice and all forms of exploitation;
A nd whereas th e d e h u m a n isin g p ra c tic e o f m a n u a l sca v e n g in g , arisin g fro m the
co n tin u in g ex isten ce o f in san itary latrin es an d a h ig h ly in iq u ito u s caste system , still persists
in v ario u s p arts o f the country, an d the ex istin g law s h av e n o t p ro v e d a d eq u ate in elim in atin g
the tw in ev ils o f in san itary latrin es an d m an u al scav en g in g ;
A - 23
2 THE GAZETTE OF INDIA EXTRAORDINARY [P art II-
A nd w h e re as it is necessary to correct the historical injustice and indignity suffered

by the manual scavengers, and to rehabilitate them to a life of dignity.
Be it enacted by Parliament in the Sixty-fourth Year of the Republic of India as follows:
CHAPTER I
P relim in a ry
Short title, 1. (1) This Act may be called the Prohibition of Employment as Manual Scavengers
extent and and their Rehabilitation Act, 2013.
commence
ment. (2) It extends to the whole of India except the State of Jammu and Kashmir.
(3) It shall come into force on such date as the Central Government may. by notification
in the Official Gazette, appoint:
Provided that the date so notified shall not be earlier than sixty days after the date of
publication of the notification in the Official Gazette.
Definitions. 2. (1) In this Act, unless the context otherwise requires,
(a) agency means any agency, other than a local authority, which may
undertake sanitation facilities in an area and includes a contractor or a firm or a company
which engages in development and maintenance of real estate;
(b) "appropriate government, in relation to Cantonment Boards, railway lands,
and lands and buildings owned by the Central Government, a Central Public Sector
Undertaking or an autonomous body wholly or substantially funded by the Central
Government, means the Central Government and in all other cases, the State
Government;
(c) "Chief Executive Officer, in relation to a Municipality or Panchayat, means,
its senior-most executive officer, by whatever name called;
(cl) hazardous cleaning by an employee, in relation to a sewer or septic tank,
means its manual cleaning by such employee without the employer fulfilling his
obligations to provide protective gear and other cleaning devices and ensuring
observance of safety precautions, as may be prescribed or provided in any other law,
for the time being in force or rules made thereunder;
(e ) insanitary latrine means a latrine which requires human excreta to be cleaned
or otherwise handled manually, either in situ , or in an open drain or pit into which the
excreta is discharged or flushed out, before the excreta fully decomposes in such
manner as may be prescribed:
Provided that a water flush latrine in a railway passenger coach, when cleaned
by an employee with the help of such devices and using such protective gear, as the
Central Government may notify in this behalf, shall not be deemed to be an insanitary latrine.
(f ) "local authority means,
(i) a Municipality or a Panchayat, as defined in clause (e) and clause (f) of
article 243P of the Constitution, which is responsible for sanitation in its area of
jurisdiction;
(ii) a Cantonment Board constituted under section 10 of the Cantonments
Act, 2006; and 41 of 2006.
(iii) a railway authority;
(g) manual scavenger means a person engaged or employed, at the
commencement of this Act or at any time thereafter, by an individual or a local authority
or an agency or a contractor, for manually cleaning, carrying, disposing of, or otherwise
handling in any manner, human excreta in an insanitary latrine or in an open drain or pit
into which the human excreta from the insanitary latrines is disposed of, or on a
A - 24
S e c . 1J T H E G A Z E T T E O F IN D IA E X T R A O R D IN A R Y 3
railway track or in such other spaces or premises, as the Central Government or a State
Government may notify, before the excreta fully decomposes in such manner as may be
prescribed, and the expression manual scavenging shall be construed accordingly.
E x p la n a tio n . For the purpose of this clause,
(a) engaged or employed means being engaged or employed on a regular

or contract basis;
0b ) a person engaged or employed to clean excreta with the help of such
devices and using such protective gear, as the Central Government may notify
in this behalf, shall not be deemed to be a manual scavenger;
(Ii) National Commission for Safai Karmacharis means the National Commission
for Safai Karamcharis constituted under section 3 of the National Commission for Safai
64 o f 1993. Karmacharis Act, 1993 and continued by Resolution of the Government of India in the
Ministry of Social Justice and Empowerment vid e No.l7015/18/2003-SCD-VI, dated
24th February, 2004 and as amended from time to time;
(/) notification means a notification published in the Official Gazette and the
expression notify shall be construed accordingly;
(j) occupier, in relation to the premises where an insanitary latrine exists, or
someone is employed as a manual scavenger, means the person who, for the time
being, is in occupation of such premises;
(k) owner , in relation to the premises where an insanitary latrine exists or
someone is employed as a manual scavenger, means, the person who, for the time
being has legal title to such premises;
(0 "prescribed means prescribed by the rules made under this Act;
(in) railway authority means an authority administering railway land, as may
be notified by the Central Government in this behalf;
(n) railway land" shall have the meaning assigned to it in clause (32A ) of
24 o f 1989. section 2 of the Railways Act, 1989;
(o ) sanitary latrine means a latrine which is not an 'insanitary latrine;
(p) septic tank means a water-tight settling tank or chamber, normally located
underground, which is used to receive and hold human excreta, allowing it to decompose
through bacterial activity;
(q) sewer" means an underground conduit or pipe for carrying off human excreta,
besides other waste matter and drainage wastes;
(r) State Government , in relation to a Union territory, means the Administrator
thereof appointed under article 239 of the Constitution;
(5) survey means a survey of manual scavengers undertaken in pursuance of
section 11 or section 14.
(2) Words and expressions used and not defined in this Act, but defined in the
41 o f 2006. Cantonments Act, 2006, shall have the same meanings respectively assigned to them in that
Act.
(J) The reference to a Municipality under Chapters IV to VIII of this Act shall include
a reference to, as the case m ay be, the Cantonment Board or the railway authority, in respect
of areas included within the jurisdiction of the Cantonment Board and the railway land,
respectively.
A - 25
THE GAZETTE OF INDIA EXTRAORDINARY [P art II
Act to have 3. The provisions of this Act shall have effect notwithstanding anything inconsistent
overriding therewith contained in the Employment of Manual Scavengers and Construction of Dry
effect.
Latrines (Prohibition) Act, 1993 or in any other law, or in any instrument having effect by 4^ Qf 1993
virtue of any other law.
CHAPTER II
I dentification of insanitary latrines
Local 4. (7) Every local authority shall,

authorities to
survey
insanitary (1a ) carry out a survey of insanitary latrines existing within its jurisdiction, and
latrines and
publish a list of such insanitary latrines, in such manner as may be prescribed, within
provide
sanitary a period of two months from the date of commencement of this Act;
community
(b ) give a notice to the occupier, within fifteen days from the date of publication
latrines.
of the list under clause (a), to either demolish the insanitary latrine or convert it into a
sanitary latrine, within a period of six months from the date of commencement of this
Act:
Provided that the local authority may for sufficient reasons to be recorded in
writing extend the said period not exceeding three months;
(c) construct, within a period not exceeding nine months from the date of
commencement of this Act, such number of sanitary community latrines as it considers
necessary, in the areas where insanitary latrines have been found.
(2) Without prejudice to the provisions contained in sub-section (7), Municipalities,
Cantonment Boards and railway authorities shall also construct adequate number of sanitary
community latrines, within such period not exceeding three years from the date of
commencement of this Act, as the appropriate Government may, by notification, specify, so
as to eliminate the practice of open defecation in their jurisdiction.
(J) It shall be the responsibility of local authorities to construct community sanitary
latrines as specified in sub-sections (7) and (2), and also to make arrangements for their
hygienic upkeep at all times.
Explanation .For the purposes of this section, community in relation to railway
authorities means passengers, staff and other authorised users of railways.
CHAPTER III
P rohibition of insanitary latrines and employment and engagement
as manual scavenger
Prohibition of 5. (7) Notwithstanding anything inconsistent therewith contained in the Employment

insanitary
latrines and
of Manual Scavengers and Construction of Dry Latrines (Prohibition) Act, 1993, no person, 46 of 1993.
employment local authority or any agency shall, after the date of commencement of this Act,
and engage
(a) construct an insanitary latrine; or
ment of
manual (b ) engage or employ, either directly or indirectly, a manual scavenger, and every
scavenger.
person so engaged or employed shall stand discharged immediately from any obligation,
express or implied, to do manual scavenging.
(2) Every insanitary latrine existing on the date of commencement of this Act, shall
either be demolished or be converted into a sanitary latrine, by the occupier at his own cost,
before the expiry of the period so specified in clause (b ) of sub-section (7) of section 4:
Provided that where there are several occupiers in relation to an insanitary latrine, the
liability to demolish or convert it shall lie with,
(a) the owner of the premises, in case one of the occupiers happens to be the
owner; and
A - 26
S e c . 1] T H E G A Z E T T E O F IN D IA E X T R A O R D IN A R Y
0b ) all the occupiers, jointly and severally, in all other cases:

Provided that the State Government may give assistance for conversion of insanitary
latrines into sanitary latrines to occupiers from such categories of persons and on such
scale, as it may, by notification, specify:
Provided further that non-receipt of State assistance shall not be a valid ground to
maintain or use an insanitary latrine, beyond the said period of nine months.
(3 ) If any occupier fails to demolish an insanitary latrine or convert it into a sanitary
latrine within the period specified in sub-section (2 ), the local authority having jurisdiction
over the area in which such insanitary latrine is situated, shall, after giving notice of not less
than twenty one days to the occupier, either convert such latrine into a sanitary latrine, or
demolish such insanitary latrine, and shall be entitled to recover the cost of such conversion
or, as the case may be. of demolition, from such occupier in such manner as may be prescribed.
6 . (7) Any contract, agreement or other instrument entered into or executed before the C o ntract,
date of commencement of this Act, engaging or employing a person for the purpose of agreement,
elc., to be
manual scavenging shall, on the date of commencement o f this Act, be terminated and such void.
contract, agreement or other instrument shall be void and inoperative and no compensation
shall be payable therefor.
(2) Notwithstanding anything contained in sub-section (/), no person employed or
engaged as a manual scavenger on a full-time basis shall be retrenched by his employer, but
shall be retained, subject to his willingness, in employment on at least the same emoluments,
and shall be assigned work other than manual scavenging.
7. No person, local authority or any agency shall, from such date as the State P roh ib ition o f
persons fro m
Government may notify, which shall not be later than one year from the date of commencement engagement or
of this Act, engage or employ, either directly or indirectly, any person for hazardous cleaning e m p lo y m e n t
of a sewer or a septic tank. fo r hazardous
cle a n in g of
sewers and
septic tanks.
8. W hoever contravenes the provisions of section 5 or section 6 shall for the first P enalty fo r
contravention be punishable with imprisonment for a term which may extend to one year or co n tra ve n tio n
o f section 5 or
with fine which may extend to fifty thousand rupees or with both, and for any subsequent section 6.
contravention with imprisonment which may extend to two years or with fine which may
extend to one lakh rupees, or with both.
9. W hoever contravenes the provisions of section 7 shall for the first contravention be P en alty fo r
punishable with imprisonment for a term which may extend to two years or with fine which co n tra ve n tio n
o f section 7.
may extend to two lakh rupees or with both, and for any subsequent contravention with
imprisonment which may extend to five years or with fine which may extend to five lakh
rupees, or with both.
10. No court shall take cognizance of any offence punishable under this Act except L im ita tio n o f
upon a complaint thereof is made by a person in this behalf within three months from the date prosecution.
of the occurrence of the alleged commission of the offence.
CHAPTER IV
I d e n t if ic a t io n o f m a n u a l s c a v e n g e r s in u r b a n a n d
RURAL AREAS AND THEIR REHABILITATION
11. ( i) If any Municipality has reason to believe that some persons are engaged Survey
or of
employed in manual scavenging within its jurisdiction, the Chief Executive Officer of such manual
scavengers in
Municipality shall cause a survey to be undertaken to identify such persons. urban areas by
(2) The content and methodology of the survey referred to in sub-section ( I ) shall Mbeunicipalities.
such as may be prescribed, and it shall be completed within a period o f two months from its
commencement in the case of Municipal Corporations, and within a period of one month in
the case of other Municipalities.
A - 27
T H E G A Z E T T E O F IN D IA E X T R A O R D IN A R Y [P a rt II
(3) The Chief Executive Officer of the Municipality, in whose jurisdiction the survey is
undertaken, shall be responsible for accurate and timely completion of the survey.
(4) After completion of the survey, the Chief Executive Officer shall cause to be drawn
up a provisional list of persons found to be working as manual scavengers within the
jurisdiction o f his M unicipality and fulfilling the eligibility conditions as may be prescribed,
shall cause such provisional list to be published for general information in such manner, as
may be prescribed, and shall invite objections to the list from the general public.
(5) Any person having any objection, either to the inclusion or exclusion o f any name
in the provisional list published in pursuance of sub-section (4), shall, within a period of
fifteen days from such publication, file an objection, in such form as the M unicipality may
notify, to the Chief Executive Officer.
(6) All objections received in pursuance of sub-section (5), shall be enquired into, and
thereafter a final list of persons found to be working as manual scavengers within the local
limits o f the municipality, shall be published by it in such manner, as may be prescribed.
(7) As soon as the final list of manual scavengers, referred to in sub-section (6) is
published, the persons included in the said list shall, subject to the provisions of
sub-section (2) of section 6, stand discharged from any obligation to work as manual scavengers.
A p p lic a tio n 12 . (7) Any person working as a manual scavenger in an urban area, may, either during
by an urban the survey undertaken by the M unicipality in pursuance o f section 11, within whose
manual
scavenger fo r
jurisdiction he works, or at any time thereafter, apply, in such manner, as may be prescribed,
id e n tific a lio n . to the Chief Executive Officer of the Municipality, or to any other officer authorised by him in
this behalf, for being identified as a manual scavenger.
(2) On receipt of an application under sub-section (7), the Chief Executive Officer shall
cause it to be enquired into, either as part of the survey undertaken under section 11, or,
when no such survey is in progress, within fifteen days of receipt of such application, to
ascertain whether the applicant is a manual scavenger.
(5) If an application is received under sub-section (7) when a survey under section 11
is not in progress, and is found to be true after enquiry in accordance with sub-section (2),
action shall be taken to add the name of such a person to the final list published under
sub-section ( 6 ) of section 11, and the consequences mentioned in sub-section (7) thereof
shall follow.
R eha bilita 13. (7) Any person included in the final list of manual scavengers published in pursuance
tio n o f of sub-section (<5) of section 11 or added thereto in pursuance of sub-section (3) of section 12,
persons
identified as
shall be rehabilitated in the following manner, namely:
manual (a ) he shall be given, within one month,
scavengers
by a M u n ici ( i ) a photo identity card, containing, in t e r a lia , details of all members of
p a lity.
his family dependent on him, and
( ii) such initial, one time, cash assistance, as may be prescribed;
(b ) his children shall be entitled to scholarship as per the relevant scheme of the
Central Government or the State Government or the local authorities, as the case may be;
(c) he shall be allotted a residential plot and financial assistance for house
construction, or a ready-built house, with financial assistance, subject to eligibility
and willingness o f the manual scavenger, and the provisions o f the relevant scheme of
the Central Government or the State Government or the concerned local authority;
(d) he, or at least one adult member of his family, shall be given, subject to
eligibility and willingness, training in a livelihood skill, and shall be paid a monthly
stipend of not less than three thousand rupees, during the period of such training;
(e ) he, or at least one adult member of his family, shall be given, subject to
A - 28
eligibility and willingness, subsidy and concessional loan for taking up an alternative
occupation on a sustainable basis, in such manner as may be stipulated in the relevant
scheme of the Central Government or the State Government or the concerned local
authority;
(f) be shall be provided such other legal and programmatic assistance, as the
Central Government or State Government may notify in this behalf.
(2) The D istrict M agistrate o f the district concerned shall be responsible for
rehabilitation of each manual scavenger in accordance with the provisions of sub-section (7)
and the State Government or the District Magistrate concerned may, in addition, assign
responsibilities in his behalf to officers subordinate to the District Magistrate and to officers
of the concerned Municipality.
14. If any Panchayat has reason to believe that some persons are engaged in manual Survey o f
scavenging within its jurisdiction, the Chief Executive Officer of such Panchayat shall cause m anual
scav en g ers in
a survey of such manual scavengers to be undertaken, m u ta tis m utandis, in accordance with rural areas by
the provisions of section 11 and section 12, to identify such person. P a n c h a y a ts .
15. ( i) Any person working as a manual scavenger, in a rural area, may, either during A p p lic a tio n
the survey undertaken by the Panchayat within whose jurisdiction he works, in pursuance of by a rural
section 14 or at any time thereafter, apply, in such manner, as may be prescribed, to the Chief m anual
sc a v en g e r for
Executive Officer of the concerned Panchayat, or to any other officer authorised by him in id e n tific a tio n .
this behalf, for being identified as a manual scavenger.
(2) On receipt of an application under sub-section (7). the Chief Executive Officer shall
cause it to be enquired into, either as part of the survey undertaken under section 14 or when
no such survey is in progress, within fifteen days of receipt of such application, so as to
ascertain whether the applicant is a manual scavenger.
16. Any person included in the final list of manual scavengers, published in pursuance R e h a b ilita tio n
of section 14 or added thereto in pursuance o f sub-section (2) of section 15 shall be o f p erso n s
iden tified as
rehabilitated, m u ta tis m u ta n d is, in the manner laid down for urban manual scavengers in m anual
section 13. scavengers by
a P a n c h a y a t.
CHAPTER V
I m p l e m e n t in g a u t h o r it ie s
17. Notwithstanding anything contained in any other law for the time being in force, it R e sp o n sib ility
o f local
shall be the responsibility of every local authority to ensure, through awareness campaign
a u th o ritie s to
or in such other manner that after the expiry of a period of nine months, from the date of en su re
commencement of this Act, e lim in a tio n o f
in s a n ita ry
(7) no insanitary latrine is constructed, maintained or used within its jurisdiction; la trin e s .
and
(ii) in case of contravention of clause (i), action is taken against the occupier
under sub-section (3) of section 5.
18. The appropriate Government may confer such powers and impose such duties on A u th o ritie s
local authority and District Magistrate as may be necessary to ensure that the provisions of w ho m ay be
sp ecified for
this Act are properly carried out, and a local authority and the District Magistrate may, im p le m e n tin g
specify the subordinate officers, who shall exercise all or any of the powers, and perform all p ro v isio n s o f
or any of the duties, so conferred or imposed, and the local limits within which such powers this Act.
or duties shall be carried out by the officer or officers so specified.
19. The District Magistrate and the authority authorised under section 18 or any other D uty o f
subordinate officers specified by them under that section shall ensure that, after the expiry D is tric t
M a g istra te
of such period as specified for the purpose of this Act, and a u th o rised
o ffic e rs.
(a ) no person is engaged or em ployed as manual scavenger within their
jurisdiction;
A - 29
THE GAZETTE OF INDIA EXTRAORDINARY [P art II
(b) no one constructs, maintains, uses or makes available for use, an insanitary
latrine;
(c) manual scavengers identified under this Act are rehabilitated in accordance
with section 13, or as the case may be, section 16;
id) persons contravening the provisions of section 5 or section 6 or section 7
are investigated and prosecuted under the provisions of this Act; and
0e) all provisions of this Act applicable within his jurisdiction are duly complied
with.
Appointment 20. (7) The appropriate Government may, by notification, appoint such persons as it
of inspectors
thinks fit to be inspectors for the purposes of this Act, and define the local limits within
and their
powers. which they shall exercise their powers under this Act.
(2) Subject to any rules made in this behalf, an inspector may, within the local limits of
his jurisdiction, enter, at all reasonable times, with such assistance as he considers necessary,
any premises or place for the purpose of,
(a) examining and testing any latrine, open drain or pit or for conducting an
inspection of any premises or place, where he has reason to believe that an offence
under this Act has been or is being or is about to be committed, and to prevent
employment of any person as manual scavenger;
(b ) examine any person whom he finds in such premises or place and who, he has
reasonable cause to believe, is employed as a manual scavenger therein, or is otherwise
in a position to furnish information about compliance or non-compliance with the
provisions of this Act and the rules made thereunder;
(c) require any person whom he finds on such premises, to give information
which is in his power to give, with respect to the names and addresses of persons
employed on such premises as manual scavenger and of the persons or agency or
contractor employing or engaging them;
(cl) seize or take copies of such registers, record of wages or notices or portions
thereof as he may consider relevant in respect of an offence under this Act which he
has reason to believe has been committed by the principal employer or agency; and
(e) exercise such other powers as may be prescribed.
(3) Any person required to produce any document or thing or to give any information
required by an inspector under sub-section (2) shall be deemed to be legally bound to do so
within the meaning of section 175 and section 176 of the Indian Penal Code. 45 o f 1860.
(4) The provisions of the Code of Criminal Procedure, 1973, shall, so far as may be, 2 of 1974.
apply to any such search or seizure under sub-section (2) as they apply to such search or
seizure made under the authority of a warrant issued under section 94 of the said Code.
CHAPTER VI
P rocedure for trial
Offences to 21. (7) The State Government may confer, on an Executive Magistrate, the powers of a
be tried by
Judicial Magistrate of the first class for the trial of offences under this Act; and, on such
Executive
Magistrate. conferment of powers, the Executive Magistrate, on whom the powers are so conferred, shall
be deemed, forthe purposes of the Code of Criminal Procedure, 1973,tobeaJudicialMagistrate 2 of 1974.
of the first class.
(2) An offence under this Act may be tried summarily.
Offcncc to bc 22. Notwithstanding anything contained in the Code of Criminal Procedure, 1973, 2 of 1974.
cognizable every offence under this Act shall be cognizable and non-bailable.
and non-
bailablc.
A - 30
23. (7) Where an offence under this Act has been committed by a company, every O ffe n ce s by
person who, at the time the offence was committed, was in charge of, and was responsible to, c o m p a n ie s.
the company for the conduct of the business of the company, as well as the company, shall
be deemed to be guilty o f the offence and shall be liable to be proceeded against and
punished accordingly.
(2) Notwithstanding anything contained in sub-section (7), where any offence under
this Act has been committed by a company and it is proved that offence has been committed
with the consent or connivance of, or is attributable to, any neglect on the part of, any
director, manager, secretary or other officer of the company, such director, manager, secretary
or other officer shall be deemed to be guilty of that offence and shall be liable to be proceeded
against and punished accordingly.
E xp la n a tio n . For the purposes of this section,
(a) company means any body corporate and includes a firm or other association
of individuals; and
(b) director in relation to a firm, means a partner in the firm.
CHAPTER VII
V ig il a n c e c o m m it t e e s
24. (7) Every State Government shall, by notification, constitute a Vigilance Committee
Vigilance
for each district and each Sub-Division. C om m ittees.
(2) Each Vigilance Committee constituted for a district shall consist o f the following
members, namely:
(a) the District Magistrate Chairperson, ex o ffic io ;
( b ) all members of the State Legislature belonging to the Scheduled Castes
elected from the district members:
Provided that if a district has no member of the State Legislature belonging to
the Scheduled Castes, the State Government may nominate such number of other
members of the State Legislature from the district, not exceeding two, as it may deem
appropriate.
(c) the district Superintendent of Police member, ex o ffic io ;
(d) the Chief Executive Officer of,
(i) the Panchayat at the district level member, e x officio:
(.ii ) the Municipality of the district headquarters member, e x officio:
(iii) any other M unicipal C orporation constituted in the district
member, ex officio:
(iv ) C antonm ent Board, if any, situated in the d istrict m em ber,
e x officio:
(e) one representative be nominated by the railway authority located in the
district;
(/) not more than four social workers belonging to organisation working for the
prohibition of manual scavenging and rehabilitation o f manual scavengers, or,
representing the scavenger community, resident in the district, to be nominated by the
District Magistrate, two of whom shall be women;
(g) one person to represent the financial and credit institutions in the district, to
be nominated by the District Magistrate;
(h ) the district-level officer in-charge of the Scheduled Castes Welfare
Member-Secretary, e x officio:
A - 31
10 T H E G A Z E T T E O F IN D IA E X T R A O R D IN A R Y [P a rt II
(7) district-level officers of Departments and agencies who, in the opinion of the
District Magistrate, subject to general orders, if any, of the State Government, have a
significant role to play in the implementation of this Act.
(J) Each Vigilance Committee, constituted for a Sub-Division, shall consist of the
following members, namely:
(a) the Sub-Divisional Magistrate Chairperson, e x o ffic io ;
(ib ) the C hairpersons and the C hief E xecutive O fficers of Panchayats at

intermediate level of the Sub-Division, and where Panchayats at intermediate level, do
not exist, Chairpersons from two Panchayats at Village level to be nominated by the
Sub-Divisional M agistrate member, e x officio',
(c) the Sub-Divisional Officer of Police member, e x o ffic io ;
(d) Chief Executive Officer of
(j) the M unicipality o f the Sub-D ivisional headquarters m em ber,

ex officio', and
(ii) Cantonment Board, if any, situated in the Sub-Divisionmember,

ex officio',
(<?) one representative to be nominated by the railway authority located in the

Sub-Division member, e x officio',
(j) two social workers belonging to the organisation working for the prohibition
of manual scavenging and rehabilitation of the manual scavengers, or representing the
scavenger community resident in the Sub-Division, to be nominated by the District
Magistrate, one of whom shall be a woman;
(g) one person to rep resen t the fin an cial and credit institu tio n s in the
Sub-Division, to be nominated by the Sub-Divisional Magistrate;
(h ) the Sub-Divisional level officer in-charge of Scheduled Castes welfare
Member-Secretary, e x officio;
(i) Sub-Divisional level officers of Department and agencies who in the opinion
of the Sub-Divisional Magistrate, subject to any general orders of the State Government
or the District M agistrate, have a significant role to play in the implementation of this
Act member, ex officio.
(4) Each Vigilance Committee constituted at district and Sub-Divisional level shall
meet at least once in every three months.
(5) No proceeding of a Vigilance Committees shall be invalid merely by reason of any
defect in its constitution.
Functions o f 25. The functions of Vigilance Committee shall be
Vigilance
C o m m itte e. (a) to advise the District Magistrate or, as the case may be, the Sub-Divisional
Magistrate, on the action which needs to be taken, to ensure that the provisions of this
Act or of any rule made thereunder are properly implemented;
(b ) to oversee the economic and social rehabilitation of manual scavengers;
(c) to co-ordinate the functions of all concerned agencies with a view to channelise
adequate credit for the rehabilitation of manual scavengers;
(d) to monitor the registration of offences under this Act and their investigation
and prosecution.
A - 32
S e c . 1] T H E G A Z E T T E O F IN D IA E X T R A O R D IN A R Y 11
26. (7) Every State Government shall, by notification, constitute a State Monitoring State
Committee, consisting of the following members, namely: M o n ito rin g
C o m m itte e.
(a) the Chief M inister of State or a M inister nominated by him Chairperson,
e x o ffic io ;
(b ) the Minister-in-charge of the Scheduled Castes Welfare, and such other
Department, as the State Government may notify;
(c) Chairperson of the State Commissions for Safai Karamcharis, and Scheduled
Castes, if any member, ex o fficio;
(d ) representatives of the National Commission for Scheduled Castes, and Safai
Karamcharismember, e x officio;
(e) not less than two members of the State Legislature belonging to the Scheduled
Castes, nominated by the State Government:
P rovided that if any State L egislature has no m em ber belonging to the
Scheduled Castes, the State Government may nominate the members belonging to the
Scheduled Tribes;
if) the Director-General of Police member, ex officio;
(,g ) Secretaries to the State Government in the Departments of Home, Panchayati
Raj, Urban Local Bodies, and such other Departments, as the State Government may notify;
(h) Chief Executive Officer of at least one Municipal Corporation, Panchayat at
the district-level, Cantonment Board and railway authority as the State Government
may notify;
(i) not more than four social workers belonging to organisation working for the
prohibition o f m anual scavenging and rehabilitation of manual scavengers, or,
representing the scavenger community, resident in the State, to be nominated by the
State Government, two o f whom shall be women;
(/) State-level head of the convener Bank of the State Level Bankers Committee
member, e x o ffic io ;
( k ) Secretary o f the D epartm ent o f the State G overnm ent dealing with
development of the Scheduled CastesMember-Secretary, e x officio:
(I) such other representative of Departments of the State Government and such
other agencies which, in the opinion of the State Government, are concerned with the
implementation of this Act.
(2) The State M onitoring Committee shall meet at least once in every six months and
shall observe such rules of procedure in regard to the transaction of business at its meetings
as may be prescribed.
27. The functions of the State M onitoring Committee shall be Functions o f
the State
(a) to monitor and advise the State Government and local authorities for effective M o n ito rin g
implementation of this Act; C o m m itte e.
(b ) to co-ordinate the functions of all concerned agencies;

(c) to look into any other matter incidental thereto or connected therewith for
implementation o f this Act.
28. Every State or Union territory Government and Union territory administration shall D u ty o f
send such periodic reports to the Central Government about progress of implementation of States or
U n io n
this Act, as the Central Government may require. te rrito rie s to
send periodic
reports to the
Central
G overnm ent.
29. (7) The Central Government shall, by notification, constitute a Central Monitoring
Central
Committee in accordance with the provisions of this section. M o n ito rin g
C o m m itte e.
A - 33
12 T H E G A Z E T T E O F IN D IA E X T R A O R D IN A R Y [P a r t I I
(2) The Central M onitoring Committee shall consist of the following members,
namely:
(a) The Union Minister for Social Justice and Empowerment Chairperson,
e x officio',
(b ) Chairperson of the National Commission for Scheduled Castes member,

e x officio:
(c) M inister of State in the Ministry of Social Justice and Empowerment

member, e x o ffic io ;
(d) Chairperson, National Commission for Safai Karamcharismember, ex officio',
(e ) the M ember of the Planning Commission dealing with development of the
Scheduled Castesmember, ex o ffic io ;
(f) three elected members of Parliament belonging to Scheduled Castes, two from
the Lok Sabha and one from the Rajya Sabha;
(g) Secretaries of the Ministries of,
(/) Social Justice and Empowerment, Department of Social Justice and
Empowerment;
(ii) Urban Development;
(iii) Housing and Urban Poverty Alleviation;
(iv) Drinking Water and Sanitation;
(v) Panchayati Raj;
(vi) Finance, Department of Financial Services; and
(vii) Defence,
members, e x officio',
(h) Chairman, Railway Board member, ex officio',
(i) Director-General, Defence Estates member, ex officio',
(j) representatives of not less than six State Governments and one Union territory,
as the Central Government may, notify;
(k ) not more than six social workers belonging to organisation working for the
prohibition of manual scavenging and rehabilitation of manual scavengers, or,
representing the scavenger community, resident in the country, to be nominated by
the Chaiiperson, two of whom shall be women;
(/) Joint Secretary, Departm ent of Social Justice and Em powerment in the
Ministry of Social Justice and Empowerment, looking after development of Scheduled
Castes Member-Secretary, e x officio',
(m ) such other representatives of Central Ministries or Departments and agencies
which, in the opinion of the Chairperson, are concerned with the implementation of
this Act.
(3) The Central M onitoring Committee shall meet at least once in every six months.
Functions o f 30. The functions of the Central M onitoring Committee shall be,
the Central
M o n ito rin g (a) to monitor and advise the Central Government and State Government for
C o m m itte e. effective implementation of this Act and related laws and programmes;
(b ) to co-ordinate the functions of all concerned agencies;
(c) to look into any other matter incidental to or connected with implementation
of this Act.
A - 34
S e c . 1] T H E G A Z E T T E O F IN D IA E X T R A O R D IN A R Y 13
31. (7) The National Commission for Safai Karamcharis shall perform the following Functions o f
functions, namely: N a tio n a l
Com m ission
(a) to monitor the implementation of this Act; fo r Safai
Karam charis.
(b ) to enquire into complaints regarding contravention of the provisions of this
Act. and to convey its findings to the concerned authorities with recommendations
requiring further action; and
(c) to advise the Central and the State Governments for effective implementation
of the provisions of this Act.
(d) to take su o m o tu notice of matter relating to non-implementation of this Act.
(2) In the discharge of its functions under sub-section (7), the National Commission
shall have the power to call for information with respect to any matter specified in that sub
section from any Government or local or other authority.
32. (7) The State Government may, by notification, designate a State Commission for Power o f
Safai Karamcharis or a State Commission for the Scheduled Castes or such other statutory or State
G overnm ent
other authority, as it deems fit, to perform, within the State, m u ta tis m u ta n d is , the functions to designate
specified in sub-section (7) of section 31. an a p pro pri
ate a u th o rity
(2) An authority designated under sub-section (7) shall, within the State, have, to m o n ito r
m u ta tis m u ta n d is, the powers of the National Commission for Safai Karamcharis as specified the im p le
in sub-section (2) of section 31. m entation o f
this Act.
CHAPTER Vm
M is c e l l a n e o u s
33. (7) It shall be the duty o f every local authority and other agency to use appropriate D uty o f local
technological appliances for cleaning of sewers, septic tanks and other spaces within their authorities
control with a view to eliminating the need for the manual handling of excreta in the process and other
agencies to
of their cleaning. use modern
(2) It shall be the duty of the appropriate Government to promote, through financial tech nolog y
assistance, incentives and otherwise, the use of modem technology, as mentioned in sub fo r cleaning
o f sewers, etc.
section (7).
34. No suit, prosecution or other legal proceeding shall lie against an appropriate P ro te ctio n o f
Government or any officer of the appropriate Government or any member of the Committee action taken
in good faith.
for anything which is in good faith done or intended to be done under this Act.
35. No civil court shall have jurisdiction in respect of any matter to which any provision Jurisdiction o f
of this Act applies and no injunction shall be granted by any civil court in respect of anything, c iv il courts
which is done or intended to be done, by or under this Act. barred.
36. (7) The appropriate Government shall, by notification, make rules for carrying out Power o f
the provisions of this Act, within a period not exceeding three months from the date of appropriate
commencement of this Act. G overnm ent
to make rules.
(2) In particular, and without prejudice to the generality of the foregoing power, such
rules may provide for all or any of the following matters, namely:
(a) the obligation of an employer, under clause ( d ) of sub-section (7) of
section 2;
(b) the manner in which the excreta fully decomposes under clauses (e) and (g)
of sub-section (7) of section 2;
(c) the manner of carrying out survey of insanitary latrine and publishing list
thereof under clause (a ) of sub-section (7) of section 4;
(d) procedure of giving notice and recovering cost of demolition of an insanitary
latrine under sub-section (J) of section 5;
(ie) c o n te n t a n d m e th o d o lo g y o f th e s u rv e y u n d e r s u b -s e c tio n ( 2 ) o f s e c tio n 11 ;
A - 35
14 T H E G A Z E T T E O F IN D IA E X T R A O R D IN A R Y [P a rt II
(f) the eligibility conditions for identification of manual scavengers and publication
of provisional list of persons found to be working as manual scavengers under sub-section
(4) of section 11;
(g) publication of final list of persons found to be working as manual scavengers

under sub-section (6) of section 11;
(/?) manner of application to be made to the Chief Executive Officer of the
municipality, or to an officer authorised by him in this behalf, under sub-section (7) of
section 12 or, as the case may be, sub-section (7) of section 15;
(/) provision of initial, one time, cash assistance under sub-clause (ii) of clause
(a) of sub-section (7) of section 13;
(j) such other powers of Inspectors under clause (e) of sub-section (2) of section
2 0 ;and
(k ) any other matter which is required to be, or may be, prescribed.
(5) Every rule made under this Act by the Central Government shall be laid, as soon as may
be after it is made, before each House of Parliament, while it is in session, for a total period of thirty
days which may be comprised in one session or in two or more successive sessions, and if, before
the expiry of the session immediately following the session or the successive sessions aforesaid,
both Houses agree in making any modification in the rale or both Houses agree that the rule
should not be made, the rule shall thereafter have effect only in such modified form or be of no
effect, as the case may be; so, however, that any such modification or annulment shall be without
prejudice to the validity of anything previously done under that rule.
(4) Every rule made under this Act by the State Government shall, as soon as may be
after it is made, be laid before each House of State Legislature, where there are two Houses
and where there is one House of State Legislature, before that House.
Power o f 37. (7) Notwithstanding anything contained in section 36 of this Act:
Central
G overnm ent (a) the Central Government shall, by notification, publish model rales for the
to make model guidance and use of State Governments; and
rules.
(b) in case the State Government fails to notify the rales under section 36 of this
Act within the period of three months specified therein, then the model rules as notified
by the Central Government shall be deemed to have come into effect, m u ta tis m utandis,
in such State, till such time as the State Government notifies its rales.
(2) The model rules made by the Central Government under this Act shall be laid, as
soon as may be after they are made, before each House of Parliament while it is in session, for
a total period of thirty days which may be comprised in one session or in two or more
successive sessions, and if, before the expiry of the session immediately following the
session or the successive sessions aforesaid, both Houses make any modification in the
rale, the rale shall thereafter have effect only in such modified form; so, however, that any
such modification shall be without prejudice to the validity of anything previously done
under that rale.
Pow er to 38. (7) If any difficulty arises in giving effect to the provisions of this Act, the Central
rem ove Government may, by order published in the Official Gazette, make such provisions, not
d ifficu ltie s.
inconsistent with the provisions of this Act, as may appear to it to be necessary or expedient
for the removal of the difficulty:
Provided that no such order shall be made in relation to a State after the expiration of
three years from the commencement of this Act in that State.
(2) Every order made under this section shall, as soon as may be after it is made, be laid
before each House of Parliament.
A - 36
S e c . 1] T H E G A Z E T T E O F I N D I A E X T R A O R D IN A R Y 15
39. (7) The appropriate G overnm ent may, by a general or special order published in the Pow er to
Official Gazette, for reasons to be recorded, and subject to such conditions as it m ay impose, e x e m p t,
exem pt any area, category o f buildings or class o f persons from any provisions o f this Act or
from any specified requirem ent contained in this Act or any rule, order, notification, bye-laws
or schem e made thereunder or dispense with the observance o f any such requirem ent in a
class or classes o f cases, for a period not exceeding six m onths at a time.
(2) Every general or special order m ade under this section shall be laid, as soon as may
be after it is made, before each House o f Parliam ent or each House o f State Legislature, where
there are two H ouses and w here there is one House o f State Legislature, before that House.
P.K. MALHOTRA.
Secy, to the Govt, o f Inclia.
P R IN T E D B Y D IR E C T O R A T E O F P R IN T IN G AT G O V E R N M E N T O F IN D IA PR E S S , M IN T O RO AD,
N E W D ELH I A N D P U B L IS H E D B Y T H E C O N T R O L L E R O F P U B L IC A T IO N S , D ELH I, 20 13 .
G MG I PM R N D 2806G I (S 3) 19 -09 -201 3.
A - 37
APPENDIX A 1.2
TIME FRAME FOR FULFILMENT OF RESPONSIBILITIES AND CERTAIN ACTIVITIES
AND IMPLEMENTING AGENCIES
Table A1.2.1 Time frame for fulfilment of responsibilities and certain activities
Section Time period from

No under Subject Matter the commencement Responsibility
the Act of the Act
Carry out a survey of

the insanitary
latrines existing within
1 4(1 )(a) 2 months Local Authority
its jurisdiction, and
publish a list of such
insanitary latrines
Give a notice to the

occupier within 15 days
from the date of 15 days from
2 4(1 )(b) publication of the list of the publication of Local Authority
insanitary latrines, to the list
demolish and convert
into a sanitary latrine
Within a period of 6
months (for
(the occupier) to either sufficient reasons
demolish the insanitary in recording, the Occupier
3 4(1 )(b)
latrine or convert it into local authority may (Resident)
a sanitary latrine extend the period
by not exceeding
another 3 months)
Construction of
appropriate number of
Within a period of
sanitary community
4 4(1 ) ( c ) note exceeding 9 Local Authority
latrines in the areas
months
where insanitary latrines
have been found
Construct adequate
3 years from the
number of sanitary Municipalities
date of
5 4(2) community latrines in Cantonment Boards
commencement of
the areas to eliminate Railway Authorities
the Act
open defecation
Not to engage or
employ, either directly
Within one year, as Person
or indirectly, any person
6 7 may be notified by Local authority
for hazardous cleaning
the State Govt. Agency
of a sewer or
septic tank
From the date of 1 month for municipalities

Identification of manual
7 11(1) commencement 2 months for municipal
scavengers
of the Act corporations
A - 38
Every concerted effort should be taken so that there should be no further tolerance for pushing back
the time frames for eradication of manual scavenging and failure to eradicate without reasonable
cause beyond this would be contravention of the provisions of The Prohibition of Employment as
Manual Scavengers and their Rehabilitation Act, 2013 and treated as an offence by public officials,
with severe penalties.
Implementing Agencies
The implementing agencies under the Act should be the District Collector and Municipal Commis
sioner. As per the Section 18 of the Act, State Government shall confer such powers and impose
such duties on local authority (Panchayat or municipal body) and District Magistrate as may be
necessary to ensure that the provisions of this Act are properly carried out. It is incumbent upon the
district magistrate or chief executive officer of the local authority to specify and confer such powers to
the subordinate officers to perform all the duties as per the provisions of the Act. It is to be ensured
by the authorities as notified by the appropriate government to ensure the following:
a. No person is engaged or employed as manual scavenger within their jurisdiction

b. No one constructs, maintains, uses or makes available for use, an insanitary latrine;
c. Identification and rehabilitation of the manual scavengers
d. Investigation and prosecution of persons contravening the provisions of the Act;
As per Section 33, sub-section 1 of the Act, "it shall be the duty of every local authority and other
agency to use appropriate technological appliances for cleaning of sewers, septic tanks and other
spaces within their control with a view to eliminating the need for manual handling of excreta in the
process of their cleaning . Sub-section 2 further specifies that, "it shall be the duty of the appropriate
government to promote, through financial assistance, incentives and otherwise, the use of modern
technology, as mentioned in sub-section 1 .
A - 39
APPENDIX A 2.1
PERFORMANCE OF KNOWN SEWAGE TREATMENT PROCESSES
UNDER INDIAN CONDITIONS
A study of pollution potential of water courses by sewage even after treatment was instituted by the
Central Pollution Control Board and carried out by M/S Anna University on identified STPs in south
India and M/S IIT Roorkee on identified STPs in north India. The results of performance of the STPs
evaluated are reproduced here.
Table A 2.1.1 Summary of Results of Anna University

(Figures in Parameters are arithmetic average)
Total Coliform Total Collform Prercent Fecal Fecal Coliform Percent

Treatment MPN/100 mL MPN/100 mL Reduct Collform MPN / 100 mL Reduction
Plant Influent X 106 Effluent X 104 ion MPN /100 mL Effluent X 104
Influent X 106
99.0 - 98.7 -
AABF 5 - 500 5 - 380 2.90 - 500 3.7 - 190
99.2 99.6
92.6 - 92.6 -
ASP 6 .8 - 5,000 50 - 6,800 5 - 3,700 37 - 3,800
98.6 98.9
Tertiary < 2 (all but one 97.1 - <2 (all but one 98.2 -
0.68 - 98 1.1 - 6 8
Treated day) 99.9 day) 99.9
99.9 99.9
OP 03.8 - 680 0.05 - 900 0.7 -98 0.038 - 500
98.7 94.4
99.7 99.5
TF 6 .8 - 500 2 - 3,000 3.0 - 370 2 - 1 .1 0 0
94 97.0
A - 40
Table A 2.1.2 Annual performance of the five sewage treatment plants for Physico - Chemical characteristic
Characteristics DEWATs Nesapakkam CPCL Pondicherry V. Valley

Raw Treated Raw Treated Raw Treated Raw Treated Raw Treated
Min 288 17 450 33 67 2 93 19 168 31
Max 1037 358 1482 534 328 164 730 286 764 299
TSS (rng/L)
A vg 594 189 1059 234 206 23 397 154 383 106
SD 233 123 318 169 85 42 229 86 223 96
Min 272 53 519 56 104 3 235 98 277 69
COD-T Max 1120 207 1656 288 421 160 800 240 560 181
(m aL ) A vg 637 118 1232 128 230 57 497 171 429 115
SD 256 57 275 59 88 46 177 54 92 44
Min 128 24 149 37 66 0 64 32 75 37
COD-S Max 352 133 635 203 261 107 480 208 240 117
(mg/L) A vg 233 65 397 102 139 34 210 99 159 65
SD 75 37 132 49 67 31 127 52 62 29
Mill 206 19 236 15 36 0.8 77 36 74 31
BOD-T Max 749 138 671 90 174 65 356 123 320 75
(m aL ) A vg 343 59 520 53 93 14 212 55 181 43
SD 174 36 108 26 47 17 116 33 61 15
Min 80 14 98 5 18 0.4 37 15 35 15
BOD-S Max 344 70 379 73 88 37 217 45 185 57
(mg/L) A vg 201 30 238 33 46 8 102 29 95 29
SD 78 18 75 21 22 10 59 9 50 13
A - 41
Table A 2.1.3 Annual performance of the five sewage treatment plants

for microbiological characteristics
DEWATs Nesapakkam CPCL Pondicherry V. Valley

Characteristics
Raw Treated Raw Treated Raw Treated Raw Treated Raw Treated
Total Min 500 5 680 50 68 0.0002 380 0.78 680 38
Coliforms Max 5000 380 500000 6800 9800 0.37 68000 3000 190000 5000
Avg 5926 43 32152 1325 893 0.15 12492 565 21235 712
SD 11125 65 77099 1691 1559 0.58 150501 587 38918 1183
Min 380 3.7 500 37 50 0.0002 380 0.78 500 19
Faecal Max 5000 190 370000 5000 6800 0.98 38000 1100 68000 3800
Colifonns Avg 4555 28 22672 823 633 0.078 8506 371 9611 427
SD 9887 38 57296 1034 1054 0.23 9787 321 14636 775
Min 190 0.68 98 18 38 0.0002 190 0.5 380 19
Max 3800 98 180000 3800 3700 0.68 37000 980 38000 1900
E.Coli
Avg 2569 15 12730 459 366 0.056 5387 243 4958 225
SD 6301 21 29621 644 631 0.17 6540 237 7802 395
Min 13 0.29 68 5 1.3 0.0002 13 0.5 78 1.1
Faecal Max 1300 3.8 5000 180 680 0.19 980 68 980 50
Streptococci Avg 2691 1.2 1373 51 95 0.016 393 10 317 10
SD 393 1.2 1593 47 185 0.048 326 18 305 17
Table A 2.1.4 Summary O f Results of IIT, Roorkee

(Figures in parameters are arithmetic average)
Total Coliform Total Collform Percent Fecal Fecal Coliform Percent

Treatment MPN/100 mL MPN/100 mL Reduct Collform MPN / 100 mL Reduction
Plant Influent X 106 Effluent X 104 ion MPN /100 mL Effluent X 104
Influent X 106
99.2 - 99.9 -
UASB 2.3 - 23 1.9 - 23 0.23 - 15 0.023 - 23
99 98.5
99.3 - 99.7 -
UASB 1.6 - 43 1.1 - 23 0.39 - 23 0.11 - 4-3
99.5 99.8
99.7 - 99.3 -
OP 4.3 - 930 1.5 - 430 0.023 - 230 0.15 - 210
99.5 99.1
ASP 1.5 - 4.3 9.3 - 930 93.8 0.21 - 1.5 0.15 - 930 99.3
Anaerobic
28 450 83.9 6 .8 130 80.9
Filter
A - 42
Table A 2.1.5 Sewage Treatment Plants in Delhi
Sl.No Name of the STPs & Design Actual flow Type of STP Present Status
Capacity (mgcl) capacity (MLD)
(MLD)
1 Coronation Pillar STPs Activated sludge process Under utilised
1) (10) 45.46 40.87 (ASP), trickling filter & Over the Des. Cap.
2) (10 + 20) 45.46 63.46 ASP Under Utilized
90.92 56.55
2. Delhi Gate (2.2) 10.00 10.00 High rate bio-filters Running on designed
Densadeg technology capacity
3. Ghitorni (5) 22.73 N il Activated sludge process N ot in operation
4. Keshopur STPs i)12 mgd not running,

1) (12) 54.55 46.55 A ll the three plants sewage passes through
1) (20) 90.92 95.10 designed on activated PST. ii) Over the Des.
2) (40) 181.84 106.46 sludge process Cap. iii) Under- utilized
5. Kondli STPs Over the capacity
1) (10-Phase-I) 45.46 56.55 A ll three activated sludge Under- utilized
2) (25 -Phase-II) 113.65 57.96 process Under- utilized
3) (10-Phase-III) 45.46 28.36
6. Mekrauli STP (5) 22.73 4.95 Extended aeration Under-utilized
7. Najafgarh STP (5) 22.73 2.27 Activated sludge proc. Under- utilized
8. Nilotlii STP (40) 181.84 15.0 Activated sludge process Under- utilized
9. Narela STP (10) 45.46 2.50 Activated sludge process Under- utilized
10. Oklila STPs A ll the plants designed on Under- utilized

1) (12) 54.55 39.09 activated sludge process Under- utilized
2) (16) 72.73 40.91 Running in cap.
3) (30) 136.38 136.98 Under-utilized
(37) 168.20 159.11 Under-utilized
(45) 204.57 181.84
11. Papankalan STP (20) 90.92 37.73 Activated sludge process Under-utilized
12 Rithala STPs Activated sludge process Under-utilized

1 ) ( 4 0 ) Old 181.84 46.28 & High rate aerobic ASP Over the des. cap.
2) (40) N ew 181.84 185.07 & biofor/biofilter
13. Rohini STP (15) 68.19 N il Activated sludge process N ot in operation
14. Sen N.H. STP (2.2) 10.0 10.0 High rate Bio filter Running on designed
capacity.
15. Timarpur O.P. (6) 27.27 4.79 Oxidation ponds Under-utilized
16. Yamnna Vihar STPs Activated sludge process Under-utilized
1) Ph-I(10) 45.46 27.27 Under-utilized
2) Ph-n(10) 45.46 14.77
17. Vasant Kunj STPs ASP & Extended aeration Under-utilized
1) (2.2) 10.00 3.18 Under-utilized
2) (3.0) 13.63 4.36
Total 30 2330 1478
A - 43
Table A 2.1.6 Performance Evaluation of Sewage Treatment Plants in Delhi
Perform an ce E valuation o f STP* (24 H our com posite M onitoring

D esign A ctual for every tliree hourly sam ples)
SI. N am e o f STP & % reduction
r ~ C apacity flow ,
No. C apacity (m gd) * In fluen t Q uality E ffluent Q uality
j iU
pH TSS CO D BO D C ond. pH TSS C O D BO D C ond. TSS COD BO D
1 Cor. Pillar(lO) 45.46 40.87 7.2 179 317 112 908 7.4 35 61 18 1090 80.45 80.76 83.93
(20+10) 136.38 120.01 6.44 342 172 48 1700 6.9 93 48 15 1730 72.81 72.09 68.75
Keshopur(12*) 54.55 46.55 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
2 (20) 90.92 95.1 7.3 404 560 282 1390 7.6 78 149 45 1390 80.69 73.39 84.04
(40) 181.84 106.46 7.3 404 560 282 1390 7.8 21 55 10 1520 94.80 90.18 96.45
Oklila(12) 54.55 39.09 7.3 498 517 204 1440 7.8 21 54 10 1460 95.78 89.56 95.10
(16) 72.73 40.91 7.4 291 486 207 1510 7.7 83 108 48 1400 71.48 77.78 76.81
3 (30) 136.38 136.98 7.4 647 551 222 1480 7.6 76 153 45 1470 88.25 72.23 79.73
(37) 168.2 159.11 7.3 480 515 249 1590 7.8 32 62 12 1540 93.33 87.96 95.18
(45) 204.57 181.84 7.3 480 515 249 1590 7.7 27 51 19 1530 94.38 90.10 92.37
4 Narela (10) 45.46 2.5 7.4 426 447 100 1720 8 38 72 8 1720 91.08 83.89 92.00
Y. Vihar (Ph.-110. 45.46 27.27 7.1 391 505 174 1110 7.7 44 84 17 1050 88.75 83.37 90.23
5
Ph.-II 10) 45.46 14.77 7.2 405 538 199 1020 7.5 39 44 20 1070 90.37 91.82 89.95
6 Tiniarpur O.P -(6) 27.27 4.79 6.7 412 272 106 1650 7.3 11 26 4 1650 97.33 90.44 96.23
7 Najafgarh (5) 22.73 2.27 7.4 165 205 54 810 7.7 29 38 1 687 82.42 81.46 98.15
8 Nilotlii (40) 181.84 15 7.7 432 328 90 2340 7.8 21 26 4 1960 95.14 92.07 95.56
9 Dr. SenN.H.(2.2) 10 10 7.5 370 585 236 1680 7.4 36 46 16 1660 90.27 92.14 93.22
10 Delhi Gate (2.2) 10 10 7.5 263 605 147 1020 7.3 26 62 20 1030 90.11 89.75 86.39
11 Papaiikalan (20) 90.92 37.73 7.6 142 275 103 2190 7.9 39 46 10 1580 72.54 83.27 90.29
Kondli Ph.-I (10) 45.46 56.55 7.3 363 507 241 1390 7.8 68 140 27 1390 81.27 72.39 88.80
12 Ph.-II (25) 113.65 57.96 7.3 604 588 261 1550 7.6 45 50 34 1350 92.55 91.50 86.97
ph .-m (io) 45.46 28.36 7.3 519 615 237 1530 7.8 16 50 14 1220 96.92 91.87 94.09
13 Mehrauli(5) 22.73 4.95 7.8 251 326 126 1090 8.1 12 35 7 1180 95.22 89.26 94.44
Rithala {(40 Old) 181.84 46.28 7.2 330 399 205 1260 7.5 75 54 14 1240 77.27 86.47 93.17
14
(40 New)} 181.84 185.07 7.2 330 399 205 1260 7.3 47 151 55 1230 85.76 62.16 73.17
Vasant Kunj (2.2) 10 3.18 7.5 379 460 323 1710 7.8 23 43 7 1450 93.93 90.65 97.83
15
(3) 13.63 4.36 7.4 479 565 306 1400 7.9 49 80 20 1470 89.77 85.84 93.46
16 Roliiiii (15) 68.19 Nil - - - - -
17 Gliitomi (5) 22.73 Nil - - - - - - -
Total 2330 1478
Keshopur 12 mgd STP is not running fully, it is observed that the sewage passes though
Primary Settling Tank. All values are in mg/1 except pH and conductivity (p mhos / cm)
A - 44
Table A 2.1.7 Performance of Bacteriological Reduction in

Sewage Treatment Plants in Delhi
Performaiice evaluation of Sewage Treatmeut Plants in Delhi

Effluent Bacteriological % Reduction
Influent Bacteriological Quality
SI. Name of the STP & Quality
No. capacity (mgcl) Faecal Total Faecal
Total Coliform Total Faecal
Coliform Coliform Coliform
(Nos/lOOml) Coliform Coliform
(Nos/lOOml) (Nos/lOOml) (Nos/lOOml)
1. Najafgarh (5) 10900000 5100000 320000 120000 97.06 97.65
2. Papankala (20) 13100000 10300000 120000 70000 99.08 99.32
3. Delhi gate (2.2) 26000000 19000000 1700000 1100000 93.46 94.21
4. Dr. SenN. H. (2.2) 133000000 102000000 240000 21700 99.82 99.98
5. Nilothi (40) 61000000 50000000 120000 70000 99.80 99.86
6. Cor. Pillar (10) 39000000 32000000 200000 110000 99.49 99.66
7. Cor. Pillar (30) 78000000 44000000 700000 200000 99.10 99.55
8. Narela (5) 17000000 10000000 110000 40000 99.35 99.60
9. Vasant Kiuij (3) 6900000 3900000 178000 101000 97.42 97.41
10. VasantKunj (2.2) 71000000 46000000 17000 8000 99.98 99.98
11. Oklila (12) 370000000 65000000 2900000 230000 99.22 99.65
12. Oklila (16) 51000000 27000000 990000 530000 98.06 98.04
13. Oklila (30) 204000000 107000000 115000000 25000000 43.63 76.64
14. Oklila (37) 197000000 111000000 1280000 710000 99.35 99.36
15. Oklila (45) 197000000 111000000 4100000 600000 97.92 99.46
16. Y. Vihar (Ph.-110) 1210000000 410000000 19400000 4600000 98.40 98.88
17. Y. Vihar (Ph.-II 10) 1570000000 370000000 8500000 5200000 99.46 98.59
18. Keshopiir (20) 430000000 135000000 91000000 7200000 78.84 94.67
19. Keshopur (40) 430000000 135000000 11500000 5100000 97.33 96.22
20. Kondli (Ph.-110) 670000000 320000000 24000000 13900000 96.42 95.66
21. Kondli (Ph.-II 25) 910000000 480000000 5500000 1800000 99.40 99.63
22. Kondli (Ph.-m 10) 570000000 370000000 2700000 140000 99.53 99.96
23. Rithala (40 Old) 1080000000 710000000 32000000 4600000 97.04 99.35
24. Rithala (40 New) 1080000000 710000000 49000000 5900000 95.46 99.17
25. Mehrauli (5) 290000000 210000000 490000 20000 99.83 99.99
26. Dr. SenN.H (2.2)
(After Bio-filter)
133000000 102000000 179000 13500 99.87 99.99
27. Dr. SenN.H(2.2)

133000000 102000000 27000 11200 99.80 99.99
(After U.V. reatment)
A - 45
The values reported for the CPCL plant in Table A 2.1.3 relate to the quality of recovered water after
the secondary treated sewage is further treated by chemical coagulation, sedimentation, filtration
and R O.
The performance of oxidation ponds one in the south coastal temperate climate at Puducherry and
the other at north in the cold hilly region of Rishikesh have also been evaluated in this study. In
the Puducherry ponds, removals were 93% for total BOD and from 37,000/100 ml to 500/100 ml
for faecal coliforms. In the Rishikesh pond system, the removals were 82% for total BOD and from
6000000/100 ml to 28000/100 ml for faecal coliforms.
The faecal coliform reduction from 3000/100 ml and 70,000/100 ml to almost nil have been
documented in the study when secondary treated sewage was chemically coagulated with alum or
Iron salts and chlorinated with of 3 to 4 mg/l as in Figure A 2.1.1
Figure A 2.1.1 Removal of FC with chlorination after coagulation with different

coagulants at optimum doses.
The performance results do not cover the later day STP processes such as SBR, MBBR and MBR
etc as these STPs were not in popular use at that time. All the same, the studies establish the position
that the same STP process exhibits varying degrees of removals under varying conditions of climate,
capacity utilization, nature of inlet sewage etc and almost all processes can be expected to attain a
required degree of removal of BOD and faecal coliforms provided the design takes into account the
insights as brought out above.
A - 46
APPENDIX A 2.2
ESTIMATION OF FUTURE POPULATION
(Retained as in 2nd edition)
1.PROBLEM
Assuming that the scheme of water supply will commence to function from 1986, it is required to
estimate the population 30 years hence, i.e. in 2016 and also the intermediate population 15 years
after 1986, i.e. in 2001.
Table A2.2-1
Year Population Increment
1921 40,185 ---
1931 44,522 15,873
1941 60,395 15,873
1951 75,614 15,219
1961 98,886 23,272
1971 124,230 25,344
1981 158,800 34,570
Total 118,615
Average 19,769
2. SOLUTION
2.1 ARITHMETIC PROGRESSION METHOD
Increase in population from 1921 to 1981

i.e. in 6 decades = 1,58,800
(-) 40,185
= 1,18,615
= 1,58,800 - 40,185 = 1,18, 615
or increase per decade = 1/6 x 1,18,615 = 19,769
Population in 2 0 0 1 = Population in 1981 + Increase for 2 decades
= 1,58,800 + 2 x 19,769
= 1,58,800 + 39,538 = 1,98,338
Population in 2016 = Population in 1981 + Increase for 3.5 decades
= 1,58,800 + 3.5 x 19,769 = 2,27,992
A - 47
2.2 GEOMETRIC PROGRESSION METHOD
Rate of growth (r) per decade between

1931 and 1921 = 4,337/40,185 = 0.108
1941 and 1931 = 15,873/44,522 = 0.356
1951 and 1941 = 15,219/60,395 = 0.252
1961 and 1951 = 23,272/75,614 = 0.308
1971 and 1961 = 25,344/98,886 = 0.256
1981 and 1971 = 34,570/1,24,230 = 0.278
Geometric Mean,
Assuming that the future growth follows the geometric mean for
the period 1921 to 1981 rg = 0.2442
Population in 2001 = Population in 1981 * (1 + rg) 2
= 1,58,800 * (1.2442)2 = 2,45,800
Population in 2016 = Population in 1981 * (1 + rg) 3-5
= 1,58,800 * (1.2442)35 = 3,41,166
2.3 METHOD OF VARYING INCREMENT OR INCREMENTAL INCREASE METHOD
In this method, a progressively decreasing or increasing rather than a constant rate is adopted. This
is a modification over the Arithmetical Progression method.
Table A2.2-2
Year Population Increase (X) Incremental Increase (Y)
1921 40,185
1931 44,522 4,337
1941 60,395 15,873 11,536
1951 75,614 15,219 - 654
1961 98,886 23,272 8,053
1971 124,230 25,344 2,072
1981 158,800 34,570 9,226
Total 1,18,615 30,233
Average 1/6 * 118,615 = 19,769 1/5 * 30,233 = 6,047
A - 48
Population can be projected using the formula:
Pn = P, + nY + n(n + 1)Y
Therefore, population in 2001 can be given as
= 1,58,800 + 39,538 + 18,141

= 2,16,479
3 .5 x 4 .5 x 6 0 4 7
^2oi6 î98i + 3.5 x 1 9 7 6 9 +
Similarly, population in 2016 can be given as

= 1,58,800 + 69,192 + 24,188
= 2,75,612
2.4 GRAPHICAL PROJECTION METHOD
From the Figure presented on the following page, the figures for 2001 and 2016 years obtained are
as follows:
2001 - 253,000
2016 - 362,000
*
"E
1
.8i
E?
-ft
10
1911 19 21 1931 1941 1951 19Gl 1971 19 SI 1991 2001 2011 2021 2031
Y*s
Figure A2.2-1 Semi log graph for estimation of future population
A - 49
APPENDIX A 3.1
COMPUTATION OF STORM RUNOFF AND DESIGN OF STORM SEWER
PROBLEM
Design a system of storm sewers for the area shown in Figure A3.1-1 based on the Rational Formula
for the estimation of peak runoff.
Basic Data and Assumptions imperviousness
Built up and paved area - 0.7
Open space, lawns, etc. - 0.2
Inlet time
Built up and paved area (tb) - 8 minutes.
Open space, lawns (t1) - 15 minutes.
Minimum velocity in sewer - 0.8 mps
Minimum depth of cover above crown - 0.5 metres.
Rainfall intensity = consider one year storm as the area is central and high priced. (Use Table 3.7 for
the record of rainfall intensity and frequency of rainfall). Use Mannings chart for sewer design.
Figure A3.1-1
A - 50
1 SOLUTION
Quantity of storm water runoff is calculated using the Rational Formula given in Section 3.9.2.I. i.e.]
Q = 10 C i A
Where,
Q : Runoff in m3/hr
C : Coefficient of runoff
i : Intensity of rainfall in mm/hr and
A : Area of drainage district in hectares
Storm water runoff is determined in the following manner.
I) From the rainfall records for the last 26 years (Table 3.7), the storm occurring once in a year, i.e.
26 times in 26 years, the time-intensity values for this frequency are obtained by interpolation and
are as follows;
Intensity, i mm/hr 30 35 40 45 50 60
Duration, t minute 44 36 28.5 22.5 13.5 9.75
II) The generalised formula adopted for intensity and duration is
Where,
i : Intensity of rainfall in mm/hr

t : Duration in minutes and a and n are constants
A graph Figure A3.1-3 is plotted for one year storm using the values i and t from the above table on
a log-log paper. From the line of best fit the values of a and n are found out. From the plotted line
values of a and n are 160 and 0.4 respectively.
iii) Now using equation i = (160 / t04 ), i.e. after substituting the values of a and n for different values
of i for various values of t are calculated and tabulated as below and a curve (Figure A3.1-4) is
plotted on an ordinary graph paper.
The table for intensity-duration curve for one year storm is given in Table A 3.1-1
Table A3.1-1
tmin 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 60 80 100 120
i = a/tn 84.2 64.0 54.0 48.5 44.2 41.2 38.6 36.8 34.8 31.0 27.8 25.4 23.6
iv)Another graph (Figure A3.1-5) of runoff-coefficient C vs. duration time t is plotted as per values
given in Table 3.8 (Hornets Table).
v) From the above two graphs (Figure A3.1-4 and Figure A3.1-5) the values of C and i for the same
A - 51
duration time t are determined and the curves for 10 C i vs t for the various values of impervious
ness are plotted (Figure A3.1-6). The value of 10 C i gives the rate of runoff in m3/hr per hectare
of the tributary area. These curves are ultimately used in calculating the runoff from the tributary
areas for a given time of concentration and imperviousness factor.
2 DESIGN OF STORM SEWER SYSTEM
Table A3.1-2 gives the various components of the storm sewer system design.
Column 1-4 identify the location of drain, street and manholes.
Columns 5-6 record the increment in tributary area with the given imperviousness factors.
Column 7 gives the tributary area increment with equivalent 100 percent imperviousness factor.
Column 8 records the total area served by each drain.
Column 9 records the time of concentration at each upper end of line (drain).
The time of concentration is found by taking the weighted average of the two areas. i.e.,
Where,
A f: Built up area
A2 : Area of lawns
Column 10 records the time of flow in each drain. For example the time of flow in line 1 is calculated
to be 70 / (60 x1.0) = 1.17 min.
Column 11 is the total time of concentration for each drain.
Column 12 is the value of runoff as 10 C i read from the Figure A3.1-6 for the corresponding time of
concentration.
Column 13 gives the total runoff from each tributary area.
Column 14 gives the runoff in lps from each tributary area.
Columns 15-18 record the chosen size, required grade resulting capacity, velocity of flow for each
drain or line. These designs of storm sewers are computed from the Mannings chart for each
required flow and maintaining a minimum velocity.
Columns 19-23 identify the profile of the drain.
Column 19 is taken form the plan
Column 20 = Col.19 *Col.16
Column 21 the required drop in manholes is obtained directly from the recommended values in
section 3.17.1.
Column 22 gives invert elevation at the upper end with minimum cover of 0.6m at starting manhole.
A - 52
Part A: Engineering
Table A3.1-2
Tributary area
Line tc Time of Runoff Flow
Location of drain (hectares) Design Profile
Number Concentration m3/hr Q
increment
Time of ( t )
TOTAL tc=
Imp factor
upper e n d
Total Area
Length m
Invert Elevation
Eq 100%
Capacity
Manhole
Manhole
Manhole
Velocity
Dia mm
hectare
Drop in
0.7 Imp
0.2 Imp
m/1000
Time of
drain tf
flow in
Street
factor
factor
(10Ci)
inlet to
Slope
(0 E
from
mps
ti+tf
Per
2
lps
Q.
to
*"co
* Upper Lower
end end
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
1 South st 5 4 0.286 0.366 0.274 0.274 12.0 - 12.0 345 94.5 26.6 200 10.0 32 1.0 70 0.7 0.000 37.400 36.700
2 4 3 0.167 0.488 0.214 0.488 13.3 1.17 14.47 335 164.0 46.0 250 6.65 50 1.0 125 0.83 0.025 36.675 35.845
North
3 south R 32 R 3.1 0.415 0.312 0.352 0.352 11.0 - 11.0 348 123.0 35.0 250 6.65 50 1.0 70 0.47 0.000 36.700 36.230
St.2
- 53
4 R31 3 0.358 0.36 0.324 0.676 11.5 1.17 12.67 340 264.0 74.0 350 4.55 98 1.0 70 0.32 0.050 36.180 35.860
5 South St. 3 2 0.256 0.466 0.274 1.438 12.5 3.27 15.77 335 480.0 135.0 450 3.14 160 1.0 125 0.40 0.066 35.779 35.379
North
6 south R2.2 R 2.1 0.230 0.492 0.260 0.260 12.8 - 12.8 340 87.5 25.0 200 10.0 32 1.0 70 0.70 0.000 38.000 37.300
St.3
7 R 21 2 0.410 0.310 0.348 0.608 11.0 1.17 12.17 342 208.0 59.0 300 5.55 70. 1.0 70 0.39 0.050 37.250 36.860
8 South St. R2 1 0.256 0.466 0.274 2.320 12.5 5.37 17.87 330 765.0 214.0 600 2.22 280 1.0 160 0.36 0.200 35.179 34.819
North
9 south R 12 R1.1 0.660 0.282 0.517 0.517 10.2 - 10.2 350 182.0 51.0 250 10.0 60 1.25 70 0.70 0.000 36.800 36.100
St.4
10 R 11 1 0.580 0.362 0.479 0.996 10.8 0.94 11.74 344 330.0 92,0 350 5.0 100 1.1 70 0.35 0.050 36.050 35.700
APPENDIX
Pump
11 South St. 1 0.670 0.330 0.494 3.810 10.4 8.05 18.45 325 1240.0 345.0 700 1.67 400 1.0 25 0.42 0.234 34.585 34.165
house
Thus for lines 1, 3, 6 and 9, the invert elevations are respectively 37.400, 36.700, 38.000 and 36.000.
In case a manhole having more than one inlet, the drop in the manhole is considered with respect to
the lowest invert level of the inlets to fix the invert level of the outlet.
Column 23 = Col.22 - Col.20 = invert elevation at the lower end of the line.
Figure A3.1-2
INTENSITY " i"

30 35 40 45 50 60
(mm / hr)
DURATION t "
44 36 28.5 22.5 13.5 9.75
(minutes)
100
90
80
70
E 60
E \ ^ S T O R f Yl ONCE AYE AR
50
Ô
40
>-
CO 30
20
<
cr
10
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910 20 30 40 50 607080
DURATION t " (MINUTES)
Figure A3.1-3
A - 54
Part A : Engineering APPENDIX
100
90
80 r
\
70
60
\ (1 YEEAR STOF*M)
w 50
z
40
30

-----1 i
20
<
a;
10
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180
DURATION " t " (MINUTES)
Figure A3.1-4
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180
DURATION " t " (MINUTES)
Figure A3.1-5 After horner area rectangle
10 30 50 70 90 110 130 150 170
DURATION T (MINUTES)
Figure A3.1-6
A - 55
APPENDIX A 3.2 A
NOMOGRAM FOR MANNINGS FORMULA FOR GRAVITY SEWERS FLOWING FULL AND
MANNINGS N VALUE OF 0.013.
(For discharges from 100 Ipm to 100000 Ipm)
For other values of Mannings n, the velocity and discharge will be inversely proportional.
Example-Find the discharge and velocity of a sewer flowing full of diameter 200 mm, slope of 1 in 200
and a Mannings n value of 0.0125.
Answer-From the nomogram, V = 0.75 m/s and discharge = 1,300 lpm. For n value of 0.0125,
V = 0.75 x 0.013/0.0125 = 0.78 m/s & discharge = 1,300 x 0.013/0.0125 = 1,352 lpm
Figure A3.2A-1
Source-"Data Matrix for Public Health Engineers, TWAD Board, 1991
A - 56
APPENDIX A 3.2 B
NOMOGRAM FOR MANNINGS FORMULA FOR GRAVITY SEWERS FLOWING FULL AND
MANNINGS N VALUE OF 0.013
(For discharges from 1000 Ipm to 1000000 Ipm)
For other values of Mannings n the velocity and discharge will be inversely proportional.
Example-Find the discharge and velocity of a sewer flowing full of diameter 900 mm, slope of 1 in
1,000 and a Mannings n value of 0.012.
Answer-From the nomogram, V = 0.90 m/s and discharge = 35,000 lpm. For n value of 0.0125,
V = 0.90 x 0.013/0.0125 = 0.94 m/s & discharge = 35,000 x 0.013/0.0125 = 36,400 lpm
10000 6000
FIG 7 NOMOGRAM CHART FOR MANNINGS FORMULA
Figure A3.2B-1
Source-Data Matrix for Public Health Engineers, TWAD Board, 1991
A - 57
APPENDIX A 3.3
MS EXCEL FOR MANNING FORMULA FOR CIRCULAR GRAVITY PIPES FLOWING FULL
No A B C
1 Appendix 3.3
2 MS Excel For Manning Formula for Circular Gravity Pipes Flowing Full
3 Given diameter and slope of sewer, find discharge and velocity
4 This is left blank for the designer to enter his design notes
7 diameter, mm 200 Enter by Designer
8 slope 1 in 250 Enter by Designer
9 value of Mannings n 0.013 Enter from Table 3.11
10 diameter power 0.67 34.81 P0WER(B7,0.67)
11 slope power 0.5 0.06 P0W ER((1/B8),0.5)
12 Velocity, m/sec 0.67 (1/B9)*(3.968/1000)*B10*B11
13 diameter power 2.67 1392355 P0WER(B7,2.67)
14 Flow rate l/s 2 1.1 (1/B9)*(3.118/1000000)*B13*B11
15 Flow in MLD 1.82 B14*3600*24/1000000
A - 58
APPENDIX A 3.4 A
COMPUTATIONS OF DIAMETER, SLOPES, DISCHARGES IN
GRAVITY SEWERS BY USING APPENDIX A 3.3
1 Given a sewer diameter, slope & depth of flow, find velocity and discharge
Diameter of sewer (D) = 200 mm

Depth of flow (d) = 160 mm
Sewer Material: Cement concrete pipe in "Good condition (with collar joints)
Slope of the sewer line = 1 in 250
Mannings co-efficient is uniform across sewer section
Use Manning value as 0.013 from Table 3.11
From Appendix A 3.2 A and A 3.2 B,
Velocity is 0.67 m/s and Discharge is 1260 lpm
Ratio of d/D is 160 / 200 = 0.8
Ratio of v/V from Table 3.12 is 1.14
Hence velocity is = 0.67 x 1.14 = 0.76 m/s
Ratio of q/Q from Table 3.12 is 0.968
Hence discharge is = 1260 x 0.968 = 1220 lpm
2 Given a sewer diameter, slope & discharge needed, find depth of flow
Diameter of sewer (D) = 200 mm

Discharge required = 1260 lpm
Slope of the sewer line = 1 in 250
Mannings co-efficient is uniform across sewer section
Use Manning value as 0.013 from Table 3.11
From Appendix A 3.2 A and A 3.2 B,
Velocity is 0.67 m/s and Discharge is 21.1 lps
Ratio of discharge is = 21.1 / 21.4 = 0.968
Corresponding ratio from Table 3.12 is d/D is 0.8
Hence, depth of flow is = 200 x 0.8 = 160 mm
3 Given discharge needed and available slope, find the diameter
Discharge needed = 612 lpm

Available slope of the sewer line = 1 in 180
d/D ratio should not exceed 0.8
From Table 3.12, for d/D of 0.8, q/Q is 0.968
Discharge at full depth is = 612 / 0.968 = 632 lpm
From Appendix A 3.4 A, by entering the discharge and slope
Required diameter is 143 mm & velocity is 0.63 m/s as below
Use nearest higher diameter
A - 59
APPENDIX A 3.4 B
MS EXCEL FOR MANNING FORMULA FOR
CIRCULAR GRAVITY PIPES FLOWING FULL
No A B C
1 Appendix 3.3
2 MS Excel For Manning Formula for Circular Gravity Pipes Flowing Full
3 Given discharge and slope of sewer, find diameter and velocity
7 Discharge, l/s 1 0 .2 0 Enter by Designer
9 slope power 0.5 0.07 POWER((1/B8), 0.5)
10 value of Mannings n 0.013 Enter from Table 3.11
11 diameter power 2.67 570563 B7*B10/(3.118/1000000)/B9
12 diameter, mm 143 POWER(B11,(1/2.67)
13 diameter power 0.67 27.83 P0WER(B12,0.67)
14 velocity m/s 0.63 P0WER(B12,0.67)
A - 60
APPENDIX A 3.5 A
NOMOGRAM FOR HAZEN W ILLIAMS FORMULA FOR MAINS
FLOWING FULL AND C VALUE OF 100
(For discharges from 100 to 100000 Ipm)
For other values of C, the velocity and discharge will be directly proportional.
Example-Find the discharge and velocity of a sewer of diameter 300 mm flowing full slope of 1 in
100 and a Hazen Williams C value of 130
Answer-From the nomogram, V = 0.75 m/s and discharge = 5,700 lpm. For C value of 130,
V = 0.75 x 130 / 100 = 0.98 m/s & discharge = 5,700 x 130 / 100 = 7,400 lpm
Figure A3.5A-1
Source-Data Matrix for Public Health Engineers, TWAD Board, 1991
A - 61
APPENDIX A 3.5 B
NOMOGRAM FOR HAZEN WILLIAMS FORMULA FOR MAINS
FLOWING FULL AND C VALUE OF 100
(For discharges from 1000 to 1000000 lpm)
For other values of C the velocity and discharge will increase pro rata.
Example-Find the discharge and velocity of a sewer flowing full of diameter 1,200 mm, slope of 1 in
1,000 and a Hazen Williams C value of 130
Answer-From the nomogram, V = 0.95 m/s and discharge = 63,000 lpm. For C value of 130,
V = 0.95 x 130 / 100 = 1.24 m/s & discharge = 63,000 x 130 / 100 = 81,900 lpm
Figure A3.5B-1
Source-"Data Matrix for Public Health Engineers, TWAD Board, 1991
A - 62
APPENDIX A 3.6
HAZEN W ILLIAMS FORMULA FOR CIRCULAR SEWERS
FLOWING UNDER PRESSURE
No A B C
1 Appendix 3.6
2 Hazen Williams Formula for Circular Sewers Flowing Under Pressure
3 Given diameter and slope, find velocity and flow rate
7 diameter, mm 300 Enter by Designer
9 Hazen Williams C 140 Enter from Table 3.11
10 diameter power 0.63 36.36 POWER(B7,0.63)
11 diameter power 2.63 3272118 POWER(B7,2.63)
12 Slope power 0.54 0.056 P0WER((1/B8),0.54)
13 Velocity m/s 1.295 (4.567/1000)*B9*B10*B12
14 Discharge cum / day 7913 (3.1/10000)*B11*B12*B9
15 Discharge in MLD 7.91 B14/1000
16
17 Given flow rate and slope of sewer, find diameter and velocity
18 Discharge cum / day 7913 Enter by Designer
19 Slope 1 in 210 Enter by Designer
20 Slope power 0.54 0.056 P0WER(1/B19,0.54)
21 Hazen Williams C 140 Enter by Designer
22 diameter power 2.63 3272275 B18/(3.1/10000)/B20/B21
23 diameter, mm 300 P0WER(B22,(1/2.63))
24 diameter power 0.63 36 Power(B23,0.63)
25 velocity, m/s 1.295 (4.567/1000)*B20*B21*B24
A - 63
APPENDIX A 3.7
DESIGN OF SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM
1 PROBLEM
Design a system of sanitary sewers for the given area shown in the Figure A3.7-1 with the following
details:
1. Population Density 300 persons/hect.

2. Water Supply 250 lpd/head (ultimate).
3. Maximum rate of infiltration 2 0 ,0 0 0 lpd/hect.
4. Minimum depth of cover to be provided over the crown of the sewer - 1 m
5. Minimum velocity in sewer at peak flow - 0.6mps

6 . Maximum velocity in sewer - 2.0 mps
7. Minimum size of the sewer - 150 mm
8 . Waste water reaching sewers - 90% of W/S
9. Peak flow - 3.5 * Ave. flow
Figure A3.7-1
A - 64
2 SOLUTION
1. Draw a line to represent the proposed sewer in each street or valley to be served. Near the line
indicate by an arrow the direction in which sewage is to flow.
2. Locate the manhole, giving each an identification number.
3. Sketch the limits of the service areas for each lateral.
4. Measure the areas (ha) of the several service areas.
5. Prepare a table as shown in Table A3.7-1 with the columns for the different steps in computation
and a line for each section of sewer between manholes.
Columns 1-6 for the line manhole, location of the manhole, manhole numbers, ground level at start
ing manhole and length of line between the manholes.
Columns 7-8 the corresponding area for the next street of sewer and in Col.8 the sum of the areas
are entered.
Column 9 the population served by each corresponding line is entered.
Column 10 shows the sewage flow (mld) through each line. The sewage flow is assumed as 90% of
the per capita water supply.
Column 11 shows the ground water infiltration for each area = 20,000 * 10"6 x Col.8 .
Column 12 gives the peak flow i.e. Col.10 * 3 + Col.11.
Column 13 gives the peak flow in lps.
Column 14-15 indicate the diameter and slope of the pipes determined from the Mannings chart.
Columns 16-17 indicate the discharge through pipe flowing full and the actual discharge through the
pipes i.e. as Col. 13.
Column 18 also determined from the Mannings chart when pipe following full.
Column 19 calculated from the hydraulic elements curve for the circular pipes.
Column 20 gives Col.6 x Col.15.
Columns 21-22 invert levels of the lines are calculated.
A - 65
Table A3.7-1 Design of a sewer system
Ground
Groun
Len Area Served Sewage water Diame Discharge Velocity Total Invert Elevation
Manhole d level Peak flow
gth (ha) flow infiltrati ter lps mps fall m
Locati at Populati
Line on Slope
on start on
V
manh Incre Q Q V Upper Lower
From To m Total mid mid mid lps mm Actu m
ole ment Full Actual Full end end
al
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 Street R.8.5 R.8.4 38.275 120 0.80 0.80 240 0.054 0.016 0.205 2.37 150 0.008 14 2.37 0.75 0.57* 0.96 37.125 36.165
2 Street R.8.4 R.8.3 37.960 116 1.20 2.00 600 0.135 0.040 0.512 5.92 150 0.008 14 5.92 0.75 0.72 0.93 36.135** 35.205
3 Street R.8.3 R.8.2 36.873 114 1.40 3.40 1020 0.230 0.068 0.873 10.10 150 0.008 14 10.10 0.75 0.82 0.91 35.175 34.265
4 Street R.8.2 R.8.1 36.895 116 0.90 4.30 1290 0.290 0.066 1.10 12.73 150 0.008 14 12.73 0.75 0.86 0.93 34.235 33.305
5 Street R.8.1 8 36.420 75 0.70 5.0 1500 0.34 0.10 1.29 14.92 200 0.005 24 14.92 0.70 0.74 0.38 34.275 33.895
6 Street 8 7 36.117 41 14.5 19.5 5850 1.32 0.39 5.01 57.96 300 0.005 70 57.96 1.0 1.13 0.21 33.845 33.635
7 Street 7 6 35.830 26 4.8 24.3 7300 1.64 0.48 6.22 71.96 350 0.005 100 71.96 1.2 1.32 0.13 33.605 33.475
Main
8 6 5 35.105 88 2.2 26.5 7950 1.80 0.53 6.83 79.02 350 0.005 100 79.02 1.2 1.32 0.44 33.445 33.005
St.
9 -do- 5 4 34.412 86 7.8 34.3 10300 2.31 0.68 8.76 101.35 400 0.0033 125 101.35 1.0 1.12 0.29 32.975 32.685
10 -do- 4 3 34.181 36 5.0 39.3 11800 2.65 0.70 10.05 116.28 400 0.0033 125 116.28 1.0 1.14 0.12 32.655 32.535
11 -do- 3 2 34.105 77 1.2 40.5 12150 2.73 0.80 10.35 119.75 400 0.0033 125 119.75 1.0 1.14 0.26 32.505 32.245
12 -do- 2 1 34.905 117 5.0 45.5 13650 3.07 3.91 11.65 134.79 450 0.0033 160 134.79 1.0 1.12 0.39 32.208 31.811
13 -do- 1 0 33.250 41 1.7 47.2 14200 3.2 0.94 12.14 140.46 450 0.0033 160 140.46 1.0 1.12 0.14 31.788 31.641
* Since velocity is less than 0.6mps, flushing once a day is necessary; ** A minimum level difference of 30 mm is provided between incoming
and outgoing sewers to provide necessary slope in the manhole.
A - 66
APPENDIX A 3.8
ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES FOR STRUCTURAL DESIGN OF
BURIED CONDUITS
General assumptions
The general assumptions relating to the characteristics of soil and other factors for the examples
are given below:
i) Saturated density of fill(w)= 2,000 kg/m3
ii) Kp = Kp = 0.130, ordinary maximum tor clay (thoroughly wet)
iii) rsd for rigid conduit on ordinary bedding= 0.7 for positive projection and -0.3 for negative
projection
iv) Projection ratio = 1
v) Concentrated surcharge corresponding to wheel load for Class AA wheel loading=6.25T
vi) Impact factor = 1.5
vii) Factor of Safety for safe supporting strength = 1.1
viii) The design also provides for accidental surcharge of drains and accounts for a water load of
75% as per standard practice, based on the assumption that the sewage flow is 3/4 full.
Determination of fill loads over pipes
EXAMPLE I
1 PROBLEM
Determine the fill load on a 1,200 mm dia. NP2 Class concrete pipe installed in a trench of width of
2.3 m and depth of 4.00 m.
2 SOLUTION
Pipe thickness t = 65mm for D of 1,200mm

Bc = D + 2t = 12,00
+ 130 = 1,330mm
= 1.33m
Bd = 2.3m
H = 4.00 - 1.33 = 2.67 m
H/ Bd = ( 2.67 / 2.3 ) = 1.16
Bd is < 2Bc Hence trench formula is applicable.
Cd = 0.9965 or 1.00 (from Table3.19) for ordinary maximum for clay.
From Equation (3.29)
Wc = Cd w Bd2 = 1.00 x 2,000 x 2.32 = 10,580 kg/m
A - 67
EXAMPLE II
1 PROBLEM
Determine the fill load on 900mm dia NP2 Class concrete pipe installed in a trench of width 2.1 m
and depth 6 .0 m.
2 SOLUTION
Pipe thickness t 50mm for D of 900mrn

Bc = D + 2t = 900 + 100 = 1,000mm =1m
w = 2 ,0 0 0 kg/m 2
H = 6.0 - 1.0 = 5.0m
Bd = 2.1m
(H / Bd) = (5.0 / 2.1) = 2.38
2B c < Bd. < 3B c Hence either the trench or embankment formula can be used,1
From Table 3.19
Cd = 1.77188 or say 1.8
From Equation (3.29)
Wc = Cd w Bd2 = 1.8 x 2,000 x 2.1 2 = 15,876 kg/m or say 16,000 kg/m.
EXAMPLE III
1 PROBLEM
Determine the fill load on a 1,200mm dia NP2 Class concrete pipe installed as a positive projecting
conduit under a fill of 7 m height above the top of pipe. The pipe wall thickness is 65mm and the fill
weight 2 ,0 0 0 kg/m3.
2 SOLUTION
Assume rsd = 0.7 and p = 1.0

H=7m
B = 1,200 + 130 = 1,330mm = 1.33m
H/B c = 7/1.33 = 5.26
rsd x p = 0.7 x 1 = 0.7
Cc = 9 (from Figure 3.34)
Using Equation (3.25)
Wc = Cc w Bc2 = 9 x 2,000 x 1.332 = 31,850 kg/m
EXAMPLE IV
1 PROBLEM
Determine the fill load on a 1,200mm dia NP2 Class pipe installed as a negative projection conduit in
a trench the depth of which is such that the top of the pipe is 2 m below the surface of natural ground
in which the trench is dug. The height of the fill over the top of the pipe is 10m.
A - 68
2 SOLUTION
Assume the width of the trench as 2 m and fill weight, w = 2,000 kg/m3
Assume rsd = - 0.3 and p = 1.0
H = 10m, Bd = 2.00m H/Bd = 10/2 = 5.00
For values of p = 1.0 rsd = - 0.3 and H/Bd = 5.00
Cn = 3.2 (from Figure 3.36)
Wc = Cn w Bd2 = 3.2 x 2,000 x 2.02 = 25,600 kg/m
EXAMPLE V
1 PROBLEM
Determine the load on 1,500mm dia conduit in tunnel condition 15 m deep in a soil of silty sand.
2 SOLUTION
The maximum width of excavation (Bt) may be assumed as 1,950mm; and the cohesion coefficient
(C) of the soil as 500 kg/m2
Kp = 0.15 and w = 1,800 kg/m3

H =15 m; Bt = 1.95 m
H/Bt = 15/1.95 = 7.7
Ct = 3.00 (from Figure 3.42)
Wt = Ct. Bt.(w Bt - 2C) = 3.00 x1.95 (1,800 x 1.95 - 2 x 500)
= 3.00 x 1.95 x 2,510 = 14,680 kg/m
EXAMPLE VI
1 PROBLEM
Determine the load on a 600 mm dia NP2 Class pipe (t = 40 mm) under 1 m cover caused by 6.25
Tonnes Wheel load applied directly above the centre of pipe.
2 SOLUTION
L = 1 m (since standard length of conduit 1 m)

H = 1m
Bc = 600+80 = 680 mm = 0.68 m
(L/2H) = (1.0/2x 1) = 0.50
(Bc /2H) = (0.68/2 x 1) = 0.34
From Table 3.21 for values of (L/2H) = 0.50
And (Bc /2H) = 0.34
C c = 0.248
s
Wsc = Cs ( PF / L ) = (0.248 x 6250 x 1.5/1.0) = 2,325 kg/m
A - 69
EXAMPLE VII
1 PROBLEM
Determine the load on a 1,200 mm dia concrete pipe under 2 m of cover resulting from a broad gauge
railway track loading;
2 SOLUTION
Assumed thickness of pipe = 100 mm

Axle load P = 22.5 tonnes
Impact factor F = 1.75
Length of sleeper 2A = D = 2.7 m
Assume 4 axles spaced 1.84 m on the locomotive (2B)
M = 4 x 2B = 4 x 1.84 = 7.36 m; H = 2 m
Weight of track structure =wt = 0.3 T/m
Using equation (3.37)
Bc = 1,200 + 200 = 1,400mm = 1.4 m
From Table 3.21

Influence Coefficient Cs = 0.652
W = 4 Cs U Bc = 4 x 0.652 x 8.036 x 1 .4 = 29.34 tonnes/m = 29,340 kg/m
(Since it has been given that it is a broad gauge track, the formula W = 32.14 Cs Bc, could be used
directly without calculating the value of U).
Using the formula W = 32.14 Cs Bc
W = 32.14 x 0.652 x 1 .4 = 29.337 t/m. or 29,337 kg/m
EXAMPLE VIII
1 PROBLEM
Design the structural requirement tor a 900mm dia. NP3 class sewer pipe which is to be laid in 6m
deep trench of 2.0 m width assuming that the total vertical load will account tor concentrated sur
charge of 6.25 T applied at the centre of the pipe. The water load should also be considered.
A - 70
2 SOLUTION
The type of bedding for the purpose of this example may be assumed as Ab class with load factor
of 2.8.
Bc = 900 + 2 x 5 0 = 1,000

mm = 1.0 m
H=6- 1=5m
Bd = 2.0
H/Bd = 5/2.0 = 2.50
Cd = 1.764 (from table 3.13 for saturated top soil)
Using equation (3.29) ........ Wc = Cd w Bd2
Wc = 1.764 x 2,000 x 22 = 14,110 kg/m.
L = 1m, H = 5m
and
From Table 3.21 C s = 0.019

Wsc = Co (PF/L) = (0.019 x 6,250 x 1.5) / 1 = 178 kg/m
Water Load Ww = x x x x 1,000 x - A l l kg I m

w 7 10 10 4 100
Wtt = W c + W sc + W W= 14,110
+ 178 + 471 = 14,759
or say
J 14,800
kg/m

Safe supporting strength of 900 mm NP2 pipe with class Ab bedding = [(3,750 x 2.8) / 1.5] = 7,000
kgs/m which is less than the total load on the pipe i.e. 14,800 kgs/m.
Safe supporting strength of 900 mm NP3 pipe with class Ab bedding = [(10,140 x 2.8) / 1.5] =
18,928 kgs/m. which is more than the total load on the pipe i.e. 14,800 kgs/m.
Design of anti flotation blocks
EXAMPLE IX
1 PROBLEM
A RCC pipeline of internal dia 2,000mm and barrel thickness of 115mm is to be laid below Ground
level. Each pipe is 2.5 metre long and weighs 2 Tonnes. The minimum overburden required to pre
vent the pipe from upliftment is to be determined. Where there is no over-burden the size of RCC of
antiflotation block required to prevent it from flotation is to be determined.
A - 71
2 SOLUTION
Depth of cover to prevent flotation of an em pty pipeline.
W here,
Hmin : Minimum depth of fill required to prevent flotation of em pty pipe
Bc : O.D. of pipe, m eters
Ws : Density of (soil) fill material = 1,800 kg/m3
Wo : Density of water = 1,000 kg/m3
To sh o w that the pipe g ets lifted up if there is no over burden
W eight of em pty pipe W c = 2 ,0 0 0 kg/metre
Bc = 2 .0 0 + 0 .2 3 = 2 .2 3 metre (O.D. of pipe)
W hen there is no over burden w eight of water
displaced = ( n / 4 ) Bc2 w o
(n / 4) (2.23)2 1 ,0 00 = 3 ,9 1 0 kg or 3.91 ton nes
S in ce the w eight of Empty pipe (2 ton nes) is le ss than the upward w eight of water (3.91 ton nes) the
pipe will float.
Depth of minimum overburden required to prevent flotation with a factor of safety 1.2
H min Bcc (ws - wo) + W cc = ( n / 4 ) * Bc2
c w oo
Hmin * 2 .2 3 (1.8 - 1.00) + 2 = [(n/ 4)] * 2 .2 3 2 * 1 * (Factor of safety of 1.2)
Hmin = 1 5 m etres
H en ce it is desirable to provide a cover of 1.5 m etres to prevent flotation of pipeline.
W here it is not p ossib le to provide the a b o v e minimum over burden anti flotation blocks can b e pro
vided for e a c h pipe to prevent flotation of pipeline.
T he Anchoring force required to be created is equal to the 1st term of the Equation (3.32).
H min B c (w s - w o )
H min = 1.5m with a factor of safetyJ of 1.2
B c = 2.23m
w s = 1,800 kg/m3
w o = 1,000 kg/m3
1.5 x 2 .2 3 x (1.8 - 1.00) = 2 ,6 8 0 kg/metre length of pipe
Anchoring force required for e a c h pipe of 2.5 metre long
= 2 .6 8 x 2.5 = 6 .7 ton n es per pipe
A - 72
Volum e of concrete to be provided;

Su b m erged w eight of concrete: (2,400 - 1,000) = 1,400 kg/m 3 or 1.4 to n n es/m 3
Volum e = (6.7 / 1.4) = 4 .7 8 m3
Provide anti flotation block of size 2 .8 5 * 1.5 * 1.20 m for e a ch pipe of 2 .5 m long (Figure A3.8-1).
Figure A3.8.1 Anti Floatation Blocks
A - 73
APPENDIX A 3.9
THREE EDGE BEARING TESTS FOR PIPE STRENGTH
The load which the pipe must withstand without failure is termed three-edge bearing strength. For
non reinforced concrete pipes, the point of load at which the pipe cracks and fails is the termination
of a three-edge bearing test.
For reinforced concrete pipes, these specifications provide two criteria for passing the three-edge
bearing test; first, there is an intermediate load based on the appearance of a crack 0.25 mm wide
and 0.3 m long. The final requirement for reinforced pipe is the ultimate three-edge bearing strength
at the final failure of the pipe where no further load increase can be supported.
In conducting this test, the pipe is placed horizontally on two parallel wooden rails resting on 15cm *
15cm bearing block or other solid support that extends the length of the pipe. An upper bearing block
is placed on the top of the pipe. Next, a rigid I-beam or other structural member is placed on the upper
bearing block to apply the load to the block.
Table A3.9-1 Three edge bearing strengths of concrete pipes are given below
Load to produce 0.25 crack Ultimate load

(kg/liner meter) (kg/liner meter)
Dia of Concrete Concrete
pipe mm
NP2 P! P2& P3 n p 3 np4 NPi NP2 Pi P2& P3 n p 3 np4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
80 1,040 - - - 1,560 - -
100 1,040 - - 1,560 1,560 - -
125 - - - - - - -
150 1,040 - - 1,560 1,560 - -
200 - - - - - - -
250 1,140 - - 1,670 1,710 - -
300 1,200 - - 1,790 1,800 - -
350 1,260 3,040 - 1,880 1,890 4,363 -
400 1,360 3,460 3,460 2,020 2,040 5,190 5,190

450 1,480 3,730 - 2,220 2,220 5,640 -
500 1,660 4,160 4,160 - 2,490 6,240 6,240

600 1,900 4,720 4,720 - 2,850 7,980 7,980
700 2,100 5,320 5,120 - 3,150 7,980 7,980
800 2,300 6,060 6,060 - 3,430 9,090 9,090
900 2,500 6,760 6,760 - 3,750 10,140 10,140
1,000 2,680 7,400 7,400 - 4,020 11,100 11,100
1,100 2,780 8,200 8,200 - 4,170 12,300 12,300
1,200 2,880 9,000 9,000 - 4,320 13,500 13,500
1,400 2,900 - 10,610 - 4,470 - 17,950
1,600 2,980 - 12,800 - 4,470 - 18,300
1,800 2,980 - 13,800 - 4,470 - 20,700
A - 74
APPENDIX A 3-10
RELATIVE LIMITATIONS ON USE OF PIPE MATERIALS (IN ALPHABETICAL ORDER)
IN SPECIFIC LOCATIONS
(Pipe materials listed in alphabetical order)
Asbestos Cement (AC) Pipes
Not suitable for high sulphate levels in sewage / soil water, unless good lining such
as HDPE/GRP/PVC/PE/CM with sulphate resistant cement lining is provided or pipe
AC-1
manufactured with sulphate resistant cement or Alumina cement. The quality of the
lining shall be ensured by the competent authority.
Not in aggressive soils/groundwater or tidal zone unless sulphate resistant cement or

AC-2
high alumina cement is used in manufacture.
AC-3 Not in locations where live load from vehicular traffic will occur on the laid pipeline
Cast Iron or Ductile Iron (CIDI) Pipes
CIDI-1 Never to be used near buried electricity transmission high tension cables
Wherever used above ground supports at each pipe length shall be ensured without
CIDI-2
any subsidence.
Pipes with external synthetic coatings not to be used in marine coastal environments to
CIDI-3
prevent leaching of constituent chemicals into the environment
Glass Fiber Reinforced (GRP) Pipes
GRP - 1 Not in area where future works may affect the pipe side support.
Not in ground contaminated or possibly contaminated by certain chemicals in

GRP - 2
concentrations deleterious to the resin of the pipe.
Do not use pipes/couplings with chips, cracks, crazing, layer delamination or exposed
GRP - 3
fibres or ends of pipes not sealed with resin
GRP - 4 Do not use pipe and couplings, stored unprotected from sunlight for more than 9
months.
GRP - 5 Do not use in ground conditions having low stiffness, e.g. tidal zone.
GRP - 6 Not in location subjected to vehicular load and has insufficient cover.
Not in areas subject to excavations by other service providers within 2m radial distance
GRP - 7
of pipeline.
GRP - 8 Not in ground subject to differential settlement or extreme movement
GRP - 9 Not in ground offering low side support strength to the pipe.
Do not use when control of construction practices is not adequate to ensure quality of
GRP - 10
embedment for flexible pipes.
A - 75
Not suitable for uncertainties in geotechnical analysis to determine if flexible pipe struc
GRP - 11
turally suitable
Uplift precaution in locations where high groundwater table and empty pipe may be
GRP - 12
encountered
Mild Steel (MS) Pipes
MS - 1 Never to be used near electricity transmission cables
Never to be used below ground unless proper protection against corrosion from soil
MS - 2
and soil water is ensured
Can be considered with appropriate lining and protection for gravity flow under
MS - 3 exceptional circumstances. The quality of the lining shall be ensured by the competent
authority.
Choice of spiral welded Vs or horizontal welded pipes shall be evaluated with respect
MS - 4
to overburden
Reinforced Cement Concrete (RCC) Pipes
Not suitable for high sulphate levels in sewage / soil water, unless good lining such
as HDPE/GRP/PVC/PE/CM with sulphate resistant cement lining is provided or pipe
RCC - 1 manufactured with sulphate resistant cement or Alumina cement. The quality of the
lining shall be ensured by the competent authority.
Not in aggressive soils/groundwater or tidal zone unless sulphate resistant cement or
RCC - 2
high alumina cement is used in manufacture.
Stoneware Pipes with hemp yarn and cement mortar (SWCM) packing joints
SWCM - 1 Not in unstable ground, i.e. refilled ground, tidal zone.
SWCM - 2 Not suitable for above ground installation.
SWCM - 2 Not in the vicinity of trees with aggressive root systems.
SWCM - 4 Not to be used for crossing beneath water courses.
Stoneware Pipes with O ring (SQOR) joints
SWOR - 1 Not in unstable ground, i.e. refilled ground, tidal zone.
SWOR - 2 Not suitable for above ground installation.
SWOR - c Not to be used for crossing beneath water courses.

Synthetic Pipes like Profile Wall, Double walled corrugated, PE, Solid Wall,
HDPE, UPVC (SP) Pipes
SP - 1 Not in location subjected to vehicular load and has insufficient cover.
Not in areas subjected to third party interference, e.g. excavations within 2m of

SP - 2
pipeline by other parties.
SP - 3 Not in ground offering low side support strength to the pipe
A - 76
SP - 4 Not in ground which allows migration of pipe embedment material into it.
SP - 5 Not in ground contaminated with deleterious chemicals
SP - 6 Not suitable for above ground installation
SP - 7 Not suitable as reticulations systems except for special applications
Note: Wherever special circumstances are encountered the above limitations can be overcome by
appropriate precautions with the documented approval of the competent authority
A - 77
APPENDIX A 4.1
COMPUTATION OF FRICTION FACTOR IN PUMPING MAINS
1 B C D
2 A pp e n d ix A 4-1
3 Friction fa c to r fo r Fittings in Pressure M ains
4 G iven the type and num bers o f fittings, find the total friction factor
5 T h is is left blank fo r the d esigne r to enter his design notes
6 N um b er o f S udden contractions E nter by D esigner 2
7 Friction F actor fo r each From T able 4.2 0.5
8 Friction fa c to r fo r all D 6*D 7 1
9 E ntrance shape w ell rounded E nter by D esigner 1
11 Friction fa c to r fo r all D 9*D 10 0.5
12 E lbow 90 degrees E nter by D esigner 4
13 Friction F actor fo r each From T able 4.2 1
14 Friction fa c to r fo r all D 12*D 13 4
17 Friction facto r fo r all D 15*D 16 3
21 T ee 90 degrees E nter by D esigner 4
24 T ee in straight pipe E nter by D esigner 1
26 Friction facto r fo r all D 24*D 25 0.3
27 G ate valve open E nter by D esigner 4
A - 78
28 Friction Factor for each From Table 4.2 0.4
29 Friction factor for all D27*D28 1.6
30 Valve with reducer and increaser Enter by D esigner 3
33 Globe valve Enter by D esigner 4
34 Friction Factor for each From Table 4.2 10
35 Friction factor for all D33*D34 40
36 Angle Enter by D esigner 2
39 Swing check Enter by D esigner 1
42 Venturi meter Enter by D esigner 1
45 Orifice Enter by D esigner 1
48 Total friction factor D 8+D 11+D 14+D 17+D 20+D 23+D 26+D 29+D 32+ 72.7
D 35+D 38+D 41+D 44+D 47
A - 79
APPENDIX A 4.2
CALCULATION OF KW NEEDED FOR PUMPING
Given
Low sewage level = 3.5 m

Delivery level = 32.5 m
Velocity = 0.883 m/s
Discharge = 7,913 cum / day
Slope = 210
Length of pumping main = 4,200 m
Top of goose neck before delivery = 34.0 m
Friction factor due to fittings as in Appendix 4-1
Type of pump is submersible
Efficiency assumed = 0.65
Safety factor for estimation =1 / 0.9
Answer
Goose neck is treated as well rounded entrance = factor is 1

Hence friction loss due to fittings is = 70 + 2 = 72
Discharge = 7,913 * 1,000 / 24 / 3,600 = 91.6 lps
Velocity head = 0.883 * 0.883 / 2 / 9.81 = 0.04
Loss of head in fittings = 0.04 x 72 = 2.87 m
Top elevation of goose neck at delivery = 34.0 m
Add factor of safety against cavitation = 1m
Static lift = (34+1) - 3.5 = 31.5 m
Friction loss = 4,200 / 210 = 20 m
Total system head = 2.87 + 31.5 + 20 = 54.37 m
Pump efficiency = 0.65
Actual kW needed = 91.6 * 54.37 / 100.5/ 0.65 / 0.9 = 85 kW
A - 80
APPENDIX A 4.3
EFFECTS OF SILTING AND EROSION SEWAGE PUMPING MAIN PERFORMANCE
The following is an extract from the Master Plan for Water and Sewerage by the WHO and
UNDP for the Chennai Metropolitan Area prepared dated 1977 and which was the basis for the
countrys first birth of an exclusive Water Supply and Sewerage Board at Chennai.
Five numbers of differently aged sewage pumping mains of Chennai sewerage system were
selected and the hydraulics were evaluated using Rhodamine B Fluorescent tracer dyes
injected into the pump deliveries and the concentrations were measured with a fluorometer
at the start and discharge of the pumping mains and related to the measured flows, diameter
and length of the pipe lines which were all Cast Iron mains with spigot socket lead joints. The
study was aimed to establish the velocity profiles, siltation in the pumping mains and the
resulting friction co-efficient. All the pumping mains were low lift pumping stations and hence
the Mannings n was selected as the criteria of friction factor evaluation.
1 The Physical Setting and Methodology
The sandy soils in the area coupled with the local practice of scouring cooking pots with sand contribute
to the inordinate quantities of grit and silt found in Madras sewage. This phenomenon was recognized
by Mr. J. W. Madeley, and his investigations conducted in the early 1900s led to the construction of
degritting wells ahead of the major pump stations which however were mostly non-operational. As
part of the present investigations, tests were conducted at five of the pump stations. Static head and
friction losses were measured at several flows with dual pressure gauges immediately downstream
from the pump station manifold. Flows were measured by using a Turner fluorometer and standard
ized solutions of Rhodamine "B dye. The dye was fed at a constant rate into the pump bell mouth
by a calibrated peristaltic pump and samples were collected at a point far enough downstream from
the pump to ensure complete mixing. Flow rates were computed from the observed dilution of the
standard fluorescent dye solution.
The results of these tests are presented in Table A4.3-1. The measurements of flow, total head and
static head are given in columns (1) to (3). The dynamic head column (4) is the difference between the
total and static heads. Column (5) shows the calculated flow velocities. The "K value in column (6) is
equal to Ahd/Q2. The Mannings roughness coefficient, n, was calculated from the Manning equation:
Examination of Table A4.3-1 shows that the calculated K and n values change with flow and velocity.
Higher apparent n values are associated with lower velocities. Hydraulic theory dictates that there
are only two possible causes for this phenomenon, either the basic relation changes or the cross
sectional area of the pipe and / or the roughness of its interior change. Dr. Walter L Moore discussed
the first of these possibilities in his 1959 ASCE paper entitled "Relationships between pipe resistance
formulas, where it was shown that the friction loss constant K, does increase slightly as the flow is
reduced towards the point where the laminar flow regime begins. To account for this phenomenon,
Dr Moore developed a procedure for varying the exponent "m as a function of the Reynolds Number
and, thereby, allowing K to remain constant.
A - 81
Table A4.3-1 Force Main Friction Loss Analysis
Measured K Computed Roughness

Q flow AhT Ahs Ahd Velocity
Ahd/Q2 Coefficient
Force main Total Head meters Static Head metres Dynamic Head
m3/s m/s S2/m 5 n
of water of water metres of water
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (V)
Greams road 0.095 4.92 2.81 2.11 0.83/0.57 234 0.0104

625 m of 380 mm 0.136 7.03 2.81 4.22 1.19/0.82 228 0.0102
1,595 m of 460 mm 0.195 11.96 2.81 9.15 1.71/1.19 241 0.0106
New Purasawalkam 0.387 2.39 1.4 1.0 0.43/0.32 6.68 0.0154

3,017 m of 1,065 mm 0.449 2.67 1.4 1.27 0.50/0.38 6.30 0.0150
1,723 m of 1,200 mm 0.544 3.16 1.4 1.76 0.61/0.46 5.95 0.0145
0.66 7.38 1.4 5.98 0.74/0.57 13.7 0.0221
Langs Garden 0.0665 2.8 ml 2.8 0.91 633 0.0134

603 m of 305 mm 0.074 3.5 ml 3.5 1.01 639 0.0135
Chetput 0.0296 5.62 nil 5.62 0.58 6414 0.0205

990 m of 225 mm 0.043 5.975 nil 5.97 0.85 3229 0.0146
0.0296 5.45 nil 5.45 0.58 6220 0.0202
Law College 0.071 1.8 0.32 357 0.0240

2,107 m of 535 mm 0.085 3.2 0.38 443 0.0267
0.111 5.49 0.50 446 0.0268
0.15 4.45 0.67 198 0.0179
0.17 3.4 0.76 118 0.0138
0.202 4.45 0.90 109 0.0133
A - 82
Modified K values were computed using Dr Moores method in an attempt to explain the severe varia
tions noted in column (6), but this refinement did little to stabilise the K values, and therefore, the
variations must be attributed to the silt buildup changing the cross sectional are of the lines.
Data developed from the Law College tests were subjected to further analysis with the results shown
in Table A4.3-2. Assuming that the variations in K values were in fact due to the partial clogging of the
pipe, equivalent pipe sizes and areas were computed as in columns (4) and (5) of Table A4.3-2. The
% shown in column (6) represent the unclogged area of a 535 mm diameter pipe which would have a
cross sectional area equal to the equivalent pipe noted in column (5). Column (7) shows the apparent
velocity of the flow, noted in column (1), travelling through a clean, 535 mm diameter line.
Considering these measured and computed data the bottom 40 to 45 percent of the Law College
force main is evidently clogged with silt and remains so until the flow reaches an apparent velocity
of approximately 0.55 m/s. at velocities greater than 0.6 m/s scouring begins to take place, and the
pipe is essentially cleaned out when the apparent velocity exceeds 0.7 m/s. This phenomenon is
illustrated graphically in Figure A4.3-1 is the measured flow versus head loss for the 535 mm force
main is plotted.
Table A4.3-2 Analysis of Law College Force Main Losses.
E quivalent pipe
Q h k size
E quivalent pipe
area
E quivalent portion
o f unclogged pipe
A pparent
V elocity
(for n = 0.0135)
m 3/s m mm sqm % m /s
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

0.071 1.8 357 430 0.145 65 0.32
0.085 3.2 443 413 0.134 60 0.38
0.111 5.49 445 412 0.134 60 0.50
0.15 4.45 198 480 0.181 81 0.67
0.17 3.4 118 529 0.220 98 0.76
0.202 4.45 109 537 0.226 101 0.90
Four conclusions can be drawn from the results of the force main tests.
Firstly, the clogging of force mains with silt is a significant problem, and the current degritting
methods are not effective. The Law College force main is not an exception because equally large
concentrations of grit were observed in the flow of all force mains tested. Clogging takes place
rapidly because the 40 percent reduction in the cross section of the Law College force main
occurred within a period of twelve hours.
Secondly, no special tools or equipment are required to remove silt from a force main in as much
as subjecting the line to velocities of greater than 0.8 m/s appears to remove essentially all the
accumulations.
A - 83
8.0
7.0
6.0
MEASURED SYSTEM HEAD CURVE
FOR LAW COLLEGE FORCE MAIN
___ Q v s A h . FOR CLEAN 535mm

DIAMETER (21 inch) ATn=0.0135
-------- ~______ I_______ |_______ |_______ I_______ I_______ |_______ |_________

0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2
FLOW (m5/se c)
Figure A4.3-1 Measured Flow vs. head in the Law College Sewage Pumping Station
Thirdly, no economy in power cost is gained by designing the large force mains to operate at low
velocities unless much more effective grit removal is practiced. Larger lines will fill; up with silt until
a scour velocity is reached and then produce the friction losses commensurate with the smaller
equivalent pipe.
Fourthly, force mains which have been operated at reasonably high velocities exhibit a friction loss
coefficient "n when clean similar to that of smooth wrought iron pipe. Evidently, the larger quantities
of grit transported through these lines has polished their interiors. In fact Greams road force main
was apparently so thoroughly polished that it responded hydraulically like a smooth brass or glass
pipeline. It was therefore concluded that a friction loss co-efficient of 0.0125 is more representative of
the Madras Force mains than the normally accepted values for new cast iron of 0.013.
This historical record establishes the need to ensure (a) adequate grit removal before pump
ing and adequate non silting velocities in the design stage itself as otherwise, like the mains
reported herein, the siltation may be severely restraining the pumping main capacities in the
years to come and especially in locations where the densification of population is very slow
in newer habitations and eventually when the population does pick up to designed capacity,
the pumping mains would have been severely choked calling for radical cut and cure
techniques.
By a similar argument, the same can also happen to the gravity sewer collection pipes also
and it will not be easy to cut and cure such gravity sewers.
The study also advances a case effectively on the need for incremental sewerage and non
conventional options as in chapter-3 especially in the case of newer layouts.
A - 84
APPENDIX A 4.4
EVALUATING OPTIONS FOR SIZING THE SEWAGE PUMPING MAIN AND PUMP SETS
1 Appendix A 4-4
2 B C D E F G H I J K L
3 Condition of flow Immediate flows Intermediate flows Ultimate flows
4 Stage low ave peak low ave peak low ave peak
5 Average flow, cum / day Enter by Designer 1500 3800 7900
6 Proportion Enter by Designer 0.6 1 2.2 0.6 1 2.2 0.6 1 2.2
7 Design flow, cum / day E5*D6, E5*E6, E5*F6 900 1500 3300 2280 3800 8360 4740 7900 17380
8 Hazen Williams C Enter by Designer 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
9 Desired velocity, m/s 0.8, D9*E6/D6, D9*F6/D6 0.8 1.3 2.9 0.8 1.3 2.9 0.8 1.3 2.9
10 Area needed, sqm D7/24/3600/D9 0.013 0.013 0.013 0.033 0.033 0.033 0.069 0.069 0.069
11 Dia needed, m SQRT (D10*4/3.14) 0.129 0.129 0.129 0.205 0.205 0.205 0.296 0.296 0.296
12 Dia needed, mm D11*1000 129 129 129 205 205 205 296 296 296
13 Radius, m D11/2 0.064 0.064 0.064 0.102 0.102 0.102 0.148 0.148 0.148
14 Radius power 0.63 POWER(D13,0.63) 0.178 0.178 0.178 0.238 0.238 0.238 0.300 0.300 0.300
15 S power 0.54 D9/0.848/D8/D14 0.053 0.089 0.195 0.040 0.066 0.145 0.031 0.052 0.115
16 S POWER(D15, (1/0.54)) 0.004 0.011 0.048 0.003 0.007 0.028 0.002 0.004 0.018
17 Slope 1 in 1/D16 229.6 89.1 20.7 394.8 153.3 35.6 605.1 234.9 54.6
18 length, m Enter by Designer 960 960 960 960 960 960 960 960 960
19 Friction in pipeline, m D18/D17 4.2 10.8 46.4 2.4 6.3 27.0 1.6 4.1 17.6
20 Velocity head, m D9*D9/2/9.81 0.033 0.091 0.439 0.033 0.091 0.439 0.033 0.091 0.439
21 Frction factor in fittings Appendix-4-11C47 72.7 72.7 72.7 72.7 72.7 72.7 72.7 72.7 72.7
22 Friction in fittings, m D20*D21 2.4 6.6 31.9 2.4 6.6 31.9 2.4 6.6 31.9
23 Static lift, m Enter by designer 26.5 26.5 26.5 26.5 26.5 26.5 26.5 26.5 26.5
24 Total head, m D22+D23 28.9 33.1 58.4 28.9 33.1 58.4 28.9 33.1 58.4
25 Efficiency of pumpset Enter by designer 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
26 Discharge, Ips D7*1000/24/3600 10.4 17.4 38.2 26.4 44.0 96.8 54.9 91.4 201.2
27 Kw required D26*D24/D25/100.5 3.7 7.1 27.7 9.5 18.1 70.3 19.7 37.6 146.1
28 Option 1
29 Provide 150 mm pipeline at zero year and another 150 mm at 11th year and another 250 mm in 21st year and change pumpsets at 11th and 21st years
30 The augmnentation at 21st year can be decided based on realistic conditions at that time. May be suitable for smaller systems
31 Option 2
32 Provide 200 mm pipeline at zero year and provide pump sets also as for the 11th year flowrate and use the storage volume in the wet well and sewer system
33 The augmnentation at 21st year can be decided based on realistic conditions at that time. May be suitable for very large systems
34 Basis for Decision
35 Unlike water pumping, sewage varies widely and grit adds to the problem
36 Hence, paramount im portance is to ensure minimum of 0.8 m/s all times.
37 Each system to be weighed carefully based on calculations for that system
A - 85
APPENDIX A 5.1
ODOUR CONTROL
1 Introduction
Raw sewage must not be allowed to stagnate. If this occurs, anaerobic process sets in as shown in
Figure 5.2. This in turn can generate Hydrogen Sulphide gas. It is this gas which causes foul odour
problems because it smells like rotten egg. The need for control of this foul odour is the fact that this
gas can be harmful to human beings. This chapter deals with the effects of this gas on human health,
the locations where this gas can form and the technologies of its control.
2. Mechanism of its Entry and Effects on Human Beings
The gas enters the body through eyes or mucous membrane of breathing organs.
Blood seeps out from the capillaries in cavities of the lungs, causes pulmonary oedema, leading
to breathing difficulties and death by suffocation.
In sewer facilities, it is generated in rising mains with no oxygen supply and in inverted siphons,
etc., where sludge is likely to accumulate easily.
It is generated in grit chamber, pumping well, sedimentation basin, and sludge thickening tank in
sewage treatment plants.
Hydrogen sulphide generated in sewage and deposited sludge is sealed within and in the static
condition, so it does not disperse to the atmosphere easily. However, when agitated, it disperses
all at once to the atmosphere.
The relationship between its concentration and its toxic effect is shown in Table A5.1-1.
Table A5.1-1 Relationship between concentration of hydrogen sulphide and its toxic effects
one. (ppm) Effects and reaction on organ by H2S

of H2S
Sense of odour
0.025 Sensitive persons can sense the odour (limit of
sense of odour)
0.3 Anybody can sense the odour
3 to 5 Foul unpleasant odour of medium strength
10 Permissible concentration (lower limit for
irritation of the mucous membrane of the eye)
20 to 30 Although bearable, after getting accustomed to Breathing organs
the odour (olfactory fatigue), any higher Lowest limit for irritating the
concentration cannot be sensed. lungs
50 Eyes
100 to 300 Olfactory nerve paralysis for 2 to 15 minutes; If exposed continuously for 8 Conjunctivitis
feels like unpleasant odour has reduced. to 48 hours, bronchitis, , itchiness,
pneumonia, and death by pain in the
suffocation due to pulmonary eyes, feeling
oedema
A - 86
one. (ppm) Effects and reaction on organ by H2S

of H2S
170 to 300 Scorching pain in the mucous of sand in the
membrane of respiratory tract; eye, glare,
if exposure is less than 1 hour bloodshot
(limit), serious symptoms may eyes and
not occur swelling,
turbidity of
cornea,
corneal
damage and
separation,
bending and
haziness of
field of
vision,
increase in
pain due to
light
350 to 400 Exposure for 1 hour or more
may lead to loss of life
600 Exposure for 30 minutes hour

may lead to loss of life
700 Cerebral nerves

After excessive respiration for a short period, respiratory paralysis occurs immediately thereafter
800 to 900 Loss of consciousness, respiratory arrest, death
1,000 Swoon, respiratory arrest, death
5,000 Instantaneous death
Source: JSWA, 2003
3 Locations where the gas is formed
The factors causing foul odour are unnecessary sewage stagnation and anaerobic activity. The
locations where these can occur are
a) Sewers that are choked and not flowing,
b) Sewage pumping station sumps where sewage is not pumped out then & there,
c) Primary clarifiers, sludge thickeners, digesters and sludge drying beds in STPs.
Immediately on forming, the gas is however in dissolved form. When the sewage gets agitated like
flowing through sewers, this gas is released into the air. At this stage, its foul odour is troublesome.
Even though ammonia is also present in sewage, it does not cause any odour problem because it is
present as ammonium bicarbonate salt. It is split into ammonia only during biological treatment and
gets nitrified if additional oxygen is supplied. Even if it is not nitrified, its concentration is too low to
cause a foul odour problem. There can be stray gases like methyl sulphide, dimethyl sulphide and
methyl mercaptan, but their concentrations are usually negligible for any human discomfort.
A - 87
4 Control Technologies
Odour control processes are as follows.
4.1 Odour Prevention
The objective is to reduce the number of locations and volume of odour-generating substances.
i) Sealing of locations emitting odour
Some of the methods to seal odour can be through using air-tight manhole cover, air-tight door, trap
seal, air curtain.
ii) Anti- septic
In this method, the odour is controlled by restraining the decomposition of organic matter through use
of sterilizer and maintaining aerobic condition through use of air and ozone.
iii) Cleaning
Debris tends to be accumulated around screen and grit removal facility and consideration is required
during design to make cleaning of the structure easy.
4.2 Ventilation
Generated odour is ventilated and discharged to air by dilution and dispersion.
4.3 Deodorisation
There are many kind of deodorisation system. Optimal deodorisation system should be selected
in consideration of air flow, constituents and intensity of nuisance odour, target of deodorisation,
ambient environment, manageability of O&M, and economic efficiency. Consideration should be
made whether central deodorisation or individual deodorisation system should be adopted in each
STP or pumping stations.
4.4 Odour Enclosure
Providing a cover over the units, which produce odour, helps in containing the odour to be removed.
The head room in such cases shall be a minimum 4.5 m as per the industrial safety requirements.
The material of the cover can be synthetic types mounted on a funicular polygon. All materials and
fasteners shall be non-corrodible. Some installations are shown in Figure A5.1-1.
(A) Figure A5.1-1 Covers over sewage structure Flat type and Dome type (Yokohama City)
A - 88
4.5 Deodorisation Processes
4.5.1 Aeration Oxidation Process (Activated Sludge Basins)
Principle
Odour-generating gas is fed into aeration tank where it is oxidized and decomposed by the action of
activated sludge.
Target substances
Sulphur compound
Salient Features
Both capital and O&M costs are low. Blower needs mist filter and dust filter for protection and
corrosion resistance.
Figure A5.1-2 Schematic diagram of aeration oxidation process (activated sludge basins)
4.5.2 Soil Deodorisation System
i) Principle
Odour-generating substances are fed into soil where it is adsorbed, oxidized and decomposed by
action of bacteria in soil.
Target substances
Organic substance, which is nutrient for bacteria
Salient Features
In this case, the capital cost is low but large footprint is required. Gradual consolidation of soil
prevents permeability and discharging efficiency. Therefore, periodic maintenance of soil is required
through ploughing and replacement.
A - 89
Figure A5.1-3 Schematic diagram of soil deodorisation system

4.5.3 Biofiltration
i) Principle
In this process, odour-generating substances fed to soil is adsorbed, oxidized and decomposed by
action of bacteria.
ii) Target substances
Organic substance, which is nutrient for bacteria and hydrogen sulphide
iii) Salient Features
O&M cost is relatively low and footprint of equipment is small. The process is suitable for high strength
of odour and acclimation period of bacteria is needed.
Figure A5.1-4 Schematic diagram of biofiltration

4.5.4 Water Scrubber Process
Principle
Odour is removed by contact of the odour-generating substances with water and dissolving odour.
Target substances
Ammonia, Amines and other water soluble substances
Salient Features
A - 90
Both capital and O&M costs are low. This is generally used as the pre-treatment of following
deodorisation process. When secondary treated wastewater is used as washing water, caution is
needed because secondary treated water may emit odour.
Figure A5.12-5 Schematic diagram of water scrubber process

4.5.5 Activated Carbon Process
i) Principle
Odour-generating substances are removed by adsorbing physically and chemically.
Hydrogen sulphide, Methyl sulphide, Ammonia, Trimethylamine
Activated carbon is relatively expensive and characterised by high pressure loss. Periodically
exchange or regeneration of activated carbon is necessary. Mist and dust in gas need to be removed.
This system is suitable for low strength odour.
Figure A5.1-6 Schematic diagram of activated carbon process

4.5.6 Ion Exchange Resin
i) Principle
By passing odour-generating substance through ion exchange resin, odour-generating substances

are removed by chemical adsorption of alkaline and acid substances and physical adsorption of
neutral substances.
Almost all odour-generating substances
A - 91
Resin is relatively costly and pressure loss is large. Regeneration of resin is rather easy. Sometimes
activated carbon process and ion exchange process are configured in series.
Discharge
Figure A5.1-7 Schematic diagram of ion exchange resin

4.5.7 Chemical Oxidation Process
Principle
Odour-generating substances are removed by the oxidation action of oxidants such as sodium
hypochlorite, and chlorine water.
Target substances
Oxidisable substances
Salient Features
In case if the exhausted gas contains chlorine, absorption equipment with alkaline solution
is needed.
To neutralization equipn
Odour Discharge partly Discharge partly
i A /\ A 11
Fan 11
Make-up
V
-
' I
Tank Make-up Alkali solution tank
Figure A5.1-8 Schematic diagram of chemical oxidation process
A - 92
4.5.8 Acid and Alkaline Scrubber Process
i) Principle
In acid scrubber process, odour-generating substances are kept in contact with hydrochloric
acid or sulphuric acid, and are removed by neutralization reaction. In alkaline scrubber process,
odour-generating substances are kept in contact with sodium hydroxide, and are removed by
neutralization reaction.
Ammonia, Amines (acid scrubber process), Hydrogen sulphide, Methyl mercaptan (alkaline scrubber
process)
In this process, neutralization equipment is needed. Since there are many contact methods between
chemical and odour-generating substances, close examination is needed in their selection. It is
important to mention that pH of solvent influences the efficiency of deodorisation.
Figure A5.1-9 Schematic diagram of acid and alkaline scrubber process
4.5.9 Direct Combustion Process
i) Principle
Odour-generating substances are combusted and decomposed in incinerator at a very high

temperature of approximately 800C.
Almost all of odour-generating substances
A - 93
In case when ventilated odour-generating substances from various facilities are used as inflow to the
incinerator, capital cost and operation cost would be economical. In case of individual combustion,
capital cost and operation cost would be high. In this process, the temperature of air flow has to be
raised high, whatever the concentration of the odour-generating substance may be. Therefore, small
air flow with high concentration of odour-generating substance has advantage and higher removal
efficiency. However, oxygen concentration in odour- generating gas should not be too low and SOx
and NOx concentration in odour-generating gas should be examined.
Figure A5.1-10 Schematic diagram of direct combustion process
4.5.10 Catalytic Combustion Process
i) Principle
In this process, odour-generating substances are heated up and destroyed at a temperature of

approximately 350 C by heat exchanger using incinerator in presence of catalyst such as platinum
and vanadium.
Almost all the odour-generating substances
Fuel consumption in this process is lower than that of the direct combustion process. This process is
advantageous in case of high-concentration odour-generating substances below the explosion limit.
If oily smoke is present, it sticks on the surface of catalyst, and reduces the activation, so it needs to
be washed and removed once or twice a year.
Figure A5.12-1 Schematic diagram of catalytic combustion process
4.5.11 Ozone Oxidation Process
i) Principle
Odour-generating substances are removed by the oxidation action of ozone.
A - 94
Odour-generating substances with low concentration and a large volume (except ammonia)
Ozone is harmful and with sharp smell. Monitoring of excessive ozone residue in treated gas is
needed and if necessary, activated carbon system can be installed for removal of ozone. When the
odour-generating substances are in wet situation, efficiency of removal will be higher.
To atmosphere

Odour
Reactor
I
Fan <------
Figure A5.1-12 Schematic diagram of ozone oxidation process
4.6 Methods of Covers
1) Primary covers
Primary covers are installed near the water surface of tanks. These are well used for locations where
odour is comparatively strong, such as primary sedimentation basin and sludge thickening tank, and
in cases where upper parts are not used.
2) Secondary covers
Building is installed on tanks etc.
3) Double covers
This combines 1) and 2).
After collecting high-concentration odour with few quantity of air as much as possible, it is more
economical to deodorize and effective. Therefore, non-working clearance of the water surface of
tanks and covers, and working clearance of floors, ceilings, and walls should be necessary minimum
in order to carry out operation and maintenance of the facilities.
Typical methods are shown in Figure A5.1-13.
A - 95
Figure A-5-1-13 Methods of providing domes over odour producing units in STPs
A - 96
APPENDIX A 5.2
MASS DIAGRAM FOR RAW SEWAGE FLOW PATTERN AT THE KOYAMBEDU STP, CHENNAI
APPENDIX A 5-2 MASS DIAGRAM FOR RAW SEWAGE

FLOW PATTERN AT THE KOYAMBEDU STP, CHENNAI
3
0
1
0)
N
E
o
L_
4-
<D
E
o
+0)

+-i
(0
o>
*
a
3
C
a)
4 -1
re
L_
5
o
LL
0)
>
re
3
E
3
o
Time on 24 Hours Basis
A - 97
APPENDIX A 5.3
LABORATORY
5.3.1 General
A well designed and adequately equipped laboratory under a competent analyst is essential in all
sewage treatment plants. Very small size plants such as stabilization ponds need not have their own
laboratories if the facilities of a nearby laboratory are available. The results of the laboratory analysis
will aid in the characterization of any waste water, pinpoint difficulties in the operation and indicate
improvement measures, evaluate the composition of effluents and thus estimate the efficiency of
operation and also measure the pollution effects of the discharge of such effluents upon the receiving
water bodies.
The analytical data accumulated over a period to time is an important document in safeguarding the
treatment plant from allegations of faulty operation. The laboratory should also engage in research
and special studies for evolving improvements and innovations in the plant operation. The laboratory
therefore, must form an integral part of the treatment plant.
5.3.2 Planning of Laboratory Facilities
5.3.2.1 Physical Facilities
The actual design of the laboratory depends on the size and type of treatment plants and type and
volume of analytical work required to be carried out. Due consideration, therefore should be given to
the space requirement for permanent installed equipments and smooth performances or analytical
work by the personnel. Necessary provision for future expansions should also be incorporated in the
laboratory design.
5.3.2.2 Size of the Laboratory
The size and equipments needed for the laboratory depends on the capacity of the STP. Even the
smallest STP shall be provided with a laboratory, where at least a few simple analyses such as SS,
pH, BOD and residual chlorine can be made. On the other hand large STP providing complete
treatment may require a well planned laboratory building with facilities for physical, chemical,
biological and bacteriological work.
A recommended layout for a STP control laboratory of about 25 mld treatment capacity is presented
as Figure A 5.3-1. The total area of the laboratory is about 130 sqm with a small toilet hall and wash
room. It includes the main laboratory hall of 75 sqm with work benches and smaller rooms of about
13 sqm each. One of these rooms can be used as the office and the other can be used as a balance
room or instrument room etc. The laboratory should have a separate emergency exit.
5.3.2.3 Location
The laboratory should be easily accessible from any unit of the plant and so located as to provide
adequate natural lighting (preferably north light) and ventilation, it should be away from pumps and
other heavy operating machinery.
A - 98
5.3.2.4 Floor Space
Minimum floor space required accommodating the equipment necessary to be installed in the room
and to avoid interference in the work should be provided. The width of walkways between rows of
tables or equipments should be not less than 1m but preferably 1.2m. Total floor space requirement
of any work room should be arrived at by accounting for space requirement for all equipments and
their placement and the number of staff utilizing the room.
Figure A 5.3-1 Typical layout and list of equipments for sewage treatment plant control laboratory
5.3.2.5 Walls
Walls should be; finished smooth in light colours. The wall space and offsets should be convenient to
locate cabinets, benches, hoods, incubators, alongside, without any loss of floor space.
5.3.2.6 Lighting
All work rooms in a laboratory including stairways and passages should be well lighted. The window
areas in terms of floor area should not be less than 20 percent and all windows should be fitted with
transparent glass panels. Long windows should be preferred to broad windows for greater depth of
penetration of light into work rooms. North-South facing should be preferred for prevention of glare
on work tables and benches. There must be adequate artificial lighting to supplement day-light, well
distributed to provide uniform general lighting with minimum shadow effects. Spot lights should be
provided to specific equipment and instruments such as weighing balances, hoods, etc. Adequate
number of plug points should be provided for extra lighting and equipment when required,
5.3.2.7 Power Supply
Adequate electric power supply for at least 200 amps at L.T. voltage is required. Many laboratory
equipments require higher voltage and provision for such exigencies should be made.
A - 99
It is also desirable to provide suitable voltage stabilizers to protect sophisticated equipment from
damage due to wide fluctuations in the line voltage. This may require consideration in terms of
individual units or for the laboratory as a whole.
5.3.2.8 Floor
Floors should be of smooth finish but not slippery and should be easy to wash and keep clean.
Concrete flooring with mosaic finish and dadooing up to window sill level is recommended.
5.3.2.9 Work Tables and Benches
A provision of 10 m space of work tables and benches per worker should be sufficient. These tables
should be preferably located along the walls. Tables located in any other position should have a clear
gangway of width not less than 1 m. between adjacent rows. Wall side tables are generally kept 60 to
75 cm wide and centre tables are designed 140 cm wide to allow work space on both sides. Height of
tables should be 90 to 95 cm for working in a standing posture and 75 to 80 cm for working in a sitting
posture. Table tops should be finished smooth with acid resistant tiles/sheets. A separate rigid table
of size 120 cm x 60 cm with revolving adjustable stool should generally be provided for analytical
balance. Adequate number of stools should be provided along with work tables and benches. Drains
connected to table sinks should also be resistant to attack from corrosive substances.
5.3.2.10 Reagent Cabinets and Cupboards
These should be provided in adequate number and size for storing chemicals and reagents and stock
solutions, etc. in a systematic order. Sliding glass panelled shutters should be preferred to hinge
shutters in these cabinets. The laboratory tables could be provided with cupboards and open glass
shelves on the top to provide additional space for storage of chemicals and stock solutions.
5.3.2.11 Sinks
Both table sinks and separate sinks with adequate water supply shall be provided. Table sinks
are fitted with gooseneck taps extending high enough above the table to permit washing of litre
cylinders. Separate sinks of sufficient size and depth located at suitable points shall also be provided for
washing the glassware. Plumbing to sinks and wash basins shall be of proper design and of corrosive
resistant materials like PVC or ceramic for waste water lines.
5.3.2.12 Fume Hoods and Chambers
Fume hoods and chambers are necessary to prevent spreading of toxic and irritant fumes and odours
into other parts of the laboratory and also to prevent condensation of walls, windows and other
fixtures causing corrosion. Some analytical work needs isolated fume chambers while other could
he carried out under an exhaust hood. Positive ventilation with exhaust tans are generally provided
for this purpose. Hoods are designed as per standard practice to provide a minimum air velocity of
30 linear m/min.
5.3.2.13 Gas Supply
The plant should provide its own gas supply to the laboratory by installing a gas plant.
A - 100
Efforts should be made to use digester gas if sludge digesters are installed. Gas should be piped to
main work tables with hoods with appropriate fixture outlets. Compressed cooking gas in cylinders
can also be used.
5.3.2.14 Space for Analytical Balance
The analytical balance mounted on a small rigid table to be used in sitting position may be provided
in a separate cubicle or enclosure in bigger laboratories. It may also be possible to provide a masonry
platform with top surface of polished stone for mounting the balance.
5.3.2.15 Constant Temperature Room
In large plants, provision is sometimes made for constant temperature rooms maintained at 20 deg
C for performances of BOD and other tests. If this is not available commercial type 20 deg C BOD
incubator may be used.
5.3.2.16 Sample Preparation Room
In large plants employing both primary and secondary processes where number of samples handled
daily is large and so a separate sample preparation room con be very useful. Such room should have
refrigerators of suitable capacities. In addition, an attached cold room with storage facilities may also
be necessary particularly where bacteriological work is done.
5.3.2.17 Media Preparation and Sterilization Room
In large STPs where continuous bacteriological analysis is done, additional facilities for media
preparation, centrifuging sterilization by autoclaves, etc. are necessary and additional rooms for
accommodating these facilities should also be included. Such rooms are usually attached to the
laboratory and are located within easy reach of the analysts.
5.3.2.18 Space for Records
Space for keeping laboratory and plant records should be provided in the laboratory office or in the
plant administrative block.
5.3.2.19 Wash and Toilet Facilities
Adequate toilets and wash basins should be provided separately for men and women. Emergency
showers should also be provided which can be housed in the work room itself with a curtain to
provide temporary privacy. Emergency foot operated spout type eyewash should also be installed in
the workroom.
5.3.3 Equipment and Chemicals
5.3.3.1 Equipment Required
The type of equipment required for sewage treatment plant laboratory depends on the type of plant,
the type of analytical work to be caused out and the frequency of each test to be performed. It is
advisable to make initial decisions on the specific analysis to be undertaken, the number of samples,
A - 101
the frequency of sampling and the staff requirement to carry out these analysis, so as to avoid
unnecessary purchases and keeping of equipment idle for an indefinite period. Equipment that is
not used and is kept idle is often neglected and fall into disuse. Hence, selection of equipment for
the plant laboratory requires most useful and careful planning, so that each equipment bought is
specifically on the basis of anticipated function and availability of trained staff.
A list of important equipments required for carrying out several analytical works in a laboratory
is given in Appendix A 5.4. The list is not exhaustive, but covers most of the requirements. The
quantities required have to be decided as suggested above.
The estimates of essential consumable articles such as chemicals, glassware etc. and recurring
replacement in the succeeding years of operation must be worked out with utmost care on the
basis of the particular treatment processes to each plant. A list of important tests is given in Appendix
A 5.5 which will serve as a guideline for choosing the required glassware and chemicals for a
particular STP
Refrigerators for reagents and deep freezes provided for preserving samples should be adequate in
capacity and numbers.
All equipment needs a certain amount of maintenance care, particularly those that are electrically
operated. Periodic servicing of equipment and checking for their efficiency will save the loss of
equipment and prevent faulty analysts leading to work interruptions.
5.3.3.2 Storage
All glassware should be stored in an orderly way and used with care to minimize loss due to
breakages in handling, Glassware should he cleaned thoroughly after their use and dried before
placing in the cupboards and lockets.
Chemicals should be stated in proper shelves and lockets. Toxic chemicals such as arsenic, cyanide
etc. should he kept under lock and key and should be under the direct charge of a senior analyst
who issues and accounts for them, Acids, bulky glassware etc. which can cause accidents and burns
by dropping on the floor should not be stored on high shelves., which need ladders or high stools to
reach them.
Chemicals that have a limited life should be bought in such quantities as can be used before their
potency is lost.
A stock register for all equipment, chemicals and glassware should be maintained in all laboratories
and kept up-to-date.
A - 102
APPENDIX A 5.4
MINIMUM LABORATORY EQUIPMENTS NEEDED FOR TESTS
Equipment Type of Plant
5MLD >5 MLD
Analytical Balance x x
Autoclave -- x
Centrifuge -- x
Chlorine comparator x x
Colony counters -- x
Demineraliser x x
Dissolved Oxygen sampler x x
Drying oven (hot air) x x
Fume cupboards x x
Gas liquid chromatograph -- x
Hot plates x x
Incubator 20C (BOD) x x
Incubator 30C (Bacteriological) -- x
Kjeldahl Digester Unit x x
Magnetic stirrers x x
Microscope, binocular with oil immersion and movable x

stage counting cell
Membrane Filter Assembly -- x
Muffle Furnace x x
Orsat or equivalent gas analysis apparatus x
pH comparator (Colorimetric) x x
pH meter with reference & spare electrodes -- x
A - 103
Equipment Type of Plant
5MLD >5 MLD
pH meter portable x x
Refrigerator x x
Sedwick Rafter funnel -- x
Sludge sampler -- x
Soxhlet extraction unit -- x
Spectrophotometer (atomic absorption) -- x
Spectrophotometer with or without U-V rage or photo -- x

electric colorimeter
Total organic carbon analyser -- x
Turbidimeter x x
Vacuum pump x x
Water bath (thermostat controlled) x x
A - 104
APPENDIX A 5.5
TESTS RECOMMENDED TO BE CARRIED OUT ON UNITS OF SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANTS
Mixed
Total Liqueur SVI Total
Settleable Dissolved Volatile
Treatment stage/Unit Suspended Suspended for Turbidity pH Alkalinity BOD COD DO ORP Kjeldahl
Solids Solids Acids
Solids Solids (ML ML Nitrogen
SS)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1 Raw sewage X X X X X X X X
Primary sedimentation tanks

2 X X X
influent and effluent
Attached/fluidized/immobilized
3 X X X X X X
media influent & effluent
Activated sludge aeration tank

4 X X X X
influent & effluent
5 Above tank contents X X
Effluent of secondary settling

6 X X X X X X X
tank
Influent & effluent of septic
7 X X X X X
tanks
8 Above tank contents X X X
9 Digester contents X X X
10 Primary sludge
11 Secondary settled sludge
12 Digested sludge X X X
13 Sludge digester supernatant X X X X X X X
Stabilization ponds influent &

14 X X X X X
effluent
15 Above pond contents X X X X
A - 105
APPENDIX A 5.6
EXAMPLE FOR HYDRAULIC DESIGN OF MECHANICALLY CLEANED BAR RACK
AND SCREEN CHAMBER
1 PROBLEM STATEMENT
Design a bar rack and screen chamber for a peak design flow of 150 MLD (3*average sewage flow
of 50 MLD) with the following data.
Peak design flow 1.736 m3/s

Flow conditions in incoming trunk sewer
Diameter of incoming sewer 1.40 m
Depth of flow in sewer at peak flow 1.05 m
Velocity in sewer at peak design flow 1.16 m/s
Drop of screen chamber floor to invert 0.08 m
Assumed width of rectangular bars 10 mm
Clear spacing between bars 25 mm
Sketch a hydraulic profile through bar rack under clean conditions as well as for 50 percent
clogged conditions.
2 SOLUTION
2.1 DESIGN OF BAR RACK
Assume depth of flow in screen chamber 1.05 m

Assume velocity of flow through rack Openings 0.9 m/s
Provide 73 clear spacing of 25mm each

Number of bars = 72 of 10mm each
2.2 ACTUAL DEPTH OF FLOW IN SCREEN CHAMBER AT PEAK FLOW
The longitudinal section of the screen chamber is divided into four sections. The section 1 is at
sewer, section 2 at screen chamber u/s of bar rack, section 3 at d/s of bar rack and section 4 u/s
of the outlet of screen chamber. It is assumed that the outlet channel/sewer from screen chamber
discharges freely into the sump well. The definition sketch is given in Figure A5.6-1.
Applying Bernoullis theorem between sections 1 and 2
A - 106
Where,
Z1 & Z2 datum heads

d1 & d2 depths of flow at sections 1 and 2
V1 & V2 velocities of flow at sections 1 and 2
h head loss due to sudden expansion from sewer to screen chamber
vx2 v22
2g 2g
Taking floor of the screen chamber as datum (Z2 = 0) and assuming Ke = 0.3 for coefficient of
expansion,
Solving by trial and error,

d = 1.17 m
1 .7 3 6
= 0 .5 8 3 mis
2 .5 4 5 x 1 .1 7
2.3 VELOCITY THROUGH CLEAR OPENING OF BAR RACK
The velocity through the bar rack was assumed to be 0.9 m/s but it is actually 0.81 m/s. If desired,
the steps I, II and III can be revised to yield different values of number of bars, depth of flow and
velocity of flow, etc. However as V is within range (0.6-1.2 m/s), these steps are not being revised,
being acceptable.
2.4 HEAD LOSS THROUGH BAR RACK
h = 0.0728 ( r 2 - V22) = 0.0728x(0.8132 - 0.5832)

r2 t ,2
= 0.024 m
Using Kirschmers Formula
A - 107
h - P (fV/by hv sin0
- 2.42 x ' 72x10 sin 75c
73x25 v2x9.81y
= 0.022 m
2.5 DETERMINE DEPTH AND VELOCITY OF FLOW D/S OF BAR RACK
Applying energy equation between sections 2 and 3
2.6 HEAD LOSS THROUGH BAR RACK AT 50% CLOGGING
Assuming d\ and V\ as depth and velocity of flow at section 2 when bar rack is 50% clogged,
Therefore,
1 .7 3 6
2 .5 4 5 x d l 0 .5 9 3 0 .2 3
= 1 .1 5 +
2x9.81 2x9.81
A - 108
2.7 FLOOR RAISING REQUIRED IN CHANNEL BEFORE FREE FALL INTO SUMP WELL
If the flow d/s of bar rack has to be designed for free fall conditions into the adjoining sump well of
pumping station, it is obvious that critical flow conditions will prevail near the outfall.
Depth of critical flow,
Critical velocity,
1.736
V. =- = 1.88 m l s
- 2 .5 4 5 x 0 .3 6 2
In order not to disturb the existing hydraulic profile at section 3 and beyond, the floor of the screen
chamber has to be raised by an amount Zc, which can be determined by applying Bernoullis
Theorem between sections 3 and 4.
2.8 HYDRAULIC PROFILE
Hydraulic profile through the bar racks for clean conditions as well as for 50% clogged conditions is
presented in the following Figure A 5.6-2.
A - 109
S E C T IO N S E C T IO N S E C T IO N S E C T IO N
(DEFIN ITION SKETCH FOR S E C T IO N S OF BAR

SCREEN DESIGN
Figure A 5.6-1
D E S I6 N FL OW W H E N RACK IS . C LE A N & AT 50% C L0 6 6 IN 6
Figure A 5.6-2
A - 110
APPENDIX A 5.7
DESIGN EXAMPLE FOR GRIT CHAMBER WITH PROPORTIONAL FLOW WEIR
AS HYDRAULIC CONTROL DEVICE
1 PROBLEM STATEMENT
Design grit chamber to treat peak design flow of 150 MLD (3*Average wastewater flow of 50
MLD) of wastewater to remove grit particles up to a size of 0.15 mm and of specific gravity of 2.65.
The minimum temperature is 15C. The grit chamber is equipped with proportional flow weir as
control device.
2 SOLUTION
2.1 COMPUTATION OF SETTLING VELOCITY
Applying Stokes Law,
d
v
Given S s = 2.65, d = 0.15*10'3 m
v = 1 . 1 4 x l 0 -6 m 2 Is a t \ 5 C
-x (2 .6 5 -l)x 15x10 ^ = 0.0.018 m i s
18 v ' 1.14x10
Check for Reynold's Number, R
Vd 0.018x 0.15 x 10-3
R= = 2.37 > 0.5
v 1.14 x 10
H ence Stoke's law d o e s not apply
Applying Transitions Law for 0.5 < R < 103
v .= [ 0.7.07 (Ss- 1 ) / \ - 0 . 6] 0.714
= [ 0.707 X (2.65-1) X (0.15 X 10'3) 16X (1.14 X 106 )06 ] 0.714
= 0.0168 m /s
2.2 COMPUTATION OF SURFACE OVERFLOW RATE, SOR
The surface overflow rate for 100% removal efficiency in an ideal grit chamber
= Settling velocity of the minimum size of particle to be removed
= 0.0168 m/s
= 1451.5 m3/m2/d
However, due to turbulence and short circuiting due to several factors as eddy, wind and density
currents, the actual value to be adopted has to be reduced taking into account the performance of
A - 111
the basin and the desired efficiency of the particles removal. To determine the actual overflow rate,
the following formula may be used.
where,
n= efficiency of removal of desired particles

n= measure of settling basin performance
= 1/8 for very good performance
Assuming n = 0.75, n = 1/8
2.3 DETERMINATION OF THE DIMENSIONS OF GRIT CHAMBER
Provide 4 channels of 0.5 m wide and 16 m long.
The critical displacement velocity to initiate re-suspension of grit is given by
The horizontal velocity of flow Vh should be kept less than critical displacement velocity, Vc
Assuming a depth of 0.3 m,
7 .5 x 1 0 0 0
V, = = 0.15 m/s < 0.161 m/s OK
0.3 x 4 x 0.5 x 24 x 3600
The hydraulic residence time at peak flow is
A - 112
Total depth of grit chamber = Water depth + free board + grit storage space
=0.3 + 0.25 + 0.25 = 0.8 m
Provide 4 channels of grit chamber, each 16m * 0.5m *0.8m
2.4 DESIGN OF PROPORTIONAL FLOW WEIR
There will be four proportional flow weirs, each installed at the control section of each of the four
grit chambers.
Peak flow for each weir = (0.087 / 4) = 0.022 m3/s

Flow through a proportional flow weir is givers by
For symmetrical sharp-edged weir, C = 0.61

Assuming, a = 35 mm (usually between 25-50 mm)
h = 1.1m at peak flow
To determine the coordinates (x, y) of the curve forming the edge of the weir, assume suitable four
values of y and compute corresponding values of x using equation 5.14, The coordinates for
proportional flow weir are listed below:
Sl. No. y, m x, m
1. a = 0.035 0.400
2. 10a = 0.35 0.082
3. 20a = 0.70 0.057
4. 30a = 1.05 0.047
5. 40a = 1.40 0.040
However, with a base width (b) of 4 cm, it is not possible to have such a weir. Hence, continue the
channel section itself downstream by elevating the floor level above the grit storage space of 0.25
m for a length of at least 5 times the clear width and designing the floor slope such that a minimum
velocity of 0.3 m/s is obtained at least in peak flow conditions.
A - 113
APPENDIX A 5.8
DESIGN EXAMPLE FOR DETRITOR
Design a detritors for a peak flow of 150 MLD and Average flow of 60 MLD
Peak design flow = 150 MLD

Average flow = 60 MLD
Number of units = 2 (designer to choose)
Peak design flow for each unit = 75 MLD
Grit particle size to be removed = 0.15 mm
Grit particle specific gravity = 2.65
Settling velocity as per Table 5.6 = 0.018 m/sec
Surface overflow rate as per Table 5.6 = 1555 cum / sqm / day
Plan area of each detritors at peak flow = 150 X 1000 / 1555 / 2 = 48 sqm
One side of a square detritor =7 m
Critical displacement velocity to initiate resuspension of grit is calculated as in Appendix A 5.7
Critical displacement velocity = 0.161 m / sec
Depth of flow = assumed as 0.85 m
Horizontal velocity = 75 x 1000 / 24 / 3600 / 7 / 0.85 =
0.145 m / sec
Less than critical displacement velocity of 0.161and hence OK

Grit storage space
Rotary speed of scraper = say 0.25 rpm

Time between scraping = 1 / 0.25 = 4 minutes
Grit content for domestic sewage varies from 0.05m3 to 0.15m3 per ML
Assume = 0.1m3 per ML
Quantity of grit between scrapings = 60 x 0.1 x 4 / 1440 = 0.017 cum
Depth of detritor needed to hold this grit = 0.017 / 48 / 2 = negligible
Normally this is a concurrent activity and separate depth is not needed and may affect velocities
Provide, 2 numbers of each 7 m x 7 m x 0.85m LD with freeboard as per equipment vendor
A - 114
Appendix A 5-9
Calculating Size of Approach Channel for Parshall Plume
1 A B C D E F G
3 choice 1 choice 2 choice 3
4 Lower value of flow in MLD Enter 45 Enter 45 Enter 45
5 Higher value of flow in MLD Enter 170 Enter 170 Enter 170
6 Lower value of flow in lps 04*1000000/24/3600 521 E4*1000000/24/3600 521 G4*1000000/24/3600 521
7 Higher value of flow in lps C5*1000000/24/3600 1968 E5*1000000/24/3600 1968 G5*1000000/24/3600 1968
8 Throat width (W) m, from Table Enter 0.3 Enter 0.6 Enter 0.9
9 Channel at (D) m, from Table Enter 0.83 Enter 1.12 Enter 1.55
P0WER((E6/2264/E8),(1 /1.5) POWER((G6/2264/G8),(1/1.
10 Liquid depth at low flow, m POWER((C6/2264/C8),(1/1.5)) 0.84 0.53 0.40
) 5))
POWER((E7/2264/E8),(1 /1.5) POWER((G7/2264/G8),(1/1.
11 Liquid depth at high flow, m POWER((C7/2264/C8),(1/1.5)) 2.03 1.28 0.98
) 5))
12 velocity at mouth, low flow, m/s 04*1000/24/3600/09/010 0.75 E4*1000/24/3600/E9/C10 0.88 G4*1000/24/3600/G9/G10 0.83
velocity at mouth, high flow,
13 05*1000/24/3600/09/011 1.17 E5*1000/24/3600/E9/C11 1.37 G5*1000/24/3600/G9/G11 1.30
m/s
14 Approach channel width, m 09 0.83 E9 1.12 G9 1.55
Approach channel, liquid depth,
15 C11 2.03 E11 1.28 G11 0.98
m
16 Approach channel width, m C14 0.83 E14 1.12 G14 1.55
Approach channel liquid depth,
17 C11 2.03 E11 1.28 G11 0.98
m
18 Width of throat, m 08 0.3 E8 0.60 G8 0.9
It may be seen that the velocities at low flow and high flow are met adequately in all three chosen channel widths. However, the ease of O&M
also has to be considered. Choice 1 gives a very narrow width and very deep channel. This will be difficult to maintain. Between choice 2 and
choice 3, both can be used. H ow ever choice 2 will give alm ost a square section and lesser width fo r easy m aintenance.
A - 115
P artA: Engineering APPENDIX
APPENDIX A 5.10
DETENTION TIMES OF CLARIFIERS IN STPs EVALUATED BY NEERI
Primary Secondary
Name of STP Q in
Numbers Diameter SWD HRT Numbers Diameter SWD HRT Total HRT
MLD m m hrs m m hrs hrs
K&C Valley 163 3 39.6 3.04 1.65 3 46.5 3.6 2.70
1 39 3.6 0.63 3.33
Atladara 27 1 45.7 2.5 3.64 1 35 2.5 2.14 2.14
Howrah 45 2 38.1 3 3.65 2 38.1 3 3.65 3.65
Mahati 135 4 22.86 3.14 0.92 2 40 3.2 1.43
2 45 3.5 1.98 3.41
Jaspur 20 1 39.6 2.4 3.55 1 33.5 2.4 2.54 2.54
Kodungaiyur II 90 2 40 3 2.01 2 41.6 3 2.17 2.17
Koyambedu 34 2 36.6 2.74 4.07 2 33.5 2.44 3.03 3.03
Nesapakkam 23 2 21.2 2.4 1.77 2 24.4 3.1 3.02 3.02
Kalyani 10.8 1 23.6 4.2 4.08 1 28.3 1.6 2.24 2.24
Rithala 180 4 40 3.12 2.09 4 42.7 4.2 3.21 3.21
Kishopur 180 4 40 3 2.01 4 48 3.6 3.47 3.47
BHU 8 2 14.6 3 3.01 2 16 3.5 4.22 4.22
Maximum 4.20 4.22
Minimum 2.40 2.14
Source-P erform ance Evaluation o f S ew age Treatm ent Plants in lndia-N E ER I-February-1994
A - 116
Appendix A 5-11
Illustrative Sizing of Clarifiers in Activated Sludge
1 A B C
2 Primary Clarifiers followed by secondary treatment
4 Average flow, MLD Enter 23
5 Peak flow. MLD Enter 60
6 Overflow rate for average flow from Table 5.8. m3/m2/day Enter 35
7 Overflow rate for peak flow from Table 5.8, m3/m2/day Enter 80
8 Surface area for average flow, sqm C4*1000/C6 657
9 Surface area for peak flow, sqm C5*1000/C7 750
10 Higher of the two areas, sqm MAX(C8,C9) 750
11 Required diameter, m SQRT(4*C10/3.14) 30.91
12 Resulting weir length, m 3.14*C10 97.06
13 Resulting weir loading rate, m3/m /day C3*1000/C11 236.97
Weir loading rate in average flow from Table 5.8, m3/m /

14 Enter 125.00
day
15 Usage of double sided weir is needed or not Enter Yes
16 Choose an annular space from inner sidewall of clarifier, m Enter 0.20
17 Choose a launder width, m Enter 0.60
18 Diameter of outer weir, m C10-C15-C15 30.51
19 Diameter of inner weir, m C17-C16-C16 29.31
20 Diameter of inner weir, m 3.14*(C17+C18) 187.83
21 Resulting weir loading rate, m3/m /day C3*1000/C19 122.45
22 Weir loading is safe or not Enter Yes
23 Side water depth shall be to suit Table 5.8 Enter Yes
In actual practice, the diameter and the size of launder will be not less than the
24
above values
A - 117
25 Depending on the area and diameter, multiple number of these clarifiers may be designed
26 Secondary Clarifiers for activated sludge
27 Average flow, MLD Enter 23
28 Peak flow. MLD Enter 60
29 Return sludge flow, MLD Enter 11.5
30 MLSS, mg/L Enter 3500
31 Overflow rate for average flow from Table 5.8. m3/m2/day Enter 25
32 Overflow rate for peak flow from Table 5.8, m3/m2/day Enter 40
33 Surface area for peak flow, sqm C5*1000/C7 750
34 Surface area for average flow for overflow rate, sqm C27*1000/C31 920
35 Solids loading for average flow from Table 5.8. kg/m2/day Enter 100
36 Solids loading for peak flow from Table 5.8, kg/m2/day Enter 210
Surface area for average flow for solids loading, sqm (C27+C29)*C30 1207.5
37
/C35
(C28+C29)*C30/
38 Surface area for peak flow for solids loading, sqm 1192
C36
MAX(C33,C34,
39 Higher of the four areas, sqm 1500
C37,C38)
40 Required diameter, m SQRT(4*C39/3.14) 43.71
41 Resulting weir length, m 3.14*C40 137.26
42 Resulting weir loading rate at average flow, m3/m /day C27)*1000/C41 168
Weir loading rate in average flow from Table 5.8, m3/m /

43 Enter 185
day
44 Usage of double sided weir is needed or not Enter No
45 Choose an annular space from inner sidewall of clarifier, m Enter 0.2
46 Side water depth shall be to suit Table 5.8
In actual practice, the diameter and side water depths will

47 be not less than the above values
Depending on the area and diameter, multiple number of
48
these clarifiers may be designed
A - 118
APPENDIX A 5.12
ILLUSTRATIVE DESIGN OF CONVENTIONAL ASP AERATION
The MS Excel version is available in the CD version of the manual and can be easily used. In case
of any difficulty, the reader may proceed as follows.
Leave 3 blank rows at the top and start from cell A4.
Copy column A as below
Paste it in column A of your computer
Then copy column C as below
Paste it in column C of your computer by prefixing =
Then wherever it says "Enter in column C below, you can enter your choice in column B
Then copy column B as entered and paste in column D except in cell D6,
Then enter the winter temperature in cell D6
No A B C D
4 Plant design flow, MLD 50 Enter 50
5 Elevation of site above MSL, m 30 Enter 30
6 Operating temperature in deg C 30 Enter 20
7 Primary clarifier effluent BOD, mg/l 230 Enter 230
8 Thickener overflow return as fraction of Enter 0.15

0.15
plant flow
9 Thickener overflow return, MLD 7.5 B4*B8 7.5
10 Thickener overflow return BOD, mg/l 500 Enter 500
11 Centrate from sludge dewatering as 0.006 Enter 0.006

fraction of plant flow
12 Centrate from sludge dewatering return, 0.3 B4*B11 0.3

MLD
13 Centrate from sludge dewatering return 380 Enter 380

BOD, mg/l
((B4*B7)+(B9*B10)+
14 Influent BOD to aeration tank, mg/l 266 (B12*B13))/ 380
(B4+B9+B12)
15 Effluent BOD 20 Enter 20
A - 119
No A B C D
Weighted BOD to be removed in the 246 B14-B15 246

16
aeration tank, mg/l
17 MLSS 3000 Enter 3000
18 F: M 0.35 Enter 0.35
19 F 14208 B16*(B4+B9+B12) 14208
20 40594 B19/B18 40594
Aeration tank volume calculated from F/M,

21 13531 (B20/B17)*1000 13531
cum
From Fig 5.31 in
22 Mean Cell Residence Time, Theta C, days 3 5
Chapter 5
23 Constant Y 0.500 Fixed value 0.500
24 constant Kd 0.060 Fixed value 0.060
B23*B4*1000*B16
25 Aeration tank volume calculated from 5208 0.006
*B22/(1+B24*B22)/
Theta, cum
B17
26 HRT for average flow as per CPHEEO, hrs 4 to 6 in Table 5.8

5 5
in Chapter 5
((B4*B7)+(B9*B10)+
27 Influent BOD to aeration tank, mg/l 266 (B12*B13))/ 380
(B4+B9+B12)
Aeration tank volume calculated from
28 10417 B4*1000*B26/24 10417
HRT, cum
liquid depth, m (restrict to max of 6.5 m if

29 5.50 Enter 5.50
air cooled)
30 BOD removed in aeration tank, kg/day 14208 (B4+B9+B12)*B16 14208
31 Kg oxygen / Kg of BOD removed 0.8 to 1.0 in Table 5.8 0.9

0.9
in Chapter 5
32 Kg of Oxygen needed per day 12787 B30*B31 12787
33 Residual D. O. in aeration 2.0 Fixed value 2.0
34
35 If surface aerators are used 5412.4
A - 120
No A B C D
0.83 0.8 to 0.85 as in

36 Alpha value 0.83
Equation 5.31 in
Chapter 5
37 Beta value As in clause

0.95 0.95
5.8.1.7.5.3
7.43 14.42+(0.003*B6*
38 D O at operating temperature 9.16
B6)-(0.323*B6)
7.41 (1-(B5/152)*0.017)
39 D O at operating elevation 9.13
*B38
40 Oxygen tension, mg/l 5.03 (B39*B37)-B33 6.67
41 Oxygen gradient, mg/l 0.55 B40/9.17 0.73
42 Temperature difference 10.0 B6-20 0.0
43 Temperature Co-efficient 1.03 Fixed Value 1.03
44 Temperature correction factor 1.3 Power(B43,B42) 1.0
45 Conversion factor to standard conditions 0.61 B41*B36*B44 0.60
Oxygen needed under standard

46 20879 B32/B45 21172
conditions, kg / day
47 Provide factor of safety for intangibles 1.1 -- 1.1
Oxygen needed after factor of safety , kg/

48 22967 B45*B46 23289
day
Oxygen transfer capacity of 1.2 to 2.4 in clause

49 1.8 1.8
aerator Kg/Kwhr in aeration tank, kg/day 5.8.1.7.5.3
50 Kw of aerator needed 532 B48/24/B49 532
51
52 If diffused aeration is used
POWER(B6,3)/
53 Factor for temperature power 3 0.027 0.008
(POWER(10,6))
(POWER(B6,2)/
54 Factor for temperature power 2 0.001 0.001
(POWER(10,5))/7)
A - 121
No A B C D
55 Factor for temperature power 1 0.090 0.003*B6 0.060
56 Density of air at operating temperature 1.221 1.285+B53-B54-B55 1.232
57 Content of oxygen in air 0.23 Fixed value 0.23
Kg of oxygen needed for residual

58 100 B4*B33 100
D O per day
59 Total kg of oxygen needed per day 12887 B32+B58 12887
60 Air needed in cum / day 45505 B59/B56/B57 45072
Transfer efficiency of diffuser system per

61 0.05 Fixed 0.05
m depth (*)
62 Transfer efficiency at design depth 0.28 B29*B61 0.28
63 diffuser fouling factor per year 0.04 Enter 0.04
64 Diffuser life cycle, years 3.00 -- 3.00
POWER((1+B63),
65 Diffuser fouling factor for its life cycle 1.12 1.12
B64)
66 Provide factor of safety for intangibles 1.10 B47 1.10
67 Air needed for oxygenation in cum / day 204747 B60*B65*B66/B62 163899
68 Air needed for oxygenation in cum / hour 8531 B67/24 6829
Air mixing criteria cum /minute / 1000 cum As in clause

69 16 16
of tank 5.8.1.7.5.6
Air needed for mixing as per manual

70 12990 B28*B69*60/1000 12990
cum / hr
1.8 to 2.7 as per US 2.7

71 Air needed for mixing as per manual 2.7
EPA, 625/8-85/0100,
in cum / hr
p 38
72 Surface area of aeration tank, sqm 2460 B28/B29 2460
Air needed for mixing as per US EPA 6643 B71*B72 6643

73
guidelines in cum / hr
74 Maximum of air needed for mixing 12990 MAX(B70,B73) 12990

in cum / hr
Air needed as higher of oxygenation and 12990
75 12990 MAX(B68,B74)
mixing cum / hr
A - 122
No A B C D
Air needed as under standard

76 21210 B75/B45 21508
conditions, cum / hr
Friction and other losses as

77 0.2 Enter by Designer 0.2
fraction of depth
Liquid depth as water column for

78 6.6 B29*(1+B77) 6.6
air pressure
0.746*((0.03*B76)
79 Kw of needed compressor at 1400 rpm 486.6 493.3
+ 16)
For DPR purpose, equation for Compressor Kw at 1400 rpm for 7 m water
80
column can be taken as BHP = 0.03*(cum / hr)+16
81
82
83 Sludge Flows
84 Y0bs=Y/(1+Kd*ThetaC) 0.42 (B23)/(1+B24*B22) 0.38
85 Excess Sludge mass wasted Kg/day 5208 B84*B16*B4 4727
86 Kgd of excess sludge / Kg of BOD removed 20879 B32/B45 21172
Kg of excess sludge from thumb

87 4916 B4*B16*B86 4916
rule per day
Excess sludge as higher of the two values, MAX(B85,B87, D85,

88 5208 5208
Kg/ day D87)
Concentration factor for MLSS in return /

89 3.3 Enter by Designer 3
excess sludge
Return / excess sludge MLSS 9900 B17*B89 9900

90
concentration, mg/l
91 Cells in aeration, kg 40594 B17*B28/1000 40594
92 Cells wasting from system kg / day 5208 B88 5208
B92*1000000/B90
93 Volume of excess sludge, cum / day 526 526
/1000
94 Resulting Theta C 7.8 B91/B92 7.8
A - 123
No A B C D
95 Least Theta C in design 0.3 MIN(B22,D22) 0.5
96 Volume of excess sludge for least Theta C 1367 B93*B94/B95 820
97 Excess sludge pump set duty as cum / day MAX(B93,B96,D93

1367 1367
,D96)
0.25 to 0.8 as per
98 Recirculation ratio 0.8 0.8
Table 5.8
99 Return sludge pump set duty as MLD 40 B4*B98 40
Motors of both the return sludge and excess sludge pump sets will be provided with
100
VFD to downsize actual pumpage as needed
Note.
For incorporating anoxic tank before aeration tank, the design criteria of the Bangalore K&C Valley
STP as given in Table 5.32 may be followed.
A - 124
APPENDIX A 5.13
DESIGN EXAMPLE OF FACULTATIVE AERATED LAGOON
1 PROBLEM
D esign a facultative aerated lagoon to ser v e 4 0 ,0 0 0 people. S e w a g e flow @ 180 lpcd = 7 2 0 0 cum /
day, Raw BOD5 = 5 0 gcd or 2 7 7 mg/l and final BOD5 is not to e x c e e d 30 mg/l in winter. A verage
am bient air tem perature in January is 18C and in su m m er 37C.
2 SOLUTION
2.1 LAGOON SIZE
A ssu m e detention time = 5 d ays

Lagoon volum e = 7 ,2 0 0 * 5 = 3 6 ,0 0 0 cum.
Let Lagoon d im en sion s b e 7 0 m * 1 3 0 m * 4 m d ee p
2.2 LAGOON WINTER TEMPERATURE
U se Eq. (5.34) to determ ine TL. A ssu m e Ti = 23C

H en ce, H en ce,
T L = 21C
2.3 ESTIMATION OF K
A ssu m e K at 20C = 0.7 per day

H ence, K at 21C = 0 .7 * 1 .0 3 5 = 0.724/day,
2.4 D/UL ESTIMATION
K eep lagoon geom etry such that flow conditions are plug-flow type (i.e. D/UL = 0.2 approx.). This
will b e p ossib le if a long and narrow lagoon (23 m * 3 9 0 m) is provided ( s e e Table 5.12) or baffles are
provided within the rectangular lagoon of 7 0 m * 1 3 0 m to give a winding flow with the s a m e effect.
(S e e Figure 5.42).
2.5 BOD5 REMOVAL EFFICIENCY (IN WINTER)
K * 0 = 0 .7 2 4 * 5 = 3.62
S e e Figure (5.41) at K * 0 = 3 .6 2 and D/UL = 0.2
Soluble BOD removal efficiency = 92%
Namely, soluble BOD in effluent = 2 2 mg/l
S S likely to flow out in effluent = 3 5 mg/l (say)
A - 125
BOD of VSS = 0.77x(0.6x35) = 16 mg/l

Hence, BOD of effluent = 22 + 16 = 38 mg/l
Overall efficiency in winter = 86%
In other months of the year, the efficiency will be higher and effluent BOD will be less than the above
value.
2.6 POWER REQUIREMENT
When efficiency = 86% and all BOD is removed aerobically,

O2 required/day = 0.86 (1.4x2000 kg/d)
= 2,408 kg/d = 100kg/hr
1.7 W/cum (acceptable)
2.7 LAND REQUIREMENT
Net lagoon area = 9,000 sqm

Area including embankments and slopes = 13,500 sqm (approximately)
Area/person = 0.337 sqm/person
NOTE)
If the lagoon was kept as a square shaped unit or a rectangular unit with say W:L = 1:2, the D/UL
value would have been between 3.0 and 4.0 (namely, approaching completely - mixed conditions)
and soluble effluent BOD would have increased to 49 mg/l, thus giving a total final effluent of about
65 mg/l instead of 38 mg/l seen above. Thus, lagoon geometry plays an important part in determining
efficiency.
A - 126
APPENDIX A 5.14
DESIGN EXAMPLE OF FACULTATIVE STABILIZATION POND
1 PROBLEM
Design a facultative stabilization pond to treat 5,000 m3/d municipal wastewater, BOD5 230 mg/l
from a town (population 25,000 persons) located in Central India, latitude 22N, elevation 100 m
above sea level. The average temperature in January is 18C. The effluent from the pond is to be
used for irrigation.
2 SOLUTION
2.1 POND SIZE
Permissible organic load according to temperature correlation = 20^18 - 120

240 kg BOD/ha/d
Permissible organic load according to latitude and elevation 235/(1 + 0.003x1)
180 kg BOD/ha/d
Adopt a conservative loading rate of 200 kg BOD/ha/d
BOD load from the town 5,000x0.23 = 1,150 kg/d
Therefore pond area 1,150/200 = 5.75 ha
Adopt an average depth of 1.5 m
Therefore pond detention time 5.75x104x1.5/5,000
17.25 d
Provide three ponds of equal volume and surface area; two primary ponds in parallel and one
secondary pond in series receiving the effluent of the two primary ponds. Use of multiple ponds
improves performance from viewpoints of stability, efficiency of treatment and maintenance.
However, it requires greater land area for the same pond surface area.
2.2 CHECK FOR DETENTION TIME
For 90% BOD reduction, the BOD reaction rate constant = 0.2/d for plug flow condition. The total
overall detention time, 0 , is given by:
0.1 = exp - 0.2 (2x0/3 + 0/3), or 0 = 11.5 d
For a conservative estimate, for completely mixed condition in all three ponds, the total overall
detention time is given by:
0.1 = 1/(1+0.2x20/3) (1 + 0.2x0/3), or 0 = 22.5 d
In actual conditions, the hydraulic regime in the ponds is going to be between the two ideal conditions
of plug flow and completely mixed flow. The detention time of 17.25 d is therefore acceptable.
A - 127
2.3 CHECK FOR MICROBIAL QUALITY FOR IRRIGATION
WHO guidelines recommend sewage retention in stabilization ponds for 8-10 days for irrigation of
cereal, fodder and industrial crops and trees. This assures removal of intestinal nematodes from sew
age. The design meets this requirement.
For irrigation of crops likely to be eaten uncooked, the guidelines recommend a faecal coliform limit
of 1,000 organisms/100 ml. For microbial reduction rate constant of 2.0/d at 20C or 1.4 at 18C, and
influent faecal coliform concentration = 107/100 ml, the effluent concentration N is
given by
N = 107/ (1+1.4*2*17.25/3) (1+1.4*17.25/3)

or,
N = 64,600/100 ml
Therefore the design does not meet the criteria of irrigation water quality for crops likely to be eaten
uncooked. If two maturation ponds, each of 17.25/3 d detention time are provided in series after the
secondary pond, the effluent concentration is expected to be:
N = 107/ [(1 + 1 4*2*(17.25/3)] (1 + 1.4*17.25/3)3

= 788/100 ml
The above calculations are based on assumption of complete mixing. In actual condition the
performance is likely to be better.
2.4 SLUDGE ACCUMULATION
Most of the sludge will accumulate in primary ponds. Assuming 0.75 m deep allowable sludge
deposition, capacity available = 0.75 * (2/3) * 5.75 * 104 = 28,750 m3. For 0.07 m3/person/year
sludge accumulation rate,
Desludging frequency = 28,750/(0.07 * 25,000) = 16 years.

Because of non-uniform deposition of sludge, a desludging frequency of once in 10 years is
recommended.
A - 128
Figure A5.14-1 Typical plan of a waste stabilization pond
A - 129
Figure A5.14-2 Typical details of inlet and outlet chamber for facultative waste stabilization pond
A - 130
APPENDIX A 5.15
DESIGN EXAMPLE FOR UPFLOW ANAEROBIC SLUDGE BLANKET REACTOR
1 PROBLEM
Design an upflow sludge blanket reactor for an average flow of 5 MLD of wastewater with the
following data:
1. COD of wastewater = 400 mg/l

2. Design hydraulic residence time = 6 hrs
3. Design COD loading = 1 - 2 kg COD/m3d
4. Velocity of rise of wastewater in the reactor through sludge bed = 0.75 m/hr
5. Velocity of wastewater in settling chamber = < 1.5 m/hr
6. Flow area covered by each inlet = 1 - 2 m2
2 SOLUTION
2.1 DETERMINE THE DIMENSIONS OF UASBR
Volume of UASBR = 5,000 * (6/24) = 1,250 m3

Actual volumetric organic loading = [(5*400)/1,250] kg COD/m3d
= 1.6 [OK as it is between 1-2 kg COD/m3d]
Height of wastewater in reactor = Rise velocity*HRT
= 0.75*6 = 4.5 m
Area of Reactor = [1250/4.5] = 277.8 m2
Provide two reactors of 11.8 m*11.8 m *5.25 m (height)
2.2 NO. OF INLETS
Assume that each inlet can serve 2.0 m2 of flow area

Number of inlets in each reactor = [138.9/2] = 70
2.3 AREA OF SETTLING CHAMBER
Assuming a velocity of 1.2 m/hr in the settling zone

Area of settling chamber in each reactor = [5,000/(2*24*1.2)] = 86.8 m2
A - 131
APPENDIX A 5.16
DESIGN EXAMPLE FOR ANAEROBIC FILTER
1 PROBLEM
Design anaerobic filters to treat an average flow of 5 MLD of wastewater with the following
assumptions:
1. COD of the wastewater = 400 mg/l

2. Design COD Loading = 1.0 kg COD/m3d
3. Depth of media = 1.2 m
2 SOLUTION
2.1 DIMENSIONS OF ANAEROBIC FILTER
Total COD load = 5x400 = 2,000 kg COD/d

Volume of anaerobic filters for media = [2,000/1.0] = 2,000 m3
Plan Area of filters = [2,000/1.2] = 1,666.7 m2
Provide two filters of diameter 32.6 m and height 1.5 m including free board and bottom zone for
dispersion of wastewater and supporting media.
2.2 HRT FOR FILTERS
HRT = [2,000/5,000] d
= 9.6 hrs
A - 132
APPENDIX A 6.1
ILLUSTRATIVE COMPUTATION OF
SLUDGE WEIGHTS AND VOLUMES FROM ASP
No A B C D
1 Appendix 6-1
2 Illustrative Computation of Sludge weights and volumes from ASP
3 Raw sewage flow in MLD Enter 10
4 Raw sewage BOD in mg/l Enter 250
5 Raw sewage SS in mg/l Enter 400
6 Raw sewage VSS in percent Enter 60
7 Raw sewage ISS in percent 100-D6 40
Secondary clarifier effluent Enter 10

8
BOD in mg/l
9 Consider Primary Clarifier alone
10 BOD removal in percent Enter 30
11 Effluent BOD in mg/l D4*(100-D10)/100 175
12 ISS removal in percent Enter 60
13 VSS removal in percent Enter 60
100*((D6*D12/100)+(D7*D13/100))/ 60
14 TSS removal in percent Enter (D6+D7)
15 VSS removed in kg / day D3*D5*D6*D13/100/100 1440
16 ISS removed in kg / day D3*D5*D7*D12/100/100 960
17 TSS removed in kg / day SUM(D15:D16) 2400
18 % solids in primary sludge Enter 4
Specific gravity of primary

19 Enter 1
sludge
20 Sludge removed in Kld D17*100/D18/D19/1000 60
21 BOD removed in kg / day D3*D4*D10/100 750
22 Kg VSS / kg BOD removed D15/D21 1.9
A - 133
No A B C D
23 Kg ISS / kg BOD removed D16/D21 1.3
24 Kg TSS / kg BOD removed D17/D21 3.2
25 ISS carry over in kg / day (D3*D5*D7/100)-D16 640
26 Consider conventional secondary stage alone
27 Clarifier effluent BOD in mg/l Enter 10
Secondary clarifier VSS in

28 Enter 85
percent
Secondary clarifier ISS in
29 100-D28 15
percent
30 Aeration kd in per day Enter 0.06
31 Aeration Y Enter 0.5
32 Aeration SRT in days 5
Kg VSS / kg BOD removed, Y Enter D31/(1+(D30)*(D32))

33 0.38
observed = Y/(1+ (kd)*( SRT))
34 BOD removed in kg / day D3*(D11-D27) 1650
35 Kg VSS removed per day D33*D34 635
36 SS removed in kg / day D35*100/D28 747
37 Inert sludge carry over in kg/day (D3*D5*D7/100) 1600
38 Kg TSS carried over per day SUM(D36:D37) 2347
39 % solids in sludge Enter 0.75
40 Specific gravity Enter 1.00
43 Kg TSS / kg BOD removed D38/D34 1.42
44 Consider extended aeration alone
45 Clarifier effluent BOD in mg/l Enter 10
A - 134
No A B C D
47 Aeration Y Enter 0.5
48 Aeration SRT in days Enter 15
Kg VSS / kg BOD removed, Y

49 Enter D47/(1+(D46)*(D48)) 0.26
observed = Y/(1+ (kd)*( SRT))
50 BOD removed in kg / day D3*(D4-D45) 2400
51 Kg VSS removed per day D49*D50 632
52 Inert sludge carry over in kg/day D3*D5*(D7)/100 1600
53 Kg TSS removed per day SUM(D51:D52) 2232
54 % solids in sludge Enter 0.75
55 Specific gravity Enter 1.00
58 Kg TSS / kg BOD removed 0.93
59
60 Rule of Thumb for Design Purposes for parameters as above.
61 For other parameters please rework in the M S excel
62 Kg Sludge / Kg BOD removed
63 Process as VSS as TSS
64 Primary alone 1.92 3.20
Primary & secondary as

65 0.86 1.31
conventional ASP
66 Extended aeration ASP 0.26 0.93
A - 135
APPENDIX A 6.2
ILLUSTRATIVE CALCULATION OF SLUDGE WEIGHTS
Calculation example of Figure 6.1.

1) Set influent solid as 100 and Design sludge generation, D as 90.
2) Assume solids recovery rate or reduction rate of each treatment stage as under.
Table A6.2-1
Solids recovery rate, etc. Figure 6.1, a Figure 6.1, b
Solid recovery rate in Thickening, y 1 90 % 90 %
Solid reduction rate in Digestion, y 2 - 40 %
Solid recovery rate in Dewatering, y 3 95 % 90 %
Coagulant dosing rate in Dewatering, y 4 0 .8 % 1 .0 %
Solid reduction rate in Incineration, y 5 70 % -
Solid recovery rate in Incineration, y 6 80 % -
3) In case of Figure 6.1, a
Solid of return flow from sludge treatment facilities, R, is calculated as under assuming all solids are
returned to the sludge treatment facilities.
R = (D + R) {(1 - y1) +Y1(1 + Y4)(1 - Y3)+ Y1(1 + Y4) Y3 (1 - Y5)(1 - Y6)

= (90 + R) {(1 - 0.9) +0.9(1 + 0.008)(1 - 0.95)+ 0.9(1 + 0.008) 0.95 (1 - 0.7)(1 - 0.8)
= (90 + R) x 0.197
R = 22.1
Calculation of Solid in each treatment stage
Thickener: X1 = D + R = 90 + 22.1 = 112.1
Centrifugal dewatering machine: X 2 = X 1x y 1 =112.1x0.9 = 100.9
Coagulant dosing: C = X 2 x y 4 = 100.9 x 0.008 = 0.8
Incinerator: X = X 2 x (1 + y4) x y 3 = 100.9 x (1+0.008) x 0.95 = 96.6
Solid reduction in Incinerator: G = X 3 x y 5 = 96.6 x 0.7 = 67.6
Incineration ash: X 4 = (X3 - G) x y 6 = (96.6 - 67.6) x 0 .8 = 23.2
4) In case of Figure 6.1, b
Solid of return flow from sludge treatment facilities, R, is calculated as under assuming all solids are
returned to the sludge treatment facilities as in case of Figure 6.1, a.
R = (D + R) {(1 - Y1) +Y1(1 + Y4)(1 - Y3)+ Y1(1 + Y4) Y3 (1 - Y5)(1 - Y6)

= (90 + R) {(1 - 0.9) +0.9(1 + 0.008)(1 - 0.95)+ 0.9(1 + 0.008) 0.95 (1 - 0.7)(1 - 0.8)
A - 136
= (90 + R) x 0 .1 9 7
R = 22.1
C alculation of Solid in ea ch treatm ent sta g e
Thickener: X1 = D + R = 9 0 + 22.1 = 112.1
Centrifugal dew atering m achine: X 2= X.,* y 1 = 1 1 2 .1 x 0 .9 = 100.9
C oagulant dosing: C = X 2* y 4= 100.9 x 0 .0 0 8 = 0.8
Incinerator: X = X 2 * (1 + y4) * Y3= 100.9 x (1 + 0.008) x 0 .9 5 = 9 6.6
Solid reduction in Incinerator: G = X 3 * y 5 = 9 6 .6 * 0 .7 = 6 7 .6
Incineration ash: X 4= (X 3- G) * y 6= (96 .6 - 6 7.6) x 0.8 = 2 3 .2
A - 137
APPENDIX A 6-3
FRICTION LOSSES IN SLUDGE PIPELINES UNDER GRAVITY AND PUMPED CONDITIONS
1 A B C
2 Calculation of Friction Losses in Sludge Pipelines
3 for Gravity conditions and pumped conditions
4 For Gravity Conditions
5 Pipe material considered is UPVC
6 value of Mannings n Enter from Table 3.11 0.0100
7 Discharge rate m3/day Enter by Designer 500
8 Discharge rate in litres per sec C7*1000/24/3600 5.79
9 Required velocity, m/sec Enter by Designer 1.20
10 Required area in sqcm (C8/C9/1000)*100*100 48.23
11 diameter in mm 10*SQRT(4*C10/3.14) 78.38
12 Hydraulic mean radius R in m C11/4/1000 0.0196
13 diameter in mm power 0.67 POWER(C11,0.67) 18.5830
14 Gradient power 0.5 C9*C6*1000/3.968/C13 0.1627
15 Gradient C14*C14 0.026
16 Length of pipeline, m Enter by Designer 100
17 Friction loss, m C15*C16 2.6484
18 Solids content of sludge in percent Enter by Designer 4
19 Friction compounding factor 2.88+(0.176*C18*C18)-0.866*C18 2.2320
20 Total friction head, m C17*C19 5.9113
21 Add safety factor at percent Enter by Designer 10
22 Design friction head, m C20*(1+(C21/100)) 6.502
23
A - 138
24 For Pumped Conditions of raw sludge
25 Pipe material considered is UPVC
26 Solids in sludge as percent Solids in sludge as percent 4
27 Value of Hazen C Value of Hazen C 53
28 Discharge in cum / day Discharge in cum / day 75
29 Discharge rate in litres per second Discharge rate in liters per second 0.87
30 Required velocity, m/sec Required velocity, m/sec 1.50
31 Required area in sqcm Required area in sqcm 5.79
32 diameter in mm diameter in mm 27.15
33 diameter in mm power 0.67 diameter in mm power 0.67 9.13
34 Gradient power 0.54 Gradient power 0.54 0.678
35 Gradient Gradient 0.488
36 Length of pipeline, m Length of pipeline, m 15
37 Friction loss, m Friction loss, m 7.314
38 Friction compounding factor Friction compounding factor 3
39 Total friction head, m Total friction head, m 21.94
40 Add safety factor at percent Add safety factor at percent 10
41 Design friction head, m Design friction head, m 22.3
42 Number of tees Number of tees 2
43 Friction factor for tee Friction factor for tee 1.5
44 Number of valves Number of valves 2
45 Friction factor for valve Friction factor for valve 1.4
46 Total friction co-efficient Total friction co-efficient 6
47 velocity head, m velocity head, m 0.11
48 Friction loss in bends & tees Friction loss in bends & tees 0.67
49 Other Losses, m Other Losses, m 0.33
50 Total friction loss, m Total friction loss, m 23.27
A - 139
APPENDIX A 6.4
DESIGN EXAMPLE OF SLUDGE DIGESTERS
Design low rate and high rate digesters for digesting mixed primary and activated sludge from a
50,000 m3/day capacity activated sludge Wastewater Treatment Plant.
1 GIVEN
a) Raw effluent suspended solids (SS) concentration = 400 mg/l

b) SS removal efficiency in the primary sedimentation tank = 75 %
c) Therefore, quantity of primary sludge generated
(0.4 kg/m3 x 50,000 m3/day x 0.75) = 15,000 kg/day
d) At 4% consistency or 40 kg/m3 SS concentration,
primary sludge volume (15,000 kg/day - 40 kg/m3) = 375 m3/day
e) The excess activated sludge generated = 2,630 kg/day
f) At 1% consistency or SS concentration of 10 kg/m3 the excess
activated sludge volume (2,630 kg/day - 10 kg/m3) = 263 m3/day
g) Total volume of the raw mixed sludge (375 + 263) = 638 m3/day
h) Total quantity of the raw mixed sludge (15,000 - 2,630) = 17,630 kg/day
i) SS concentration of the raw mixed sludge
(17,630 kg/day - 638 m3/day) = 27.6 kg/ m3]
j) The approximate percentage of volatile matters (VM)
in the mixed sludge = 70 %
k) Quantity of VM in the raw mixed sludge (0.7 x 17,630) = 12,341 kg/day
l) Quantity of Non-VM or inorganic (0.3 x 17,630) = 5,289 kg/day
* 1% consistency = 10,000 mg/l = 10 kg/m3
LOW RATE DIGESTER
a) Approximate percentage destruction of VM

(design value) = 50%
b) For achieving 50 % VM destruction, under mesophilic
conditions, the HRT required (from Figure.6.5) = 40 day
c) Quantity of VM in the digested sludge (0.5 x 12,341) = 6,170 kg/day
d) Quantity of non-volatile matters or inorganic matters
in the digested sludge = 5,289 kg/day
e) Total quantity of solids in the digested sludge
(6,170 + 5,289) = 11,459 kg/day
f) Percentage of VM in the digested sludge
(6,170 + 11,459) = 53.80 %
g) Percentage of inorganic matter in the digested sludge
(5,289 + 11,459) = 46.20 %
h) Depending on the frequency of sludge withdrawal the consistency of the digested sludge
withdrawn from the low rate digester is expected to be in the range of 4 - 6 %.
A - 140
i) For an average consistency of 5 % (or 50 kg/ m3),

the volume of digested sludge (11,459 - 50) = 229 m3/day
j) Therefore the volume of digester
V = [Vf - 2/3 (Vf - Vd)] T1
= [638 - 2/3 (638 - 229)] * 40
= 14,624 m3
Check for volatile solids loading rate kg VSS/day/m3
= 12,341 - 14,624 = 0.84 kg VSS/day/m3
(The VSS loading is within the permissible range - 0.6 to 1.6 kg VSS/day/m3)
3 GAS GENERATION
a) Gas production per kg of VM destroyed = 0.9 m3

b) Total gas generation (0.9m3/kg VM * 6,170 kg VM/day) = 6,039 m3
c) To avoid foaming, the minimum surface area required
to meet the condition - 9 m3 of gas generated per
day per m2 surface area, will be (6,039 - 91) = 617 m2
d) For operational flexibility and constructional reasons, it is suggested
to install two digesters of the following dimensions.
e) Volume of each digester (14,624 m3 - 2) = 7,312 m3
f) Minimum surface area of each digester (617 m2 - 2) = 309 m2
g) Choosing the digester shape as a low, vertical cylinder and for
a diameter of 34 m, the surface area of each digester will be = 908 m2
h) Therefore the effective digester depth will be
(7,312 m3 - 908 m2) = 8.0 m
4 ADDITIONAL VOLUME
a) Volume for sludge storage during the monsoon period -w hen the sludge drying bed option
is used for sludge dewatering = Vd * T2
b) For a storage period of 12 days (229 m3/day * 12 days) = 2,748 m3
c) Equivalent to 2,748 m3 - 908 m2 = 3.0 m
d) Additional allowance for grit and scum Accumulation = 0.6 m
e) Free board = 0.6 m
f) Therefore total additional depth = 4.2 m
Two digesters - each of 34 m diameters & 12.2 m depth
5 HIGH RATE DIGESTERS
a) For a sludge temperature of 24C, the Solids Retention Time (SRT) required for 50% VSS
destruction (refer Table 6.10) = 20 days
b) Therefore the digester volume will be = 638 * 20
c) (Volume of fresh sludge * Retention time) = 12,760 m3
d) Choosing two digesters, the capacity of each digester will be:
Volume (12,760 m3 - 2) = 6,380 m3
A - 141
e) Choosing a diameter of 27 m, the effective depth will be = 11.2 m

f) Additional allowance for grit accumulation = 0.5 m
g) Free board = 0.6 m
h) Total additional depth = 1.1 m
Two digesters of 27 m diameter and 12.3 m depth
Additional, separate sludge holding facility for storage during monsoon period (when sludge drying
bed option is used for dewatering) is to be computed as before.
Figure A6.4-1 Typical Details of Low rate Sludge Digester
A - 142
APPENDIX A 6.5
DESIGN EXAMPLE OF SLUDGE DRYING BEDS
1 PROBLEM STATEMENT
Design sludge drying beds tor digested sludge obtained from low rate anaerobic digesters for
digesting a mixture of primary and excess activated sludge. The capacity of activated sludge plant is
50,000 m3/d and following data is assumed:
i) Volume of digested sludge = 229 m3/day

(Refer to design example on
low rate anaerobic digester
in Appendix 6.4)
ii) Dewatering, drying and sludge

removal cycle 10 d
iii) Depth of application of sludge 0.3 m
2 SOLUTION
i) Total plan area of sludge drying
ii) Number of beds is assumed to be = 30
iii) If per capita wastewater flow is assumed as 150 lpcd
Contributory design population = 5 0 ,0 0 0 x lO 3

= 3,33,333
150
Plan area of sludge drying bed = 7,633 - 3,33,333 = 0.023 m2/capita
Figure A6.5-1 Typical details of sludge drying bed
A - 143
Appendix A7-1
Table of Micro Nutrients to be added to biological systems per month till MLSS builds up to 3000 mg/l for continuous flow reactors (Source, Eckenfelder)
A B C D E F G H I J K
Sewage in MLD 4 BOD at Inlet 300
mg per mg per
Atomic Market Chemical Chemical Formula Molecular Kg Rs Cost
mg of BOD mg of BOD
per per
Weight as element Weight as compound per Kg
month month
(m a y
v a ry )
Calcium Ca 40 0.0062 Calcium carbonate CaCo3 100 0.0155 18.60 120 2232.00
Cobalt Co 58 0.00013 Cobaltic chloride CoCI2(6H20) 238 0.000533448 0.64 3400 2176.47
Copper Cu 64 0.00015 Cupric sulphate Cu(S04) 160 0.000375 0.45 340 153.00
Ferrous ammonium
Iron Fe 56 0.012 FeS04 (NH4)2(S04) (6 H20) 392 0.084 100.80 260 26208.00
sulphate
Magnesium
Magnesium Mg 24 0.003 MgCI2 95 0.011875 14.25 200 2850.00
chloride
Manganese
Manganese Mn 55 0.0001 MnCI2(4H20) 198 0.00036 0.43 280 120.96
chloride
Molybdenum Mo 96 0.00043 Molybdic acid MoS2 106 0.000474792 0.57 3500 1994.13
Potassium K 39 0.0045 Potassium chloride KCI 75 0.008653846 10.38 240 2492.31
Selenium Se 79 0.0014 Selenium chloride SeCI4 228.825 0.004055127 4.87
Sodium Na 23 0.00005 Sodium chloride NaCI 59 0.000128261 0.15 120 18.47
Zinc Zn 66 0.00016 Zinc oxide ZnO 82 0.000198788 0.24 300 71.56
Rs/KI 0.32
The values in colum n (I) are for the indicated feed raw sewage of 4 MLD and feed raw BOD of 300 mg / 1, For other values, it will be prorate.
For exam ple, if raw sewage is 20 MLD and raw BOD is 450 mg/l, Ca need will be 18.6 * (20*450) / (4*300) = 140
These can be added even in shorter intervals than a month if the need arises. C ost of chem icals as given is only for illustrative calculations.
A - 144
Appendix A7-2
Table of Micro Nutrients to be added to biological systems per month till MLSS builds up to 3000 mg/l for batch flow reactors
A B C D E F G H I J K
volume of reactor in cum 1500 BOD of feed 200

mg mg
Atomic per mg of Market Chemical Chemical Formula Molecular per mg of Kg Rs Cost
BOD BOD
as per per
Weight as element Weight per Kg
compound month month
(may
vary)
Calcium Ca 40 0.0062 Calcium carbonate CaCo3 100 0.0155 4.65 120 558.00
0.00053344
Cobalt Co 58 0.00013 Cobaltic chloride CoCI2(6H20) 238 0.16 3400 544.12
8
Copper Cu 64 0.00015 Cupric sulphate Cu(S04) 160 0.000375 0.11 340 38.25
Ferrous ammonium FeS04 (NH4)2(S04)(6 6552.0
Iron Fe 56 0.012 392 0.084 25.20 260
sulphate H20) 0
Magnesiu
Mg 24 0.003 Magnesium chloride MgCI2 95 0.011875 3.56 200 712.50
m
Manganes
Mn 55 0.0001 Manganese chloride MnCI2(4H20) 198 0.00036 0.11 280 30.24
e
Molybden 0.00047479
Mo 96 0.00043 Molybdic acid MoS2 106 0.14 3500 498.53
um 2
0.00865384
Potassium K 39 0.0045 Potassium chloride KCI 75 2.60 240 623.08
6
0.00405512
Selenium Se 79 0.0014 Selenium chloride SeCI4 228.825 1.22
7
0.00012826
Sodium Na 23 0.00005 Sodium chloride NaCI 59 0.04 120 4.62
1
0.00019878
Zinc Zn 66 0.00016 Zinc oxide ZnO 82 0.06 300 17.89
8
Rs/day 1368
The values in colum n (I) are fo r the indicated feed volum e of reactor of 1500 cum & feed raw BOD of 200 mg / 1. For other values, it will be
prorate. For exam ple, if volum e of reactor is 2500 cum and raw BOD is 450 mg/l, Ca need will be 4.65*2500*450/1500 / 200 = 17.44
These can be added even in shorter intervals than a month if the need arises.
A - 145
APPENDIX A 7.3
CASE STUDIES IN RECYCLING AND REUSE OF SEWAGE
A complete documentation of all the technologies, design basis and engineering practices will be
not only voluminous but also not directly applicable in every other place and as such, only the key
issues are brought out here and a reference is available in the end for a detailed learning of these
comprehensively. The case studies are arranged in the following order:
1. Agriculture
2. Farm Forestry
3. Horticulture
4. Toilet flushing
5. Industrial and commercial
6. Fish culture
7. Groundwater recharge
8. Indirect recharge of impoundments
1 AGRICULTURE
The risk in using inadequately treated sewage in agriculture in general poses the health hazards as
enunciated by the WHO and extracted hereunder.
Table A7.3- 1 Health hazards of inadequately treated sewage in agriculture
Type of pathogen / infection Relative excess of frequency of infection or disease
Intestinal nematode infections

(Ascaris lumbricoidus, Trichuris High
trichiura, hookworm)
Bacterial infections
Bacterial diarrtieas Lower
(e.g. cholera, typhoid)
Viruses
Viral diarrheas Lowest
Hepatitis A
Source: World Health Organization 1989
These infections can virtually reduce the effective man days by as much as even 50 % especially in
rural habitations where neither prophylaxis not cure is easily accessible and if at all, financially in out
of reach unless subsidized. It is not that sewage cannot be used at all. It only requires appropriate
treatment. The reported specific experiences are hereunder.
1.1 ISRAEL
There are approximately 200 numbers of deep surface reservoirs in operation throughout the
country with a total storage capacity of 150 Mm3 that are used to store treated sewage during the
winter season and the water is then used during the summer season for irrigation crops and animal
fodder thus reusing nearly 70% of the treated sewage which equates to nearly 400 Mm3 per year.
The Dan Region reuse system serves the Tel Aviv metropolitan area treats 120 Mm3/year of Tel Aviv
sewage which is stored in recharge aquifer basins and then pumped from recovery wells and
conveyed to irrigation. The Kishon facilities treat 32 Mm3/year of sewage from the Haifa metropolitan
A - 146
area and the treated sewage is conveyed beyond 30 km where it is blended with local storm water
and stored in a 12 Mm3 reservoir for irrigation of 15,000 ha of cotton and other non-edible crops.
There are 3 other similar reuse projects in the Jeezrael Valley for 8 Mm3/year, Gedera for 1.5 Mm3/
year and Getaot Kibbutz for 0.14 Mm3/year. This emphasises the importance of reuse projects.
1.2 TALLAHASSEE, FLORIDA, US
The Tallahassee agricultural reuse system is a cooperative operation where the city owns and
maintains the irrigation system, while the farming service is under contract to commercial enterprise.
The reuse dates back to 1966 and until 1980, was limited to irrigation of 50 ha of land used for hay
production. Based upon success of the early studies and experience, new spray field has been
expanded to approximately 840 ha with an application rate of 8 cm per week on the soils of 95% sand
and interspersed clay layer at a 10 m depth and the field is sloping from 21m to 6m above sea level.
The treated sewage meets BOD of 20 mg/l for BOD and TSS and MPN of 200 per 100 ml for faecal
Coliform and is pumped over 13 km and distributed via 16 centre-pivot irrigation units. Major crops
are corn, soybeans, coastal Bermuda grass, and rye with the rye and Bermuda grass being grazed
by cattle, though some of the Bermuda grass is harvested as hay and haylage.
1.3 AFRICA
Raw sewage farming for vegetables is used in Eritrea in Northeast Africa in an area of 124,320 km2
and a 3.5 million population set at 1,700 m above sea level with water scarcity which forces the
crudely treated sewage use for vegetables. The pathogens detected in the vegetables are shown
hereunder:
Table A7.3- 2 Pathogen detected in vegetables grown from crudely treated sewage
at Eritrea, Africa
Faecal coliform E. Coli Giardia

Types of Sam pling No. of
vagetables grown sites sam ple No. + ve %. + ve No. + ve %. + ve No. + ve %. + ve
C abbage 4 8 6 75 6 75 4 50
Lettuce 4 12 11 96.6 6 96.6 6 50
G.vegetable 4 12 12 100 11 100 3 25
Tomatoes 3 9 9 100 12 100 2- 22.0
C arrots 3 9 6 66.6 9 66.6 ND _
C ucurbits 3 6 6 100 6 100 ND _
Total 16 62
ND indicates not dctocted.

Note: No Salm onclla w a s detected, Shigella w as detocted in one let tuce sam ple.
The faecal Coliforms in the sewage used for irrigation was 4 *1 0 4 to 13*109 per litre as compared
to a limit of 1,000 per 100 ml and in the vegetables it was 2 *1 0 3 to 4^10 per kg. Among the local
farmers in the field, out of a sample of 75 persons, 34 had Giardia Lamblia. But there was surprisingly
no detection of round worm or hook worm, Shigella or Salmonella. This might have been due to the
combination of prophylactic methods in treading on farm soil and drinking water sources were not
affected by sewage but eating green salad as a standard practice.
A - 147
1.4 FINDINGS BY THE LONDON SCHOOL OF TROPICAL MEDICINE & INTERNATIONAL

WATER MANAGEMENT INSTITUTE, HYDERABAD, INDIA
An evaluation of the situation at Hyderabad when the city sewage was not treated and used for
irrigation of nearly 3,100 hectares of land downstream of the discharge river course and the quality
issues are hereunder:
Table A7.3- 3 Effect of exposure to untreated sewage and partially treated sewage on Ascaris
Lumbricoides, Hookworm, Heavy hookworm and Trichuris Trichiura infection at Hyderabad
W a te r
C h a r a c te r is tic q u a lity , O R *l 95% C I P
o v a / lit e r
A. lumbricoides * 2
R iv e r w a te r 0 1.0
P a r t ia lly tr e a te d w a s te w a te r 12 3 .2 1 .2 -8 .6 0 .0 2
U n tr e a te d w a s te w a te r 70 5 .3 2 .0 - 1 4 0.001
H o o k w o rm *3
P a r t ia lly tr e a te d w a s te w a te r 15 0 .7 0 .4 -1 .1 0.11
U n tr e a te d w a s te w a te r 76 3 .5 2 .2 -5 .5 < 0 .0 0 1
H o o k w o r m (e p g > 1 6 0 ) * 4
R iv e r w a te r 0 1 .0
P a r t ia lly tr e a te d w a s te w a te r 15 0 .8 0 3 -2 .2 0 .6 5
U n tr e a te d w a s te w a te r 76 3 .9 1 .5 -9 .9 0 .0 0 4
T. trichiura*5
P a r t ia lly tr e a te d w a s te w a te r 0 .3 0 .6 0 2 -2 .5 0 .5 3
U n tr e a te d w a s te w a te r 4 5 .6 1 .8 -1 8 0 .0 0 3
*1 OR = odds ratio, CI = confidence interval: epg = eggs per gram (of feces).
*2 Controlled for age. sex. education, and household clustering,
*3 Controlled for age. education, caste, latrine presence, and household clustering.
*4 Controlled for age. sex. education, type of water supply, agricultural activities involved in. and
household clustering.
*5 Controlled for sex. education, and household clustering.
Although this study was unable to provide conclusive evidence about the validity of the current
WHO wastewater nematode guideline, the findings suggest that for A lumbricoides and T trichiura
infection, the WHO nematode guideline of less than or equal to one ova per litre is appropriate but
the nematode guideline of less than or equal to one per litre when exposed to children is too strict. No
increased risk of hookworm infection was detected when wastewater with a mean concentration of
A - 148
15 ova per litre was used, which would suggest that at least for the risk of hookworm infection, the
WHO nematode guideline is too strict and a more lenient guideline can be set if hookworm species is
the predominant ova in wastewater. However, more studies are needed to confirm this suggestion.
1.5 FINDINGS OF THE INSTITUTE OF PUBLIC HEALTH LAHORE AND INTERNATIONAL

WATER MANAGEMENT INSTITUTE, LAHORE, PAKISTAN
The study was carried out around the town of Haroonabad a small town with about 80,000
inhabitants in the southern part of the Punjab Province in Pakistan. Around this town agricultural
areas are irrigated with untreated urban wastewater for about 30 years for vegetables sold in the city.
In the middle of this main site there is a colony and most farmers live here. There are two peri-urban
settlements and all three settlements are connected with the municipal relative reliable water supply.
There is an organized system for disposal of sewage water in a pond, either by drains or pipes or
by carts. The farmers in the villages use canal or tube well water. This provides as ideal setting for a
relative evaluation of farm workers from sewage farm and fresh water farm. The findings of incidence of
diseases related to the practices are extracted hereunder:
Table A7.3- 4 Prevalence of diseases by exposure to wastewater with odds ratio and
95% confidence interval
Disease Exposed Unexposed OR 96% Cl

Diarrhea 11 7% (23) 6 .2% (17) 2.00 1.04-3.85
Diarrtea complicated with fever 56% (11) 1.8% (5) 3.18 1. 09-9.31
Dysentery 0.5% (1) 0 - -
Skin problems 30% (6) 5.8% (16) 0.51 0.20-1.32

Nail problems 7 1% (14) 2 .2% (6) 3.42 1.29-9.05
Typhoid 0 0.7% (2) - -
Fever/cold 11 7% (23) 11.7% (32) 1.00 0 .5 7 -1 .7 7

Total number of health questionnaires 197 274
Figure A7.3- 1 Prevalence of diseases in male adult farm workers and children by exposure to
wastewater
A - 149
The classical finding of this study was the health guidelines for faecal coliform bacteria in
wastewater from the WHO seem difficult to realize in the tropical climate of the Punjab Province, since
canal water also exceeds the guidelines regularly. However, an appropriate form of treatment of
wastewater for helminth eggs and faecal coliform bacteria before application to the fields is highly
recommended. If treatment is not possible because of the high costs, other protective measures
should be taken. Low cost interventions could include information on hygiene behaviour for farmers,
wearing of shoes and gloves while working in wastewater irrigated fields, regular treatment of farmers
and their families with anti-helminthic drugs and crop restrictions in wastewater irrigated fields.
1.6 FINDINGS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF JERUSALEM
Though this study covers an outdated period of early 20th century, the lessons there from are worth
learning for posterity. Some the extracts from this study are shown hereunder:
Figure A7.3- 2 Persistence of selected enteric pathogens in water, wastewater,

soil and crops
Figure A7.3- 3 Relationship between Ascaris-positive stool samples in the population of western
Jerusalem and supply of vegetable and salad crops irrigated with raw wastewater in Jerusalem,
1935-1982
A - 150
Figure A7.3- 4 Wastewater irrigation of vegetable and Ascaris prevalence in Darmstadt, Berlin and
other German cities, 1949
Figure A7.3- 5 Seasonal variation in typhoid fever cases in Santiago and the rest of Chile (average
rates, 1977-1983)
Figure A7.3- 6 Intensity of parasitic infection in sewage farm workers and controls in
various regions of India
A - 151
Their findings concluded that the WHO guidelines for crops eaten uncooked (and on pasture land
where farm animals are grazed) that an effluent must contain one or fewer helminth eggs per litre,
with a geometric mean of faecal coliforms not exceeding 1,000/100 ml can be readily achieved with
low-cost, robust stabilization pond systems which are particularly suited to developing countries and
high levels of pathogen removal can be achieved by such low-cost systems as shown hereunder.
Table A7.3- 5 WHO Recommended microbiological quality guidelines for wastewater

use in agriculture
Intrstinal Faecal Wastewater

Nematodes (b) Coliforms Treatment expected to
Category Reuse Exposed
(arithmetic (geometric Achieve the required
conditions group
Mean no. of Mean no. per microbiological
Eggs per litre) 100ml) quality
A Irrigation of crops Workers, <1 < 1,000 A series of tabilisation

Likely to be eaten Consumers, Ponds desigied to achieve
Uncooked, sports Public The microbik equivalent
Fields, public indicated, or equivalent
Parks (d) Treatment
B Irrigation of cereal Workers <1 No standard Retention in stabilisation
crops, industrial recommended ponds for 8-10 days or
crops, fodder crops, equivalent helminth and
pasture and trees|e) faecal coliform removal
C Localised Irrigation None Not applicable Not applicable Pre - treatment as required
Of crops in category B by the irrigation
If exposure of Technology, but not less
workers and the public than primary sedimentation
Does not occur
A) In specific cases, local epidemiological, socio - cultural and environmertal factors should be taken into account, and guidelines modified accordingly
b) Ascaris and Trichuris species and hookworms
c) During the irrigation Period
d) A more stringent guidetion (<200 faecal coliforms /100m l) is appropriate for public lawns, such as hotel lawns, with the public may come into
direct contact
e) In the case of fruit L e e s , irrigation should cease two weeks before fruit is picked, and no fruit should be picked off the ground. Sprinkler
Treatm ent phases
Figure A7.3- 7 Generalized removal curves for BOD, helminth eggs, excreted bacteria and viruses
in waste stabilization ponds at temperatures above 20C
A - 152
This study is of great relevance to India in appropriately treating the sewage of rural habitations by
such natural pond systems without complicating sophisticated treatment technologies and ensuring
the safe reuse of pond effluents for potential agriculture of non-edible crops. In 1970, an outbreak
of cholera of some 200 cases occurred in Jerusalem and investigation provided a strong evidence
that the main route of transmission was through the consumption of vegetables, including lettuce and
cucumbers illegally irrigated with untreated sewage from Jerusalem and which villagers sold door-to-
door throughout the city.
1.7 FINDINGS OF NEERI IN INDIA
A study of stool examinations of workers at five large sewage farms at Jaipur, Madras, Hyderabad,
Trivandrum and Pune in India during 1973 revealed that out of 466 samples from sewage farm
workers compared with 432 samples from a control population for the presence of Ancylostoma
duodenale (hook worm), Ascaris lumbricoides (round worm), Trichuris trichiura (whip worm),
Enterobius vermicularis (pin worm), Hymenolepis nana (dwarf tapeworm), Entamoeba histolytica and
Giardia intestinalis, the incidence and multiplicity of infection was greater in sewage farm workers.
1.8 GUANAJUATO RIVER BASIN, MEXICO, SEWAGE RIGHTS ISSUES
The total sewage generated in Guanajuatos 46 municipalities is 567 MLD and could be used for
agricultural of 20,000 ha. There is little or no expected impact on the nutrient value resulting from
treatment, given that the nutrient requirements of the principal crop, alfalfa, would continue to be met
even after treatment. Additionally, other sources of untreated urban wastewater enter the river down
stream of the treatment plant, entailing sufficiently high nutrient loads that little effect of treatment was
perceptible to the farmers. The benefits from the waste solid sludge are being lost because these
go directly to a landfill instead of being spread on agricultural land. The areas of further study are
(a) the conditions required for wastewater markets to function, specifically commercial feasibility for
irrigation use of treated vs. untreated wastewater, pricing and supply mechanisms, etc. (b) water
rights conflicts, (c) hydrological impact of selling the treated water outside the sub-basin, (d) water
quality assessment of the final use, e.g. at the farm level for irrigation and (e) accounting for the
nutrients lost in the treatment process. This is a classical case of inter basin rights of
treated sewage.
1.9 TYPHOID FEVER OUTBREAK IN SANTIAGO, CHILE
In 1978 and 1983, the outbreak of typhoid fever in Santiago has been reported due to the use of
untreated sewage for the irrigation of 13,500 ha of tomatoes, lettuce, cabbage, celery and cauliflower
that were consumed raw.
1.10 THE SULAIBIA REUSE FACILITY, KUWAIT
By far the worlds largest of its kind, this facility extends the secondary sewage treatment beyond the
conventional limits to nutrients removal, ultra filtration and reverse osmosis to a mammoth scale of
375 MLD with provision to expand to 600 MLD and when commissioned in 2004, it won Wastewater
Project of the Year in the 2005 Global Water Awards and described by the judges as a "Powerful
A - 153
statement of the future of water resources across the whole Middle East and North Africa region . The
agriculture and industry demands were met till then by brackish ground water which slowly increased
in its salt concentration and this project seeks to reverse it by substituting the agriculture and industry
demands and aquifer recharge as well. The sale price for kilolitre was $ 0.60 for freshwater, 0.08 for
secondary sewage and 0.15 for RO treated sewage it being colourless, clear and sparkling.
2 FARM FORESTRY
2.1 ABU DHABI
It is extensively practiced since 1976. The system, designed for 190 MLD is a dual distribution
network for irrigation of 15,000 ha of urban forests, public gardens, trees, shrubs, and grassed
areas along roadways. Secondary treated sewage is further provided tertiary treatment with rapid
sand filtration, chlorination and ozonation. The infra-structure is painted purple and labelled to avoid
any cross-connections.
2.2 EGYPT
Egypt exports some fruits and vegetables and hence use of treated sewage is impossible in this
segment. However, considering the barren sandy terrain, the ministry promulgates a policy of
"Treated sewage + sandy desert soil = Green Trees and already 1,800 hectares are under cultivation
with Eucalyptus, Mahogany, African Mahogany, Terminalia, Acacia and Neem trees with irrigation by
modified flood or drip irrigation.
2.3 WOODBURN, OREGON, USA
In 1999, Woodburn was ready to discharge 6 MLD of treated sewage through micro-spray sprinklers
into its newly developed 40 hectare poplar tree plantation. Sewage is treated using a biological
nutrient removal aeration basin, a clarifier, sand filters, disinfection in an ultraviolet unit, chlorination
and is pumped into a manifold system to the plantation through an underground piping system where
micro-spray sprinklers are used and there is a 10 m offset to the property line where irrigation does
not occur. In addition, the plantation is completely fenced and surrounded by signs warning intrud
ers that treated effluent is being discharged. The irrigation system can be shut down in 2.5 hectare
blocks, providing the capability for spot irrigation and operated from a microcomputer. The field was
ploughed, levelled, and then grass and 10 cm cuttings were planted into the bare ground and when
irrigated, they had a weed control problem and had to manually remove the grass from around the
cuttings. This would condition the soil and there wouldnt be any weeds. Then they would plant the
trees in the stream lines and rows without disturbing the soil. This way, grass was already growing
and weeds were not a big problem. This natural system creates an attractive habitat for wildlife,
provides 30 to 50% more evapotranspiration capacity than would a different crop of equal size, and
provides a new source of revenue. Trees can be harvested every 7 to 12 years, and revenue from
the sale of woodchips can be used to offset a portion of the capital and operation and maintenance
costs of the system. The city plans to expand the facility every 5 years to match population growth.
By 2020, the site will cover 140 hectares acres and will reuse 20 MLD of treated sewage.
A - 154
2.4 WIDE BAY WATER CORPORATION, QUEENSLAND, AUSTRALIA
Wide Bay Water Corporation has come up with a winning solution for the dispersal of their treated
sewage by recycling it onto a timber plantation of 300,000 trees on 220 hectares as of 2008 with
expansion plans to a million trees by 2010 by a centrally controlled automated drip irrigation system
from two sewage treatment plants. A 130 micron disc filtration technology was used to pre filter the
treated sewage before putting into the drip irrigation. The monitoring consisted of a central base unit
which is interfaced to a PC for ease of programming, viewing system status, water usage, graphing
and SMS alarming, as well as graphical mapping and additional management programs. Currently,
the base unit manages the RF communications to three, UHF radio linked field units which are
installed at each of the main pumping sites. Additional sensors were installed to monitor water flow,
pH and dam levels. The remote infield valve control and water meter monitoring was automated by
Piccolo XR s. The Piccolo XRs utilize a low power licensed UHF radio, latching output technology
and store & forward (repeater) communications. This combination allows low cost, yet simple and
reliable communication to the remote fields. A wireless monitoring system was also installed at the
site to record local environmental factors, such as a weather station to monitor temperature, humid
ity, solar radiation, wind speed, rainfall and ET. Soil moisture probes were installed at keys sites to
monitor the effects of irrigation, localized rainfall, drainage and plant uptake in the soil profile. The
plantation is stated to have won a Federal Government for Innovation in Irrigation, were both financial
and environmental.
2.5 AL BIREH, PALESTINE
The sewage treatment facility is designed for 5.7 MLD with extended aeration followed by gravel
media filtration for turbidity reduction, a chlorine-dosing unit calibrated to inject chlorine at a rate of
2 mg/l and 400 L vessel that retained the chlorinated water for 30 minutes. No fertilizer was applied
in addition to the nutrients presents in the reclaimed wastewater. A nursery of 600 m2 for annual
cultivation of 80,000 seedlings of indigenous trees and cooked vegetables with irrigation system of
micro-drippers was opted for. The eggplants were sterilized to ensure a safe distance of 50 cm from
the drip lines. Two types of effluents are used being high quality effluent with drip irrigation and very
high quality effluent with subsurface irrigation. The regulations, applications and achievements are
shown hereunder.
Table A7.3- 6 Summary of Al-Bireh WWTP reclaimed water use achievements
Effluent Type Regulation Application Achievements
BOD/TSS Orchard, olives,
High quality less than 20/30 mg/l, Ornamentals Grape stocks High growth
Faecal Coliform Processed vegetables High yield
less than 1,000 MPN/100 ml Restricted area landscaping
Cooked vegetables High yield
Very high quality F.C non-detectable
Nursery (eggplants) No contamination
Effluent polishing
A - 155
Regular basis of the reclaimed water, soil and microbiological quality were tested. The test results
show that the tertiary treatment generates reclaimed water suitable for unrestricted agriculture reuse
application according to Israeli and US EPA guidelines. Crop quality tests showed that eggplants
irrigated with reclaimed water were not contaminated with faecal coliform and intestinal viruses. In
the nursery, seedling germination rates were high (>90%) and seedlings irrigated with the reclaimed
water showed high vegetative growth. The nursery and Alfalfa plantation are shown hereunder.
Figure A7.3- 8 Nursery and Alfalfa plantation at Al-Bireh facility
2.6 SEWAGE SUSTAINED VERMICOMPOSTING
In the matter of producing vermin compost for tree plantations, a study by University of Agricultural
Sciences, Dharwad, Karnataka found that sewage could be used in vermicomposting provided its
details with respect to composition of toxic substances are known.
3 HORTICULTURE
3.1 EL PASO TEXAS, USA
Because of declining reserves of fresh groundwater and an uncertain supply of surface water, the El
Paso Water Utilities has adopted a strategy to curtail irrigation use of potable water by substituting
reclaimed municipal effluent. This strategy has been implemented in stages, starting with irrigation of
a county-operated golf course using secondary effluent from the Haskell Plant, and a city-owned golf
course with tertiary treated effluent from the Fred Hervey Plant. The reuse projects were expanded
to use secondary effluent from the Northwest Plant to irrigate a private golf course, municipal parks,
and school grounds. Reclaimed water use from the Haskell Plant is also expanded to include parks
and school grounds. In these cases, the salinity of reclaimed water ranges from 680 to 1,200 ppm as
total dissolved salts (TDS) depending on the plant. Reclaimed water from the Hervey Plant has the
lowest salinity (680 ppm), and a large portion of it is now being injected into an aquifer for recovery
as potable water.
A - 156
3.2 DURBIN CREEK (WESTERN CAROLINA)
T he Durbin C reek W astew ater T reatm ent Facility located near Fountain Inn, South Carolina,
d isch arg es to Durbin C reek, a relatively sm all tributary of the E noree River. A verage flow from the
Durbin C reek Plant is 5 ,2 0 0 m 3/day with a p eak flow of 2 2 ,7 0 0 m 3/day during storm ev en ts. T he plant
is perm itted for an a v era g e flow of 1 2 ,5 0 0 m3/day. T he Durbin C reek plant is located on an 81 ha
site, half of w hich is w ood ed and the rem aining half cleared for land application of bio solid s. Hay is
harvested in the application fields. M uch of the land surrounding th e plant site is u sed a s a pasture
and for hay production without th e benefit of bio solid s applications.
3.3 CHANDIGARH
C handigarh is perhaps the first city to h ave d ev elo p ed infrastructure with pipe lines for a tertiary
treatm ent plant to cover the horticulture n e e d s of its v a st 1,50 0 h ectares by nearly 90 MLD out of
w hich 4 5 MLD capacity is in p lace and another 4 5 MLD is under com pletion.
3.4 DELHI
With the se w a g e volum e at about 4 ,4 0 0 MLD, planned reu se of treated se w a g e for d esig n ated
institutional cen tres h ave b een put in p lace a s (a) Luytens at 9 0 MLD, (b) J a p a n e se park at 35 MLD,
(c) minor irrigation departm ent at 3 5 0 MLD totalling 4 7 5 MLD.
4 TOILET FLUSHING
4.1 JAPAN
B e c a u se of the countrys density and limited w ater resou rces, w ater reclam ation and reu se program s
are not n ew to Japan. By 1995, 89.6% of cities larger than 5 0 ,0 0 0 p eo p le w ere sew ered , and 72%
of the inhabitants of th e se cities w ere served with a se w a g e collection sy stem . T herefore, buildings
being retrofitted for flush toilets and the construction of n ew buildings offer ex cellen t opportunities
for reu se. Initially, the countrys reu se program provided reclaim ed w ater to multi-family, com m ercial,
and sch ool buildings, with a reclam ation plant treating all of the w astew a ter for u se in toilet flushing
and other incidental non-potable pu rp oses. Later, m unicipal treatm ent w orks and reclaim ed w ater
sy ste m s w ere u sed together, a s part of a dual sy stem , providing m ore effective and econom ical
treatm ent than individual reclam ation facilities.
In 1998, reclaim ed w ater u se in Japan w a s 130 Mm3/year, with distribution a s sh ow n in Table A 7.1- 7.
At that tim e, about 40% of the reclaim ed w ater w a s being distributed in dual sy ste m s. O f this m ore
than 1/3 w a s being u sed for toilet flushing, and about 15% ea ch for urban irrigation and clean sin g. A
w ide variety of buildings w ere fitted for reclaim ed w ater u se, with sch o o ls and office buildings being
m ost num erous. In Tokyo, the u se of reclaim ed w ater is m andated in all n ew buildings that h ave floor
area larger than 3 0 ,0 0 0 m2. Japan offers a very goo d reu se m odel for cities in develop ing countries
b e c a u se its historical u sa g e is directly related to m eeting urban w ater n e e d s rather than only agri
cultural irrigation requirem ents. In addition, the reclaim ed w ater quality requirem ents in Japan are
different from the U .S., a s they are m ore stringent for coliform cou n ts for unrestricted u se, w hile being
le ss restrictive for other applications.
A - 157
Examples of large area water reclamation systems in Japan can be found in Chiba Prefecture, Kobe
City, and Fukuoka City. Outside the city limits of each of these urban areas, streams have been
augmented, parks and agricultural areas have been irrigated, and greenbelts established with
reclaimed water. The price of reclaimed water in these cities ranges from $0.83/m3 for residential use
to $2.99/m3 for business and other uses. This compares with a potable water price range of $1.08 to
$3.99/m3 (USEPA, 2004).
Table A7.3- 7 Uses of reclaimed water in Japan
Use Percent Mm3/year
Environmental Water 54% 63.9
Agricultural Irrigation 13% 15.9
Snow Melting 13% 15.3
Industrial Water 11% 12.6
Cleansing Water 9% 11.2
4.2 INDIAN SCENARIO
Reuse of treated sewage for toilet flush has been recognized as a means of water conservation
especially in high rise apartments, office complexes, multiplexes, etc. Generally, this flushing
consumes about 3 to 4 flushes per day per person and its volume will be about 20 to 30 litres daily.
When a 135 lpcd is supplied, by reusing these 30 litres per day per person, we still have to deal with
110 litres per capita daily and this has to be disposed outside the house. But then, the entire 135 lpcd
has to be treated before we can recover the 30 lpcd for toilet flush. Alternatively, there has to be twin
sewerage within the house so that milder grey water can be separately collected and treated with
less strenuous effort before reuse for flush. Such a system is least advisable especially in modern
urban habitations where the potential dangers of cross connection in plumbing and nuisance value of
dealing with a STP within the dwelling boundary are matters of great reluctance either to be enforced
or to be embraced by the occupants. That brings matters to two options namely, condominiums
to have such a facility as a centralized option for the entire condominium or a habitation to have a
dual pipeline from the STP back all the way to the dwellings supplying such toilet flush grade water.
Obviously, such a new dual pipeline all over the habitation is almost next to impossible to be
designed, implemented and attended to in O&M because, here is a system that will deliver as little as
30 lpcd and its design as a gravity pipeline discharging in short stints for rare timings in a 24 hours
cycle calls for a pressurized system. The net result of all this is the fact that these are possible only in
the case of condominiums and entirely new layouts. In India, the rule of culture far more outweighs the
practicalities and culturally, no one can be forced to avail a water supply originating from the refuse
A - 158
of the neighbour and receive it into his habitation. The Karnataka State Pollution Control Board
(KSPCB) has laid down that new layouts shall provide their own STPs by new urban standards juxta
posed with the erstwhile standards prescribed by MoEF/CPCB, and followed by KSPCB as well. An
extract of the same along with remarks thereon is furnished hereunder.
Table A7.3- 8 Discharge standards for surface water Vs urban reuse standards by KSPCB
No Parameters as per BIS Values as per BIS Proposed by KSPCB
1 pH 6.5-8.5 6.0 -9.0
2 BOD < 20 < 10
3 TSS < 30 Not specified
4 Oil & Grease <10 Not specified
5 Turbidity Not specified < 2 NTU
6 E. Coli Not specified NIL
7 Res. Chlorine Not specified > 1 PPM
All Units except pH and NTU in mg/l
Considering the E coli issue alone, total coliform is not addressed and thus, enteric viruses which
are specific for water borne epidemics through unintentional portals of entry are left out. Thus total
coliforms have to be not detected. The technology for this in the condominium scale can be the
ultrafiltration membranes which can function under low pressure and trap the viruses as shown in
Figure A7.3- 9 overleaf.
A - 159
Figure A7.3- 9 Membrane filtration spectrum
5 INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL
5.1 SAKAIHAMA TREATED WASTEWATER SUPPLY PROJECT, JAPAN
To ensure sustainable water supply in Sakaihama district advanced treatment process was
established at 3 STPs. Two types of advanced treatment processes are applied to the effluent
obtained from step-feed multistage biological nitrogen removal facilities: 33,000 m3/day of water is
produced using fibre filtration to be used for purposes (cooling water in large industries) in which
there is no contact with the human and 1,000 m3/day of water is produced using ozonation for uses
in which human contact is expected. Reclaimed water is supplied to large-scale company groups,
and small and medium-sized enterprises which include National Soccer Training Centre (NTC),
disaster prevention base, Sakai solid waste disposal plant, and local industries. In these facilities,
the reclaimed water is used for variety of purposes. In large-scale industries, it is mainly used for
cooling purposes, and in small industries it is used for toilet flushing and watering plants through
sprinkler. The use also includes sprinkling water over the football ground, and for fire extinguishing in
emergency cases. Some hydrants are installed on transmission pipelines for this purpose.
Sakai city depends on water supplies from Osaka Prefecture, for which the main source is Yodogawa
River. Considering increase in demand, it became important to secure additional water resources. To
ensure sustainable water supply in Sakaihama district (covering area of about 300 ha) and to restore
the environment in existing rivers, reuse of treated wastewater (advanced level) came into practice.
A - 160
For this purpose, advanced treatment process was established at 3 STPs. To achieve the objectives,
two types of advanced treatment processes are applied: 33,000 m3/day of water is produced using
fibre filtration to be used for purposes (cooling water in large industries) in which there is no contact
with the human and 1,000 m3/day of water is produced using ozonation for uses in which human
contact is expected.
The facilities used for supplying treated water in this project are as follows:
- One water supply pumping station
- 2 satellite treatment plants (ozonation)
- About 12 km of transmission pipelines
Reclaimed water is supplied to large-scale company groups, and small and medium-sized
enterprises which include National Soccer Training Centre (NTC), disaster prevention base, Sakai
solid waste disposal plant, and local industries. In these facilities, the reclaimed water is used for
variety of purposes. In large-scale industries, it is mainly used for cooling purposes, and in small
industries it is used for toilet flushing and watering plants through sprinkler. The use also includes
sprinkling water over the football ground, and for fire extinguishing in emergency cases. Some
hydrants are installed on transmission pipelines for this purpose.
Table A7.3- 9 Treated wastewater supply
User Quantity (m3/day) Proposed by KSPCB
Sakai National Training Centre (NTC) 400 Sprinkling on football ground
Disaster prevention base 500 Sprinkling
Solid waste disposal plant 20 Sprinkling
Local industry business cluster 80 Toilet flushing, Sprinkling
Large companies 33,000 Coolant
Total 34,000
A - 161
Figure A7.3- 10 Sakaihama treated wastewater reuse scheme
Table A7.3- 10 Quality of supplied treated wastewater
Parameter Fibre filtration water Ozonation water
E. Coli - Not detected
pH 5.8-8.6 5.8-8.6
Odour Not unpleasant Not unpleasant
Residual chlorine - Maintained
Appearance Not unpleasant Not unpleasant
Source: http://water.city.sakai.lg.jp/torikumi/file/konwakai4-03.pdf
5.2 BETHLEHEM STEEL MILLS, USA
Perhaps the first industrial use of treated sewage for industrial purpose was initiated here by Abel
Wolman. One of the largest reclaimed water user is the Bethlehem Steel Sparrows Point steel mill in
Baltimore. For many years, the plant used about 100 MGD of reclaimed water from the Back River
Wastewater Treatment Plant. The reclaimed water was used for contact cooling of steel and for other
process purposes in the mill.
5.3 HAWAII
The Sewage Treatment facility produces two grades of high-quality recycled water whereby the R-1
water is used for landscape, agriculture, and golf course irrigation, R-2 water which is the reverse
osmosis permeate is used for industrial purposes such as boiler feed water and ultra-pure process
water. The switching to RO water with only 1 ppm of silica turned into a savings for industrial users,
A - 162
as the ground water arising from filtering of rain water through the lava structure in the ground it picks
up between 60 to 70 ppm of silica which scales up the boilers costing the power
Figure A7.3- 11 Hawaii sewage reuse facility schematic
5.4 DURBAN, SOUTH AFRICA
Durban Metro experienced considerable pressure to provide basic services, including water, to its
growing domestic and industrial customers. The natural water resources were not sufficient to meet
the increasing demand. As a solution, the KwaZulu Natal pilot project was launched to install and
operate a new affordable distribution network for the townships under successful tri-sector partner
ship (public-private-NGOs). Durban Metro decided to go further by implementing a public-private
partnership water reuse project: the Durban Water Recycling project (DWR). The project included
treating primary sewage and re-purifying the reclaimed water to the capacity of 47,500 m3/d. As a
result, about 7% of Durbans wastewater is reclaimed as high quality water supplied to the Mondi
Paper Mill and SAPREF Refinery at a cost 25% lower than potable water instead of being discharged
to the sea. The purification of the wastewater is handled by the newly refurbished wastewater
treatment plant applying tertiary treatment using dual media filtration, ozonation, granulated carbon
filters and chlorination.
The municipal authority, called "Durban Metro, experienced a dramatic population increase and
customers increased from 1 million to nearly 3 million due to the incorporation of 30 local authori
ties and surrounding townships into the metropolitan area. As a result, Durban Metro experienced
considerable pressure to provide basic services to its growing domestic customers, among whom
26% lived in the townships and relied on standpipes for clean drinking water. Moreover, several
industries located in this area, such as Mondi Paper Mill and SAPREF refinery needed continuous
supply of high quality water for process and cooling purposes. Average rainfall in the region is 200
mm/year, and suffers from periodic droughts. Hence, the natural water resources are not sufficient
to meet the increasing demand.
A - 163
In order to develop a workable solution to the water and sanitation problems, the KwaZulu Natal
pilot project was launched as a part of the Worldwide "Business Partners for Development (BPD)
programme created by the World Bank in 1998. This project allowed Durban Metro to install and
operate a new affordable distribution network for the townships through innovations in service
delivery and tariff structures - first 200 l/day of water was free for domestic customers. This was the
result of a successful tri-sector partnership (public-private-NGOs).
Considering the success of this first initiative, Durban Metro decided to go further by
implementing a public-private partnership water reuse project: the Durban Water Recycling project
(DWR). The project included treating primary sewage and re-purifying the reclaimed water to the
capacity of 47,500 m3/d. As a result, about 7% of Durbans wastewater is reclaimed as high quality
water supplied to the Mondi Paper Mill and SAPREF Refinery at a cost 25% lower than potable
water instead of being discharged to the sea. The purification of the wastewater is handled by
the newly refurbished wastewater treatment plant which includes tertiary treatment including dual
media filtration, ozonation, granulated carbon filters and chlorination. (Mediterranean Wastewater
Reuse Working Group, 2007).
6 FISH CULTURE
6.1 HANOI, VIETNAM
Hanoi, the capital of Vietnam has a major system of wastewater reuse involving vegetables, rice as
well as fish in low lying Tranh Tri district which lies to the south of the city. Wastewater and storm
water are discharged untreated, to four small rivers which play a dual role: drainage of wastewater
from the city; and wastewater supply for reuse in agriculture and aquaculture. The system of waste
water reuse has largely been developed by the district farmers and local community over the past 40
years. After 1960s, land use stabilized into vegetable cultivation on higher land, rice/fish cultivation
on medium level land, and year-round pond fish culture on deeper land adjacent to the main irrigation
and drainage canals. Wastewater-fed aquaculture became the major occupation of cooperatives with
easy access to wastewater.
The local aquaculture research institute provided seed of exotic fish species, and fish hatcheries and
nurseries were developed by farmers. Farmers also learnt how to regulate the introduction of waste
water to produce fish. The major species are silver carp, rohu, and tilapia. Yields of fish of 3-8 tonnes/
ha are harvested annually, lower yields from rice/fish and higher from pond culture.
Hanoi, the capital of Vietnam has a major system of wastewater reuse involving vegetables, rice as
well as fish in low lying Tranh Tri district which lies to the south of the city. Produce from the reuse
system provides a significant part of the diet of the citys people.
Wastewater and storm water are discharged untreated, about 320,000 m3/day, to four small
rivers that play a dual role: drainage of wastewater from the city; and wastewater supply for reuse in
agriculture and aquaculture. In 2009, only one wastewater treatment plant was reported to be
operational and 3 treatment plants under construction. About one-third of the city is sewered. The
wastewater is 75-80% domestic and 20-25% industrial.
A - 164
Source: UNEP webpage: http://www.unep.or.jp/ietc/publications/techpublications/techpub

15/2-9/9-3-1.asp
Figure A7.3- 12 Raw wastewater being pumped into wastewater-fed fish ponds in Hanoi
The system of wastewater reuse has largely been developed by the district farmers and local
community over the past 30 years. Before 1960 the area was a sparsely populated swamp where
rice was grown but with low yields and frequent flooding. Following the formation of cooperatives in
1967, land use stabilized into vegetable cultivation on higher land, rice/fish cultivation on medium
level land, and year-round pond fish culture on deeper land adjacent to the main irrigation and drain
age canals. Wastewater-fed aquaculture became the major occupation of 6 cooperatives with easy
access to wastewater and a minor occupation of 10 others out of the total of 25 district communes.
The local aquaculture research institute provided seed of exotic fish species, and fish hatcheries
and nurseries were developed by farmers. Farmers also learned how to regulate the introduction of
wastewater to produce fish. The major species are silver carp, rohu, and tilapia. Rohu and Tilapia has
been the most popular species in recent years. Yields of fish of 3-8 tonnes/ha are harvested annually,
lower yields from rice/fish and higher from pond culture.
An on-going project to improve the wastewater and drainage system of Hanoi has had only marginal
impact on the wastewater-fed fish ponds through loss of a small area to construct a reservoir. A new
industrial development area is being established outside the drainage area of the district so fish
being cultured on city wastewater should be relatively free of contamination. However, the change in
land use policy since the 1980s from cooperative to individual household management has adversely
affected wastewater fed aquaculture. Over the decade since 1985 the area of wastewater fed aqua
culture (essentially the rice/fish system) has declined in area by 36% from a total of 750 to 480 ha.
A - 165
6.2 BANGLADESH
In Bangladesh, the development of the first duckweed, conventional wastewater treatment system
began, in 1989 at the KHC in Mirzapur. The facility consists of one duckweed covered, 0.7 ha plug
flow lagoon constructed as a 500 m long serpentine channel with seven bends. It is fed with a mixture
of hospital, school and domestic wastewater from some 2,350 people. The plug flow wastewater-fed
duckweed pond is preceded by a 0.2 ha anaerobic pond with a hydraulic retention time (HRT) of 2-4
days. HRT in the plug flow pond is estimated as 21-23 days. Duckweed harvested from the 0.7 ha
wastewater treatment pond is fed daily to three adjacent fish ponds, each 0.2 ha.
The duckweed removes nutrients and the plant cover suppresses phytoplankton growth. Average
removal efficiencies for BOD5, N and P, and faecal coliforms are 90-97%, 74-77%, and 99.9%,
respectively. Effluent turbidity is always below 12 NTU. The effluent is used to top up the water level
of the adjacent fish ponds. The wastewater treatment system produces from 220 to 400 tonnes fresh
weight duckweed/ha/year (about 17 to 31 tonnes dry weight/ha/year). The fish ponds are stocked
with Indian major carps (rohu, mrigal and catla), Chinese carps (grass carp and silver carp), and com
mon carp. Fish production varies from 10 to 15 tonnes/ha/year, yield being relatively high because of
frequent harvesting and addition of other feed besides duckweed such as oil cake and rice bran.
Duckweed based wastewater treatment and reuse, Mirzapur
PRISM (Project in Agriculture, Rural Industry Science and Medicine), a non-government

organization (NGO) in Bangladesh, has carried out a research and development programme with
duckweed based, wastewater treatment and reuse through fish culture. There are systems fed with
conventional wastewater or sewage in three districts, the largest being at the Kumudini Hospital
Complex (KHC), Mirzapur, Tangail district.
Source: UNEP webpage; http://www.unep.or.jp/ietc/publications/techpublications/techpub

15/2-9/9-3-3.asp
Figure A7.3- 13 A duckweed based wastewater treatment system at Mirzapur, Bangladesh
A - 166
The development of the first duckweed, conventional wastewater treatment system began, in 1989
at the KHC in Mirzapur. The facility consists of one duckweed covered, 0.7 ha plug flow lagoon
constructed as a 500 m long serpentine channel with seven bends. It is fed with a mixture of hospital,
school and domestic wastewater from some 2,350 people (per capita estimated sewage generation
100 l/day). The plug flow wastewater-fed duckweed pond is preceded by a 0.2 ha anaerobic pond
with a hydraulic retention time (HRT) of 2-4 days. HRT in the plug flow pond is estimated at 21-23
days. Duckweed harvested from the 0.7 ha wastewater treatment pond is fed daily to three adjacent
fish ponds, each 0.2 ha.
The duckweed removes nutrients and the plant cover suppresses phytoplankton growth. Average
removal efficiencies for BOD5, N and P, and faecal coliforms are 90-97%, 74-77%, and 99.9%,
respectively. Effluent turbidity is always below 12 NTU. The effluent is used to top up the water level
of the adjacent fish ponds.
The wastewater treatment system produces from 220 to 400 tonnes fresh weight duckweed/ha/year
(about 17 to 31 tonnes dry weight/ha/year). The fish ponds are stocked with a polyculture of Indian
major carps (rohu, mrigal and catla), Chinese carps (grass carp and silver carp), and common carp.
Tilapia is not stocked, but fingerlings enter the ponds incidentally. Fish production varies from 10 to
15 tonnes/ha/year, about 40% of which is tilapia. Fish yields are relatively high because of frequent
harvesting and addition of other feed besides duckweed such as oil cake and rice bran.
Over the last two years the wastewater-fed duckweed-fish system has generated a net profit of almost
US$3,000/ha/year. This is about three times that of the major agricultural crop of the area, rice.
7 GROUNDWATER RECHARGE
7.1 SOIL AQUIFER TREATMENT
7.1.1 DESCRIPTION
Soil aquifer treatment (SAT) makes use of the natural chemical and biological processes within soil
(unsaturated zone) to "polish treated sewage. Soil aquifer treatment is most commonly used to
remove residual organic material, nitrogen and pathogenic microorganisms.
The most common SAT solution is infiltration ponds. After conventional sewage treatment, the water
is discharged into infiltration ponds and then reused via recovery wells. Infiltration ponds are used in
cycles: Sewage is treated during wet cycle; sludge is dried and solids are removed during dry cycle.
Figure A7.3- 14 Soil aquifer treatment
A - 167
7.1.2 APPLICATION EXAMPLES
a. Sweetwater SAT Treatment Plant in Tucson, Arizona, USA
It was built in year 1989, and consists of 8 recharge basins and 2 wetland basins. The total size is 17
ha, the design percolation rate is 70 cm/day and the amount of water reclaimed per year is 1,233.5
m3 per year. The area is used also for wildlife protection.
Figure A7.3- 15 Sweetwater SAT treatment plant, Tucson, AZ
b. Rio Hondo Spreading Grounds, Montebello Forebay, California, USA
Table A7.3- 11 Site characteristics
Rio Hondo
Year when initially started using 1937/38
Size (ha) 230
# of Sub-Basins 20
Percolation Rate (m3/sec) 11
Water Storage (103 m3) 4,557
A - 168
Source: http://www.wrd.org/engineering/groundwater-replenishment-spreading-grounds.php
[Accessed 20 Oct. 2011]
Figure A7.3- 16 Rio Hondo Spreading Grounds, Montebello Forebay, CA
c. Phoenix, Arizona, USA
d. Orange County, California, USA
e. Israel
7.1.3 ADVANTAGES AND DISADVANTAGES
a. Advantages
i. No requirement of energy and mechanical equipment for aeration

ii. Natural process and virtually maintenance free
iii. System can provide renewed water sources
iv. It protects against sea water intrusion, when practiced in coastal areas.
v. It helps in the protection of wildlife
b. Disadvantages
i. Large areas of land are used

ii. Odours, mosquitoes and flies can be a problem if they are not properly controlled
A - 169
7.1.4 TYPICAL DESIGN PARAMETERS
Table A7.3- 12 Typical design parameters
Parameter Value
Sewage loading rate <15cm/d
Total nitrogen loadings 56 to 67 kg/ha/d
BOD to Nitrogen ratio >3:1
BOD removal around 90%
SS in the percolate 1 to 2 mg/L
Source: Sherwood C. Reed, Ronald W. Crites, E. Joe Middlebrooks, 2006
Table A7.3- 13 Hydraulic loading cycles for soil aquifer treatment
Wastewater Application Drying/Resting

Loading Objective Season
Applied Period (d) Period (d)
Summer 1-2 6-7

Primary
W inter 1-2 7-12
Maximize infiltration rates
Summer 2-3 5-7
Secondary
W inter 1-3 6-10
Summer 1-2 6-9
Primary
W inter 1-2 7-13
Maximize nitrification
Summer 2-3 5-6
Secondary
W inter 1-3 6-10
Summer 1-2 10-13
Primary
W inter 1-2 13-20
Maximize nitrogen removal Summer 6-7 9-12
Secondary.
W inter 9-12 12-16
Source: Adapted from Crites, R.W. and Tchobanoglous, G., Small and Decentralized Wastewater
Management Systems, McGraw-Hill. New York. 1998.
Important considerations related to design and maintenance of this process is as follows
A. The minimum pre-treatment is secondary or the equivalent. For small systems, a short detention
time pond is recommended. If facultative or stabilization ponds are to be used, it is recommended
that a constructed wetland system be used between the pond and the infiltration point to reduce
TSS levels.
A - 170
B. High loadings of BOD and TSS from industrial activity will require careful management to avoid
odour production and to avoid plugging of the soil.
7.1.5 APPLICABILITY
Soil aquifer treatment is an effective process for polishing BOD, TSS, and pathogen removal.
Removal of phosphorus and metals depends on travel distance and soil texture. Nitrogen removal
can be significant when systems are managed for that objective: ammonia is retained in the soil long
enough for biological conversion through ammonia adsorption and the absence of available oxygen
and the existence of carbon sources facilitates denitrification. Pathogens are filtered out by the soil
and adsorbed onto clay particles and organic matter.
7.1.6 GUIDING PRINCIPLES
A. This technology is used as a method of conserving sewage without wasting it.
B. This technology can be considered where area is available.
C. In coastal cities where ground water is used, this can be a long term solution against sea water
intrusion. This requires a separate study needs to be carried out at each location before its
application in the field.
7.2 ORLANDO AND ORANGE COUNTY, FLORIDA, USA
The City of Orlando and Orange County, Florida, were mandated to cease discharge of effluent into
Shingle Creek, which flows into Lake Tohopekaliga. To overcome this issue, a reuse project was
constructed in West Orange and Southeast Lake counties along a high, dry, and sandy area known
as the Lake Wales Ridge, called Water Conserv II. Water Conserv II is the largest reuse project of its
type in the world, a combination of agricultural irrigation and rapid infiltration basins (RIBs). It is also
the first reuse project in Florida to irrigate crops produced for human consumption with reclaimed
water. Water Conserv II began operation on December 1, 1986. The project is designed for average
flows of 50 mgd (2,190 l/s) and can handle peak flows of 75 mgd (3,285 l/s). Approximately 60% of
the daily flows are used for irrigation, and the remaining 40% is discharged to the RIBs for recharge
of the Floridan aquifer.
Citrus growers participating in Water Conserv II benefit from using reclaimed water. Citrus produced
for fresh fruit or processing can be irrigated by using a direct contact method. Growers are provided
reclaimed water 24 hours per day, 7 days per week at pressures suitable for micro-sprinkler or
impact sprinkler irrigation. By providing reclaimed water at pressures suitable for irrigation, costs for
the installation, operation, and maintenance of a pumping system can be eliminated.
Water Conserv II: City of Orlando and Orange County, Florida, US
As a result of a court decision in 1979, the City of Orlando and Orange County, Florida, were
mandated to cease discharge of their effluent into Shingle Creek, which flows into Lake Toho
pekaliga, by March 1988. To overcome this issue, the decision was made to construct a reuse
project in West Orange and Southeast Lake counties along a high, dry, and sandy area known
A - 171
as the Lake Wales Ridge, and the project was named Water Conserv II. The primary use of the reclaimed
water would be for agricultural irrigation. Daily flows not needed for irrigation would be distributed
into rapid infiltration basins (RIBs) for recharge of the Floridan aquifer.
Water Conserv II is the largest reuse project of its type in the world, a combination of agricultural
irrigation and RIBs. It is also the first reuse project in Florida permitted by the Florida Department of
Environmental Protection to irrigate crops produced for human consumption with reclaimed water.
The project is best described as "a cooperative reuse project by the City of Orlando, Orange County,
and the agricultural community.
The project is designed for average flows of 50 mgd (2,190 l/s) and can handle peak flows of 75 mgd
(3,285 l/s). Approximately 60% of the daily flows are used for irrigation, and the remaining 40% is
discharged to the RIBs for recharge of the Floridan aquifer. Water Conserv II began operation on
December 1, 1986.
At first, citrus growers were reluctant to sign up for reclaimed water being afraid of potential
damage to their crops and land from the use of the reclaimed water. Study was carried out on the use of
reclaimed water as an irrigation source for citrus. Later on, the Mid Florida Citrus Foundation (MFCF),
a non-profit organization was created for conducting research on citrus and deciduous fruit and
nut crops. Goals of the MFCF are to develop management practices that will allow growers in the
northern citrus area to re-establish citrus and grow it profitably, provide a safe and clean environ
ment, find solutions to challenges facing citrus growers, and promote urban and rural cooperation. All
research conducted by the MFCF is located within the Water Conserv II service area. Reclaimed
water is used on 163 of the 168 acres of research. MFCF research work began in 1987.
Research results to date have been positive. The benefits of irrigating with reclaimed water have
been consistently demonstrated through research since 1987. Citrus on ridge (sandy, well drained)
soils respond well to irrigation with reclaimed water. No significant problems have resulted from
the use of reclaimed water. Tree condition and size, crop size, and soil and leaf mineral aspects
of citrus trees irrigated with reclaimed water are typically as good as, if not better than, groves
irrigated with well water. Fruit quality from groves irrigated with reclaimed water was similar to groves
irrigated with well water. The levels of boron and phosphorous required in the soil for good citrus
production are present in adequate amounts in reclaimed water. Thus, boron and phosphorous can be
eliminated from the fertilizer program. Reclaimed water maintains soil pH within the recommended
range; therefore, lime no longer needs to be applied.
Citrus growers participating in Water Conserv II benefit from using reclaimed water. Citrus produced
for fresh fruit or processing can be irrigated by using a direct contact method. Growers are provided
reclaimed water 24 hours per day, 7 days per week at pressures suitable for micro-sprinkler or
impact sprinkler irrigation. At present, local water management districts have issued no restrictions
for the use of reclaimed water for irrigation of citrus. By providing reclaimed water at pressures suit
able for irrigation, costs for the installation, operation, and maintenance of a pumping system can be
eliminated. This means a savings of $317 per hectare per year. Citrus growers have also realized
increased crop yields of 10 to 30% and increased tree growth of up to 400%.
A - 172
The increase is not due to the reclaimed water itself, but the availability of the water in the soil for the
tree to absorb. Growers are maintaining higher soil moisture levels.
Citrus growers also benefit from enhanced freeze protection capabilities. The project is able to supply
enough water to each grower to protect his or her entire production area. Freeze flows are more than
8 times higher than normal daily flows. It is very costly to the City and County to provide these flows
(operating costs average $15,000 to $20,000 per night of operation), but they feel it is well worth the
cost. If growers were to be frozen out, the project would lose its customer base. Sources of water to
meet freeze flow demands include normal daily flows of 30 to 35 MGD (1,310 to 1,530 l/s), 38 million
gallons of stored water (143,850 m3), 80 MGD (3,500 l/s) from twenty-five 16-inch diameter wells,
and, if needed, 20 MGD (880 l/s) of potable water from the Orlando Utilities Commission.
Water Conserv II is a success story. University of Florida researchers and extension personnel are
delighted with research results to date. Citrus growers sing the praises of reclaimed water irrigation.
The Floridan aquifer is being protected and recharged. Area residents view the project as a friendly
neighbour and protector of the rural country atmosphere (USEPA, 2004).
7.3 PHOENIX (ARIZONA), USA
Water reclamation and reuse have become an important part of Phoenix Water Services Depart
ments operational strategy. In 2001, Cave Creek Reclaimed Water Reclamation Plant (CCWRP),
in northeast Phoenix, began operation which uses an activated sludge nitrification / denitrification
process along with filtration and ultraviolet light disinfection to produce a tertiary-grade effluent that
meets the Arizona standards. CCWRP is currently able to treat 8 MGD (350 l/s) and has an expan
sion capacity of 32 MGD (1,400 l/s). The Phoenix reclamation plant delivers reclaimed water through
a nonpotable distribution system to golf courses, parks, schools, and cemeteries for irrigation pur
poses. The reclaimed water is sold to customers at 80% of the potable water rate.
CCWRPs sister facility, North Gateway Water Reclamation Plant (NGWRP), will serve the north
west portion of Phoenix. The design phase has been completed. The NGWRP will have an initial
treatment capacity of 4 MGD (175 l/s) with an ultimate capacity of 32 MGD (1,400 l/s). The plant is
modelled after the Cave Creek facility using the "dont see it, dont hear it, dont smell it design mantra.
Construction will be performed using the construction manager-at-risk delivery method.
Groundwater recharge and recovery is a key component of the water reuse program. Phoenix is
currently exploring the use of vadose zone wells because they do not require much space and are
relatively inexpensive to construct. This method also provides additional treatment to the water as
it percolates into the aquifer. A vadose zone recharge facility along with a recovery well is being
designed for the CCWRP site.
Water Reclamation and Reuse: Integrated Approach to Wastewater Treatment and Water Resources
Issues in Phoenix, Arizona
The rapidly developing area of North Phoenix is placing ever-increasing demands on the citys
existing wastewater collection system, wastewater treatment plants, and potable water resources.
A - 173
As an integrated solution to these issues, water reclamation and reuse have become an important
part of Phoenix Water Services Departments operational strategy.
Cave Creek Reclaimed Water Reclamation Plant (CCWRP), in northeast Phoenix, began operation
in September 2001. The facility uses an activated sludge nitrification/denitrification process along
with filtration and ultraviolet light disinfection to produce a tertiary-grade effluent that meets the
Arizona standards. CCWRP is currently able to treat 8 MGD (350 l/s) and has an expansion
capacity of 32 MGD (1,400 l/s). The Phoenix reclamation plant delivers reclaimed water through a non
potable distribution system to golf courses, parks, schools, and cemeteries for irrigation purposes. The
reclaimed water is sold to customers at 80% of the potable water rate.
CCWRPs sister facility, North Gateway Water Reclamation Plant (NGWRP), will serve the northwest
portion of Phoenix. The design phase has been completed. The NGWRP will have an initial treat
ment capacity of 4 MGD (175 l/s) with an ultimate capacity of 32 MGD (1,400 l/s). The plant is mod
elled after the Cave Creek facility using the "dont see it, dont hear it, dont smell it design mantra.
Construction will be performed using the construction manager-at-risk delivery method.
Phoenix is using geographic information system (GIS) technology to develop master plans for the
build out of the reclaimed water distribution system for both the Cave Creek and North Gateway
reclamation plants. Through GIS, potential reclaimed water customers are easily identified. GIS also
provides information useful for determining pipe routing, reservoir, and pump station locations. The
goal is to interconnect the 2 facilities, thus building more reliability and flexibility into the system. The
GIS model is dynamically linked to the water system, planning, and other important databases so that
geospatial information is constantly kept up to date. A hydraulic model is being used in conjunction
with the GIS model to optimize system operation.
Irrigation demand in Phoenix varies dramatically with the seasons, so groundwater recharge and
recovery is a key component of the water reuse program. Phoenix is currently exploring the use of
vadose zone wells because they do not require much space and are relatively inexpensive to con
struct. This method also provides additional treatment to the water as it percolates into the aquifer.
A pilot vadose zone well facility has been constructed at the NGWRP site to determine the efficacy
of this technology. A vadose zone recharge facility along with a recovery well is being designed for
the CCWRP site.
Nonpotable reuse and groundwater recharge with high quality effluent play an important role in
the Citys water resources and operating strategies. The North Phoenix Reclaimed Water System
integrates multiple objectives, such as minimizing the impact of development in the existing waste
water infrastructure by treating wastewater locally and providing a new water resource in a desert
environment. By using GIS, Phoenix will be able to plan the build out of the reclaimed water system
to maximize its efficiency and minimize costs (USEPA, 2004).
A - 174
Figure A7.3- 17 North Phoenix reclaimed water system
7.4 SANTA ROSA (CALIFORNIA) RECHARGE PROJECT, USA
Since early 1960s, the Santa Rosa Subregional Water Reclamation System has provided reclaimed
water for agricultural irrigation in the Santa Rosa Plain, and later on for irrigating golf courses, and
local parks. The remaining reclaimed water not used for irrigation was discharged to the Laguna de
Santa Rosa. Growing concerns over water quality impacts in the Laguna de Santa Rosa pressured
the system to search for a new and reliable means of reuse.
In the northwest quadrant of Sonoma County lies the Geysers Geothermal Steamfield, a super-heat
ed steam resource used to generate electricity. Due to overexploitation, the electricity generation has
declined from 2,000 MW (1987) to about 1,200 MW. As a result, the operators are seeking a source
of water to recharge the deep aquifers that yield steam.
A - 175
In 1998, the Santa Rosa Sub-regional Reclamation System decided to build a conveyance system
to send 11 MGD (480 l/s) of tertiary-treated water from the Laguna treatment plant to the northwest
Geysers steam field for recharge and it began operations in in November 2003.
About 100 megawatts of additional power is generated each day by the Geysers Recharge Project.
In January 2008, the delivery went up to 12.62 MGD and helped generate enough electricity for
100,000 households in Sonoma and other North Bay counties.
The conveyance system to deliver water to the steamfield includes 40 miles (64 km) of pipeline,
4 large pump stations, and a storage tank located high in the Mayacmas Mountains. The system
requires a lift of 1,005 meters. Distribution facilities within the steamfield include another 29km of
pipeline, a pump station, and tank, plus conversion of geothermal wells from production wells to
injection wells.
Geysers Recharge Project: Santa Rosa, California, USA
The cities of central Sonoma County, California, have been growing rapidly, at the same time regula
tions governing water reuse and discharge have become more stringent. Since the early 1960s, the
Santa Rosa Subregional Water Reclamation System has provided reclaimed water for agricultural
irrigation in the Santa Rosa Plain, primarily to forage crops for dairy farms. In the early 1990s, urban
irrigation uses were added at Sonoma State University, golf courses, and local parks. The remaining
reclaimed water not used for irrigation was discharged to the Laguna de Santa Rosa. But limited stor
age capacity, conversion of dairy farms to vineyards (decreasing reclaimed water use by over two-
thirds), and growing concerns over water quality impacts in the Laguna de Santa Rosa, pressured
the system to search for a new and reliable means of reuse.
In the northwest quadrant of Sonoma County lies the Geysers Geothermal Steamfield, a super
heated steam resource used to generate electricity since the mid-1960s. At its peak in 1987, the field
produced almost 2,000 megawatts (MW). Geysers operators have mined the underground steam
to such a degree over the years that electricity production has declined to about 1,200 MW. As a
result, the operators are seeking a source of water to recharge the deep aquifers that yield steam.
Geothermal energy is priced competitively with fossil fuel and hydroelectric sources, and is an impor
tant "green source of electricity. In 1998, the Santa Rosa Sub-regional Reclamation System decided
to build a conveyance system to send 11 MGD (480 l/s) of tertiary-treated water from the Laguna
treatment plant to the northwest Geysers steamfield for recharge and in November 2003 it began
operating. About 100 megawatts of additional power is generated each day by the Geysers Recharge
Project. In January 2008, the delivery went up to 12.62 MGD and helps generate enough electricity
for 100,000 households in Sonoma and other North Bay counties.
The conveyance system to deliver water to the steamfield includes 40 miles (64 km) of pipeline,
4 large pump stations, and a storage tank located high in the Mayacmas Mountains. The system
requires a lift of 1,005 meters. Distribution facilities within the steamfield include another 29 km of
pipeline, a pump station, and tank, plus conversion of geothermal wells from production wells to
injection wells.
A - 176
One of the major benefits of the Geysers Recharge Project is the flexibility afforded by year-round
reuse of water. The system has been severely limited because of seasonal discharge constraints
and the fact that agricultural reuse is not feasible during the wet winter months. The Geysers steam-
field will use reclaimed water in the winter, when no other reuse options are available. However,
during summer months, demand for reuse water for irrigation is high. The system will continue to
serve agricultural and urban users while maintaining a steady but reduced flow of reclaimed water to
the Geysers.
In addition to the benefits of power generation, the Geysers Recharge Project will bring an
opportunity for agricultural reuse along the Geysers pipeline alignment, which traverses much of
Sonoma Countys grape-growing regions (USEPA, 2004).
7.5 UNDP STUDY AT CHENNAI
A study by UNDP in the 1970s identified a sand basin on the coast of Bay of Bengal where
secondary treated sewage of the Chennai city can be infiltrated through percolation ponds and
extracted for specific industrial use in the nearby petro-chemical complex. However, the public
acceptance of this project has not been forthcoming.
8 INDIRECT RECHARGE OF IMPOUNDMENTS
8.1 WINDHOEK (NAMIBIA)
The W indhoek reclamation plant has been in operation since 1968 with an initial production rate of
4800 m3/d. This operation is the only existing example of direct potable water production. The plant
has since been upgraded in stages to its present capacity of 21,000 m3/d.
The wastewater from residential and commercial settings is treated in the Gammans treatment
plants by trickling filters (6,000 m3/d) and activated sludge (12,000 m3/d), with enhanced phosphorus
removal. The effluents from these processes go to 2 separate maturation ponds (4 to 12 days reten
tion). Only the polished effluent from the activated sludge system is directed to the Windhoek recla
mation facility added with water from the Goreangab Dam (blending ratio 1:3.5), where it is treated
to drinking water standards. After tertiary treatment, reclaimed water is blended again with bulk water
from different sources.
Advanced treatment processes (including ozonation and activated carbon) have been added to the
initial separation processes of dissolved air flotation, sedimentation, and rapid sand filtration. A chlo
rine residual of 2 mg/l is provided in distribution systems. Membrane treatment has been considered,
as well as additional 140 days storage of the secondary effluent from the maturation ponds in the
Goreangab Dam.
Windhoek, the capital of Namibia, has a population of 200,000 and is located in the desert. In
1960, low rainfall (below 300 mm/year) caused the necessary water supply to fall short of the water
demand. To meet this need, the countrys water supply master plan included the long distance
A - 177
transport of 80% of its w ater supply from the Eastern National W ater Carrier, ex ten siv e aquifer with
draw als from around th e city, the d evelop m en t of a local su rface reservoir, and the construction of a
reclam ation plant. T he W indhoek reclam ation plant h a s b een in operation sin c e 1 96 8 with an initial
production rate of 4 ,8 0 0 m 3/d. This operation is the only existing exam p le of direct potable w ater
production. T he plant h as sin ce b een upgraded in sta g e s to its p resen t capacity of 2 1 ,0 0 0 m3/d.
T he w astew ater from residential and com m ercial settin gs is treated in the G am m an s treatm ent
plants by trickling filters (6 ,0 0 0 m 3/d) and activated slu d g e (1 2 ,0 0 0 m 3/d), with en h a n ced phosphorus
rem oval. T he effluents from ea ch of th e se p r o c e sse s go to 2 sep a ra te maturation p on d s for 4 to
12 d ays of polishing. Only the polished effluent from the activated slu d g e sy stem is directed to the
W indhoek reclam ation facility added with w ater from th e G orean gab Dam (blending ratio 1:3.5),
w h ere it is treated to drinking w ater standards. After tertiary treatm ent, reclaim ed w ater is blended
again with bulk w ater from different so u rces.
A dvanced treatm ent p r o c e sse s (including ozonation and activated carbon) h ave b een ad d ed to the
initial separation p r o c e sse s of d issolved air flotation, sed im entation, and rapid san d filtration. R esid
ual chlorine of 2 mg/l is provided in distribution sy ste m s. M em brane treatm ent h as b een con sid ered ,
a s well a s additional 140 d ays storage of the seco n d ary effluent from the maturation p ond s in the
G orean gab Dam.
Risk stu d ies and evaluations of toxicity and carcinogenicity h ave dem onstrated that reclaim ed w ater
produced at the W indhoek facility is a sa fe and a ccep ta b le alternative w ater resou rce for potable
pu rp oses. T reatm ent capacity at the W indhoek treatm ent plant is currently being in creased to 4 0 ,0 0 0
m3/d (USEPA, 2004).
Source: USEPA, 2 0 0 4
Figure A 7.3- 18 G orean gab Dam , adjacen t to th e W indhoek reclam ation plant in Namibia.
A - 178
8.2 GERMANY
The Berlin water works are located near the surface water system. The water works wells are drilled
mostly at short distance from the rivers and lakes near the bank, from where water is abstracted.
One of the largest water works of Berlin (Tegel) abstracts lake water (80%) via bank filtration and
artificial groundwater recharge. In Tegel drinking water, advanced treated wastewater portions have
been calculated to be 14-28%.
In order to study the properties and consequences of artificial recharge, a research and development
project, namely Project Natural and Artificial Systems for Recharge and Infiltration (NASRI), was initi
ated in 2002. The NASRI project indicates that aquifer recharge offers great potentials in the future of
integrated water management, provided that the necessary precautions are taken.
The Berlin water works are located near the surface water system. The waterworks wells are drilled
mostly at short distance (1-600 m) from the rivers and lakes near the bank. From here bank-filtered
surface water is abstracted.
One of the largest waterworks of Berlin (Tegel) abstracts lake water (80%) via bank filtration and
artificial groundwater recharge. In Tegel drinking water, advanced treated wastewater portions have
been calculated to be 14-28%.
The climatic water balance is approaching a negative value with transpiration equalling precipitation.
Even in the near future an equalised water balance is not expected. Since 1997, part of the advanced
treated wastewater is discharged into former drainage ditches to redress the disturbed water balance
in the lowland which had resulted in a 0.15 to 0.50 m reduction in the low moors thickness over 50
years. This beneficial reuse has increased the water table, restored the ecology and increased the
grass yields from the meadows to 4-5 harvest per year instead of 2.
In order to study the properties and consequences of artificial recharge, a research and development
project, namely Project Natural and Artificial Systems for Recharge and Infiltration (NASRI), was
initiated in 2002. Their purpose was to study: physical, chemical and biological processes; transport
processes; the long-term sustainability of bank filtration; models of transport processes; water man
aging scenarios; the development of guidelines for the optimised operation of existing bank filtration
and groundwater recharge scheme.
The NASRI project provided valuable data concerning artificial aquifer recharge. This project
indicates that aquifer recharge offers great potentials in the future of integrated water management,
provided that the necessary precautions are taken. It is a process of high value for the future of
Berlins drinking water supply. Mechanisms governing the removal of impurities and chemical
reactions were better understood (Mediterranean Wastewater Reuse Working Group, 2007).
A - 179
APPENDIX A 8.1
DESIGN EXAMPLE OF INTERCEPTOR TANK
The following design criteria are extracted from the publication "The Design of Small Bore Sewer
Systems by the World Bank indexed as TAG 14 available from website http://www-wds.worldbank.
org/ and authorised for public use.
Design of an interceptor tank to pre-treat the sewage from a household of 8 persons at 70 lpcd of
sewage and desludging every 3 years
(i) Minimum hydraulic retention time is given by the following equation:

th = 1.5 - 0.3 log (Pq)
Where,
th = minimum mean hydraulic retention time, days
P = contributing population
q = sewage flow, lpcd
Hence, minimum hydraulic retention time = 1.5 - 0.3 log (8 * 70) = 0.68 day
(ii) Volume required for sedimentation is given by the following equation:

Vh = 10-3 (Pq) th
Where,
Vh = volume required for sedimentation, m3
Hence, volume required for sedimentation = 8 * 70 * 0.68 /1000 = 0.39 m3
(iii) Combined solids digestion and storage volume is given by equation:

V s = 70 *PN / 1000
Where,
Vs = combined solids digestion and storage volume, m3
N = desired interval between successive desludging operations, years
Hence, solids digestion and storage volume = 70 * 8 * 3/1000 = 1.68 m3
Assume a tank of 3 m * 1 m in plan area (A)
(iv) Maximum depth of sludge = Vs/A = 1.68/3 = 0.56 m

(v) Maximum submerged scum depth (dss) = 0.7/A = 0.7/3 = 0.23 m
(vi) Minimum sludge clear space = 0.82 - 0.26 A
Clear height above invert of outlet pipe = 0.3 + (75/1000) = 0.375 m

Diameter of outlet pipe = 75 mm = 75 / 1000 = 0.075 m
Effective depth = 0.56 + 0.375 + 0.23 = 1.165 m
Freeboard = 0.3 m
Overall inner dimensions = 3 m * 1 m * 1.5 m height
A - 180
APPENDIX A 9.1
DESIGN EXAMPLE OF LEACH PIT
Design example : Twin Leach Pits (Dry conditions) for 5 users :
1 ASSUMPTIONS
a) litres of wastewater is generated per capita per day

b) litres of water is used per day for floor washing and pan cleaning
c) The water table remains 2 meters or more below ground level through out the year for dry pit
and 50 cm below for wet conditions
d) The local soil is porous silty loams and
e) The pits are designed for 2 year sludge accumulation capacity.
2 SOLUTION 1
a) Calculate the total waste water flow (Q) in litres per day
Q = 9.5 l/d x 5 users + 5 litres for floor wash etc.
= 52.5 liters per day
b) Assuming a pit of 800 mm internal diameter (inside lining 75 mm thick with brick on edge
and effective depth 800 mm, check for infiltrative surface area (At); this is given by :
At =n d h
Where d is the external diameter and h is the effective depth of the pit.
At = n x 0.95 x 0.8 = 2.39 m2
c) If the soil is porous silty loams, the infiltrative area required is 52.5/20 = 2.6 m2 ; hence the infiltra
tive area provided is insufficient, Therefore by choosing a depth of 0.9 m ; the infiltrative area At
will be
= n x 0.95 x 0.9 = 2.69 m2, which is sufficient.
d) Check for the required solid storage volume (V) for a solids accumulation rate of 0.04 m3 per
capita per year, (Table 9.2) for a dry pit with water being used for anal cleansing and for a dislodg
ing interval of 2 years and a household size of 5 persons
V = 0.04 x 2 x 5 = 0.40 m3
Whereas, the volume of proposed pit is :
Hence pit proposed has the sufficient storage capacity.
A - 181
e) Allowing a free space of say 0.225 m, the dimensions of the pit are as follows:
Internal diameter 800 mm
Total depth 1,125 mm (900 mm + 225 mm free board)
Since the pit bottom is more than 2 m above the maximum ground water table, the pit will function
in dry condition.
3 SOLUTION 2
The ground water table is 50 cm below the ground surface, but all other assumptions are the same
as in the above example.
The pit size is determined by taking the sludge accumulation rate from Table 9.2, Assuming the pit
desludging period as 2 years.
Volume of the pit = 0.095 x 2 x 5
= 0.95 m3
Allowing a free board of 0.225 m. Pit dimensions come as follows :
Internal diameter 1,100 mm
Total depth 1,225 mm (1,000 mm + 225 mm free board)
A - 182
APPENDIX A 9.2
SOIL PERCOLATION TEST
To design a suitable soil absorption system for disposal of effluent from septic tanks, percolation
test shall be carried out, on the proposed site for location of the absorption system, in the
following manner.
Six or more test holes spaced uniformly over the proposed absorption field shall be made.
A square or circular hole with side width of diameter of 10 cm to 30 cm and vertical sides shall be
dug or bored to the depth of the proposed absorption trench. The bottom and sides of the holes shall
be carefully scratched with a sharp-pointed instrument to remove any smeared soil surfaces and to
provide a natural soil interface into which water may percolate, the holes shall be filled for a depth of
5 cm with loose material to protect the bottom from scouring and settling.
Before the actual readings for percolation tests are taken, it is necessary to ensure that the soil is
given ample opportunity to swell and approach the condition it will be in during the wettest season of
the year, This is done by pouring water in the hole up to a minimum depth of 30 cm over the grave!
and allowed to soak for 24 hours. If the water remains in the test hole after the overnight swelling
period, the depth of water shall be adjusted to 15 cm over the gravel. Then from a fixed reference
point, the drop in water level shall be noted over a 30 minute period. This drop shall be used to
calculate the percolation rate.
If no water remains in the hole, at the end of 30 minute period, water shall be added to bring the depth
of the water in hole 15 cm over the gravel. From a fixed reference point, the drop in water level shall
be measured at 30 minute intervals for 4 hours, refilling to 15 cm level over the grave! as necessary.
The drop that occurs during the final 30 minute period shall be used to calculate the percolation rate.
The drop during the earlier periods provide information for the possible modification of the procedure
to suit local circumstances.
In sandy soils or other porous soils in which the first 15 cm of water seeps away in less than 30
minutes after overnight swelling period, the time interval between measurements shall be taken as
10 minutes and the test run for one hour. The drop that occurs in the final 10 minutes shall be used
to calculate the percolation rate.
Based on the final drop, the percolation rate, which is the time in minutes required for water to fall
1 cm, shall be calculated.
A - 183
APPENDIX A 9.3
EXAMPLE OF DESIGN OF MINI-PACKAGED TREATMENT PLANT
(ON-SITE CONSTRUCTION-TYPE)
The following shows an example of designing an on-site construction-type sewage treatment

system - for 500 persons in Japan.
Basic settings
Number of users: 500
Sewage generation rate: 200 L/day
BOD concentration of sewage: 200 mg/L
- Inflow rate of sewage [Q]
Q [m3/day] = 500 [persons] x 200 [L/person/day]/1,000 = 100 [m3/day]
First flow equalization tank
Sewage inflow time [T]: 16 hours (per day)
Peak time [Tm]: 2 hours (per day)
Peak factor [Km] (maximum flow rate/mean flow rate): 3.0
Flow adjustment ratio (margin) [Kc]: 1.3
The necessary capacity [V] is given by the following formula:
V [m3] = [(Km/T) - (Kc/24)] x Tm x Q
= [(3.0/16) - (1.3/24)] x 2 x 100 = 28 m3
This tank shall meet all the following requirements:
Requirement 1: The retention time shall exceed 8 hours.
Requirement 2: BOD volume load shall be less than 0.3 [kg/m3/day].
Requirement 1: V1 [m3]
V1 [m3] = Q x (8/24) = 34 [m3]
Requirement 2: V2 [m3]
Assuming that the inflow BOD concentration is 200 [mg/L],
V2 [m3] = (200 x Q/1,000)/0.3 = 67 [m3]
Accordingly, the capacity meeting both requirements is V [m3] = 67 [m3].
- Sedimentation tank
Assuming that the retention time [T] is 3 hours,
V [m3] = Q x (3/24) = 12.5 [m3]
- Second flow equalization tank
V [m3] = Q x (2/24) = 8.4 [m3]
- Flocculation tank
Assuming that the retention time [T] is 30 minutes,
V [m3] = Q x (1/24) x (30/60) = 2.1 [m3]
- Flocculation sedimentation tank
V [m3] = Q x (3/24) = 12.5 [m3]
A - 184
- Disinfection tank
Assuming that the retention time [T] is 15 minutes,
V [m3] = Q x (1/24) x (15/60) = 1.1 [m3]
- Sludge storage tank
Assuming that the BOD reduction ratio is 90% (raw sewage: 200 mg/L and treated sewage: 20 mg/L)
and 1 0 0 % of removed contaminants are converted to sludge, the sludge generation (dry substance)
rate [Sq(DS)] is given by the following formula:
Sq(DS) [kg-DS/day] = (200 x Q/1,000) x (90/100) x (100/100)
= 18 [kg-DS/day]
Assuming that the sludge concentration is 15,000 mg/L (1.5%),

Sq [m 3/day] = 18 [kg-DS/day]/(1.5/100)/1,000 = 1.2 [m 3/day]
Assuming that the retention period is one week, the capacity of the sludge storage tank [V] is given
by the following formula:
V [m3] = 1.2 [m 3/day] x 7 [day/week] = 8.4 [m3]
Table A9.3-1 Example of designing a on-site construction-type treatment system
Capacity 500 Persons (100 mJ/day)

Effective
Tank Name Setting Value
Volume
Peak coefficient:3.0
Inflow time:16hr/24 hr
Flow equalization tank (1st) 28 m3
Flow adjustment ratio: 1.3
Peak time:2hr/24 hr
Retention time:8 hr
Contact aeration tank 67 m3 BOD volumetric loading
:0.3 kg/m3/day
Tank
Volume Sedimentation tank 12.5 m3 Retention time:3 hr
Flow equalization tank (2nd) 8.4 m3 Retention time:2 hr
Flocculation tank 2.1 m3 Retention time:30 min
Flocculation
12.5 m3 Retention time:3 hr
sedimentation tank
Disinfection tank 1.1 m3 Retention time: 15 min
Gross yield coefficient: 100%
Sludge storage tank 8.4 m3 Sludge concentration:15,000 mg/L
Storage days:1 week
A - 185
P artA: Engineering REFERENCES
REFERENCES
(1) A K Dhussa and V K Jain, B iom ethanation , Newsletter, National Bioenergy Board, MNRE, March, (2002)
(2) Akepati S. Reddy, T hapar Centre for Industrial Research & Development,
(3) Arceivala. S. J., W astew ater Treatm ent for Pollution C ontrol , Tata M cG raw-H ill Publishing Com pany Limited, (2000)
(4) BIS: 10500 of 1991
(5) BW SSB, Correspondence at various times.
(6) C hartered Institution of W ater and Environm ental M anagem ent (CIW EM ) w ebpage http://w w w .ciw em .org/policy-and-international/
current-topics/w ater-m anagem ent/w ater-reuse/potable-w ater-reuse/planned-indirect-potable-reuse.aspx
(7) Christine deB arbadillo et al, Practical Considerations fo r Design of a Step-Feed Biological Nutrient Removal System , Florida W ater
Resources Journal, (2002)
(8) CM W SSB, Correspondence at various times
(9) CPCB, Status of W ater Supply, W astew ater G eneration and Treatm ent in Class-I Cities and Class-II Towns of India. New Delhi, (2009)
(10) CPCB, MoEF, GOI, General Standards for Discharge o f Environm ental Pollutants Part-A: Effluents , (1986)
(11) CPHEEO, MoUD, M anual on M unicipal Solid W aste M anagem ent ,(2000)
(12) CPHEEO, MoUD, M anual on S ew erage and Sew age Treatm ent , (1993)
(13) CPHEEO, MoUD, M anual on W ater Supply & Treatm ent , (1999)
(14) CSE, Policy Paper on Septage M anagem ent in India, India, (2011)
(15) Daniel Sztruhar, et al., C om bined sew er overflow assessm ent in S lovakia , S lovak Technical University, D epartm ent o f Sanitary
Engineering, Slovakia, http://w w w .kzdi.sk/osobne/sztruhar/icudi2000/icudi% 202000.htm .
(16) Dhinadhayalan, M. and Nema, A K, D ecentralized W astew ater M anagem ent - New C oncepts and Innovative Technological
Feasibility for Developing C ountries , S ustainable Environm ent Research, 22(1), p. 39-44, (2012)
(17) Ebara Engineering Service Co., Ltd.,http://w w w .jiw et.or.jp/english/gcus/pdf/gcus02.pdf
(18) Environm ental O perators C ertification Program hom epage.
http://dns2.eocpsearch.org/W ordpress/w p-content/uploads/2012/10/plants-K elow na.pdf
A - 186
Part A: Engineering REFERENCES
(19) EPA, U. Process Design M anual for Land A pplication of M unicipal S ludge , EPA 625/1-83/016, (1983)
(20) Esrey, S.A., Potash, J.B., Roberts, L., Shiff, C. Effects of im proved w a ter supply and sanitation on Ascariasis, Diarrhea,
Dracunculiasis, Hookworm infection, Schistosom iasis, and Trachom a , Bull. W H O 69(5), p. 609-621, (1991)
(21) Harrison. D., et. al., The use o f C om putational Fluid Dynam ics in the O ptom isation o f Sludge P rocess .Technical Paper 37.pDf,
Monsal, http://w w w .m onsal.com /docum ents/technical% 20paper% 2037.pdf
(22) Hickm an Jr., H. Lanier, The Principles o f Integrated Solid W aste M anagem ent , A m erican A cadem y o f Environm ental Engineers,
A nnapolis, MD, (1999).
(23) Hitachi Plant Technologies, Ltd. (2010), http://w w w .hitachi-pt.com /products/es/w ater/w astew ater/pegasus.htm l
(24) http://w ater.city.sakai.lg.jp/torikum i/file/konw akai4-03.pdf
(25) http://w w w .ariakeebb.com /
(26) http://w w w .ciw em .org/policy-and-international/current-topics/w ater-m anagem ent/w ater-reuse/potable-w ater-reuse.aspx.
(27) http://w w w .gesui.m etro.tokyo.jp/english/c40/im g/Seoul.pdf
(28) http://w w w .ittw w w .com .au/brochures/abj_brochures.pdf
(29) http://ww w.kaldnes.com
(30) http://w w w .stow a-electedtechnologies.nl/
(31) http://w w w .unep.or.jp/ietc/publications/techpublications/techpub-15/2-9/9-3-1.asp)
(32) http://w w w .unep.or.jp/ietc/publications/techpublications/techpub-15/2-9/9-3-3.asp
(33) http://w w w .veoliaw aterst.com /solia/en/
(34) http://w w w .yokogaw a.co.jp/an/faq/oxy/oxy_general.htm
(35) http://w w w .yokogaw a.com /an/faq/do/do_general.htm
(36) Indira Gandhi International Airport, New Delhi, Correspondence, (2011)
(37) IS2470 (P art1):Code of Practice for installation o f septic tank , (1985)
(38) ISHIGAKI COMPANY, LTD. http://w w w .ishigaki.co.jp/english/P roducts/Filter/D etail/IS G K3.htm l
(39) J Marsalek, Technique for Flow M easurem ents in Urban Runoff S tudies , Proceedings of the International S em inar and Exposition on
W ater R esources Instrum entation by International W ater Resources A ssociation and A m erican S ociety of Civil Engineers at
Chicago, (1974)
A - 187
(40) Japan Sew age W orks A ssociation (2011). Draft G uideline on design and execution m anagem ent in sew er rehabilitation method,
and others , JSWA, Tokyo,(2011)
(41) Japan Sew age W orks Association, G uideline and M anual for Planning and Design in S ew erage S ystem s , JSWA, Tokyo, (2009)
(42) Japan Sew age w orks Association, M anual on design of sew er facilities , JSWA, Tokyo, (1991)
(43) JICA Press Release-N R/2007-2 April 2, (2007).
(44) JSW A , The Technical Evaluation Report on M BR s , (2003)
(45) Kajim a Corporation, http://w w w .kajim a.co.jp/gallery/civil_kajim a/kurasi/kurasi01.htm l
(46) K natz.et.al.Using CFD to S elect A naerobic Digestion Mixing S ystem s , W EFTEC, Session 41 Through 50, pp. 2750-2758(9), (2010)
(47) Kruger, Scada System D evelopm ent and Upgrades, http://w w w .krugerusa.com /m edias/files/scada
(48) L&T Shipbuilding Limited, Kattupalli..(C orrespondence, 2011)
(49) Lambert, J et. al.,W ater Jetting Code of Practice 2nd Ed . WRC, UK, (2005)
(50) M/s Kottar Social Service Society, Nagercoil & M/s C aritas India & M/s Caritas Germany. (Correspondence)
(51) M/s. HANNA, http://w w w .hannainst.com /usa/prods2.cfm ?id=004002&P rodC ode=H I 98186
(52) M/s. YSI, http://w w w .ysi.com /productsdetail.php7P roO D O -19; http://w w w .ysi.com /productsdetail.php75000-5100-30
(53) Mara, D., Sleigh, A and Tayler, K.,PC-based Sim plified S ew er Design , University o f Leeds, England, (2001)
(54) M editerranean W astew ater Reuse W orking Group, M editerranean W astew ater Reuse Report , (2007)
(55) M etcalf & Eddy, Inc. W astew ater Engineering: Treatm ent and Reuse M cG raw-Hill, New York, (2003)
(56) MoEF, G overnm ent of India, National Urban Sanitation Policy , (2008)
(57) Moreau, A, Filterability A ssessm ent o f M em brane Bioreactors at European Scale, ISBN/EAN: 9789089570147, (2010)
(58) Moriyama, K. et al., A study on N itrification-D enitrification Process Using endogenous Respiration for Denitrification , Proceedings of
Environm ental and Sanitary Engineering Research, Vol.24, (1988)
(59) MoUD, H andbook on Service Level B enchm arking ,(2011)
(60) MoUD, Advisory, Recent Trends in Technologies in S ew erage S ystem , (2012)
(61) MoUD, UNDP, W orld Bank, Technical G uideline on Twin Pit Pour Flush Latrine , (1992)
(62) Murata, T., Advanced Treatm ent Technology o f W astew ater , Rikou-toshyo, (1992)
A - 188
(63) National A cadem y o f Engineering, Environm ental Studies Board, Ad Hoc C om m ittee on W ater A nalysis Criteria, W QC, (1972)
(64) NISHIHARA Environm ent Co. Ltd., LIN PO Rd^CN , LINPOR-NP, Advanced Treatm ent by Em ploying Media Nishiharas Technology
in SBR process, IC Process, http://w w w .nishihara.co.jp/
(65) NRCD, MoEF, GOI, Status Paper on River G anga , (2009)
(66) O CW D hom e page, http://ww w. 0cw d.c 0m/r
(67) O hio D epartm ent of Natural Resources, Dam Safety, Design and M aintenance o f Trash racks for Pipe and Riser S pillw ays ,
Fact S heet 96-38, (2007)
(68) Pam phlet issued by DJB.
(69) Pennsylvania D epartm ent of Environm ental Protection, W astew ater Treatm ent Plant O perator Certification Training, M odule 18, The
A ctivated Sludge Process Part IV, (2013)
(70) Regional S ew erage Centre o f Nara Prefecture, Annual Report o f W ater Q uality Managem ent, (2009)
(71) Renata Tom czak-W andzel, et.al., Effect o f D isintegration Pre-treatm ent o f Sew age S ludge for Enhanced A naerobic Digestion
The 8th International Conference, May 19-20, 2011, Vilnius, Lithuania,
(72) Rongjing Xie, et. al., Full-scale dem onstration o f an ultrasonic disintegration technology in enhancing anaerobic digestion o f mixed
prim ary and thickened secondary sewage sludge, Journal of Environm ental Engineering and Science, Volum e 6, Issue 5,
S eptem ber 2007 pages 533 -5 4 1
(73) Robbins, D.M. .S eptage M anagem ent G uide for Local G overnm ents , RTI International, USA, (2007)
(74) S. C hurchhouse, Long term operating experience o f m em brane bioreactor. School of W ater Science, 1 day conference on MBR,
9 April 2003, Cranfield, UK, (2003)
(75) Saktheeswaran. S, Resurrection o f an Abandoned 23 MLD Sew age Infested S urface W ater Treatm ent Plant by Disinfection at High
Lime and N eutralization by Carbon Di O xide at Hosur, India , International W orkshop on A dvances in Disinfection Technologies,
NEERI, Nagpur, February, (2011)
(76) Sanki Engineering Co., Ltd., http://w w w .sanki.co.jp/product/lineup/im ages/panel_03/03_rotary-press.pdf
(77) SEKISUI A Q U A SYS TE M S Co., Ltd., http://w w w .sekisuia.co.jp/english/tanks/product/bps/index.htm l
(78) Septage M anagem ent in Asia-USAID , http://w w w .slideshare.net/O sw arM ungkasa/regional-septage-study-usaid-eco-asia-15361249
(79) Spellm an, F. R., H andbook o f W ater and W astew ater Treatm ent Plant O perations , Lewis Publishers, (2009)
A - 189
(80) Sundaram oorthy S and Nambi Ayyadurai, S., Experiences in Use of Renovated Sew age as Industrial Cooling W ater at Madras,
India , Proceedings of the W ater E nvironm ent Federation, 66th A nnual C onference & Exposition, Anaheim , California, USA,
pp 402-414, (1993)
(81) Than Khin, A jit P. Annachhatre, Novel m icrobial nitrogen removal processes , B iotechnology A dvances 22, 519-532, (2004)
(82) The Indian A gricultural Research Institute at Karnal, http://w w w .icar.org.in/en/im age/tid/109
(83) The Puducherry Public W orks Departm ent. Correspondence, (2011)
(84) Thom as P. Gilligan, M anfred Morper., A Unique Process for Upgrading conventional activated Sludge S ystem s fo r Nitrogen Rem oval ,
C alifornia W ater Environm ent A ssociation,73rd A nnual Conference, April, (2001)
(85) Tilley et al., Com pendium o f Sanitation S ystem s and Technologies. D uebendorf and G eneva , Swiss Federal Institute o f A quatic
S cience and Technology (EAWAG), (2008)
(86) Tokyo M etropolitan G overnm ent. http://nett21.gec.jp/G E S A P /them es/them es2.htm l.
(87) Turovskiy, I. S, W astew ater Sludge Processing , John W le y & Sons, Inc, (2006)
(88) TW AD Board w ebpage
(89) U.S. Environm ental Protection Agency, G uidelines for W ater Reuse , EPA/625/R-04/108, (2004)
(90) UN Centre fo r Human Settlem ents (HABITAT), The Design of S hallow S ew er Systems. Nairobi, Kenya , (1986)
(91) UNDP, W orld Bank, The Design o f Small Bore S ew er S ystem s , TAG Technical Note No. 14, W ashington, USA, (1985)
(92) UNICEF Com m unity A pproaches to Total Sanitation , New York, USA, (2009)
(93) US Federal Em ergency M anagem ent Agency, Special Events C ontingency Planning, Job A ids M anual , (2005)
(94) USAID, A Rapid A ssessm ent of Septage M anagem ent in A sia , (2010)
(95) USAID, Developing Com prehensive Septage M anagem ent Program m es in A sia , (2009)
(96) USEPA, D ecentralized S ystem s Technology Fact Sheet - Septage Treatm ent/D isposal , EPA - 832-F-99-068. W ashington,
USA, (1999)
(97) USEPA, Handbook: Septage Treatm ent and Disposal , EPA - 625/6-84-009. Ohio, USA, (1984)
(98) USEPA, S um m ary Report for In-Vessel C om posting of M unicipal W astew ater S ludge , EPA/625/8-89/016, (1989)
(99) USEPA.Design M anual-M unicipal W astew ater D isinfection , EPA/625/1-86/021, (1986)
(100) W EPA,State o f Technology for Rehabilitation of W astew ater Collection S ystem s , EPA/600/R-10/078/July, 2010.
A - 190
(101) WEF, M anual of Practice No.8 , W EF Press, (2010)

(102) WERF. Fact sheet C2, Pressure S ew er S ystem s
(103) WERF. Fact sheet C4, Vacuum S ew er S ystem s
(104) W H O /IR C (2004). Linking Technology Choice with O peration and M aintenance .
(105) W orld Bank, W ater and Sanitation Program , (2006)
(106) W orld Bank, W orld D evelopm ent Report , (1993)
(107) WPCF, MOP - FD-5 C hapter 4, Table 4-2
(108) W RC, UK, W ater Jetting Code of Practice , (2005)
(109) WSP, South Asia, Hoshangabad: Towards City-w ide Sanitation ,
http://w w w .w sp.org/sites/w sp.org/files/publications/E E M P _TS S M .pdf, (2008)
(110) WSP, South Asia, Technology O ptions fo r Urban Sanitation in India , (2008)
(111) Yamada, K., M atsushim a, O., and K. Sone, Reclaim ed W astew ater Supply Business in Tokyo and Introduction o f new Technology ,
http://w w w .gesui.m etro.tokyo.jp/ english/tec_papers/tec_papers.htm )
(112) Yam agata, H., Nasu, M., Yoshizawa, M., Miyamoto, A., and M. M inam iyam a, Heat Island M itigation using W ater Retentive
P avem ent Sprinkled with Reclaim ed W astew ater , W ater Science and Technology, Vol. 57.5, p.763-771,(2008)
A - 191
G overnm ent o f India
Ministry of Urban Development

Nirman Bhawan, New Delhi 110 011, India
http://moud.gov.in
http://cpheeo.nic.in/

Sewerage Design Manual 2013 India PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sewerage Design Manual 2013 India PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sewerage Design Manual 2013 India PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MANUAL ON SEWERAGE

AND SEWAGE TREATMENT SYSTEMS

MINISTRY OF URBAN DEVELOPMENT, NEW DELHI

CENTRAL PUBLIC HEALTH AND

JAPAN INTERNATIONAL COOPERATION AGENCY

All rights reserved

Copy Edited and Published under contract with JICA by

New Delhi-110011, Dated the 20

ACKNOW LEDGEM ENT

Part - C on Management is a refreshing approach to modern methods of project delivery

The Expert Committee expresses its gratitude to Dr.S.Sundaramoorthy, Consultant, JST,

I am also privileged to express my sincere thanks on behalf of the Expert Committee to

The contribution made by Mr.V.K.Chaurasia, Joint Adviser (PHEE), Mr.J.B.Ravinder, Deputy

I would like to acknowledge all those connected individuals, organizations, institutions,

Name Designation / Departm ent

1 Akira Takechi Team Leader

2 Katsuzo Motegi Sew erage M anagem ent

3 Kiyoshi M izufune Planning & Design (Civil)

4 Dr A lok Kum ar Planning & Design (Sewer)

5 G uillerm o M adariaga Planning & Design (M echanical & Electrical)

6 M asatoshi Yam ada G eneral Editor / Sew erage M anagem ent

7 Yoshitaka Ito O&M (Facility, Sewer)

8 Teruo Suga O&M (M echanical)

9 M ikio Suzuki O&M (Electrical)

10 Akira Morita O nsite Planning & Design/O &M

11 Guru raj Rao C oordinator / O&M

12 Dr Kiyoshi M oriyam a Sew erage O&M Planning

13 M asaaki M ukaide Civil Facility Designing

14 Takenori Shoryuji Facility O&M Planning

15 T akehiro Nakano W ater Q uality / Safety

Indian Study Team (IS T)-C ounterpart to JS T

No Name Designation / Departm ent

2 Shri M K Am irthalingam Sew age C ollection system s

3 Shri R Vasudevan Electrical and Instrum entation System s

4 Shri D Harsha M anagem ent Practices in Sew erage

5 Shri I Kalyanasundaram Sew erage Structures

6 Shri P Subram ani Sludge M anagem ent and Bio-m ethanation

7 Dr S Saktheesw aran Sew age Reuse and C opy-E ditor

No Name Designation / Department

1 Adviser(PHEE) (Vacant) CPHEEO/, MoUD, Chairman

2 Dr. S.R. Shukla Former Adviser (PHEE), CPHEEO, MoUD, Co-Chairman

3 Shri. R. Sethuraman Former Joint Adviser (PHEE), CPHEEO, MoUD

4 Shri B.B.Uppal Former Deputy Adviser (PHE), CPHEEO, MoUD

5 Shri V.K.Chaurasia Joint Adviser (PHEE), CPHEEO, MoUD

6 Dr. M.Dhinadhayalan Joint Adviser (PHEE), CPHEEO, MoUD, Member Secretary

7 Dr. Ramakant Assistant Adviser (PHE), CPHEEO, MoUD, Coordinator

8 Dr.Arvind.K.Nema Professor, Dept of Civil Engineering, 1.1.T.Delhi,

9 Dr. A.K.Dussa Director (UWE), Ministry of New & Renewable Energy

10 Shri D.P.Singh Retd Chief Engineer,(Ganga), U.P.Jal Nigam, Allahabad

11 Shri M.Dhanabalan Retd Chief Engineer,TWAD Board, Chennai

12 Dr.Hernant Landge C E, Maharashtra Jeevan Pradhikaran, Thane

14 Shri C. Lallunghnema Joint Secretary (Tech.), PHED, Mizoram

16 Dr. Vinod Tare Professor, Dept of Civil Engineering, I.I.T.Kanpur

17 Dr. Girish R.Pophali Scientist E-1, NEERI, Nagpur

18 Shri Nazimuddin Senior Environmental Engineer, CPCB, MoEF, Delhi

19 Shri D.K.Agrawal Scientist F, Bureau of Indian Standards, Delhi

20 Dr. R.K.Singh Deputy General Manager (Projects), HUDCO, MoHUPA

No Name Designation / Department

1 Adviser(PHEE) (Vacant) CPHEEO/Director (PHE), MoUD, Chairman